JP7487700B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

For example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are known machines that have a normal gaming state and a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player, and control the switching of the gaming state based on the establishment of certain conditions, thereby making various changes in the progress of the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2004-81853 A

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, there is still room for improvement in terms of control over game progress.

The present invention has been made in consideration of the above-mentioned circumstances, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that is capable of appropriately controlling the progress of a game.

The present invention relates to
A launching means capable of launching a game ball based on a predetermined launching operation;
A variable ball entry means that can be switched between a first state in which the game ball can be entered or is easy to enter, and a second state in which the game ball cannot be entered or is more difficult to enter than in the first state ;
A means for executing a specific determination based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition;
A means for controlling execution of a specific game based on the result of the specific determination;
Equipped with
The specific game is a game in which the variable ball entry means is switched from the second state to the first state , and then switched to the second state ,
The specific game mode includes a first mode corresponding to the result of the specific judgment being a first result, and a second mode corresponding to the result of the specific judgment being a second result different from the first result,
a first means for, when a predetermined state change occurs after the execution of the specific judgment and before the execution of the specific game, making the mode of the specific game performed after the predetermined state change the first mode in response to the result of the specific judgment performed before the predetermined state change being the first result;
a second means for, when the predetermined state change occurs after the execution of the specific judgment and before the execution of the specific game, making the mode of the specific game performed after the predetermined state change the second mode in response to the result of the specific judgment performed before the predetermined state change being the second result;
a means for enabling a specific notification to be executed after the occurrence of the predetermined state change;
Equipped with
The specific notification is not executed if the predetermined state change does not occur.

According to the present invention, it is possible to preferably control the progress of a game.

1 is a front view showing a pachinko machine according to one embodiment. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine. FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board. FIG. 4A is a schematic diagram of the second operating port when it is in a closed state, and FIG. 4B is a schematic diagram of the second operating port when it is in an open state. 1A is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device when it is in a closed state, and FIG. 1B is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device when it is in an open state. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. 11 is a diagram for explaining the display contents on the display screen of the pattern display device. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the display contents on the display screen of the pattern display device. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the display contents on the display screen of the pattern display device. FIG. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used in lotteries, etc. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a win/lose table. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type table for a first special symbol, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type table for a second special symbol. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table for a jackpot, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table for a miss. 5 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process in the MPU of the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. A flowchart showing the winning process for an operating port. 13 is a flowchart showing an information acquisition process. 13 is a flowchart showing a main process. 13 is a flowchart showing a normal process. 13 is a flowchart showing a game play control process. 13 is a flowchart showing a data setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for setting a variable display time. 13 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process. A flowchart showing the large prize opening and closing process. 13 is a flowchart showing a transition process when an opening/closing execution mode is ended. 13 is a flowchart showing a reserved read-ahead process. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the performance control device and its peripheral devices. 13 is a flowchart showing a performance setting process in the MPU of the performance control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a pending command handling process. A diagram showing the configuration of a hold memory area. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the hold notice performance, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the hold change points during a game round. 13 is a flowchart showing the setting process for hold notice. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a presentation mode. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a final display mode lottery table. A figure showing an example of a production scenario lottery table. 1A is a flowchart showing the first execution process of the hold notice, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the configuration of the display mode memory area. A diagram to explain the change suggestion presentation. 13A is a flowchart showing a shift command response process, and FIG. 13B is a diagram for explaining a shift process of a reserved image. 13 is a flowchart showing processing for displaying special chart changes. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for switching presentation modes. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting process for advance notice return. 13 is a flowchart showing the second execution process of the hold notice. 13 is a flowchart showing the third execution process of the hold notice. 13 is a flowchart showing the process for promoting a pending notice. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a promotion determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a display example of a hold image. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a display example of a hold image. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a display example of a hold image. 13 is a flowchart showing a pending command handling process according to the second embodiment; 13 is a flowchart showing a process for switching presentation modes. 13 is a flowchart showing a second setting process for hold notice. 13 is a flowchart showing processing for displaying special chart changes. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a display example of a hold image. 13 is a flowchart showing a rendering mode switching process according to a third embodiment; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a return determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a display example of a hold image. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table according to the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the setting process for hold notice. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a final display mode lottery table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a final display mode lottery table. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for an opening/closing execution mode. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting process for advance notice return. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a return determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a display example of a hold image. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a display example of a hold image. 13A is a flowchart showing an information acquisition process according to a fifth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing a pending command setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a pending command handling process. 11 is a flowchart showing a first reserved read-ahead process. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for an opening/closing execution mode. 13 is a flowchart showing a second reserved read-ahead process. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting process for advance notice return. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an upper limit display mode table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a display example of a hold image. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a display example of a hold image. FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration according to a sixth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing main processing in the MPU of the performance control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a normal process. 13 is a flowchart showing the process for restoring a hold notice. 13 is a flowchart showing a display mode setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing processing for displaying special chart changes. 13 is a flowchart showing the fourth execution process of the hold notice. 13 is a flowchart showing the process for promoting a pending notice. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a display example of a hold image. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a display example of a hold image. 13A is a flowchart showing main processing according to the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing normal processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a performance setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a display mode setting process. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a display example of a hold image. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a display example of a hold image. 23 is a flowchart showing a presentation mode switching process according to the eighth embodiment; 13 is a flowchart showing a mode switching determination process. A figure showing how switching of presentation modes is restricted. A figure showing the switching manner of presentation modes in the ninth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for switching presentation modes. 13 is a flowchart showing a pending command handling process. 13 is a flowchart showing a second setting process for hold notice. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a display example of a hold image. An explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used in winning/losing lotteries in the second embodiment. FIG. 2A is a diagram showing an example of a win/loss table for a low probability mode, and FIG. 2B is a diagram showing an example of a win/loss table for a high probability mode. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type table for the first special chart, (b) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type table for the second special chart, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of the second time-saving game state. (a) is a figure showing an example of a support lottery table for the low frequency support mode, (b) is a figure showing an example of a support lottery table for the high frequency support mode, and (c) is a figure showing an example of a device opening and closing game. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process in the MPU of the main control device. A flowchart showing the winning process for an operating port. 13 is a flowchart showing an information acquisition process. 13 is a flowchart showing a normal process. 13 is a flowchart showing special chart game play control processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a data setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for setting a variable display time. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table. 13 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process. A flowchart showing the large prize opening and closing process. 13 is a flowchart showing a transition process when an opening/closing execution mode is ended. 13 is a flowchart showing a high probability mode update/end process. 13 is a flowchart showing a high frequency support mode update/end process. 13 is a flowchart showing processing for transitioning to a second time-saving game state. 13A is a flowchart showing a process for starting a confirmed display, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing a process for ending a confirmed display. 13 is a flowchart showing the general game play control processing. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of starting map fluctuations. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for power supply support. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of opening and closing the role-playing device. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the performance control device and its peripheral devices. 13 is a flowchart showing a performance setting process in the MPU of the performance control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a first transition performance setting process. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a display example of a pattern display device. 13 is a flowchart showing a second transition performance setting process. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a display example of a pattern display device. 13 is a flowchart showing an ending performance setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing processing for displaying special chart changes. 13A is a flowchart showing a process for updating the remaining number of times display, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing a process for updating the number of times of misses display. An explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of transition to the second time-saving game state. An explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of transition to the second time-saving game state. An explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of transition to the second time-saving game state. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of transition to the second time-shortened game state in variant example 1 relating to the second embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a display example of a pattern display device. A figure for explaining the second time-saving gaming state in variant example 2 of the second embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing processing for transitioning to a second time-saving game state. An explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of transition to the second time-saving game state. A figure showing an example of a win/lose table related to variant example 3 of the second embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a type table for big wins. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a type table for special misses, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a third time-saving gaming state. 13 is a flowchart showing special chart game play control processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table. 13 is a flowchart showing processing for transitioning to the third time-saving game state. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for starting a final display. 13 is a flowchart showing a performance setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing processing for displaying special chart changes. 13 is a flowchart showing processing for starting fluctuations. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a display example of a pattern display device. An explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of transition to the third time-saving game state. An explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of transition to the third time-saving game state. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the regular game round in the final game round. A figure showing an example of a win/lose table related to variant example 4 of the second embodiment. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing an example of a type table for a jackpot, and FIG. 13C is a diagram showing an example of a third time-saving gaming state. 13 is a flowchart showing processing for transitioning to the third time-saving game state. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table. 13 is a flowchart showing a performance setting process. 1A is a flowchart showing a first transition effect setting process, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a game play effect for the first time-saving game state. 13A is a flowchart showing the process for setting the third transition effect, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of a play time effect for the third time-saving play state. 13 is a flowchart showing processing for displaying special chart changes. 1A is a flowchart showing the process for starting the fluctuation, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence between the fluctuation display pattern and the performance for each game round. A diagram showing examples of specific effects A to E. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of a game state. A figure showing an example of a win/lose table related to variant example 5 of the second embodiment. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing an example of a type table for a jackpot, and FIG. 13C is a diagram showing an example of a third time-saving gaming state. 13 is a flowchart showing processing for transitioning to the third time-saving game state. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a display example of a pattern display device. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of a game state. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of a game state. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of a game state. A figure showing an example of a win/lose table related to variant example 6 of the second embodiment. (a) and (b) are figures showing an example of a type table for a jackpot, (c) is a figure showing an example of a second time-saving game state, and (d) is a figure showing an example of a third time-saving game state. 13 is a flowchart showing a transition process when an opening/closing execution mode is ended. 13 is a flowchart showing special chart game play control processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table. 13 is a flowchart showing a high frequency support mode update process. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a transition to a second time-saving gaming state. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a transition to the third time-saving gaming state. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for ending the high frequency support mode. 13 is a flowchart showing processing for transitioning to a time-saving gaming state. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for starting a final display. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of a game state. 13 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process related to variant example 7 of the second embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a transition to the third time-saving gaming state. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a transition to a second time-saving gaming state. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of a game state. FIG. 13A is a diagram showing an example of a type table for special misses in variant example 8 of the second embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of a third time-saving gaming state. 13 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process. 13 is a flowchart showing a process B for determining a transition to the third time-saving gaming state. 13 is a flowchart showing a process B for determining a transition to the second time-shortened gaming state. 13 is a flowchart showing processing for transitioning to a time-saving gaming state. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of a game state. 13 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process related to variant example 9 of the second embodiment. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of a game state. 13 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process according to a tenth modified example of the second embodiment; 13 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a transition to a second time-saving gaming state. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of a game state. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of a game state. FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an external signal according to a modification 11 of the second embodiment. FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an external signal according to a twelfth modification of the second embodiment. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an external signal. FIG. 4A is a diagram for explaining a connection terminal, and FIG. 4B is a diagram for explaining characteristics of an external signal. An explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used in winning/losing lotteries in the third embodiment. FIG. 2A is a diagram showing an example of a win/loss table for a low probability mode, and FIG. 2B is a diagram showing an example of a win/loss table for a high probability mode. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type table for a first special symbol, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type table for a second special symbol. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a type of special miss result, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a type of sudden time-saving game state. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a support lottery table. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process in the MPU of the main control device. A flowchart showing the winning process for an operating port. 13 is a flowchart showing an information acquisition process. 13 is a flowchart showing a normal process. A flowchart showing special chart game play control processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a data setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process. 13 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process. A flowchart showing the large prize opening and closing process. 13 is a flowchart showing a transition process when an opening/closing execution mode is ended. 13 is a flowchart showing a high frequency support mode update process. 1A is a flowchart showing a process for determining whether or not a game state has suddenly shifted to a time-saving gaming state, and FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a reservation process. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for setting a variable display time. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table. This is a diagram to explain the special reach miss A performance and the special reach miss B performance. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for ending the high frequency support mode. 13 is a flowchart showing the first transition process for the sudden time-saving gaming state. A flowchart showing the second transition process of the sudden time-saving gaming state. 13 is a flowchart showing the general game play control processing. 1A is a flowchart showing the process of starting normal map fluctuations, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of the fluctuation display time. 1A is a flowchart showing the processing for supporting electric roles, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a mode of opening and closing of a reel. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of opening and closing the role-playing device. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the performance control device and its peripheral devices. 13 is a flowchart showing a performance setting process in the MPU of the performance control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a first transition performance setting process. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a display example of a pattern display device. 13 is a flowchart showing processing for displaying special chart changes. 1A is a flowchart showing the second transition performance setting process, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of the display of the pattern display device. 13A is a flowchart showing a process for setting a performance for reservation, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of a display of an image for reservation. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a display example of a pattern display device. 1A is a flowchart showing the process for setting the final effect, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of the display of the pattern display device. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the flow when a special miss result occurs during the time-saving game state. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a transition to a sudden time-saving gaming state in a first variant example of the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a reservation update process. 13A is a flowchart showing a performance setting process, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing a reservation image update process. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the flow when a special miss result occurs during the time-saving game state. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a display example of a pattern display device. 13A is a diagram showing an example of a sudden time-saving gaming state in a modified example 2 of the third embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing a priority information storage area. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a normal game play in a sudden time-saving game state, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a device opening and closing game. 13 is a flowchart showing a reservation update process. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the flow when a special miss result occurs during the time-saving game state. 13A is a diagram showing an example of a sudden time-shortened gaming state according to variant example 3 of the third embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing a counter area for the time-shortened gaming state. 13A is a flowchart showing a process for determining whether or not a game state has suddenly shifted to a time-saving gaming state, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an occurrence order information storage area. 13 is a flowchart showing a reservation process. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for setting a variable display time. 13 is a flowchart showing a high frequency support mode update process. 13 is a flowchart showing the first transition process for the sudden time-saving gaming state. A flowchart showing the second transition process of the sudden time-saving gaming state. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the flow when a special miss result occurs during the time-saving game state. A diagram showing the state of the counter area for the time-saving game state. 13A is a diagram showing a counter area for a time-shortened gaming state in a fourth modified example of the third embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an occurrence order information storage area. 13 is a flowchart showing a reservation process. 13 is a flowchart showing a high frequency support mode update process. A flowchart showing the second transition process of the sudden time-saving gaming state. 13 is a flowchart showing an ending performance setting process. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a display example of a pattern display device. 13A is a diagram showing a counter area for a time-saving gaming state in a fifth modified example of the third embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of the priority of each time-saving gaming state. 13A is a flowchart showing a process for determining whether or not a sudden transition to a time-saving gaming state has occurred, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing the state of a counter area for the time-saving gaming state. 13A is a flowchart showing the reservation process, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing the state of the counter area for the time-saving game mode. 13 is a flowchart showing a high frequency support mode update process. 13 is a flowchart showing the first transition process for the sudden time-saving gaming state. 13A is a flowchart showing a second transition process for a sudden time-saving gaming state, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing the state of a counter area for the time-saving gaming state. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the flow when a special miss result occurs during the time-saving game state. A diagram showing the state of the counter area for the time-saving game state. FIG. 13A is a diagram showing an example of a time-saving gaming state according to a sixth modified example of the third embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of the priority of each time-saving gaming state. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a normal game play in a time-saving game state, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a device opening and closing game. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a sudden transition to a time-saving gaming state. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for setting a variable display time. 13 is a flowchart showing the first transition process for the sudden time-saving gaming state. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the flow when a special miss result occurs during the time-saving game state. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a display example of a pattern display device. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the flow when a special miss result occurs during the time-saving game state. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the flow when a special miss result occurs during the time-saving game state. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the flow when a special miss result occurs during the time-saving game state. (a) is a figure showing an example of a ceiling time-saving game state relating to variant example 7 of the third embodiment, (b) is a figure showing an example of types of time-saving game states, and (c) is a figure showing an example of the priority of each time-saving game state. 1A is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing, and FIG. 1B is a flowchart showing the special chart play count control processing. 13 is a flowchart showing the process for determining a transition to the ceiling time-saving gaming state. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a display example of a pattern display device. A flowchart showing the process for transitioning to the ceiling time-saving gaming state. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the flow when the number of miss plays reaches the ceiling number of plays during the time-saving play state or when a special miss result occurs. 13A is a diagram showing an example of a win/lose table for a low probability mode relating to variant example 8 of the third embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of a special loss result. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a special miss result. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a sudden transition to a time-saving gaming state. 13 is a flowchart showing a reservation release process. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for setting a variable display time. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a display example of a pattern display device. 13 is a flowchart showing a performance setting process. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a reservation display section. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a display example of a pattern display device. An explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used in winning/losing lotteries in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 2A is a diagram showing an example of a win/loss table for a low probability mode, and FIG. 2B is a diagram showing an example of a win/loss table for a high probability mode. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type table for the first special chart, (b) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type table for the second special chart, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of a sudden time-saving game state. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a support lottery table. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a normal winning type table, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a low-winning device opening and closing game. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a high prize device opening and closing game. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process in the MPU of the main control device. A flowchart showing the winning process for an operating port. 13 is a flowchart showing an information acquisition process. 13 is a flowchart showing a normal process. A flowchart showing special chart game play control processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a data setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process. 13 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process. A flowchart showing the large prize opening and closing process. 13 is a flowchart showing a transition process when an opening/closing execution mode is ended. 13 is a flowchart showing a high frequency support mode update process. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a sudden transition to a time-saving gaming state. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for setting a variable display time. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a display example of a pattern display device. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time table. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for ending the high frequency support mode. 13 is a flowchart showing the process for suddenly transitioning to a time-saving gaming state. 1A is a flowchart showing the normal game play control process, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of the confirmed display time. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of starting map fluctuations. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a stop result for a normal winning combination, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a variable display time. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for power supply support. 13A is a flowchart showing an opening count setting process, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing an upper limit opening time setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of opening and closing the role-playing device. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the performance control device and its peripheral devices. 13 is a flowchart showing a performance setting process in the MPU of the performance control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a first transition performance setting process. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a display example of a pattern display device. 13 is a flowchart showing processing for displaying special chart changes. 1A is a flowchart showing the second transition performance setting process, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of the display of the pattern display device. 13 is a flowchart showing an ending performance setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing the process for displaying general map changes. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the general map display area. A diagram to explain the changing display in the general map display area. 13 is a flowchart showing a stop result setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for changing a stop result. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for special light emission effects. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a special light-emitting effect. 13 is a flowchart showing a start timing setting process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of switching of the operation mode of the normal side game. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of switching of the operation mode of the normal side game. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of switching of the operation mode of the normal side game. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of switching of the operation mode of the normal side game. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the start timing of the special light-emitting effect. A figure showing an example of a high prize device opening and closing game related to variant example 1 of the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of opening and closing the role-playing device. 13A is a flowchart showing an upper limit open time setting process, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing a close time setting process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of switching of the operation mode of the normal side game. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of switching of the operation mode of the normal side game. A figure showing an example of a high prize device opening and closing game related to variant example 2 of the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of opening and closing the role-playing device. 13 is a flowchart showing an opening count change process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of switching of the operation mode of the normal side game.

First Embodiment
A first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. Figure 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10 seen from the front side, and Figures 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10 in an expanded form. Note that, for the sake of convenience, the components within the play area PE of the pachinko machine 10 are omitted in Figure 2.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body 12 attached to the outer frame 11.

The outer frame 11 is made of plate material connected on all four sides, forming a rectangular frame. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment. Note that the outer frame 11 is not a required component of the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be attached to the island equipment of the game hall.

The gaming machine main body 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 in a state in which it can be opened and closed. Specifically, an upper support bracket 17 is fixed to the connection between the upper frame portion and the left frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a lower support bracket 18 is provided at the connection between the lower frame portion and the left frame portion of the outer frame 11. The upper support bracket 17 and the lower support bracket 18 form a support mechanism, which allows the gaming machine main body 12 to rotate forward of the pachinko machine 10 with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the outer frame 11 (see Figures 2 and 3).

As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 as a base body, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is supported rotatably relative to the outer frame 11. In detail, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front.

The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front. The back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be rotated backward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front (see Figure 3).

Next, the front door frame 14 will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is mainly composed of a synthetic resin frame body 20 whose external shape is almost the same as that of the outer frame 11, and covers almost the entire front surface of the inner frame 13. A roughly elliptical window portion 21 is formed in the center of the frame body 20, allowing almost the entire play area PE, which will be described later, to be viewed from the front, and the window portion 21 is blocked from the rear side of the front door frame 14 by a glass unit 22.

The glass unit 22 comprises a plurality of transparent glass panels 23 and a glass holder that holds the glass panels 23. The glass holder is formed with a partition that separates the holding area of the glass panels 23 into front and rear, and the two glass panels 23 face each other from the front and rear with the partition in between. In other words, by ensuring a predetermined gap between the two glass panels 23, interference between the glass panels 23 is avoided, and the playing area PE is doubly covered by the glass panels 23 from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

It is not necessary to unitize both glass panels 23 using a glass holder, and each glass panel 23 may be attached individually to the frame body 20. Furthermore, the number of glass panels is arbitrary, and may be one, or three or more. However, from the viewpoint of improving safety and crime prevention, it is preferable to employ multiple glass panels and have each glass panel face each other at a specified gap from the front to the back. Incidentally, it is also possible to employ a panel member made of a transparent synthetic resin instead of the glass panels.

As shown in FIG. 1, various light emitting means such as lamps are provided around the glass unit 22 (specifically, the window section 21). For example, a lamp section (annular illumination section) 26 incorporating a light emitting means such as an LED is provided along the periphery of the window section 21. The lamp section 26 lights up or blinks in response to changes in the game state, such as when a jackpot is hit or a predetermined reach is reached. In addition, an error display lamp section 27 that lights up in the event of a predetermined error is provided at the center of the lamp section 26 and at the top of the pachinko machine 10, and prize ball lamp sections 28 that light up while prize balls are being paid out are provided on the left and right sides of the error display lamp section 27. In addition, speaker sections 29 that output sound effects according to the game state are provided close to the left and right prize ball lamp sections 28.

Below the window 21 in the front door frame 14 (frame body 20), an upper bulge 31 and a lower bulge 32 that bulge toward the front are arranged side by side. An upper tray 33 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulge 31, and a lower tray 34 that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulge 32. The upper tray 33 has the function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from the payout device described below, and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism described below while aligning them in a row. In addition, the lower tray 34 has the function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 33.

The upper surface of the upper bulge 31 is provided with a performance operation unit 36 (more specifically, a push button) that is manually operated by the player. For example, the performance operation unit 36 is manually operated according to suggestions displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75, which will be described later, and the performance content on the display screen G, etc. becomes a predetermined performance content that corresponds to the operation.

A game ball launching handle 41 is provided to the right of the lower bulge 32 so as to protrude forward. When the game ball launching handle 41 is operated, a game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism described below.

As shown in FIG. 2, a passage forming unit 45 is attached to the back of the front door frame 14. The passage forming unit 45 is molded from synthetic resin and has a front door side upper tray passage that leads to the upper tray 33 and a front door side lower tray passage that leads to the lower tray 34. In the passage forming unit 45, a receiving portion that protrudes rearward and opens upward is formed at the upper corner, and the receiving portion is divided into left and right by a partition wall to define an entrance portion of the front door side upper tray passage and an entrance portion of the front door side lower tray passage. Game balls that enter the front door side upper tray passage are guided to the upper tray 33, and game balls that enter the front door side lower tray passage are guided to the lower tray 34.

The front door frame 14 has protruding shafts at its upper and lower ends on the rear side of the pivot base end. These protruding shafts form an assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13. In addition, as shown in FIG. 2, a plurality of hooks 49 extending rearward are arranged in parallel in the vertical direction on the rear side of the front door frame 14 on the pivot tip end side. These hooks 49 form a locking mechanism for the inner frame 13.

Next, the inner frame 13 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 2 and 3. The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 50, which has an approximately rectangular outer shape like the outer frame 11. The height dimension of the resin base 50 is set to be slightly smaller than the height dimension of the outer frame 11. The resin base 50 is also positioned close to the upper frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a slight gap is formed between the lower frame portion of the outer frame 11 and the resin base 50. A fascia is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to close this gap. The fascia is positioned below the resin base 50 (specifically, its lower end portion), and when the inner frame 13 is closed to the outer frame 11, the resin base 50 rests on the fascia.

Support brackets 51, 52 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the front of the resin base 50 on the rotation base side. Axle holes are formed in the support brackets 51, 52, and the protruding shafts of the front door frame 14 are inserted into these axle holes, so that the front door frame 14 is supported rotatably relative to the inner frame 13.

The front of the resin base 50 has an insertion hole at the tip of the rotation for inserting the hook metal fittings 49 provided on the back of the front door frame 14. As shown in FIG. 3, in this pachinko machine 10, the locking device 55 for locking the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is hidden and arranged on the back side of the inner frame 13. Therefore, the hook metal fittings 49 are engaged with the locking device 55 (more specifically, the front door hook receiving member) through the insertion hole, so that the front door frame 14 is locked so that it cannot be opened relative to the inner frame 13. The locking device 55 also has multiple inner frame hook members 57 extending rearward from the inner frame 13. These inner frame hook members 57 are hooked onto the hook receiving members 19 of the outer frame 11, so that the gaming machine main body 12 is locked in a closed state relative to the outer frame 11.

A cylinder lock 58 for unlocking the locking device 55 is installed in the lower right corner of the resin base 50. The cylinder lock 58 is integrated with the locking device 55, and the locking device 55 is configured so that when a key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 58 is turned to the right, the front door frame 14 is unlocked from the inner frame 13, and when the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 58 is turned to the left, the inner frame 13 is unlocked from the outer frame 11.

A roughly elliptical window hole 54 is formed in the center of the resin base 50, and the window hole 54 is blocked from the rear by the game board 60 attached to the resin base 50. The game board 60 is made of wooden plywood and a sheet material that covers the front board surface of the plywood, and its front surface is exposed to the front side of the resin base 50 through the window hole 54. A game area PE where game balls flow down is formed in this exposed area, i.e., the front surface of the game board 60. Note that the game board 60 is not limited to being made of wood, and can also be made of synthetic resin.

The game board 60 (particularly the various components arranged in the game area PE) will be described below with reference to Figure 4. Figure 4 is a front view of the game board 60.

The game board 60 has multiple openings of various sizes that run through it in the thickness direction (front-to-back direction). Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 61, a first operating opening 62, a second operating opening 63, a through gate 64, a variable winning device 65, a variable display unit 67, etc.

When a ball enters the general winning opening 61, the variable winning device 65, the first operating opening 62, and the second operating opening 63, it is detected by a winning sensor (detection sensor), and a bonus such as a payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is given to the player based on the detection result. In this case, when a ball enters the general winning opening 61, 10 game balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the variable winning device 65, 15 game balls are paid out. Also, when a ball enters the first operating opening 62, 3 game balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the second operating opening 63, 1 game ball is paid out. Incidentally, even if a ball enters the through gate 64, no game balls are paid out.

The number of prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the number of prize balls associated with the first operating port 62 may be the same as the number of prize balls associated with the second operating port 63, or the number of prize balls associated with the second operating port 63 may be greater than the number of prize balls associated with the first operating port 62. The number of prize balls associated with the variable winning device 65 may be the same as or less than the number of prize balls associated with other operating ports. A predetermined number of game balls may also be paid out when a ball enters the through gate 64.

At the bottom of the game board 60, an outlet 68 is provided, and game balls that do not enter the various entry sections are discharged from the game area PE through the outlet 68. Here, "entering" means that the game ball passes through a specified opening position, and includes not only a situation in which the game ball is discharged from the game area PE after passing through the opening position, but also a situation in which the game ball is not discharged from the game area PE after passing through the opening position. However, in the following explanation, in order to clearly distinguish from game balls entering the outlet 68, balls entering the general winning port 61, the operating ports 62, 63, the variable winning device 65, or the through gate 64 will also be referred to as winning.

The game board 60 is also provided with numerous nails 69 to appropriately distribute and adjust the flow path of the game balls, and various components (apparatus) such as windmills are also arranged on it. These nails 69, windmills, and other components diversify the flow of the game balls, and are adjusted so that winning the general winning hole 61 and the like described above occurs with a reasonable probability.

The variable display unit 67 is located in the center of the game board 60. The variable display unit 67 is installed on the back side of the game board 60 (Figure 3), and its display screen G can be viewed through an opening provided in the center of the game board 60. A frame-shaped center frame 76 is attached to the front of the game board 60, corresponding to the periphery of the opening.

The center frame 76 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game board 60, and the gap dimension between the front surface of the center frame 76 and the glass unit 22 is smaller than the diameter dimension of the game ball. This prevents the game ball flowing down the game area PE from entering the inner area of the center frame 76 and coming into contact with the display screen G. In addition, the center frame 76 distributes the flow path of the game ball as it flows down the game area PE to the left and right, forming a left route that passes through the left side of the center frame 76 and a right route that passes through the right side.

Whether the game ball flows down (passes through) the left or right route is determined by the amount of rotation of the game ball launch handle 41, i.e., the launch force of the game ball. The launched game ball enters the game area PE from the upper left side of the game board 60, so the stronger the launch force of the game ball, the more likely it is that the game ball will flow down the right route.

In more detail, when the player rotates the game ball launching handle 41 as the first launching operation with a rotation amount in the first range that is equal to or greater than the predetermined rotation amount but less than the reference rotation amount, the launched game ball flows down the left route, and when the player rotates the game ball launching handle 41 as the second launching operation with a rotation amount in the second range that is equal to or greater than the reference rotation amount, the launched game ball flows down the right route. Note that the predetermined rotation amount is the rotation amount that allows the launched game ball to pass through the guide rail 100 described below and enter the game area PE, and the reference rotation amount is the rotation amount that launches the game ball with a launch force that can reach the top of the center frame 76.

A first operating port 62 that opens upward is disposed below the center frame 76 (variable display unit 67). The first operating port 62 is located in the center of the game board 60, but game components such as nails 69 are disposed to prevent game balls flowing down the right route from entering the first operating port 62. In other words, only game balls flowing down the left route can enter the first operating port 62. Therefore, when a player aims to enter the first operating port 62, the player plays by shooting the game ball so that it flows down the left route. A first operating port entry sensor 62a (FIG. 7) is provided in the first operating port 62, and the entry sensor 62a detects game balls that have entered the first operating port 62.

The second actuation port 63 is located to the right of the center frame 76 (variable display unit 67). The configuration of the second actuation port 63 will be described with reference to Figure 5.

The second operating port 63 is provided with a normal power attachment 63a (variable receiving means) that serves as a guide piece (support piece) consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. Specifically, the pair of movable pieces that are supported so as to be rotatable in the left and right direction are arranged so as to sandwich the opening serving as the second operating port 63 from both the left and right sides.

The rotation of each of the movable pieces allows the opening 63 to be switched between a closed state (non-support state or non-guide state) shown in FIG. 5(a) and an open state (support state or guide state) shown in FIG. 5(b). In detail, a protrusion 63d is provided at the top of the second operating port 63 so as to protrude forward, and when the movable pieces are in an upright position as shown in FIG. 5(a), the gap between each of the movable pieces and the protrusion 63d becomes less than the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball is prevented from flowing into the second operating port 63. On the other hand, when the movable pieces are rotated so as to tilt outward as shown in FIG. 5(b), an opening large enough for the game ball to pass through is formed between the protrusion 63d and the movable pieces, and the game ball is allowed to flow into the second operating port 63. A winning sensor 63c for the second operating port is provided at the second operating port 63, and the winning sensor 63c detects a game ball that has won the second operating port 63.

The normal power supply mechanism 63a is provided with a drive unit 63b that drives each movable piece. Each movable piece is driven by the drive unit 63b through a link mechanism (not shown) to switch between an open state (inclined position) and a closed state (standing position). Incidentally, the first operating port 62 is not provided with a normal power supply mechanism (opening/closing structure).

In the above configuration, it is not possible to enter the second operating port 63 when it is closed, but it may be possible to enter. In other words, it may be possible to enter the second operating port 63 when it is closed, but it is more difficult to enter (it is more difficult to enter) than when it is open. In short, it is sufficient that the ease of entering the second operating port 63 differs between the open and closed states, and the degree of closing or opening is arbitrary. In addition, the configuration of the normal power device 63a is not limited to the above, and for example, the second operating port 63 may be opened and closed by a movable piece rotating back and forth or sliding back and forth or left and right.

As shown in FIG. 4, a through gate 64 is disposed above (upstream of) the second operating port 63 on the right route. The through gate 64 has a through hole (not shown) that penetrates vertically, and a game ball that enters the through gate 64 passes through the through gate 64 and flows down the game area PE again. Therefore, a game ball that enters the through gate 64 can also enter the second operating port 63. A through entry sensor 64a (FIG. 7) is provided on the through gate 64, and the entry sensor 64a detects a game ball that enters the through gate 64.

The through gate 64 is a trigger for opening the normal power device 63a provided in the second operating port 63. Specifically, an internal lottery is held when a prize is won through the through gate 64, and if the result of the internal lottery is an opening result (support win), a device opening/closing game (support execution mode) is executed in which the normal power device 63a is opened from a closed state and then returned to the closed state.

In the right route, a variable winning device 65 is located below (downstream of) the second operating port 63. The configuration of the variable winning device 65 will be explained with reference to Figure 6.

The variable winning device 65 is equipped with a large winning opening 65a that opens to the front, and an opening/closing door 65b that opens and closes the large winning opening 65a. The large winning opening 65a is a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front, and is large enough to allow multiple game balls to win at the same time. The large winning opening 65a is connected to a guide passage 65e provided on the back side of the game board 60, and is configured so that all game balls that win in the large winning opening 65a are guided to the guide passage 65e. A winning sensor 65c for the large winning opening is provided in the guide passage 65e, and the winning sensor 65c detects game balls that win in the large winning opening 65a.

The variable winning device 65 is also provided with a drive unit 65d that drives the opening and closing door 65b. The opening and closing door 65b is driven by the drive unit 65d through a link mechanism (not shown) to switch between a closed state (FIG. 6(a)) in which game balls cannot enter the large winning opening 65a, and an open state (FIG. 6(b)) in which game balls can enter the large winning opening 65a. Specifically, the opening and closing door 65b is normally in a closed state, and is switched to an open state when an internal lottery is won to transition to an opening and closing execution mode (large win game).

The open/close execution mode is a mode to which the mode is switched when a jackpot is won. The open/close execution mode will be described in detail later. In the case of a jackpot, the variable winning device 65 may be opened repeatedly for up to a maximum of multiple rounds (e.g., 10 rounds), with one round being the passage of a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) or the winning of a predetermined number of prizes (e.g., 10 prizes).

In the above configuration, it is not possible to win a prize through the large prize opening 65a when it is closed, but it may be possible to win a prize. In other words, it may be possible to win a prize through the large prize opening 65a when it is closed, but it may be more difficult to win a prize (make it more difficult to win a prize) than when it is open. In short, it is sufficient that the ease of winning a prize through the large prize opening 65a differs between the open and closed states, and the degree of closing or opening is arbitrary.

Here, only game balls that flow down the right route can win the second operating port 63, through gate 64, and variable winning device 65. Therefore, when a player aims to win the second operating port 63, through gate 64, and variable winning device 65, the player will play by shooting the game ball so that it flows down the right route.

As shown in FIG. 4, a main display unit 81 is provided below the variable winning device 65. The main display unit 81 is arranged along the outer edge of the lower side of the play area PE, and protrudes forward from the front of the play board 60. A special display section 43 and a regular display section 44, which display predetermined pictures, etc., are provided on the front of the main display unit 81. These display sections 43, 44 are visible from the front through the glass unit 22 of the front door frame 14. The gap dimension between the front of the main display unit 81 and the glass unit 22 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. This prevents the game ball from passing in front of the main display unit 81, ensuring the visibility of the various display sections 43, 44.

The special chart display section 43 is provided with a first special chart display section AS that displays the results of a lottery based on winning the first operating port 62, and a second special chart display section BS that displays the results of a lottery based on winning the second operating port 63.

In the first special chart display unit AS, the winning of the first operating port 62 is used as a trigger to display a changing pattern, and the result of the display stopping is the clear display of the result of the internal lottery conducted based on the winning of the first operating port 62. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 62 is a winning result corresponding to a jackpot, the display stopping in the first special chart display unit AS, a predetermined pattern is displayed as the stopping result, and then the above-mentioned opening and closing execution mode is entered.

In the second special chart display section BS, the winning of the second operating port 63 is used as a trigger to display a changing pattern, and the result of the display stopping is the clear display of the result of the internal lottery conducted based on the winning of the second operating port 63. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 63 is a winning result corresponding to a jackpot, the display stopping in the second special chart display section BS is stopped, a predetermined pattern is displayed as the stopping result, and then the above-mentioned opening and closing execution mode is entered.

In the following, to distinguish between the image that changes in appearance when a winning jackpot is won through the first operating port 62 and the image that changes in appearance when a winning jackpot is won through the second operating port 63, the former will be referred to as the first special image or first special design, and the latter as the second special image or second special design.

Here, based on a win in any of the operating ports 62, 63, a change display is started in the corresponding special chart display unit AS, BS, and the period from when the specified stop result is displayed until the change display is stopped corresponds to one play round in the special chart display unit AS, BS. However, one play round is not limited to the above, and for example, in a configuration in which a single display area is provided and the change display is performed in that single display area regardless of whether a win occurs in any of the operating ports 62, 63, the change display is started in that single display area, and one play round corresponds to the period from when the change display is started in that single display area until the specified stop result is displayed and the change display is stopped.

The main display unit 81 is also provided with a special symbol reserved number display section AM. The number of times that the game ball has entered the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63 can be reserved up to four times, and the special symbol reserved number display section AM can display the reserved number of the first special symbol (first actuation port 62) and the reserved number of the second special symbol (second actuation port 63) separately.

The normal map display unit 44 is a display unit for displaying the results of an internal lottery performed based on winning at the through gate 64. In this case, the normal map display unit 44 displays the changing patterns triggered by winning at the through gate 64, and as a result of the stopping of the changing display, the result of the internal lottery performed based on winning at the through gate 64 is displayed clearly. If the result of the internal lottery based on winning at the through gate 64 is a winning result corresponding to a transition to a support state in which the normal power device 63a is opened, a predetermined stopping result is displayed on the normal map display unit 44, the changing display is stopped, and then a transition to the support state occurs. Note that the pattern that is displayed in a changing manner triggered by winning at the through gate 64 is sometimes called a normal pattern or a normal map.

Here, based on winning at the through gate 64, the variable display starts in the normal map display section 44, and the period from when a predetermined stop result is displayed until the variable display stops corresponds to one play round in the normal map display section 44. In the following, to distinguish between a play round in the normal map display section 44 and a play round in the special map display sections AS and BS, the former may be referred to as a normal map play round, and the latter as a special map play round.

The regular map display section 44 is also provided with a regular map reserve number display section FM. The number of times that a game ball has entered the through gate 64 can be reserved up to four times, and the regular map reserve number display section FM can display the number of reserved regular maps (through gate 64).

The special map display unit 43 and the general map display unit 44 are configured with a segment display device having multiple segments, but are not limited to this and may be configured with other display devices such as a liquid crystal display device.

In addition, although not shown in the figure, the main display unit 81 is provided with a round display section for clearly indicating the number of rounds in the opening and closing execution mode. The round display section starts displaying the number of rounds when the opening and closing execution mode is started or has been started. This display continues without changing the display content while the opening and closing execution mode is being executed, and ends when the opening and closing execution mode is ended or has been ended.

Next, the variable display unit 67 will be described. The variable display unit 67 is provided with a pattern display device 75 that variably displays (or variably displays or switches between) a pattern, which is a type of picture.

The pattern display device 75 is configured as a liquid crystal display device equipped with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. Note that the pattern display device 75 is not limited to being a liquid crystal display device, and may be other display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

On the pattern display device 75, for example, patterns are displayed in a line at the top, middle, and bottom, and these patterns are scrolled left and right to change and display. In this case, the changing display on the pattern display device 75 is started based on a winning entry in the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63. In other words, when a changing display is performed on the special pattern display section 43, a changing display is also performed on the pattern display device 75 accordingly. Then, when the variable winning device 65 transitions to a jackpot game state (open/close execution mode) in which it is in an open state, a predetermined pattern combination is displayed stopped on a preset winning line on the pattern display device 75.

The pattern display device 75 also displays a reservation corresponding to the first special display unit AS and the second special display unit BS. In this reservation display, a predetermined reservation image is displayed, and the number of reserved items in each operating port 63, 64 is indicated by the number of reserved items displayed. The reservation number is not limited to that indicated by the reservation image, but may be indicated by a numerical display. In addition, the reservation number may be indicated by, for example, a display unit (a display unit separate from the reservation number display units AM, FM of the main display unit 81) or a light-emitting unit (reservation lamp unit) provided on the game board 60, separate from the pattern display device 75.

The configuration of the inner frame 13 will be described with reference to FIG. 2 again. Below the mounting area of the game board 60 on the resin base 50, a game ball launching mechanism 110 is provided that launches game balls toward the game area PE based on the operation of the game ball launching handle 41. The game ball launching mechanism 110 mainly comprises a solenoid 111 that launches game balls placed at a predetermined launch waiting position, a launch rail 112 that determines the launch direction of the game balls launched by the solenoid 111, a ball delivery device 113 that supplies game balls to the launch waiting position, and a base plate 114 on which these various components 111 to 113 are attached. The base plate 114 is fixed to the resin base 50, and thus the game ball launching mechanism 110 is integrated with the resin base 50.

The launch rail 112 is fixed to the base plate 114 in an obliquely inclined state so that it slopes upward toward the game board 60. A ball stopper that stops the game balls supplied from the ball sending device 113 in the above-mentioned launch waiting position is provided at a position closer to the downstream end (i.e., the lower end) of the launch rail 112. The solenoid 111 is located further downstream than the ball stopper.

The solenoid 111 is electrically connected to a power source and a launch control device, which will be described later. Based on the output of electrical signals from the power source and the launch control device, the output shaft of the solenoid 111 reciprocates in the extension/contraction direction, causing the game ball placed in the launch standby position to be launched toward the game board 60, or more specifically, toward the guide rail 100 attached to the game board 60.

As shown in FIG. 4, the guide rail 100 defines the play area PE so that the outer shape of the play area PE is approximately circular. The guide rail 100 is composed of an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102 that are arranged facing each other with a gap slightly larger than the diameter of the play ball, and a guide passage 103 is defined by these two rails 101, 102. The guide passage 103 has an entrance portion that opens to the tip side (diagonally downward) of the launch rail 112, and an exit portion located at the top of the play area PE. The play ball launched based on the operation of the solenoid 111 is guided to the play area PE by moving in the order of the launch rail 112 → guide rail 100 (entrance portion → exit portion).

In addition, a return prevention member 106 is attached to the front side of the exit portion of the game board 60, specifically near the tip of the inner rail 101, to prevent game balls that have reached the game area PE from returning back into the guide passage 103, preventing game balls that have already reached the game area PE from interfering with the launch of subsequent game balls.

As shown in FIG. 2, the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112 are arranged so that the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 face each other diagonally across the bottom edge of the game board 60. In other words, the rails 100, 112 are arranged so that the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 are offset left and right near the bottom edge of the game board 60. This brings the rails 100, 112 closer to the bottom edge of the game board 60, while forming a predetermined gap between the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112.

A foul ball passage 46 is disposed below the gap thus formed. The foul ball passage 46 is integrally molded with the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. If a game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 110 does not reach the play area PE and returns inside the guide passage 103 as a foul ball, the foul ball will enter the foul ball passage 46 through the above-mentioned gap. The foul ball passage 46 is connected to the lower tray passage on the front door side, and game balls that enter the foul ball passage 46 are discharged to the lower tray 34. This prevents interference between the foul ball and the next game ball to be launched, and returns the game ball that has become a foul ball to the player.

A through hole is formed in the resin base 50 to the left of the launch rail 112 (more specifically, the side supporting the front door frame 14) that penetrates the resin base 50 in the front-rear direction, and a passage forming member 121 is disposed in this through hole. The passage forming member 121 is screwed to the resin base 50, and has a main body side upper dish passage and a main body side lower dish passage. The upstream sides of the main body side upper dish passage and the main body side lower dish passage lead to the game ball distribution section described later. In addition, the receiving portion of the passage forming unit 45 attached to the front door frame 14 is inserted below the passage forming member 121, and the front door side upper dish passage is disposed below the main body side upper dish passage, and the front door side upper dish passage is disposed below the main body side lower dish passage.

An opening/closing member 124 for opening and closing the upper plate passage on the main body side and the lower plate passage on the main body side is attached below the passage forming member 121 in the resin base 50. The opening/closing member 124 is supported by a support shaft provided at its lower end so as to be rotatable in the front-rear direction, and a biasing member is provided to bias the opening/closing member to a forward position where the upper plate passage on the main body side and the lower plate passage on the main body side are closed. Therefore, when the front door frame 14 is opened relative to the inner frame 13, the opening/closing member 124 rises as shown in the figure, closing the upper plate passage on the main body side and the lower plate passage on the main body side. This prevents the stored balls from spilling out when the front door frame 14 is opened while game balls are stored in the upper plate passage on the main body side or the lower plate passage on the main body side. On the other hand, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the opening/closing member 124 is pushed open against the biasing force by the receiving portion provided in the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. In this state, the upper tray passage on the main body side is connected to the upper tray passage on the front door side, and the lower tray passage on the main body side is connected to the lower tray passage on the front door side.

Next, the rear structure of the inner frame 13 (resin base 50 and game board 60) will be described with reference to Figure 3.

Bearing fittings 132 are arranged side by side on the upper and lower sides of the rotation base end on the back surface of the resin base 50. The bearing fittings 132 are formed with bearing portions spaced apart from each other on the top and bottom, and the back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to the inner frame 13 by these bearing portions.

The back surface of the resin base 50 is provided with multiple locking fittings, and the game board 60 is attached to the resin base 50 by these locking fittings. Here, we will explain the configuration of the back surface of the game board 60.

A display control device is attached to the variable display unit 67, which is located in the center of the game board 60, so as to cover the variable display unit 67 from behind (not shown). A performance control device unit 142 is mounted behind the display control device so as to overlap the display control device. The performance control device unit 142 is configured to include a performance control device 143 and a mounting base 144, and the performance control device 143 is attached to the mounting base 144.

The performance control device 143 is equipped with a performance control board that controls the sound, lamp display, and display control device according to instructions from the main control device described below, and the performance control board is housed in a board box 145 made of a transparent resin material or the like.

As shown in FIG. 3, a collection plate 150 is provided on the back of the game board 60 below the variable display unit 67. The collection plate 150 is provided with a game ball recovery mechanism that recovers game balls that have entered the various winning holes, a detection mechanism that detects the entry of game balls into the various winning holes, etc.

Regarding the game ball recovery mechanism, the collecting board 150 is provided with recovery passages corresponding to the various ball entry sections such as the general winning opening 61. These recovery passages run down from the ball entry sections along the back of the game board 60, and define the path along which the game balls fall. The recovery passages join near the bottom end of the game board 60, and all game balls that pass through the ball entry sections such as the general winning opening 61 are collected at the bottom of the game board 60 via the recovery passages. The outlet of each recovery passage is open downward, and a discharge passage is provided at the end of the outlet (more specifically, below the game board 60). The game balls that have collected below the game board 60 through the recovery passage are led out to the discharge passage. The outlet 68 also leads to the discharge passage, and game balls that have not won any of the winning openings are also led out to the discharge passage via the outlet 68.

Explaining the detection mechanism, the collection board 150 is provided with winning sensors (detection sensors) that individually correspond to the various ball entry sections such as the general winning opening 61. These winning sensors are arranged at intermediate positions in each recovery passage leading to the ball entry section such as the general winning opening 61, and detect the passage of the game ball when the falling path of the game ball is specified in the recovery passage. In other words, the entry of the game ball into a ball entry port such as the general winning opening 61 is detected when the game ball passes through a detection area provided at an intermediate position in each recovery passage. The winning sensor is composed of, for example, a magnetic sensor that detects the change in the magnetic field that occurs when the game ball passes through the detection area.

These various winning sensors are electrically connected to a main control device unit 160 (more specifically, the main control device) provided on the rear side of the game board 60, and detection signals from these winning sensors are output to the main control device. The main control device unit 160 and its associated configuration will be described below.

The main control device unit 160 is mounted on the game board 60 so as to cover the assembly board 150 from the rear, and is composed of a mounting base 161 made of synthetic resin and a main control device 162 mounted on the mounting base 161. The main control device 162 is equipped with a main control board having a function (main control circuit) that is responsible for the main control of the game, and the main control board is housed in a board box 163 made of a transparent resin material or the like.

The substrate box 163 comprises a box base (front case body) of a roughly rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover (rear case body) that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and box cover are connected to each other by a sealing part that serves as a sealing means so that they cannot be opened, thereby sealing the substrate box 163. A plurality of sealing parts are provided on the long sides of the substrate box 163, and at least one of them is used to perform the sealing process.

Any configuration can be applied to the sealing part as long as it is configured to connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner, but the box base and the box cover are connected to each other in an unopenable manner by inserting a locking claw into the long hole that constitutes the sealing part. The sealing process using the sealing part prevents unauthorized opening after the sealing, and even if unauthorized opening occurs, it makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily, and it is possible to perform the sealing process again even after it has been opened once. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting a locking claw into at least one long hole of the multiple sealing parts. Then, when the board box 163 is opened, such as when a malfunction occurs in the stored main control board or when inspecting the main control board, the connection part between the sealing part into which the locking claw is inserted and the other sealing parts is cut. This separates the box base and the box cover of the board box 163, and the main control board inside can be removed. If the sealing process is to be performed again, a locking claw is inserted into the long hole of the other sealing part. If a record indicating that the board box 163 has been opened is left on the board box 163, unauthorized opening can be easily discovered by looking at the board box 163.

One short side of the board box 163 has multiple connecting pieces that protrude out to the side. These connecting pieces correspond one-to-one to the multiple connectable pieces formed on the mounting base 161, and the connecting pieces and the connectable pieces seal between the board box 163 and the mounting base 161.

Next, the back pack unit 15 will be described with reference to Figures 2 and 3.

As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 is covered from the rear by the back pack unit 15. The back pack unit 15 has a back pack 201, to which a dispensing mechanism 202, a discharge passage panel 203, and a control device assembly unit 204 are attached.

The back pack 201 is molded from a transparent synthetic resin, and as shown in FIG. 3, has a base part 211 to which the payout mechanism part 202 and the like are attached, and a protective cover part 212 that protrudes to the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and has a generally rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover part 212 is closed on the left and right sides and the top, and only the bottom is open, and is large enough to surround at least the variable display unit 67.

The base 211 has an external output terminal 213 at its upper right side. The external output terminal 213 has various output terminals, and various signals are output to the hall computer HC (management control device) at the gaming hall through these output terminals. In addition, the base 211 has a pair of upper and lower hook pins at its right end when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the back pack unit 15 is supported rotatably relative to the inner frame 13 by inserting the hook pins into the bearing fittings 132 (more specifically, the bearing part) provided on the inner frame 13. In addition, a fastener for fastening to a fastening hole provided on the inner frame 13 is provided at the pivot tip of the base 211, and the back pack unit 15 is fixed to the inner frame 13 by fitting the fastener into the fastening hole.

The payout mechanism 202 is disposed on the base 211 so as to bypass the protective cover 212. The payout mechanism 202 is provided with a tank 221 that is disposed on the top of the back pack 201 and opens upward, and game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 221. A tank rail that gently slopes toward the downstream side is connected to the bottom of the tank 221, and a case rail that extends in the vertical direction is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail. A payout device 222 is provided at the most downstream part of the case rail. The game balls paid out from the payout device 222 are supplied to a game ball distribution section provided on the base 211 of the back pack 201 through a payout passage provided downstream of the payout device 222.

The game ball distribution section has the function of distributing game balls dispensed from the payout device 222 to either the upper tray 33, the lower tray 34, or the discharge passage described below, and is formed so that the inner opening leads to the upper tray 33 via the above-mentioned main body side upper tray passage and front door side upper tray passage, and the outer opening leads to the lower tray 34 via the main body side lower tray passage and front door side lower tray passage.

As shown in FIG. 3, the discharge passage panel 203 and the control device assembly unit 204 are attached to the lower end of the base portion 211, sandwiching the lower end from the front and rear. The discharge passage panel 203 has a discharge passage that is open to the rear on the surface facing the control device assembly unit 204, and the open part of the discharge passage is blocked by the control device assembly unit 204. The discharge passage is formed to discharge game balls to the island equipment of the game hall, and the game balls led to the discharge passage from the above-mentioned collection passage etc. are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 by passing through the discharge passage.

The control device assembly unit 204 has a horizontally long mounting base on which the payout control device 181 and the power supply and launch control device 191 are mounted. The payout control device 181 and the power supply and launch control device 191 are stacked one behind the other so that the payout control device 181 is at the rear of the pachinko machine 10.

In the payout control device 181, a payout control board that controls the payout device 222 is housed in a board box, and a status return switch provided on the payout control board protrudes outside the board box. For example, when the status return switch is pressed in the event of a payout error, such as a ball jam in the payout device 222, the ball jam is cleared.

The power supply and launch control device 191 has a power supply and launch control board housed in a board box, which generates and outputs the specified power required by various control devices, etc., and also controls the launch of the game ball in response to the player's operation of the game ball launch handle 41.

The power supply and launch control device 191 is provided with a power outage monitoring section (power outage monitoring circuit) 315 that monitors the power supply and detects the occurrence of a power outage or other power interruption. This pachinko machine 10 has a function for storing and retaining various data, so that in the unlikely event of a power outage, the state at the time of the power outage is retained, and when the power returns to normal, the state before the power outage is restored. For example, when the power supply is cut off in the normal manner, such as when an amusement hall closes, the state before the power outage is stored and retained. The power supply and launch control device 191 is also provided with a RAM erase switch. When the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch, the RAM data is initialized.

<Electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The main control board 311 of the main control device 162 is equipped with an MPU 312. The MPU 312 contains a ROM 313 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 312, a RAM 314 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 313, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as random number generators, and the like.

RAM 314 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data using backup voltage from the power supply and firing control device 191 even after a power outage occurs, and RAM 314 is provided with a backup area in addition to an area for temporarily storing various data, etc. The backup area is an area for storing the stack pointer, values of each register, I/O, etc. at the time of power interruption when a power outage occurs. When recovering from the power outage (when power is restored), the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power outage based on the information in the backup area.

In the configuration shown in FIG. 7, the ROM 313 and the RAM 314 are integrated into a single chip for the MPU 312, but this is not limiting and each may be integrated into a separate chip. This also applies to the MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 162.

The MPU 312 is provided with an input port and an output port. The payout control device 181 and the power supply and launch control device 191 are connected to the input side of the MPU 312. In addition, various sensors are connected to the input side of the MPU 312. The various sensors include a general winning port winning sensor 61a, a first operating port winning sensor 62a, a second operating port winning sensor 63c, a through winning sensor 64a, and a large winning port winning sensor 65c, which detect winnings in the general winning port 61, the first operating port 62, the second operating port 63, the through gate 64, and the variable winning device 65. The MPU 312 performs winning judgments (ball winning judgments) for each winning section based on the detection results of these various sensors 61a, 62a, 63c, 364a, and 65c. In addition, the MPU 312 executes various lotteries based on the winnings at the first actuation port 62, the second actuation port 63, and the through gate 64.

The output side of the MPU 312 is connected to the payout control device 181, the performance control device 143, etc. For example, a prize ball command is output to the payout control device 181 based on the winning determination result for the prize ball entry section corresponding to the payout of the prize ball.

Various commands, such as a change start command, a type command, a change end command, an opening command, and an ending command, are output to the performance control device 143. In this case, when outputting these various commands, the command information storage area 313e of the ROM 313 is referenced. Details of these various commands will be explained later. Each of the above commands is configured as a predetermined number of bytes of information, and various information is included as the predetermined number of bytes of information.

Also, the output side of the MPU 312 is connected to various drive units, such as the drive unit 63b for the normal power device 63a and the drive unit 65d for the variable winning device 65. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 311, and the MPU 312 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits. Specifically, when a transition to the open/close execution mode occurs, the MPU 312 executes drive control of the drive unit 65d so that the opening/closing door 65b of the variable winning device 65 is driven. Also, when a transition to the support state occurs, the MPU 312 executes drive control of the drive unit 63b so that each movable piece of the normal power device 63a is driven. Also, during each special pattern play, display control of the first special pattern display unit AS or the second special pattern display unit BS in the special pattern display unit 43 is executed. Also, during a normal pattern play, display control of the normal pattern display unit 44 is executed.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned external output terminal 213 is connected to the output side of the MPU 312, and information on balls entering various entry areas and lottery results such as big wins are output to the hall computer HC through this external output terminal 213. This makes it possible for the hall computer HC to grasp the status of the pachinko machine 10, etc.

The power supply and launch control device 191 is connected to a commercial power supply (external power supply) in, for example, an amusement park. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, it generates the operating power required for each of the main control board 311, the payout control device 181, etc., and supplies the generated operating power.

The power supply and launch control device 191 is provided with a power outage monitoring unit 315, which monitors the stable 24-volt DC voltage output from the power supply and launch control device 191. When the output voltage from the power supply and launch control device 191 falls below 22 volts, the power outage monitoring unit 315 determines that a power outage (power cutoff) has occurred, and outputs a power outage signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) provided in the MPU 312 of the main control device 162. As a result, the main control device 162 recognizes the occurrence of a power outage and immediately executes NMI interrupt processing, and further executes power outage processing based on this. Incidentally, the power supply and launch control device 191 is provided with a power outage power supply unit such as a backup capacitor, and when a power outage occurs or when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is OFF, power for memory retention is supplied from the power outage power supply unit to the RAM 314 of the main control device 162. In addition, the power supply and launch control device 191 is responsible for controlling the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 110, which is driven when certain launch conditions are met.

The payout control device 181 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls by the payout device 222 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 162.

The performance control device 143 drives and controls the lamp units 26-28 and speaker unit 29 provided on the front door frame 14, and controls the display control device 350, based on various commands input from the main control device 162. The display control device 350 executes display control of the pattern display device 75 based on commands input from the performance control device 143. In this case, the performance control device 143 determines the time for which the patterns are displayed on the pattern display device 75 to vary and the type of combination of patterns to be finally displayed in a stopped state, based on various commands input from the main control device 162, and also determines whether or not a reach will occur and the content of the reach performance.

Here, the display contents of the pattern display device 75 will be explained with reference to Figures 8 to 10.

As shown in Figures 8(a) to (j), the design, which is a type of picture, is composed of nine main designs, each numbered "1" to "9," and a sub-design consisting of a shell-shaped picture. More specifically, the main designs are composed of nine character designs, such as an octopus, each numbered "1" to "9."

As shown in FIG. 9(a), the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 has three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 set in the upper, middle, and lower rows. Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is configured with main and sub-symbols arranged in a predetermined order. In detail, the upper symbol row Z1 has nine main symbols from "1" to "9" arranged in descending numerical order, with one sub-symbol arranged between each main symbol. The lower symbol row Z3 has nine main symbols from "1" to "9" arranged in ascending numerical order, with one sub-symbol arranged between each main symbol. In other words, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are configured with 18 symbols. In contrast, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine main symbols from "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, with a main symbol "4" additionally arranged between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1", and one sub-symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. In other words, the middle symbol row Z2 alone is composed of 20 symbols, with 10 main symbols arranged. Then, on the display screen G, the symbols of each of these symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed variably, scrolling in a predetermined direction with periodicity. Also, as shown in FIG. 9(b), the display screen G is configured so that three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, resulting in a total of nine symbols, 3 x 3, being stopped and displayed.

Five active lines, namely the left line L1, the middle line L2, the right line L3, the downward-right line L4, and the upward-right line L5, are set on the display screen G. The display stops in the order of upper pattern row Z1 → lower pattern row Z3 → middle pattern row Z2, and when the display of all pattern rows Z1 to Z3 ends with a combination of patterns with the same number on any active line, a jackpot video is displayed to indicate the occurrence of a normal 4R jackpot result or a 10R special jackpot result, which will be described later.

In this pachinko machine 10, main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "specific symbols", and when a 10R special jackpot result occurs, the same combination of specific symbols is displayed. Also, main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "non-specific symbols", and when a regular 4R jackpot result occurs, the same combination of non-specific symbols is displayed.

Here, the variable display of each symbol row will be explained with reference to FIG. 10. When a game round starts, first, high-speed variable display starts for all symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In this case, it is impossible or difficult to recognize which symbol row is being displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 10(a), the variable display mode of the upper symbol row Z1 switches from a high-speed variable display to a low-speed variable display in which the player can recognize the variable displayed symbol. Then, as shown in FIG. 10(b), the variable display mode of the lower symbol row Z3 switches from a high-speed variable display to a low-speed variable display as the variable display of the upper symbol row Z1 ends. Then, as shown in FIG. 10(c), the variable display of the lower symbol row Z3 ends. After the variable display of all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 ends, a stop display period is provided in which the stop display is maintained and the player waits for a predetermined period.

In a gaming machine, when the symbols are displayed in a stopped state on the symbol display device 75, it is common to stop the symbols in the final stop row (middle symbol row Z2 in this embodiment) gradually while slowing down the variable display speed, rather than stopping them suddenly. In this case, if the symbols in middle symbol row Z2 (final stop row) are configured to start stopping in time with the start of the stopped display on the special symbol display section 43, the time required for the symbols to decelerate to stop on the symbol display device 75 is shortened, resulting in a reduction in the effective stopped display time.

Therefore, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, including the final stop row, are stopped (temporarily stopped) before the special symbol display section 43 starts to display the symbols, and then the temporarily stopped symbols are permanently stopped (determined display) in accordance with the start timing of the special symbol display section 43. The display mode of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the provisional stop state is different from that in the definitive display. For example, at least one of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 moves gently back and forth, or at least a part of the characters (FIG. 8) such as an octopus that make up the main symbol and sub-symbol are moving. In other words, the provisional stop is performed so that the symbols appear to be stationary at first glance, but remain in an incompletely stopped state (stationary display). In contrast, the definitive display is performed so that the symbols do not move back and forth or the characters do not move, and the symbols are completely stopped.

The provisional stop display of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 may start with a stop result that corresponds to the result of the win/lose lottery or the type of jackpot, and then proceed directly to a final display. In addition, the provisional stop display may temporarily stop with a stop result that does not correspond to the result of the win/lose lottery or the type of jackpot, and then the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 may change again to a stop result that corresponds to the result of the win/lose lottery, and then proceed to a final display.

Incidentally, in a special pattern game run executed by the special pattern display unit 43, the pattern is not temporarily stopped, but the changing pattern is suddenly stopped as the changing display time elapses, and this state (the state in which the pattern is stopped) is maintained until the fixed display time has elapsed. In other words, the stopped display of the pattern in the special pattern display unit 43 remains a fixed display. This is also the case in a regular pattern game run executed by the regular pattern display unit 44.

The manner in which the pattern display device 75 changes is not limited to the above and can be any manner, and the number of pattern rows, the direction in which the pattern changes in the pattern rows, the number of patterns in each pattern row, and the combination of patterns corresponding to a jackpot or a miss can be changed as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 9(b), a hold display section 200 is provided at the bottom of the display screen G for displaying a number of hold images corresponding to the number of holds in the previous play, and the player can recognize the number of holds by visually checking the hold display section 200. The hold display section 200 has a first hold display area Ga corresponding to the first special symbol, and a second hold display area Gb corresponding to the second special symbol.

In the first hold display area Ga, unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4 are displayed side by side in the left-right direction, with the same number of unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4 as the maximum number of balls that can be held when a game ball enters the first operating port 62. Specifically, the maximum number of balls that can be held when a game ball enters the first operating port 62 is four, and corresponding to this, the first hold display area Ga1, the second unit hold display area Ga2, the third unit hold display area Ga3, and the fourth unit hold display area Ga4 are set in the first hold display area Ga.

For example, if the number of reserved balls when a game ball enters the first operating port 62 is one, a predetermined reserved image is displayed only in the first unit reserved display area Ga1, and if the number of reserved balls when a game ball enters the first operating port 62 is four, a predetermined reserved image is displayed in all of the first unit reserved display area Ga1 to the fourth unit reserved display area Ga4.

In addition, in the second reserve display area Gb, the same number of unit reserve display areas Gb1 to Gb4 as the maximum number of reserved balls when a game ball enters the second operating port 63 are displayed side by side in the left-right direction. Specifically, the maximum number of reserved balls when a game ball enters the second operating port 63 is four, and corresponding to this, the first unit reserve display area Gb1, the second unit reserve display area Gb2, the third unit reserve display area Gb3, and the fourth unit reserve display area Gb4 are set in the second reserve display area Gb.

For example, if the number of reserved balls when the game ball enters the second operating port 63 is one, a predetermined reserved image is displayed only in the first unit reserved display area Gb1, and if the number of reserved balls when the game ball enters the second operating port 63 is four, a predetermined reserved image is displayed in all of the first unit reserved display area Gb1 to the fourth unit reserved display area Gb4.

In addition, an execution display area D is set between the first hold display area Ga and the second hold display area Gb. A hold image corresponding to the game round to be executed (being executed) is displayed in the execution display area D. For example, when a game round ends and the next game round starts, the hold image displayed in the first unit hold display area Ga1 of the first hold display area Ga or the first unit hold display area Gb1 of the second hold display area Gb is moved and displayed in the execution display area D. This allows the player to recognize that the game round that was on hold will be executed.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries by the MPU 312 of the main control device 162>
Next, the electrical configuration for performing various lotteries by the MPU 312 of the main control device 162 will be described with reference to FIG.

The MPU 312 uses various counter information during play to perform lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot, settings for the display of the special chart display section 43, and settings for the display of the normal chart display section 44. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11, it uses a jackpot random number counter C1 used for lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot, a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the type of jackpot such as a guaranteed jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, a random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a variable type counter CS that determines the variable display time of each special chart display section AS, BS in the special chart display section 43. In addition, it uses a normal chart random number counter C3 used for lottery for whether or not to put the normal power device 63a of the second operating port 63 into a support state (open state).

Each counter C1-C3, CINI, and CS is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in lottery counter buffer 314a set in a specified area of RAM 314. In lottery counter buffer 314a, information corresponding to jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and variable type counter CS is stored in reserved ball storage area 314b, which serves as acquired information storage means, when a win occurs in first actuation port 62 or second actuation port 63.

The reserved ball storage area 314b includes a reserved area RE consisting of a reserved area Ra for a first special symbol and a reserved area Rb for a second special symbol, and an execution area AE. The reserved areas Ra and Rb each include a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, and the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer 314a is stored in one of the areas as reserved information according to the winning history of the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63. The reserved information corresponds to special information.

In this case, when multiple consecutive wins occur at the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63, the first to fourth areas store the numerical information in chronological order from the first area → the second area → the third area → the fourth area. By providing four areas in this way, up to four winning balls at the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63 can be reserved and stored. In addition, the reserved ball storage area 314b is provided with a total reserved number storage area, and information for specifying the number of winning balls at the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63 that are reserved and stored is stored in this total reserved number storage area.

The execution area AE is an area for moving the values stored in the first area of the reserve area RE when the variable display of the special chart display section 43 begins, and when one game round begins, a win/loss determination is made based on the various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

Regarding each counter in detail, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 199, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 199). In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 goes around once, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 199). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of the RAM 314 when the game ball enters the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63. More specifically, it is stored in the reserved area Ra for the first special symbol of the RAM 314 when the game ball enters the first actuation port 62, and is stored in the reserved area Rb for the second special symbol of the RAM 314 when the game ball enters the second actuation port 63.

The random number value that will result in a jackpot win is stored as a win/loss table (win/loss information group) in the win/loss table storage area 313a, which serves as a win/loss information group storage means in the ROM 313. The contents of the win/loss table will now be explained with reference to FIG. 12.

In the win/lose table, address information consisting of binary information is set in a one-to-one correspondence with jackpot numerical information also consisting of binary information. Specifically, five types of address information are set, expressed in decimal, from "1" to "5," and five types of jackpot numerical information are set, expressed in decimal, from "7," "17," "27," "37," and "47," and there is a one-to-one correspondence between the address information and the jackpot numerical information. The value of each jackpot numerical information is within the range of "0" to "199," which is the range of random number information that can be updated by the jackpot random number counter C1.

Here, in this pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery modes in the winning/losing lottery means. The number of jackpot numerical information referenced in the low probability mode is different from the number of jackpot numerical information referenced in the high probability mode, and the former is smaller than the latter. Specifically, in the low probability mode, only jackpot numerical information with address information "1" is referenced when the winning/losing lottery is performed, and in the high probability mode, jackpot numerical information corresponding to all address information is referenced when the winning/losing lottery is performed. In other words, in the low probability mode, there is one numerical information that will win the jackpot, and in the high probability mode, there are five numerical information pieces, which is more than in the low probability mode. As a result, the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability mode is 1/200, while the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability mode is 1/40, and the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning the jackpot than the low probability mode. In each lottery mode, the lottery result is a loss result except for the random number value that wins the jackpot. In addition, the number and value of the random numbers that will result in a win can be any number, as long as the probability of winning is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode.

The jackpot type counter C2 is used to assign the type of jackpot when a jackpot is hit, and is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e. 99). The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of RAM 314 when the game ball enters the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63. More specifically, it is stored in the reserved area Ra for the first special symbol of RAM 314 when the game ball enters the first actuation port 62, and is stored in the reserved area Rb for the second special symbol of RAM 314 when the game ball enters the second actuation port 63.

The allocation destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a jackpot type table in the type table storage area 313b of the ROM 313. Here, the jackpot type table will be explained with reference to FIG. 13.

As the jackpot type table, a jackpot type table for the first special symbol (Fig. 13(a)) and a jackpot type table for the second special symbol (Fig. 13(b)) are set. When a jackpot is achieved based on winning the first actuation port 62, the jackpot type table for the first special symbol is referenced, and when a jackpot is achieved based on winning the second actuation port 63, the jackpot type table for the second special symbol is referenced.

As shown in FIG. 13(a), in the jackpot type table for the first special chart, a 4R variable jackpot result and a 4R normal jackpot result are set as selectable jackpot types. Both of these jackpot results result in four rounds of play being performed. Here, a round of play is one in which the variable winning control is performed at least once to change the variable winning device 65 from a closed state to an open state, and then back to the closed state. In this embodiment, the variable winning control is performed once per round of play.

A 4R guaranteed jackpot result is one in which, after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode is set to high probability mode, and the support mode in the regular power device 63a of the second operating port 63 is set to high frequency support mode. In this case, the high probability mode and high frequency support mode continue until the next jackpot occurs (until the next opening and closing execution mode begins). Incidentally, while the opening and closing execution mode is being executed, the lottery mode is set to low probability mode, and the support mode is set to low frequency support mode.

Here, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode are modes in which the drive mode of the normal power device 63a is controlled so that the frequency of winning into the second operating port 63 is relatively high and low when compared in a situation in which game balls are continuously launched into the game area PE in the same manner. Specifically, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the normal power lottery using the normal power lottery random number counter C3 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode, and the number of times the normal power device 63a opens when the normal power lottery is won is also greater in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode, and the time for one opening is also longer in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode.

Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the second actuation port 63 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the first actuation port 62 is higher than in the second actuation port 63, but in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the second actuation port 63 is higher than in the first actuation port 62. And, when a winning entry into the second actuation port 63 occurs, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play without losing too many balls.

The configuration for realizing the high-frequency support mode is not limited to the above, and may be, for example, a configuration in which the probability of winning the normal drawing is the same in both modes, and the number of times the normal electric device 63a is opened or the duration of one opening is given preferential treatment compared to the low-frequency support mode. In short, it is sufficient that the frequency of winning the second operating port 63 per unit time is higher than in the low-frequency support mode, and the high-frequency support mode and low-frequency support mode can be set by making any one or any combination of the conditions of the normal drawing, the number of times it is opened, and the duration of opening different.

The 4R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which, after the open/close execution mode ends, the lottery mode is set to the low probability mode, and the support mode in the normal power device 63a of the second operating port 63 is set to the high frequency support mode. In this case, the high frequency support mode continues until the number of play times after the open/close execution mode reaches a predetermined upper limit (e.g., 100 times). When the upper limit is reached, the high frequency support mode ends, and the support mode switches to the low frequency support mode while the lottery mode remains in the low probability mode. In other words, the game transitions to a game state (normal game state) in which the lottery mode is set to the low probability mode and the support mode is set to the low frequency support mode.

In this embodiment, the jackpot type counter C2's "0" to "64" corresponds to a 4R special jackpot result, and "65" to "99" corresponds to a 4R normal jackpot result. In other words, the probability of being assigned to a 4R special jackpot result is set to 65%, and the probability of being assigned to a 4R normal jackpot result is set to 35%.

As shown in FIG. 13(b), in the jackpot type table for the second special chart, a 10R guaranteed jackpot result and a 4R normal jackpot result are set as selectable jackpot types. A 10R guaranteed jackpot result results in 10 rounds of play being executed. A 10R guaranteed jackpot result is a jackpot result in which, after the open/close execution mode ends, the lottery mode is set to high probability mode, and the support mode in the normal power device 63a of the second operating port 63 is set to high frequency support mode. In this case, the high probability mode and high frequency support mode will continue until the next jackpot occurs.

The 4R normal jackpot result set in the jackpot type table for the second special design is the same as the 4R normal jackpot result set in the jackpot type for the first special design. In other words, if a 4R normal jackpot result occurs as a result of winning the second operating port 63, the lottery mode is set to the low probability mode, and the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode, and this state continues until the number of play times after the open/close execution mode reaches a predetermined upper limit (e.g. 100 times).

In this embodiment, the jackpot type counter C2's "0" to "64" corresponds to a 10R special jackpot result, and "65" to "99" corresponds to a 4R normal jackpot result. In other words, the probability of being assigned to a 10R special jackpot result is set to 65%, and the probability of being assigned to a 4R normal jackpot result is set to 35%.

In this way, the probability of being assigned to a special jackpot result is the same whether the type table of the first special chart display section or the type table of the second special chart display section is used. However, when a special jackpot result is selected, the type table of the second special chart display section is set to result in a 16R jackpot result, whereas the type table of the first special chart display section is set to result in a 4R jackpot result. In other words, when a special jackpot result is based on winning the second operating port 63, the number of rounds in the open/close execution mode is greater than when a special jackpot result is based on winning the first operating port 62, and it is possible to expect a larger payout of game balls. In other words, a game in which a game ball is won in the second operating port 63 is more advantageous for the player than a game in which a game ball is won in the first operating port 62.

As described above, there is a clear difference in the advantages offered to the player between the first actuation port 62 and the second actuation port 63. Therefore, the player will play in the hope that, of the first actuation port 62 and the second actuation port 63, a win will occur in the second actuation port 63, and as a result, the player will pay more attention to the high frequency support mode, in which the frequency of wins in the second actuation port 63 increases.

The jackpot type counter C2 is also used to determine the stop result of the image displayed on each special chart display unit AS, BS when the result of the winning/losing lottery based on the winning/losing entry into the operating port 62, 63 is a jackpot. The stop result is determined by referring to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of the ROM 313. In the stop result table, multiple data of the stop result (the jackpot image displayed on each special chart display unit AS, BS) in the case of a jackpot are set in correspondence with the value of the jackpot type counter C2, and when determining the stop result, the data of the multiple stop results corresponding to the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is read out. Here, the same jackpot type counter C2 is used to determine the stop result and the jackpot type, so the jackpot image displayed on each special chart display unit AS, BS corresponds to the jackpot type determined at the time of the jackpot.

The variation type counter CS is configured to increment by 1 within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (i.e., 99). The variation type counter CS is used by the MPU 312 to determine the variation display time in the first special chart display section AS and the second special chart display section BS of the special chart display section 43.

The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time the normal processing described below is executed, and is repeatedly updated during the remaining time in the normal processing. The fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of the RAM 314 when the game ball enters the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63. More specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the reserved area Ra for the first special symbol of the RAM 314 when the game ball enters the first actuation port 62, and is stored in the reserved area Rb for the second special symbol of the RAM 314 when the game ball enters the second actuation port 63.

The allocation destination of the variable display time for the variable type counter CS is stored as a variable display time table in the variable display time table storage area 313c of the ROM 313. Here, the variable display time table will be explained with reference to FIG. 14.

As the variable display time table, a variable display time table for a jackpot (Fig. 14(a)) and a variable display time table for a loss (Fig. 14(b)) are set. If the result of the winning/losing lottery based on winning the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63 is a jackpot, the variable display time table for a jackpot is referenced, and if the result of the winning/losing lottery based on winning the actuation ports 62, 63 is a loss, the variable display time table for a loss is referenced.

In each variation display time table, the numerical range of the variation type counter CS is set in correspondence with information on the variation pattern. Note that in FIG. 14, to facilitate understanding, information on the variation display time is listed along with the variation pattern, but the information on the variation display time is stored in ROM 313 separately from the variation display time table as time information corresponding to each variation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 14(a), the jackpot variation display time table has variation pattern 1A (15 sec), variation pattern 2A (60 sec), variation pattern 3A (60 sec), variation pattern 4A (120 sec), and variation pattern 5A (120 sec) set as selectable variation patterns. When a variation pattern is selected using the variation type counter CS, the image variation display is performed in the first special chart display section AS or the second special chart display section BS at the variation display time corresponding to the selected variation pattern.

When a variation pattern is selected, information indicating that variation pattern is sent to the performance control device 143 as a variation start command. The performance control device 143 determines the variation pattern selected by the main control device 162 based on the received variation start command. Then, the display control device 350 is controlled so that the variation display of each of the above-mentioned pattern rows Z1 to Z3 is performed at the variation display time corresponding to the determined variation pattern. As a result, each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 is displayed in a variable manner on the pattern display device 75 in synchronization with the variable display of the pattern on the first special pattern display unit AS or the second special pattern display unit BS.

Furthermore, each variation pattern also corresponds to a game round presentation such as a reach presentation performed by the pattern display device 75. Specifically, variation pattern 1A corresponds to a normal reach winning presentation, variation pattern 2A corresponds to an SP reach (super reach) A winning presentation, variation pattern 3A corresponds to an SP reach B winning presentation, variation pattern 4A corresponds to an SPSP reach A winning presentation, and variation pattern 5A corresponds to an SPSP reach B winning presentation. In other words, when the presentation control device 143 determines a variation pattern from the received variation start command, it controls the display control device 350 so that a game round presentation corresponding to that variation pattern is performed by the pattern display device 75.

In each of the above-mentioned reach-winning effects, after a reach display is performed, each of the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a jackpot symbol combination. Here, the reach display (reach state) refers to a display state that makes the player think that the variable display state is likely to result in a special display result (jackpot result) in a gaming machine that has a symbol display device 75 capable of performing a variable display (or a variably displayed) of symbols (pictures), and in which the game state becomes a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is advantageous to the player when the stopped display result after the variable display becomes a special display result (jackpot result) in the stage between the start of the variable display (or variably displayed) of the symbols (pictures) in the symbol display device 75 and the derived display of the stopped display result.

In other words, it is a display state in which some of the multiple symbol rows displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 are stopped to display a combination of symbols that may result in a jackpot symbol combination corresponding to the occurrence of a jackpot state, and in this state, the remaining symbol rows are displayed with varying symbols. More specifically, as a preliminary step before the variable symbol display ends, when the symbols of the final symbol row are displayed with varying symbols, the symbols of the symbol rows other than the final symbol row are displayed on the active line in the display screen G in a manner that constitutes a jackpot symbol combination, thereby forming a reach line.

In the normal reach hit performance, the symbols are displayed in a stopped state in a jackpot symbol combination after the reach display. The SP reach performance is a higher level reach performance than the normal reach performance, in which a predetermined performance in which a character or the like appears is performed after the reach line is formed, and after the predetermined performance, symbols are displayed in a stopped state in a jackpot symbol combination. Note that the content of the above-mentioned predetermined performance after the reach line is formed differs between the SP reach A performance and the SP reach B performance. The SPSP reach performance is a higher level reach performance than the SP reach performance, in which symbols are displayed in a stopped state in a jackpot symbol combination after a development performance that develops from the SP reach performance is performed. The SPSP reach A performance develops from the SP reach A performance, and the SPSP reach B performance develops from the reach B performance.

Note that the items in the "Notes (Performance Mode)" column in Figure 14(a) are added for convenience and are not set in the variable display time table.

As shown in FIG. 14(b), the variable display time table for losing has variable pattern 1H, variable pattern 2H (15 sec), variable pattern 3H (60 sec), variable pattern 4H (60 sec), variable pattern 5A (120 sec), and variable pattern 6H (120 sec) set as selectable variable patterns. The variable display time is set corresponding to each variable pattern, as in the variable display time table for big wins, but the variable display time corresponding to variable pattern 1H is configured to vary depending on the number of reserved first or second special patterns at that time. Specifically, when variable pattern 1H is selected in a situation where the number of reserved patterns is two or less, the variable display time is 8 sec, and when variable pattern 1H is selected in a situation where the number of reserved patterns is three or more, the variable display time is configured to be 4 sec, which is shorter than 8 sec.

Fluctuation pattern 1H corresponds to a complete miss on the symbol display device 75, fluctuation pattern 2H corresponds to a normal reach miss, fluctuation pattern 3H corresponds to an SP reach A miss, fluctuation pattern 4H corresponds to an SP reach B miss, fluctuation pattern 5H corresponds to an SPSP reach A miss, and fluctuation pattern 6H corresponds to an SPSP reach B miss.

In the complete miss effect, the symbols are displayed in a miss pattern combination without a reach display. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned reach miss effects, after the reach display, each symbol in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 is displayed in a reach miss pattern combination (a state in which the symbols in the final stop row displayed on the reach line are symbols other than those that form a jackpot in combination with the reach symbols). In addition, the SP reach A miss effect corresponds to the SP reach A hit effect, and after a predetermined effect of the same type as the SP reach A hit effect is performed, the symbols are displayed in a reach miss pattern combination. In addition, the SP reach B miss effect, the SPSP reach A miss effect, and the SPSP reach B miss effect correspond to the SP reach B hit effect, the SPSP reach A hit effect, and the SPSP reach B hit effect, respectively.

In the fluctuation display time table for big wins, "0" of the fluctuation type counter CS corresponds to fluctuation pattern 1A, "1" to "12" correspond to fluctuation pattern 2A, "13" to "28" correspond to fluctuation pattern 3A, "29" to "63" correspond to fluctuation pattern 4A, and "64" to "99" correspond to fluctuation pattern 5A. On the other hand, in the fluctuation display time table for losses, "0" to "59" of the fluctuation type counter CS corresponds to fluctuation pattern 1H, "60" to "79" correspond to fluctuation pattern 2H, "80" to "89" correspond to fluctuation pattern 3H, "90" to "96" correspond to fluctuation pattern 4H, "97" to "98" correspond to fluctuation pattern 5H, and "99" corresponds to fluctuation pattern 6H.

If the result of the win/lose lottery based on the entry into the actuation ports 62, 63 is a jackpot result, variation pattern 5A corresponding to the SPSP reach B presentation is most likely to be selected, and if the result of the win/lose lottery is a loss result, variation pattern 6H corresponding to the SPSP reach B presentation is least likely to be selected. In other words, the SPSP reach B presentation is the reach presentation that is most likely to be executed in the case of a jackpot and least likely to be executed in the case of a loss, so it functions as the highest level reach presentation with the highest expectation of a jackpot.

For fluctuation patterns other than fluctuation pattern 5A and fluctuation pattern 6H, the higher the reach effect, the more likely it is to be selected in the event of a jackpot and the less likely it is to be selected in the event of a miss. In other words, the expectation of a jackpot increases in the following order: normal reach effect < SP reach A effect < SP reach B effect < SPSP reach A effect.

The normal map random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 250, for example, and to return to 0 after it reaches a maximum value (i.e., 250). The normal map random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the normal map reserve area 314c of the RAM 314 when the game ball enters the through gate 64. Then, at a specified timing, a lottery is held to determine whether or not the normal power device 63a should be controlled to an open state based on the value of the stored normal map random number counter C3. For example, if C4 = 0 to 190, the normal power device 63a is controlled to an open state, and if C4 = 191 to 250, the normal power device 63a is not controlled to an open state.

<Various processes executed by the main control device 162>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 312 of the main control device 162 will be described. The processes of the MPU 312 are roughly divided into main process that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt process and normal process that are executed to progress the game, and NMI interrupt process that is started by input of a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. For the sake of convenience, the NMI interrupt process and timer interrupt process will be described first, and then the main process and normal process will be described.

<NMI interrupt processing>
The NMI interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 15. This process is executed when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. That is, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal is output from the power outage monitoring unit 315 of the power supply and launch control device 191 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 312, and the MPU 312 suspends the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process.

In the NMI interrupt process, first in step Sa11, the data in the usage registers provided in MPU 312 is saved to the backup area of RAM 314. In step Sa12, a power outage flag (information on the occurrence of a power outage) is set in the backup area. In step Sa13, the data saved in the backup area is restored to the usage registers of MPU 312, and then the NMI interrupt process is terminated. Note that if the power outage flag can be set without destroying the data in the usage registers of MPU 312, the processes of steps Sa11 and Sa13 can be omitted.

After the NMI interrupt process is executed, the power outage process is executed by checking that the power outage flag is set in the normal process described below. This process is explained later.

<Timer interrupt processing>
The timer interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 16. This process is started by the MPU 312 periodically (for example, every 2 msec).

In step Sa101, the reading process of the various winning sensors is executed. That is, the state of the various winning sensors connected to the main control device 162 is read, and the state of the winning sensor (detection information from the winning sensor) is judged and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. For example, if it is judged that a winning has occurred in the first operating port 62, a winning detection flag for the first special symbol is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314, and if it is judged that a winning has occurred in the second operating port 63, a winning detection flag for the second special symbol is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. Also, if it is judged that the game ball has passed through the through gate 64, a winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314.

In step Sa102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 314.

In step Sa103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the regular jackpot random number counter C3 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the regular jackpot random number counter C3 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values, they are each cleared to 0. The updated values of each counter C1 to C3 are then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 314.

In step Sa104, a winning process for through is executed in response to winning at the through gate 64. In the winning process for through, it is determined whether or not a winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314, and if the flag is stored, the value of the normal winning random number counter C3 updated in step Sa103 is stored in the normal map holding area 314c, provided that the number of reserved role pieces stored in the normal map holding area 314c is less than four. In addition, if a winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 314e, the winning detection flag is erased and the winning process for the through gate is terminated.

After executing the winning process for the through gate in step Sa104, proceed to step Sa105, execute the winning process for the actuation port associated with winning at actuation ports 62 and 63, and end this timer interrupt process.

<Winning process for the operating port>
The winning process for the operating port in step Sa105 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step Sa201, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the first operating port 62 (initial entry) based on the detection state of the first operating port entry sensor 62a. If it is determined that a game ball has entered the first operating port 62, in step Sa202, a prize ball command is set in the payout control device 181 to pay out three game balls.

In step Sa203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that a gaming ball has entered the first operating port 62. In step Sa204, the value stored in the reserved number storage area of the first special symbol reserved area Ra is read, and the start reserved memory number RaN reserved and stored in the first special symbol reserved area Ra is set (hereinafter also referred to as the first start reserved memory number RaN). After that, in step Sa205, an information acquisition process is performed to store the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS, and this winning process is terminated.

If the result of step Sa201 is negative (if no winning has occurred in the first actuation port 62), the process proceeds to step Sa206, where it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the second actuation port 63 (initial winning) based on the detection state of the second actuation port winning sensor 63c. If it is determined that the game ball has won the second actuation port 63, a winning ball command is set in the payout control device 181 in step Sa207 to pay out one game ball.

In step Sa208, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the gaming ball has entered the second actuation port 63. In step Sa209, the value stored in the reserved number memory area of the second special symbol reserved area Rb is read, and the start reserved memory number RbN reserved and stored in the second special symbol reserved area Rb is set (hereinafter also referred to as the second start reserved memory number RbN). After that, in step Sa205, information acquisition process is performed, and this winning process is terminated.

Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sa206 (no winning has occurred in the second operating port 63), this winning process ends.

The prize ball command set in step Sa202 or step Sa207 is sent to the payout control device 181 by the external output process of the normal process described below.

Here, the information acquisition process of step Sa205 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 18.

First, in step Sa301, it is determined whether the start pending memory count N (RaN or RbN) set in step Sa204 or step Sa209 described above is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). If the start pending memory count N is the upper limit, this information acquisition process is terminated, and if it is less than the upper limit, in step Sa302, the start pending memory count N of the corresponding special chart pending areas Ra, Rb is incremented by 1. In step Sa303, the value stored in the total pending number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the common pending number CRN) is incremented by 1.

In step Sa304, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS are stored in the first free memory area of the reserved area for the corresponding special chart display section, that is, the memory area corresponding to the reserved memory number incremented by 1 in step Sa302.

In other words, when the start pending memory number RaN for the first special symbol is set, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS are stored in the first free memory area of the first special symbol holding area Ra, that is, the holding area Ra corresponding to the start pending memory number RaN for the first special symbol incremented by 1 in step Sa302 above.

In addition, when the start pending memory number RbN for the second special chart is set, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS are stored in the first free memory area of the reserve area Rb for the second special chart, that is, the reserve area Rb corresponding to the start pending memory number RbN for the second special chart incremented by 1 in step Sa302 above.

In step Sa305, a hold read-ahead process is executed to execute the hold notice performance described below. Details of the hold read-ahead process are described later. After step Sa305 is executed, this information acquisition process is terminated.

<Main processing>
The main processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 19. The main processing is executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while an external power source is being supplied, or when an external power source is supplied while the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is in the on state).

First, in step Sa2001, the initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, a wait process is executed for, for example, about one second to wait for the sub-side control device (such as the dispensing control device 181) to become operable. In the following step Sa2002, access to the RAM 314 is permitted.

In step Sa2003, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch of the power supply and launch control device 191 is turned on, and in the following step Sa2004, it is determined whether a power outage flag is stored in the backup area of RAM 314. In step Sa2005, a RAM judgment value is calculated, and in step Sa2006, it is determined whether the RAM judgment value is normal. Specifically, the RAM judgment value calculated in step Sa2005 is compared with the RAM judgment value saved when the power outage occurred, and it is determined whether the two match. If the two match, the RAM judgment value is determined to be normal, and the data stored and held in RAM 314 is recognized as valid. Conversely, if the two do not match, the RAM judgment value is determined to be abnormal, and the data stored and held in RAM 314 is recognized as invalid. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the working area address of RAM 314. It is also possible to determine the validity of the stored and held data by whether the keyword written in a specified area of RAM 314 is saved correctly.

If the RAM judgment value is normal, the process proceeds to step Sa2007, where the value of the stack pointer stored in the backup area is written to the stack pointer of MPU 312, and the state of the stack is restored to the state before the power was cut off. In step Sa2008, a power restoration command is output to restore the sub-side control device (such as the payout control device 181) to the gaming state before the power was cut off. In step Sa2009, the power outage flag stored in the backup area is erased. After that, in step Sa2010, interrupt permission is set, and the process proceeds to normal processing, which will be described later.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sa2003 (if the RAM erase switch is pressed) or a negative judgment is made in step Sa2006 (if the RAM judgment value is not normal), the process proceeds to step Sa2011, where an initialization command is output to initialize the sub-control device (such as the dispensing control device 181). In step Sa2012, the used area of RAM 314 is cleared to 0, and in step Sa2013, the initialization process of RAM 314 is executed. Thereafter, in step Sa2010, interrupt permission is set, and the process proceeds to normal processing, which will be described later.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 20. Normal processing is processing that starts after main processing that is started when the power is turned on is executed, and in normal processing, main processing of the game is executed. In summary, the processing of steps Sa401 to Sa408 is executed as periodic processing with a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps Sa409 and Sa410 is executed in the remaining time.

In normal processing, first, external signal output processing is executed in step Sa401. In the external signal output processing in step Sa401, output data such as the timer interrupt processing or commands set in the previous normal processing is sent to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is sent to the payout control device 181. In addition, if a performance command such as a fluctuation start command, type command, or fluctuation end command is set, it is sent to the performance control device 143.

In step Sa402, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 314.

In step Sa403, a game round control process is executed to control the game in each game round. This game round control process performs jackpot determination, display control of the special chart display unit 43, etc.

In step Sa404, a game state transition process is executed. This game state transition process transitions the game state to an open/close execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like. Details of the game number control process in step Sa403 and the game state transition process in step Sa404 will be described later.

In step Sa405, an electric role support process is executed to drive and control the normal power role 63a provided in the second operating port 63. In this electric role support process, a normal play lottery is executed to determine whether the normal play lottery 63a should be opened or not using numerical information acquired from the normal play lottery random number counter C3 stored in the normal play lottery reserve area 314c of the RAM 314, and if a win is determined, the opening and closing process of the normal play lottery 63a is executed. In addition, the display control of the normal play lottery display unit 44 is executed to inform the result of the normal play lottery.

As already explained, the support provided by the normal power device 63a is set to a low-frequency support mode or a high-frequency support mode, and a transition to one of the support modes is made by the game state transition process described below. After this process, if the high-frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314, the high-frequency support mode is selected, and if the flag is not set, the low-frequency support mode is selected.

In the electric role support process, whether or not the high frequency support mode is selected is determined by determining whether or not the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. Then, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the normal electric role 63a is opened when the electric role open state is selected is set to be greater than in the low frequency support mode, and the opening time for each opening is set to be longer than in the low frequency support mode. Also, in the high frequency support mode, when the electric role open state is selected and the open state of the normal electric role 63a occurs multiple times, the closing time from the end of one opening state to the start of the next opening state is set to be shorter than the opening time for each opening.

In step Sa406, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 110 is excited once every predetermined period (e.g., 0.6 sec), provided that a launch permission signal is input from the power supply and launch control device 191. This causes the game ball to be launched toward the game area PE.

In step Sa407, it is determined whether a power outage flag is stored in the backup area of RAM 314. The power outage flag is set by the NMI interrupt process (FIG. 15) that is executed when a power outage occurs, and is used by MPU 312 to detect the occurrence of a power outage.

If the power outage flag is not stored (power outage has not occurred), in step Sa408, it is determined whether the timing for executing the next normal process has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current normal process. Then, during the remaining time until the timing for executing the next normal process, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated.

That is, in step Sa409, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is then stored in the corresponding area of RAM314. In addition, in step Sa410, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the corresponding area of RAM314.

Here, the execution time of each process in steps Sa401 to Sa408 changes depending on the game state, so the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (i.e., the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS can also be randomly updated.

If the determination in step Sa407 above is positive (the power outage flag is stored), the process proceeds to step Sa411, where the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited. In step Sa412, the value of the stack pointer of MPU 312 is stored in the backup area of RAM 314, and in step Sa413, the power outage flag is set in the backup area.

In step Sa414, a RAM judgment value is calculated and stored in a backup area. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of RAM 314. In step Sa415, access to RAM 314 is prohibited, and an infinite loop continues until the power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed. Note that even after the power is completely cut off, power for storing and maintaining data in RAM 314 is supplied from the power supply and launch control device 191, so the information stored in RAM 314 before the power was cut off is retained in the same state for a specified period of time (for example, one or two days).

<Game Play Control Processing>
The game play control process in step Sa403 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step Sa501, it is determined whether or not the game is in the open/close execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an open/close execution mode flag is stored (memorized) in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. The open/close execution mode flag is stored when the game state is transitioned to the open/close execution mode in the game state transition process described below, and is erased when the game state transition process ends the open/close execution mode.

If the opening and closing execution mode is in progress, the game round control process is terminated without executing any of the processes from step Sa502 onwards, i.e., the game round start process from step Sa502 to step Sa505, the game round progress process from step Sa506 to step Sa507, or the game round end process from step Sa508 to step Sa509. In other words, if the opening and closing execution mode is in progress, the special game round will not be started regardless of whether or not a winning combination has occurred in the operating ports 62, 63.

In addition, a game round based on a winning/losing lottery triggered by winning through gate 64 (a normal game round) is executed regardless of whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in effect. In other words, while the execution of special game rounds is restricted during the opening/closing execution mode, a normal game round is executed in the same way as when the opening/closing execution mode is not in effect. Therefore, if the result of the normal game round during the opening/closing execution mode is a winning result, the second operating port 63 (normal electric device 63a) is opened.

If the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress, in step Sa502, it is determined whether the special chart display unit 43 is displaying a change. Specifically, it is determined whether either the first special chart display unit AS or the second special chart display unit BS is displaying a change. This determination is made by determining whether a change display in progress flag is stored (stored) in the various flags storage area 314e of the RAM 314. The change display in progress flag is stored when a change display is started for either the first special chart display unit AS or the second special chart display unit BS, and is erased when the change display ends.

If the special chart display unit 43 is not displaying a variable, proceed to step Sa503 and determine whether the common hold number CRN is "0". If the common hold number CRN is "0", this means that the start hold memory numbers RaN and RbN are "0" for both the first actuation port 62 and the second actuation port 63. Therefore, the game play control process ends as is.

If the common reserved number CRN is not "0", step Sa504 executes a data setting process to set the data stored in the first special chart reserved area Ra or the second special chart reserved area Rb for variable display, and then step Sa505 executes a variable start process to start the variable display in the special chart display unit 43 and the variable display in the pattern display device 75, and then ends this game round control process.

The data setting process in step Sa504 and the change start process in step Sa505 are now described in detail.

First, the data setting process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 22.

First, in step Sa601, it is determined whether the second start pending memory count RbN reserved in the second special design reserve area Rb is "0". If the second start pending memory count RbN is "0", data setting processing for the first special design (first actuation port 62) is executed in steps Sa602 to Sa608, and if the second start pending memory count RbN is not "0", data setting processing for the second special design (second actuation port 63) is executed in steps Sa609 to Sa615.

As already explained, when the common reserved number CRN is 1 or more, the data setting process is performed. The situation in which the data setting process is performed means that at least one of the first start reserved memory number RaN and the second start reserved memory number RbN is 1 or more. In this case, the data setting process is configured to first determine whether the second start reserved memory number RbN is "0" or not, and to execute the process related to the reserved information for the first special symbol on the condition that the second start reserved memory number RbN is "0", that is, there is no reserved information for the second special symbol. Therefore, when reserved information is stored in both the first special symbol reserved area Ra and the second special symbol reserved area Rb, the reserved information for the second special symbol (second operating port 63) stored in the second special symbol reserved area Rb is processed preferentially.

In the data setting process for the first special chart, first in step Sa602, the first start reserved memory number RaN in the reserved area Ra for the first special chart is decremented by 1. In step Sa603, the common reserved number CRN is decremented by 1. In step Sa604, the data stored in the first area of the reserved area Ra for the first special chart is moved to the execution area AE.

In step Sa605, a process is executed to shift the data (reserved information such as the jackpot random number counter C1) stored in the memory area of the reserved area Ra for the first special chart. In this process, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in the second to fourth areas is sequentially moved to the lower areas.

In step Sa606, it is determined whether or not a second special pattern flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. The second special pattern flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that there is pending information for the second operating port 63. If the second special pattern flag is stored, the second special pattern flag is erased in step Sa607.

After execution of step Sa607 or if a negative judgment is made in step Sa606 (if the second special chart flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step Sa608, where a shift command (shift occurrence information) is set to notify the performance control device 143 that a shift has been made in the reserved area data. In this case, a shift command is selected from the command information storage area 313e of the ROM 313, the shift command including information that the reserved area that is the subject of this data shift corresponds to the first special chart reserved area Ra, i.e., information that the reserved area corresponds to the first operating port 62, and the selected shift command is set as the command to be sent to the performance control device 143. After that, this data setting process is terminated.

The shift command set in step Sa608 is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sa401 in normal processing (Figure 20). The performance control device 143 executes processing to change the display in the first reserved display area Ga of the pattern display device 75 in response to the reduction in the number of reserved items based on the received shift command.

In the data setting process for the second special chart, first in step Sa609, the second start reserved memory number RbN in the reserved area Rb for the second special chart is decremented by 1. In step Sa610, the common reserved number CRN is decremented by 1. In step Sa611, the data stored in the first area of the reserved area Rb for the second special chart is moved to the execution area AE.

In step Sa612, a process is executed to shift the data (reserved information such as the jackpot random number counter C1) stored in the memory area of the reserved area Rb for the second special symbol. In step Sa613, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e. If the second special symbol flag is not stored, the second special symbol flag is set in step Sa614.

After execution of step Sa614 or if a positive judgment is made in step Sa613 (if the second special chart flag is stored), the process proceeds to step Sa615, where a shift command (shift occurrence information) is set, which is information for making the performance control device 143, which is the sub-side control device, recognize that a shift of data in the reserved area has occurred. In this case, a shift command is selected from the command information storage area 313e of the ROM 313, which includes information that the reserved area that is the subject of this data shift corresponds to the second special chart reserved area Rb, i.e., information that it corresponds to the second operating port 63, and the selected shift command is set as the command to be sent to the performance control device 143. After that, this data setting process is terminated.

The shift command set in step Sa613 is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sa401 in normal processing (Figure 20). The performance control device 143 executes processing to change the display in the second reserved display area Gb of the pattern display device 75 in response to the reduction in the number of reserved items based on the received shift command.

Next, the fluctuation start process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 23.

First, in step Sa701, it is determined whether the win/lose lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether a high probability mode flag is stored (memorized) in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. The high probability mode flag is used by the MPU 312 to know that the mode is the high probability mode, and is set when transitioning to the high probability mode.

If the mode is not the high probability mode, the win/loss determination is made in step Sa702 by referring to the win/loss table for the low probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the low probability mode (e.g., "7"). On the other hand, if the mode is the high probability mode, the win/loss determination is made in step Sa703 by referring to the win/loss table for the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the high probability mode (e.g., "7", "17", "27", "37", "47").

After execution of step Sa702 or step Sa703, in step Sa704, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/loss determination in step Sa702 or step Sa703 is a jackpot win. If it is a jackpot win, in step Sa705, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e. If the second special symbol flag is not stored, in step Sa706, a lottery is performed for the jackpot type by referring to the type table for the first special symbol display unit (FIG. 13(a)). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of the 4R special jackpot result or the numerical range of the 4R normal jackpot result.

On the other hand, if the second special symbol flag is stored, in step Sa707, the type table for the second special symbol (FIG. 13(b)) is referenced to draw the jackpot type. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is within the numerical range of the 10R special jackpot result or the numerical range of the 4R normal jackpot result.

After execution of step Sa706 or step Sa707, in step Sa708, a type flag indicating the type of jackpot selected by the lottery in step Sa706 or step Sa707 is stored in the various flag storage area 314e. For example, if the type of jackpot selected by the lottery is a 10R special jackpot, a 10R special jackpot flag is stored.

In step Sa709, the stop result for the jackpot is set by referring to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of the ROM 313. Specifically, the stop result corresponding to the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is read from the stop result table and set as the stop result for the current game round.

If the result of step Sa704 is negative (if a jackpot has not occurred), the process proceeds to step Sa710, where a stop result for a miss is set. In this embodiment, only one type of stop result for a miss is provided, and that stop result is set in step Sa710.

After execution of step Sa709 or step Sa710, in step Sa711, a variable display time setting process is executed to set the variable display time for the current game round in the first special chart display unit AS or the second special chart display unit BS.

Here, the process for setting the variable display time will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 24.

First, in step Sa801, it is determined whether the result of the hit/miss judgment for the current game round is a jackpot or not. If it is a jackpot, the process proceeds to step Sa802, where a variable display time table for a jackpot (FIG. 14(a)) is obtained as a table for drawing the variable display time (variation pattern). On the other hand, if it is not a jackpot but a miss, the process proceeds to step Sa803, where a variable display time table for a miss (FIG. 14(b)) is obtained.

After execution of step Sa802 or step Sa803, in step Sa804, a lottery process for the variable display time (variation pattern) is executed using the variable display time table acquired in step Sa802 or step Sa803. Specifically, one variation pattern corresponding to the variation type counter CS stored in the execution area AE is identified from the group of variation patterns set in the variable display time table.

In step Sa805, the variable display time corresponding to the variable pattern identified in step Sa804 is set as the variable display time for the current game round. In this step, the value of the variable display time corresponding to the identified variable pattern is set in the variable display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 314d of RAM 314. For example, if the variable display time is 15 sec, 7500 is set in the variable display time counter area as the corresponding value. This set value is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16) is started. After step Sa805 is executed, the variable display time setting process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 23), after execution of step Sa711, in step Sa712, a fluctuation start command and a type command are set. The fluctuation start command includes information on the fluctuation pattern. As the fluctuation pattern is set separately for a jackpot and a miss (FIG. 14), the performance control device 143 can determine the result of the hit/miss judgment performed by the main control device 162 by analyzing the fluctuation pattern from the fluctuation start command. In other words, the fluctuation start command includes not only information on the fluctuation display time, but also information on the result of the hit/miss judgment. Furthermore, the type command includes information on the type of jackpot. Note that the type command is set only when the result of the hit/miss judgment is a jackpot.

The variation start command and type command set in step Sa712 are sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sa401 in normal processing (Figure 20). The performance control device 143 determines the content of the performance for that game round based on the received variation start command and type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed. The content of this performance includes the variable display mode of the pattern on the pattern display device 75, and this determined variable display mode of the pattern is output from the performance control device 143 to the display control device 350 as a display content command. The display control device 350 controls the display of the pattern display device 75 so that the variable display of the pattern corresponding to each game round is performed based on the display content command received from the performance control device 143.

In step Sa713, the display of the special symbol display section 43 starts to change. At that time, the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314 is referenced. If the second special symbol flag is stored, the current game round corresponds to the second special symbol, and the image in the second special symbol display section BS is displayed in a changing manner. On the other hand, if the second special symbol flag is not stored, the current game round corresponds to the first special symbol, and the image in the first special symbol display section AS is displayed in a changing manner. After execution of step Sa713, this change start process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the game round control process (FIG. 21), if a positive judgment is made in step Sa502 (if the special chart display unit 43 is displaying a change), the process proceeds to step Sa506, where it is determined whether the change display time for the current game round has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the change display time counter area provided in the various counter areas of RAM 314 has become "0".

If the variable display time has not elapsed, variable display processing is executed in step Sa507. In the variable display processing, the display of the special chart display section related to the current game round is controlled (each display segment is controlled to emit light) so that each display segment in the special chart display section related to the current game round is turned on and off in a predetermined order. After execution of step Sa507, this game round control processing is terminated.

If the variable display time has elapsed, the variable end process is executed in step Sa508. In the variable end process, each special image display unit AS, BS is controlled so that the variable displayed image is stopped and displayed according to the stop result set in step Sa709 or step Sa710.

In step Sa509, a variation end command is set, and then this game round control process is terminated. The variation end command set in step Sa509 is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sa401 in the normal process (Figure 20). The performance control device 143 sends the received variation end command to the display control device 350 while maintaining its information form. By receiving the variation end command, the display control device 350 displays the final stop pattern combination for that game round as a confirmed display (final stop display).

<Game Status Transition Processing>
The game state transition process of step Sa404 (FIG. 20) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step Sa901, it is determined whether or not the game is in the opening/closing execution mode. If the game is not in the opening/closing execution mode, the game proceeds to step Sa902, where it is determined whether or not the timing has come when the variable display in each special chart display section AS, BS has ended (the final display has ended). If it is not the timing for the variable display to end, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is the timing for the variable display to end, in step Sa903, it is determined whether the game result of the current game round corresponds to a transition to the open/close execution mode, i.e., whether the win/loss determination result is a jackpot. In this step, the jackpot determination is made by referring to whether a type flag (step Sa708 in FIG. 23) is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. If the game result of the current game round does not correspond to a transition to the open/close execution mode, this game state transition process is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sa903 (if the game result of the current game round corresponds to a transition to the open/close execution mode), the process proceeds to step Sa904, where the open/close execution mode start process is executed. In this start process, the open/close execution mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e. Also, an opening period is set for waiting for the start of the first round while keeping the variable winning device 65 in a closed state. Furthermore, if a high probability mode flag or high frequency support flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e, a process is executed to erase these flags.

In step Sa905, a process for starting the round display is executed to notify the number of rounds in the open/close execution mode. In this step, the type of the current jackpot is identified based on the type flag stored in the various flag storage area 314e, and the round display unit is controlled so that the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. Note that the display of the number of rounds in the round display unit continues until the open/close execution mode ends.

In step Sa906, it is determined whether the current jackpot type is a 10R variable probability jackpot result. If it is not a 10R variable probability jackpot result, that is, if it is either a 4R variable probability jackpot result or a 4R normal jackpot result, in step Sa907, the round counter area RC provided in the various counter areas 314d of RAM 314 is set to "4". On the other hand, if the current jackpot type is a 10R variable probability jackpot result, in step Sa908, the round counter area RC is set to "10".

After execution of step Sa907 or step Sa908, in step Sa909, an opening command is set to notify the performance control device 143 of the start of the opening and the opening period. This set opening command is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sa401 in the normal processing (Figure 20).

In step Sa910, the external signal setting process is executed, and then the game state transition process is terminated. In the external signal setting process, the output terminal for the jackpot signal provided in the external output terminal 213 is set to an output state. As a result, if the output terminal for the jackpot signal is connected to a management control device on the gaming hall side, a jackpot signal is output to the management control device, and the management control device can determine that a jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 10.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sa901 above (if the game is in the opening/closing execution mode), the process proceeds to step Sa911, where it is determined whether or not the opening period has elapsed. If the opening period has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated. If the opening period has elapsed, the big prize opening opening/closing process is executed in step Sa912.

Here, the process of opening and closing the big prize opening will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 26.

First, in step Sa1001, it is determined whether the large prize opening 65a is open or not. This determination is made based on the drive state of the drive unit 65d. If the large prize opening 65a is not open, in step Sa1002 it is determined whether the value of the round counter area RC is "0". If the value of the round counter area RC is not "0", that is, if there is a round of play to be executed, in step Sa1003 it is determined whether the value of the timer area T provided in the various counter areas 344b of RAM 314 is "0". This process is to determine whether the waiting period between rounds (round interval period) has elapsed.

If the value of the timer area T is "0", proceed to step Sa1004, and set "15000" to the timer area T as a value corresponding to the upper limit opening time (30 sec) of the variable winning device 65 in one round of play. The value set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16) is started. In step Sa1005, set "10" to the winning counter area PC provided in the various counter areas 344b as a value corresponding to the upper limit number of winnings (10) for the variable winning device 65 in one round of play.

In step Sa1006, the variable prize drive unit 32c is driven to open the large prize opening 65a. In step Sa1007, an opening command is set to notify the performance control device 143 that the opening of the large prize opening 65a (variable prize device 65) has begun, and then the large prize opening opening and closing process is terminated. This set opening command is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sa401 in the normal process (Figure 20).

If the above step Sa1002 makes a positive judgment (if the value of the round counter area RC is 0) or if the above step Sa1003 makes a negative judgment (if the value of the timer area T is not 0), the large prize opening opening process ends.

If the above step Sa1001 judges positive (the large prize opening 65a is open), the process proceeds to step Sa1008, where it is determined whether the value of the timer area T is "0". This process is to determine whether the upper limit opening time of the variable prize device 65 set in step Sa1004 has elapsed.

If the value of the timer area T is not "0", proceed to step Sa1009, and determine whether or not a win has occurred in the large prize opening 65a based on the detection state of the large prize opening winning sensor 65c. If no win has occurred, the large prize opening opening opening process ends. On the other hand, if a win has occurred, decrement the value of the winning counter area PC by 1 in step Sa1010, and then determine whether or not the value of the winning counter area PC is "0" in step Sa1011. If the value of the winning counter area PC is not "0", the large prize opening opening opening process ends.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sa1008 (if the value of the timer area T is 0) or if a positive judgment is made in step Sa1011 (if the value of the prize counter area PC is 0), the process proceeds to step Sa1012, where the drive unit 65d is switched to a non-driven state and the large prize opening 65a is closed. In step Sa1013, the value of the round counter area RC is decremented by 1, and in step Sa1014, it is determined whether the value of the round counter area RC is "0".

If the value in the round counter area RC is not "0", i.e., if there are remaining rounds of play, proceed to step Sa1015 and set the timer area T to "1000" as a value corresponding to the period (2 sec) during which the variable winning device 65 will remain closed and wait for the start of the next round of play.

In step Sa1016, a close command is set to notify the performance control device 143 that the variable winning device 65 has been closed (the round of play has ended), and then the large winning opening opening and closing process is terminated. The set close command is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sa401 in the normal process (Figure 20).

If the above step Sa1014 results in a positive judgment (if the value of the round counter area RC is 0), i.e., if the final round of the open/close execution mode has ended, the process proceeds to step Sa1017, where the ending start process is executed. In this start process, an ending period is set during which the variable winning device 65 remains in the closed state and waits for the start of the next game round (the first game round after the open/close execution mode has ended). In step Sa1018, an ending command is set to notify the performance control device 143 of the start of the ending and the ending period, and then this large winning opening open/close process is terminated. The set ending command is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sa401 in the normal process (FIG. 20).

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition process (FIG. 25), after executing the large prize opening/closing process in step Sa912, it is determined in step Sa913 whether the value of the round counter area RC is "0." If the value of the round counter area RC is not "0," this game state transition process is terminated as is to continue the opening/closing execution mode.

If the value of the round counter area RC is "0", the process proceeds to step Sa914 to determine whether the ending has ended (whether the ending period has elapsed). If the ending has not ended, the game state transition process ends in order to continue the ending. On the other hand, if the ending has ended, the process proceeds to step Sa915 to execute the transition process at the end of the opening and closing execution mode.

Here, we will explain the transition process when the opening and closing execution mode ends, with reference to the flowchart in Figure 27.

First, in step Sa1101, the type flag stored in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314 is referenced to determine whether the current jackpot is a guaranteed jackpot result. If it is a guaranteed jackpot result, in step Sa1102, a high probability mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e, and in step Sa1103, a high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. This transitions to a gaming state in which the win/lose selection mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode (a so-called guaranteed jackpot gaming state with electric support). This gaming state continues until the next jackpot occurs. After step Sa1103 is executed, the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode is completed.

If the result of the negative judgment in step Sa1101 is (if the current jackpot is not a guaranteed jackpot result), that is, if the current jackpot is a normal jackpot result, proceed to step Sa1104 and set the high frequency support flag in the various flag storage area 314e. If the current jackpot is a normal jackpot result, the high probability mode flag is not set, and the game state (so-called time-saving game state) in which the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode is transitioned to. In the following step Sa1105, "100" is set in the game count counter area provided in the various counter areas 344b of RAM 314. This set value is decremented by one each time a special game is played in the time-saving game state, and when the value of the game count counter area becomes "0", the high frequency support flag stored in the various flag storage area 314e is erased. Therefore, the time-saving game state ends after 100 game rounds have been played, and then the game state transitions to a game state (normal game state) in which the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode. After step Sa1105 is executed, the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode is completed.

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition process (FIG. 25), after the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode in step Sa915 is completed, the round display end process is executed in step Sa916. In this process, the round display section in the special chart display section 43 is controlled so that the round display section is turned off.

In step Sa917, the process of ending the open/close execution mode is executed, and then the game state transition process is terminated. In the process of ending the open/close execution mode, the process of erasing the type flag and the open/close execution mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 314e is executed.

<Pending read-ahead processing>
The reserved ball pre-reading process of step Sa305 (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 28. This process is executed when reserved ball information is acquired based on winning the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63, and a lottery is performed to determine the presence or absence of a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and the change pattern for the acquired reserved ball information before the execution of the change start process (FIG. 23) corresponding to the reserved ball information.

First, in step Sa1201, the start reserved memory numbers RaN, RbN stored in each reserved area Ra, Rb of the reserved ball storage area 314b and the common reserved number CRN stored in the total reserved number memory area of the same reserved ball storage area 314b are read, and this information is stored in a register of the MPU 312.

In step Sa1202, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 (random number value for determining whether or not a win has occurred) contained in the reserved information acquired in step Sa304 (FIG. 18) is determined based on the current winning entry into the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63. In step Sa1203, a win/loss determination is made using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 determined in step Sa1202. At this time, if the lottery mode when the reserved information was acquired was the low probability mode, the win/loss table for the low probability mode is referenced, and if the lottery mode when the reserved information was acquired was the high probability mode, the win/loss table for the high probability mode is referenced to make the win/loss determination.

In step Sa1204, it is determined whether the result of the win/loss determination in step Sa1202 is a jackpot win or not. If it is a jackpot win, in step Sa1205, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 (a random number for drawing the jackpot type) included in the pending information acquired based on the current winning at the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63 is obtained.

In step Sa1206, a lottery is performed to determine the type of jackpot using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 obtained in step Sa1205. If the reserved information is based on winning the first actuation port 62, the type table for the first special symbol (FIG. 13(a)) is referenced, and if the reserved information is based on winning the second actuation port 63, the type table for the second special symbol (FIG. 13(b)) is referenced to identify the type of jackpot corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2. Note that the processing in steps Sa1203 to Sa1206 is similar to steps Sa701 to Sa707 in the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 23).

In step Sa1207, jackpot information indicating that a jackpot has occurred and type information indicating the type of jackpot selected in step Sa1206 are stored in a register of MPU312.

After execution of step Sa1207 or if a negative judgment is made in step Sa1204 (if the jackpot has not been won), in step Sa1208, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS included in the pending information acquired based on the current winning of the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63 is obtained. In step Sa1209, a lottery is performed for a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation display time) using the value of the fluctuation type counter CS obtained in step Sa1208. At this time, if the pending information acquired corresponds to a jackpot, the fluctuation display time table for jackpots (FIG. 14(a)) is referenced, and if the pending information acquired corresponds to a loss, the fluctuation display time table for losses (FIG. 14(b)) is referenced to identify the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS. Note that the processing in this step is similar to steps Sa801 to Sa804 in the processing for setting the fluctuation display time.

In step Sa1210, the fluctuation pattern information indicating the fluctuation pattern selected in step Sa1209 is stored in the register of the MPU312. In step Sa1211, the hold command is set as the output target to the performance control device 143, and then the hold pre-read process is terminated. The hold command includes information indicating whether the current hold information corresponds to the first special chart or the second special chart, as well as various information stored in the register (information on the start hold memory numbers RaN and RbN, information on the common hold number CRN, jackpot information, type information, and fluctuation pattern information). As already explained, since the presence or absence of a jackpot can be determined from the fluctuation pattern, the hold command may be set so as not to include jackpot information. The hold command set in step Sa1211 is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sa401 in the normal process (FIG. 20).

<Electrical configuration of the performance control device 143 and the display control device 350>
The electrical configuration of the performance control device 143 and the display control device 350 will be described below with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The performance control board 341 provided in the performance control device 143 is equipped with an MPU 342. The MPU 342 has a ROM 343 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 342, a RAM 344 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 343, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc.

The MPU 342 is provided with an input port and an output port. The main control device 162 is connected to the input side of the MPU 342. From the main control device 162, various commands are received, such as hold display control commands such as a shift command and a hold command, game number control commands such as a fluctuation start command, a type command, and a fluctuation end command, and opening/closing execution mode commands such as an opening command and an ending command.

As already explained, the output side of the MPU 342 is connected to the lamp units 26 to 28 and the speaker unit 29 provided in the front door frame 14, as well as to the display control device 350.

The input side of the MPU 342 is also connected to the performance operation unit 36 provided on the front door frame 14. The performance operation unit 36 is provided with a detection sensor that detects the operation of the performance operation unit 36, and detection information (detection signal) from the detection sensor is input. The MPU 342 determines whether the performance operation unit 36 has been operated based on the detection information, and determines the type of operation that has been performed.

The display control device 350 includes a display control board 351 on which an MPU 372, which is a composite chip of a program ROM 373 and a work RAM 374, a video display processor (VDP) 375, a character ROM 376, and a video RAM 377 are mounted.

The MPU 372 analyzes the commands received from the performance control device 143 or performs a predetermined calculation process based on the received commands to control the VDP 375 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 375).

The program ROM 373 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 372, and also stores and holds JPEG format image data for the background image.

The work RAM 374 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. that are used when the MPU 372 executes various programs. This work data, flags, etc. are stored in various areas of the work RAM 374.

VDP375 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device that serves as a liquid crystal display driver built into pattern display device 75. VDP375 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is made into an IC chip, and its actual form can be described as a microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. VDP375 mediates the reading and writing of data by adjusting the timing of MPU372, video RAM377, etc., and reads image data to be stored in video RAM377 from character ROM376 at a specified timing and displays it on pattern display device 75.

The character ROM 376 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as the designs displayed on the design display device 75. This character ROM 376 holds bitmap format image data of various display designs, a color palette table that is referenced when determining the color to be displayed at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

It is also possible to provide multiple character ROMs 376 and have each character ROM 376 store image data, etc. It is also possible to configure the character ROM 376 to store JPEG format image data for background images stored in the program ROM 373.

Video RAM 377 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 75, and the display content of the pattern display device 75 is changed by rewriting the contents of video RAM 377.

<Various processes executed by the performance control device 143>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 342 of the performance control device 143 will be described.

<Performance setting process>
The effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 30. The effect setting process is a process that is activated by the MPU 342 at a predetermined cycle (for example, every 2 msec).

First, in step Sa1301, it is determined whether or not a pending command has been received from the main control device 162. The pending command received from the main control device 162 is stored in a command storage area 344a provided in the RAM 344 of the performance control device 143. The command storage area 344a is configured as a ring buffer that can store multiple commands individually and can read out commands that have been previously stored. Therefore, even if multiple commands are received at the same time, the processing corresponding to each command can be executed satisfactorily.

When making the judgment in step Sa1301, it is judged whether or not a hold command is stored in the area of the command storage area 344a to be read this time. If a hold command is stored (if a hold command has been received), in step Sa1302, a hold command response process is executed to display a hold image in the hold display section 200 (FIG. 9(b)) of the display screen G. The hold command response process will be described in detail later.

After execution of step Sa1302 or if a negative judgment is made in step Sa1301 (if a hold command has not been received), in step Sa1303, it is judged whether or not a shift command has been received from the main control unit 162. If a shift command has been received, in step Sa1304, a shift command response process is executed to shift the hold image displayed on the hold display unit 200. Details of the shift command response process will be described later.

After execution of step Sa1304 or if a negative judgment is made in step Sa1303 (if a shift command has not been received), in step Sa1305, a special pattern change display process is executed to display changes in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75. Details of the special pattern change display process will be described later.

In step Sa1306, processing for the opening and closing execution mode is executed to perform effects during the opening and closing execution mode. In the opening and closing execution mode processing, in addition to the round effects during the opening and closing execution mode, processing is executed to perform opening effects, ending effects, and winning effects when a win occurs in the variable winning device 65.

In step Sa1307, a process for switching the presentation mode is executed to switch the presentation mode. The details of the process for switching the presentation mode are described later.

In step Sa1308, other processing is performed, and then the performance setting processing is terminated. In other processing, processing is performed to display a demo screen when a start winning does not occur for a predetermined period of time, and to switch to a power saving mode that stops the image display on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 to reduce power consumption, etc.

<Pending command processing>
The command response process in step Sa1302 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step Sa1401, the hold command from the main control unit 162 is analyzed, and the hold information (jackpot information, type information, fluctuation pattern information, etc.) is stored in the hold memory area 344c of the RAM 344.

As shown in FIG. 32, the reserved memory area 344c is provided with a reserved area SRa for a first special symbol and a reserved area SRb for a second special symbol, which correspond to the reserved ball storage area 314b on the main control device 162 side. Each reserved area SRa, SRb has four memory areas, a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area. In addition, the reserved memory area 344c is provided with an execution area SAE, which corresponds to the execution area AE on the main control device 162 side.

In step Sa1401, based on the hold command, it is determined whether the current hold information corresponds to the first or second special chart, and which number of the corresponding special chart the hold information is, and the fluctuation pattern information (and, in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot information and type information) is stored in the corresponding storage area of the hold memory area 344c. For example, if the current hold information is the second hold information corresponding to the first special chart, the fluctuation pattern information etc. is stored in the second storage area of the hold area SRa for the first special chart.

After execution of step Sa1401, in step Sa1402, the value of the reserved number counter provided in various counter area 344b of RAM 344 (start reserved memory number SN) is incremented by 1. Various counter area 344b is provided with a reserved number counter for the first special design and a reserved number counter for the second special design, and in step Sa1402, the start reserved memory number SN of the corresponding side is updated.

In step Sa1403, a setting process for the hold notice is executed to execute the hold notice performance. Here, the hold notice performance is explained with reference to FIG. 33.

In this embodiment, a hold preview effect is performed to notify or suggest the likelihood of a jackpot occurring in the game round to which the hold image corresponds, depending on the display mode of the hold image displayed in the hold display section 200 of the display screen G. The display mode of the hold image is set to a normal display mode when the hold preview effect is not performed, and a specific display mode when the hold preview effect is performed, and furthermore, multiple display modes are set for the specific display mode.

In this embodiment, the display color (hue) of the pending image indicates the degree of expectation. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33(a), a normal display mode HMa in which the main display color is a normal color (e.g., white) is set as the normal display mode, and four types of specific display modes are set: a blue display mode HMb in which the main display color is blue, a green display mode HMc in which the main display color is green, a red display mode HMd in which the main display color is red, and a rainbow display mode HMe in which the main display color is rainbow. Note that in FIG. 33(a), different hatching is used to correspond to the different display colors.

Among the specific display modes, the blue display mode HMb has the lowest probability of a jackpot, followed by the green display mode HMc < the red display mode HMd < the rainbow display mode HMe in that order. The rainbow display mode HMe suggests a jackpot.

In addition, each specific display mode also suggests the effect that will be performed in the game turn to which the reserved image corresponds. Specifically, the blue display mode HMb suggests that a reach effect (either a normal reach effect, an SP reach effect, or an SPSP reach effect) of a higher rank than a normal reach effect will be performed in the game turn to which the reserved image corresponds, the green display mode HMc suggests that a reach effect of a higher rank than an SP reach effect will be performed, and the red display mode HMd suggests that an SPSP reach effect will be performed.

The above-mentioned hold notice performance using the hold image is performed using at least a part of the period from the start of displaying the hold image that is the subject of the performance to the end of displaying it, in other words, the period from the occurrence of the hold information to the end of the game round of that hold information. There are multiple timings set for the execution of the hold notice performance during the period (hold period) when the hold image is displayed in the first hold display area Ga or the second hold display area Gb, such as when the hold image starts to be displayed or when it is shifted. In addition, multiple timings for the execution of the hold notice performance during the execution of a game round are set as hold change points, as shown in FIG. 33(b). Each hold change point is set to match, for example, the start timing of a game round (change start timing), the start timing of various reach performances, the development timing of the reach performance, etc.

Returning to the explanation of the hold command response process (FIG. 31), the hold notice setting process in step Sa1403 executes a lottery to determine whether or not to execute a hold notice performance for the current hold information, and executes a process to set the display mode of the hold image when the hold notice performance is executed. The hold notice setting process will be described in detail later.

In step Sa1404, the first execution process of the hold notice is executed to execute the hold notice performance. In the first execution process of the hold notice, the execution control of the hold notice performance is performed based on the setting result of step Sa1403. Details of the first execution process of the hold notice will be described later.

In step Sa1405, a process is executed to display a hold image in the hold display section 200 of the display screen G. Specifically, a hold display command is created so that a hold image is additionally displayed in the corresponding unit hold display area in each hold display area Ga, Gb, and is set as an output target to the display control device 350. The hold display command includes information indicating whether the current hold information corresponds to the first or second special chart, and information indicating which number the hold information is. After execution of step Sa1405, the hold command response process is terminated.

<Settings for hold notice>
The setting process for the hold notice in step Sa1403 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step Sa1501, the pending memory area 344c of RAM 344 is referenced to ascertain the fluctuation pattern, etc. (pre-read result) of the current pending information. In step Sa1502, based on the fluctuation pattern, etc. ascertained in step Sa1501, it is determined whether the current pending information corresponds to a jackpot.

If the information does not correspond to a jackpot, i.e., if the pending information corresponds to a miss, proceed to step Sa1503 and determine whether the fluctuation pattern of the pending information is fluctuation pattern 1H (fluctuation pattern corresponding to a complete miss). If a negative judgment is made in step Sa1503 (if the fluctuation pattern is other than fluctuation pattern 1H) or if a positive judgment is made in step Sa1502 (if the pending information corresponds to a jackpot), the current presentation mode is identified in step Sa1504.

Now, the presentation modes will be explained with reference to FIG. 35. In this embodiment, presentation mode A and presentation mode B are set as presentation modes for game presentations executed on display screen G. Presentation mode A and presentation mode B are distinguishable from the player, and for example, the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 and the background image 401 displayed at the back of the hold display section 200 are different in both presentation modes.

These presentation modes can be manually switched by the player, specifically, by performing a specified operation on the presentation operation unit 36 (Fig. 1) during the valid period for mode switching. For example, if a specified operation is performed on the presentation operation unit 36 when the presentation mode is presentation mode A, the presentation mode will switch to presentation mode B, and if a specified operation is performed on the presentation operation unit 36 when the presentation mode is B, the presentation mode will switch to presentation mode A.

In addition, the frequency of occurrence of the above-mentioned hold notice effect differs between presentation mode A and presentation mode B, and is configured so that the frequency of occurrence of the hold notice effect in presentation mode A is higher than that in presentation mode B. The configuration for making the frequency of occurrence of the hold notice effect different is not particularly limited, but for example, a possible configuration is to execute the hold notice effect via an execution lottery in both presentation modes, and then make the probability of winning the execution lottery in presentation mode B when the hold information corresponds to a miss lower than that in presentation mode A.

In this case, in presentation mode B, the proportion of pending notice presentations that correspond to predictions of a jackpot is higher than in presentation mode A, so the likelihood of a jackpot being expected when a pending notice presentation is executed is higher. In other words, presentation mode A can be made to function as a mode in which pending notice presentations are more likely to be executed and are easier to enjoy, while presentation mode B can be made to function as a mode in which pending notice presentations are less likely to be executed but have a higher likelihood of a jackpot being expected when they are executed.

Although not shown in FIG. 35, for example, a reserved image that resembles a game ball may be displayed in presentation mode A, whereas a reserved image that resembles a star may be displayed in presentation mode B. In this way, the base image of the reserved image may be different between presentation mode A and presentation mode B.

Returning to the explanation of the setting process for the reserved notice (FIG. 34), after the current presentation mode is determined in step Sa1504, the corresponding reserved notice execution lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343 in step Sa1505. A plurality of reserved notice execution lottery tables are set corresponding to the presence or absence of a jackpot and the presentation mode. For example, the reserved notice execution lottery table corresponding to the case where the current reserved information is a jackpot is set to have a higher probability of winning than the reserved notice execution lottery table corresponding to the case where it is a miss. Also, the reserved notice execution lottery table corresponding to presentation mode A and corresponding to the case where the current reserved information is a miss is set to have a higher probability of winning than the reserved notice execution lottery table corresponding to presentation mode B and corresponding to the case where the current reserved information is a miss.

In step Sa1506, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the pending notice performance based on the pending notice execution lottery table obtained in step Sa1505 and the lottery counter (random number value) obtained from each counter area 344b of RAM 344. In step Sa1507, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step Sa1506 is a winning result.

If the result of the lottery is a winning execution, proceed to step Sa1508 and grasp the corresponding reserved number. In this step, refer to the reserved memory area 344c of RAM 344 to grasp whether the reserved information corresponds to the first special chart or the second special chart, and grasp the reserved number of the corresponding special chart. In this case, the reserved number is the number including the reserved information of the current time. For example, if the reserved information of the current time is stored in the third area of the reserved area SRa for the first special chart in the reserved memory area 344c, grasp that the reserved information corresponds to the first special chart and that the reserved number is 3. Note that, when the reserved information of the current time is stored in the first area of the reserved area SRa for the first special chart (when it is the first reserved information), if reserved information is stored in the execution area SAE (when a game round is being executed), grasp the reserved number as 1, and if reserved information is not stored in the execution area SAE (when a game round is not being executed), grasp the reserved number as 0.

In step Sa1509, a final display mode selection table is obtained from the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343. In this embodiment, the display mode of the reserved image is not only changed once to perform the reserved preview performance, but the display mode of the reserved image is also configured to be changed multiple times to perform the reserved preview performance. The final display mode selection table is a table for selecting the final display mode of the reserved image in the reserved preview performance.

As shown in FIG. 36, in the final display mode selection table, the range of selectable final display modes and the selection probability of each display mode are set in correspondence with each variation pattern. Note that in FIG. 36, the "Notes (Performance Mode)" item indicating the game round performance corresponding to each variation pattern is added for convenience and is not set in the final display mode selection table.

The final display mode selection table includes a final display mode selection table for big wins (Fig. 36(a)) and a final display mode selection table for losses (Fig. 36(b)). Each selection table has a different selection range for the final display mode according to each variation pattern and a different probability of selection for each option.

In the final display mode lottery table for big wins, the range of final display modes of the reserved image in the reserved preview performance is set as follows: if the current reserved information is fluctuation pattern 1A (hit of normal reach), blue display mode HMb and rainbow display mode HMe; if the current reserved information is fluctuation pattern 2A (hit of SP reach A) or fluctuation pattern 3A (hit of SP reach B), blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, and rainbow display mode HMe; if the current reserved information is fluctuation pattern 4A (hit of SPSP reach A) or fluctuation pattern 5A (hit of SPSP reach B), blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, and rainbow display mode HMe. Therefore, when a hold image in blue display mode HMb is displayed as a hold notice effect, it suggests that a reach effect of a higher rank than a normal reach effect will be performed in the game turn to which the hold image corresponds (the game turn of the hold information that triggered the hold notice effect), when a hold image in green display mode HMc is displayed it suggests that a reach effect of a higher rank than an SP reach effect will be performed, and when a hold image in red display mode HMd is displayed it suggests that an SPSP reach effect will be performed.

In addition, even in the final display mode lottery table for losing, when a reserve image in blue display mode HMb is displayed as a reserve notice effect, it suggests that a reach effect of a rank higher than a normal reach effect will be performed in the corresponding game round, when a reserve image in green display mode HMc is displayed, it suggests that a reach effect of a rank higher than an SP reach effect will be performed, and when a reserve image in red display mode HMd is displayed, it suggests that an SPSP reach effect will be performed. Therefore, when a reserve notice effect is performed and a reserve image in blue, green, or red is displayed, the player can predict what level of reach effect will be performed. However, it cannot tell whether or not there will be a jackpot.

In addition, in the final display mode selection table for losing, the rainbow display mode HMe is not set as an option for the final display mode, and the reserved image of the rainbow display mode HMe is displayed only in the case of a jackpot. Therefore, the reserved image of the rainbow display mode HMe suggests a jackpot, and when the reserved image is displayed, the player can predict that a jackpot will occur in the play that the reserved image corresponds to.

In the final display mode lottery table for a jackpot, the probability of selecting the rainbow display mode HMe is kept low (for example, 5%) for all variation patterns. This is to prevent the occurrence of inconveniences, since if the probability of selecting the rainbow display mode HMe is increased, there is a concern that the player will have more opportunities to recognize the jackpot before the game round is played, and will lose interest in the game round presentation. The selection probability for the other options is such that a higher-ranked display mode is more likely to be selected than a lower-ranked display mode in each variation pattern. For example, in the case of variation pattern 3A, the green display mode HMc is more likely to be selected than the blue display mode HMb.

On the other hand, in the final display mode selection table for losing, it is more difficult to select a higher-ranked display mode than in the final display mode selection table for winning. For example, in the variation pattern (variation pattern 4A) corresponding to the SPSP reach A presentation in the final display mode selection table for winning, the probability of selecting the red display mode HMd is 55%, whereas in the variation pattern (variation pattern 5H) corresponding to the SPSP reach B presentation in the final display mode selection table for losing, the probability of selecting the red display mode HMd is only 10%.

In the final display mode selection tables for jackpots and misses, the display mode selection tendency is set as described above, so that even if the type of reach effect performed in a game round is the same, the expectation of a jackpot will be higher if a higher display mode is displayed as the reserved image corresponding to that game round.

In this embodiment, a common table is used for both presentation mode A and presentation mode B as the final display mode selection table for a jackpot and a final display mode selection table for a loss, but a different table may be set for each presentation mode.

Returning to the explanation of the setting process for the hold notice (FIG. 34), in step Sa1509, a final display mode selection table corresponding to the presence or absence of a jackpot in the hold information is obtained based on the fluctuation pattern, etc., grasped in step Sa1501. In step Sa1510, the final display mode for this hold notice performance is selected based on the fluctuation pattern grasped in step Sa1501, the final display mode selection table obtained in step Sa1509, and the counters (random number values) for selection obtained from each counter area 344b of RAM 344.

The counter for the lottery is acquired when a hold command is received from the main control device 162, in other words, when hold information that is the subject of the lottery process is generated. The same applies to the counters (random numbers) used for other lottery processes executed by the performance control device 143.

In step Sa1511, a performance scenario selection table is obtained from the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343. The performance scenario selection table is a table for selecting a performance scenario for the pending preview performance.

In the performance scenario lottery table, as shown in FIG. 37, multiple performance scenarios are set in correspondence with the reserved number and the final display mode of the reserved notice performance. In detail, groups are set from performance scenario 0 corresponding to reserved number = 0 to performance scenario 4 corresponding to reserved number = 4, and in each group, a group of performance scenarios for each color is set in correspondence with the final display modes of blue, green, red, and rainbow. A random number value from 0 to 99 is assigned to each group of performance scenarios for one color. For example, if the reserved number is 0 and the final display mode is the blue display mode HMb, performance scenario 0 blue (1) and performance scenario 0 blue (2) are available for selection, and the one corresponding to the random number value is selected from among them.

Each performance scenario specifies when and in what display mode the reserved image is displayed in the reserved notice performance in which the final display mode has been determined. When the reserved information corresponding to the first special chart is read in advance, the reserved number of the first special chart at that time is 4, and the red display mode HMd is selected as the final display mode. Taking the performance scenario 4 red (1) as an example, this scenario specifies that after the reserved image is displayed in the blue display mode HMb in the fourth unit reserved display area Ga4 of the first reserved display area Ga (FIG. 9 (b)), when the reserved image is moved and displayed in the second unit reserved display area Ga2, it is changed to the green display mode HMc, and then, during the period in which the reserved image is displayed in the execution display area D (during the execution of the game round corresponding to the reserved image), it is changed to the red display mode HMd.

Although not shown in Figure 37, a presentation scenario that specifies changing the display mode of the reserved image in the execution display area D also specifies at what timing (at which reserved change point) during a game round the display mode is changed. There are also presentation scenarios that change the display mode multiple times during the execution of a game round. For example, presentation scenario 0 green (2) specifies that the reserved image is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the blue display mode HMb at a previous reserved change point during the execution of a game round, and then further changed to the green display mode HMc at a later reserved change point.

In addition, "G4 (Hold 4)" to "G1 (Hold 1)" in "Notes (Performance Mode)" in FIG. 37 indicate the display mode when a reserved image is displayed in each unit reserved display area of the reserved display section 200. Also, "D (During Play)" indicates the display mode when a reserved image is shifted from the first unit reserved display area to the execution display area D, and the display mode during the period when a reserved image is displayed in the execution display area D. Incidentally, the items in the "Notes (Performance Mode)" column are added for convenience and are not set in the performance scenario lottery table.

In addition, a presentation scenario lottery table for a big win and a presentation scenario lottery table for a loss are set as the presentation scenario lottery table. In this embodiment, a common table is used for presentation mode A and presentation mode B as the presentation scenario lottery table for a big win and a presentation scenario lottery table for a loss, but a different table may be set for each presentation mode. Note that FIG. 37 shows an example of a presentation scenario lottery table for a big win.

Returning to the explanation of the setting process for the hold notice (FIG. 34), in step Sa1511, a performance scenario selection table corresponding to the presence or absence of a jackpot in the hold information is obtained based on the fluctuation pattern, etc., grasped in step Sa1501. In step Sa1512, a performance scenario for the current hold notice performance is selected based on the number of holds grasped in step Sa1508, the final display mode determined in step Sa1510, the performance scenario selection table obtained in step Sa1511, and the counters (random number values) for selection obtained from each counter area 344b of RAM 344.

In step Sa1513, the performance scenario data is set so that the performance scenario selected in step Sa1512 is executed. In step Sa1514, a hold notice flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344, and then the setting process for the hold notice is terminated. The hold notice flag is used by the MPU 342 to know that a hold notice performance should be executed.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sa1503 (if the fluctuation pattern of the pending information is fluctuation pattern 1H (complete miss)) or if a negative judgment is made in step Sa1507 (if the lottery for executing the pending notice performance is a miss), the process proceeds to step Sa1515, where the display mode of the pending image is set to the normal display mode HMa. After that, the setting process for the pending notice is terminated.

<First execution process of pending notice>
The first execution process of the pending notice in step Sa1404 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 38 (a).

First, in step Sa1601, it is determined whether or not a hold notice flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344. If the hold notice flag is not stored, i.e., if it is not a situation in which a hold notice performance should be executed, the first execution process of the hold notice is terminated.

On the other hand, if the hold notice flag is stored and it is a situation where a hold notice performance should be executed, proceed to step Sa1602, and determine whether it is time to change the display mode of the hold image corresponding to the hold information that triggered the hold notice performance. In other words, determine whether it is a situation where the hold image should be displayed in a specific display mode from the beginning. In this step, the above determination is made by referring to the setting result of the performance scenario of the hold notice performance set in step Sa1513 (Figure 34) above. If it is not a timing to change the display mode, the first execution process of the hold notice is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is the timing for the display mode to change, a lottery is performed in step Sa1603 to determine whether or not to execute a change suggestion effect. The change suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that the display mode of the reserved image will change (rank up). The form of the change suggestion effect is not particularly limited, but in this embodiment, the change suggestion effect is performed in the form shown in FIG. 39. First, as shown in FIG. 39(a), a predetermined character image 402 is displayed near the reserved display unit 200 at a predetermined timing before the reserved image changes. Note that, when a change suggestion effect is performed in accordance with the timing of occurrence of reserved information, first, the reserved image is displayed in a normal display mode, and immediately after that or at the same time, the character image 402 is displayed. After that, a video of the character performing a predetermined action is displayed, and the display mode of the reserved image is changed to a higher display mode as shown in FIG. 39(b). Note that the character image 402 is erased after the display mode of the reserved image is changed.

In step Sa1603, a lottery is performed to select whether or not to execute a change suggestion effect based on the counters (random numbers) for selection obtained from each counter area 344b of RAM 344 and the execution lottery table stored in the various table storage areas 343a of ROM 343. In step Sa1604, it is determined whether or not the result of the selection in step Sa1603 is a winning result. If the result of the selection is a winning result, in step Sa1605, the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 is set to execute a change suggestion effect. Specifically, a command to execute a change suggestion effect is set as an output target to the display control device 350.

In this embodiment, the change suggestion effect is executed only when the display mode of the pending image is changed, but the change suggestion effect may be executed even when the display mode of the pending image is not changed. In other words, the change suggestion effect may be executed by lottery even when the display mode of the pending image is not changed.

In such a case, for example, a change suggestion effect may be such that, after a specific character image 402 is displayed as shown in FIG. 39(a), the character does not perform a specific action or performs an action different from the specific action, the character image 402 is erased without changing the display mode of the reserved image, and the display mode before the character image 402 was displayed is maintained as it is. However, if such false effects occur frequently, the player's expectations for the change suggestion effect may be lost, so it is advisable to keep the frequency of such effects low. Specifically, the probability of winning the execution of a change suggestion effect when the display mode is not changed is lower than when the display mode is changed; in other words, the frequency with which the display mode of the reserved image does not change when the character image 402 is displayed is lower than the frequency with which it does change.

After execution of step Sa1605 or if a negative judgment is made in step Sa1604 (if the lottery for executing the change suggestion effect is not won), the process proceeds to step Sa1606, where the display mode to be changed to in this change process is determined based on the result of the effect scenario settings. Specifically, it is determined in which specific display mode the pending image will be displayed from among the blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, and rainbow display mode HMe.

In step Sa1607, the display mode of the hold image is set to be changed to the display mode determined in step Sa1606. If this process is performed when a hold command is received (when an additional hold image is to be displayed), the initial display mode of the additional hold image is set to the display mode determined in step Sa1606.

In this case, if a change suggestion performance is not to be executed, the pending image is set to be displayed in one of the specific display modes indicated by the performance scenario from the beginning. On the other hand, if a change suggestion performance is to be executed, the image is set to be displayed in the normal display mode HMa and then changed to the specific display mode indicated by the performance scenario. If the setting process of step Sa1607 is executed, in step Sa1405 of the pending command response process (Figure 31), the pending display command to the display control device 350 is set so that the command includes information on the display mode set in step Sa1607.

In step Sa1608, information indicating the display mode of the reserved image this time is stored in the display mode storage area 344e of the RAM 344. As shown in FIG. 38(b), in the display mode storage area 344e, areas are provided corresponding to the reserved information (reserved image) of each special chart and the reserved information during the game round, and the display mode of the reserved image can be stored in each area. For example, when the blue display mode HMb is displayed in the second unit reserved display area Ga2 of the first reserved display area Ga, the display mode storage area 344e stores information that the second area for the first special chart (the area corresponding to the second reserved information) is displayed in blue display mode HMb. Incidentally, when a change suggestion performance is executed, information indicating the display mode (display color) after the change is stored. Note that the display mode storage area 344e may not be provided, and the display mode information may be stored in the corresponding area of the reserved memory area 344c. After execution of step Sa1608, the first execution process of the reserved notice is terminated.

<Shift command processing>
The shift command response process in step Sa1304 (FIG. 30) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step Sa1701, the first execution process of the hold notice is executed. This process is intended to change the display mode of the hold image of the hold information that triggered the hold notice performance when the hold image is shifted. The process of this step is essentially the same as the first execution process of the hold notice (Fig. 38(a)) in step Sa1404 (Fig. 31).

To explain with reference to FIG. 38(a), in the first execution process of the hold notice in step Sa1701, a hold notice flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344, and if it is a situation where a hold notice performance should be executed, step Sa1602 determines whether the current shift timing is the timing to change the display mode (display color) of the hold image (the hold image displayed in each hold display area Ga, Gb) corresponding to the hold information that triggered the hold notice performance. This determination is made based on the setting result of the performance scenario for the hold notice performance set in step Sa1513 (FIG. 34).

If it is the timing to change the display mode, a lottery is held in step Sa1603 to determine whether or not to execute a change suggestion effect, and if the lottery is won, in step Sa1605, the change suggestion effect is set to be executed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75. After execution of step Sa1605 or if a negative judgment is made in step Sa1604 (if the lottery to execute the change suggestion effect is not won), the process proceeds to step Sa1606, where the display mode to which the change will be made in this change process is determined based on the results of the setting of the effect scenario.

In step Sa1607, the display mode of the reserved image is set to be changed to the display mode determined in step Sa1606. Specifically, a command to change the display mode of the reserved image at the current shift timing is set by including, as an output command to the display control device 350, information indicating which reserved image's display mode is to be changed and information indicating which display mode (display color) it is to be changed to. As a result, the display mode of the reserved image at the current shift timing is changed to the display mode determined by the setting result of the performance scenario.

In step Sa1608, for the pending image whose display mode is to be changed, information on the changed display mode is stored in the display mode memory area 344e of the RAM 344. For example, when a pending image in a blue display mode HMb displayed in the second unit pending display area Ga2 of the first pending display area Ga is changed to a green display mode HMc when shifted to the first unit pending display area Ga1, the blue display information stored in the second area for the first special chart (the area corresponding to the second pending information) in the display mode memory area 344e is erased, and the green display information is stored in the same area.

Returning to the explanation of the shift command response process (FIG. 40), after the process of step Sa1701 is executed, the second execution process of the pending notice is executed in step Sa1702. This process is related to the presentation mode switching process of step Sa1307 (FIG. 30), so it will be described in detail after the explanation of that switching process.

In step Sa1703, the value of the reserved number counter (start reserved memory number SN) provided in the various counter area 344b of RAM 344 is decremented by 1. The various counter area 344b is provided with a reserved number counter for the first special design and a reserved number counter for the second special design, and in this step the start reserved memory number SN of the corresponding side is updated.

In step Sa1704, a shift process is executed to move the pending image, and then the shift command response process is terminated. In the shift process, the pending information stored in the first area of the pending memory area 344c of the RAM 344 is moved to the execution area SAE, and the pending information stored in the second to fourth areas is shifted sequentially to the lower areas. At this time, the display mode information stored in each area of the display mode memory area 344e is also shifted sequentially to the lower areas.

In addition, in the shift process, the display control device 350 is controlled to change the display position of the pending image in the pending display section 200 of the display screen G to the lower unit pending display area. For example, if pending images are displayed in the first unit pending display area Ga1 and the second unit pending display area Ga2 of the first pending display area Ga as shown in FIG. 40(b1) as the state before the control, the display positions of those pending images are changed to the execution display area D and the first unit pending display area Ga1 as shown in FIG. 40(b2) by the control. Note that if the setting is made to change the display mode of the pending image in the first execution process of the pending notice in step Sa1701, the change in display position and the change in display mode are performed together.

<Special chart change display processing>
The special chart change display processing of step Sa1305 (FIG. 30) will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step Sa1801, it is determined whether a game round is currently being played. Specifically, it is determined whether a game round of either the first special chart or the second special chart is currently being played. If neither game round is currently being played, the process proceeds to step Sa1802, where it is determined whether a variation start command sent from the main control unit 162 has been received. The variation start command contains information about the variation pattern selected by lottery in the variation display time setting process (Figure 24) in the main control unit 162.

By referring to this information on the fluctuation pattern, it is possible to know at what fluctuation display time the special symbol game will be played on the special symbol display unit 43, which is controlled by the main control unit 162. Also, as already explained, since a fluctuation pattern for a jackpot and a fluctuation pattern for a miss are set separately, it is also possible to determine the result of the win/loss judgment from the fluctuation pattern.

If the change start command has not been received, the special chart change display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the change start command has been received, the process proceeds to step Sa1803, where change start process is executed to start the performance for the game round, and then the special chart change display process is terminated.

In the process for starting the fluctuation, the fluctuation start command from the main control device 162 is analyzed to identify the fluctuation pattern related to the current special game. Furthermore, the fluctuation display time in the current special game is grasped based on the identified fluctuation pattern. In the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343, a presentation pattern table in which the fluctuation display time is determined in association with each fluctuation pattern is stored. The fluctuation display time determined in the presentation pattern table corresponds to the fluctuation display time corresponding to each fluctuation pattern (FIG. 14) in the main control device 162, and a common fluctuation display time is assigned to one fluctuation pattern in the presentation control device 143 and the main control device 162. For example, if the fluctuation pattern is fluctuation pattern 1A, the corresponding fluctuation display time is 15 sec in both the presentation control device 143 and the main control device 162. In the process for starting the fluctuation, the fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern analyzed from the fluctuation start command is identified by referring to the presentation pattern table, and this is set as the fluctuation display time for the current special game.

The presentation pattern table also associates presentation patterns for game round presentations with each variation pattern. The presentation patterns are normal reach hit, SP reach A hit, SP reach B hit, SPSP reach A hit, SPSP reach B hit, complete miss, normal reach miss, SP reach A miss, SP reach B miss, SPSP reach A miss, and SPSP reach B miss, as described in the explanation of the variation display time table. The correspondence between the variation patterns and the presentation patterns has already been described with reference to FIG. 14, so an explanation is omitted here. In the variation start process, the presentation pattern corresponding to the current variation pattern is identified by referring to the presentation pattern table, and this is set as the presentation pattern for the current special chart game round.

In addition, in the process for starting the variation, if the result of the win/loss judgment for the current special game round is a jackpot, the type of jackpot is identified based on the type command from the main control device 162. If the jackpot type is a guaranteed jackpot, the stop result for the guaranteed jackpot is set as the stop result of the pattern string Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75. Conversely, if the jackpot type is a regular jackpot, the stop result for the regular jackpot is set as the stop result of the pattern string Z1 to Z3. In these cases, the active lines L1 to L5 on which the stop result for the jackpot is displayed are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

In addition, if the result of the win/loss judgment for this special game round is a miss, the stopping symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are randomly determined. However, if the presentation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern is one that produces a reach presentation, the stopping symbols are determined so that a reach is formed on the active lines L1 to L5 determined by lottery. In other words, the stopping result in which a combination of miss reach symbols is formed on one active line L1 to L5 is set as the stopping result for this time.

In the process for starting the fluctuation, after executing each of the above processes, a command including information on the current stopped symbol and presentation pattern is set as an output target to the display control device 350. The display control device 350 controls the symbol display device 75 according to the received command so that the symbols in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 stop with the stop result determined by the presentation control device 143, or the game round presentation is performed with the presentation pattern determined by the presentation control device 143.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sa1801 (if a game round is being played), the process proceeds to step Sa1804, where it is judged whether or not a change end command has been received from the main control device 162. If a change end command has not been received, this means that the change display time has not yet elapsed in this special game round. In this case, in step Sa1805, a change in progress process is executed. In the change in progress process, processing is executed to continue the change display of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 that was started by the change start process, to temporarily stop and display the patterns of each pattern row Z1 to Z3 in order, and to execute each reach performance.

In step Sa1806, it is determined whether or not the current special chart play is the play of the reserved information that triggered the hold notice performance. If it is not the play of the reserved information that triggered the hold notice performance, the process for displaying the special chart change is terminated. On the other hand, if it is the play of the reserved information that triggered the hold notice performance, the first execution process of the hold notice is executed in step Sa1807. This process is intended to change the display mode of the reserved image of the reserved information that triggered the hold notice performance during the execution of the play of that reserved information. The process of this step is basically the same as the first execution process of the hold notice (Fig. 38(a)) in step Sa1404 (Fig. 31).

To explain with reference to FIG. 38(a), in the first execution process of the hold notice in step Sa1807, a hold notice flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344, and if it is a situation where a hold notice performance should be executed, step Sa1602 determines whether it is time to change the display mode of the hold image (the hold image displayed in the execution display area D) corresponding to the hold information that triggered the hold notice performance. This determination is made based on the setting result of the performance scenario for the hold notice performance set in step Sa1513 (FIG. 34).

If it is the timing to change the display mode, a lottery is held in step Sa1603 to determine whether or not to execute a change suggestion effect, and if the lottery is won, in step Sa1605, the change suggestion effect is set to be executed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75. After execution of step Sa1605 or if a negative judgment is made in step Sa1604 (if the lottery to execute the change suggestion effect is not won), the process proceeds to step Sa1606, where the display mode to be changed to in this change process is determined based on the results of the setting of the effect scenario.

In step Sa1607, the display mode of the reserved image is set to be changed to the display mode determined in step Sa1606. As a result, at a predetermined reserved change point during a game round, the display mode of the reserved image is changed to the display mode determined by the setting result of the presentation scenario. In the following step Sa1608, information on the changed display mode is stored in an area corresponding to the execution display area D in the display mode storage area 344e of RAM 344.

Returning to the explanation of the special chart change display process (Fig. 41), after executing the process of step Sa1807, the third execution process of the pending notice is executed in step Sa1808. This process is related to the presentation mode switching process of step Sa1307 (Fig. 30), and will be described in detail after explaining the switching process. After executing step Sa1808, the special chart change display process ends.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sa1804 (if a variation end command has been received), it means that the variation display time has elapsed. In this case, the process proceeds to step Sa1809, and variation end processing is executed. In the variation end processing, the variation display of each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 and the currently executed performance are ended (the patterns of each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are fixed and stopped).

In step Sa1810, it is determined whether or not the current special chart play is the play of the reserved information that triggered the reserved notice performance. If it is not the play of the reserved information that triggered the reserved notice performance, the special chart change display process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is the play of the reserved information that triggered the reserved notice performance, it is determined in step Sa1811 whether or not a reserved notice flag or a return waiting flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d. Details of the return waiting flag will be described later.

If either the hold notice flag or the return waiting flag is stored, the stored flag is erased in step Sa1812. After execution of step Sa1812 or if a negative judgment is made in step Sa1811 (if neither the hold notice flag nor the return waiting flag is stored), the special chart change display process is terminated.

In this embodiment, the configuration is such that it is determined whether the variable display time has elapsed based on whether a variable end command has been received from the main control device 162. However, since the variable display time can be determined from the variable start command sent at the start of the variable in the performance control device 143, it may also be determined whether the variable display time for the currently running game round has elapsed based on the determined variable display time. In this case, it may also be configured not to send the variable end command from the main control device 162.

<Processing for switching presentation modes>
The rendering mode switching process of step Sa1307 (FIG. 30) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG 42. The rendering mode switching process is for switching between rendering mode A and rendering mode B already described.

First, in step Sa1901, it is determined whether or not it is within the valid period for switching presentation modes. In this embodiment, the period during which the SP reach presentation or the SPSP reach presentation is being executed in a special chart game round, or the period during which the open/close execution mode is being executed, is set as an invalid period during which the presentation mode cannot be switched, and the other periods, including the period during which the special chart game round is being executed, are the valid period for switching presentation modes. In step Sa1901, it is determined whether or not the current timing belongs to the above-mentioned valid period. If it is not within the valid period for switching presentation modes, the processing for switching presentation modes is terminated.

If the presentation mode switching is in effect, the process proceeds to step Sa1902, where it is determined whether a predetermined operation for switching the presentation mode has been performed on the presentation operation unit 36. If the predetermined operation has not been performed, the presentation mode switching process is terminated.

When a predetermined operation is performed, the process proceeds to step Sa1903, where a switching process is executed to switch the presentation mode. For example, when the current presentation mode is presentation mode A, the presentation data is set to switch to presentation mode B. The presentation mode may be switched in accordance with the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined operation is performed, or in accordance with the timing when the next special game round starts.

In step Sa1904, a presentation mode flag corresponding to the presentation mode after switching is set in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344. In this embodiment, a mode A flag and a mode B flag are provided as flags corresponding to presentation mode A and presentation mode B, respectively. For example, when switching the presentation mode from presentation mode A to presentation mode B, the mode A flag stored in the various flag storage area 344d is erased, and the mode B flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d.

In step Sa1905, it is determined whether a return standby flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d. The return standby flag will be described later.

If the return standby flag is not stored, proceed to step Sa1906 and determine whether or not a hold notice flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d. If the hold notice flag is not stored, end the presentation mode switching process.

On the other hand, if the hold notice flag is stored, i.e., if the hold notice performance is being executed or is in a standby state, the process proceeds to step Sa1907, where the hold notice flag is erased. As a result, if the hold notice performance was being executed before the mode was switched, the continuation of the hold notice performance is canceled. Also, if the hold notice performance was in a standby state, the execution of the hold notice performance that was on standby is canceled.

In step Sa1908, it is determined whether or not a hold notice performance is being performed, i.e., whether or not there is a hold image being displayed in a specific display mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is an hold image being displayed in any of the blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, or rainbow display mode HMe among the hold images being displayed in each hold display area Ga, Gb. This determination is made by referring to the information for each area stored in the display mode memory area 344e of RAM 344. If there is no hold image being displayed in a specific display mode, the performance mode switching process is terminated.

On the other hand, if there is a pending image being displayed in a specific display mode (if the pending notice performance is being executed), the process proceeds to step Sa1909, and information indicating in which display mode the pending image being displayed in the specific display mode is stored in the return area 344f of the RAM 344. In the return area 344f, areas are set corresponding to the pending display areas Ga1-Ga4, Gb1-Gb4 and the execution display area D of each special chart, and it is possible to store the display mode of the pending image in each area.

In step Sa1909, the display mode information stored in the display mode storage area 344e at that time is also stored in the return area 344f. Therefore, at the time of processing in step Sa1909, the same information is stored in the display mode storage area 344e and the return area 344f.

The display mode information may be identification information indicating the display mode or identification information indicating the display color. In short, it is sufficient if the display mode of the pending image can be identified from the information stored in the return area 344f, and it is sufficient if it corresponds to the display mode of the pending image.

By the above process, by referring to the return area 344f after switching the presentation mode, it is possible to know which pending image was displayed in which display mode before switching the presentation mode. Note that when the shift process of step Sa1704 in the shift command response process (FIG. 40) is executed while display mode information is stored in the return area 344f, not only the display mode storage area 344e but also the display mode information stored in each area of the return area 344f is shifted in order to the lower area.

In step Sa1910, processing is executed to cancel the display of the reserved image displayed in the specific display mode in the specific display mode. That is, the reserved image displayed in the specific display mode is set to switch to the normal display mode HMa when the presentation mode is switched. The switch to the normal display mode HMa is performed in accordance with the timing of the presentation mode switch. For example, if the presentation mode is switched at the timing when the above-mentioned specified operation is performed, the reserved image is switched to the normal display mode HMa at that timing, and if the presentation mode is switched at the start of the next special game round, the reserved image is switched to the normal display mode HMa at that timing.

The cancellation process of step Sa1910 also executes a process to clear the display mode information stored in the display mode storage area 344e. Therefore, at the time of processing of step Sa1910, the display mode information is stored only in the return area 344f. Furthermore, the cancellation process of step Sa1910 also executes a process to erase the performance scenario data set in step Sa1513 of the setting process for the hold notice (Figure 34).

In this embodiment, when the presentation mode is switched, the system is configured to restrict a re-run of the execution lottery for the acquired pending information, in other words, pending information for which a lottery for executing the pending notice presentation (setting process for the pending notice in FIG. 34) has already been conducted. Specifically, a new lottery for executing the pending notice presentation is not conducted, and the system is configured to prevent duplicate execution lotteries for the same pending information (pending image) from being conducted before and after the presentation mode is switched.

In step Sa1911, a standby flag for return is set in the various flag storage area 344d. In this embodiment, the display mode of the pending image is configured to return to a specific display mode when the original presentation mode is switched again after the presentation mode has been switched. The standby flag for return is a flag indicating that the return process is in a standby state. After step Sa1911 is executed, the presentation mode switching process is terminated.

If the above step Sa1905 is judged to be positive (if the return standby flag is stored), the process proceeds to step Sa1912, where the process of erasing the return standby flag is executed. Here, a situation in which a positive judgment is made in step Sa1905 means a situation in which the first switching of the presentation mode is performed while the hold notice presentation is being executed, and then the mode switching operation is performed again, resulting in a return to the original presentation mode. For example, a situation in which the presentation mode is switched from presentation mode A to presentation mode B while any of the hold images is displayed in a specific display mode, and then switched back to presentation mode A. In this case, when the previous mode is switched (from presentation mode A to presentation mode B), the display mode of the hold image is changed to the normal display mode HMa and the hold notice presentation is canceled, so that the hold image that was displayed in the specific display mode in presentation mode A will continue to be displayed in the normal display mode HMa while in presentation mode B.

In addition, after switching to presentation mode B, the game round for that reserved image (reserved information) may end before switching to presentation mode A. In this case, the return waiting flag is cleared in steps Sa1811 and Sa1812 of the special chart change display process (Figure 41), so a negative judgment is made in the above step Sa1905.

After step Sa1912 is executed, step Sa1913 executes a setting process for preview return to return the display mode of the pending image to a specific display mode. Then, the process for switching the presentation mode is terminated.

<Changing the display mode of the reserved image by switching the performance mode>
As already explained, in this embodiment, when the presentation mode is changed while the reserved image is displayed in a specific display mode, the display mode of the reserved image is changed to the normal display mode HMa, and the reserved notice presentation is canceled. In this case, the display state of not only the background image 401 but also the reserved display section 200 is changed, so that the change in presentation mode can be easily understood by the player.

In addition, if the switching of the presentation mode is limited to a simple change in the displayed image, it is difficult to impress the difference between the modes on the player, but in this embodiment, the frequency of execution of the hold notice performance is different between the modes, so the difference between the presentation modes can be highlighted. However, in a configuration in which the frequency of execution of the hold notice performance differs between the modes, even if the display mode of the hold image in which the hold notice performance is being performed is the same, the jackpot expectation suggested by the display mode may differ depending on the type of presentation mode. For this reason, if the display mode before the mode switch is maintained after the mode switch, even though the actual expectation of the hold information corresponds to the presentation mode before the switch, it is displayed as if it suggests the expectation corresponding to the presentation mode after the switch, so there is a concern that a mismatch will occur between the expectation suggested by the hold notice performance and the actual expectation. In this regard, by changing the display mode of the hold image to the normal display mode HMa when the presentation mode is switched, such inconsistency in expectation can be suitably avoided.

In this way, by canceling the execution of the hold preview effect when the presentation mode is switched, it is possible to make the change in presentation mode easier to understand and to avoid inconsistencies in the level of expectation suggested by the hold preview effect. On the other hand, however, there is a concern that some players may mistakenly believe that the cancellation of the hold preview effect has meant that the chance suggested by the hold preview effect has also disappeared, leading to disappointment.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a setting process for returning the preview in step Sa1913, a second execution process for the pending preview in step Sa1702, and a third execution process for the pending preview in step Sa1808 are provided, and the display mode of the pending image is restored when the original presentation mode is returned to by switching again after the presentation mode has been switched. The process of each of the above steps is explained in detail below.

<Settings for preview return>
The setting process for the advance notice return in step Sa1913 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step Sa2101, the display status of the reserved image displayed in each reserved display area Ga, Gb and execution display area D before the specific display mode is released and the normal display mode HMa is recognized. For example, if the fourth reserved image for the first special chart (reserved image in the fourth unit reserved display area Ga4) is displayed in the blue display mode HMb and the presentation mode is switched from presentation mode A to presentation mode B, and then switched back to presentation mode A, it is recognized that the reserved image was displayed in the blue display mode HMb.

In this case, if the number of play times has been played and the reserved image has shifted to the lower area after switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B, it is determined that the reserved image corresponding to the reserved image displayed in the fourth unit reserved display area Ga4 at the time of the mode switch was displayed in blue display mode HMb before the release process. For example, if two play times have been played after switching to presentation mode B, it is determined that the reserved image displayed in the second unit reserved display area Ga2 was displayed in blue display mode HMb at the time of the mode switch. This determination is made by referring to the return area 344f of RAM 344.

In step Sa2102, it is determined whether or not a play round of the reserved image (target reserved image) that was displayed in a specific display mode is being played. In other words, after switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B, it is determined whether or not a play round has been played and the game has progressed to the play round of the target reserved image. If a play round is not being played, the process proceeds to step Sa2103, where the number of reserved pieces of information before the target reserved image (reserved number) is determined. For example, if the target reserved image is the third reserved information, the number of reserved pieces before that is determined to be two. Note that reserved information that is currently playing a play round is not included in the reserved number. Also, the number of reserved pieces is determined separately for the first special chart and the second special chart.

In step Sa2104, it is determined whether the number of reserved items determined in step Sa2103 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (e.g., 1 item). If it is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the process proceeds to step Sa2105, where a lottery process for a return scenario is executed. The return scenario determines at what shift timing the target reserved image is returned to its original specific display mode.

In the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343, a restoration scenario table is stored that defines the timing for restoring the display mode of the reserved image to the original state in correspondence with the number of reserved items and the original specific display mode. In the restoration scenario table, for example, in correspondence with the number of reserved items being two, the restoration timing of the display mode can be selected from the first shift (shift to the second unit reserved display area Ga2), the second shift (shift to the first unit reserved display area Ga1), and the third shift (shift to the execution display area D).

In addition, in the reversion scenario table, if the original display mode is a specific display mode higher than the blue display mode HMb, it is possible to select whether to revert directly from the normal display mode HMa to the original specific display mode, or to revert gradually to the original specific display mode. Thus, there are cases where a reversion to the specific display mode before release is made by a single pending change display, and cases where a reversion to the specific display mode before release is made after multiple pending change displays.

In step Sa2105, the timing and state of return of the display state of the pending image are selected by lottery based on the return scenario table and the lottery counter (random number value) obtained from each counter area 344b of RAM 344.

After execution of step Sa2105 or if a negative judgment is made in step Sa2104 (if the number of reserved items is less than one), a return scenario setting process is performed in step Sa2106. If a return scenario lottery process is performed in step Sa2105, the display mode of the reserved image is set to be restored in the selected return scenario, and if the number of reserved items is less than one, the display mode of the reserved image is set to be restored when shifting to the execution display area D.

After execution of step Sa2106 or if a positive judgment is made in step Sa2102 (if a game round of the target reserved image is being played), in step Sa2107, a notice return flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344. The notice return flag is used by the MPU 342 to know that processing should be performed to return the display state of the reserved image to the original state. After execution of step Sa2107, the setting process for notice return is terminated.

<Second execution process of pending notice>
The second execution process of the reserved notice in step Sa1702 (FIG. 40(a)) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 44. This process is performed as part of the shift command response process, in other words, it is a process executed at the shift timing of the reserved image.

First, in step Sa2201, it is determined whether or not a notice return flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344. If a notice return flag is not stored, the second execution process of the pending notice is terminated.

If the notice return flag is stored, proceed to step Sa2202, and determine the return scenario set in step Sa2106 in the setting process for the notice return. In step Sa2203, based on the setting result of the return scenario determined in step Sa2202, it is determined whether or not the current shift timing is the timing to return the display mode of the target hold image. If it is not the timing to return, the second execution process of the hold notice is terminated.

If it is time to return, proceed to step Sa2204, and determine the display mode to which the change will be made based on the result of the return scenario settings. For example, if the display mode of the target pending image before release is the green display mode HMc, and the display mode determined by the return scenario is the green display mode HMc, the green display mode HMc is determined as the display mode to which the change will be made. Also, if the display mode determined by the return scenario is the blue display mode HMb, which is the precursor to the green display mode HMc, the blue display mode HMb is determined as the display mode to which the change will be made.

In step Sa2205, the display mode of the target reserved image is set to be changed to the display mode determined in step Sa2204. Specifically, a command to change the display mode of the reserved image at the current shift timing is set by including information indicating the reserved image whose display mode is to be changed and information indicating which display mode (display color) to change to as an output command to the display control device 350. After execution of step Sa2205, the second execution process of the reserved notice is terminated.

<Third execution process of pending notice>
The third execution process of the reserved notice in step Sa1808 (FIG. 41) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 45. This process is performed as part of the special chart change display process, in other words, it is a process performed during the execution of the game round.

First, in step Sa2301, it is determined whether or not a notice return flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344. If a notice return flag is not stored, the third execution process of the pending notice is terminated.

If the notice return flag is stored, proceed to step Sa2302 and determine whether or not a promotion flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d. Promotion flags will be described later.

If the promotion flag is not stored, proceed to step Sa2303 and determine whether the current display mode of the target reserved image is the normal display mode HMa. Note that the current display mode of the target reserved image is the normal display mode HMa when a switching operation to the original presentation mode is performed during the execution of a game round of the target reserved image.

If the current display mode is the normal display mode HMa, proceed to step Sa2304 and determine whether or not there are any reserved change points remaining in the ongoing game round. For example, if there are no reserved change points remaining, such as when the presentation mode is changed at the end of a game round of the target reserved image, proceed to step Sa2314 and erase the notice return flag stored in the various flag storage area 344d. This cancels the return process of the reserved notice presentation, and the target reserved image (the reserved image displayed in the execution display area D) continues to be displayed in the normal display mode HMa for that game round.

If a hold change point remains, in step Sa2305, the return area 344f of RAM 344 is referenced to determine the specific display mode of the target hold image before release, and this is determined as the display mode to which it will be changed. In step Sa2306, the display mode of the hold image is set to be changed to the display mode determined in step Sa2305. Specifically, a command to change the display mode of the hold image is set as an output command to the display control device 350, including information indicating which display mode (display color) to change to. As a result, the display mode of the hold image displayed in the execution display area D is changed (returned) to the specific display mode before release at the most recent hold change point.

After execution of step Sa2306 or if a negative judgment is made in step Sa2303 (if the current display mode of the target pending image is not the normal display mode HMa), step Sa2307 judges whether or not a judged flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d. Note that if the current display mode of the target pending image (the pending image displayed in the execution display area D) is not the normal display mode HMa, this means that the display mode of the pending image has already been changed to the specific display mode before release.

If it is determined in step Sa2307 that the determined flag is stored, the third execution process of the pending notice is terminated. On the other hand, if the determined flag is not stored, the promotion process of the pending notice is executed in step Sa2308.

Here, the process for promoting the pending notice in step Sa2308 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 46.

In the promotion process, first, in step Sa2401, the change pattern of the target reserved image is grasped. This is done based on the change start command (step Sa712 in FIG. 23) sent from the main control device 162 at the start of the game round (the game round currently being played) of the target reserved image.

In step Sa2402, a promotion judgment of the hold notice performance is performed based on the fluctuation pattern grasped in step Sa2401 and the promotion judgment table stored in the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343. The promotion judgment is to judge whether or not it is possible to change the display mode of the target hold image (the hold image displayed in the execution display area D) to a higher specific display mode (a higher display mode than the display mode before release).

As shown in Figure 47, the promotion determination table has an upper limit for the display mode corresponding to each variation pattern. For example, in the case of variation pattern 5H, which corresponds to a missed SPSP reach A, a change up to the red display mode HMd is permitted. Incidentally, in the case of each variation pattern corresponding to a jackpot, a change up to the rainbow display mode HMe is permitted in all of variation patterns 1A to 5A.

The promotion determination table is not limited to the configuration shown in FIG. 47, and may have other configurations, such as a different upper limit display mode for each fluctuation pattern corresponding to a jackpot. In short, it is sufficient that the upper limit display mode is determined so as to correspond to the jackpot expectation of that play count (fluctuation pattern) (in other words, so as to be consistent with the jackpot expectation).

In step Sa2402, the promotion determination table is referenced to identify the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern grasped in step Sa2401, and it is determined whether the current display mode of the target reserved image is a display mode lower than the identified upper limit display mode. As a result, if the current display mode is a display mode lower than the upper limit display mode, the display mode is allowed to be promoted, and if not, promotion is not allowed. Note that if a change in the display mode has been set in step Sa2306, it is determined whether the display mode after the change is a display mode lower than the identified upper limit display mode, and based on the result, it is determined whether promotion is possible.

After execution of step Sa2402, in step Sa2403, a judged flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344. The judged flag is set so that the MPU 342 knows that a promotion judgement has been performed, in other words, to avoid duplicate promotion judgements.

In step Sa2404, it is determined whether the result of the promotion determination in step Sa2402 allows the display mode to be promoted. If promotion is not allowed, the process exits from the promotion process for the pending notice and proceeds to step Sa2314 (FIG. 45), where the notice return flag is cleared and the third execution process for the pending notice is terminated.

If promotion is permitted, proceed to step Sa2405 and execute a lottery process for the promotion scenario. The promotion scenario determines the timing (hold change point) at which the target reserved image displayed in the execution display area D will be changed to which display mode. A promotion scenario lottery table for lottery-drawing promotion scenarios is stored in the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343, and in this promotion scenario lottery table, in addition to information for execution lottery for lottery-drawing whether or not to execute a promotion performance, multiple types of promotion scenarios are set corresponding to each upper limit display mode of the reserved notice performance. In step Sa2405, based on the promotion scenario lottery table and the lottery counters (random number values) obtained from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344, an execution lottery for whether or not to promote the display mode and a scenario lottery for promotion are performed.

In step Sa2406, it is determined whether the result of the lottery process in step Sa2405 is to upgrade the display mode. If not, the process exits the pending notice upgrade process and proceeds to step Sa2314 (Figure 45), where the notice return flag is cleared and the pending notice third execution process is terminated.

If a promotion is to be performed, the process proceeds to step Sa2407, where promotion scenario data is set so that the promotion scenario selected in step Sa2405 is executed. After step Sa2407 is executed, in steps Sa2408 to Sa2410, processing related to the change suggestion presentation is executed. These processes are similar to steps Sa1603 to Sa1605 in the first execution process of the pending notice (FIG. 38(a)), and therefore a description thereof is omitted.

After execution of step Sa2410 or if a negative judgment is made in step Sa2409, a promotion flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d in step Sa2411, and then the process for promoting the hold notice is terminated. The promotion flag is used by the MPU 342 to know that the display mode of the target hold image should be promoted.

Returning to the explanation of the third execution process of the pending notice (Figure 45), after the pending notice promotion process of step Sa2308 is executed, the third execution process of the pending notice is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sa2302 (if the promotion flag is stored), the process proceeds to step Sa2309, where it is determined whether or not it is time to promote the display mode. This judgment is made based on the result of the promotion scenario setting in step Sa2407. If it is not time to promote, the third execution process of the pending notice is terminated.

If it is the time to promote, proceed to step Sa2310, and determine the display mode to which the current change process will be changed (higher display mode) based on the promotion scenario setting results. In the following step Sa2311, a setting is made to change the display mode of the pending image displayed in the execution display area D to the display mode determined in step Sa2310. Specifically, a command to change the display mode of the pending image displayed in the execution display area D is set so as to include information indicating which display mode to change to as an output command to the display control device 350.

In step Sa2312, it is determined whether the display mode identified in step Sa2310 or the display mode set as the destination in step Sa2311 is the final display mode in the promotion performance. For example, if the promotion scenario is set to promote the display mode in multiple stages by multiple change processes, and if the current change process is an intermediate process, this step is determined to be negative as not being the final display mode, and the third execution process of the pending notice is terminated.

If it is the final display mode, in step Sa2313, the promotion flag stored in the various flag storage area 344d is erased. In the following step Sa2314, the notice return flag stored in the various flag storage area 344d is erased, and then the third execution process of the pending notice is terminated.

<Flow of display mode of reserved images when the performance mode is switched>
The flow of display modes of pending images when the presentation mode is switched will be described with reference to Figures 48 to 50.

When three reserved information for the first special chart have been acquired, and a winning entry occurs in the first operating port 62, and the fourth reserved information (reserved image HW) is acquired, the main control device 162 executes a reserved pre-reading process (step Sa305) for the reserved information acquired. Here, it is assumed that the result is that the win/loss judgment is a miss, and that the fluctuation pattern is fluctuation pattern 6H (miss for SPSP reach B).

The performance control device 143 also executes a setting process for the hold notice (step Sa1403) based on the results of the look-ahead in the main control device 162, and performs a lottery to determine the execution of the hold notice performance for the hold image HW, a lottery for the final display mode, a lottery for the performance scenario, etc. As a result of these lotteries, the red display mode HMd is selected as the final display mode, and a scenario is selected in which the display is initially in the green display mode HMc and is changed to the red display mode HMd at a later shift timing as the performance scenario. In this case, as shown in FIG. 48(a), the hold image HW in the green display mode HMc is displayed in the fourth unit hold display area Ga4 of the first hold display area Ga.

After that, when the player performs a mode switching operation using the presentation operation unit 36, the presentation mode switches from presentation mode A to presentation mode B. At that time, as shown in FIG. 48(b), the display mode of the pending image HW, which was the green display mode HMc in presentation mode A, is changed to the normal display mode HMa. In this case, the presentation control device 143 stores information indicating the display mode (green display mode HMc) of the pending image HW before the mode switching in the return area 344f of the RAM 344. Note that FIG. 48(b) shows a case where the presentation mode is switched in the middle of a game round in which the pending information of the pending image HW was obtained.

When the mode switching operation is performed again in the next game round and the presentation mode switches from presentation mode B to presentation mode A, the presentation control device 143 executes a setting process for the preview return (step Sa1913) based on the information stored in the return area 344f, grasps the original display mode (green display mode HMc), draws a return scenario, etc. As a result of the scenario drawing, it is assumed that a scenario has been selected in which the display is initially in the normal display mode HMa, and then changes to the original display mode, the green display mode HMc, at the subsequent change timing.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 49(a), at the time of switching to presentation mode A, the on-hold image HW is displayed in the normal display mode HMa. If the selected return scenario changes the display mode of the on-hold image HW to the blue display mode HMb at the next shift timing, and then to the green display mode HMc at the next shift timing, as shown in FIG. 49(b), at the time the on-hold image HW is shifted to the second unit on-hold display area Ga2, the display mode of the on-hold image HW is returned to the original green display mode HMc. This causes the display mode of the on-hold image HW, which was set to the normal display mode HMa when switching to presentation mode B, to be returned to the display mode before switching to presentation mode B.

After switching from presentation mode B to presentation mode A, the execution lottery for the change suggestion presentation (Figure 39) that suggests a change in the display mode of the reserved image (rank up) is not held until the play of the reserved image HW is started. Therefore, when the display mode is changed to the blue display mode HMb or the green display mode HMc, the change suggestion presentation is not held.

Then, as shown in FIG. 50(a), when a play round of the reserved image HW is started, the performance control device 143 executes the third execution process of the reserved notice (step Sa1808), and performs the following operations: grasping the fluctuation pattern of the reserved image HW, grasping the upper limit display mode corresponding to the grasped fluctuation pattern, and determining whether to promote it to a higher display mode.

The change pattern of the pending image HW is change pattern 6H, and the upper limit display mode in this case is the red display mode HMd (Figure 47), so in the promotion judgment, the promotion of the display mode is permitted on the basis that the current display mode (green display mode HMc) is a mode lower than the upper limit display mode. As a result, as shown in Figure 50 (b), at a predetermined pending change point in the play round of the pending image HW, the display mode of the pending image HW displayed in the execution display area D is changed to the red display mode HMd, i.e., a mode higher than the original display mode. At that time, if the execution lottery for the change suggestion effect is won, the change suggestion effect is performed and then the change to the red display mode HMd is made.

The red display mode HMd suggests that an SPSP reach effect will be performed in the play round of the reserved image. Here, the change pattern of the reserved image HW is change pattern 6H, which corresponds to the SPSP reach B miss effect, so that an SPSP reach B effect will be performed in the play round of the reserved image HW, and the suggestion by the reserved image HW and the actual play round effect are consistent.

In addition, after switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B, the game round of the reserved image HW may end without switching back to presentation mode A. In this case, the display mode of the reserved image HW is maintained in the normal display mode HMa without returning to the specific display mode.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

When the execution of the hold notice performance is cancelled by switching the performance mode and the display mode of the target hold image HW is changed from the specific display mode to the normal display mode HMa, the display mode of the target hold image HW is then restored to the original specific display mode by transitioning back to the original performance mode.

In this embodiment, the display mode of the reserved image is set to a specific display mode based on the result of the reserved read-ahead process, so that the player's expectation of a jackpot result can be aroused even before the start of a game round. Furthermore, since multiple types of modes are set as the specific display mode so that the jackpot expectation degree is different, the expectation degree can be suggested by giving it a large or small value, and this configuration is advantageous in arousing the player's expectation. In addition, since the mode is switched between the presentation mode A and the presentation mode B, the player's mood can be changed during the game, and boredom with the game can be suppressed. In this configuration, there is a concern that if the execution of the reserved notice presentation is canceled, the presentation mode is switched during the execution of the reserved notice presentation (the presentation in which the reserved image is set to a specific display mode), which may cause the player to misunderstand or feel anxious that the expectation degree that was notified or suggested by the presentation has disappeared. In this case, it is possible to limit the switching of the presentation mode during the execution of the reserved notice presentation, but this may lead to a situation in which the frequency of switching the presentation mode decreases, and the significance of providing multiple types of presentation modes may be lost.

In this regard, in this configuration, when the execution of the hold notice performance is cancelled by switching the performance mode, and then the performance mode is switched back to the original mode in this state, the target hold image HW that was changed to the normal display mode HMa is returned to the original specific display mode, so that the expectation level can be notified again. This makes it possible to inform the player that the expectation level has not disappeared, and the hold notice performance can be executed without imposing restrictions on switching the performance mode. In other words, it becomes possible to optimally achieve both the execution of the hold notice performance and the switching of the performance mode.

Information corresponding to the notification mode of the hold image when a hold notice performance is performed can be stored in the return area 344f of the RAM 344, and when the original performance mode is restored, the notification mode of the target hold image HW is set based on the return area 344f of the RAM 344. This makes it possible to preferably restore the display mode of the hold image, which has been set to the normal display mode HMa, to the original specific display mode when the original performance mode is restored.

When making the above settings, the display mode of the target pending image HW is set based on the information stored in the return area 344f, regardless of the result of the pending pre-read process performed on the target pending image.

For example, when transitioning from presentation mode A to presentation mode B and then back to presentation mode A, if the display mode of the target reserved image HW is set based on the results of the reserved pre-read performed in the previous presentation mode A, it is expected that the display mode will be set to a different mode from the display mode in the previous presentation mode A. In this case, since the display mode of the target reserved image HW in the later presentation mode A does not match the display mode in the previous presentation mode A, it is difficult for the player to understand that the released reserved notice performance has returned. In particular, in a configuration in which the display mode of the reserved image can be changed gradually, even with the same pre-read result, differences may occur in the display mode of the reserved image (reserved notice performance) at the time of switching depending on the timing of switching the presentation mode, so if the display mode in the later presentation mode A is set based on the results of the reserved pre-read process, a mode different from the display mode in the previous presentation mode A is likely to be set.

In this regard, in this configuration, the display mode is set based on the information stored in the return area 344f, not the result of the hold pre-read process, so when transitioning to the later presentation mode A, it can be set to the same display mode as the one actually displayed in the earlier presentation mode A. This allows for optimal alignment between the display mode in the earlier presentation mode A and the display mode in the later presentation mode B, making it easier for the player to recognize that the display mode (hold notice presentation) has returned.

When the display mode of the target pending image HW is to be restored to the original specific display mode by a subsequent transition to presentation mode A, the presentation scenario (return scenario) for changing the display mode of the target pending image HW from the normal display mode HMa to the original specific display mode is reset.

When the target reserved image HW is returned to its original specific display mode in the subsequent presentation mode A, the period from when the subsequent presentation mode A is switched to until the end of the game round of the target reserved image HW, i.e., the remaining period during which the target reserved image HW continues to be displayed, is expected to vary depending on the length of time spent in the immediately preceding presentation mode B. In this regard, in this configuration, the presentation scenario is reset when the target reserved image HW is returned to its original specific display mode, so that the target reserved image HW can be suitably changed to its original specific display mode even when the remaining period varies.

In the above case, the number of pending images before the target pending image HW is determined, and the performance scenario is reset based on the results.

In this case, the presentation scenario can be reset after properly understanding the remaining period, and the target pending image HW can be suitably changed to the original specific display mode regardless of the duration of stay in presentation mode B.

In the subsequent presentation mode A, the target pending image HW can be restored to the original specific display mode, and then promoted to a higher specific display mode.

In this case, the range of the display mode (suggested expectation) in the later presentation mode A is limited to the display mode in the earlier presentation mode A, preventing the range of suggestible expectation from narrowing. In that case, if a higher specific display mode is suddenly used, it may be difficult to understand the correspondence with the hold notice presentation in the earlier presentation mode A, and the presentation may become difficult to understand. In this regard, with this configuration, it is possible to first use the original specific display mode and then change to a higher display mode, making it easy to understand that the display mode of the target hold image HW has returned (the released hold notice presentation has returned), preventing player confusion.

In the above case, the display mode of the target reserved image HW is not simply promoted, but a promotion determination is made as to whether or not to promote it to a higher display mode based on the fluctuation pattern of the target reserved image HW, and whether or not to promote it to a higher mode is determined based on the result of the promotion. This makes it possible to promote the display mode of the target reserved image HW while aligning it with the game play performance (reach performance, etc.) that is actually performed in the game play of the target reserved image HW.

It is possible to execute a change suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the reserved image will change to a higher mode, and it is configured to restrict the execution of the change suggestion effect when the display mode of the target reserved image HW is returned to the original specific display mode by transitioning to the original display mode.

Because the change suggestion effect suggests that the display mode will change to a higher level, the player's expectation of the change to a higher level is aroused, and the player's attention to the reserved image can be increased. In such a configuration, for example, when the target reserved image HW is set to the green display mode HMc in the previous performance mode A and is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the green display mode HMc in the subsequent performance mode A, if a change suggestion effect is performed, it is assumed that the player will associate the higher display mode (red display mode HMd or rainbow display mode HMe) with the specific display mode (green display mode HMc) in the previous performance mode A that he remembers as a reference, even though the display mode is actually returned to the original specific display mode. In this case, the actual display mode (green display mode HMc) in the target reserved image HW is a display mode lower than the mode associated with it by the player, which may give the player an unpleasant impression. In this regard, in this configuration, even if the change corresponds to a change to a higher-level display mode, if the change is simply a return to the display mode in the previous presentation mode A, the change suggestion presentation is not executed, which prevents the player from associating the display mode with a higher-level presentation mode than the actual display mode, making it possible to effectively prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences.

The likelihood of the hold notice effect being executed differs between presentation mode A and presentation mode B.

In this configuration, the presentation characteristics related to the indication of the jackpot expectation change when the presentation mode is switched, so the difference between presentation modes can be more strongly impressed on the player than when the appearance is changed only by changing the background image or character image. However, on the other hand, if the presentation mode is switched while the display mode of the target hold image HW is kept in the specific display mode (while the ongoing hold notice presentation is continued), there is a risk that the expectation suggested by the target hold image HW will differ before and after the presentation mode is switched. In this case, by canceling the execution of the hold notice presentation when the presentation mode is switched, such inconsistency in the expectation can be suppressed, but this time, there is a concern that the player will be misled and anxious that even the expectation suggested by the specific display mode has disappeared. By applying this embodiment (such as a configuration in which the display mode of the target hold image HW is restored to the original specific display mode by switching to the original presentation mode) to such a configuration, each of these features can be made to function effectively, and each of the above effects can be preferably exerted.

<Modification 1>
In the first embodiment, when a reserved image in a specific display mode exists, for example, when switching is performed from one of the presentation modes A and B to the other, the display mode of the reserved image before the switching is stored, and the display mode of the reserved image is changed to the normal display mode. After that, when switching is performed again to the original presentation mode (one of the presentation modes) before the game round of the reserved image ends, a restoration process of the display mode of the reserved image is performed based on the information of the display mode stored at the time of the previous switching (switching to the other presentation mode), and the reserved image is changed to the original specific display mode or to a higher specific display mode.

During the period between the previous switch and the subsequent switch (re-switch to the original presentation mode), i.e., the period during which the display mode restoration process is pending, the player is playing the game, so new pending information may be generated. In this modified example, the handling of the pending notice presentation for this new pending information differs from the first embodiment described above. This modified example will be described below with reference to Figures 51 to 55. Note that in these figures, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that are similar to those in the first embodiment described above, and their description will be omitted.

<Pending command processing>
The hold command response process according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 51. This process is executed when the performance control device 143 receives a hold command (when hold information occurs), and is executed in place of the hold command response process in Fig. 31. In Fig. 51, the same processes as those in Fig. 31 are given the same step numbers, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

In step Sa1402, the value of the reserved number counter (start reserved memory number SN) provided in the various counter area 344b of RAM 344 is incremented by 1, and in step Sa2601, it is determined whether or not a return standby flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344. The return standby flag is for MPU 342 to know that the state is waiting for the return process (processing for returning the display mode of the reserved image to the original specific display mode), and is stored in the various flag storage area 344d during the standby period of the return process. The standby period of the return process includes the period from when the presentation mode A or the presentation mode B is switched from one to the other and when it is switched back to the original presentation mode (stay period in the other presentation mode), as well as the period from when it is switched to the other presentation mode until the game play of the target reserved image (the reserved image that is the target of the display mode restoration process) ends without being switched back to the original presentation mode.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sa2601 (the return standby flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step Sa1403, where the setting process for the hold notice (FIG. 34) is executed. In the setting process for the hold notice, settings are made to execute the hold notice performance for the generated hold information.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sa2601 (if the return standby flag is stored), the process proceeds to step Sa2602 without executing the setting process for the hold notice in step Sa1403, and the display mode of the hold image corresponding to the generated hold information is set to the normal display mode HMa. In other words, in this modified example, if new hold information occurs during the standby period for the return process, the configuration is such that the execution of the hold notice performance for that hold information is restricted.

The hold information is read ahead by the hold read ahead process (FIG. 26) of the main control unit 162, just like other hold information. Therefore, although the performance control unit 143 forcibly sets the display mode of the hold image to the normal display mode HMa as described above, the read ahead results such as the change pattern are in a state obtained by the hold command from the main control unit 162.

In step Sa2603, the information occurring during the restriction is stored in correspondence with the generated pending information. The information occurring during the restriction indicates that the information occurred during the restricted period. The process of step Sa2603 is performed, for example, by storing the information occurring during the restriction together with pending information such as the change pattern in the first to fourth areas (FIG. 32) provided in the pending memory area 344c of the RAM 344. Therefore, when the shift process of step Sa1704 in the shift command response process (FIG. 40) is executed, the information occurring during the restriction is shifted to the lower area side along with the pending information. This makes it possible to know which pending image occurred during the restricted period even if the display area of the pending image is shifted by the shift process. The information occurring during the restriction may be stored in a memory area other than the pending memory area 344c after it is possible to recognize which pending information it is.

After execution of step Sa2603, in step Sa1405, processing is executed to display a hold image in the hold display section 200 of the display screen G. As described above, since the display mode is set to the normal display mode HMa in step Sa2602, the hold image for hold information generated during the restricted period is displayed in the normal display mode HMa.

If the above step Sa2601 makes a negative judgment (if it is not during the restricted period) and the process goes through the setting process for the hold notice in step Sa1403 and the first execution process for the hold notice in step Sa1404 to reach step Sa1405, the hold image will be displayed in the display mode set in those processes.

<Processing for switching presentation modes>
The rendering mode switching process according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 52. This process is executed in step Sa1307 of the rendering setting process (Fig. 30) in the rendering control device 143, and is executed instead of the rendering mode switching process of Fig. 42. In Fig. 52, the same processes as those in Fig. 42 are given the same step numbers, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

After executing the switching process of the presentation mode in step Sa1903, in step Sa1904, a presentation mode flag corresponding to the switched presentation mode is set. In the following step Sa1905, it is determined whether or not a return standby flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344. Note that when the switching process of step Sa1903 is executed, a situation in which a return standby flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d means that after the presentation mode is switched (the previous switching), a re-switch to the original presentation mode has been performed. Conversely, a situation in which a return standby flag is not stored means that the previous switching has been performed (a situation in which a re-switch to the original presentation mode has not yet been performed).

If it is determined in step Sa1905 that the return standby flag is not stored (the previous switch has been performed), the process proceeds to step Sa1906, and the process of steps Sa1906 to Sa1911 is executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa1905 that the return standby flag is stored (if re-switching has occurred), the process proceeds to step Sa1912, where the return standby flag is erased from the various flag storage area 344d. This releases the restricted state of the hold notice presentation. Therefore, for hold information that occurs after this release, the setting process for the hold notice presentation (step Sa1403) and the like is executed at the time the hold information is generated (when the hold command is received).

In step Sa1913, the setting process for the advance notice return is executed, and in the following step Sa2701, it is determined whether or not there is any pending information that occurred during the restricted period. This determination is made based on the information that occurred during the restricted period stored in step Sa2603 of the pending command processing (Figure 51).

If there is no pending information that occurred during the restricted period, the processing for switching presentation modes is terminated. On the other hand, if there is pending information that occurred during the restricted period, a second setting process for pending notice is executed in step Sa2702, and then the processing for switching presentation modes is terminated.

<Second setting process for hold notice>
The second setting process for hold notice in step Sa2702 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 53.

First, in step Sa2801, the pending information that occurred during the restricted period is identified. That is, based on the information generated during the restricted period, it is determined which pending information that exists at that time occurred during the restricted period.

After executing the process of step Sa2801, the process of step Sa2802 and subsequent steps is executed for the pending calls that occurred during the identified restricted period. Note that since most of the processes from step Sa2802 onwards are similar to the processes in the setting process (FIG. 34) for the pending notice in step Sa1403 (FIG. 51), the explanation of the common processes will be simplified and the different processes will be explained in detail.

In steps Sa2802 to Sa2804, the pending memory area 344c of RAM 344 is referenced to determine the fluctuation pattern in pending occurrences during the limited period, and whether or not a jackpot has been won. In step Sa2805, the presentation mode after switching is determined. For example, if the re-switch is from presentation mode B to presentation mode A, presentation mode A is determined as the presentation mode after switching.

In steps Sa2806 to Sa2808, a hold notice execution lottery table corresponding to the switched performance mode identified in step Sa2805 is obtained, and a lottery is held to execute the hold notice performance. If the execution lottery is won, in steps Sa2809 to Sa2814, the final display mode of the hold image in the hold notice performance is determined, and the process (performance scenario) leading up to the display of the final display mode is determined.

In this case, if the final display mode selection table for selecting the final display mode or the presentation scenario selection table for selecting the presentation scenario is different for each presentation mode, the table corresponding to the presentation mode after switching identified in step Sa2805 is obtained and the selection is performed. Although the hold that occurred during the limited period occurred in the presentation mode before switching, the selection for the execution of the hold notice presentation and the selection of the final display mode are performed according to the conditions set for the presentation mode after switching.

In step Sa2815, the hold notice flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344, and then the second setting process for the hold notice is terminated. After the hold notice flag is set in this manner, a process is executed to change the display mode of the hold notice to a specific display mode in the first execution process of the hold notice in step Sa1701 in the shift command response process (FIG. 38(a)) or in the first execution process of the hold notice in step Sa1807 in the special chart change display process (FIG. 41). In other words, the hold notice performance for the hold information that occurred before the mode switch will be performed in the performance mode after the switch.

<Special chart change display processing>
The special chart change display process according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 54. This process is executed in step Sa1305 of the performance setting process (Fig. 30) in the performance control device 143, and is executed instead of the special chart change display process in Fig. 41. In Fig. 54, the same step numbers are given to the processes similar to those in Fig. 41, and their descriptions are omitted or simplified.

This process is provided as a measure to deal with the case where the play round for the target reserved image (the reserved image that is the subject of the display mode restoration process) ends without switching back to the original presentation mode.

After executing the processing for the end of the variation in step Sa1809, step Sa1810 determines whether or not the current special chart play is the play of the reserved information (the reserved image that is the target of the display mode return processing) that triggered the reserved notice performance. If it is the play of the reserved information that triggered the reserved notice performance, step Sa1811 determines whether or not a reserved notice flag or a return waiting flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d. If either the reserved notice flag or the return waiting flag is stored, step Sa1812 erases the stored flag. This cancels the return processing and releases the restricted state of the reserved notice performance.

In step Sa2901, it is determined whether or not there is any pending information that occurred during the restricted period. If there is any pending information that occurred during the restricted period, the process proceeds to step Sa2902, where it is determined which pending information occurred during the restricted period. The processes in steps Sa2901 and Sa2902 are performed based on the pending information that occurred during the restricted period stored in step Sa2603 of the pending command process (FIG. 51).

In step Sa2903, a setting process for the hold notice is executed for the hold that occurred during the limited period identified in step Sa2902. This process is similar to the setting process for the hold notice in step Sa1403 (FIG. 51) (FIG. 34), and performs setting process for executing the hold notice presentation corresponding to the current presentation mode.

In other words, if the restricted state is released without switching back to the original presentation mode, the conditions set for the presentation mode currently in use are applied to the lottery for the execution of the pending notice presentation and the lottery for the final display mode. For example, if the previous switch was from presentation mode A to presentation mode B, the conditions set for presentation mode B are applied to perform the lottery for the execution of the pending notice presentation, etc. After execution of step Sa2903 or if a negative judgment is made in step Sa2902 (if there is no pending information generated during the restricted period), the special chart change display process is terminated.

<About the flow of display of pending images corresponding to pending occurrences during the restriction period>
The flow of display modes of pending images corresponding to pending occurrences during a restricted period will be described with reference to Figure 55.

When the fourth hold information of the first special chart occurs in the presentation mode A, the main control device 162 performs a hold pre-read process (step Sa305), and the presentation control device 143 performs a setting process for the hold notice (step Sa1403). As a result, when a hold notice presentation in which the display mode is the green display mode HMc is executed, as shown in FIG. 55(a), a hold image HA in which the display mode is the green display mode HMc is displayed in the fourth unit hold display area Ga4 of the first hold display area Ga.

When a player performs a mode switching operation during a game in which the hold information corresponding to the hold image HA has been acquired, the presentation mode switches from presentation mode A to presentation mode B. At this time, as shown in FIG. 55(b), the display mode of the hold image HA is changed from the green display mode HMc to the normal display mode HMa.

And, while the presentation mode is maintained at presentation mode B, two new pieces of pending information are generated during the period until the pending image HA is shifted to the second unit pending display area Ga2. For these newly generated pending pieces of information, the presentation control device 143 does not perform the setting process for the pending notice, and the display mode is set to the normal display mode HMa. In other words, since the execution of the pending notice presentation is restricted, as shown in FIG. 55(c), the pending images HB1 and HB2 corresponding to the newly generated pending information are displayed in the third unit pending display area Ga3 and the fourth unit pending display area Ga4, respectively, with their display mode set to the normal display mode HMa.

The main control device 162 performs a hold pre-read process for the hold information of the hold images HB1 and HB2 at the timing of acquisition of the hold information, just like other hold information. The results of the pre-read are notified to the performance control device 143 via a hold command, so although the performance control device 143 is not in a state where it is performing setting processing for hold notices, it is in a state where it has acquired the results of the pre-read process for the hold information.

When the mode switching operation is performed again in the next game round and the presentation mode is switched from presentation mode B to presentation mode A, the presentation control device 143 executes the second setting process for the hold notice (step Sa2702) for the hold images HB1 and HB2 displayed in the normal display mode HMa. The second setting process for the hold notice is to draw a lottery for the execution of the hold notice presentation, a lottery for the final display mode, a lottery for the presentation scenario, etc. based on the pre-reading result notified by the main control device 162 at the timing of acquiring the hold information. When conducting these draws, the lottery table used is the one corresponding to the presentation mode A, which is the presentation mode after the switch. In other words, although the hold information for the hold images HB1 and HB2 was acquired in a situation where the presentation mode was B, the lottery for the hold notice presentation for them applies the lottery conditions set for the presentation mode A, which is the mode when the hold notice presentation is executed.

If the result of the above lottery is, for example, that the hold preview performance will not be performed for the hold image HB1, and the hold preview performance will be performed for the hold image HB2 with the display mode set to the blue display mode HMb, then as shown in FIG. 55(d), the display mode of the hold image HB1 will be maintained in the normal display mode HMa, and the display mode of the hold image HB2 will be changed to the blue display mode HMb.

The hold image HA corresponding to the hold information acquired in presentation mode A before transitioning to presentation mode B is changed to the original display mode, that is, the green display mode HMc, by the presentation control device 143 performing a setting process for the return of the notice (step Sa1913) and a second execution process for the hold notice (step Sa1702).

Also, unlike when switching to presentation mode A as described above, if the state shown in FIG. 55(c) is reached and presentation mode B is maintained while the play round for the reserved image HA (the play round for the final reserved information acquired in the previous presentation mode A) ends, the restricted state ends with the end of that play round. In this case, at the end of that play round, a second setting process for the reserved notice is executed for the reserved images HB1 and HB2. At this time, various selections such as the selection for the execution of the reserved notice presentation, the selection for the final display mode, and the selection for the presentation scenario are performed using a selection table corresponding to presentation mode B. In other words, selection conditions different from those in FIG. 55(d) are applied.

If, as a result of the above lottery, for example, a hold notice performance is executed for hold image HB1 with the display mode being the blue display mode HMb, and a hold notice performance is not executed for hold image HB2, then as shown in FIG. 55(e), the display mode of hold image HB1 is changed to the blue display mode HMb, and the display mode of hold image HB1 is maintained in the normal display mode HMa.

The modified example described above has the following advantages:

For the hold images HB1 and HB2 corresponding to the hold information acquired during a restricted state in which the execution of the hold notice performance is restricted, the display mode after the restricted state ends is set based on the results of the hold pre-reading process executed during the restricted state.

In this modified example, if the presentation mode is switched while the pending notice presentation is being executed, the execution of the pending notice presentation is restricted until the presentation mode is switched back to the original presentation mode. If new pending information is acquired in this restricted state, and such pending information is not changed to a specific display mode, there is a concern that it may not be possible to arouse the player's sense of anticipation regarding the pending information acquired in the restricted state.

In this regard, according to the present configuration, the display mode of the reserved images HB1, HB2 corresponding to the reserved information acquired during the restricted state can be changed to a specific display mode after the restricted state ends, thereby stimulating the player's sense of anticipation regarding the reserved information acquired during the restricted state. In this case, the change to the specific display mode after the restricted state (execution of the reserved notice presentation) is performed based on the results of the reserved read-ahead process executed during the restricted state, so the reserved read-ahead process can be performed in the same way as when the restricted state is not in effect. In other words, since there is no need to change the configuration of the reserved read-ahead process, it is possible to execute the reserved notice presentation triggered by the reserved information acquired during the restricted state after the restricted state, while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

The system is configured so that the hold pre-read process for acquired hold information is performed according to the timing of acquisition of the hold information, regardless of whether the hold information is in a restricted state or not.

In this case, the hold read-ahead process can be performed according to the timing of acquisition of the hold information whether the state is restricted or not, so there is no need to distinguish between the hold read-ahead process in the former and latter cases. This makes it possible to execute a hold notice performance triggered by the hold information acquired during the restricted state after the restricted state, while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

The display mode of the hold images HB1 and HB2 after the restricted state is set (hold notice effect setting) is configured to be executed when the restricted state ends.

For example, when setting the display mode after the restricted state based on the results of the reserved read-ahead process executed during the restricted state, it is not impossible to execute the setting during the restricted state. However, if a play round of reserved images HB1, HB2 for which the display mode has been set is executed during the restricted state, the display period of the reserved images will end without the display mode setting being reflected, and there is a risk that the setting will be wasted. In this regard, with the present configuration, the display mode is set when the restricted state ends, preventing such waste from occurring and enabling efficient processing.

When pending information is acquired during a restricted state, information occurring during restriction indicating that the pending information was acquired during a restricted state is stored in the pending memory area 344c of RAM 344.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to know after the restricted state that the pending information was acquired during the restricted state based on the information generated during the restricted state stored in the pending memory area 344c of the RAM 344. Therefore, even if pending information acquired before the restricted state and pending information acquired during the restricted state are mixed after the restricted state ends, it is possible to easily identify the pending information acquired during the restricted state. As a result, when setting the display mode of each pending image after the restricted state, it is possible to distinguish between pending information acquired during the restricted state and pending information that was not, and to process only the pending information acquired during the restricted state.

<Modification 2>
In this modified example, the display mode of the reserved image is restored by distinguishing between a case where a presentation mode with a high occurrence frequency of the reserved notice presentation (presentation mode A) is switched to a case where a presentation mode with a low occurrence frequency of the reserved notice presentation (presentation mode B) is switched to a case where a presentation mode with a low occurrence frequency of the reserved notice presentation is switched to a case where a presentation mode with a high occurrence frequency of the reserved notice presentation ...

In the first embodiment described above, when the presentation mode is switched in a situation where a reserved image of a specific display mode exists, and the reserved image is made the normal display mode HMa, and then the original presentation mode is switched back to, the display mode is restored to the reserved image. However, in this modified example, the display mode is restored to the reserved image even if the original presentation mode is not switched back to. Incidentally, the occurrence frequency of the reserved notice presentation in presentation mode A (the probability of the reserved notice presentation being executed when the pre-read result is incorrect) is higher than that in presentation mode B, in other words, the probability of a big win in presentation mode A for a specific display mode of the same display color is lower than that in presentation mode B, which is the same as in the first embodiment described above.

<Processing for switching presentation modes>
The rendering mode switching process according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 56. This process is executed in step Sa1307 of the rendering setting process (Fig. 30) in the rendering control device 143, and is executed in place of the rendering mode switching process of Fig. 42. In Fig. 56, the same processes as those in Fig. 42 are given the same step numbers, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

After executing the processing for switching the presentation mode in step Sa1903, in step Sa1904, a presentation mode flag corresponding to the switched presentation mode is set in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344. The presentation mode flag is used by the MPU 342 to grasp the presentation mode after switching before the presentation mode is switched, and the current presentation mode after the presentation mode is switched.

In step Sa3101, it is determined whether or not a hold notice flag is stored in the various flag storage areas. The hold notice flag is used by the MPU 342 to determine whether a hold notice performance should be executed or is currently being executed.

If the hold notice flag is not stored, the process for switching presentation modes is terminated. On the other hand, if the hold notice flag is stored, the process proceeds to step Sa3102, where the hold notice flag is erased. As a result, if a hold notice presentation was being executed before the mode was switched, the continuation of the hold notice presentation being executed is canceled, and if the hold notice presentation was in standby, the standby (execution reservation) of the hold notice presentation is canceled.

In step Sa3103, it is determined whether or not there is a pending image being displayed in a specific display mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is an pending image being displayed in each pending display area Ga, Gb that is being displayed in any of the blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, or rainbow display mode HMe. This determination is made by referring to the information for each area stored in the display mode memory area 344e of RAM 344. If there is no pending image being displayed in a specific display mode, the processing for switching presentation modes is terminated.

If there is a pending image being displayed in a specific display mode, proceed to step Sa3104 and determine whether the current mode switch is a switch from presentation mode A to presentation mode B. In other words, determine whether the switch is from a presentation mode with a higher occurrence frequency of pending preview performance to a presentation mode with a lower occurrence frequency (in other words, whether the switch is from a presentation mode with a lower chance of winning the pending preview performance to a presentation mode with a higher chance). If the switch is to presentation mode B, in step Sa3105, reference is made to the pending memory area 344c of RAM 344, and the change pattern of the pending image being displayed in the specific display mode is grasped.

In step Sa3106, a return judgment is made based on the fluctuation pattern grasped in step Sa3105 and the return judgment table stored in the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343. The return judgment is to determine whether or not it is possible to return the pending image displayed in the specific display mode to the specific display mode again after switching the presentation mode.

As shown in FIG. 57, the table for determining the return has an upper limit for the display mode corresponding to each variation pattern. For example, in the case of variation pattern 5H corresponding to a miss in SPSP Reach A, a return (change) to the green display mode HMc is permitted. When a hold notice performance is executed in a situation where the player is in performance mode B, the upper limit display mode corresponding to variation pattern 5H is set to the red display mode HMd, but the upper limit display mode in the table for determining the return is limited to the lower green display mode HMc. This is also true for other miss-corresponding variation patterns such as variation pattern 3H and variation pattern 4H. Incidentally, in the case of each variation pattern corresponding to a jackpot, a change to the rainbow display mode HMe is permitted in all of variation patterns 1A to 5A. Note that the table for determining the return is not limited to the configuration shown in FIG. 57, and may have other configurations, such as a different upper limit display mode for each variation pattern corresponding to a jackpot.

In step Sa3106, the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern grasped in step Sa3105 is identified by referring to the reversion determination table, and it is determined whether the current display mode of the target pending image is equal to or lower than the identified upper limit display mode. As a result, if the current display mode is equal to or lower than the upper limit display mode, the reversion of the display mode is permitted, and if not, the reversion is not permitted.

In step Sa3107, it is determined whether the result of the return judgment in step Sa3106 allows the return of the display mode. If return is not allowed, the process proceeds to step Sa3108, where a process is executed to cancel the display of the reserved image displayed in the specific display mode. In other words, the reserved image displayed in the specific display mode is set to switch to the normal display mode HMa in response to the switching of the presentation mode. In addition, in the cancellation process of step Sa3108, a process is executed to erase the display mode information stored in the display mode memory area 344e and the presentation scenario data set in step Sa1513 of the setting process for the reserved notice (FIG. 34). After execution of step Sa3108, the presentation mode switching process is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sa3107 above (if the return of the display mode is permitted), in step Sa3109, the display mode information of each pending image stored in the display mode storage area 344e of RAM 344 is stored in the return area 344f of RAM 344. In step Sa3110, similar to step Sa3108 above, processing is executed for canceling the display of pending images displayed in a specific display mode in that specific display mode.

In step Sa3111, the setting process for the preview return is executed, and then the processing for switching presentation modes is terminated. The setting process for the preview return in step Sa3111 is similar to the setting process for the preview return in step Sa1913 (FIG. 43) of the processing for switching presentation modes (FIG. 42) according to the first embodiment described above. In the setting process for the preview return, setting processes are performed such as the timing at which the display mode of the pending image is to be restored (changed) after switching to presentation mode B, and the method of restoration (whether to restore in a single change or to restore in stages).

When the setting process for the preview return is performed as described above, the display mode of the target preview is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode in the second execution process (Fig. 44) of the reserved preview in step Sa1702 of the shift command response process (Fig. 40(a)) and in the third execution process (Fig. 45) of the reserved preview in step Sa1808 of the special chart change display process (Fig. 41). At this time, in the second execution process of the reserved preview, processing is performed to return the display mode of the target preview to the original specific display mode (the specific display mode before switching to performance mode B).

In addition, in the third execution process of the reserved notice, the current display mode of the target reserved image during the game round of the target reserved image (the display mode restored by the restoration process) is compared with the upper limit display mode to which the fluctuation pattern of the target reserved image corresponds, and it is determined whether or not a change (promotion) to a higher level display mode is possible. Then, if such a change is possible, a promotion determination and a promotion lottery are carried out, and the display mode is promoted.

At this time, the upper limit display mode referenced is the one set for presentation mode B (conforming to the conditions of the hold notice presentation in presentation mode B). Therefore, even if the revertible display mode is limited to a lower upper limit display mode determined by the reversion determination table at the time of reversion of the display mode by switching to presentation mode B, the display mode of the target hold image can ultimately be changed within the range of the upper limit display mode suitable for presentation mode B.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sa3104 (switching from presentation mode B to presentation mode A), the processing of steps Sa3105 to Sa3107 is skipped and the processing proceeds to step Sa3109. In other words, when switching from presentation mode B, which has a lower frequency of occurrence of hold notice presentations, to presentation mode A, which has a higher frequency, the display mode in presentation mode B is configured to be reflected as is in presentation mode A after the mode switch.

<Flow of display mode of reserved images when the performance mode is switched>
The flow of display modes of the reserved image when the presentation mode is switched will be described with reference to Fig. 58. Here, the case of switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B will be described. As already described, presentation mode A is a mode in which the frequency of occurrence of the reserved notice presentation is relatively high, and presentation mode B is a mode in which the frequency of occurrence of the reserved notice presentation is relatively low.

When the third reserved information (reserved image HW) of the first special chart occurs in a situation where the presentation mode is A, the main control device 162 executes a reserved pre-reading process (step Sa305) for the reserved information that has occurred. Here, it is assumed that the result of the pre-reading is that the win/loss judgment is a miss and the fluctuation pattern is fluctuation pattern 4H (SP reach B miss).

The performance control device 143 also executes a setting process for the hold notice (step Sa1403) based on the results of the look-ahead in the main control device 162, and performs a lottery to determine the execution of the hold notice performance for the hold image HW, a lottery for the final display mode, a lottery for the performance scenario, etc. As a result of these lotteries, the green display mode HMc is selected as the final display mode, and a scenario is selected in which the display is initially in the blue display mode HMb and changes to the green display mode HMc at the first shift timing as the performance scenario. In this case, as shown in FIG. 58 (a1), the hold image HW in the blue display mode HMb is displayed in the third unit hold display area Ga3 of the first hold display area Ga.

After that, when the display mode of the pending image HW is the blue display mode HMb and the player performs a mode switching operation using the presentation operation unit 36, the presentation mode switches from presentation mode A to presentation mode B, and the display mode of the pending image HW is changed to the normal display mode HMa, as shown in FIG. 58 (a2).

When switching to presentation mode B, the presentation control device 143 performs a return judgment as to whether or not to return the display mode of the pending image HW to a specific display mode (step Sa3106). In the return judgment, the fluctuation pattern of the pending image HW is identified, and the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is grasped based on the return judgment table (Figure 57), and it is determined whether or not the display mode of the pending image HW before switching to presentation mode B is equal to or lower than the grasped upper limit display mode.

Here, the upper limit display mode of fluctuation pattern 4H, which is the fluctuation pattern of the pending image HW, is the blue display mode HMb, and since the display mode of the pending image HW before switching to presentation mode B is the blue display mode HMb, the display mode of the pending image HW before switching to presentation mode B is a mode below the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. In this case, a return to the specific display mode is permitted, and a return scenario is set in the setting process for the preview return (step Sa3111).

As a result, if a scenario is set to return to the blue display mode HMb at the next shift timing, as shown in FIG. 58 (a3), when the display position of the hold image HW is shifted from the third unit hold display area Ga3 to the second unit hold display area Ga2, the display mode of the hold image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the blue display mode HMb.

Then, the display position of the reserved image HW in the blue display mode HMb shifts to the execution display area D, and when a play round of the reserved image HW is started, the presentation control device 143 executes the third execution process of the reserved notice (step Sa1808) and determines whether to promote to a higher display mode. In this case, the promotion determination is performed by applying the determination conditions of presentation mode B.

For example, if the upper limit display mode of the fluctuation pattern 4H in presentation mode B is set to a lower blue display mode HMb than in presentation mode A, promotion of the reserved image HW is not permitted, and the display mode of the reserved image HW is maintained in the blue display mode HMb. Also, if the upper limit display mode of the fluctuation pattern 4H in presentation mode B is set to the green display mode HMc, as in presentation mode A, promotion is permitted, and the display mode of the reserved image HW is promoted to the green display mode HMc at a predetermined reserved change point in the play round of the reserved image HW.

Next, we will explain what happens when the presentation mode is switched when the display mode of the pending image HW is set to the green display mode HMc in presentation mode A.

As shown in FIG. 58 (a1), a hold image HW in a blue display mode HMb is displayed in the third unit hold display area Ga3, and the display position of the hold image HW shifts to the second unit hold display area Ga2 without switching the presentation mode, and as shown in FIG. 58 (b1), the display mode of the hold image HW is changed from the blue display mode HMb to the green display mode HMc.

In this state, when the player performs a mode switching operation using the presentation operation unit 36, the presentation mode switches from presentation mode A to presentation mode B, and the display mode of the pending image HW is changed to the normal display mode HMa, as shown in FIG. 58 (b2).

At this time, the performance control device 143 performs a return judgment, but the display mode of the pending image HW before switching to performance mode B becomes a display mode higher than the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. In this case, a return to the specific display mode is not permitted. As a result, the display mode of the pending image HW is maintained in the normal display mode HMa for the period until it is shifted to the execution display area D.

Then, when the display position of the reserved image HW, which has been set to the normal display mode HMa, shifts to the execution display area D and a play round of the reserved image HW is started, the presentation control device 143 executes the third execution process of the reserved notice and determines whether to promote to a higher display mode. For example, if the upper limit display mode of the variable pattern 4H in presentation mode B is set to the blue display mode HMb, promotion to the blue display mode HMb is permitted, and if it is set to the green display mode HMc, promotion to the green display mode HMc is permitted. Note that FIG. 58 (b3) shows a case where the display mode of the reserved image HW is promoted to the blue display mode HMb.

The modified example described above has the following advantages:

When the presentation mode is switched in a situation where the on-hold image is in a specific display mode (a situation where the on-hold notice presentation is being executed), the system is configured to determine whether or not the display mode of the target on-hold image HW in the presentation mode after the switch is to be the same as the display mode in the presentation mode before the switch.

In this modified example, the mode is switched between presentation mode A and presentation mode B, allowing the player to change his/her mood during play and preventing boredom with the game. In this case, presentation mode B is set as a presentation mode in which the hold notice presentation is less likely to be executed than presentation mode A. In this configuration, switching presentation modes changes the presentation characteristics related to the indication of the likelihood of a jackpot, so the difference between presentation modes can be more strongly impressed on the player than when the change is limited to appearance, such as changing the background image or character image.

However, on the other hand, when the conditions for switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B are met in a situation where the reserved image is in a specific display mode, if the presentation mode is switched while the display mode of the target reserved image HW is maintained, there is a concern that only the corresponding expectation level will change even though there is no change in the display mode. For example, even with the same specific display mode of green display mode HMc, the expectation level in presentation mode B is higher than that in presentation mode A. Therefore, if the display mode of the target reserved image HW remains in the green display mode HMc and the presentation mode is switched from presentation mode A to presentation mode B, if the player understands the expectation level of the green display mode HMc based on the expectation level in presentation mode B after the mode switch, there is a risk that the player will associate it with a higher expectation level than the game round presentation (such as a reach presentation) that is actually performed in the game round.

In this regard, in this configuration, when the presentation mode is switched while the reserved image is in a specific display mode, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the target reserved image HW should be the same as the display mode in the presentation mode before the switch. This makes it possible to prevent inconsistencies in the expectation level from occurring, and makes it possible to appropriately display the reserved image after the transition to presentation mode B.

The display mode of the target pending image HW when switching to presentation mode B is compared with the upper limit display mode set for presentation mode B, and based on the result, it is determined whether or not to make the display mode of the target pending image HW the same as the display mode before the mode switch.

In the above configuration, the display mode at the time of transition to presentation mode B is compared with the upper limit display mode set for presentation mode B to determine whether or not to make the display mode the same as that in presentation mode A. This makes it possible to determine whether or not to make the display mode the same in presentation mode B based on the corresponding expectation level for each mode (blue display mode HMb, etc.), making it possible to appropriately display the pending image after transition to presentation mode B.

In the above case, multiple upper limit display modes in presentation mode B are set corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, and the above judgment is made by applying the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern predicted for the target reserved image HW. This makes it possible to determine whether or not to use the same mode based on the prediction result of the target reserved image HW, that is, the win/loss result actually notified in the play round of the target reserved image HW and the play round presentation (reach presentation, etc.) performed in that play round.

When the display mode of the target hold image HW in presentation mode B is to be the same as the display mode in presentation mode A before the mode change, the target hold image HW is first changed to the normal display mode HMa and then to the same mode.

In the above configuration, when the display mode of the target hold image HW is to be the same as before the mode change, it is possible to change it to the normal display mode HMa and then to the specific display mode. With this configuration, the display mode of the target hold image HW can be changed to the normal display mode HMa when switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B, whether the display mode is to be the same as before the mode change or not. This makes it possible to reduce the unnaturalness of changing from the specific display mode to the normal display mode HMa due to a determination that the display mode should not be the same. In addition, by changing to the normal display mode HMa and then to the specific display mode, it is possible to arouse a sense of expectation that the hold image set to the normal display mode HMa will be changed to the specific display mode after the transition to presentation mode B, including when it is determined that the display mode should not be the same, and it is possible to maintain the sense of expectation for the hold image (hold information).

When switching from presentation mode B to presentation mode A, the above judgment is not performed, and the display mode of the target pending image in presentation mode A after the mode switch is the same as the display mode in presentation mode A before the mode switch.

In the above configuration, when the mode is switched from a high to a low expectation for the on-hold preview performance, no determination is made as to whether or not to keep the same mode. This makes it possible to prevent excessive restrictions on the continuation of the on-hold preview performance (maintenance of the specific display mode of the on-hold image), and also makes it possible to reduce the processing load.

<Modification 3>
In the first embodiment and each modified example, the display mode of the reserved image before and after the performance mode switching is targeted, but in this modified example, the display mode of the reserved image before and after the opening and closing execution mode is targeted. Hereinafter, this modified example will be described with reference to Figures 59 to 67. In these figures, the same reference numerals are used for the same configuration as in the first embodiment and each modified example, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In this modified example, the variable display time table for the high probability mode and high frequency support mode (high probability game state) and the variable display time table for the low probability mode and high frequency support mode (time-saving game state) are set separately from the variable display time table for the low probability mode and low frequency support mode (normal game state) (Figure 14).

In the variable display time table for the high probability game state, as shown in Figures 59 (a) and (b), settings are made for a jackpot and a miss, respectively. In the variable display time table for a jackpot, a variable pattern 11A corresponding to an SPSP reach A hit and a variable pattern 12A corresponding to an SPSP reach B hit are set in accordance with the value of the variable type counter CS.

In addition, in the variation display time table for misses, variation pattern 11H corresponding to a complete miss, variation pattern 12H corresponding to an SPSP reach A miss, and variation pattern 13H corresponding to an SPSP reach B miss are set in accordance with the value of the variation type counter CS. When the value of the variation type counter CS is within the range of 0 to 79, in the normal game state, it corresponds to either a complete miss (variation pattern 1H) or a normal reach miss (variation pattern 2H) (Figure 14 (b)), but in the high probability game state, it corresponds only to a complete miss (variation pattern 11H) (Figure 59 (b)). In other words, even if the variation type counter CS has the same value, different game round presentations can be implemented in the normal game state and the high probability game state.

In the variable display time table for the time-saving game state, settings are made for a jackpot and a miss, as shown in Figures 59 (c) and (d). In the variable display time table for a jackpot, a variable pattern 21A corresponding to an SP reach A hit, a variable pattern 22A corresponding to an SP reach B hit, a variable pattern 23A corresponding to an SPSP reach A hit, and a variable pattern 24A corresponding to an SPSP reach B hit are set in accordance with the value of the variable type counter CS.

In addition, in the variable display time table for misses, a variable pattern 21H corresponding to a complete miss, a variable pattern 22H corresponding to a SP reach A miss, a variable pattern 23H corresponding to a SP reach B miss, a variable pattern 24H corresponding to an SPSP reach A miss, and a variable pattern 25H corresponding to an SPSP reach B miss are set in accordance with the value of the variable type counter CS. In the variable display time table for the time-saving game state, when comparing the same value of the variable type counter CS, different game number presentations can be implemented in the normal game state and the high probability game state. In the variable display time table for misses corresponding to the time-saving game state, the rate of complete misses is lower than in other game states, but this is to prevent the time-saving game state from ending without a reach presentation by increasing the frequency of the reach presentation.

Note that the number of types of fluctuation patterns in each fluctuation display time table shown in FIG. 59 and the corresponding relationship with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS are merely examples, and other configurations are also possible as long as they are set to different contents in the normal game state, the high probability game state, and the time-saving game state.

<Settings for hold notice>
The setting process for the hold notice according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 60. This process is executed when the performance control device 143 receives a hold command from the main control device 162. This process is executed in step Sa1403 of the hold command response process (Fig. 31), and is executed instead of the setting process for the hold notice in Fig. 34. In Fig. 60, the same step numbers are used for the processes similar to those in Fig. 34, and their explanations are omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sa1501, the change pattern information etc. for the current reserved information is determined based on the reserved information stored in step Sa1401 of the reserved command response process (FIG. 31). In step Sa1502, it is determined whether the current reserved information corresponds to a jackpot based on the change pattern information etc. determined in step Sa1501.

If the information does not correspond to a jackpot, that is, if the information is reserved for a miss, the process proceeds to step Sa3301, where it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern of the reserved information is fluctuation pattern 1H (fluctuation pattern corresponding to a complete miss in a normal game state), fluctuation pattern 11H (fluctuation pattern corresponding to a complete miss in a high probability game state), or fluctuation pattern 21H (fluctuation pattern corresponding to a complete miss in a time-saving game state). If a negative judgment is made in step Sa3301 (if it is not fluctuation pattern 1H, fluctuation pattern 11H, or fluctuation pattern 21H) or if a positive judgment is made in step Sa1502 (if the information is reserved for a jackpot), the current game state is determined in step Sa3302. Specifically, it is determined whether the current game state is a normal game state, a high probability game state, or a time-saving game state.

In step Sa3303, the corresponding reserved notice execution lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343. A plurality of reserved notice execution lottery tables are set corresponding to the presence or absence of a jackpot and the game state. For example, the reserved notice execution lottery table corresponding to the case where the current reserved information is a jackpot is set to have a higher winning probability than the reserved notice execution lottery table corresponding to the case where the current reserved information is a miss. In addition, the reserved notice execution lottery table corresponding to the high probability game state and the case where the current reserved information is a miss is set to have a lower winning probability than the reserved notice execution lottery table corresponding to the normal game state or the time-saving game state and the case where the current reserved information is a miss, in order to suppress the occurrence of false effects in the high probability game state.

It is not necessary to vary the probability of the hold preview effect depending on the game state, and the probability of the hold preview effect being executed may be the same for the above three states or any two of those states.

In step Sa1506, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the hold notice performance, based on the hold notice execution lottery table obtained in step Sa3303 and the lottery counter (random number value) obtained from each counter area 344b of RAM 344. In step Sa1507, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step Sa1506 is a winning result. If the lottery result is an execution winning result, the process proceeds to step Sa1508, and the corresponding hold number is determined.

In step Sa3304, a final display mode selection table corresponding to the current game state is obtained from the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343. In the final display mode selection table, the range of selectable final display modes and the selection probability of each display mode are set in correspondence with each variation pattern. In this modified example, since different variation patterns are set according to the game state, the final display mode selection table is also set separately to correspond to each game state.

Figure 61 shows a table for a jackpot and a table for a loss as examples of a final display mode lottery table in a high probability game state. Also, Figure 62 shows a table for a jackpot and a table for a loss as examples of a final display mode lottery table in a time-saving game state.

In step Sa1510, the final display mode for the current reserved notice performance is selected based on the fluctuation pattern determined in step Sa1501, the final display mode selection table obtained in step Sa3304, and the counters (random number values) for selection obtained from each counter area 344b of RAM 344. In step Sa1511, the performance scenario selection table is obtained from the various table storage area 343a of ROM 343. In step Sa1512, the performance scenario for the current reserved notice performance is selected based on the number of reserved items determined in step Sa1508, the final display mode determined in step Sa1510, the performance scenario selection table obtained in step Sa1511, and the counters (random number values) for selection obtained from each counter area 344b of RAM 344.

In step Sa1513, the performance scenario data is set so that the performance scenario selected in step Sa1512 is executed. In step Sa1514, a hold notice flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344, and then the setting process for the hold notice is terminated. The hold notice flag is used by the MPU 342 to know that a hold notice performance should be executed.

When the setting process for the hold notice is performed as described above, the display mode of the target hold image is changed based on the setting result of step Sa1513 in step Sa1404 of the hold command response process (Fig. 31), step Sa1701 of the shift command response process (Fig. 40), and the first execution process (Fig. 38) of the hold notice in step Sa1807 of the special chart change display process (Fig. 41).

Also, if a positive judgment is made in step Sa3301 (if the change pattern of the hold information is a change pattern of a complete miss pair), the process proceeds to step Sa1515, where the display mode of the hold image is set to the normal display mode HMa. After that, the setting process for the hold notice is terminated.

<Open/Close Execution Mode Processing>
The opening/closing execution mode process according to this modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 63. This process is executed in step Sa1306 of the effect setting process (Fig. 30).

First, in step Sa3401, it is determined whether the opening and closing execution mode is being executed. If the opening and closing execution mode is not being executed, in step Sa3402 it is determined whether an opening command (step Sa909 in FIG. 25) has been received from the main control device 162, i.e., whether it is time to start the opening and closing execution mode. If an opening command has not been received, the opening and closing execution mode processing is terminated.

If an opening command has been received, the process proceeds to step Sa3403, where opening processing is executed. In the opening processing, a transmission command to the display control device 350 is set so that a predetermined opening performance is executed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75, etc.

In step Sa3404, it is determined whether the number of reserved items (total number of reserved items 1 and 2) is 0, i.e., whether any reserved items exist. If the number of reserved items is 0 (no reserved items exist), the process for the opening and closing execution mode ends.

If the number of reserved items is not 0 and there are reserved items, proceed to step Sa3405 and determine whether or not a reserved notice flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344. If a reserved notice flag is stored, the reserved notice flag is erased in step Sa3406. As a result, if a reserved notice performance was being executed before the start of the opening/closing execution mode, the continuation of the reserved notice performance being executed is canceled, and if the reserved notice performance was in a standby state, the standby (execution reservation) of the reserved notice performance is canceled.

In step Sa3407, it is determined whether or not there is a pending image displayed in a specific display mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is an pending image displayed in each pending display area Ga, Gb that is displayed in any of the blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, or rainbow display mode HMe. This determination is made by referring to the information for each area stored in the display mode memory area 344e of RAM 344.

If there is a pending image displayed in a specific display mode, the process proceeds to step Sa3408, where information indicating in which mode the pending image is displayed in the specific display mode is stored in the return area 344f of RAM344. In the following step Sa3409, information indicating the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is stored in RAM344. For example, if the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is a normal game state, information corresponding to the normal game state is stored in a specified area of RAM344. Note that this information is stored in a separate memory area from the state flag indicating the current game state in order to distinguish it from the flag.

In step Sa3410, a standby flag for return is set in the various flag storage area 344d. The standby flag for return is used by the MPU 342 to recognize that the MPU 342 is waiting for a return process to return the display mode of the reserved image to the original specific display mode. In the following step Sa3411, a process is executed to erase the reserved image from the display screen G of the pattern display device 75. That is, in this modified example, the reserved image displayed on the reserved display unit 200 is configured to be erased when the open/close execution mode is started. After execution of step Sa3411, the process for the open/close execution mode is terminated.

Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sa3405 (if the hold notice flag is not stored) or if a negative judgment is made in step Sa3407 (if there is no hold image in a specific display mode), the process proceeds to step Sa3411, and the hold image deletion process is executed. In other words, even if the hold notice performance is not being executed, the hold image in the hold display unit 200 is deleted when the opening and closing execution mode is started.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sa3401 above (if the game is in the opening and closing execution mode), the process proceeds to step Sa3412, where it is judged whether or not a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the ending performance. If not, processing for the opening and closing execution mode is executed in step Sa3413, and then the processing for the opening and closing execution mode is terminated. In the processing for the opening and closing execution mode, a transmission command is set to the display control device 350 so that a predetermined round performance, a winning performance, an ending performance, etc. is executed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75, etc.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sa3412 (if a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the ending performance), the process proceeds to step Sa3414, where it is determined whether or not a return standby flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d. If a return standby flag is not stored, the process for the opening/closing execution mode is terminated.

If the return standby flag is stored, the process proceeds to step Sa3415, where a process is executed to erase the return standby flag. Here, a situation in which a positive determination is made in step Sa3414 means that the open/close execution mode is performed while the hold notice performance is being executed, and the display of the hold image is erased. In this case, the process proceeds to step Sa3416, where a setting process for the notice return is executed to return the display mode of the hold image to a specific display mode. Details of this process will be described later.

After step Sa3416 is executed, step Sa3417 performs settings to display the pending image in the normal display mode HMa. That is, when returning the display mode of the pending image to the specific display mode, immediately after the end of the opening and closing execution mode, the display of the pending image is resumed in the normal display mode HMa. After step Sa3417 is executed, the processing for the opening and closing execution mode is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sa3414 above (if the return standby flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step Sa3418, where it is judged whether the number of reserved items (total number of special 1 reserved items and special 2 reserved items) is 0. If the number of reserved items is 0 and there are no reserved items, the process for the open/close execution mode ends. On the other hand, if the number of reserved items is not 0 and there are reserved items, the reserved images for those reserved items are displayed in the normal display mode HMa in step Sa3417.

<Settings for preview return>
The setting process for the advance notice return in step Sa3416 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step Sa3501, the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is determined. This determination is made based on the information stored in step Sa3409 (Figure 63). In step Sa3502, the type of jackpot that triggered the current opening and closing execution mode is determined. This determination is made based on the reserved information obtained by analyzing the fluctuation start command.

In step Sa3503, a return judgment of the display mode is made based on the game state before the opening and closing execution mode grasped in step Sa3501, the big win type grasped in step Sa3502, and the return judgment table stored in the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343. The return judgment is to determine whether or not the reserved image that was set to a specific display mode in the game state before the opening and closing execution mode should be returned to its original display mode in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode.

As shown in FIG. 65, in the return judgment table, whether or not to allow the return of the display mode is determined in accordance with the game state before the opening and closing execution mode and the jackpot type of the jackpot that triggered the current opening and closing execution mode. Specifically, when the game state is common before and after the opening and closing execution mode, such as when the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is a time-saving game state and the jackpot type is a normal jackpot, or when the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is a high-probability game state and the jackpot type is a probability variable jackpot, the return of the display mode is restricted when the game state is different before and after the opening and closing execution mode, such as when the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is a time-saving game state and the jackpot type is a probability variable jackpot, when the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is a high-probability game state and the jackpot type is a normal jackpot, or when the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is a normal game state and the jackpot type is a time-saving game state.

However, if the game state before the opening and closing execution mode was a normal game state and the jackpot type was a guaranteed jackpot, the system refers to the results of the pre-reading of the target reserved image to determine whether or not to allow a return. Specifically, if the results of the pre-reading of the target reserved image are a result other than a normal jackpot, the system restricts the return of the above display mode, whereas if the results of the pre-reading of the target reserved image are a normal jackpot, the system allows the return of the above display mode. This is to prevent the high probability game state from ending before the player is able to fully enjoy playing in the high probability game state.

In other words, if the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is the normal game state and the jackpot type is a probability jackpot, the game mode will switch from the first special symbol game (left-hand play state) to the second special symbol game (right-hand play state) via the opening and closing execution mode. At that time, if a normal jackpot is present in the reserve of the first special symbol and the reserve is consumed, the state will end early even though it was possible to transition to a high probability game state. Therefore, if there is such a risk, the display mode of the reserved image of the first special symbol is returned to the specific display mode to alert the player and encourage quick entry into the second operation port 63 (starting port for the second special symbol).

In this modified example, the reversion of the above display mode is restricted if the result of the pre-read of the target reserved image is a guaranteed jackpot, but this may also be permitted.

Returning to the explanation of the setting process for the advance notice return (FIG. 64), after execution of step Sa3503, in step Sa3504, it is determined whether or not the result of the determination process of step Sa3503 permitted the return of the display mode. If the result did not permit the return, the setting process for the advance notice return is terminated. In other words, the display mode of the target pending image after the opening and closing execution mode is left as the normal display mode HMa.

If return is permitted, in step Sa3505, the return area 344f of RAM 344 is referenced to ascertain the display state of the target pending image before the open/close execution mode. After step Sa3505 is executed, the processing of steps Sa3506 to Sa3510 is executed.

These processes are similar to steps Sa2103 to Sa2107 in FIG. 43, and set the timing at which the display mode of the target reserved image is to be restored to the original display mode, corresponding to the number of reserved images before the target reserved image. That is, in step Sa3506, the number of reserved images before the target reserved image is determined, and if the determined number of reserved images is 1 or more, in step Sa3508, a return scenario for changing the display mode determined in step Sa3505 is drawn by lottery. In step Sa3509, the return scenario data is set so that the drawn return scenario is executed, and in step Sa3510, a notice return flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344. The notice return flag is used by MPU 342 to determine that a process should be executed to restore the display mode of the reserved image.

When the setting process for the preview return is performed as described above, the display mode of the target preview is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode in the second execution process (Fig. 44) of the reserved preview in step Sa1702 of the shift command response process (Fig. 40(a)) and in the third execution process (Fig. 45) of the reserved preview in step Sa1808 of the special chart change display process (Fig. 41). At this time, the second execution process of the reserved preview executes processing to return the display mode of the target preview to the original specific display mode (the specific display mode before the open/close execution mode).

In addition, in the third execution process of the reserved notice, the current display mode of the target reserved image during the game round of the target reserved image (the display mode restored by the restoration process) is compared with the upper limit display mode to which the fluctuation pattern of the target reserved image corresponds, and it is determined whether or not a change (promotion) to a higher level display mode is possible. Then, if such a change is possible, a promotion determination and a promotion lottery are carried out, and the display mode is promoted.

<Display mode of pending images before and after the opening and closing execution mode>
The display mode of the reserved image before and after the opening and closing execution mode will be explained. Here, the case where the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is a time-saving game state and a normal jackpot occurs, and the game state transitions to the time-saving game state after the opening and closing execution mode, and the case where the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is a time-saving game state and a probability variable jackpot occurs, and the game state transitions to the probability variable game state after the opening and closing execution mode will be explained as examples.

First, with reference to Figure 66, we will explain the case where a normal jackpot occurs when the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is the time-saving game state, and the game state transitions to the time-saving game state after the opening and closing execution mode.

When the third reserved information of the second special chart occurs in the time-saving game state, the main control device 162 performs a reserved pre-reading process (step Sa305), and the performance control device 143 performs a setting process for the reserved notice (step Sa1403). As a result, when a reserved notice performance in which the display mode is the green display mode HMc is executed, as shown in FIG. 66(a), a reserved image HW in which the display mode is the green display mode HMc is displayed in the third unit reserved display area Gb3 of the second reserved display area Gb.

When a normal jackpot result occurs in the game in which the reserved image HW was obtained and the game transitions to the open/close execution mode, the display of all reserved images, including the reserved image HW, is erased, as shown in FIG. 66(b). This state is maintained until a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the ending performance.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the ending performance, the performance control device 143 executes a setting process for preview return (step Sa3416) and performs a return judgment as to whether or not to return the display mode of the pending image HW to the specific display mode before the opening and closing execution mode. In the return judgment, the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is compared with the game state after the opening and closing execution mode to judge whether or not the two match. If a normal jackpot result occurs in the time-saving game state, the game state after the opening and closing execution mode becomes a time-saving game state, and therefore the game state before the opening and closing execution mode and the game state after the opening and closing execution mode match. In this case, a return to the specific display mode is permitted, and a lottery for a return scenario is performed.

As a result, if a scenario is drawn to return to the green display mode HMc at the second shift timing after the opening and closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. 66(c), when the opening and closing execution mode ends, the display of each pending image HW will resume with the display mode of the pending image HW set to the normal display mode HMa.

After that, at the first shift timing from the third unit hold display area Gb3 to the second unit hold display area Gb2, the display mode of the hold image HW is maintained in the normal display mode HMa, as shown in FIG. 66(d). Then, at the second shift timing from the second unit hold display area Gb2 to the first unit hold display area Gb1, the display mode of the hold image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the green display mode HMc.

Next, with reference to Figure 67, we will explain the case where a special jackpot occurs when the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is a time-limited game state, and the game state transitions to a special jackpot state after the opening and closing execution mode.

When the third reserved information of the second special chart occurs in the time-saving game state, the main control device 162 performs a reserved pre-reading process (step Sa305), and the performance control device 143 performs a setting process for the reserved notice (step Sa1403). As a result, when a reserved notice performance in which the display mode is the green display mode HMc is executed, as shown in FIG. 67(a), a reserved image HW in which the display mode is the green display mode HMc is displayed in the third unit reserved display area Gb3 of the second reserved display area Gb.

When a guaranteed jackpot result occurs during the game in which the reserved image HW was obtained and the game transitions to the open/close execution mode, the display of all reserved images, including the reserved image HW, is erased, as shown in FIG. 67(b).

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the ending presentation, the presentation control device 143 executes a setting process for the advance notice return (step Sa3416) to make a return judgment. If a guaranteed jackpot result occurs during the time-saving game state, the game state after the opening and closing execution mode becomes a highly probable game state, and the game state before the opening and closing execution mode and the game state after the opening and closing execution mode do not match. In this case, a return to the specific display mode is not permitted, and the return process is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 67(c), when the opening and closing execution mode ends, the display of each pending image is resumed with the display mode of the pending image HW set to the normal display mode HMa. Thereafter, the display mode of the pending image HW is maintained in the normal display mode HMa for the period until the pending image HW is shifted to the execution display area D. In other words, if the game state before the opening and closing execution mode differs from the game state after the opening and closing execution mode, the pending notice performance performed before the opening and closing execution mode is basically canceled, and the pending notice performance for the same pending image HW after the opening and closing execution mode is not performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 67(d), the display position of the reserved image HW, which has been set to the normal display mode HMa, shifts to the execution display area D, and when a play round of the reserved image HW is started, the performance control device 143 executes the third execution process of the reserved notice (step Sa1808) and determines whether to promote to a higher display mode. As a result, if promotion to a higher display mode is selected by lottery, the display mode of the reserved image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to a specific display mode, as shown in FIG. 67(e). Note that FIG. 67(e) shows the case where the display mode of the reserved image HW is promoted to the green display mode HMc.

Next, we will explain the case where a special jackpot occurs when the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is a normal game state, and the game state transitions to a high probability game state after the opening and closing execution mode.

In this case, since the game state before the opening and closing execution mode does not match the game state after the opening and closing execution mode, if we apply the above example, the display mode of the reserved image HW will not be restored after the opening and closing execution mode. However, when switching from a low probability game state (left-hand play) aiming for a win in the first operating port 62 to a high probability game state (right-hand play) aiming for a win in the second operating port 63, whether or not to restore the display mode is switched based on the results of the advance reading of the reserved information corresponding to the reserved image HW.

Specifically, if the result of the pre-read of the reserved information corresponding to the reserved image HW is a normal jackpot result, the display mode of the reserved image HW is restored after the opening and closing execution mode. In other words, if there is reserved information that results in a normal jackpot result in the first special chart, when a play round of that reserved information is executed, the state that could have been transitioned to a high probability play state will end prematurely, so the display mode is changed to a specific display mode to encourage winning into the second operating port 63.

In this case, instead of changing from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode, the reserved image HW may be displayed in the specific display mode from the beginning. By using a display mode different from the case where the display mode is restored when the game state before the opening and closing execution mode matches the game state after the opening and closing execution mode, it is expected that the player's awareness will be promoted. In addition, by displaying in the specific display mode from the beginning, there is also the advantage that the player can quickly realize that there is reserved information on the first special chart that will result in a normal jackpot, making it easier for him or her to respond.

On the other hand, if the result of the pre-read of the reserved information corresponding to the reserved image HW is a result other than a normal jackpot result, the display mode of the reserved image HW will not be restored after the opening and closing execution mode, as a general rule.

The modified example described above has the following advantages:

When switching to the open/close execution mode in a situation where the target reserved image HW is in a specific display mode (a situation where a reserved notice performance is being executed), if the game state before the open/close execution mode differs from the game state after the open/close execution mode, the display mode of the target reserved image HW after the open/close execution mode is configured to be different from the display mode before the open/close execution mode.

In this modified example, the display mode of the reserved image is set to a specific display mode based on the result of the reserved read-ahead process, so that the player's anticipation of a jackpot result can be aroused even before the start of a game round. In addition, multiple types of game states are set as the game state, and when a jackpot result occurs and the open/close execution mode is executed, the game state is transitioned to one of the multiple game states. In this manner, in a configuration with multiple types of game states, even if the reserved information used to determine whether or not a win has been won is the same, there may be differences in the win/lose result and the game round presentation (such as a reach presentation) performed in the game round depending on the game state.

In this regard, in this configuration, for the target reserved image HW that was in a specific display mode before the opening and closing execution mode was executed, if the game state before and after the opening and closing execution mode is different, the display mode after the opening and closing execution mode is made different from the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode. Therefore, even if the award determination result or game number presentation due to differences in the game state changes, the target reserved image HW is prevented from misleading the player, and it is possible to preferably display the reserved image in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode.

When the open/close execution mode is entered in a situation where the target reserved image HW is in a specific display mode (a situation where a reserved notice performance is being executed), the display mode of the target reserved image HW after the open/close execution mode is configured to differ depending on whether the game state before the open/close execution mode is the same as the game state after the open/close execution mode or not.

As mentioned above, in a configuration with multiple types of game states, even if the reserved information used to determine whether or not a win has been won is the same, differences may occur in the win/lose result and the game round presentation (such as reach presentation) performed in a game round depending on the game state. In this regard, in this configuration, for the target reserved image HW that was in a specific display mode before the opening/closing execution mode is executed, the display mode in the game state after the opening/closing execution mode is made different depending on whether the game state before and after the opening/closing execution mode is the same. This makes it possible to set the display mode based on the win/lose determination result and the change in game round presentation due to differences in the game state, and makes it possible to appropriately display the reserved image in the game state after the opening/closing execution mode.

If the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is different from the game state after the opening and closing execution mode, the display mode of the target reserved image HW in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is set to the normal display mode HMa.

The above configuration effectively prevents the display of a pending image that does not match the actual expectation level after the opening and closing execution mode, which can lead to misunderstandings by the player. In addition, by uniformly using the normal display mode HMa, it is possible to eliminate the need for fine adjustments to the display mode in accordance with changes in expectation level, and it is also possible to simplify the processing configuration.

When the display mode of the target reserved image HW is set to the normal display mode HMa based on the difference between the game state before the opening and closing execution mode and the game state after the opening and closing execution mode, it is then determined whether or not to promote the display mode of the target reserved image HW to a higher display mode (specific display mode), and the display mode of the target reserved image HW is changed based on the result of the determination.

When the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is different from the game state after the opening and closing execution mode, by changing the display mode of the target reserved image HW in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode to the normal display mode HMa, it is possible to absorb the results of the win/lose judgment and the fluctuations in the game round presentation caused by the change in the game state, but there is a concern that it will not be possible to notify or indicate the expectation level of the reserved information corresponding to the target reserved image HW. In this regard, in this configuration, the target reserved image HW that has been set to the normal display mode HMa is given an opportunity to change to a specific display mode afterwards, so that even if the specific display mode is changed to the normal display mode HMa, it can be promoted to the specific display mode after the fact, making it possible to notify the expectation level, etc.

In the above case, when play has progressed to the play count of the target reserved image HW set to the normal display mode HMa, a determination is made as to whether or not to promote the display mode of the target reserved image HW to a specific display mode, and the promotion is carried out based on the result of the determination.

By promoting the display mode of the target reserved image HW after the game round of the target reserved image HW has started, a promotion determination can be made by utilizing the information on the win/lose determination acquired and transmitted at the start of the game round and the information on the game round presentation. Since this information corresponds to the game state after the opening and closing execution mode, the above promotion can be made in a manner appropriate to the game state after the opening and closing execution mode, and it becomes possible to change the display mode of the target reserved image HW, which was set to the normal display mode HMa after the opening and closing execution mode, to a specific display mode without giving the player any misunderstanding regarding the level of expectation, etc.

In particular, by determining whether or not the target reserved image HW is promoted to a specific display mode based on the variation pattern identified by the execution of a win/lose judgment in the main control device 162 (start of a game round), it is possible to determine whether or not promotion is possible using the same information that is used to select the game round presentation in the game round of the target reserved image HW. As a result, when the game state before the opening and closing execution mode differs from the game state after the opening and closing execution mode, the display mode of the target reserved image HW can be changed to the specific display mode while adapting it to the game round presentation that is actually performed in the game round after the opening and closing execution mode.

In addition, by adopting the above configuration, it is possible to avoid adding a dedicated process for transmitting a change pattern (the result of the win/lose judgment and information on the game round performance) corresponding to the game state after the opening/closing execution mode solely for the purpose of judging whether or not to promote the target reserved image HW to a specific display mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. In other words, when a game round of the target reserved image HW is executed in the game state after the opening/closing execution mode, it is necessary to send a change start command from the main control device 162 to the performance control device 143 in order to execute the change display of the pattern row Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 in synchronization with the special pattern game round in the special pattern display unit 43. However, by adopting a configuration in which the promotion judgment is executed using this change start command, it becomes unnecessary to notify the main control device 162 of the change pattern corresponding to the game state after the opening/closing execution mode to the performance control device 143 by a dedicated command other than the change start command. Therefore, not only can the promotion determination be made using the existing processing configuration in the main control device 162, but the performance control device 143 does not need to be equipped with a processing configuration for when such a dedicated command is received, which prevents the processing configuration from becoming complicated.

Information corresponding to the notification mode of the reserved image when a reserved notice performance is performed can be stored in the return area 344f of the RAM 344, and when the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is the same as the game state after the opening and closing execution mode, the display mode of the target reserved image HW in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is set based on the information stored in the return area 344f.

For example, if the display mode of the target reserved image HW in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is set based on the results of the reserved read-ahead process performed before the opening and closing execution mode, there is a concern that it will be set to a display mode different from the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode. In this regard, with this configuration, when the opening and closing execution mode is executed in a situation where a reserved image with a specific display mode exists, information on the display mode at that time is stored, and the report display mode after the opening and closing execution mode is set based on the stored information, so that it is possible to preferably restore the display mode after the opening and closing execution mode to the original mode before the opening and closing execution mode.

By restoring the target pending image HW (pending information) to its original state before the opening and closing execution mode in this way, the target pending image HW (pending information) that aroused a sense of anticipation in the player by changing to a specific display state before the opening and closing execution mode can arouse the same sense of anticipation even after the opening and closing execution mode.

When the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is the same as the game state after the opening and closing execution mode, if the display mode of the target reserved image HW in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is to be the same as the specific display mode before the opening and closing execution mode, it is possible to first set it to the normal display mode HMa and then change it to the specific display mode.

In this case, regardless of whether the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is the same as the game state before the opening and closing execution mode, the display mode of the target reserved image HW may be changed from the specific display mode to the normal display mode HMa as the opening and closing execution mode is executed. This makes it possible to reduce the unnaturalness of changing to the normal display mode HMa due to a difference in the game state. In addition, by causing an event in which the display mode changes from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode, it is possible to arouse anticipation that the reserved image that has been set to the normal display mode HMa will be changed to the specific display mode in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode, including cases in which the game state is different, and it becomes possible to maintain anticipation for the reserved image (reserved information).

A determination of whether the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is the same as the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is made at the end of the opening and closing execution mode.

In this case, the display mode of the target pending image HW can be adjusted quickly after the opening and closing execution mode. Therefore, even if there are fewer pending items before the target pending image HW after the opening and closing execution mode, the display mode of the target pending image HW can be appropriately adjusted.

The pending image is now hidden while the open/close execution mode is running.

When changing the display mode of the target reserved image HW upon the end of the opening and closing execution mode, if the target reserved image HW that had been displayed up until that point is suddenly changed to another display mode at the end of the opening and closing execution mode, there is a concern that the player will have an unnatural impression. In particular, when downgrading to the normal display mode HMa, it is expected that it will be easily noticeable to the player and will easily give an unnatural impression. In this regard, in this configuration, since the reserved image is not displayed in the opening and closing execution mode, when changing the display mode of the target reserved image HW, a period can be inserted during which the reserved image itself, including other reserved images, is not displayed. This makes it possible to prevent the change in the display mode from being noticeable and to alleviate unnaturalness. In addition, by making the reserved image not displayed, there is also the advantage that it is easier to draw the player's attention to the performance for the opening and closing execution mode (jackpot game performance).

<Modification 4>
In the third modified example of the first embodiment, the display mode after the opening and closing execution mode for the reserved image that was in a specific display mode before the opening and closing execution mode is determined according to the relationship between the game state before the opening and closing execution mode and the game state after the opening and closing execution mode. In this modified example, the pre-reading process is executed again after the opening and closing execution mode for the reserved image that was in a specific display mode before the opening and closing execution mode, and the display mode of the reserved image is determined based on the result. Hereinafter, this modified example will be described with reference to Figures 68 to 76. In these figures, the same reference numerals are used for the same configurations as those in the first embodiment and each modified example, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The processing performed by the MPU 312 of the main control unit 162 is explained below.

<Information Acquisition Process>
The information acquisition process according to this modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 68(a). This process is executed when a prize is won at the actuation ports 62, 63 (executed in step Sa205 of the prize winning process for the actuation ports (Fig. 17)), and is executed in place of the information acquisition process of Fig. 18. In Fig. 68(a), the same steps as those in Fig. 18 are given the same step numbers, and their explanations will be omitted or simplified.

In step Sa304, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS are stored in the corresponding reserved areas for the special chart display section, and then in step Sa4101, the reserved command setting process is executed. After execution of step Sa4101, the information acquisition process is terminated. Here, the reserved command setting process in step Sa4101 will be explained based on the flowchart in FIG. 68(b).

First, in step Sa4201, the start reserved memory numbers RaN, RbN stored in each reserved area Ra, Rb of reserved ball storage area 314b and the common reserved number CRN stored in the total reserved number memory area of the reserved ball storage area 314b are read, and this information is stored in the register of MPU 312. In steps Sa4202 to Sa4204, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 (random number value for winning or losing), the value of the jackpot type counter C2 (random number for drawing the jackpot type), and the value of the variation type counter CS (random number for drawing the variation pattern) contained in the reserved information obtained in step Sa304 (Fig. 68(a)) based on the current winning entry into the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63 are grasped. Note that the processing in steps Sa4201 to Sa4204 is similar to the processing in steps Sa1202, Sa1205, and Sa1208 in the reserved read-ahead processing (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment described above.

In the next step Sa4205, a hold command is set as an output target to the performance control device 143, and then the hold command setting process is terminated. The hold command includes information indicating whether the current hold information corresponds to the first special chart or the second special chart, as well as information indicating the values of the various counters C1, C2, and CS determined in steps Sa4202 to Sa4204 above.

In other words, in the first embodiment described above, the hold-ahead read process (FIG. 28) performs a win/lose determination process and a lottery process for the variation pattern based on the values of the various counters C1, C2, and CS that have been grasped, and the results are included in the hold command and sent to the performance control device 143. However, in this modified example, instead of the results of the win/lose determination process and the lottery process for the variation pattern, the information on the various counters C1, C2, and CS that have been grasped (random number information used in the win/lose determination process and the lottery process for the variation pattern) is included in the hold command and sent to the performance control device 143.

The processing performed by the MPU 342 of the performance control device 143 is explained below.

<Pending command processing>
The hold command response process according to this modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 69. This process is executed when a hold command is received from the main control device 162 (executed in step Sa1302 of the performance setting process (Fig. 30)), and is executed in place of the hold command response process in Fig. 31. In Fig. 69, the same steps as in Fig. 31 are given the same step numbers, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

In step Sa1402, the value of the hold number counter (start hold memory number SN) provided in the various counter area 344b of RAM 344 is incremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step Sa4301, where the first hold pre-read process is executed. The first hold pre-read process is a hold pre-read process performed by the performance control device 143, and based on the information of the various counters C1, C2, and CS included in the hold command from the main control device 162, it pre-reads the results of the win/lose judgment for the hold information acquired upon the occurrence of a start win. Here, the first hold pre-read process in step Sa4301 will be explained based on the flowchart in Figure 70.

First, in step Sa4401, the current game state is determined. Specifically, it is determined whether the current game state is a normal game state, a high probability game state, or a time-limited game state. In step Sa4402, the hold command from the main control device 162 is analyzed, and the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the current hold information is determined. In step Sa4403, a win/loss determination table is obtained from the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343.

In this modified example, the same table data as the win/loss determination table stored in the ROM 313 (win/loss table storage area 313a) of the main control device 162 is stored as the win/loss determination table for the performance control device 143. In addition, the same table data as the jackpot type table (FIG. 13) and the variable display time table (FIGS. 14 and 59) stored in the ROM 313 of the main control device 162 are stored for the jackpot type table for drawing lots for the jackpot type and the variable display time table for drawing lots for the variable pattern. For this reason, even if the performance control device 143 performs these lottery processes separately from the win/loss lottery and variable pattern lottery in the main control device 162, the same lottery result can be obtained as long as the random number values used for the lottery are the same.

The win/loss determination table is set separately for low probability mode (normal game state, time-saving game state) and high probability mode (high probability game state), so in step Sa4403, a table corresponding to the game state identified in step Sa4401 is obtained.

In step Sa4404, as a pre-reading process to determine whether or not there is a jackpot, a win/loss determination is made based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 determined in step Sa4402 and the win/loss determination table obtained in step Sa4403, and the win/loss result is determined. In step Sa4405, it is determined whether or not the win/loss result determined in step Sa4404 is a jackpot win. If it is a jackpot win, in step Sa4406, the hold command from the main control unit 162 is analyzed and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 in the current hold information is determined.

In step Sa4407, as a pre-reading process for the jackpot type, a lottery is performed for the jackpot type based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 determined in step Sa4406 and the type table stored in the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343, and the result of the type lottery is determined. At this time, if the reserved information is based on winning the first operating port 62, the type table for the first special symbol is referenced, and if the reserved information is based on winning the second operating port 63, the type table for the second special symbol is referenced.

In step Sa4408, the jackpot information indicating the jackpot result determined in step Sa4404 and the type information indicating the jackpot type result determined in step Sa4407 are stored. These pieces of information are stored in the corresponding areas in the reserved memory area 344c (Figure 32) of RAM 344.

In this modified example, the processing of steps Sa4406 and Sa4407 may be omitted because the results of the pre-reading of the jackpot type are not reflected in the pending preview performance.

After execution of step Sa4408 or if a negative judgment is made in step Sa4405 (if the jackpot has not been won), in step Sa4409, the hold command from the main control device 162 is analyzed and the value of the variable type counter CS in the current hold information is determined. In step Sa4410, based on the game state determined in step Sa4401 and the result of the win/lose lottery determined in step Sa4404, a corresponding variable display time table is obtained from the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343. For example, if the current game state is a time-saving game state and the result determined in step Sa4404 is a loss result, a loss variable display time table for the time-saving game state (Figure 59 (d)) is obtained.

In step Sa4411, as a process of reading ahead the fluctuation pattern, a lottery process is performed for the fluctuation pattern based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS grasped in step Sa4409 and the fluctuation display time table acquired in step Sa4410, and the result is grasped. In step Sa4412, information indicating the fluctuation pattern grasped in step Sa4411 is stored in the corresponding area of the reserved memory area 344c. After execution of step Sa4412, the first reserved read-ahead process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the hold command response process (FIG. 69), after the first hold pre-read process is executed in step Sa4301, the hold notice setting process is executed in step Sa1403 using the processing result of step Sa4301. The hold notice setting process is a setting process for executing the hold notice performance.

<Open/Close Execution Mode Processing>
The opening and closing execution mode process according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 71. This process is executed in step Sa1306 of the performance setting process (Fig. 30), and is executed in place of the opening and closing execution mode process of Fig. 63. In Fig. 71, the same processes as those in Fig. 63 are given the same step numbers, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

After clearing the hold notice flag in step Sa3406, it is determined in step Sa3407 whether or not there is a hold image displayed in a specific display mode. In other words, it is determined whether or not there is an hold image displayed in each hold display area Ga, Gb at the start timing of the opening and closing execution mode that is displayed in any of the blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, or rainbow display mode HMe.

If there is a pending image displayed in a specific display mode, the process proceeds to step Sa3408, and information indicating in which display mode the pending image is displayed in the specific display mode is stored in the return area 344f of RAM 344. After step Sa3408 is executed, the process of step Sa3409 (FIG. 63) is not executed, and a return standby flag is set in the various flags storage area 344d of RAM 344 in step Sa3410. That is, in the above-mentioned modified example 4, the process of storing the game state before the opening/closing execution mode was executed in step Sa3409, but in this modified example, this process is not executed.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sa3414 (if it is judged that the return standby flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344), the process of clearing the return standby flag is executed in step Sa3415.

Here, a situation in which a positive judgment is made in step Sa3414 means that the open/close execution mode is performed while the on-hold preview performance is being executed, and the display of the on-hold image is erased. In this case, in step Sa4501, a second on-hold read-ahead process is executed to perform a new on-hold read-ahead. In the following step Sa4502, a setting process for the preview return is executed to return the display mode of the on-hold image to a specific display mode. Details of the second on-hold read-ahead process in step Sa4501 and the setting process for the preview return in step Sa4502 will be described later.

After step Sa4502 is executed, step Sa3417 executes a process to display the pending image in the normal display mode HMa, and then ends the process for the open/close execution mode. That is, in this modified example as well, the pending image is displayed in the normal display mode HMa immediately after the open/close execution mode ends.

<Second reserved read-ahead processing>
The second reserved read-ahead processing of step Sa4501 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step Sa4601, the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is determined. This determination is made by referring to the type of jackpot for the current jackpot that triggered the opening and closing execution mode. For example, if the current jackpot is a guaranteed jackpot result, the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is determined to be a guaranteed jackpot state, and if it is a normal jackpot result, the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is determined to be a time-saving game state.

In step Sa4602, the reserved memory area 344c of the RAM 344 is referenced, and the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 for each reserved information stored in the reserved memory area 344c is determined. This process may be performed on all reserved information stored in the reserved memory area 344c, or it may be performed on only the reserved information that is the target of the return process (the reserved information of the reserved image that was displayed in a specific display mode before the opening and closing execution mode).

In step Sa4603, a hit/lose determination table corresponding to the game state grasped in step Sa4601 is obtained. In step Sa4604, as a pre-reading process to determine whether or not there is a jackpot, a hit/lose lottery is performed based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped in step Sa4602 and the hit/lose determination table obtained in step Sa4603, and the hit/lose result is determined. Note that the process of step Sa4604 is performed on the reserved information for which the jackpot random number counter C1 was grasped in step Sa4602. The same applies to the processes from step Sa4605 onwards.

Here, the processing of steps Sa4603 and Sa4604 is the same as steps Sa4403 and Sa4404 of the first reserved read-ahead processing (FIG. 70) performed at the time of starting winning (when reserved information is acquired). However, when the lottery mode changes before and after the opening and closing execution mode, for example, when the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is a normal game state and the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is a high probability game state, the winning/losing judgment table acquired in step Sa4603 is different, so a lottery result different from the first reserved read-ahead processing may be obtained. For example, when a certain jackpot result is won under a normal game state, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 for the reserved reserved information is "17", a losing result is read in advance in the first reserved read-ahead processing before the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the above-mentioned certain jackpot result is performed, but a winning result is read in advance in the second reserved read-ahead processing assuming the game state after the opening and closing execution mode (FIG. 12).

In step Sa4605, it is determined whether the result of the determination in step Sa4604 is a jackpot win or not. If it is a jackpot win, in step Sa4606, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is determined by referring to the reserved memory area 344c. In step Sa4607, as a jackpot type pre-reading process, a lottery is performed for the jackpot type based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 determined in step Sa4606 and the type table stored in the various table memory area 343a of the ROM 343, and the result of the type lottery is determined.

In step Sa4608, the jackpot information indicating the jackpot result determined in step Sa4604 and the type information indicating the jackpot type result determined in step Sa4607 are stored in the corresponding memory areas of the reserved memory area 344c.

In step Sa4609, the value of the variation type counter CS is determined by referring to the reserved memory area 344c. In step Sa4610, based on the game state determined in step Sa4601 and the result of the win/lose lottery determined in step Sa4604, the corresponding variation display time table is obtained from the various table memory area 343a of the ROM 343. For example, if the game state after the opening/closing execution mode is a high probability game state and the result determined in step Sa4604 is a loss result, the loss variation display time table for the high probability game state (Figure 59 (b)) is obtained.

In step Sa4611, as a process of reading ahead the fluctuation pattern, a lottery process is performed for the fluctuation pattern based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS grasped in step Sa4609 and the fluctuation display time table acquired in step Sa4610, and the result is grasped. The process of step Sa4611 is similar to step Sa4411 of the first reserved pre-reading process performed at the time of start winning (when the reserved information is acquired), but if the game state changes before and after the opening and closing execution mode, the fluctuation display time table acquired in step Sa4610 will be different, and a lottery result different from the first reserved pre-reading process may be obtained.

In step Sa4612, information indicating the fluctuation pattern identified in step Sa4611 is stored in the corresponding area of the reserved memory area 344c, and then the second reserved read-ahead process is terminated.

<Settings for preview return>
The setting process for the advance notice return in step Sa4502 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step Sa4701, the hold memory area 344c of the RAM 344 is referenced to determine the change pattern of the hold information corresponding to the target hold image (the hold image that was displayed in the specific display mode before the open/close execution mode). The change pattern determined in this case is the change pattern determined in the second hold pre-read process.

In step Sa4702, it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern grasped in step Sa4701 is any of fluctuation patterns 1H, 11H, and 21H. These fluctuation patterns correspond to a complete miss (FIG. 14, FIG. 59), and if it is any of them, the setting process for the advance return is terminated.

If the fluctuation pattern grasped in step Sa4701 is not fluctuation pattern 1H, fluctuation pattern 11H, or fluctuation pattern 21H, proceed to step Sa4703, and grasp the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern grasped in step Sa4701 (the fluctuation pattern read ahead in the second reserved read ahead process). An upper limit display mode table is stored in the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343. As shown in FIG. 74, the upper limit display mode table defines the upper limit of the display mode corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, and for example, in fluctuation pattern 12H corresponding to SPSP reach A miss in a high probability gaming state, a red display mode HMd is set as the upper limit of the specific display mode. In step Sa4703, the upper limit display mode table is referenced to identify the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern in the gaming state after the open/close execution mode.

In step Sa4704, the return area 344f of RAM 344 is referenced to determine the display mode of the target reserved image before the opening and closing execution mode. In step Sa4705, a return determination process is performed to determine whether or not the display mode of the target reserved image should be returned to the specific display mode before the opening and closing execution mode in play after the opening and closing execution mode. In this process, the upper limit display mode determined in step Sa4703 is compared with the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode determined in step Sa4704, and if the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode is of the same rank or lower rank than the upper limit display mode, the determination result is that return is permitted, and if the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode is of a higher rank than the upper limit display mode, the determination result is that return is not permitted.

In step Sa4706, it is determined whether the result of the return judgment in step Sa4705 is to allow return. If the judgment result is that return is not allowed, the setting process for the advance notice return is terminated.

If the judgment result is that return is permitted, the processes of steps Sa4707 to Sa4711 are executed. These processes are similar to steps Sa2103 to Sa2107 in FIG. 43, and set the timing at which the display mode of the target pending image is to be returned to the original display mode, corresponding to the number of pending images before the target pending image. That is, in step Sa4707, the number of pending images before the target pending image is determined, and if the determined number of pending images is 1 or more, a lottery process for a return scenario is executed in step Sa4709. In step Sa4710, return scenario data is set so that the selected return scenario is executed.

In addition, since the second reserved read-ahead process (step Sa4501) is executed at the end of the opening and closing execution mode, it is also possible to start displaying the reserved image in a specific display mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends, but in this modified example, the display mode is uniformly set to the normal display mode HMa immediately after the opening and closing execution mode ends (step Sa3417). In other words, even if the target reserved image is set to a specific display mode after the opening and closing execution mode, it is displayed in the normal display mode HMa once and then changed to the specific display mode afterwards. The reason for this configuration is that there is a high possibility that the payout of game balls is continuing at the timing immediately after the opening and closing execution mode ends, and the player may be taking action such as discharging game balls from the lower tray 34, etc., and in such cases, it is assumed that attention to the reserved image will decrease. By avoiding the display of the specific display mode at such a timing, it is possible to prevent the specific display mode from being set without the player's knowledge.

After execution of step Sa4710, in step Sa4711, a notice return flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344. The notice return flag is used by the MPU 342 to know that processing should be performed to return the display mode of the pending image to the original state.

After step Sa4711 is executed, the setting process for the notice return is terminated. Then, as shown in FIG. 71, in step Sa3417, the pending images for all pending images that exist at the time of the end of the opening and closing execution mode, including the target pending image, are set to be displayed in the normal display mode HMa. In other words, even if the return process is performed, the target pending image is displayed in the normal display mode HMa immediately after the end of the opening and closing execution mode.

Then, in the second execution process (Fig. 44) of the hold notice in step Sa1702 of the shift command response process (Fig. 40(a)), and in the third execution process (Fig. 45) of the hold notice in step Sa1808 of the special chart change display process (Fig. 41), the display mode of the target hold image is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode. At this time, in the second execution process of the hold notice, processing is performed to return the display mode of the target hold image to the original specific display mode (the specific display mode before the open/close execution mode).

In addition, in the third execution process of the reserved notice, the current display mode of the target reserved image during the game round of the target reserved image (the display mode restored by the restoration process) is compared with the upper limit display mode to which the fluctuation pattern of the target reserved image corresponds, and it is determined whether or not a change (promotion) to a higher level display mode is possible. Then, if such a change is possible, a promotion determination and a promotion lottery are carried out, and the display mode is promoted.

<Flow of display of pending images before and after the opening and closing execution mode>
The flow of the display mode of the reserved image before and after the opening and closing execution mode will be described. First, the case where the result of the prediction of the winning/losing judgment does not change before and after the opening and closing execution mode, but the result of the prediction of the variation pattern changes will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 75(a), when the third reserved information (reserved image HW) of the second special chart occurs in a highly probable game state, the main control device 162 executes the information acquisition process (FIG. 68(a)). As a result, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is assumed to be 25, and the value of the variation type counter CS is assumed to be 80.

The performance control device 143 also executes a first reserved read-ahead process (step Sa4301) based on the result of the information acquisition process of the main control device 162. In the first reserved read-ahead process, the read-ahead process is executed using the game state at that time, i.e., the hit/miss determination table and the fluctuation display time table for the high probability game state. Since the hit/miss result corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 = 25 is a miss result (Figure 12), and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation type counter CS = 80 is fluctuation pattern 12H (Figure 59 (b)), the result of the first reserved read-ahead process is a miss and fluctuation pattern 12H. Fluctuation pattern 12H is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a miss in SPSP reach A.

Furthermore, the performance control device 143 executes a setting process for the hold notice (step Sa1403) based on the result of the first hold pre-read process, and performs a lottery to execute the hold notice performance for the hold image HW, a lottery to select the final display mode, a lottery to select the performance scenario, etc. The selection range of the final display mode corresponding to the variation pattern 12H is the blue display mode HMb, the green display mode HMc, and the red display mode HMd (Figure 61 (b)), and here, as a result of the above various lotteries, the red display mode HMd is selected as the final display mode, and a performance scenario in which the initial display mode is the blue display mode HMb is selected. In this case, the hold image HW whose display mode is the blue display mode HMb is displayed in the third unit hold display area Gb3 of the second hold display area Gb.

When a normal jackpot occurs during the game in which the reserved image HW was obtained and the game transitions to the open/close execution mode, the display of all reserved images, including the reserved image HW, is erased, as in variant example 4 above. This state is maintained until a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the ending performance.

Then, when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the ending performance, the performance control device 143 executes the second reserved read-ahead process (step Sa4501) based on the reserved information stored in the reserved memory area 344c. In the case of a normal jackpot result, the game state after the open/close execution mode becomes a time-saving game state, but in the second reserved read-ahead process, the read-ahead process is executed using a hit/miss judgment table and a variable display time table for the time-saving game state. Since the hit/miss result corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 = 25 is a miss result (Figure 12), and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation type counter CS = 80 is fluctuation pattern 23H (Figure 59 (d)), the result of the second reserved read-ahead process is a miss and fluctuation pattern 23H. The fluctuation pattern 23H is not a SPSP reach A miss, but a fluctuation pattern corresponding to an SP reach B miss, which is lower than the reach performance.

The performance control device 143 also executes a setting process (step Sa4502) for preview return based on the result of the second hold look-ahead process, and performs a return judgment as to whether or not to return the display mode of the hold image HW to the specific display mode before the opening and closing execution mode. In the return judgment, the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern read in advance by the second hold look-ahead process is grasped based on the upper limit display mode table (Figure 74), and it is judged whether or not the display mode of the hold image HW before the opening and closing execution mode is equal to or lower than the grasped upper limit display mode.

Here, since the upper limit display mode of fluctuation pattern 23H read ahead by the second reserved read-ahead process is the green display mode HMc (Figure 74), the blue display mode HMb, which is the display mode before the opening/closing execution mode, becomes a mode below the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. In this case, a return to the specific display mode is permitted, and a return scenario is set.

As a result, if a scenario is set to return to the blue display mode HMb at the next shift timing, as shown in FIG. 75(b), when the display position of the hold image HW is shifted from the third unit hold display area Ga3 to the second unit hold display area Ga2, the display mode will change from the normal display mode HMa to the blue display mode HMb.

Even if the display mode of the pending image HW is the green display mode HMc when the opening and closing execution mode is started, the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode is lower than the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern pre-read by the second pending pre-reading process, so after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the display mode of the pending image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the green display mode HMc.

In contrast to these, if the display mode of the pending image HW is the red display mode HMd when the opening and closing execution mode is started, the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode will be a higher mode than the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern pre-read by the second pending pre-read process. In this case, a return to the specific display mode is not permitted. In other words, whether or not the specific display mode is returned depends on the display mode of the pending image HW when the opening and closing execution mode is started.

If a return to the specific display mode is not permitted, the pending image HW will remain in the normal display mode HMa until it is shifted to the execution display area D after the open/close execution mode ends (Figure 75 (c)).

Then, when the display position of the reserved image HW set to the normal display mode HMa shifts to the execution display area D and a play round of the reserved image HW is started, the performance control device 143 executes the third execution process of the reserved notice (step Sa1808) and determines whether to promote to a higher display mode. As a result, if promotion to a higher display mode is selected by lottery, the display mode of the reserved image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to a specific display mode. For example, if the upper limit display mode of the variable pattern 23H in the promotion determination is set to the green display mode HMc, the display mode of the reserved image HW is promoted within the range up to the green display mode HMc.

Next, we will explain with reference to Figure 76 what happens when the results of the look-ahead judgment of the win/loss determination change before and after the opening/closing execution mode.

As shown in FIG. 76(a), when the third reserved information (reserved image HW) of the second special chart occurs in a highly probable game state, the main control device 162 executes an information acquisition process. As a result, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is assumed to be 17, and the value of the variation type counter CS is assumed to be 45.

The performance control device 143 also executes the first reserved read-ahead process based on the result of the information acquisition process of the main control device 162. The win/loss result corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 = 17 in the high probability game state is a win result (Figure 12), and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation type counter CS = 45 is fluctuation pattern 12A (Figure 59 (a)), so the result of the first reserved read-ahead process is a win and fluctuation pattern 12A. Fluctuation pattern 12A is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to an SPSP reach B win.

Furthermore, the performance control device 143 executes a setting process for the hold notice based on the result of the first hold pre-read process. The selection range of the final display mode corresponding to the variation pattern 12A is the blue display mode HMb, the green display mode HMc, the red display mode HMd, and the rainbow display mode HMe (Figure 61 (a)). Here, as a result of the above-mentioned various lotteries, the rainbow display mode HMe is drawn as the final display mode, and a performance scenario in which the initial display mode is the blue display mode HMb is drawn. In this case, the hold image HW whose display mode is the blue display mode HMb is displayed in the third unit hold display area Gb3 of the second hold display area Gb.

When a normal jackpot occurs during the game in which the reserved image HW was obtained and the game transitions to the open/close execution mode, the display of all reserved images, including the reserved image HW, is erased. This state is maintained until a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the ending performance.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the ending performance, the performance control device 143 executes a second reserved read-ahead process based on the reserved information stored in the reserved memory area 344c. In the second reserved read-ahead process, the read-ahead process is executed using a hit/miss determination table and a variable display time table for the time-saving game state. Since the hit/miss result corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 = 17 is a miss result (Figure 12), and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation type counter CS = 45 is fluctuation pattern 22H (Figure 59 (d)), the result of the second reserved read-ahead process is a miss and fluctuation pattern 22H. Fluctuation pattern 22H is not a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a reach hit, but a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a reach miss (SP reach A miss).

The performance control device 143 also executes a setting process for preview return based on the results of the second hold look-ahead process, and performs a return judgment as to whether or not to return the display mode of the hold image HW to the specific display mode before the opening and closing execution mode. Since the upper limit display mode of the fluctuation pattern 22H read in advance by the second hold look-ahead process is the green display mode HMc (Figure 74), the blue display mode HMb, which is the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode, becomes a mode below the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. In this case, a return to the specific display mode is permitted, and a return scenario is set.

As a result, if a scenario is set to return to the blue display mode HMb at the next shift timing, as shown in FIG. 76 (b), when the display position of the hold image HW is shifted from the third unit hold display area Ga3 to the second unit hold display area Ga2, the display mode will change from the normal display mode HMa to the blue display mode HMb.

Even if the display mode of the pending image HW is the green display mode HMc when the opening and closing execution mode is started, the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode is lower than the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern pre-read by the second pending pre-reading process, so after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the display mode of the pending image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the green display mode HMc.

In contrast to these, if the display mode of the pending image HW is the red display mode HMd or the rainbow display mode HMe when the opening and closing execution mode is started, the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode will be a higher mode than the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern pre-read by the second pending pre-reading process. In this case, a return to the specific display mode is not permitted. In other words, even if the win/loss changes before and after the opening and closing execution mode, whether or not the specific display mode is returned to will depend on the display mode of the pending image HW when the opening and closing execution mode is started.

If a return to the specific display mode is not permitted, the pending image HW will remain in the normal display mode HMa until it is shifted to the execution display area D after the open/close execution mode ends (Figure 76 (c)).

Then, the display position of the reserved image HW, which has been set to the normal display mode HMa, shifts to the execution display area D, and when a play round of the reserved image HW is started, the performance control device 143 executes the third execution process of the reserved notice and determines whether to promote to a higher display mode. As a result, if promotion to a higher display mode is selected by lottery, the display mode of the reserved image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode.

Depending on the value of the variation type counter CS of the reserved image HW, even if the result of the first reserved pre-reading process in the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is a hit and a variation pattern of a reach effect or more, the result of the second reserved pre-reading process at the end of the opening and closing execution mode may change to a miss and a variation pattern corresponding to a complete miss (for example, in the case where a normal jackpot result is obtained in the high probability game state as described above and a transition is made to a time-saving game state after the opening and closing execution mode, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the reserved information of the reserved image HW is 17 and the value of the variation type counter CS is 10). In such a case, the display mode restoration process is not performed in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode, and the display mode of the reserved image HW is maintained in the normal display mode HMa.

The modified example described above has the following advantages:

When the open/close execution mode is entered in a situation where the target reserved image HW is in a specific display mode (a situation where the reserved notice performance is being executed), the reserved read-ahead process (second reserved read-ahead process) is executed again after the open/close execution mode, and the display mode of the target reserved image HW in the game state after the open/close execution mode is set based on the result.

In this modified example, the display mode of the reserved image is set to a specific display mode based on the result of the reserved read-ahead process, so that the player's anticipation of a jackpot result can be aroused even before the start of a game round. In addition, multiple types of game states are set as the game state, and when a jackpot result occurs and the open/close execution mode is executed, the game state is transitioned to one of the multiple game states. In this manner, in a configuration with multiple types of game states, even if the reserved information used to determine whether or not a win has been won is the same, there may be differences in the win/lose result and the game round presentation (such as a reach presentation) performed in the game round depending on the game state.

In this regard, in this configuration, if the system transitions to the opening and closing execution mode while a hold notice performance is being performed, the system executes the pre-reading process again after the opening and closing execution mode for the hold information that triggered the hold notice performance, and sets the display mode of the target hold image HW (the hold image of the hold information that triggered the hold notice performance) based on the result. Therefore, for the target hold image HW for which a hold notice performance was being performed before the opening and closing execution mode, the display mode after the opening and closing execution mode can be adjusted to be suitable for the game state after the opening and closing execution mode, making it possible to suitably display the hold image after the opening and closing execution mode.

When the reserved ball pre-reading process is performed again after the opening and closing execution mode, the pre-reading is performed by applying the win/lose judgment conditions and the performance selection conditions that correspond to the game state after the opening and closing execution mode. This makes it possible to adjust the display mode of the target reserved ball image HW while aligning it with the win/lose result that is actually notified in the game round of the target reserved ball image HW that is performed after the opening and closing execution mode and the game round performance that is actually performed in that game round.

The display mode of the target reserved image HW in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is set based on the result of the reserved pre-read process after the opening and closing execution mode and the display mode of the target reserved image HW before the opening and closing execution mode.

For example, if the display mode of the reserved image changes frequently when switching to the opening and closing execution mode, there is a concern that the player will feel uncomfortable. In this regard, with this configuration, the display mode after the opening and closing execution mode is set taking into account not only the results of the second look-ahead, but also the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode. For example, if the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode is compared with the results of the second look-ahead, and there is no problem in using the same display mode after the opening and closing execution mode, the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode can be carried over. This makes it possible to prevent excessive changes in the display mode of the reserved image at the border of the opening and closing execution mode, and makes it possible to display the reserved image after the opening and closing execution mode in a natural manner.

Multiple upper limit display modes are set corresponding to the fluctuation patterns of each game state, and among them, the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern identified by the second look-ahead process after the opening and closing execution mode is compared with the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode, and the display mode of the target reserved image HW in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is set based on the result. More specifically, if the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode is equal to or lower than the upper limit display mode derived from the fluctuation pattern, the display mode of the target reserved image HW in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is set to the same mode as the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode.

In this modified example, multiple types of display modes (notification modes in the hold preview performance) for the reserved image are set with different jackpot expectations. In this configuration in which the expectation level is set in stages and multiple display modes are provided, the range of expectation levels corresponding to one display mode is narrow, so if the reserved image after the opening and closing execution mode is displayed in the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode, there is a tendency for the expected levels suggested before and after the opening and closing execution mode to differ. In this regard, with this configuration, even in a situation in which multiple display modes are set, it is possible to align the expected levels and appropriately display the reserved image after the opening and closing execution mode.

If the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode is a higher display mode than the upper limit display mode derived from the fluctuation pattern, the display mode of the target reserved image HW in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is set to the normal display mode HMa. This makes it possible to prevent the display mode after the opening and closing execution mode from exceeding the expected degree corresponding to the game state before the opening and closing execution mode, and makes it possible to preferably display the reserved image after the opening and closing execution mode.

When the display mode of the target reserved image HW in the game state after the open/close execution mode is set to the normal display mode HMa, a determination is made as to whether or not to promote the display mode to a specific display mode during the game of the target reserved image HW, and the promotion is carried out based on the result of the determination.

When the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is different from the game state after the opening and closing execution mode, by changing the display mode of the target reserved image HW in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode to the normal display mode HMa, it is possible to absorb the results of the win/lose judgment and the fluctuations in the game round presentation caused by the change in the game state, but there is a concern that it will not be possible to notify or indicate the expectation level of the reserved information corresponding to the target reserved image HW. In this regard, in this configuration, for the target reserved image HW that has been set to the normal display mode HMa, an opportunity to change to a specific display mode is given as the game progresses to the game round of the target reserved image HW. Therefore, even if the display mode is changed from the specific display mode to the normal display mode HMa, it can be promoted to the specific display mode after the fact, making it possible to notify the expectation level, etc.

In the above case, the determination as to whether or not the target reserved image HW is promoted to a specific display mode is made based on the variation pattern identified by the execution of a win/loss determination in the main control device 162 (the start of a game round).

In this case, the same information used to select the game round presentation in the game round of the target reserved image HW is used to determine whether or not promotion will occur, so if the game state before the opening and closing execution mode differs from the game state after the opening and closing execution mode, the display mode of the target reserved image HW can be changed to a specific display mode while adapting it to the game round presentation that is actually performed in the game round after the opening and closing execution mode.

In addition, by adopting the above configuration, it is possible to avoid adding a dedicated process for transmitting a change pattern (the result of the win/lose judgment and information on the game round performance) corresponding to the game state after the opening/closing execution mode solely for the purpose of judging whether or not to promote the target reserved image HW to a specific display mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode. In other words, when a game round of the target reserved image HW is executed in the game state after the opening/closing execution mode, it is necessary to send a change start command from the main control device 162 to the performance control device 143 in order to execute the change display of the pattern row Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 in synchronization with the special pattern game round in the special pattern display unit 43. However, by adopting a configuration in which the promotion judgment is executed using this change start command, it becomes unnecessary to notify the main control device 162 of the change pattern corresponding to the game state after the opening/closing execution mode to the performance control device 143 by a dedicated command other than the change start command. Therefore, not only can the promotion determination be made using the existing processing configuration in the main control device 162, but the performance control device 143 does not need to be equipped with a processing configuration for when such a dedicated command is received, which prevents the processing configuration from becoming complicated.

When the display mode of the target reserved image HW in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is to be the same as the specific display mode before the opening and closing execution mode, it is possible to first set it to the normal display mode HMa and then change it to the specific display mode.

In this case, regardless of whether the display mode of the target reserved image HW is restored to the same mode or not, the display mode of the target reserved image HW may be changed from the specific display mode to the normal display mode HMa as the opening and closing execution mode is executed. This makes it possible to reduce the unnaturalness of changing to the normal display mode HMa due to a determination not to restore to the same mode. In addition, by causing an event in which the display mode changes from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode, it is possible to arouse anticipation that the reserved image that has been set to the normal display mode HMa may be changed to the specific display mode in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode, including when it is determined not to restore to the same mode, and it becomes possible to maintain anticipation for the reserved image (reserved information).

The pending image is now hidden while the open/close execution mode is running.

When changing the display mode of the target reserved image HW upon the end of the opening and closing execution mode, if the target reserved image HW that had been displayed up until that point is suddenly changed to another display mode at the end of the opening and closing execution mode, there is a concern that the player will have an unnatural impression. In particular, when downgrading to the normal display mode HMa, it is expected that it will be easily noticeable to the player and will easily give an unnatural impression. In this regard, in this configuration, since the reserved image is not displayed in the opening and closing execution mode, when changing the display mode of the target reserved image HW, a period can be inserted during which the reserved image itself, including other reserved images, is not displayed. This makes it possible to prevent the change in the display mode from being noticeable and to alleviate unnaturalness. In addition, by making the reserved image not displayed, there is also the advantage that it is easier to draw the player's attention to the performance for the opening and closing execution mode (jackpot game performance).

<Modification 5>
In this modified example, the display mode of the reserved image before the occurrence of the power interruption state and the display mode of the reserved image when the power is restored from the power interruption state are targeted. This modified example will be described below with reference to Figures 77 to 86. In these figures, the same reference numerals are used for the same configurations as those in the first embodiment and each modified example, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first embodiment and each of the modified examples, when the occurrence of a power outage is detected by the power outage monitoring unit 315 of the power supply and launch control device 191, a power outage flag (information on the occurrence of a power outage) is set in the backup area provided in the RAM 314 of the main control device 162, and power for power outage is supplied from the backup power supply unit 316 of the power supply and launch control device 191 to the RAM 314. In other words, when a power outage occurs, power is supplied to the RAM 314 so that the play times of the special and normal figures in progress on the main display unit 81 when the power outage occurred and the reserved information stored in the RAM 314 of the main control device 162 when the power outage occurred can be retained, and the data in the RAM 314 is backed up. In this modified example, in addition to that, the data stored in the RAM 344 in the performance control device 143 is also backed up.

However, because the performance control device 143 handles a larger amount of data than the main control device 162, the RAM 344 installed in the performance control device 143 is larger in capacity than the RAM 314 of the main control device 162. For this reason, if an attempt was made to back up all of the data stored in the RAM 344 of the performance control device 143 as is, the amount of power consumed during a power outage would be large. As a result, there is a concern that the power stored in the backup power supply unit 316 will be consumed in a short period of time, shortening the data retention period (backup period) or requiring a backup power supply unit 316 with a large storage capacity, resulting in increased costs.

Therefore, in this modified example, instead of backing up the entire data stored in RAM 344, the device is configured to back up information related to on-hold images, such as on-hold information, stored in on-hold memory area 344c as part of the data. The electrical configuration for this purpose will be described with reference to FIG. 77.

The performance control device 143 is provided with a backup RAM 345 as a storage medium dedicated to backup, separate from the RAM 344. The capacity of the backup RAM 345 is smaller than that of the RAM 344, and is sufficient to store information related to images for reservation. Note that the backup RAM 345 may be integrated into a single chip together with the MPU 342, like the RAM 344, or may be integrated into a chip separate from the MPU 342 and the RAM 344.

RAM 344 and backup RAM 345 are supplied with power during power outage from backup power supply unit 316. In this modified example, when a power outage occurs, information relating to the reserved images among the data stored in RAM 344 is stored (copied) to backup RAM 345, and the supply of power during power outage to RAM 344 is intended to supply the power required to read the information relating to the reserved images stored in RAM 344. Therefore, after the read process (writing process to backup RAM 345) is completed, the supply of power during power outage to RAM 344 is stopped.

On the other hand, the supply of power during power interruption to the backup RAM 345 continues even after the writing process of the information related to the reserved image is completed. In this way, when a power interruption occurs, the information to be backed up is stored in a small storage medium provided separately from the RAM 344, and power during power interruption is supplied to that storage medium, so that the amount of power consumed to retain data can be kept low. This prevents the data retention period from becoming shorter and the need for a backup power supply unit 316 with a large storage capacity from becoming necessary.

Although not shown in the figure, the power supply and launch control device 191 or the performance control device 143 is provided with a switching unit (switch circuit) that switches the state of the power supply to the RAM 344 during power interruption. The switching unit operates to supply power during power interruption from the backup power supply unit 316 to the RAM 344 at least while information about the reserved image is being read from the RAM 344 and written to the backup RAM 345, and to stop the supply of power during power interruption to the RAM 344 after writing of information about the reserved image to the backup RAM 345 is completed.

The performance control device 143 is provided with an NMI terminal, just like the main control device 162, and a power outage signal from the power outage monitoring unit 315 in the power supply and launch control device 191 is output to this NMI terminal. In other words, in this modified example, when a power outage signal is output from the power outage monitoring unit 315, power outage processing is executed in both the main control device 162 and the performance control device 143.

Next, the various control processes executed by the MPU 342 of the performance control device 143 will be explained. The processes of the MPU 342 can be broadly divided into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, normal processing for performance control, and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting a power outage signal to the NMI terminal. Of these, the NMI interrupt processing is almost the same as the NMI interrupt processing in the main control device 162 (Figure 15), so Figure 15 will be used for the explanation.

<NMI interrupt processing>
15, in the NMI interrupt process, first in step Sa11, data in the usage registers provided in the MPU 342 is saved to a predetermined storage area of the RAM 344 or to the backup RAM 345. In step Sa12, a power outage flag is set in the backup RAM 345. In step Sa13, the saved data is restored to the usage registers of the MPU 342, and then the NMI interrupt process is terminated. Note that if the power outage flag can be set without destroying the data in the usage registers of the MPU 342, the processes of steps Sa11 and Sa13 can be omitted.

<Main processing>
The main processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 78. The main processing is executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while an external power source is being supplied, or when an external power source is supplied while the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is in the on state).

In step Sa5101, the initial setting process associated with power-on is executed, and in step Sa5102, access to RAM 344 and backup RAM 345 is permitted. In step Sa5103, the used area of RAM 344 is cleared to 0, and in step Sa5104, initialization process of RAM 344 is executed. After that, the main process is terminated, and the process proceeds to normal processing described below.

<Normal processing>
The normal processing will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG.

First, in step Sa5201, a power-on notification process is executed. The power-on notification process is to issue a power-on notification in response to the power being turned on for the pachinko machine 10.

If a power outage occurs when a game is not being played (as in the state before the power is turned on), a message such as "Power has been turned on" is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 as the power-on notification. This message display continues for a predetermined period of time, after which a predetermined demo video is displayed.

In addition, if a power outage occurs during a game round and the game is resumed after the power is turned on (after power is restored), a message such as "The screen will return shortly" is displayed on the display screen G as a power-on notification. At that time, the main display unit 81 will be in a state where the next game round will be played, but the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are not displayed on the display screen G, and no variable display is performed due to them. Such variable display is performed from the start of the next game round (the game round that starts after power is turned on) after power is turned on (after power is restored). The message display is erased when the next game round ends (when the next game round starts).

In addition, in both cases where a power outage occurs when a game round is not being played or when a power outage occurs during a game round, no sound is output from the speaker unit 29 and a silent state is maintained while the power-on notification is being executed. Sound is output from the start of the game round that begins after power is turned on (or the start of the next game round if a subsequent game round is being played when power is restored). With this configuration, when the hall power supply to which multiple pachinko machines 10 are connected is turned on during preparations for business at the game hall, etc., and the pachinko machines 10 are started up simultaneously, it is possible to prevent sounds from being output simultaneously from each pachinko machine 10, which would cause noise.

In step Sa5202, a process for restoring the hold notice is executed to display the hold image in the display mode before the power failure. The details of this process will be described later. Note that the processes of steps Sa5201 and Sa5202 are executed only when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

After execution of step Sa5202, external signal output processing is executed in step Sa5203. In the external signal output processing, the command set in the previous normal processing is sent to the display control device 350, and control signals for driving and controlling the various lamp units 26 to 28 and the speaker unit 29 are sent. In step Sa5204, counter update processing is executed to update the counter values provided in the various counter areas 344b of the RAM 344.

In step Sa5205, a command reception process is executed to receive a command from the main control device 162. The command received by the command reception process is stored in the command storage area 344a of the RAM 344, as already described. In step Sa5206, the performance setting process described with reference to FIG. 30 is executed.

In step Sa5207, it is determined whether or not a power outage flag is set in the backup RAM 345. If the power outage flag is not set, i.e., if a power outage has not occurred, the process proceeds to step Sa5208, where it is determined whether or not the timing for executing the next normal process has arrived, i.e., whether or not a predetermined time (2 msec in this modified example) has elapsed since the start of the current normal process.

If the predetermined time has elapsed, the process returns to step Sa5203 and executes the processing from step Sa5203 onward. On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not elapsed, the process waits until the predetermined time has elapsed. In this case, the remaining time may be used to update the values of various counters, as in the normal processing in the main control unit 162 (Figure 20).

Furthermore, if a positive judgment is made in step Sa5207 (if the power outage flag is set), this means that a power outage has occurred. In this case, the process proceeds to step Sa5209, where on-hold image information is created that indicates in what display mode each on-hold image was displayed before (just before) the power outage occurred. In this step, the process refers to the performance scenario data for the on-hold notice performance stored in RAM 344, and determines whether there are on-hold images displayed in a specific display mode, and if such on-hold images exist, in what display mode they are displayed, and creates on-hold image information based on the determination results.

In step Sa5210, information about the reserved image is stored in backup RAM 345. In addition to the reserved image information created in step Sa5209, the information stored in reserved memory area 344c of RAM 344 is also stored in backup RAM 345, and this information is stored and held as information for displaying the reserved image when power is restored. The information stored in reserved memory area 344c includes reserved information stored in each area set for the first special chart and the second special chart (values of jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and variable type counter CS, etc.), as well as information indicating the number of reserved items.

Note that the process of storing the reserved image information created in step Sa5209 and the process of storing the information stored in the reserved memory area 344c do not necessarily need to be performed in the same step, and one of the storage processes may be performed first, followed by the other storage process.

In step Sa5211, a RAM judgment value is calculated and stored in backup RAM 345. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value of information related to the reserved image stored in backup RAM 345. In step Sa5212, access to RAM 344 and backup RAM 345 is prohibited, and thereafter, an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed.

<Processing for restoring pending notice>
The process for restoring the pending notice in step Sa5202 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 80.

First, in step Sa5301, it is determined whether or not a power outage flag is stored in the backup RAM 345. If the power outage flag is not stored, this means that the power stored in the backup power supply unit 316 has run out and the data stored in the backup RAM 345 has been lost. In this case, the process for restoring the hold notice is terminated.

If a power outage flag is stored, the process proceeds to step Sa5302, where a RAM judgment value is calculated. In the following step Sa5303, it is determined whether or not the RAM judgment value is normal. Specifically, the RAM judgment value calculated in step Sa5302 is compared with the RAM judgment value (step Sa5211) saved when the power outage occurred, and it is determined whether or not the two match.

If the two do not match, the RAM judgment value is deemed abnormal, and the data stored in backup RAM 345 is recognized as invalid. In this case, the process for restoring the pending notice is terminated. The validity of the data stored in backup RAM 345 can also be determined by whether or not the keywords written in a specified area of backup RAM 345 are correctly saved.

On the other hand, if the two match, the RAM judgment value is determined to be normal, and the data stored in the backup RAM 345 is recognized as valid. In this case, the process proceeds to step Sa5304, where the data stored in the backup RAM 345 is referenced to determine the number of items on hold at the time of the power outage.

In step Sa5305, it is determined whether the number of reserved items identified in step Sa5304 is 0. If the number of reserved items is 0, that is, if a power outage occurred when there are no reserved items, the process for restoring the reserved notification is terminated.

If the number of pending images is not 0, the process proceeds to step Sa5306, where display mode setting processing is executed. This processing is for setting the display mode of the pending image to be displayed after power is restored. Here, the display mode setting processing of step Sa5306 is explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 81.

In step Sa5401, the data stored in backup RAM 345 is referenced to ascertain the display mode of each pending image before (just before) the power outage occurred. In step Sa5402, based on the results of the determination in step Sa5401, it is determined whether or not there are any pending images that were displayed in a specific display mode. If there are no pending images that were displayed in a specific display mode, the process proceeds to step Sa5403, where the display mode of all pending images is set to the normal display mode HMa.

If there is a hold image that was displayed in a specific display mode, proceed to step Sa5404, and determine whether the display mode of that hold image (target hold image) is equal to or greater than a specified display mode (e.g., red display mode HMd). If the display mode of the target hold image is a mode lower than the specified display mode (e.g., green display mode HMc or blue display mode HMb), proceed to step Sa5405, and set the display mode of that hold image to the specific display mode before the power outage. In step Sa5406, the display mode of hold images other than the target hold image is set to the normal display mode HMa.

If the display mode of the target hold image is equal to or higher than the predetermined display mode (e.g., red display mode HMd or rainbow display mode HMe), proceed to step Sa5407, and set the display mode of the hold image to a display mode lower than the predetermined display mode (e.g., green display mode HMc). In other words, if the display mode of the target hold image is equal to or higher than the predetermined display mode, the display mode of the target hold image when power is restored is limited to a mode lower than the specific display mode before the power outage.

In step Sa5408, the display mode of the pending images other than the target pending image is set to the normal display mode HMa. In step Sa5409, a return notice flag is set in the various flags storage area 344d of RAM 344. The role of the return notice flag will be described later.

Returning to the explanation of the process for restoring the on-hold notice (FIG. 80), after executing the display mode setting process of step Sa5306, in step Sa5307, the display control device 350 is controlled so that each on-hold image is displayed in the display mode set in step Sa5306. In step Sa5308, the on-hold information etc. stored in the backup RAM 345 is stored (restored) in the corresponding area of the RAM 344. In step Sa5309, the power outage flag stored in the backup RAM 345 is erased, and then the process for restoring the on-hold notice is terminated.

<Special chart change display processing>
The special chart change display process according to this modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 82. This process is executed in step Sa1305 of the performance setting process (Fig. 30), and is executed in place of the special chart change display process in Fig. 41. In Fig. 82, the same step numbers are given to the processes similar to those in Fig. 41, and their descriptions are omitted or simplified. For convenience, in Fig. 82, the description of the first execution process of the reserved notice is omitted.

If the result of step Sa1804 is negative and the display is changing, processing for the display is in progress is executed in step Sa1805. In step Sa5501, it is determined whether the current special chart play round is the play round of the reserved image (target reserved image) that was displayed in a specific display mode before the power was cut off. If it is not the play round of the target reserved image, the special chart change display processing is terminated.

If it is the play time of the target reserved image, the fourth execution process of the reserved notice is performed in step Sa5502, and then the special chart change display process is terminated. The fourth execution process of the reserved notice is for promoting the display mode of the reserved image to a higher mode in the play time of the target reserved image.

<Fourth execution process of pending notice>
The fourth execution process of the pending notice in step Sa5502 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 83.

First, in step Sa5601, it is determined whether a recovery notice flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344. The recovery notice flag is used by the MPU 342 to determine that, when power is restored, a process should be executed to change the display mode of the pending image, which has been set to a lower display mode than the specific display mode before the power outage, to a higher display mode. If the recovery notice flag is not stored, the fourth execution process of the pending notice is terminated.

If the return notice flag is stored, proceed to step Sa5602 and determine whether or not a promotion flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d. The promotion flag is used by the MPU 342 to determine that the display mode of the target reserved image should be promoted, and is similar to the promotion flag in the first embodiment.

If the promotion flag is not stored, in step Sa5603, it is determined whether or not a determined flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d. If a determined flag is stored, the fourth execution process of the pending notice is terminated.

If the determined flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step Sa5604, where it is determined whether or not any reserved change points remain in the ongoing game round. If there are no reserved change points remaining, the process proceeds to step Sa5611, where the return notice flag stored in the various flag storage area 344d is erased, and then the fourth execution process of the reserved notice is terminated.

If pending change points remain, proceed to step Sa5605 to execute the pending notice promotion process, and then terminate the pending notice fourth execution process. Here, the pending notice promotion process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 84.

In the promotion process, first in step Sa5701, the current display mode of the target pending image displayed in the execution display area D is grasped. Note that the current display mode is the display mode set in step Sa5407 of the display mode setting process (Figure 81).

In step Sa5702, the fluctuation pattern of the target reserved image is identified. This is based on the fluctuation start command (step Sa712 in FIG. 23) sent from the main control device 162 at the start of the game round (the game round currently being played) of the target reserved image.

In step Sa5703, a promotion judgment is made for the hold notice performance based on the fluctuation pattern grasped in step Sa5701, the current display mode grasped in step Sa5702, and the promotion judgment table stored in the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343. The promotion judgment is made to determine whether or not it is possible to change the display mode of the target hold image displayed in the execution display area D to a specific display mode higher than the current state.

In the promotion judgment table, an upper limit of the display mode is set corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, similar to the promotion judgment table (Figure 47) in the first embodiment described above. In step Sa5703, the promotion judgment table is referenced to identify the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, and it is determined whether the current display mode is a lower display mode than the identified upper limit display mode. As a result, if it is a lower display mode, the display mode is allowed to be promoted, and if not, promotion is not allowed.

After step Sa5703 is executed, a judged flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d in step Sa5704. The judged flag is used by the MPU 342 to know that a promotion judgement has been executed.

In step Sa5705, it is determined whether the result of the promotion determination in step Sa5703 allows the display mode to be promoted. If promotion is not allowed, the process exits from the promotion process for the pending notice and proceeds to step Sa5611 (Figure 83), where the return notice flag is cleared and the fourth execution process for the pending notice is terminated.

If promotion is allowed, proceed to step Sa5706 and execute the lottery process for the promotion scenario. The promotion scenario determines the timing (hold change point) at which the target pending image displayed in the execution display area D will be changed to which display mode. The lottery for the promotion scenario is performed based on the promotion scenario lottery table stored in the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343 and the lottery counters (random number values) obtained from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344, similar to step Sa2405 (Figure 46) in the first embodiment.

In step Sa5707, promotion scenario data is set so that the promotion scenario selected in step Sa5706 is executed. In step Sa5708, a promotion flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d, and then the pending notice promotion process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the fourth execution process of the on-hold notice (FIG. 83), if a positive judgment is made in step Sa5602 (if the promotion flag is stored), the process proceeds to step Sa5606, where it is determined whether it is time to promote the display mode. This judgment is made based on the result of the promotion scenario setting in step Sa5707. If it is not time to promote, the fourth execution process of the on-hold notice is terminated.

If it is the time to promote, proceed to step Sa5607, and determine the display mode (higher display mode) to which the change will be made in this change process based on the promotion scenario setting results. In the following step Sa5608, a setting is made to change the display mode of the pending image displayed in the execution display area D to the display mode determined in step Sa5607. Specifically, a command to change the display mode of the pending image displayed in the execution display area D is set so as to include information indicating which display mode to change to as an output command to the display control device 350.

In step Sa5609, it is determined whether the display mode identified in step Sa5607 or the display mode set as the destination in step Sa5608 is the final display mode in the promotion performance. For example, if the promotion scenario is set to promote the display mode in multiple stages by multiple change processes, and if the current change process is an intermediate process, this step is determined to be negative as not being the final display mode, and the fourth execution process of the pending notice is terminated.

If it is the final display mode, in step Sa5610, the promotion flag stored in the various flag storage area 344d is erased. In the following step Sa5611, the return notice flag stored in the various flag storage area 344d is erased, and then the fourth execution process of the hold notice is terminated.

<Display mode of pending images before and after power outage>
The display mode of the reserved image before and after the power failure will be described. First, a case where a reserved image in the green display mode HMc exists before the power failure occurs will be described with reference to FIG. 85.

As shown in FIG. 85(a), when a game round of the first special chart is being played, there are three reserved information items for the first special chart, and the reserved image HW in the third unit reserved display area Ga3 is displayed in the green display mode HMc. If a power outage occurs in this state, the pachinko machine 10 turns off, and the display on the display screen G disappears. As a result, all reserved images, including the reserved image HW, are no longer displayed.

At this time, the performance control device 143 stores information about the reserved image in the backup RAM 345. Since the backup RAM 345 is supplied with power for data retention during power outage from the power supply and launch control device 191, the information about the reserved image stored in the backup RAM 345 is retained even during the power outage.

After that, when the power outage is resolved and power is restored, the main control device 162 executes the power restoration process (steps Sa2004 to Sa2010 in FIG. 19) based on the data stored in the RAM 314. As a result, the continuation of the game round (the game round of the first special chart) that was interrupted when the power outage occurred is resumed on the special chart display unit 43.

When power is restored, the performance control device 143 executes a power-on notification process (step Sa5201) to notify the user that power has been turned on. As a result, a text display 461 such as "Screen will return shortly" is displayed on the display screen G.

The performance control device 143 also executes a process for restoring the on-hold notice (step Sa5202) to restore the display of the on-hold images. In the process for restoring the on-hold notice, the number of on-hold images and the display mode of each on-hold image before the power outage are determined based on information about the on-hold images stored in the backup RAM 345, and it is determined whether any of the on-hold images determined were displayed in a specific display mode. If any on-hold images were displayed in a specific display mode, it is determined whether the display mode is equal to or greater than a predetermined display mode (e.g., red display mode HMd), and the display mode when power is restored is set based on the result.

Here, the display mode before the power outage occurred is the green display mode HMc, which is a lower mode than the specified display mode, so the display mode of the hold image HW is set to the display mode before the power outage occurred. As a result, as shown in FIG. 85(b), each hold image is displayed on the display screen G in the same state as when the power outage occurred.

Incidentally, since information regarding the variable display of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 is not backed up, the variable display of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 is not displayed in the above case. Therefore, the text display 461 as the power-on notification and each pending image that is restored based on information regarding the pending images stored in the backup RAM 345 are displayed on a background 462 for when power is restored that is different from the background when the variable display of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 is performed. The background 462 for when power is restored is, for example, a monochrome background displayed in a predetermined display color (for example, black).

After that, when the restarted next round of play is finished, each reserved image is shifted to the lower unit reserved display area as shown in FIG. 85(c). As the next round of play begins, the display screen G changes to show the rows of symbols Z1 to Z3, and the screen returns to normal.

Next, we will explain with reference to Figure 86 what happens when a pending image in red display mode HMd exists before the power outage occurs.

As shown in FIG. 86(a), when a game round of the first special symbol is being played, there are three reserved information pieces of the first special symbol, and the reserved image HW displayed in the third unit reserved display area Ga3 is displayed in a red display mode HMd. If a power outage occurs in this state, the pachinko machine 10 turns off, and the display on the display screen G disappears.

After that, when the power outage is resolved and power is restored, the game round that was interrupted when the power outage occurred (the game round of the first special chart) is resumed on the special chart display unit 43. In addition, the performance control device 143 executes a process for restoring the hold notice, and determines whether the specific display mode of the hold image HW before the power outage occurred is equal to or greater than the predetermined display mode.

Here, the display mode of the on-hold image HW before the power outage occurred is the red display mode HMd, which is a mode equal to or higher than the predetermined display mode, so the display mode of the on-hold image HW when power is restored is set to the green display mode HMc, which is lower than the display mode before the power outage. As a result, as shown in FIG. 86(b), the display of each on-hold image is restored with the display mode of the on-hold image HW set to the green display mode HMc.

After that, when it is time to start playing the reserved image HW, the performance control device 143 grasps the change pattern of the reserved information corresponding to the reserved image HW based on the change start command sent from the main control device 162. Then, based on the change pattern, it determines whether or not to promote the current display mode (green display mode HMc) to a higher display mode.

That is, if the display mode before the power failure occurs is equal to or higher than the predetermined display mode, it is temporarily restored to a lower display mode than the display mode before the power failure, and the display mode of the reserved image HW is reset based on the fluctuation start command sent at the start of the game round. As a result, if it is determined that the image is to be promoted to the red display mode HMd (higher display mode), the display mode of the reserved image HW in the execution display area D is changed from the green display mode HMc to the red display mode HMd, as shown in FIG. 86(c). Note that the game round presentation (reach presentation, etc.) implemented in the game round of the reserved image HW is determined based on the fluctuation pattern analyzed from the fluctuation start command, and therefore the display mode of the reserved image HW that is determined to be promoted based on the fluctuation pattern will be consistent with the game round presentation.

The modified example described above has the following advantages:

When a power outage occurs while the target hold image HW is in a specific display mode (when the hold notice performance is being executed), and the power outage is then resolved and power is restored, the display mode of the target hold image HW after power is restored is set based on the display mode of the target hold image HW before the power outage, and the hold notice performance is executed again.

In this modified example, a hold notice performance is executed in which the display mode of the hold image is a specific display mode based on the result of the hold pre-read process, so that the player's anticipation of a jackpot result can be aroused even before the start of a game round. Furthermore, since multiple types of modes are set as specific display modes with different jackpot expectancies, the expectancy can be indicated by assigning a large or small value, which is advantageous in arousing the player's anticipation. Under such a configuration, if a power outage occurs during the execution of a hold notice performance and then the power is restored, the hold notice performance that was being performed before the abnormality occurs is re-executed. This allows the hold notice performance to be restored after the abnormality is resolved, and the hold notice performance is prevented from disappearing due to the occurrence of an abnormality. At that time, the display mode of the target hold image HW is set based on the display mode before the abnormality occurred, so that the hold notice performance that was being performed before the power outage can be preferably restored.

In the event of a power outage, information regarding the on-hold image is stored in the backup RAM 345, making it possible to retain information corresponding to the display mode of the on-hold image even after a power outage occurs.

According to the above configuration, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped due to a power outage and control over the reserved image is stopped, after power is restored, the display mode of the target reserved image HW before the power outage can be understood by referring to the information stored in the backup RAM 345. This makes it possible to preferably restore the display mode of the target reserved image HW to the display mode before the power outage when the reserved notice performance is executed again after power is restored.

If the display mode of the target pending image HW before the power outage is a notification mode higher than a specified mode (green display mode HMc), the display mode of the target pending image HW after power is restored is configured to be limited to the specified mode or lower.

For example, if a power outage causes a change in the reserved ball information stored in reserved ball storage area 314b, an inconsistency will occur between the results of the reserved ball read before the power outage and the results of the win/lose judgment and the selection of the game round presentation performed in the game round after power is restored. In such a case, if the reserved ball advance notice performance before the power outage suggests a high level of expectation, and this is then re-executed as is after power is restored, the notification results for the game round (the results of the win/lose judgment) and the game round presentation performed in the game round will be inconsistent with the level of expectation suggested by the reserved ball advance notice performance, which could give the player an unpleasant impression.

In this regard, in the above configuration, if the type of specific display mode that was in effect when the power outage occurred was a predetermined or higher mode and suggested a certain degree of expectation, the hold notification performance is restricted to a lower level of display mode and re-executed. This prevents the hold notification performance from suggesting a degree of expectation that does not match the notification results for the game round, making it possible to effectively prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

When the display mode of the target reserved image HW is restricted to a display mode below a predetermined mode, a determination is made as to whether or not to promote the display mode to a higher display mode during the play of the target reserved image HW, and the promotion is carried out based on the result of the determination.

In the above configuration, even if the display mode of the target reserved image HW is restricted to a display mode below a predetermined mode, the display mode is promoted to a higher level by playing the target reserved image HW, so the expected degree of expectation is prevented from remaining low.

In the above case, the decision as to whether or not to promote to a higher display mode is made based on the result of the win/loss judgment made at the time of the game round and the result of the selection of the variation pattern.

In the above configuration, the results after power is restored are used as a basis for determining whether or not to upgrade the display mode of the target pending image HW for the winning/losing judgment and the selection of the game round presentation. This allows the above upgrade to be performed while being consistent with the notification results that are actually performed in the game round after power is restored.

When power is restored after a power outage, the power restoration process is executed, and a setting process (return process for the hold notice) is executed to re-execute the hold notice performance.

In this case, when the power outage is resolved and power is restored, the hold notification performance can be quickly re-executed. As a result, if a power outage occurs during a game round and there is a period after power is restored during which the pattern change display is not performed on the display screen G, the hold notification performance can be re-executed before the pattern change display is restored.

<Modification 6>
In the fifth modified example of the first embodiment, the performance control device 143 is provided with a backup RAM 345, but in this modified example, the performance control device 143 does not have a backup function. This modified example will be described below with reference to Figures 87 to 91. In these figures, the same reference numerals are used to designate the same components as those in the first embodiment and each modified example, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The performance control device 143 of this modified example has the same electrical configuration as the performance control device 143 of the first embodiment, and does not have a backup RAM 345. It also does not have a function for backing up data stored in the RAM 344. For this reason, if a power outage occurs when a hold exists (when a hold image is displayed on the hold display unit 200), the hold information and the like held by the performance control device 143 will be lost.

In addition, in this modified example, the signal line that transmits the power failure signal output from the power failure monitoring unit 315 of the launch control device 191 is not connected to the performance control device 143, and the power failure signal is not input to the performance control device 143.

In addition, in this modified example, the results of the reserved ball read-ahead process (Fig. 28) of the main control device 162 (the results of the read-ahead process such as the variation pattern lottery) are stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b (Fig. 11) of the RAM 314. That is, in addition to the reserved information (the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS), each area set in the reserved ball storage area 314b stores the results of the reserved ball read-ahead process performed on the reserved information.

The information regarding the results of the read-ahead processing stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b continues to be stored in the RAM 314 without being erased even after the information is sent to the performance control device 143. The reason for this configuration is to make it possible to know the results of the reserved read-ahead processing that was performed before the power outage occurred when power is subsequently restored after a power outage occurs.

In other words, in a normal pachinko machine, after the reserved read-ahead process is executed in the main control device 162 and the result is sent to the performance control device 143 as a reserved command or the like, the read-ahead result is not used in the control process on the main control device 162 side, so there is no need to leave the information on the main control device 162 side. For this reason, after sending to the performance control device 143, it is common to release the area in which the information on the read-ahead result was stored and erase the information by overwriting the read-ahead result for the subsequent reserved information, etc.

In contrast, in this modified example, information regarding the read-ahead results is stored in RAM 314 even after the information is sent to the performance control device 143. In the event of a power outage, power for use during power outage is supplied to RAM 314 from the power source and launch control device 191, and the information in RAM 314 is retained without being erased. Therefore, with a configuration like this modified example, it is possible to retain information regarding the read-ahead results when a power outage occurs, and when power is restored after the power outage, it becomes possible to know the results of the pending read-ahead process that was performed before the power outage occurred.

The information about the look-ahead results stored in RAM 314 is not permanently stored, but is erased when the reserved information is erased. In other words, the information about the look-ahead results in RAM 314 is erased in response to the execution of a play round of the reserved information that was the subject of the reserved look-ahead process.

Incidentally, the reason why the storage area for information related to the look-ahead results is reserved ball storage area 314b is to take into consideration the convenience of determining which reserved information the information related to the look-ahead results corresponds to, and of allocating storage areas so that other information is not inadvertently overwritten. Therefore, the storage area for this information does not necessarily have to be reserved ball storage area 314b, but may be another storage area in RAM 314.

The processing performed by the MPU 312 of the main control unit 162 is explained below.

<Main processing>
The main processing according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flow chart of Fig. 87(a). This processing is executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and is executed in place of the main processing of Fig. 19. In Fig. 87(a), the same steps as those in Fig. 19 are given the same step numbers, and their description will be omitted or simplified.

If the determination in step Sa2003 is negative (the RAM erase switch has not been pressed), then in step Sa2004 it is determined whether or not a power outage flag is stored in the backup area of RAM 314. If a power outage flag is stored, i.e., if power is restored after a power outage occurs and data is stored in RAM 314, then in step Sa2005 a RAM determination value is calculated.

In step Sa2006, it is determined whether the RAM judgment value is normal, and if it is normal, the stack pointer is restored in step Sa2007. In step Sa2008, a power restoration command is output.

In step Sa6101, a hold command for when power is restored is set based on the information stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of RAM 314, and output to the performance control device 143. The hold command for when power is restored includes information indicating the number of reserved balls at the time of the power outage, information indicating the results of the hold look-ahead performed before the power outage occurred, and the like. After step Sa6101 is executed, the process of step Sa2009 (clearing the power outage flag) is executed.

The processing performed by the MPU 342 of the performance control device 143 is explained below.

<Normal processing>
The normal process according to this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 87(b). This process is executed in place of the normal process of Fig. 79. As shown in Fig. 87(b), the normal process according to this modification does not include a backup process for reserved information in the event of a power outage.

Specifically, in the normal processing of FIG. 79 relating to the above-mentioned modified example 5, step Sa5207 checks whether a power outage flag is stored in the backup RAM 345 to determine whether a power outage state exists, and if a power outage flag is stored (if a power outage state has occurred), steps Sa5209 to Sa5212 are executed, but in the normal processing of FIG. 87(b) relating to this modified example, these processes are not provided. Also, in the normal processing of FIG. 79 relating to modified example 5 of the above-mentioned first embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, step Sa5202 is executed to restore the reserved notice, but in the normal processing of FIG. 87(b) relating to this modified example, such a process is not provided, and after executing the power on notification process of step Sa5201, the external output process of step Sa5203 is executed.

<Performance setting process>
The effect setting process according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 88. This process is executed in step Sa5206 of the normal process (Fig. 87(b)), and is executed in place of the effect setting process of Fig. 30. In Fig. 88, the same processes as those in Fig. 30 are given the same step numbers, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sa6201, it is determined whether a hold command at power recovery has been received from the main control unit 162. The hold command at power recovery is output when power is restored from a power outage (step Sa6101 in FIG. 87(a)), and the command includes information indicating the number of items on hold at the time the power outage occurred, information indicating the results of the hold look-ahead performed before the power outage occurred, etc.

If a power recovery hold command has been received, the process proceeds to step Sa6202, where the number of items on hold at the time of the power outage is determined based on the power recovery hold command from the main control unit 162. In step Sa6203, it is determined whether the number of items on hold determined in step Sa6202 is 0. If the number of items on hold is not 0, the process proceeds to step Sa6204, where a display mode setting process is executed to set the display mode of the hold image after power is restored. The display mode setting process is now explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 89.

First, in step Sa6301, the change pattern of each reserved information is grasped based on the power recovery reserved command from the main control unit 162. This change pattern was read in advance by the reserved information read-ahead process (Figure 28) of the main control unit 162 before the power outage occurred. Since the power recovery reserved command contains information on the change patterns for the number of reserved items grasped in step Sa6202, in this step, all of these change patterns are grasped.

When sending a hold command when power is restored that includes information on the fluctuation pattern for the number of reserved items, it is expected that the amount of data will be large or that the information on the fluctuation pattern may not be able to be contained, so the information may be sent in multiple installments. Specifically, a hold command when power is restored may first be sent in a form that does not include information on the fluctuation pattern, and the command may be followed by sequentially sending information on the fluctuation pattern for each reserved item.

In step Sa6302, it is determined whether or not there is pending information about a jackpot based on the results of the determination in step Sa6301. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the fluctuation patterns determined in step Sa6301 include a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a jackpot, and it is determined whether or not there is pending information that predicts a jackpot before the power outage occurs.

If there is pending information for a jackpot, proceed to step Sa6303 and set the display mode of the pending image corresponding to the pending information to the first specific display mode. The first specific display mode is a specific display mode lower than the rainbow display mode HMe, which is the upper limit of the final display mode selected when a jackpot is predicted in advance, for example, the green display mode HMc.

In step Sa6304, a return notice flag is set in correspondence with the reserved image (target reserved image). The return notice flag is used by the MPU 342 to know that a process (promotion process) should be executed to change the display mode of the reserved image in the play round of the target reserved image. The return notice flag may be stored in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344, or may be stored in a corresponding area (the area to which the target reserved image corresponds) in the reserved memory area 344c of the RAM 344 so that it is shifted together with the reserved information of the target reserved image.

After execution of step Sa6304 or if a negative judgment is made in step Sa6302 (there is no pending information of a jackpot), in step Sa6305, it is judged whether or not a fluctuation pattern corresponding to an SPSP reach effect exists among the fluctuation patterns grasped in step Sa6301. Specifically, it is judged whether or not any of fluctuation patterns 5H, 6H, 12H, 13H, 24H, and 25H exists. This step judges whether or not the pending information, which is a failure in the pre-read result before the power outage, includes any corresponding to a reach effect with a rank of a predetermined or higher probability of winning.

If there is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the SPSP reach performance, proceed to step Sa6306, and set the display mode of the reserved image corresponding to the reserved information in which the fluctuation pattern has been pre-read to the second specific display mode. The second specific display mode is a display mode lower than the first specific display mode, for example, the blue display mode HMb. In step Sa6307, set the return notice flag in correspondence with the reserved image.

After execution of step Sa6307 or if a negative judgment is made in step Sa6305 (if there is no fluctuation pattern corresponding to the SPSP reach performance), step Sa6308 judges whether there is any reserved information whose fluctuation pattern cannot be grasped in step Sa6301. Note that examples of cases in which the fluctuation pattern cannot be grasped include when a power outage occurs and part of the information indicating the look-ahead result is corrupted, or when some of the data is corrupted due to noise or the like when the power recovery hold command is sent.

If there is pending information whose fluctuation pattern cannot be grasped, proceed to step Sa6309, and set the display mode of the pending image corresponding to that pending information to the normal display mode HMa. In step Sa6310, set the return notice flag corresponding to that pending image.

After execution of step Sa6310 or if a negative judgment is made in step Sa6308 (if there is no pending information whose fluctuation pattern cannot be grasped), in step Sa6311, the display mode of the remaining pending images (pending images whose display mode has not been set by steps Sa6302 to Sa6310) is set to the normal display mode HMa.

Returning to the explanation of the performance setting process (FIG. 88), after the display mode setting process of step Sa6204 is executed, in step Sa6205, the display control device 350 is controlled so that the pending image of the display mode set in the setting process is displayed on the display screen G. After execution of step Sa6205, the process proceeds to step Sa1301, and thereafter, the processes of steps Sa1301 to Sa1308 are executed.

If the result of step Sa6201 is negative (if the power recovery hold command has not been received), the process skips steps Sa6202 to Sa6205 and proceeds to step Sa1301. If the result of step Sa6203 is negative (if the number of held items is 0), the process skips steps Sa6204 and Sa6205 and proceeds to step Sa1301.

By the above process, when power is restored after a power outage occurs, the reserved image of the reserved information in which a jackpot result was predicted is displayed in the first specific display mode, and the reserved image of the reserved information in which a miss result corresponding to a reach effect with a high probability of winning was predicted is displayed in the second specific display mode. After that, the fourth execution process of the reserved notice in step Sa5502 in the specific variation display process (Figure 82) is performed, and the display mode of the target reserved image is upgraded. In other words, the display mode of the target reserved image is reset based on the variation start command sent after power is restored. Note that the fourth execution process of the reserved notice is the same as in Variation 5 above, so a description will be omitted.

<Display mode of pending images before and after power outage>
The display mode of the reserved image before and after the power failure will be described. First, the case where the big win result was pre-read before the power failure occurred will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 90(a), when a game round of the first special chart is being played, there are three reserved information items of the first special chart, and the reserved image HW in the third unit reserved display area Ga3 is displayed in a red display mode HMd. The result of the preview of the reserved information corresponding to the reserved image HW is a jackpot result, and the results of the preview of the reserved information corresponding to the other reserved images are all miss results (complete misses).

If a power outage occurs in this state, the pachinko machine 10 turns off and the display on the display screen G disappears. As a result, all pending images, including the pending image HW, are no longer displayed.

At this time, the RAM 314 of the main control unit 162 is supplied with power for data retention from the power supply and launch control unit 191 during a power outage, so the data stored in the RAM 314 is retained even during the power outage. The data stored in the RAM 314 includes the results of the hold pre-read process (step Sa305) performed on the hold information of each of the hold images before the power outage occurred.

After that, when the power outage is resolved and power is restored, the main control device 162 executes the power restoration process (steps Sa2004 to Sa2010) based on the data stored in the RAM 314. As a result, the continuation of the game round (the game round of the first special chart) that was interrupted when the power outage occurred is resumed on the special chart display unit 43.

When power is restored, the main control unit 162 reads out information from the data stored in RAM 314, such as information indicating the number of reserved items, information indicating whether each reserved item corresponds to the first or second special chart, and information on the results of the reserved item read-ahead process for each reserved item (variation pattern), and transmits these as a power restoration reserved item command to the performance control unit 143 (step Sa6101).

The performance control device 143 executes a process to restore the display of the reserved image based on the various information sent from the main control device 162 (steps Sa6202 to Sa6205). In this process, the display mode of the reserved image HW in which the jackpot result was predicted is set to the first specific display mode (green display mode HMc), and the display mode of the other reserved images is set to the normal display mode HMa. At this time, if there is reserved information whose fluctuation pattern cannot be grasped, the display mode of the reserved image corresponding to that reserved information is set to the normal display mode HMa.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 90(b), the display mode of the on-hold image HW is set to the green display mode HMc, and the display mode of the other on-hold images is set to the normal display mode HMa, and the display of each on-hold image is restored. When power is restored, the performance control device 143 executes a power-on notification process (step Sa5201) to issue a power-on notification, and so a text display 461 such as "Screen will return shortly" is displayed on the display screen G. Therefore, each on-hold image whose display has been restored is displayed together with the above-mentioned text display 461.

After that, when it is time to start playing the reserved image HW, the performance control device 143 grasps the change pattern of the reserved information corresponding to the reserved image HW based on the change start command sent from the main control device 162. Then, based on the change pattern, it determines whether or not to promote the current display mode (green display mode HMc) to a higher display mode.

In other words, the reserved image HW of the reserved information for which the jackpot result was predicted before the power outage occurred is temporarily displayed in a display mode below a predetermined value (first specific display mode), and the display mode of the reserved image HW is reset based on the variation start command sent at the start of a game round. As a result, when it is determined that the image should be promoted to a higher display mode (red display mode HMd or rainbow display mode HMe), the display mode of the reserved image HW is changed to the higher mode (e.g., red display mode HMd) in the execution display area D, as shown in FIG. 90(c).

In addition, if the fluctuation pattern understood from the fluctuation start command sent at the start of a game round of the reserved image HW does not correspond to a jackpot, i.e., if a jackpot is not announced in that game round, promotion to a higher display mode is not permitted, and the display mode of the reserved image HW in the execution display area D is maintained in the first specific display mode.

Next, we will explain with reference to Figure 91 what happens when the SP out-of-reach result and the SPSP out-of-reach result are predicted in advance before the power outage occurs.

As shown in FIG. 91(a), when a game round of the first special chart is being played, there are three reserved information items for the first special chart separately, the reserved image HW1 in the first unit reserved display area Ga1 is displayed in blue display mode HMb, and the reserved image HW in the third unit reserved display area Ga3 is displayed in green display mode HMc.

The predicted result of the pending information corresponding to the pending image HW1 is variation pattern 3H (SP reach A miss), and the predicted result of the pending information corresponding to the pending image HW2 is variation pattern 6H (SPSP reach B miss). Note that the predicted result of the pending information corresponding to the pending image in the second unit pending display area Ga2 is variation pattern 1H (complete miss).

If a power outage occurs in this state, the pachinko machine 10 turns off and the display on the display screen G disappears. When the power outage is then resolved and power is restored, the rest of the game round (the game round of the first special chart) that was interrupted when the power outage occurred is resumed on the special chart display unit 43.

The performance control device 143 also executes processing to restore the display of the reserved image based on the power recovery reserved command sent from the main control device 162 (steps Sa6202 to Sa6205). At this time, for the reserved image HW1 in which a fluctuation pattern corresponding to an SP reach failure (fluctuation pattern 3H) has been pre-read, the display mode is set to the normal display mode HMa, and for the reserved image HW2 in which a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a higher level SPSP reach failure (fluctuation pattern 6H) has been pre-read, the display mode is set to the second specific display mode (blue display mode HMb).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 91(b), the display of each pending image is restored with the display mode of pending image HW1 set to the normal display mode HMa and the display mode of pending image HW2 set to the blue display mode HMb. In other words, pending images of pending information corresponding to reach-miss performances lower than a predetermined rank are displayed in the normal display mode HMa regardless of whether they were displayed in the specific display mode before the power outage occurred, and pending images of pending information corresponding to reach performances of a predetermined rank or higher are displayed restricted to a display mode below a predetermined level (second specific display mode).

When a play round of the reserved image HW2 is executed, a determination is made as to whether to promote to a higher display mode, as this is the same as when the jackpot result is predicted in advance as described with reference to Figure 90, and therefore a description thereof will be omitted.

The modified example described above has the following advantages:

When a power outage occurs while the target hold image HW is in a specific display mode (when the hold notice performance is being executed), and the power outage is then resolved and power is restored, the display mode of the target hold image HW after power is restored is set based on the results of the hold pre-read process performed before the power outage, and the hold notice performance is executed again.

In this modified example, a hold notice performance is executed in which the display mode of the hold image is a specific display mode based on the result of the hold look-ahead process, so that the player's anticipation of a jackpot result can be aroused even before the start of a game round. Furthermore, since multiple types of modes are set as specific display modes with different jackpot expectancies, the expectancy can be indicated by assigning a large or small value, which is advantageous in arousing the player's anticipation. Under such a configuration, if a power outage occurs during the execution of the hold notice performance and then the power is restored, the hold notice performance that was being performed before the abnormality occurred is re-executed. This allows the hold notice performance to be restored after the abnormality is resolved, and the hold notice performance is prevented from disappearing due to the occurrence of an abnormality. At that time, since the display mode of the target hold image HW is set based on the result of the hold look-ahead process before the abnormality occurred, it becomes possible to preferably re-execute the hold notice performance after the power is restored.

By storing the winning/losing results and fluctuation patterns read in advance by the reserved ball read-ahead process in the reserved ball storage area 314b of RAM 314, the information corresponding to the above-mentioned read-ahead results can be retained even after a power outage occurs.

In the above configuration, when a power outage occurs, the information corresponding to the pre-read result is not lost but is retained. Therefore, after power is restored, the display mode of the target hold image HW can be determined based on the information retained in RAM 314, making it possible to preferably replay the hold notification performance after power is restored.

When executing the hold notification performance after power is restored, the display mode of the target hold image HW is limited to a specified mode (green display mode HMc) or lower.

For example, if a change occurs in the reserved ball storage area 314b due to the influence of a power outage, an inconsistency occurs between the result of the reserved ball pre-read performed before the power outage and the result of the hit/miss judgment performed in the game round after the power is restored, or the selection result of the game round presentation. In such a case, if the reserved ball pre-reading performance suggests a high expectation level before the power outage and is replayed as is after the power is restored, the notification result in the game round (the result of the hit/miss judgment) and the game round presentation performed in the game round may not be consistent with the expectation level suggested by the reserved ball pre-reading performance, which may give the player an unpleasant impression. In this regard, in the above configuration, if the type of specific display mode that was performed at the time of the power outage was a predetermined or higher mode and suggested a certain degree of expectation, the reserved ball pre-reading performance is restricted to a lower display mode and replayed. This prevents the reserved ball pre-reading performance from suggesting an expectation level that does not match the notification result in the game round, making it possible to suitably prevent the above-mentioned inconvenience from occurring.

When the display mode of the target reserved image HW is restricted to a display mode below a predetermined mode, a determination is made as to whether or not to promote the display mode to a higher display mode during the play of the target reserved image HW, and the promotion is carried out based on the result of the determination.

In the above configuration, even if the display mode of the target reserved image HW is restricted to a display mode below a predetermined mode, the display mode is promoted to a higher level by playing the target reserved image HW, so the expected degree of expectation is prevented from remaining low.

In the above case, the decision as to whether or not to promote to a higher display mode is made based on the result of the win/loss judgment made at the time of the game round and the result of the selection of the variation pattern.

In the above configuration, the results after power is restored are used as a basis for determining whether or not to upgrade the display mode of the target pending image HW for the winning/losing judgment and the selection of the game round presentation. This allows the above upgrade to be performed while being consistent with the notification results that are actually performed in the game round after power is restored.

After power is restored, if the results of the hold pre-read process performed before the power outage cannot be identified, the display mode of the target hold image HW is set to the normal display mode HMa.

For example, if the results of the reserve read-ahead process performed before the power outage cannot be identified for some of the reserved images, and the display of the reserved images is cancelled, there is a concern that the number of reserved balls will not be properly notified to the player. In addition, when the reserve notice performance is replayed with the reserved images for which the results of the reserve read-ahead process can be identified (the display mode of the reserved images is set to a specific display mode), the display of the reserved images for which the results of the reserve read-ahead process cannot be identified will be lost, causing the order of the reserved images set to a specific display mode and the number of play times to be shifted, which may result in the degree of expectation being suggested by making them correspond to a different number of play times. In this regard, the present configuration distinguishes between reserved images for which the results of the reserve read-ahead process performed before the power outage can be identified and reserved images for which the results cannot be identified, and the latter are redisplayed in the normal display mode HMa, making it possible to properly notify the player of the number of reserved balls while appropriately performing the reserve notice performance for the other reserved images.

When power is restored from a power outage, the main control unit 162 outputs a hold command when power is restored to the performance control unit 143, and based on the performance control unit 143 receiving the hold command when power is restored, it executes a setting process (display mode setting process) to re-execute the hold notice performance.

In this case, when the power outage is resolved and power is restored, the hold notification performance can be quickly re-executed. As a result, if a power outage occurs during a game round and there is a period after power is restored during which the pattern change display is not performed on the display screen G, the hold notification performance can be re-executed before the pattern change display is restored.

<Modification 7>
In this modified example, the switching of the presentation mode is restricted when the reserved image is displayed in a specific display mode. This modified example will be described below with reference to Figures 92 to 94. In these figures, the same reference numerals are used to designate the same components as those in the first embodiment and each modified example, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, the presentation mode was configured to be switched by manual operation, but in this modified example, the presentation mode is configured to be switched automatically without operation of the presentation operation unit 36. The presentation modes include presentation mode A and presentation mode B, which, like the first embodiment, differ in the frequency with which the hold notice presentation occurs. Specifically, presentation mode A is configured to function as a mode in which the hold notice presentation is likely to be executed and the presentation is easy to enjoy, while presentation mode B is configured to function as a mode in which the hold notice presentation is unlikely to be executed, but which has a high probability of winning if it is executed.

<Processing for switching presentation modes>
The presentation mode switching process according to this modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 92. This process is executed in step Sa1307 of the presentation setting process (Fig. 30), and is executed in place of the presentation mode switching process of Fig. 42.

First, in step Sa7101, it is determined whether it is time to draw a lottery to switch presentation modes. In this modified example, a period in a predetermined state (for example, a normal game state in which a presentation that spans multiple game rounds, such as continuous presentations, is not being performed) is set as the effective period for switching presentation modes, and during this effective period, a lottery for switching presentation modes is held at a predetermined timing in each game round (for example, the start timing of a game round). In this step, it is determined whether it is time to hold the lottery. If it is not time to draw a lottery to switch presentation modes, the processing for switching presentation modes is terminated as is in order to maintain the current presentation mode.

If it is time to draw a lottery for switching the presentation mode, proceed to step Sa7102 and execute a first mode switching lottery to draw a lottery for switching the presentation mode. In this step, the lottery is executed based on the lottery counter (random number value) obtained from each counter area 344b of RAM 344 and the first mode switching lottery table stored in the various table storage area 343a of ROM 343. The first mode switching lottery table is a lottery table for drawing a lottery for whether or not to switch the presentation mode. Note that this table may have a common winning probability regardless of the type of presentation mode in which you are currently in, or the winning probability may vary depending on the presentation mode in which you are currently in.

In step Sa7103, it is determined whether the result of the lottery in step Sa7102 is a winning result. If the result of the lottery is a losing result, the processing for switching the presentation mode is terminated to maintain the current presentation mode.

If the lottery result is a winning result, the process proceeds to step Sa7104, where mode switching determination processing is executed. The mode switching determination processing is for determining whether or not switching of the presentation mode is permitted. Here, the mode switching determination processing of step Sa7104 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 93.

First, in step Sa7201, the pending memory area 344c of RAM 344 is referenced to ascertain the current number of pending items. In step Sa7202, it is determined whether the number of pending items ascertained in step Sa7201 is 0. If the number of pending items is 0, in step Sa7203 it is determined that switching of the presentation mode is permitted, and then the mode switching determination process is terminated.

If the number of reserved images is not 0, the current display mode of each reserved image is determined in step Sa7204. In the following step Sa7205, it is determined whether or not there is a reserved image displayed in a specific display mode (any of the blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, or rainbow display mode HMe) based on the determination result in step Sa7204. If there is no reserved image in a specific display mode, the process proceeds to step Sa7203, and it is determined that the presentation mode switching is allowed.

If a reserved image of a specific display mode is present, in step Sa7206, it is determined whether the current mode switch is a switch from presentation mode A to presentation mode B. In other words, it is determined whether the switch is from a presentation mode with a higher occurrence frequency of reserved preview performance to a presentation mode with a lower occurrence frequency (in other words, whether the switch is from a presentation mode with a lower chance of winning the reserved preview performance to a presentation mode with a higher chance).

If it is to switch to presentation mode B, proceed to step Sa7207 and determine whether the pre-read result for the reserved information of the reserved image displayed in the specific display mode is a jackpot result. If the pre-read result is not a jackpot result, it is determined in step Sa7208 that the presentation mode switching is not permitted, and then the mode switching determination process is terminated. Generally, in a win/loss determination, the probability of missing is much higher than the probability of winning (jackpot probability), and most reserved pre-read results are misses, so the majority of the determinations in step Sa7207 above are negative, and the presentation mode switching is not permitted. In other words, in a situation where a reserved image in a specific display mode is present when switching to presentation mode B, the presentation mode switching is basically not permitted and is restricted.

If the above step Sa7207 is judged to be positive (if the pre-read result is a jackpot result), the process proceeds to step Sa7209, where a second mode switching lottery is executed to re-draw the mode switching. In this step, the above lottery is executed based on the lottery counters (random numbers) acquired from each counter area 344b of RAM 344 and the second mode switching lottery table stored in the various table storage area 343a of ROM 343. The second mode switching lottery table is a lottery table for drawing a lottery for whether or not to switch the performance mode, similar to the first mode switching lottery table. The winning probability in the second mode switching lottery table may be the same as the winning probability in the first mode switching lottery table, or it may be different.

In step Sa7210, it is determined whether the result of the lottery in step Sa7209 is a winning result. If the result of the lottery is a losing result, the process proceeds to step Sa7208, where it is determined that switching of the presentation mode is not permitted.

If the lottery result is a winning result, the process proceeds to step Sa7203, where it is determined that the presentation mode switching is permitted. In other words, in some cases where the pre-read result is a jackpot result, the presentation mode switching is exceptionally permitted even if a reserved image of a specific display mode is displayed.

As already explained, if there is a reserved image in a specific display mode and there is no reserved jackpot read-ahead, switching of presentation modes is not permitted, and even if there is a reserved jackpot read-ahead, if the player loses the second mode switching lottery, switching of presentation modes is not permitted. In other words, since it is a rare case that switching of presentation modes is permitted in a situation where there is a reserved image in a specific display mode, the player will recognize this as a violation of the rules, and the presentation will result in a guaranteed jackpot.

If the judgment in step Sa7206 above is negative (switching from presentation mode B to presentation mode A), that is, switching from a presentation mode with a lower frequency of occurrence of the hold preview presentation to a presentation mode with a higher frequency (in other words, switching from a presentation mode with a higher expectation of a jackpot for the hold preview presentation to a presentation mode with a lower expectation of a jackpot for the hold preview presentation), then in step Sa7211 it is judged whether the display mode of the hold image displayed in a specific display mode is equal to or greater than a predetermined mode (e.g., green display mode HMc).

If the display mode is a lower mode than the predetermined mode (for example, blue display mode HMb), proceed to step Sa7203 and determine that the presentation mode switching is permitted. In other words, when switching to presentation mode A, even if a reserved image of a specific display mode is displayed, if the display mode is lower than the predetermined mode, the presentation mode switching is permitted. In this case, the presentation mode switching is performed with the specific display mode of the reserved image maintained. Note that, if the form of the reserved image changes depending on the presentation mode, the form is changed and the display color is set to the same display color as before the mode switching.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sa7211 (if the display mode is equal to or greater than the predetermined mode), then in step Sa7207, for the reserved image whose display mode is equal to or greater than the predetermined mode, it is judged whether or not the result of the advance reading of the reserved information is a jackpot result. After that, the processing of steps Sa7208 to Sa7210 is executed, and the switching of the presentation mode is permitted on the condition that the second mode switching lottery has been won.

Returning to the explanation of the rendering mode switching process (FIG. 92), after executing the mode switching judgment process of step Sa7104, in step Sa7105, it is determined whether or not the result of the judgment process of step Sa7104 permits mode switching. If the result is that mode switching is not permitted, the rendering mode switching process is terminated as is to maintain the current rendering mode.

If the result indicates that mode switching is permitted, the process proceeds to step Sa7106, where a switching process is executed to switch the presentation mode. For example, if the current presentation mode is presentation mode A, the presentation data is set to switch to presentation mode B. Note that the presentation mode may be switched at the start of a game round, or during a game round.

In step Sa7107, the presentation mode flag corresponding to the switched presentation mode is set in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344, and then the presentation mode switching process is terminated.

In addition, in this modified example, the second execution process of the pending notice in step Sa1702 in the shift command response process (Figure 40), the third execution process in step Sa1808 in the special chart change display process (Figure 41), and any processes associated with them are not executed.

<Regarding restrictions on switching between performance modes>
The mode of limiting switching of the presentation mode will be described with reference to Fig. 94. First, the case of switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B will be described with reference to Fig. 94(a).

When the time comes to switch presentation modes, if there are no reserved items, or if there are reserved items but no reserved image in a specific display mode, switching of presentation modes is permitted.

When a reserved image of a specific display mode is present, basically, switching of presentation modes is not permitted. In other words, when switching from presentation mode A, which has a relatively high occurrence frequency of reserved notice presentations (presentation mode in which the likelihood of a jackpot occurring in the reserved notice presentation is relatively low), to presentation mode B, which has a relatively low occurrence frequency (presentation mode in which the likelihood of a jackpot occurring in the reserved notice presentation is relatively high), switching of presentation modes is restricted on the condition that a reserved image of a specific display mode is present.

However, even if there are pending images in a specific display mode, if one of them contains a jackpot result that has been pre-read, then exceptionally, a change in presentation mode is permitted. In this case, as already explained, a presentation will result in a presentation where a jackpot is confirmed due to a presentation inconsistency. Note that if there is pending information in which a jackpot result has been pre-read, and the display mode is the normal display mode HMa, then a change in presentation mode is permitted as it is assumed that there are no pending images in a specific display mode.

Next, switching from presentation mode B to presentation mode A will be explained with reference to Figure 94 (b).

When the time to switch presentation modes arrives and there are no reserved items, or if there are reserved items but no reserved image in a specific display mode, switching of presentation modes is permitted, just as when switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B.

When a reserved image of a specific display mode exists, whether or not mode switching is permitted depends on that display mode. Specifically, when the display mode of the reserved image displayed in a specific display mode is a display mode lower than the specified display mode (blue display mode HMb), switching of the presentation mode is permitted. In other words, when switching from presentation mode B, which has a relatively low occurrence frequency of reserved notice presentations (presentation mode in which the probability of a jackpot for the reserved notice presentation is relatively high), to presentation mode A, which has a relatively high occurrence frequency (presentation mode in which the probability of a jackpot for the reserved notice presentation is relatively low), the switching restrictions are relaxed compared to the opposite case. In this case, the display mode for the reserved image is not changed to the normal display mode HMa, and the specific display mode before the mode switching is maintained.

On the other hand, if the display mode of the reserved image is equal to or higher than the predetermined display mode, switching of the presentation mode is not permitted unless a jackpot result has been predicted in advance. In other words, if the reserved preview presentation informs the player of a certain degree of expectation, switching of the presentation mode is restricted.

The modified example described above has the following advantages:

When a hold preview performance in which the display mode of the hold image is a specific display mode is being performed, the change of performance mode is restricted.

In this modified example, a hold preview performance is executed in which the display mode of the hold image is set to a specific display mode based on the result of the hold pre-read process, so that the player's anticipation of a jackpot result can be aroused even before the start of a game round. In addition, because the mode is switched between performance mode A and performance mode B, the player's mood can be changed during play, and boredom with the game can be suppressed. In this configuration, for example, if the performance mode is switched while the hold preview performance is being executed, there is a concern that the player's attention to the hold preview performance will decrease due to the distraction of the change in performance mode, or conversely, the player may be so focused on the hold preview performance that the performance mode will change without the player noticing, causing confusion.

In this regard, with this configuration, the switching of presentation modes is restricted when a hold notice performance is being executed, thereby preventing overlapping between the execution of the hold notice performance and the switching of presentation modes. This allows the execution of the hold notice performance and the switching of presentation modes to be carried out in a way that is easy for the player to notice, and makes it possible to effectively prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences. Also, if the presentation mode after the switch is not suitable for the hold notice performance being executed, prior adjustments are required to make the two compatible when designing the performance; however, with this configuration, such adjustments are not necessary, which has the advantage of reducing the burden during design.

The likelihood of the hold notice effect being executed differs between presentation mode A and presentation mode B.

In this configuration, the presentation characteristics related to the indication of the probability of winning change when the presentation mode is switched, so the difference in presentation modes can be more strongly impressed on the player than when the change is limited to appearance, such as by changing the background image or character image. On the other hand, however, if the presentation mode is switched while the pending notice presentation is still being executed, there is a risk that the expectation level suggested by the pending notice presentation will differ before and after the presentation mode is switched. In this case, there is a concern that the expectation level suggested by the pending notice presentation in the switched presentation mode will differ from the result of the actual hit/miss judgment that is notified, giving the player an unpleasant impression. By applying this modified example (a configuration that restricts the switching of presentation modes when the pending notice presentation is being executed) to such a configuration, the occurrence of the above-mentioned discrepancy can be avoided, and it is possible to suitably suppress the giving of an unpleasant impression to the player.

Presentation mode B is a presentation mode in which the hold notice presentation is less likely to be executed than presentation mode A, and is configured to restrict switching to presentation mode B when the hold notice presentation is being executed in presentation mode A.

In cases where the likelihood of a hold notice effect being executed in presentation mode B is lower than that in presentation mode A, there is a concern that switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B while the hold notice effect is still being executed will increase the apparent expectation level, causing the player to be presented with a higher expectation level than in reality. In this regard, with this configuration, when switching from presentation mode A, in which the hold notice effect is more likely to be executed (the expectation level corresponding to the hold notice effect is relatively low) to presentation mode B, in which the hold notice effect is less likely to be executed (the expectation level corresponding to the specific notification is relatively high), the execution of the switch is restricted if the hold notice effect is being executed, making it possible to suitably prevent a higher expectation level being suggested than in reality.

When a reserved notice performance is being performed in performance mode A, switching to performance mode B is generally restricted, but if the reserved notice performance and the reserved pre-read result that triggered it are a jackpot result, switching to performance mode B is exceptionally permitted.

In this case, even though the situation does not normally involve a change in presentation mode, the change occurs, which breaks the rules from the player's perspective and can suggest a jackpot. In other words, it becomes possible to use the change in presentation mode as one of the presentations that suggests the level of expectation.

If the conditions for switching to presentation mode A are met while a hold notice presentation is being performed in presentation mode B, whether or not to restrict switching to presentation mode A varies depending on the type of specific display mode when the switching conditions are met.

If the system is configured to uniformly restrict the switching of presentation modes when a hold notice performance is being executed, there is a risk that the switching of presentation modes may be excessively restricted or the frequency with which the hold notice performance is executed may be reduced, which may undermine the significance of providing multiple types of presentation modes or the significance of having a function to execute the hold notice performance. In this regard, in the present configuration, when switching from presentation mode B, which corresponds to a high expectation level corresponding to the hold notice performance, to presentation mode A, which corresponds to a low expectation level corresponding to the hold notice performance, the mode switching restrictions are relaxed, and switching is permitted on the condition that the specific display mode when the switching condition is met is equal to or less than a specified mode (green display mode HMc). This makes it possible to prevent excessive restrictions on switching presentation modes or the execution of the hold notice performance, and makes it possible to optimally secure these opportunities.

<Modification 8>
In this modified example, the execution of the hold notice effect is restricted when the effect mode is switched. This modified example will be described below with reference to Figures 95 to 99. In these figures, the same reference numerals are used to designate the same components as those in the first embodiment and each modified example, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In this modified example, a switching guide notification is given during the effective switching period of the presentation mode, and if the player operates the presentation operation unit 36 while this notification is being given, the presentation mode is switched from the next game round. Here, an example of such a mode switch is described.

As shown in FIG. 95(a), during a given game round during the effective period for switching the presentation mode, a switching guide image 451 is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 as a switching guide notification. This switching guide image 451 is displayed for a given period (for example, the period until the end of that game round).

Figure 95 (a) shows a display example of the switching guide image 451 in which a text display such as "Press the effect button to switch the effect mode" is displayed as a caption above the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G. Note that the switching guide notification is not limited to this, and may also be a window with the above text display displayed, or a specific light-emitting element corresponding to the switching guide being illuminated. Also, the notification is not necessarily limited to a visual notification, and may be an audio guide using the speaker unit 29.

In such a state, when the player performs a specified operation on the presentation operation unit 36, a switch standby notification is issued. The switch standby notification notifies the player that a switch of presentation modes is on standby. The specific form of the switch standby notification is not particularly limited, but for example, as shown in FIG. 95(b), a switch standby image 452 with text such as "Preparing for mode change" is displayed on the display screen G.

When the game round in which the waiting-for-switch image 452 is displayed ends and the game moves to the next round, the waiting-for-switch image 452 disappears and the presentation mode changes, as shown in FIG. 95(c).

In addition, if the player does not operate the presentation operation unit 36 during the display period of the switching guide image 451 in FIG. 95(a), the presentation mode will not be switched and the current presentation mode will be maintained even when moving on to the next game round.

The presentation modes include presentation mode A and presentation mode B, which, like the first embodiment, differ in the frequency with which the on-hold notice presentation occurs. Specifically, presentation mode A is configured to function as a mode in which the on-hold notice presentation is likely to be executed and the presentation is easy to enjoy, while presentation mode B is configured to function as a mode in which the on-hold notice presentation is unlikely to be executed, but which has a high probability of winning if it is executed.

<Processing for switching presentation modes>
The presentation mode switching process according to this modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 96. This process is executed in step Sa1307 of the presentation setting process (Fig. 30), and is executed in place of the presentation mode switching process of Fig. 42.

First, in step Sa8101, it is determined whether or not the presentation mode switching is valid. In this modified example, as in modified example 7 above, a period in which a predetermined state (for example, a normal game state in which a presentation that spans multiple game rounds, such as continuous presentations, is not being performed) is set as the presentation mode switching valid period. If the presentation mode switching is not valid, the presentation mode switching process is terminated to maintain the current presentation mode.

If it is during the valid period for switching the presentation mode, the process proceeds to step Sa8102, where it is determined whether or not a switching standby flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344. The switching standby flag is used by the MPU 342 to determine that a mode switching is in a standby state, in other words, that the presentation mode will be switched later.

If the switch standby flag is not stored, i.e., if the mode is not in standby for switching, the process proceeds to step Sa8103, where it is determined whether or not a guidance display flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d. The guidance notification flag is used by the MPU 342 to know that a switching guidance notification is being executed.

If the guidance notification flag is not stored, i.e., if the switching guidance notification is not being executed, the process proceeds to step Sa8104, where it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the lottery for executing the switching guidance notification. The lottery for executing the switching guidance notification is a process of drawing lots to determine whether or not to execute the switching guidance notification. The lottery timing for the switching guidance notification is not particularly limited, but in this modified example, the start timing of a game round is set to the above lottery timing. If it is not time to draw lots, the process for switching presentation modes ends.

If it is time for a lottery, the process proceeds to step Sa8105, where a lottery is held to determine whether or not to execute the switching guidance notification. In this step, the lottery is held based on the lottery counter (random number) obtained from each counter area 344b of the RAM 344 and the switching guidance lottery table stored in the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343. In step Sa8106, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of step Sa8105 is a winning result. If the lottery result is a losing result, the processing for switching the presentation mode is terminated so that the switching guidance notification is not executed.

If the lottery result is a winning result, the process proceeds to step Sa8107, and the display control device 350 is controlled to display the switching guide image 451 as a switching guide notification. Specifically, a command to display the switching guide image 451 is set as a transmission command to the display control device 350. As a result, the switching guide image 451 is displayed on the display screen G. In step Sa8108, a notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d, and then the processing for switching the presentation mode is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sa8103 (if the guidance notification flag is stored), i.e., if a switching guidance notification is being executed, the process proceeds to step Sa8109, where it is judged whether or not a predetermined operation for switching the presentation mode has been performed on the presentation operation unit 36. If a predetermined operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step Sa8110, where the guidance notification flag stored in the various flag storage area 344d is erased.

In step Sa8111, a switching standby flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d. This transitions to a mode switching standby state. In step Sa8112, the display control device 350 is controlled to display a switching standby image 452 as a switching standby notification. Specifically, a command to display the switching standby image 452 is set as a transmission command to the display control device 350. This causes the switching standby image 452 to be displayed on the display screen G. After step Sa8112 is executed, the presentation mode switching process is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sa8109 (the specified operation has not been performed), the process proceeds to step Sa8113, where it is judged whether the display period of the switching guide image 451 (notification period of the switching guide notification) has elapsed. If the display period has not elapsed, the process for switching the presentation mode is terminated so that the display of the switching guide image 451 continues.

If the display period has elapsed, the process proceeds to step Sa8114, where the notification flag stored in the various flag storage area 344d is erased. This ends the period during which the presentation mode switching operation is accepted. Also, in step Sa8114, the display control device 350 is controlled to erase the switching guide image 451. After step Sa8114 is executed, the presentation mode switching process ends.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sa8102 (if the switching standby flag is stored), i.e., if the game is in a standby state for mode switching, the program proceeds to step Sa8115, where it is judged whether or not it is time to switch modes. The timing for switching presentation modes is not particularly limited as long as it is a timing after transition to a standby state, but in this modified example, the start timing of the next game round that is performed after the end of the game round in which the switching operation was performed is set as the switching timing. If it is not the timing to switch, the processing for switching presentation modes is terminated to continue the standby state for mode switching.

If it is time to switch, the process proceeds to step Sa8116, where the switch standby flag stored in the various flag storage area 344d is erased. This ends the standby state for mode switching. In step Sa8117, a switching process is executed to switch the presentation mode. For example, if the current presentation mode is presentation mode A, the presentation data is set to switch to presentation mode B.

In step Sa8118, the presentation mode flag corresponding to the presentation mode after switching is set in the various flag storage area 344d. In step Sa8119, the second setting process for the hold notice is executed, and then the process for switching presentation modes is terminated. The second setting process for the hold notice is for setting the execution of the hold notice presentation for the hold information that occurs during the waiting period for switching modes. The details of this setting process will be described later.

<Pending command processing>
The hold command response process according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 97. This process is executed when a hold command is received from the main control device 162 (executed in step Sa1302 of the performance setting process (Fig. 30)), and is executed in place of the hold command response process of Fig. 31. In Fig. 97, the same processes as those in Fig. 31 are given the same step numbers, and their explanations will be omitted or simplified.

In step Sa1402, the value of the hold number counter (start hold memory number SN) provided in the various counter area 344b of RAM 344 is incremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step Sa8201, where it is determined whether or not a switch standby flag is stored in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344. If the switch standby flag is not stored, i.e., if the mode is not in a standby state for switching, the process proceeds to step Sa1403, where the setting process for the hold notice (Figure 34) is executed. In the setting process for the hold notice, settings are made to execute the hold notice performance for the generated hold information.

If the switch standby flag is stored (the mode is in standby for switching), the process proceeds to step Sa8202, and the display mode of the on-hold image corresponding to the generated on-hold information is set to the normal display mode HMa. In other words, in this modified example, if new on-hold information occurs during the standby period for switching the mode, the execution of the on-hold preview performance triggered by that on-hold information is restricted.

The read-ahead for this reserved information is performed by the reserved read-ahead process (Fig. 26) of the main control unit 162, in the same way as for other reserved information. Therefore, the performance control unit 143 does not execute the setting process for the reserved notice in step Sa1403, and forces the display mode of the reserved image to the normal display mode HMa, but the read-ahead results such as the change pattern are in a state obtained by the reserved command from the main control unit 162.

In step Sa8203, standby occurrence information indicating that the pending information occurred during the standby period is stored in correspondence with the pending information that occurred. This process is performed, for example, by storing the standby occurrence information in the first to fourth areas (FIG. 32) provided in the pending memory area 344c of RAM 344. Therefore, when the shift process of step Sa1704 in the shift command response process (FIG. 40) is executed, the standby occurrence information is shifted to the lower area in association with the pending information (variation pattern information, etc.). This makes it possible to know which pending image occurred during the standby period even if the display area of the pending image is shifted by the shift process. Note that the standby occurrence information may be stored in a memory area other than the pending memory area 344c of RAM 344 as long as it is possible to recognize which pending information is the target.

After execution of step Sa8203, in step Sa1405, processing is executed to display a hold image in the hold display section 200 of the display screen G. As described above, since the display mode is set to the normal display mode HMa in step Sa8202, the hold image of the hold information generated during the waiting period is displayed in the normal display mode HMa.

<Second setting process for hold notice>
The second setting process for the hold notice in step Sa8119 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 98. The second setting process for the hold notice is to set the execution of the hold notice performance for the hold information generated during the waiting period for mode switching.

First, in step Sa8301, the pending information that occurred during the standby period for mode switching is identified. That is, based on the information generated during standby, it is determined which pending information that exists at that time occurred during the standby period.

After executing the process of step Sa8301, the process of steps Sa8302 and onwards is executed for the pending calls that occurred during the identified waiting period. Note that since most of the processes from step Sa8302 onwards are similar to the processes in the setting process for pending notice (Figure 34), the explanation of the common processes will be simplified and the different processes will be explained in detail.

In steps Sa8302 to Sa8304, the pending memory area 344c of RAM 344 is referenced to determine the pattern of changes in pending occurrences during the waiting period, and whether or not a jackpot has been won. In step Sa8305, the presentation mode after the switch is determined. For example, if the current mode switch is from presentation mode A to presentation mode B, presentation mode B is determined as the presentation mode after the switch.

In steps Sa8306 to Sa8308, a hold notice execution lottery table corresponding to the switched presentation mode identified in step Sa8305 is obtained, and a lottery is held to execute the hold notice presentation. If the execution lottery is won, in steps Sa8309 to Sa8314, the final display mode of the hold image in the hold notice presentation is determined, and the presentation scenario is determined. At that time, if different tables are set for each presentation mode as the final display mode lottery table for drawing the final display mode, or the presentation scenario lottery table for drawing the presentation scenario, the table corresponding to the switched presentation mode identified in step Sa8305 is obtained and a lottery is held.

In this way, in this modified example, for pending information that occurs during the waiting period for mode switching, when the standby state is released, a pending notice performance is set (a display mode setting process based on the results of advance reading). At that time, although the pending information that occurs during the standby period occurred during the performance mode before the switch, the lottery for the execution of the pending notice performance and the lottery for the final display mode are performed according to the conditions set for the performance mode after the switch, and are performed in accordance with the performance mode after the switch.

In step Sa8315, the hold notice flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344, and then the second setting process for the hold notice is terminated. After the hold notice flag is set in this manner, a process is executed to change the display mode of the hold notice to a specific display mode in the first execution process of the hold notice in step Sa1701 in the shift command response process (FIG. 38(a)) or in the first execution process of the hold notice in step Sa1807 in the special chart change display process (FIG. 41). In other words, the hold notice performance for hold information that occurs during the waiting period for mode switching is performed after the performance mode is switched.

<Display mode of reserved images when the performance mode is switched>
The display mode of the reserved image when the presentation mode is switched will be described with reference to Fig. 95 and Fig. 99. Here, the case of switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B will be described as an example.

If the execution lottery for the switching guide notification is won during the valid switching period of the mode switching, a switching guide image 451 is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75, as shown in FIG. 95(a). When the player performs a mode switching operation using the performance operation unit 36 in this state, the game moves to a standby state for mode switching (a state in which the player is aware that a mode switch will occur later), and a switching standby image 452 is displayed on the display screen G, as shown in FIG. 99(a). The standby state for mode switching ends when the mode switching timing occurs (the start timing of the next game round).

If two new pieces of pending information occur during the standby period, the main control device 162 executes the pending read-ahead process (step Sa305) in the same way as for pending information that occurs outside the standby period, and reads ahead the change patterns, etc., for each piece of pending information. In addition, the performance control device 143 does not execute the setting process for the pending notice (step Sa1403) for each piece of pending information, and sets the display mode of the corresponding pending images HW1, HW2 to the normal display mode HMa.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 99(b), the hold images HW1, HW2 in the normal display mode HMa are displayed in the second unit hold display area Ga2 and the third unit hold display area Ga3 of the first hold display area Ga. The state in which the display mode of the hold images HW1, HW2 is the normal display mode HMa continues at least until the standby state ends.

When the mode switching timing occurs with the start of the next game round, the standby state for mode switching ends, and the presentation mode switches from presentation mode A to presentation mode B, as shown in FIG. 99(c). At this time, the presentation control device 143 executes the second setting process for the hold notice (step Sa8119) for the hold information (hold images HW1, HW2) that occurred during the standby period.

In the second setting process for the hold notice, various selections are made to execute the hold notice performance (selection of the execution of the hold notice performance, selection of the final display mode, selection of the performance scenario, etc.) based on the results of the hold pre-reading process executed when the hold information was acquired. At that time, for these selections, a selection table set for the performance mode B, which is the performance mode after switching, is used.

If the result of the second setting process for the hold notice is that the hold notice performance will not be executed for the hold image HW1, and the hold image HW2 will be changed to the blue display mode HMb at the next shift timing, then as shown in FIG. 99(d), when the hold image HW2 is shifted from the second unit hold display area Ga2 to the first unit hold display area Ga1, its display mode will be changed from the normal display mode HMa to the blue display mode HMb. In other words, the hold notice performance triggered by the hold information generated during the waiting period for the mode change will be executed after the mode change.

In addition, there may be cases where a lottery for executing a switching notification notification is won while the hold notice performance is being executed, and switching notification image 451 (Figure 95 (a)) is displayed while the hold notice performance is being executed. In this case, the hold notice performance is not subject to the execution restriction, and the system transitions to a standby state with the hold notice performance continuing.

In addition, hold information may occur between the time when the switching guide image 451 is displayed and the time when the switching operation is performed (before the transition to the standby state), and the hold information may trigger the execution of a hold notice performance. In other words, the standby state may be transitioned to with the hold image of the hold information acquired after the switching guide image 451 is displayed in a specific display mode. In this case, the hold notice performance is not subject to the execution restriction, and the standby state is transitioned to with the hold notice performance continuing.

The modified example described above has the following advantages:

When the conditions for switching the presentation mode are met and the game moves to a standby state, and then when the timing for switching arrives, the presentation mode is switched. During the standby state, the game is configured to restrict the execution of the hold preview presentation, which sets the display mode of the hold image to a specific display mode.

In this modified example, a hold preview performance is executed in which the display mode of the hold image is set to a specific display mode based on the result of the hold pre-read process, so that the player's anticipation of a jackpot result can be aroused even before the start of a game round. In addition, because the mode is switched between performance mode A and performance mode B, the player's mood can be changed during play, and boredom with the game can be suppressed. In this configuration, for example, if the performance mode is switched while the hold preview performance is being executed, there is a concern that the player's attention to the hold preview performance will decrease due to the distraction of the change in performance mode, or conversely, the player may be so focused on the hold preview performance that the performance mode will change without the player noticing, causing confusion.

In this regard, with this configuration, when it is known that the presentation mode will be switched later (standby state for mode switching), the execution of the hold notice presentation is restricted, so that the presentation mode can be prevented from switching while the hold notice presentation is being executed. This allows the execution of the hold notice presentation and the switching of presentation modes to be carried out in a way that makes it easy for the player to notice, and makes it possible to effectively prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences. Also, if the presentation mode after the switch is not suitable for the currently executing hold notice presentation, prior adjustments are required to make the two compatible when designing the presentation; however, with this configuration, such adjustments are not necessary, which has the advantage of reducing the burden at the time of design.

The system is designed to restrict the execution of the hold notification effect based on hold information acquired during standby mode.

The above configuration broadens the range of special states that are subject to the restriction of the hold notice performance, and prevents excessive restriction of the execution of the hold notice performance. In particular, if the execution restriction of the hold notice performance is applied to the hold information acquired during the period from the display of the switching guide image 451 until the transition to the standby state, the execution of the hold notice performance will be restricted even for hold information acquired in a situation where it is uncertain whether the performance mode will actually be switched. In this case, if the player does not perform the switching operation and the performance mode is not switched, the execution of the hold notice performance will be restricted for hold information that did not need to be restricted, but with this configuration, it is possible to prevent such unnecessary restrictions.

The system is designed to restrict the execution of the hold preview performance regardless of the results of the hold pre-read process.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to forcibly restrict the execution of the hold preview performance regardless of the result of the hold preview processing. This makes it possible to preferably prevent the performance mode from switching while the hold preview performance is being executed. In addition, since the execution restriction of the hold preview performance is not affected by the result of the hold preview processing, the hold preview processing can be carried out in the same way as when the device is not in a standby state (during the hold preview performance restriction period) even in a standby state. In other words, since there is no need to change the configuration of the hold preview processing, it is possible to restrict the execution of the hold preview performance in a standby state while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

The likelihood of the hold notice effect being executed differs between presentation mode A and presentation mode B.

In this configuration, the presentation characteristics related to the indication of the probability of winning change when the presentation mode is switched, so the difference in presentation modes can be more strongly impressed on the player than when the change is limited to appearance, such as changing the background image or character image. On the other hand, however, if the presentation mode is switched while the pending notice presentation is being executed, there is a risk that the expectation level suggested by the pending notice presentation will differ before and after the presentation mode is switched. In this case, there is a concern that the expectation level suggested by the pending notice presentation in the presentation mode after the switch will differ from the result of the actual hit/miss judgment that is notified, giving the player an unpleasant impression. By applying this modified example (a configuration that limits the execution of the pending notice presentation when the presentation mode is in a standby state in which preparations are being made to switch) to such a configuration, the occurrence of the above-mentioned discrepancy can be avoided, and it is possible to suitably suppress giving the player an unpleasant impression.

Presentation mode B is a presentation mode in which the hold notice presentation is less likely to be executed than presentation mode A, and is configured to restrict switching to presentation mode B when the hold notice presentation is being executed in presentation mode A.

In the case where the likelihood of the hold notice performance in presentation mode B is lower than that in presentation mode A, there is a concern that switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B while the hold notice performance is still being executed will increase the apparent expectation level, and present a higher expectation level to the player than in reality. In this regard, in this configuration, when switching from presentation mode A, in which the hold notice performance is more likely to be executed (the expectation level corresponding to the hold notice performance is relatively low) to presentation mode B, in which the hold notice performance is less likely to be executed (the expectation level corresponding to the specific notification is relatively high), the execution of the hold notice performance is restricted if preparations are underway to switch to that mode. This prevents switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B while the hold notice performance is being executed, making it possible to suitably prevent the suggestion of a higher expectation level than in reality.

The system is configured so that the on-hold preview performance corresponding to the on-hold information acquired during the standby state is executed after switching the performance mode. This prevents the execution of the on-hold preview performance from being restricted for the on-hold information acquired during the standby state, preventing the expectation level indication from being impossible.

In the above case, the hold notice performance after the mode switch is configured to be executed based on the results of the hold look-ahead process performed during the standby state (the hold look-ahead process when the hold information is acquired). In this case, it is possible to execute the hold notice performance corresponding to the hold information acquired during the standby state without having to execute the hold look-ahead process again after the performance mode is switched. This allows the existing configuration for the hold look-ahead process of the main control unit 162 to be used as is, and prevents the configuration from becoming complicated.

The system is configured to hold a lottery to determine whether or not to execute the hold notice performance after switching the performance mode based on the hold information acquired during the standby state, and to apply the lottery conditions (winning probability, etc.) for the execution lottery that correspond to the performance mode after the switch.

In the above configuration, when a lottery is held to determine whether or not to execute a hold notice performance after a performance mode change, the lottery conditions applied are those set in accordance with the performance mode after the change, rather than the lottery conditions when the target hold information was acquired (lottery conditions set in accordance with the performance mode before the change). This makes it possible to execute a hold notice performance in accordance with the performance mode after the change, even if the hold information was acquired during a standby state (before the performance mode was changed).

When pending information is acquired during a standby state, information generated during standby indicating that the pending information was acquired during a standby state is stored in the pending memory area 344c of the RAM 344.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to know after the standby state that the pending information was acquired during the standby state based on the information generated during standby stored in the hold memory area 344c of the RAM 344. Therefore, even if the pending information acquired before the standby state and the pending information acquired during the standby state are mixed after the standby state ends, it is possible to easily identify the pending information acquired during the standby state. As a result, when executing the hold notification performance after the mode is switched, it is possible to distinguish between the pending information acquired during the standby state and the pending information that was not, and to process only the pending information acquired during the standby state.

<Other Modifications>
The present invention is not limited to the above-described first embodiment and each modified example, and may be implemented, for example, as follows. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to the first embodiment and each modified example, or may be applied to the first embodiment and each modified example in combination in part or in whole. It is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the first embodiment and each modified example. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed.

(1) In the first embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, the maximum number of pending information items based on winning at the first actuation port 62 is four, but it may be less than four (it may be one), or it may be five or more. The maximum number of pending information items based on winning at the second actuation port 63 may also be less than four (it may be one), or it may be five or more. The maximum number of pending information items based on winning at each actuation port 62, 63 may also be different.

(2) In the first embodiment and each of the modified examples, the reserved information based on winning entries at the first actuation port 62 and the second actuation port 63 is differentiated, but it may be configured not to be differentiated. Also, the reserved information based on winning entries at the second actuation port 63 is given priority in determining whether it is a win or lose over the reserved information based on winning entries at the first actuation port 62, but the relationship may be reversed, or the winning or lose determination may be performed in the order of winning entries.

(3) In the first embodiment and each of the modified examples, only game balls flowing down the right route can pass through or win the through gate 64 and the second operating port 63, but only game balls flowing down the left route can pass through or win, or game balls can pass through or win from either the right route or the left route. However, in order to add variety to the game, it is preferable to configure the game so that only game balls flowing down either the right route or the left route can win the first operating port 62, and only game balls flowing down the other of the right route or the left route can pass through or win the through gate 64 and the second operating port 63.

(4) In the first embodiment and each of the modified examples, a hold image is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 to notify the player of the number of holds, but the hold image may be displayed on a display unit other than the pattern display device 75, or hold lamp units (light-emitting units) provided in a number corresponding to the upper limit memory number may be illuminated to notify the number of holds based on the number of illuminated hold lamp units. When the hold lamp units are illuminated, a hold notice performance can be performed by changing the light-emitting state (e.g., light-emitting color) to a specific light-emitting state different from the normal light-emitting state based on the result of the hold look-ahead process.

(5) In the first embodiment and each of the modified examples, the result of the win/lose judgment is a jackpot result, and the game transitions to the jackpot game (open/close execution mode). However, like a so-called type 1/type 2 hybrid machine, the result of the win/lose judgment is a small win result, and the game transitions to the jackpot game when the game ball passes through the V winning port (V winning sensor) during the small win game (a game state in which a variable winning device having a V winning port or a V winning port and a loss port inside is opened and closed) (when the award judgment results in a predetermined result and a predetermined game result is achieved).

In addition, in the present invention, "a bonus can be awarded to the player based on the fact that a bonus corresponding result has been achieved" and "the player is transitioned to a special game state that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that a bonus corresponding result has been achieved" can be understood to also include the case where the result of the win/loss determination is a small win result and transitions to a big win game via a V win, as described above.

(6) In the first embodiment and each of the modified examples, a hold preview effect was executed as a specific notification in which the display mode of the hold image was a specific display mode. However, instead of a hold preview effect using a hold image, the configuration of each of the first embodiment and each of the modified examples may be applied to a play round effect (so-called continuous preview effect or look-ahead zone effect) that is executed over multiple play rounds based on the results of the hold look-ahead process.

(7) In the first embodiment and each of the modified examples, a specific notification is executed across game rounds, but the specific notification does not necessarily have to be across game rounds, and may be executed within a single game round. For example, in the first embodiment, this is because it is expected that the presentation mode will be switched multiple times during a game round. In this case, the presentation executed within that single game round does not necessarily have to be triggered by the result of the reserved read-ahead process, and may be based on the result of a win/lose determination performed at the start of that game round.

(8) In the first embodiment and each of the modified examples, the patterns displayed variably on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 are configured to scroll in the left-right direction, but the patterns may be displayed lined up on the left, center, and right, and these patterns may be variably displayed by scrolling up and down. In other words, the arrangement direction of the patterns and the scrolling direction are not particularly limited. Furthermore, the number of patterns (number of rows of patterns) is not limited to three, and may be two, or four or more.

(9) In the first embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, an execution display area D is provided to notify the player that a reserved play has been completed, but the configuration may be such that the execution display area D is not provided.

(10) In the first embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, when a hold notice performance is executed, a performance scenario is set including the notification period in the execution display area D. However, a performance scenario may be set for the period before the target hold image HW is displayed in the execution display area D (the period during which the play turn of the target hold image HW is on hold).

(11) In the first embodiment and each of the modified examples, when executing a hold notice performance, the settings are made in stages, such as by determining the final display mode of the hold image and then setting the performance scenario. However, a configuration may also be adopted in which the final display mode and performance scenario are set in a single process. For example, a configuration may also be adopted in which both the final display mode and the performance scenario are determined by a single table.

(12) In the first embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, information on the fluctuation pattern is transmitted when the result of the hold pre-read process executed by the main control unit 162 is notified to the performance control unit 143. However, in order to prevent the data volume of the transmission command from becoming large, it is also possible to transmit predetermined information with a smaller data volume than the fluctuation pattern (such as an identifier corresponding to the fluctuation pattern or rank information when the fluctuation pattern is ranked according to the degree of expectation). This also applies to the power recovery hold command in modified example 5 of the first embodiment.

(13) In the first embodiment and each of the modified examples, the game round presentation (presentation pattern) is determined based on the fluctuation pattern, but the game round presentation may be determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS or the jackpot random number counter C1. In this case, the main control device 162 does not execute the reserved read-ahead process, and the presentation control device 143 executes the reserved read-ahead process (a process of reading ahead the result of the win/lose judgment and the game round presentation) based on the reserved command from the main control device 162 (information indicating the value of the fluctuation type counter CS or the jackpot random number counter C1).

(14) In the first embodiment and each of the modified examples, the mode of the hold notice presentation (display mode of the hold image) is set based on the fluctuation pattern identified by the hold pre-reading process, but the presentation control device 143 may be configured to pre-read the presentation pattern (play round presentation) based on the information on the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern identified by the hold pre-reading process) sent from the main control device 162, and set the mode of the hold notice presentation based on the result. This type of configuration is particularly effective, for example, when multiple types of presentation patterns (play round presentations) correspond to one fluctuation pattern.

(15) In the above first embodiment, variants 1 to 3 of the first embodiment, and variants 5 to 8, the reserved read-ahead process is configured to be performed by the main control device 162, but it may be configured to be performed by the performance control device 143 or the display control device 350. When the reserved read-ahead process is executed by the performance control device 143, as in variant 4 of the first embodiment, information corresponding to the value (obtained random number) of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the variation type counter CS may be transmitted from the main control device 162 to the performance control device 143, and the performance control device 143 may read in advance the result of the hit/miss judgment, the lottery result of the variation pattern, etc. Also, in the above variant 4, at least one of the first reserved read-ahead process and the second reserved read-ahead process may be configured to be performed by the main control device 162.

(16) In the above first embodiment and variants 1 to 4 of the first embodiment, the display mode of the target hold image HW is restored to the original specific display mode before being promoted to a higher-level display mode, but it may be configured to promote to a higher-level display mode without restoring to the original specific display mode. Also, it may be configured in such a way that both the case of restoring to the original specific display mode before being promoted to a higher-level display mode and the case of promoting to a higher-level display mode without restoring to the original specific display mode can occur.

(17) In the above first embodiment and variants 1 to 4 of the first embodiment, when the display mode of the target hold image HW is restored to the original specific display mode, the display mode of the target hold image HW may be restored in stages. However, a configuration may be adopted in which a gradual restoration does not occur. In other words, a configuration may be adopted in which the display mode is restored to the original specific display mode with a single uniform change in the display mode.

(18) In the first embodiment and variants 1 to 4 of the first embodiment described above, the return scenario is set to include the display period in the execution display area D. However, the return scenario may be set to include only the display period in the first pending display area Ga or the second pending display area Gb (without including the display period in the execution display area D).

(19) In the first embodiment and variants 1 to 4 of the first embodiment described above, the promotion process of the target reserved image HW may not be executed.

(20) In the first embodiment and variants 1 to 4 of the first embodiment, the target reserved image HW is restored to the original specific display mode during the period (reserved period) during which it is displayed in the first reserved display area Ga or the second reserved display area Gb, and is then promoted to a higher display mode during the play round of the target reserved image HW. However, it is not necessary to wait until the play round of the target reserved image HW before promotion, and the promotion may be performed during the reserved period. When the promotion process is performed before the play round starts, it is advisable to refer to the result of the reserved pre-read process performed on the target reserved image HW (reserved information) instead of the fluctuation start command transmitted from the main control device 162 at the start of the fluctuation.

(21) In the first embodiment and variants 1 to 4 of the first embodiment described above, when the target reserved image HW is promoted to a higher display state during a play round, the change start command transmitted from the main control device 162 at the start of the change is referenced. However, the promotion may be performed based on the results of a reserved read-ahead process performed on the target reserved image HW (reserved information).

(22) In the first embodiment and variants 1 and 2 of the first embodiment, the presentation mode is switched by the player's operation (manually). However, as in variant 7, the presentation mode may be switched automatically without the player's operation.

(23) In the above first embodiment and variants 1 and 2 of the first embodiment, the presentation mode is switched during a game round, but the presentation mode may be switched via the opening and closing execution mode (jackpot game). For example, the configurations according to the first embodiment and variants 1 and 2 of the first embodiment may be applied to a configuration in which multiple presentation modes are set as presentation modes for a high probability game state, and the player can select which presentation mode to play in the immediately preceding opening and closing execution mode.

For example, when applying the configuration according to the first embodiment, the following configuration can be used. In the presentation mode A during the high probability game state, the display mode of the target reserved image HW is set to a specific display mode, and when a guaranteed jackpot occurs in the game of the reserved information before the target reserved image HW and the game transitions to the opening and closing execution mode, and a presentation mode B different from the presentation mode A is selected during the opening and closing execution mode, the display mode of the target reserved image HW is set to the normal display mode HMa in the presentation mode B (high probability game state) after the opening and closing execution mode. Then, when a guaranteed jackpot occurs again in the game of the reserved information before the target reserved image HW and the game transitions to the opening and closing execution mode, and a presentation mode A is selected during the opening and closing execution mode, the display mode of the target reserved image HW is set to the original specific display mode in the presentation mode A (high probability game state) after the opening and closing execution mode.

In addition, in the above configuration, the presentation mode does not necessarily have to be switched by the player's operation (manually), but may be switched automatically without the player's operation.

(24) In the above first embodiment and variants 1 and 2 of the first embodiment, the likelihood (probability) of the hold notice performance being executed is different between presentation mode A and presentation mode B, but the likelihood of the hold notice performance being executed may be the same in these presentation modes.

(25) In the above first embodiment and variants 1 and 2 of the first embodiment, the configuration has two types of presentation modes, presentation mode A and presentation mode B, as the multiple types of presentation states, but a configuration with three or more types of presentation modes may be used. In this case, for example, in a configuration with presentation modes A to C as three or more types of presentation states, the hold notice presentation may be less likely to be executed in the order of presentation mode A > presentation mode B > presentation mode C, and the ease of execution of the hold notice presentation may be different in each presentation mode, or the ease of execution of the hold notice presentation may be the same for all presentation modes A to C, or a configuration may be used in which presentation modes with the same ease of execution of the hold notice presentation and presentation modes with different ease of execution are mixed, such as presentation modes A and C having the same ease of execution of the hold notice presentation, but presentation mode B being less likely to execute the hold notice presentation.

In a configuration in which presentation modes with the same ease of execution of the hold notice presentation are mixed with presentation modes with different ease of execution, the display mode of the target hold image HW may be set to the normal display mode HMa when switching between presentation modes with the same ease of execution, just as when switching between different presentation modes. In other words, the configuration may be such that no distinction is made between switching between presentation modes with the same ease of execution and switching between different presentation modes.

In addition, when switching between presentation modes that have the same ease of execution, unlike when switching between different presentation modes, the display mode may not be changed to the normal display mode HMa even when the presentation mode is switched, but the specific display mode before the mode switch may be maintained. In other words, a distinction may be made between switching between presentation modes that have the same ease of execution and switching between different presentation modes, and the handling of the hold notice presentation may be different between the two.

(26) In the above first embodiment and variants 1 and 2 of the first embodiment, the hold notice performance can be executed in presentation mode B in which the hold notice performance is unlikely to be executed, but the hold notice performance may not be executed in presentation mode B. In other words, the "presentation state in which a specific notification is unlikely to be executed" of the present invention can be understood to include not only presentation modes in which the hold notice performance is unlikely to be executed, but also presentation modes in which the hold notice performance is not executed.

(27) In the first embodiment and variants 1 and 2 of the first embodiment described above, the likelihood of the hold notice performance being executed in the presentation mode A and the presentation mode B is differentiated by varying the probability of execution of the hold notice performance when the hold information corresponds to a miss. However, the likelihood of the hold notice performance being executed in the presentation modes may be differentiated by varying the probability of execution of the hold notice performance when the hold information corresponds to a jackpot, or by varying the probability of execution in both the cases corresponding to a miss and the cases corresponding to a hit.

(28) In the first embodiment and variants 1 and 2 of the first embodiment described above, when the presentation mode is switched during the execution of the hold notice presentation, the hold image displayed in the execution display area D is also changed to the normal display mode HMa. However, it is also possible to distinguish between the first hold display area Ga and the second hold display area Gb and the execution display area D, and not change the hold image displayed in the execution display area D to the normal display mode HMa.

(29) In the first embodiment and variants 1 and 2 of the first embodiment described above, the execution of the change suggestion effect is restricted when the display mode of the target reserved image HW is restored to the original specific display mode, but a configuration in which a dedicated effect (different from the change suggestion effect) corresponding to the restoration may be executed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the player to distinguish between a case where the display mode of the reserved image is simply changed to a higher display mode and a case where the reserved image is restored to the original specific display mode as a result of the restoration process.

(30) In the first embodiment described above, when the display mode is switched from presentation mode A to presentation mode B while the hold notice performance is being executed, and then switched back to presentation mode A (when the display mode returns to the original presentation mode in which the hold notice performance was being executed), the display mode of the target hold image HW is restored to the original specific display mode. However, for example, in a configuration having presentation modes A to C as presentation modes, when the display mode is switched to presentation mode B while the hold notice performance is being executed in presentation mode A, and the display mode of the target hold image HW is set to the normal display mode HMa, and then the display mode is switched to presentation mode C (a presentation mode different from presentation mode A) before the end of the play round of the target hold image HW, the display mode may be restored to the original specific display mode.

In the above case, it is preferable that the ease with which the hold notice performance is executed is the same in presentation mode A and presentation mode C, or that presentation mode C is a presentation mode in which the hold notice performance is executed more easily than presentation mode A (lower expectations for the hold notice performance). However, this is not limited to this, and presentation mode C may be configured to be less likely to execute the hold notice performance than presentation mode A. In this case, presentation mode C may be a presentation mode in which the hold notice performance is executed more easily than presentation mode B, or a presentation mode in which the hold notice performance is executed less easily, or a presentation mode in which the hold notice performance is executed with the same ease as presentation mode B. Also, a configuration in which the ease with which the hold notice performance is executed may be the same in presentation mode A, presentation mode B, and presentation mode C.

(31) In the first embodiment described above, the display mode of the target hold image HW is changed to the normal display mode HMa in both cases where the display mode is switched from A to B during execution of the hold notice performance, and where the display mode is switched from B to A during execution of the hold notice performance. However, in the latter case, i.e., where the display mode is switched from a high expectation display mode corresponding to the hold notice performance to a low expectation display mode, the display mode of the target hold image HW may be maintained in the specific display mode (not changed to the normal display mode HMa).

(32) In the first embodiment described above, when the presentation mode is switched from A to B during execution of the hold notice presentation, and then switched back to A before the play round of the hold information that triggered the hold notice presentation ends, the display mode of the target hold image HW is restored to the original specific display mode. However, the display mode of the target hold image HW may be restored to the original specific display mode when the presentation mode is switched to A before the play round of the hold information that triggered the hold notice presentation starts. In other words, when the presentation mode is switched to A after the play round of the hold information that triggered the hold notice presentation starts, the display mode of the target hold image HW may not be restored to the original specific display mode.

(33) In the first embodiment described above, when the presentation mode is switched from A to B during the execution of the hold notice performance, and new hold information occurs while the player is in presentation mode B, the hold notice performance triggered by the hold information is not executed in presentation mode B. However, a lottery for executing the hold notice performance may be held under conditions set in accordance with presentation mode B, and the hold notice performance may be executed if the player wins the lottery.

However, while the reserved image that was in a specific display mode in presentation mode A before switching to presentation mode B is changed to the normal display mode HMa when presentation mode B is switched to, if a reserved notice presentation is performed for the reserved information generated in presentation mode B, there is a concern that this will further increase the player's anxiety that a jackpot or even the level of expectation for the reserved image (reserved information) that was in the normal display mode HMa may have been lost. In addition, if presentation mode A is switched back to while a reserved notice presentation started in presentation mode B is being performed, the question arises as to how to handle the reserved notice presentation, and there is a concern that the overall processing may become more complicated.

In that sense, as in the first embodiment described above, it is preferable to restrict the execution of the hold notice performance for newly generated hold information while remaining in presentation mode B (in other words, while waiting for the restoration process to restore the display mode of the target hold image HW, which was set to a specific display mode in the previous presentation mode A, to its original display mode). Note that, in a case where the presentation mode is switched from A to B when the hold notice performance is not being executed, it is not necessary to restrict the execution of the hold notice performance triggered by the newly generated hold information in presentation mode B.

(34) In the first embodiment described above, the number of pending messages including the current pending information is determined in step Sa1508, but the number of pending messages may be determined for pending messages prior to the current pending information.

(35) In the first variation of the first embodiment described above, the target pending images HB1 and HB2 in the restricted state (pending images of pending information generated during the restricted state) are in the normal display mode HMa, but they may be configured to be in a predetermined display mode (e.g., a black display mode) different from both the normal display mode HMa and the specific display mode. In this case, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that the pending notice performance is in a restricted state, in other words, it is possible to inform the player that there is a possibility that the display mode will be changed to the specific display mode when the restricted state ends.

(36) In the first variant of the first embodiment described above, when the display mode is switched from A to B during execution of the hold notice display, i.e., when the hold notice display transitions to a restricted state, a notification corresponding to the restricted state and different from the hold image (for example, a predetermined display informing the user that the display is in a restricted state) may be provided.

(37) In the first variation of the first embodiment described above, the display of pending images may be disabled during the restricted state. More specifically, the display may be disabled not only for pending image HA that is in a specific display mode in presentation mode A and pending images HB1 and HB2 of pending information generated in presentation mode B, but also for all pending images, including other pending images.

In this case, in order to prevent the player from losing track of the number of reserved balls, the number of reserved balls may be notified by a separate display such as a number display (a separate display of the number of reserved balls from the image for reserved balls). However, since it may be difficult for the player to understand if the display suddenly switches to the above-mentioned separate display, it is preferable to, for example, notify the number of reserved balls by both the image for reserved balls and a separate display such as a number display, and if the display mode switches from A to B during the execution of the reserved notice, only the display of the image for reserved balls is erased in B. In this case, it is preferable not to change the location of the separate display in order to prevent the player from losing track of the separate display.

(38) In the first variation of the first embodiment described above, the mode of the hold notice presentation triggered by hold information generated during the restricted state is configured to be set at the end of the restricted period (step Sa2702), but it may be set during the restricted period or after the end of the restricted period.

(39) In the first modified example of the first embodiment described above, when pending information is acquired during the restricted state, the pending read-ahead process is executed, and after the restricted state ends, the display mode of the target pending images HB1, HB2 is set based on the result of the pending read-ahead process executed during the restricted state. However, the pending read-ahead process for the pending information acquired during the restricted state may be executed after the restricted state, and the display mode of the target pending images HB1, HB2 after the restricted state may be set based on the result. In this case, the pending read-ahead process may be executed by the main control device 162 or the performance control device 143. In addition, the pending read-ahead process may be not executed when pending information is acquired during the restricted state, or may be executed.

(40) In the above-mentioned modified example 2 of the first embodiment, when the presentation mode A is switched to the presentation mode B during the execution of the hold notice presentation, the presentation mode B is configured to have the same display mode as that in the presentation mode A. However, in cases where the notification mode of the hold image is different between the presentation mode A and the presentation mode B, it is not necessary to return to the same specific display mode, and the display mode may be changed to a display mode that the player can recognize as being of the same rank. For example, in the presentation mode A, the display modes are ranked in the order of blue display mode HMb < green display mode HMc < red display mode HMd < rainbow display mode HMe, while in the presentation mode B, the display mode is ranked in the order of yellow display mode < brown display mode < purple display mode < rainbow display mode. In this case, when the display mode of the target hold image HW is the green display mode HMc when the presentation mode A is switched to the presentation mode B, the display mode of the target hold image HW in the presentation mode B may be the brown display mode.

In addition, in a gaming machine that indicates the level of expectation by changing the reserved image to a specified character image, in a configuration in which the costume, pose, expression, etc. of the character are set to differ depending on the presentation mode, if presentation mode A is switched to presentation mode B while the target reserved image HW has been changed to a character image with a costume, etc. corresponding to presentation mode A (a state in which the reserved notice presentation is being executed), in presentation mode B, the target reserved image HW may be restored to the same character image as in presentation mode A, while the costume, etc. may correspond to presentation mode B.

In short, it is sufficient that the display mode of the target reserved image HW in presentation mode B can be recognized by the player as being of the same rank as the display mode in presentation mode A. This also applies to the case where the display mode of the target reserved image HW is promoted to a higher-ranking display mode in presentation mode B. In other words, it is sufficient that the display mode can be recognized as a higher-ranking display mode from the player's perspective. In the above example, the display mode of the target reserved image HW would first be a brown display mode, and then promoted to a purple display mode.

In addition, the configuration in the first embodiment and its modified example 1, in which the display mode of the target reserved image HW is restored to the original specific display mode when the original presentation mode A is returned to, the configuration in modified example 3 of the first embodiment, in which the display mode of the target reserved image HW after the opening and closing execution mode is the same as the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode when the game state before the opening and closing execution mode and the game state after the opening and closing execution mode are the same, the configuration in modified example 4 of the first embodiment, in which the display mode of the target reserved image HW after the opening and closing execution mode is the same as the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode when the specific display mode of the target reserved image HW in the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is equal to or lower than the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern identified by the second reserved pre-reading process, and the configuration in modified example 5 of the first embodiment, in which the display mode of the target reserved image HW after power is restored to the same specific display mode as the display mode at the time of power outage, etc., can also be said to be specific examples of restoring the display mode of the target reserved image HW to a display mode that the player can recognize as being of the same rank.

(41) In the second modification of the first embodiment described above, when the presentation mode is switched from A to B during the execution of the hold notice presentation, the display mode of the target hold image HW is temporarily changed to the normal display mode HMa. However, the display mode may not be changed to the normal display mode HMa. In other words, when the result of the determination is that the display mode of the same rank is to be displayed in presentation mode B (when a positive determination is made in step Sa3107), the display mode of the target hold image HW may be changed to the same rank without changing it to the normal display mode HMa (without executing the processing of step Sa3110).

(42) In the second modification of the first embodiment described above, when the determination result is that the display mode of the same rank will not be displayed in the presentation mode B (when a negative determination is made in step Sa3107), the display mode of the target pending image HW is set to the normal display mode HMa, but it may be set to a specific display mode within a range that does not exceed the actual expectation level. Specifically, when the specific display mode of the target pending image HW before the presentation mode switching is a mode higher than the upper limit display mode set in the return determination table, the specific display mode may be set to a display mode lower than the upper limit display mode (a display mode lower than the specific display mode before the presentation mode switching).

(43) In the above-mentioned modified examples 3 and 4 of the first embodiment, three types of game states are provided: a normal game state, a high probability game state, and a time-saving game state. However, the configuration may include game states other than these three, such as two types of game states: a normal game state and a high probability game state. In other words, it is sufficient as long as there are multiple types of game states.

(44) In the above-mentioned first embodiment, in the third and fourth variations, the display of the reserved image is not executed during the opening and closing execution mode, but the reserved image may be displayed. In this case, the display mode of the reserved image during the opening and closing execution mode may be the normal display mode HMa, or the specific display mode before the opening and closing execution mode. Also, the reserved image may be displayed in a predetermined display mode (e.g., a black display mode) different from both the normal display mode HMa and the specific display mode. In this case, the predetermined display mode may not correspond to the jackpot expectation level of each reserved information (does not suggest the expectation level, etc.).

(45) In the above-mentioned variants 3 and 4 of the first embodiment, the display of the reserved image is resumed during the ending period, but the display of the reserved image may be resumed before the ending period begins, or after the ending period ends (for example, when the first game round begins after the opening and closing execution mode ends).

(46) In the above-mentioned modified examples 3 and 4 of the first embodiment, the display mode of the target reserved image HW is changed from the normal display mode HMa to the specific display mode in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode, but it may be configured to display it as a specific display target without changing it to the normal display mode HMa. In other words, it may be configured to resume display of the reserved image with the display mode of the target reserved image HW changed to the specific display mode.

(47) In the above-mentioned modified examples 3 and 4 of the first embodiment, a configuration in which the game state (variation pattern table) is changed via an opening/closing execution mode in which multiple rounds of play are executed is exemplified as a configuration to which the present invention can be applied, but the present invention can also be applied to a configuration in which the variation pattern table is changed via a small win game (opening/closing execution mode in which one round of play is executed). Note that the change in the variation pattern table is not limited to being triggered by the result of a win/loss determination being a win result or the opening/closing execution mode (a game state in which the variable winning device 65 is opened and closed) being executed, but may also be based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, such as the number of play times in which the result of a win/loss determination was a loss reaching a predetermined number.

(48) In the above-mentioned modified examples 3 and 4 of the first embodiment, as an example of a configuration in which a difference occurs in the results obtained by the lottery even if the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the variation type counter CS are the same, a change in the game state triggered by the open/close execution mode is given as an example, but the difference may also be caused by an event other than the open/close execution mode. Such an event may be, for example, a predetermined number of game plays in which the result of the hit/miss judgment is a miss, or winning some kind of lottery. In other words, the trigger may be any event, and it is sufficient that the above difference occurs due to the occurrence of some event. Furthermore, the above difference is not limited to being caused by a change in the game state, and may also be caused by, for example, a change in the presentation state that does not involve a change in the jackpot probability.

(49) In the third modified example of the first embodiment, the display mode of the reserved image is stored when the opening and closing execution mode is started, but the timing of storing the display mode is not particularly limited. For example, the display mode may be stored at the time of a winning game that triggers the opening and closing execution mode.

However, if the display mode of the reserved image is configured to be gradually increased in the reserved notice performance, there is a possibility that the display mode of the reserved image will change during the execution of a winning play round, so it is preferable to store the display mode after the display mode is confirmed, in other words, after the change in the display mode is restricted. Specifically, it is preferable to store the display mode when the open/close execution mode is started (when the winning play round ends) as in Variation 3 above.

(50) In the third modification of the first embodiment, the return judgment and the setting of the return process (step Sa3416) are executed during the ending period, but these processes may be executed after the opening and closing execution mode ends. Also, they may be executed after the opening and closing execution mode starts and before the ending period starts.

When performing each of the above processes during the open/close execution mode, it is advisable to perform them during periods when the variable winning device 65 is in a closed state, such as the opening period, ending period, or round interval period. When the variable winning device 65 is in an open state during the open/close execution mode, it is expected that the processing load will be relatively high, such as the need to perform processing to perform a winning performance based on the occurrence of a win in the variable winning device 65. If such a period is used to perform the return judgment or return processing, there is a concern that this will result in an even higher load. In this regard, by configuring the above processes to be performed during the period when the variable winning device 65 is in a closed state, it is possible to reduce the processing load.

(51) In the third variant of the first embodiment described above, when the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is a normal game state and the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is a high probability game state, if the result of the reserved pre-reading process is a normal jackpot result, the display mode of the target reserved image HW is restored. However, regardless of whether the result is a normal jackpot result or a highly probable jackpot result, if the jackpot result is pre-read by the reserved pre-reading process, the display mode of the target reserved image HW may be restored.

(52) In the fourth variant of the first embodiment described above, the acquired random numbers themselves, such as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the variation type counter CS, are transmitted from the main control device 162 to the performance control device 143. However, in order to prevent the data volume of the transmission command from becoming too large, it is also possible to transmit predetermined information (such as an identifier corresponding to the random number) with a smaller data volume than the acquired random numbers.

(53) In the fourth modified example of the first embodiment, the second reserved read-ahead process is performed when the opening and closing execution mode ends, but it may be configured to be performed after the opening and closing execution mode ends. It may also be configured to be performed while the opening and closing execution mode is being executed, or before the opening and closing execution mode starts (the period from the start of a winning game round to the start of the opening and closing execution mode).

(54) In the fourth modified example of the first embodiment described above, the first reserved pre-reading process and the second reserved pre-reading process are configured to pre-read the fluctuation pattern, but the performance pattern (game round performance) may also be pre-read. This type of configuration is particularly effective when, for example, multiple types of performance patterns (game round performances) correspond to one fluctuation pattern.

(55) In the fourth modification of the first embodiment, the upper limit display mode is set in the upper limit display mode table in correspondence with the fluctuation pattern, but the upper limit display mode may be set in correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS.

(56) In the fourth modified example of the first embodiment described above, even if the win/lose result of the acquired jackpot random number counter C1 varies between the game state before the opening/closing execution mode and the game state after the opening/closing execution mode, the display mode of the target reserved image HW is configured to be a specific display mode after the opening/closing execution mode. However, it may also be configured not to be a specific display mode. Specifically, if the result of the first reserved pre-reading process is a jackpot and the result of the second reserved pre-reading process is a miss, the display mode of the target reserved image HW may not be a specific display mode after the opening/closing execution mode.

(57) In the fourth variant of the first embodiment described above, the specific display mode of the target reserved image HW in the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is compared with the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern identified by the second reserved read-ahead process, and the display mode of the target reserved image HW in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is set based on the result of the comparison. However, the display mode may be set based on the result of the second reserved read-ahead process without performing the above comparison (regardless of the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode).

(58) In the fourth modified example of the first embodiment described above, when the specific display mode of the target reserved image HW in the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is a higher mode than the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern identified by the second reserved pre-reading process, the display mode of the target reserved image HW in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is set to the normal display mode HMa. However, the specific display mode may be set within a range that does not exceed the actual expected degree. Specifically, when the specific display mode of the target reserved image HW in the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is a higher mode than the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern identified by the second reserved pre-reading process, the specific display mode may be set to a display mode that is lower than the upper limit display mode (a display mode lower than the specific display mode before the opening and closing execution mode).

(59) In the fourth modified example of the first embodiment described above, the second reserved read-ahead process is executed regardless of whether the game state before the opening and closing execution mode is the same as the game state after the opening and closing execution mode. However, if the game states are the same, the second reserved read-ahead process may not be executed, and the display mode of the target reserved image HW after the opening and closing execution mode may be set based on the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode. Specifically, the display mode after the opening and closing execution mode may be set to the same mode as the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode. In this case, the display mode may be changed to the normal display mode HMa first and then to the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode, or the display may be displayed in the display mode before the opening and closing execution mode from the beginning.

(60) In the above-mentioned modified examples 5 and 6 of the first embodiment, a power interruption abnormality is exemplified as a predetermined abnormality, but other abnormalities such as a magnetic sensor abnormality or a vibration sensor abnormality may also be used. In this case, the predetermined abnormality is not limited to an abnormality that causes the game progress to stop, and may also be an abnormality that causes the game progress to continue.

(61) In the above-described variants 5 to 6 of the first embodiment, when the power outage is resolved and power is restored, the display of the hold image is resumed with the target hold image HW in a specific display mode. However, in the initial stage upon power restoration, the display mode of the target hold image HW may be the normal display mode HMa, and then may be changed to the specific display mode set based on the display mode before the power outage occurred or the result of the hold pre-read process performed before the power outage.

In addition, in the initial stage when power is restored, the display mode of the target pending image HW may be set to a predetermined display target (a display mode dedicated to when power is restored, for example a purple display mode) different from both the normal display mode HMa and the specific display mode, and then may be changed to a specific display mode set based on the display mode before the power outage occurred or the result of the pending read-ahead process performed before the power outage. In this case, the pending image set to the predetermined display mode may be set to the normal display mode HMa first and then changed to the specific display mode.

(62) In the above-mentioned variants 5 to 6 of the first embodiment, when the power outage is resolved and power is restored, the display of the reserved images is resumed in a state where the screen state of the pattern display device 75 is a recovery waiting screen (a screen displaying text display 461 such as "The screen will return shortly"), but the display of the reserved images may be resumed when the screen is restored (the display of the changing patterns of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 is restored) without displaying the reserved images in the recovery waiting screen state. In such a case, the display of the reserved images is resumed in a state where the number of reserved images displayed is updated (each reserved image is shifted downward and the number of reserved images is reduced by one).

The timing of displaying the reserved image may be different depending on whether the power interruption occurs while a game round is not being played or while a game round is being played. Specifically, if the power interruption occurs while a game round is not being played, the display of the reserved image may be resumed when the power-on screen (a screen displaying text such as "Power has been turned on") is displayed, and if the power interruption occurs while a game round is being played, the display of the reserved image may not be displayed while the screen is waiting for recovery, and the display of the reserved image may be resumed when the screen is restored. In other words, if the power interruption occurs while a game round is not being played, the display of the reserved image may be resumed at an earlier timing (shorter time has elapsed since the start of power supply) than if the power interruption occurs while a game round is being played.

(63) In the above-mentioned variants 5 and 6 of the first embodiment, examples were given of cases where a power interruption abnormality occurred during or when a game round was being played, but the invention can also be applied to cases where a power interruption abnormality occurred during the opening and closing execution mode. In such cases, the display of the target reserved image may be resumed in the power-on screen state or the recovery waiting screen state, or the display of the reserved image may be suspended during the period in which the subsequent opening and closing execution mode is being performed after power is restored, and the display of the target reserved image may be resumed in accordance with the start timing of the first game round after the opening and closing execution mode. Also, the display of the reserved image may be suspended during the period in which the recovery waiting screen state is being performed, and the display of the reserved image may be resumed in accordance with the return of the screen.

(64) In the above-mentioned variants 5 and 6 of the first embodiment, the power failure monitoring unit 315 is provided in the power supply and launch control device 191, but it may be provided in the main control device 162 or the performance control device 143. In this case, in variant 5, the power failure monitoring unit 315 may be provided in each of the main control device 162 and the performance control device 143, or it may be provided in one of the main control device 162 and the performance control device 143, and a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring unit 315 or a power failure command (a command indicating the occurrence of a power outage) from one control device may be sent to the other control device.

(65) In the above-described variants 5 to 6 of the first embodiment, the process of setting the display mode of the target reserved image HW after power is restored (the process for returning the reserved notice in step Sa5202 and the process of setting the display mode in step Sa6204) is executed when power is restored, but it may be executed after power is restored. Specifically, it may be configured to be executed at a predetermined timing during the period from when power is restored until the start of a play round of the target reserved image HW.

(66) In the above-mentioned variant 5 of the first embodiment, information indicating the display mode of the target pending image HW is backed up, and after power is restored, the display mode before the power outage is grasped based on that information to set the display mode of the target pending image HW after power is restored. In the variant 6 of the first embodiment, information indicating the look-ahead result is backed up, and after power is restored, the look-ahead result before the power outage is grasped based on that information to set the display mode of the target pending image HW after power is restored. However, the look-ahead process may be executed again after power is restored, and the display mode of the target pending image HW after power is restored may be set based on the result. In this case, the look-ahead process after power is restored may be performed by the main control device 162 or the performance control device 143.

In the above case, it is advisable to store change location information that makes it possible to know which hold image is in a specific display mode when multiple hold images are displayed, and to back up (store and retain) the change location information even if a power outage occurs. With this configuration, it becomes possible to know after power is restored which hold image was displayed in a specific display mode before the power outage occurred. The change location information may be stored in RAM 314 of the main control device 162 and backed up by the main control device 162, or it may be stored in RAM 344 or backup RAM 345 of the performance control device 143 and backed up by the performance control device 143.

In the above case, it is advisable to execute a pre-reading process after power is restored on the reserved images (reserved information) that were understood to have been in a specific display mode before the power outage. In this case, even reserved images that were not in a specific display mode before the power outage are made into a specific display mode by the pre-reading process after power is restored, preventing the player from getting an unnatural impression. Furthermore, compared to performing the pre-reading process again on all reserved information that exists after power is restored, the number of times the pre-reading process is executed can be kept low, making it possible to reduce the processing load when power is restored.

Here, determining which hold images were displayed in a specific display mode before the power outage can be rephrased as determining which hold images were not displayed in a specific display mode before the power outage, and the display mode of hold images determined to not have been displayed in a specific display mode as a result of this determination may be set to the normal display mode. In this case, the processing may be to set the display mode of hold images that were not subject to the pre-reading process after power recovery to the normal display mode, or to perform the pre-reading process after power recovery on all hold images, and then for hold images determined to not have been displayed in a specific display mode, the display mode may be forcibly set to the normal display mode regardless of the results of the pre-reading process.

In addition, in a configuration in which the display mode of the target pending image HW is set based on the results of the pre-read after power is restored, the display mode may be limited to a specific display mode below a certain level (for example, the green display mode HMc or the blue display mode HMb), as in variants 5 and 6 of the first embodiment.

The read-ahead process after power is restored may be performed when power is restored, or may be performed after power is restored if it is performed before the start of a play round of the reserved image (reserved information) that was in a specific display mode before the power outage.

In addition, the system may be configured to not execute a pre-reading process after power is restored, and to set the display mode of pending images that are understood to have been in a specific display mode before the power outage to a predetermined specific display mode (e.g., the blue display mode HMb).

(67) In the fifth variation of the first embodiment described above, a backup RAM 345 is provided to back up (store and hold) information related to images for reservation. However, a configuration may be adopted in which all information stored in RAM 344 is backed up without providing a backup RAM 345. Also, a configuration may be adopted in which only a portion of the information stored in RAM 344 (information related to images for reservation) is backed up without providing a backup RAM 345.

(68) In the fifth variation of the first embodiment described above, the power outage signal from the power outage monitoring unit 315 is sent to the main control unit 162 and the performance control unit 143, but it may be sent only to the main control unit 162. In such a configuration, when the power outage signal from the power outage monitoring unit 315 is input to the main control unit 162, the main control unit 162 sends a power outage command to the performance control unit 143, and the performance control unit 143 executes power outage processing (such as the processing of steps Sa11 to Sa13) in response to receiving the power outage command.

(69) In the fifth variant of the first embodiment described above, if the specific display mode of the target hold image HW before the power outage is equal to or higher than a specific display mode (green display mode HMc) (if a positive judgment is made in step Sa5404), the display mode of the target hold image HW after power is restored is limited to a specific display mode lower than the specific display mode. However, the display mode of the target hold image HW may be set to the normal display mode HMa (the specific display mode may be canceled).

(70) In the fifth modified example of the first embodiment described above, the configuration is such that the promotion process is executed for the target reserved image HW in the play round when the display mode of the target reserved image HW after power is restored is set to a specific display mode lower than the specific display mode before the power outage (steps Sa5409 and Sa5601). However, the configuration may also be such that the promotion process is executed for the target reserved image HW in the play round when the display mode of the target reserved image HW after power is restored is the specific display mode before the power outage. In addition, the configuration may also be such that the promotion process is executed for the play round regardless of the display mode of the target reserved image HW after power is restored.

(71) In the sixth modified example of the first embodiment described above, when the jackpot result is pre-read by the pre-read-ahead process before the power outage (when a positive judgment is made in step Sa6302), the display mode of the target pending image HW after power recovery is uniformly set to the first specific display mode (green display mode HMc). However, it may be configured to be more likely to be set to the first specific display mode. Specifically, when the jackpot result is pre-read by the pre-read-ahead process before the power outage, the display mode of the target pending image HW after power recovery may be set to the normal display mode HMa or a specific display mode lower than the first specific display mode, and the probability of the first specific display mode being set higher than the probability of these display modes.

In addition, without imposing a restriction such as the first specific display mode, a setting process for the hold notice similar to that before the power outage may be executed based on the grasped hold pre-reading result (the result of the hold pre-reading process executed before the power outage), and a lottery process may be executed for the hold notice performance and the display mode of the hold image.

The same applies when a highly anticipated losing result is predicted (when a positive judgment is made in step Sa6305).

(72) In the sixth variant of the first embodiment described above, the upper limit display mode of the target pending image HW after power is restored is different depending on whether the pending read-ahead process before the power outage resulted in a jackpot or a miss, but such a distinction may not be made. Specifically, the upper limit display mode of the target pending image HW after power is restored may be uniformly set to a predetermined special display mode regardless of whether the result was a hit or miss.

(73) In the sixth variant of the first embodiment described above, when the fluctuation pattern identified by the hold pre-read processing before the power outage cannot be grasped (when a negative judgment is made in step Sa6308), the hold image corresponding to that hold information is set to the normal display mode HMa and displayed. However, it may be configured to treat this as an error and not display the hold image. In that case, the hold image corresponding to the hold information whose fluctuation pattern cannot be grasped may be hidden, or all hold images, including other hold images, may not be displayed.

(74) In the above-mentioned modified example 6 of the first embodiment, when the big win result is read in advance by the reserved reading process before the power failure (if the positive judgment is made in step Sa6302), the display mode of the target reserved image HW after the power failure is set to the first specific display mode, but it may be configured to be set to the normal display mode HMa. In other words, if a specific display mode with a higher expectation is set after the power failure based on the fact that the big win result was read in advance before the power failure, it is expected that the impact on the player will be large if an inconsistency occurs between the reserved reading result and the result of the win/loss judgment in the game round due to the influence of the power failure abnormality. In this regard, it is possible to safely set the display mode of the reserved image after the power failure by configuring the display mode of the reserved image after the power failure to be the normal display mode HMa for the time being and changing the display mode based on the variable start command sent at the start of the game round. This is also true when a high expectation miss result is read in advance (if the positive judgment is made in step Sa6305).

(75) In the sixth variant of the first embodiment described above, the configuration is such that promotion processing is executed in the play round of the target reserved image HW when a jackpot result is predicted by the reserved pre-read processing before the power is cut off, or when a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a reach miss effect of an SPSP reach miss or higher is predicted (steps Sa6304, Sa6307). However, the configuration may also be such that promotion processing is executed in the play round of the target reserved image HW when other pre-read results are obtained (such as a reach miss effect of an SP reach miss). Moreover, the configuration may also be such that promotion processing is executed in the play round regardless of the pre-read result.

(76) In the sixth modified example of the first embodiment, not only the information corresponding to the result of the hold pre-read process performed before the power outage, but also the information corresponding to the specific display mode of the target hold image HW before the power outage may be backed up, and the display mode of the target hold image HW after power recovery may be set based on both of these pieces of information. For example, the upper limit of the specific display mode after power recovery (upper limit display mode) may be set to a plurality of types corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, and when the specific display mode of the target hold image HW before the power outage (backed up specific display mode) is a mode equal to or lower than the upper limit display mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern pre-read in the hold pre-read process before the power outage (backed up hold pre-read result), the display mode of the target hold image HW after power recovery may be set to the same mode as the specific display mode before the power outage.

(77) In the above-mentioned modified example 6 of the first embodiment, the main control device 162 backs up the information corresponding to the result of the reserved read-ahead processing performed before the power outage. However, the performance control device 143 or the display control device 350 may back up the information. When backing up the information in the performance control device 143, as in modified example 5 of the first embodiment, the performance control device 143 may be provided with a backup function such as a backup RAM, and the information corresponding to the result of the reserved read-ahead processing transmitted from the main control device 162 may be stored in the RAM 344 of the performance control device 143. When a power outage occurs, the information may be written to the backup RAM, or the information stored in the RAM 344 may be retained even during the power outage. In this configuration, when the power outage is resolved and power is restored, the result of the reserved read-ahead processing performed before the power outage can be grasped based on the information retained in the performance control device 143 (information corresponding to the result of the reserved read-ahead processing).

In the above case, the information corresponding to the result of the hold pre-reading process in the main control device 162 may or may not be backed up. Incidentally, if the main control device 162 and the performance control device 143 are configured to back up information corresponding to the result of the hold pre-reading process, a configuration may be further provided for determining the normality of the information based on the comparison result of each piece of information backed up in both the control devices 162 and 143. Specifically, when the power outage is resolved and power is restored, the information corresponding to the result of the hold pre-reading process backed up in the main control device 162 is sent to the performance control device 143, and the performance control device 143 compares the information it backs up (information corresponding to the result of the hold pre-reading process) with the information sent from the main control device 162. As a result, if the two pieces of information correspond to each other, the backed up information is determined to be normal, the information is recognized as valid, and is used to set (return) the hold notice performance after power is restored. Conversely, if the two pieces of information do not correspond to each other, the backed up information is determined to be abnormal, and the information is considered invalid and the hold notice performance return process (setting of the hold notice performance using the information) is not executed.

Here, the information transmitted from the main control device 162 corresponds to the information backed up by the performance control device 143 not only when the values of the two pieces of information match, but also when the information itself does not match, such as when the form (e.g., value) of the information at the time of storage is different between the two control devices 162, 143, but the contents of the information are essentially the same.

In addition, the information comparison may be performed not only by the performance control device 143 but also by the main control device 162 or the display control device 350. When the comparison is performed by the main control device 162, when the power outage is resolved and power is restored, the information backed up by the performance control device 143 is transmitted to the main control device 162.

In addition, the information whose normality is judged by comparing (collating) the results backed up by the main control device 162 and the performance control device 143 is not necessarily limited to the results of the hold read-ahead process, but may be other information, such as the result of a hit/miss judgment or information about the number of holds. Incidentally, if the information about the number of holds backed up by the main control device 162 does not correspond to the information about the number of holds backed up by the performance control device 143, an error notification may be issued as an abnormality, or alternatively or in addition, the number of holds may be notified based on the information backed up by the main control device 162 (priority is given to the information backed up by the main control device 162).

(78) In the above-described variants 7 to 8 of the first embodiment, the likelihood (probability) of the hold notice performance being executed is different between presentation mode A and presentation mode B. However, the likelihood of the hold notice performance being executed may be the same in these presentation modes.

(79) In the above-mentioned variants 7 to 8 of the first embodiment, the hold notice performance can be executed in the performance mode B in which the hold notice performance is unlikely to be executed, but the hold notice performance may not be executed in the performance mode B. In other words, the "performance state in which a specific notification is unlikely to be executed" of the present invention can be understood to include not only a performance mode in which the hold notice performance is unlikely to be executed, but also a performance mode in which the hold notice performance is not executed.

(80) In the seventh modified example of the first embodiment described above, the presentation mode is automatically switched without the player's operation, but the presentation mode may be switched by the player's operation (manual). In this case, it is preferable to disable the operation to switch the presentation mode while the pending preview presentation is being executed.

(81) In the above-mentioned modified example 7 of the first embodiment, the configuration has two types of presentation modes, presentation mode A and presentation mode B, as the multiple types of presentation states, but a configuration with three or more types of presentation modes may be used. In this case, for example, in a configuration with presentation modes A to C as three or more types of presentation states, the hold notice presentation may be executed more difficultly in the order of presentation mode A > presentation mode B > presentation mode C, and the ease of execution of the hold notice presentation may be different in each of the presentation modes, or the ease of execution of the hold notice presentation may be the same for all presentation modes A to C, or a configuration may be used in which presentation modes with the same ease of execution of the hold notice presentation and presentation modes with different ease of execution are mixed, such as presentation modes A and C having the same ease of execution of the hold notice presentation, but presentation mode B being difficult to execute.

In a configuration in which presentation modes with the same ease of execution of the hold notice performance are mixed with presentation modes with different ease of execution, the configuration may be such that switching between presentation modes with the same ease of execution is restricted while the hold notice performance is being executed, as is the case with switching between different presentation modes, or in the case of switching between presentation modes with the same ease of execution, switching between presentation modes may be permitted even while the hold notice performance is being executed.

(82) In the seventh variant of the first embodiment described above, when the time for switching is reached (when a positive judgment is made in step Sa7101), a lottery for switching the presentation mode (first mode switching lottery in step Sa7102) is executed, and if the lottery is won, it is determined whether or not the pending notice presentation is being executed, and if it is being executed, the processing for switching the presentation mode is not executed. However, it may also be configured to determine whether or not the pending notice presentation is being executed when the time for switching is reached (when a positive judgment is made in step Sa7101), and if it is being executed, the lottery for switching the presentation mode is not executed and the mode switching is not executed.

(83) In the seventh variant of the first embodiment described above, not only switching from presentation mode A, in which the hold notice performance is likely to be executed, to presentation mode B, in which the hold notice performance is unlikely to be executed, but also switching from presentation mode B to presentation mode A is restricted while the hold notice performance is being executed. However, the configuration may be such that switching from presentation mode B to presentation mode A is permitted even while the hold notice performance is being executed.

(84) In the seventh variant of the first embodiment described above, when switching from presentation mode B to presentation mode A, it is determined whether the display mode of the target hold image HW on which the hold notice presentation is being executed is equal to or greater than a predetermined display mode (green display mode HMc), and whether or not to allow the switching of presentation modes is determined based on the result of the determination. However, as in the case of switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B, the switching of presentation modes may be restricted if the hold notice presentation is being executed, regardless of the display mode of the target hold image HW.

(85) In the seventh variant of the first embodiment described above, when switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B, regardless of the display mode of the target hold image HW, if the hold notice presentation is being executed, the switching of presentation modes is restricted. However, as in the case of switching from presentation mode B to presentation mode A, a configuration may be adopted in which whether or not to permit switching of presentation modes is determined based on the display mode of the target hold image HW.

In the above case, the specified display mode that is the criterion (boundary) for whether or not to allow switching of presentation modes may be a display mode of the same rank as that for switching from presentation mode B to presentation mode A, or may be a display mode different from that for switching from presentation mode B to presentation mode A. If a different display mode is used, it is preferable that it be a display mode of a higher rank than that for switching from presentation mode B to presentation mode A.

(86) In the seventh modified example of the first embodiment, when switching from presentation mode B to presentation mode A is permitted during execution of the hold notice presentation, the presentation mode is switched while the display mode of the target hold image HW is maintained in the specific display mode. However, the display mode of the target hold image HW may be changed to the normal display mode HMa when the presentation mode is switched. In this case, the display mode may be maintained in the normal display mode HMa until a play round of the target hold image HW is started or ended, or, as in the first embodiment and its first and second modified examples, the display mode may be changed to the specific display mode before a play round of the target hold image HW is started or ended.

(87) In the seventh variant of the first embodiment described above, the switching of presentation modes may be restricted based on the results of the reserved information read-ahead process. For example, when a predetermined result (e.g., a jackpot result or a miss result of an SPSP reach presentation or higher) is read in advance by the reserved information read-ahead process, the switching of presentation modes may be restricted until the end of the play round of the reserved information.

For example, when a high-expectation miss result such as a jackpot result or an SPSP reach effect is predicted, it is expected that a teasing effect such as a preview effect that stirs up the player's anticipation (an effect other than the hold preview effect using a hold image) will be performed before the game round of the reserved information is started. If the performance mode is switched during the execution of the teasing effect, it may be difficult for the player to understand the teasing effect. In this case, if the configuration is such that the switching of the performance mode is restricted based on the result of the hold pre-reading process that triggers the hold preview effect, regardless of whether the hold preview effect is being executed or not, it is possible to suitably prevent the switching of the performance mode during the teasing effect. In addition, since the switching of the performance mode can be restricted before the execution of the hold preview effect, even if the timing of the switching of the performance mode and the start timing of the hold preview effect overlap, it is possible to prevent the switching of the performance mode and the execution of the hold preview effect from being performed simultaneously.

(88) In the seventh variant of the first embodiment described above, when the condition for switching the presentation mode is met during the execution of the hold notice performance (when the timing for switching the presentation mode is reached and the first mode switching lottery is won), the presentation mode is allowed to be switched if the result of the pre-reading of the hold image (hold information) for which the hold notice performance is being executed is a jackpot result. However, instead of or in addition to this, the presentation mode may be allowed to be switched if a predetermined miss result (for example, a miss result of an SPSP reach performance or greater) is pre-read. In other words, although the presentation mode cannot be switched in principle while the hold notice performance is being executed, when the presentation mode is switched, it can be suggested that there is a high expectation for the hold information that is the subject of the hold notice performance.

The configuration that allows exceptional switching of presentation modes as described above is not essential, and in variant 7 of the first embodiment, the configuration may be such that, without referring to the results of the hold preview process, the decision as to whether or not to allow switching of presentation modes is determined based on whether or not a hold preview presentation is being performed and the type of specific display mode at that time.

(89) In the seventh variant of the first embodiment, the presentation mode can be switched on the condition that the second mode switching lottery is won. However, the mode can be switched without going through such a lottery. In other words, if the condition for switching the presentation mode is met during the execution of the pending notice presentation and the result of the pre-reading of the pending information is a jackpot result, the presentation mode can be switched without fail.

(90) In the eighth variant of the first embodiment described above, the presentation mode is switched by the player's operation (manual), but the presentation mode may be switched automatically without the player's operation. Such a configuration may, for example, be configured such that the switching of the presentation mode is preset based on the fact that a predetermined result has been pre-read by the reserved information pre-reading process, and then the presentation mode is automatically switched when the switching execution condition is met. Note that the switching execution condition may, for example, be the start of a play round of the reserved information in which the predetermined result has been pre-read, or the start of a play round a predetermined number of times before the current play round.

(91) In the above-mentioned modified example 8 of the first embodiment, the configuration has two types of presentation modes, presentation mode A and presentation mode B, as the multiple types of presentation states, but a configuration with three or more types of presentation modes may be used. In this case, for example, in a configuration with presentation modes A to C as three or more types of presentation states, the hold notice presentation may be executed more difficultly in the order of presentation mode A > presentation mode B > presentation mode C, and the ease of execution of the hold notice presentation may be different in each of the presentation modes, or the ease of execution of the hold notice presentation may be the same for all of presentation modes A to C, or a configuration may be used in which presentation modes with the same ease of execution of the hold notice presentation and presentation modes with different ease of execution are mixed, such as presentation modes A and C having the same ease of execution of the hold notice presentation, but presentation mode B being difficult to execute.

In a configuration in which presentation modes with the same ease of execution of the hold notice performance are mixed with presentation modes with different ease of execution, the execution of the hold notice performance may be restricted while in a standby state for switching presentation modes, as in the case of switching between different presentation modes, even when switching between presentation modes with the same ease of execution, or the execution of the hold notice performance may be permitted even while in a standby state for switching presentation modes, when switching between presentation modes with the same ease of execution.

(92) In the eighth variant of the first embodiment described above, the execution of the on-hold preview effect is uniformly restricted when the display mode is in standby for switching, but the execution of the on-hold preview effect that displays a specific display mode of a predetermined level or higher may be restricted. For example, when the display mode is in standby for switching, the execution of the on-hold preview effect in which the display mode of the on-hold image is the blue display mode HMb may be permitted, while the execution of the on-hold preview effect in which the display mode of the on-hold image is the green display mode HMc or higher may not be permitted.

(93) In the above-mentioned variant 8 of the first embodiment, the execution of the hold notice performance is restricted when the presentation mode switching standby state is in effect, regardless of the presentation mode to be switched to, but the restriction mode may be different depending on the presentation mode to be switched to. For example, when switching from presentation mode B, in which the hold notice performance is difficult to execute, to presentation mode A, in which the hold notice performance is easy to execute, the execution of the hold notice performance is uniformly restricted when the presentation mode switching standby state is in effect, whereas when switching from presentation mode A to presentation mode B, the execution of the hold notice performance may be permitted even when the presentation mode switching standby state is in effect, or the execution of the hold notice performance in a specific display mode higher than a predetermined display mode (e.g., blue display mode HMb) may be restricted, but the execution of the hold notice performance in a specific display mode lower than the predetermined display mode may be permitted.

(94) In the eighth modified example of the first embodiment described above, the display mode of the target reserved image HW after the presentation mode is switched is set when the standby state ends, but it may be set at a predetermined timing during the period from when the standby state ends (when the presentation mode is switched) until the start or end of a play round of the target reserved image HW. When setting during a play round of the target reserved image HW, the display mode may be set based on the result of the reserved image pre-read process of the target reserved image HW, or the display mode may be set based on a variation start command sent at the start of a play round of the target reserved image HW.

(95) In the eighth variant of the first embodiment described above, the execution of the hold notice performance is not restricted for hold information acquired before the display of the switching guide image 451, but the execution of the hold notice performance may be restricted. In other words, the execution of the hold notice performance may be restricted not only during the standby state, but also before transitioning to the standby state.

Specifically, when the switching guide image 451 is displayed while the hold notice performance is being performed, the display mode of the hold image that is the target of the hold notice performance may be changed from the specific display mode to the normal display mode HMa at a predetermined timing during the period from when the switching guide image 451 is displayed to when the performance mode is switched. Note that specific timings for changing from the specific display mode to the normal display mode HMa may include the timing of displaying the switching guide image 451, the timing of transitioning to a standby state, and the timing of switching performance modes.

(96) In the eighth variant of the first embodiment described above, after the switching guide image 451 is displayed, the execution of the hold notice performance is not restricted for hold information acquired before the transition to the standby state. However, the execution of the hold notice performance may be restricted.

In this case, the configuration may be such that the execution restriction of the hold notice performance is started prior to the transition to the standby state based on the display of the switching guide image 451 (transition to the switching guide state). In other words, after the display of the switching guide image 451, the hold notice performance triggered by the hold information acquired before the transition to the standby state may not be executed before the transition to the standby state or during the standby state.

Also, the hold notice performance may be temporarily executed before transitioning to the standby state, but the execution of the hold notice performance may be canceled when transitioning to the standby state. Specifically, after the switching guide image 451 is displayed, a hold notice performance triggered by the hold information acquired before transitioning to the standby state is executed before transitioning to the standby state, and then the display mode of the hold image that is the target of the hold notice performance may be changed from the specific display mode to the normal display mode HMa. Note that specific examples of the timing of the change from the specific display mode to the normal display mode HMa include the timing of transitioning to the standby state and the timing of switching performance modes.

(97) In the eighth variant of the first embodiment described above, when pending information is acquired during a standby state, a pending read-ahead process is executed, and after the standby state ends, the display mode of the target pending image HW is set based on the result of the pending read-ahead process executed during the standby state. However, a configuration may also be adopted in which a pending read-ahead process for the pending information acquired during the standby state is executed after the standby state, and the display mode of the target pending image HW after the standby state is set based on the result. In this case, the pending read-ahead process may be executed by the main control device 162 or by the performance control device 143. Also, a configuration may be adopted in which the pending read-ahead process is not executed when pending information is acquired during a standby state, or is executed.

(98) In the above-mentioned variation 8 of the first embodiment, the configuration according to the variation 7 of the first embodiment may be applied, and a configuration may be adopted in which the transition to the switching guidance state is restricted while the hold notice performance is being executed. Specifically, while the hold notice performance is being executed, a switching guidance lottery may not be executed even if it is time to execute the lottery, or the switching guidance image 451 may not be displayed or the notification flag may not be set even if the lottery is won, or a configuration may be adopted in which it is not determined whether or not it is time to execute the switching guidance lottery.

(99) The present invention can also be applied to other types of pachinko machines that are different from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric device opens a predetermined number of times when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines in which a right is generated and a jackpot is awarded when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines equipped with other devices, arrange ball machines, mahjong ball machines, and other gaming machines.

The present invention can also be applied to non-pinball gaming machines, such as slot machines, which have multiple reels with multiple patterns circumferentially attached, and which start the rotation of the reels by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and which, after the reels stop when a stop switch is operated or a predetermined time has passed, award the player with a special prize, such as a medal payout, if a specific pattern or combination of specific patterns is formed on a winning line visible through a display window.

The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the gaming machine body is supported on an outer frame so that it can be opened and closed, has a storage section and an intake device, and the reels start to rotate when a start lever is operated after a predetermined number of gaming balls stored in the storage section have been taken in by the intake device.

Second Embodiment
The gaming machine according to this embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the pachinko machine 10 described with reference to Figures 1 to 10 in the first embodiment is the same in this embodiment, so the description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries by the MPU 312 of the main control device 162>
The electrical configuration for performing various lotteries by the MPU 312 of the main control device 162 will be described with reference to FIG.

The MPU 312 uses various counter information during play to perform lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot, settings for the display of the special chart display section 43, and settings for the display of the normal chart display section 44. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 100, it uses a jackpot random number counter C1 used for lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot, a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the type of jackpot such as a guaranteed jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, a random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a variable type counter CS that determines the variable display time of each special chart display section AS, BS in the special chart display section 43. In addition, it uses a normal chart random number counter C3 used for lottery for whether or not to put the normal power device 63a of the second operating port 63 into a support state (open state).

Each counter C1-C3, CINI, and CS is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in lottery counter buffer 314a set in a specified area of RAM 314. In lottery counter buffer 314a, information corresponding to jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and variable type counter CS is stored in reserved ball storage area 314b, which serves as acquired information storage means, when a win occurs in first actuation port 62 or second actuation port 63.

The reserved ball storage area 314b has a reserved area RE consisting of a reserved area Ra for the first special design and a reserved area Rb for the second special design, and an execution area AE. The reserved areas Ra and Rb each have a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, and the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer 314a is stored in one of the areas as reserved information (special information) according to the winning history of the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63.

In this case, when multiple consecutive wins occur at the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63, the first to fourth areas store the numerical information in chronological order from the first area → the second area → the third area → the fourth area. By providing four areas in this way, up to four winning balls at the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63 can be reserved and stored. In addition, the reserved ball storage area 314b is provided with a total reserved number storage area, and information for specifying the number of winning balls at the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63 that are reserved and stored is stored in this total reserved number storage area.

The execution area AE is an area for moving the values stored in the first area of the reserve area RE when the variable display of the special chart display section 43 begins, and when one game round begins, a win/loss determination is made based on the various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

As for each counter, for example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 2999, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e. 2999). In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 goes through one cycle, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 2999).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of the RAM 314 when the gaming ball enters the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63. More specifically, it is stored in the reserved area Ra for the first special symbol of the RAM 314 when the gaming ball enters the first actuation port 62, and it is stored in the reserved area Rb for the second special symbol of the RAM 314 when the gaming ball enters the second actuation port 63.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the win/lose lottery to determine whether or not there is a jackpot, and the value of the random number that will result in a jackpot win is set in the win/lose table stored in the win/lose table storage area 313a of the ROM 313. As shown in FIG. 101, a win/lose table for a low probability mode and a win/lose table for a high probability mode are set as the win/lose table. In this pachinko machine 10, the lottery modes for the win/lose lottery are a low probability mode (low probability state) in which the probability of a jackpot is relatively low, and a high probability mode (high probability state) in which the probability of a jackpot is relatively high. When the lottery mode is the low probability mode, the win/lose table for the low probability mode is referenced, and when the lottery mode is the high probability mode, the win/lose table for the high probability mode is referenced.

As shown in FIG. 101(a), in the win/lose table for the low probability mode, a total of 10 random numbers from "0" to "9" are set as the jackpot random number values. In other words, the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability mode is set to 1/300.

As shown in FIG. 101(b), in the win/lose table for the high probability mode, a total of 50 random numbers from "0" to "49" are set as the jackpot random number values. In other words, the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability mode is set to 1/60.

In each lottery mode, any random number value other than the one that results in a jackpot will result in a losing lottery result. Note that the probability of winning a jackpot in each probability mode is not limited to the above, and can be set arbitrarily. In other words, as long as the probability of winning a jackpot is higher in a high probability mode than in a low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers corresponding to a jackpot are arbitrary.

The jackpot type counter C2 is used to assign the type of jackpot when a jackpot is hit, and is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e. 99). The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of RAM 314 when the game ball enters the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63. More specifically, it is stored in the reserved area Ra for the first special symbol of RAM 314 when the game ball enters the first actuation port 62, and is stored in the reserved area Rb for the second special symbol of RAM 314 when the game ball enters the second actuation port 63.

The allocation destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a jackpot type table in the type table storage area 313b of the ROM 313. As shown in FIG. 102, a jackpot type table for the first special symbol and a jackpot type table for the second special symbol are set as the jackpot type table. When a jackpot is achieved based on winning the first actuation port 62, the jackpot type table for the first special symbol is referenced, and when a jackpot is achieved based on winning the second actuation port 63, the jackpot type table for the second special symbol is referenced.

As shown in FIG. 102(a), in the jackpot type table for the first special chart, the selectable jackpot types are set as 4R variable jackpot result A, 4R variable jackpot result B, 4R normal jackpot result A, and 4R normal jackpot result B. All of these jackpot results result in four rounds of play being performed. Here, a round of play is one in which the variable winning control is performed at least once to change the variable winning device 65 from a closed state to an open state, and then back to the closed state. In this embodiment, the variable winning control is performed once per round of play.

4R special jackpot result A is a jackpot result in which the lottery mode is set to high probability mode after the open/close execution mode ends. In this case, the high probability mode continues until the number of times the special game is played after the open/close execution mode reaches a predetermined first upper limit (e.g., 100 times). When the first upper limit is reached, the high probability mode ends and the lottery mode is changed to low probability mode.

In addition, in the case of 4R sure-win result A, after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the support mode of the regular power device 63a of the second operating port 63 is set to the high-frequency support mode. In this case, the high-frequency support mode continues until the number of times the special game is played after the opening and closing execution mode reaches a second upper limit number (e.g., 1,100 times) that is greater than the first upper limit number. When the second upper limit number is reached, the high-frequency support mode ends and the support mode is changed to the low-frequency support mode.

In other words, if the jackpot type is a 4R special jackpot result A, the state will be high probability mode and high frequency support (high probability game state, special variable game state) until the number of times the special chart is played after the opening and closing execution mode reaches the first upper limit, and after the first upper limit is reached, the state will be low probability mode and high frequency support mode (time-saving game state) until the second upper limit is reached. After the second upper limit is reached, the state will transition to low probability mode and low frequency support (normal game state).

Here, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode will be explained. In the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the driving mode of the normal power device 63a is controlled so that the frequency of winning into the second operating port 63 is relatively high and low when compared in a situation where game balls are continuously launched into the game area PE in the same manner. Specifically, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the normal power device lottery using the normal power random number counter C3 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode, and the number of times the normal power device 63a opens when the normal power device lottery is won is also greater in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode, and the time required for one opening is also longer in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode.

Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the second actuation port 63 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the first actuation port 62 is higher than in the second actuation port 63, but in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the second actuation port 63 is higher than in the first actuation port 62. And, when a winning entry into the second actuation port 63 occurs, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play without losing too many balls.

The configuration for realizing the high-frequency support mode is not limited to the above, and may be, for example, a configuration in which the probability of winning the normal drawing is the same in both modes, and the number of times the normal electric device 63a is opened or the duration of one opening is given preferential treatment compared to the low-frequency support mode. In short, it is sufficient that the frequency of winning the second operating port 63 per unit time is higher than in the low-frequency support mode, and the high-frequency support mode and low-frequency support mode can be set by making any one or any combination of the conditions of the normal drawing, the number of times it is opened, and the duration of opening different.

4R High probability jackpot result B is a jackpot result in which the lottery mode is set to high probability mode after the open/close execution mode ends. In this case, the high probability mode continues until the number of times the special game is played after the open/close execution mode reaches a first upper limit (e.g., 100 times). Also, with 4R High probability jackpot result B, the support mode is set to high frequency support mode after the open/close execution mode ends. In this case, the high frequency support mode continues until the number of times the special game is played after the open/close execution mode reaches a first upper limit. In other words, when the jackpot type becomes 4R High probability jackpot result B, the state will be a high probability game state until the number of times the special game is played after the open/close execution mode reaches a first upper limit, and after the first upper limit is reached, the state will switch to normal game state.

4R normal jackpot result A is a jackpot result in which, after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode is set to the low probability mode and the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode. In this case, the high frequency support mode continues until the number of times the special chart play is performed after the opening and closing execution mode reaches a predetermined third upper limit (e.g., 1000 times). In other words, when the jackpot type becomes 4R normal jackpot result A, the time-saving play state is entered until the number of times the special chart play is performed after the opening and closing execution mode reaches the third upper limit, and after the third upper limit is reached, the state transitions to the normal play state.

4R normal jackpot result B is a jackpot result in which, after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode is set to the low probability mode and the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode. In this case, the high frequency support mode continues until the number of times the special chart play is performed after the opening and closing execution mode reaches a fourth upper limit (e.g., 100 times), which is less than the third upper limit. In other words, when the jackpot type becomes 4R normal jackpot result B, the time-saving play state is entered until the number of times the special chart play is performed after the opening and closing execution mode reaches the fourth upper limit, and after the fourth upper limit is reached, the state transitions to the normal play state.

In this embodiment, "0" to "1" on the jackpot type counter C2 corresponds to 4R special jackpot result A, "2" to "49" corresponds to 4R special jackpot result B, "50" to "51" corresponds to 4R normal jackpot result A, and "52" to "99" corresponds to 4R normal jackpot result B. In other words, the probability of being assigned to 4R special jackpot result A is set to 2%, the probability of being assigned to 4R special jackpot result B is set to 48%, the probability of being assigned to 4R normal jackpot result A is set to 2%, and the probability of being assigned to 4R normal jackpot result B is set to 48%.

As shown in FIG. 102(b), in the jackpot type table for the second special chart, 10R special jackpot result A and 10R special jackpot result B are set as selectable jackpot types. Each of these jackpot results results in 10 rounds of play being executed.

10R High probability jackpot result A is a jackpot result in which the lottery mode is set to high probability mode after the open/close execution mode ends. In this case, the high probability mode continues until the number of times the special game is played after the open/close execution mode reaches the first upper limit (e.g., 100 times). Also, with 10R High probability jackpot result A, the support mode is set to high frequency support mode after the open/close execution mode ends. In this case, the high frequency support mode continues until the number of times the special game is played after the open/close execution mode reaches the second upper limit (e.g., 1100 times). In other words, when the jackpot type becomes 10R High probability jackpot result A, the high probability game state will be in effect until the number of times the special game is played after the open/close execution mode reaches the first upper limit, and then the time-saving game state will be in effect until the second upper limit is reached.

10R High probability jackpot result B is a jackpot result in which the lottery mode is set to high probability mode after the open/close execution mode ends. In this case, the high probability mode continues until the number of times the special game is played after the open/close execution mode reaches the first upper limit (e.g., 100 times). Also, in the 10R High probability jackpot result B, the support mode is set to high frequency support mode after the open/close execution mode ends. In this case, the high frequency support mode continues until the number of times the special game is played after the open/close execution mode reaches the first upper limit (e.g., 100 times). In other words, when the jackpot type becomes 10R High probability jackpot result B, the state becomes a high probability game state until the number of times the special game is played after the open/close execution mode reaches the first upper limit, and after the first upper limit is reached, the state transitions to normal game state.

In this embodiment, "0" to "19" on the jackpot type counter C2 corresponds to the 10R special jackpot result A, and "20" to "99" corresponds to the 10R normal jackpot result B. In other words, the probability of being assigned to the 10R special jackpot result A is set to 20%, and the probability of being assigned to the 10R normal jackpot result B is set to 80%.

In addition, in the jackpot type table for the second special chart, the normal jackpot result is not set as a selectable jackpot type. In other words, if a jackpot is won in the winning/losing lottery of the second special chart based on the entry into the second operating port 63, the guaranteed jackpot result is selected with a 100% probability after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Therefore, if a jackpot is won in a high probability game state or a time-saving game state in which entry into the second operating port 63 is possible, the game will always transition to a high probability game state. In addition, if a jackpot is won in the winning/losing lottery of the second special chart, the number of rounds played in the opening/closing execution mode is greater than when a jackpot is won in the winning/losing lottery of the first special chart, and more game balls can be expected to be acquired. Therefore, a game in which a game ball is won in the second operating port 63 is more advantageous for the player than a game in which a game ball is won in the first operating port 62.

In this way, there is a clear difference in the advantages that the first actuation port 62 and the second actuation port 63 offer to the player. Therefore, the player will play in the hope that, of the first actuation port 62 and the second actuation port 63, a win will occur in the second actuation port 63, and as a result, the player will pay more attention to the high frequency support mode, which increases the frequency of wins in the second actuation port 63.

In this embodiment, in addition to the time-saving game state which is entered when a normal jackpot result is reached, there is a time-saving game state which is entered when the cumulative number of times (the number of times that the player is stuck) that the special game play results in a loss (loss game play) reaches a predetermined ceiling number of times (for example, 1000 times) (Fig. 102(c)). In the following, in order to distinguish between the time-saving game state which is entered when a jackpot is reached and the time-saving game state which is entered when the ceiling number of times is reached, the former may be referred to as the first time-saving game state and the latter as the second time-saving game state.

When counting the number of misses, if a jackpot result occurs before the ceiling number of times is reached, the number of times remaining until the ceiling number of times is reset to the initial value (e.g. 1000 times), and the number of misses up to that point is discarded. Also, misses during the high probability play state are not counted. Therefore, in order to transition to the second time-saving play state, the number of misses after the open/close execution mode ends must reach the ceiling number, and if transitioning to the high probability play state after the open/close execution mode, the number of misses after the high probability play state ends must reach the ceiling number.

Since the trigger for transition to the second time-saving game state is a miss, transition to the second time-saving game state does not pass through the open/close execution mode. In other words, after the special game round in which the number of misses reaches the ceiling number of times has ended, it is possible to immediately play a special game round in the second time-saving game state. The second time-saving game state continues until the number of special game rounds played since transitioning to the second time-saving game state reaches a predetermined fifth upper limit number (e.g., 900 times). After the second time-saving game state ends, transition to the normal game state occurs.

In addition, the jackpot type counter C2 is also used to determine the stop result of the image to be stopped and displayed on each special chart display unit AS, BS when the result of the winning/losing lottery based on the winning/losing lottery based on the winning/losing lottery in the operation port 62, 63 is a jackpot. The stop result is determined by referring to the stop result table stored in the stop result table memory area 313d of the ROM 313. In the stop result table, multiple data of the stop result (the jackpot image to be stopped and displayed on each special chart display unit AS, BS) in the case of a jackpot is set in correspondence with the value of the jackpot type counter C2, and when determining the stop result, the data of the multiple stop results corresponding to the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is read out. Here, the same jackpot type counter C2 is used to determine the stop result and the jackpot type, so there is a correlation between the jackpot image to be stopped and displayed on each special chart display unit AS, BS and the jackpot type determined at the time of the jackpot.

The variation type counter CS is configured to increment by 1 within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (i.e., 99). The variation type counter CS is used by the MPU 312 to determine the variation display time in the first special chart display section AS and the second special chart display section BS of the special chart display section 43.

The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time the normal processing described below is executed, and is repeatedly updated during the remaining time in the normal processing. The fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of the RAM 314 when the game ball enters the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63. More specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the reserved area Ra for the first special symbol of the RAM 314 when the game ball enters the first actuation port 62, and is stored in the reserved area Rb for the second special symbol of the RAM 314 when the game ball enters the second actuation port 63.

The allocation destination of the variable display time for the variable type counter CS is stored as a variable display time table in the variable display time table storage area 313c of the ROM 313. The variable display time table will be described in detail later.

The regular winning random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 99, and to return to 0 after it reaches a maximum value (i.e., 99). The regular winning random number counter C3 is updated periodically, and is stored in the regular winning holding area 314c of the RAM 314 when the game ball enters the through gate 64.

The normal winning random number counter C3 is used for the normal winning/losing lottery (support lottery) to determine whether or not there is a normal winning (support winning) result. If the result is a support winning result, the normal power device 63a is changed from a closed state to an open state, and then a device opening/closing game to return it to the closed state is performed at least once.

The random number value that results in a support win is set in a support lottery table stored in the win/lose table memory area 313a of the ROM 313. As shown in FIG. 103, a support lottery table for the low-frequency support mode and a support lottery table for the high-frequency support mode are set as the support lottery table. When the support lottery is performed, if the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the support lottery table for the low-frequency support mode is referenced, and if the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the support lottery table for the high-frequency support mode is referenced.

As shown in FIG. 103(a), in the support lottery table for the low-frequency support mode, the random number value for winning support is set to one, "7." In other words, the probability of winning support in the low-frequency support mode is set to 1/100.

As shown in FIG. 103(b), the support lottery table for the high frequency support mode has a total of 99 numbers set from "0" to "98." In other words, the probability of winning support in the high frequency support mode is set to 99/100, and most support lotteries result in a support win.

In each support mode, the lottery result will normally be a loss unless the random number value results in a support win. Note that the probability of winning support in each support mode is not limited to the above, and can be set arbitrarily. In other words, as long as the probability of winning support is higher in high-frequency support mode than in low-frequency support mode, the number and value of the random number that results in a support win are arbitrary. Also, the support lottery table for each support mode may be common, making the probability of winning support equal between low-frequency support mode and high-frequency support mode.

<Various processes executed by the main control device 162>
Next, a description will be given of timer interrupt processing and normal processing executed by the MPU 312 in the main control device 162 to progress the game. In addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 312 also executes main processing that is started when the power is turned on and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but a description of these processes will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
The timer interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 104. This process is started by the MPU 312 periodically (for example, every 2 msec).

In step Sb101, the reading process of the various winning sensors is executed. That is, the state of the various winning sensors connected to the main control device 162 is read, and the state of the winning sensor (detection information from the winning sensor) is judged and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. For example, if it is judged that a winning has occurred in the first operating port 62, a winning detection flag for the first special symbol is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314, and if it is judged that a winning has occurred in the second operating port 63, a winning detection flag for the second special symbol is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. Also, if it is judged that the game ball has passed through the through gate 64, a winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314.

In step Sb102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 314.

In step Sb103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the regular random number counter C3 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the regular random number counter C3 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values, they are each cleared to 0. The updated values of each counter C1 to C3 are then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 314.

In step Sb104, a winning process for through is executed in response to winning at the through gate 64. In the winning process for through, it is determined whether or not a winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314, and if the flag is stored, the value of the regular winning random number counter C3 updated in step Sb103 is stored in the regular reserve area 314c, provided that the number of reserved role pieces stored in the regular reserve area 314c is less than four. In addition, if a winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 314e, the winning detection flag is erased and the winning process for the through gate is terminated.

In step Sb105, the winning process for the actuation port 62, 63 is executed in response to a winning entry into the actuation port, and then the timer interrupt process is terminated.

<Winning process for the operating port>
The winning process for the operating port in step Sb105 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step Sb201, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the first operating port 62 (initial entry) based on the detection state of the first operating port entry sensor 62a. If it is determined that a game ball has entered the first operating port 62, in step Sb202, a prize ball command is set in the payout control device 181 to pay out three game balls.

In step Sb203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that a gaming ball has entered the first operating port 62. In step Sb204, the value stored in the reserved number storage area of the first special symbol reserved area Ra is read, and the start reserved memory number RaN reserved and stored in the first special symbol reserved area Ra is set (hereinafter also referred to as the first start reserved memory number RaN). After that, in step Sb205, an information acquisition process is performed to store the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS, and this winning process is terminated.

If the result of step Sb201 is negative (if no winning has occurred in the first actuation port 62), the process proceeds to step Sb206, where it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the second actuation port 63 (initial winning) based on the detection state of the winning sensor 63c for the second actuation port. If it is determined that a game ball has won the second actuation port 63, a winning ball command is set in the payout control device 181 in step Sb207 to pay out one game ball.

In step Sb208, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that a gaming ball has entered the second actuation port 63. In step Sb209, the value stored in the reserved number memory area of the second special symbol reserved area Rb is read, and the start reserved memory number RbN reserved and stored in the second special symbol reserved area Rb is set (hereinafter also referred to as the second start reserved memory number RbN). After that, in step Sb205, information acquisition process is performed, and this winning process is terminated.

Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sb206 (no winning has occurred in the second operating port 63), this winning process ends.

The prize ball command set in step Sb202 or step Sb207 is sent to the payout control device 181 by the external output process of the normal process described below.

Here, the information acquisition process of step Sb205 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 106.

First, in step Sb301, it is determined whether the start pending memory count N (RaN or RbN) set in step Sb204 or step Sb209 described above is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). If the start pending memory count N is the upper limit, the information acquisition process is terminated, and if it is less than the upper limit, in step Sb302, the start pending memory count N of the corresponding special chart pending areas Ra, Rb is incremented by 1. In step Sb303, the value stored in the total pending memory count storage area (hereinafter referred to as the common pending number CRN) is incremented by 1.

In step Sb304, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS are stored in the first free memory area of the reserved area for the corresponding special chart display section, that is, the memory area corresponding to the reserved memory number incremented by 1 in step Sb302.

In other words, when the start pending memory number RaN for the first special symbol is set, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS are stored in the first free memory area in the first special symbol holding area Ra, that is, the holding area Ra corresponding to the start pending memory number RaN for the first special symbol that was incremented by 1 in step Sb302.

In addition, when the start pending memory number RbN for the second special chart is set, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS are stored in the first free memory area of the reserve area Rb for the second special chart, that is, the reserve area Rb corresponding to the start pending memory number RbN for the second special chart that was incremented by 1 in step Sb302.

In step Sb305, a display update process is executed for the special chart reserved number display section AM of the main display unit 81. In the special chart reserved number display section AM, it is possible to display the reserved number for the first special chart and the reserved number for the second special chart separately. In the display update process of step Sb305, if the current ball entry destination (winning destination) is the first operating port 62, the display of the reserved number for the first special chart is updated, and if the current ball entry destination (winning destination) is the second operating port 63, the display of the reserved number for the second special chart is updated.

In step Sb306, a hold command is set as a transmission target to the performance control device 143. The hold command includes information indicating whether the first or second special pattern is the starting winning, information indicating the number of holds, etc. After step Sb306 is executed, this information acquisition process ends.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 107. Normal processing is processing that starts after main processing that is started when the power is turned on is executed, and in normal processing, main processing of the game is executed. In summary, the processing of steps Sb401 to Sb408 is executed as a regular processing with a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps Sb409 to Sb411 is executed in the remaining time.

In normal processing, first, external signal output processing is executed in step Sb401. In the external signal output processing in step Sb401, output data such as the timer interrupt processing or the commands set in the previous normal processing is sent to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is sent to the payout control device 181. In addition, if a performance command such as a fluctuation start command, type command, or fluctuation end command is set, it is sent to the performance control device 143.

In step Sb402, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 314.

In step Sb403, a special chart play control process is executed to control play during each special chart play. In the special chart play control process, a jackpot determination and display control of the special chart display unit 43 are performed. In step Sb404, a game state transition process is executed. This game state transition process transitions the game state to an open/close execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like. The special chart play control process in step Sb403 and the game state transition process in step Sb404 will be described in detail later.

In step Sb405, a normal play control process is executed to control play during a normal play. In the normal play control process, a support lottery (a lottery for determining whether a normal play is a win or lose) and display control of the normal play display unit 44 are performed. In step Sb406, an electric role support process is executed to drive and control the normal play device 63a provided in the second operating port 63. The normal play control process in step Sb405 and the electric role support process in step Sb406 will be described in detail later.

In step Sb407, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 110 is excited once every predetermined period (e.g., 0.6 sec), provided that a launch permission signal is input from the power supply and launch control device 191. This causes the game ball to be launched toward the game area PE.

In step Sb408, it is determined whether a power outage flag is stored in the backup area of RAM 314. The power outage flag is set by the NMI interrupt process that is executed when a power outage occurs, and is used by MPU 312 to detect the occurrence of a power outage.

If the power outage flag is not stored (power outage has not occurred), step Sb409 determines whether it is time to execute the next normal process, i.e., whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current normal process. If the predetermined time has not elapsed since the start of the current normal process, step Sb410 updates the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches its maximum value. The updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is then stored in the corresponding area of RAM 314.

In step Sb411, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the corresponding area of RAM 314.

If the determination in step Sb409 is positive (a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of this normal processing), the process returns to step Sb401 and executes the processing from step Sb401 onwards.

In this way, after executing the process of step Sb408, the remaining period until the timing for executing the next normal process is reached is used to repeatedly update the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS. Here, since the execution time of each process of steps Sb401 to Sb408 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the timing for executing the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (i.e., the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be randomly updated, and the variation type counter CS can also be randomly updated in the same way.

If the judgment in step Sb408 is affirmative (if the power outage flag is stored), the process proceeds to step Sb412, where the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited. In step Sb413, the value of the stack pointer of MPU312 is stored in the backup area of RAM314, and in step Sb414, a power outage command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143. By transmitting the power outage command, the performance control device 143 is notified of the occurrence of a power outage state.

In step Sb415, a RAM judgment value is calculated and stored in a backup area. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of RAM 314. In step Sb416, access to RAM 314 is prohibited, and an infinite loop continues until the power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed. Note that even after the power is completely cut off, power for storing and maintaining data in RAM 314 is supplied from the power supply and launch control device 191, so the information stored in RAM 314 before the power was cut off is retained in the same state for a specified period of time (for example, one or two days).

<Special chart game play control processing>
The game play control processing of step Sb403 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step Sb501, it is determined whether or not the opening and closing execution mode using the variable winning device 65 is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening and closing execution mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. The opening and closing execution mode flag is used by the MPU 312 to know that the opening and closing execution mode is in progress.

If the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress, in step Sb502, it is determined whether the special chart display unit 43 is displaying a confirmed image. Specifically, it is determined whether a confirmed display flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The confirmed display flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine whether a confirmed display is being performed on the first special chart display unit AS or the second special chart display unit BS.

If the special chart display unit 43 is not displaying a fixed image, in step Sb503, it is determined whether the special chart display unit 43 is displaying a variable image. Specifically, it is determined whether a variable display flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The variable display flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine whether a variable display is being performed on the first special chart display unit AS or the second special chart display unit BS.

If the special chart display unit 43 is not displaying a variable, step Sb504 determines whether the common reserve number CRN is "0". If the common reserve number CRN is "0", this means that the start reserve memory numbers RaN and RbN are "0" for both the first actuation port 62 and the second actuation port 63. Therefore, if the common reserve number CRN is "0", there is no reserve information to be executed, and the special chart play count control process is terminated.

If the common reserved number CRN is not "0", step Sb505 executes a data setting process to set the data stored in the first special chart reserved area Ra or the second special chart reserved area Rb for variable display, and then step Sb506 executes a variable start process to start the variable display in the special chart display unit 43, and then ends this game round control process.

The data setting process in step Sb505 and the change start process in step Sb506 are now described in detail.

First, the data setting process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 109.

First, in step Sb601, it is determined whether the second start pending memory count RbN reserved in the second special design reserve area Rb is "0". If the second start pending memory count RbN is "0", data setting processing for the first special design (first actuation port 62) is executed in steps Sb602 to Sb608, and if the second start pending memory count RbN is not "0", data setting processing for the second special design (second actuation port 63) is executed in steps Sb609 to Sb615.

As already explained, when the common reserved number CRN is 1 or more, the data setting process is performed. The situation in which the data setting process is performed means that at least one of the first start reserved memory number RaN and the second start reserved memory number RbN is 1 or more. In this case, the data setting process is configured to first determine whether the second start reserved memory number RbN is "0" or not, and to execute the process related to the reserved information for the first special symbol on the condition that the second start reserved memory number RbN is "0", that is, there is no reserved information for the second special symbol. Therefore, when reserved information is stored in both the first special symbol reserved area Ra and the second special symbol reserved area Rb, the reserved information for the second special symbol (second operating port 63) stored in the second special symbol reserved area Rb is processed preferentially.

In the data setting process for the first special chart, first in step Sb602, the first start reserved memory number RaN in the reserved area Ra for the first special chart is decremented by 1. In step Sb603, the common reserved number CRN is decremented by 1. In step Sb604, the data stored in the first area of the reserved area Ra for the first special chart is moved to the execution area AE.

In step Sb605, a process is executed to shift the data (reserved information such as the jackpot random number counter C1) stored in the memory area of the reserved area Ra for the first special chart. In this process, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in the second to fourth areas is sequentially moved to the lower areas.

In step Sb606, it is determined whether or not a second special pattern flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. The second special pattern flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that there is pending information for the second operating port 63. If the second special pattern flag is stored, the second special pattern flag is erased in step Sb607.

After execution of step Sb607 or if a negative judgment is made in step Sb606 (if the second special chart flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step Sb608, where a shift command (shift occurrence information) is set to notify the performance control device 143 that a shift has been made in the reserved area data. In this case, a shift command is selected from the command information storage area 313e of the ROM 313, the shift command including information that the reserved area that is the subject of this data shift corresponds to the first special chart reserved area Ra, i.e., information that the reserved area corresponds to the first operating port 62, and the selected shift command is set as the command to be sent to the performance control device 143. After that, this data setting process is terminated.

The shift command set in step Sb608 is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sb401 in normal processing (Figure 107). The performance control device 143 executes processing to change the display in the first reserved display area Ga of the pattern display device 75 in response to the reduction in the number of reserved items based on the received shift command.

In the data setting process for the second special chart, first in step Sb609, the second start reserved memory number RbN in the reserved area Rb for the second special chart is decremented by 1. In step Sb610, the common reserved number CRN is decremented by 1. In step Sb611, the data stored in the first area of the reserved area Rb for the second special chart is moved to the execution area AE.

In step Sb612, a process is executed to shift the data (reserved information such as the jackpot random number counter C1) stored in the memory area of the reserved area Rb for the second special symbol. In step Sb613, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e. If the second special symbol flag is not stored, the second special symbol flag is set in step Sb614.

After execution of step Sb614 or if a positive judgment is made in step Sb613 (if the second special chart flag is stored), the process proceeds to step Sb615, where a shift command (shift occurrence information) is set, which is information for making the performance control device 143, which is the sub-control device, recognize that a shift of data in the reserved area has occurred. In this case, a shift command is selected from the command information storage area 313e of the ROM 313, which includes information that the reserved area that is the subject of this data shift corresponds to the reserved area Rb for the second special chart, i.e., information that it corresponds to the second operating port 63, and the selected shift command is set as the command to be sent to the performance control device 143. After that, this data setting process is terminated.

The shift command set in step Sb615 is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sb401 in normal processing (Figure 107). The performance control device 143 executes processing to change the display in the second reserved display area Gb of the pattern display device 75 in response to the reduction in the number of reserved items based on the received shift command.

Next, the change start process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 110.

First, in step Sb701, it is determined whether the win/lose lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. The high probability flag is used by the MPU 312 to know that the high probability mode is in effect, and is set when transitioning to the high probability mode.

If the mode is not high probability mode, a win/loss determination is made in step Sb702 by referring to the win/loss table for low probability mode (Fig. 101(a)). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning for the low probability mode (e.g., "0" to "9"). On the other hand, if the mode is high probability mode, a win/loss determination is made in step Sb703 by referring to the win/loss table for high probability mode (Fig. 101(b)). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning for the high probability mode (e.g., "0" to "49").

After step Sb702 or step Sb703 is executed, in step Sb704, it is determined whether the result of the hit/miss determination in step Sb702 or step Sb703 is a jackpot win. If it is a jackpot win, in step Sb705, it is determined whether the second special symbol flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e. If the second special symbol flag is not stored, in step Sb706, a lottery is performed for the jackpot type by referring to the type table for the first special symbol (FIG. 102(a)). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE belongs to any of the numerical ranges of 4R special jackpot result A, 4R special jackpot result B, 4R normal jackpot result A, or 4R normal jackpot result B.

On the other hand, if the second special symbol flag is stored, in step Sb707, the type table for the second special symbol (Fig. 102(b)) is referenced to draw the jackpot type. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE belongs to the numerical range of 10R special jackpot result A or 10R special jackpot result B.

After step Sb706 or step Sb707 is executed, in step Sb708, a type flag indicating the type of jackpot selected by the lottery in step Sb706 or step Sb707 is stored in the various flag storage area 314e. For example, if the type of jackpot selected by the lottery is a 4R variable jackpot result A, a 4R variable jackpot A flag is stored.

In step Sb709, the stop result for the jackpot is set by referring to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of the ROM 313. Specifically, the stop result corresponding to the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is read from the stop result table and set as the stop result for the current game round.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb704 (if the jackpot has not been won), the process proceeds to step Sb710, where a stop result for a loss is set. In this embodiment, only one type of stop result for a loss is provided, and that stop result is set in step Sb710.

After execution of step Sb709 or step Sb710, in step Sb711, a variable display time setting process is executed to set the variable display time for the current game round in the first special chart display unit AS or the second special chart display unit BS.

Here, the process for setting the variable display time will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 111.

First, in step Sb801, the current game state is grasped. Specifically, it is grasped which of the high probability flag and the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314, and based on the result, it is determined whether the current game state is the normal game state, the high probability game state, or the time-saving game state. The high frequency support flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that the current support mode is the high frequency support mode. If both the high probability flag and the high frequency support mode are set, it is determined to be in the high probability game state, if only the high frequency support mode is set, it is determined to be in the time-saving game state, and if neither the high probability flag nor the high frequency support mode is set, it is determined to be in the normal game state.

In step Sb802, it is determined whether the result of the win/loss judgment for the current game round is a jackpot or not. If it is a jackpot, the process proceeds to step Sb803, where a jackpot variable display time table is obtained as a table for drawing the variable display time (variable pattern). At this time, a variable display time table corresponding to the current game state is obtained based on the result of the determination in step Sb801.

The variable display time table will now be explained with reference to Figures 112 and 113.

The variable display time table includes a variable display time table for the normal game state, a variable display time table for the high probability game state, and a variable display time table for the time-saving game state. In addition, the variable display time table corresponding to each game state is set for both big wins and losses.

In each variation display time table, the numerical range of the variation type counter CS is set in correspondence with information on the variation pattern. Note that in Figures 112 and 113, information on the variation display time is listed along with the variation pattern for ease of understanding, but the information on the variation display time is stored in ROM 313 separately from the variation display time table as time information corresponding to each variation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 112(a), in the jackpot variable display time table corresponding to the normal game state, variable pattern 1A (15 sec), variable pattern 2A (60 sec), and variable pattern 3A (120 sec) are set as selectable variable patterns. When a variable pattern is selected using the variable type counter CS, the image variable display is performed in the first special chart display section AS or the second special chart display section BS at the variable display time corresponding to the selected variable pattern.

When a variation pattern is selected, information indicating that variation pattern is sent to the performance control device 143 as a variation start command. The performance control device 143 determines the variation pattern selected by the main control device 162 based on the received variation start command. Then, the display control device 350 is controlled so that the variation display of each of the above-mentioned pattern rows Z1 to Z3 is performed at the variation display time corresponding to the determined variation pattern. As a result, each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 is displayed in a variable manner on the pattern display device 75 in synchronization with the variable display of the pattern on the first special pattern display unit AS or the second special pattern display unit BS.

In addition, each variation pattern also corresponds to a game round presentation such as a reach presentation performed by the pattern display device 75. Specifically, variation pattern 1A corresponds to a normal reach winning presentation, variation pattern 2A corresponds to an SP reach (super reach) winning presentation, and variation pattern 3A corresponds to an SPSP reach winning presentation. In other words, when the presentation control device 143 determines a variation pattern from the received variation start command, it controls the display control device 350 so that a game round presentation corresponding to that variation pattern is performed by the pattern display device 75.

In each of the above-mentioned reach-winning effects, after a reach display is performed, each of the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a jackpot symbol combination. Here, the reach display (reach state) refers to a display state that makes the player think that the variable display state is likely to result in a special display result (jackpot result) in a gaming machine that has a symbol display device 75 capable of performing a variable display (or a variably displayed) of symbols (pictures), and in which the game state becomes a special game state (open/close execution mode) that is advantageous to the player when the stopped display result after the variable display becomes a special display result (jackpot result) in the stage between the start of the variable display (or variably displayed) of the symbols (pictures) in the symbol display device 75 and the derived display of the stopped display result.

In other words, it is a display state in which some of the multiple symbol rows displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 are stopped to display a combination of symbols that may result in a jackpot symbol combination corresponding to the occurrence of a jackpot state, and in this state, the remaining symbol rows are displayed with varying symbols. More specifically, as a preliminary step before the variable symbol display ends, when the symbols of the final symbol row are displayed with varying symbols, the symbols of the symbol rows other than the final symbol row are displayed on the active line in the display screen G in a manner that constitutes a jackpot symbol combination, thereby forming a reach line.

The normal reach hit effect is one in which the symbols are displayed in a jackpot symbol combination after the reach display described above. The SP reach effect is a higher level reach effect than the normal reach effect, in which a predetermined effect in which a character or the like appears is performed after the formation of a reach line, and symbols are displayed in a jackpot symbol combination after the predetermined effect. The SPSP reach effect is a higher level reach effect than the SP reach effect, in which symbols are displayed in a jackpot symbol combination after a development effect that develops from the SP reach effect is performed.

Note that the items in the "Notes (Performance Mode)" column in Figure 112(a) are added for convenience and are not set in the variable display time table.

As shown in FIG. 112(b), in the loss variable display time table corresponding to the normal game state, variable pattern 1H, variable pattern 2H (15 sec), variable pattern 3H (60 sec), and variable pattern 4H (120 sec) are set as selectable variable patterns. As with the jackpot variable display time table, a variable display time is set corresponding to each variable pattern, but the variable display time corresponding to variable pattern 1H varies depending on the number of reserved first or second special patterns at that time. Specifically, when variable pattern 1H is selected in a situation where the number of reserved patterns is two or less, the variable display time is 8 sec, and when variable pattern 1H is selected in a situation where the number of reserved patterns is three or more, the variable display time is 4 sec, which is shorter than 8 sec.

Fluctuation pattern 1H corresponds to a complete miss on the symbol display device 75, fluctuation pattern 2H corresponds to a normal miss, fluctuation pattern 3H corresponds to a SP miss, and fluctuation pattern 4H corresponds to a SPSP miss.

In the complete miss effect, the symbols are displayed in a miss pattern combination without a reach display. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned reach miss effects, after a reach display is performed, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a reach miss pattern combination (a state in which the symbols in the final stop row displayed on the reach line are symbols other than those that form a jackpot in combination with the reach symbols). In addition, the SP reach miss effect corresponds to the SP reach hit effect, and after a predetermined effect of the same type as the SP reach hit effect is performed, symbols are displayed in a reach miss pattern combination. In addition, the SPSP reach miss effect also corresponds to the SP reach hit effect.

In the fluctuation display time table for big wins, "0" on the fluctuation type counter CS corresponds to fluctuation pattern 1A, "1" to "29" correspond to fluctuation pattern 2A, and "30" to "99" correspond to fluctuation pattern 3A. On the other hand, in the fluctuation display time table for losses, "0" to "64" on the fluctuation type counter CS corresponds to fluctuation pattern 1H, "65" to "84" corresponds to fluctuation pattern 2H, "85" to "94" corresponds to fluctuation pattern 3H, and "95" to "99" corresponds to fluctuation pattern 4H.

If the result of the win/lose lottery based on the entry into the actuation ports 62, 63 is a jackpot result, variation pattern 3A corresponding to the SPSP reach performance is most likely to be selected, and if the result of the win/lose lottery is a loss result, variation pattern 4H corresponding to the SPSP reach performance is least likely to be selected. In other words, the SPSP reach performance is the reach performance that is most likely to be executed in the case of a jackpot and least likely to be executed in the case of a loss, so it functions as the highest level reach performance with the highest expectation of a jackpot.

For fluctuation patterns other than fluctuation pattern 3A and fluctuation pattern 4H, the higher the reach effect, the more likely it is to be selected in the event of a jackpot and the less likely it is to be selected in the event of a miss. In other words, the expectation of a jackpot increases in the following order: normal reach effect < SP reach effect < SPSP reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 113(a), in the jackpot fluctuation display time table corresponding to a high probability game state, fluctuation pattern 11A (60 sec), which corresponds to an SP reach hit, and fluctuation pattern 12A (120 sec), which corresponds to an SPSP reach hit, are set as selectable fluctuation patterns.

Also, as shown in FIG. 113(b), in the loss variable display time table corresponding to the high probability game state, the selectable variable patterns are variable pattern 11H corresponding to a complete miss, variable pattern 12H (60 sec) corresponding to an SP reach miss, and variable pattern 13H (120 sec) corresponding to an SPSP reach miss. In the loss variable display time table in the high probability game state, the range of the variable type counter CS corresponding to a complete miss is wider than in the loss variable display time table in the normal game state, making it less likely that a reach performance will occur, allowing the game to proceed quickly.

The display time for the variation pattern 11H, which corresponds to a complete miss, is shortened earlier than the display time table for misses in normal play mode. Specifically, it is set to 8 seconds if the number of reserved balls is 1 or less, and 4 seconds if the number of reserved balls is 2 or more.

As shown in FIG. 113(c), in the jackpot variation display time table corresponding to the time-saving game state, variation pattern 21A (15 sec) corresponding to a normal reach hit, variation pattern 22A (60 sec) corresponding to an SP reach hit, and variation pattern 23A (120 sec) corresponding to an SPSP reach hit are set as selectable variation patterns.

Also, as shown in FIG. 113(d), in the loss variable display time table corresponding to the time-saving game state, the selectable variable patterns are set as a variable pattern 21H corresponding to a complete miss, a variable pattern 22H (15 sec) corresponding to a normal reach miss, a variable pattern 23H (60 sec) corresponding to an SP reach miss, and a variable pattern 24H (120 sec) corresponding to an SPSP reach miss. In the loss variable display time table for the time-saving game state, the rate of complete misses is lower than that in the loss variable display time table for the normal game state, but this is to prevent the time-saving game state from ending without a reach effect by increasing the frequency of reach effects. Note that the variable display time of the variable display time of the loss variable display time table for the time-saving game state is configured to be 8 sec when the number of reserved balls is 1 or less, and 4 sec when the number of reserved balls is 2 or more, as in the loss variable display time table for the high probability game state.

Note that the fluctuation display time tables shown in Figures 112 and 113 are merely examples, and the number of types of fluctuation patterns and the numerical range of the fluctuation type counter CS corresponding to each fluctuation pattern can be set arbitrarily.

Returning to the explanation of the variable display time setting process (FIG. 111), in step Sb803, for example, if the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, the variable display time table for the jackpot in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 112(a) is obtained.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb802 (if the jackpot is not reached), a loss variable display time table corresponding to the current game state is obtained in step Sb804 as a table for drawing the variable display time. For example, if the current game state is a time-saving game state, a loss variable display time table for the time-saving game state shown in FIG. 113(d) is obtained.

After execution of step Sb803 or step Sb804, in step Sb805, a lottery process for the variable display time (variation pattern) is executed using the variable display time table acquired in step Sb803 or step Sb804. Specifically, one variation pattern corresponding to the variation type counter CS stored in the execution area AE is identified from the group of variation patterns set in the variable display time table.

In step Sb806, the variable display time corresponding to the variable pattern identified in step Sb805 is set as the variable display time for the current special game. In this step, the value of the variable display time corresponding to the identified variable pattern is set in the variable display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 314d of RAM 314. For example, if the variable display time is 15 sec, 7500 is set in the variable display time counter area as the corresponding value. This set value is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 104) is started. After step Sb806 is executed, the variable display time setting process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 110), after executing the process of setting the fluctuation display time in step Sb711, in step Sb712, the fluctuation display flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. In the following step Sb713, a fluctuation start command and a type command are set as targets for transmission to the performance control device 143. The fluctuation start command includes information on the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 112 and FIG. 113, a different fluctuation pattern is set for each game state, and also different fluctuation patterns are set depending on whether it is a jackpot or a miss. Therefore, in the performance control device 143, by analyzing the fluctuation pattern from the fluctuation start command, it becomes possible to grasp not only the information on the fluctuation display time, but also the presence or absence of a jackpot and the current game state. In addition, the type command includes information on the type of jackpot. Note that the type command is set only when the result of the hit/miss judgment is a jackpot.

The variation start command and type command set in step Sb713 are sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sb401 in normal processing (Figure 107). The performance control device 143 determines the content of the performance for that game round based on the received variation start command and type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed. The content of this performance includes the variable display mode of the pattern on the pattern display device 75, and this determined variable display mode of the pattern is output from the performance control device 143 to the display control device 350 as a display content command. The display control device 350 controls the display of the pattern display device 75 so that the variable display of the pattern corresponding to each game round is performed based on the display content command received from the performance control device 143.

In step Sb714, the display of the special symbol display section 43 starts to change. At that time, the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314 is referenced. If the second special symbol flag is stored, the current game round corresponds to the second special symbol, and the image in the second special symbol display section BS is displayed in a changing manner. On the other hand, if the second special symbol flag is not stored, the current game round corresponds to the first special symbol, and the image in the first special symbol display section AS is displayed in a changing manner. After step Sb714 is executed, this change start process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the special chart play count control process (FIG. 108), after step Sb506 is executed, the special chart play count control process is terminated. Also, if a positive judgment is made in step Sb501 (opening/closing execution mode is in progress), the special chart play count control process is terminated without executing the processes in steps Sb502 and onward. In other words, if the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, no variable display is performed on the special chart display unit 43 even if reserved information exists.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sb503 (if the special chart display unit 43 is displaying a variable), the process proceeds to step Sb507, where it is determined whether the variable display time for the current special chart game has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the variable display time counter area provided in the various counter areas of RAM 314 has become "0".

If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step Sb508. In the variable display process, the display of the special chart display section related to the current play round is controlled (the illumination of each display segment is controlled) so that each display segment in the special chart display section related to the current play round is turned on and off in a predetermined order. After execution of step Sb508, the special chart play round control process is terminated.

If the variable display time has elapsed, proceed to step Sb509, and clear the variable display flag set in the various flag storage area 314e. In the following step Sb510, high probability mode update/end processing is executed. In the high probability mode update/end processing, processing is performed to update the remaining number of times in the high probability mode and to end the high probability mode. In step Sb511, high frequency support mode update/end processing is executed. In the high frequency support mode update/end processing, processing is performed to update the remaining number of times in the high frequency support mode and to end the high frequency support mode.

In step Sb512, a process for transition to the second time-saving game state (FIG. 102(c)) is executed, which controls the transition to the second time-saving game state. In step Sb513, a process for starting a final display is executed to start a final display on the special symbol display unit 43, and then the special symbol game number control process is terminated. Details of each process in steps Sb510 to Sb513 will be described later.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sb502 (if the special chart display unit 43 is displaying a confirmed display), the process proceeds to step Sb514, where a confirmed display termination process is executed to terminate the confirmed display on the special chart display unit 43. After step Sb514 is executed, the special chart play count control process is terminated. Details of the confirmed display termination process in step Sb514 will be described later.

<Game Status Transition Processing>
The game state transition processing of step Sb404 (Figure 107) will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 114.

First, in step Sb901, it is determined whether or not the game is in the open/close execution mode. If the game is not in the open/close execution mode, the program proceeds to step Sb902, where it is determined whether or not the special game play has ended (whether or not the final display on the special game display unit 43 has ended). If the special game play has not ended, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is time to end the special game round, step Sb903 determines whether the game result of this special game round corresponds to a transition to the open/close execution mode, i.e., whether the win/loss determination result is a jackpot. In this step, the jackpot determination is made by checking whether a type flag (step Sb708 in FIG. 110) is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. If the game result of this special game round does not correspond to a transition to the open/close execution mode, this game state transition process is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sb903 (if the game result of the current special game round corresponds to a transition to the open/close execution mode), the process proceeds to step Sb904, and the start process of the open/close execution mode is executed. In this start process, the open/close execution mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. Also, an opening period is set during which the variable winning device 65 is kept in a closed state and the start of the first round is awaited. Furthermore, if a high probability flag or high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e, these flags are cleared.

In step Sb905, a process for starting the round display is executed to notify the number of rounds in the open/close execution mode. In this step, the type of the current jackpot is identified based on the type flag stored in the various flag storage area 314e, and the round display unit is controlled so that the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. Note that the display of the number of rounds in the round display unit continues until the open/close execution mode ends.

In step Sb906, it is determined whether the current jackpot type is a 10R variable probability jackpot result. If it is not a 10R variable probability jackpot result, that is, if it is either a 4R variable probability jackpot result or a 4R normal jackpot result, in step Sb907, the round counter area RC1 provided in the various counter area 314d of RAM 314 is set to "4". On the other hand, if the current jackpot type is a 10R variable probability jackpot result, in step Sb908, the round counter area RC1 is set to "10".

After execution of step Sb907 or step Sb908, in step Sb909, an opening command is set to notify the performance control device 143 of the start of the opening and the opening period. This set opening command is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sb401 in normal processing (Figure 107).

In step Sb910, the external signal setting process is executed, and then the game state transition process is terminated. In the external signal setting process, the output terminal for the jackpot signal provided in the external output terminal 213 is set to an output state. As a result, if the output terminal for the jackpot signal is connected to a management control device on the gaming hall side, a jackpot signal is output to the management control device, and the management control device can determine that a jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 10.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sb901 (if the game is in the opening/closing execution mode), the process proceeds to step Sb911, where it is determined whether or not the opening period has elapsed. If the opening period has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated. If the opening period has elapsed, the big prize opening opening/closing process is executed in step Sb912.

Here, the process of opening and closing the big prize opening will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 115.

First, in step Sb1001, it is determined whether the large prize opening 65a is open or not. This determination is made based on the drive state of the drive unit 65d. If the large prize opening 65a is not open, in step Sb1002 it is determined whether the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0". If the value of the round counter area RC1 is not "0", that is, if there is a round of play to be executed, in step Sb1003 it is determined whether the value of the timer area T1 provided in the various counter areas 344b of RAM 314 is "0". This process is to determine whether the waiting period between rounds (round interval period) has elapsed.

If the value of the timer area T1 is "0", proceed to step Sb1004, and set "15000" in the timer area T1 as a value corresponding to the upper limit opening time (30 sec) of the variable winning device 65 in one round of play. The value set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (Fig. 104) is started. In step Sb1005, set "10" in the winning counter area PC1 provided in the various counter areas 344b as a value corresponding to the upper limit number of winnings (10) in the variable winning device 65 in one round of play.

In step Sb1006, the drive unit 65d is driven to open the large prize opening 65a. In step Sb1007, an opening command is set to notify the performance control device 143 that the opening of the large prize opening 65a (variable prize opening device 65) has begun, and then the large prize opening opening and closing process is terminated. This set opening command is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sb401 in the normal process (Figure 107).

If a positive judgment is made in step Sb1102 (if the value of the round counter area RC1 is 0) or if a negative judgment is made in step Sb1103 (if the value of the timer area T1 is not "0"), the large prize opening/closing process is terminated.

If the answer is yes in step Sb1001 (the large prize opening 65a is open), the process proceeds to step Sb1008, where it is determined whether the value of the timer area T1 is "0". This process is to determine whether the upper limit opening time of the variable prize device 65 set in step Sb1004 has elapsed.

If the value of the timer area T1 is not "0", proceed to step Sb1009, and determine whether or not a win has occurred in the large prize opening 65a based on the detection state of the large prize opening winning sensor 65c. If no win has occurred, the large prize opening opening opening process ends. On the other hand, if a win has occurred, the value of the winning counter area PC1 is decremented by 1 in step Sb1010, and then it is determined in step Sb1011 whether or not the value of the winning counter area PC1 is "0". If the value of the winning counter area PC1 is not "0", the large prize opening opening opening process ends.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sb1008 (if the value of the timer area T1 is "0") or if a positive judgment is made in step Sb1011 (if the value of the prize counter area PC1 is "0"), the process proceeds to step Sb1012, where the drive unit 65d is switched to a non-driven state and the large prize opening 65a is closed. In step Sb1013, the value of the round counter area RC1 is decremented by 1, and in step Sb1014, it is determined whether the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0".

If the value in the round counter area RC1 is not "0", i.e., if there are remaining rounds of play, proceed to step Sb1015 and set the timer area T1 to "1000" as a value corresponding to the period (2 sec) during which the variable winning device 65 will remain closed and wait for the start of the next round of play.

In step Sb1016, a close command is set to notify the performance control device 143 that the variable winning device 65 has been closed (the round of play has ended), and then the large winning opening opening and closing process is terminated. The set close command is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sb401 in the normal process (Figure 107).

If the answer is yes in step Sb1014 (if the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0"), that is, if the final round of the open/close execution mode has ended, the process proceeds to step Sb1017, where the ending start process is executed. In this start process, an ending period is set during which the variable winning device 65 remains in the closed state and waits for the start of the next game round (the first game round after the open/close execution mode has ended). In step Sb1018, an ending command is set to notify the performance control device 143 of the start of the ending and the ending period, and then the large winning opening open/close process is terminated. The set ending command is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sb401 in the normal process (Fig. 107).

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition process (FIG. 114), after executing the large prize opening/closing process in step Sb912, it is determined in step Sb913 whether the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0." If the value of the round counter area RC1 is not "0," this game state transition process is terminated as is to continue the opening/closing execution mode.

If the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0", the process proceeds to step Sb914 to determine whether the ending has ended (whether the ending period has elapsed). If the ending has not ended, the game state transition process ends in order to continue the ending. On the other hand, if the ending has ended, the process proceeds to step Sb915 to execute the transition process at the end of the opening and closing execution mode.

Here, we will explain the transition process when the opening and closing execution mode ends, with reference to the flowchart in Figure 116.

First, in step Sb1101, the type flag set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314 is referenced to determine whether the current jackpot is a guaranteed jackpot result. If it is a guaranteed jackpot result, in step Sb1102, a high probability flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. This transitions the lottery mode to the high probability mode.

In step Sb1103, a value corresponding to the first upper limit number of times (for example, 100) is set in the probability variation counter area KC provided in the various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314. The probability variation counter area KC is used by the MPU 312 to grasp the remaining number of times in the high probability mode (the remaining number of times special pattern play can be performed while in the high probability mode), and is decremented by one each time a special pattern play is performed in the high probability mode.

In step Sb1104, the first support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The first support flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that the current support mode is the high-frequency support mode, and setting the first support flag transitions the support mode to the high-frequency support mode.

In step Sb1105, it is determined whether the current jackpot result is 4R variable probability jackpot result A or 10R variable probability jackpot result A. If it is 4R variable probability jackpot result A or 10R variable probability jackpot result A, the process proceeds to step Sb1106, and a value corresponding to the second upper limit number of times (e.g., 1100) is set in the support counter area SC provided in the various counter areas 314d. On the other hand, if it is not 4R variable probability jackpot result A or 10R variable probability jackpot result A, that is, if it is 4R variable probability jackpot result B or 10R variable probability jackpot result B, the process proceeds to step Sb1107, and a value corresponding to the first upper limit number of times (e.g., 100) is set in the support counter area SC. The support counter area SC is used by the MPU 312 to grasp the remaining number of times in the high frequency support mode (the remaining number of times that the special pattern game can be played in the high frequency support mode), and is decremented by one each time a special pattern game is played in the high frequency support mode.

After execution of step Sb1106 or step Sb1107, in step Sb1108, a high probability game state start command is set as the target for transmission to the presentation control device 143, and then the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode is terminated. The high probability game state start command set in step Sb1108 is transmitted to the presentation control device 143 in step Sb401 in the normal processing (Figure 107). By transmitting the high probability game state start command, the presentation control device 143 is notified of the start of the high probability game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode).

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb1101 (if the current jackpot result is a normal jackpot result), the process proceeds to step Sb1109, where the first support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. As a result, the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode, and the game transitions to the first time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode).

In step Sb1110, it is determined whether the current jackpot result is a 4R normal jackpot result A. If it is a 4R normal jackpot result A, the process proceeds to step Sb1111, where the support counter area SC is set to a value corresponding to the third upper limit number of times (e.g., 1000). On the other hand, if the 4R normal jackpot result is not A, i.e., if it is a 4R normal jackpot result B, the process proceeds to step Sb1112, where the support counter area SC is set to a value corresponding to the fourth upper limit number of times (e.g., 100).

After execution of step Sb1111 or step Sb1112, in step Sb1113, a first time-shortened game state start command is set as the target for transmission to the presentation control device 143, and then the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode is terminated. The first time-shortened game state start command set in step Sb1113 is transmitted to the presentation control device 143 in step Sb401 in normal processing (FIG. 107). By transmitting the first time-shortened game state start command, the presentation control device 143 is notified of the start of the first time-shortened game state.

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition process (FIG. 114), after the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode in step Sb915 is completed, the round display end process is executed in step Sb916. In this process, the round display section in the special chart display section 43 is controlled so that the round display section is turned off.

In step Sb917, the process of ending the open/close execution mode is executed, and then the game state transition process is terminated. In the process of ending the open/close execution mode, the process of erasing the type flag and the open/close execution mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 314e is executed.

Next, we will explain the high probability mode update/end process of step Sb510 in FIG. 108, the high frequency support mode update/end process of step Sb511, and the process for transitioning to the second time-saving game state of step Sb512. These processes are executed when the variable display time has elapsed, in other words, when the final display on the special chart display unit 43 starts.

<High Probability Mode Update/End Processing>
The high probability mode update/end processing of step Sb510 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 117.

First, in step Sb1201, it is determined whether or not a high probability flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. If the high probability flag is set, that is, if the current lottery mode is the high probability mode, the process proceeds to step Sb1202, where the value of the high probability counter area KC provided in the various counter area 314d of RAM 314 is updated. Specifically, the value of the high probability counter area KC is decremented by 1.

In step Sb1203, it is determined whether the value of the probability change counter area KC is "0". If the value of the probability change counter area KC is "0", that is, if the number of remaining special game plays that can be played in the high probability mode is 0, in step Sb1204, the high probability flag set in the various flag storage area 314e is cleared. This transitions the lottery mode to the low probability mode.

At that time, if the value of the support counter area SC is 0, the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode, and the game transitions to the normal game state (low probability mode and low-frequency support mode). If the value of the support counter area SC is not 0, the support mode remains in the high-frequency support mode, and the game transitions to the first time-saving game state (low probability mode and high-frequency support mode).

In step Sb1205, a high probability game state end command is set as the target for transmission to the presentation control device 143, and then the high probability mode update/end process is terminated. The high probability game state end command set in step Sb1204 is transmitted to the presentation control device 143 in step Sb401 in normal processing (FIG. 107). By transmitting the high probability game state end command, the presentation control device 143 is notified of the end of the high probability game state.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb1201 (the high probability flag is not set), i.e., if the current lottery mode is the low probability mode, the high probability mode update/termination process is terminated without executing the processes in steps Sb1202 and onward. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sb1203 (the value of the probability change counter area KC is not "0"), the high probability mode update/termination process is terminated without executing the processes in steps Sb1204 and onward in order to continue the high probability mode.

<High frequency support mode update/termination process>
The high frequency support mode update and termination process in step Sb511 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step Sb1301, it is determined whether the first support flag or the second support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. If these flags are set, the support mode is the high frequency support mode, which means that the game is in either the high probability game state, the first time-saving game state, or the second time-saving game state.

In this case, proceed to step Sb1302 and update the value of the support counter area SC provided in the various counter areas 314d of RAM 314. Specifically, subtract 1 from the value of the support counter area SC.

In step Sb1303, it is determined whether the value of the support counter area SC is "0". If the value of the support counter area SC is "0", that is, if the number of times play has been performed with high frequency support has reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to step Sb1304, where the support flag set in the various flag storage area 314e is cleared. This ends the high probability play state, the first time-saving play state, or the second time-saving play state.

In step Sb1305, the corresponding game state end command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143. At this time, if the guaranteed variable game state or the first time-shortened game state ends, the first time-shortened game state end command is set, and if the second time-shortened game state ends, the second time-shortened game state end command is set.

The set game state end command is sent to the presentation control device 143 in step Sb401 in normal processing (FIG. 107). When the presentation control device 143 receives the first time-shortened game state end command together with the high probability game state end command (step Sb1205 in FIG. 117), it understands that the high probability game state ends and the game state transitions to the normal game state. In addition, when it receives only the first time-shortened game state end command, it understands that the first time-shortened game state will end, and when it receives the second time-shortened game state end command, it understands that the second time-shortened game state will end.

After step Sb1305 is executed, the high-frequency support mode update/termination process is terminated. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sb1301 (if none of the support flags are set), i.e., if the game is in normal play mode, the high-frequency support mode update/termination process is terminated without executing the processes in steps Sb1302 and onward. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sb1303 (if the value of the support counter area SC is not "0"), the high-frequency support mode update/termination process is terminated without executing the processes in steps Sb1304 and onward in order to continue the high-frequency support mode.

<Processing for transition to second time-saving gaming state>
The processing for transition to the second time-saving game state in step Sb512 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step Sb1401, it is determined whether the result of this special drawing is a jackpot result. If it is a jackpot result, the process proceeds to step Sb1402, and a value corresponding to the ceiling number of times (e.g., 1000) is set in the miss counter area HC provided in the various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314. The miss counter area HC is used by the MPU 312 to grasp the number of times remaining until the ceiling number of times is reached. After step Sb1402 is executed, the process for transitioning to the second time-saving game state is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb1401 (if the result of the special drawing is a loss), the process proceeds to step Sb1403, where it is judged whether or not a second support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. The second support flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that the game state is the second time-saving game state.

If the second support flag is not set, i.e., if the current game state is not the second game state, in step Sb1404, it is determined whether or not the high probability flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. If the high probability flag is not set, i.e., if the current lottery mode is the low probability mode, the process proceeds to step Sb1405, where the value of the miss count counter area HC is updated. Specifically, the value of the miss count counter area HC is decremented by 1.

In step Sb1406, it is determined whether the value of the miss counter area HC is "0". If the value of the miss counter area HC is "0", that is, if the number of miss plays has reached the ceiling number, the process proceeds to step Sb1407, where the second support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. This causes a transition to the second time-saving play state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode).

Here, the high-frequency support mode update/termination process in step Sb511 includes a process of subtracting the remaining number of times in the high-frequency support mode and a process of terminating the high-frequency support mode based on the result (Fig. 118). In this embodiment, these processes are performed before the process for transition to the second time-shortened game state in step Sb512 is performed. For this reason, if the value of the miss counter area HC becomes "0" in the final game round in the first time-shortened game state, in other words, if the game round in which the end of the first time-shortened game state is determined and the game round in which the transition to the second time-shortened game state is determined are the same game round, the first time-shortened game state will end during that game round before transitioning to the second time-shortened game state.

If the result of the win/loss judgment of the special game round is a jackpot result before the value of the miss counter area HC reaches "0", the processing of step Sb1402 is executed, and the value of the miss counter area HC is reset to a value corresponding to the ceiling number of times. Therefore, after the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the jackpot result ends, the game will start with the remaining number of miss games until the transition to the second time-saving game state being set to the ceiling number of times.

In step Sb1408, a value (e.g., 900) corresponding to the fifth upper limit number of times is set in the support counter area SC provided in the various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314. In step Sb1409, a second time-shortened game state start command is set as a command to be sent to the presentation control device 143. The set second time-shortened game state start command is sent to the presentation control device 143 in step Sb401 in normal processing (FIG. 107). By sending the second time-shortened game state start command, the presentation control device 143 is notified of the start of the second time-shortened game state.

In step Sb1410, it is determined whether the second special chart flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e, i.e., whether the special chart play count that has reached the ceiling number of times is a play count of the second special chart. When the special chart play count that has reached the ceiling number of times is a play count of the second special chart, it means that the ceiling number of times was reached in the final play count (1000th special chart play count) of the first time-saving play state. On the other hand, when the special chart play count that has reached the ceiling number of times is a play count of the first special chart, it means that the ceiling number of times was reached in the special chart play count in the normal play state.

If the second special chart flag is not set (if the special chart play round that has reached the ceiling number of times is the first special chart play round), proceed to step Sb1411 and determine whether the regular chart play round is in a changing display. If the regular chart play round is in a changing display, proceed to step Sb1412 and determine whether the support lottery result for that regular chart play round is a support winning result (regular chart winning result).

If the result is a support win, proceed to step Sb1413, and change the winning/losing result of the regular game round that is being displayed to a losing result. In the following step Sb1414, the stopping result for the losing result is set as the stopping result for the regular game round.

After execution of step Sb1414 or if a negative judgment is made in step Sb1412 (if the winning/losing result of the regular game round during which the changing display is being made is a losing result), the changing display of the regular game round is forcibly terminated in step Sb1415. In other words, the regular game display unit 44 is controlled to end the changing display even before the changing display time has elapsed. After that, the regular game display unit 44 is caused to confirm and display the stop result corresponding to the losing result at a predetermined confirmed display time (e.g., 0.5 sec). After execution of step Sb1415, the process for transitioning to the second time-saving game state is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sb1410 (if the second special chart flag is set), the normal chart play round will not be forcibly ended, and the process for transitioning to the second time-saving play state will end without executing the processes in steps Sb1411 to Sb1415.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sb1403 (if the game is in the second time-shortened game state) or if a positive judgment is made in step Sb1404 (if the game is in the high probability mode), the processing related to the second time-shortened game state is not executed, and the processing for transition to the second time-shortened game state is terminated without executing the processing from step Sb1405 onwards. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sb1406 (if the value of the miss counter area HC is not "0"), the processing for transition to the second time-shortened game state is terminated without executing the processing from step Sb1407 onwards in order to maintain the game state at that time.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb1411, i.e., if no change display of the number of normal game rounds is being made (including the case where a fixed display of the number of normal game rounds is being made), the process for transition to the second time-saving game state is terminated without executing the processes in steps Sb1412 and onward.

<Processing for starting confirmation display>
The process for starting the final display in step Sb513 (FIG. 108) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 120(a).

First, in step Sb1501, it is determined whether or not the second special chart flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. If the second special chart flag is not set, i.e., if the current special chart play round is the first special chart play round, it is determined in step Sb1502 whether or not the current special chart play round is a miss play round in which the ceiling has been reached. In other words, it is determined whether or not the current special chart play round corresponds to the play round immediately prior to the first special chart play round played after transitioning to the second time-saving play state.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sb1501 (if the second special chart flag is set) or a negative judgment is made in step Sb1502 (if the game is not a losing game in which the ceiling has been reached), the process proceeds to step Sb1503, where the normal fixed display time (e.g., 0.5 sec) is set as the fixed display time for this special chart game.

The normal confirmation display time does not necessarily have to be one type, and multiple types of different lengths may be provided, such as a first time (e.g., 0.5 sec) for the low-frequency support mode (normal game state) and a second time (e.g., 0.3 sec) for the high-frequency support mode (high-variant game state, first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state).

If a positive judgment is made in step Sb1502 (if the game is a losing round in which the ceiling has been reached), the process proceeds to step Sb1504, where a specific fixed display time (e.g., 0.8 sec) different from the normal fixed display time is set as the fixed display time for this special game round. This specific fixed display time is longer than the normal fixed display time. Note that if the normal fixed display time is set for the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the specific fixed display time is set to be longer than the normal fixed display time for the low-frequency support mode.

As already explained, if the normal game round is in the process of displaying a variable result when the confirmation display starts for the losing game round (the first special game round) where the ceiling is reached, the display will be forcibly terminated and the losing result will be displayed as a stopped result for the normal game round. The specific confirmation display time is longer than the confirmation display time (0.5 sec) for the normal game round at that time.

For this reason, if there is a next regular round on hold when the confirmation display of the regular round ends, that next regular round will start before the confirmation display of the special round ends when the ceiling is reached. In this case, since the internal game state has already transitioned to the second time-saving game state (high frequency support mode), that next regular round will be played in a manner corresponding to the second time-saving game state. In other words, when the number of misses reaches the ceiling number, the regular round will start playing in a manner corresponding to the second time-saving game state before the special round.

After execution of step Sb1503 or step Sb1504, in step Sb1505, a confirmation display flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. The confirmation display flag is used by the MPU 312 to know that the confirmation display of the special game round is being executed.

In step Sb1506, a process to start the final display is executed. In the process to start the final display, the special image display unit 43 is controlled so that the image being displayed in a variable manner is displayed in a stopped state according to the stop result set in step Sb709 (FIG. 110) or step Sb710.

In step Sb1507, the variation end command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143, and then the process for starting the final display is terminated. The variation end command set in step Sb1507 is transmitted to the performance control device 143 in step Sb401 in the normal processing (FIG. 107). The performance control device 143 transmits the received variation end command to the display control device 350 while maintaining its information form. By receiving the variation end command, the display control device 350 displays the final stop pattern combination for that game round as a final display (final stop display).

<Processing for ending confirmation display>
The process for ending the confirmed display in step Sb514 (FIG. 108) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 120(b).

First, in step Sb1601, it is determined whether the fixed display time set in step Sb1503 or step Sb1504 has elapsed. If the fixed display time has not elapsed, the fixed display end process is terminated in order to continue the stopped display of the stopped result in the special image display unit 43.

If the confirmed display time has elapsed, in step Sb1602, the confirmed display flag set in the various flag storage area 314e is cleared, and then the confirmed display end process is terminated. If the confirmed display flag is cleared in this manner, a negative judgment is made in step Sb502 of the special chart game round control process (FIG. 108) in the next processing round. Therefore, if there is a next special chart game round on hold (pending information where a game round has not yet been played), the variable display for that next special chart game round is started. On the other hand, if there is not a next special chart game round on hold (pending information that has not yet been processed), the stop result that was displayed as confirmed will continue to be displayed until a new start winning occurs and pending information is acquired.

<Regular game play control processing>
The regular game play control processing of step Sb405 (Figure 107) will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 121.

First, in step Sb1701, it is determined whether or not a reel opening/closing game using the normal power reel 63a is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a reel opening/closing flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. The reel opening/closing flag is used by the MPU 312 to know that a reel opening/closing game is in progress, and is set when a reel opening/closing game is being played.

If the reel is being opened and closed, the normal play control process ends. On the other hand, if the reel is not being opened and closed, step Sb1702 determines whether a normal play is being performed in the normal play display unit 44. In this case, a normal play is a concept that includes the changing display of the image in the normal play display unit 44 and the stationary display (confirmed display) of the image in the normal play display unit 44, and step Sb1702 determines whether either the changing display or the stationary display is being performed.

In addition, during special game times in the special game display section 43, the execution of the variable display is restricted if the opening and closing execution mode using the variable winning device 65 is being executed, but during normal game times, the variable display is permitted even during the opening and closing execution mode. Also, during normal game times, the execution of the variable display is restricted if the device opening and closing game using the normal electric device 63a is being executed, but during special game times, the variable display is permitted even during the device opening and closing game.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb1702 (a normal game round is not being played), the process proceeds to step Sb1703, where it is judged whether the normal game round reserve memory number FN is "0". If the normal game round reserve memory number FN is "0", the normal game round control process is terminated.

If the number of reserved regular maps FN is not "0", step Sb1704 executes a regular map data setting process to set the data stored in the reserved area Rc for electric utility for variable display. In the regular map data setting process, the number of reserved regular maps FN is decremented by 1, and the data stored in the first area of the reserved area Rc for electric utility is moved to the execution area for regular maps. After that, a process is executed to shift the data stored in each memory area of the reserved area Rc for electric utility, and a regular map shift command is set, which is information for making the performance control device 143 recognize that a shift has been made in the reserved area on the regular map side.

In step Sb1705, the regular map fluctuation start process is executed, and then the regular map game play control process is terminated. Here, the regular map fluctuation start process is explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 122.

First, in step Sb1801, it is determined whether the first support flag or the second support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. If neither support flag is set, i.e., if the current support mode is the low-frequency support mode, in step Sb1802, a support lottery (normal win/loss determination) is performed by referring to the support lottery table for the low-frequency support mode (FIG. 103(a)). On the other hand, if either support flag is set, i.e., if the current support mode is the high-frequency support mode, in step Sb1803, a support lottery is performed by referring to the support lottery table for the high-frequency support mode (FIG. 103(b)). As already explained, in the support lottery table for the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning support is set higher than in the support lottery table for the low-frequency support mode, making it easier to win support.

Incidentally, in the normal game round that is executed while the special game round is being confirmed when the ceiling is reached, the support lottery is performed by referring to the support lottery table for the high frequency support mode. Therefore, in this case, the support lottery is more likely to result in a support win, and in a situation where the probability of winning a support is set to 95/100 as in this embodiment, there is a very high probability of a support win.

After execution of step Sb1802 or step Sb1803, in step Sb1804, it is determined whether the result of the lottery in step Sb1802 or step Sb1803 is a support winning result (a normal winning result). If it is a support winning result, the process proceeds to step Sb1805, where the stop result for a normal winning is set by referring to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of ROM 313. If it is not a support winning result, i.e., if it is a normal losing result, the process proceeds to step Sb1806, where the stop result for a normal losing result is set by referring to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of ROM 313.

After execution of step Sb1805 or step Sb1806, a process for setting the normal map variation display time is executed in step Sb1807. In this setting process, the variation display time for the current normal map play round is set in the normal map display unit 44. At that time, if the support mode is the low frequency support mode, a relatively long variation display time is set, and if the support mode is the high frequency support mode, a relatively short variation display time is set.

Specifically, if the support mode is low frequency support mode and the result of the support lottery is a normal miss, the variable display time is set to, for example, 30 seconds, and if the support mode is low frequency support mode and the result is a support win, the variable display time is set to, for example, 0.5 seconds. Also, if the support mode is high frequency support mode and the result is a normal miss, the variable display time is set to, for example, 0.5 seconds, and if the support mode is high frequency support mode and the result is a support win, the variable display time is set to, for example, 0.5 seconds.

When the ceiling is reached, the normal game round that is executed during the confirmation display of the special game round starts in a state where the game has internally transitioned to the second time-saving game state, so the variable display time for the high frequency support mode is applied. In other words, the normal game round is executed with a short variable display time.

The above variable display times are merely examples, and other configurations are also possible, such as allowing the selection of multiple types of time, such as 0.5 sec, 1 sec, etc., as the variable display time when a support win occurs in a high-frequency support mode situation.

In step Sb1808, a normal map change start command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143. The normal map change start command includes information on the normal map change pattern (information indicating the normal map pass/fail result and the change display time). The set normal map change start command is transmitted to the performance control device 143 in step Sb401 in normal processing (Figure 107).

In step Sb1809, a process is executed to start the changing display of the image in the regular map display unit 44, and then the regular map change start process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the normal game play control process (FIG. 121), if a positive judgment is made in step Sb1702 (if a normal game play is being performed), the process proceeds to step Sb1706, where it is judged whether or not the variable display time set in step Sb1807 has elapsed. If the variable display time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step Sb1707, where the variable display process is executed. In the variable display process, the display of the normal game display unit 44 is controlled (light emission control of each display segment) so that each display segment in the normal game display unit 44 is turned on and off in a predetermined order. Thereafter, the normal game play control process is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sb1706 (if the variable display time has elapsed), a process for displaying the confirmed normal map is executed in step Sb1708, and then the process for controlling the normal map play is terminated. In the process for displaying the confirmed normal map, the normal map display unit 44 is controlled so that the image is displayed as a stopped image with the stop result set in step Sb1805 or step Sb1806. At that time, the fixed display time is set to a predetermined specified time (for example, 0.5 sec). In the process for displaying the confirmed normal map, a normal map variable end command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143. The normal map variable end command includes information on the fixed display time for the current normal map play.

<Electricity support processing>
The electric support processing of step Sb406 (FIG. 107) will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step Sb1901, it is determined whether or not a special feature opening/closing game is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a special feature opening/closing flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314.

If the reel is not being opened or closed, proceed to step Sb1902 and determine whether the normal game has ended. If the normal game has not ended, the electric support process ends.

If it is time for the end of the regular game round, proceed to step Sb1903 and determine whether the result of the support lottery for this regular game round is a support winning result. If it is not a support winning result, end the electric role support processing.

If the result is a support win, proceed to step Sb1904 and determine whether the first support flag or the second support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. If neither support flag is set, i.e., if the support mode is the low frequency support mode, in step Sb1905, set "1" to the opening count counter area RC2 provided in the various counter area 314d of RAM 314. The opening count counter area RC2 is used to count the number of times the normal power device 63a is opened in the device opening and closing game, and is decremented by one each time the normal power device 63a is switched from the closed state to the open state.

If the first support flag or the second support flag is set, i.e., if the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, in step Sb1906, the opening count counter area RC2 is set to "2". In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the number of times the normal power device 63a opens is set to 1, and in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the normal power device 63a opens is set to 2.

In step Sb1907, the reel opening/closing flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. In the following step Sb1908, an external signal setting process is executed, and then the electric support process is terminated. In the external signal setting process, the signal output state of the output terminal for the reel opening signal provided in the external output terminal 213 is set to the open signal output state.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sb1901 (when the reel opening/closing game is in progress), the reel opening/closing process is executed in step Sb1909. Here, the reel opening/closing process is explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 124.

First, in step Sb2101, it is determined whether the normal power mechanism 63a is open. Specifically, this determination is made based on the drive state of the drive unit 63b. If the normal power mechanism 63a is not open, it is determined in step Sb2102 whether the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is "0".

If the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is not "0", proceed to step Sb2103 and determine whether the value of the timer area T2 provided in the various counter area 344b of RAM 314 is "0". This process is to determine whether the waiting period between openings has elapsed when the normal power device 63a is opened multiple times in a device opening and closing game.

If the value of the timer area T2 is "0", proceed to step Sb2104 to determine whether the first support flag or the second support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. If neither support flag is set, i.e., the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, in step Sb2105, set the timer area T2 to "50" (equivalent to 0.1 sec). If either support flag is set, i.e., the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, in step Sb2106, set the timer area T2 to "1000" (equivalent to 2 sec). The value set in step Sb2105 or step Sb2106 corresponds to the upper limit opening time per opening in the opening and closing game of the reel.

After execution of step Sb2105 or step Sb2106, in step Sb2107, the winning counter area PC2 provided in the various counter areas 344b is set to "6". This value corresponds to the upper limit number of winnings (6) for the normal power device 63a (second operating port 63) in the device opening and closing game.

In step Sb2108, the drive unit 63b is driven to open the normal power reel 63a. In step Sb2109, a reel opening command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143. The set reel opening command is transmitted to the performance control device 143 in step Sb401 in normal processing (FIG. 107). This notifies the performance control device 143 that the normal power reel 63a has been switched from a closed state to an open state.

After step Sb2109 is executed, the reel opening/closing process is terminated. Also, if a positive judgment is made in step Sb2102 (if the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is "0") or if a negative judgment is made in step Sb2103 (if the value of the timer area T2 is not "0"), the normal power reel 63a is not opened, and the reel opening/closing process is terminated without executing the processes in and after step Sb2104.

If the result of step Sb2101 is positive (the normal power device 63a is open), the process proceeds to step Sb2110, where it is determined whether the value of the timer area T2 is "0". This process is to determine whether the upper limit open time of the normal power device 63a set in step Sb2105 or step Sb1206 has elapsed.

If the value of the timer area T2 is not "0", i.e., if the upper limit opening time of the normal power device 63a has not elapsed, step Sb2111 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the second operating port 63. If a win has occurred, step Sb2112 subtracts 1 from the value of the winning counter area PC2. Step Sb2113 determines whether or not the value of the winning counter area PC2 is "0", i.e., whether or not the number of winning balls entering the second operating port 63 has reached the upper limit number of winning balls.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb2111 (if no winning has occurred in the second operating port 63) or if a negative judgment is made in step Sb2113 (if the value of the winning counter area PC2 is not "0"), the device opening/closing process ends to keep the normal power device 63a open.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sb2110 (the value of the timer area T2 is "0" and the upper limit opening time of the normal power device 63a has elapsed) or if a positive judgment is made in step Sb2113 (the value of the winning counter area PC2 is "0" and the number of winning balls in the second operating port 63 has reached the upper limit number of winning balls), the drive unit 63b is set to a non-driven state in step Sb2114 to close the normal power device 63a.

In step Sb2115, a role-close command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143. The set role-close command is transmitted to the performance control device 143 in step Sb401 in normal processing (FIG. 107). This notifies the performance control device 143 that the normal power role 63a has been switched from an open state to a closed state.

In step Sb2116, the process of updating the opening count counter area RC2 is executed. In this update process, the value of the winning counter area PC2 is referenced, and if the value of the winning counter area PC2 is not "0" (the number of winning balls at the second operating port 63 has not reached the upper limit of winning balls), the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is decremented by 1. On the other hand, if the value of the winning counter area PC2 is "0" (the number of winning balls at the second operating port 63 has reached the upper limit of winning balls), the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is set to "0".

In step Sb2117, it is determined whether the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is "0". If the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is "0", the reel opening/closing process is terminated. If the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is not "0", that is, if there are remaining openings of the normal power reel 63a, in step Sb2118, the timer area T2 is set to "100" (equivalent to 0.2 sec), and then the reel opening/closing process is terminated. The value set in step Sb2118 corresponds to the waiting time for which the normal power reel 63a is closed and awaits the next opening.

Returning to the explanation of the electric role support process (FIG. 123), after executing the reel opening/closing process in step Sb1909, in step Sb1910, it is determined whether the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is "0". If the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is not "0", the electric role support process ends. If the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is "0", that is, if the reel opening/closing game has ended, in step Sb1911, the reel opening/closing flag set in the various flag storage area 314e is cleared, and then the electric role support process ends.

<Electrical configuration of the performance control device 143 and the display control device 350>
The electrical configuration of the performance control device 143 and the display control device 350 in this embodiment will be described below with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The performance control board 341 provided in the performance control device 143 is equipped with an MPU 342. The MPU 342 has a ROM 343 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 342, a RAM 344 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 343, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc.

The MPU 342 is provided with an input port and an output port. The main control device 162 is connected to the input side of the MPU 342. From the main control device 162, various commands are received, such as hold display control commands such as a shift command and a hold command, game number control commands such as a fluctuation start command, a type command, and a fluctuation end command, and opening/closing execution mode commands such as an opening command and an ending command.

As already explained, the output side of the MPU 342 is connected to the lamp units 26 to 28 and the speaker unit 29 provided in the front door frame 14, as well as to the display control device 350.

The input side of the MPU 342 is also connected to the performance operation unit 36 provided on the front door frame 14. The performance operation unit 36 is provided with a detection sensor that detects the operation of the performance operation unit 36, and detection information (detection signal) from the detection sensor is input. The MPU 342 determines whether the performance operation unit 36 has been operated based on the detection information, and determines the type of operation that has been performed.

The display control device 350 includes a display control board 351 on which an MPU 372, which is a composite chip of a program ROM 373 and a work RAM 374, a video display processor (VDP) 375, a character ROM 376, and a video RAM 377 are mounted.

The MPU 372 analyzes the commands received from the performance control device 143 or performs a predetermined calculation process based on the received commands to control the VDP 375 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 375).

The program ROM 373 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 372, and also stores and holds JPEG format image data for the background image.

The work RAM 374 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. that are used when the MPU 372 executes various programs. This work data, flags, etc. are stored in various areas of the work RAM 374.

VDP375 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device that serves as a liquid crystal display driver built into pattern display device 75. VDP375 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is made into an IC chip, and its actual form can be described as a microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. VDP375 mediates the reading and writing of data by adjusting the timing of MPU372, video RAM377, etc., and reads image data to be stored in video RAM377 from character ROM376 at a specified timing and displays it on pattern display device 75.

The character ROM 376 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as the designs displayed on the design display device 75. This character ROM 376 holds bitmap format image data of various display designs, a color palette table that is referenced when determining the color to be displayed at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

It is also possible to provide multiple character ROMs 376 and have each character ROM 376 store image data, etc. It is also possible to configure the character ROM 376 to store JPEG format image data for background images stored in the program ROM 373.

Video RAM 377 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 75, and the display content of the pattern display device 75 is changed by rewriting the contents of video RAM 377.

<Various processes executed by the performance control device 143>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 342 of the performance control device 143 will be described.

<Performance setting process>
The effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 126. The effect setting process is initiated by the MPU 342 at a predetermined cycle (for example, every 2 msec).

First, in step Sb2301, it is determined whether an ending command (step Sb1018 in FIG. 115) has been received from the main control device 162. The ending command is sent when an ending is to be started in the opening/closing execution mode, which is performed when the result of the win/loss determination in the special game round is a jackpot.

The various commands received from the main control device 162 are stored in a command storage area 344a provided in the RAM 344 of the performance control device 143. The command storage area 344a is configured as a ring buffer that can store multiple commands individually and can read out commands that have been stored earlier. Therefore, even if multiple commands are received at the same time, the processing corresponding to each command can be executed satisfactorily.

When making the judgment in step Sb2301, it is determined whether or not an ending command is stored in the area of the command storage area 344a that is the current read target. If an ending command is stored (if an ending command is received), in step Sb2302, a first transition effect setting process is executed to set a transition effect corresponding to a transition to a high probability gaming state or a first time-saving gaming state. The first transition effect setting process will be described in detail later.

After execution of step Sb2302 or if a negative judgment is made in step Sb2301 (if an ending command has not been received), step Sb2303 judges whether or not a second time-shortened game state start command (step Sb1409 in FIG. 119) has been received from the main control device 162. The second time-shortened game state start command is sent when transitioning to the second time-shortened game state is triggered by the number of losing play times in the special chart play times reaching the ceiling number of times.

If a second time-saving play state start command has been received, in step Sb2304, a second transition effect setting process is executed to set a transition effect corresponding to the transition to the second time-saving play state. The second transition effect setting process will be described in detail later.

After execution of step Sb2304 or if a negative judgment is made in step Sb2303 (if the second time-shortened gaming state start command has not been received), step Sb2305 judges whether any gaming state end command has been received. Specifically, it judges whether any of the high probability gaming state end command (step Sb1205 in FIG. 117), the first time-shortened gaming state end command, or the second time-shortened gaming state end command (step Sb1305 in FIG. 118) has been received.

If any of these commands have been received, in step Sb2306, the system executes an end effect setting process to set an end effect corresponding to the end of the high probability game state, the first time-saving game state, or the second time-saving game state. The end effect setting process will be described in detail later.

After execution of step Sb2306 or if a negative judgment is made in step Sb2305 (if no game state end command has been received), in step Sb2307, a special pattern change display process is executed to display the changes in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75. The details of the special pattern change display process will be described later.

In step Sb2308, other processing is performed, and then the performance setting processing is terminated. In other processing, processing is performed to display a demo screen when a start winning does not occur for a specified period of time, and to switch to a power saving mode that stops the image display on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 to reduce power consumption, etc.

<First transition performance setting process>
The first transition performance setting process in step Sb2302 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 127. This process is executed when an ending command is received from the main control device 162, in other words, it is executed in accordance with the ending start timing of the opening/closing execution mode.

First, in step Sb2401, it is determined whether or not a situation exists in which a transition to a high probability game state or a first time-saving game state will occur. In other words, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode for which the ending command was sent corresponds to a jackpot result that will cause a transition to a high probability game state or a first time-saving game state. This determination is made based on the type command sent from the main control device 162.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when there is only a jackpot type that always transitions to either the high probability game state or the first time-saving game state after the opening/closing execution mode ends, it is possible to omit the processing of step Sb2401.

If a transition to a high probability game state or a first time-saving game state occurs, a start effect corresponding to each game state is set in step Sb2402. For example, if a transition to a high probability game state occurs, a start effect for a high probability game state is set as the start effect. In the start effect for a high probability game state, as shown in FIG. 128(a), a title image 471 corresponding to a high probability game state, such as "Lucky Time," and a remaining number image 472 are displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75. The remaining number image 472 notifies the player of the remaining number of special game times that the player can stay in the high probability game state.

In the start presentation for the time-saving play state where the number of remaining times in the first time-saving play state is 100, as shown in FIG. 128(b), a title image 473 corresponding to a time-saving play state with 100 remaining times, such as "Chance Time," and a remaining number of times image 472 are displayed. In this case, the remaining number of times image 472 notifies the player of the remaining number of special play times that can be played in the first time-saving play state.

In the start presentation for the first time-saving game state in which the number of remaining plays is 1000, as shown in FIG. 128(c), a title image 474 corresponding to a higher time-saving game state such as "Super Chance Time" and a remaining play count image 472 are displayed.

In addition, in the start performance for each time-saving play state, a miss count image 475 is displayed to notify the number of times that the special winning/losing judgment has resulted in a losing result. This miss count image 475 continues to be displayed in the first time-saving play state, and the displayed number is updated at the end of each losing play. Therefore, by looking at this image 475, the player can know the progress in the process until the ceiling is reached (FIG. 128(d)). Specifically, the player can know the current number of losing plays, and if the player knows the ceiling number, the player can know the number of plays remaining until the ceiling number.

Figure 128 (d) shows the time-saving performance that is executed while in the first time-saving gaming state. The time-saving performance is performed after the start performance of Figures 128 (b) and (c) ends, until the first time-saving gaming state ends. This time-saving performance is configured to be distinguishable from the normal performance, for example by having a different background image from the normal performance during the normal gaming state.

Incidentally, the miss count image 475 is not erased even when the first time-saving game state ends, and continues to be displayed even after transition to the normal game state. Note that the miss count image 475 may be temporarily erased when the first time-saving game state ends, and may be displayed again when the normal game state begins or after transition to the normal game state.

In step Sb2402, the above-mentioned various start effects are set to be displayed on the display screen G during the ending period of the opening and closing execution mode. In this case, the start effects may be configured to be displayed during the entire ending period, or may be configured to be displayed during only a part of the ending period.

In step Sb2403, a predetermined value is set in the remaining number counter area provided in the various counter areas 344b of RAM344. The remaining number counter area is for MPU342 to grasp the remaining number of times that the special game can be played while in the high probability game state or the first time-saving game state, and is decremented by one each time a special game is played in each of these game states. In this step, if the game state to be transitioned to is the high probability game state, values corresponding to the first upper limit number of times (e.g., 100 times) and the second upper limit number of times (e.g., 1100 times) are set as the above-mentioned predetermined value, respectively, and if the game state to be transitioned to is the first time-saving game state, a value corresponding to the third upper limit number of times (e.g., 1000 times) or the fourth upper limit number of times (e.g., 100 times) is set.

In this embodiment, the performance control device 143 counts the remaining number of times for each game state separately from the main control device 162, but the performance control device 143 may be configured to grasp the remaining number of times for each game state based on the update results in the main control device 162. For example, the main control device 162 may notify the performance control device 143 of the update results of the probability change counter area KC (step Sb1202 in FIG. 117) and the update results of the support counter area SC (step Sb1302 in FIG. 118) by sending a specified command, and the performance control device 143 may analyze the command and grasp each of the above update results. In this case, the specified command may be made by including information on each of the above update results in an existing command such as the fluctuation end command (step Sb1506 in FIG. 120(a)), or the specified command may be composed of a dedicated command for notifying each of the above update results.

In step Sb2404, the display of the remaining number of times image 472 is set to start. At this time, the display of the remaining number of times image 472 may be set to start during each start performance (performance performed using the ending period) set in step Sb2402, or the display of the remaining number of times image 472 may be set to start after the start performance ends and a transition to a high probability game state or the like.

In step Sb2405, a remaining number of times display flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344. The remaining number of times display flag is used by the MPU 342 to know that the remaining number of times image 472 is being displayed.

In step Sb2406, it is determined whether the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is a high probability game state. If the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is not a high probability game state, that is, if it is the first time-saving game state, proceed to step Sb2407 and set to start displaying the miss count image 475. In this case, it may be set so that the display of the miss count image 475 starts at each start performance set in step Sb2402, or it may be set so that the display of the miss count image 475 starts after the start performance ends and the game transitions to the first time-saving game state. Note that the initial value of the miss count image 475 when the display is started in step Sb2406 is 0 times.

Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sb2401 (if the game state after the opening and closing execution mode is the normal game state), the process proceeds to step Sb2407, and the display setting of the miss count image 475 is performed.

After step Sb2407 is executed, in step Sb2408, the miss count display flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d. The miss count display flag is used by the MPU 342 to know that the miss count image 475 is being displayed.

After step Sb2408 is executed, the first transition effect setting process is terminated. Also, if a positive judgment is made in step Sb2406 (if the game state after the open/close execution mode is a high probability game state), the miss count image 475 is not displayed, and the first transition effect setting process is terminated without executing the processes of steps Sb2407 and Sb2408.

<Second transition performance setting process>
The second transition effect setting process of step Sb2304 (FIG. 126) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 129. This process is executed when a second time-shortened gaming state start command is received from the main control device 162, in other words, when the second time-shortened gaming state is started.

First, in step Sb2501, the value of the miss counter area provided in the various counter areas 344b of the RAM 344 is cleared. The miss counter area counts the number of times the special game has been played resulting in a miss, and is referenced when the miss count image 475 is displayed.

In step Sb2502, a process is executed to erase the miss count image 475 displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75, and in step Sb2503, the miss count display flag set in the various flags storage area 344d of the RAM 344 is cleared.

In step Sb2504, it is determined whether the first time-shortened game state will end with the current special game round. In other words, it is determined whether the special game round in which the second time-shortened game state start command was received is the final special game round in the first time-shortened game state. In this step, the above determination is made by determining whether the first time-shortened game state end command has been received in the same game round.

As already explained, in this embodiment, the upper limit number of times (third upper limit number (e.g., 1000 times)) of the first time-saving game state to which the game is transferred when a 4R normal jackpot result A is obtained and the ceiling number of times (e.g., 1000 times) that triggers the transition to the second time-saving game state are set to the same number. In this configuration, when the number of times played in the first time-saving game state reaches the upper limit number without winning a jackpot, the number of times of misses also reaches the ceiling number at the same time, and a first time-saving game state end command corresponding to the end of the first time-saving game state and a second time-saving game state start command corresponding to the number of misses reaching the ceiling number are transmitted in the same special game round. Note that a similar event occurs when a 4R special jackpot result A is obtained, the game is transitioned to a high probability game state, and after the high probability game state ends, the game is transitioned to the first time-saving game state (first time-saving game state with 1000 times remaining). In step Sb2504, it is determined whether or not one of these cases applies.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb2504 (if the first time-saving game state does not end in this special game round), i.e., if there is a transition from the normal game state to the second time-saving game state, the process proceeds to step Sb2505, where a start effect corresponding to the second time-saving game state is set. In the start effect for the second time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 130(a), a title image 474 corresponding to a higher time-saving game state such as "Super Chance Time" and a remaining number of plays image 472 are displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75.

The start effect for the second time-saving game state may be executed in the special game round in which the number of misses reaches the ceiling number, or may be executed after transitioning to the second time-saving game state. In the former case, the start effect may be executed after each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped and displayed in a combination resulting from a miss in the special game round in which the ceiling number of misses is reached. In this case, the start effect may be executed using part or all of the fixed display time, or may be executed across the variable display time (part of the variable display time) and the fixed display time (part or all of the fixed display time).

When executing the above start effect using part of the fixed display time, it is recommended to execute the start effect in the latter half of the fixed display time, except when the start effect is executed across the variable display time and the fixed display time. Specifically, it is recommended to execute the start effect after starting the fixed display of each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3. In this case, it is possible to notify the player of the result of the special pattern lottery using each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 and then notify the player of the transition to the second time-saving play state, which is a preferable aspect for the player to understand both the result of the special pattern lottery and the transition to the second time-saving play state.

In step Sb2506, a value corresponding to the fifth upper limit is set in the remaining number counter area provided in the various counter area 344b of the RAM 344. The fifth upper limit is the number of times that the player can play the special game in the second time-saving game state, and is, for example, 900 times.

In step Sb2507, the display of the remaining number of times image 472 is set to start. At this time, as shown in FIG. 130(a), the display of the remaining number of times image 472 may be set to start during the start effect for the second time-saving game state, or the display of the remaining number of times image 472 may be set to start after the start effect ends and the game transitions to the second time-saving game state.

In step Sb2508, the remaining number display flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344, and then the second transition performance setting process is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sb2504 (if the first time-saving game state ends with the current special game round), i.e., if the first time-saving game state transitions to the second time-saving game state, the process proceeds to step Sb2509, and the setting is made to execute an additional performance for the remaining number of times. Here, the additional performance will be explained with reference to Figures 130 (b) and (c).

When performing the above-mentioned additional performance, as shown in FIG. 130(b), the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a combination that results in a miss on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 in the final play round in the first time-saving play state. The stop display in this case does not take a special stop form, but rather displays each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 in order as in the other special pattern play rounds in the first time-saving play state to notify of a miss.

After each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 130(c), an added image 476 consisting of text such as "+900 times!!" is displayed in the special symbol play round in which the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed. This notifies the player that the remaining number of times in the time-saving play state has been added. This added image may be displayed using part or all of the fixed display time, or may be displayed across the variable display time (part of the variable display time) and the fixed display time (part or all of the fixed display time). In this case, the images of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 that are stopped and displayed may be erased before the added image 476 is displayed, or the images of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may not be erased, and the added image 476 may be displayed in front of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

After step Sb2509 is executed, in step Sb2510, a value corresponding to the fifth upper limit is added to the value in the remaining number counter area. As a result, in play after transitioning to the second time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 130(d), a remaining number image 472 reflecting the fifth upper limit is displayed. After step Sb2510 is executed, the second transition performance setting process is terminated.

<Ending performance setting process>
The end effect setting process of step Sb2306 (FIG. 126) will be described with reference to FIG. 131. This process is executed when an end command is received for each of the high probability game state, the first time-saving game state, and the second time-saving game state, in other words, when each of these game states ends.

In step Sb2601, it is determined whether the end of the current game state is the end of the first time-saving game state. Specifically, it is determined whether a first time-saving game state end command has been received from the main control device 162.

If the end of the current game state is the end of the first time-saving game state, proceed to step Sb2602 and determine whether the number of misses has reached the ceiling number. In other words, determine whether the conditions for transitioning to the second time-saving game state are met.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb2602 (if the number of misses has not reached the ceiling number and the game does not transition to the second time-saving game state) or if a negative judgment is made in step Sb2601 (if the high probability game state or the second time-saving game state has ended), an end effect corresponding to the game state to be ended is set in step Sb2603. For example, if the high probability game state has ended, an end effect for the high probability game state is set to be executed.

In step Sb2604, the value of the remaining number counter provided in the various counter area 344b of the RAM 344 is cleared (initialized), and in step Sb2605, the remaining number image 472 displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 is erased.

In step Sb2606, the remaining number display flag set in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344 is cleared, and then the end effect setting process is terminated. Also, if a positive judgment is made in step Sb2602 (the number of misses has reached the ceiling number of times and the game moves to the second time-saving game state), the end effect setting process is terminated without executing the processes from step Sb2603 onwards in order to continue updating and displaying the remaining number of times.

<Special chart change display processing>
The special chart change display processing of step Sb2307 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 132.

First, in step Sb2701, it is determined whether a game round is being played. Specifically, it is determined whether a game round of either the first special design or the second special design is being played. If neither game round is being played, the process proceeds to step Sb2702, where it is determined whether a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control device 162.

The fluctuation start command includes information on the fluctuation pattern selected by the process for setting the fluctuation display time (FIG. 111) in the main control unit 162. By referring to this fluctuation pattern information, it is possible to know at which fluctuation display time the special chart game will be played on the special chart display unit 43, which is display controlled by the main control unit 162. Also, as already explained, since a fluctuation pattern for a jackpot and a fluctuation pattern for a loss are set separately, it is also possible to determine the result of the win/loss judgment from the fluctuation pattern.

If the change start command has not been received, the process for displaying the special chart change ends. On the other hand, if the change start command has been received, the process proceeds to step Sb2703, where the change start process is executed to start the performance for the game round.

In the process for starting the fluctuation, the fluctuation start command from the main control device 162 is analyzed to identify the fluctuation pattern for the current special game. Furthermore, the fluctuation display time for the current special game is grasped based on the identified fluctuation pattern. In the various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343, a presentation pattern table in which the fluctuation display time is determined in association with each fluctuation pattern is stored. The fluctuation display time determined in the presentation pattern table corresponds to the fluctuation display time corresponding to each fluctuation pattern (Fig. 112, Fig. 113) in the main control device 162, and a common fluctuation display time is assigned to one fluctuation pattern in the presentation control device 143 and the main control device 162. For example, if the fluctuation pattern is fluctuation pattern 1A, the corresponding fluctuation display time is 15 sec in both the presentation control device 143 and the main control device 162. In the process for starting the fluctuation, the fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern analyzed from the fluctuation start command is identified by referring to the presentation pattern table, and this is set as the fluctuation display time for the current special game.

The presentation pattern table also associates each variation pattern with a presentation pattern for the game round presentation. The presentation patterns are normal reach hit, SP reach hit, SPSP reach hit, complete miss, normal reach miss, SP reach miss, and SPSP reach miss, as described in the explanation of the variation display time table. The correspondence between the variation patterns and the presentation patterns has already been described with reference to FIG. 112, so an explanation will be omitted. In the variation start process, the presentation pattern corresponding to the current variation pattern is identified by referring to the presentation pattern table, and this is set as the presentation pattern for the current special chart game round.

In addition, in the process for starting the variation, if the result of the win/loss judgment for the current special game round is a jackpot, the type of jackpot is identified based on the type command from the main control device 162. If the jackpot type is a guaranteed jackpot, the stop result for the guaranteed jackpot is set as the stop result of the pattern string Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75. Conversely, if the jackpot type is a regular jackpot, the stop result for the regular jackpot is set as the stop result of the pattern string Z1 to Z3. In these cases, the active lines L1 to L5 on which the stop result for the jackpot is displayed are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

In addition, if the result of the win/loss judgment for this special game round is a miss, the stopping symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are randomly determined. However, if the presentation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern is one that produces a reach presentation, the stopping symbols are determined so that a reach is formed on the winning lines L1 to L5 determined by lottery. In other words, the stopping result in which a combination of miss reach symbols is formed on at least one winning line L1 to L5 is set as the stopping result for this time.

In the process for starting the fluctuation, after executing each of the above processes, a command including information on the current stopped symbol and information on the presentation pattern is set as an output target to the display control device 350. The display control device 350 controls the symbol display device 75 according to the received command so that the symbols in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 stop with the stop result determined by the presentation control device 143, or a presentation for a game round is performed with the presentation pattern determined by the presentation control device 143.

After step Sb2703 is executed, the process for updating the remaining number of times display is executed in step Sb2704, and then the process for displaying the special chart change is terminated. Here, the process for updating the remaining number of times display is explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 133(a).

First, in step Sb2801, it is determined whether or not the remaining number display flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344, i.e., whether or not the remaining number image 472 is being displayed. Note that since the remaining number display flag is set when the game is in a high probability game state, a first time-saving game state, or a second time-saving game state, the determination process of step Sb2801 can be said to determine whether or not the current game state is in any of these game states.

If the remaining number of times display flag is not set, the process for updating the remaining number of times display is terminated. On the other hand, if the remaining number of times display flag is set, the process proceeds to step Sb2802, where the value of the remaining number of times counter area is updated. Specifically, the value of the remaining number of times counter area is decremented by one. In the following step Sb2803, the display content of the remaining number of times image 472 is updated by referring to the update result of step Sb2802. As a result, the remaining number of times notified by the remaining number of times image 472 is decremented by one. After step Sb2803 is executed, the process for updating the remaining number of times display is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the special chart change display process (FIG. 132), if a positive judgment is made in step Sb2701 (if a special chart game round is being played), the process proceeds to step Sb2705, where it is judged whether or not a change end command has been received from the main control device 162. If a change end command has not been received, this means that the change display time has not yet elapsed in this special chart game round. In this case, in step Sb2706, a change in progress process is executed. In the change in progress process, processing is executed to continue the change display of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 that was started by the change start process, to temporarily stop and display the patterns of each pattern row Z1 to Z3 in order, and to execute each reach performance.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sb2705 (if a variation end command has been received), the process proceeds to step Sb2707, where variation end processing is executed. In the variation end processing, the variation display of each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 and the currently executed performance are ended. In addition, in step Sb2707, control is performed so that the patterns of each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are fixed and stopped at the fixed display time set by the main control unit 162.

In step Sb2708, the process for updating the display of the number of misses is executed, and then the process for displaying the special pattern variation is terminated. Here, the process for updating the display of the number of misses is explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 133(b).

First, in step Sb2901, it is determined whether or not the miss count display flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344, i.e., whether or not the miss count image 475 is being displayed. Note that since the miss count display flag is set in the normal game state or the first time-saving game state, the determination process in step Sb2901 can be said to determine whether or not the current game state is one of these game states.

If the miss count display flag is set, in step Sb2902, it is determined whether or not the result of this special drawing is a miss. If it is a miss, the process proceeds to step Sb2903, where the value of the miss count counter area is updated. Specifically, the value of the miss count counter area is incremented by 1. In the following step Sb2904, the display content of the miss count image 475 is updated by referring to the update result of step Sb2903. As a result, the number of misses notified by the miss count image 475 is incremented by 1.

The update process of the miss counter in step Sb2903 is executed at the start of the final display, but in step Sb2904, the miss count image 475 is set to be updated after the final display time has elapsed. In this case, the update timing of the miss count image 475 may be the end of the final display, or it may be after the start of the next special game.

After step Sb2904 is executed, the process for updating the display of the number of misses is terminated. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sb2901 (if the flag for displaying the number of misses is not set) or if a negative judgment is made in step Sb2902 (if the result of the current special game is a jackpot), the process for updating the display of the number of misses is terminated without executing the processes in and after step Sb2903.

<About the transition to the second time-saving game state>
The flow of transition to the second time-saving game state will be described. Here, the case where the transition to the first time-saving game state of the third upper limit number (for example, 1000 times) is triggered by the 4R normal big win result A, and then the transition to the second time-saving game state is triggered by the number of misses reaching the ceiling number (for example, 1000 times) will be described with reference to FIG. 134.

When the open/close execution mode corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot result A ends at timing t1, the first support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. This causes a transition to the first time-saving gaming state, which is a low probability mode and high frequency support mode state (Fig. 134 (a) and (b)).

Also, at the timing t1, the main control device 162 sets a third upper limit number (e.g., 1000 times) in the support counter area SC provided in the various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314 (Fig. 134 (c)). The value of the support counter area SC is decremented by 1 each time a special game round in which the win/loss judgment result is a miss (miss game round) is played in the first time-saving game state, and the first time-saving game state ends when the value becomes "0" (Figs. 108, 118). In other words, the value of the support counter area SC corresponds to the remaining number of special game rounds in which the first time-saving game state can be played.

In the performance control device 143, the remaining number is counted by a remaining number counter area provided in the various counter areas 344b of the RAM 344 (Fig. 133(a)). The pattern display device 75 displays a remaining number image 472 (Fig. 128(d)) based on the value of the remaining number counter area, thereby notifying the remaining number of times in the first time-saving game state.

If a jackpot result occurs during the first time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state ends with a transition to the open/close execution mode, and the values in the support counter area SC and the remaining number counter area are cleared.

When the confirmation display of the special game play that resulted in a 4R normal jackpot result A starts, the main control device 162 sets a value corresponding to the ceiling number of times (for example, 1000 times) in the miss counter area HC of the various counter areas 314d described above (Fig. 134(d)). The value of the miss counter area HC is decremented by 1 each time a miss game play is performed after the end of the open/close execution mode (Figs. 108 and 119). This counts the number of times remaining until the ceiling number of times.

In the performance control device 143, the number of misses is counted by the miss counter area provided in the various counter areas 344b (Fig. 133(b)). The value of the miss counter area of the performance control device 143 is incremented by one each time a miss is played. In other words, the value of the miss counter area of the performance control device 143 corresponds to the number of misses up to that point after a jackpot result is reached (after the open/close execution mode is performed). The pattern display device 75 displays a miss image 475 based on the value of the miss counter area (Fig. 128(d)), thereby reporting the cumulative number of misses.

The main control device 162 updates the miss counter area HC when the confirmation display starts for a special game round that has resulted in a miss in the win/loss judgment, but the number of misses displayed by the miss count image 475 is updated after waiting for the confirmation display time for that special game round to elapse. However, this configuration is not essential, and the miss count image 475 may be updated before the confirmation display time has elapsed. In other words, the number of misses may be updated at the start of the confirmation display or during the confirmation display.

Incidentally, in a pachinko machine that has a function for executing a re-draw effect (an effect in which the symbol string Z1 to Z3 is temporarily stopped and displayed, the symbol string Z1 to Z3 is changed again, and then the symbol string Z1 to Z3 is displayed stopped with a different symbol combination than the previous stopped display), it is assumed that the player will be paying attention to the symbol display device 75 even after the changing display has ended and the final display has started, hoping for the symbol string Z1 to Z3 to change again. In order to maintain the sense of expectation in such a configuration, it is preferable to update the miss count image 475 after the final display time has elapsed, rather than updating it at any time during the final display.

When the number of misses in the first time-saving game state reaches the third upper limit at timing t2 and the value of the support counter area SC becomes "0", the first support flag is cleared and the first time-saving game state ends (Fig. 134 (b) and (c)). In this embodiment, the third upper limit and the ceiling number are set to the same value, so when the support counter area SC becomes "0", the value of the miss counter area HC also becomes "0". In response to this, the second support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e, and the game transitions to the second time-saving game state, which is a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode (Fig. 134 (e)).

At this time, the value of the support counter area SC is reset to the fifth upper limit number of times (e.g., 900 times) corresponding to the duration of the second time-saving game state. Also, in the symbol display device 75, an additional effect (Fig. 130 (b) to (d)) is executed so that the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state is added.

In this embodiment, the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state is updated before a transition determination to the second time-saving game state is made (Figs. 108, 118, and 119). The advantages of such a configuration will be explained with reference to Fig. 135.

To facilitate understanding, a comparative example is a configuration in which the remaining number of times the time-saving game state is played is updated after a transition determination to the second time-saving game state, and the differences from the configuration of this embodiment are explained. Also, to make it easier to compare the two, it is assumed that a restriction is imposed in both the comparative example and the configuration of this embodiment that restricts the overlapping implementation of the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state.

As described above, in the case where the cumulative number of unsuccessful plays reaches the ceiling number in the final play of the first time-shortened play state triggered by a jackpot, in the configuration of the comparative example, a transition determination to the second time-shortened play state is first made, and it is internally recognized that a transition to the second time-shortened play state should occur. However, since the player is still in the first time-shortened play state at that point, transition to the second time-shortened play state is restricted, and as a result, reaching the ceiling is invalidated.

To avoid invalidating the reaching of the ceiling in this way, it is conceivable to set the ceiling number of times to be greater than the third upper limit number of times so that the cumulative number of misses in the special game play after the final game play of the first time-saving game state becomes the ceiling number of times. If it is desired to immediately transition to the second time-saving game state after the end of the first time-saving game state, the ceiling number of times should be set to 1001 times or the third upper limit number should be set to 999 times so that the cumulative number of misses reaches the ceiling number in the special game play next to the final game play.

However, in this case, a period of time in the normal game state will be interposed between the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state. For example, if the update of the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state and the transition judgment to the second time-saving game state are performed at the start timing of the confirmation display in the special game round, the first time-saving game state will end at the start timing of the confirmation display in the previous special game round, and the transition to the second time-saving game state will occur at the start timing of the confirmation display in the subsequent special game round, that is, during the period when the variable display is performed in the subsequent special game round.

In that case, if the variable display in the normal game round starts in that normal game state, the variable display time in that normal game round is set to a long time for the normal game state, and the probability of the hit/miss judgment is also applied to the low winning probability for the normal game state. In this case, if the hit/miss judgment of that normal game round is a miss, the normal power role 63a will not be in the open state until the normal game round with the long variable display time ends, the next normal game round has a support winning result (normal winning result), and that normal game round ends. Therefore, even if the timing for the confirmation display of the later special game round starts and the game moves to the second time-saving game state, it will take a long time for the normal power role 63a to be in the open state, and there is a concern that there will be a delay before the player can actually receive the benefits of the high-frequency support mode.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state is updated first, so that the reaching of the third upper limit number of times is recognized in the final play round of the first time-saving game state, and the first time-saving game state ends, and then the transition to the second time-saving game state based on the reaching of the ceiling number of times is recognized. Therefore, switching from the first time-saving game state to the second time-saving game state is performed within the same special game round, and the reaching of the ceiling is not invalidated, and there is no intervening period of staying in the normal game state. In other words, when the cumulative number of misses reaches the ceiling number in the final play round of the first time-saving game state triggered by a win, it becomes possible to smoothly transition from the first time-saving game state to the second time-saving game state.

Next, the case of transitioning from the normal game state to the second time-saving game state will be described with reference to FIG. 136. Here, the display of the variation of the special game number when the number of misses reaches the ceiling number is performed from timing t1 to timing t3 in FIG. 136, and the display of the variation of the normal game number is started at timing t3, which is an intermediate timing.

When a special game round (special game round of the first special game round) begins in which the number of misses reaches the ceiling number during normal gameplay, the variable display is performed from timing t1 to timing t3. When the variable display time has elapsed at timing t3, the final display of the special game round begins. In this case, the final display time is set to a specific final display time (e.g., 0.8 sec) that is longer than the normal final display time (Fig. 120(a)).

At timing t3, the second support flag is set based on the reaching of the ceiling number of times, and a transition to the second time-saving game state is made (FIG. 136 (a) and (b)). At this time, the value of the support counter area SC is set to a fifth upper limit number of times (e.g., 900 times) corresponding to the duration of the second time-saving game state.

The symbol display device 75 executes a start effect (Fig. 130(a)) corresponding to the transition to the second time-saving play state. This start effect is executed, for example, in the special symbol play round in which the ceiling number of times has been reached. At that time, the start effect may be executed during part or all of the fixed display time, or the start effect may be executed across the variable display time (part of the variable display time) and the fixed display time (part or all of the fixed display time).

On the other hand, when a normal game round starts at timing t2, which is midway through the variable display during the special game round, the game state at this point is normal game state, so the variable display time during that normal game round is set to the variable display time for normal game state (e.g. 30 sec).

At timing t3, the confirmation display for the special game round where the ceiling has been reached starts, and when the transition to the second time-saving game state is made, the variable display for the normal game round is forcibly terminated (Fig. 136 (c)). As a result, the variable display ends earlier than the variable display time set at timing t2 has elapsed. At the above time, if the support judgment result for that normal game round was a support win result (normal winning result), the judgment result is rewritten to a loss result. Therefore, after the above-mentioned forced termination, the confirmation display is made with the stop result corresponding to the loss result.

If the support judgment result is a miss, the result is maintained and the confirmation display is performed with the stop result set at the start of the normal game round. Also, if the normal game round is displaying confirmation at timing t3, or if the normal power role 63a is playing an opening and closing role, the forced termination is not performed and the state continues.

After that, when the fixed display time (e.g. 0.5 sec) has elapsed at timing t4, the result has been rewritten to a miss as described above, so the opening and closing of the device by the normal power device 63a is not performed, and the next normal game round starts immediately. Since the game state at this point is the second time-saving game state, the variable display for that game round is performed in the short variable display time for the second time-saving game state (e.g. 0.5 sec). Also, the support judgment in this case is performed under the high probability of winning for the second time-saving game state. Here, it is assumed that the result of the support judgment was a support win result.

Here, the final display time (e.g., 0.5 sec) of the normal game round in which the variable display is forcibly terminated based on reaching the ceiling is shorter than the final display time (e.g., 0.8 sec) of the special game round in which the ceiling has been reached. Therefore, the normal game round will be played in the second time-saving game state earlier than the special game round (Fig. 136 (c)).

When the variable display time for the normal game round has elapsed at timing t6, the fixed display is then displayed for the set fixed display time (e.g., 0.5 sec). The total time (e.g., 1 sec) of the variable display time for the normal game round (e.g., 0.5 sec) and the fixed display time (e.g., 0.5 sec) is longer than the fixed display time for the special game round that has reached the ceiling (e.g., 0.8 sec). For this reason, the fixed display for the special game round ends in the middle of the fixed display for the normal game round (timing t5).

At that time, if there is pending information for the first special symbol, the next special symbol play round (the first special symbol play round) will start. In this case, the special symbol play round will be a play round that is played under the second time-saving play state. Incidentally, since the opening and closing play of the normal electric symbol 63a has not yet been performed at this point, no winning occurs in the second operating port 63, and the second special symbol play round will not be played.

When the confirmation display time for the normal game round has elapsed at timing t7, the reel opening and closing game is executed. This makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second operating port 63.

The above configuration allows the timing of the opening and closing of the reels to be accelerated after the transition to the second time-saving play state compared to when the normal play round is not forcibly ended or the result is not rewritten to a losing result. This allows the start of the period during which a win is possible in the second operating port 63 to be accelerated, and in turn allows the reserved information for the second special play round to be obtained earlier.

For example, if the timing of obtaining the reserved information for the second special chart is delayed, it becomes easier for the first special chart to be played in the second time-saving play state. If the second special chart results in a jackpot, the type determination is more favorable than for the first special chart (Fig. 102 (a) and (b)), so the more the first special chart is played, the more disadvantageous it becomes for the player. In particular, in the case of a configuration in which the variable display time for a play round of the first special chart is shortened in the second time-saving play state, there is a concern that the number of times the first special chart is played after switching to the second time-saving play state will be more likely to increase.

In this regard, according to the present embodiment, the start of the period during which the reserved information for the second special symbol can be generated can be accelerated, so that the number of times the first special symbol is played after the transition to the second time-saving play state can be prevented from increasing. This makes it possible for the player to play in the second time-saving play state in a manner that is preferable to the player.

In addition, as in this embodiment, in a configuration in which the normal game state is played in a left-hand play mode and no winning occurs in the through gate 64 under left-hand play, an event in which the normal game round is being played during the transition from the normal game state to the second time-saving game state does not basically occur. However, if a player who realizes that the ceiling has been reached hastily switches to a right-hand play mode, the transition to the second time-saving game state may occur while the normal game round is being played. In particular, in a configuration in which the number of misses up to that point is notified by the miss count image 475, it is expected that the player will be conscious of the transition to the second time-saving game state from a relatively early stage, and such an operation error will be more likely to occur. In such a case, the longer the variable display time for the normal game state during the normal game round is, the later the timing at which the second special game round can be played will be, and this configuration functions effectively.

In addition, even if the launch strength of the game ball is too strong and the game ball flows to the right route and unintentionally passes through the through gate 64, or if the configuration is such that one or several special game turns are played in the normal game state between the end of the first time-saving game state and the transition to the second time-saving game state, the transition to the second time-saving game state can be made while the normal game turn is being played. This configuration is also effective in such cases.

In addition, in a configuration where a game ball can enter through gate 64 in left-handed play (in other words, a configuration where entry into through gate 64 can normally occur in the normal play state), it will naturally occur that a normal play round is being played when transitioning from the normal play state to the second time-saving play state, so this configuration is also effective for such pachinko machines.

As described above, when transitioning from the normal game state to the second time-saving game state, the normal game round is forcibly terminated or rewritten to a miss result, but when transitioning from the first time-saving game state to the second time-saving game state, such processing is not executed. When transitioning from the first time-saving game state to the second time-saving game state, the normal game round is already being played in a manner corresponding to the high frequency support mode before the transition, and if the variable display of the normal game round was terminated midway or rewritten to a miss result in such a situation, it could result in a delay in the start timing of the opening and closing of the reel.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

In the first special game, the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state is updated before a transition to the second time-saving game state is determined.

According to this configuration, when the cumulative number of misses reaches the ceiling number in the final play round of the first time-saving play state, the first time-saving play state can be ended and then the second time-saving play state can be transitioned to. This makes it possible to prevent the transition to the second time-saving play state from being restricted due to the first time-saving play state being in the first time-saving play state, and makes it possible to appropriately control the play state. Moreover, since the end of the first time-saving play state and the transition to the second time-saving play state can be performed in the same play round, a seamless transition from the first time-saving play state to the second time-saving play state can be realized without the intervention of a special play round in the normal play state. This makes it possible to create a state equivalent to the remaining number of times in the time-saving play state being added, making it possible to appropriately arouse the joy of the player.

This embodiment can also be seen as being configured so that, in one special game round, a determination is made as to whether the first time-saving game state has ended before a determination is made as to whether the second time-saving game state should be entered. In this case as well, the same effect as above can be achieved.

The first time-saving game state includes a predetermined first time-saving game state (a time-saving game state corresponding to a 4R special jackpot result A, and a time-saving game state corresponding to a 4R regular jackpot result A) whose upper limit number of times is set to the same number of times as the ceiling number of times.

In this case, if the above-mentioned predetermined first time-saving game state is implemented as the first time-saving game state, the number of losing play times will naturally reach the ceiling number in the final play round, and it is possible to transition from the first time-saving game state to the second time-saving game state. In other words, even if the first time-saving game state ends without winning the jackpot result, the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state will be added by transitioning to the second time-saving game state triggered by reaching the ceiling number of times, and from the player's perspective, the chance of winning the jackpot result in the time-saving game state is significantly increased compared to when such remaining number of times is not added. This not only gives the player the fun of expecting that the predetermined time-saving game state will be selected as the time-saving game state, but also increases the appeal (appeal to the player) of the predetermined time-saving game state, making it possible to suitably stimulate the desire to play.

If a regular round of play is in progress when the transition to the second time-saving play state is made, the regular round of play can be ended.

For example, if a winning entry into the through gate 64 occurs immediately before the transition to the second time-saving game state, the normal game round and the opening and closing game of the role-playing device that are triggered by this will be played in an unfavorable manner corresponding to the normal game state. In that case, for example, if the transition is made after passing through the opening and closing execution mode as in the conventional time-saving game state, the normal game round that occurs in such a situation can be ended in the opening and closing execution mode, so that the influence of the normal game round on the second time-saving game state can be suppressed. However, in the case of the second time-saving game state that is transitioned to without passing through the opening and closing execution mode, since it is not possible to secure a period for absorbing the normal game round that was started before the transition, there is a concern that the normal game round in an unfavorable manner corresponding to the normal game state will continue to be played even after the transition to the second time-saving game state. In this regard, by ending the normal game round when it is being played in a situation where the transition to the second time-saving game state is made, it is possible to suppress the normal game round in an unfavorable manner corresponding to the normal game state from continuing even after the transition to the second time-saving game state. This allows the player to quickly enjoy the benefits of the second time-saving gaming state.

If the result of the support lottery for the regular game round that is being terminated is a support winning result (regular winning result), it will be changed to a losing result.

With this configuration, after a normal game round ends, the next normal game round can be started without going through the opening and closing of the reel. This allows the start timing of the normal game round or the reel opening and closing of the reel in an advantageous manner corresponding to the second time-saving game state to be accelerated, allowing the player to enjoy the benefits of the second time-saving game state more quickly.

When a regular game round is being played in a situation where a transition to the second time-saving game state is being made, if that regular game round is in the process of displaying the finalized state, the execution of the termination process is restricted.

For example, if a confirmation display is forcibly terminated while it is being executed, the notification period for the stop result (the notification result of the support lottery) will be shortened. As a result, there is a concern that the visibility of the stop result will decrease, making it difficult for the player to understand the result of the support lottery. In this regard, by restricting the execution of the forced termination when a confirmation display is in progress, an appropriate notification period can be secured and a decrease in the visibility of the stop result can be prevented.

In addition, the configuration in which the result of the support lottery is changed to a losing result can achieve the following effects. For example, in a situation in which the transition to the second time-saving game state is made and the result of the support lottery for the normal game round in which the confirmation display is being executed is a support winning result, if the confirmation display is forcibly terminated and rewritten to a losing result in response to the transition to the second time-saving game state, first, the confirmation display corresponding to the support winning result that was performed before the transition to the second time-saving game state is performed, and then the confirmation display is terminated by the forced termination associated with the transition to the second time-saving game state. In other words, although the rewriting to a losing result is performed internally, the confirmation display itself is terminated without being reflected in the stop result, so the stop result corresponding to the changed losing result is not displayed, and only the stop result corresponding to the support winning result before the change is displayed. In this case, the fact that the opening and closing of the role is not performed despite the support winning result being notified may cause the player to feel distrustful, which may reduce trust in the pachinko machine and the game hall. In this regard, by restricting the execution of forced termination when the confirmation display is in progress, it is possible to prevent inconsistencies between the reported result and the result of the changed support lottery, and in turn, to prevent the occurrence of an event in which the opening and closing of the reel is not performed when the result of the support lottery is reported.

When the number of misses reaches the ceiling number of times, the game will transition to the second time-saving game state at the start of the confirmation display for the special game round in which the ceiling number of misses is reached.

When the confirmation display ends in the special game round in which the number of misses reaches the ceiling number, the first special game round after the transition to the second time-saving game state begins as the next special game round. In this configuration, the transition to the second time-saving game state is made at the start of the confirmation display of the special game round in which the number of misses reaches the ceiling number, so that a grace period (a period in which the game state has transitioned to the second time-saving game state, but a special game round after the transition to the second time-saving game state has not yet been made) can be secured between the time of the transition to the second time-saving game state and the time of the first special game round after the transition to the second time-saving game state. If the normal game round is ended in response to the transition to the second time-saving game state, the next normal game round can be started during the grace period, and the normal game round can be started prior to the special game round after the transition to the second time-saving game state. As a result, the timing at which the normal power device 63a starts to open and close is accelerated, making it possible to create a situation in which winning is more likely to occur in the second operating port 63 after transitioning to the second time-saving play state.

The grace period is configured to be longer than the confirmed display time of the regular game round that was the subject of the termination process.

With this configuration, the fixed display of the normal game round, in which the variable display is terminated by the termination process, ends in the middle of the grace period, so it becomes possible to start the next normal game round before the grace period ends. Since the next normal game round is played in the second time-saving game state, the first normal game round after the transition to the second time-saving game state can be started prior to the first special game round after the transition to the second time-saving game state. This makes it possible to advance the start timing of the opening and closing of the reels after the transition to the second time-saving game state, and to create a situation in which winning at the second operating port 63 is more likely to occur at an earlier stage.

The process for ending a normal game round in response to a transition to a time-saving game state is configured to be performed only when a game transitions from a normal game state to a time-saving game state (second time-saving game state).

In this configuration, the end process for the normal game round is executed in response to the change from an unfavorable situation to an advantageous situation in which the normal game round or the opening and closing of the role play is performed, making it possible to optimally exert each of the above effects.

If the condition for transitioning to the time-saving play state is met while in the time-saving play state (if the ceiling number of times, which is the condition for transitioning to the second time-saving play state, is reached in the final play round of the first time-saving play state), the execution of the above-mentioned termination process is restricted.

When the transition condition to the time-saving game state is met in a time-saving game state, the normal game round and the opening and closing of the reel are already being played in a manner corresponding to the time-saving game state before the transition condition is met. Therefore, if the above-mentioned termination process is performed in such a situation, the normal game round is forcibly terminated in the middle by the termination process, and the reel opening and closing game is not performed, and the next normal game round starts, and the reel opening and closing game is performed after the normal game round ends. In other words, there is a risk that the start timing of the reel opening and closing game will be delayed compared to when the normal game round is continued without forcibly terminating. Therefore, by using the above-mentioned termination process appropriately when transitioning from the normal game state to the time-saving game state and when transitioning from the time-saving game state to the time-saving game state, it is possible to realize a prompt start of the reel opening and closing game in either transition case.

The confirmed display time for a special game in which the transition condition to the second time-saving game state (the number of misses reaching the ceiling number of times) is met is set to a specific confirmed display time, and is configured to be longer than the confirmed display time (normal confirmed display time) for other special game in which the transition condition is not met.

In order to allow the player to smoothly start playing in the time-saving game state, it is preferable to inform the player of the transition to the time-saving game state before the first special game round after the transition to the time-saving game state starts. In this case, if the transition is made via the opening and closing execution mode as in the conventional time-saving game state, it is possible to make a notification corresponding to the transition to a specific game state by using the period of the opening and closing execution mode (for example, the ending period, etc.), but in the case of a time-saving game state that is transitioned to without going through the opening and closing execution mode as in the second time-saving game state of this embodiment, after the special game round in which the transition condition is established ends, the first special game round after the transition to the second time-saving game state is immediately performed, making it difficult to ensure the execution period of such a notification. In this regard, by lengthening the confirmation display time of the special game round in which the transition condition to the second time-saving game state is established, the timing of the start of the first special game round after the transition to the second time-saving game state can be delayed, and it becomes possible to preferably ensure the execution period of the notification informing the transition to the second time-saving game state.

In addition, the configuration of lengthening the display time of the special game in which the transition condition to the second time-saving game state is met has the advantage of making the grace period longer than the display time of the regular game in which the termination process is targeted. When establishing such a relationship, it is possible to shorten the display time of the regular game in which the termination process is targeted, compared to the normal display time. However, in this case, there is a concern that the shortening of the display time of the stop result reduces its visibility, and the player will not be able to properly understand the results of the support lottery. In this regard, by lengthening the display time of the special game, it is possible to avoid unreasonable shortening of the display time of the regular game in which the transition condition is met, and it becomes possible to establish the above relationship without impairing the visibility of the stop result.

When transitioning from the normal game mode to the time-saving game mode (second time-saving game mode), the confirmed display time of the special game mode in which the transition conditions are met is extended.

According to this configuration, the longer confirmation display time in the game round where the transition condition is met makes it possible to ensure that the player has time to prepare for switching to the time-saving game state. In particular, in this embodiment, left-handed play is recommended in the normal game state, while right-handed play is recommended in the time-saving game state, so that an operation to switch the launch strength of the game balls is required when transitioning from the normal game state to the time-saving game state. According to this configuration, it is possible to preferably ensure time for such an operation to switch the launch strength.

<Modification 1>
A first modified example of the second embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 137 to 138. In these figures, the same components as those in the second embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the second embodiment described above, when the ceiling number of times is reached in the first special game play and the game transitions to the second time-saving game state, the normal game play is played before the special game play, but in this modified example, the opening and closing of the reels in a manner corresponding to the second time-saving game state is played before the special game play.

<About the specific confirmed display time>
In this modified example, the length of the specific fixed display time set when the ceiling number of times is reached in the first special figure game round is longer than in the case of the second embodiment. Specifically, the specific fixed display time is set to a time (e.g., 4 sec) longer than the total period (e.g., 1.5 sec) of the fixed display time (e.g., 0.5 sec) of the normal figure game round that is forcibly terminated, the variable display period (e.g., 0.5 sec) of the normal figure game round corresponding to the second time-saving game state, and the fixed display time (e.g., 0.5 sec) of the normal figure game round corresponding to the second time-saving game state.

<About the transition to the second time-saving game state>
The case of transitioning from the normal game state to the second time-saving game state will be described with reference to Fig. 137. Here, the variable display of the special game number when the number of misses reaches the ceiling number is performed from timing t1 to timing t3, and the variable display of the normal game number is started at timing t2, which is an intermediate timing.

When a special game round (special game round of the first special game round) begins in which the number of misses reaches the ceiling number during normal gameplay, the variable display is performed from timing t1 to timing t3. When the variable display time has elapsed at timing t3, the final display of the special game round begins. The final display time in this case is set to the specific final display time described above (for example, 4 sec).

At timing t3, the second support flag is set based on the reaching of the ceiling number of times, and a transition to the second time-saving game state is made (Fig. 137 (a) and (b)). At this time, the value of the support counter area SC is set to the fifth upper limit number of times (e.g., 900 times) corresponding to the duration of the second time-saving game state.

On the other hand, when a normal game round starts at timing t2, which is midway through the variable display during the special game round, the game state at this point is normal game state, so the variable display time during that normal game round is set to the variable display time for normal game state (e.g. 30 sec).

At timing t3, the confirmation display for the special game round where the ceiling has been reached starts, and when the transition to the second time-saving game state is made, the variable display for the normal game round is forcibly terminated (Fig. 137 (c)). As a result, the variable display ends earlier than the variable display time set at timing t2 has elapsed. At the above time, if the support judgment result for that normal game round was a support win result (normal winning result), the judgment result is rewritten to a loss result. Therefore, after the above-mentioned forced termination, the confirmation display is made with the stop result corresponding to the loss result.

After that, when the fixed display time (e.g. 0.5 sec) has elapsed at timing t4, the result has been rewritten to a miss as described above, so the opening and closing of the device by the normal power device 63a is not performed, and the next normal game round starts immediately. Since the game state at this point is the second time-saving game state, the variable display for that game round is performed in the short variable display time for the second time-saving game state (e.g. 0.5 sec). Also, the support judgment in this case is performed under the high probability of winning for the second time-saving game state. Here, it is assumed that the result of the support judgment was a support win result.

When the variable display time for the normal game has elapsed at timing t5, the fixed display is then performed for the set fixed display time (e.g., 0.5 sec). Then, when the fixed display time has elapsed at timing t6, the normal game device 63a performs a game of opening and closing the device (Fig. 137(d)). This makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second operating port 63.

Here, the period during which the confirmation display of the special game round that started at timing t3 continues (specific confirmation display time) is longer than the total period (e.g. 1.5 sec) of the confirmation display time of the regular game round from timing t3 to timing t4, the variable display time of the regular game round from timing t4 to timing t5, and the confirmation display time of the regular game round from timing t5 to timing t6. For this reason, the opening and closing of the reel will start in the middle of the confirmation display of the special game round.

When the specific confirmation display time has elapsed at timing t7, the first special symbol game round after transition to the second time-saving game state is executed. As described above, in this modified example, the opening and closing game of the reel starts prior to the first special symbol game round, so that a winning entry into the second operating port 63 can be generated in the period before the first special symbol game round starts, and a period for acquiring reserved information for the second special symbol can be secured. Therefore, reserved information for the second special symbol can be made to exist at the time when the first special symbol game round starts after transition to the second time-saving game state. This makes it possible to execute a game round of the second special symbol, which is more favored than the first special symbol, as the first special symbol game round.

In the above case, in order to promote the acquisition of the reserved information of the second special symbol during the period T from timing t6 to timing t7, it is preferable to perform a predetermined notification that encourages the ball to enter the second operating port 63. The specific form of the predetermined notification is not particularly limited, but for example, as shown in FIG. 138, a right hit notification image 477a and a target guide image 477b including text display such as "Aim for the electric chute!" may be displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75. The right hit notification image 477a encourages the launch of the game ball in the right route in the game area PE, and the target guide image 477b guides the player to the target where the game ball should enter.

The above-mentioned predetermined notification may be made after timing t3 when the transition to the second time-saving game state is made, but in this case, it is preferable to make the notification at a predetermined timing at least before timing t7 when the confirmation display of the special game round in which the condition for transition to the second time-saving game state is established ends. This predetermined timing may be any timing before timing t6 when the reel opening and closing game starts, or any timing during the period from timing t6 to timing t7 (the timing when the specific confirmation display time has elapsed). Considering the operation period for the player to adjust the firing intensity, it is preferable for the above notification to be made before the reel opening and closing game starts (before the normal power reel 63a is opened), and it is preferable for the predetermined timing to be a timing during the period from timing t3 to timing t6.

In addition, at timing t7 when the first special chart play round is started after transitioning to the second time-saving play state, there may be reserved information for the first special chart as well as reserved information for the second special chart. In this regard, in this modified example, when reserved information for both the first and second special charts exists, the play round for the second special chart is prioritized (Fig. 109), so even in such a case, it is possible to play the second special chart as the first special chart play round.

The modified example described above has the following advantages:

The confirmation display for the first regular game round after transitioning to the second time-saving game state can be ended before the first special game round after transitioning to the second time-saving game state starts.

In this case, if the result of the support lottery for the first regular game after transitioning to the second time-saving game state is a support winning result, the opening and closing game of the device can be started to open the regular power device 63a before the first special game after transitioning to the second time-saving game state starts. This makes it possible to generate a winning entry into the second operating port 63 and store reserved information for the second special game before the first special game after transitioning to the second time-saving game state starts, making it possible to play the second special game as the first special game.

The system is configured to transition to the second time-saving game state in accordance with the start of the confirmation display of the special game round for which the transition condition has been met, and to execute a predetermined notification encouraging a win at the second operating port 63 at least before the confirmation display of the special game round ends.

By transitioning to the second time-saving game state in accordance with the start of the confirmation display of the special game round for which the transition condition is satisfied, a grace period (a period during which the game state has transitioned to the second time-saving game state, but the special game round since transitioning to the second time-saving game state has not yet been played) can be secured between the time of transition to the second time-saving game state and the time of the first special game round being played) after transition to the second time-saving game state. In a configuration in which it is possible to start the opening and closing game of the device before the start of the first special game round after transitioning to the second time-saving game state, by issuing a notification encouraging a win at the second operating port 63 during the grace period, it becomes possible for the player to easily save up reserved information for the second special game before the start of the first special game round.

<Modification 2>
A second modification of the second embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 139 to 140. In these figures, the same components as those in the second embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In this modified example, if the number of misses reaches the ceiling number during the first time-saving game state, the game transitions to the second time-saving game state. The specific configuration for this is explained below.

<About the second time-saving game state>
The second time-saving game state of this modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 139. In this modified example, in addition to the first time-saving game state to which the game is switched when a normal jackpot result is obtained, a second time-saving game state to which the game is switched when the number of misses reaches the ceiling number of times is provided.

The ceiling number of times in the second time-saving game state in this modified example is set to a number (e.g., 800 times) less than the third upper limit number of times (e.g., 1000 times) in the first time-saving game state. Therefore, when a 4R normal jackpot result A is obtained and the game transitions to the first time-saving game state after the end of the open/close execution mode, if there are multiple misses in the first time-saving game state, the cumulative number of misses will reach the ceiling number before reaching the end number of the first time-saving game state. Note that the duration of the transition to the second time-saving game state is the same as in the first embodiment described above, until the number of special game times after the transition to the second time-saving game state reaches the predetermined fifth upper limit number (e.g., 900 times).

<Processing for transition to second time-saving gaming state>
The second time-saving game state transition process according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 140. This process is executed in step Sb512 of the special game play control process (Fig. 108) in the main control device 162, and is executed instead of the second time-saving game state transition process in Fig. 119. In Fig. 140, the same step numbers are given to the processes similar to those in Fig. 119, and their descriptions are omitted or simplified.

If the result of step Sb1404 is negative (the high probability flag is not set), the value of the miss count counter area HC in RAM 314 is updated in step Sb1405. Specifically, the value of the miss count counter area HC is decremented by 1.

In step Sb1406, it is determined whether the value of the miss counter area HC is "0". If the value of the miss counter area HC is "0", that is, if the number of times the special pattern has been played as a miss has reached the ceiling number of times, it proceeds to step Sb3101, and it is determined whether the first support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM314. The first support flag is used by MPU312 to know that the first time-saving play state is in effect.

If the first support flag is set, i.e., if the first time-shortened game state is in progress, the process proceeds to step Sb3102, where the first support flag set in the various flag storage area 314e is cleared. In the following step Sb1407, the second support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e, and the second time-shortened game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) is initiated. In other words, in this modified example, if the value in the miss count counter area HC becomes "0" during the first time-shortened game state, the first time-shortened game state is switched to the second time-shortened game state, and the second time-shortened game state is forcibly activated.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb3101 (the first support flag is not set), i.e., if the first time-saving game state is not being entered, the second support flag is set in step Sb1407 without executing the processing of step Sb3102.

After execution of step Sb1407, in step Sb1408, a value corresponding to the fifth upper limit number of times (for example, 900 times) is set in the support counter area SC of RAM314. Even if the first time-shortened game state is transitioned to the second time-shortened game state in the middle of the first time-shortened game state, the same value is set as when the normal game state (a situation that is not the first time-shortened game state) is transitioned to the second time-shortened game state. In other words, if the second time-shortened game state is transitioned to in the middle of the first time-shortened game state, regardless of the number of times remaining in the first time-shortened game state at that time, the remaining number of times in the high-frequency support mode thereafter is rewritten to the fifth upper limit number of times for the second time-shortened game state.

In step Sb1409, a second time-shortened game state start command is set as the command to be sent to the performance control device 143. The set second time-shortened game state start command is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sb401 in normal processing (FIG. 107). Then, the process proceeds to step Sb1410, where it is determined whether or not the second special chart flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

<About the flow to the second time-saving game state>
The flow of transition to the second time-saving game state will be described. Here, the case where a transition to the first time-saving game state of the third upper limit number of times (for example, 1000 times) is triggered by a 4R normal jackpot result A, and then a transition to the second time-saving game state is triggered by the number of misses reaching the ceiling number of times (for example, 800 times) will be described.

When the open/close execution mode corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot result A ends, the first support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. This causes a transition to the first time-saving gaming state, which is a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode. At this time, a value corresponding to the third upper limit number of times (e.g., 1000 times) is set in the support counter area SC of the RAM 314.

Then, when the cumulative number of miss plays in the first time-saving play state reaches 800 and the ceiling number of plays is reached, the first support flag is cleared for the special play that has reached the ceiling, and the second support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. At this time, the number of plays executed in the first time-saving play state has not reached the third upper limit number of plays, and there are 200 remaining plays, but the first time-saving play state is switched to the second time-saving play state. Then, a value corresponding to the fifth upper limit number of plays (for example, 900 plays) is set in the support counter area SC.

In the pattern display device 75, as in the first embodiment, an additional effect (Fig. 130 (b) to (d)) is executed so that the remaining number of times in the time-saving play state is added, but the additional number of times notified by the additional effect is the fifth upper limit number minus the remaining number of times in the first time-saving play state (for example, 700 times). In other words, internally, the remaining number of times of 200 times is canceled and 900 times is newly set as the duration of the high frequency support mode, but from the player's point of view, it is presented as if 700 times have been added.

In this modified example, the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state is updated before a transition determination to the second time-saving game state is made (Figs. 108, 118, and 140). The advantages of such a configuration will be explained with reference to Fig. 141.

To facilitate understanding, a comparative example will be used in which a determination is made to transition to the second time-shortened game state before the remaining number of times the time-shortened game state is updated, and the differences from the configuration of this modified example will be explained. Also, to make it easier to compare the two, it will be assumed that a transition to the second time-shortened game state during the first time-shortened game state is permitted in the comparative example as well.

In the comparative example configuration, when the cumulative number of miss plays reaches the ceiling number during the first time-saving game state, a transition determination to the second time-saving game state is first made, and the first time-saving game state is switched to the second time-saving game state. After that, the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state is updated during the same special game round, so that the remaining number of times in the second time-saving game state is decremented by one, even though a special game round in the second time-saving game state has not actually been executed. As a result, the number of special game rounds that can be played in the second time-saving game state becomes 899, one less.

In contrast, in this modified example, the transition to the second time-shortened game state is determined after the update of the remaining number of times in the time-shortened game state is completed, so after switching from the first time-shortened game state to the second time-shortened game state, the remaining number of times in the second time-shortened game state is not subtracted in that special game round. In other words, the remaining number of times in the second time-shortened game state is subtracted after the next special game round (the special game round executed after the transition to the second time-shortened game state) starts, so the number of special game rounds that can be played in the second time-shortened game state is 900. In other words, it is possible to preferably secure the number of special game rounds that can be played in the second time-shortened game state.

The modified example described above has the following advantages:

When the transition condition is met during the first time-saving game state, transition to the second time-saving game state is permitted, and the system is configured so that in one special game round, the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state is updated before a transition decision is made to the second time-saving game state.

This configuration makes it possible to prevent the update of the remaining number of times during a special game round from being executed immediately after the special game round transitions to the second time-saving game state. This makes it possible to appropriately secure the remaining number of times after transitioning to the second time-saving game state, and makes it possible to appropriately control the game state.

<Modification 3>
The third modification of the second embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 142 to 156. In these figures, the same components as those in the second embodiment and the modifications will be given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In this modified example, the losing results in the winning/losing lottery for the special game round include a normal losing result and a special losing result, and if the winning/losing lottery results in a special losing result, the system is configured to transition to the third time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) without transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode. Note that the normal losing result is the same as the losing result in the second embodiment described above. Also, this modified example does not have the functionality of the second time-saving game state.

<Special game winning/losing table>
In this modified example, a win/loss table for the first special symbol and a win/loss table for the second special symbol are provided as win/loss tables used in the win/loss lottery in the special symbol game. The win/loss table for the first special symbol is referenced in the win/loss lottery based on the start winning into the first operating port 62 (the start port of the first special symbol), and the win/loss table for the second special symbol is referenced in the win/loss lottery based on the start winning into the second operating port 63 (the start port of the second special symbol). The win/loss table for the first special symbol is the same as the win/loss table (FIG. 101) in the second embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted.

The win/lose table for the second special design is stored in the win/lose table storage area 313a of the ROM 313. As shown in FIG. 142, the win/lose table for the second special design includes a win/lose table for the low probability mode and a win/lose table for the high probability mode. When the lottery mode is the low probability mode, the win/lose table for the low probability mode is referenced, and when the lottery mode is the high probability mode, the win/lose table for the high probability mode is referenced.

As shown in FIG. 142(a), in the win/lose table for low probability mode, a total of 10 values from "0" to "9" are set as the random number values that result in a jackpot (value of the jackpot random number counter C1), and the probability of winning a jackpot in low probability mode is set to 1/300. In addition, a total of 300 values from "10" to "309" are set as the random number values that result in a special miss. In other words, the probability of a special miss in low probability mode is set to 1/10. Other random number values are assigned to normal miss results, and the probability of a normal miss in low probability mode is set to 2690/3000.

In addition, in the win/lose table for the low probability mode corresponding to the first special chart, the special losing result is not set as a lottery result. In other words, the special losing result is a winable result only when a right-hand hit is performed in a situation where a win is possible in the second operating port 63.

As shown in FIG. 142(b), in the win/lose table for high probability mode, a total of 50 random number values from "0" to "49" are set as the jackpot winning values, and the probability of winning the jackpot in high probability mode is set to 1/60. Note that in the win/lose table for high probability mode, no special losing results are set as lottery results, and all values other than the random number value for the jackpot are assigned to normal losing results. The probability of a normal losing result in high probability mode is set to 59/60.

<Special game play type table>
As the jackpot type table, a jackpot type table for a first special symbol (FIG. 143(a)) and a jackpot type table for a second special symbol (FIG. 143(b)) are set.

As shown in FIG. 143(a), in the jackpot type table for the first special chart, the selectable jackpot types are set as a 4R variable jackpot result and a 4R normal jackpot result. Both of these jackpot results result in four rounds of play being performed.

The 4R guaranteed jackpot result is a jackpot result that transitions to a high probability game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) after the end of the open/close execution mode. In this case, the high probability game state continues until the number of game plays executed after the open/close execution mode reaches a predetermined first upper limit number (e.g., 100 times). When the first upper limit number is reached, the high probability game state ends and transitions to a normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode).

The 4R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result that transitions to the first time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) after the open/close execution mode ends. In this case, the first time-saving game state continues until the number of game plays executed after the open/close execution mode reaches a predetermined second upper limit number (e.g., 100 times). When the second upper limit number is reached, the first time-saving game state ends and transitions to the normal game state.

In the jackpot type table for the first special chart, "0" to "64" on the jackpot type counter C2 correspond to a 4R special jackpot result, and "65" to "99" correspond to a 4R normal jackpot result. In other words, the probability of being assigned to a 4R special jackpot result is set to 65%, and the probability of being assigned to a 4R normal jackpot result is set to 35%.

As shown in FIG. 143(b), in the jackpot type table for the second special chart, a 10R special jackpot result and a 10R normal jackpot result are set as selectable jackpot types. Both of these jackpot results result in 10 rounds of play being performed.

The 10R special jackpot result is a jackpot result that transitions to a high probability game state after the opening and closing execution mode ends. In this case, the high probability game state continues until the number of game plays executed after the opening and closing execution mode reaches a predetermined third upper limit number (e.g., 100 times). In addition, the 10R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result that transitions to a first time-saving game state after the opening and closing execution mode ends. In this case, the first time-saving game state continues until the number of game plays executed after the opening and closing execution mode reaches a predetermined fourth upper limit number (e.g., 100 times).

In the jackpot type table for the second special chart, "0" to "64" on the jackpot type counter C2 correspond to a 10R special jackpot result, and "65" to "99" correspond to a 10R normal jackpot result. In other words, the probability of being assigned to a 10R special jackpot result is set to 65%, and the probability of being assigned to a 10R normal jackpot result is set to 35%.

In addition, in this modified example, another type table is provided, which is a type table for special losses. The type table for special losses is a type table that is referenced when the result of the winning/losing lottery is a special loss result, and is stored in the type table storage area 313b of the ROM 313.

As shown in FIG. 144(a), in the type table for special losses, special loss result A and special loss result B are set as selectable special loss types. Special loss result A is a special loss result that transitions to the third time-shortened game state A, and special loss result B is a special loss result that transitions to the third time-shortened game state B.

As shown in FIG. 144(b), the third time-saving game state A is a game state of low probability mode and high frequency support mode, and continues until the number of times the special game is played after transitioning to the third time-saving game state A reaches a predetermined fifth upper limit (e.g., 900 times). The third time-saving game state B is also a game state of low probability mode and high frequency support mode, and continues until the number of times the special game is played after transitioning to the third time-saving game state B reaches a sixth upper limit (e.g., 100 times), which is less than the fifth upper limit. In other words, the third time-saving game state A is more advantageous for the player than the third time-saving game state B.

Note that since special miss results A and B are both miss results, the opening and closing execution mode is not executed. In other words, if these results occur, the game will transition to the third time-saving game state A or B without going through the opening and closing execution mode.

In the special miss type table, "0" to "9" on the jackpot type counter C2 correspond to special miss result A, and "10" to "99" correspond to special miss result B. In other words, the probability of being assigned to special miss result A is set to 10%, and the probability of being assigned to special miss result B is set to 90%.

The random number value (jackpot type counter C2) used to select the special miss type is also used to determine the stop result of the pattern to be stopped and displayed on each special chart display unit AS, BS when the result of the win/lose lottery is a special miss result. The stop result is determined by referring to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of the ROM 313. In the stop result table, multiple data are set for the stop result (special miss pattern to be stopped and displayed on each special chart display unit AS, BS) in the case of a special miss result, corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2, and when determining the stop result, the data corresponding to the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is read out from among the multiple stop result data. Here, the same jackpot type counter C2 is used to determine the stop result and the special miss type, so there is a correlation between the special miss pattern to be stopped and displayed on each special chart display unit AS, BS and the special miss type determined at the time of the special miss.

In this modified example, the special miss type is selected by using the jackpot type counter C2, but a dedicated counter value (random number for selection) corresponding to the special miss result may be prepared and the special miss type may be selected by using the dedicated counter value.

The special failure type may also be selected by substituting an existing counter value other than the jackpot type counter C2, such as a fluctuation type counter CS. In this case, since the number of types of special failure results is expected to be smaller than the number of types of fluctuation patterns, etc., the selection may be performed using a portion (a portion of the bit value) of the fluctuation type counter CS, etc.

<Special chart game play control processing>
The special game play control process according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 145. This process is executed in step Sb403 of the normal process (Fig. 107) by the main control device 162, and is executed instead of the special game play control process of Fig. 108. In Fig. 145, the same step numbers are given to the processes similar to those in Fig. 108, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb503 (the special chart display unit 43 is not displaying a variable image), then in step Sb504 it is judged whether the common reserved number CRN is "0". If the common reserved number CRN is not "0", that is, if reserved information for either the first special chart or the second special chart exists, the process proceeds to step Sb505, where data setting processing is executed. In the data setting processing, the reserved information stored in the first special chart reserved area Ra or the second special chart reserved area Rb is moved to the execution area AE for variable display.

In step Sb3201, a change start process is executed to start the change display in the special chart display unit 43. Here, the change start process of step Sb3201 is explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 146. Note that in FIG. 146, the same process as the change start process in FIG. 110 is given the same step number, and the explanation thereof is omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sb3301, it is determined whether or not the second special chart flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. The second special chart flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that the current special chart play is a second special chart play.

If the second special chart flag is not set, i.e., if the current special chart play is for the first special chart, the win/loss table for the first special chart (Fig. 101) is referenced in step Sb3302 to determine whether it has been a win or a loss. At that time, if the lottery mode at that time is the low probability mode, the win/loss table for the low probability mode (Fig. 101(a)) is referenced, and if it is the high probability mode, the win/loss table for the high probability mode (Fig. 101(b)) is referenced.

If the second special chart flag is set, i.e., if the current special chart play is for the second special chart, the win/loss table for the second special chart (Fig. 142) is referenced in step Sb3303 to determine whether the win/loss has occurred. At that time, if the lottery mode at that time is the low probability mode, the win/loss table for the low probability mode (Fig. 142(a)) is referenced, and if it is the high probability mode, the win/loss table for the high probability mode (Fig. 142(b)) is referenced.

After step Sb3302 or step Sb3303 is executed, step Sb3304 determines whether the result of the win/loss determination in step Sb3302 or step Sb3303 is a jackpot win. If a jackpot win is determined, the process proceeds to step Sb3305, where the type of jackpot is determined by referring to the corresponding jackpot type table (FIG. 143).

In step Sb3306, a type flag indicating the jackpot type selected by the type determination in step Sb3305 is stored in the various flag storage area 314e. For example, if the jackpot type selected by lottery is a 4R special jackpot result, a 4R special jackpot flag is stored.

In step Sb3307, the stop result for the jackpot is set by referring to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of the ROM 313. Specifically, the stop result corresponding to the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is read from the stop result table and set as the stop result for the current game round.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb3304 (if the jackpot has not been won), the process proceeds to step Sb3308, where it is judged whether the result of the judgment made in step Sb3302 or step Sb3303 is a special miss result. If it is a special miss result, in step Sb3309, the special miss type is selected by referring to the special miss type table (Figure 144 (a)).

In step Sb3310, a special loss flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The special loss flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that the result of this special drawing is a special loss result. Multiple types of special loss flags are prepared according to the type of special loss, and in step Sb3310, the special loss flag corresponding to the type selected in step Sb3309 is set. For example, if the selected special loss type is special loss result A, special loss flag A is set.

In step Sb3311, the stop result for the special miss is set by referring to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of the ROM 313. Specifically, the stop result corresponding to the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is read from the stop result table and set as the stop result for the current game round.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb3308 (if the result is not a special miss), it means that the result of this winning/losing lottery is a normal miss result. In this case, proceed to step Sb3312 and set the stop result for a normal miss. In this modified example, there is only one type of stop result for a miss, and that stop result is set in step Sb3312.

After execution of step Sb3307, step Sb3311 or step Sb3312, a variable display time setting process is executed in step Sb3313 to set the variable display time for the current game round in the first special chart display unit AS or the second special chart display unit BS. In the variable display time setting process, the variable display time is selected by lottery using the variable type counter CS and the variable display time table. Here, the variable display time table for this modified example will be explained with reference to FIG. 147.

In this modified example, at least a variable display time table for a special miss on the second special symbol and a variable display time table for a normal miss on the second special symbol are set as the variable display time table. In addition, each of these variable display time tables is set for the first time-saving game state and for the normal game state in the reserved portion after the first time-saving game state. The reserved portion here corresponds to the special symbol game rounds that are executed in the normal game state after the first time-saving game state ends, based on the reserved information of the second special symbol that exists at the end of the first time-saving game state. Since the maximum number of reserved second special symbols is four, the reserved special symbol game rounds are executed a maximum of four times.

The variable display time table for special misses in the second special chart (for the first time-saving game state) is referenced when the result of the winning/losing lottery in the second special chart is a special miss in the first time-saving game state. In this variable display time table, as shown in FIG. 147(a), the selection of the variable pattern is configured to differ depending on the number of times the special chart is played after transitioning to the first time-saving game state (in other words, after the opening/closing execution mode is performed). Specifically, when the number of times the special chart is played after transitioning to the first time-saving game state is 1 to 99 and a special miss occurs, the variable pattern Z1 (e.g., 8 sec or 4 sec) is selected, and when the number of times the special chart is played after transitioning to the first time-saving game state is 100, that is, when a special miss occurs in the final play in the first time-saving game state, the variable pattern Z2 (e.g., 15 sec) is selected.

Fluctuation pattern Z1 corresponds to a complete miss effect, and fluctuation pattern Z2 corresponds to a special reach miss effect. In other words, when a fluctuation start command corresponding to fluctuation pattern Z1 is sent to the effect control device 143, the pattern display device 75 executes a complete miss effect as an effect for a game round, and when a fluctuation start command corresponding to fluctuation pattern Z2 is sent to the effect control device 143, the pattern display device 75 executes a special reach miss effect as an effect for a game round. In the complete miss effect, the symbols are stopped and displayed in a miss pattern combination without a reach display. The special reach miss effect will be described in detail later.

The variable display time table for normal misses on the second special chart (for the first time-saving game state) is referenced when the result of the win/lose lottery on the second special chart is a normal miss while in the first time-saving game state. As shown in FIG. 147(b), this variable display time table is also configured so that the selection of the variable pattern differs depending on the number of times the special chart has been played since the transition to the first time-saving game state.

Of these, if a normal miss occurs when the number of times the special game has been played since the transition to the first time-saving game state is 1 to 99, the explanation is omitted since it is the same as the case of FIG. 113(d) explained in the second embodiment above. Also, if a normal miss occurs in the final game in the first time-saving game state, regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS, the variation pattern Z3 (8 sec or 4 sec) is selected. Variation pattern Z3 corresponds to a complete miss presentation.

The variable display time table for special misses in the second special chart (normal play state of reserved numbers) is referenced when a special miss occurs in the reserved special chart play. As shown in FIG. 147(c), this variable display time table is configured to select variable pattern Z4 (15 sec) regardless of the value of the variable type counter CS. Variable pattern Z4 corresponds to the special reach miss performance.

The variable display time table for normal misses in the second special chart (normal play state of reserved pieces) is referenced when a normal miss occurs in the play of the reserved special chart. As shown in FIG. 147(d), this variable display time table is configured to select variable pattern Z5 (8 sec) regardless of the value of the variable type counter CS. Variable pattern Z5 corresponds to a complete miss performance.

Since each variable display time table is configured as described above, in the final play round to the reserved play rounds, if the result of the special chart lottery is a jackpot result or a special miss result, a reach effect is executed, and if the result of the special chart lottery is a normal miss result, the execution of the reach effect is restricted. Therefore, if a reach effect is executed in the final play round to the reserved play rounds, the jackpot result or special miss result is confirmed, and the player can predict that it will not be a normal miss result before the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are all stopped. In other words, in these play rounds, the player will play in strong hope that a reach effect will occur, making it possible to greatly increase the attention paid to the behavior of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3.

Each of these variable display time tables is stored in the variable display time table storage area 313c of the ROM 313. Note that the items in the "Notes (Performance Mode)" column in FIG. 147 are added for convenience and are not set in the variable display time table.

In addition, a variable display time table for normal gameplay (other than reserved portions) and a variable display time table for high probability gameplay are also provided, but these are similar to the cases in Figures 112 and 113 described in the second embodiment above, so their explanation will be omitted.

The variable display time table for the third time-saving game state is the same as the variable display time table for the time-saving game state shown in Figures 113(c) and (d). Note that in the third time-saving game state, right-hand play is performed, so the special game round may result in a special miss in the win/loss lottery. In this case, the miss variable display time table (for time-saving game state) shown in Figure 113(d) is referenced, and the variable display time is drawn without distinguishing it from a normal miss.

Returning to the explanation of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 146), in the process of setting the fluctuation display time in step Sb3313, the current game state, the result of the win/lose lottery, the number of times the special game has been played, etc. are grasped, and the fluctuation display time (fluctuation pattern) is drawn by referring to the fluctuation display time table corresponding to these grasped results. Then, the drawn fluctuation display time is set in the fluctuation display time counter area of RAM314 as the fluctuation display time for the current special game.

In the next step Sb712, a change display flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The change display flag is used by the MPU 312 to know that a change display for a special game round is in progress. After step Sb712 is executed, the process from step Sb713 onwards is executed.

Returning to the explanation of the special chart play count control process (FIG. 145), if a positive judgment is made in step Sb507 (if the variable display time has elapsed), the process proceeds to step Sb509, where the variable display flag set in the various flag storage area 314e is cleared. In step Sb510, high probability mode update/end processing is executed to update the remaining number of times in the high probability mode or to end the high probability mode.

In step Sb511, high-frequency support mode update/end processing is executed to update the remaining number of times in the high-frequency support mode or to end the high-frequency support mode. In step Sb3202, third time-shortened play state transition processing is executed to control transition to the third time-shortened play state (FIG. 144 (b)). In step Sb3203, confirmation display start processing is executed to start confirmation display on the special chart display unit 43, and then the special chart play count control processing is terminated.

<Third time-saving gaming state transition process>
The process for transition to the third time-saving gaming state in step Sb3202 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 148. This process is executed after the process for updating and ending the high frequency support mode in step Sb511.

First, in step Sb3401, it is determined whether or not a special miss flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM344. If the special miss flag is set, that is, if the result of this special chart win/lose lottery is a special miss result, the process proceeds to step Sb3402, where it is determined whether or not a high probability flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The high probability flag indicates that the current game state is a high probability game state.

If the high probability flag is not set, i.e., if the game is not in a high probability game state, step Sb3403 determines whether the first support flag or the third support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The first support flag indicates that the current game state is the first time-saving game state, and the third support flag indicates that the current game state is the third time-saving game state.

If neither the first nor third support flag is set, i.e., if the game is not in the first or third time-saving game state, the process proceeds to step Sb3404, where the third support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. This transitions to the third time-saving game state.

In step Sb3405, it is determined whether the type of the current special miss result is special miss result A. This determination is made by determining the type of special miss flag set in the various flag storage area 314e.

If the result is a special miss A, the process proceeds to step Sb3406, where a value corresponding to the fifth upper limit number of times (e.g., 900) is set in the support counter area SC of RAM314. This sets the third time-saving game state to which the player will transition to the third time-saving game state A.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb3405 (if the special miss result is not A), i.e., if the type of special miss result is special miss result B, the process proceeds to step Sb3407, where a value corresponding to the sixth upper limit number of times (e.g., 100) is set in the support counter area SC. As a result, the third time-saving game state to be transitioned to is set to the third time-saving game state B.

After execution of step Sb3406 or step Sb3407, in step Sb3408, a third time-shortened game state start command is set as the target for transmission to the presentation control device 143. At that time, if a transition is made to the third time-shortened game state A, a start command corresponding to the third time-shortened game state A is set, and if a transition is made to the third time-shortened game state B, a start command corresponding to the third time-shortened game state B is set. Each of these start commands includes information indicating the upper limit number of times.

The set third time-shortened game state start command is sent to the presentation control device 143 in step Sb401 in normal processing (FIG. 107). By sending the third time-shortened game state start command, the presentation control device 143 is notified of the start of the third time-shortened game state. After step Sb3408 is executed, the processing for transition to the third time-shortened game state is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sb3402 (if the high probability flag is set) or if a positive judgment is made in step Sb3403 (if either the first support flag or the third support flag is set), the process for transition to the third time-saving game state is terminated without executing the processes in steps Sb3404 to Sb3408. In other words, if a special miss occurs in a situation in which the game is in the high probability game state, the first time-saving game state, or the third time-saving game state, transition to the third time-saving game state is restricted, and the special miss result in the current special game round is invalidated.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb3401 (if the special miss flag is not set), the processing for transition to the third time-saving gaming state is terminated without executing the processing from step Sb3402 onwards in order to continue the gaming state at that time.

<Processing for starting confirmation display>
The process for starting the finalized display in step Sb3203 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 149. In Fig. 149, the same processes as those in the process for starting the finalized display in Fig. 120(a) are given the same step numbers, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sb3501, it is determined whether or not a special miss flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM314. If the special miss flag is set, that is, if the result of this special drawing is a special miss, the process proceeds to step Sb3502, where a process is executed to clear the special miss flag. In the following step Sb3503, the normal fixed display time (e.g., 0.5 sec) is set as the fixed display time for this special drawing game.

If the result of step Sb3501 is negative (the special miss flag is not set), i.e., if the result of this special drawing is not a special miss, then in step Sb3504 it is determined whether or not the result of this special drawing is a jackpot result. If it is a jackpot result, then the process proceeds to step Sb3503, where the normal fixed display time is set as the fixed display time for this special drawing game.

If the result is not a jackpot, i.e., if the result of this special drawing is a normal miss, step Sb3505 determines whether or not the current special drawing round is the final round (100th round) in the first time-saving play state. If it is not the final round, proceed to step Sb3503, and set the above-mentioned normal fixed display time as the fixed display time for this special drawing round.

On the other hand, if it is the final play round, the process proceeds to step Sb3506, where it is determined whether the normal play round is undergoing a variable display. Note that the normal play round in this case is one in which the variable display began before the start of the confirmation display for the final play round in the first time-saving play state, and a support lottery was conducted in the first time-saving play state (a lottery in which the winning probability was high).

If the normal game round is being displayed as a variable, the process proceeds to step Sb3507, where it is determined whether the winning or losing result of the normal game round being displayed as a variable is a support winning result (normal winning result). If it is a support winning result, the process proceeds to step Sb3508, where the winning or losing result of the normal game round being displayed as a variable is changed to a losing result. In the following step Sb3509, the stopping result for the losing result is set as the stopping result for the normal game round.

After execution of step Sb3509 or if a negative judgment is made in step Sb3507 (if the winning/losing result of the regular game round being displayed is a losing result), the display of the fluctuations of the regular game round is forcibly terminated in step Sb3510. After that, the stop result corresponding to the losing result is displayed on the regular display unit 44 after a predetermined display confirmation time (e.g., 0.5 sec).

After step Sb3510 is executed, in step Sb3511, a specific fixed display time longer than the normal fixed display time is set as the fixed display time for the current special game. This specific fixed display time is set to a period longer than the execution period of the reel opening and closing game in the first time-saving game state (high frequency support mode) shown in FIG. 103(c) (opening time 2 sec + interval period 0.2 sec + opening time 2 sec = 4.2 sec), and more specifically, it is set to a period longer than 4.7 sec, which is the total period of the fixed display time for the normal game (e.g., 0.5 sec) and the execution period of the reel opening and closing game. In this modified example, for example, 5 sec is set as the specific fixed display time. Note that in a configuration in which multiple types of reel opening and closing games with different opening times and opening times are provided as the reel opening and closing games in the first time-saving game state, a time longer than the longest time among them is set as the specific fixed display time.

In addition, if a negative judgment is made in step Sb3506 (the normal game round is not in a variable display), the process proceeds to step Sb3511 without executing the processes in steps Sb3507 to Sb3510, and the specific fixed display time is set as the fixed display time for the current special game round.

After execution of step Sb3511 or step Sb3503, in step Sb1504, a confirmation display flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. In step Sb1505, the special chart display unit 43 is controlled so that a confirmation display is started, and in step Sb1506, a variation end command is set as a target for transmission to the performance control device 143.

In step Sb3512, an external signal setting process is performed to output a game round execution signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side to notify the execution of a special game round (more specifically, that the variable display has ended). The game round execution signal is used on the gaming hall side to grasp the number of times that a special game round has been executed, and to display the number of times that a special game round has been executed after a jackpot on a data counter on the gaming island, etc. In the external signal setting process, the game round execution signal is set to be in the on state for a predetermined period of time.

In addition, in the external signal setting process of step Sb3512, a setting process is performed to output a lottery result signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side to notify the result of this special winning/losing lottery. Specifically, if the result of the winning/losing lottery is a jackpot result, a lottery result signal corresponding to a jackpot is output, if the result is a normal loss result, a lottery result signal corresponding to a normal loss is output, and if the result is a special loss result, a lottery result signal corresponding to a special loss is output.

These multiple lottery result signals may be assigned a signal wiring (output terminal of external output terminal 213) for each signal, or may share a single signal wiring to output all of these lottery result signals. In the latter case, it is preferable to make the signal state (output level, output period, output timing, etc. when in the on state) of the lottery result signal transmitted through a single signal wiring different for each result of the win/lose lottery. In this case, the management control device on the gaming hall side that receives the lottery result signal can determine the result of the win/lose lottery based on the difference in signal state.

Here, in this modified example, if the result of the win/lose lottery is a special miss result, there are cases where a transition to the third time-shortened game state occurs afterwards, and cases where such a transition does not occur (cases where a positive judgment is made in step Sb3402 or step Sb3403 of the process for transition to the third time-shortened game state (Figure 148)), but the external signal setting process in step Sb3512 is set up so that a lottery result signal corresponding to a special miss is output in either case.

If no transition to the third time-saving game state occurs, it may be possible to treat this as a normal miss and output a lottery result signal in a manner corresponding to a normal miss. From the perspective of consistency with the subsequent game state (a state in which there is no transition to the third time-saving game state), it would be more logical to output a signal corresponding to a normal miss than to output a signal corresponding to a special miss as in this modified example.

However, in a configuration that outputs a lottery result signal corresponding to a normal miss, the amusement hall will not be able to grasp the actual number of times a special miss occurred during a game, and there is a concern that it will be difficult to determine whether the odds of winning a special miss are generally in line with the designed probability. In particular, since the number of special misses notified to the amusement hall will be thinned out and made smaller than the actual number, there is a risk that, for example, even if an act is being carried out that fraudulently increases the probability of a special miss occurring, there will be a delay in discovering this.

In this regard, regardless of whether a transition to the third time-saving game state occurs, by outputting an external signal for a special miss when the result of the win/lose lottery is a special miss, the gaming hall can properly grasp the actual number of times that a special miss result occurred, making it possible to effectively prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

<Performance setting process>
The performance setting process according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 150. This process is started by the performance control device 143 at a predetermined cycle (for example, every 2 msec), and is executed in place of the performance setting process in Fig. 126. In Fig. 150, the same processes as those in Fig. 126 are given the same step numbers, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sb2301, it is determined whether or not an ending command has been received from the main control device 162. If an ending command has been received, in step Sb2302, a first transition effect setting process is executed to set a transition effect corresponding to a transition to a high probability gaming state or a first time-saving gaming state.

After execution of step Sb2302 or if a negative judgment is made in step Sb2301 (if an ending command has not been received), in step Sb2305, it is judged whether or not any game state end command has been received. If a game state end command has been received, in step Sb2306, an end effect setting process is executed to set an end effect corresponding to the end of the high probability game state, the first time-saving game state, or the third time-saving game state.

After execution of step Sb2306 or if a negative judgment is made in step Sb2305 (if no game state end command has been received), step Sb3601 executes a special pattern change display process to display changes in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75. In step Sb2308, other processes are executed, and then the performance setting process is terminated.

<Special chart change display processing>
The special chart change display processing of step Sb3601 will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 151. In Fig. 151, the same process as the special chart change display processing of Fig. 132 is given the same step number, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sb2701, it is determined whether a game round is being played. If a game round is not being played, the process proceeds to step Sb2702, where it is determined whether a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control device 162.

If a fluctuation start command has been received, the process proceeds to step Sb3701, where fluctuation start processing is executed to start the performance for the game round. Here, the fluctuation start processing is explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 152.

First, in step Sb3801, it is determined whether the current special symbol play round is the final play round in the first time-saving play state. If it is the final play round, the process proceeds to step Sb3802, and a setting is made so that a chance notification is made in the current special symbol play round. In the chance notification, as shown in FIG. 153(a), a chance notification image 478 is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75. In the chance notification image 478, for example, a caption image with text display such as "If a reach is made, it's a chance" is displayed above the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G. The chance notification is started in the final play round in the first time-saving play state, and continues until the reserved special symbol play round of the second special symbol is completed after the first time-saving play state ends.

The chance notification may be a window with the above text displayed or a specific light-emitting element corresponding to the chance notification may be illuminated. The notification is not necessarily limited to a visual notification, and may be an audio guide using the speaker unit 29.

After execution of step Sb3802 or if a negative judgment is made in step Sb3801 (if this is not the final play in the first time-saving play state), in step Sb3803, the fluctuation start command from the main control unit 162 is analyzed and the fluctuation pattern for the current special play is grasped. In step Sb3804, it is judged whether the grasped fluctuation pattern is either fluctuation pattern Z2 or fluctuation pattern Z4. Fluctuation pattern Z2 is selected when a special miss occurs in the final play in the first time-saving play state (Fig. 147(b)), and fluctuation pattern Z4 is selected when a special miss occurs in the reserved special play in the normal play state (Fig. 147(c)).

If the grasped fluctuation pattern is either fluctuation pattern Z2 or fluctuation pattern Z4, proceed to step Sb3805 and set the special reach miss effect to be executed as the play effect for the current special chart play round. Here, the special reach miss effect will be explained with reference to Figures 153 (b) to (d).

In the special missed reach performance, first, as shown in FIG. 153(b), the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed in a reach combination on one of the pay lines L1 to L5 on the display screen G, and a reach display is performed. After that, the middle symbol row Z2 (the symbol row of the final stopped row) is switched from a high-speed fluctuation display to a low-speed fluctuation display, and at that time, as shown in FIG. 153(c), a low-speed fluctuation display is performed with a special symbol 479 with the letters "LUCKY" or the like placed in the position of a symbol different from the symbol that forms a jackpot combination. FIG. 153(c) shows an example where a special symbol 479 is placed in the position of the "4" symbol, which is the next symbol to the "3" symbol that forms a jackpot combination.

Then, as shown in FIG. 153(d), the slow-changing special symbol 479 is stopped on the reach line to notify the player of the special miss result. In other words, in this modified example, after the reach line is formed by the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, the symbol combination in which the special symbol 479 of the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped on the reach line is the symbol combination that corresponds to the special miss result.

Returning to the explanation of the special chart fluctuation display process (Fig. 152), if a negative judgment is made in step Sb3804 (if it is neither fluctuation pattern Z2 nor fluctuation pattern Z4), in step Sb3806, it is judged whether the grasped fluctuation pattern is any of fluctuation patterns Z1, Z3, or Z5. Fluctuation pattern Z1 is selected when a special miss occurs in the 1st to 99th special chart play times in the first time-saving play state (Fig. 147(a)), and fluctuation pattern Z3 is selected when a normal miss occurs in the final play time in the first time-saving play state (Fig. 147(b)). Also, fluctuation pattern Z5 is selected when a normal miss occurs in the reserved special chart play times in the normal play state (Fig. 147(d)).

If the grasped fluctuation pattern is either fluctuation pattern Z1, fluctuation pattern Z3 or fluctuation pattern Z5, step Sb3807 sets the execution of a complete miss effect as the effect for the current special chart play round. Here, the execution of a complete miss effect is set not only when the grasped fluctuation pattern is fluctuation pattern Z3 or fluctuation pattern Z5, but also when it is fluctuation pattern Z1, that is, when the lottery result for the special chart play round is a special miss result, but this corresponds to the fact that the special miss result is invalidated during the first time-saving play state.

In other words, in the 1st to 99th special symbol play times in the first time-saving play state, even if the result of the winning/losing lottery is a special losing result, each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the symbol display device 75 is stopped and displayed in a combination that is a complete losing result. This notifies the player that this is simply a losing result, making it impossible or difficult to identify that the result of the special symbol winning/losing lottery is a special losing result.

At that time, the special symbol display unit 43 displays the stop result corresponding to the special miss result (Figure 146). Because the symbol display device 75 reports a result that is different from the actual result of the win/lose lottery, it is expected that it will be difficult for the employees of the amusement hall to know if cheating is occurring. However, by configuring the display mode of the special symbol display unit 43 not to reflect the invalidation, it will be possible to know the actual lottery result by visually checking the special symbol display unit 43, making it easier to discover cheating.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb3806 (if the pattern is not fluctuation pattern Z1, fluctuation pattern Z3, or fluctuation pattern Z5), the process proceeds to step Sb3808, and the game play presentation corresponding to the fluctuation pattern identified in step Sb3803 is set to be executed. For example, if the fluctuation pattern identified is fluctuation pattern 23A (Figure 113 (c)), the process is set to execute the SPSP reach winning presentation.

After step Sb3805, step Sb3807, or step Sb3808 is executed, in step Sb3809, a stop result command and a pattern command are sent as output targets to the display control device 350. The stop result command is a command that specifies the stop result of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3, and the pattern command is a presentation pattern command that specifies the presentation for the game round to be executed. In accordance with the received command, the display control device 350 controls the pattern display device 75 so that the patterns of each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 stop with the specified stop result, or a presentation for the game round is executed with the specified presentation pattern. After step Sb3809 is executed, the process for starting the variation is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the special chart change display process (FIG. 151), after the change start process in step Sb3701 is executed, the remaining number of times display update process is executed in step Sb2704. In the remaining number of times display update process, the remaining number of times in the first time-saving game state, etc. is updated, and the display contents of the remaining number of times image 472 are updated.

<About the flow to the third time-saving game state>
The flow of transition to the third time-saving game state in this modified example will be described with reference to Figures 154 and 155. Here, it is assumed that after the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to the 4R normal big win result is performed, the game is transitioned to the first time-saving game state with 100 remaining times.

At timing t1, if the result of the lottery for the third special symbol play after the transition to the first time-saving play state is a normal miss, the third support flag remains in the off state, and the transition to the third time-saving play state does not occur (Figure 154 (d)). As shown in Figure 155, in that special symbol play, a complete miss effect is executed on the symbol display device 75, and the player is notified of the normal miss result.

At timing t2, if the winning/losing lottery result is a special losing result, for example, in the tenth special symbol game round after the transition to the first time-saving game state, the transition to the third time-saving game state is restricted based on the fact that the first time-saving game state is in progress, and the special losing result is invalidated (timing t3). As shown in FIG. 155, in that special symbol game round, a complete losing effect is executed on the symbol display device 75. The complete losing effect in this case is the same as when the winning/losing lottery result is a normal losing result, and the effect time (variable display time) is also the same. For this reason, as long as you are looking at the symbol display device 75, it is indistinguishable from a normal losing result, making it difficult for the player to tell that a special losing result has occurred.

In this modified example, the probability of winning the special miss result is set relatively low (1/10), so it is expected that the special miss result will be won multiple times while playing the first time-saving game state (timing t4). In this case, too, winning the special miss result is not reflected in the switching of game states, and the transition to the third time-saving game state is invalidated (timing t5). In addition, the symbol display device 75 executes a complete miss effect, and a play-time effect is performed without clearly indicating that a special miss result has been reached.

At timing t6, if the winning/losing lottery result in the final play (the 100th special game play) in the first time-saving game state is a special losing result, the third support flag is turned on and the game state transitions to the third time-saving game state (timing t7). That is, in this modified example, the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state is updated before the transition to the third time-saving game state is determined (FIGS. 145 and 148), but in the final play in the first time-saving game state, the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state is updated to end the first time-saving game state, and then the transition to the third time-saving game state is determined based on the winning of the special losing result.

In other words, in this modified example, even if a special miss is drawn in a special game turn (1st to 99th special game turn) other than the final game turn in the first time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state is not entered and a transition to the third time-saving game state does not occur. However, if a special miss is drawn in the final game turn, the winning of the special miss result is reflected in the change of game state, and a transition to the third time-saving game state occurs. For this reason, the final game turn is more advantageous to the player than the other special game turns in the first time-saving game state, and is, so to speak, a game turn in a chance state.

When the game transitions to the third time-saving game state as described above, the number of remaining times in the state set to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode increases by the number of remaining times in the third time-saving game state. Specifically, if the type of special failure result becomes special failure result A, the remaining number of times increases by 900 times, and if the type of special failure result becomes special failure result B, the remaining number of times increases by 100 times (Figure 144).

Here, in this modified example, the end of the first time-shortened game state due to the number of executed game rounds reaching the upper limit, and the transition to the third time-shortened game state based on winning the special miss result, occur within the same game round. In other words, the transition to the third time-shortened game state can be made without the player feeling the end of the first time-shortened game state, so that it is essentially a state in which an additional (added) number of remaining rounds has been added at the end of the first time-shortened game state. The transition to the third time-shortened game state occurs at the start of the confirmation display in the final game round (strictly speaking, immediately before the start of the confirmation display).

In the above case, during that special symbol play round, as shown in FIG. 155, a special miss reach effect is executed on the symbol display device 75. This notifies the player of the special miss result. After the special miss reach effect is executed, an additional effect (FIG. 130(c)) is executed so that the remaining number of times in the time-saving play state is added. This additional effect may be executed using part or all of the fixed display time of the final play round, or may be executed across the variable display time (part of the variable display time) and the fixed display time (part or all of the fixed display time), or may be executed during the next special symbol play round.

If the result of the lottery in the final game round is a normal miss, the first time-saving game state ends, but there is no transition to the third time-saving game state. In other words, the low probability mode and high frequency support mode ends and there is a transition to the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). As shown in FIG. 155, in that special game round, a complete miss effect is executed on the pattern display device 75.

Incidentally, this modified example has a reserve function for the second special chart that can store up to four reserved information items, so if the final play in the first time-saving play state results in a normal miss and the low probability mode and high frequency support mode state ends, if reserved information for the second special chart exists, the number of play times for the second special chart corresponding to the reserved information can be executed. Since these play times are played under the normal play state, if a special miss occurs, a transition to the third time-saving play state occurs, just like the final play in the first time-saving play state.

In other words, not only the final play in the first time-saving play state, but also the reserved play after the end of the first time-saving play state will be chance play. If a special miss occurs in a reserved special pattern play, as shown in FIG. 155, a special miss reach effect is executed on the pattern display device 75, and the special miss result is announced. Also, if a normal miss occurs in a reserved special pattern play, a complete miss effect is executed on the pattern display device 75.

<About the flow of the regular game round in the final game round>
The flow of the normal game round in the final game round in the first time-saving game state will be explained with reference to Figure 156. Here, it is assumed that the winning/losing lottery result in the final game round is a normal losing result. First, the case where the normal game round is being displayed in a variable manner at the start timing of the final game round confirmation display will be explained with reference to Figure 156 (a).

After the variable display of the normal game round starts at timing t1, if the timing for the start of the confirmation display for the final game round in the first time-saving game state arrives at timing t2 before the variable display time has elapsed, the variable display of the normal game round is forcibly terminated (Fig. 156 (a1), (a4), Fig. 149). The normal game round that is the subject of this forced termination is one for which a win/lose lottery was conducted in the first time-saving game state, and the support lottery table for the high frequency support mode (Fig. 103 (b)) was applied. If the support lottery result for this normal game round was a support win result, it is changed to a lose result in accordance with the forced termination (Fig. 149).

When the variable display of the normal game round is forcibly terminated at timing t2, the losing result is then displayed frozen on the normal game display unit 44 for a predetermined fixed display time (e.g., 0.5 sec) (timing t3). Also, at timing t2, the fixed display of the final game round (special game round) also begins, but in this case the fixed display time is set to a specific fixed display time (e.g., 6 sec) that is longer than the normal fixed display time (e.g., 0.5 sec) (Fig. 149).

At this time, the confirmation display time of the final round is longer than the confirmation display time of the forcibly terminated normal round. Also, since the result of the lottery for the forcibly terminated normal round is deemed to be a loss, the opening and closing of the device by the normal power device 63a is not performed thereafter, and the next normal round starts immediately after the confirmation display of the forcibly terminated normal round ends. Therefore, the next normal round starts before timing t4, when the confirmation display time of the final round has elapsed (timing t3).

The first time-saving game state ends when the confirmation display of the final game round starts, so the next normal game round is played under normal game state. Therefore, in this normal game round, a win/lose lottery is performed using the support lottery table for low-frequency support mode (Figure 103(a)), which makes it more likely to result in a loss, and the variable display time is set to a longer variable display time for low-frequency support mode (e.g., 30 seconds).

As a result, not only at timing t4 when the next special pattern play (play of the reserved second special pattern) starts, but also for some time thereafter, the normal power device 63a is maintained in a closed state, making it impossible or difficult to win at the second operating port 63. This makes it possible to prevent new reserved information from being replenished even if a play of the reserved second special pattern is played and a vacancy occurs in the reserved number of second special patterns.

Next, we will explain with reference to Figure 156 (b) what happens when the reel opening/closing game is in progress at the start of the confirmation display for the final play round (when the variable display for the normal play round is not in progress).

After the opening and closing of the reel by the normal power reel 63a is started, the timing for starting the confirmation display for the final play round in the first time-saving play state is reached before the execution period (for example, 4.2 sec) has elapsed (timing t11). At this time, since the variable display of the normal play round is not in progress, forced termination is not executed, and the reel opening and closing play continues after that.

As mentioned above, the confirmation display of the final game round, which starts from timing t11, is performed in a specific confirmation display time (e.g., 6 sec) that is longer than the normal confirmation display time. This specific confirmation display time is longer than the execution period of the reel opening and closing game, so the reel opening and closing game ends (timing t12) before timing t13 when the confirmation display of the final game round ends. In other words, even if the reel opening and closing game is being performed at the start of the confirmation display of the final game round, it is absorbed within the confirmation display time of the final game round, and by timing t13 when the next special game round (the reserved second special game round) starts, the reel opening and closing game has ended.

When the above-mentioned opening and closing game of the reels ends at timing t12, the next round of normal play begins, but this round of normal play is played under normal play conditions. This makes it easier to get a miss, and the variable display time is set to a longer variable display time (e.g. 30 seconds) for the low-frequency support mode.

As a result, similar to the case of FIG. 156(a), not only at timing t13 when the next special symbol play (play of the reserved second special symbol) starts, but also for some time thereafter, the normal power device 63a is maintained in a closed state, making it impossible or difficult to win the second operating port 63. This makes it possible to prevent new reserved information from being replenished even if a play of the reserved second special symbol is played and a vacancy occurs in the reserved number of second special symbols.

It is possible that the regular game round is being displayed as confirmed when the confirmation display for the final game round starts. In that case, even if the support lottery result for that regular game round is a support winning result and the reel opening/closing game is then executed, the specific confirmation display time for the final game round is longer than the total period (e.g. 4.7 sec) of the confirmation display time for the regular game round and the execution period of the reel opening/closing game, so that the reel opening/closing game can be ended before the next special game round (the reserved second special game round) starts.

As described above, in this modified example, the replenishment of reserved information after the final play round is completed is suppressed, so the number of play rounds (play rounds of the second special symbol) that can be executed after the first time-saving play state can be limited to the number of play rounds corresponding to the upper limit of reserved numbers (4 times). As already explained, the reserved play rounds of the second special symbol, like the final play round of the first time-saving play state, are advantageous play rounds that will result in a transition to the third time-saving play state if a special miss result is won, and the above configuration can prevent the player from being overly advantageous.

For example, if the replenishment of reserved information after the end of the first time-saving play state is permitted, it is assumed that it is not easy to accurately predict at the design stage of the pachinko machine how many reserved information pieces will be replenished in actual play. As a result, there is a concern that the amount of work required for probability design will increase, leading to an increased burden on the design work. However, according to this modified example, the number of play times (play times of the second special chart) that can be executed after the end of the first time-saving play state can be fixed, which has the advantage of reducing the burden at the time of design.

The modified example described above has the following advantages:

When a special miss occurs in the final play of the first time-saving play state, a transition to the third time-saving play state occurs after the first time-saving play state ends. However, even if a special miss occurs in another special play in the first time-saving play state, a transition to the third time-saving play state does not occur.

According to this configuration, by hitting a special miss result in the final play round of the first time-saving play state, it is possible to transition from the first time-saving play state to the third time-saving play state, and create a state equivalent to an increase in the number of remaining plays in the time-saving play state. This extends the period during which the time-saving play state can be played, and increases the chances of hitting a jackpot result while in the time-saving play state. This makes it possible to add a game in which the aim is not only to hit a jackpot result in the first time-saving play state, but also to hit a special miss result in the final play round, expanding the range of ways to enjoy the game and increasing interest.

In addition, even if a special miss occurs in another special game round in the first time-saving game state, transition to the third time-saving game state is restricted, so in order to transition to the third time-saving game state, not only must a special miss result be achieved, but the timing must also be right. This appropriately increases the difficulty of transitioning to the third time-saving game state, making it possible to appropriately bring out the joy and sense of accomplishment of the player when the transition is achieved. Furthermore, this configuration makes it possible to emphasize the superiority of the final game round to the first time-saving game state as a chance game round, making it possible to appropriately increase the attention to that game round.

If a special miss occurs in the final play round of the first time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state ends and the game transitions to the third time-saving game state occurs in that final play round.

This configuration allows the first time-saving game state to be switched to the third time-saving game state without the need for a special game play in the normal game state. This makes it possible to create a state in which the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state has been increased.

In this case, the symbol display device 75 executes an additional effect, making it easier for the player to sense that the remaining number of plays has been increased.

The transition to the third time-saving game state is made without going through the opening and closing execution mode.

According to the above configuration, since a jackpot result is not required to transition to the third time-shortened game state, the probability of the transition can be set independently of the probability of winning a jackpot. This makes it possible to freely set the probability of transitioning to the third time-shortened game state without relying on the probability of winning a jackpot. In addition, by transitioning to the third time-shortened game state without going through the open/close execution mode, it is possible to prevent a significant separation between the first time-shortened game state and the third time-shortened game state. This makes it easier for the player to feel a sense of unity between the two time-shortened game states, making it easier to give the impression that the time-shortened game state has been extended.

In this case, the probability of winning the special miss result is set higher than the probability of winning the jackpot, giving the player the impression that it is easy to transition to the third time-saving game state. This makes it easier for the player to feel a sense of anticipation even when approaching the final round of the first time-saving game state, and makes it possible to expand the elements of enjoyment of the game as a way out just before the first time-saving game state ends.

The condition for transitioning to the third time-saving game mode has been set to a special miss result in the special drawing.

According to this configuration, both the game of whether or not the result of the special drawing lottery will be a jackpot result, and the game of whether or not the result will be a special miss and the transition condition to the third time-saving game state will be met can be executed in one special drawing game round. As a result, the final game round in which transition to the third time-saving game state is permitted can function as a chance game round (a game round that is more advantageous than other special drawing game rounds) in which both games can be executed, making it possible to appropriately increase the sense of anticipation and attention for that game round.

When a special failure occurs, an external signal to notify the player is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, when a special failure occurs in a special game turn other than the final game turn in the first time-saving game state (when a special failure occurs in a situation in which transition to the third time-saving game state is restricted), the above-mentioned external signal to notify the player of the special failure is output.

In this configuration, an external signal corresponding to the special miss result is output, making it possible for the gaming hall's management and control device to know that the trigger for transition to the third time-saving game state has occurred. In this case, in a situation where transition to the third time-saving game state is restricted, it is conceivable to configure the system so that the above-mentioned external signal is not output even if the result of the special chart win/lose lottery is a special miss result. Given that there will be no transition to the third time-saving game state after that, it would make more sense not to output an external signal than to do so.

However, with such a configuration, the gaming hall will not be able to grasp the actual number of times that a special losing result has occurred during play, and there is a risk that, for example, there will be a delay in discovering an act of fraudulently increasing the winning probability of a special losing result. In this regard, with this configuration, the external signal is output even when transition to the third time-saving game state is restricted, so that the gaming hall can properly grasp the actual number of times that a special losing result has occurred. This makes it easier to discover when the winning probability of a special losing result has been fraudulently increased, and makes it possible to increase the fraud prevention effect.

The output mode of the lottery result signal for notifying the jackpot result and normal miss result is different, and an external signal corresponding to the special miss result is output.

With this configuration, an external signal corresponding to a special loss result can be output using existing terminals and existing wiring for notifying the result of a jackpot, etc., so the number of output terminals, etc. in the pachinko machine 10 can be kept small compared to when a dedicated signal is output. Also, if the management control device on the gaming hall side already has an input terminal, etc. for receiving notification of the result of a jackpot, etc., it can use that to receive the external signal corresponding to the special loss result. Even if it becomes necessary to add a function for identifying (recognizing) differences in the output mode of the lottery result signal, this can be achieved with a minor change to the control program alone, making it possible to keep implementation costs low.

When outputting the lottery result signal corresponding to the special miss, a common lottery result signal may be output for cases where a transition to the third time-shortened play state occurs and cases where such a transition does not occur, or separate lottery result signals may be output to distinguish between these cases. In the latter configuration, the management control device on the gaming hall side can grasp from the external signal 1 not only that a special miss has occurred, but also whether or not a transition to the third time-shortened play state is in order. This makes it possible to immediately determine that a failure to transition to the third time-shortened play state despite a special miss is not an abnormality in the pachinko machine 10.

When separate lottery result signals are output when a transition to the third time-saving game state occurs and when the transition does not occur, separate signal wiring (output terminals of external output terminal 213) may be assigned to the signal output when the transition occurs and the signal output when the transition does not occur, or one signal wiring may be shared. When sharing signal wiring, it is advisable to make the signal state of the lottery result signal corresponding to the special miss (output level when in the on state, output period, output timing, etc.) different between when a transition occurs and when it does not occur.

In addition, in order to reduce the number of required signal wiring (output terminals of external output terminal 213), a configuration may be adopted in which an external signal corresponding to a special loss result is output using a game round execution signal output for each game round. In other words, a configuration may be adopted in which the signal state of the game round execution signal is made different depending on the result of the win/lose lottery.

Specifically, if the result of the lottery is a jackpot, a game round execution signal in a manner corresponding to a jackpot is output, if the result is a normal miss, a game round execution signal in a manner corresponding to a normal miss is output, and if the result is a special miss, a game round execution signal in a manner corresponding to a special miss is output. In this case, no dedicated signal is output as a lottery result signal.

This configuration not only simplifies the configuration by eliminating the signal terminals and signal wiring for the lottery result signal, but also makes it possible to avoid adding input terminals to the management and control device on the gaming hall side. In addition, since the lottery result signal can be output simultaneously with the game round execution signal, the number of signal outputs from the pachinko machine can be reduced, making it possible to reduce the processing load required for signal exchange on both the pachinko machine and the management and control device on the gaming hall side.

In the above case, the same game execution signal may be output for both a jackpot result and a normal miss result. Even in this case, the management and control device on the gaming hall side can know that a jackpot result has occurred by outputting an external signal corresponding to the open/close execution mode after the fact.

Possible configurations for varying the signal state of the play round execution signal for each win/lose lottery include varying the output level, output period, output timing, etc. when in the on state. Among these, from the standpoint of ease of implementation and implementation, it is preferable to vary the output period of the on state. For example, if the result of the win/lose lottery is a jackpot result, a play round execution signal with an on period of 0.3 sec is output, if the result is a normal loss result, a play round execution signal with an on period of 0.5 sec (or 0.3 sec) is output, and if the result is a special loss result, a play round execution signal with an on period of 0.8 sec is output.

When outputting a game round execution signal corresponding to a special miss, the same game round execution signal may be output when a transition to the third time-saving game state occurs and when such a transition does not occur, as described above, or game round execution signals of different types may be output.

In addition, if the pachinko machine 10 has a function for outputting an external signal (game round start signal) for notifying the start of each game round to the outside of the pachinko machine 10, the game round start signal may be used to output an external signal corresponding to a special miss result, instead of or in addition to the game round execution signal. In other words, the signal state of the game round start signal may be configured to differ depending on the result of the win/lose lottery.

In addition, if there is an external signal that is output for each play round other than the play round execution signal and the play round start signal, the configuration may be such that the external signal corresponding to the special miss result is output using that signal.

<Modification 4>
In the above-mentioned modified example 3, when a special miss occurs during the first time-saving game state, the transition to the third time-saving game state is restricted, but in this modified example, the transition is permitted. The configuration of this modified example will be described below with reference to Figures 157 to 168. In these figures, the same reference numerals are used to designate the same configuration as in the above-mentioned second embodiment and each modified example, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Special game winning/losing table>
The hit/miss table for the first special symbol (for low probability mode), the hit/miss table for the second special symbol (for low probability mode), and the hit/miss table for the first special symbol and the second special symbol (for high probability mode) according to this modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 157. These hit/miss tables are stored in the hit/miss table storage area 313a of the ROM 313.

The win/lose table for the first special design (for low probability mode) is referenced when a win/lose lottery is conducted based on winning the first operating port 62 when the lottery mode is the low probability mode. In this win/lose table for the first special design (for low probability mode), as shown in FIG. 157(a), a total of 10 values from "0" to "9" are set as the random number values for the jackpot (value of the jackpot random number counter C1), and the probability of winning the jackpot in low probability mode is set to 1/300. In addition, a total of 10 values from "10" to "19" are set as the random number values for the special failure result, and the probability of the special failure result in low probability mode is set to 1/300. The other random numbers are assigned to the normal failure result, and the probability of the normal failure result in low probability mode is set to 2980/3000.

The winning/losing table for the second special design (for low probability mode) is referenced when a winning/losing lottery is conducted based on the winning of the second operating port 63 when the lottery mode is the low probability mode. In this winning/losing table for the second special design (for low probability mode), as shown in FIG. 157(b), a total of 10 values from "0" to "9" are set as the random number values for the jackpot (value of the jackpot random number counter C1), and the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability mode is set to 1/300. In addition, a total of 30 values from "10" to "39" are set as the random number values for the special failure result. In other words, the probability of a special failure result in the low probability mode is set to 1/100, which is different from the probability of the first special design. The other random numbers are assigned to the normal failure result, and the probability of a normal failure result in the low probability mode is set to 2960/3000.

The winning/losing table (for high probability mode) for the first and second special designs is referenced when a winning/losing lottery is conducted based on winning the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63 when the lottery mode is the high probability mode. In this winning/losing table (for high probability mode) for the first and second special designs, as shown in FIG. 157(c), a total of 50 random numbers from "0" to "49" are set as the random numbers that result in a jackpot, and the probability of winning a jackpot in high probability mode is set to 1/60. Note that in the winning/losing table (for high probability mode) for the first and second special designs, no special losing results are set as lottery results, and all values other than the random number value for the jackpot are assigned to normal losing results. The probability of a normal losing result is set to 59/60.

<Special game play type table>
The special game play type table for this modified example will be explained with reference to Figure 158.

As the jackpot type table, a jackpot type table for the first special chart (Fig. 158(a)) and a jackpot type table for the second special chart (Fig. 158(b)) are set.

As shown in FIG. 158(a), in the jackpot type table for the first special chart, the selectable jackpot types are set as a 4R variable jackpot result and a 4R normal jackpot result. Both of these jackpot results result in four rounds of play being performed.

The 4R guaranteed jackpot result is a jackpot result that transitions to a high probability game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) after the end of the open/close execution mode. In this case, the high probability game state continues until the number of game plays executed after the open/close execution mode reaches a predetermined first upper limit number (e.g., 100 times). When the first upper limit number is reached, the high probability game state ends and transitions to a normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode).

The 4R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result that transitions to the first time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) after the open/close execution mode ends. In this case, the first time-saving game state continues until the number of game plays executed after the open/close execution mode reaches a predetermined second upper limit number (e.g., 1000 times). When the second upper limit number is reached, the first time-saving game state ends and transitions to the normal game state.

In the jackpot type table for the first special chart, "0" to "64" on the jackpot type counter C2 correspond to a 4R special jackpot result, and "65" to "99" correspond to a 4R normal jackpot result. In other words, the probability of being assigned to a 4R special jackpot result is set to 65%, and the probability of being assigned to a 4R normal jackpot result is set to 35%.

As shown in FIG. 158(b), in the jackpot type table for the second special chart, a 10R special jackpot result and a 10R normal jackpot result are set as selectable jackpot types. Both of these jackpot results result in 10 rounds of play being performed.

The 10R special jackpot result is a jackpot result that transitions to a high probability game state after the opening and closing execution mode ends. In this case, the high probability game state continues until the number of game plays executed after the opening and closing execution mode reaches a predetermined third upper limit number (e.g., 100 times). In addition, the 10R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result that transitions to a first time-saving game state after the opening and closing execution mode ends. In this case, the first time-saving game state continues until the number of game plays executed after the opening and closing execution mode reaches a predetermined fourth upper limit number (e.g., 1000 times).

In the jackpot type table for the second special chart, "0" to "64" on the jackpot type counter C2 correspond to a 10R special jackpot result, and "65" to "99" correspond to a 10R normal jackpot result. In other words, the probability of being assigned to a 10R special jackpot result is set to 65%, and the probability of being assigned to a 10R normal jackpot result is set to 35%.

In this modified example, a type table for special misses is not set. In other words, there is only one type of special miss result in both the first special chart and the second special chart. However, the third time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) to which the player transitions upon winning the special miss result is configured to be different between the case where a special miss result is obtained in the win/lose lottery for the first special chart and the case where a special miss result is obtained in the win/lose lottery for the second special chart.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 158(c), if the first special symbol lottery results in a special miss, the game moves to the third time-saving game state A, and if the second special symbol lottery results in a special miss, the game moves to the third time-saving game state B. The third time-saving game state A continues until the number of times the special symbol game is played after the transition to the third time-saving game state A reaches a predetermined fifth upper limit (e.g., 100 times). The third time-saving game state B continues until the number of times the special symbol game is played after the transition to the third time-saving game state B reaches a sixth upper limit (e.g., 10 times), which is less than the fifth upper limit. Note that, since a special miss is one of the miss results, the opening and closing execution mode is not executed. In other words, if a special miss occurs, the game moves to the third time-saving game state A or B without going through the opening and closing execution mode.

<Third time-saving gaming state transition process>
The third time-saving game state transition process according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 159. This process is executed in step Sb3202 of the special game play control process (FIG. 145) by the main control device 162, and is executed instead of the third time-saving game state transition process of FIG. 148. In FIG. 159, the same step numbers are given to the processes similar to those in FIG. 148, and their descriptions are omitted or simplified. The third time-saving game state transition process is executed after the high-frequency support mode update/end process of step Sb511.

First, in step Sb3401, it is determined whether or not a special miss flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. If the special miss flag is set, that is, if the result of this special drawing is a special miss, the process proceeds to step Sb3402, where it is determined whether or not a high probability flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

If the high probability flag is not set, step Sb4101 determines whether or not the third support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The third support flag is for the MPU 312 to know that the third time-shortened game state is in effect. If the third support flag is not set, i.e., the game is not in the third time-shortened game state, step Sb4102 determines whether or not the first support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The first support flag is for the MPU 312 to know that the game is in the first time-shortened game state.

If the first support flag is set, i.e., if the game is in the first time-saving game state, the process proceeds to step Sb4103, where the first support flag set in the various flag storage area 314e is cleared. This ends the first time-saving game state.

After execution of step Sb4103 or if a negative judgment is made in step Sb4102 (if the first support flag is not set and the game is not in the first time-saving game state), the third support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e in step Sb4104. This causes a transition to the third time-saving game state.

In step Sb4105, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. If the second special symbol flag is not set, i.e., if the current special miss result is a special miss result for the first special symbol, in order to transition to the third time-saving game state A (Fig. 158(c)), in step Sb4106, a value corresponding to the fifth upper limit number of times (e.g., 100 times) is set in the support counter area SC of RAM 314.

In step Sb4107, a process for ending the normal game is executed. This process is the same as the process of steps Sb1411 to Sb1415 in the process for transitioning to the second time-saving game state in FIG. 119. In this case, a specific fixed display time longer than the normal fixed display time is set as the fixed display time for the special game round (FIG. 149). This specific fixed display time may be longer (for example, 0.8 sec) than the fixed display time of the normal game round that is forcibly terminated (for example, 0.5 sec) as in the second embodiment above, or may be longer (for example, 4 sec) than the total period (for example, 1.5 sec) of the fixed display time of the normal game round that is forcibly terminated, the variable display period (for example, 0.5 sec) of the normal game round corresponding to the second time-saving game state, and the fixed display time (for example, 0.5 sec) of the normal game round corresponding to the second time-saving game state as in the second modified example above.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sb4105 (if the second special chart flag is set), i.e., if the current special miss result is a special miss result for the second special chart, in order to transition to the third time-saving game state B (Figure 158 (c)), in step Sb4108, a value corresponding to the sixth upper limit number of times (e.g., 10 times) is set in the support counter area SC.

Here, in this modified example, even when the first support flag is set, the third support flag is set, and if a special miss occurs during the first time-saving game state, transition to the third time-saving game state is permitted. Also, since the first time-saving game state is a game state in which winning the second operating port 63 corresponding to the second special symbol is possible or easy, a special miss that occurs during the first time-saving game state will be a special miss for the second special symbol. Therefore, the third time-saving game state to which transition occurs during the first time-saving game state is the third time-saving game state B in which the remaining number of times is set to the sixth upper limit number of times (for example, 10 times).

In this way, it is possible to transition to the third time-shortened game state B when there are remaining plays in the first time-shortened game state, and in that case, in step Sb4108, the value of the support counter area SC is rewritten to a value corresponding to the remaining plays in the third time-shortened game state B, regardless of the value at that time (the remaining plays in the first time-shortened game state). Therefore, no matter which special play in the first time-shortened game state transitions to the third time-shortened game state, the remaining plays thereafter are changed to the sixth upper limit.

The sixth upper limit number of times (e.g., 10 times) is less than the first upper limit number of times (e.g., 1000 times), which is the remaining number of times set at the beginning of the first time-saving game state, so unless the third time-saving game state B is entered when the remaining number of times in the first time-saving game state is less than the sixth upper limit number, the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state will decrease. In other words, the longer it is possible to avoid winning the special losing result, the longer the time-saving game state can be continued and the game can be played to an advantage. In other words, when comparing the case where the special losing result occurs in the first time-saving game state with the case where it does not occur, the former is configured to be more disadvantageous to the player than the latter.

In addition, in this modified example, since a special failure result is also set for the first special chart, a special failure result may occur during the normal game state. In this case, the game transitions to the third time-saving game state A, and the support mode switches from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode. In other words, if a special failure result occurs during the normal game state, it is more advantageous for the player than if a special failure result does not occur.

After execution of step Sb4107 or step Sb4108, in step Sb3408, a command to start the third time-shortened game state is set as the command to be sent to the performance control device 143, and then the process for transitioning to the third time-shortened game state is terminated.

In addition, if a positive judgment is made in step Sb4101 (if the third support flag is set), the process for transition to the third time-saving game state is terminated without executing the processes of steps Sb4102 to Sb3408. In other words, even if a special miss occurs in the third time-saving game state, re-transition to the third time-saving game state is restricted, and the number of remaining plays at that time is maintained.

<Special chart game time fluctuation display time table>
The special game number control process and the variable start process performed by the main control device 162 are the same as those in the above modified example 3 (Fig. 145, Fig. 146), but as described above, in this modified example, when a special miss occurs in the first time-saving game state, the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state is reduced, and the variable display time table is set accordingly. The variable display time table for this modified example will be described below with reference to Figs. 160 and 161.

In this modified example, at least a variable display time table for a special miss in the first special chart (for normal game state), a variable display time table for a jackpot in the second special chart (for first time-saving game state), a variable display time table for a normal miss in the second special chart (for first time-saving game state), a variable display time table for a special miss in the second special chart (for first time-saving game state), a variable display time table for a jackpot in the second special chart (for third time-saving game state B), a variable display time table for a normal miss in the second special chart (for third time-saving game state B), and a variable display time table for a special miss in the second special chart (for third time-saving game state B).

The variable display time table for special misses in the first special chart (for normal gameplay) is referenced when the result of the win/lose lottery in the first special chart is a special miss in a normal gameplay situation. In this variable display time table, as shown in FIG. 160(a), the variable pattern Y1 (for example, 15 sec) is configured to be selected. The variable pattern Y1 corresponds to a special reach miss performance. In other words, when a variable start command corresponding to the variable pattern Y1 is sent to the performance control device 143, the symbol display device 75 executes a special reach miss performance as a performance for a game round. The special reach miss performance notifies the player of a special miss result, and is the same as the special reach miss performance (FIGS. 153(b)-(d)) in the above-mentioned modified example 3.

The variable display time table for the big win in the second special chart (for the first time-saving game state) is referenced when the result of the win/lose lottery in the second special chart is a big win in the first time-saving game state. In this variable display time table, as shown in FIG. 160(b), when the value of the variable type counter CS is between "0" and "79", one of the variable patterns 21A to 23A is selected, and when the value of the variable type counter CS is between "80" and "99", variable pattern Y2 (for example, 60 sec) is selected. Variable patterns 21A to 23A are the same as variable patterns 21A to 23A in FIG. 113(c). Variable pattern Y2 corresponds to specific effect A as an effect for a play round. Details of specific effect A will be described later.

The variable display time table for normal misses in the second special chart (for the first time-saving game state) is referenced when the result of the win/lose lottery in the second special chart is a normal miss result in the first time-saving game state. In this variable display time table, as shown in FIG. 160(c), when the value of the variable type counter CS is "0" to "79", one of the variable patterns 21H to 24H is selected, and when the value of the variable type counter CS is "80" to "99", variable pattern Y3 (for example, 60 sec) is selected. Variable patterns 21H to 24H are the same as variable patterns 21H to 24H in FIG. 113(d). Variable pattern Y3 corresponds to specific effect B as a play round effect. Details of specific effect B will be described later.

The variable display time table for special misses on the second special chart (for the first time-saving game state) is referenced when the result of the win/lose lottery on the second special chart is a special miss result in the first time-saving game state. This variable display time table is configured to select variable pattern Y4 (e.g., 60 sec), as shown in FIG. 160(d). Variable pattern Y4 corresponds to specific presentation C, which is a presentation for a play round. Details of specific presentation C will be described later.

The variable display time table for the jackpot in the second special chart (for the third time-saving game state B) is referenced when the result of the win/lose lottery in the second special chart is a jackpot result in the third time-saving game state B. In this variable display time table, as shown in FIG. 161(a), the variable pattern Y5 (for example, 60 sec) is configured to be selected as the variable pattern. Variable pattern Y5 corresponds to specific effect D as an effect for a play round. Details of specific effect D will be described later.

The variable display time table for normal misses in the second special chart (for the third time-saving game state B) is referenced when the result of the winning/losing lottery in the second special chart is a normal miss in the third time-saving game state B. In this variable display time table, as shown in FIG. 161(b), if a normal miss occurs in the first to ninth special chart play times after transitioning to the third time-saving game state B, variable display time table is configured so that variable display pattern Y6 (e.g., 8 sec or 4 sec) is selected, and if a normal miss occurs in the final play time (tenth play time) of the third time-saving game state B, variable display pattern Y7 (e.g., 60 sec) is selected. Variable display pattern Y6 corresponds to a complete miss effect, and variable display pattern Y7 corresponds to a specific effect E as an effect for play times. Details of the specific effect E will be described later.

The variable display time table for special misses in the second special chart (for the third time-saving game state B) is referenced when the result of the win/lose lottery in the second special chart is a special miss in the third time-saving game state B. In this variable display time table, as shown in FIG. 161(c), if a special miss occurs in the first to ninth special chart play times after transitioning to the third time-saving game state B, variable display time table is configured so that variable pattern Y8 (e.g., 8 sec or 4 sec) is selected, and if a normal miss occurs in the final play time (tenth play) of the third time-saving game state B, variable pattern Y9 (e.g., 60 sec) is selected. Variable pattern Y8 corresponds to a complete miss effect, and variable pattern Y9 corresponds to a specific effect E as an effect for play times.

<Performance setting process>
The performance setting process according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 162. This process is started by the performance control device 143 at a predetermined cycle (for example, every 2 msec), and is executed in place of the performance setting process in Fig. 126. In Fig. 162, the same processes as those in Fig. 126 are given the same step numbers, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sb2301, it is determined whether or not an ending command has been received from the main control device 162. If an ending command has been received, in step Sb4201, the first transition effect setting process is executed to set a transition effect corresponding to a transition to a high probability gaming state or a first time-saving gaming state.

After execution of step Sb4201 or if a negative judgment is made in step Sb2301 (if an ending command has not been received), in step Sb4202, it is judged whether or not a third time-shortened play state start command has been received from the main control device 162. If a third time-shortened play state start command has been received, in step Sb4203, a third transition effect setting process is executed to set a transition effect corresponding to the transition to the third time-shortened play state.

After execution of step Sb4203 or if a negative judgment is made in step Sb4202 (if the third time-shortened game state command has not been received), step Sb2305 judges whether any game state end command has been received. If a game state end command has been received, step Sb2306 executes an end effect setting process to set an end effect corresponding to the end of the high probability game state, the first time-shortened game state, or the third time-shortened game state.

After execution of step Sb2306 or if a negative judgment is made in step Sb2305 (if no game state end command has been received), in step Sb4204, a special pattern change display process is executed to display changes in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75. In step Sb2308, other processes are executed, and then the performance setting process is terminated.

<First transition performance setting process>
The first transition performance setting process of step Sb4201 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 163 (a).

First, in step Sb4301, it is determined whether or not a situation exists in which a transition to a high probability gaming state will occur. In other words, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode for which the ending command was sent corresponds to a jackpot result that will cause a transition to a high probability gaming state. This determination is made based on the type command sent from the main control device 162.

If a transition to a high probability game state occurs, step Sb4302 executes a process for setting effects for the high probability game state. In this process, for example, after a start effect for a high probability game state similar to that shown in FIG. 128(a) is executed, a game turn effect corresponding to the high probability game state is executed. The game turn effect for the high probability game state has a different aspect from the game turn effect for the normal game state, and for example, the background image displayed at the back of each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 is set to a different display color or display content from that for the normal game state.

In step Sb4303, a value corresponding to the first upper limit number (e.g., 100 times) is set in the remaining number counter area of RAM 344. In step Sb4304, a setting is made to start displaying the remaining number image 472 (e.g., FIG. 128(a)). In step Sb4305, a remaining number display flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344, and then the first transition performance setting process is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb4301 (if the situation does not result in a transition to the high probability play state), the process proceeds to step Sb4306, where it is determined whether or not a transition to the first time-saving play state occurs. In other words, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode for which the ending command was sent corresponds to a jackpot result that will result in a transition to the first time-saving play state.

If a transition to the first time-shortened game state occurs, step Sb4307 executes a process for setting effects for the first time-shortened game state. In this process, for example, after a start effect for the first time-shortened game state similar to that shown in FIG. 128(b) is executed, a game round effect corresponding to the first time-shortened game state is set to be executed. The game round effect for the first time-shortened game state has a different form from the game round effect for the normal game state or the high probability game state, and for example, the background image displayed on the back side of each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 is set to a different display color or display content from that for the normal game state or the high probability game state.

In addition, in the start effect or play effect for the first time-saving game state in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 163(b), instead of the remaining number of times image 472, a state notification image 450 is displayed to notify that the chance time (first time-saving game state) is in progress. In other words, when the first time-saving game state is in effect, the remaining number of times is not displayed.

After execution of step Sb4307 or if a negative judgment is made in step Sb4306 (if the situation does not lead to a transition to the first time-saving game state), the first transition effect setting process is terminated.

<Third transition performance setting process>
The third transition performance setting process of step Sb4203 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 164 (a).

First, in step Sb4401, a process for setting the effects for the third time-saving game state is executed. In this process, after the start effect for the third time-saving game state is executed, the game round effect corresponding to the third time-saving game state is set to be executed. The game round effect for the third time-saving game state has a different form from the game round effect for the normal game state, the high probability game state, and the first time-saving game state.

In step Sb4402, a value corresponding to the upper limit number of times to which the third time-shortened game state is to be transitioned is set in the remaining number counter area of RAM344. Specifically, if the transition is to the third time-shortened game state A, a value corresponding to the fifth upper limit number of times (e.g., 100 times) is set, and if the transition is to the third time-shortened game state B, a value corresponding to the sixth upper limit number of times (e.g., 10 times) is set.

In step Sb4403, the remaining number of times image 472 (e.g., FIG. 128(a)) is set to start displaying. When transitioning to the third time-shortened game state during the first time-shortened game state, as shown in FIG. 164(b), the state notification image 450 is changed to the remaining number of times image 472 in conjunction with the transition to the third time-shortened game state. In other words, the remaining number of times is switched from a state in which it is not displayed to a state in which it is displayed.

In step Sb4404, the remaining number display flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344, and then the third transition performance setting process is terminated.

<Special chart change display processing>
The special chart change display processing of step Sb4204 will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 165. In Fig. 165, the same process as the special chart change display processing of Fig. 132 is given the same step number, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sb2701, it is determined whether a game round is being played. If a game round is not being played, the process proceeds to step Sb2702, where it is determined whether a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control device 162.

If a fluctuation start command has been received, the process proceeds to step Sb4501, and a fluctuation start process is executed to start the game round presentation on the symbol display device 75. Here, the fluctuation start process is explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 166(a).

First, in step Sb4601, the change start command from the main control device 162 is analyzed, and the change pattern for the current special game round is grasped. In step Sb4602, the game round performance corresponding to the grasped change pattern is set to be executed. The correspondence between the change pattern and the game round performance is explained with reference to FIG. 166(b).

If the grasped fluctuation pattern is fluctuation pattern Y1, it is set so that a special reach miss effect is executed. Fluctuation pattern Y1 is set when a special miss result occurs in the first special chart (when a special miss result occurs during normal game play). In addition, the special reach miss effect is the same as the special reach miss effect in the above-mentioned modification example 3 (Fig. 153 (b) to (d)).

When the grasped fluctuation pattern is fluctuation pattern Y2, it is set so that specific presentation A is executed. Fluctuation pattern Y2 is set as part of the case where a jackpot result is obtained during the first time-saving game state. Specific presentation A is a presentation that notifies the result of a jackpot, and is configured, for example, so that after a reach display is performed using upper pattern row Z1 and lower pattern row Z3, a predetermined battle presentation is performed to see whether or not the warrior character can defeat the enemy character (Figure 167 (a)). In specific presentation A, an ending in which the warrior character wins in the battle presentation is displayed, and then the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a stopped jackpot combination.

When the grasped fluctuation pattern is fluctuation pattern Y3, it is set so that specific effect B is executed. Fluctuation pattern Y3 is set as part of the cases where a normal miss occurs during the first time-saving gaming state. Specific effect B is an effect that notifies of a miss result, and is an effect related to specific effect A. In specific effect B, an ending in which the warrior character and the enemy character end in a draw is displayed in the battle effect described above after the reach display (Figure 167 (b)), and then the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a combination that is not a reach.

If the grasped fluctuation pattern is fluctuation pattern Y4, it is set so that specific effect C is executed. Fluctuation pattern Y4 is set when a special miss occurs during the first time-saving game state. Specific effect C is an effect that notifies the transition to the third time-saving game state, and is related to specific effects A and B. In specific effect C, an ending in which the warrior character is defeated in the battle effect described above after the reach display is displayed (Figure 167 (c)), and then the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed stopped in a reach-miss combination.

If the recognized fluctuation pattern is Y5, then it is set so that specific effect D is executed. Fluctuation pattern Y5 is set if a jackpot result is achieved during the third time-saving game state. Specific effect D is an effect that notifies the result of a jackpot, and is configured, for example, so that after a reach display is performed using upper pattern row Z1 and lower pattern row Z3, a revenge battle effect is performed in which the warrior character challenges the enemy character who was defeated in specific effect C again (Figure 167 (d)). In specific effect D, an ending in which the warrior character wins the revenge battle effect is displayed, and then the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a stopped jackpot combination.

When the grasped fluctuation pattern is fluctuation pattern Y7 or fluctuation pattern Y9, it is set so that specific effect E is executed. Fluctuation pattern Y7 is set when a normal miss occurs in the final play round (the 10th special symbol play round) of the third time-saving play state, and fluctuation pattern Y9 is set when a special miss occurs in the final play round of the third time-saving play state. Specific effect E is an effect that notifies the miss result and the end of the third time-saving play state, and is related to specific effect D. In specific effect E, an ending in which the warrior character is defeated in the revenge battle effect after the reach display is displayed (Figure 167 (d)), and then the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed stopped in a reach-miss combination.

If the grasped fluctuation pattern is fluctuation pattern Y6 or fluctuation pattern Y8, it is set so that a complete miss effect is executed. Fluctuation pattern Y6 is set when a normal miss result occurs in a play round (the first to ninth special chart play rounds) other than the final play round in the third time-saving play state, and fluctuation pattern Y8 is set when a special miss result occurs in a play round other than the final play round in the third time-saving play state.

Returning to the explanation of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 166(a)), after execution of step Sb4602, in step Sb4603, a stop result command and a pattern command are sent as targets for transmission to the display control device 350. The pattern command is a presentation pattern command that specifies the presentation for the game round to be executed. In accordance with the received command, the display control device 350 controls the pattern display device 75 so that the patterns in each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 stop with the specified stop result, or a presentation for the game round is executed with the specified presentation pattern. After execution of step Sb4603, the fluctuation start process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the special chart change display process (FIG. 165), after executing the change start process of step Sb4501, in step Sb4502, it is determined whether the current game state is a high probability game state or a third time-saving game state. If it is a high probability game state or a third time-saving game state, in step Sb2704, a process for updating the remaining number of times display is executed. In the process for updating the remaining number of times display, the remaining number of times in the first time-saving game state, etc. is updated, or the display contents of the remaining number of times image 472 are updated. After executing step Sb2704 or if a negative judgment is made in step Sb4502 (if it is not a high probability game state or a third time-saving game state), the special chart change display process is terminated.

<About the game state flow>
The flow of game states in this modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 168. First, the flow from the normal game state to the third time-shortened game state will be described with reference to Fig. 168(a).

In the normal game state, the ball is played by hitting the left hand, and the game is played mainly by a winning/losing lottery for the first special symbol, which is triggered by the ball entering the first operating port 62. If the winning/losing lottery result for the first special symbol in the normal game state is a special missing result, the game transitions to the third time-saving game state A, and the support mode is switched from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode. In the high-frequency support mode, winning the second operating port 63 becomes possible or easy, and the player can play without losing too many balls, and can also participate in a type lottery that favors jackpot types. Therefore, in the normal game state, a special missing result transitions the game state to one that is advantageous to the player.

The upper limit number of times for the third time-saving game state A (fifth upper limit number of times) is set to 100 times. Here, in this modified example, the transition judgment to the third time-saving game state is made after the update of the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state is finished, so after switching to the third time-saving game state, the remaining number of times can be subtracted from the next special game number of times. Therefore, after transitioning to the third time-saving game state A, it is possible to preferably secure 100 times as the number of special game numbers that can be played in that game state.

As described above, if a special miss occurs during normal gameplay, it is advantageous for the player, so during normal gameplay, it becomes possible to play while aiming not only for a jackpot but also for a special miss.

Next, the flow of game states from the first time-saving game state will be explained with reference to FIG. 168(b).

In the first time-saving play state, the game is played by hitting the right hand, and the game is played mainly by drawing a lottery to see whether the second special symbol will win or lose, which is triggered by the entry of the ball into the second operating port 63. If the lottery result for the second special symbol in the first time-saving play state is a jackpot result, the game transitions to the open/close execution mode. In this case, the symbol display device 75 notifies the player of the jackpot result through specific performance A, and a performance is executed in which the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed in a jackpot combination, along with a battle performance that ends with the warrior character defeating the enemy character.

If the result of the lottery for the second special chart in the first time-saving game state is a special miss, the first time-saving game state transitions to the third time-saving game state B. As a result, the number of times remaining in the time-saving game state is changed to the sixth upper limit number (e.g., 10 times), which is the upper limit number of times in the third time-saving game state B. Since this sixth upper limit number is much less than the first upper limit number (e.g., 1000 times), which is the upper limit number of times in the first time-saving game state, the number of times remaining in the time-saving game state is reduced. In other words, at the beginning of the transition to the first time-saving game state, up to 1000 times of play in the time-saving game state are allowed, but if a special miss is drawn during that time, the remaining number is reduced to 10 times. For this reason, if a special miss is drawn in the first time-saving game state, it is disadvantageous for the player.

Furthermore, when transitioning to the third time-saving play state B, regardless of the number of times remaining in the first time-saving play state at that time, the upper limit of the number of times in the third time-saving play state is set as the number of times remaining in the subsequent time-saving play state. In this way, regardless of how many times the special pattern play has been played since transitioning to the first time-saving play state when the special miss result is the result of the winning/losing lottery for the second special pattern, the number of times remaining in the time-saving play state will be 10, so the later the special miss result is obtained after transitioning to the first time-saving play state, the longer the duration of the time-saving play state can be extended. For this reason, players can play in the hope of not drawing a special miss result at all, or of drawing one as late as possible.

When a special miss occurs during the first time-saving game state, the symbol display device 75 notifies the player of the special miss result through a specific effect C, and a battle effect is executed in which the warrior character is defeated by the enemy character, along with an effect in which the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a stop state in a miss-reach combination. After the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a stop state, a transition effect is executed to a revenge battle effect mode in which the player re-challenges the defeated enemy character.

If the result of the lottery for the second special symbol during the first time-saving game state is a normal miss, the game state does not change and the first time-saving game state is maintained. In this case, the symbol display device 75 executes a complete miss effect, various reach miss effects, and specific effect B.

In special effect B, a battle scene is played in which the warrior character and the enemy character end in a draw, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a combination that is not a reach. This special effect B is configured so that it is impossible or difficult to distinguish from special effects A and B until the end is displayed, and in the middle of the scene, it creates a sense of expectation that it may be a big win, and also a sense of excitement that it may result in a special miss and the number of times remaining in the time-saving play state will be reduced.

The reason why the outcome of special effect C, which is executed in the case of a special miss, is a loss, while the outcome of special effect B, which is executed in the case of a normal miss, is a draw, with the former being a less favorable impression than the latter, is that in this modified example, a special miss result in the special chart winning/losing lottery is more disadvantageous to the player than a normal miss result.

If the result of the lottery for the second special symbol in the third time-saving game state B is a jackpot result, the game will transition to the open/close execution mode. In this case, the symbol display device 75 will notify the player of the jackpot result through a specific effect D, and will execute an effect in which the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed in a jackpot combination along with a revenge battle effect in which the warrior character defeats the enemy character.

The reason why the revenge battle presentation is performed in the third time-saving game state B is that the game state has not been demoted to the normal game state, but rather corresponds to the fact that the time-saving game state is still continuing, even though there are only 10 turns remaining. This configuration gives the player the impression that there is still a chance, which can reduce disappointment and motivate them.

If the result of the lottery for the second special symbol in the first to ninth special symbol play times in the third time-saving play state B is a normal miss result or a special miss result, no transition in play state occurs and the third time-saving play state is maintained. In this case, a complete miss effect is executed on the symbol display device 75.

If the result of the lottery for the second special symbol in the final play round (the 10th special symbol play round) in the third time-saving play state is a normal miss result or a special miss result, the third time-saving play state ends. In this case, the symbol display device 75 notifies the player of the miss result and the end of the third time-saving play state through a specific effect E. In the specific effect E, a revenge battle effect is executed in which the warrior character is defeated by the enemy character, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a stop combination that is a miss.

Furthermore, after these effects, a number notification effect is executed in that special game round, which notifies the player of the total number of special game rounds executed in the time-saving game state (the total number of special game rounds executed through the first time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state). By visually checking this effect, the player can grasp the performance in this time-saving game state.

The modified example described above has the following advantages:

The system is configured to allow a transition to the third time-shortened game state if a special miss occurs in the first time-shortened game state, and is configured so that transitioning to the third time-shortened game state is more disadvantageous to the player than continuing in the first time-shortened game state without transitioning to the third time-shortened game state.

According to this configuration, when the player goes through the open/close execution mode and transitions to the first time-saving game state, the player can experience the thrill of being demoted to an unfavorable state depending on the subsequent game development, and it is possible to add fun that goes beyond just aiming to win the jackpot result. However, while such a thrill can be provided, if the player's disappointment when demoted to an unfavorable state is too strong, it may weaken the player's desire to play thereafter, which may have the opposite effect. In this respect, in this configuration, the player is demoted to an unfavorable state by transitioning to the third time-saving game state with fewer remaining times, so that even if such a demotion occurs, the player can still have a chance to win a jackpot in the time-saving game state. This reduces the player's disappointment compared to when transitioning to the normal game state. In particular, in a configuration in which the type judgment when the jackpot result is obtained in the winning/losing lottery for the second special chart is more favorable than that for the first special chart, the game period for the second special chart is secured even if the player is demoted to an unfavorable state, so the above effect can be well demonstrated. This makes it possible to provide a game that allows players to experience the thrills described above while preventing a significant loss of enthusiasm for the game.

If a special miss occurs during the first time-saving game state, the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state is set to the maximum number of times in the third time-saving game state regardless of the number of times remaining in the first time-saving game state at that time.

According to this configuration, the later the timing of the special miss result in the first time-saving game state, the greater the total number of times the time-saving game state can be played, which is advantageous for the player. This increases the fun of avoiding the special miss result when playing in the first time-saving game state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

When in the first time-saving game state, the remaining number of plays is not displayed.

For example, if the configuration indicates the number of remaining times in the first time-saving game state, the player can know how many times there were before the special failure result occurred, and therefore, when a special failure result occurs and the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state is set to the upper limit number of times in the third time-saving game state, the player can easily determine how many times has been reduced as a result. In this regard, by not indicating the number of remaining times in the first time-saving game state, it is possible to make it impossible or difficult for the player to determine the remaining number of times before the special failure result occurred. This makes it difficult for the player to determine the reduction in the remaining number of times when transitioning to the third time-saving game state, and even if the reduction is large, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming too disappointed and losing their motivation to play.

In the above case, when the game transitions to the third time-saving game state, the remaining number of times is clearly displayed. This allows the player to easily understand that the game has transitioned to the third time-saving game state, and the number of times remaining in the time-saving game state after the transition to the third time-saving game state.

In this modified example, there is only one type of first time-saving game state, but in order to conceal the remaining number of times in the first time-saving game state and make it difficult for the player to know the remaining number of times before a special miss occurs, it is preferable to provide multiple types of first time-saving game states with different upper limit numbers. By configuring in this way, it becomes difficult for the player to know or predict the upper limit number of times in the first time-saving game state in the first place, and the above effect can be more effectively exerted. In that case, by configuring each of these first time-saving game states in such a way that it is impossible or difficult for the player to distinguish between them, it is possible to further strengthen the above effect.

There are two types of miss results: special miss results and normal miss results. If the result of the special chart lottery is a special miss result, the player will be demoted to a disadvantageous state (transition to the third time-saving game state).

According to this configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not a player will be demoted to a disadvantageous state for each game round. This allows the player to experience the thrill of the possibility of being demoted in each game round, making it possible to enhance the enjoyment of such thrills in the game.

Even in the normal game state, a special miss can occur, and when a special miss occurs, the game transitions to the third time-saving game state, so that when a special miss occurs during the normal game state, it is advantageous for the player, unlike when a special miss occurs during the first time-saving game state.

With this configuration, even if the same special failure result is won, the advantage or disadvantage can be reversed depending on the game state when the result is won, which can add an element of surprise. In addition, it is possible to prevent players from becoming fixed on a game in which they simply avoid the occurrence of a special failure result, which can lead to diversification of the game.

In this case, the upper limit of the number of times to enter the third time-saving game state, which is entered when a special miss occurs in the normal game state, is set to be greater than the upper limit of the number of times to enter the third time-saving game state, which is entered when a special miss occurs in the first time-saving game state. This makes it possible to highlight the superiority of the third time-saving game state entered from the normal game state, and to increase the excitement of aiming to win the special miss in the normal game state.

<Modification 5>
In this modified example, when a special miss occurs during the first time-saving game state, it is determined whether the first time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state is to be prioritized. The configuration of this modified example will be described below with reference to Figures 169 to 177.

<Special game winning/losing table>
The hit/miss table for the first special symbol (for low probability mode), the hit/miss table for the second special symbol (for low probability mode), and the hit/miss table for the first special symbol and the second special symbol (for high probability mode) according to this modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 169. These hit/miss tables are stored in the hit/miss table storage area 313a of the ROM 313.

The win/lose table for the first special symbol (for low probability mode) is referenced when a win/lose lottery is conducted based on winning the first operating port 62 when the lottery mode is the low probability mode. In this win/lose table for the first special symbol (for low probability mode), as shown in FIG. 169(a), a total of 10 values from "0" to "9" are set as the random number value for the jackpot (value of the jackpot random number counter C1) and the probability of winning the jackpot in low probability mode is set to 1/300. Other random numbers are assigned to normal miss results, and the probability of a normal miss result in low probability mode is set to 2990/3000. Note that in the win/lose table for the first special symbol (for low probability mode), a special miss result is not set as a lottery result.

The winning/losing table for the second special chart (for low probability mode) is referenced when a winning/losing lottery is conducted based on the winning of the second operating port 63 when the lottery mode is the low probability mode. In this winning/losing table for the second special chart (for low probability mode), as shown in FIG. 169(b), a total of 10 values from "0" to "9" are set as the random number values for the jackpot (value of the jackpot random number counter C1), and the probability of winning the jackpot in low probability mode is set to 1/300. In addition, a total of 30 values from "10" to "39" are set as the random number values for the special failure result, and the probability of the special failure result in low probability mode is set to 1/100. The other random numbers are assigned to the normal failure result, and the probability of the normal failure result in low probability mode is set to 2960/3000.

The winning/losing table (for high probability mode) for the first and second special designs is referred to when a winning/losing lottery is conducted based on winning the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63 when the lottery mode is the high probability mode. In this winning/losing table (for high probability mode) for the first and second special designs, as shown in FIG. 169(c), a total of 50 random numbers from "0" to "49" are set as the random numbers that result in a jackpot, and the probability of winning a jackpot in high probability mode is set to 1/60. Note that in the winning/losing table (for high probability mode) for the first and second special designs, a special losing result is not set as the lottery result, and all values other than the random number value for the jackpot are assigned to the normal losing result. The probability of a normal losing result is set to 59/60.

<Special game play type table>
The special game play type table for this modified example will be explained with reference to Figure 170.

As the jackpot type table, a jackpot type table for the first special chart (Fig. 170(a)) and a jackpot type table for the second special chart (Fig. 170(b)) are set.

As shown in FIG. 170(a), in the jackpot type table for the first special chart, the selectable jackpot types are set as 4R special jackpot result, 4R normal jackpot result A, and 4R normal jackpot result B. All of these jackpot results result in four rounds of play being performed.

The 4R guaranteed jackpot result is a jackpot result that transitions to a high probability game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) after the end of the open/close execution mode. In this case, the high probability game state continues until the number of game plays executed after the open/close execution mode reaches a predetermined first upper limit number (e.g., 100 times). When the first upper limit number is reached, the high probability game state ends and transitions to a normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode).

4R normal jackpot result A is a jackpot result that transitions to the first time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) after the open/close execution mode ends. In this case, the first time-saving game state continues until the number of game plays executed after the open/close execution mode reaches a predetermined second upper limit number (e.g., 70 times). When the second upper limit number is reached, the first time-saving game state ends and transitions to the normal game state.

4R normal jackpot result B is a jackpot result that transitions to the first time-saving game state after the open/close execution mode ends. In this case, the first time-saving game state continues until the number of game plays executed after the open/close execution mode reaches a third upper limit (e.g., 100 times), which is greater than the second upper limit. When the third upper limit is reached, the first time-saving game state ends and transitions to the normal game state.

In the jackpot type table for the first special chart, "0" to "69" on the jackpot type counter C2 correspond to a 4R special jackpot result, "70" to "89" correspond to a 4R normal jackpot result A, and "90" to "99" correspond to a 4R normal jackpot result B. In other words, the probability of being assigned to a 4R special jackpot result is set to 70%, the probability of being assigned to a 4R normal jackpot result A is set to 20%, and the probability of being assigned to a 4R normal jackpot result B is set to 10%.

As shown in FIG. 170(b), in the jackpot type table for the second special chart, the selectable jackpot types are set as a 10R special jackpot result, a 10R normal jackpot result A, and a 10R normal jackpot result B. All of these jackpot results result in 10 rounds of play being performed.

The 10R probability jackpot result is a jackpot result that transitions to a high probability game state after the open/close execution mode ends. In this case, the high probability game state continues until the number of game plays after the open/close execution mode reaches a predetermined fourth upper limit (e.g., 100 plays).

The 10R normal jackpot result A is a jackpot result that transitions to the first time-saving game state after the open/close execution mode ends. In this case, the first time-saving game state continues until the number of game plays after the open/close execution mode reaches a predetermined fifth upper limit (e.g., 70 plays).

The 10R normal jackpot result B is a jackpot result that transitions to the first time-saving game state after the open/close execution mode ends. In this case, the first time-saving game state continues until the number of game plays after the open/close execution mode reaches a sixth upper limit (e.g., 100 times), which is greater than the fifth upper limit.

In the jackpot type table for the second special chart, "0" to "69" on the jackpot type counter C2 correspond to a 10R special jackpot result, "70" to "89" correspond to a 10R normal jackpot result A, and "90" to "99" correspond to a 10R normal jackpot result B. In other words, the probability of being assigned to a 10R special jackpot result is set to 70%, the probability of being assigned to a 10R normal jackpot result A is set to 20%, and the probability of being assigned to a 10R normal jackpot result B is set to 10%.

In this modified example, a type table for special misses is not set. That is, there is only one type of special miss result in the second special chart. When a special miss result occurs, the game moves to the third time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) without going through the open/close execution mode. As shown in FIG. 170(c), the third time-saving game state in this modified example continues until the number of times the special chart game is executed after the transition to the third time-saving game state reaches the seventh upper limit number (e.g., 50 times), which is less than the second upper limit number (e.g., 70 times), the third upper limit number (e.g., 100 times), the fifth upper limit number (e.g., 70 times), and the sixth upper limit number (e.g., 100 times).

<Third time-saving gaming state transition process>
The third time-saving game state transition process according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 171. This process is executed in step Sb3202 of the special game play control process (FIG. 145) by the main control device 162, and is executed instead of the third time-saving game state transition process of FIG. 148. In FIG. 171, the same step numbers are given to the processes similar to those in FIG. 148, and their descriptions are omitted or simplified. Note that in this modified example, the third time-saving game state transition process is executed after the high-frequency support mode update/end process of step Sb511 is executed.

First, in step Sb3401, it is determined whether or not a special miss flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. If the special miss flag is set, that is, if the result of this special drawing is a special miss result, the process proceeds to step Sb3402, where it is determined whether or not a high probability flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

If the high probability flag is not set, step Sb4801 determines whether or not the third support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The third support flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that the game is in the third time-saving game state.

If the third support flag is not set, i.e., if the game is not in the third time-saving game state, step Sb4802 determines whether the first support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The first support flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that the game is in the first time-saving game state.

If the first support flag is set, i.e., if the game is in the first time-shortened game state, proceed to step Sb4803 and determine whether the upper limit number of times for the third time-shortened game state, which the game will transition to upon winning the special miss result, is greater than the current remaining number of times in the first time-shortened game state. Specifically, the value of the support counter area SC in RAM314 is referenced to determine the current remaining number of times in the first time-shortened game state during which the game is currently in, and it is determined whether the upper limit number of times for the third time-shortened game state (seventh upper limit number of times) is greater than the remaining number thus determined. In this modified example, the seventh upper limit number of times for the third time-shortened game state is set to 50 times, and if the value of the support counter area SC is 50 or less, this step is determined as positive, and if it is greater than 50, this step is determined as negative.

If the upper limit number of times for the third time-saving game state is greater than the current remaining number of times in the first time-saving game state, the processing of steps Sb4804 to Sb3408 is executed to apply the third time-saving game state in priority over the current first time-saving game state.

In step Sb4804, the first support flag set in the various flag storage area 314e is cleared. This ends the first time-saving game state. In the following step Sb4805, the third support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. This transitions to the third time-saving game state.

In step Sb4806, a value corresponding to the seventh upper limit number of times (for example, 50 times) is set in the support counter area SC of RAM 314. At that time, regardless of the value of the support counter area SC at that time (the number of times remaining in the first time-shortened game state), it is rewritten to the value corresponding to the seventh upper limit number of times. Therefore, regardless of when the first time-shortened game state transitions to the third time-shortened game state, the number of times remaining in the time-shortened game state (a state of low probability mode and high frequency support) after transitioning to the third time-shortened game state will be the seventh upper limit number of times.

In step Sb3408, a third time-shortened gaming state start command is set as the command to be sent to the performance control device 143. This notifies the performance control device 143 of the transition to the third time-shortened gaming state.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb4803 (if the upper limit number of times in the third time-saving game state is less than the current remaining number of times in the first time-saving game state), the current first time-saving game state is applied in preference to the third time-saving game state. Specifically, the process for transition to the third time-saving game state is terminated without performing the processes in steps Sb4804 to Sb3408.

In this way, in this modified example, when a special miss occurs, the upper limit number of times for the third time-shortened game state is compared with the remaining number of times for the first time-shortened game state, and the time-shortened game state with the greater number of times is prioritized. For example, if the configuration is such that the game always transitions to the third time-shortened game state, in a situation where the upper limit number of times for the third time-shortened game state is less than the remaining number of times for the first time-shortened game state, the transition to the third time-shortened game state will effectively reduce the remaining number of times for the time-shortened game state. In other words, this would be a transition to a disadvantageous state for the player, but this modified example makes it possible to suppress such a transition to an unfavorable state.

In this modified example, the first time-saving game state has multiple types of first time-saving game states with different upper limit numbers, and the number of times that the priority of the first time-saving game state is reversed with the third time-saving game state in the first time-saving game state differs for each type of first time-saving game state. Specifically, in the first time-saving game state A (the first time-saving game state with an upper limit number of 70 times) that is entered upon winning a 4R normal jackpot result A, if a special miss occurs in the first to twentieth special game play times, the continuation of the first time-saving game state A is prioritized, and from the 21st time onwards, the transition to the third time-saving game state is prioritized. Also, in the first time-saving game state B (the first time-saving game state with a maximum number of times of 100), which is entered when a 4R regular jackpot result B is won, if a special miss occurs in the 1st to 50th special game play, the continuation of the first time-saving game state B takes priority, and from the 51st play onwards, the transition to the third time-saving game state takes priority.

This relationship is also true for the first time-saving game state to which a player enters upon winning a 10R regular jackpot result A, and the first time-saving game state to which a player enters upon winning a 10R regular jackpot result B.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb4802 (the first support flag is not set), i.e., if the game is in a normal game state, processing for ending the normal game is executed in step Sb4807. This processing is the same as the processing in steps Sb1411 to Sb1415 in the processing for transition to the second time-saving game state in FIG. 119. In this case, in the special game round, a specific fixed display time longer than the normal fixed display time is set as the fixed display time (FIG. 149). This specific fixed display time may be longer (for example, 0.8 sec) than the fixed display time of the normal game round that is forcibly terminated (for example, 0.5 sec), as in the second embodiment above, or may be longer (for example, 4 sec) than the total period (for example, 1.5 sec) of the fixed display time of the normal game round that is forcibly terminated, the variable display period (for example, 0.5 sec) of the normal game round corresponding to the second time-saving game state, and the fixed display time (for example, 0.5 sec) of the normal game round corresponding to the second time-saving game state, as in the second modified example above.

After executing step Sb4807, the process proceeds to step Sb4805, where the process of setting the third support flag is executed. Then, the process from step Sb4806 onwards is executed.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sb4801 (if the third support flag is set), the process for transitioning to the third time-saving game state is terminated without executing the processes of steps Sb4802 to Sb3408. In other words, even if a special miss occurs in the third time-saving game state, re-transition to the third time-saving game state is restricted, and the number of remaining plays at that time is maintained.

<Special chart game time fluctuation display time table>
The special game number control process and the variable start process performed by the main control device 162 are the same as those in the above modified example 3 (Figs. 145 and 146), but as described above, this modified example is configured to determine whether to prioritize the continuation of the first time-shortened game state or the transition to the third time-shortened game state when a special miss occurs in the first time-shortened game state, and the variable display time table is set accordingly. The variable display time table for this modified example will be described below with reference to Figs. 172 and 173.

In this modified example, at least a variable display time table for a special miss on the second special chart (for first time-shortened play state A), a variable display time table for a special miss on the second special chart (for first time-shortened play state B), a variable display time table for a normal miss on the second special chart (for first time-shortened play state A), and a variable display time table for a normal miss on the second special chart (for first time-shortened play state B) are set.

The variable display time table for special misses in the second special chart (for first time-shortened game state A) is referenced when the result of the win/lose lottery in the second special chart is a special miss result in a situation in which the first time-shortened game state A (first time-shortened game state with a maximum number of plays of 70) is the first. This variable display time table is configured so that the selection of the variable pattern differs depending on whether the situation in which the special miss result occurs is one in which continuation of the first time-shortened game state A is prioritized or one in which transition to the third time-shortened game state is prioritized.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 172(a), the variation pattern W1 (e.g., 8 sec or 4 sec) is selected in the 1st to 20th special game rounds in which the continuation of the first time-saving game state A is prioritized, and the variation pattern W2 (e.g., 15 sec) is selected in the 21st to 70th special game rounds in which the transition to the third time-saving game state is prioritized. The variation pattern W1 corresponds to a complete miss performance, and the variation pattern W2 corresponds to a special reach miss A performance. In other words, when a variation start command corresponding to the variation pattern W1 is sent to the performance control device 143, the pattern display device 75 executes a complete miss performance as a performance for a game round, and when a variation start command corresponding to the variation pattern W2 is sent to the performance control device 143, the pattern display device 75 executes a special reach miss A performance as a performance for a game round.

The special reach miss A presentation is the same as the special reach miss presentation according to the above-mentioned modified example 3. That is, as shown in Figs. 174(a) and (b), after a reach display is performed using the upper pattern row Z1 and the lower pattern row Z3, the middle pattern row Z2 is displayed in a slow-moving manner while including the special pattern 479, and then the special pattern 479 is displayed stationary on the reach line. After the special reach miss A presentation is performed, an additional presentation (Fig. 130(c)) similar to that of the above-mentioned second embodiment is executed. The number of additional presentations notified at that time is 50, which is the upper limit number of times in the third time-saving game state (seventh upper limit number of times).

The variable display time table for special misses in the second special chart (for the first time-saving game state B) is referenced when the result of the lottery for the second special chart is a special miss in the first time-saving game state B (the first time-saving game state with a maximum number of plays of 100). This variable display time table is also configured so that the selection of the variable pattern differs depending on whether the situation at the time of the special miss is one in which the continuation of the first time-saving game state B is prioritized or one in which the transition to the third time-saving game state is prioritized. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 172(b), the variable pattern W1 is selected in the 1st to 50th special chart play times in which the continuation of the first time-saving game state B is prioritized, and the variable pattern W2 is selected in the 51st to 100th special chart play times in which the transition to the third time-saving game state is prioritized.

The variable display time table for normal misses in the second special chart (for the first time-saving game state A) is referenced when the result of the win/lose lottery in the second special chart is a normal miss while in the first time-saving game state A. As shown in FIG. 173(a), this variable display time table is configured so that the selection of the variable pattern differs depending on the number of times the special chart has been played since the transition to the first time-saving game state A.

Specifically, in the first to twentieth special game play times, one of the variation patterns 21H to 24H is selected. Variation patterns 21H to 24H are the same as variation patterns 21H to 24H in FIG. 113(d). In addition, in the 21st to 60th special game play times, if the value of the variation type counter CS is between "0" and "79", one of the variation patterns 21H to 24H is selected, and if the value of the variation type counter CS is between "80" and "99", variation pattern W3 (for example, 14 sec) is selected.

The variation pattern W3 corresponds to the special reach miss B performance. The special reach miss B performance is a so-called false performance that is paired with the special reach miss A performance, and after raising the expectation of a special miss, the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed in a combination different from the special miss combination. Specifically, as shown in Figures 174(a) and (c), after a reach display is performed using the upper pattern row Z1 and the lower pattern row Z3, the middle pattern row Z2 is displayed in a slow fluctuation state including the special pattern 479, and then the middle pattern row Z2 is displayed in a stopped state so that the special pattern 479 does not stop on the reach line.

In the 61st to 70th special chart play times, if the value of the variation type counter CS is between "0" and "39", one of the variation patterns 21H to 24H is selected, and if the value of the variation type counter CS is between "40" and "99", variation pattern W3 is selected. Compared to the 21st to 60th special chart play times, the ratio of variation pattern W3 is higher. In other words, in the 61st to 70th special chart play times, the special reach miss B performance is more likely to be executed than in the 21st to 60th special chart play times, and the incentive to a special miss (third time-saving play state) is strengthened.

The first through twentieth special pattern play times are situations in which even if a special miss occurs in the first time-saving play state A, the game does not transition to the third time-saving play state, the 21st through 60th times correspond to the middle of the first time-saving play state A, and the 69th through 70th times correspond to the end of the first time-saving play state A. Incidentally, the selectable variation patterns in the first through 20th special pattern play times do not include variation pattern W3, and the special reach miss B performance is not executed in these special pattern play times.

The variable display time table for normal misses in the second special chart (for first time-saving game state B) is referenced when the result of the win/lose lottery in the second special chart is a normal miss result while in the first time-saving game state B. This variable display time table is also configured so that the selection of the variable pattern differs depending on the number of times the special chart has been played since transitioning to the first time-saving game state A, as shown in FIG. 173(b).

The selection mode for the 1st to 70th special symbol play times is the same as that for the variable display time table for normal misses (for the first time-saving play state A) in the second special symbol in FIG. 173(a). That is, for the 1st to 70th special symbol play times in the first time-saving play state B, a variable pattern is selected using a lottery table of the same mode as that for the first time-saving play state A. For this reason, the selection tendency for the variable display time (play time presentation) tends to be similar to that in the first time-saving play state A. This makes it impossible or difficult for the player to determine whether they are in the first time-saving play state A or the first time-saving play state B (in other words, what is the upper limit number of times the first time-saving play state is during their stay) from the behavior of the variable display time and the play time presentation.

The selection manner of the fluctuation patterns does not necessarily have to be completely the same, and may be similar. For example, in the fluctuation display time table for the first time-saving game state B, the selection ratio of fluctuation pattern W3 is high in the 61st to 70th special game rounds, so long as there is a common tendency with the fluctuation display time table for the first time-saving game state A, the detailed selection probability and target game rounds may differ.

As shown in FIG. 173(b), in the 71st to 90th special game rounds, if the value of the variation type counter CS is between "0" and "79", one of the variation patterns 21H to 24H is selected, and if the value of the variation type counter CS is between "80" and "99", variation pattern W3 is selected. In addition, in the 91st to 100th special game rounds, if the value of the variation type counter CS is between "0" and "39", one of the variation patterns 21H to 24H is selected, and if the value of the variation type counter CS is between "40" and "99", variation pattern W3 is selected. In other words, even in the first time-saving game state B, the special reach miss B performance is more likely to be executed in the final stage, and the incentive to a special miss (third time-saving game state) is strengthened.

<About the game state flow>
The flow of the game state in this modified example will be described. First, the case where the result of the special drawing lottery in the first time-saving game state A (the first time-saving game state with the upper limit number of times of 70 times) is a special miss result will be described with reference to FIG. 175.

The upper limit of the number of times the third time-shortened game state, which is entered upon winning a special miss result, is set to 50 times, and when the number of times the special pattern game is played after entering the first time-shortened game state A is 1 to 20, the number of times remaining in the first time-shortened game state A is greater than the upper limit of the number of times the third time-shortened game state is, and when the number of times the special pattern game is played is 21 to 70, the upper limit of the number of times the third time-shortened game state is greater than the number of times remaining in the first time-shortened game state A.

Here, in this modified example, if a special miss occurs during the first time-saving game state and a transition to the third time-saving game state is triggered, the first time-saving game state A is prioritized over transitioning to the third time-saving game state, whichever results in more remaining plays in the time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode state) (the side that is more advantageous to the player). For this reason, as shown in Figures 175(a) and (b), if a special miss occurs on the first to twentieth special game play, the first time-saving game state A is continued, and if a special miss occurs on the 21st to 70th special game play, the game transitions to the third time-saving game state.

When the game transitions to the third time-saving game state, the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state is changed to the remaining number of times in the third time-saving game state, regardless of the remaining number of times in the first time-saving game state A at that time. For this reason, for example, if a special miss occurs in the 30th special game, a time-saving game state of 50 times will be set from that point on (Fig. 175 (c), (d)). Similarly, for example, if a special miss occurs in the 65th special game, a time-saving game state of 50 times will be set from that point on (Fig. 175 (e), (f)). However, the total number of times of play taking into account both the first time-saving game state A and the third time-saving game state is 80 times in the former case and 115 times in the latter case. In other words, in the 21st to 70th special game turns during which a transition to the third time-saving game state is permitted, the later the special game turn that results in a special miss, the greater the total number of special game turns during which the time-saving game state can be played, which is advantageous for the player.

On the other hand, the first time-saving game state A has a maximum number of times set, and the opportunity to transition to the third time-saving game state is not guaranteed indefinitely. In particular, in this modified example, when in the normal game state, winning the second actuation port 63 is limited, resulting in a game mode in which the aim is to win the jackpot by winning the first actuation port 62, and the result type of the first special chart lottery performed by winning the first actuation port 62 does not include a special miss result. Therefore, if the first time-saving game state A ends without transitioning to the third time-saving game state, the opportunity to transition to the third time-saving game state will disappear. In this case, the total number of times that the time-saving game state can be played with the special chart will be 70 times, which will be less than the total number of times when the special miss result is obtained.

In other words, the closer to the end of the first time-saving game state A, the greater the profit if you hit the special losing result, but the greater the risk that the first time-saving game state A will end without any changes and you will not be able to increase the number of remaining plays. This allows you to enjoy the game while balancing the anticipation of hitting the special losing result later rather than earlier, and the frustration of having to hit the special losing result before the end of the first time-saving game state A, making it possible to increase the interest of playing in the first time-saving game state A.

In addition, in this modified example, the transition to the third time-saving play state is determined after the update of the remaining number of times in the time-saving play state is completed. Therefore, when switching from the first time-saving play state A to the third time-saving play state, the remaining number of times can be subtracted after the next special play time occurs after the switch. Therefore, it is possible to preferably ensure that 50 times is the remaining number of times after transitioning to the third time-saving play state.

Next, the flow of the game state taking into account the first time-saving game state B (the first time-saving game state with a maximum number of plays of 100) will be explained with reference to Figures 176 and 177.

In this modified example, in addition to the first time-saving game state A described above, the first time-saving game state B is set as the type of the first time-saving game state to which the player transitions upon winning the jackpot result. In this first time-saving game state B, the upper limit number of times is set to 100 times, which is higher than the first time-saving game state A, so the range of special game times in which the player transitions to the third time-saving game state in the event of a special miss is different from the first time-saving game state A. Specifically, even if the first to 50th special game times result in a special miss, the player does not transition to the third time-saving game state, but if the 51st to 100th special game times result in a special miss, the player transitions to the third time-saving game state and the remaining number of times is rewritten to 50 (Fig. 176 (c), (d)).

For example, if only the first time-saving game state A is set and the range of special game rounds in which a transition to the third time-saving game state occurs in the event of a special failure is fixed, the player will know in advance when a special failure will increase his or her profitability, and there is a risk that interest in other game rounds will wane. In this regard, in this modified example, the range of special game rounds in which a transition to the third time-saving game state occurs in the event of a special failure is diversified, so it is no longer possible to uniformly determine when a special failure will increase the player's profitability. This prevents the player's attention from concentrating on the same game round in each first time-saving game state, making it possible to increase attention to the game throughout the entire first time-saving game state.

Here, in this modified example, it is configured so that it is impossible or difficult for the player to distinguish between the first time-shortened game state A and the first time-shortened game state B. Specifically, as already explained, the selection mode of the variable display time (variable display pattern) is common between the first time-shortened game state A and the first time-shortened game state B, and a common presentation is executed as the start presentation when transitioning to each of these time-shortened game states.

For example, as shown in FIG. 128(b), in the case where the remaining number of times image 472 is displayed on the pattern display device 75 along with a title image 473 such as "Chance Time" during the start performance, the same title image 473 and remaining number of times image 472 are displayed in both the first time-shortened game state A and the first time-shortened game state B. In other words, even when the first time-shortened game state to which the player has transitioned is the first time-shortened game state B, the initial remaining number of times notified is the same as in the first time-shortened game state A.

The remaining number of times image 472 is displayed in the same way as in first time-saving game state A not only at the start of the performance, but also in subsequent special game times in first time-saving game state B. When the number of special game times reaches 70 times in first time-saving game state B, a predetermined additional performance (for example, the additional performance in FIG. 130(c)) is executed. This notifies the user of an increase in the remaining number of times corresponding to the difference with first time-saving game state A (30 times), and ensures consistency with the actual remaining number of times.

In addition, in a configuration in which a background image for the first time-shortened game state different from that for the normal game state is set as the background image on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75, the background image may be common to the first time-shortened game state A and the first time-shortened game state B. In addition, in a configuration in which multiple types of display modes for each pattern in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are set according to the type of game state, each pattern may be displayed in the same display mode in the first time-shortened game state A and the first time-shortened game state B.

Note that to make it impossible or difficult to distinguish between the first time-saving game state A and the first time-saving game state B, it is not necessary to implement all of the above configurations, but it is sufficient to implement at least one of them.

As described above, by providing multiple types of first time-saving game states with different upper limit numbers, the range of special game rounds that will cause a transition to the third time-saving game state in the event of a special miss is not uniform, making it impossible or difficult to distinguish between each of these first time-saving game states, and providing a variety of ways to enjoy the game depending on the number of special game rounds played after transitioning to the first time-saving game state, as follows:

First, in zone A (Fig. 176(e)) where the 1st to 20th special symbol play times are played, no transition to the 3rd time-saving play state occurs if a special miss result is won, regardless of whether the first time-saving play state entered after the open/close execution mode is the first time-saving play state A or the first time-saving play state B. In this zone A, the remaining number of times is not added, so the player can enjoy the state by simply aiming for a jackpot result. In line with this, the play time presentation performed by the symbol display device 75 does not execute either the special reach miss A presentation that notifies the player of a win on the special miss result (occurrence of an addition), or the special reach miss B presentation, which is a false presentation (Fig. 172, Fig. 173).

In zone B (Fig. 176 (e)), where the 21st to 50th special play rounds are played, if the first time-shortened play state entered was first time-shortened play state A, then the zone will enter the third time-shortened play state upon winning the special miss result, but if the zone was in first time-shortened play state B, then even if the special miss result is won, there will be no transition to the third time-shortened play state. For this reason, zone B becomes a zone where the first time-shortened play state A is confirmed as the remaining number of rounds is added.

As a result, from the player's perspective, the occurrence of the top-up makes the total number of special game turns in which the time-saving game state can be played greater than the upper limit of the first time-saving game state A, but conversely, the absence of the top-up leaves the possibility of the first time-saving game state B in which it is possible to aim for a greater total number of special game turns in which the time-saving game state can be played. Therefore, regardless of how much the total number has increased, players who hope for an increase in the total number of turns will be able to enjoy themselves as they aim for a jackpot result or a special miss result. Also, players who hope for the total number of turns to be as high as possible will be able to enjoy themselves as they aim for a jackpot result while avoiding a special miss result.

In zone B, in the game play presentation of the pattern display device 75, if the result of the special pattern winning/losing lottery is a special miss result, a special reach miss A presentation is executed, and in some cases where the result is a normal miss, a special reach miss B presentation is executed (Figures 172 and 173).

Zone C (Fig. 176 (e)), where the 51st to 60th special play rounds are played, transitions to the third time-shortened play state if the special miss result is won, regardless of whether the first time-shortened play state to which the player transitions is either first time-shortened play state A or first time-shortened play state B. However, if the player is in first time-shortened play state B, the timing of the special miss result (the timing of transition to the third time-shortened play state) will be earlier, and the increase in the total number of times will remain small. For this reason, for players who wish to increase the total number of times even a little, this will be a state in which they do not wish for a special miss result, and they can enjoy aiming for a jackpot result while avoiding a special miss result.

Zone D (Fig. 176(e)), where the 61st to 70th special game rounds are played, transitions to the third time-shortened game state if a special miss result is won, regardless of whether the first time-shortened game state to which the player transitions is the first time-shortened game state A or the first time-shortened game state B. However, if the first time-shortened game state to which the player transitions is the first time-shortened game state A, the game is nearing the end, meaning that there is a high possibility that the first time-shortened game state A will end. For players who want to avoid the time-shortened game state ending without any remaining rounds being added, this is a fun state in which they can enjoy the thrill of the time-shortened game state coming to an end, while aiming for a jackpot result or a special miss result.

In Zone D, if the result of the special chart lottery is a normal miss, the probability of the special reach miss B effect being executed is increased (Fig. 173). This increases the chances for the player to watch the effect in suspense, wondering whether they will win the special miss result and the remaining number of plays will be increased, or whether they will not win the special miss result and the time-saving game state will end, making it possible to appropriately increase attention to the game.

If the first time-saving game state to which the player transitioned was first time-saving game state B, the timing of winning the special miss result would still be on the early side, and the increase in the total number of times would remain small. For this reason, players who wish to win more total times would want the time-saving game state not to end (the first time-saving game state to which the player transitioned being first time-saving game state B) while avoiding a special miss result.

In zone E (Fig. 176(e)), where the 71st to 90th special game rounds are played, the first time-saving game state to which the player has entered is confirmed to be first time-saving game state B. This is a state in which the player can enjoy aiming for a jackpot result or a special miss result.

When the transitioned first time-saving game state is the first time-saving game state B and the 70th special game round is reached, as already mentioned, an additional effect is executed corresponding to the difference from the upper limit number of times in the first time-saving game state A. In this case, in addition to the effect of aligning the number of times notified by the remaining number image 472 with the remaining number of times in the first time-saving game state B, there is also the advantage that for players who think that the transitioned first time-saving game state is the first time-saving game state A or players who do not understand the game characteristics in advance, the 71st and subsequent special game rounds can be recognized as game rounds with the remaining number of times added.

In this case, before the additional performance is executed, a performance for ending the first time-saving game state may be executed. This can give a stronger impression that the first time-saving game state has ended.

Zone F (Fig. 176(e)), where the 91st to 100th special game rounds are played, is at the end of the first time-saving game state B, and the possibility of the first time-saving game state B ending is increasing. For the player, if he or she can win a special miss result at this timing (if the remaining number of rounds can be added), the player will have won the maximum number of rounds in total, and can enjoy the thrill of the first time-saving game state B coming to an end while aiming for a jackpot result or a special miss result. In zone F, as in zone D, the probability of the special reach miss B performance being executed is increased if the result of the special game lottery is a normal miss result (Fig. 173).

The above-mentioned configuration allows players to enjoy playing the game while predicting whether the first time-saving game state to which they have been transferred will be the first time-saving game state A or the first time-saving game state B, and predicting the timing at which they can get a special miss result to increase the total number of times, thereby making it possible to appropriately increase the interest of the game.

The modified example described above has the following advantages:

The first time-saving game state is configured to include a first time-saving game state A and a first time-saving game state B, which have different ranges of special game turns that allow the remaining number of turns in the time-saving game state to increase when a special miss occurs.

For example, if the number of special game rounds at which an increase in the remaining number of times (transition to the third time-saving game state) is permitted in the event of a special miss is fixed, the player will be able to know in advance when the special miss will increase the remaining number of times, and there is a risk that interest in other special game rounds will wane. In this regard, since multiple first time-saving game states are provided with different ranges of special game rounds at which an increase in the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state is permitted in the event of a special miss, it is no longer possible to uniformly determine when a special miss will increase the remaining number of times. This prevents the player's attention from concentrating on the same special game round in each first time-saving game state, making it possible to increase attention to the game throughout the entire first time-saving game state.

The type of the first time-saving game state is not clearly indicated, and the player cannot or has difficulty in determining whether the first time-saving game state to which the player has transitioned is first time-saving game state A or first time-saving game state B.

For example, if the configuration clarifies the number of special game turns that are in an allowable state (a state in which an increase in the remaining number of turns is allowed), even if multiple first time-saving game states with different ranges of special game turns that are in such a state are provided, the special game turns that should be noted in each first time-saving game state will be clear, and there is a concern that the player's interest will be biased toward a specific game turn. In this regard, by making it impossible or difficult for the player to distinguish between first time-saving game state A and first time-saving game state B, it is possible to make it impossible or difficult for the player to distinguish the range of special game turns that are in an allowable state. This allows the player to enjoy playing while predicting which special game turns are in an allowable state in each first time-saving game state, making it possible to increase the attention to the game throughout the entire first time-saving game state.

The upper limit number of times in the first time-saving game state B (e.g., 100 times) is set to be greater than the upper limit number of times in the first time-saving game state A (e.g., 70 times), and in the first time-saving game state B, the permissible state is included in the special game play times after the upper limit number of times in the first time-saving game state A (e.g., the 71st to 100th special game play times).

In this configuration, when the number of times the special symbol game is played after the transition to the time-saving game state reaches the number of times corresponding to the upper limit of the first time-saving game state A (for example, 70 times), if the player predicts that the transition to the first time-saving game state is the first time-saving game state A, the time-saving game state will end when the upper limit is reached. On the other hand, if the player predicts that the transition to the first time-saving game state B is the first time-saving game state, the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state can be increased by a special miss result after the corresponding number of times is exceeded, which is a desirable situation for the player. Therefore, when the number of times the special symbol game is played in the first time-saving game state approaches the corresponding number of times, the player can play while being conflicted between the anxiety that the time-saving game state will end and the expectation that the remaining number of times will be efficiently increased by winning the special miss result after the number of times is exceeded, which makes it possible to appropriately increase the interest.

In the first time-saving play state A and the first time-saving play state B, a common special play round (1st to 20th round) has been set up in which the remaining number of times is not increased even if a special miss occurs.

With this configuration, in the above-mentioned common special game round, the remaining number of times is not added regardless of whether the transition to the time-saving game state is the first time-saving game state A or the first time-saving game state B, so it is possible to ensure a period during which the player can concentrate on playing in order to achieve a jackpot result without worrying about the type of time-saving game state or whether they will win the special miss result.

In the above case, the configuration may be such that the player can distinguish between the common special game round in which the remaining number of times is not increased even if a special miss occurs, and the other special game round in which the remaining number of times is increased if a special miss occurs. For example, it is possible to use different background images on the pattern display device 75 for the common special game round and the other special game round.

If a special miss occurs in the first time-saving play state A or the first time-saving play state B and the remaining number of times is increased, the increase in the remaining number of times is limited even if a special miss occurs again in the time-saving play state after the increase.

In this configuration, the addition of the remaining number of times based on winning the special miss result is limited to only once during the transition to the time-saving play state, which can result in a large difference in the total number of times that the time-saving play state can be played depending on whether the addition occurs early or late in the transition to the time-saving play state. This increases the importance of the timing of the special miss result, making it possible to effectively highlight the effects of each of the above configurations.

When a special miss occurs in the first time-saving game state, the remaining number of times in the first time-saving game state at that point is compared with the maximum number of times in the third time-saving game state, and the time-saving game state with the greater number of times is given priority.

According to this configuration, when a special miss occurs (when the trigger for transition to the third time-saving game state occurs), if the number of remaining plays at that time is greater, the first time-saving game state continues, and conversely, if the upper limit number of plays in the third time-saving game state is greater, a switch from the first time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state occurs. This allows the player to always transition to the time-saving game state that is more advantageous to them, regardless of when the special miss occurs.

In addition, the above configuration makes it possible to realize a pachinko machine with multiple time-saving game states with different ranges of play times for which the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state is allowed to increase when a special miss occurs, with a simple configuration and simple control. In other words, it is sufficient to perform the end management of multiple time-saving game states with different upper limit numbers (first time-saving game state A and first time-saving game state B) using the existing control method, while simply adding the above comparison and prioritization process (step Sb4803), thereby preventing the configuration and control process from becoming complicated.

<Modification 6>
In the second embodiment and its modified examples, either the second time-shortened game state or the third time-shortened game state is provided, but in this modified example, both of these time-shortened game states are provided. In addition, in this modified example, when in either time-shortened game state, transition to the second time-shortened game state or the third time-shortened game state is restricted. The configuration of this modified example will be described below with reference to Figures 178 to 190.

<Special game winning/losing table>
In this modified example, a win/loss table for the first and second special symbols (for low probability mode) and a win/loss table for the first and second special symbols (for high probability mode) are provided as win/loss tables for the special symbol game. Each of these win/loss tables is stored in the win/loss table storage area 313a of the ROM 313.

The winning/losing table (for low probability mode) for the first and second special designs is referred to when a winning/losing lottery is conducted based on winning the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63 in a situation where the lottery mode is the low probability mode. In this winning/losing table (for low probability mode) for the first and second special designs, as shown in FIG. 178(a), a total of 10 values from "0" to "9" are set as the random number value for the jackpot (value of the jackpot random number counter C1), and the probability of winning the jackpot in low probability mode is set to 1/300. In addition, a total of 10 values from "10" to "19" are set as the random number value for the special failure result, and the probability of the special failure result in low probability mode is set to 1/300. The other random numbers are assigned to the normal failure result, and the probability of the normal failure result in low probability mode is set to 2980/3000.

The winning/losing table (for high probability mode) for the first and second special designs is referred to when a winning/losing lottery is conducted based on winning the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63 when the lottery mode is the high probability mode. In this winning/losing table (for high probability mode) for the first and second special designs, as shown in FIG. 178(b), a total of 50 random numbers from "0" to "49" are set as the random numbers that result in a jackpot, and the probability of winning a jackpot in high probability mode is set to 1/60. Note that in the winning/losing table (for high probability mode) for the first and second special designs, no special losing results are set as lottery results, and all values other than the random number value for the jackpot are assigned to normal losing results. The probability of a normal losing result is set to 59/60.

<Special game play type table>
The special game play type table for this modified example will be explained with reference to Figure 179.

As the jackpot type table, a jackpot type table for the first special chart (Fig. 179(a)) and a jackpot type table for the second special chart (Fig. 179(b)) are set.

As shown in FIG. 179(a), in the jackpot type table for the first special chart, the selectable jackpot types are set as a 4R variable jackpot result and a 4R normal jackpot result. Both of these jackpot results result in four rounds of play being performed.

The 4R guaranteed jackpot result is a jackpot result that transitions to a high probability game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) after the end of the open/close execution mode. In this case, the high probability game state continues until the number of game plays executed after the open/close execution mode reaches a predetermined first upper limit number (e.g., 100 times). When the first upper limit number is reached, the high probability game state ends and transitions to a normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode).

The 4R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result that transitions to the first time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) after the open/close execution mode ends. In this case, the first time-saving game state continues until the number of game plays executed after the open/close execution mode reaches a predetermined second upper limit number (e.g., 100 times). When the second upper limit number is reached, the first time-saving game state ends and transitions to the normal game state.

In the jackpot type table for the first special chart, "0" to "64" on the jackpot type counter C2 correspond to a 4R special jackpot result, and "65" to "99" correspond to a 4R normal jackpot result. In other words, the probability of being assigned to a 4R special jackpot result is set to 65%, and the probability of being assigned to a 4R normal jackpot result is set to 35%.

As shown in FIG. 179(b), in the jackpot type table for the second special chart, a 10R special jackpot result and a 10R normal jackpot result are set as selectable jackpot types. Both of these jackpot results result in 10 rounds of play being performed.

The 10R probability jackpot result is a jackpot result that transitions to a high probability game state after the open/close execution mode ends. In this case, the high probability game state continues until the number of game plays after the open/close execution mode reaches a third predetermined upper limit (e.g., 100 plays).

The 10R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result that transitions to the first time-saving game state after the open/close execution mode ends. In this case, the first time-saving game state continues until the number of game plays after the open/close execution mode reaches a predetermined fourth upper limit (e.g., 100 plays).

In the jackpot type table for the second special chart, "0" to "64" on the jackpot type counter C2 correspond to a 10R special jackpot result, and "65" to "99" correspond to a 10R normal jackpot result. In other words, the probability of being assigned to a 10R special jackpot result is set to 65%, and the probability of being assigned to a 10R normal jackpot result is set to 35%.

Here, in this modified example, in addition to the first time-saving game state to which the player transitions when a jackpot occurs, there are a second time-saving game state and a third time-saving game state to which the player transitions without a jackpot occurs.

Of these, the second time-saving game state is a time-saving game state to which the state is entered when the number of play times resulting in a loss (loss play times) reaches a predetermined ceiling number of times (e.g., 800 times). As shown in FIG. 179(c), this second time-saving game state continues until the number of times the special game play has been executed since the state was entered into the second time-saving game state reaches a predetermined fifth upper limit number of times (e.g., 500 times).

The ceiling number of times in this modified example is set to a number greater than the upper limit number of times (number of times of continuation) of the first time-saving game state to which the transition occurs upon a 4R normal jackpot result or a 10R normal jackpot result. This prevents the number of misses during the first time-saving game state from reaching the ceiling number of times.

The third time-saving game state is a time-saving game state to which the player enters when the result of the special winning/losing lottery results in a special losing result. As shown in FIG. 179(d), this third time-saving game state continues until the number of times the special game has been played since the transition to the third time-saving game state reaches a sixth upper limit (e.g., 300 times), which is less than the fifth upper limit. In other words, the third time-saving game state continues for a smaller number of times than the second time-saving game state, making the second time-saving game state a more advantageous time-saving game state for the player. In this modified example, there is only one type of third time-saving game state.

<Transition process when closing/opening execution mode ends>
The transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flow chart of Fig. 180. This process is executed in step Sb915 of the game state transition process (Fig. 114) by the main control device 162, and is executed in place of the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in Fig. 116. In Fig. 180, the same step numbers are used for the processes similar to those in Fig. 116, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sb1101, it is determined whether the current jackpot is a guaranteed jackpot result. If it is a guaranteed jackpot result, in step Sb1102, a high probability flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. This causes the lottery mode to transition to the high probability mode.

In step Sb1103, a value corresponding to the first upper limit number of times (e.g., 100) is set in the probability change counter area KC provided in the various counter area 314d of the RAM 314. In step Sb1104, the first support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

In step Sb5101, a value (e.g., 100) corresponding to the first upper limit number is set in the support counter area SC provided in the various counter areas 314d. In step Sb1108, a high probability game state start command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143, and then the transition process at the end of the opening and closing execution mode is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb1101 (if the current jackpot result is a normal jackpot result), the process proceeds to step Sb1109, where the first support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. This causes a transition to the first time-saving game state.

In step Sb5102, a value (e.g., 100) corresponding to the second upper limit number is set in the support counter area SC. In step Sb1113, a command to start the first time-saving game state is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143, and then the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode is terminated.

<Special chart game play control processing>
The special game play control process according to this modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 181. This process is executed in step Sb403 of the normal process (Fig. 107), and is executed instead of the special game play control process in Fig. 108. In Fig. 181, the same step numbers are given to the processes similar to those in Fig. 108, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb503 (the special chart display unit 43 is not displaying a variable image), then in step Sb504 it is judged whether the common reserved number CRN is "0". If the common reserved number CRN is not "0", that is, if reserved information for either the first special chart or the second special chart exists, the process proceeds to step Sb505, where data setting processing is executed. In the data setting processing, the reserved information stored in the first special chart reserved area Ra or the second special chart reserved area Rb is moved to the execution area AE for variable display.

In step Sb5201, a change start process is executed to start the change display in the special chart display unit 43, and then the special chart play count control process is terminated. The change start process in step Sb5201 will be described in detail later.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sb507 (if the variable display time has elapsed), the variable display flag set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314 is cleared in step Sb509. In step Sb510, high probability mode update/end processing is executed to update the remaining number of times the high probability mode is in effect or to end the high probability mode.

In the following step Sb5202, high frequency support mode termination processing is executed to terminate the high frequency support mode. In step Sb5203, time-saving play state transition processing is executed to execute transition processing to the second time-saving play state or the third time-saving play state. In step Sb5204, confirmation display start processing is executed to start confirmation display on the special chart display unit 43, and then the special chart play count control processing is terminated. Details of steps Sb5202 to Sb5204 will be described later.

<Change start processing>
The fluctuation start processing of step Sb5201 will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 182. Note that in Fig. 182, the same processes as those in the fluctuation start processing of Fig. 146 are given the same step numbers, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

After executing the processing of step Sb3302 or step Sb3303, in step Sb3304, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/loss determination in step Sb3302 or step Sb3303 is a jackpot win. If it is a jackpot win, the process proceeds to step Sb3305, where the type of jackpot is determined by referring to the corresponding type table (Figure 179).

In step Sb3306, a type flag indicating the jackpot type selected by the type determination in step Sb3305 is set in the various flag storage area 314e. In step Sb3307, the stop result for the jackpot is set by referring to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of the ROM 313.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb3304 (if the jackpot has not been won), the process proceeds to step Sb3308, where it is judged whether the result of the win/loss judgment made in step Sb3302 or step Sb3303 is a special miss result. If it is a special miss result, a special miss flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e in step Sb3310. In step Sb3311, a stop result for a special miss is set as the stop result of the image displayed in a variable manner in the special image display unit 43.

If the result of step Sb3308 is negative (if the result is not a special miss), it means that the result of this lottery is a normal miss. In this case, proceed to step Sb3312 and set the stop result for a normal miss.

After execution of step Sb3307, step Sb3311, or step Sb3312, step Sb5301 executes high frequency support mode update processing to update the number of times the special chart has been played in the high frequency support mode. Step Sb5302 executes second time-shortened play state transition determination processing to determine whether or not a transition trigger to the second time-shortened play state has occurred, and step Sb5303 executes third time-shortened play state transition determination processing to determine whether or not a transition trigger to the third time-shortened play state has occurred. Details of steps Sb5301 to Sb5303 will be described later.

In step Sb3313, a variable display time setting process is executed to set the variable display time for the current game round in the first special chart display section AS or the second special chart display section BS. In the variable display time setting process, the variable display time is selected by lottery using the variable type counter CS and the variable display time table.

In this modified example, as a variation pattern in the case where the winning/losing result of the first special chart lottery is a losing result (special losing result or normal losing result), in addition to a variation pattern corresponding to a complete losing effect or various reaching losing effects in the case of a normal losing result, as shown in FIG. 183, a variation pattern R1 (e.g. 18 sec) for when the ceiling is reached and a variation pattern R2 (e.g. 15 sec) for a special losing result are set.

Fluctuation pattern R1 is selected in a game round in which the result of the special symbol winning/losing lottery is a losing result and the number of losing attempts reaches the ceiling number of attempts. When a fluctuation start command corresponding to fluctuation pattern R1 is sent to the effect control device 143, the symbol display device 75 executes a ceiling reaching effect as an effect for a game round. In the ceiling reaching effect, after a losing result is notified by a complete losing effect using the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, an reaching notification effect is executed to notify that the ceiling number of attempts has been reached. Note that instead of or in addition to the reaching notification effect, at least a part of the start effect corresponding to the transition to the second time-saving game state (for example, the start effect in FIG. 130(a)) may be executed.

Fluctuation pattern R2 is selected when the result of the special chart winning/losing lottery is a special losing result. When a fluctuation start command corresponding to fluctuation pattern R2 is sent to the performance control device 143, the pattern display device 75 executes a special reach-miss performance as a performance for a game round. The special reach-miss performance notifies the player that a special miss result has occurred, and is the same as the special reach-miss performance in FIG. 153 relating to the above-mentioned variant example 3.

In addition, in this modified example, even if the result of the winning/losing lottery is a special losing result, the transition to the third time-saving game state may be restricted. The above-mentioned variation pattern R2 is selected when a transition to the third time-saving game state occurs in the case of a special losing result, and if the transition to the third time-saving game state is restricted, a variation pattern corresponding to a complete losing effect as in the above-mentioned modified example 3 is selected.

Returning to the explanation of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 182), after step Sb3313 is executed, in step Sb712, a fluctuation display flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The fluctuation display flag is used by the MPU 312 to know that the fluctuation display of the special game round is in progress. After step Sb712 is executed, the process from step Sb713 onwards is executed.

Next, we will explain the process for updating the high-frequency support mode in step Sb5301, the process for determining whether to transition to the second time-saving play state in step Sb5302, and the process for determining whether to transition to the third time-saving play state in step Sb5303. These processes are executed in the fluctuation start process, in other words, when the fluctuation display in the special chart play round starts.

<Processing for updating high frequency support mode>
The high frequency support mode update process in step Sb5301 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step Sb5401, it is determined whether the result of this special drawing is a jackpot result. If it is not a jackpot result, in step Sb5402, it is determined whether the first support flag, second support flag, or third support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. The first support flag indicates that the current game state is the first time-shortened game state, the second support flag indicates that the current game state is the second time-shortened game state, and the third support flag indicates that the current game state is the third time-shortened game state.

If these flags are set, the process proceeds to step Sb5403, where the value of the support counter area SC in the various counter areas 314d of RAM 314 is updated. Specifically, the value of the support counter area SC is decremented by 1. This decrements the remaining number of times for each time-saving play state by 1.

In step Sb5404, it is determined whether the value of the support counter area SC is "0". If the value of the support counter area SC is "0", that is, if the number of times play has been performed in each time-saving play state has reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to step Sb5405, where a time-saving end flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The time-saving end flag is used by the MPU 312 to know that each time-saving play state should be ended.

After step Sb5405 is executed, the high-frequency support mode update process is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step Sb5401 (if a jackpot result is obtained) or a negative judgment is made in step Sb5402 (if none of the support flags are set), the remaining number of times for each time-saving play state is not updated, and the high-frequency support mode update process is terminated without executing the processes in steps Sb5403 and onward. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sb5404 (if the value of the support counter area SC is not "0"), it is determined that each time-saving play state should not be ended, and the high-frequency support mode update process is terminated without executing the process in step Sb5405.

<Processing for determining transition to second time-saving gaming state>
The process for determining whether to transition to the second time-shortened gaming state in step Sb5302 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step Sb5501, it is determined whether the result of this special drawing is a jackpot result. If it is not a jackpot result, it proceeds to step Sb5502, where it is determined whether the reached flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM314. The reached flag is used by MPU312 to determine whether the number of losing plays has reached the ceiling number of times.

If the reached flag has not been set, in step Sb5503, it is determined whether or not the high probability flag has been set in the various flag storage area 314e. If the high probability flag has not been set, i.e., if the current lottery mode is the low probability mode, the process proceeds to step Sb5504, where the value of the miss count counter area HC provided in the various counter area 314d of the RAM 314 is updated. Specifically, the value of the miss count counter area HC is decremented by 1. The miss count counter area HC is used by the MPU 312 to grasp the number of times remaining until the ceiling number of times.

In step Sb5505, it is determined whether the value of the miss counter area HC is "0". If the value of the miss counter area HC is "0", that is, if the number of miss plays has reached the ceiling number, the process proceeds to step Sb5506, and the reached flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

In step Sb5507, it is determined whether any of the first support flag, second support flag, or third support flag is set. If none of the support flags are set, i.e., if the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, in step Sb5508, a second time-saving start flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e, and then the process for determining whether to transition to the second time-saving gaming state is terminated. The second time-saving start flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that a transition to the second time-saving gaming state should be made.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sb5507 (if any support flag is set), the process proceeds to step Sb5509, where it is judged whether or not a time-saving end flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. If a time-saving end flag is set, this means that this is the final play round in each time-saving play state. In this case, the process proceeds to step Sb5508, where a second time-saving start flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. In other words, if the ceiling number of times is reached in the final play round in each time-saving play state, the process proceeds to a transition to the second time-saving play state.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb5509 (the time-saving end flag is not set), that is, if the player is in another time-saving play state and is not in the final play round, it is determined that the player should not transition to the second time-saving play state, and the process for determining the transition to the second time-saving play state is terminated without executing the process of step Sb5508. This restricts the transition to the second time-saving play state.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sb5502 (if the reached flag is set) or if a positive judgment is made in step Sb5503 (if the high probability flag is set), the process for determining whether to transition to the second time-saving game state is terminated without executing the processes in step Sb5504 and onwards. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sb5505 (if the value of the miss counter area HC is not "0"), the process for determining whether to transition to the second time-saving game state is terminated without executing the processes in step Sb5506 and onwards.

If the judgment in step Sb5501 is positive (the result is a big win), the process proceeds to step Sb5510, where the value in the counter area HC is set to a value corresponding to the ceiling count (e.g., 800). In step Sb5511, the process judges whether the reached flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

If the reached flag is set, step Sb5512 executes a process to clear the reached flag. After step Sb5512 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step Sb5511 (if the reached flag is not set), the process for determining whether to transition to the second time-saving game state is terminated.

<Processing for determining transition to the third time-saving gaming state>
The process for determining whether to transition to the third time-saving gaming state in step Sb5303 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step Sb5601, it is determined whether or not a special miss flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. If the special miss flag is set, that is, if the result of this special drawing is a special miss result, the process proceeds to step Sb5602, where it is determined whether or not a high probability flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

If the high probability flag is not set, i.e., if the game is not in a high probability game state, step Sb5603 determines whether the first support flag, the second support flag, or the third support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. If any of these support flags is set, i.e., if the current game state is the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, or the third time-saving game state, step Sb5604 determines whether the time-saving end flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb5603 (if none of the support flags are set and the current game state is the normal game state) or if a positive judgment is made in step Sb5604 (if the time-saving end flag is set and this is the final game in each time-saving game state), the process proceeds to step Sb5605, where it is determined whether or not a second time-saving start flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

If the second time-saving start flag is not set, i.e., if the situation does not warrant a transition to the second time-saving play state, in step Sb5606, the third time-saving start flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e, and then the process for determining whether to transition to the third time-saving play state is terminated. The third time-saving start flag is used by the MPU312 to determine that a transition to the third time-saving play state should be made.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sb5605 (if the flag for starting the second time-saving game is set), the process for determining whether to transition to the third time-saving game state is terminated without executing the process of step Sb5606. In other words, even if a special miss result is obtained, if the state is such that a transition to the second time-saving game state should occur, the transition to the third time-saving game state is restricted.

For this reason, if the ceiling number of times is reached and a special miss result is won in the same game round, the game state will transition to the second time-saving game state. The second time-saving game state has a higher upper limit number of times than the third time-saving game state, and is a time-saving game state that is advantageous to the player. With the above-mentioned configuration, if both transition triggers are met at the same time, it is possible to transition to the more advantageous time-saving game state.

Here, the process for determining whether to transition to the second time-saving game state in step Sb5302 (FIG. 185) and the process for determining whether to transition to the third time-saving game state in step Sb5303 (FIG. 186) are performed when the variable display of the special game number starts (more specifically, before the process for setting the variable display time in step Sb3313) (FIG. 182).

Because these processes are related to the transition restriction to the second or third time-saving play state, it would be natural to perform them at the timing of transition to each of these time-saving play states (the start timing of the confirmation display in the special game round). However, in such a configuration, if both the ceiling number of times reached and the special miss result are won in the same game round, when setting the variable display time (variation pattern) for that game round, the MPU 312 will recognize only the special miss result and will not recognize that the ceiling has been reached. For this reason, the variation pattern for that game round will necessarily be set to variation pattern R2 (Figure 183) corresponding to the special miss result.

In the process of setting the fluctuation start command in the subsequent step Sb713 (FIG. 182), the fluctuation start command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern R2 is set, so that the effect control device 143 recognizes the special reach miss A effect as the play-round effect to be executed. In other words, although the game state control prioritizes reaching the ceiling over the special miss result to transition to the second time-saving game state, the play-round effect will not be an effect corresponding to the second time-saving game state (an effect corresponding to reaching the ceiling), but an effect corresponding to the transition to the third time-saving game state (an effect announcing a win on the special miss result). In other words, there is a concern that an inconsistency will occur between the content of the play-round effect and the time-saving game state to be transitioned to, which may cause inconvenience such as a player misunderstanding the time-saving game state to be transitioned to when they see the play-round effect.

In such a case, the above-mentioned inconsistency could be eliminated by providing the same play time presentation when the ceiling is reached and when a special miss is won, but this would mean that despite the fact that multiple types of time-saving play states with different performances have been provided, this would not be utilized in the presentation, which is not desirable.

In this regard, in this modified example, when the display of the variation of the special game round is started, the processing of steps Sb5302 and Sb5303 is executed, so that the MPU312 can set the display time while grasping the establishment of the ceiling reaching and the priority adoption. Therefore, in a game round where both the ceiling reaching and the special miss result are established, the setting of the variation pattern R2 corresponding to the special miss result can be canceled, and the variation pattern R1 (Fig. 183) corresponding to the ceiling reaching can be set. As a result, even if the game round performance corresponding to the ceiling reaching and the game round performance corresponding to the special miss result are separately provided, it is possible to execute the game round performance that is consistent with the game state to which the game is actually transitioned, and it is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb5601 (if the special miss flag is not set) or if a positive judgment is made in step Sb5602 (if the high probability flag is set), the process for determining whether to transition to the third time-saving game state is terminated without executing the processes in steps Sb5603 and onward.

Next, we will explain the process for ending the high frequency support mode in step Sb5202 (Fig. 181), the process for transitioning to the time-saving play state in step Sb5203, and the process for starting the final display in step Sb5204. These processes are executed when the variable display time has elapsed in a special game round, in other words, when the final display in a special game round starts.

<Processing for ending high frequency support mode>
The high frequency support mode ending process in step Sb5202 (FIG. 181) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step Sb5701, it is determined whether the first support flag, the second support flag, or the third support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. If any of the support flags is set, that is, if the player is currently in the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, or the third time-saving game state, it proceeds to step Sb5702, where it is determined whether the time-saving end flag is set. The time-saving end flag indicates that the currently-current time-saving game state should be ended, in other words, it indicates that the current special chart game round is the final special chart game round in the currently-current time-saving game state.

If the time-saving end flag is set, the process proceeds to step Sb5703, where the support flag set in the various flag storage area 314e is cleared. This ends the first time-saving play state, the second time-saving play state, or the third time-saving play state. In the following step Sb5704, the time-saving end flag set in the various flag storage area 314e is cleared.

In step Sb5705, the corresponding game state end command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143, and then the processing for ending the high-frequency support mode is terminated. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sb5701 (if none of the support flags are set) or if a negative judgment is made in step Sb5702 (if the time-saving end flag is not set), the processing for ending the high-frequency support mode is terminated without executing the processing in and after step Sb5703.

<Time-saving game state transition processing>
The processing for transitioning to the time-saving game state in step Sb5203 (Figure 181) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 188.

First, in step Sb5801, it is determined whether or not a second time-saving start flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. The second time-saving start flag indicates that a transition should be made to the second time-saving game state.

If the second time-saving start flag is set, in step Sb5802, the second support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. This transitions to the second time-saving game state.

In this modified example, the high frequency support mode termination process (processing to terminate the time-shortened game state) in step Sb5202 is executed before the time-shortened game state transition process (processing to transition to the time-shortened game state) in step Sb5203 is executed. Therefore, if the number of miss play times in the final play time in another time-shortened game state reaches the ceiling number of times, it is possible to transition from the preceding time-shortened game state to the second time-shortened game state without going through the normal game state.

In step Sb5803, a value corresponding to the fifth upper limit number (e.g., 500) is set in the support counter area SC provided in the various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314. The support counter area SC is used by the MPU 312 to grasp the remaining number of times in the high frequency support mode.

In step Sb5804, a second time-shortened game state start command is set as the command to be sent to the performance control device 143. The set second time-shortened game state start command is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sb401 in normal processing (Figure 107).

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb5801 (the second time-saving start flag is not set), the process proceeds to step Sb5805, where it is judged whether or not a third time-saving start flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The third time-saving start flag indicates that a transition should be made to the third time-saving game state.

If the third time-saving start flag is set, the third support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e in step Sb5806. This transitions to the third time-saving game state. If a special miss occurs in the final play in another time-saving game state, a seamless transition can be made from the preceding time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state without the intervention of the normal game state.

In step Sb5807, a value corresponding to the sixth upper limit number (e.g., 300) is set in the support counter area SC. In step Sb5808, a third time-saving game state start command is set as the command to be sent to the performance control device 143.

After step Sb5804 or step Sb5808 is executed, in step Sb5809, the time-saving start flag set in the various flag storage area 314e is cleared. In step Sb5810, it is determined whether the second special chart flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

If the second special symbol flag is not set, that is, if the current special symbol play round is the first special symbol play round, and the transition to the second time-saving play state or the third time-saving play state is a transition from the normal play state, processing for ending the normal play state is executed in step Sb5811. This processing is the same as the processing in steps Sb1411 to Sb1415 in the processing for transition to the second time-saving play state in FIG. 119.

After step Sb5811 is executed, the process for transition to the time-shortened game state is terminated. Also, if a positive judgment is made in step Sb5810 (if the second special chart flag is set), the process for transition to the time-shortened game state is terminated without executing the process of step Sb5811. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sb5805 (if the third time-shortened start flag is not set), that is, if the situation does not warrant a transition to the time-shortened game state, the process for transition to the time-shortened game state is terminated as is.

In this modified example, in the control of ending or transitioning to the time-saving game state, the process of updating the number of times played and the process of determining whether or not to transition to the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state are performed at the start of the variable display, while the process of actually ending or transitioning to the time-saving game state is performed after the variable display ends.

When the former count update and transition determination are performed at the start of the change display, it is possible to set the timing of the latter end process and transition process to the same timing (processing count) as the former, rather than setting it after the change ends. From the standpoint of processing efficiency, it is preferable to group the processes together and execute them at the same time, rather than dividing the processes and dispersing the execution timing.

However, if the termination process or transition process is performed at the start of the variable display, the normal game round and the normal electric device 63a will operate in a manner corresponding to the time-saving game state before the result of the win/lose lottery is announced in the special game round, and the player may be able to infer a transition to the second or third time-saving game state by observing these behaviors. Since the second or third time-saving game state is transitioned to when the win/lose lottery result is a loss, in the above case, the player will be able to grasp the loss result before the win/lose lottery result is announced. As a result, the expectation of a jackpot in the special game round will disappear early, which is undesirable in terms of increasing attention to the game round.

In this regard, according to this modified example, the transition to the second time-saving play state or the third time-saving play state occurs after the variable display ends, so that the normal play round and the normal electric device 63a can be operated in a manner corresponding to the time-saving play state after the result of the winning/losing lottery is announced. This prevents the player from determining that the result is a losing one before the result of the winning/losing lottery is announced, making it possible to maintain the anticipation of a big win in an optimal manner.

<Processing for starting confirmation display>
The process for starting the finalized display in step Sb5204 (FIG. 181) will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 189. In Fig. 189, the same processes as those in the process for starting the finalized display in Fig. 149 are given the same step numbers, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sb5901, it is determined whether the current special game is a losing game in which the ceiling is reached. If it is not a losing game in which the ceiling is reached, it is determined in step Sb5902 whether a special losing flag is set in the various flags storage area 314e of RAM 314.

If the special miss flag is set, that is, if the result of this special drawing is a special miss, step Sb5903 executes a process to clear the special miss flag. After step Sb5903 is executed or if a positive judgment is made in step Sb5901 (if the game is a miss in which the ceiling has been reached), this means that a transition to the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state will occur.

In this case, in step Sb5904, it is determined whether or not the second special chart flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. If the second special chart flag is set, i.e., if the current special chart play round is a play round of the second special chart, in step Sb5905, the normal fixed display time (e.g., 0.5 sec) is set as the fixed display time for the current special chart play round. Also, if a negative determination is made in step Sb5902 (if the special miss flag is not set), i.e., if the result of this special chart win/lose lottery is a jackpot result or a normal miss result, the process also proceeds to step Sb5905, and the normal fixed display time is set as the fixed display time for this round.

If the negative judgment is made in step Sb5904 (the second special chart flag is not set), that is, if the current special chart play round is the first special chart play round, the transition to the second time-saving play state or the third time-saving play state is a transition from the normal play state. In this case, proceed to step Sb5906, and set a specific fixed display time longer than the normal fixed display time as the fixed display time for the current special chart play round. The specific fixed display time in this case may be a time (e.g., 0.8 sec) longer than the fixed display time (e.g., 0.5 sec) of the normal chart play round that is forcibly terminated, as in the second embodiment, or a time (e.g., 4 sec) longer than the total period (e.g., 1.5 sec) of the fixed display time of the normal chart play round that is forcibly terminated, the variable display period (e.g., 0.5 sec) of the normal chart play round corresponding to the second time-saving play state, and the fixed display time (e.g., 0.5 sec) of the normal chart play round corresponding to the second time-saving play state.

After step Sb5905 or step Sb5906 is executed, in step Sb1504, a confirmation display flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e, and then the processing of steps Sb1505 and Sb1506 is executed in sequence.

In step Sb3512, an external signal setting process is performed to output to the management control device of the gaming hall a game round execution signal to notify the execution of a special game round, and a lottery result signal to notify the result of the current special lottery. Note that in this modified example, if a special miss occurs in a time-saving game state, transition to the third time-saving game state is restricted, but the external signal setting process is set so that an external signal corresponding to the special miss result is output even in such a case.

<About the game state flow>
The flow of the game state in this modified example will be explained with reference to Figure 190.

When the number of miss plays reaches the ceiling number during normal play (event A), the normal play state transitions to the second time-saving play state. In this case, in the special play round where the ceiling has been reached, the ceiling reach effect (Fig. 183) is executed by the symbol display device 75 as a play round effect. In the ceiling reach effect, a complete miss effect using the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and an arrival notification effect that notifies the user that the ceiling number has been reached are executed.

In this modified example, the miss counter area HC (update of the number of misses) is performed at the start of the variable display in the special game (Fig. 182, Fig. 185), but the number of misses in the miss count image 475 (Fig. 128) is updated after the fixed display time has elapsed in that special game, as in the second embodiment described above.

For example, if the number of times the miss count image 475 is displayed is updated when the miss count counter area HC is updated, the number of times the miss count image 475 is displayed will be incremented by 1 before the pattern sequence Z1 to Z3 is stopped and displayed. In this case, there is a concern that the player will be able to predict the miss result before the win/lose lottery result is announced by the pattern sequence Z1 to Z3, making it difficult to maintain anticipation of a jackpot during that special pattern play round.

In this regard, as in this modified example, by delaying the update timing of the miss count image 475 relative to the update timing of the miss count counter area HC and updating the miss count image 475 after the fixed display time has elapsed, it is possible to make the display count of the miss count image 475 increment by 1 after the miss result is notified by the pattern rows Z1 to Z3. This prevents the player from predicting the miss result in advance, making it possible to maintain anticipation of a big win.

In the above configuration, if there is pending information corresponding to the next special game, the miss count image 475 will be updated when that special game starts, and if there is no pending information corresponding to the next special game, the miss count image 475 will be updated after the special game in which the miss count counter area HC was updated ends.

Note that the miss count image 475 does not necessarily need to be updated when the fixed display time has elapsed, and may be updated at other times. In other words, in order to avoid predicting the miss result in advance, it is sufficient that the miss count image 475 is updated after the win/lose lottery result is announced by the stopped display of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, so the miss count image 475 may be configured to be updated at any time during the period from the end of the variable display to the end of the fixed display in the special pattern play round in which the miss count counter area HC has been updated.

If a special miss occurs during normal game play (event B), the game state transitions from the normal game state to the third time-saving game state. In this case, in the special game round in which the special miss occurs, a special reach miss performance (Fig. 183) is executed by the pattern display device 75.

If a special miss occurs in a play round other than the final play round in the first or second time-saving play state (event C), transition to the third time-saving play state is restricted, and the first or second time-saving play state continues. In this case, in the special pattern play round in which the special miss occurs, a complete miss effect is executed by the pattern display device 75 as a play round effect. In addition, a picture corresponding to the special miss result is displayed in a stopped state on the special pattern display unit 43.

If a special miss occurs in the final play of the first or second time-shortened play state (event D), the game transitions from the first or second time-shortened play state to the third time-shortened play state. Note that if the play that resulted in a special miss is the final play of each time-shortened play state, transition to the third time-shortened play state is permitted because the update process for the remaining number of times in the high-frequency support mode (processing for updating the high-frequency support mode in step Sb5301) is executed to recognize the end of the time-shortened play state, and then the transition determination process for the third time-shortened play state (processing for determining transition to the third time-shortened play state in step Sb5303) is executed.

In the above case, in the special symbol play round that results in a special miss, a special reach miss effect is executed on the symbol display device 75 as a play round effect. In addition, during at least a portion of the confirmed display time in that special symbol play round, an additional effect (e.g., the additional effect in FIG. 130(c)) is executed to notify that the remaining number of times in the high frequency support mode has increased. At this time, the number of times that is added that is notified by the additional effect is the number that corresponds to the upper limit number of times in the third time-saving play state (e.g., 300 times).

If the number of losing play times reaches the ceiling number of times in a play time other than the final play time in the third time-saving play state (event E), transition to the second time-saving play state is restricted, and the third time-saving play state continues. In this case, in the special play time where the ceiling has been reached, a complete losing effect is executed by the symbol display device 75 as an effect for the play time.

If the number of losing play times reaches the ceiling number in the final play round of the third time-saving play state (event F), the third time-saving play state transitions to the second time-saving play state. In this case, in the special pattern play round in which the ceiling is reached, a ceiling-reaching effect is executed by the pattern display device 75 as a play round effect. In addition, the above-mentioned additional effect is executed for at least a portion of the fixed display time in that special pattern play round.

In this modified example, the upper limit number of times in the first time-saving game state is set to a number less than the ceiling number of times, so the number of times of loss play will not reach the ceiling number during or at the final play in the first time-saving game state. However, if the upper limit number and the ceiling number of times in the first time-saving game state are set to the same number as in the second embodiment described above, a loss result will occur at the final play in the first time-saving game state, resulting in a transition from the first time-saving game state to the second time-saving game state.

When the ceiling is reached and a special miss occurs during the same special game in the normal game state (event G), the process is executed in the order of the transition judgment of the second time-shortened game state (processing for transition judgment of the second time-shortened game state in step Sb5302) → transition judgment of the third time-shortened game state (processing for transition judgment of the third time-shortened game state in step Sb5303), and the transition to the second time-shortened game state is prioritized. In other words, since the transition to the second time-shortened game state or the third time-shortened game state is restricted during the time-shortened game state, the transition to the second time-shortened game state is determined in the previous transition judgment of the second time-shortened game state, and the transition to the third time-shortened game state is restricted in the subsequent transition judgment of the third time-shortened game state. This allows the player to avoid transition to the third time-shortened game state, which is disadvantageous to the player, and to transition to the second time-shortened game state, which is advantageous to the player.

In this case, in a special game round where both the ceiling reach and the special miss result are achieved, a ceiling reach effect is executed by the pattern display device 75 as a game round effect. In addition, a picture corresponding to the special miss result is displayed in a stopped state on the special pattern display unit 43.

The modified example described above has the following advantages:

In a configuration having a second time-saving game state, which is triggered when the number of losing game plays reaches the ceiling number, and a third time-saving game state, which is a time-saving game state more disadvantageous to the player than the second time-saving game state and is triggered when a special losing result occurs, the transition to the third time-saving game state is restricted even if a special losing result occurs during the second time-saving game state, and in one special game play, a transition determination for the second time-saving game state is made before a transition determination for the third time-saving game state is made.

According to this configuration, if the ceiling number of times is reached and a special miss result is won in the same special game round, even if the transition condition to the second time-shortened game state is determined to be met in the transition judgment to the second time-shortened game state and then the transition condition to the third time-shortened game state is determined to be met in the transition judgment to the third time-shortened game state, the transition to the third time-shortened game state is avoided due to the above restriction. This allows the transition to the advantageous second time-shortened game state to be implemented, making it possible to appropriately control the game state.

The decision to transition to the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state is made at the start of the special game round.

In the above configuration, the transition judgment of the second time-saving game state and the transition judgment of the third time-saving game state are performed at the start of the special game round, so that the transition judgment can be performed before the execution of the ceiling reaching effect corresponding to the reaching of the ceiling number of times and the special reach miss effect corresponding to the special miss result are set as the play round performance. For example, if the ceiling number of times is reached and the special miss result is won in the same special game round, both the ceiling reaching effect and the special reach miss effect will be established as the execution target of the play round performance, but according to this configuration, the transition to the third time-saving game state is avoided, and the above-mentioned each effect can be selected based on the priority of the transition to the second time-saving game state. As a result, when the time-saving game state of the transition destination is adjusted to one side, it is possible to preferably execute the play round performance that is consistent with the adjusted time-saving game state of the transition destination.

While the transition judgment for the second time-saving game state and the transition judgment for the third time-saving game state are made at the start of the special game round, the transition to each of these time-saving game states is made in conjunction with the start of the confirmation display.

When the transition judgment for the second time-shortened game state and the transition judgment for the third time-shortened game state are executed and the transition to each of these time-shortened game states or the transition destination time-shortened game state is determined, all that remains is to transition to the time-shortened game state according to the determination result (simply set the time-shortened flag corresponding to the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314). For this reason, in a configuration in which each of these transition judgments is performed at the start of a special game round, it is natural to also transition to the time-shortened game state at the start of a special game round.

However, if the transition to the time-saving play state is made at the start of a special play round, the player's attention will be shifted to the time-saving play state even before the result of the special play lottery is announced, raising concerns that the role of the play round will not be properly fulfilled. In this regard, by waiting until the start of the confirmation display before transitioning to the time-saving play state, even if the player notices the time-saving play state from the behavior of the regular power device 63a, it is possible to have the player focus on the play round until the result of the special play lottery is announced, and then shift their attention to the transition to the time-saving play state. Thus, it is possible to perform each of the above transition judgments at the start of a special play round while preventing a loss of attention to the play round, and to execute a play round performance that is consistent with the adjusted time-saving play state to which the player has been transitioned.

The conditions for transitioning to the second time-saving play state and the conditions for transitioning to the third time-saving play state are both met when the result of the special chart win/lose lottery is a lose result. For this reason, if the transition to the time-saving play state is made at the start of a special chart play round, there is the inconvenience that the player will not notice the time-saving play state and will be able to determine the lose result in advance, even before the result of the special chart win/lose lottery is announced. In this regard, by waiting until the start of the confirmation display before transitioning to the time-saving play state, it is possible to suitably prevent the occurrence of such inconveniences.

The remaining number of times in the time-saving play state is updated, and then the transition judgment to the second time-saving play state and the transition judgment to the third time-saving play state are made.

According to this configuration, for example, if a special miss occurs in the final play round of the second time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state can be ended in that final play round before transitioning to the third time-saving game state. This prevents the special miss result from being invalidated, restricting transition to the third time-saving game state, and also makes it possible to switch from the second time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state without an intervening special game round in the normal game state.

In the case of a process (step Sb3313) for setting the execution of a special reach miss effect (announcement of a special miss result or corresponding to a transition to the third time-shortened game state) based on the result of a special chart win/loss lottery as a transition to the third time-shortened game state, and a process (step Sb5504) for updating the number of miss play times as a transition to the second time-shortened game state, the latter update process is performed before the former setting process is performed in one play time (a special chart play time that resulted in a special miss result).

For example, in a configuration in which the former setting process is executed prior to the latter update process, in a special game round in which both the ceiling number of times have been reached and the special miss result has been won, the pachinko machine 10 will only recognize the special miss result and will not recognize the ceiling number of times has been reached at the setting process stage. In this case, the setting result will inevitably be that the special reach miss performance is executed, but the time-saving game state to which the game actually moves is adjusted to the second time-saving game state, so that a notification that is inconsistent with the time-saving game state to which the game is adjusted will be issued. In this regard, by executing the latter update process prior to the former setting process, the pachinko machine 10 will be able to recognize the ceiling number of times at the setting process stage and can cancel the execution of the special reach miss performance. As a result, it is possible to adjust the time-saving game state to which the game is moved while suppressing the notification that is inconsistent with the type of time-saving game state to which the game actually moves to be issued in the special game round, and it is possible to appropriately control the game state.

If a special miss occurs during a special game where the cumulative number of misses has not yet reached the ceiling number, the number of misses is updated and then the special miss effect is set to be executed. In other words, when only the condition for transitioning to the third time-saving game state is met, an appropriate notification can be given accordingly.

The pattern display device 75 is configured to display the miss count image 475, and the display content is updated after the fixed display time has elapsed.

In the above configuration, the image 475 of the number of misses is displayed, so that the player can grasp the progress of the cumulative number and the number of times remaining until the ceiling number, and can use this information as useful information in proceeding with the game thereafter. In this case, in a configuration in which the update process of the number of misses is performed prior to the setting of the notification corresponding to the special miss result, the update process is performed at a relatively early stage in the special game round. In such a case, if the display content of the image 475 of the number of misses is updated immediately in response to the update of the number of misses, there is a concern that the player will be able to determine that the result is a miss even before the result of the special lottery is not notified. In this regard, by waiting until the end of the confirmation display before updating the image 475 of the number of misses, it is possible to prevent the possibility of determining the miss result in advance. This makes it possible to maintain the expectation of a big win and to prevent a decrease in attention to the game round.

<Modification 7>
In the above-mentioned modified example 6, even if the ceiling is reached or a special miss occurs during the time-saving game state, the transition to the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state is restricted, but in this modified example, these transitions are permitted. The configuration of this modified example will be described below with reference to Figures 191 to 194. In these figures, the same reference numerals are used for the configurations similar to those in the above-mentioned second embodiment and each modified example, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The configuration of the win/lose table and type table for the special game round in this modified example is the same as the win/lose table and type table in modified example 6 shown in Figs. 178-179. The second and third time-shortened game states are also the same as the second and third time-shortened game states in modified example 6 shown in Fig. 179. In other words, the second time-shortened game state continues for a longer number of times than the third time-shortened game state, making the second time-shortened game state a more advantageous time-shortened game state for the player.

<Change start processing>
The variation start processing according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 191. This processing is executed in step Sb5201 of the special game play control processing (Fig. 181), and is executed instead of the variation start processing of Fig. 182. In Fig. 191, the same step numbers are given to the processing similar to that of Fig. 182, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After step Sb3307, step Sb3311 or step Sb3312 is executed, that is, after the stop result corresponding to each winning/losing lottery result is set, in step Sb5301, a high frequency support mode update process is executed to update the number of times the special game is played in the high frequency support mode. In step Sb6101, a process for determining whether or not a transition trigger to the third time-shortened game state has occurred is executed, and in step Sb6102, a process for determining whether or not a transition trigger to the second time-shortened game state has occurred is executed. That is, in the above-mentioned modified example 6, the process for determining whether or not a transition trigger to the second time-shortened game state has occurred is executed after the process for determining whether or not a transition trigger to the third time-shortened game state has occurred, but in this modified example, the process for determining whether or not a transition trigger to the third time-shortened game state has occurred is executed before the process for determining whether or not a transition trigger to the second time-shortened game state has occurred. Details of steps Sb6101 and Sb6102 will be described later.

After execution of step Sb6102, in step Sb3313, a variable display time setting process is executed to set the variable display time for the current game round in the first special chart display unit AS or the second special chart display unit BS. In this modified example, as in the above modified example 6, a variable pattern R1 (e.g., 18 sec) for when the ceiling is reached and a variable pattern R2 (e.g., 15 sec) for a special miss result are set (Figure 183). After execution of step Sb3313, the process from step Sb712 onwards is executed.

<Processing for determining transition to the third time-saving gaming state>
The process for determining whether the game is shifted to the third time-shortened game state in step Sb6101 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 192. In Fig. 192, the same process as the process for determining whether the game is shifted to the third time-shortened game state in Fig. 186 will be assigned the same step number, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sb5601, it is determined whether or not a special miss flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. If the special miss flag is set, it is determined in step Sb5602 whether or not a high probability flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

If the high probability flag is not set, in step Sb6201, it is determined whether or not any of the first support flag, second support flag, or third support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. If any of these support flags is set, that is, if the current game state is any of the first time-shortened game state, second time-shortened game state, or third time-shortened game state, in step Sb6202, a time-shortened ending flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. In other words, in this modified example, if a special miss occurs in a situation in which the first time-shortened game state, second time-shortened game state, or third time-shortened game state is being played, the time-shortened game state being played is ended.

After execution of step Sb6202 or if a negative judgment is made in step Sb6201 (none of the support flags are set), in step Sb6203, a flag for starting the third time-saving mode is set in the various flag storage area 314e, and then the process for determining whether to transition to the third time-saving game state is terminated. The third time-saving mode flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that a transition to the third time-saving game state should be made.

<Processing for determining transition to second time-saving gaming state>
The process for determining whether the game is moved to the second time-shortened game state in step Sb6102 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 193. In Fig. 193, the same process as the process for determining whether the game is moved to the second time-shortened game state in Fig. 185 will be assigned the same step number, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb5503 (the high probability flag is not set), the value of the miss counter area HC provided in the various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314 is updated in step Sb5504. In step Sb5505, it is judged whether the value of the miss counter area HC is "0". If the value of the miss counter area HC is "0", that is, if the number of miss plays has reached the ceiling number, the process proceeds to step Sb5506, where the reached flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

In step Sb6301, it is determined whether the first support flag, the second support flag, or the third support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. If any of these support flags is set, that is, if the current game state is the first time-shortened game state, the second time-shortened game state, or the third time-shortened game state, in step Sb6302, a time-shortened end flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

After execution of step Sb6302 or if a negative judgment is made in step Sb6301 (none of the support flags are set), step Sb6303 judges whether or not a third time-saving start flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. If the third time-saving start flag is set, that is, if a special miss has occurred in the special game round in which the ceiling has been reached, the process proceeds to step Sb6304, where a process is executed to clear the third time-saving start flag. This cancels the transition to the third time-saving game state.

After execution of step Sb6304 or if a negative judgment is made in step Sb6303 (the third time-saving start flag is not set), the second time-saving start flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e in step Sb6305, and then the process for determining whether to transition to the second time-saving game state is terminated. The second time-saving start flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that a transition to the second time-saving game state should be made.

In this manner, in this modified example, if both the ceiling is reached and a special miss result are achieved in the same play round, it is first set that a transition should be made to the third time-shortened play state based on the winning of the special miss result, and then it is rewritten to a transition to the second time-shortened play state based on the achievement of the ceiling being reached. The second time-shortened play state has a higher upper limit number of plays than the third time-shortened play state, and is a time-shortened play state that is more advantageous to the player. With the above configuration, if both transition triggers are achieved at the same time, it is possible to transition to the more advantageous time-shortened play state.

In addition, the high-frequency support mode update process in step Sb5301, the transition determination process to the third time-saving game state in step Sb6101, and the transition determination process to the second time-saving game state in step Sb6102 are executed prior to the variable display time setting process in step Sb3313. Therefore, in a special pattern game round in which both the ceiling has been reached and a special miss result have been achieved, the decision result that prioritizes the transition to the second time-saving game state can be reflected in the selection of the variable display time (variation pattern). Specifically, when the number of miss game rounds has reached the ceiling number in a special pattern game round, and at the same time a special miss result has also been achieved, the variation pattern R1 (Figure 183) corresponding to the ceiling reaching can be set as the variation pattern for that game round. This makes it possible to execute a game round performance that is consistent with the game state to be transitioned to.

<About the game state flow>
The flow of the game state in this modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 194. Note that events A to B are the same as events A to B in modified example 6, so their description will be omitted.

If a special miss occurs in the first or second time-saving game state (event C), the game state transitions from that state to the third time-saving game state. In this case, in the special game round in which the special miss occurs, a special reach miss effect is executed by the symbol display device 75 as a game round effect.

When the number of misses reaches the ceiling number of times during the third time-saving game state (event D), the third time-saving game state transitions to the second time-saving game state. In this case, in the special game round where the ceiling has been reached, the ceiling-reaching effect is executed by the symbol display device 75 as the game round effect.

When the ceiling is reached and a special miss occurs during the same special game in the normal game state (event E), the process is executed in the order of the transition judgment of the third time-shortened game state (processing for transition judgment of the third time-shortened game state in step Sb6101) → transition judgment of the second time-shortened game state (processing for transition judgment of the second time-shortened game state in step Sb6102), so that the transition to the second time-shortened game state is prioritized. In other words, if a transition trigger is established during the time-shortened game state, transition to the second time-shortened game state or the third time-shortened game state is permitted, so even if the transition to the third time-shortened game state is determined in the earlier transition judgment of the third time-shortened game state, the determination result is changed so that the transition to the second time-shortened game state is determined in the later transition judgment of the second time-shortened game state. This makes it possible to avoid transition to the third time-shortened game state, which is disadvantageous to the player, and to transition to the second time-shortened game state, which is advantageous to the player.

In this case, in a special game round where both the ceiling reach and the special miss result are achieved, a ceiling reach effect is executed by the pattern display device 75 as a game round effect. In addition, a picture corresponding to the special miss result is displayed in a stopped state on the special pattern display unit 43.

The modified example described above has the following advantages:

In a configuration having a second time-saving game state, which is triggered when the number of losing game plays reaches the ceiling number, and a third time-saving game state, which is a time-saving game state more disadvantageous to the player than the second time-saving game state and which is triggered when a special losing result occurs, a transition to the third time-saving game state is permitted if a special losing result occurs during the second time-saving game state, and a transition determination to the third time-saving game state is made during one special game play, and then a transition determination to the second time-saving game state is made.

According to this configuration, if the ceiling number of times is reached and a special miss result is won in the same special game round, even if a transition to the third time-shortened game state is determined in a transition determination for the third time-shortened game state, a transition to the second time-shortened game state is then determined in a transition determination for the second time-shortened game state, thereby canceling the result of the previous transition determination for the third time-shortened game state. This allows a transition to the advantageous second time-shortened game state to be implemented, making it possible to appropriately control the game state.

<Modification 8>
In the above-mentioned modified examples 6 and 7, the order of the process for determining whether the second time-shortened game state is reached and the process for determining whether the third time-shortened game state is reached is fixed, but in this modified example, the order of these processes is configured to be switchable. The configuration of this modified example will be described below with reference to Figures 195 to 200. In these figures, the same reference numerals are used to designate the same components as those in the above-mentioned second embodiment and each modified example, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In this modified example, similar to the modified example 6 described above, if the number of losing plays reaches the upper limit while in the time-saving play state, or if the winning/losing lottery result is a special losing result, the transition to the second time-saving play state or the third time-saving play state is restricted.

The configuration of the win/lose table and type table for the special game rounds in this modified example is the same as the win/lose table and type table in modified example 6 shown in Figures 178 to 179. The second time-saving game state to which the game transitions when the number of losing game rounds reaches the ceiling number is also the same as the second time-saving game state in modified example 6 shown in Figure 179.

However, in this modified example, multiple types of special miss results are set, and multiple types of the third time-saving game state are also set.

<Special miss type table and third time-saving game state>
The type table for special misses and the third time-saving game state in this modified example will be explained with reference to Figure 195.

In this modified example, a type table for special misses (for the first special chart) is provided as a type table separate from the type table for big wins. The type table for special misses (for the first special chart) is a type table that is referenced when the result of the lottery for the first special chart is a special miss, and is stored in the type table storage area 313b of the ROM 313.

As shown in FIG. 195(a), in the type table for special losses (for the first special chart), special loss result A and special loss result B are set as selectable special loss types. Special loss result A is a special loss result that transitions to the third time-shortened game state A, and special loss result B is a special loss result that transitions to the third time-shortened game state B.

As shown in FIG. 195(b), the third time-saving game state A is a time-saving game state that continues until the number of times the special game play is performed reaches a predetermined sixth upper limit number (e.g., 300 times). The sixth upper limit number is less than the fifth upper limit number (e.g., 500 times) of the second time-saving game state, making the second time-saving game state a more advantageous time-saving game state for the player than the third time-saving game state A.

The third time-saving game state B is a time-saving game state that continues until the number of times the special game play is performed reaches a predetermined seventh upper limit (e.g., 700 times). The seventh upper limit is greater than the fifth upper limit of the second time-saving game state, making the third time-saving game state B a more advantageous time-saving game state for the player than the second time-saving game state.

In the special miss type table (for the first special chart), "0" to "89" on the jackpot type counter C2 correspond to special miss result A, and "90" to "99" correspond to special miss result B. In other words, the probability of being assigned to special miss result A is set to 90%, and the probability of being assigned to special miss result B is set to 10%.

A special miss result is also set in the win/lose lottery for the second special chart (Fig. 178(a)), but only one type of special miss result is set for the second special chart. In other words, a type table for special misses corresponding to the second special chart is not set. If a special miss result is obtained in the win/lose lottery for the second special chart, the game will transition to the third time-saving game state A. Note that this configuration is for the sake of convenience in order to make it easier to understand and explain, and multiple types of special miss results for the second special chart may be set.

<Change start processing>
The variation start processing according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 196. This processing is executed in step Sb5201 of the special game play control processing (Fig. 181), and is executed instead of the variation start processing of Fig. 182. In Fig. 196, the same step numbers are given to the same processing as in Fig. 182, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After step Sb3307, step Sb3311, or step Sb3312 is executed, that is, after the stop results corresponding to each winning/losing lottery result are set, step Sb5301 executes a high frequency support mode update process to update the number of times the special chart is played in the high frequency support mode.

In step Sb6501, it is determined whether or not a special miss flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. If the special miss flag is set, i.e., if the result of this special chart winning/losing lottery is a special miss result, it proceeds to step Sb6502, where it is determined whether or not the type of special miss result is special miss result B. Special miss result B triggers a transition to the third time-saving game state B, which is a time-saving game state that is more advantageous to the player than the second time-saving game state triggered by reaching the ceiling.

If the type of special failure result is not special failure result B, it means that it is special failure result A. Special failure result A triggers a transition to the third time-shortened game state A, which is a time-shortened game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second time-shortened game state. In this case, proceed to step Sb6503 and execute the transition determination process A for the second time-shortened game state, and then execute the transition determination process A for the third time-shortened game state in step Sb6504.

The transition judgment process A of the second time-shortened game state in step Sb6503 and the transition judgment process A of the third time-shortened game state in step Sb6504 are similar to the transition judgment process of the second time-shortened game state in step Sb5302 (FIG. 185) and the transition judgment process of the third time-shortened game state in step Sb5303 (FIG. 186) in the above-mentioned modified example 6. Therefore, if the ceiling number of times is reached and the special miss result is won in the same play round, and the type of the special miss result is special miss result A, the transition process to the time-shortened game state is performed to reflect the reaching of the ceiling number of times. In other words, the transition to the third time-shortened game state A is restricted, and it is decided to transition to the second time-shortened game state.

Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sb6501 (if the special miss flag is not set), i.e., if the result of this special drawing is a normal miss, the process also proceeds to step Sb6503.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sb6502 (if the type of special miss result is special miss result B), a transition judgment process B for the third time-saving game state is executed in step Sb6505, and then a transition judgment process B for the second time-saving game state is executed in step Sb6506. In other words, the processing is performed in the reverse order to when a negative judgment is made in step Sb6502.

Here, the transition determination process B of the third time-saving game state in step Sb6505 will be explained based on the flowchart in FIG. 197. In FIG. 197, the same step numbers are used for processes similar to the transition determination process of the third time-saving game state in FIG. 186, and their explanations will be omitted or simplified.

As shown in FIG. 197, the transition judgment process B of the third time-shortened game state in step Sb6505 is basically the same as the transition judgment process of the third time-shortened game state in FIG. 186, but differs in that it does not include the processing of step Sb5605. Step Sb5605 restricts transition to the third time-shortened game state when the second time-shortened game start flag is set (when the situation is such that a transition to the second time-shortened game state should occur), but the transition judgment process B of the third time-shortened game state in step Sb6505 does not execute such processing. In other words, without considering whether the situation is such that a transition to the second time-shortened game state should occur, if the player is not currently in another time-shortened game state, the third time-shortened game state start flag is set, indicating that a transition to the third time-shortened game state should occur.

Next, the second time-saving game state transition determination process B in step Sb6506 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 198. In FIG. 198, the same processes as the second time-saving game state transition determination process in FIG. 185 are assigned the same step numbers, and their explanations will be omitted or simplified.

As shown in FIG. 198, the transition judgment process B to the third time-shortened game state in step Sb6506 is basically the same as the transition judgment process to the second time-shortened game state in FIG. 185, but differs in that it includes the processing of step Sb6601. Step Sb6601 restricts transition to the second time-shortened game state when the third time-shortened start flag is set. Therefore, if the ceiling number of times is reached and the special miss result is won in the same game round, and the type of the special miss result is special miss result B, transition processing to the time-shortened game state is performed to reflect the winning of the special miss result. In other words, transition to the second time-shortened game state is restricted, and it is determined to transition to the third time-shortened game state B.

Returning to the explanation of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 196), after execution of step Sb6504 or step Sb6506, the process of setting the fluctuation display time is executed in step Sb3313. In the process of setting the fluctuation display time, if the number of times of the miss game reaches the ceiling number of times, the fluctuation pattern R1 (FIG. 183) corresponding to reaching the ceiling is set, and if the result of the winning/losing lottery is a special miss result, the fluctuation pattern R2 corresponding to the special miss result is set. However, if both the number of times of the ceiling and the win of the special miss result are achieved in the same game, the fluctuation pattern is set taking into account the decision result of which time-saving game state to transition to. Specifically, if it is decided to transition to the second time-saving game state, the fluctuation pattern R1 corresponding to reaching the ceiling is set, and if it is decided to transition to the third time-saving game state B, the fluctuation pattern R2 corresponding to the special miss result is set. After execution of step Sb3313, the process from step Sb712 onwards is executed.

<Time-saving game state transition processing>
The time-saving game state transition process according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 199. This process is executed in step Sb5203 of the special game play control process (Fig. 181), and is executed instead of the time-saving game state transition process in Fig. 188. In Fig. 199, the same step numbers are given to the processes similar to those in Fig. 188, and their descriptions are omitted or simplified.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb5801 (the second time-saving start flag is not set), then in step Sb5805, it is judged whether or not a third time-saving start flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. If the third time-saving start flag is set, then in step Sb5806, a third support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. This causes a transition to the third time-saving game state.

In step Sb6701, it is determined whether the type of special failure result is special failure result B. If it is not special failure result B, i.e., if it is special failure result A, the process proceeds to step Sb6702, where a value corresponding to the sixth upper limit number of times (e.g., 300) is set in the support counter area SC provided in the various counter areas 314d of RAM 314. As a result, the third time-saving game state to be transitioned to is set to the third time-saving game state A.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sb6701 (if the special miss result is B), the process proceeds to step Sb6703, where a value corresponding to the seventh upper limit number of times (e.g., 700) is set in the support counter area SC. This sets the transition to the third time-saving game state to the third time-saving game state B.

After execution of step Sb6702 or step Sb6703, in step Sb6704, a third time-shortened game state start command is set as the target for transmission to the presentation control device 143. At that time, if a transition is made to the third time-shortened game state A, a start command corresponding to the third time-shortened game state A is set, and if a transition is made to the third time-shortened game state B, a start command corresponding to the third time-shortened game state B is set. Each of these start commands includes information indicating the upper limit number of times.

After step Sb5804 or step Sb6704 is executed, step Sb5809 executes a process to clear the time-saving start flag. Then, step Sb5810 and subsequent processes are executed.

<About the game state flow>
The flow of the game state in this modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 200. Note that since event A is the same as event A in the modified example 6, a description thereof will be omitted.

When a special miss result A or special miss result B occurs during normal game play (event B), the game transitions from the normal game play state to the third time-saving game state A or third time-saving game state B. In this case, in the special game round in which the special miss result occurs, the special reach miss effect (Fig. 183) is executed by the pattern display device 75 as the game round effect.

If special miss result A or special miss result B occurs in a play round other than the final play round of the first time-saving play state or the second time-saving play state (event C), transition to the third time-saving play state A or the third time-saving play state B is restricted, and the first time-saving play state or the second time-saving play state continues. In this case, in the special pattern play round in which the special miss result occurs, a complete miss effect is executed by the pattern display device 75 as a play round effect. Note that a picture corresponding to the special miss result is displayed in a stopped state on the special pattern display unit 43.

If the final play round of the first time-saving play state or the second time-saving play state results in a special miss result A or a special miss result B (event D), the game will transition from each time-saving play state to the third time-saving play state A or the third time-saving play state B. In this case, in the special play round that results in a special miss result, a special reach miss effect will be executed by the pattern display device 75 as a play round effect.

If the number of misses reaches the ceiling number of times in a play round other than the final play round of the third time-saving play state A or the third time-saving play state B (event E), transition to the second time-saving play state is restricted, and the third time-saving play state A or the third time-saving play state B continues. In this case, in the special play round where the ceiling has been reached, a complete miss effect is executed by the pattern display device 75 as an effect for the play round.

If the number of misses reaches the ceiling number in the final play of the third time-saving play state A or the third time-saving play state B (event F), the game state transitions from each of the third time-saving play states to the second time-saving play state. In this case, in the special play round in which the ceiling is reached, a ceiling-reaching effect is executed by the pattern display device 75 as a play round effect.

When the ceiling is reached and the special miss result A is achieved in the same special game round in the normal game state (event G), the process is executed in the order of the transition judgment of the second time-shortened game state (processing A for transition judgment of the second time-shortened game state in step Sb6503) → transition judgment of the third time-shortened game state (processing A for transition judgment of the third time-shortened game state in step Sb6504), and the transition to the second time-shortened game state is prioritized. In other words, since the transition to the second time-shortened game state or the third time-shortened game state A is restricted when in the time-shortened game state, the transition to the second time-shortened game state is determined in the previous transition judgment of the second time-shortened game state, and the transition to the third time-shortened game state A is restricted in the subsequent transition judgment of the third time-shortened game state. This makes it possible to avoid transition to the third time-shortened game state A, which is disadvantageous to the player, and to transition to the second time-shortened game state, which is advantageous to the player.

In this case, in a special game round in which both the ceiling reach and the special miss result are achieved, a ceiling reach effect is executed by the pattern display device 75 as a game round effect. In addition, a picture corresponding to the special miss result A is displayed in a stopped state on the special pattern display unit 43.

When the ceiling is reached and the special miss result B is achieved in the same special game round in the normal game state (event H), the process is executed in the order of the transition judgment of the third time-shortened game state (processing B for transition judgment of the third time-shortened game state in step Sb6505) → transition judgment of the second time-shortened game state (processing B for transition judgment of the second time-shortened game state in step Sb6506), and the transition to the third time-shortened game state B is prioritized. In other words, since the transition to the second time-shortened game state or the third time-shortened game state B is restricted when in the time-shortened game state, the transition to the third time-shortened game state B is determined in the previous transition judgment of the third time-shortened game state, and the transition to the second time-shortened game state is restricted in the subsequent transition judgment of the second time-shortened game state. This allows the player to avoid transition to the second time-shortened game state, which is disadvantageous to the player, and to transition to the third time-shortened game state B, which is advantageous to the player. In this case, in a special game round where both the ceiling has been reached and a special miss result has been achieved, a special reach miss effect is executed by the pattern display device 75 as a game round effect.

The modified example described above has the following advantages:

In a configuration having a second time-shortened game state, which is entered when the number of losing game plays reaches the ceiling number, and a third time-shortened game state B, which is a time-shortened game state more advantageous to the player than the second time-shortened game state and which is entered when a special losing result occurs, the transition to the third time-shortened game state B is restricted even if a special losing result occurs during the second time-shortened game state, and in one special game play, a transition decision to the third time-shortened game state B (step Sb6505) is made before a transition decision to the second time-shortened game state (step Sb6506) is made.

According to this configuration, if the ceiling number of times is reached and a special miss result is won in the same special game round, even if the transition judgment for the third time-shortened game state B determines that the transition condition to the third time-shortened game state B is met, and then the transition judgment for the second time-shortened game state determines that the transition condition to the second time-shortened game state is met, the transition to the second time-shortened game state is avoided due to the above restriction. This allows the transition to the advantageous third time-shortened game state B to be implemented, making it possible to appropriately control the game state.

The system has a third time-saving game state A, which is less favorable than the second time-saving game state, and a third time-saving game state B, which is more favorable than the second time-saving game state, and when the ceiling number of times is reached and a special miss result is won in the same special game round, the type of special miss result (the type of the third time-saving game state to transition to) is referenced, and the order of transition determination is switched based on the result.

According to this configuration, when the ceiling number of times is reached and the special failure result is won in the same special game, if the type of the special failure result is special failure result A (a type corresponding to a transition to the third time-shortened game state A, which is less favorable than the second time-shortened game state), the process is executed in the order of transition judgment of the second time-shortened game state (step Sb6503) → transition judgment of the third time-shortened game state A (step Sb6504), and if the type of the special failure result is special failure result B (a type corresponding to a transition to the third time-shortened game state B, which is more favorable than the second time-shortened game state), the process is executed in the order of transition judgment of the third time-shortened game state B (step Sb6505) → transition judgment of the second time-shortened game state (step Sb6506). With this configuration, even in a situation where there are multiple third time-shortened game states, and a state that is less favorable than the second time-shortened game state and a state that is more favorable than the second time-shortened game state are mixed, the transition to the more favorable time-shortened game state can always be prioritized.

<Modification 9>
In this modified example, in the special game in which the number of misses reaches the ceiling number of times and the transition condition to the second time-saving game state is established, the determination process of whether or not to transition to the third time-saving game state is not executed. The configuration of this modified example will be described below with reference to Figures 201 and 202.

In this modified example, similar to modified example 8 above, if the number of losing plays reaches the upper limit while in the time-saving play state, or if the winning/losing lottery result is a special losing result, the transition to the second time-saving play state or the third time-saving play state is restricted.

The win/lose table, jackpot type table, and second time-saving game state of the special game in this modified example are the same as the win/lose table, jackpot type table, and second time-saving game state of modified example 6 shown in Figs. 178-179. The special loss type table and third time-saving game state of this modified example are the same as the special loss type table and third time-saving game state of modified example 8 shown in Fig. 195. That is, the third time-saving game state has a third time-saving game state A and a third time-saving game state B, and the third time-saving game state A has a lower upper limit number of times than the second time-saving game state, and the third time-saving game state B has a higher upper limit number of times than the second time-saving game state.

<Change start processing>
The variation start processing according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 201. This processing is executed in step Sb5201 of the special game play control processing (Fig. 181) by the main control device 162, and is executed instead of the variation start processing in Fig. 196. In Fig. 201, the same step numbers are given to the processing similar to that in Fig. 196, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After step Sb3307, step Sb3311, or step Sb3312 is executed, that is, after the stop results corresponding to each winning/losing lottery result are set, step Sb5301 executes a high frequency support mode update process to update the number of times the special chart is played in the high frequency support mode.

In step Sb7201, a process for determining whether to transition to the second time-shortened game state is executed to determine whether to transition to the second time-shortened game state. This process is the same as the process for determining whether to transition to the second time-shortened game state in FIG. 185 relating to the above-mentioned modified example 6.

With reference to FIG. 185, the process for determining whether to enter the second time-saving game state in step Sb7201 will be explained. First, in step Sb5501, it is determined whether the result of this special drawing is a jackpot result. If it is not a jackpot result, the process proceeds to step Sb5502, where it is determined whether the reached flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314.

If the reached flag is not set, in step Sb5503, it is determined whether or not the high probability flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. If the high probability flag is not set, the process proceeds to step Sb5504, where the value of the miss count counter area HC provided in the various counter area 314d of RAM 314 is updated.

In step Sb5505, it is determined whether the value of the miss counter area HC is "0". If the value of the miss counter area HC is "0", that is, if the number of miss plays has reached the ceiling number, the process proceeds to step Sb5506, and the reached flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

In step Sb5507, it is determined whether the first support flag, the second support flag, or the third support flag is set. If any of the support flags is set, it is determined in step Sb5509 whether a time-saving end flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb5507 (if none of the support flags are set) or if a positive judgment is made in step Sb5509 (if the time-saving end flag is set), a second time-saving start flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e in step Sb5508. The second time-saving start flag is used by the MPU 312 to know that a transition to the second time-saving game state should occur.

Returning to the explanation of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 201), after executing the process for determining whether to transition to the second time-shortened game state in step Sb7201, in step Sb7202, it is determined whether or not the second time-shortened game state start flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. If the second time-shortened game state start flag is not set, that is, if the situation does not warrant a transition to the second time-shortened game state, in step Sb7203, a process for determining whether or not to transition to the third time-shortened game state is executed. This process is the same as the process B for determining whether to transition to the third time-shortened game state in FIG. 197 relating to the above-mentioned modified example 8.

With reference to FIG. 197, the process for determining whether to transition to the third time-saving game state in step Sb7203 will be explained. First, in step Sb5601, it is determined whether or not a special miss flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. If the special miss flag is set, that is, if the result of this special chart win/loss lottery is a special miss result (special miss result A or special miss result B), the process proceeds to step Sb5602, where it is determined whether or not a high probability flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

If the high probability flag is not set, in step Sb5603, it is determined whether the first support flag, the second support flag, or the third support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. If any of these support flags is set, in step Sb5604, it is determined whether the time-saving end flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb5603 (if none of the support flags are set and the current game state is the normal game state) or if a positive judgment is made in step Sb5604 (if the time-saving end flag is set and this is the final game in each time-saving game state), then in step Sb5606, a third time-saving start flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The third time-saving start flag is used by the MPU 312 to know that a transition to the third time-saving game state should occur.

Returning to the explanation of the fluctuation start process (Fig. 201), if a positive judgment is made in step Sb7202 (if the second time-saving start flag is set), the process proceeds to step Sb7204, where it is determined whether or not a special miss flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. If the special miss flag is set, that is, if the result of this special chart win/loss lottery is a special miss result, then in step Sb7205, a process is executed to clear the set special miss flag.

After execution of steps Sb7203 and Sb7205, or if a negative judgment is made in step Sb7204 (the special miss flag is not set), step Sb3313 executes a variable display time setting process to set the variable display time for the current game round in the first special chart display unit AS or the second special chart display unit BS. In this modified example, as in modified example 6 above, a variable pattern R1 (e.g., 18 sec) for when the ceiling is reached and a variable pattern R2 (e.g., 15 sec) for a special miss result are set (Figure 183). After execution of step Sb3313, the processes from step Sb712 onwards are executed.

<About the game state flow>
The flow of the game state in this modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 202. Note that events A to F are the same as events A to F in modified example 8, and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

In this modified example, the process is executed in the order of the process for determining whether to transition to the second time-shortened game state (step Sb7201) and the process for determining whether to transition to the third time-shortened game state (step Sb7203). If the second time-shortened game start flag is set in the process for determining whether to transition to the second time-shortened game state, the execution of the process for determining whether to transition to the third time-shortened game state is avoided. Therefore, if the ceiling is reached and special miss result A or B is achieved in the same special game round in the normal game state (event G), the transition to the third time-shortened game state A or B is restricted, and the game transitions from the normal game state to the second time-shortened game state.

In this case, in a special game round in which both the ceiling reach and special miss result A or B are achieved, a ceiling reach effect is executed by the pattern display device 75 as a game round effect. At this time, a picture corresponding to the special miss result A or B is displayed in a stopped state on the special display unit 43.

The third time-shortened game state A is a time-shortened game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second time-shortened game state, whereas the third time-shortened game state B is a time-shortened game state that is more advantageous to the player than the second time-shortened game state, and each of these third time-shortened game states is configured to have different advantages and disadvantages in relation to the second time-shortened game state. In this modified example, regardless of such differences in advantages, a transition to the second time-shortened game state is prioritized regardless of the type of special miss that occurs simultaneously with reaching the ceiling. With this configuration, the following effects can be expected.

The second time-shortened game state is entered based on the cumulative number of losing plays, and therefore has the characteristic that the player can predict the transition to the second time-shortened game state before the number of losing plays reaches the ceiling number (before the transition trigger is established). For this reason, if the transition to the second time-shortened game state is not made even though the number of losing plays has actually reached the ceiling number and the transition trigger is established, the player is likely to notice that the transition to the second time-shortened game state has not occurred. In this case, there is a risk of confusion as to what happened after the ceiling was reached, and even if the transition to another time-shortened game state is made, there is a concern that it will give the unnatural impression that the game state is not the second time-shortened game state.

On the other hand, the transition to the third time-saving game state is triggered by winning a special losing result, and transition occurs based on conditions that are met within one play round, so the player cannot predict the transition to the third time-saving game state before the transition trigger is met. For this reason, even if the player is internally in a winning state for a special losing result, unless this is actively notified, it is possible to avoid the player being aware of the transition to the third time-saving game state.

For these reasons, in cases where a trigger for transition to the second time-shortened game state and a trigger for transition to the third time-shortened game state occur simultaneously, leaving the player with no choice but to choose one of the time-shortened game states, it is believed that restricting the transition to the third time-shortened game state and prioritizing the transition to the second time-shortened game state will make it less likely for the player to notice the transition restriction. Therefore, by uniformly prioritizing the second time-shortened game state regardless of whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous, as in this modified example, it becomes possible to adjust the time-shortened game state to which the player is to transition while suppressing the player's awareness.

In addition, even in the above-mentioned variants 6 and 7, in which the only third time-saving game state exists that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second time-saving game state, if the ceiling number of times is reached and a special miss result is won in the same game round, the transition to the second time-saving game state is prioritized, which is similar to this variant, so the above-mentioned effect can also be expected in the configurations of variants 6 and 7.

<Modification 10>
In this modified example, in the special game in which the winning/losing lottery result is a special losing result and the transition condition to the third time-saving game state is established, the determination process of whether or not to transition to the second time-saving game state is not executed. The configuration of this modified example will be described below with reference to Figures 203 to 206.

In this modified example, similar to modified example 8 above, if the number of losing plays reaches the upper limit while in the time-saving play state, or if the winning/losing lottery result is a special losing result, the transition to the second time-saving play state or the third time-saving play state is restricted.

The win/lose table, jackpot type table, and second time-saving game state of the special game in this modified example are the same as the win/lose table, jackpot type table, and second time-saving game state of modified example 6 shown in Figs. 178-179. The special loss type table and third time-saving game state of this modified example are the same as the special loss type table and third time-saving game state of modified example 8 shown in Fig. 195. That is, the third time-saving game state has a third time-saving game state A and a third time-saving game state B, and the third time-saving game state A has a lower upper limit number of times than the second time-saving game state, and the third time-saving game state B has a higher upper limit number of times than the second time-saving game state.

<Change start processing>
The variation start processing according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 203. This processing is executed in step Sb5201 of the special game play control processing (Fig. 181) by the main control device 162, and is executed instead of the variation start processing in Fig. 196. In Fig. 203, the same step numbers are given to the processing similar to that in Fig. 196, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After step Sb3307, step Sb3311, or step Sb3312 is executed, that is, after the stop results corresponding to each winning/losing lottery result are set, step Sb5301 executes a high frequency support mode update process to update the number of times the special chart is played in the high frequency support mode.

In step Sb7501, a process for determining whether to transition to the third time-shortened game state is executed to determine whether to transition to the third time-shortened game state. This process is the same as the process B for determining whether to transition to the third time-shortened game state in FIG. 197 relating to the above-mentioned modified example 8.

With reference to FIG. 197, the process for determining whether to transition to the third time-saving game state in step Sb7501 will be explained. First, in step Sb5601, it is determined whether or not a special miss flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. If the special miss flag is set, that is, if the result of this special chart win/loss lottery is a special miss result (special miss result A or special miss result B), the process proceeds to step Sb5602, where it is determined whether or not a high probability flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

If the high probability flag is not set, in step Sb5603, it is determined whether the first support flag, the second support flag, or the third support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. If any of these support flags is set, in step Sb5604, it is determined whether the time-saving end flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb5603 (if none of the support flags are set and the current game state is the normal game state) or if a positive judgment is made in step Sb5604 (if the time-saving end flag is set and this is the final game in each time-saving game state), then in step Sb5606, a third time-saving start flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The third time-saving start flag is used by the MPU 312 to know that a transition to the third time-saving game state should occur.

Returning to the explanation of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 203), after executing the process for determining whether to transition to the third time-shortened game state in step Sb7501, the process for determining whether to transition to the second time-shortened game state is executed in step Sb7502. The details of step Sb7502 will be described later.

In the following step Sb3313, a variable display time setting process is executed to set the variable display time for the current game round in the first special chart display unit AS or the second special chart display unit BS. In this modified example, as in the above modified example 6, a variable pattern R1 (e.g., 18 sec) for when the ceiling is reached and a variable pattern R2 (e.g., 15 sec) for a special miss result are set (Fig. 183). After execution of step Sb3313, the process from step Sb712 onwards is executed.

<Processing for determining transition to second time-saving gaming state>
The process for determining whether the game is shifted to the second time-shortened game state in step Sb7502 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 204. In Fig. 204, the same process as the process for determining whether the game is shifted to the second time-shortened game state in Fig. 185 will be assigned the same step number, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb5503 (the high probability flag is not set), step Sb7601 judges whether or not a third time-saving start flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. If the third time-saving start flag is not set, i.e., if the situation is not such that a transition to the third time-saving game state should occur, the process proceeds to step Sb7602, where it is judged whether or not a third support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

If the third support flag is set, i.e., if the current game state is the third time-saving game state, step Sb7603 determines whether or not a time-saving end flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. If the time-saving end flag is set, this means that the current special game round is the final game round in the third time-saving game state.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb7602 (if the third support flag is not set) or if a positive judgment is made in step Sb7603 (if the time-saving end flag is set), the value of the miss count counter area HC provided in the various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314 is updated in step Sb7604. Specifically, the value of the miss count counter area HC is decremented by 1. The miss count counter area HC is used by the MPU 312 to grasp the number of times remaining up to the ceiling number of times.

In step Sb7605, it is determined whether the value of the miss counter area HC is "0". If the value of the miss counter area HC is "0", that is, if the number of miss plays has reached the ceiling number, the process proceeds to step Sb7606, and the reached flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

In step Sb7607, it is determined whether or not the first support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. If the first support flag is set, that is, if the current game state is the first time-saving game state, the process proceeds to step Sb7608, where it is determined whether or not a time-saving end flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. If the time-saving end flag is set, this means that the current special game round is the final game round in the first time-saving game state.

In this modified example, the upper limit number of times in the first time-saving game state is set to a number (e.g., 100 times) that is less than the ceiling number of times (e.g., 800 times), and the value of the miss counter area HC is reset to a value corresponding to the ceiling number of times (e.g., 800) when a jackpot result occurs. Therefore, the number of miss plays in the first time-saving game state will never reach the ceiling number, and the judgment process of step Sb7607 will always result in a negative judgment. However, whether or not the upper limit number of times in the first time-saving game state is set to a number less than the ceiling number is optional, and it may be set to a number equal to or greater than the ceiling number, so in such a configuration, the judgment process of step Sb7607 may result in a negative judgment or a positive judgment.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sb7607 (if the first support flag is not set) or if a positive judgment is made in step Sb7608 (if the time-saving end flag is set), the process proceeds to step Sb5508, where a second time-saving start flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The second time-saving start flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that a transition to the second time-saving game state should occur.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sb7601 (if the flag for starting the third time-saving play is set), that is, if the situation is such that a transition to the third time-saving play state should occur, the process for judging the transition to the second time-saving play state is terminated without executing the processes in steps Sb7602 and onwards. In other words, the process in step Sb7604 is not executed, and the value in the miss counter area HC is not updated. Therefore, if the result of the win/lose lottery in a special chart play round where the number of miss play rounds reaches the ceiling number of times, the update of the number of miss play rounds is limited, and the reaching of the ceiling number of times is put on hold.

In addition, if a negative judgment is made in step Sb7603 (the time-saving end flag is not set), that is, if the player is in the third time-saving play state (excluding the final play round), the process for judging the transition to the second time-saving play state is terminated without executing the processes in steps Sb7604 and onwards. In other words, even if the player is in the third time-saving play state (excluding the final play round), the value of the miss counter area HC is not updated. Therefore, while the player is in the third time-saving play state, even if the result of the special chart win/loss lottery is a miss, the number of miss play rounds is not updated and the same value continues to be maintained.

When the third support flag is cleared and the third time-saving game state ends, a negative judgment is made in step Sb7602, and the processing of step Sb7604 is executed. In other words, the state in which the update of the number of miss plays is restricted is released when the third time-saving game state ends.

Incidentally, a negative judgment is made in step Sb7602 (when it is judged that the third support flag is not set) when both the third support flag and the first support flag are not set and the game state at that time is the normal game state, or when the first support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e and the game state at that time is the first time-saving game state. In this case, the process of step Sb7604 is executed and the value of the miss counter area HC is updated. In other words, when the game is in the first time-saving game state, unlike when the game is in the third time-saving game state, the number of miss game times is updated in response to the result of the special chart win/lose lottery being a miss.

<About the game state flow>
The flow of the game state in this modification will be explained with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 205(a), in a situation where the game is in the third time-saving game state A or the third time-saving game state B (excluding the final game round), the update of the number of unsuccessful game rounds is restricted. This case will be explained with reference to FIG. 206. Here, an example will be explained in which a 4R normal jackpot result occurs, causing a transition to the first time-saving game state, and then a special unsuccessful result A occurs, causing a transition to the third time-saving game state A.

When the open/close execution mode corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot result ends at timing t1, the first support flag is set and the game transitions to the first time-saving game state (Fig. 206 (a) and (b)). At this time, the value of the support counter area SC is set to a value corresponding to the second upper limit number of times (e.g., 100 times). The miss counter area HC is set to a value corresponding to the ceiling number of times (e.g., 800 times) at the start of the confirmation display in the special chart game round that resulted in the 4R normal jackpot result (Fig. 206 (d) and (e)).

When the value of the support counter area SC becomes "0" at timing t2, the first support flag is cleared, the first time-saving game state ends, and the game transitions to the normal game state. Between the start and end of the first time-saving game state (timing t1 to timing t2), the value of the miss counter area HC is updated based on the result of the win/lose lottery in each special game round being a miss (special miss result or normal miss result) (Figure 206 (e)).

If the result of the lottery at timing t3 is a special miss result A, the third support flag is set and the game moves from the normal game state to the third time-saving game state A (Fig. 206 (c)). At this time, the value of the support counter area SC is set to a value corresponding to the sixth upper limit number of times (e.g., 300 times).

In addition, at timing t3 when the game transitions to the third time-shortened game state A, the game transitions to a restricted state in which updates to the miss counter area HC are restricted. This restricted state continues until the third time-shortened game state A ends (Fig. 206(e)). This prevents the number of misses from reaching the ceiling during the third time-shortened game state, restricting the transition to the second time-shortened game state, in other words, preventing the ceiling from being reached.

When the value of the support counter area SC becomes "0" at timing t4, the third support flag is cleared, the third time-saving game state A ends, and the game transitions to the normal game state. As a result, the above-mentioned restricted state is released, and the update of the miss counter area HC resumes.

After that, when the value of the miss counter area HC becomes "0" at timing t5, the second support flag is set and the game transitions to the second time-saving game state (Figure 206 (f)).

In the above configuration, from timing t3 to timing t4, when the updating of the miss counter area HC is restricted, the miss count image 475 displayed on the pattern display device 75 is not updated either. In other words, the miss count immediately before the transition to the third time-saving game state A is held. At that time, as shown in FIG. 206(g), a holding image 481 corresponding to the fact that the miss count is being held is displayed, and it is notified that the updating of the miss count has been stopped. This holding image 481 is erased in conjunction with the resumption of updating of the miss counter area HC at timing t4.

At timings t1 to t3 and timings t4 to t5 when the value of the miss counter area HC is updated, the miss count image 475 is displayed so that the number of times displayed increases according to the result of the special drawing lottery being a miss, as in the second embodiment described above. In this modified example, the miss count counter area HC is updated (updating the number of misses) at the start of the special drawing game (Figs. 203 and 204), but the number of misses in the miss count image 475 is updated after the fixed display time has elapsed in that special drawing game, as in the second embodiment described above. Note that the miss count image 475 does not necessarily need to be updated when the fixed display time has elapsed, and the miss count image 475 may be updated at any time during the period from the end of the variable display to the end of the fixed display in the special drawing game in which the miss counter area HC is updated.

Next, we will explain the flow of the game state when each of the events A to E shown in Figure 205 (b) occurs. Of these, events A to D are the same as events A to D in Variation 8 above, so we will omit the explanation for them.

If the winning/losing lottery result is special losing result A or special losing result B in a special game round (the game round of the ceiling number) in which the number of losing game rounds reaches the ceiling number (event E), the update of the losing count counter area HC is restricted (step Sb7601 in FIG. 204). As a result, the value of the losing count counter area HC is held at "1", which is the value immediately before the ceiling is reached, and the reaching of the ceiling is put on hold. Therefore, the MPU 312 only recognizes the winning of the special losing result, and the game state transitions to the third time-saving game state A or the third time-saving game state B. In this case, in that special game round, a special reaching losing effect (FIG. 153) is executed by the pattern display device 75 as an effect for the game round.

In this modified example, updates to the miss counter area HC are restricted not only during play times in which the winning/losing lottery result is a special miss, but also when the game is in the third time-saving game state. Therefore, the value of the miss counter area HC is kept at "1" even while the game is in the third time-saving game state.

Then, when the third time-saving game state ends, the update restriction on the miss counter area HC is lifted. At that time, in this variation, the process is executed in the order of update process of the remaining number of times in the high-frequency support mode (processing for updating the high-frequency support mode in step Sb5301) → update process of the number of misses (processing for determining the transition to the second time-saving game state in step Sb7502), so that after the end process of the third time-saving game state is executed in the final play round of the third time-saving game state, the update of the number of misses is resumed during that special play round.

In other words, the value of the miss counter area HC, which had been held at "1" until then, is decremented by one in the final play of the third time-saving play state to "0", and as a result, the second support flag is set and the game moves to the second time-saving play state. In this way, the end of the third time-saving play state and the release of the pending state of reaching the ceiling are performed in the same play, and the game moves from the third time-saving play state to the second time-saving play state without going through the normal play state. In this case, the symbol display device 75 executes an additional effect (e.g., the additional effect in FIG. 130(c)) that notifies the player that the number of remaining times in the high-frequency support mode has increased. At this time, the additional effect notified by the additional effect corresponds to the upper limit number of times in the second time-saving play state (e.g., 500 times).

The above-mentioned additional effects may be performed using part or all of the final display time of the last game, or may be performed across the variable display time (part of the variable display time) and the fixed display time (part or all of the fixed display time).

The modified example described above has the following advantages:

The system has a second time-saving game state, which is triggered when the number of losing plays reaches the ceiling number, and a third time-saving game state, which is triggered when a special losing result occurs, and is configured to restrict updates to the number of losing plays when in the third time-saving game state.

The third time-saving game state is entered based on the result of the special drawing lottery being a special miss result, and the transition to the third time-saving game state occurs randomly, so that the cumulative number of miss games may reach the ceiling number in the third time-saving game state. In this case, if the transition to the second time-saving game state is restricted and the third time-saving game state is continued, it is possible to avoid multiple time-saving game states overlapping and complicating the processing, but on the other hand, it will result in the game that has been repeated with the aim of reaching the ceiling number being for naught. In particular, since the player can predict in advance that the ceiling number will be reached, there is a concern that if the reaching of the ceiling number is invalidated, the player will be likely to notice this and feel unpleasant. In this regard, by restricting the update of the number of miss games when in the third time-saving game state, it is possible to prevent the cumulative number of miss games (the number recognized by the pachinko machine 10) from reaching the ceiling number during the third time-saving game state. This prevents reaching the ceiling number of times from being invalidated, making it possible to optimally control the game state.

The above restriction is lifted when the third time-saving play state ends. With this configuration, the update of the number of miss plays resumes when the third time-saving play state ends. This allows the player to play again from the continuation of the accumulated number of plays before the transition to the third time-saving play state, aiming to reach the ceiling number of plays.

If the result of the special drawing lottery is a special miss, the number of miss plays will be limited.

According to this configuration, when a special miss occurs in a game where the cumulative number of misses reaches the ceiling number, the player can hold off on reaching the ceiling number of times while prioritizing the special miss result. This makes it possible to avoid transitioning to the second time-saving game state and transition to the third time-saving game state, thereby preventing multiple time-saving game states from overlapping. After the third time-saving game state ends, the update of the number of misses is resumed, so that the update result naturally reaches the ceiling number of times and transitions to the second time-saving game state. In other words, when a special miss occurs in a game where the cumulative number of misses reaches the ceiling number of times, the player can transition to the third time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state in sequence, making it possible to configure the game so that the player can enjoy the benefits of both of these time-saving game states.

In one game, a transition determination to the third time-saving game state is made, and then the number of play times with a miss is updated.

According to this configuration, when a special miss occurs in a game in which the cumulative number of miss plays reaches the ceiling number, it is possible to switch between updating the number of miss plays or not based on the result of the transition judgment to the third time-saving game state. Therefore, this can be a preferable aspect in realizing a configuration that prioritizes winning the special miss result and reserves the reaching of the ceiling number of plays as described above.

The system is designed to allow the number of misses to be updated when in the first time-saving game state.

The first time-saving game state, which is entered via the open/close execution mode, can be adjusted during the design stage of the pachinko machine so that the cumulative number of times that a game is lost during the first time-saving game state does not reach the ceiling number. Specifically, the upper limit number of times in the first time-saving game state can be set to a number that is less than the ceiling number. In light of such characteristics, while limiting the update of the number of times that a game is lost during the third time-saving game state, it is possible to allow the update of the number of times that a game is lost during the first time-saving game state, which can prevent the ceiling number from being reached during the third time-saving game state, which cannot be predicted in advance during the design stage, and to prevent a large delay in the transition to the second time-saving game state due to excessive stagnation in the update of the number of times that a game is lost.

When the update of the number of losing plays is restricted, the display content of the losing play count image 475 is maintained in the state it was in immediately before the restriction was imposed.

In a configuration in which the update of the number of times a losing game is restricted when in the third time-saving game state, a discrepancy occurs between the actual cumulative number of times a losing game is played and the internal cumulative number of times a losing game is recognized by the pachinko machine 10. For this reason, there is a concern that it may become difficult for the player to grasp the cumulative number of times that is internally recognized in relation to the ceiling number of times, and this tendency becomes more pronounced as the game progresses in the third time-saving game state and the discrepancy becomes larger. In this regard, when the update of the number of times is restricted, the number of times a losing game is played is displayed in a state in which the state immediately before that is maintained, so that the player can easily understand the internally recognized number of times. This makes it possible to appropriately suppress confusion among the player.

<Modification 11>
This modification differs from the above modification 3 in the manner in which an external signal is output when a special miss result occurs.

Conventional pachinko machines only had the first time-saving game state, which is entered via the open/close execution mode, so it is assumed that the hall equipment, such as the hall computer (management control device) of the game hall and the notification unit (data counter, etc.) installed on the game island, are configured to only support this state. For this reason, even if a pachinko machine with a third time-saving game state (a time-saving game state entered when a special miss occurs) that is entered without going through the open/close execution mode is configured to output a dedicated external signal, the hall equipment will not be able to support it, and there is a concern that the game hall will not be able to know that a special miss has occurred or that the third time-saving game state has occurred. In this case, it would be possible to respond by replacing the hall equipment, but this would place a heavy burden on the game hall.

The configuration of this modified example has been devised taking these circumstances into consideration, and the configuration of this modified example will be explained below with reference to FIG. 207.

First, the external signals when the special chart lottery results in a normal jackpot and the game transitions to the first time-saving game state via the open/close execution mode will be described with reference to FIG. 207(a). In this modified example, the external signals used in this case are the first external signal (FIG. 207(a4)) and the second external signal (FIG. 207(a5)). The first external signal and the second external signal are output to the outside of the gaming machine using separate output terminals in the external output terminal 213.

The first external signal is a signal output in response to the opening and closing execution mode, and is turned on during the period from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode (Fig. 207(a2)) (timing t2 to timing t3) as shown in Fig. 207(a4). The second external signal is a signal output in response to the opening and closing execution mode and the time-shortened game state (first time-shortened game state), and is turned on during the period from the start of the opening and closing execution mode to the end of the time-shortened game state (Fig. 207(a3)) (timing t2 to timing t4) as shown in Fig. 207(a5).

By the way, during the special game round, no direct external signal (such as a jackpot winning signal) corresponding to the result of the jackpot is output, and only a game round execution signal indicating that the special game round has been executed is output. The game round execution signal is output at the start and end of the confirmation display during the special game round.

The hall computer, notification unit, etc. recognizes the execution (end) of a special game round by receiving a game round execution signal, and then recognizes the occurrence of a jackpot or a jackpot game (open/close execution mode) by receiving a first external signal. In addition, after the first external signal goes to the OFF state, the second external signal goes to the ON state, and thus recognizes the transition to a time-saving game state (occurrence of a time-saving game state).

Next, with reference to Figure 207 (b), we will explain the external signal that occurs when the special drawing results in a special miss and the game moves to the third time-saving game state without going through the open/close execution mode.

If the special drawing results in a special miss, no direct external signal corresponding to the special miss (such as a special miss result winning signal) will be output during the special drawing play time, and only a play time execution signal indicating that the special drawing play time has been executed will be output.

Then, the first external signal is output at the timing of transition to the third time-saving game state (Fig. 207 (b4)). In this modified example, the transition to the third time-saving game state occurs at the start of the confirmation display in the special game round that resulted in a special miss, so the first external signal is output at the start of the confirmation display.

As mentioned above, the first external signal is a jackpot signal that notifies the hall equipment that it is in the opening and closing execution mode, but since the opening and closing execution mode is not performed when transitioning to the third time-saving gaming state, the first external signal in FIG. 207 (b4) is a pseudo jackpot signal that does not correspond to the opening and closing execution mode. Therefore, to make it possible to distinguish from cases that actually correspond to the opening and closing execution mode (when a normal jackpot result is obtained), the signal is turned on for a shorter period of time than in such cases (timing t12 to timing t13).

The specific output period of the first external signal is not particularly limited as long as it can be distinguished from the first external signal when a normal jackpot result is obtained, but it is preferable that the period be shorter than the minimum period for one round in the opening and closing execution mode (the firing cycle of the game balls x the maximum number of winning balls into the variable winning device 65). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the output period of the first external signal output when transitioning to the third time-saving game state from being longer than the output period when the opening and closing execution mode is actually performed, making it possible to appropriately distinguish between the two. In this modified example, the output period of the first external signal is set to, for example, 200 msec.

In addition, if a special miss occurs, a second external signal is output in response to the transition timing (Fig. 207 (b5)). This second external signal is in the ON state during the period from the transition timing to the end of the time-saving game state (timing t12 to timing t14).

As described above, when transitioning to the third time-saving game state due to winning a special miss result, the same external signal (signal output from the same external terminal) is used as the external signal used when transitioning to the first time-saving game state due to winning a normal jackpot result, so it is possible to receive the external signal when transitioning to the third time-saving game state without having to add additional receiving terminals to the hall equipment.

In this case, if the hall equipment has a function that can distinguish the output period (difference in length) of the first external signal, the occurrence of a special losing result can be recognized by receiving a first external signal with a short output period. This makes it possible for the hall computer to manage the occurrence of a special losing result, and for a data counter or the like to issue a notification corresponding to a winning result for the special losing result.

Even if it is not possible to distinguish the difference in the output period, the behavior of the external signal in the case of a special miss is the same as in the case of a normal jackpot result, so the hall equipment can grasp the transition or occurrence of a time-saving game state. In other words, in the case of a special miss, just like in the case of a normal jackpot result, the first external signal and the second external signal are turned on, and then the first external signal is turned off and the second external signal is turned on. Therefore, even if it is difficult to distinguish between a normal jackpot result and a special miss, it is possible to recognize the transition to the time-saving game state.

Depending on the type of data counter, etc., it is also expected that the configuration will be such that a light-emitting effect corresponding to the opening and closing execution mode is performed based on the first external signal. In this regard, in this modified example, the first external signal in the event of a special miss is output after transitioning to the time-saving game state (third time-saving game state). Therefore, in the event of a special miss, it is possible to prevent the light-emitting effect corresponding to the opening and closing execution mode from being performed before transitioning to the time-saving game state.

In this case, the above-mentioned light-emitting effect may be performed when the time-saving game state is entered, but since the output period of the first external signal is shortened in the event of a special miss, the light-emitting effect can be ended in a short time. This makes the light-emitting effect less noticeable, and prevents the player from getting an unnatural impression.

In the above explanation, the third time-saving game state triggered by winning the special miss result was exemplified as a time-saving game state to which a transition is made without going through the open/close execution mode, but the configuration of this modified example can also be applied to the second time-saving game state to which a transition is made when the ceiling number of times is reached. Specifically, the special game number of times (timing t11 to timing t12) of the special miss result in FIG. 207 (b1) can be replaced with the special game number of times that has reached the ceiling number of times. In other words, when a transition is made to the second time-saving game state when the ceiling number of times is reached, the first external signal and the second external signal of FIG. 207 (b4) and (b5) can be output in accordance with the timing of the transition to the time-saving game state.

<Modification 12>
In this modified example, the output mode of the external signal when a special miss occurs is different from the modified example 3 and the modified example 11. The configuration of this modified example will be described with reference to Figs.

In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 208, a first external signal A, a first external signal B, a second external signal A, a second external signal B, and a third external signal can be output as external signals. Of these, the first external signal A and the second external signal A are similar to the first external signal and the second external signal in modified example 11, and therefore a description thereof will be omitted. In other words, this modified example has a configuration in which the first external signal B, the second external signal B, and the third external signal are added to the configuration of modified example 11.

The first external signal B is a signal that is output in response to the opening and closing execution mode, and when the special drawing results in a normal jackpot and the game moves to the first time-saving game state via the opening and closing execution mode, it is turned on during the period from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode (timing t2 to timing t3), as shown in FIG. 208(e). In other words, it has the same output mode as the first external signal A.

However, as shown in FIG. 209(e), if the special drawing results in a special miss and the game moves to the third time-saving game state without going through the opening and closing execution mode, the signal is not switched to the ON state, but is maintained in the OFF state, corresponding to the fact that the opening and closing execution mode is not executed. In other words, the first external signal A (FIG. 209(d)) is switched to the ON state for a predetermined period (timing t12 to timing t13) as a pseudo jackpot signal when the game moves to the third time-saving game state, but the first external signal B is not switched to the ON state in this way.

The second external signal B is a signal that is output in response to the opening/closing execution mode and the time-saving game state, and in the case of a transition to the first time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 208(g), it is in the ON state during the period from the start of the opening/closing execution mode to the end of the time-saving game state (timing t2 to timing t4). In other words, it has the same output mode as the second external signal A.

However, as shown in FIG. 209(g), in the case of a transition to the third time-shortened game state, the signal is turned off during the time-shortened game state. In other words, the second external signal A (FIG. 209(f)) is turned on during the time-shortened game state, but the second external signal B does not switch to the on state in this way.

The third external signal is a signal that is output in response to the time-shortened game state, and is in the ON state during the period from the start to the end of the time-shortened game state. This is the same whether the time-shortened game state to be transitioned to is the first time-shortened game state or the third time-shortened game state (Fig. 208 (h), Fig. 209 (h)).

The first external signal B, the second external signal B, and the third external signal B are each output from a different output terminal to the outside of the gaming machine.

If a third time-saving play state (a time-saving play state that does not go through the open/close execution mode) is added as a function to a pachinko machine, arcades may consider introducing new hall equipment (hall computers, data counters, etc.) that supports the third time-saving play state, or adding functions to existing hall equipment, in order to handle such a function.

However, it is not certain that all gaming halls will take such measures, and it is possible that existing hall equipment will continue to be used. In other words, there is a possibility that the hall equipment that is expected to receive external signals will be a mixture of incompatible equipment that is not compatible with the third time-saving gaming state and compatible equipment that is compatible with the third time-saving gaming state.

The configuration of this modified example has been devised taking into account this mixed state. Note that the compatible device is assumed to be one that has the function of recognizing the time-saving gaming state from the third external signal.

In order for the data counter or the like to receive an external signal from the pachinko machine 10, the wiring from the data counter or the like must be connected to each terminal of the external output terminal 213 on the pachinko machine 10. In this case, in this modified example, the connection mode to each terminal on the external output terminal 213 is made different depending on whether the hall equipment on the gaming hall side is a non-compatible device or a compatible device.

Specifically, if the hall equipment connected to the pachinko machine 10 is a non-compatible equipment, as shown in FIG. 210(a), the above wiring is connected to the output terminal for the first external signal A and the output terminal for the second external signal A provided on the external output terminal 213. This puts the hall equipment in a state where it can receive the first external signal A and the second external signal B output from the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the hall equipment recognizes the transition to the first time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state in the manner described in Modification Example 11.

On the other hand, if the hall equipment connected to the pachinko machine 10 is compatible equipment, the above wiring is connected to the output terminal for the first external signal B and the output terminal for the third external signal provided on the external output terminal 213. This puts the hall equipment in a state where it can receive the first external signal B and the third external signal output from the pachinko machine 10.

As described above, when transitioning to the first time-shortened game state, the first external signal B is turned on in the opening and closing execution mode, and the third external signal is turned on in the time-shortened game state (Fig. 210(b)). In this case, the hall equipment recognizes the opening and closing execution mode and then recognizes the time-shortened game state, and is thereby able to grasp that a transition has been made to the time-shortened game state via the opening and closing execution mode, i.e., that a transition has been made to the first time-shortened game state.

In addition, when transitioning to the third time-shortened game state, the third external signal is turned on in the time-shortened game state without the first external signal B being turned on (Fig. 210(b)). In this case, the hall equipment recognizes the time-shortened game state without going through the opening and closing execution mode, and is thereby able to grasp that a transition to the time-shortened game state has occurred without going through the opening and closing execution mode, i.e., that a transition to the third time-shortened game state has occurred.

In addition, a data counter or the like may be equipped with a function that automatically adds the number of jackpots based on the first external signal (jackpot signal) being turned on. In this case, if the first external signal A is turned on for a predetermined period in the case of a transition to the third time-saving game state (a transition to the time-saving game state without passing through the open/close execution mode), this may result in an increase in the number of jackpots reported by the data counter or the like, even if the result is a special miss. In this regard, if a compatible device that can recognize the time-saving game state from the third external signal is connected to the pachinko machine 10, the first external signal B, which is maintained in the off state, can be used to prevent the number of jackpots reported from increasing each time a special miss occurs.

In the above description, the output terminal for the first external signal B and the output terminal for the third external signal are exemplified as connection terminals when the hall equipment connected to the pachinko machine 10 is a compatible equipment. However, instead of this, the output terminal for the second external signal B and the output terminal for the third external signal may be used as the connection terminals. In this case, the hall equipment can recognize the transition to the first time-shortened game state when both the second external signal B and the third external signal are in the ON state, and can recognize the transition to the third time-shortened game state when the second external signal B is in the OFF state and the third external signal is in the ON state. It is possible to arbitrarily select which output terminal of the first external signal B or the second external signal B the hall equipment is connected to depending on the specifications of the hall equipment.

In addition, the third time-saving game state triggered by winning a special miss result has been exemplified as a time-saving game state to which a player transitions without going through the open/close execution mode, but the configuration of this modified example can also be applied to the second time-saving game state to which a player transitions when the ceiling number of times is reached. Specifically, the special game play times (timing t11 to timing t12) for the special miss result in FIG. 209(a) can be replaced with the special game play times that have reached the ceiling number of times.

<Other Modifications>
The present invention is not limited to the above-described second embodiment and each modified example, and may be implemented, for example, as follows. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to the second embodiment and each modified example, or may be applied to the second embodiment and each modified example in combination in part or in whole. It is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the second embodiment and each modified example. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed.

(1) In the second embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, the maximum number of pending information items based on winning at the first actuation port 62 is four, but it may be less than four (it may be one) or it may be five or more. The maximum number of pending information items based on winning at the second actuation port 63 may also be less than four (it may be one) or it may be five or more. The maximum number of pending information items based on winning at each actuation port 62, 63 may also be different.

In addition, at least one of the first actuation port 62 (first special symbol) or the second actuation port 63 (second special symbol) may be configured without a reserve function. In particular, in the case of variant example 3, by configuring the second actuation port 63 without a reserve function for winning, it becomes possible to highlight the superiority of the final play round (the special symbol play round in which the remaining number of times is allowed to increase if a special miss occurs).

(2) In the second embodiment and each of the modified examples, the reserved information based on winning entries at the first actuation port 62 and the second actuation port 63 is differentiated, but it may be configured not to be differentiated. Also, the reserved information based on winning entries at the second actuation port 63 is given priority in determining whether it is a win or lose over the reserved information based on winning entries at the first actuation port 62, but the relationship may be reversed, or the winning or lose determination may be performed in the order of winning entries.

(3) In the second embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, only game balls flowing down the right route can pass through or win the through gate 64 and the second operating port 63, but only game balls flowing down the left route can pass through or win, or game balls can pass through or win from either the right route or the left route. However, in order to add variety to the game, it is preferable to configure the game so that only game balls flowing down one of the right route and the left route can win the first operating port 62, and only game balls flowing down the other of the right route and the left route can pass through or win the through gate 64 and the second operating port 63.

(4) In the second embodiment and each of the modified examples, the result of the win/lose judgment is a jackpot result, and the game transitions to the jackpot game (open/close execution mode). However, like a so-called type 1/type 2 hybrid machine, the result of the win/lose judgment is a small win result, and the game transitions to the jackpot game when the game ball passes through the V winning port (V winning sensor) during the small win game (a game state in which a variable winning device having a V winning port or a V winning port and a loss port inside is opened and closed) (when the result of the award judgment is a predetermined result and a predetermined game result is achieved).

In addition, in the present invention, "a specified bonus can be given to the player based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result", "a specified bonus can be given to the player based on the result of the first judgment being a specific result", "a transition to a special game state which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result" and the like can be understood to also include the case where the result of the win/loss judgment is a small win result and a transition to a big win game is made via a V win, as described above.

(5) In the second embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, different support flags such as a first support flag, a second support flag, and a third support flag are associated with the first time-saving play state, the second time-saving play state, and the third time-saving play state, respectively. However, it is also possible to provide a single support flag as a flag common to each of the time-saving play states without making such a distinction.

In such a configuration, for example, in the second embodiment described above, a support flag is set in response to a transition to the first time-shortened game state, and when the cumulative number of unsuccessful game plays reaches the ceiling number in the final play in the first time-shortened game state, the support flag is cleared once in response to the number of play plays since the transition to the first time-shortened game state reaching the upper limit number, and then the support flag is reset in response to a transition to the second time-shortened game state being determined by a transition determination to the second time-shortened game state.

(6) In the second embodiment and each of the modified examples, when various support flags are set in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114, the game is switched to the high-frequency support mode (time-shortened game state), and when various support flags are erased from the various flag storage area 114e, the game is terminated. However, the game may be switched to the high-frequency support mode when information corresponding to a first value (e.g., a support flag) is stored in a specific memory area provided in the various flag storage area 114e, and the game may be terminated when information corresponding to a second value different from the first value (e.g., a non-support flag) is stored in the specific memory area. In other words, the game may be configured such that information corresponding to being in the high-frequency support mode and information corresponding to not being in the high-frequency support mode are provided, and the transition to the high-frequency support mode and the termination of the high-frequency support mode are controlled depending on which information is stored (set).

The high-frequency support mode may also be terminated when information corresponding to a second value that is the same as or different from the first value is stored in a storage area other than the specific storage area. In other words, a storage area corresponding to being in the high-frequency support mode and a storage area corresponding to not being in the high-frequency support mode may be provided, and the transition to and termination of the high-frequency support mode may be controlled depending on which storage area the information is stored (set) in.

(7) In the second embodiment and each of the modified examples, the time-saving game state is triggered when the cumulative number of losing plays reaches the ceiling number or when a special losing result occurs. However, the game may be configured to transition to a high probability game state. In this case, the support mode in the high probability game state may be a high frequency support mode or a low frequency support mode.

Instead of a configuration that transitions to a time-saving game state or a high probability game state, the game may transition to a specific presentation mode in which special presentations that cannot be seen in the normal game state are performed or special characters, etc. appear. The game may also transition to a state in which a special lottery that is not performed in the normal game state is performed. In these cases, the game is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state in that the player can see special presentations, etc., or can receive special lotteries. Note that a point lottery is one example of a special lottery. The game may transition to a time-saving game state, a high probability game state, or an opening and closing execution mode depending on the points awarded in the point lottery or the total number of points awarded. In addition, a special presentation (for example, a character's costume, etc.) may be released, or the development story of the pachinko machine 10 may be displayed.

(8) In the second embodiment and each of the modified examples, a first time-saving game state is provided, which is entered via an opening/closing execution mode, in addition to the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state. However, a configuration may be provided that does not include the first time-saving game state. Also, a configuration may be provided that does not include a high-probability game state.

(9) In the second embodiment and each of the modified examples, the system is configured to transition to a time-saving game state that does not go through the open/close execution mode when the cumulative number of unsuccessful play attempts reaches the ceiling number or when a special unsuccessful result occurs. However, the system may be configured to transition to the time-saving game state when an event other than these occurs. For example, the system may be configured to transition to the time-saving game state when a game ball enters or passes through a specific ball entry section or a specific passing section provided inside the game area PE or a specific ball entry section. In this case, prize balls may or may not be paid out based on the ball entering or passing through.

Note that a specific ball entry section may not have an opening/closing mechanism and may be a type that is always open, or may be a variable type that has an opening/closing mechanism and can be switched between an open state in which the game ball can or is easier to enter, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot or is harder to enter than in the open state. This also applies to the above-mentioned predetermined ball entry sections.

In addition, in a configuration in which a specific ball entry section or a passing section is provided within a predetermined ball entry section, only the specific ball entry section or the passing section may be provided within the predetermined ball entry section, and a game ball that enters the predetermined ball entry section will always enter or pass through the specific ball entry section or the passing section, or one or more other ball entry sections or passing sections different from the specific ball entry section or the passing section may be provided within the predetermined ball entry section, and a game ball that enters the predetermined ball entry section may be distributed, resulting in a game ball that enters the predetermined ball entry section not entering the specific ball entry section or not passing through the specific passing section. In the latter configuration, a transition trigger to the time-saving game state is established when a game ball that enters the predetermined ball entry section enters the specific ball entry section or passes through the specific passing section, while a transition trigger to the time-saving game state is not established even if a game ball that enters the predetermined ball entry section enters the other ball entry section or passes through the other passing section.

(10) In the second embodiment and each of the modified examples, when the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state is increased, the preceding time-saving game state is ended and a transition to the subsequent time-saving game state is made. However, the remaining number of times may be increased while the time-saving game state continues. For example, as in modified example 3, if the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state is increased due to a special miss result in the final play of the first time-saving game state, the remaining number of times may be rewritten (a process of setting a value corresponding to the upper limit number of times in the third time-saving game state in the support counter area SC) without the process of terminating the time-saving game state (clearing the support flag).

In addition, as described above, when the remaining number of times in the time-saving play state is increased without terminating the time-saving play state, it is preferable to configure the support flag to correspond to one flag common to the first time-saving play state, the second time-saving play state, and the third time-saving play state, as described in (5) above. By configuring in this way, it is possible to eliminate the need to rewrite the type of the support flag in accordance with the rewriting of the remaining number of times.

(11) In the second embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, the fixed display time for the special game round is configured to be selected separately from the variable display time, but it may be selected in combination with the variable display time. For example, a fixed display time may be linked to each variable display time (variable pattern) in advance, and the fixed display time may be selected at the same time by selecting the variable display time. In that case, the selected fixed display time may be set at the start of the fixed display, or may be set at the start of the variable display together with the setting of the variable display time.

(12) In the second embodiment and the probability variation example, the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the third time-saving game state have the same aspects of the normal game round and the opening and closing of the device, but at least one of the normal game round and the opening and closing of the device may be configured to be different. For example, in the first time-saving game state, the support lottery in the normal game round is performed with a higher winning probability than in the normal game state, while in the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state, the support lottery may be performed with the same winning probability as in the normal game state. Also, in the third time-saving game state, the opening and closing of the device may be performed in a more advantageous manner than in the second time-saving game state, for example, by having a longer opening time for the normal power device 63a. In addition, the third time-saving game state may have multiple states including a third time-saving game state A and a third time-saving game state B, and in the third time-saving game state A, the opening and closing of the reels may be performed in a more advantageous manner than in the third time-saving game state B.

(13) In the second embodiment and each of the modified examples, only one type of ceiling number of times is set, but multiple types with different numbers may be set. Also, multiple types with different upper limit numbers may be set for the second time-saving gaming state. In this case, multiple types of ceiling number of times may be set and a type of second time-saving gaming state may be associated with each ceiling number, or one ceiling number may be set and when that ceiling number is reached, a lottery may be drawn to determine which second time-saving gaming state to transition to.

(14) In the second embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, if the number of misses reaches the ceiling number of times and the game transitions to the second time-saving game state, and the second time-saving game state ends without a jackpot result, the ceiling will not be reached a second time regardless of the number of misses thereafter. However, if the second time-saving game state ends without a jackpot result, the miss counter area HC may be reset to a value corresponding to the ceiling number of times, and the ceiling may be reached a second time or later. In that case, a predetermined upper limit (e.g., 3 times) may be set for the number of times the ceiling is reached (the number of times the game transitions to the second time-saving game state), or such an upper limit may not be set.

In a configuration in which the ceiling is allowed to be reached only once, the normal game state before the ceiling is reached (before transitioning to the second time-saving game state) and the normal game state after the second time-saving game state ends without a jackpot result are the same normal game state in terms of game state, but the former normal game state can be said to be more advantageous than the latter normal game state in that it can transition to the second time-saving game state. In this specification, the former normal game state and the latter normal game state are not differentiated from each other, and these states are sometimes collectively referred to as, for example, a predetermined game state, or the former normal game state and the latter normal game state are differentiated from each other, and one of them is sometimes referred to as, for example, a predetermined game state, and the other is sometimes referred to as, for example, a game state that is different in degree of advantage to the player from the predetermined game state.

(15) In the second embodiment and each of the modified examples, the variation pattern and the game-time performance have a one-to-one correspondence, but they may also have a one-to-many correspondence. In this case, the performance control device 143 can be configured to obtain a random number for the performance lottery, and to select one game-time performance from among multiple game-time performances associated with one variation pattern using the obtained random number.

(16) In the second embodiment and each of the modified examples, when the normal game round is ended in response to a transition to the second time-shortened game state or the third time-shortened game state, each support flag is set and then the normal game round is ended. However, the normal game round may be ended based on the establishment of the transition condition to each time-shortened game state or the determination of the time-shortened game state to be transitioned to, and then each support flag may be set.

(17) In the second embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, the normal game round is ended when there is a transition from the normal game state to the second time-saving game state (e.g., the second embodiment), when there is a transition from the normal game state to the third time-saving game state (e.g., modified example 4, modified example 6), or when there is a transition from the first time-saving game state to the normal game state (e.g., modified example 3). However, the transition may also be made when there is a transition from the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state to the normal game state.

In addition, the configuration may be such that the normal play round ends when a predetermined time-saving play state transitions to another time-saving play state, such as when transitioning from the first time-saving play state to the third time-saving play state, when transitioning from the second time-saving play state to the third time-saving play state, or when transitioning from the third time-saving play state A to the third time-saving play state B. In these cases, it is expected that a configuration in which the manner of the normal play round and the opening and closing of the role device is different in each time-saving play state, as in (12) above, will be beneficial.

(18) In the second embodiment and each of the modified examples, the normal game round is ended at the start of the confirmation display of the special game round when the conditions for transitioning to the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state are satisfied, corresponding to the timing of transition to each of these time-saving game states, but the normal game round may be ended during the confirmation display or at the end of the confirmation display. Note that, from the viewpoint of securing a grace period (the period during which the game state has transitioned to the second time-saving game state, but the special game round has not yet been played since the transition to the second time-saving game state), it is preferable for the normal game round to be ended before the end of the confirmation display.

(19) In the second embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, when the process for ending a normal game round is performed, if the result of the support lottery for the normal game round to be ended is a support winning result, the result is changed to a losing result. However, the process for changing the result to a losing result may not be performed. This is because the support lottery performed in the normal game state has a high probability of resulting in a losing result, and it is expected that the case in which the result of the support lottery for the normal game round being performed at the time of transition to the time-saving game state will be a rare one.

(20) In the second embodiment and each of the modified examples, if the special symbol play round in which the transition condition to the second time-shortened play state or the third time-shortened play state is satisfied is a play round of the second special symbol (if the transition condition to the second time-shortened play state or the third time-shortened play state is satisfied in a time-shortened play state), the termination process of the normal play round is not executed. However, the termination process may be executed without distinguishing between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In other words, the termination process may be executed even if the transition condition to the second time-shortened play state or the third time-shortened play state is satisfied in a time-shortened play state.

(21) In the second embodiment and each modified example, if the special symbol play round in which the transition condition to the second time-saving play state or the third time-saving play state is satisfied is the second special symbol play round, the end process of the normal play round is not executed uniformly. However, it is also possible to identify whether the second special symbol play round is a special symbol play round during the time-saving play state or a special symbol play round reserved after the time-saving play state ends, and execute the end process of the normal play round if it is the latter special symbol play round. Since the second special symbol play round reserved at the end of the time-saving play state is played under the normal play state, the normal play round started during the execution of these special symbol play rounds is played in a manner corresponding to the normal play state. By executing the end process of the normal play round in this case, the same effect as that described in the second embodiment and modified example 1 can be expected.

(22) In the second embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, a value corresponding to the upper limit number of times is set in the support counter area SC when transitioning to the time-saving game state, and the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state is updated by subtracting one from that value each time a special game is played. However, a value corresponding to the upper limit number of times is not set in the support counter area SC when transitioning to the time-saving game state, and the number of times a special game is played in the time-saving game state may be updated by adding one to the value of the support counter area SC each time a special game is played. In this case, the time-saving game state may be ended when the updated count value reaches the upper limit number of times.

(23) In the second embodiment and each modified example described above, the display content of the miss count image 475 is updated after the fixed display time of the special game round has elapsed, but the display content of the miss count image 475 may be updated after the variable display time of the special game round has elapsed. Even with this configuration, it is possible to prevent the display content of the miss count image 475 from being updated before the result of the special game lottery is announced by the stopped display of each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3. In addition, the display content of the miss count image 475 may be updated at the start of or after the start of the next special game round.

(24) In the second embodiment and each of the modified examples, notifications corresponding to reaching the ceiling number of times or winning a special miss result are configured to be executed by the pattern display device 75, but they may also be executed by another notification unit. Furthermore, notifications are not limited to image displays, and may be issued using light-emitting means such as LEDs, or by operating decorative movable bodies (movable gadgets) for moving performances in a predetermined operating mode. Furthermore, each of the above notifications does not necessarily have to be visual notifications, and may be auditory notifications in the form of sounds from the speaker unit 29. The same applies to notifications of the remaining number of times in the time-saving mode, notifications of the number of misses, right-hit notifications, etc.

(25) In the above second embodiment, modified example 1, modified example 2, modified example 6 to modified example 10 (configuration having a second time-saving game state to which a transition is made when the ceiling number of times is reached), the update process of the number of miss play times (miss play counter area HC) is executed after the update process of the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state is executed (processing of step Sb1405 in the second embodiment). However, if the process of determining whether or not to transition to the second time-saving game state (processing of step Sb1406 in the second embodiment) is executed after the update process of the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state, the update process of the number of miss play times may be executed prior to the update process of the remaining number of times. As an example of such a configuration, it is possible to execute the update process of the number of miss play times at the start of a special game round. In this case, the pachinko machine can recognize the reaching of the ceiling number of times at the start of a special game round, and this is effective in cases where it is desired to execute a game round performance corresponding to the above-mentioned reaching from the start of a special game round, or when it is desired to set a dedicated variable display time (variable pattern) corresponding to the above-mentioned reaching.

(26) In the above second embodiment, modified example 1, modified example 2, and modified examples 6 to 10, the transition to the second time-saving game state is executed at the start of the confirmation display in the special game round in which the cumulative number of miss games reaches the ceiling number, but it may be executed after the confirmation display starts. Specifically, the transition to the second time-saving game state may be executed at the midpoint of the confirmation display in the special game round in which the ceiling number of games has been reached, the end of the confirmation display, or the start of the next special game round. However, in order to secure a grace period (the period during which the game state has transitioned to the second time-saving game state, but the special game round after transitioning to the second time-saving game state has not yet been played) when processing the end of a normal game round, it is preferable to transition to the second time-saving game state before the end of the confirmation display in the special game round in which the ceiling number of games has been reached.

In addition, when transitioning to the second time-saving game state at the end of the confirmation display, the end process of the normal game round may be executed at that end.

In this case, in normal processing (FIG. 107), the processing for transition to the second time-saving game state (step Sb512) → normal game round control processing (step Sb405) are performed in that order, so that the first normal game round in the second time-saving game state is started before the first special game round in the second time-saving game state is started. In other words, in the processing round in which the transition processing to the second time-saving game state is performed (periodic processing 1 in normal processing), after the transition to the second time-saving game state (after the support flag is set), the normal game round control processing is executed, so that the first normal game round in the second time-saving game state is started, and then, in the next processing round, the first special game round in the second time-saving game state is started.

In addition, even if the configuration is such that the process for transitioning to the second time-saving game state is performed after the normal game round control process, if the normal game round control process in step Sb405 is performed prior to the special game round control process in step Sb403 in normal processing, the normal game round can be started prior to the special game round after transitioning to the second time-saving game state. In other words, in the next processing round after the transition to the second time-saving game state, processing can be performed in the order of start of change of the normal game round → start of change of the special game round, and the normal game round corresponding to the second time-saving game state can be started early.

(27) In the above second embodiment, variant 1, variant 2, and variants 6 to 10, the second time-saving game state is entered when the cumulative number of times of losing play reaches the ceiling number, but the second time-saving game state may be entered when the total number of points in the internal point information, etc., reaches a predetermined number of points. In this case, the number of points may be awarded based on, for example, the number of times of losing play reaching a predetermined number, or when the result of the special drawing lottery is a losing result, or when the value of the acquired jackpot random number counter C1 or the variable type counter CS becomes a predetermined value, a predetermined point lottery is executed, and the number of points is awarded by winning the lottery. In addition, the number of points awarded may be a fixed number based on the establishment of an awarding opportunity, or multiple points may be prepared as the number of points that can be awarded, and the number of points selected from among them by a point lottery may be awarded. The awarding of points and the number of points awarded may be notified or suggested to the player through a notification, or no notification may be given, making it impossible or difficult for the player to distinguish.

(28) In the above second embodiment, variant 1, variant 2, and variants 6 to 10, the value of the miss counter area HC is set to the ceiling number of times in the special pattern play round in which the result of the special pattern win/loss lottery results in a jackpot result, but it may also be set at the start or end of the opening/closing execution mode, midway through the opening/closing execution mode, or when transitioning to the first time-saving play state.

In addition, in the second embodiment, variant 1, variant 2, and variants 6 to 10, the remaining number of times up to the ceiling number of times is updated, but instead of setting the value of the miss counter area HC to the ceiling number of times, the value of the miss counter area HC may be incremented by one each time a miss play is executed after the end of the open/close execution mode, and the second time-saving play state may be entered when the total value reaches the ceiling number of times. In this case, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a jackpot result before the ceiling number of times is reached, the updated result of the miss result may be cleared (initialized) in that special drawing play time, the open/close execution mode, etc.

(29) In the second embodiment and variant 1 described above, the miss counter area HC is set to a value corresponding to the ceiling number of times during the special game play that results in a jackpot result, but the above setting may also be performed at the start of the opening and closing execution mode, during the opening and closing execution mode, at the end of the opening and closing execution mode, or when transitioning to the first time-saving game state. Note that, if the value of the miss counter area HC is incremented by 1 as in (28) above, it is preferable to initialize the value of the miss counter area HC to 0 at the start of the opening and closing execution mode, during the opening and closing execution mode, at the end of the opening and closing execution mode, or when transitioning to the first time-saving game state.

(30) In the second embodiment, modified example 1, and modified example 2, the transition determination as to whether or not to transition to the second time-shortened game state is performed at the start of the confirmation display in the special game round, but it may be performed at the start of the special game round as in modified examples 6 to 10. In that case, the transition determination may be performed at the start of the special game round, while the transition to the second time-shortened game state may be performed at the start of the confirmation display, or the transition to the second time-shortened game state may also be performed at the start of the special game round.

The transition determination may be performed midway through the variable display during a special game in which the cumulative number of misses has reached the ceiling number. In addition, if the transition is to be made to the second time-saving game state after the start of the confirmation display, the transition determination may be performed after the start of the confirmation display.

(31) In the second embodiment described above, as in variant example 1, a right-hit notification (a notification encouraging a win at the second operating port 63) may be made during the final display time of a special game in which the number of losing games has reached the ceiling number. In this case, the notification may be made throughout the entire final display time, or may be made during at least a portion of the final display time. Also, in variant example 1, a right-hit notification may be made throughout the entire final display time.

(32) In the above-mentioned modified example 1 of the second embodiment, the fixed display time of the special game round in which the number of misses reaches the ceiling number is longer than the total period of the fixed display time of the normal game round that is forcibly terminated, the variable display time of the normal game round corresponding to the second time-saving game state, and the fixed display time of the normal game round corresponding to the second time-saving game state, but it may be configured to be longer than the total period of the variable display time of the normal game round corresponding to the second time-saving game state and the fixed display time of the normal game round corresponding to the second time-saving game state, without including the fixed display time of the normal game round that is forcibly terminated. In the normal game state (left-handed play), it is assumed that the through gate 64 is basically not won, and in many cases the normal game round is not forcibly terminated. Therefore, even with the above-mentioned configuration, it is considered that a configuration can be realized in which the end of the first normal game round after transition to the second time-saving game state (the start of the first opening and closing of the role after transition to the second time-saving game state) precedes the start of the first special game round after transition to the second time-saving game state.

(33) In the modified example 1 of the second embodiment, the end of the first normal game round after transition to the second time-saving game state (end of the confirmation display) is configured to occur prior to the start of the first special game round after transition to the second time-saving game state, but the end of the variable display in the first normal game round may be configured to occur prior to the start of the first special game round. In this case, the confirmation display time of the special game round in which the number of misses reaches the ceiling number may be longer than the total period of the confirmation display time of the normal game round that is forcibly terminated and the variable display time of the normal game round corresponding to the second time-saving game state, or may be longer than the variable display time of the normal game round corresponding to the second time-saving game state. Even with this configuration, the first opening and closing of the role after transition to the second time-saving game state starts earlier than the configuration in which the variable display of the first normal game round ends after the start of the first special game round, and the effect of accelerating the timing at which the normal power role 63a is opened can be expected.

(34) In the above-mentioned second embodiment, in the variants 3 to 10, a special losing result is provided as part of the result of the special winning/losing lottery, but the special winning/losing lottery may only draw whether the result is a big win or a losing result, and if the result is a losing result, a separate lottery (a lottery for the type of losing result) may be performed to determine whether the result is a special losing result or not. In this case, the separate lottery may be performed using other existing random number values such as the big win type counter C2 or the variable type counter CS, or may be performed using a dedicated random number for drawing the type of losing result.

In addition, instead of the type lottery for the losing result, a transition lottery may be held to determine whether or not the transition condition to the third time-saving game state is met. In this case, the lottery may be held using other existing random numbers such as the jackpot type counter C2 or the variable type counter CS, or may be held using a dedicated random number for lottery to determine whether or not the transition condition is met.

(35) In the above-mentioned second embodiment, in variants 3 to 10, a special reach effect is executed as a notification corresponding to a special failure result, but a notification corresponding to a special failure result may be made by a game-round effect that does not involve a reach effect. In addition, the notification does not have to be made using the pattern strings Z1 to Z3. For example, a notification corresponding to a special failure result may be made by displaying a predetermined pattern such as a predetermined character on the pattern display device 75.

In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a pattern (so-called fourth pattern) that is displayed in a smaller size than each pattern in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 and that is completely synchronized with the special pattern displayed in the special pattern display section 43 is displayed on the pattern display device 75, the fourth pattern may be displayed in a specific manner different from the normal manner to notify the user of a special miss result. In addition, a notification corresponding to a special miss result may be issued by combining the manner of the fourth pattern displayed in a stopped state with at least a portion of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 displayed in a stopped state.

The notification corresponding to the special miss result may be given throughout the entire special game round, or may be given during a portion of the special game round. Incidentally, the special reach effects exemplified in variants 3 to 10 of the second embodiment above are configured so that the player cannot tell whether or not the result is a special miss at the start of the special game round, but can tell that it is a special miss at the end of the special game round, so it can be said that a notification corresponding to a special miss result is given during a portion of the special game round.

(36) In the above-described modified examples 3 to 10 of the second embodiment, an external signal corresponding to a special miss result is output when a special miss result occurs, but the external signal may not be output.

The configuration may also be such that it is possible to switch whether or not to output the external signal. For example, a switching operation unit such as a changeover switch may be provided in the pachinko machine 10, and the switching operation unit may be operated to switch whether or not to output the external signal. In this case, the switching operation unit may be located in a position that can be operated when the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened, such as the back side of the front door frame 14 or the rear side of the game board 60. With such a configuration, switching operations are permitted only by hall employees, which makes it possible to prevent abuse for fraudulent activities.

(37) In the above-mentioned second embodiment, in the third to tenth variations, even if a special failure occurs in a special game turn other than the final game turn in the first time-saving game state (if a special failure occurs in a situation in which transition to the third time-saving game state is restricted), an external signal corresponding to the special failure result is output, but the configuration may be such that the external signal is not output. In this case, the configuration may be such that the external signal corresponding to the special failure result is not output, or that an external signal corresponding to a normal failure result is output instead of an external signal corresponding to the special failure result.

For example, in a configuration in which the game results related to the special failure result (e.g., the fact that a special failure result occurred and the probability of winning the special failure result in actual play, etc.) are notified by a predetermined notification unit of the gaming hall (e.g., a data counter and its light-emitting unit installed above each pachinko machine on the gaming island) based on an external signal for a special failure result output from a pachinko machine, if an external signal for a special failure result is output in a situation in which transition to the third time-saving game state is restricted, even though transition to the third time-saving game state does not occur, a notification corresponding to the winning of the special failure result is made by the above-mentioned predetermined notification unit, which may cause misunderstanding and confusion among players and hall employees. In this regard, by using the configuration of (37), if a special failure result occurs in a situation in which transition to the third time-saving game state is restricted, it is possible to prevent this from being reflected in the notification by the predetermined notification unit, and the occurrence of misunderstandings, etc. can be suitably suppressed.

(38) In the above-mentioned second embodiment, in the modified examples 3 to 10, when a special miss occurs in the third time-saving game state, re-transition to the third time-saving game state (addition of the remaining number of times again) is restricted, but the configuration may be such that re-transition is permitted. In that case, the configuration may be such that an external signal corresponding to the special miss result that triggers the re-transition is output.

In addition, for the special failure result, a transition to the third time-saving game state occurs, but an external signal corresponding to the special failure result may not be output. By adopting such a configuration, a predetermined notification unit in the gaming hall can notify the special failure result at the first transition, but not notify the special failure result at the second transition.

(39) In the above-mentioned modified examples 3 to 10 of the second embodiment, the transition to the third time-saving game state is executed at the start of the confirmation display in the special symbol game round that resulted in a special miss, but it may be executed after the confirmation display has started. Specifically, the transition to the third time-saving game state may be executed at a timing during the confirmation display in the special symbol game round that resulted in a special miss, at the end of the confirmation display, or at the start of the next special symbol game round.

In addition, when transitioning to the third time-saving game state at the end of the confirmation display, the end process of the normal game round may be executed at that end.

In this case, in normal processing (FIG. 107), the processing for transition to the third time-saving game state (step Sb3202) → normal game round control processing (step Sb405) are performed in that order, so that the first normal game round in the third time-saving game state is started before the first special game round in the third time-saving game state is started. In other words, in the processing round in which the transition processing to the third time-saving game state is performed (periodic processing 1 in normal processing), after the transition to the third time-saving game state (after the support flag is set), the normal game round control processing is executed, so that the first normal game round in the third time-saving game state is started, and then, in the next processing round, the first special game round in the third time-saving game state is started.

Even if the configuration is such that the process for transitioning to the third time-saving game state is performed after the normal game round control process, if the normal game round control process in step Sb405 is performed prior to the special game round control process in step Sb403 in normal processing, the normal game round can be started prior to the special game round after transitioning to the third time-saving game state. In other words, in the next processing round after the transition to the third time-saving game state, processing can be performed in the order of start of change of the normal game round → start of change of the special game round, and the normal game round corresponding to the third time-saving game state can be started early.

(40) In the above-mentioned second embodiment, in the third to tenth variations, an external signal corresponding to the time-shortened game state may be output to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the external signal may be, for example, one of the on and off states (e.g., the on state) when the time-shortened game state is active, and the other of the on and off states (e.g., the off state) when the time-shortened game state is not active. By outputting the external signal, it is possible to make the management control device of the game hall know whether the current game state is a time-shortened game state or not. In addition, under a configuration in which the transition to the time-shortened game state is restricted even if the transition condition for the time-shortened game state is satisfied in a situation in which the time-shortened game state is active, it is also possible to make the management control device of the game hall know that the transition to the time-shortened game state is restricted by outputting the external signal. Note that the external signal does not necessarily have to indicate the time-shortened game state (a state in which the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode are active), and may be a signal corresponding to the support mode being the high frequency support mode.

In addition, in a configuration that outputs an external signal corresponding to the time-saving play state, if the result of the special chart win/lose lottery in the final play round of the time-saving play state (the special chart play round at which the time-saving play state ends) is a special miss result, the external signal corresponding to the time-saving play state should be turned off, and then the external signal corresponding to the special miss result (lottery result signal or play round execution signal) should be turned on.

In the above case, the special miss result triggers a transition to the subsequent time-shortened game state, but if, for example, processing is performed in the order of turning on the external signal corresponding to the special miss result and then turning off the external signal corresponding to the time-shortened game state, there is a concern that the management control device on the gaming hall side may recognize that a transition to the time-shortened game state has occurred even though the transition to the time-shortened game state is restricted. In this regard, by executing the processing in the order of turning off the external signal corresponding to the time-shortened game state and then turning on the external signal corresponding to the special miss result, it is possible to make the management control device understand that the special miss result occurred after the time-shortened game state had ended, and it is possible to prevent the transition to the time-shortened game state from being recognized as unnatural behavior.

(41) In the above-mentioned second embodiment, in the third to tenth variations, an external signal corresponding to a special miss result is output when the confirmation display starts in a special game round, but it may be output during the middle of the confirmation display or when the confirmation display ends. Also, it may be output during the middle of the variable display in a special game round in which a special miss result occurs.

(42) In the above-mentioned second embodiment, in the modified examples 3 to 10, when a special failure occurs in a situation where the transition to the third time-saving game state is restricted, a stop result corresponding to the special failure is displayed on the special chart display unit 43 in a stopped state. However, a stop result corresponding to a normal failure may be displayed in a stopped state. Also, a stop result corresponding to a special failure occurs in a situation where the transition to the third time-saving game state is restricted (a stop result corresponding to a special failure but different from the stop result displayed in a situation where the transition is not restricted) may be displayed in a stopped state.

(43) In Modifications 3 to 5 of the second embodiment, the transition determination as to whether or not to transition to the third time-shortened game state is performed at the start of the confirmation display in the special game round, but it may be performed when the special game round starts as in Modifications 6 to 10. In that case, the transition determination may be performed at the start of the special game round, while the transition to the third time-shortened game state may be performed at the start of the confirmation display, or the transition to the third time-shortened game state may also be performed at the start of the special game round.

The transition determination may be performed midway through the variable display in the special game round that resulted in a special miss. In addition, if the transition is to be made to the third time-saving game state after the start of the confirmation display, the transition determination may be configured to be performed after the start of the confirmation display.

(44) In the above-mentioned modified example 3 of the second embodiment, the transition to the third time-saving game state is permitted only in the final game round in the first time-saving game state, but the transition to the third time-saving game state may be permitted in a special game round other than the final game round. For example, a configuration may be considered in which a permission flag is provided to indicate that the transition to the third time-saving game state is permitted in the event of a special miss result, and the permission flag is set in a special game round other than the final game round (e.g., the 70th to 80th special game round) or during a period in which a special game round other than the final game round is executed (e.g., during the period from the transition to the first time-saving game state until a predetermined period has elapsed). In this configuration, if a special miss result occurs in a special game round or period in which the permission flag is set, the transition to the third time-saving game state is permitted, and if a special miss result occurs in a special game round or period in which the permission flag is not set, the transition to the third time-saving game state is restricted.

In addition, instead of or in addition to the permission flag, a restriction flag may be provided to indicate that the transition to the third time-saving game state is restricted if a special miss occurs. In this case, the restriction flag is set to a non-permission state during a special game round or period during which the transition to the third time-saving game state is not permitted even if a special miss occurs.

If a transition to the third time-saving game state is permitted in a special game round other than the final game round, it is preferable that the latter special game rounds in the first time-saving game state include game rounds in which a transition to the third time-saving game state is permitted. As the number of times remaining in the time-saving game state decreases, the expected value of winning a jackpot in the time-saving game state decreases, so it is more difficult for a player to maintain a sense of anticipation in the latter half of the time-saving game state than in the first half. In such a situation, by allowing a transition to the third time-saving game state due to a special miss result, it becomes possible to preferably maintain a sense of anticipation.

(45) In the third modified example of the second embodiment described above, a different performance for the final play in the first time-saving play state and the play of the remaining reserved second special symbol (the play of the second special symbol played in the normal play state) may be performed. For example, it may be possible to use different background images on the symbol display device 75.

(46) In the third modified example of the second embodiment described above, the confirmation display time in the case where a special miss occurs in the final play round in the first time-saving play state or in the remaining reserved play round of the second special symbol may be set to a time shorter than the normal confirmation display. With this configuration, it becomes possible to quickly start play (the special symbol play round) after transitioning to the third time-saving play state.

(47) In the above-mentioned second embodiment, in variants 3, 5, and 6 to 10, the first special symbol may have a special failure result as in variant 4. When both the first special symbol and the second special symbol have a special failure result, the winning probability of the special failure result in the first special symbol may be the same as the winning probability of the special failure result in the second special symbol, or it may be different. In addition, the upper limit number of times the third time-saving game state to which the player transitions when a special failure result occurs in the first special symbol may be the same as the upper limit number of times the third time-saving game state to which the player transitions when a special failure result occurs in the second special symbol, or it may be different.

Also, in variant 4 of the second embodiment described above, the first special chart may not have a special miss result, as in other variants.

(48) In the above-mentioned second embodiment, variants 3, 4, and 6 to 10, a special missed reach effect (fake effect) may be executed as in variant 5.

(49) In the fourth modified example of the second embodiment described above, a configuration is used in which a special miss in the first time-saving game state puts the player at a disadvantage, but a configuration may also be used in which a disadvantage is more likely to occur. Specifically, a third time-saving game state with a relatively small upper limit number of times (for example, a third time-saving game state with an upper limit number of times of 10 times) and a third time-saving game state with a relatively large upper limit number of times (for example, a third time-saving game state with an upper limit number of times of 1000 times) may be provided, and the former third time-saving game state may be more likely to be selected in the event of a special miss.

(50) In the fourth modified example of the second embodiment described above, a special miss in the first time-saving game state reduces the number of times remaining in the time-saving game state. In addition to this, the state of the normal game rounds and the opening and closing of the device in the third time-saving game state may be set to be less favorable than that in the first time-saving game state. For example, the variable display time of the normal game rounds may be longer, the opening time of the normal power device 63a may be shorter, or the number of times the normal power device 63a is opened in one opening and closing of the device may be reduced.

(51) In the fourth variant of the second embodiment described above, the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state is not indicated throughout the first time-saving game state, but the remaining number of times may be not indicated when the remaining number of times in the first time-saving game state is greater than a predetermined number (e.g., 10 times) and indicated when the remaining number of times falls to or below the predetermined number. By adopting such a configuration, if no special miss result is obtained until the end of the first time-saving game state, the remaining number of times can be notified to the player before the end of the first time-saving game state, preventing the player from getting the impression that the time-saving game state has ended abruptly.

(52) In the above-mentioned variant 5 of the second embodiment, the configuration is provided with two types of first time-saving game states, the first time-saving game state A and the first time-saving game state B, but the number of types of first time-saving game states may be three or more.

(53) In the fifth modified example of the second embodiment, the remaining number of times in the first time-shortened game state is compared with the upper limit number of times in the third time-shortened game state, and the higher number is prioritized, thereby providing a plurality of first time-shortened game states with different ranges of game times for which transition to the third time-shortened game state is permitted. However, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of first time-shortened game states with different ranges of game times for which transition to the third time-shortened game state is permitted is provided without using a priority process based on a comparison of the remaining number of times. For example, a configuration may be considered in which a permission flag is provided to indicate that transition to the third time-shortened game state is permitted in the event of a special miss, and the range of game times for which the permission flag is set and the permitted state is set is different for each first time-shortened game state.

In this case, the allowable flag is not limited to being set for a range of special game times, but may be set for one special game time or multiple special game times with no continuity in the range. For example, in the first time-saving game state A, the 60th special game time is set as the special game time in the allowable state, and the 40th, 50th, and 60th special game times are set as the special game time in the allowable state, while in the first time-saving game state B, the 80th special game time is set as the special game time in the allowable state, and the 80th, 90th, and 100th special game times are set as the special game time in the allowable state.

The permissible flag may also be set for a period of time. For example, in the first time-saving game state A, a first period (e.g., 5 minutes) from the start of a specific number of special game turns (e.g., the 20th) after transition to the time-saving game state is set to be the permissible state, while in the first time-saving game state B, a second period (e.g., 10 minutes) from the start of a specific number of special game turns (e.g., the 20th or 25th) after transition to the time-saving game state is set to be the permissible state.

Even when the permissible state is set using the permissible flag as described above, the effects described in variant 5 can be achieved by configuring the permissible state in the first time-saving game state B to be included in the 70th or subsequent special game round, or by setting the special game round or the range or period of special game rounds for which transition to the third time-saving game state is restricted in the first and second time-saving game states in common, as in variant 5.

When the permissible state is set using a permissible flag, a common upper limit number may be set for the first time-saving game state A and the first time-saving game state B. Also, instead of or in addition to the permissible flag, a restriction flag may be provided that indicates that the transition to the third time-saving game state is restricted in the event of a special miss result.

(54) In the sixth to tenth variants of the second embodiment, in a special game in which the ceiling has been reached or a special miss has been achieved, each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as stopped (either as a temporary stop display or a permanent stop display) earlier than other special game in which the variable display ends, and at least a portion of the notification corresponding to the ceiling being reached or the special miss may be performed using the remaining period until the variable display ends after the stop display.

(55) In Modifications 6 to 10 of the second embodiment, the transition judgment as to whether or not to transition to the second time-shortened game state and the transition judgment as to whether or not to transition to the third time-shortened game state are configured to be executed at the start of a special game round, but as in the second embodiment and Modifications 1 to 5, they may be executed at the start of the confirmation display (the timing of transition to each time-shortened game state). Also, each of the above transition judgments may be executed midway through the variable display in a special game round in which the transition condition to each time-shortened game state is established. Also, when transitioning to each time-shortened game state after the start of the confirmation display, the above transition judgment may be configured to be executed after the start of the confirmation display.

(56) In the above-mentioned second embodiment, in the sixth to tenth variations, the transition judgment as to whether or not to transition to the second time-saving game state is executed before the process for setting the variation pattern (the process for setting the performance for the game round), but the transition judgment may be executed after the process for setting the variation pattern, so long as it is executed before the notification corresponding to the ceiling being reached or the special failure result is executed. In such a configuration, when both the ceiling number of times reached and the special failure result being won are established in one special game round, the notification corresponding to the special failure result is first set to be executed based on the fact that the special failure result has been won, but then, based on the fact that the ceiling number of times has been reached in the transition judgment as to whether or not to transition to the second time-saving game state, the notification to be executed may be changed from the notification corresponding to the special failure result to the notification corresponding to the ceiling being reached.

(57) In the above-mentioned second embodiment, in variants 6 to 10, the transition determination as to whether or not to transition to the second time-saving game state is performed before the process of setting the variation pattern. However, the transition determination may be performed after the process of setting the variation pattern, and only the process of updating the number of times of loss play may be performed before the process of setting the variation pattern. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to know that both the special loss result and the ceiling number of times have been reached before the variation pattern is set, and to set the variation pattern so that a notification corresponding to the ceiling being reached is performed.

(58) In the above-mentioned second embodiment, in the sixth to tenth variations, the advantage or disadvantage between the second and third time-saving game states is determined by the size of the upper limit number of times. However, instead of or in addition to this, the advantage or disadvantage may be determined by the state of the normal game times and the opening and closing of the device in the time-saving game state. For example, if the second time-saving game state is more advantageous to the player than the third time-saving game state, the variable display time of the normal game times in the second time-saving game state may be shorter than that in the third time-saving game state, or the number of times the normal electric device 63a is opened in one opening and closing of the device in the second time-saving game state may be greater than that in the third time-saving game state.

(59) In the seventh modified example of the second embodiment, the second time-shortened game state is more advantageous to the player than the third time-shortened game state, but the third time-shortened game state may be more advantageous to the player than the second time-shortened game state. In this case, when a special miss result and the ceiling number of times are reached in the same special game round, in order to transition to the advantageous third time-shortened game state, it is preferable to configure the process to be executed in the following order: transition decision on whether to transition to the second time-shortened game state → transition decision on whether to transition to the third time-shortened game state.

(60) In variant 7 of the second embodiment described above, as in variant 5, when a condition for transition to another time-shortened game state is met in a time-shortened game state (when the ceiling number of times is reached or a special miss result is won), the number of times remaining in the time-shortened game state at that time may be compared with the upper limit number of times for the other time-shortened game state to which transition is to be made, and the time-shortened game state with the greater number of times may be given priority.

(61) In the above-mentioned modified example 8 of the second embodiment, when the transition condition to another time-shortened game state is satisfied in a situation where the time-shortened game state is in effect, the transition to another time-shortened game state is restricted, but such a transition may be permitted as in modified example 7. In this case, in order to transition to the more advantageous time-shortened game state when a special miss result is won and the ceiling number of times is reached in the same special game round, it is preferable to configure the order of the transition judgment as to whether or not to transition to the second time-shortened game state and the transition judgment as to whether or not to transition to the third time-shortened game state to be reversed from that in modified example 8.

(62) In the above-mentioned modified example 10 of the second embodiment, the update of the number of misses is restricted when a special miss occurs in a special pattern play in which the number of misses reaches the ceiling number, but such an update may be permitted. In other words, when a special miss occurs in a special pattern play in which the ceiling number of misses is reached, the reaching of the ceiling number is invalidated, and the transition to the second time-saving play state may be restricted.

(63) In the modified example 10 of the second embodiment described above, while the update of the number of losing play times is limited in the third time-saving game state, the update is executed in the final play time. However, the update of the number of losing play times may also be limited in the final play time. In other words, when a special losing result occurs in a special game time in which the number of losing play times reaches the ceiling number, the game may first transition to the third time-saving game state, and the update of the number of losing play times may be resumed in the special game time (special game time in the normal game state) that is played after the third time-saving game state ends. In this case, although a special game time in the normal game state is intervened, the game may transition to either the third time-saving game state or the second time-saving game state.

(64) In variant 10 of the second embodiment described above, a configuration may be adopted in which updating of the number of miss plays is permitted during part of the third time-saving game state. For example, in a situation in which the third time-saving game state is in effect, updating of the number of miss plays may be permitted until the number of miss plays reaches a predetermined value that is smaller than the ceiling number (for example, the value immediately before the ceiling number), and updating may be restricted after the predetermined value is reached. Even in this case, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event in which the ceiling number is reached during the third time-saving game state.

(65) In the above-mentioned modified example 10 of the second embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which whether or not to limit the update of the number of misses is switched by referring to the number of times remaining up to the ceiling number. Specifically, if the number of times remaining up to the ceiling number is fewer than the upper limit number in the third time-saving game state, the update of the number of misses in the third time-saving game state may be limited, and if the number of times remaining up to the ceiling number is greater, the update may be permitted in the third time-saving game state.

(66) In the above-mentioned modified example 10 of the second embodiment, the second time-saving game state has a higher upper limit number of times than the first time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state, which is advantageous to the player. However, the second time-saving game state may have a lower upper limit number of times than the first time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state, which is disadvantageous to the player.

(67) In the above-mentioned modified example 10 of the second embodiment, the update of the number of misses is permitted when in the first time-saving game state, but the update may be restricted when in the first time-saving game state. In this case, even if the upper limit number of times in the first time-saving game state is set to a number equal to or greater than the ceiling number, it is possible to prevent the ceiling number of times from being reached when in the first time-saving game state.

In addition, in a pachinko machine that has both a first time-saving game state in which the upper limit number of times is equal to or greater than the ceiling number of times, and a second time-saving game state in which the upper limit number of times is less than the ceiling number of times, the configuration may be such that in the former case, updating of the number of misses is restricted, and in the latter case, updating of the number of misses is permitted.

(68) In the above-described modified example 10 of the second embodiment, when the update of the number of misses is restricted, the state immediately before the restriction is imposed is maintained and the number of misses image 475 is displayed. However, the number of misses image 475 may not be displayed. In this case, only the retaining image 481 may be displayed, or another image relating to the third time-saving game state such as "Chance Time in progress" may be displayed. Furthermore, the number of misses image 475 may simply be erased upon transition to the restricted state, and no other image may be displayed in the location where the number of misses image 475 is displayed.

(69) In the above-mentioned modified example 10 of the second embodiment, a predetermined external signal may be output to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 when the limit on updating the number of misses is started or is being limited. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the management control device on the gaming hall side aware that the number of misses has not been updated in the pachinko machine 10, and it is possible to immediately determine that there is no abnormality in the pachinko machine 10 when the number of misses exceeds the ceiling number of times but the machine does not transition to the second time-saving game state.

(70) In the above-mentioned variant 11 of the second embodiment, the second external signal is provided, but this may be omitted. That is, if the hall device is capable of distinguishing the difference in the output period, it is possible to distinguish the occurrence of a special miss result based on the first external signal. Note that the difference in the first external signal between a normal jackpot result and a special miss result is not limited to the output period (period of the on state), but may be, for example, the output level, etc.

(71) In the above-mentioned modified example 11 of the second embodiment, the second external signal is configured to be in the ON state during the opening/closing execution mode and the time-saving game state, but it may be configured to be in the OFF state during the opening/closing execution mode and in the ON state during the time-saving game state. This also applies to the second external signals A and B in modified example 12.

(72) In Modifications 11 and 12 of the second embodiment described above, the first external signal and the second external signal in the case of a special miss result are turned on at the timing of transition to the time-shortened game state, but they may also be turned on before (e.g., immediately before) or after (e.g., immediately after) transition to the time-shortened game state. In short, it is sufficient that those external signals are turned on in response to the transition to the time-shortened game state.

(73) In the above-mentioned second embodiment, variants 11 and 12, the first external signal is turned on in the opening and closing execution mode in the event of a normal jackpot result, but the first external signal may be turned on before (e.g., immediately before) or after (e.g., immediately after) the transition to the opening and closing execution mode. In other words, the first external signal may be turned on in response to the transition to the opening and closing execution mode.

(74) In the above-described variant 12 of the second embodiment, both the first external signal B and the second external signal B can be output, but it is also possible to configure the device so that one of these signals is not output.

(75) In the second embodiment and each of the modified examples, the patterns displayed variably on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 are configured to scroll in the left-right direction, but the patterns may be displayed lined up on the left, center, and right, and these patterns may be variably displayed by scrolling up and down. In other words, the arrangement direction of the patterns and the scroll direction are not particularly limited. In addition, the number of patterns (number of rows of patterns) is not limited to three, and may be two, or four or more.

(76) The present invention can also be applied to other types of pachinko machines that are different from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric device opens a predetermined number of times when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines in which a right is generated and a jackpot is awarded when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines equipped with other devices, arrange ball machines, mahjong ball machines, and other gaming machines.

The present invention can also be applied to non-pinball gaming machines, such as slot machines, which have multiple reels with multiple patterns circumferentially attached, and which start the rotation of the reels by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and which, after the reels stop when a stop switch is operated or a predetermined time has passed, award the player with a special prize, such as a medal payout, if a specific pattern or combination of specific patterns is formed on a winning line visible through a display window.

The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the gaming machine body is supported on an outer frame so that it can be opened and closed, has a storage section and an intake device, and the reels start to rotate when a start lever is operated after a predetermined number of gaming balls stored in the storage section have been taken in by the intake device.

Third Embodiment
The gaming machine according to this embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the pachinko machine 10 described with reference to Figures 1 to 10 in the first embodiment is the same in this embodiment, so the description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries by the MPU 312 of the main control device 162>
The electrical configuration for performing various lotteries by the MPU 312 of the main control device 162 will be described with reference to FIG.

The MPU 312 uses various counter information during play to perform lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot, settings for the display of the special chart display section 43, and settings for the display of the normal chart display section 44. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 211, it uses a jackpot random number counter C1 used for lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot, a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the type of jackpot such as a guaranteed jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, a random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a variable type counter CS that determines the variable display time of each special chart display section AS, BS in the special chart display section 43. In addition, it uses a normal chart random number counter C3 used for lottery for whether or not to put the normal power device 63a of the second operating port 63 into a support state (open state).

Each counter C1-C3, CINI, and CS is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in lottery counter buffer 314a set in a specified area of RAM 314. In lottery counter buffer 314a, information corresponding to jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and variable type counter CS is stored in reserved ball storage area 314b, which serves as acquired information storage means, when a win occurs in first actuation port 62 or second actuation port 63.

The reserved ball storage area 314b has a reserved area RE consisting of a reserved area Ra for the first special design and a reserved area Rb for the second special design, and an execution area AE. The reserved areas Ra and Rb each have a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, and the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer 314a is stored in one of the areas as reserved information (special information) according to the winning history of the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63.

In this case, when multiple consecutive wins occur at the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63, the first to fourth areas store the numerical information in chronological order from the first area → the second area → the third area → the fourth area. By providing four areas in this way, up to four winning balls at the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63 can be reserved and stored. In addition, the reserved ball storage area 314b is provided with a total reserved number storage area, and information for specifying the number of winning balls at the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63 that are reserved and stored is stored in this total reserved number storage area.

The execution area AE is an area for moving the values stored in the first area of the reserve area RE when the variable display of the special chart display section 43 begins, and when one game round begins, a win/loss determination is made based on the various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

As for each counter, for example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 2999, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e. 2999). In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 goes through one cycle, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 2999).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of the RAM 314 when the gaming ball enters the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63. More specifically, it is stored in the reserved area Ra for the first special symbol of the RAM 314 when the gaming ball enters the first actuation port 62, and it is stored in the reserved area Rb for the second special symbol of the RAM 314 when the gaming ball enters the second actuation port 63.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the win/lose lottery to determine whether or not there is a jackpot, and the value of the random number that will result in a jackpot win is set in the win/lose table stored in the win/lose table storage area 313a of the ROM 313. As shown in FIG. 212, a win/lose table for a low probability mode and a win/lose table for a high probability mode are set as the win/lose table. In this pachinko machine 10, the lottery modes for the win/lose lottery are a low probability mode (low probability state) in which the probability of a jackpot is relatively low, and a high probability mode (high probability state) in which the probability of a jackpot is relatively high. When the lottery mode is the low probability mode, the win/lose table for the low probability mode is referenced, and when the lottery mode is the high probability mode, the win/lose table for the high probability mode is referenced.

As shown in FIG. 212(a), in the win/lose table for the low probability mode, a total of 10 random numbers from "0" to "9" are set as the jackpot random number values. In other words, the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability mode is set to 1/300.

The lottery result will be a losing result for any random number value other than the jackpot winning value, but in this embodiment, the losing results include special losing results and normal losing results. In the winning/losing table for the low probability mode, a total of 20 random number values from "10" to "29" are set as special losing results, and the probability of getting a special losing result is 1/150.

As shown in FIG. 212(b), in the win/lose table for high probability mode, a total of 50 random number values from "0" to "49" are set as the jackpot winning random number values. In other words, the probability of winning the jackpot in high probability mode is set to 1/60. There are no special losing results set in the win/lose table for high probability mode, and all values other than the random number values that result in a jackpot winning random number are normal losing results.

The probability of winning a jackpot in each probability mode is not limited to the above, and can be set arbitrarily. In other words, as long as the probability of winning a jackpot is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers corresponding to the jackpot are arbitrary. Furthermore, the probability of a special miss result in the win/lose table for the low probability mode is also not limited to the above, and can be set arbitrarily. In this case, the probability of a special miss result does not necessarily have to be higher than the probability of winning a jackpot, and may be the same as the probability of winning a jackpot. Furthermore, the probability of a special miss result may be lower than the probability of winning a jackpot.

The jackpot type counter C2 is used to assign the type of jackpot when a jackpot is hit, and is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e. 99). The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of RAM 314 when the game ball enters the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63. More specifically, it is stored in the reserved area Ra for the first special symbol of RAM 314 when the game ball enters the first actuation port 62, and is stored in the reserved area Rb for the second special symbol of RAM 314 when the game ball enters the second actuation port 63.

The allocation destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a jackpot type table in the type table storage area 313b of the ROM 313. As shown in FIG. 213, a jackpot type table for the first special symbol and a jackpot type table for the second special symbol are set as the jackpot type table. When a jackpot is achieved based on winning the first actuation port 62, the jackpot type table for the first special symbol is referenced, and when a jackpot is achieved based on winning the second actuation port 63, the jackpot type table for the second special symbol is referenced.

As shown in FIG. 213(a), in the jackpot type table for the first special chart, the selectable jackpot types are set as a 4R variable jackpot result, a 4R normal jackpot result A, and a 4R normal jackpot result B. All of these jackpot results result in four rounds of play being performed. Here, a round of play is one in which the variable winning control is performed at least once, changing the variable winning device 65 from a closed state to an open state, and then changing it back to the closed state. In this embodiment, the variable winning control is performed once per round of play.

A 4R high probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which, after the open/close execution mode ends, the lottery mode is set to high probability mode, and the support mode in the regular power device 63a of the second operating port 63 is set to high frequency support mode. In other words, when a 4R high probability jackpot result occurs, the game state after the open/close execution mode ends becomes a high probability mode and high frequency support mode state (high probability game state, high probability game state). In this case, the high probability game state continues until the next jackpot occurs (until the next open/close execution mode starts). Incidentally, while the open/close execution mode is being executed, the lottery mode is set to low probability mode, and the support mode is set to low frequency support mode.

In the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the drive mode of the normal power device 63a is controlled so that the frequency of winning into the second operating port 63 is relatively high or low when compared in a situation where game balls are continuously launched into the game area PE in a similar manner. Specifically, in the high-frequency support mode, the normal power device 63a is opened more frequently than in the low-frequency support mode, and the opening period for each opening is also longer than in the low-frequency support mode.

Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the second actuation port 63 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the first actuation port 62 is higher than in the second actuation port 63, but in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the second actuation port 63 is higher than in the first actuation port 62. And, when a winning entry into the second actuation port 63 occurs, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play without losing too many balls.

In this embodiment, the high frequency support modes are a first high frequency support mode and a second high frequency support mode. Of these, the mode to be entered when a 4R special jackpot result occurs is the first high frequency support mode. The difference between the first high frequency support mode and the second high frequency support mode will be explained later.

A 4R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which, after the open/close execution mode ends, the lottery mode is set to the low probability mode, and the support mode in the normal power device 63a of the second operating port 63 is set to the first high frequency support mode. In other words, if a 4R normal jackpot result occurs, the game state after the open/close execution mode ends will be in the low probability mode and high frequency support mode (time-saving game state).

When the 4R normal jackpot result is A, the time-saving game state continues until the number of times the special game of the miss result (miss game) reaches a first predetermined upper limit (e.g., 50 times). In this case, the number of miss games is counted based on the number of times the special game of the miss result is played after the opening and closing execution mode ends. In addition, when the 4R normal jackpot result is B, the time-saving game state continues until the number of times the miss game after the opening and closing execution mode reaches a second predetermined upper limit (e.g., 200 times). When the first upper limit or the second state number is reached, the time-saving game state ends and the game transitions to the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). Note that if a jackpot result is obtained before the respective upper limits are reached, the time-saving game state ends with the transition to the opening and closing execution mode based on the jackpot result.

In this embodiment, "0" to "64" on the jackpot type counter C2 corresponds to a 4R special jackpot result, "65" to "94" corresponds to a 4R normal jackpot result A, and "95" to "99" corresponds to a 4R normal jackpot result B. In other words, the probability of being assigned to a 4R special jackpot result is set to 65%, the probability of being assigned to a 4R normal jackpot result A is set to 30%, and the probability of being assigned to a 4R normal jackpot result B is set to 5%.

As shown in FIG. 213(b), in the jackpot type table for the second special chart, the selectable jackpot types are set as 10R special jackpot result, 4R normal jackpot result A, and 4R normal jackpot result B.

The 10R high probability jackpot result is one in which the number of rounds played is 10, and the game state after the open/close execution mode ends is a high probability game state. In this case, the high probability game state continues until the next jackpot occurs. 4R normal jackpot results A and B are the same as the 4R normal jackpot results A and B in the jackpot type table for the first special chart.

In this embodiment, "0" to "64" on the jackpot type counter C2 corresponds to a 4R special jackpot result, "65" to "94" corresponds to a 4R normal jackpot result A, and "95" to "99" corresponds to a 4R normal jackpot result B. In other words, the probability of being assigned to a 10R special jackpot result is set to 65%, the probability of being assigned to a 4R normal jackpot result A is set to 30%, and the probability of being assigned to a 4R normal jackpot result B is set to 5%.

In this way, the probability of being assigned to a special jackpot result is the same whether the type table of the first special chart display section or the type table of the second special chart display section is used. However, when a special jackpot result is selected, the type table of the second special chart display section is set to result in a 10R jackpot result, whereas the type table of the first special chart display section is set to result in a 4R jackpot result. In other words, when a special jackpot result is based on winning the second operating port 63, the number of rounds in the open/close execution mode is greater than when a special jackpot result is based on winning the first operating port 62, and it is possible to expect a larger payout of game balls. In other words, a game in which a game ball is won in the second operating port 63 is more advantageous for the player than a game in which a game ball is won in the first operating port 62.

As described above, there is a clear difference in the advantages offered to the player between the first actuation port 62 and the second actuation port 63. Therefore, the player will play in the hope that, of the first actuation port 62 and the second actuation port 63, a win will occur in the second actuation port 63, and as a result, the player will pay more attention to the high frequency support mode, in which the frequency of wins in the second actuation port 63 increases.

In this embodiment, the probability of being allocated to a special jackpot result is the same in the type table of the first special chart display section and the type table of the second special chart display section, but the probabilities may be different. Specifically, the type table of the second special chart display section may be configured to have a higher probability of being allocated to a special jackpot result than the type table of the first special chart display section. Even with this configuration, it is possible to make it more advantageous for the player to have the second operating port 63 win than the first operating port 62. In this case, it is not necessary to configure the second operating port 63 to be more favorable than the first operating port 62 in both the number of rounds in the opening and closing execution mode and the allocation probability to a special jackpot result, and it may be configured so that only the allocation probability to a special jackpot result is favored.

The jackpot type counter C2 is also used to determine the stop result of the image displayed on each special chart display unit AS, BS when the result of the winning/losing lottery based on the winning/losing entry into the operating port 62, 63 is a jackpot. The stop result is determined by referring to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of the ROM 313. In the stop result table, multiple data of the stop result (the jackpot image displayed on each special chart display unit AS, BS) in the case of a jackpot is set in correspondence with the value of the jackpot type counter C2, and when determining the stop result, the data of the multiple stop results corresponding to the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is read out. Here, the same jackpot type counter C2 is used to determine the stop result and the jackpot type, so the jackpot image displayed on each special chart display unit AS, BS corresponds to the jackpot type determined at the time of the jackpot.

In this embodiment, in addition to the time-saving game state that is entered when a normal jackpot result is obtained, a time-saving game state that is entered when the result of the win/lose lottery using the jackpot random number counter C1 is a special miss result is provided. In this case, the time-saving game state is a state in which the lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a second high frequency support mode.

In addition, because a special miss result is a type of miss result, the transition to the above-mentioned time-saving game state will not pass through the open/close execution mode. In other words, when a special miss result occurs, the game state will transition to the time-saving game state as the special game round ends. In the following, when distinguishing between a time-saving game state triggered by a normal jackpot result and a time-saving game state triggered by a special miss result, the former will sometimes be called the "normal time-saving game state" and the latter the "sudden time-saving game state."

As shown in FIG. 214(a), there are multiple types of special failure results. Specifically, there are three types of special failure results, special failure result A to special failure result C. Each of these special failure results is associated with a value of the jackpot random number counter C1. In more detail, of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 that result in special failure results, "10" to "29", "10" to "17" correspond to special failure result A, "18" to "27" correspond to special failure result B, and "28" to "29" correspond to special failure result C. In other words, when a special failure result occurs, the probability of special failure result A being obtained is set to 40%, the probability of special failure result B being obtained to 50%, and the probability of special failure result C being obtained to 10%.

Note that the number and values of the random numbers corresponding to the various special failure results are merely examples, and the probability of the various special failure results and the corresponding random numbers can be set arbitrarily.

As shown in FIG. 214(b), the special miss result A is a special miss result that triggers a transition to the sudden time-saving game state A (low probability mode and second high frequency support mode). The sudden time-saving game state A continues until the number of misses after the transition to the sudden time-saving game state A reaches a third predetermined upper limit (e.g., 50 times).

The special failure result B is a special failure result that triggers a transition to the sudden time-saving game state B (low probability mode and second high frequency support mode). The sudden time-saving game state B continues until the number of failures since the transition to the sudden time-saving game state B reaches a predetermined fourth upper limit (e.g., 100 times).

The special failure result C is a special failure result that triggers a transition to the sudden time-saving game state C (low probability mode and second high frequency support mode). The sudden time-saving game state C continues until the number of failures since the transition to the sudden time-saving game state C reaches a predetermined fifth upper limit (e.g., 200 times).

When the number of misses reaches the respective upper limit in the sudden time-saving game states A to C, the current sudden time-saving game state ends and transitions to the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). If a jackpot result occurs before the respective upper limit is reached, the respective sudden time-saving game state ends with a transition to the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 211, the variation type counter CS is configured to increment by 1 within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 99). The variation type counter CS is used by the MPU 312 to determine the variation display time in the first special chart display section AS and the second special chart display section BS of the special chart display section 43.

The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time the normal processing described below is executed, and is repeatedly updated during the remaining time in the normal processing. The fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of the RAM 314 when the game ball enters the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63. More specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the reserved area Ra for the first special symbol of the RAM 314 when the game ball enters the first actuation port 62, and is stored in the reserved area Rb for the second special symbol of the RAM 314 when the game ball enters the second actuation port 63.

The allocation destination of the variable display time for the variable type counter CS is stored as a variable display time table in the variable display time table storage area 313c of the ROM 313. The variable display time table will be described in detail later.

The regular winning random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 99, and to return to 0 after it reaches a maximum value (i.e., 99). The regular winning random number counter C3 is updated periodically, and is stored in the regular winning holding area 314c of the RAM 314 when the game ball enters the through gate 64.

The normal winning random number counter C3 is used for the normal winning/losing lottery (support lottery) to determine whether or not there is a normal winning (support winning) result. If the result is a support winning result, the normal power role 63a is changed from a closed state to an open state, and then a role opening/closing game is executed in which the opening/closing control to the closed state is performed at least once.

The random number value that results in a support win is set in a support lottery table stored in the win/lose table memory area 313a of the ROM 313. As shown in FIG. 215, the support lottery tables include a support lottery table for the low-frequency support mode, a support lottery table for the first high-frequency support mode, and a support lottery table for the second high-frequency support mode. When drawing support lots, if the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the support lottery table for the low-frequency support mode is referenced, if the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode, the support lottery table for the first high-frequency support mode is referenced, and if the support mode is the second high-frequency support mode, the support lottery table for the second high-frequency support mode is referenced.

As shown in FIG. 215(a), in the support lottery table for the low-frequency support mode, a total of 10 random number values from "0" to "9" are set as the support winning values, and the probability of winning the support is 1/10.

As shown in FIG. 215(b), the support selection table for the first high frequency support mode has a total of 90 values set from "0" to "89", and the probability of winning support is 9/10. In other words, when in the first high frequency support mode, the selection mode for the support selection is a high probability mode, making it easier to win support than in the low frequency support mode.

As shown in FIG. 215(c), in the support selection table for the second high frequency support mode, a total of 10 random number values from "0" to "9" are set as the support winning values, and the probability of winning support is 1/10. In other words, in the second high frequency support mode, the selection mode for the support selection is set to a low probability mode, and the support selection is performed under conditions where the probability of winning support is lower than in the first high frequency support mode.

In each support mode, if the random number value does not result in a support win, the lottery result will be a normal miss. In this case, the opening and closing of the reel will not be performed.

The probability of winning a support win in each support mode is not limited to the above, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, as long as the probability of winning a support win is higher in the first high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode, the number and value of the random numbers that result in a support win are arbitrary. In addition, in the above configuration, the probability of winning a support win in the second high-frequency support mode is the same as that in the low-frequency support mode, but the configuration may be such that the probability of winning a support win in the second high-frequency support mode is higher than the probability of winning a support win in the low-frequency support mode. In that case, the probability of winning a support win in the second high-frequency support mode may be the same as the probability of winning a support win in the first high-frequency support mode, or may be lower than the probability of winning a support win in the first high-frequency support mode, or may be higher than the probability of winning a support win in the first high-frequency support mode. Also, the configuration may be such that the probabilities of winning a support win in the low-frequency support mode, the first high-frequency support mode, and the second high-frequency support mode are equal.

Incidentally, as in this embodiment, if the probability of winning support is set to be equal between the low-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode, i.e., if there is no variation in the probability of winning support between these modes, the support lottery table for each of these modes may be made common, and a single lottery table may be provided.

<Various processes executed by the main control device 162>
Next, a description will be given of timer interrupt processing and normal processing executed by the MPU 312 in the main control device 162 to progress the game. In addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 312 also executes main processing that is started when the power is turned on and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but a description of these processes will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
The timer interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 216. This process is started by the MPU 312 periodically (for example, every 2 msec).

In step Sc101, the reading process of the various winning sensors is executed. That is, the state of the various winning sensors connected to the main control device 162 is read, and the state of the winning sensor (detection information from the winning sensor) is judged and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. For example, if it is judged that a winning has occurred in the first operating port 62, a winning detection flag for the first special symbol is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314, and if it is judged that a winning has occurred in the second operating port 63, a winning detection flag for the second special symbol is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. Also, if it is judged that the game ball has passed through the through gate 64, a winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314.

In step Sc102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 314.

In step Sc103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the regular jackpot random number counter C3 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the regular jackpot random number counter C3 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values, they are each cleared to 0. The updated values of each counter C1 to C3 are then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 314.

In step Sc104, a winning process for through is executed in response to winning at the through gate 64. In the winning process for through, it is determined whether or not a winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314, and if the flag is stored, the value of the regular winning random number counter C3 updated in step Sc103 is stored in the regular reserve area 314c, provided that the number of reserved role pieces stored in the regular reserve area 314c is less than four. In addition, if a winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 314e, the winning detection flag is erased and the winning process for the through gate is terminated.

In step Sc105, the winning process for the actuation port 62, 63 is executed in response to a winning entry into the actuation port, and then the timer interrupt process is terminated.

<Winning process for the operating port>
The winning processing for the operating port in step Sc105 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 217.

First, in step Sc201, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the first operating port 62 (initial entry) based on the detection state of the first operating port entry sensor 62a. If it is determined that a game ball has entered the first operating port 62, in step Sc202, a prize ball command is set in the payout control device 181 to pay out three game balls.

In step Sc203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that a gaming ball has entered the first operating port 62. In step Sc204, the value stored in the reserved number storage area of the first special symbol reserved area Ra is read, and the start reserved memory number RaN reserved and stored in the first special symbol reserved area Ra is set (hereinafter also referred to as the first start reserved memory number RaN). After that, in step Sc205, an information acquisition process is performed to store the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS, and this winning process is terminated.

If the result of step Sc201 is negative (if no winning has occurred in the first actuation port 62), the process proceeds to step Sc206, where it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the second actuation port 63 (initial winning) based on the detection state of the winning sensor 63c for the second actuation port. If it is determined that the game ball has won the second actuation port 63, a winning ball command is set in the payout control device 181 in step Sc207 to pay out one game ball.

In step Sc208, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the gaming ball has entered the second actuation port 63. In step Sc209, the value stored in the reserved number memory area of the second special symbol reserved area Rb is read, and the start reserved memory number RbN reserved and stored in the second special symbol reserved area Rb is set (hereinafter also referred to as the second start reserved memory number RbN). After that, in step Sc205, information acquisition process is performed, and this winning process is terminated.

Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sc206 (no winning has occurred in the second actuation port 63), this winning process ends.

The prize ball command set in step Sc202 or step Sc207 is sent to the payout control device 181 by the external output process of the normal process described below.

Here, the information acquisition process of step Sc205 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 218.

First, in step Sc301, it is determined whether the start pending memory count N (RaN or RbN) set in step Sc204 or step Sc209 described above is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). If the start pending memory count N is the upper limit, the information acquisition process is terminated, and if it is less than the upper limit, in step Sc302, the start pending memory count N of the corresponding special chart pending areas Ra, Rb is incremented by 1. In step Sc303, the value stored in the total pending memory count storage area (hereinafter referred to as the common pending number CRN) is incremented by 1.

In step Sc304, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS are stored in the first free memory area of the reserved area for the corresponding special chart display section, that is, the memory area corresponding to the reserved memory number incremented by 1 in step Sc302.

In other words, when the start pending memory number RaN for the first special symbol is set, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS are stored in the first free memory area of the first special symbol holding area Ra, that is, the holding area Ra corresponding to the start pending memory number RaN for the first special symbol that was incremented by 1 in step Sc302.

In addition, when the start pending memory number RbN for the second special chart is set, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS are stored in the first free memory area of the reserve area Rb for the second special chart, that is, the reserve area Rb corresponding to the start pending memory number RbN for the second special chart that was incremented by 1 in step Sc302.

In step Sc305, a display update process is executed for the special chart reserved number display section AM of the main display unit 81. In the special chart reserved number display section AM, it is possible to display the reserved number for the first special chart and the reserved number for the second special chart separately. In the display update process of step Sc305, if the current ball entry destination (winning destination) is the first operating port 62, the display of the reserved number for the first special chart is updated, and if the current ball entry destination (winning destination) is the second operating port 63, the display of the reserved number for the second special chart is updated.

In step Sc306, a hold command is set as a transmission target to the performance control device 143. The hold command includes information indicating whether the first or second special pattern is the starting winning, information indicating the number of holds, etc. After step Sc306 is executed, this information acquisition process ends.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 219. Normal processing is processing that starts after main processing that is started when the power is turned on is executed, and in normal processing, main processing of the game is executed. In summary, the processing of steps Sc401 to Sc408 is executed as periodic processing with a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps Sc409 to Sc411 is executed in the remaining time.

In normal processing, first, external signal output processing is executed in step Sc401. In the external signal output processing in step Sc401, output data such as the timer interrupt processing or the commands set in the previous normal processing is sent to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is sent to the payout control device 181. In addition, if a performance command such as a fluctuation start command, type command, or fluctuation end command is set, it is sent to the performance control device 143.

In step Sc402, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 314.

In step Sc403, a special chart play control process is executed to control play during each special chart play. In the special chart play control process, a jackpot determination and display control of the special chart display unit 43 are performed. In step Sc404, a game state transition process is executed. This game state transition process transitions the game state to an open/close execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like. The special chart play control process in step Sc403 and the game state transition process in step Sc404 will be described in detail later.

In step Sc405, a normal play control process is executed to control play during a normal play. In the normal play control process, a support lottery (a lottery for determining whether a normal play is a win or lose) and display control of the normal play display unit 44 are performed. In step Sc406, an electric role support process is executed to drive and control the normal play device 63a provided in the second operating port 63. The normal play control process in step Sc405 and the electric role support process in step Sc406 will be described in detail later.

In step Sc407, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 110 is excited once every predetermined period (e.g., 0.6 sec), provided that a launch permission signal is input from the power supply and launch control device 191. This causes the game ball to be launched toward the game area PE.

In step Sc408, it is determined whether a power outage flag is stored in the backup area of RAM 314. The power outage flag is set by the NMI interrupt process that is executed when a power outage occurs, and is used by MPU 312 to detect the occurrence of a power outage.

If the power outage flag is not stored (if a power outage has not occurred), step Sc409 determines whether it is time to execute the next normal process, i.e., whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current normal process. If the predetermined time has not elapsed since the start of the current normal process, step Sc410 updates the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches its maximum value. The updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is then stored in the corresponding area of RAM 314.

In step Sc411, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the corresponding area of RAM 314.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc409 (a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of this normal processing), processing returns to step Sc401 and the processing from step Sc401 onwards is executed.

In this way, after executing the process of step Sc408, the remaining period until the execution timing of the next normal process arrives is used to repeatedly update the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS. Here, since the execution time of each process of steps Sc401 to Sc408 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, it is possible to randomly update the random number initial value counter CINI (i.e., the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1), and similarly, the variation type counter CS can also be randomly updated.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc408 (if the power outage flag is stored), the process proceeds to step Sc412, where the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited. In step Sc413, the value of the stack pointer of MPU312 is stored in the backup area of RAM314, and in step Sc414, a power outage command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143. By transmitting the power outage command, the performance control device 143 is notified of the occurrence of a power outage state.

In step Sc415, a RAM judgment value is calculated and saved in a backup area. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of RAM 314. In step Sc416, access to RAM 314 is prohibited, and an infinite loop continues until the power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed. Note that even after the power is completely cut off, power for storing and maintaining data in RAM 314 is supplied from the power supply and launch control device 191, so the information stored in RAM 314 before the power was cut off is retained in the same state for a specified period of time (for example, one or two days).

<Special chart game play control processing>
The game play control processing of step Sc403 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step Sc501, it is determined whether or not the opening and closing execution mode using the variable winning device 65 is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening and closing execution mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. The opening and closing execution mode flag is used by the MPU 312 to know that the opening and closing execution mode is in progress.

If the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress, in step Sc502, it is determined whether the special chart display unit 43 is displaying a confirmed image. Specifically, it is determined whether a confirmed display flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The confirmed display flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine whether a confirmed display is being performed on the first special chart display unit AS or the second special chart display unit BS.

If the special chart display unit 43 is not displaying a fixed value, in step Sc503, it is determined whether the special chart display unit 43 is displaying a variable value. Specifically, it is determined whether a variable display flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The variable display flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine whether a variable display is being performed on the first special chart display unit AS or the second special chart display unit BS.

If the special chart display unit 43 is not displaying a variable, step Sc504 determines whether the common reserve number CRN is "0". If the common reserve number CRN is "0", this means that the start reserve memory numbers RaN and RbN are "0" for both the first actuation port 62 and the second actuation port 63. Therefore, if the common reserve number CRN is "0", there is no reserve information to be executed, and the special chart play count control process is terminated.

If the common reserved number CRN is not "0", step Sc505 executes a data setting process to set the data stored in the first special chart reserved area Ra or the second special chart reserved area Rb for variable display, and then step Sc506 executes a variable start process to start the variable display in the special chart display unit 43, and then ends this game round control process.

The data setting process in step Sc505 and the change start process in step Sc506 are now described in detail.

First, the data setting process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 221.

First, in step Sc601, it is determined whether the second start pending memory count RbN reserved in the second special pattern reserve area Rb is "0". If the second start pending memory count RbN is "0", data setting processing for the first special pattern (first actuation port 62) is executed in steps Sc602 to Sc608, and if the second start pending memory count RbN is not "0", data setting processing for the second special pattern (second actuation port 63) is executed in steps Sc609 to Sc615.

As already explained, when the common reserved number CRN is 1 or more, the data setting process is performed. The situation in which the data setting process is performed means that at least one of the first start reserved memory number RaN and the second start reserved memory number RbN is 1 or more. In this case, the data setting process is configured to first determine whether the second start reserved memory number RbN is "0" or not, and to execute the process related to the reserved information for the first special symbol on the condition that the second start reserved memory number RbN is "0", that is, there is no reserved information for the second special symbol. Therefore, when reserved information is stored in both the first special symbol reserved area Ra and the second special symbol reserved area Rb, the reserved information for the second special symbol (second operating port 63) stored in the second special symbol reserved area Rb is processed preferentially.

In the data setting process for the first special chart, first in step Sc602, the first start reserved memory number RaN in the reserved area Ra for the first special chart is subtracted by 1. In step Sc603, the common reserved number CRN is subtracted by 1. In step Sc604, the data stored in the first area of the reserved area Ra for the first special chart is moved to the execution area AE.

In step Sc605, a process is executed to shift the data (reserved information such as the jackpot random number counter C1) stored in the memory area of the reserved area Ra for the first special chart. In this process, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in the second to fourth areas is sequentially moved to the lower areas.

In step Sc606, it is determined whether or not a second special pattern flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. The second special pattern flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that there is pending information for the second operating port 63. If the second special pattern flag is stored, the second special pattern flag is erased in step Sc607.

After execution of step Sc607 or if a negative judgment is made in step Sc606 (if the second special chart flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step Sc608, where a shift command (shift occurrence information) is set to notify the performance control device 143 that a shift has been made in the reserved area data. In this case, a shift command is selected from the command information storage area 313e of the ROM 313, the shift command including information that the reserved area that is the subject of this data shift corresponds to the first special chart reserved area Ra, i.e., information that the reserved area corresponds to the first operating port 62, and the selected shift command is set as the command to be sent to the performance control device 143. After that, this data setting process is terminated.

The shift command set in step Sc608 is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sc401 in normal processing (Figure 219). Based on the received shift command, the performance control device 143 executes processing to change the display in the first reserved display area Ga of the pattern display device 75 in response to the reduction in the number of reserved items.

In the data setting process for the second special chart, first in step Sc609, the second start reserved memory number RbN in the reserved area Rb for the second special chart is decremented by 1. In step Sc610, the common reserved number CRN is decremented by 1. In step Sc611, the data stored in the first area of the reserved area Rb for the second special chart is moved to the execution area AE.

In step Sc612, a process is executed to shift the data (reserved information such as the jackpot random number counter C1) stored in the memory area of the reserved area Rb for the second special symbol. In step Sc613, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e. If the second special symbol flag is not stored, the second special symbol flag is set in step Sc614.

After execution of step Sc614 or if a positive judgment is made in step Sc613 (if the second special chart flag is stored), the process proceeds to step Sc615, where a shift command (shift occurrence information) is set, which is information for making the performance control device 143, which is the sub-control device, recognize that a shift of the reserved area data has occurred. In this case, a shift command is selected from the command information storage area 313e of the ROM 313, which includes information that the reserved area that is the subject of this data shift corresponds to the reserved area Rb for the second special chart, i.e., information that it corresponds to the second operating port 63, and the selected shift command is set as the command to be sent to the performance control device 143. After that, this data setting process is terminated.

The shift command set in step Sc615 is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sc401 in normal processing (Figure 219). Based on the received shift command, the performance control device 143 executes processing to change the display in the second reserved display area Gb of the pattern display device 75 in response to the reduction in the number of reserved items.

Next, the fluctuation start process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 222.

First, in step Sc701, a win/lose determination is made by referring to the win/lose table corresponding to the current game state. Specifically, if the current lottery mode is the low probability mode, a win/lose determination is made by referring to the win/lose table for the low probability mode (Figure 212(a)), and if the current lottery mode is the high probability mode, a win/lose determination is made by referring to the win/lose table for the high probability mode (Figure 212(b)). In this step, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the random number for the jackpot in the win/lose table being referenced.

In step Sc702, it is determined whether the result of the hit/miss determination in step Sc701 is a jackpot win or not. If it is a jackpot win, in step Sc703, the corresponding jackpot type table is referenced to determine the jackpot type (lottery for the jackpot type). Specifically, if the current jackpot result is a jackpot result based on the hit/miss lottery for the first special chart, the type is determined by referring to the jackpot type table for the first special chart (Fig. 213(a)), and if the current jackpot result is a jackpot result based on the hit/miss lottery for the second special chart, the type is determined by referring to the jackpot type table for the second special chart (Fig. 213(b)). For example, in the case of type determination based on the jackpot type table for the first special chart, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE belongs to any of the numerical ranges of the 4R variable jackpot result, the 4R normal jackpot result A, or the 4R normal jackpot result B.

In step Sc704, a jackpot type flag corresponding to the jackpot type selected by the type determination in step Sc703 is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. For example, if the selected jackpot type is 4R normal jackpot result A, the 4R normal jackpot A flag is set.

In step Sc705, the stop result for the jackpot is set by referring to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of the ROM 313. Specifically, the stop result corresponding to the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is read from the stop result table and set as the stop result for the current game round.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sc702 (if the jackpot has not been won), the process proceeds to step Sc706, where it is judged whether the result of the win/loss judgment made in step Sc701 is a special miss result. If it is a special miss result, in step Sc707, a special miss type flag corresponding to the type of special miss result is set in the various flags storage area 314e. For example, if the type of special miss result is special miss result A, the special miss A flag is set.

In step Sc708, the stop result for the special miss is set by referring to the stop result table. In the stop result table, a unique stop result is set for each type of special miss result, and specifically, a stop result for each type of special miss result is set in correspondence with the value of the jackpot random number counter C1. In this step, the stop result for the special miss corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is read from the stop result table and set as the stop result for the current game round. As already explained, the type of special miss result corresponds to the type of sudden time-saving game state, so the stop result for the special miss result displayed on the special chart display unit 43 corresponds to the type of sudden time-saving game state.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sc706 (if the result is not a special miss), the process proceeds to step Sc709, where the stop result for the current game round is set as the stop result for a normal miss. In this embodiment, only one type of stop result for a normal miss is provided, and this stop result is set in step Sc709.

After execution of step Sc705, step Sc708 or step Sc709, in step Sc710, a high frequency support mode update process is executed to update the number of times the special chart is played in the high frequency support mode. In step Sc711, a sudden time-saving play state transition determination process is executed to determine whether or not a transition trigger to the sudden time-saving play state has occurred. In step Sc712, a variable display time setting process is executed to set the variable display time by drawing a variation pattern. Details of steps Sc710 to Sc712 will be described later.

In step Sc713, a change display flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The change display flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that a change display for a special game round is in progress.

In step Sc714, a variation start command and a type command are set as targets for transmission to the performance control device 143. The variation start command contains information on the variation pattern, and a different variation pattern is set for each game state, and also a different variation pattern is set depending on whether it is a jackpot or a miss. Therefore, by analyzing the variation pattern from the variation start command, the performance control device 143 can grasp not only information on the variation display time, but also whether or not there is a jackpot and the current game state. Furthermore, the type command contains information on the type of jackpot. Note that the type command is set only when the result of the win/lose determination is a jackpot.

In step Sc715, the display of the special symbol display section 43 begins to change. At that time, if the current special symbol game is based on winning the first operating port 62, the image in the first special symbol display section AS is displayed in a changing manner, and if it is based on winning the second operating port 63, the image in the second special symbol display section BS is displayed in a changing manner. After step Sc715 is executed, the change start process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the special chart play count control process (Fig. 220), after step Sc506 is executed, the special chart play count control process is terminated. Also, if a positive judgment is made in step Sc501 (opening/closing execution mode is in progress), the special chart play count control process is terminated without executing the processes in steps Sc502 and onward. In other words, if the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, no variable display is performed on the special chart display unit 43 even if reserved information exists.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc503 (if the special chart display unit 43 is displaying a change), the process proceeds to step Sc507, where it is judged whether or not the change display time for the current special chart play round has elapsed. If the change display time has not elapsed, the change display process is executed in step Sc508. In the change display process, the display of the special chart display unit related to the current play round is controlled (each display segment is controlled to emit light) so that each display segment is turned on and off in a predetermined order. After execution of step Sc508, the special chart play round control process is terminated.

If the variable display time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step Sc509, where the variable display flag set in the various flag storage area 314e is cleared. In the following step Sc510, a high-frequency support mode termination process is executed to terminate the high-frequency support mode. In step Sc511, a first transition process for the sudden time-shortened game state is executed. The first transition process for the sudden time-shortened game state is intended to transition the game state to a sudden time-shortened game state. Details of steps Sc510 and Sc511 will be described later.

In step Sc512, the process for starting the confirmed display is executed, and then the special symbol game count control process is terminated. In the process for starting the confirmed display, the special symbol display unit 43 is controlled to perform a stopped display of the image with the stopping result set in step Sc705, step Sc708, or step Sc709. In addition, in step Sc512, the confirmed display time for continuing the above-mentioned stopped display is also set.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc502 (if the special symbol display unit 43 is displaying a fixed symbol), the process proceeds to step Sc513, where a process for terminating the fixed symbol display is executed. In the process for terminating the fixed symbol display, it is judged whether or not the fixed symbol display time set in step Sc512 has elapsed, and if so, the special symbol display unit 43 is controlled to terminate the stopped symbol display. Note that if there is no next pending information when the fixed symbol display time has elapsed, the stopped symbol display is controlled to continue as is until a winning entry occurs in the operation port 62, 63. After step Sc513 is completed, the special symbol play count control process is terminated.

<Game Status Transition Processing>
The game state transition processing of step Sc404 (Figure 219) will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 223.

First, in step Sc901, it is determined whether or not the game is in the open/close execution mode. If the game is not in the open/close execution mode, the program proceeds to step Sc902, where it is determined whether or not the special game play has ended (whether or not the final display on the special game display unit 43 has ended). If the special game play has not ended, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is time to end the special game round, in step Sc903, it is determined whether the game result of this special game round corresponds to a transition to the open/close execution mode, i.e., whether the win/loss judgment result is a jackpot. In this step, the jackpot type flag (step Sc705) is stored in the various flags storage area 314e of RAM 314 to determine whether or not there is a jackpot. If the game result of this special game round does not correspond to a transition to the open/close execution mode, this game state transition process is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc903 (if the game result of the current special game round corresponds to a transition to the open/close execution mode), the process proceeds to step Sc904, where the start process of the open/close execution mode is executed. In this start process, the open/close execution mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. In addition, an opening period is set in which the variable winning device 65 is kept in a closed state while waiting for the start of the first round. Furthermore, if the high probability flag, support flag, or reserved flag described later are set in the various flag storage area 314e, these flags are cleared.

In step Sc905, a process for starting the round display is executed to notify the number of rounds in the open/close execution mode. In this step, the type of the current jackpot is identified based on the type flag stored in the various flag storage area 314e, and the round display unit is controlled so that the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. Note that the display of the number of rounds in the round display unit continues until the open/close execution mode ends.

In step Sc906, it is determined whether the current jackpot type is a 10R variable probability jackpot result. If it is not a 10R variable probability jackpot result, that is, if it is either a 4R variable probability jackpot result or a 4R normal jackpot result, in step Sc907, the round counter area RC1 provided in the various counter area 314d of RAM 314 is set to "4". On the other hand, if the current jackpot type is a 10R variable probability jackpot result, in step Sc908, the round counter area RC1 is set to "10".

After execution of step Sc907 or step Sc908, in step Sc909, an opening command is set to notify the performance control device 143 of the start of the opening and the opening period. This set opening command is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sc401 in normal processing (Figure 219).

In step Sc910, the external signal setting process is executed, and then the game state transition process is terminated. In the external signal setting process, the output terminal for the jackpot signal provided in the external output terminal 213 is set to an output state. As a result, if the output terminal for the jackpot signal is connected to a management control device on the gaming hall side, a jackpot signal is output to the management control device, and the management control device can determine that a jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 10.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc901 (if the game is in the opening/closing execution mode), the process proceeds to step Sc911, where it is determined whether or not the opening period has elapsed. If the opening period has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated. If the opening period has elapsed, the big prize opening opening/closing process is executed in step Sc912.

Here, the process of opening and closing the big prize opening will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 224.

First, in step Sc1001, it is determined whether the large prize opening 65a is open or not. This determination is made based on the drive state of the drive unit 65d. If the large prize opening 65a is not open, in step Sc1002 it is determined whether the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0". If the value of the round counter area RC1 is not "0", that is, if there is a round of play to be executed, in step Sc1003 it is determined whether the value of the timer area T1 provided in the various counter areas 344b of RAM 314 is "0". This process is to determine whether the waiting period between rounds (round interval period) has elapsed.

If the value of the timer area T1 is "0", proceed to step Sc1004, and set "15000" in the timer area T1 as a value corresponding to the upper limit opening time (30 sec) of the variable winning device 65 in one round of play. The value set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (Fig. 216) is started. In step Sc1005, set "10" in the winning counter area PC1 provided in the various counter areas 344b as a value corresponding to the upper limit number of winnings (10) in the variable winning device 65 in one round of play.

In step Sc1006, the drive unit 65d is driven to open the large prize opening 65a. In step Sc1007, an opening command is set to notify the performance control device 143 that the opening of the large prize opening 65a (variable prize opening device 65) has begun, and then the large prize opening opening and closing process is terminated. This set opening command is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sc401 in the normal process (Figure 219).

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc1102 (if the value of the round counter area RC1 is 0) or if a negative judgment is made in step Sc1103 (if the value of the timer area T1 is not "0"), the large prize opening opening process is terminated.

If the answer is yes in step Sc1001 (the large prize opening 65a is open), the process proceeds to step Sc1008, where it is determined whether the value of the timer area T1 is "0". This process is to determine whether the upper limit opening time of the variable prize device 65 set in step Sc1004 has elapsed.

If the value of the timer area T1 is not "0", proceed to step Sc1009, and determine whether or not a win has occurred in the large prize opening 65a based on the detection state of the large prize opening winning sensor 65c. If no win has occurred, the large prize opening opening opening process ends. On the other hand, if a win has occurred, the value of the winning counter area PC1 is decremented by 1 in step Sc1010, and then it is determined in step Sc1011 whether or not the value of the winning counter area PC1 is "0". If the value of the winning counter area PC1 is not "0", the large prize opening opening opening process ends.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc1008 (if the value of the timer area T1 is "0") or if a positive judgment is made in step Sc1011 (if the value of the prize counter area PC1 is "0"), the process proceeds to step Sc1012, where the drive unit 65d is switched to a non-driven state and the large prize opening 65a is closed. In step Sc1013, the value of the round counter area RC1 is decremented by 1, and in step Sc1014, it is determined whether the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0".

If the value in the round counter area RC1 is not "0", i.e., if there are remaining rounds of play, proceed to step Sc1015 and set the timer area T1 to "1000" as a value corresponding to the period (2 sec) during which the variable winning device 65 will remain closed and wait for the start of the next round of play.

In step Sc1016, a close command is set to notify the performance control device 143 that the variable winning device 65 has been closed (the round of play has ended), and then the large winning opening opening and closing process is terminated. The set close command is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sc401 in the normal process (Figure 219).

If the answer is yes in step Sc1014 (if the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0"), that is, if the final round of the open/close execution mode has ended, the process proceeds to step Sc1017, where the ending start process is executed. In this start process, an ending period is set during which the variable winning device 65 remains in the closed state and waits for the start of the next game round (the first game round after the open/close execution mode has ended). In step Sc1018, an ending command is set to notify the performance control device 143 of the start of the ending and the ending period, and then the large winning opening open/close process is terminated. The set ending command is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sc401 in the normal process (Fig. 219).

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition process (FIG. 223), after executing the large prize opening/closing process in step Sc912, it is determined in step Sc913 whether the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0". If the value of the round counter area RC1 is not "0", this game state transition process is terminated as is to continue the opening/closing execution mode.

If the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0", the process proceeds to step Sc914 to determine whether the ending has ended (whether the ending period has elapsed). If the ending has not ended, the game state transition process ends in order to continue the ending. On the other hand, if the ending has ended, the process proceeds to step Sc915 to execute the transition process at the end of the opening and closing execution mode.

Here, we will explain the transition process when the opening and closing execution mode ends, with reference to the flowchart in Figure 225.

First, in step Sc1201, the jackpot type flag set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314 is referenced to determine whether or not the current jackpot is a highly probable jackpot result. If it is a highly probable jackpot result, in step Sc1202, a high probability flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. This transitions the lottery mode to the high probability mode.

In step Sc1203, the support A flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The support A flag corresponds to the first high-frequency support mode, and the support mode transitions to the first high-frequency support mode by the processing of step Sc1203.

If a jackpot result occurs when the Support A flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e, the Support A flag is cleared when the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to that jackpot result starts (step S904). Also, if a jackpot result occurs when the high probability flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e, the high probability flag is cleared when the opening and closing execution mode corresponding to that jackpot result starts (step S904). Therefore, in the opening and closing execution mode, the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode. This state continues until the opening and closing execution mode ends.

In step Sc1204, a high probability game state start command is set as the target for transmission to the presentation control device 143, and then the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode is terminated. The high probability game state start command set in step Sc1204 is transmitted to the presentation control device 143 in step Sc401 in the normal processing (FIG. 219). By transmitting the high probability game state start command, the presentation control device 143 is notified of the start of the high probability game state (high probability mode and first high frequency support mode).

If the result of step Sc1201 is negative (if the current jackpot result is a normal jackpot result), the process proceeds to step Sc1205, where the support A flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. This transitions the support mode to the first high frequency support mode.

In step Sc1206, the upper limit number of times corresponding to the current jackpot result is set. For example, if the current jackpot result is a 4R normal jackpot result A, a value corresponding to the first upper limit number of times (e.g., 50) is set in the support counter area SC provided in the various counter areas 314d of RAM314. The support counter area SC is used by MPU312 to grasp the remaining number of times in high frequency support mode (the remaining number of times special chart play can be performed while in high frequency support mode), and is decremented by one each time a special chart play is performed in the high frequency support mode.

In step Sc1207, a time-saving game state start command is set as the target for transmission to the presentation control device 143, and then the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode is terminated. The time-saving game state start command set in step Sc1207 is transmitted to the presentation control device 143 in step Sc401 in normal processing (FIG. 219). By transmitting the time-saving game state start command, the presentation control device 143 is notified of the start of the time-saving game state (low probability mode and first high frequency support mode).

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition process (FIG. 223), after the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode in step Sc915 is completed, the round display end process is executed in step Sc916. In this process, the round display section in the special chart display section 43 is controlled so that the round display section is turned off.

In step Sc917, the process of ending the open/close execution mode is executed, and then the game state transition process is terminated. In the process of ending the open/close execution mode, the process of erasing the type flag and the open/close execution mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 314e is executed.

Next, we will explain the high-frequency support mode update process in step Sc710 and the sudden transition to the time-saving game state determination process in step Sc711. These processes are executed in the fluctuation start process (Figure 222), in other words, they are executed when the fluctuation display starts during the special game round.

<Processing for updating high frequency support mode>
The high frequency support mode update process in step Sc710 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step Sc1301, it is determined whether the result of this special chart lottery is a jackpot result. If it is not a jackpot result, in step Sc1302, it is determined whether any of the support flags are set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the Support A flag, Support B1 flag, Support B2 flag, and Support B3 flag are set. The Support B1 flag to Support B3 flag correspond to the second high frequency support mode (sudden time-saving game state).

If any of the support flags are set, i.e., if the high frequency support mode is in progress, the process proceeds to step Sc1303, where the value of the support counter area SC in the various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314 is updated. Specifically, the value of the support counter area SC is decremented by 1. This decrements the remaining number of times for each time-saving play state by 1.

In step Sc1304, it is determined whether the value of the support counter area SC is "0". If the value of the support counter area SC is "0", that is, if the number of times play has been performed in each time-saving play state has reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to step Sc1305, where a time-saving end flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The time-saving end flag is used by the MPU 312 to know that each time-saving play state should be ended.

After step Sc1305 is executed, the high-frequency support mode update process is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step Sc1301 (if a jackpot result is obtained) or a negative judgment is made in step Sc1302 (if none of the support flags are set), the remaining number of times for each time-saving play state is not updated, and the high-frequency support mode update process is terminated without executing the processes in and after step Sc1303. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sc1304 (if the value of the support counter area SC is not "0"), it is determined that each time-saving play state should not be ended, and the high-frequency support mode update process is terminated without executing the process in step Sc1305.

<Processing for determining transition to sudden time-saving gaming state>
The process for determining whether or not a sudden transition to the time-saving game state has occurred in step Sc711 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 227 (a).

First, in step Sc1401, it is determined whether the result of this special drawing is a special loss result. Specifically, it is determined whether a special loss type flag is set in the various flags storage area 314e of RAM 314. The special loss type flag is set when the result is determined to be a special loss result in the win/loss determination in step Sc701 (step Sc707).

If the result of the special drawing lottery is not a special miss (the special miss type flag is not set), the process for determining whether to transition to the time-saving game state is terminated. On the other hand, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a special miss, the process proceeds to step Sc1402, where it is determined whether any of the support flags are set in the various flags storage area 314e.

If none of the support flags are set, i.e., if the current game state is the normal game state, then in step Sc1403, a sudden time-saving start flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The sudden time-saving start flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that a sudden transition to the time-saving game state should occur. After step Sc1403 is executed, the process for determining whether or not to transition to the sudden time-saving game state is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc1402 (if any of the support flags is set), i.e., if the current game state is the normal time-saving game state or the sudden time-saving game state, the process proceeds to step Sc1404, where it is judged whether or not a reservation flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The reservation flag is used by the MPU 312 to grasp that the transition to the time-saving game state is reserved. The reservation of the time-saving game state will be explained in detail later.

If the reservation flag is not set, this means that there is no reserved time-saving play state. In this case, proceed to step Sc1405 to execute reservation processing, and then suddenly end the process for determining whether to transition to the time-saving play state. The reservation processing is intended to reserve (wait) for the transition to the time-saving play state.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc1404 (if the reservation flag is set), then in step Sc1406 it is judged whether the reserved number for the time-saving play state has reached the reservation upper limit. In this embodiment, the reservation upper limit is set to 1. If the reserved number has not reached the reservation upper limit, the process proceeds to step Sc1405 and the reservation process is executed. If the transition reservation number has reached the reservation upper limit, the process for determining the transition to the time-saving play state is suddenly terminated without executing the process of step Sc1405.

<Reserved Processing>
The reservation process in step Sc1405 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step Sc1501, the remaining number of times in the current time-saving game state (stay time-saving) is determined. This process is performed by referencing the value in the support counter area SC. In step Sc1502, the upper limit number of times for the sudden time-saving game state (corresponding time-saving) corresponding to the type of special failure result this time is determined. For example, if the special failure result this time is special failure result B, the fourth upper limit number of times (e.g. 100 times) for the sudden time-saving game state B is determined as the upper limit number.

In step Sc1503, the difference in the number of times between the remaining number of times determined in step Sc1501 and the upper limit number of times determined in step Sc1502 is calculated. Specifically, the remaining number of times determined in step Sc1501 is subtracted from the upper limit number of times determined in step Sc1502.

In step Sc1504, it is determined whether the difference in number (subtraction result) calculated in step Sc1503 is 1 or more. In other words, it is determined whether the upper limit number determined in step Sc1502 is greater than the remaining number determined in step Sc1501. If the difference in number is 1 or more (if the upper limit number is greater than the remaining number), proceed to step Sc1505, and store (save) type information indicating the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to the type of this special miss result and difference number information indicating the difference in number calculated in step Sc1503.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 227(b), a reservation area 314f is provided in the RAM 314 as a storage area for information relating to the sudden time-saving game state to which transition is reserved. In step Sc1505, the above type information and difference number information are stored in the reservation area 314f.

In the following step Sc1506, a reservation flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. This causes the transition to the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to the current special miss result to be reserved (on hold). If the transition is reserved in this way, the transition to the sudden time-saving game state that was the subject of the reservation will be executed when the reservation release timing arrives. The details of this process will be explained later.

In addition, after the reservation flag is set, a special miss may occur again during the time-saving game state. In this case, after positive judgments are made in steps Sc1401, Sc1402, and Sc1404 of the process for determining whether to transition to the sudden time-saving game state (Fig. 227(a)), the process for step Sc1406 is executed. However, since the reservation upper limit value is set to 1 in this embodiment, a positive judgment is also made in step Sc1406, and the process for determining whether to transition to the sudden time-saving game state is terminated without performing either the process for setting the flag for starting the sudden time-saving game (step Sc1403) or the reservation process (step Sc1405).

In other words, if a special miss occurs again after the reservation, the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to that special miss is not subject to reservation, and the transition to that sudden time-saving game state is canceled (invalidated). In this manner, in this embodiment, if a special miss occurs during the time-saving game state, the sudden time-saving game state is reserved (stocked), but this is configured to be limited to the first time it is won.

In step Sc1507, a reserved command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143, and then the reservation process is terminated. The reservation command notifies that a reservation of the time-saving game state has occurred, and the command includes information indicating the type of time-saving game state that has been set as the reserved state and the difference in the number of times. After execution of step Sc1507, the reservation process is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sc1504 (if the difference in number of times is less than 1), the reservation process is terminated without executing the processes of steps Sc1505 to Sc1507. In other words, if the upper limit number of times of the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to this special miss result is equal to or less than the remaining number of times in the current time-saving game state, the sudden time-saving game state is not placed in a reserved state. In this case, if another special miss result occurs in the current time-saving game state and the upper limit number of times of the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to that is greater than the remaining number of times at that time, the sudden time-saving game state is placed in a reserved state.

<Setting process for variable display time>
The variable display time setting process of step Sc712 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step Sc1601, the current game state is identified. Specifically, it is identified which of the high probability flags and various support flags are set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314, and based on the result, it is determined whether the current game state is a normal game state, a high probability game state, a normal time-saving game state, or a sudden time-saving game state. In this step, if the high probability flag and the first high frequency support mode are set, it is determined to be a high probability game state, if only the first high frequency support mode is set, it is determined to be a normal time-saving game state, if only the second high frequency support mode is set, it is determined to be a sudden time-saving game state, and if none of the flags are set, it is determined to be a normal game state.

In step Sc1602, it is determined whether the game state grasped in step Sc1601 is a normal game state. If it is a normal game state, the process proceeds to step Sc1603, where a variable display time table for the normal game state is obtained. The variable display time table is used to select a variable display time (variation pattern) based on the value of the variation type counter CS.

Here, the variable display time table for the normal game state will be explained with reference to FIG. 230. As the variable display time table for the normal game state, a variable display time table for a jackpot (FIG. 230(a)), a variable display time table for a special miss (FIG. 230(b)), and a variable display time table for a normal miss (FIG. 230(c)) are set.

In each variation display time table, the numerical range of the variation type counter CS is set in correspondence with information on the variation pattern. Note that in FIG. 230, to facilitate understanding, information on the variation display time is listed along with the variation pattern, but the information on the variation display time is stored in ROM 313 separately from the variation display time table as time information corresponding to each variation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 230(a), in the variable display time table for the jackpot corresponding to the normal game state, variable pattern 1A (15 sec), variable pattern 2A (60 sec), and variable pattern 3A (120 sec) are set as selectable variable patterns. When a variable pattern is selected using the variable type counter CS, the variable display time corresponding to the selected variable pattern is set as the variable display time of the image in the first special chart display section AS or the second special chart display section BS.

When a variation pattern is selected, information indicating that variation pattern is sent to the performance control device 143 as a variation start command. The performance control device 143 determines the variation pattern selected by the main control device 162 based on the received variation start command. Then, the display control device 350 is controlled so that the variation display of each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 is performed at the variation display time corresponding to the determined variation pattern. As a result, each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 is displayed in a variable manner on the pattern display device 75 in synchronization with the variable display of the pattern on the first special pattern display unit AS or the second special pattern display unit BS.

In addition, each variation pattern also corresponds to a game round presentation such as a reach presentation performed by the pattern display device 75. Specifically, variation pattern 1A corresponds to a normal reach winning presentation, variation pattern 2A corresponds to an SP reach (super reach) winning presentation, and variation pattern 3A corresponds to an SPSP reach winning presentation. In other words, when the presentation control device 143 determines a variation pattern from the received variation start command, it controls the display control device 350 so that a game round presentation corresponding to that variation pattern is performed by the pattern display device 75.

In each of the reach-winning effects, after a reach display is performed, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a stopped combination for a jackpot. Here, the reach display (reach state) refers to a display state for making the player believe that the state is in a variable display state that is likely to result in a special display result (jackpot result) in a gaming machine that is equipped with a symbol display device 75 capable of performing a variable display (or variably display) of symbols (pictures) and in which, when the stopped display result after the variable display becomes a special display result (jackpot result), the gaming state becomes a special gaming state (open/close execution mode) that is advantageous to the player.

In other words, it is a display state in which some of the multiple symbol rows displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 are stopped to display a combination of symbols that may result in a jackpot symbol combination corresponding to the occurrence of a jackpot state, and in this state, the remaining symbol rows are displayed with varying symbols. More specifically, as a preliminary step before the variable symbol display ends, when the symbols of the final symbol row are displayed with varying symbols, the symbols of the symbol rows other than the final symbol row are displayed on the active line in the display screen G in a manner that constitutes a jackpot symbol combination, thereby forming a reach line.

The normal reach hit effect is a reach display in which the symbols are displayed in a jackpot symbol combination after the reach display described above. The SP reach effect is a reach effect of a higher level than the normal reach effect, in which a predetermined effect in which a character or the like appears is performed after the formation of a reach line, and after the predetermined effect, symbols are displayed in a jackpot symbol combination. The SPSP reach effect is a reach effect of a higher level than the SP reach effect, in which a development effect that develops from the SP reach effect is performed, and symbols are displayed in a jackpot symbol combination. Note that the items in the "Notes (Performance Mode)" column in Figure 230(a) are added for convenience and are not set in the variable display time table.

As shown in FIG. 230(b), in the variation display time table for special misses that correspond to the normal game state, variation pattern Z1 (15 sec) is set as a selectable variation pattern. In other words, regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS, variation pattern Z1 is always selected. As already explained, a special miss result suddenly triggers a transition to the time-saving game state.

The fluctuation pattern Z1 corresponds to the special reach miss A performance, and when a fluctuation start command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern Z1 is sent to the performance control device 143, the symbol display device 75 executes the special reach miss A performance as a performance for a game round. Here, the special reach miss A performance will be explained with reference to FIG. 233.

In the special reach miss A performance, first, as shown in FIG. 233(a), the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are displayed as a reach combination on one of the pay lines L1 to L5 on the display screen G, and the reach display is executed. After that, the middle symbol row Z2 (the symbol row of the final stop column) is switched from a high-speed change display to a low-speed change display, and at that time, as shown in FIG. 233(b), a low-speed change display is performed with a special symbol 511 with letters such as "LUCKY" placed in a position different from the symbol that forms the jackpot combination. In this way, the change display is performed so that the player can understand the presence of the special symbol 511. Note that FIG. 233(b) shows an example in which the special symbol 511 is placed in the position of the "4" symbol that is the next symbol to the "3" symbol that forms the jackpot combination.

Next, as shown in FIG. 233(c), the special symbol 511, which is being displayed at a slow rate of change, is stopped and displayed on the reach line. In this embodiment, after the reach line is formed by the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, the symbol combination on the reach line where the special symbol 511 of the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed is a symbol combination that corresponds to a special miss result, and this notifies the user that a special miss result has occurred.

As shown in FIG. 230(c), in the variable display time table for normal misses corresponding to the normal game state, variable display pattern 1H, variable display pattern 2H (15 sec), variable display pattern 3H (60 sec), and variable display pattern 4H (120 sec) are set as selectable variable patterns. As with the variable display time table for big wins, the variable display time is set corresponding to each variable pattern, but the variable display time corresponding to variable display pattern 1H varies depending on the number of reserved first or second special symbols at that time. Specifically, when variable display pattern 1H is selected in a situation where the number of reserved symbols is two or less, the variable display time is 8 sec, and when variable display pattern 1H is selected in a situation where the number of reserved symbols is three or more, the variable display time is 4 sec, which is shorter than 8 sec.

Fluctuation pattern 1H corresponds to a complete miss on the symbol display device 75, fluctuation pattern 2H corresponds to a normal miss, fluctuation pattern 3H corresponds to a SP miss, and fluctuation pattern 4H corresponds to a SPSP miss.

In the complete miss effect, the symbols are displayed in a miss pattern combination without a reach display. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned reach miss effects, after a reach display is performed, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a reach miss pattern combination (a state in which the symbols in the final stop row displayed on the reach line are symbols other than those that form a jackpot in combination with the reach symbols). In addition, the SP reach miss effect corresponds to the SP reach hit effect, and after a predetermined effect of the same type as the SP reach hit effect is performed, symbols are displayed in a reach miss pattern combination. In addition, the SPSP reach miss effect also corresponds to the SP reach hit effect.

In the fluctuation display time table for big wins, "0" on the fluctuation type counter CS corresponds to fluctuation pattern 1A, "1" to "29" correspond to fluctuation pattern 2A, and "30" to "99" correspond to fluctuation pattern 3A. On the other hand, in the fluctuation display time table for normal losses, "0" to "64" on the fluctuation type counter CS corresponds to fluctuation pattern 1H, "65" to "84" corresponds to fluctuation pattern 2H, "85" to "94" corresponds to fluctuation pattern 3H, and "95" to "98" corresponds to fluctuation pattern 4H.

If the result of the winning/losing lottery based on the entry into the actuation ports 62, 63 is a jackpot result, variation pattern 3A corresponding to the SPSP reach performance is most likely to be selected, and if the result of the winning/losing lottery is a normal miss result, variation pattern 4H corresponding to the SPSP reach performance is least likely to be selected. In other words, the SPSP reach performance is the reach performance that is most likely to be executed in the case of a jackpot and least likely to be executed in the case of a normal miss, so it functions as the highest level reach performance with the highest expectation of a jackpot.

For fluctuation patterns other than fluctuation pattern 3A and fluctuation pattern 4H, the higher the reach effect, the more likely it is to be selected in the event of a jackpot and the less likely it is to be selected in the event of a normal miss. In other words, the expectation of a jackpot increases in the following order: normal reach effect < SP reach effect < SPSP reach effect.

Also, as shown in FIG. 230(c), in the variation display time table for normal misses corresponding to the normal game state, variation pattern Z2 is set as a selectable variation pattern. Variation pattern Z2 is selected when the value of the variation type counter is "99".

Fluctuation pattern Z2 corresponds to the special reach miss B performance, and when a fluctuation start command corresponding to fluctuation pattern Z2 is sent to the performance control device 143, the performance control device 143 controls the symbol display device 75 to execute the special reach miss B performance. The special reach miss B performance is a so-called false performance that is paired with the special reach miss A performance, and it builds up a sense of expectation for a special miss, and then stops and displays the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 with a different symbol combination.

In the special reach miss B performance, as shown in Figs. 233(a) and (b), after the reach display is executed using the upper pattern row Z1 and the lower pattern row Z3, the middle pattern row Z2 is displayed with a slow fluctuation, including the special pattern 511. That is, the pattern fluctuation performance is executed up to the middle in the same manner as the special reach miss A performance. After that, for example, the special pattern 511 passes the reach line, and a pattern different from the special pattern 511 in the middle pattern row Z2 is displayed stopped on the reach line, as shown in Fig. 233(d). In other words, while it appears as if the pattern combination corresponding to the special miss result is established, the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed stopped in such a way that the combination is ultimately not established.

Returning to the explanation of the variable display time setting process (Fig. 229), in step Sc1603, from among the various variable display time tables for the normal game state, one corresponding to the result of the current special chart hit/miss determination (step Sc701) is obtained. Specifically, if the result of the current special chart hit/miss determination is a jackpot result, a variable display time table for a jackpot is obtained, if the result of the current special chart hit/miss determination is a special miss result, a variable display time table for a special miss is obtained, and if the result of the current special chart hit/miss determination is a normal miss result, a variable display time table for a normal miss is obtained.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sc1602 (if the game is not in a normal game state), the process proceeds to step Sc1604, where it is judged whether the current game state grasped in step Sc1601 is a high probability game state or not. If it is in a high probability game state, a variable display time table for the high probability game state is acquired in step Sc1605.

The variable display time table for the high probability game state will be explained with reference to FIG. 231. As the variable display time table for the high probability game state, a variable display time table for a jackpot (FIG. 231(a)) and a variable display time table for a normal miss (FIG. 231(b)) are set.

As shown in FIG. 231(a), in the fluctuation display time table for a jackpot corresponding to a high probability game state, fluctuation pattern 11A (60 sec), which corresponds to an SP reach hit, and fluctuation pattern 12A (120 sec), which corresponds to an SPSP reach hit, are set as selectable fluctuation patterns.

Also, as shown in FIG. 231(b), in the variable display time table for normal misses corresponding to a high probability game state, variable pattern 11H corresponding to a complete miss, variable pattern 12H (60 sec) corresponding to an SP reach miss, and variable pattern 13H (120 sec) corresponding to an SPSP reach miss are set as selectable variable patterns. In the variable display time table for normal misses in a high probability game state, the range of the variable type counter CS corresponding to a complete miss is wider than in the variable display time table for normal misses in a normal game state. In other words, the reach miss performance is less likely to occur, allowing the game to progress quickly.

The display time for the variation pattern 11H, which corresponds to a complete miss, is shortened earlier than the display time table for normal misses in normal gameplay. Specifically, it is set to 8 seconds if the number of reserved items is 1 or less, and 4 seconds if the number of reserved items is 2 or more.

In step Sc1605, from among the various variable display time tables for the high probability game state, one that corresponds to the result of the current special chart win/loss judgment is obtained. Note that, since the win/loss table for the high probability game state does not have a special loss result set (Figure 212 (b)), the variable display time table for the high probability game state does not have a setting that corresponds to the special loss result either.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sc1604 (if the game is not in a high probability game state), this means that the current game state is in a time-saving game state (normal time-saving game state or sudden time-saving game state). In this case, in step Sc1606, a variable display time table for the time-saving game state is obtained.

The variable display time table for the time-saving game state will be explained with reference to FIG. 232. The variable display time table for the time-saving game state includes a variable display time table for a big win (FIG. 232(a)), a variable display time table A for a special miss (FIG. 232(b)), a variable display time table B for a special miss (FIG. 232(c)), and a variable display time table for a normal miss (FIG. 232(d)).

As shown in FIG. 232(a), in the variable display time table for a jackpot corresponding to a time-saving game state, variable pattern 21A (15 sec) corresponding to a normal reach hit, variable pattern 22A (60 sec) corresponding to an SP reach hit, and variable pattern 23A (120 sec) corresponding to an SPSP reach hit are set as selectable variable patterns.

The variable display time table A for special misses is used when the result of the current special pattern hit/miss judgment is a special miss result, and the game suddenly transitions to the time-saving game state or the time-saving game state is suddenly set to a reserved state. A sudden transition to the time-saving game state occurs when a special miss occurs in the normal game state, and the normal game state is suddenly switched to the time-saving game state at the end of the special pattern game round in which the special miss occurred. A sudden time-saving game state is set to a reserved state occurs when a special miss occurs while staying in the time-saving game state (normal time-saving game state or sudden time-saving game state), and the transition to the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to the special miss result is reserved (waiting or stocked). Note that in this embodiment, since the reserved upper limit value is set to 1, a case where a special miss occurs without a reservation corresponds to a case where the game is set to a reserved state. However, if the difference number is less than 1, reservation is avoided, so this does not apply.

As shown in FIG. 232(b), in the variable display time table A for special misses corresponding to the time-saving game state, the variable pattern Z1 (15 sec) corresponding to the special reach miss A presentation is set as a selectable variable pattern. In other words, if a special miss occurs in a situation where a sudden transition to the time-saving game state or a reservation occurs, the special reach miss A presentation is executed and the fact that a special miss has occurred is notified.

Variable display time table B for special misses is used when the result of the current special chart hit/miss judgment is a special miss result and transition to the sudden time-saving play state is not reserved. Scenario in which transition to the sudden time-saving play state is not reserved is when, during a stay in the time-saving play state (normal time-saving play state or sudden time-saving play state), a special miss result occurs when the transition reservation number has reached the reserved upper limit number, or when the difference in the number of times is less than 1 even if the reserved upper limit number has not been reached.

As shown in FIG. 232(c), in the variable display time table B for special misses corresponding to the time-saving game state, variable pattern 21H (8 sec or 4 sec) corresponding to a complete miss effect and variable pattern Z2 (15 sec) corresponding to a special reach miss effect are set as selectable variable patterns. In other words, if a special miss occurs in a situation where a transition to the time-saving game state is not reserved, either a complete miss effect or a special reach miss B effect is executed, and the fact that a special miss has occurred is not announced. This makes it impossible or difficult for the player to recognize that they have won the special miss result.

As shown in FIG. 232(d), in the variable display time table for normal misses corresponding to the time-saving game state, the selectable variable patterns are variable pattern 21H corresponding to a complete miss, variable pattern 22H (15 sec) corresponding to a normal reach miss, variable pattern 23H (60 sec) corresponding to a SP reach miss, variable pattern 24H (120 sec) corresponding to a SPSP reach miss, and variable pattern Z2 (15 sec) corresponding to a special reach miss B effect. In the variable display time table for normal misses in the time-saving game state, the rate of complete misses is lower than that in the variable display time table for normal misses in the normal game state, but this is to prevent the time-saving game state from ending without a reach effect by increasing the frequency of reach effects. Note that the variable display time of variable display pattern 21H corresponding to a complete miss is configured to be 8 sec when the number of reserved items is 1 or less, and 4 sec when the number of reserved items is 2 or more, as in the variable display time table for normal misses in the high probability game state.

Returning to the explanation of the variable display time setting process (Fig. 229), in step Sc1606, from among the various variable display time tables for the time-saving game state, one that corresponds to the situation at that time is obtained. Specifically, the result of the current special chart hit/miss determination and the presence or absence of a sudden transition to the time-saving game state or reservation based on that result are referenced, and a table that corresponds to them is obtained.

Note that each of the fluctuation display time tables shown in Figures 230 to 232 is merely an example, and the number of types of fluctuation patterns and the numerical range of the fluctuation type counter CS corresponding to each fluctuation pattern can be set arbitrarily.

After execution of step Sc1603, step Sc1605, or step Sc1606, in step Sc1607, the variable display time table acquired in each step is used to execute a lottery process for the variable display time (variation pattern). Specifically, from the group of variation patterns set in the variable display time table, one variation pattern corresponding to the variation type counter CS stored in the execution area AE is identified.

In step Sc1608, the variable display time corresponding to the variable pattern identified in step Sc1607 above is set as the variable display time for the current special game round. In this step, the value of the variable display time corresponding to the identified variable pattern is set in the variable display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 314d of RAM 314. For example, if the variable display time is 15 sec, 7500 is set in the variable display time counter area as the corresponding value. This set value is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (Fig. 216) is started.

In step Sc1609, it is determined whether or not a special miss type flag is set in the various flags storage area 314e of RAM 314. If the special miss type flag is set, the process proceeds to step Sc1610, and a process to clear the flag is executed. After execution of step Sc1610, or if a negative judgment is made in step Sc1609 (if the special miss type flag is not set), the process of setting the variable display time is terminated.

Next, we will explain the process for ending the high frequency support mode in step Sc510 (Fig. 220) and the process for the first transition to the sudden time-saving game state in step Sc511. These processes are executed when the variable display time has elapsed in a special game round, in other words, when the fixed display in a special game round starts.

<Processing for terminating high frequency support mode>
The high frequency support mode ending process in step Sc510 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step Sc1701, it is determined whether any of the support flags are set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. If any of the support flags are set, that is, if the player is currently in either the normal time-saving play state or the sudden time-saving play state, the process proceeds to step Sc1702, where it is determined whether or not a time-saving end flag is set. The time-saving end flag indicates that the current time-saving play state should be ended, in other words, it indicates that the current special chart play round is the final special chart play round in the current time-saving play state.

If the time-saving end flag is set, proceed to step Sc1703 and clear the support flag set in the various flag storage area 314e. This ends the time-saving play state that you are currently in. In other words, in this embodiment, if the current special chart play round is the final play round in the time-saving play state, the time-saving play state is configured to end at the start of the confirmation display for that play round.

In step Sc1704, the time-saving end flag set in the various flag storage area 314e is cleared. In the following step Sc1705, a corresponding time-saving game state end command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143. For example, when the normal time-saving game state is ended, a time-saving game state end command corresponding to the end of the normal game state is set.

After step Sc1705 is executed, the high-frequency support mode termination process is terminated. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sc1701 (if none of the support flags are set) or if a negative judgment is made in step Sc1702 (if the time-saving termination flag is not set), the high-frequency support mode termination process is terminated without executing the processes in steps Sc1703 and onward.

<First transition process of sudden time-saving gaming state>
The first transition processing of the sudden time-saving gaming state in step Sc511 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step Sc1801, it is determined whether or not a reservation flag has been set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. If the reservation flag has not been set, the process proceeds to step Sc1802, where it is determined whether or not a sudden time-saving start flag has been set in the various flag storage area 314e. The sudden time-saving start flag is set in the transition determination process of step Sc711 at the start of fluctuation (step Sc1403), and indicates that a transition should be made to a sudden time-saving game state.

If the sudden time-saving start flag is set, i.e., if the situation is such that a transition to a sudden time-saving game state should occur, proceed to step Sc1803, and set the support B flag corresponding to that type in the various flag storage area 314e. For example, if the sudden time-saving game state to transition to is sudden time-saving game state A, set the support B1 flag. This transitions to sudden time-saving game state A.

In step Sc1804, the corresponding upper limit number is set in the support counter area SC provided in the various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314. For example, if the sudden time-saving game state to be transitioned to is sudden time-saving game state A, a value corresponding to the third upper limit number (e.g., 50) is set in the support counter area SC. The support counter area SC is used by the MPU 312 to grasp the remaining number of times in the high-frequency support mode (normal time-saving game state or sudden time-saving game state).

In step Sc1805, the sudden time-shortening start flag set in the various flag storage area 314e is cleared, and in step Sc1806, a sudden time-shortening game state start command is set as the target for transmission to the presentation control device 143. The sudden time-shortening game state start command is for notifying the player of the sudden transition to a time-shortening game state, and includes information indicating the type of sudden time-shortening game state to transition to. The sudden time-shortening game state start command set in step Sc1806 is transmitted to the presentation control device 143 in step Sc401 in normal processing (FIG. 219).

After step Sc1806 is executed, the first transition process to the sudden time-saving game state is terminated. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sc1802 (the sudden time-saving start flag is not set), the transition to the sudden time-saving game state is not executed, and the first transition process to the sudden time-saving game state is terminated without executing the processes from step Sc1803 onwards.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc1801 (if the reservation flag is set), i.e., if the sudden time-saving game state is reserved, the second transition process for the sudden time-saving game state is executed in step Sc1807. The second transition process for the sudden time-saving game state is a process for implementing a transition for the sudden time-saving game state that has been set to a reserved state.

<Second transition process of sudden time-saving gaming state>
The second transition processing of the sudden time-saving game state in step Sc1807 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step Sc1901, it is determined whether any of the support flags are set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. The second transition process for the sudden time-saving game state is executed when the sudden time-saving game state is reserved, that is, when at least the current game state is a time-saving game state, so the process of step Sc1901 essentially determines whether the current time-saving game state has ended.

If none of the support flags are set, i.e., if the current time-saving play state has ended, step Sc1902 reads out the type information stored in the reserved area 314f of RAM 314. In step Sc1903, the support B flag corresponding to the type information read out in step Sc1902 is set in the various flag storage area 314e. For example, if the sudden time-saving play state indicated by the type information is the sudden time-saving play state B, the support B2 flag is set as the corresponding flag.

In step Sc1904, the difference number information stored in the reserved area 314f is read out. In step Sc1905, a value corresponding to the difference number information read out in step Sc1904 is set as the current upper limit number (the upper limit number of times to which the sudden time-saving game state will be entered) in the support counter area SC provided in the various counter areas 314d of RAM 314. For example, if the difference number indicated by the difference number information is 73 times, 73 is set in the support counter area SC.

The difference in the number of times is calculated by subtracting the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state during the current time-saving game state from the original upper limit number of times of the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to the type of special miss result at the time of occurrence of the special miss result that triggered the reservation (100 times for sudden time-saving game state B). In other words, in this embodiment, during the period in which the time-saving game state during the current time and the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to the special miss result that occurred during the current time overlap, the time-saving game state during the current time (the preceding time-saving game state) is given priority and continues, and after the time-saving game state ends, the remaining number of times is played for the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to the special miss result that occurred during the current time.

In step Sc1906, a sudden time-shortened game state start command corresponding to the sudden time-shortened game state for which the reserved state has been released is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143. In step Sc1907, the reserved flag set in the various flag storage area 314e is cleared, and then the second transition process for the sudden time-shortened game state is terminated. By executing the processes of steps Sc1902 to Sc1907, the reserved state for the reserved sudden time-shortened game state is released, and a transition to that sudden time-shortened game state is executed.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc1901 (if any support flag is set), the reserved state is deemed to continue and the process for the second transition to the time-saving game state is suddenly terminated without executing the processes in and after step Sc1902.

<Regular game play control processing>
The regular game play control processing of step Sc405 (Figure 219) will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 237.

First, in step Sc2001, it is determined whether or not a reel opening/closing game using the normal power reel 63a is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a reel opening/closing flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. The reel opening/closing flag is used by the MPU 312 to know that a reel opening/closing game is in progress, and is set when a reel opening/closing game is being played.

If the reel is being opened and closed, the normal play control process ends. On the other hand, if the reel is not being opened and closed, step Sc2002 determines whether a normal play is being performed in the normal play display unit 44. In this case, a normal play is a concept that includes the changing display of the image in the normal play display unit 44 and the stationary display (confirmed display) of the image in the normal play display unit 44, and step Sc2002 determines whether either the changing display or the stationary display is being performed.

In addition, during special game times in the special game display section 43, the execution of the variable display is restricted if the opening and closing execution mode using the variable winning device 65 is being executed, but during normal game times, the variable display is permitted even during the opening and closing execution mode. Also, during normal game times, the execution of the variable display is restricted if the device opening and closing game using the normal electric device 63a is being executed, but during special game times, the variable display is permitted even during the device opening and closing game.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sc2002 (a normal game round is not being played), the process proceeds to step Sc2003, where it is judged whether the normal game round reserve memory number FN is "0". If the normal game round reserve memory number FN is "0", the normal game round control process is terminated.

If the number of reserved regular map memories FN is not "0", step Sc2004 executes a regular map data setting process to set the data stored in the reserved area Rc for electric utility for variable display. In the regular map data setting process, the number of reserved regular map memories FN is decremented by 1, and the data stored in the first area of the reserved area Rc for electric utility is moved to the execution area for regular maps. After that, a process is executed to shift the data stored in each memory area of the reserved area Rc for electric utility, and a regular map shift command is set, which is information for making the performance control device 143 recognize that a shift has been made in the reserved area on the regular map side.

In step Sc2005, the regular map fluctuation start process is executed, and then the regular map play count control process is terminated. Here, the regular map fluctuation start process is explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 238(a).

First, in step Sc2101, support is drawn by referring to the support drawing table corresponding to the current support mode. Specifically, if the current support mode is the low-frequency support mode, support is drawn by referring to the support drawing table for the low-frequency support mode (FIG. 215(a)). If the current support mode is the first high-frequency support mode, support is drawn by referring to the support drawing table for the first high-frequency support mode (FIG. 215(b)). If the current support mode is the second high-frequency support mode, support is drawn by referring to the support drawing table for the second high-frequency support mode (FIG. 215(c)).

In step Sc2102, it is determined whether the result of the support lottery in step Sc2101 is a support winning result (a normal winning result). If it is a support winning result, the process proceeds to step Sc2103, where the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of ROM 313 is referenced to set the stop result for a normal winning result. If it is not a support winning result, i.e., if it is a normal losing result, the process proceeds to step Sc2104, where the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of ROM 313 is referenced to set the stop result for a normal losing result.

After step Sc2103 or step Sc2104 is executed, a process for setting the normal map variable display time is executed in step Sc2105. In this setting process, the variable display time for the current normal map play in the normal map display unit 44 is set. In this embodiment, as the variable display time that can be set in step Sc2105, multiple variable display times of different lengths are provided according to the type of support mode. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 238(b), the longest variable display time (e.g., 100 sec) is provided for the low-frequency support mode, the shortest variable display time (e.g., 0.5 sec) is provided for the second high-frequency support mode, and a variable display time (e.g., 2 sec) that is shorter than the low-frequency support mode and longer than the second high-frequency support mode is provided for the first high-frequency support mode. In step Sc2105, the variable display time corresponding to the current support mode is set as the current variable display time.

In the above configuration, one variable display time is associated with each support mode, but multiple variable display times may be associated with at least one of the support modes. For example, if one time can be selected from multiple variable display times for each of the low-frequency support mode, the second high-frequency support mode, and the first high-frequency support mode, it is preferable that the expected value of the variable display time in each support mode (the sum of the variable display time x the probability of selecting that variable display time) satisfy the above-mentioned long/short relationship.

In step Sc2106, a regular map change start command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143. The regular map change start command includes information on the regular map change pattern (information indicating the regular map pass/fail result and the change display time). The set regular map change start command is transmitted to the performance control device 143 in step Sc401 in normal processing (Figure 219).

In step Sc2107, a process is executed to start the changing display of the image in the regular map display unit 44, and then the regular map change start process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the normal game play control process (Fig. 237), if a positive judgment is made in step Sc2002 (if a normal game play is being performed), the process proceeds to step Sc2006, where it is judged whether or not the variable display time set in step Sc2105 has elapsed. If the variable display time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step Sc2007, where the variable display process is executed. In the variable display process, the display of the normal game display unit 44 is controlled (light emission control of each display segment) so that each display segment in the normal game display unit 44 is turned on and off in a predetermined order. Thereafter, the normal game play control process is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc2006 (if the variable display time has elapsed), a process for displaying the confirmed normal map is executed in step Sc2008, and then the process for controlling the normal map play is terminated. In the process for displaying the confirmed normal map, the normal map display unit 44 is controlled so that the image is displayed in a stopped state according to the stop result set in step Sc2103 or step Sc2104. At that time, the fixed display time is set to a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 sec). In the process for displaying the confirmed normal map, a command for ending the normal map variation is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143. The command for ending the normal map variation includes information on the fixed display time for the current normal map play.

<Electricity support processing>
The electric support processing of step Sc406 (Figure 219) will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 239 (a).

First, in step Sc2201, it is determined whether or not a special feature opening/closing game is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a special feature opening/closing flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314.

If the reel is not being opened or closed, proceed to step Sc2202 and determine whether the normal game has ended. If the normal game has not ended, the electric support process ends.

If it is time for the end of the regular game round, proceed to step Sc2203 and determine whether the result of the support lottery for this regular game round is a support winning result. If it is not a support winning result, end the electric role support processing.

If the result is a support win, in step Sc2204, the number of openings corresponding to the type of support mode is set in the opening count counter area RC2 provided in the various counter area 314d of RAM 314. For example, as shown in FIG. 239(b), if the current support mode is the low frequency support mode, 1 time is set, and if the current support mode is the first high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode, 2 times is set.

In step Sc2205, a reel opening/closing flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. In the following step Sc2206, an external signal setting process is executed, and then the electric support process is terminated. In the external signal setting process, the signal output state of the output terminal for the reel opening signal provided in the external output terminal 213 is set to an open signal output state.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc2201 (when the reel opening/closing game is in progress), the reel opening/closing process is executed in step Sc2207. Here, the reel opening/closing process is explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 240.

First, in step Sc2301, it is determined whether the normal power mechanism 63a is open. Specifically, this determination is made based on the drive state of the drive unit 63b. If the normal power mechanism 63a is not open, it is determined in step Sc2302 whether the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is "0".

If the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is not "0", proceed to step Sc2303 and determine whether the value of the timer area T2 provided in the various counter areas 344b of RAM 314 is "0". This process is to determine whether the waiting period between openings has elapsed when the normal power device 63a is opened multiple times in a device opening and closing game.

If the value of timer area T2 is "0", in step Sc2304, the upper limit opening time corresponding to the current support mode is set in timer area T2. For example, as shown in FIG. 239(b), if the current support mode is the low frequency support mode, the shortest opening time (e.g., 0.1 sec) is set, if the current support mode is the first high frequency support mode, the longest opening time (e.g., 2 sec) is set, and if the current support mode is the second high frequency support mode, the intermediate opening time (e.g., 1 sec) is set. Note that the value set in step Sc2304 corresponds to the upper limit opening time per opening in the opening and closing game of the reel.

In step Sc2305, the winning counter area PC2 in the various counter areas 344b is set to "6." This value corresponds to the upper limit number of winnings (6) for the normal power device 63a (second operating port 63) in the device opening and closing game.

In step Sc2306, the drive unit 63b is set to the driven state to open the normal power reel 63a. In step Sc2307, a reel opening command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143. The set reel opening command is transmitted to the performance control device 143 in step Sc401 in normal processing (FIG. 219). This notifies the performance control device 143 that the normal power reel 63a has been switched from a closed state to an open state.

After step Sc2307 is executed, the reel opening/closing process is terminated. Also, if a positive judgment is made in step Sc2302 (if the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is "0") or if a negative judgment is made in step Sc2303 (if the value of the timer area T2 is not "0"), the normal power reel 63a is not opened, and the reel opening/closing process is terminated without executing the processes in and after step Sc2304.

If the result of step Sc2301 is positive (the normal power device 63a is open), the process proceeds to step Sc2308, where it is determined whether the value of the timer area T2 is "0". This process is to determine whether the upper limit opening time of the normal power device 63a set in step Sc2304 has elapsed.

If the value of the timer area T2 is not "0", i.e., if the upper limit opening time of the normal power device 63a has not elapsed, in step Sc2309, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the second operating port 63. If a win has occurred, in step Sc2310, the value of the winning counter area PC2 is decremented by 1. In step Sc2311, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter area PC2 is "0", i.e., whether or not the number of winning balls entering the second operating port 63 has reached the upper limit number of winning balls.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sc2309 (if no winning has occurred in the second operating port 63) or if a negative judgment is made in step Sc2311 (if the value of the winning counter area PC2 is not "0"), the device opening/closing process ends to keep the normal power device 63a open.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc2308 (if the upper limit opening time of the normal power device 63a has elapsed) or if a positive judgment is made in step Sc2311 (if the value of the winning counter area PC2 is "0"), in step Sc2312, the drive unit 63b is set to a non-driven state to close the normal power device 63a.

In step Sc2313, a role-close command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143. The set role-close command is transmitted to the performance control device 143 in step Sc401 in normal processing (FIG. 219). This notifies the performance control device 143 that the normal power role 63a has been switched from an open state to a closed state.

In step Sc2314, the process of updating the opening count counter area RC2 is executed. In this update process, the value of the winning counter area PC2 is referenced, and if the value of the winning counter area PC2 is not "0" (the number of winning balls at the second operating port 63 has not reached the upper limit of winning balls), the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is decremented by 1. On the other hand, if the value of the winning counter area PC2 is "0" (the number of winning balls at the second operating port 63 has reached the upper limit of winning balls), the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is set to "0".

In step Sc2315, it is determined whether the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is "0". If the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is "0", the reel opening/closing process is terminated. If the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is not "0", that is, if there are remaining openings of the normal power reel 63a, in step Sc2316, an interval time (e.g., 0.2 sec) is set in the timer area T2, and then the reel opening/closing process is terminated. The value set in step Sc2316 corresponds to the waiting time for which the normal power reel 63a is kept closed and awaits the next opening.

Returning to the explanation of the electric role support process (Fig. 239(a)), after executing the reel opening/closing process in step Sc2207, in step Sc2208, it is determined whether the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is "0". If the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is not "0", the electric role support process ends. If the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is "0", that is, if the reel opening/closing game has ended, in step Sc2208, the reel opening/closing flag set in the various flag storage area 314e is cleared, and then the electric role support process ends.

<Electrical configuration of the performance control device 143 and the display control device 350>
The electrical configuration of the performance control device 143 and display control device 350 in this embodiment will be described below with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The performance control board 341 provided in the performance control device 143 is equipped with an MPU 342. The MPU 342 has a ROM 343 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 342, a RAM 344 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 343, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc.

The MPU 342 is provided with an input port and an output port. The main control device 162 is connected to the input side of the MPU 342. From the main control device 162, various commands are received, such as game play control commands, such as a fluctuation start command, a type command, and a fluctuation end command, and opening/closing execution mode commands, such as an opening command and an ending command.

As already explained, the output side of the MPU 342 is connected to the lamp units 26 to 28 and the speaker unit 29 provided in the front door frame 14, as well as to the display control device 350.

The input side of the MPU 342 is also connected to the performance operation unit 36 provided on the front door frame 14. The performance operation unit 36 is provided with a detection sensor that detects the operation of the performance operation unit 36, and detection information (detection signal) from the detection sensor is input. The MPU 342 determines whether the performance operation unit 36 has been operated based on the detection information, and determines the type of operation that has been performed.

The display control device 350 includes a display control board 351 on which an MPU 372, which is a composite chip of a program ROM 373 and a work RAM 374, a video display processor (VDP) 375, a character ROM 376, and a video RAM 377 are mounted.

The MPU 372 analyzes the commands received from the performance control device 143 or performs a predetermined calculation process based on the received commands to control the VDP 375 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 375).

The program ROM 373 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 372, and also stores and holds JPEG format image data for the background image.

The work RAM 374 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. that are used when the MPU 372 executes various programs. This work data, flags, etc. are stored in various areas of the work RAM 374.

VDP375 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device that serves as a liquid crystal display driver built into pattern display device 75. VDP375 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is made into an IC chip, and its actual form can be described as a microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. VDP375 mediates the reading and writing of data by adjusting the timing of MPU372, video RAM377, etc., and reads image data to be stored in video RAM377 from character ROM376 at a specified timing and displays it on pattern display device 75.

The character ROM 376 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as the designs displayed on the design display device 75. This character ROM 376 holds bitmap format image data of various display designs, a color palette table that is referenced when determining the color to be displayed at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

It is also possible to provide multiple character ROMs 376 and have each character ROM 376 store image data, etc. It is also possible to configure the character ROM 376 to store JPEG format image data for background images stored in the program ROM 373.

Video RAM 377 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 75, and the display content of the pattern display device 75 is changed by rewriting the contents of video RAM 377.

<Various processes executed by the performance control device 143>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 342 of the performance control device 143 will be described.

<Performance setting process>
The effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 242. The effect setting process is a process that is activated by the MPU 342 at a predetermined cycle (for example, every 2 msec).

First, in step Sc2501, it is determined whether or not an ending command (step Sc1018) has been received from the main control device 162. The ending command is sent when an ending is to be started in the opening/closing execution mode, which is performed when the result of the win/loss determination in the special game round is a jackpot.

The various commands received from the main control device 162 are stored in a command storage area 344a provided in the RAM 344 of the performance control device 143. The command storage area 344a is configured as a ring buffer that can store multiple commands individually and can read out commands that have been stored earlier. Therefore, even if multiple commands are received at the same time, the processing corresponding to each command can be executed satisfactorily.

When making the judgment in step Sc2501, it is determined whether or not an ending command is stored in the area of the command storage area 344a that is the current read target. If an ending command is stored (if an ending command is received), in step Sc2502, a first transition effect setting process is executed to set a transition effect corresponding to a transition to a high probability play state or a normal time-saving play state. The first transition effect setting process will be described in detail later.

After execution of step Sc2502 or if a negative judgment is made in step Sc2501 (if an ending command has not been received), in step Sc2503, a special pattern change display process is executed to display changes in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75. Details of the special pattern change display process will be described later.

In step Sc2504, it is determined whether or not a sudden time-shortened game state start command (step Sc1806, step Sc1906) has been received from the main control device 162. The sudden time-shortened game state start command notifies the performance control device 143 of the sudden transition to the time-shortened game state, and is transmitted at the timing of the sudden transition to the time-shortened game state. Note that in this embodiment, the sudden transition to the time-shortened game state occurs at the start of the confirmation display in the special game round that resulted in a special miss, so the sudden time-shortened game state start command is transmitted at that start timing.

If a sudden time-saving game state start command has been received, in step Sc2505, a second transition effect setting process is executed to set a transition effect corresponding to the sudden transition to the time-saving game state. The second transition effect setting process will be described in detail later.

After execution of step Sc2505 or if a negative judgment is made in step Sc2504 (if the command to suddenly start the time-saving play state has not been received), in step Sc2506, it is judged whether or not a reservation command (step Sc1507) has been received from the main control unit 162. The reservation command notifies the performance control unit 143 that a special miss has occurred in a special play round during the time-saving play state, and that the transition to the sudden time-saving play state has been reserved, and is sent when such a reservation has occurred.

If a reservation command has been received, step Sc2507 executes a reservation effect setting process. In the reservation effect setting process, a reservation effect is set to be executed as an effect in the event that a reservation of the time-saving play state suddenly occurs. Details of the reservation effect setting process will be described later.

After execution of step Sc2507 or if a negative judgment is made in step Sc2506 (if a reserved command has not been received), step Sc2508 judges whether any game state end command has been received. Specifically, it judges whether a high probability game state end command or a time-saving game state end command (step Sc1705) has been received.

If any of these commands have been received, in step Sc2509, the system executes an end effect setting process to set an end effect corresponding to the end of the high probability game state or each time-limited game state. The end effect setting process will be described in detail later.

In step Sc2510, other processing is performed, and then the performance setting processing is terminated. In other processing, processing is performed to display a demo screen when a start winning does not occur for a specified period of time, and to switch to a power saving mode that stops the image display on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 to reduce power consumption, etc.

<First transition performance setting process>
The first transition performance setting process in step Sc2502 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 243. This process is executed when an ending command is received from the main control device 162, in other words, it is executed in accordance with the ending start timing of the opening/closing execution mode.

First, in step Sc2601, it is determined whether or not a situation exists in which a transition to a high probability game state or a normal time-saving game state will occur. In other words, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode for which the ending command was sent corresponds to a jackpot result that will cause a transition to a high probability game state or a normal time-saving game state. This determination is made based on the type command sent from the main control device 162.

If no transition to the high probability game state or the normal time-saving game state occurs, the first transition performance setting process is terminated. Note that, as in this embodiment, if there is only a jackpot type that always transitions to either the high probability game state or the normal time-saving game state after the opening/closing execution mode ends, it is possible to omit the process of step Sc2601.

If a transition to a high probability game state or a normal time-saving game state occurs, a start effect corresponding to each game state is set in step Sc2602. Specifically, if a transition to a high probability game state occurs, a start effect for the high probability game state is set as the start effect, and if a transition to a normal time-saving game state occurs, a start effect for the general time-saving game state is set as the start effect.

In the start presentation for the high probability play state, as shown in FIG. 244(a), a title image 521 corresponding to the high probability play state, such as "Lucky Time", is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75. In addition, in the start presentation for the normal time-saving play state, as shown in FIG. 244(b), a title image 522 corresponding to the normal time-saving play state, such as "Chance Time", and a remaining number of times image 523 are displayed. The remaining number of times image 523 notifies the player of the remaining number of special play times that the player can stay in the normal time-saving play state.

FIG. 244(c) shows the time-saving effects that are executed while in the normal time-saving game state. The time-saving effects are performed after the start effect in FIG. 244(b) ends, until the normal time-saving game state ends. This time-saving effect is configured to be distinguishable from the normal effects, for example by having a different background image from the normal effects during the normal game state.

In step Sc2602, the above-mentioned various start effects are set to be displayed on the display screen G during the ending period of the opening and closing execution mode. In this case, the start effects may be configured to be displayed during the entire ending period, or may be configured to be displayed during only a part of the ending period.

In step Sc2603, it is determined whether the current transition is to a normal time-saving game state. If a positive determination is made in step Sc2603, in step Sc2604, a value corresponding to the upper limit number is set in the remaining number counter area provided in the various counter areas 344b of RAM344. The remaining number counter area is used by MPU342 to grasp the remaining number of special game times that can be played while in the normal time-saving game state, and is decremented by one each time a special game time is played in each of these game states.

In this embodiment, the performance control device 143 is configured to count the remaining number of times for each game state separately from the main control device 162, but the performance control device 143 may be configured to know the remaining number of times for each game state based on the update results in the main control device 162. For example, the main control device 162 may notify the performance control device 143 of the update results of the support counter area SC (step Sc1303) by sending a specified command, and the performance control device 143 may analyze the command and know each of the update results. In this case, the specified command may be made by including information on each of the update results in an existing command such as the fluctuation start command (step Sc714), or the specified command may be composed of a dedicated command for notifying each of the update results.

In step Sc2605, the display of the remaining number of times image 523 is set to start. At this time, the display of the remaining number of times image 523 may be set to start during each start effect (effect performed using the ending period) set in step Sc2602, or the display of the remaining number of times image 523 may be set to start after the start effect ends and the game transitions to the normal time-saving game state.

In step Sc2606, the remaining number of times display flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344, and then the first transition performance setting process is terminated. The remaining number of times display flag is used by the MPU 342 to know that the remaining number of times image 523 is being displayed.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sc2603, i.e., if the current transition is to a high probability play state, the remaining number of times image 523 is not displayed, and the first transition performance setting process is terminated without executing the processes in and after step Sc2604.

<Special chart change display processing>
The special chart change display processing of step Sc2503 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 245.

First, in step Sc2701, it is determined whether a special pattern play round is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether a play round of either the first special pattern or the second special pattern is in progress. If neither play round is in progress, the process proceeds to step Sc2702, where it is determined whether a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control unit 162.

The fluctuation start command includes information on the fluctuation pattern selected by the process of setting the fluctuation display time in the main control unit 162. By referring to this fluctuation pattern information, it is possible to know at which fluctuation display time the special chart game will be played on the special chart display unit 43, which is display controlled by the main control unit 162. Also, as already explained, since a fluctuation pattern for a jackpot and a fluctuation pattern for a loss are set separately, it is also possible to determine the result of the win/loss judgment from the fluctuation pattern.

If the change start command has not been received, the process for displaying the special chart change ends. On the other hand, if the change start command has been received, the process proceeds to step Sc2703, where the change start process is executed to start the performance for the game round.

In the process for starting the fluctuation, the fluctuation start command from the main control device 162 is analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern for the current special game is identified. Furthermore, the fluctuation display time for the current special game is determined based on the identified fluctuation pattern. The various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343 stores a presentation pattern table in which the fluctuation display time is determined in correspondence with each fluctuation pattern.

The variable display time determined in the presentation pattern table corresponds to the variable display time corresponding to each variation pattern (Fig. 230 to Fig. 232) in the main control device 162, and a common variable display time is assigned to one variation pattern in the presentation control device 143 and the main control device 162. For example, if the variation pattern is variation pattern 1A, the corresponding variable display time is 15 sec in both the presentation control device 143 and the main control device 162. In the variation start process, the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern analyzed from the variation start command is identified by referring to the presentation pattern table, and this is grasped as the variable display time for the current special chart play round.

The presentation pattern table also associates each variation pattern with a presentation pattern for the game round presentation. The presentation patterns are normal reach hit, SP reach hit, SPSP reach hit, complete miss, normal reach miss, SP reach miss, SPSP reach miss, special reach miss A presentation, and special reach miss B presentation, as described in the explanation of the variation display time table. The correspondence between the variation patterns and presentation patterns has already been described with reference to Figures 230 to 232, so an explanation will be omitted. In the variation start process, the presentation pattern corresponding to the current variation pattern is identified by referring to the presentation pattern table, and this is set as the presentation pattern for the current special chart game round.

In addition, in the process for starting the variation, if the result of the win/loss judgment for the current special game round is a jackpot, the type of jackpot is identified based on the type command from the main control device 162. If the jackpot type is a guaranteed jackpot, the stop result for the guaranteed jackpot is set as the stop result of the pattern string Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75. Conversely, if the jackpot type is a regular jackpot, the stop result for the regular jackpot is set as the stop result of the pattern string Z1 to Z3. In these cases, the active lines L1 to L5 on which the stop result for the jackpot is displayed are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

In addition, if the result of the win/loss judgment for this special game round is a normal miss result, the stopping symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are randomly determined. However, if the presentation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern is one that produces a reach presentation, the stopping symbols are determined so that a reach is formed on the active lines L1 to L5 determined by lottery. In other words, the stopping result in which a combination of miss reach symbols is formed on at least one active line L1 to L5 is set as the stopping result for this time.

Also, if the result of the win/loss judgment for the current special game round is a special miss result, the stopping patterns of the upper pattern row Z1 and the lower pattern row Z3 are determined so that a reach is formed on the active lines L1 to L5 determined by lottery, and the stopping patterns are also determined so that the special pattern 511 is stopped and displayed on the middle pattern row Z2 on the reach line. In other words, the stopping result in which the pattern combination of the special miss result is formed on at least one active line L1 to L5 is set as the stopping result for this time.

In the process for starting the fluctuation, after executing each of the above processes, a command including information on the current stopped symbol and information on the presentation pattern is set as an output target to the display control device 350. The display control device 350 controls the symbol display device 75 according to the received command so that the symbols in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 stop with the stop result determined by the presentation control device 143, or a presentation for a game round is performed with the presentation pattern determined by the presentation control device 143.

After executing step Sc2703, processing for updating the remaining number of times display is executed in step Sc2704, and then processing for displaying the special chart change is terminated. In the processing for updating the remaining number of times display, it is determined whether or not the remaining number of times display flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of RAM 344, and if the remaining number of times display flag is set (if the remaining number of times image 523 is being displayed), the value of the remaining number of times counter area is updated by subtracting 1. Furthermore, the display content of the remaining number of times image 523 is updated by referring to the update result of the remaining number of times counter area. As a result, the remaining number of times notified by the remaining number of times image 523 is subtracted by 1.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc2701 (if a special game round is being played), the process proceeds to step Sc2705, where it is judged whether or not a change end command has been received from the main control device 162. If a change end command has not been received, this means that the change display time has not yet elapsed in this special game round. In this case, in step Sc2706, a change in progress process is executed. In the change in progress process, processing is executed to continue the change display of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 that was started by the change start process, to temporarily stop and display the patterns of each pattern row Z1 to Z3 in order, and to execute each reach performance.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc2705 (if a variation end command has been received), variation end processing is executed in step Sc2707, and then the special pattern variation display processing is terminated. In the variation end processing, the variation display of each pattern row Z1 to Z3 and the currently executed performance are terminated. Also, in step Sc2707, control is performed so that the patterns of each pattern row Z1 to Z3 are fixed and stopped at the fixed display time set by the main control unit 162.

<Second transition performance setting process>
The second transition effect setting process of step Sc2505 (FIG. 242) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 246(a). This process is executed when a sudden time-saving game state start command is received from the main control device 162, in other words, when a sudden time-saving game state is started.

First, in step Sc2801, the start effect for the sudden time-saving game state is set. In the start effect for the sudden time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 246(b), a title image 525 corresponding to the sudden time-saving game state, such as "Sudden Chance Time", and a remaining number of times image 523 are displayed. The remaining number of times image 523 notifies the player of the remaining number of special game times that the player can stay in the sudden time-saving game state.

In this step, a setting process for the start effect for the sudden time-saving game state is performed so that the start effect is executed at the fixed display time in the special game round. In this case, the entire start effect may be executed at the fixed display time, or a part of the start effect may be executed at the fixed display time. Note that if a part of the start effect is executed within the fixed display time, the start effect is executed across the fixed display time and the next special game round.

In step Sc2802, a value corresponding to the upper limit number of times of the sudden time-saving game state to be transitioned to is set in the remaining number counter area of RAM344. Specifically, if the type of the sudden time-saving game state to be transitioned to is the third time-saving game state A, a value corresponding to the third upper limit number of times (e.g., 50 times) is set, if it is the third time-saving game state B, a value corresponding to the fourth upper limit number of times (e.g., 100 times) is set, and if it is the third time-saving game state C, a value corresponding to the fifth upper limit number of times (200 times) is set.

In step Sc2803, the display of the remaining number of times image 523 is set to start. At this time, the display of the remaining number of times image 523 may be set to start during the start effect set in step Sc2801, or the display of the remaining number of times image 523 may be set to start after the start effect ends and the game transitions to the normal time-saving game state.

In step Sc2804, the remaining number display flag is set in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344, and then the second transition performance setting process is terminated.

<Reservation performance setting process>
The reserved performance setting process of step Sc2506 will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 247 (a). This process is executed when a reservation command is received from the main control device 162, in other words, when the transition to the time-saving game state is suddenly reserved.

First, in step Sc2901, the reserved command from the main control unit 162 is analyzed, and the differential number of times derived by the reserved processing (Fig. 228) of the main control unit 162 is grasped. The differential number of times is obtained by subtracting the remaining number of times in the current time-shortened game state from the original upper limit number of times in the sudden time-shortened game state corresponding to the special miss result when a special miss result occurs during the time-shortened game state. In other words, the differential number of times corresponds to the remaining number after the current time-shortened game state ends, assuming that the sudden time-shortened game state started at the time when the special miss result occurred.

In step Sc2902, the display mode of the reserved image is selected by lottery. The reserved image notifies the player that the transition to the time-saving game state has been suddenly reserved, and from the player's perspective, this signifies that the time-saving game state has been stocked and will continue even after the time-saving game state ends (in other words, after the number of times indicated by the remaining number of times image 523 becomes 0).

The reserved image is displayed in a specified area (for example, the lower right) on the display screen G so that it can be viewed by the player, and is configured so that the display mode suggests or notifies the player of the difference in the number of times (the number of times remaining when the stocked time-saving game state is activated). The display mode of the reserved image is set to a normal display mode when the difference in the number of times is not suggested, and a specific display mode when the difference in the number of times is suggested, and furthermore, multiple types of display modes are set for the specific display mode.

In this embodiment, the display color (hue) of the reserved image is intended to suggest the difference number. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 247(b), three types of display modes are set: a normal display mode SMw in which the main display color is a normal color (e.g., white), a blue display mode SMb in which the main display color is blue, a green display mode SMg in which the main display color is green, and a red display mode SMr in which the main display color is red.

The specific display modes suggest that the number of differences is greatest in the order of blue display mode SMb < green display mode SMg < red display mode SMr. In FIG. 247(b), different hatching is used to match the different display colors. Note that the suggestion of the number of differences can also be made using modes other than the display color; for example, the type, shape, display size, etc. of the reserved image can be used.

The reserved image is displayed in a different manner (e.g., shape or size) from the reserved image to avoid confusion with the reserved image that indicates the reserved number of times to play the special chart. For example, if the reserved image is a spherical image, the reserved image can be displayed as a heart-shaped image.

In step Sc2902, a lottery is performed to determine whether the reserved image corresponding to this reservation will be displayed in a specific display mode, and if it is to be displayed in a specific display mode, a lottery is performed to determine the type of display mode. Specifically, a lottery is performed to determine whether the image will be displayed in a normal display mode or a specific display mode using a display mode lottery table obtained from the various table storage area 343a of ROM 343 and a lottery counter (random number value) obtained from each counter area 344b of RAM 344. Also, if the lottery result is that the image will be displayed in a specific display mode, a lottery is performed to determine whether the image will be displayed in a blue display mode SMb, a green display mode SMg, or a red display mode SMr, using the difference number of times grasped in step Sc2901, a type table obtained from the various table storage area 343a of ROM 343, and a lottery counter (random number value) obtained from each counter area 344b of RAM 344. In the type lottery table, the relationship between the difference number and the numerical range of each display color is set so that, for example, when the difference number is 50 or less, the blue display mode SMb is most likely to be selected, when the difference number is more than 50 and less than 100, the green display mode SMg is most likely to be selected, and when the difference number is more than 100, the red display mode SMr is most likely to be selected.

In step Sc2903, a setting process is performed to execute the reserved effect, and then the reserved effect setting process is terminated. The reserved effect is executed in the special game round that triggered the reservation of the transition to the sudden time-saving game state (the game round in which a special miss result occurred during the time-saving game state). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 248(a), after the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed stopped with the symbol combination resulting in a special miss, as shown in FIG. 248(b), a text image 527 such as "Stock!!" and a first reserved image 528 are displayed on the display screen G. This notifies the occurrence of the reservation (stock) of the sudden time-saving game state.

After the above display has been made, from the next special pattern play, a second reserved image 529 smaller than the first reserved image 528 is displayed in the corner of the display screen G to notify the player that the game is in a reserved state (Fig. 248(c)). The second reserved image 529 is displayed so as not to overlap with the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 that are displayed in a variable or stationary manner on the display screen G, and will continue to be displayed until the time-saving play state that was in effect ends.

In step Sc2903, a setting process is performed so that the text image 527, the first reserved image 528, and the second reserved image 529 are displayed at the above-mentioned respective timings, and a display color setting process is performed for the first reserved image 528 and the second reserved image 529. At this time, the reservation images 528, 529 are set to be displayed in the display mode selected in step Sc2902.

When displaying in the specific display mode, it is not limited to displaying in a display mode selected from the beginning as described above, but may be configured so that after the first reserved image 528 is displayed in a normal display mode, the display mode is changed to a specific display mode during the display period of the second reserved image 529. Also, it may be configured so that initially a lower specific display mode (e.g., blue display mode SMb) is displayed, and then a higher specific display mode (e.g., green display mode SMg) is displayed.

In these configurations, the final display mode of the reserved image may be selected by lottery in step Sc2902. For example, if the green display mode SMg is selected as the final display mode, a selection is made as to whether the first reserved image 528 will be displayed in the normal display mode, the blue display mode SMb, or the green display mode SMg, and if it is decided that the first reserved image 528 will be displayed in the normal display mode or the blue display mode SMb, a selection is made as to when the second reserved image 529 will be promoted to a higher display mode. Such selections and decisions can be made by using a scenario selection table for selecting a performance scenario.

<Ending performance setting process>
The end effect setting process of step Sc2509 will be described with reference to Fig. 249(a). This process is executed when an end command is received for each of the high probability game state, the normal time-saving game state, and the sudden time-saving game state, in other words, when each of these game states ends.

In step Sc3101, it is determined whether or not the sudden time-saving game state is on hold. If it is not on hold, in step Sc3102, an ending effect corresponding to the game state to be ended is set. For example, if the normal time-saving game state is ending, the ending effect for the normal time-saving game state is set to be executed.

In step Sc3103, the value of the remaining number counter provided in the various counter area 344b of RAM 344 is cleared (initialized). At this time, if the value of the remaining number counter is already 0 (initial value), it is left in that state.

In step Sc3104, the remaining number of times image 523 displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 is erased. In the following step Sc3105, the remaining number of times display flag set in the various flag storage area 344d of the RAM 344 is cleared, and then the end performance setting process is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc3101 (if stock is being reserved), the execution setting for the release effect is made in step Sc3106, and then the process for setting the end effect is terminated. The release effect notifies the user that a sudden transition to the reserved time-saving game state will be initiated, and is performed, for example, by displaying text display 531 such as "Stock release!!" as shown in FIG. 249(b).

When setting the execution of the release effect, the processing of step Sc3102 is not executed. In other words, the processing is performed so that the end effect of the time-saving game state is not executed. Therefore, if the time-saving game state in which you are currently in ends while the transition to the time-saving game state is suddenly reserved, the release effect is executed in the final play round in which you are currently in the time-saving game state, and then the start effect of the sudden time-saving game state is executed in that final play round or the next special play round.

<What happens if you get a special miss during the time-saving game mode>
The flow when a special miss occurs during the time-saving game state will be described with reference to Fig. 250. Here, a case where a transition is made to a normal time-saving game state of the first upper limit number of times (for example, 50 times) in response to a 4R normal jackpot result A, and a special miss occurs before the time-saving game state ends will be illustrated.

For example, if the special miss result B occurs during the 29th special play (timing t1) in the normal time-saving play state, the remaining number of times (21 times) in the current time-saving play state is subtracted from the fourth upper limit number of times (e.g. 100 times) of the sudden time-saving play state B corresponding to the special miss result B, and it is determined whether the result is 1 or more. In this example, the subtraction result is 1 or more, and in such a case, the current normal time-saving play state continues (Fig. 250(a)), while a reservation flag is set (Fig. 250(c)), and the transition to the sudden time-saving play state B that was won during the process is reserved.

In this case, in the special symbol game round that results in a special miss, a special reach miss A effect is executed on the symbol display device 75 (display screen G), and the fact that a special miss has occurred is announced (Fig. 250 (e)). After the special reach miss A effect ends, in the same game round, a reserve effect is executed in which a text image 527 such as "Stock!!" and a first reserve image 528 are displayed (Fig. 250 (f)). The execution of the reserve effect announces that a time-saving game state has been reserved (stock). At these times, the special symbol display unit 43 displays the stop result corresponding to the special miss.

After the above, the second reserved image 529 is displayed from the next special play, and it is notified that the time-saving play state is reserved (Fig. 250 (g)). When the first reserved image 528 and the second reserved image 529 are displayed, a lottery is held to see whether or not each of the reserved images 528, 529 will be displayed in a specific display mode, and if they are to be displayed in a specific display mode, the above subtraction result (difference in number of times) is referenced to determine the type.

If, for example, a special miss occurs again during the 40th special play (timing t2) in the normal time-saving play state, the number of reserved jackpots in the time-saving play state has reached the upper reservation limit, and the sudden time-saving play state is not reserved. In other words, the transition to the sudden time-saving play state corresponding to the re-winning special miss is invalidated.

In this case, in the special symbol game round in which the special miss result is won again, a complete miss effect or a special reach miss B effect is executed on the symbol display device 75. In other words, it is announced as if the result was a normal miss, and the player is placed in a state in which it is impossible or difficult to recognize that the special miss result has been won. However, the special symbol display unit 43 displays the stop result corresponding to the special miss result. Note that Figure 250 (h) shows a case in which a complete miss effect is executed.

After that, on the 50th special chart play, the result of the special chart lottery is a normal miss, and when the confirmation display starts (timing t3), the normal time-saving play state that was in effect ends. As a result, the reserved state of the sudden time-saving play state B is released, and a transition to that time-saving play state is made (Fig. 250 (a), (d)). At this time, the remaining number of times in the sudden time-saving play state B before the transition is made is the difference number of times (79 times) corresponding to the result of the subtraction.

In the above case, in the 50th special symbol play round (the final play round of the normal time-saving play state in which the player was in the normal time-saving play state), a release effect is executed on the symbol display device 75, and then a start effect of the sudden time-saving play state is executed (Fig. 250 (i), (j)). This notifies the player that the stored time-saving play state has been activated. The release effect and the start effect are executed using the confirmed display time of the final play round. Note that at least one of these effects may be executed after the next special symbol play round (the first play round of the sudden time-saving play state) has started.

After the transition to the sudden time-saving game state B, the result of the special symbol lottery in the 79th special symbol game round is a normal miss result, and when the timing for starting the confirmation display (timing t4) arrives, the sudden time-saving game state B ends. In this case, the symbol display device 75 executes the end performance of the time-saving game state.

Incidentally, if a special miss occurs before the time-saving game state ends after the transition to the sudden time-saving game state B, the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to the special miss is reserved (stocked) again. At this time, just like in the case of timing t1 above, the special reach miss A effect or a reserved effect is executed on the pattern display device 75, and a notification is given that a special miss has occurred.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

When a special miss occurs, the transition to the sudden time-shortened game state is reserved, and then, when the execution conditions are met, the transition to the reserved sudden time-shortened game state is implemented. With this configuration, not only is there a case where the sudden transition to the time-shortened game state occurs immediately in response to the winning of the special miss, but there is also a case where the sudden transition to the time-shortened game state occurs with a delay after the winning of the special miss. Therefore, the player can be entertained not only by whether or not the sudden transition to the time-shortened game state occurs, but also by whether or not the sudden time-shortened game state is reserved (stocked), which can suitably increase the interest.

If a special miss occurs during a time-saving game state, the game is configured to reserve a sudden time-saving game state corresponding to that special miss. This configuration makes it possible to acquire multiple time-saving game states, which gives the player the fun of challenging themselves to acquire further time-saving game states, greatly increasing the game's interest.

The maximum number of times to transition to the time-saving game state via reservation is set to be less than the maximum number of times to transition without going through reservation. As mentioned above, it is expected that the ability to acquire multiple time-saving game states will increase interest, but on the other hand, the time-saving game state tends to take up a larger proportion of the time, which tends to give the player an advantage. In this regard, for the reserved time-saving game state, i.e. the second time-saving game state to be acquired, the maximum number of times that a transition to that time-saving game state can be made is kept low, preventing the player from being overly advantageous, and making it possible to strike a balance.

In this case, the upper limit number of times for the time-saving game state (reserved time-saving) to which the player transitions via reservation is set to the difference number obtained by subtracting the remaining number of times for the time-saving game state when the special miss result occurs from the original upper limit number of times (the upper limit number of times when the player does not go through reservation) by the remaining number of times for the time-saving game state when the special miss result occurs. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively advantageous as described above, but in addition, it is possible to exhibit the characteristic that the upper limit number of times for reserved time-saving can be changed depending on the timing of the special miss result. In other words, even if the special miss result is the same type, the later the timing of the winning, the higher the upper limit number of times for reserved time-saving (the difference number of times), so the player can be entertained not only by whether or not a reservation occurs, but also by the timing of its occurrence, making it possible to further appropriately increase interest.

If a special miss occurs during a time-saving game state, a special reach miss A presentation is executed to notify the player of the special miss result, and the reserved image 529 is also displayed, allowing the player to clearly recognize that a time-saving game state has suddenly been reserved. At that time, the state of the reserved image 529 is configured to be set based on the difference in the number of times, and the difference in the number of times can be suggested by the state of the reserved image 529. This makes it possible to provide a game in which the player can guess the degree of advantage of the reserved time-saving by referring to the reserved image 529.

The upper limit of the number of reserved sudden time-saving game states is set to one. For example, if the number of reserved states becomes large, there is a concern that the management and control will become complicated and the processing load will increase. In this regard, in this configuration, the number of reserved time-saving game states is limited to one, making it possible to suppress the increase in processing load. In addition, in order to temporarily reserve a time-saving game state and then perform a transition, information on the time-saving game state that was the target at the time of the reservation (information indicating the type and the maximum number of times, etc.) is stored, and this information is used at the time of the transition. For this reason, it is necessary to secure a storage area for this purpose, but according to this configuration, it is also possible to keep the number of areas for storing information on the reserved specific game state small. Furthermore, since the reserved upper limit number is a number smaller than the number of types of sudden time-saving game states (for example, three), it is not possible to reserve all of the sudden time-saving game states at the same time, and only a portion of them are reserved. This allows the player to enjoy which sudden time-saving game state is reserved, making it possible to increase interest.

If a special miss occurs when the number of reserved items in the time-saving play state has reached the upper limit, a complete miss effect or a special reach miss B effect is executed, and the special miss result is not announced. This makes it difficult for the player to notice that a special miss has occurred, and prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable about no reservations being made despite the special miss result.

<Modification 1>
A first modified example of the third embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 251 to 255. In these figures, the same components as those in the third embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the third embodiment described above, if a special miss occurs while the sudden time-saving game state is reserved, the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to that special miss is not subject to reservation. However, in this modified example, if a special miss occurs while the sudden time-saving game state is reserved, the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to that special miss is subject to reservation. Note that in this modified example, the upper reservation limit is 1, as in the third embodiment described above, and only one time-saving game state can be reserved. The configuration of this modified example will be explained in detail below.

<Processing for determining transition to sudden time-saving gaming state>
The process for determining whether or not the game state is suddenly changed to the time-saving game state according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 251. This process is executed in step Sc711 of the fluctuation start process (Fig. 222) by the main control device 162, and is executed in place of the process for determining whether or not the game state is suddenly changed to the time-saving game state in Fig. 227(a). In Fig. 251, the same process as in Fig. 227(a) is given the same step number, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sc1401, it is determined whether the result of this special drawing lottery is a special miss result. If the result of the special drawing lottery is a special miss result, it proceeds to step Sc1402, where it is determined whether any of the support flags are set in the various flag storage area 314e. If none of the support flags are set, that is, if the current game state is the normal game state, in step Sc1403, a flag for suddenly starting the time-saving mode is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc1402 (if any of the support flags is set), that is, if the current game state is a normal time-saving game state or a sudden time-saving game state, the process proceeds to step Sc1404, where it is determined whether or not a reservation flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. If the reservation flag is not set, that is, if the time-saving game state is not in a reserved state, reservation processing is executed in step Sc1405. The reservation processing is intended to reserve the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to the current special miss result.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc1404 (if the reservation flag is set), then in step Sc1406 it is judged whether the reserved number for the time-saving game state has reached the reservation upper limit. In this embodiment, the reservation upper limit is set to 1. If the reserved number has not reached the reservation upper limit, the process proceeds to step Sc1405 and reservation processing is executed.

If the number of reserved transitions has reached the upper reserved limit, the reserved renewal process is executed in step Sc3301. The reserved renewal process is a process for comparing the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to the current special miss result with the reserved sudden time-saving game state, and determining which state should be reserved. After execution of step Sc3301, the process for determining whether to transition to the sudden time-saving game state is terminated.

<Reservation renewal processing>
The reserved update process in step Sc3301 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step Sc3401, the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state during the current time is determined. This process is performed by referencing the value in the support counter area SC. In step Sc3402, the upper limit number of times for the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to the type of special failure result this time is determined. For example, if the special failure result this time is special failure result A, the third upper limit number of times for the sudden time-saving game state A (e.g. 50 times) is determined as the upper limit number.

In step Sc3403, the difference in the number of times between the remaining number of times determined in step Sc3401 and the upper limit number of times determined in step Sc3402 is calculated. Specifically, the remaining number of times determined in step Sc3401 is subtracted from the upper limit number of times determined in step Sc3402.

In step Sc3404, it is determined whether the difference number (subtraction result) calculated in step Sc3403 is 1 or more. In other words, it is determined whether the upper limit number determined in step Sc3402 is greater than the remaining number determined in step Sc3401. If the difference number is 1 or more (if the upper limit number is greater than the remaining number), proceed to step Sc3405, where the current difference number is compared with the difference number of the reserved sudden time-saving game state (reserved time-saving). Specifically, the difference number of the reserved time-saving stored in the reserved area 314f of RAM 314 is read, and it is determined whether the current difference number derived in step Sc3403 is greater than the read difference number.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc3405 (if the current differential number is greater), the process proceeds to step Sc3406, where the type information and differential number information in the reserved area 314f are updated. Specifically, in the reserved area 314f in which the reserved time-saving type information and differential number information are stored, the type information corresponding to the current special miss result and the differential number information corresponding to the current differential number are overwritten. As a result, the previous reserved state is canceled (suspended), and the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to the current special miss result is made the new reserved state.

When the reserved time reduction is changed in this way, the variable display time setting process (Fig. 222) of step Sc712 refers to the variable display time table A for special misses (Fig. 232(b)) to select the variable display time (variable pattern). In other words, if a special miss occurs while a sudden time reduction play state is reserved and a different sudden time reduction play state is reserved, a special reach miss A presentation is executed in that special play round, and it is announced that a special miss has occurred.

In step Sc3407, a reserved update command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143, and then the reserved update process is terminated. The reserved update command is for notifying that the reserved sudden time-saving game state has been changed, and the command includes information indicating the type of the newly reserved sudden time-saving game state and the difference in the number of times.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sc3404 (if the difference count is less than 1), the reserved update process is terminated without executing the processes from step Sc3405 onwards.

Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sc3405 (if the current difference number is equal to or less than the difference number of reserved time reduction), the reserved time reduction will not be changed (updated), and the reserved time reduction update process is terminated without executing the processes in and after step Sc3406. If the reserved time reduction is not changed, the variable display time setting process in step Sc712 refers to the variable display time table B for special misses (Figure 232 (c)) and draws a lottery for the variable display time (variation pattern). In other words, if the reserved sudden time reduction play state continues to be reserved even after a special miss result, a complete miss effect or a special reach miss B effect is executed in that special chart play round, and the fact that a special miss result has occurred is not announced.

<Performance setting process>
The performance setting process according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 253(a). This process is started by the performance control device 143 at a predetermined cycle (for example, every 2 msec), and is executed in place of the performance setting process in Fig. 242. In Fig. 253(a), the same process as in Fig. 242 is given the same step number, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

In step Sc2506, it is determined whether or not a reservation command has been received from the main control device 162. If a reservation command has been received, in step Sc2507, a reservation effect setting process is executed. In the reservation effect setting process, a reservation effect is set to be executed as an effect in the event that a reservation of the time-saving play state suddenly occurs.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sc2506 (if a reserve command has not been received) or after execution of step Sc2507, step Sc3501 judges whether or not a reserve update command has been received from the main control device 162. If a reserve update command has been received, i.e., if the reserved time-saving game state has been suddenly changed, the process proceeds to step Sc3502, where an update process for the reserved image is executed. The update process for the reserved image is a process for updating the display mode of the reserved image 529 (Fig. 248 (c)) displayed on the pattern display device 75 (display screen G).

Here, the process of updating reserved images in step Sc3502 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 253 (b).

In this update process, first in step Sc3601, the difference in the number of times after the update, i.e., the difference in the number of reserved time reductions after the change, is determined. This process is performed by analyzing the current reserved time reduction command received.

In step Sc3602, the display mode of the reserved image is selected by lottery, taking into account the difference in the number of times determined in step Sc3601. This process is similar to the lottery process in step Sc2902 already described, and a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the reserved image corresponding to this reservation will be displayed in a specific display mode, and if it will be displayed in a specific display mode, a lottery is performed to determine the type of display mode.

In step Sc3603, it is determined whether the display mode selected in step Sc3602 is a higher-level display mode than the current display mode (the display mode of the reserved image executed in response to the reserved time reduction before the change). For example, if the current display mode is the blue display mode SMb and the display mode selected in step Sc3602 is the green display mode SMg, this step is determined to be positive as it is a higher-level display mode.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc3603, the process proceeds to step Sc3604, where a setting process is executed to change the display mode of the reserved image 529 being displayed. In this step, the display mode of the reserved image 529 is set to be changed to the display mode selected in step Sc3602. The display mode is changed in the special game round that resulted in a special miss (the game round in which the above-mentioned display mode was selected), whereby the display mode of the reserved image 529 is promoted, and the difference in the number of reserved time reductions after the change is suggested or notified.

The change in the display mode may not only occur in the special drawing game in which the special miss result occurred, but may also occur in the next special drawing game, or in a special drawing game after that. It may also be performed in stages over multiple times.

After step Sc3604 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step Sc3603 (if the display mode is not higher level), the update process for the reserved image is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the effect setting process (FIG. 253(a)), after execution of step Sc3502 or if a negative judgment is made in step Sc3501 (if a reserved update command has not been received), in step Sc2508, it is determined whether any game state end command has been received.

<What happens if you get a special miss during the time-saving game mode>
The flow when a special failure occurs during the time-saving game state will be described with reference to Fig. 254. Here, a case where a special failure result A occurs during the normal time-saving game state, and then a special failure result B occurs during the same normal time-saving game state will be illustrated.

For example, if the special miss result A occurs during the 29th special play (timing t1) in the normal time-saving play state, the remaining number of times (21 times) in the time-saving play state during which the player is currently in the state is subtracted from the third upper limit number of times (e.g., 50 times) of the sudden time-saving play state A corresponding to the special miss result A, and the difference number A (29 times) is derived. In addition, a reservation flag is set, and the sudden time-saving play state A is placed in a reserved state (Fig. 254 (b), (c)).

In this case, in the special symbol game round in which the special miss result occurs, the symbol display device 75 executes the special reach miss A effect, and the fact that the special miss result has occurred is announced. At this time, the special symbol display unit 43 displays the stop result corresponding to the special miss result A.

In addition, after the special reach miss A effect ends, a reserve effect is executed in the same play round, in which a text image 527 such as "Stock!!" and a first reserve image 528 are displayed. The execution of the reserve effect notifies the player that a time-saving play state has been reserved (stocked). From the next special play round, a second reserve image 529 is displayed, notifying the player that the time-saving play state is on hold.

After that, for example, if special miss result B occurs during the 40th special play (timing t2) in the normal time-saving play state, the remaining number of times (10 times) in the current time-saving play state is subtracted from the fourth upper limit number of times (e.g., 100 times) of the sudden time-saving play state B corresponding to special miss result B, and the difference number B (90 times) is derived. Then, the derived difference number B this time is compared with the difference number A corresponding to the reserved sudden time-saving play state A.

As a result, because differential number B is greater than differential number A, it is determined that the reserved time-saving play state will be suddenly switched from time-saving play state A to time-saving play state B. Based on this determination, the type information and differential number information stored in the reserved area 314f of RAM 314 are updated from a value corresponding to sudden time-saving play state A to a value corresponding to sudden time-saving play state B.

By updating the reserved time reduction in this way, the number of remaining times for the sudden time-saving game state that is implemented after the normal time-saving game state ends increases. In this modified example, since the normal game number and the opening and closing game of the device are the same in the sudden time-saving game state A and the sudden time-saving game state B, the increase in the remaining number of times extends the state in which a winning entry into the second operating port 63 is likely to occur, which is advantageous for the player.

In the special symbol game round where the special miss result is B, the special reach miss A effect is executed on the symbol display device 75, and the fact that a special miss result has occurred is notified. At this time, the special symbol display unit 43 displays the stop result corresponding to the special miss result B. Note that the text image 527 and the first reserved image 528 are not displayed to avoid the misunderstanding that the reserved number for the time-saving game state has been added.

In addition, in the special game, a lottery is performed to select the display mode of the second reserved image 529 that is being displayed, taking into account the difference in number B. As a result, if a display mode that is higher than the current display mode is selected, the display mode of the second reserved image 529 is promoted in the next special game.

As shown in FIG. 255(a), in the case where the reserved image 529 is displayed in the blue display mode SMb and the special failure result B occurs, and the green display mode SMg is selected in the lottery for the display mode, for example, first, in the special pattern play round in which the special failure result B occurs, the pattern sequence Z1 to Z3 is displayed in a stopped combination for the special failure result, and the fact that a special failure result has occurred is notified (FIG. 255(b)). After that, using at least a part of the confirmed display time for that special pattern play round, the display mode of the reserved image 529 is changed from the blue display mode SMb to the green display mode SMg (FIG. 255(c)). This suggests or notifies that the number of remaining times has increased after the transition to the sudden time-saving play state in the reserved state.

The change in display mode may be made using the remaining variable display time, or may be made across the variable display time and the fixed display time. It may also be made in the next special chart game round, or in a later special chart game round.

After that, in the 50th special drawing, the result of the special drawing lottery is a normal miss, and when the confirmation display starts (timing t3), the normal time-saving play state ends, the reserved state is released, and a transition to the sudden time-saving play state B is made (Fig. 254 (a), (e)). At this time, the remaining number of times in the sudden time-saving play state B becomes the difference number of times B (90 times) updated at the above timing t2.

In the above case, on the 50th special play (the final play of the normal time-saving play state in which the player was in), the release effect (Fig. 249(b)) is executed on the symbol display device 75, and then the start effect of the time-saving play state is suddenly executed. This notifies the player that the stored time-saving play state has been activated.

After the sudden transition to time-saving game state B, the result of the special symbol lottery in the 90th special symbol game round is a normal miss result, and when the timing for starting the confirmation display (timing t4) arrives, the time-saving game state B suddenly ends. In this case, the symbol display device 75 executes the end performance of the time-saving game state.

The modified example described above has the following advantages:

If the reserved number of time-saving play states reaches the upper limit and a special miss occurs, the reserved time-saving play state is updated. In other words, a time-saving play state corresponding to a win on a special miss is reserved in exchange for the reserved time-saving play state, so that a win on a special miss after the upper limit is reached can be reflected in the type of reserved time-saving play state. This allows players to play in the hope of a special miss even after the reserved number has reached the upper limit, making it possible to maintain a sense of anticipation for a long time.

When the reserved number of time-saving play states reaches the upper limit and a special miss occurs, a determination is made as to whether or not to update the reserved time-saving play state, and the update is then performed. Depending on the combination of the reserved time-saving play state and the time-saving play state corresponding to the special miss result won after the upper limit is reached, there is a concern that changing (updating) the reserved time-saving play state may actually put the player in a disadvantageous situation. In this regard, because the configuration is such that the determination as to whether or not to perform an update is made by referring to the above combination, unnecessary changes are not made and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience. In particular, it is determined that an update should be performed if the difference in the number of times for the time-saving play state corresponding to the special miss result won during the game is greater than the difference in the number of times for the reserved time-saving play state, so it is possible to update the reserved time-saving play state when the remaining number of times of play in the time-saving play state increases.

When the reserved time reduction is updated, the appearance of the reserved image 529 is changed based on the difference in the number of times after the update. In other words, the difference in the number of times after the update is suggested by the changed appearance of the reserved image 529, so it is possible to add an interest in guessing whether the reserved time reduction will be promoted (such as a change in the reserved time reduction or an increase in the remaining number of times) from the change in the image 529.

<Modification 2>
The second modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 256 to 259. In these figures, the same components as those in the third embodiment and the first modification are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the above-mentioned variant 1, if a special miss occurs while the sudden time-saving game state is reserved, the reserved time-saving state is updated taking into account the difference in the number of times. However, in this variant, a priority is set for each type of sudden time-saving game state, and if a special miss occurs while the sudden time-saving game state is reserved, the reserved time-saving state is updated taking into account the priority. Note that in this variant, the reserved upper limit value is 1, as in the third embodiment, and only one time-saving game state can be reserved. The configuration of this variant is explained in detail below.

<About sudden time-saving gameplay state>
The sudden time-saving game state according to this modification will be described with reference to Fig. 256 and Fig. 257. In this modification, as shown in Fig. 256(a), the sudden time-saving game states A to C are configured so that the winning expectation value for the second operating port 63 is different. Specifically, the winning expectation value is configured to increase in the order of sudden time-saving game state C < sudden time-saving game state B < sudden time-saving game state A. The configuration for making the winning expectation value have such a relationship is not particularly limited, but for example, the aspect of the normal game number and the opening and closing game of the role in each sudden time-saving game state can be realized by configuring it as shown in Fig. 257.

As shown in FIG. 257(a), the variable display time of the normal game play in the sudden time-saving game state A and the sudden time-saving game state B is made shorter than that in the sudden time-saving game state C, so that the number of support wins (number of times the support lottery is executed) per unit time in the sudden time-saving game state A and the sudden time-saving game state B is made greater than that in the sudden time-saving game state C. Also, as shown in FIG. 257(b), the opening period of the normal electric device 63a in the sudden time-saving game state A is made longer than that in the sudden time-saving game state B and the sudden time-saving game state C, so that the period during which a winning is possible in the second operating port 63 when the device opening and closing game is performed is made longer in the sudden time-saving game state A than in the sudden time-saving game state B and the sudden time-saving game state C.

With the above configuration, sudden time-saving game state A is most likely to occur when a winning ball enters the second operating port 63, and sudden time-saving game state C is least likely to occur. Sudden time-saving game state B is intermediate in likelihood of occurring. In other words, sudden time-saving game state A is the most advantageous sudden time-saving game state for the player.

The upper limit number of times for each sudden time-saving game state is the same, and is set to, for example, 100 times (Figure 256 (a)). Also, the number of times the normal electric device 63a opens during the device opening and closing game and the interval period (the closing period between the first opening and the second opening) are also the same for each sudden time-saving game state (Figure 257 (b)). However, this configuration is not limited to this, and the upper limit number of times and the number of times the device is opened may be different for each sudden time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 256(a), in this modified example, a priority is set for each sudden time-saving game state. In FIG. 256(a), the smaller the numerical value, the higher the priority, and the priority is set so that the order of highest priority is sudden time-saving game state C < sudden time-saving game state B < sudden time-saving game state A. In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 256(b), a priority information storage area 551 is provided in the ROM 313, and priority information indicating the priority is stored in the priority information storage area 551 in association with the type of sudden time-saving game state.

<Reservation renewal processing>
The reserved update process according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 258. This process is executed in step Sc3301 of the process for determining the transition to the sudden time-saving game state (FIG. 251) by the main control device 162, and more specifically, is executed when a special miss occurs while the sudden time-saving game state is reserved. This process is executed in place of the reserved update process of FIG. 252, and the same step numbers are assigned to the processes in FIG. 258 that are the same as those in FIG. 252, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sc3401, the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state during the current state is determined. In step Sc3402, the upper limit number of times for the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to the type of the current special miss result is determined. In step Sc3403, the remaining number of times determined in step Sc3401 is subtracted from the upper limit number of times determined in step Sc3402 to derive the difference number of times.

In step Sc3404, it is determined whether the difference number derived in step Sc3403 is 1 or more. If the difference number is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step Sc4101, where the priority of the sudden time-saving game state (current time-saving) corresponding to the current special miss result is determined. This process is performed by referring to the special miss type flag set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314 and the priority information stored in the priority information storage area 551 of ROM 313.

In step Sc4102, the priority of the reserved sudden time-saving game state (reserved time-saving) is determined. Specifically, the type of the reserved sudden time-saving game state is identified based on the type information stored in the reservation area 314f of RAM 314, and the priority of the identified sudden time-saving game state is identified by referring to the priority information in the priority information storage area 551.

In step Sc4103, the priority of the current time reduction determined in step Sc4101 is compared with the priority of the reserved time reduction determined in step Sc4102, and it is determined whether the priority of the current time reduction is higher than the priority of the reserved time reduction. If the determination in step Sc4103 is positive, the process proceeds to step Sc4104, where the type information and differential number information in the reserved area 314f are updated. Specifically, in the reserved area 314f in which the type information and differential number information of the reserved time reduction are stored, the type information corresponding to the current special miss result and the differential number information corresponding to the current differential number (the differential number derived in step Sc3403) are overwritten. As a result, the reserved state up to that point is canceled (suspended), and the sudden time reduction game state corresponding to the current special miss result is newly set as the reserved state.

When the reserved time reduction is changed in this way, the variable display time setting process (Fig. 222) of step Sc712 refers to the variable display time table A for special misses (Fig. 232(b)) to select the variable display time (variable pattern). In other words, if a special miss occurs while a sudden time reduction play state is reserved and a different sudden time reduction play state is reserved, a special reach miss A presentation is executed in that special play round, and it is announced that a special miss has occurred.

In step Sc4105, a reserved update command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143, and then the reserved update process is terminated. The reserved update command is for notifying that the reserved sudden time-saving game state has been changed, and the command includes information indicating the type of the sudden time-saving game state that has been newly set as the reserved state and the difference in the number of times.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sc4103 (if the priority of the current time-saving is low), the reserved state is maintained, the reserved sudden time-saving game state is not changed, and the reservation update process is terminated without executing the processes in and after step Sc4104. If the reserved time-saving is not changed, the variable display time setting process in step Sc712 refers to the variable display time table B for special misses (Figure 232 (c)) and draws the variable display time (variable pattern). In other words, if the reserved sudden time-saving game state continues to be reserved even after a special miss result, a complete miss effect or a special reach miss B effect is executed in that special chart play round, and the fact that a special miss result has occurred is not clearly indicated.

<What happens if you get a special miss during the time-saving game mode>
The flow when a special failure occurs during the time-saving game state will be described with reference to Fig. 259. Here, a case where a special failure occurs multiple times in the order of special failure result B, special failure result C, and special failure result A in the normal time-saving game state will be illustrated.

For example, if special miss result B occurs during the 20th special play (timing t1) in the normal time-saving play state, the remaining number of times (30 times) in the time-saving play state during which the player is currently in the state is subtracted from the upper limit number of times (e.g., 100 times) of the sudden time-saving play state B corresponding to special miss result B, and the difference number B (70 times) is derived. In this case, since the difference number B is 1 or more, a reservation flag is set and the sudden time-saving play state B is placed in a reserved state (Fig. 259 (b), (c)).

In the special symbol game round where the special miss result is B, the special reach miss A effect is executed on the symbol display device 75, and the fact that a special miss result has occurred is notified. At this time, the special symbol display unit 43 displays the stop result corresponding to the special miss result B.

In addition, after the special reach miss A effect ends, a reserve effect is executed in the same play round, in which a text image 527 such as "Stock!!" and a first reserve image 528 are displayed. The execution of the reserve effect notifies the player that a time-saving play state has been reserved (stocked). From the next special play round, a second reserve image 529 is displayed, notifying the player that the time-saving play state is on hold.

After that, for example, if the special miss result C occurs during the 30th special play (timing t2) in the normal time-saving play state, the remaining number of times (20 times) in the time-saving play state during which the player is currently in the state is subtracted from the upper limit number of times (e.g., 100 times) of the sudden time-saving play state C corresponding to the special miss result C, and the difference number C (80 times) is derived. In this case, the difference number C is 1 or more, and since the sudden time-saving play state B has been reserved, the priority of the sudden time-saving play state C and the priority of the sudden time-saving play state B are read out from the priority information storage area 551 of the ROM 313 and compared. Since the priority of the sudden time-saving play state C is lower than the priority of the sudden time-saving play state B, the sudden time-saving play state B is given priority as the reserved target.

In other words, the reservation of the sudden time-saving game state C is invalidated, and the reserved state of the sudden time-saving game state B is maintained. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the reserved time-saving game state from being switched from the sudden time-saving game state B, in which winning at the second operating port 63 is relatively likely to occur, to the sudden time-saving game state C, in which winning at the second operating port 63 is relatively unlikely to occur.

In the above case, in the special symbol game round in which the special miss result C is reached, a complete miss effect or a special reach miss B effect is executed on the symbol display device 75. In other words, it is announced as if the result was a normal miss, and the player is placed in a state in which it is impossible or difficult to recognize that he or she has won the special miss result. However, the special symbol display unit 43 displays the stop result corresponding to the special miss result C.

After that, for example, if the special miss result A occurs during the 40th special play (timing t3) in the normal time-saving play state, the remaining number of times (10 times) in the time-saving play state during which the player is currently in the state is subtracted from the upper limit number of times (for example, 100 times) of the sudden time-saving play state A corresponding to the special miss result A, and the difference number A (90 times) is derived. In this case, the difference number A is 1 or more, and since the sudden time-saving play state B has been reserved, the priority of the sudden time-saving play state A and the priority of the sudden time-saving play state B are read out from the priority information storage area 551 and compared. Since the priority of the sudden time-saving play state A is higher than the priority of the sudden time-saving play state B, the sudden time-saving play state A is given priority as the reserved target.

In this case, the type information and the differential number information stored in the reserved area 314f of the RAM 314 are updated from a value corresponding to the sudden time-saving game state B to a value corresponding to the sudden time-saving game state A. Specifically, the type information in the reserved area 314f is rewritten to a value corresponding to the sudden time-saving game state A, and the differential number information is rewritten to a value corresponding to the differential number A.

As a result, the reserved state of sudden time-saving game state B is cancelled (suspended), and sudden time-saving game state A is newly reserved. In other words, the reserved sudden time-saving game state is switched from sudden time-saving game state B to sudden time-saving game state A, in which winning at the second operating port 63 is more likely to occur, and a time-saving game state that is more advantageous to the player is stocked.

In addition, the above change to the reserved time-saving feature will increase the number of remaining times (the difference in the number of times) that the sudden time-saving game state will play after the normal time-saving game state ends. In other words, the state in which winning at the second operating port 63 is more likely to occur will be extended compared to before the change, which is advantageous for the player.

In this modified example, the upper limit number of times for each sudden time-saving game state is the same, so if a special miss occurs in the reserved state of the sudden time-saving game state, the difference in the number of times will inevitably be larger than the difference in the number of times for the reserved sudden time-saving game state. However, if the upper limit number of times is different for each sudden time-saving game state, it is possible that the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to the later special miss result will have a smaller difference in the number of times than the reserved sudden time-saving game state. Even in such a case, if the priority corresponding to the later sudden time-saving game state is higher than the priority corresponding to the reserved sudden time-saving game state, the reserved time-saving will be changed.

In a special symbol game round in which the special miss result A is reached, the symbol display device 75 executes a special reach miss A effect, and the fact that a special miss result has occurred is announced. At this time, the special symbol display unit 43 displays the stop result corresponding to the special miss result A. Note that the text image 527 and the first reserved image 528 are not displayed to avoid the misunderstanding that the reserved number for the time-saving game state has been added.

In addition, in the special game play, a lottery is run to select the display mode of the second reserved image 529 being displayed, taking into account the difference in number of times A. If a display mode that is higher than the current display mode is selected as a result, the display mode of the second reserved image 529 is upgraded in the next special game play. This suggests or notifies the remaining number of times for the reserved time reduction after the change.

The change in display mode may be made using the remaining variable display time, or may be made across the variable display time and the fixed display time. It may also be made in the next special chart game round, or in a later special chart game round.

After that, on the 50th special drawing, the result of the special drawing lottery is a normal miss, and when the confirmation display starts (timing t4), the normal time-saving play state ends, the reserved state is released, and a transition to the sudden time-saving play state A is made (Fig. 259 (a), (e)). At this time, the remaining number of times in the sudden time-saving play state A becomes the difference number A (90 times) updated at the above timing t3.

In the above case, on the 50th special play (the final play of the normal time-saving play state in which the player was in), the release effect (Fig. 249(b)) is executed on the symbol display device 75, and then the start effect of the time-saving play state is suddenly executed. This notifies the player that the stored time-saving play state has been activated.

After the sudden transition to time-saving game state A, the result of the special symbol lottery in the 90th special symbol game round is a normal miss, and when the timing for starting the confirmation display (timing t4) arrives, the time-saving game state A suddenly ends. In this case, the symbol display device 75 executes the end performance of the time-saving game state.

The modified example described above has the following advantages:

The decision as to whether or not to update the reserved time-saving state is made based on the type of time-saving game state. In other words, the decision as to whether or not to update (change) is made is made by comparing the type of reserved time-saving game state with the type of time-saving game state that corresponds to the special miss result won after the upper limit is reached, so it becomes possible to determine whether or not to change based on the differences in characteristics between these two specific game states.

A priority is set in advance for each of the sudden time-saving game states A to C (multiple types of time-saving game states that can be reserved), and the presence or absence of an update is determined based on that priority. In this case, if a higher priority is set for the sudden time-saving game state with a higher expected value of winning in the second actuation port 63 (for example, sudden time-saving game state A) than for the sudden time-saving game state with a lower expected value of winning in the second actuation port 63 (for example, sudden time-saving game state C), it is possible to prevent a switch in the direction in which winning in the second actuation port 63 becomes more difficult due to the update of the reserved time-saving. This allows the player to aim for a win on a special miss result without worrying about the downgrade of the reserved time-saving, and makes it easier to enjoy a game in which the reserved time-saving is upgraded by winning a special miss result.

It is also expected that the workload at the time of designing the gaming machine can be reduced. In other words, if all combinations of the reserved time-saving game state and the time-saving game state corresponding to the special miss result won after the upper limit is reached are assumed, and if the reservation is not executed when the special miss result B (corresponding to the sudden time-saving game state B) occurs while the time-saving game state A is reserved, for example, if an attempt is made to specify in the control program whether or not to update each combination, there is a concern that the control program will become more complicated as the number of combinations increases, leading to an increase in the workload. In this regard, by using the priority to determine whether or not to update, it is sufficient to simply set a priority for each time-saving game state, and the control program can be simplified. Furthermore, even if a design change is required after the fact, a complete change to the control program is not required, and it is sufficient to simply change the priority setting. In other words, there is also the advantage that the design can be easily changed.

<Modification 3>
The third modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 260 to 268. In these figures, the same components as those in the third embodiment and each modification are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples, the reserved upper limit is set to 1, and it is possible to reserve one sudden time-saving game state, but in this modified example, it is possible to reserve multiple sudden time-saving game states. The configuration of this modified example will be explained in detail below.

<About sudden time-saving gameplay state>
The sudden time-saving game state according to this modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 260(a). In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 260(a), the sudden time-saving game states A to C are configured so that the winning expectation value for the second operating port 63 is different. Specifically, as in the modified example 2, the winning expectation value is configured to increase in the order of sudden time-saving game state C < sudden time-saving game state B < sudden time-saving game state A. Note that the configuration example for making the winning expectation value have such a relationship has been described in the modified example 2, so the description will be omitted.

In addition, in this modified example, the upper limit number of times is different for the sudden time-saving game states A to C. Specifically, the upper limit number of times increases in the following order: sudden time-saving game state C < sudden time-saving game state B < sudden time-saving game state A. Note that it is not essential to have different upper limit numbers, and the upper limit number of times may be the same for sudden time-saving game states A to C, as in modified example 2 above.

<Regarding the various counter areas 314d>
The various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314 according to this modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 260(b).

The various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314 are set in a portion of the memory area of the RAM 314, and are used as soft counters by setting various counter values related to game control and rewriting the values so that they are decremented by one at each specified update timing. In this modified example, the counter area 314d is configured to include a counter area 560 for the time-saving game state. This counter area 560 for the time-saving game state is used as an area for counting the remaining number of times the time-saving game state is engaged.

The counter area 560 for the time-saving game state includes an area 561 for executing time-saving to count the number of times remaining in the current time-saving game state, and an area 562 for reserved time-saving to count the number of times remaining in the reserved time-saving game state. Among these, the reserved time-saving area 562 has multiple counter areas set, and specifically, a number of counter areas corresponding to the number of types of sudden time-saving game states are secured. That is, three counter areas are set, consisting of a first reserved time-saving area 562a, a second reserved time-saving area 562b, and a third reserved time-saving area 562c.

<Processing for determining transition to sudden time-saving gaming state>
The process for determining whether or not the game state is suddenly changed to the time-saving game state according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 261(a). This process is executed in step Sc711 of the fluctuation start process (Fig. 222) by the main control device 162, and is executed in place of the process for determining whether or not the game state is suddenly changed to the time-saving game state in Fig. 227(a). In Fig. 261(a), the same step numbers are given to the processes similar to those in Fig. 227(a), and their descriptions are omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sc1401, it is determined whether the result of this special drawing lottery is a special miss result. If the result of the special drawing lottery is a special miss result, it proceeds to step Sc1402, where it is determined whether any of the support flags are set in the various flag storage area 314e. If none of the support flags are set, that is, if the current game state is the normal game state, in step Sc1403, a flag for suddenly starting the time-saving mode is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc1402 (if any of the support flags is set), that is, if the current game state is a normal time-saving game state or a sudden time-saving game state, a reservation process is executed in step Sc4301, and then the process for determining whether to transition to the sudden time-saving game state is terminated. The reservation process is a process for reserving the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to a special miss result when a special miss result occurs during the time-saving game state.

<Reserved Processing>
The reservation process in step Sc4301 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step Sc4401, it is determined whether any of the reservation flags are set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. In this modified example, reservation flags A to C are set corresponding to the sudden time-saving game states A to C, and for example, when reservation flag C is set in the various flag storage area 314e, it indicates that the sudden time-saving game state C is on hold.

If none of the reservation flags are set, i.e., if the sudden time-saving game state is not reserved, proceed to step Sc4402, and set the reservation flag corresponding to the current special miss result in the various flag storage area 314e. For example, if the current special miss result is special miss result A, set reservation flag A.

In step Sc4403, a value corresponding to the upper limit number of times the sudden time-saving game state corresponds to the current special miss result is set in reserved time-saving area 562 in various counter areas 314d of RAM 314. More specifically, the above value is set in the topmost area of the areas that are free among the first reserved time-saving area 562a to the third reserved time-saving area 562c. When the processing of this step is executed in a situation where a negative judgment is made in step Sc4401 (a situation where the sudden time-saving game state is not reserved), all areas are free, so the above value is set in the first reserved time-saving area 562a.

In step Sc4404, the order of occurrence of the current special losing result is stored. In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 261(b), an order of occurrence information storage area 565 is set in the RAM 314 as a storage area for storing the information on the order of occurrence. This order of occurrence information storage area 565 has multiple storage areas consisting of a first area 565a, a second area 565b, and a third area 565c. These first area 565a to third area 565c correspond to the winning order of the special losing result (the order of occurrence of the reserved time reduction), and specifically, the first area 565a corresponds to the earliest winning order, and the third area 565c corresponds to the latest winning order.

In this step, type information corresponding to the type of the current special miss result is stored in the topmost empty area among the first area 565a to the third area 565c. If no sudden time-saving play state is reserved and the current special miss result is the first win in the time-saving play state, the type information is stored in the first area 565a.

In step Sc4405, a reserved command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143, and then the reservation process is terminated. The reserved command notifies that a reservation of the time-saving game state has occurred, and the command includes information indicating the type of the time-saving game state that has been set as the reserved state.

If the determination in step Sc4401 is positive (if any of the reservation flags is set), i.e., if the sudden time-saving game state is in a reserved state, proceed to step Sc4406, and determine whether or not a time-saving game state of the same type as the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to the current special miss result is being reserved. This determination may be made by referring to the occurrence order information storage area 565 of RAM 314, or by referring to the reservation flags in the various flags storage area 314e. For example, when referring to the occurrence order information storage area 565, it is determined whether or not type information corresponding to the type of the current special miss result is stored in any of the first area 565a to the third area 565c, and if the type information is stored, it is recognized that the same type of time-saving game state is being reserved.

If the same type of time-saving game state is not reserved, proceed to step Sc4402, and set the reservation flag corresponding to the current special miss result in the various flag storage area 314e. In the following step Sc4403, a value corresponding to the upper limit number of times is set in the topmost free area in the first reserved time-saving area 562a to the third reserved time-saving area 562c of the reserved time-saving area 562. For example, if the second reserved time-saving area 562b and the third reserved time-saving area 562c are free, the above value is set in the second reserved time-saving area 562b.

In step Sc4404, type information corresponding to the type of this special miss result is stored in the topmost free area among the first area 565a to the third area 565c of the occurrence order information storage area 565.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc4406 (if the same type of time-saving game state is reserved), the reservation process ends without executing the processes in steps Sc4402 to Sc4405. In other words, if the same type of time-saving game state is already reserved, the reservation of that time-saving game state continues, but the reservation of a sudden time-saving game state corresponding to the current special miss result is not executed.

<Setting process for variable display time>
The process of setting the variable display time according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 263. This process is executed in step Sc712 of the variable start process (Fig. 222), and is executed in place of the process of setting the variable display time in Fig. 229. In Fig. 263, the same process as in Fig. 229 is given the same step number, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sc1604 (if the game is not in a high probability game state), this means that the current game state is a time-saving game state (normal time-saving game state or sudden time-saving game state). In this case, in step Sc4501, it is judged whether the result of this special chart winning/losing lottery is a special losing result. If it is a special losing result, the process proceeds to step Sc4502, where it is judged whether any of the reservation flags are set in the various flags storage area 314e of RAM 314.

If none of the reserved flags are set, proceed to step Sc4503, and obtain variable display time table A for special misses (Figure 232 (b)) as the variable display time table for this time. In this variable display time table A, only variable pattern Z1 (special miss A effect) is set as a selectable variable pattern. In other words, if a special miss occurs in a situation where there is no reserved time reduction, a lottery process for the variable display time (step Sc1607) is executed so that a variable pattern corresponding to the execution of the special miss A effect is selected.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc4502 (if any of the reserved flags is set), the process proceeds to step Sc4504, where variable display time table B for special misses (Fig. 232 (c)) is obtained as the variable display time table for this time. Variable display time table B has variable pattern 21H (complete miss effect) or variable pattern Z2 (special reach miss B effect) set as selectable variable patterns. In other words, if a special miss result occurs in a situation where a reserved time reduction exists, a lottery process for the variable display time (step Sc1607) is executed so that a variable pattern corresponding to a complete miss effect or a special reach miss B effect is selected.

In addition, as the event that corresponds to the special failure result in the situation where the reserved time shortening exists, there are two cases: the time shortening game state of the same type as the sudden time shortening game state corresponding to the current special failure result is not reserved, and the sudden time shortening game state corresponding to the special failure result is reserved; and the time shortening game state of the same type as the sudden time shortening game state corresponding to the current special failure result is already reserved, and the sudden time shortening game state corresponding to the special failure result is not reserved. In this modified example, in either case, the variable display time (variable pattern) is drawn by lottery using the variable display time table B. That is, for the first special failure result during the time shortening game state, the special reach miss A effect is executed on the pattern display device 75, and the special failure result is notified, but for the second and subsequent wins, regardless of whether the reserve is executed or not, the complete miss effect or the special reach miss B effect is executed on the pattern display device 75, and the special failure result is not notified.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sc4501 (if the result is not a special miss), the process proceeds to step Sc4505, where a variable display time table for the corresponding time-saving game state is obtained. Specifically, if the result of this win/lose lottery is a jackpot result, the variable display time table for the jackpot (Figure 232 (a)) is obtained, and if the result of this win/lose lottery is a normal miss result, the variable display time table for the normal miss (Figure 232 (d)) is obtained.

<Processing for updating high frequency support mode>
The high frequency support mode update process according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 264. This process is executed in step Sc710 of the fluctuation start process (Fig. 222), and is executed instead of the high frequency support mode update process in Fig. 226. In Fig. 264, the same processes as those in Fig. 226 are given the same step numbers, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc1302 (if any support flag is set), that is, if the current game state is a time-saving game state (normal time-saving game state or sudden time-saving game state), proceed to step Sc4601, and update the counter value SC in the execution time-saving area 561 provided in the various counter areas 314d of RAM 314. Specifically, the counter value SC is decremented by 1. This decrements the remaining number of times that the player is currently in the time-saving game state. The remaining number in this case can be said to be the remaining number of times that the player can play the special game while in the time-saving game state.

In step Sc4602, it is determined whether the updated counter value SC is "0." If the counter value SC is "0," that is, if the number of times the game has been played in the time-saving game state during the current stay has reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to step Sc1305, where a time-saving end flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

After execution of step Sc1305 or if a negative judgment is made in step Sc4602 (if the counter value SC is not "0"), in step Sc4603, it is judged whether or not any of the reservation flags are set in the various flag storage area 314e. If any of the reservation flags are set, that is, if the sudden time-saving game state is reserved, the process proceeds to step Sc4604, where the counter value YC in the reserved time-saving area 562 provided in the various counter area 314d is updated.

For more details about step Sc4604, the counter value YC is decremented by 1 for the areas among the first reserved time-saving area 562a to the third reserved time-saving area 562c where a maximum number of times is set (areas where the value is not "0"). For example, if the first reserved time-saving area 562a and the second reserved time-saving area 562b are areas where the counter value YC is not "0", the counter value YC for each of these areas is updated. This decrements the remaining number of times for each reserved time-saving play state.

In step Sc4605, it is determined whether or not there is an area in which the counter value YC was updated in step Sc4604 and the updated value is "0". If there is an area in which the updated value is "0", the process proceeds to step Sc4606 and the reservation flag for the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to that area is cleared.

For example, if a special miss result C occurs during a time-saving play state, and the time-saving play state C is suddenly reserved, and then a special miss result A occurs and the time-saving play state A is suddenly reserved, if the counter value YC of the first reserved time-saving area 562a, in which the upper limit number of times for the sudden time-saving play state C is set, becomes "0" as a result of the update process of step Sc4604, the reservation flag C corresponding to the sudden time-saving play state C is cleared. This ends the reservation of the sudden time-saving play state C. Note that, at the point where the reserved state ends when the counter value YC becomes "0", the remaining number of reserved time-saving times updated in the above step Sc4604 can be said to be the remaining number of special game times for which the reserved state can be continued.

In step Sc4607, the order of occurrence stored in the order of occurrence information storage area 565 is updated. In the above example, the type information of the sudden time-saving game state C stored in the first area 565a is erased, and the type information of the sudden time-saving game state A stored in the second area 565b is shifted to the first area 565a. As a result, the order of occurrence of the later sudden time-saving game state A is moved up, and it is recognized as the earliest reserved time-saving.

In step Sc4608, the counter value of the first reserved time-saving area 562a to the third reserved time-saving area 562c in the reserved time-saving area 562 that is lower than the area in which the updated counter value YC has become "0" is shifted to a higher area. In the above example, since the counter value of the first reserved time-saving area 562a becomes "0", the counter value of the second reserved time-saving rear 562b (a value corresponding to the remaining number of times in the sudden time-saving game state A) is shifted to the first reserved time-saving area 562a. At this time, if the value of the third reserved time-saving area 562c is not "0", the counter value of that area is shifted to the second reserved time-saving rear 562b. After execution of step Sc4608, the high-frequency support mode update process is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sc4603 (none of the reserved flags are set), there is no need to update the reserved time-saving area, and the high-frequency support mode update process is terminated without executing the processes in steps Sc4604 and after. If a negative judgment is made in step Sc4605 (there is no area whose updated value becomes "0"), the reservation status at that time is maintained, and the high-frequency support mode update process is terminated without executing the processes in steps Sc4606 and after.

<First transition process of sudden time-saving gaming state>
The first transition process of the sudden time-saving game state according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 265. This process is executed in step Sc511 of the special game play control process (FIG. 220), and is executed instead of the first transition process of the sudden time-saving game state in FIG. 235. In FIG. 265, the same step numbers are given to the processes similar to those in FIG. 235, and their descriptions are omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sc4701, it is determined whether any of the reserved flags are set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. If none of the reserved flags are set, i.e., if there is no reserved time reduction, the process proceeds to step Sc1802, where it is determined whether or not a sudden time reduction start flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

If the sudden time-saving start flag is set, i.e., if the situation is such that a transition to a sudden time-saving game state should occur, proceed to step Sc1803, and set the support B flag corresponding to that type in the various flag storage area 314e. For example, if the sudden time-saving game state to transition to is sudden time-saving game state A, set the support B1 flag.

In step Sc4702, a value corresponding to the upper limit number of times is set in the execution time-saving area 561 provided in the various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314. The execution time-saving area 561 is a counter area that allows the MPU 312 to grasp the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state during the current time-saving game state. In step Sc1805, the sudden time-saving game state start flag set in the various flag storage area 314e is cleared, and in step Sc1806, a sudden time-saving game state start command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc4701 (if any of the reserved flags is set), i.e., if there is a reserved time-saving, the second transition process for the sudden time-saving game state is executed in step Sc4703. The second transition process for the sudden time-saving game state is a process for implementing a transition for the sudden time-saving game state that has been set as a reserved state.

<Second transition process of sudden time-saving gaming state>
The second transition processing of the sudden time-saving game state in step Sc4703 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step Sc4801, it is determined whether any of the support flags are set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. The second transition process for the sudden time-saving game state is executed when the sudden time-saving game state is reserved, that is, when at least the current game state is a time-saving game state, so the process of step Sc4801 essentially determines whether the current time-saving game state has ended.

If none of the support flags are set, i.e., if the current time-saving game state has ended, the earliest reserved time-saving state is identified in step Sc4802. Specifically, the type information stored in the first area 565a in the occurrence order storage area 565 of RAM 314 is read to identify the type of the first special losing result, and the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to the identified type is specified.

In step Sc4803, the support B flag corresponding to the reserved time reduction identified in step Sc4802 is set in the various flag storage area 314e. For example, if the earliest reserved time reduction is a sudden time reduction game state B, the support B2 flag is set.

In step Sc4804, the counter value YC of the first reserved time-saving area 562a provided in the various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314 is shifted to the execution time-saving area 561. Here, the counter value YC of the first reserved time-saving area 562a is updated together with the counter value SC of the execution time-saving area 561 during the current time-saving game state, and is decremented by one for each special game. Therefore, the counter value YC when the above shift is performed is the remaining number of times when a special miss result is won during the current time-saving game state, minus the original upper limit number of times of the sudden time-saving game state that is reserved as a result of the winning. In other words, it is the same as the difference number in the above third embodiment and modified example 1.

In step Sc4805, the values stored in the second reserved time-saving area 562b and the third reserved time-saving area 562c are shifted to the higher-order areas. That is, the value in the second reserved time-saving area 562b is shifted to the first reserved time-saving area 562a, and the value in the third reserved time-saving area 562c is shifted to the second reserved time-saving area 562b.

In step Sc4806, among the reserved flags set in the various flag storage area 314e, the reserved flag corresponding to the reserved time reduction identified in step Sc4802 is cleared. In the following step Sc4807, the generation order stored in the generation order information storage area 565 is updated. Specifically, the type information stored in the first area 565a is erased, and the type information stored in the second area 565b and the third area 565c is shifted to the first area 565a and the second area 565b, respectively.

In step Sc4808, a command to suddenly start the time-saving game state is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143, and then the second transition process for the sudden time-saving game state is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc4801 (if any of the support flags are set), i.e., if the player is in the time-saving play state, the process for the second transition to the time-saving play state is suddenly terminated without executing the processes in and after step Sc4802, as it is determined that no transition will be made for the reserved time-saving play state.

<What happens if you get a special miss during the time-saving game mode>
The flow when a special failure occurs during the time-saving game state will be described with reference to Fig. 267 and Fig. 268. Here, an example is shown of a case in which special failure occurs multiple times in the normal time-saving game state in the order of special failure result A, special failure result C, special failure result A, and special failure result B. For convenience, the explanation will be given assuming that the upper limit of the normal time-saving game state is 100 times.

In a situation where the sudden time-saving game state is not reserved during normal time-saving game state, for example, if a special miss result A occurs on the 30th special game turn (timing t1), the reservation flag A is set and the sudden time-saving game state A is placed in a reserved state (Fig. 267 (b), (c)). At this time, the type information of the special miss result A (sudden time-saving game state A) is stored in the first area 565a of the occurrence order information storage area 565, and the sudden time-saving game state A is stored as the first reserved time-saving that has occurred.

Also, as shown in FIG. 268(a), a value corresponding to the upper limit number of times (e.g., 100 times) of the sudden time-saving game state A is set in the first reserved time-saving area 562a of the time-saving game state counter area 560. The counter value in the first reserved time-saving area 562a is updated each time a special game is played in the normal time-saving game state during the current state (FIG. 267(d)). In other words, the counter value (the remaining number of reserved time-saving times) is decremented in parallel with the counter value SC in the execution time-saving area 561 (corresponding to the remaining number of times in the normal time-saving game state during the current state).

In a special symbol game round in which the special miss result A is reached, the symbol display device 75 executes a special reach miss A effect, and the player is notified that a special miss result has been reached. At this time, the special symbol display unit 43 displays the stop result corresponding to the special miss result A.

In addition, after the special reach miss A effect ends, a reserve effect is executed in the same play round, in which a text image 527 such as "Stock!!" and a first reserve image 528 are displayed. The execution of the reserve effect notifies the player that a time-saving play state has been reserved (stocked). From the next special play round, a second reserve image 529 is displayed, notifying the player that the time-saving play state is on hold.

After that, for example, if the special miss result C occurs during the 60th special play (timing t2) in the normal time-saving play state, the reservation flag C is set and the sudden time-saving play state C is placed in a reserved state (Fig. 267 (b), (e)). At this time, the type information of the special miss result C (sudden time-saving play state C) is stored in the second area 565b of the occurrence order information storage area 565, and the sudden time-saving play state C is stored as the second reserved time-saving play state that occurred.

Also, as shown in FIG. 268(b), a value corresponding to the upper limit number of times (e.g., 50 times) of the sudden time-saving game state C is set in the second reserved time-saving area 562b of the time-saving game state counter area 560. The counter value in the second reserved time-saving area 562b is also updated each time a special game is played in the normal time-saving game state during the current time-saving game state (FIG. 267(f)).

In the above case, the time-saving game state is suddenly reserved in response to winning the special miss result, but in the special pattern play round in which the special miss result C is reached, the pattern display device 75 executes a complete miss effect or a special reach miss B effect. In other words, the fact that a special miss result has occurred is not clearly indicated, and the player is placed in a state in which it is impossible or difficult for him or her to recognize that a new reservation has occurred. Note that the special pattern display unit 43 displays the stop result corresponding to the special miss result C.

After that, for example, suppose that the special miss result A occurs again during the 70th special play (timing t3) in the normal time-saving play state. In this case, because the sudden time-saving play state A has already been reserved, the reservation of the sudden time-saving play state A corresponding to this special miss result A is invalidated. In other words, the information in the occurrence order information storage area 565 and the values stored in each of the reserved time-saving areas 562a to 562c are not rewritten.

In a special symbol game in which the special miss result A is won again, a complete miss effect or a special reach miss B effect is executed on the symbol display device 75, and the fact that a special miss result has occurred is not made clear. In addition, the special symbol display unit 43 displays the stop result corresponding to the special miss result A.

After that, if the special miss result B occurs during the 85th special play (timing t4) in the normal time-saving play state, the reservation flag B is set and the sudden time-saving play state B is placed in a reserved state (Fig. 267 (b), (g)). At this time, the type information of the special miss result B (sudden time-saving play state B) is stored in the third area 565c of the occurrence order information storage area 565, and the sudden time-saving play state B is stored as the third reserved time-saving that occurred.

Also, as shown in FIG. 268(c), a value corresponding to the upper limit number of times (e.g., 80 times) of the sudden time-saving game state B is set in the third reserved time-saving area 562c of the time-saving game state counter area 560. The counter value in the third reserved time-saving area 562c is also updated each time a special game is played in the normal time-saving game state during the current state (FIG. 267(h)). In a special game that results in a special miss result B, a complete miss effect or a special reach miss B effect is executed on the pattern display device 75, and the fact that a special miss result has occurred is not announced.

After that, in the 100th special drawing, the result of the special drawing lottery is a normal miss, and when the timing for the start of the confirmation display (timing t5) arrives, the support flag is cleared based on the value of the execution time-saving area 561 being "0", and the normal time-saving play state that was in place ends. In this case, the first area 565a of the occurrence order information storage area 565 is referenced, and the sudden time-saving play state A is recognized as the earliest reserved time-saving play state. Then, the support B1 flag corresponding to the recognized sudden time-saving play state A is set, and a transition to the sudden time-saving play state A is implemented (Fig. 267 (i)).

Also, as shown in FIG. 268(d), in the time-saving game state counter area 560, the counter value of the first reserved time-saving area 562a (corresponding to the remaining number of times in the sudden time-saving game state A) is shifted to the execution time-saving area 561. As a result, the counter value of the first reserved time-saving area 562a at the end of the normal time-saving game state is set as the number of times that the player can stay in the sudden time-saving game state A. This value is the difference number A (30 times) obtained by subtracting the remaining number of times in the normal time-saving game state at the time of winning the special miss result A (70 times) from the upper limit number of times in the sudden time-saving game state A (100 times) (FIG. 267(i)).

Furthermore, in the counter area 560 for the time-saving game state, in conjunction with the above shift, the counter values of the second reserved time-saving area 562b and the third reserved time-saving area 562c are shifted to the first reserved time-saving area 562a and the second reserved time-saving area 562b, respectively (Figure 268 (d)). Also, in the generation sequence information storage area 565, the type information of the first area 565a is erased, and the type information of the second area 565b and the third area 565c is shifted to the first area 565a and the second area 565b, respectively.

In the above case, during the 100th special symbol play (the final play during the normal time-saving play state), the release effect (Fig. 249(b)) is executed on the symbol display device 75, and then the start effect of the time-saving play state is suddenly executed. This notifies the player that the stored time-saving play state has been activated.

After the transition to the sudden time-saving game state A, at timing t6 before the end of state A, when the counter value of the first reserved time-saving area 562a (corresponding to the remaining number of times in the sudden time-saving game state C) becomes "0", the reservation flag C is cleared (Fig. 267 (e), (f)). This ends the reserved state of the sudden time-saving game state C. In this case, since the player is currently in the sudden time-saving game state A at that time, the player does not transition to the sudden time-saving game state C. In other words, the reserved state ends without transitioning to the sudden time-saving game state C. At this time, no notification corresponding to the end of the reserved state is made, and the player is placed in a state in which the player cannot or has difficulty recognizing the end.

When the reserved state ends, in the time-saving game state counter area 560, as shown in FIG. 268(e), the counter value in the second reserved time-saving area 562b (corresponding to the remaining number of times in the sudden time-saving game state B) is shifted to the first reserved time-saving area 562a. Also, in the occurrence sequence information storage area 565, the type information in the first area 565a (corresponding to the sudden time-saving game state C) is erased, and the type information in the second area 565a (corresponding to the sudden time-saving game state B) is shifted to the first area 565a.

When the sudden time-saving game state A ends at timing t7, the first area 565a of the generation sequence information storage area 565 is referenced, and the sudden time-saving game state B is recognized as the first reserved time-saving. Then, the support B2 flag corresponding to the recognized sudden time-saving game state B is set, and a transition to the sudden time-saving game state B is implemented (Figure 267 (j)).

Also, as shown in FIG. 268(f), in the time-saving game state counter area 560, the counter value of the first reserved time-saving area 562a (corresponding to the remaining number of times in the sudden time-saving game state B) is shifted to the execution time-saving area 561. As a result, the counter value of the first reserved time-saving area 562a at the end of the sudden time-saving game state A is set as the number of special game times that can be played in the sudden time-saving game state B. This value is the difference number B (35 times), which is the sum of the remaining number of times in the normal time-saving game state at the time of winning the special miss result B (15 times) and the difference number A (30 times) mentioned above, subtracted from the upper limit number of times (80 times) of the sudden time-saving game state B.

In the above case, in the final play of the sudden time-saving game state A, a release effect is executed on the symbol display device 75, and then a start effect of the sudden time-saving game state is executed. This notifies the activation of the stored time-saving game state. Note that in this modified example, since the reservation (stock) occurrence of the sudden time-saving game state B is not clearly indicated before the transition to the sudden time-saving game state B, the end effect of the sudden time-saving game state A may be executed instead of the release effect, and then the start effect of the sudden time-saving game state B may be executed.

After the transition to the sudden time-saving game state B, the result of the special symbol lottery in the 35th special symbol game round is a normal miss result, and when the timing for starting the confirmation display (timing t8) arrives, the sudden time-saving game state B ends. In this case, the symbol display device 75 executes the end performance of the time-saving game state.

The modified example described above has the following advantages:

Multiple reserved time-saving areas 562a-562c are provided, making it possible to reserve multiple time-saving play states. When multiple reservations are made, the reserved time-saving play states are transitioned to in sequence, so the more reservations made, the more advantageous it is for the player. This allows players to enjoy not only whether or not a reservation will be made, but also how many reservations can be made, making it possible to appropriately heighten interest.

A number of reserved time-saving areas 562a-562c are provided that correspond to the number of types of sudden time-saving game states (time-saving game states that can be reserved), and the upper limit on the number of reserved states is set to the same number as the number of types. In this case, it is possible to reserve all sudden time-saving game states simultaneously while preventing the number of reserved states from becoming too large, which would increase the processing load and cause memory area congestion.

When a special miss occurs during a time-saving game state, a counter value corresponding to the upper limit of reserved time-saving play based on that result is set in reserved time-saving area 562, and each time a game is played, the counter value in reserved time-saving area 562 is updated together with the counter value in executed time-saving area 561. In this case, the remaining number of times in the active time-saving game state and the remaining number of times in the reserved time-saving game state can be updated in parallel, making it possible to manage the remaining number of times in both time-saving game states simultaneously.

In particular, if multiple reservations are allowed in a configuration in which the remaining number of times after a transition to a reserved time-saving play state is set as the differential number of times, there is a concern that the transition timing for each reserved time-saving play state will be different, resulting in a greater diversity of differential numbers and complicating the derivation process. In this regard, this configuration makes it possible to easily derive the differential number of times for each reserved time-saving play state.

The counter value updated in reserved time-saving area 562 becomes the end value, and when the remaining number of times becomes 0, the reserved state of the reserved time-saving corresponding to the counter value is terminated. In this case, if the remaining number of times (original upper limit number of times) of the reserved time-saving corresponding to the winning is less than the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state in which the player was staying when the special miss result was won, the reserved state can be automatically released without transitioning to the reserved time-saving. Therefore, the counter value in reserved time-saving area 562 can be set without the need to compare the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state in which the player was staying and the remaining number of times in the reserved time-saving game state in which the special miss result was won, or to determine whether or not the game is reserved based on the result, and the processing configuration can be simplified.

The multiple reserved time-saving areas 562a to 562c correspond to the order of winning the special miss results, and when the stay time-saving ends, the counter value of the first reserved time-saving area 562a corresponding to the earliest winning order is shifted to the execution time-saving area 561 for managing the remaining number of stay time-saving times. With this configuration, when multiple reservations are made, the transition to each reserved time-saving can be executed sequentially in the order corresponding to the order in which the reservations occurred. In other words, since the order of reservations is reflected directly in the order of transition, by reserving the time-saving game state with a high winning expectation value for the second operating port 63 in the early order, it is possible to arrive early in a state in which it is easy to receive the special winning lottery and to suppress the loss of balls held, and it is possible for the player to proceed with the game advantageously. In other words, since the development of the game afterwards differs depending on the order of the reserved time-saving game state, the player can pay attention to the order in which the reservations occur, and it is possible to increase the interest.

When a special miss occurs during a time-saving game state, a special reach miss A effect is executed to notify the player of the special miss result, but the type of the reserved sudden time-saving game state is not recognizable or difficult for the player to recognize. By configuring it in this way, even if the player knows the regularity regarding the transition order, it is possible to make the actual transition order difficult to understand, allowing the player to enjoy predicting which time-saving game state they will transition to.

When a special miss occurs without a reserved time reduction, a special reach miss A effect is executed to notify the player of the special miss, whereas when a special miss occurs with a reserved time reduction, a complete miss effect or a special reach miss B effect is executed to notify the player of the special miss. In other words, the second and subsequent occurrences of a reserved result are not notified, so the player is not made aware that multiple reserved results have occurred, and the player can enjoy predicting the number of reserved results and the order of transition.

<Modification 4>
A fourth modified example of the third embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 269 to 274. In these figures, the same components as those in the third embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the above-mentioned modified example 3, the maximum number of reserved sudden time-saving game states was configured to be the same as the number of types of sudden time-saving game states, but in this modified example, the number of reserved sudden time-saving game states is configured to be greater than the number of types of sudden time-saving game states. The configuration of this modified example is explained in detail below. Note that the sudden time-saving game state in this modified example is the same as the sudden time-saving game state in the above-mentioned modified example 3.

<Regarding the various counter areas 314d>
Various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314 according to this modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 269. As shown in FIG. 269(a), the various counter areas 314d are set with a time-saving game state counter area 560 as an area for counting the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state. The time-saving game state counter area 560 is provided with an execution time-saving area 561 for counting the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state during a stay, and a reserved time-saving area 562 for counting the remaining number of times in the reserved time-saving game state.

Multiple counter areas are set in the reserved time-saving area 562. More specifically, a number of counter areas greater than the number of types of sudden time-saving game states (3) are set, and specifically, 10 counter areas are set, including the first reserved time-saving area 562a to the tenth reserved time-saving area 562j. Note that the number of counter areas is not limited to 10, and may be any other number as long as it is greater than the number of types of sudden time-saving game states.

As shown in FIG. 269(b), the RAM 314 is also provided with an occurrence order information storage area 565. The occurrence order information storage area 565 has the same number of areas as the reserved time-saving area 562, the first area 565a through the tenth area 565j, which correspond to the winning order of the special miss result (the order in which the reserved time-saving occurs). Specifically, the first area 565a corresponds to the earliest winning order, and the tenth area 565j corresponds to the latest winning order.

<Reserved Processing>
The reservation process according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 270. This process is executed in step Sc4301 of the process for determining whether or not the time-saving game state has suddenly shifted (Fig. 261) by the main control device 162, and is executed in place of the reservation process of Fig. 262.

First, in step Sc5101, it is determined whether any of the reservation flags are set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. In this modified example, reservation flags A to C are set corresponding to the sudden time-saving game states A to C, and for example, when reservation flag C is set in the various flag storage area 314e, it indicates that the sudden time-saving game state C is on hold.

If none of the reservation flags are set, i.e., if the sudden time-saving game state is not reserved, proceed to step Sc5102, and set the reservation flag corresponding to the current special miss result in the various flag storage area 314e. For example, if the current special miss result is special miss result A, set reservation flag A.

In step Sc5103, a value corresponding to the upper limit number of times the sudden time-saving game state corresponds to the current special miss result is set in reserved time-saving area 562 in various counter areas 314d of RAM 314. More specifically, the above value is set in the topmost area that is free among the first reserved time-saving area 562a to the tenth reserved time-saving area 562j. When the processing of this step is executed in a situation where a negative judgment is made in step Sc5101 (a situation where the sudden time-saving game state is not reserved), all areas are free, so the above value is set in the first reserved time-saving area 562a.

In step Sc5104, the order of occurrence of the current special miss result is stored. In this step, type information corresponding to the type of the current special miss result is stored in the topmost empty area among the first area 565a to the tenth area 565j of the occurrence order information storage area 565. When the processing of this step is executed in a situation where a negative judgment is made in step Sc5101 (a situation where the sudden time-saving play state is not reserved), all areas are empty, so the above type information is stored in the first area 565a.

In step Sc5105, a reserved command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143, and then the reservation process is terminated. The reserved command notifies that a reservation of the time-saving game state has occurred, and the command includes information indicating the type of the time-saving game state that has been set as the reserved state.

If the judgment in step Sc5101 is positive (if any of the reservation flags is set), i.e., if the sudden time-saving game state is in a reserved state, the process proceeds to step Sc5106, where it is determined whether or not there is an area of free space in the first reserved time-saving area 562a to the tenth reserved time-saving area 562j of the reserved time-saving area 562. If there is an area of free space, the process proceeds to step Sc5102, where the reservation flag corresponding to this special miss result is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

In step Sc5103, a value corresponding to the upper limit number is set in the highest free area among the first reserved time-saving area 562a to the tenth reserved time-saving area 562j. For example, if the sixth reserved time-saving area 562f to the tenth reserved time-saving area 562j are free, the above value is set in the sixth reserved time-saving area 562f.

In step Sc5104, type information corresponding to the type of this special miss result is stored in the topmost free area among the first area 565a to the third area 565c of the occurrence order information storage area 565.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sc5106 (if there is no free space area), the reservation process ends without executing the processes in steps Sc5102 to Sc5105. In other words, if the number of reserved sudden time-saving game states has already reached the upper reservation limit, the reservation of the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to this special miss result is not executed.

In this modified example, the process for setting the variable display time is the same as the process for setting the variable display time in modified example 3 (Figure 263).

<Processing for updating high frequency support mode>
The high frequency support mode update process according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 271. This process is executed in step Sc710 of the fluctuation start process (Fig. 222), and is executed instead of the high frequency support mode update process in Fig. 264. In Fig. 271, the same processes as those in Fig. 264 are given the same step numbers, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sc4602 (if the counter value SC in the execution time-saving area 561 is not "0") or after execution of step Sc1305 (setting the time-saving end flag), step Sc4603 judges whether or not any of the reservation flags are set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. If any of the reservation flags are set, that is, if the sudden time-saving play state is reserved, the process proceeds to step Sc4604, where the counter value YC in the reserved time-saving area 562 provided in the various counter area 314d is updated.

In step Sc4605, it is determined whether or not there is an area in which the counter value YC has been updated in step Sc4604 and the updated value has become "0". If there is an area in which the updated value has become "0", the process proceeds to step Sc5201, and it is determined whether or not a time-saving game state of the same type as the sudden time-saving game state of the area in which the updated value has become "0" is being reserved. For example, when the upper limit number of times for the sudden time-saving game state C is set in the fourth reserved time-saving area 562d, if the counter value YC of the area 562d becomes "0" by the update in step Sc4604, the generation order information storage area 565 is referenced to determine whether or not there is a reservation for the sudden time-saving game state C as another reservation.

If the same type of time-saving play state is not reserved, proceed to step Sc4606 and clear the reservation flag for the sudden time-saving play state corresponding to that area. In the above example, the reservation flag C corresponding to the sudden time-saving play state C is cleared. This ends the reservation of the sudden time-saving play state C.

After execution of step Sc4606 or if a positive judgment is made in step Sc5201 (if the same type of time-saving game state is being reserved), in step Sc4607, the information in the generation sequence information storage area 565 is updated so that the type information of the sudden time-saving game state for which the reservation has ended is deleted. In the following step Sc4608, the counter values of areas in the reserved time-saving area 562 that are lower than the area in which the updated counter value YC has become "0" are shifted to higher areas. After execution of step Sc4608, the high-frequency support mode update process is terminated.

<Second transition process of sudden time-saving gaming state>
The second transition process of the sudden time-saving gaming state according to this modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 272. This process is executed in step Sc4703 of the first transition process of the sudden time-saving gaming state (Fig. 265), and is executed instead of the second transition process of the sudden time-saving gaming state in Fig. 266. In Fig. 272, the same step numbers are given to the processes similar to those in Fig. 266, and their descriptions are omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sc4801, it is determined whether any of the support flags are set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. The second transition process for the sudden time-saving game state is executed when the sudden time-saving game state is reserved (YES in step Sc4701), and since such reservation occurs during a stay in the time-saving game state, the process of step Sc4801 essentially determines whether the currently-remaining time-saving game state has ended.

If none of the support flags are set, i.e., if the current time-saving game state has ended, the earliest reserved time-saving state is identified in step Sc4802. Specifically, the type information stored in the first area 565a in the occurrence order storage area 565 of the RAM 314 is read out to identify the type of the first special losing result, and the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to the identified type is specified. In step Sc4803, the support B flag corresponding to the reserved time-saving state identified in step Sc4802 is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

In step Sc4804, the counter value YC of the first reserved time-saving area 562a provided in the various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314 is shifted to the execution time-saving area 561. Here, the counter value of the first reserved time-saving area 562a is updated together with the counter value SC of the execution time-saving area 561 in the time-saving game state during the stay, and is subtracted by one for each special game. Therefore, the counter value YC at the time of the above shift is the remaining number of times when a special miss result is won in the time-saving game state during the stay, subtracted from the original upper limit number of times of the sudden time-saving game state reserved as a result of the winning. In other words, it is the same as the difference number in the above third embodiment and modified example 1. In step Sc4805, the counter values YC of the second reserved time-saving area 562b to the tenth reserved time-saving area 562j are shifted to the upper area.

In step Sc5301, it is determined whether or not a time-saving game state of the same type as the reserved time-saving state identified in step Sc4802 is currently reserved. For example, if the reserved time-saving state identified in step Sc4802 is a sudden time-saving game state B, the occurrence order information storage area 565 is referenced to determine whether or not a reservation for a sudden time-saving game state B exists as another reservation.

If the same type of time-saving game state is not reserved, proceed to step Sc4806, and clear the reservation flag that corresponds to the reserved time-saving game state identified in step Sc4802 from among the reservation flags set in the various flag storage area 314e.

After execution of step Sc4806 or if a positive judgment is made in step Sc5301 (if the same type of time-saving game state is reserved), in step Sc4807, the information in the generation sequence information storage area 565 is updated. Specifically, the type information in the first area 565a is deleted, and the type information in the second area 565b and thereafter is shifted to the higher order area.

<Ending performance setting process>
The end performance setting process according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 273. This process is executed in step Sc2509 of the performance setting process (Fig. 242) by the performance control device 143, and is executed instead of the end performance setting process in Fig. 249(a). In Fig. 273, the same process as in Fig. 249(a) is given the same step number, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

The end effect setting process is executed when a time-saving play state end command is received from the main control device 162, and is executed in conjunction with the end of the time-saving play state.

In step Sc3101, it is determined whether or not the sudden time-shortened game state is on hold. If it is on hold, the process proceeds to step Sc5401, where it is determined whether or not the current time-shortened game state to be ended (ending time-shortened game state) and the next time-shortened game state to be transitioned to (transition time-shortened game state) are the same type of time-shortened game state. For example, if the current time-shortened game state for which the termination process is executed by the main control unit 162 is the sudden time-shortened game state A, it is determined whether or not the time-shortened game state to which the transition is to be made as the earliest reserved time-shortened game state is the sudden time-shortened game state A. This determination can be made, for example, by referring to the time-shortened game state end command from the main control unit 162 and the type information on the time-shortened game state included in the reservation command.

If the end time reduction and transition time reduction are the same type of time reduction game state, proceed to step Sc5402 and set it to execute an additional effect for the remaining number of times. Here, this additional effect will be explained with reference to FIG. 274.

When performing the above-mentioned additional performance, as shown in FIG. 274(a), the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a combination of missing results on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 in the final play round of the stay time reduction. The stop display in this case does not take a special stop form, but rather displays each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 in order as in the other special pattern play rounds in the stay time reduction to notify of the missing result.

After each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are frozen and displayed, as shown in FIG. 274(b), an added image 581 consisting of text such as "+30 times!!" is displayed during the special symbol play round in which the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are frozen and displayed. This notifies the player that the remaining number of times in the time-saving play state has been added. Note that the added number of times notified by the added image 581 is the number corresponding to the difference number of times (for example, 30 times).

The added image 581 may be displayed using part or all of the fixed display time, or may be displayed across the variable display time (part of the variable display time) and the fixed display time (part or all of the fixed display time). In this case, the images of the stopped and displayed symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may be erased before the added image 581 is displayed, or the images of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may not be erased, and the added image 581 may be displayed in front of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

After step Sc5402 is executed, in step Sc5403, a value corresponding to the difference in the number of times is added to the value in the remaining number counter area. As a result, in the game after the transition to the next sudden time-saving game state, the remaining number image 523 reflecting the added amount is displayed, as shown in FIG. 274(c).

After step Sc5403 is executed, the end effect setting process is terminated. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sc5401 (the end time reduction and transition time reduction are not the same type of time reduction game state), the release effect setting process is executed in step Sc3106, and then the end effect setting process is terminated.

<What happens if you get a special miss during the time-saving game mode>
The flow when a special miss occurs during the time-saving game state will be described. In this modified example, the number of times that the player can reserve the sudden time-saving game state is set to be greater than the number of types of the sudden time-saving game state. Therefore, if the player wins the same type of special miss result multiple times while in the time-saving game state, the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to each of those wins will be reserved. In other words, multiple sudden time-saving game states of the same type can be reserved.

In addition, in this modified example, if a special miss occurs during the time-saving game state, information is stored in the occurrence order information storage area 565 so that the type and winning order can be recognized, and when a transition to the reserved time-saving state is implemented, the transition is implemented according to the stored winning order (the order in which the reserved time-saving state occurred). For this reason, when the time-saving game state currently in progress ends, an event may occur in which the type of the time-saving game state that ends and the type of the reserved time-saving game state to which the transition is implemented immediately thereafter are the same. In such a case, the pattern display device 75 executes an additional performance (Fig. 274). This gives the player the impression that the time-saving game state currently in progress has been extended.

If the types of the end time reduction and transition time reduction are different, the release effect is executed as in the third embodiment and variant 1 described above. After that, the start effect of the time-saving game state is suddenly executed, and the activation of the stored time-saving game state is announced.

<Modification 5>
A fifth modified example of the third embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 275 to 282. In these figures, the same components as those in the third embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the above-mentioned modified examples 3 and 4, the transition is performed in an order corresponding to the order in which the multiple reserved time-saving states that occurred during the time-saving game state occurred, but in this modified example, the transition is performed in a different order. Note that the reserved upper limit number of sudden time-saving game states is set to the same number as the number of types of sudden time-saving game states, as in the above-mentioned modified example 3. The configuration of this modified example will be explained in detail below.

<About sudden time-saving gameplay state>
The sudden time-shortened game state in this modified example is similar to the sudden time-shortened game state in modified example 2 (FIG. 256(a)). Explaining with reference to FIG. 256(a), the sudden time-shortened game states A to C in this modified example have different winning expectation values for the second operating port 63, and specifically, the winning expectation values are configured to increase in the order of sudden time-shortened game state C < sudden time-shortened game state B < sudden time-shortened game state A. Note that an example of the configuration for achieving such a relationship between the winning expectation values has been described in modified example 2 above, and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

The upper limit number of times for the sudden time-saving game states A to C is the same, and is set to, for example, 100 times. Note that it is not essential to have a common upper limit number of times, and the upper limit number of times may be different for the sudden time-saving game states A to C, as in Variation 3 above.

<Regarding the various counter areas 314d>
Various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314 according to this modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 275. As shown in Fig. 275(a), a time-shortened game state counter area 610 is set in the various counter areas 314d as an area for counting the remaining number of times in the time-shortened game state. The time-shortened game state counter area 610 is provided with an execution time-shortened area 611 for counting the remaining number of times in the time-shortened game state during a stay, and a reserved time-shortened area 612 for counting the remaining number of times in the reserved time-shortened game state.

Multiple counter areas are set in the reserved time-saving area 612, and specifically, the number of counter areas corresponding to the number of types of sudden time-saving game states is secured. In other words, three counter areas are set, consisting of the first reserved time-saving area 612a, the second reserved time-saving area 612b, and the third reserved time-saving area 612c.

As shown in FIG. 275(b), each of these reserved time-saving areas 612a to 612c is associated with a type of sudden time-saving game state. Specifically, the first reserved time-saving area 612a is a counter area for sudden time-saving game state A, the second reserved time-saving area 612b is a counter area for sudden time-saving game state B, and the third reserved time-saving area 612c is a counter area for sudden time-saving game state C.

In addition, a priority is set for each reserved time-saving area 612a-612c. In FIG. 275(b), the smaller the number, the higher the priority, and the priority is set in the following order: third reserved time-saving area 612c for sudden time-saving play state C < second reserved time-saving area 612b for sudden time-saving play state B < first reserved time-saving area 612a for sudden time-saving play state A.

The configuration for associating the types of time-saving play states with each reserved time-saving area 612a-612c and setting priorities is not particularly limited, but for example, such associations and priority information can be stored in a specified area of ROM 313 or incorporated into the control program.

The above configuration sets priorities for the first reserved time-saving area 612a to the third reserved time-saving area 612c (storage areas of the various counter areas 314d), but since each of these areas corresponds one-to-one to the type of sudden time-saving game state, it can also be said that priorities are set for sudden time-saving game states A to C.

<Processing for determining transition to sudden time-saving gaming state>
The process for determining whether or not the game state is suddenly changed to the time-saving game state according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 276(a). This process is executed in step Sc711 of the fluctuation start process (Fig. 222) by the main control device 162, and is executed in place of the process for determining whether or not the game state is suddenly changed to the time-saving game state in Fig. 227(a). In Fig. 276(a), the same step numbers are given to the processes similar to those in Fig. 227(a), and their descriptions are omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sc1401, it is determined whether the result of this special drawing lottery is a special miss result. If the result of the special drawing lottery is a special miss result, it proceeds to step Sc1402, where it is determined whether any of the support flags are set in the various flag storage area 314e. If none of the support flags are set, that is, if the current game state is the normal game state, in step Sc1403, a flag for suddenly starting the time-saving mode is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc1402 (if any of the support flags is set), that is, if the current game state is a normal time-saving game state or a sudden time-saving game state, a reservation process is executed in step Sc6101, and then the process for determining whether to transition to the sudden time-saving game state is terminated. The reservation process is a process for reserving the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to a special miss result when a special miss result occurs during the time-saving game state.

<Reserved Processing>
The reservation processing in step Sc6101 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step Sc6201, it is determined whether any of the reservation flags are set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. In this modified example, reservation flags A to C are set corresponding to the sudden time-saving game states A to C, and for example, when reservation flag C is set in the various flag storage area 314e, it is configured to indicate that the sudden time-saving game state C is on hold.

If none of the reserved flags are set, i.e., if there is no reserved time reduction, proceed to step Sc6202, and set the reserved flag corresponding to the current special miss result in the various flag storage area 314e. For example, if the current special miss result is special miss result A, set the reserved flag A.

In step Sc6203, a value corresponding to the upper limit number of times of the sudden time-saving game state to which the current special failure result corresponds is set in the reserved time-saving area 612 in the various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314. Specifically, the above value is set in the area for the sudden time-saving game state to which the current special failure result corresponds, among the first reserved time-saving area 612a to the third reserved time-saving area 612c. For example, if the current special failure result is special failure result C, as shown in FIG. 276(b), a value corresponding to the upper limit number of times of the sudden time-saving game state C (e.g., 100 times) is set in the third reserved time-saving area 612c for the sudden time-saving game state C.

In step Sc6204, a reserved command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143, and then the reservation process is terminated. The reserved command notifies that a reservation of the time-saving game state has occurred, and the command includes information indicating the type of the time-saving game state that has been set as the reserved state.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc6201 (if any of the reservation flags are set), i.e., if there is a reserved time-saving state, proceed to step Sc6205 to determine whether a time-saving game state of the same type as the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to the current special miss result is reserved. In this step, the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314 is referenced, and if a reservation flag corresponding to the type of the current special miss result has already been set, it is recognized that a time-saving game state of the same type is reserved.

If the same type of time-saving game state is not reserved, the process executes steps Sc6202 to Sc6204. That is, a reservation flag corresponding to the current special miss result is set in the various flag storage area 314e, and a value corresponding to the upper limit number of times for the sudden time-saving game state to which the current special miss result corresponds is set in the corresponding area among the first reserved time-saving area 612a to the third reserved time-saving area 612c.

If the determination in step Sc6205 is positive (if the same type of time-saving game state is reserved), proceed to step Sc6206, where the value of the corresponding reserved time-saving area 612 is rewritten. That is, the counter value of the corresponding reserved time-saving area 612 is reset to a value corresponding to the upper limit number of times. For example, if the sudden time-saving game state C is reserved and the current special miss result is special miss result C, as shown in Figures 277 (b1) and (b2), the counter value of the third reserved time-saving area 612c is changed to a value corresponding to the upper limit number of times. This increases the remaining number of times for the reserved sudden time-saving game state C, in other words, the period during which the sudden time-saving game state C can be reserved is extended. After execution of step Sc6206, the reservation process is terminated.

<Setting process for variable display time>
The setting process of the variable display time in this modified example is the same as the setting process of the variable display time in the modified example 3. With reference to FIG. 263, when none of the reserved flags are set (when a negative judgment is made in step Sc4502), that is, when a special miss result occurs in a situation where the time-saving game state is not reserved suddenly, the variable display time table A for special miss (FIG. 232(b)) is acquired as the variable display time table this time. In this variable display time table A, only the variable pattern Z1 (special reach miss A performance) is set as a selectable variable pattern, and a lottery process (step Sc1607) of the variable display time is executed so that a variable pattern corresponding to the execution of the special reach miss A performance is selected.

In addition, if any of the reservation flags is set (if a positive judgment is made in step Sc4502), that is, if a special miss result occurs while the time-saving game state is suddenly reserved, variable display time table B for special misses (Fig. 232(c)) is obtained as the current variable display time table. In this variable display time table B, variable pattern 21H (complete miss effect) or variable pattern Z2 (special reach miss B effect) is set as a selectable variable pattern, and a lottery process (step Sc1607) for the variable display time is executed so that a variable pattern corresponding to the complete miss effect or the special reach miss B effect is selected.

When a special miss occurs while the sudden time-saving game state is reserved, there are cases where the same type of time-saving game state as the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to the current special miss result is not reserved and the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to the special miss result is reserved, or the same type of time-saving game state as the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to the current special miss result is already reserved and the value corresponding to the upper limit number of times is reset in the corresponding reserved time-saving area 612. In this modified example, in either case, the variable display time table B is used to draw the variable display time (variable pattern). That is, for the first special miss result during the time-saving game state, the special reach miss A effect is executed on the pattern display device 75, and the special miss result is clearly indicated, but for the second and subsequent wins, the complete miss effect or the special reach miss B effect is executed on the pattern display device 75, and the special miss result is not clearly indicated.

<Processing for updating high frequency support mode>
The high frequency support mode update process according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 278. This process is executed in step Sc710 of the fluctuation start process (Fig. 222), and is executed instead of the high frequency support mode update process in Fig. 226. In Fig. 278, the same processes as those in Fig. 226 are given the same step numbers, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc1302 (if any of the support flags is set), that is, if the current game state is a time-saving game state (normal time-saving game state or sudden time-saving game state), proceed to step Sc6301, and update the counter value SC in the execution time-saving area 561 provided in the various counter areas 314d of RAM 314. Specifically, the counter value SC is decremented by 1. This decrements the remaining number of times that the player is currently in the time-saving game state. In this case, the remaining number of times can be said to be the remaining number of times that the player can play the special game while remaining in the time-saving game state.

In step Sc6302, it is determined whether the updated counter value SC is "0." If the counter value SC is "0," that is, if the number of times the game has been played in the time-saving game state during the current stay has reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to step Sc1305, where a time-saving end flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

After execution of step Sc1305 or if a negative judgment is made in step Sc6302 (if the counter value SC is not "0"), in step Sc6303, it is judged whether or not any of the reservation flags are set in the various flag storage area 314e. If any of the reservation flags are set, that is, if the sudden time-saving game state is reserved, the process proceeds to step Sc6304, where the counter value YC in the reserved time-saving area 612 provided in the various counter area 314d is updated.

For more details about step Sc6304, the counter value YC is decremented by 1 for the areas among the first reserved time-saving area 612a to the third reserved time-saving area 612c for which a maximum number of times is set (areas whose value is not "0"). For example, if the first reserved time-saving area 612a and the second reserved time-saving area 612b are areas for which the counter value YC is not "0", the counter value YC is updated for each of those areas. This decrements the remaining number of times for each reserved time-saving play state. Note that for areas for which the counter value is already "0" at the time step Sc6304 is executed (the third reserved time-saving area 612c in the above example), the counter value YC is maintained at "0".

In step Sc6305, it is determined whether or not there is an area in which the counter value YC was updated in step Sc6304 and the updated value is "0". If there is an area in which the updated value is "0", the process proceeds to step Sc6306 and the reservation flag for the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to that area is cleared.

For example, if the counter value in the first reserved time-saving area 562a becomes "0" as a result of updating the counter value, the reservation flag A corresponding to the sudden time-saving game state A is cleared. This ends the reservation of the sudden time-saving game state A. Note that, at the point where the reserved state ends when the counter value YC becomes "0", the counter value YC (remaining number of reserved time-saving times) updated in the above step Sc6304 can be said to be the remaining number of times special game play can be continued in the reserved state. After execution of step Sc6306, the high frequency support mode update process ends.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sc6303 (none of the reserved flags are set), there is no need to update the reserved time-saving area, and the high-frequency support mode update process is terminated without executing the processes in steps Sc6304 and onward. If a negative judgment is made in step Sc6305 (there is no area where the updated value becomes "0"), the reserved sudden time-saving game state is continued to be reserved, and the high-frequency support mode update process is terminated without executing the process in step Sc6306.

<First transition process of sudden time-saving gaming state>
The first transition process of the sudden time-saving game state according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 279. This process is executed in step Sc511 of the special game play control process (FIG. 220), and is executed instead of the first transition process of the sudden time-saving game state in FIG. 235. In FIG. 279, the same step numbers are given to the processes similar to those in FIG. 235, and their descriptions are omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sc6401, it is determined whether or not any of the reservation flags are set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. If none of the reservation flags are set, i.e., if the sudden time-saving game state is not reserved, the process proceeds to step Sc1802, where it is determined whether or not a sudden time-saving start flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

If the sudden time-saving start flag is set, i.e., if the situation is such that a transition to a sudden time-saving game state should occur, proceed to step Sc1803, and set the support B flag corresponding to that type in the various flag storage area 314e. For example, if the sudden time-saving game state to transition to is sudden time-saving game state A, set the support B1 flag.

In step Sc6402, a value corresponding to the upper limit number of times is set in the execution time-saving area 611 provided in the various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314. The execution time-saving area 611 is a counter area that allows the MPU 312 to grasp the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state during the current time-saving game state. In step Sc1805, the sudden time-saving start flag set in the various flag storage area 314e is cleared, and in step Sc1806, a sudden time-saving game state start command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc6401 (if any of the reservation flags is set), i.e., if the sudden time-saving game state is on hold, the second transition process for the sudden time-saving game state is executed in step Sc6403. The second transition process for the sudden time-saving game state is a process for implementing a transition from the sudden time-saving game state that was set as a reserved state.

<Second transition process of sudden time-saving gaming state>
The second transition processing of the sudden time-saving gaming state in step Sc6403 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 280 (a).

First, in step Sc6501, it is determined whether any of the support flags are set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. The second transition process for the sudden time-saving game state is executed when the sudden time-saving game state is reserved (YES in step Sc6401), and since such reservation occurs during a stay in the time-saving game state, the process of step Sc6501 essentially determines whether the currently-remaining time-saving game state has ended.

If none of the support flags are set, that is, if the time-saving game state during the stay has ended, proceed to step Sc6502, and identify the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to the highest priority among the reserved sudden time-saving game states. Specifically, in the first reserved time-saving area 612a to the third reserved time-saving area 612c provided in the various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314, the area with the highest priority is identified among the areas whose counter value is not "0" (areas in which the remaining number of times is being counted), and the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to the identified area is identified as the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to the highest priority. For example, if the counter value is not "0" in the second reserved time-saving area 612b and the third reserved time-saving area 612c, the sudden time-saving game state B corresponding to the second reserved time-saving area 612b with the higher priority is identified as the sudden time-saving game state with the highest priority.

In addition, a priority may be set for the reserved flags, and the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to the highest priority may be identified based on the priority. For example, the same priority as the first reserved time-saving area 612a to the third reserved time-saving area 612c may be set for the reserved flags A to C, and the reserved flag with the highest priority may be identified from among the reserved flags set in the various flag storage area 314e, thereby identifying the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to the highest priority.

In step Sc6503, the B flag corresponding to the sudden time-saving game state identified in step Sc6502 is set in the various flag storage area 314e. For example, if the sudden time-saving game state identified is the sudden time-saving game state B, the support B2 flag is set.

In step Sc6504, the counter value of the area with the highest priority is shifted to the execution time reduction area 611 for areas in the first reserved time reduction area 612a to the third reserved time reduction area 612c whose counter values are not "0". For example, as shown in FIG. 280(b), if the counter values are not "0" in the second reserved time reduction area 612b and the third reserved time reduction area 612c, the counter value of the second reserved time reduction area 612b is shifted to the execution time reduction area 611.

In this manner, in this modified example, when the current time-saving game state ends, the support B flag of the sudden time-saving game state that is reserved at that time and that has the highest priority is set, and the counter value of the reserved time-saving area 612 that has the highest priority is set in the executed time-saving area 611. In other words, when multiple sudden time-saving game states are reserved, the order of transition is determined based on the predetermined priorities.

The counter value YC in the second reserved time-saving area 612ba is updated together with the counter value SC in the execution time-saving area 611 during the time-saving play state, and is decremented by one for each special play. Therefore, the counter value YC when the shift is performed is the remaining number of times when a special miss result is won during the time-saving play state during the current play state, minus the original upper limit number of times for the sudden time-saving play state that is reserved as a result of the winning. In other words, it is the same as the difference number in the third embodiment and variant example 1 described above.

In step Sc6505, among the reserved flags set in the various flag storage area 314e, the reserved flag corresponding to the reserved time reduction identified in step Sc6502 is cleared. In the following step Sc6506, a sudden time-shortened gaming state start command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143, and then the second transition process of the sudden time-shortened gaming state is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc6501 (if any of the support flags are set), i.e., if the player is in the time-saving play state, the process for the second transition to the time-saving play state is suddenly terminated without executing the processes in and after step Sc6502, as it is determined that no transition will be made for the reserved time-saving play state.

<What happens if you get a special miss during the time-saving game mode>
The flow when a special failure occurs during the time-saving game state will be described with reference to Fig. 281 and Fig. 282. Here, a case where a special failure occurs multiple times in the normal time-saving game state in the order of special failure result C, special failure result B, special failure result A, and special failure result B will be illustrated. For convenience, the explanation will be given assuming that the upper limit number of times in the normal time-saving game state is 100 times.

In a situation where there is no reserved time reduction in the normal time-saving play state, for example, if a special miss result C occurs in the 10th special play (timing t1), a reservation flag C is set and the sudden time-saving play state C is placed in a reserved state (Fig. 281 (b), (c)). Also, as shown in Fig. 282 (a), a value corresponding to the upper limit number of times (for example, 100 times) of the sudden time-saving play state C is set in the third reserved time-saving area 612c of the time-saving play state counter area 610. The counter value of the third reserved time-saving area 612c is updated each time a special play is executed in the normal time-saving play state during the stay (Fig. 281 (d)). In other words, the counter value (remaining number of reserved time-saving times) is decremented in parallel with the counter value SC of the execution time-saving area 611 (corresponding to the remaining number of times in the normal time-saving play state during the stay).

In the special symbol game round where the special miss result is C, the special reach miss A effect is executed on the symbol display device 75, and the fact that a special miss result has occurred is announced. At this time, the special symbol display unit 43 displays the stop result corresponding to the special miss result C.

In addition, after the special reach miss A effect ends, a reserve effect is executed in the same play round, in which a text image 527 such as "Stock!!" and a first reserve image 528 are displayed. The execution of the reserve effect notifies the player that a time-saving play state has been reserved (stocked). From the next special play round, a second reserve image 529 is displayed, notifying the player that the time-saving play state is on hold.

After that, for example, if the special miss result B occurs during the 30th special play (timing t2) in the normal time-saving play state, the reservation flag B is set and the sudden time-saving play state B is placed in a reserved state (Fig. 281 (b), (e)). Also, as shown in Fig. 282 (b), a value corresponding to the upper limit number of times (e.g., 100 times) of the sudden time-saving play state B is set in the second reserved time-saving area 612b of the time-saving play state counter area 610. The counter value in the second reserved time-saving area 612b is also updated each time a special play is executed in the normal time-saving play state during the current state (Fig. 281 (f)).

In the above case, the time-saving game state is suddenly reserved in response to winning the special miss result, but in the special pattern play round in which the special miss result B is reached, the pattern display device 75 executes a complete miss effect or a special reach miss B effect. In other words, the fact that a special miss result has occurred is not clearly indicated, and the player is placed in a state in which it is impossible or difficult for him or her to recognize that a new reservation has occurred. In addition, the special pattern display unit 43 displays the stop result corresponding to the special miss result B.

After that, for example, if the special miss result A occurs during the 60th special play (timing t3) in the normal time-saving play state, the reservation flag A is set and the sudden time-saving play state A is placed in a reserved state (Fig. 281 (b), (g)). Also, as shown in Fig. 282 (c), a value corresponding to the upper limit number of times (e.g., 100 times) of the sudden time-saving play state A is set in the first reserved time-saving area 612a of the time-saving play state counter area 610. The counter value of the first reserved time-saving area 612a is also updated each time a special play is executed in the normal time-saving play state during the current stay, just like the other areas (Fig. 281 (h)).

In the above case, in the special symbol game round in which the special miss result A is reached, the symbol display device 75 executes a complete miss effect or a special reach miss B effect, and the fact that the special miss result has occurred is not made clear. In addition, the special symbol display unit 43 displays the stop result corresponding to the special miss result A.

After that, for example, suppose that the special miss result B occurs during the 80th special play (timing t4) in the normal time-saving play state. The special miss result B occurs again while the sudden time-saving play state B is already reserved. In this case, the reserved state of the sudden time-saving play state B continues (Fig. 281 (e)), and a value corresponding to the upper limit number of times (e.g., 100 times) is reset in the second reserved time-saving area 612b (Fig. 278 (d)). In other words, the counter value in the second reserved time-saving area 612b is restored to a value corresponding to the upper limit number of times, and the number of times remaining in the reserved sudden time-saving play state B increases.

In a special symbol game in which the special miss result B is won again, a complete miss effect or a special reach miss B effect is executed on the symbol display device 75, and the fact that a special miss result has occurred is not made clear. In addition, the special symbol display unit 43 displays the stop result corresponding to the special miss result B.

After that, in the 100th special chart play, the result of the special chart lottery is a normal miss, and when the confirmation display starts (timing t5), the support flag is cleared based on the value of the execution time-saving area 611 being "0", and the normal time-saving play state that was in place ends. In this case, the reserved time-saving area 612 of the various counter areas 314d is referenced, and a transition is made to the sudden time-saving play state with the highest priority among the reserved sudden time-saving play states.

Specifically, the support B1 flag corresponding to the sudden time-saving game state A is set, and the counter value of the first reserved time-saving area 612a in the time-saving game state counter area 610 (corresponding to the remaining number of times in the sudden time-saving game state A) is shifted to the execution time-saving area 611 (Fig. 282 (e)). In other words, although it is not the first in the order of winning the special miss result, the transition to the sudden time-saving game state A, which has the highest priority, is carried out prior to other sudden time-saving game states (Fig. 281 (i)).

After the transition to the sudden time-saving game state A, at timing t6 before the end of state A, when the counter value of the third reserved time-saving area 612c (corresponding to the remaining number of times in the sudden time-saving game state C) becomes "0", the reservation flag C is cleared (Fig. 281 (c), (d)). This ends the reserved state of the sudden time-saving game state C. In this case, since the player is currently in the sudden time-saving game state A at that time, the player does not transition to the sudden time-saving game state C. In other words, the reserved state ends without transitioning to the sudden time-saving game state C. At this time, no notification corresponding to the end of the reserved state is made, and the player is placed in a state in which the player cannot or has difficulty recognizing the end.

When the sudden time-saving game state A ends at timing t7, the reserved time-saving area 612 in the various counter areas 314d is referenced, and a transition to the sudden time-saving game state with the highest priority among the reserved sudden time-saving game states is made. At this time, because the priority of the sudden time-saving game state B is the highest, a transition to the sudden time-saving game state B is made.

That is, the support B2 flag corresponding to the sudden time-saving game state B is set, and the counter value of the second reserved time-saving area 612b in the time-saving game state counter area 610 (corresponding to the remaining number of times in the sudden time-saving game state A) is shifted to the execution time-saving area 611 (Fig. 282 (f)). The counter value of the second reserved time-saving area 612b becomes the difference number B (20 times) obtained by subtracting the sum of the remaining number of times in the normal time-saving game state at the time of re-winning the special miss result B (20 times) and the difference number A (60 times) from the upper limit number of times (100 times) in the sudden time-saving game state B.

After the transition to the sudden time-saving game state B, the result of the special symbol lottery in the 20th special symbol game round is a normal miss result, and when the timing for starting the confirmation display (timing t8) arrives, the sudden time-saving game state B ends. In this case, the symbol display device 75 executes the end performance of the time-saving game state.

The modified example described above has the following advantages:

Priorities are set in advance for each of the sudden time-saving game states A to C (multiple types of time-saving game states that can be reserved), and when multiple reservations are made, transitions are made in the order corresponding to the priority. In this case, regardless of the order of winning the special miss result, transitions can be made in the order corresponding to the type of sudden time-saving game state, and the transition order can be set based on the characteristics of each sudden time-saving game state. For example, as in this modified example, by increasing the priority of the sudden time-saving game state A, which has a high expected value of winning the second operating port 63, the order of activation of the sudden time-saving game state A can be accelerated when there are multiple reserved time-savings. This allows the player to quickly reach a state where it is easy to receive a special winning lottery and to suppress the loss of balls in their possession, making it easy for the player to play.

It is also expected to have the effect of reducing the workload when designing gaming machines. In other words, if one were to specify the transition order for every combination of time-saving play states that can be reserved in the control program, there is a concern that the control program would become more complicated as the number of combinations increases, leading to an increased workload. In this regard, by using priorities to control the transition order, it is sufficient to set a priority for each time-saving play state, and the control program can be simplified. Furthermore, even if a design change is required after the fact, it is not necessary to completely change the control program, and it is sufficient to simply change the priority setting. In other words, there is also the advantage that even if a request for a design change such as changing the transition order or adding a time-saving play state arises, it can be easily accommodated.

When a special miss occurs during a time-saving game state, a counter value corresponding to the upper limit of reserved time-saving play based on that result is set in reserved time-saving area 612, and each time a game is played, the counter value in reserved time-saving area 612 is updated together with the counter value in executed time-saving area 611. In this case, the remaining number of times in the active time-saving game state and the remaining number of times in the reserved time-saving game state can be updated in parallel, making it possible to manage the remaining number of times in both time-saving game states simultaneously.

In particular, in a configuration in which the transition order is controlled based on priority, winning a special miss result that corresponds to a time-saving play state with a higher priority than the reserved time-saving play state will cause the transition order to change and the transition timing to fluctuate, raising concerns that the process of deriving the differential number of times for each reserved time-saving play will become complicated. In this regard, this configuration makes it possible to easily derive the differential number of times for each reserved time-saving play.

The reserved time-saving areas 612a to 612c are assigned to the types of sudden time-saving play states A to C, and priorities are set for these reserved time-saving areas 612a to 612c. In this case, by shifting the update result of the reserved time-saving area 612 with the highest priority, in which the counter value is set at the end of the stay time-saving, to the execution time-saving area 611, it is possible to easily control the transition in the order according to the priority.

<Modification 6>
A sixth modified example of the third embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 283 to 291. In these figures, the same components as those in the third embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the above-mentioned variant 5, the priority is set for the sudden time-saving game state (a time-saving game state in which reservations are possible), but in this variant, the priority is set to include other time-saving game states. Note that the maximum number of reserved sudden time-saving game states is set to the same number as the number of types of sudden time-saving game states, as in the above-mentioned variant 5. The configuration of this variant will be explained in detail below.

<About time-saving game mode>
The time-saving game state according to this modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 283 and Fig. 284. As shown in Fig. 283(a), in this modified example, a normal time-saving game state, a sudden time-saving game state A, and a sudden time-saving game state B are set as time-saving game states. It is not essential to set the normal time-saving game state to one type or the sudden time-saving game state to two types, and it is also possible to set the normal time-saving game state to two or more types, or the sudden time-saving game state to three or more types, as in the above modified example 1.

In each of the time-saving game states, there is a difference in the expected value of winning into the second operating port 63. Specifically, the expected value of winning into the second operating port 63 in the sudden time-saving game state A is configured to be higher than in the normal time-saving game state and the sudden time-saving game state B. The configuration for establishing such a relationship between the expected values of winning is not particularly limited, and can be realized, for example, by configuring the normal game play and the opening and closing of the role in each time-saving game state as shown in FIG. 284.

As shown in FIG. 284(a), the probability of winning the support is made equal in each time-shortened game state, and the variable display time of the normal game play in the sudden time-shortened game state A is made shorter than that in the normal time-shortened game state and the sudden time-shortened game state B, so that the number of support wins per unit time (the number of times the support lottery is executed) in the sudden time-shortened game state A is made greater than in the other time-shortened game states. Also, as shown in FIG. 284(b), the opening period of the normal electric device 63a in the sudden time-shortened game state A is made longer than that in the normal time-shortened game state and the sudden time-shortened game state B, so that the period during which a winning is possible in the second operating port 63 when a device opening/closing game is performed in the sudden time-shortened game state A is made longer than in the other time-shortened game states.

The above configuration makes it most likely that the sudden time-saving game state A will occur when a ball enters the second operating port 63. In this case, it becomes easier to receive prize balls frequently based on balls entering the second operating port 63, so the player can take part in a lottery to see if the second special design corresponding to the second operating port 63 will win or lose while optimally minimizing the loss of balls in hand, resulting in the most advantageous time-saving game state (the most desirable time-saving game state) for the player.

Also, as shown in FIG. 283(a), the upper limit number of times in the normal time-saving game state is configured to be greater than that in the sudden time-saving game state A and the sudden time-saving game state B. For example, the upper limit number of times in the normal time-saving game state is set to 150 times, and the upper limit number of times in the sudden time-saving game state A and the sudden time-saving game state B is set to 100 times. Note that it is not necessarily necessary to make the upper limit number different, and the upper limit number may be the same in these time-saving game states.

As shown in FIG. 283(b), a priority is set for each of the normal time-shortened play state, the sudden time-shortened play state A, and the sudden time-shortened play state B. In FIG. 283(b), the smaller the numerical value, the higher the priority, and the priority is set in the order of sudden time-shortened play state B < normal time-shortened play state < sudden time-shortened play state A. The priority information indicating these priorities is stored in the priority information storage area 551 (FIG. 256(b)) of the ROM 313 in association with the type of time-shortened play state.

<Processing for determining transition to sudden time-saving gaming state>
The process for determining whether or not the game state is suddenly changed to the time-saving game state according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 285. This process is executed in step Sc711 of the fluctuation start process (Fig. 222) by the main control device 162, and is executed in place of the process for determining whether or not the game state is suddenly changed to the time-saving game state in Fig. 276(a). In Fig. 285, the same process as in Fig. 276(a) is given the same step number, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sc1401, it is determined whether the result of this special drawing lottery is a special miss result. If the result of the special drawing lottery is a special miss result, it proceeds to step Sc1402, and it is determined whether any support flags are set in the various flags storage area 314e of RAM 314.

If any of the support flags is set, that is, if the current game state is a time-saving game state, proceed to step Sc6801 and determine whether the time-saving game state (corresponding time-saving) corresponding to the current special failure result is the same type as the time-saving game state (stay time-saving) currently in operation. More specifically, the types of the corresponding time-saving and stay time-saving are determined based on the special failure type flag and support flag set in the various flag storage area 314e, and it is determined whether the determined types match. For example, if a special failure result A (a special failure result corresponding to the sudden time-saving game state A) occurs while staying in the normal time-saving game state, this step is determined as negative, and if a special failure result B (a special failure result corresponding to the sudden time-saving game state B) occurs while staying in the sudden time-saving game state B, this step is determined as positive.

If the corresponding time reduction is not the same type of time-reduced play state as the stay time reduction, the priority of the stay time reduction is determined in step Sc6802. Specifically, the priority information storage area 551 of RAM 314 is referenced, and the priority of the stay time reduction is determined based on the type of stay time reduction determined in step Sc6801 above.

In step Sc6803, the priority of the corresponding time reduction is determined. Specifically, the priority information storage area 551 is referenced, and the priority of the corresponding time reduction is determined based on the type of the corresponding time reduction determined in step Sc6801.

In step Sc6804, the priority of the stay time reduction determined in step Sc6802 is compared with the priority of the stay time reduction determined in step Sc6803, and it is determined whether the priority of the responsive time reduction is higher than the priority of the stay time reduction. If the priority of the responsive time reduction is higher than the priority of the stay time reduction, a flag for starting sudden time reduction is set in the various flag storage area 314e in step Sc1403, and then the transition determination for the sudden time reduction game state is terminated. The flag for starting sudden time reduction is used by the MPU 312 to determine that a transition to a sudden time reduction game state should be made, and in this case indicates that a transition to the responsive time reduction should be made.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sc6804 (if the priority of the corresponding time reduction is not higher than the priority of the stay time reduction), the reservation process is executed in step Sc6101, and then the process for determining whether to transition to the sudden time-saving game state is terminated. The reservation process is a process for reserving the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to a special miss result when a special miss result occurs during the time-saving game state.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc6801 (if the corresponding time reduction is the same type of time-saving game state as the stay time reduction), proceed to step Sc6101 and execute the reservation process. In other words, if a special miss result is obtained that corresponds to the same type of time-saving game state as the stay time reduction, control is performed so that the time-saving game state (corresponding time reduction) that corresponds to the special miss result is placed in a reservation state.

<Setting process for variable display time>
The process of setting the variable display time according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 286. This process is executed in step Sc712 of the variable start process (Fig. 222), and is executed in place of the process of setting the variable display time in Fig. 263. In Fig. 286, the same process as in Fig. 263 is given the same step number, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sc1604 (if the game is not in a high probability game state), this means that the current game state is a time-saving game state (normal time-saving game state or sudden time-saving game state). In this case, in step Sc6901, it is judged whether the result of this special chart win/loss lottery is a special miss result. If it is a special miss result, the program proceeds to step Sc602, where it is judged whether a sudden time-saving start flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314.

When the current game state is a time-saving game state and the flag for starting the time-saving mode is suddenly set, this means that the game state should transition to a time-saving game state (corresponding time-saving mode) corresponding to the special miss result won during the time-saving mode. In this case, the process proceeds to step Sc6903, and variable display time table A for special misses (Fig. 232 (b)) is obtained as the variable display time table for this time. In this variable display time table A, only variable pattern Z1 (special reach miss A presentation) is set as a selectable variable pattern.

Therefore, if a special miss result corresponding to a time-saving game state with a higher priority than the stay time reduction is won during the stay time reduction, a lottery process (step Sc1607) for the variable display time is executed so that a variable pattern corresponding to the execution of the special reach miss A effect is selected. In other words, the special reach miss A effect is executed in the special chart play round in which the special miss result is won, and the fact that a special miss result has been reached is controlled so that it is notified.

If the negative judgment is made in step Sc6902 (if the sudden time-saving start flag is not set), that is, if the priority of the time-saving game state (corresponding time-saving) corresponding to the special miss result won during the stay time-saving is equal to or lower than the stay time-saving, proceed to step Sc6904, and obtain the variable display time table B for special miss (Fig. 232 (c)) as the variable display time table for this time. In this variable display time table B, the variable display time table B is set with the variable pattern 21H (complete miss effect) or the variable pattern Z2 (special reach miss B effect) as a selectable variable pattern, and if the priority of the corresponding time-saving corresponding to the current special miss result is lower than the priority of the stay time-saving, the lottery process (step Sc1607) for the variable display time is executed so that the variable pattern corresponding to the complete miss effect or the special reach miss B effect is selected. In other words, the fact that the result is a special miss is not made clear.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sc6901 (if the result is not a special miss), this means that the result is a jackpot result or a normal miss result. In this case, the process proceeds to step Sc4505, and the variable display time table for the corresponding time-saving game state is obtained. Specifically, if the result of this win/lose lottery is a jackpot result, the variable display time table for a jackpot (Figure 232 (a)) is obtained, and if the result of this win/lose lottery is a normal miss result, the variable display time table for a normal miss (Figure 232 (d)) is obtained.

After step Sc6903, step Sc6904, or step Sc4505 is executed, in step Sc1607, the dynamic display time table acquired in each step is used to execute a lottery process for the variable display time (variable pattern). Then, the process from step Sc1608 onwards is executed.

<First transition process of sudden time-saving gaming state>
The first transition process of the sudden time-saving game state according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 287. This process is executed in step Sc511 of the special game play control process (FIG. 220), and is executed instead of the first transition process of the sudden time-saving game state in FIG. 279. In FIG. 287, the same step numbers are given to the processes similar to those in FIG. 279, and their descriptions are omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sc7101, it is determined whether or not a sudden time-saving start flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. If the sudden time-saving start flag is set, that is, if the situation is such that a sudden transition to a time-saving game state is required, it is determined in step Sc7102 whether or not any of the support flags are set in the various flag storage area 314e.

If any of the support flags are set, i.e., if the current game state is a time-saving game state, this means that a special miss result corresponding to a time-saving game state with a higher priority has been won in a time-saving game state. In this case, proceed to step Sc7103, and clear the set support flag, i.e., the support flag for the time-saving stay. This ends the time-saving stay. In this way, if a special miss result corresponding to a corresponding time-saving stay with a higher priority is won in the middle of a time-saving stay, in other words, if the priority of the time-saving stay is lower than the corresponding time-saving stay that was won in the middle, the time-saving stay will be forcibly terminated.

After execution of step Sc7103 or if a negative judgment is made in step Sc7102 (if no support flags are set and the current game state is the normal game state), proceed to step Sc1803 and set the support B flag of the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to this special miss result in the various flags storage area 314e. For example, if the sudden time-saving game state to be transitioned to is sudden time-saving game state A, set the support B1 flag.

If the current special miss result occurs in a time-saving game state (if a positive judgment is made in step Sc7102), the time-saving game state corresponding to the current special miss result will be started immediately after the time-saving state is ended midway. In other words, if a special miss result corresponding to a time-saving game state with a higher priority is won midway, the corresponding time-saving state will be implemented by interrupting the time-saving state.

In step Sc6402, a value corresponding to the upper limit number of times is set in the execution time-saving area 611 provided in the various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314. The execution time-saving area 611 is a counter area that allows the MPU 312 to grasp the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state during the current time-saving game state. In step Sc1805, the sudden time-saving game state start flag set in the various flag storage area 314e is cleared, and in step Sc1806, a sudden time-saving game state start command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143.

After execution of step Sc1806 or if a negative judgment is made in step Sc7101 (the sudden time-saving start flag is not set), step Sc7104 judges whether any of the reservation flags are set in the various flag storage area 314e. If any of the reservation flags are set, that is, if the sudden time-saving game state is on hold, step Sc6403 executes a second transition process for the sudden time-saving game state. The second transition process for the sudden time-saving game state is a process for implementing a transition from the sudden time-saving game state that was set as a reserved state.

After execution of step Sc6403 or if a negative judgment is made in step Sc7104 (if no reservation flags are set), the first transition process for the time-saving game state is suddenly terminated.

<What happens if you get a special miss during the time-saving game mode>
The flow when a special miss occurs during the time-saving game state will be explained with reference to Figures 288 to 292.

First, the case where a special miss result A (corresponding to sudden time-shortened game state A) occurs in a normal time-shortened game state will be described with reference to Figures 288 and 289. For example, if a special miss result A occurs during the 110th special game turn (timing t1) in the normal time-shortened game state, the priority of the normal time-shortened game state, which is the stay time-shortened state, is compared with the priority of the sudden time-shortened game state A, which is the responsive time-shortened state. In this case, since the priority of the responsive time-shortened state is higher than the priority of the stay time-shortened state, a transition to the responsive time-shortened state is prioritized. In other words, the normal time-shortened game state is terminated midway, and a transition to the sudden time-shortened game state A is implemented.

In a special symbol game round in which the special miss result A is reached, the symbol display device 75 executes a special reach miss A effect, and the player is notified that a special miss result has occurred (Fig. 289 (a)). At this time, the special symbol display unit 43 displays the stop result corresponding to the special miss result A.

In addition, in response to switching to a time-shortened game state (sudden time-shortened game state A) in which the expected value of winning at the second operating port 63 is higher than the previous time-shortened game state (normal time-shortened game state), a promotion effect is executed on the symbol display device 75. In this modified example, a level value of the time-shortened game state is set as an indicator indicating the expected value of winning or whether it is high or low, and in the time-shortened game state, a level notification image 621 is displayed on the symbol display device 75 as a notification corresponding to the level value. Figure 289(a) shows, as an example, a case in which level 1 is associated with the normal time-shortened game state.

In the above promotion effect, as shown in FIG. 289(b), a promotion notification image 622, for example consisting of the text display "Level Up", is displayed on the symbol display device 75, and the level value indicated by the level notification image 621 is changed from level 1 to level 2 (higher level). This notifies the player of the upgrade of the time-saving game state.

The promotion effect may be executed using the remaining variable display time in the special symbol game round that resulted in the special miss result A, or may be executed using part or all of the fixed display time, or may be executed across the variable display time (part of the variable display time) and the fixed display time (part or all of the fixed display time). In this case, the promotion effect may be executed after erasing the image of the frozen pattern row Z1 to Z3, or may be executed by positioning the promotion notification image 622 in front of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 without erasing the image of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3. Note that when the promotion effect is executed using the variable display time, it is preferable that the promotion effect be started after the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are frozen and displayed in a combination that results in a special miss result.

After the promotion effect is executed as described above, the level notification image 621 indicating level 2 will continue to be displayed in the next and subsequent special game rounds (Figure 289 (c)). The display of the level notification image 621 indicating level 2 will continue while the player is in the sudden time-saving game state A.

In the above case, the remaining number of times image 523 that notifies the remaining number of times in the time-saving play state is suddenly displayed to notify a value that does not correspond to the remaining number of times in the time-saving play state A. In more detail, it is displayed to notify a value that corresponds to the remaining number of times if the normal time-saving play state were to continue without being terminated, based on the maximum number of times in the normal time-saving play state.

For example, if a sudden transition to time-saving game state A occurs on the 110th special game turn (40 turns remaining) in the normal time-saving game state, the remaining number of turns image 523 is displayed to notify "39 turns remaining" on the first special game turn in the sudden time-saving game state A (the 111th special game turn since the start of the normal time-saving game state). This allows the player to sense that the normal time-saving game state has leveled up midway through, and that this leveled-up state can continue within the upper limit of the number of turns in the normal time-saving game state.

After that, when the 150th special symbol play round (timing t2) is reached since the start of the normal play state, the remaining number of times image 523 displays "Last," and the special symbol play round is announced as if it were the final play round of the time-saving play state (Fig. 289 (d)). Also, if the result of the special symbol win/loss lottery for that play round is a normal miss result, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a complete miss combination, and the normal miss result is announced.

However, the above special symbol play round is internally a midway play round in the sudden time-saving play state A (the 40th special symbol play round from the start of the sudden time-saving play state A), and the time-saving play state continues after that. In response to this, the symbol display device 75 displays the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 as a completely miss combination, and then executes a continuation effect. In the continuation effect, a continuation notification image 623, such as a display image of "Not yet!", is displayed on the symbol display device 75, thereby notifying the continuation of the time-saving play state (Fig. 289 (e)).

The continuation effect may be executed using the remaining variable display time in the special game round, or may be executed using part or all of the fixed display time, or may be executed across the variable display time (part of the variable display time) and the fixed display time (part or all of the fixed display time). In this case, the promotion effect may be executed after erasing the images of the stopped-displayed pattern rows Z1 to Z3, or may be executed by positioning the promotion notification image 622 in front of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 without erasing the images of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3.

After that, in the next special game round, the remaining number of times image 523 will be displayed as "? times remaining," making it impossible or difficult for the player to recognize the remaining number of times (Fig. 289 (f)). In other words, the remaining number of times in the sudden time-saving game state A in which the player is currently in is not notified, and the number is kept in an unclear state. This state will continue in subsequent special game rounds. This can heighten the player's sense of excitement by making it unclear when the time-saving game state will end, and can add to the fun of playing by predicting how long the time-saving game state will last.

When the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state A is suddenly made invisible, the remaining number of times image 523 may not be displayed. In other words, after a special game in which the remaining number of times image 523 displays "Last," the remaining number of times image 523 may be erased in the next special game.

After that, for example, if special miss result A occurs during the 70th special symbol play (timing t3) in the sudden time-saving play state, the reservation flag A is set, and the sudden time-saving play state A corresponding to the winning of the special miss result A is placed in a reserved state (Fig. 288 (b), (c)). In this case, the symbol display device 75 executes a complete miss effect or a special reach miss B effect, and the fact that a special miss result has occurred is not clearly indicated. Note that the special symbol display unit 43 displays the stop result corresponding to the special miss result A.

After that, in the final play round of the sudden time-saving game state A, the result of the special chart lottery is a normal miss, and when the timing at which the confirmation display starts (timing t4) arrives, the sudden time-saving game state A that was in effect ends. As a result, the reserved state of the subsequent sudden time-saving game state A that was reserved is released, and a transition to that time-saving game state is made. In other words, the sudden time-saving game state A essentially continues.

In the above case, the remaining number of times in the sudden time-saving game state A where the transition is made will be the difference number (70 times) obtained by subtracting the remaining number of times (30 times) in the preceding sudden time-saving game state A from the upper limit number of times (e.g. 100 times) of that sudden time-saving game state A. In this case, the remaining number of times image 523 continues to display "? times remaining" and the remaining number of times is not indicated.

After the transition to the subsequent sudden time-saving game state A, when the remaining number of times that the player can stay in that game state during special game turns reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 10 turns) (timing t5), a remaining number image 523 showing "10 turns remaining" is displayed, and the remaining number of times that the player can stay in the time-saving state is notified (Fig. 289 (g)). In this way, by switching to a state in which the remaining number of times that the player can stay in the time-saving state is clearly indicated as the remaining number of times that the player can stay in the time-saving state falls below the predetermined number, it is possible to suitably prevent the player from being confused by the impression that the time-saving game state has suddenly ended.

Then, when the final round of play ends in the subsequent sudden time-saving game state A (timing t5), the sudden time-saving game state A ends. In this case, the symbol display device 75 executes a performance for ending the time-saving game state.

In the above, we have exemplified the case where special failure result A occurs in a normal time-saving play state, but the same process applies if special failure result A occurs suddenly in time-saving play state B. In other words, in the special game round where special failure result A occurs, time-saving play state B is suddenly ended and a transition to time-saving play state A is suddenly implemented.

Next, we will explain the case where a special miss result B (corresponding to the sudden time-saving game state B) occurs in a situation where the game is in the sudden time-saving game state A, with reference to Figure 290.

In this example, since the current time-saving game state is the sudden time-saving game state A, the symbol display device 75 displays a level notification image 621 of Lv2 (Fig. 290 (e)). Then, for example, if a special miss occurs B during the 70th special symbol game turn (timing t1) in the sudden time-saving game state A, the priority of the sudden time-saving game state A, which is the time-saving state, is compared with the priority of the sudden time-saving game state B, which is the responsive time-saving state. In this case, since the priority of the responsive time-saving state is lower than the priority of the time-saving state, the continuation of the time-saving state is prioritized. In other words, the sudden time-saving game state A is continued, and the sudden time-saving game state B is placed on hold (Fig. 290 (a) to (d)).

In a special symbol game round in which the special miss result B is reached, a complete miss effect or a special reach miss B effect is executed on the symbol display device 75 (Fig. 290 (f)). In other words, it is announced as if a normal miss result has occurred, and the fact that a special miss result has occurred is not explicitly stated. However, the special symbol display unit 43 displays the stop result corresponding to the special miss result B. Note that Fig. 290 (f) shows the case in which a special reach miss B effect is executed.

After that, in the final play of the sudden time-saving game state A, the result of the special chart lottery is a normal miss, and when the confirmation display starts (timing t2), the sudden time-saving game state A ends and the player transitions to the reserved sudden time-saving game state B (Fig. 290 (a)-(d)). In this case, the remaining number of times in the sudden time-saving game state B is the difference number (70 times) obtained by subtracting the remaining number of times in the sudden time-saving game state A (30 times) from the upper limit number of times in the sudden time-saving game state B (for example, 100 times).

At the above time, in response to the switch to a time-saving game state (sudden time-saving game state B) in which the expected value of winning at the second operating port 63 is lower than the previous time-saving game state (sudden time-saving game state A), a demotion effect is executed on the symbol display device 75. In this demotion effect, as shown in FIG. 290(h), a demotion notification image 624, such as a text display of "Level Down", is displayed on the symbol display device 75, and the level value indicated by the level notification image 621 is changed from level 2 to level 1 (lower level). This notifies the player that the time-saving game state has been downgraded.

The demotion effect may be executed using the remaining variable display time in the special game that resulted in the special miss result B, or may be executed using part or all of the fixed display time, or may be executed across the variable display time (part of the variable display time) and the fixed display time (part or all of the fixed display time). In this case, the demotion effect may be executed after erasing the image of the frozen pattern rows Z1 to Z3, or may be executed by positioning the demotion notification image 624 in front of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 without erasing the image of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3. When executing the demotion effect using the variable display time, it is preferable to start the demotion effect after the normal miss result is announced by the pattern rows Z1 to Z3.

After the demotion effect is executed as described above, the level notification image 621 will continue to be displayed indicating level 1 even in the next and subsequent special chart play times (Fig. 290 (i)). In addition, the remaining number of times image 523 will be displayed as "? times remaining," and the remaining number of times in the sudden time-saving play state B will not be made clear. Then, when the remaining number of times in the sudden time-saving play state B reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 10 times), the remaining number of times image 523 "10 times remaining" will be displayed, and the remaining number of times for the stay time-saving play will be notified.

After that, in the final play of the sudden time-saving game state B, the result of the special symbol lottery becomes a normal miss result, and when the timing for starting the confirmation display (timing t3) arrives, the sudden time-saving game state B ends. In this case, the symbol display device 75 executes the end performance of the time-saving game state.

Next, we will explain the case where special miss result B (corresponding to sudden time-saving game state B) occurs in a normal game state with reference to Figure 291.

In this example, since the time-saving game state during the stay is the sudden time-saving game state B, the symbol display device 75 displays a level notification image 621 of Lv1 (Fig. 291 (e)). Then, for example, if a special miss result B occurs during the 68th special symbol game turn (timing t1) in the normal time-saving game state, the priority of the normal time-saving game state, which is the stay time-saving state, is compared with the priority of the sudden time-saving game state B, which is the corresponding time-saving state. In this case, since the priority of the corresponding time-saving state and the priority of the stay time-saving state are the same, the continuation of the stay time-saving state is prioritized. In other words, the normal time-saving game state continues, and the sudden time-saving game state B is put on hold (Fig. 291 (a) to (d)).

In a special symbol game round in which the special miss result B is reached, a complete miss effect or a special reach miss B effect is executed on the symbol display device 75 (Fig. 291 (f)). In other words, it is announced as if a normal miss result has occurred, and the fact that a special miss result has occurred is not explicitly stated. However, the special symbol display unit 43 displays the stop result corresponding to the special miss result B. Note that Fig. 291 (f) shows the case where a special reach miss B effect is executed.

After that, in the final play in the normal time-saving play state, the result of the special winning/losing lottery is a normal losing result, and when the timing for the start of the confirmation display (timing t2) arrives, the normal time-saving play state in which the player was staying ends, and a transition to the reserved sudden time-saving play state B is made (Fig. 291 (a)-(d)). In this case, the number of times remaining in the sudden time-saving play state B is the difference number (18 times) obtained by subtracting the remaining number of times in the normal time-saving play state (82 times) from the upper limit number of times in the sudden time-saving play state B (for example, 100 times).

In the next special play (the first play in the sudden time-saving play state B), the remaining number of times image 523 is displayed as "? times remaining," and the number of times remaining in the sudden time-saving play state B is not made clear. Then, when the number of times remaining in the sudden time-saving play state B reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times), the remaining number of times image 523 is displayed as "10 times remaining," and the number of times remaining for the stay time-saving play is notified.

After that, in the final play of the sudden time-saving game state B, the result of the special symbol lottery becomes a normal miss result, and when the timing for starting the confirmation display (timing t3) arrives, the sudden time-saving game state B ends. In this case, the symbol display device 75 executes the end performance of the time-saving game state.

At the above time, in response to the switch to a time-saving game state (sudden time-saving game state B) in which the expected value of winning at the second operating port 63 is lower than the previous time-saving game state (sudden time-saving game state A), a demotion effect is executed on the symbol display device 75. In this demotion effect, as shown in FIG. 291(h), a demotion notification image 624, such as a text display of "Level Down", is displayed on the symbol display device 75, and the level value indicated by the level notification image 621 is changed from level 2 to level 1 (lower level). This notifies the player that the time-saving game state has been downgraded.

The demotion effect may be executed using the remaining variable display time in the special game that resulted in the special miss result B, or may be executed using part or all of the fixed display time, or may be executed across the variable display time (part of the variable display time) and the fixed display time (part or all of the fixed display time). In this case, the demotion effect may be executed after erasing the image of the frozen pattern rows Z1 to Z3, or may be executed by positioning the demotion notification image 624 in front of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 without erasing the image of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3. When executing the demotion effect using the variable display time, it is preferable to start the demotion effect after the normal miss result is announced by the pattern rows Z1 to Z3.

After the demotion effect is executed as described above, the level notification image 621 indicating level 1 will continue to be displayed for the next and subsequent special game rounds (Fig. 291(i)). In addition, the remaining number of times image 523 will be displayed as "? times remaining," and the number of times remaining in time-saving game state B will suddenly become unclear.

After that, after the sudden transition to time-saving game state B, the result of the special symbol lottery in the final play round is a normal miss, and when the timing for starting the confirmation display (timing t3) arrives, the time-saving game state B suddenly ends. In this case, the symbol display device 75 executes the end performance of the time-saving game state.

In the above, we have exemplified the case where special failure result B occurs in a normal time-saving play state, but the same process applies when special failure result B occurs in a sudden time-saving play state B. In other words, the sudden time-saving play state B that was in effect during the special play round that resulted in special failure result B continues, and the subsequent sudden time-saving play state B is placed on hold.

Here, the continuation and switching of the time-saving gaming state in the configuration of this modified example is summarized as shown in Figure 292.

When a special miss result A occurs during a normal time-saving game state (event A), the priority of the sudden time-saving game state A corresponding to the special miss result A is higher than the priority of the normal time-saving game state, so the normal time-saving game state is terminated and a transition to the sudden time-saving game state A is executed.

When a special miss result B occurs during a normal time-saving game state (event B), the priority of the sudden time-saving game state B corresponding to the special miss result B is lower than the priority of the normal time-saving game state, so the normal time-saving game state continues and the sudden time-saving game state B is placed in a reserved state. In this case, after the normal time-saving game state ends due to reaching the upper limit number of times, a transition to the sudden time-saving game state B is implemented.

If a special miss occurs in the sudden time-saving game state A (event C), the priority of the sudden time-saving game state B is lower than the priority of the sudden time-saving game state A, so the sudden time-saving game state A continues and the sudden time-saving game state B is placed in a reserved state. In this case, after the sudden time-saving game state A ends due to reaching the upper limit number of times, a transition to the sudden time-saving game state B is implemented.

If special miss result A occurs during sudden time-saving game state B (event D), the priority of sudden time-saving game state A is higher than the priority of sudden time-saving game state B, so sudden time-saving game state B is terminated and a transition to sudden time-saving game state A is executed.

By the way, if a normal jackpot occurs in the sudden time-saving play state A or the sudden time-saving play state B, a transition to the open/close execution mode is executed regardless of the priority between the sudden time-saving play state and the normal time-saving play state, and after the mode ends, a transition to the normal time-saving play state is executed.

The modified example described above has the following advantages:

The priority order is set so that the order is highest in the sudden time-saving game state B < normal time-saving game state < sudden time-saving game state A. When the special miss result B occurs in a normal game state, the transition to the sudden time-saving game state B is reserved as a restriction on the transition, and when the special miss result A occurs in a normal game state, the transition to the sudden time-saving game state A is immediately performed without adding the above restriction. In other words, the transition is restricted or not restricted depending on the combination of the type of time-saving stay and the time-saving game state corresponding to the special miss result won during the game, so that the development of the game after that can be made different depending on the combination. This allows the player to enjoy not only whether or not to transition to a specific game state, but also which combination will result, making it possible to increase the interest.

In the above case, by increasing the priority of the sudden time-saving game state A, which has a high expected value of winning at the second operating port 63, if the combination of the time-saving game state during which the player is in the game and the time-saving game state corresponding to the special miss result won during the game increases the likelihood of winning at the second operating port 63, it is possible to suddenly transition to the time-saving game state A without imposing any restrictions. In other words, it is possible to quickly reach a state where it is easy to win the special chart lottery and to minimize the loss of balls in hand, making it easy for the player to play.

In the case where a special miss result A occurs during normal time-saving game state and the game suddenly transitions to time-saving game state A, the remaining number of times image 523 is configured to display the number of times remaining if the normal time-saving game state had continued. This makes it appear as if the normal time-saving game state continues even after the sudden transition to time-saving game state A, and gives the impression that the previous time-saving game state has been promoted by winning the special miss result. Furthermore, by subsequently displaying "? times remaining" as the remaining number of times image 523, the game can be played while giving a sense of excitement that such a promoted state may come to an end, making it possible to suitably increase interest.

<Modification 7>
A sixth modified example of the third embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 293 to 298. In these figures, the same components as those in the third embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the above-mentioned modified examples 5 and 6, the normal time-saving game state and the sudden time-saving game state are set as the time-saving game state, but in this modified example, a ceiling time-saving game state is also set. The configuration of this modified example will be explained in detail below.

<About time-saving game mode>
The time-saving game state according to this modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 293. As described above, this modified example has a ceiling time-saving game state as one type of time-saving game state. As shown in Fig. 293(a), this ceiling time-saving game state is entered when the cumulative number of times (so-called stuck times) of special game times (missing game times) in which the winning lottery result is a miss reaches a predetermined ceiling number (e.g., 800 times).

When counting the number of misses, if a jackpot result occurs before the ceiling number of times is reached, the number of times remaining until the ceiling number of times is reset to the initial value (e.g. 800 times), and the number of misses up to that point is discarded. Also, misses during a high probability play state are not counted. Therefore, to transition to a ceiling time-saving play state, the number of misses after the open/close execution mode ends must reach the ceiling number, and if transitioning to a high probability play state after the open/close execution mode, the number of misses after the high probability play state ends must reach the ceiling number.

The ceiling time-saving play state is a state in which the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the second high frequency support mode, similar to the sudden time-saving play state. Note that because the trigger for transition to the ceiling time-saving play state is a miss result, transition to the ceiling time-saving play state occurs without passing through the open/close execution mode. In other words, when the number of miss play times reaches the ceiling number, the play state transitions to the ceiling time-saving play state as the special pattern play time ends. The ceiling time-saving play state continues until the number of special pattern play times executed after transition to the ceiling time-saving play state reaches the predetermined upper limit.

As shown in FIG. 293(b), there is a difference in the expected value of winning into the second actuation port 63 for the ceiling time-shortened game state, the normal time-shortened game state, the sudden time-shortened game state A, and the sudden time-shortened game state B. Specifically, the expected value of winning into the second actuation port 63 in the sudden time-shortened game state A is configured to be higher than the normal time-shortened game state, the ceiling time-shortened game state, and the sudden time-shortened game state B.

The structure that sets the winning expectation value in this way is not particularly limited, and the normal time-saving game state, sudden time-saving game state A, and sudden time-saving game state B can be configured to have, for example, the normal game number and the opening and closing of the device game mode (Fig. 284) described in the above modified example 6. Also, the ceiling time-saving game state can be configured to have, for example, the same normal game number and the opening and closing of the device game mode as the sudden time-saving game state B.

The upper limit number of times in the ceiling time-saving game state is configured to be greater than those in the normal time-saving game state, the sudden time-saving game state A, and the sudden time-saving game state B. For example, the upper limit number of times in the ceiling time-saving game state is set to 500 times, the upper limit number of times in the normal time-saving game state is set to 150 times, and the upper limit number of times in the sudden time-saving game state A and the sudden time-saving game state B is set to 100 times. Note that it is not necessarily necessary to make the upper limit number different, and the upper limit number of times in these time-saving game states may be configured to be equal.

As shown in FIG. 293(c), a priority is set for each of the ceiling time-shortened game state, normal time-shortened game state, sudden time-shortened game state A, and sudden time-shortened game state B. In FIG. 293(c), the smaller the numerical value, the higher the priority, and the priority is set in the following order: sudden time-shortened game state B < normal time-shortened game state < sudden time-shortened game state A < ceiling time-shortened game state. The priority information indicating these priorities is stored in the priority information storage area 551 (FIG. 256(b)) of the ROM 313 in association with the type of time-shortened game state.

<Change start processing>
The variation start processing according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 294(a). This processing is executed in step Sc506 of the special game play control processing (Fig. 220) by the main control device 162, and is executed instead of the variation start processing of Fig. 222. In Fig. 294(a), the same step numbers are given to the same processing as in Fig. 222, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

After executing the high frequency support mode update process in step Sc710, the process for determining whether to transition to the ceiling time-shortened game state is executed in step Sc7401. The process for determining whether to transition to the ceiling time-shortened game state is executed to determine whether or not a transition trigger to the ceiling time-shortened game state has been established. Here, the process for determining whether to transition to the ceiling time-shortened game state in step Sc7401 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 295.

First, in step Sc7501, it is determined whether the result of this special drawing is a jackpot result. If it is not a jackpot result, it proceeds to step Sc7502, where it is determined whether the reached flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. The reached flag is used by MPU 312 to determine whether the number of losing plays has reached the ceiling number of times.

If the reached flag is not set, in step Sc7503, it is determined whether or not the high probability flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. If the high probability flag is not set, that is, if the current lottery mode is the low probability mode, the process proceeds to step Sc7504, where the value of the miss count counter area HC provided in the various counter area 314d of the RAM 314 is updated. Specifically, the value of the miss count counter area HC is decremented by 1. The miss count counter area HC is used by the MPU 312 to grasp the number of times remaining until the ceiling number of times.

The number of remaining plays up to the ceiling number is not directly notified to the player, but is indirectly notified by notifying the player of the number of misses up to that point. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 296, a miss count image 651 is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75, and this miss count image 651 is configured to notify the player of the number of miss plays after the open/close execution mode (after a jackpot).

The miss count image 651 continues to be displayed while the number of times remaining until the ceiling number is being counted, and the number of times the notification is updated each time a miss play ends. Therefore, by looking at the image 651, the player can know the progress on the way to reaching the ceiling, and further, if the player knows the ceiling number, he or she can know the number of times remaining until the ceiling number by referring to the cumulative value of the miss count shown by the miss count image 651.

Incidentally, in this modified example, the update process of the miss counter area HC (step Sc7504) is incorporated into the fluctuation start process, and the update of the remaining number of times up to the ceiling number is executed when the fluctuation of the miss game round starts, but the update of the miss count image 651 is performed after the miss result is notified by the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 (Fig. 296 (b)). This prevents the player from being able to determine the miss result from the update of the miss count image 651 before the result is notified by the pattern rows Z1 to Z3. The specific timing for updating the miss count image 651 can be at the end of a miss game round, such as when the confirmation display starts, during the confirmation display, or when the confirmation display time has elapsed, or at the start of the next game round.

In the above configuration, the cumulative number of losing plays up to that point is notified, but instead, the remaining number of plays up to the ceiling number of plays may be notified.

Returning to the explanation of the process for determining whether to transition to the ceiling time-saving game state (FIG. 295), after execution of step Sc7504, in step Sc7505, it is determined whether the value of the miss counter area HC is "0". If the value of the miss counter area HC is "0", that is, if the number of miss games has reached the ceiling number, the process proceeds to step Sc7506, where an reached flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

In step Sc7507, a ceiling time-saving start flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The ceiling time-saving start flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that a transition to the ceiling time-saving game state should occur. After step Sc7507 is executed, the process for determining whether to transition to the ceiling time-saving game state is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc7502 (if the reached flag is set) or if a positive judgment is made in step Sc7503 (if the high probability flag is set), the process for determining whether to transition to the ceiling time-saving game state is terminated without executing the processes in steps Sc7504 and onward. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sc7505 (if the value of the miss counter area HC is not "0"), the process for determining whether to transition to the ceiling time-saving game state is terminated without executing the processes in steps Sc7506 and onward.

If the judgment in step Sc7501 is positive (the result is a big win), the process proceeds to step Sc7508, where the value in the counter area HC is set to a value corresponding to the ceiling count (e.g., 800). In step Sc7509, the process determines whether the reached flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

If the reached flag is set, step Sc7510 executes a process to clear the reached flag. After step Sc7510 is executed or if a negative judgment is made in step Sc7509 (if the reached flag is not set), the process for determining whether to transition to the second time-saving game state is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 294(a)), after step Sc7401 is executed, a process for determining whether or not a sudden time-saving game state has been entered is executed in step Sc711. This process is similar to the process for determining whether or not a sudden time-saving game state has been entered (FIG. 285) in accordance with the above-mentioned modified example 6.

The process for determining whether or not to suddenly enter the time-saving game state in step Sc711 will be explained with reference to FIG. 285. First, in step Sc1401, it is determined whether or not the result of this special drawing is a special miss. If the result of the special drawing is a special miss, the process proceeds to step Sc1402, where it is determined whether or not any of the support flags are set in the various flags storage area 314e of RAM 314.

If any of the support flags are set, that is, if the current game state is a time-saving game state, proceed to step Sc6801 and determine whether the time-saving game state corresponding to this special miss result (corresponding time-saving) is the same type as the time-saving game state currently in effect (stay time-saving). If the corresponding time-saving is not the same type of time-saving game state as the stay time-saving, the priority of the stay time-saving is determined in step Sc6802, and then the priority of the corresponding time-saving is determined in step Sc6803.

In step Sc6804, the priority of the stay time reduction determined in step Sc6802 is compared with the priority of the stay time reduction determined in step Sc6803, and it is determined whether the priority of the responsive time reduction is higher than the priority of the stay time reduction. If the priority of the responsive time reduction is higher than the priority of the stay time reduction, a flag for sudden time reduction start is set in the various flag storage area 314e in step Sc1403. The flag for sudden time reduction start is used by the MPU 312 to determine that a sudden transition to a time-shortened game state should occur, and in this case indicates that a transition to the responsive time reduction should be implemented.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sc6804 (if the priority of the corresponding time reduction is not higher than the priority of the stay time reduction), the reservation process is executed in step Sc6101. The reservation process is a process for reserving the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to a special miss result when a special miss result occurs during the time-saving game state.

Incidentally, in the process for determining whether to transition to the ceiling time-saving game state (Fig. 295), there is no process for comparing the priority of each time-saving game state and switching between transition and reservation based on the result, but this is because the priority of the ceiling time-saving game state is set to the highest. In other words, if the number of misses reaches the ceiling number while staying in another time-saving game state, a transition to the ceiling time-saving game state is always implemented.

Returning to the explanation of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 294(a)), after step Sc711 is executed, the process of setting the fluctuation display time is executed in step Sc712. This process is similar to the process of setting the fluctuation display time in the above-mentioned modified example 6 (FIG. 285).

In the next step Sc713, a change display flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The change display flag is used by the MPU 312 to know that a change display for a special game round is in progress.

<Special chart game play control processing>
The variable start processing according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 294(b). This processing is executed in step Sc403 of the normal processing (FIG. 219), and is executed in place of the special game play control of FIG. 220. In FIG. 294(b), the same step numbers are given to the same processing as in FIG. 220, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc507 (if the variable display time has elapsed), in step Sc509, the variable display flag set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314 is cleared. In the following step Sc510, high frequency support mode termination processing is executed to terminate the high frequency support mode.

In step Sc7402, the process for transitioning to the ceiling time-shortened game state is executed. The process for transitioning to the ceiling time-shortened game state is for transitioning the game state to the ceiling time-shortened game state. Here, the process for transitioning to the ceiling time-shortened game state in step Sc7402 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 297.

First, in step Sc7601, it is determined whether or not the ceiling time reduction start flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. If the ceiling time start flag is not set, the process for transitioning to the ceiling time reduction game state is terminated.

If the ceiling time-saving start flag is set, i.e., if the situation is such that a transition to a time-saving game state should occur suddenly, step Sc7602 determines whether any of the support flags are set in the various flag storage area 314e. If any of the support flags are set, i.e., if the current game state is a time-saving game state, this means that the number of misses in the time-saving game state has reached the ceiling number of times.

In this case, the process proceeds to step Sc7603, and the set support flag, i.e., the support flag for time-saving play, is cleared. This ends the time-saving play. In this way, if the ceiling number of plays is reached during the time-saving play state, the time-saving play state is forcibly terminated.

After execution of step Sc7603 or if a negative judgment is made in step Sc7602 (if no support flags are set and the current gaming state is the normal gaming state), the process proceeds to step Sc7604, where the support C flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The support C flag corresponds to the ceiling time-shortened gaming state, and setting this flag causes a transition to the ceiling time-shortened gaming state.

In step Sc7605, a value corresponding to the upper limit number of times (e.g., 500 times) of the ceiling time-saving game state is set in the execution time-saving area 611 provided in the various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314. In step Sc7606, the ceiling time-saving start flag set in the various flag storage area 314e is cleared.

In step Sc7607, a ceiling time-shortened game state start command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143, and then the process for transitioning to the ceiling time-shortened game state is terminated. The ceiling time-shortened game state start command is used to notify the performance control device 143 of the transition to the ceiling time-shortened game state.

<About the flow of play during time-saving play>
The flow when the number of miss plays reaches the upper limit during the time-saving play state or when a special miss result occurs will be explained with reference to Figure 298.

When special miss result A occurs in a situation where the player is in the ceiling time-saving game state (event A), the priority of the sudden time-saving game state A corresponding to special miss result A is lower than the priority of the ceiling time-saving game state, so the ceiling time-saving game state continues and the sudden time-saving game state A is placed in a reserved state. In this case, after the ceiling time-saving game state ends when the upper limit number of times is reached, a transition to the sudden time-saving game state A is made. At this time, the remaining number of times in the sudden time-saving game state A is the difference number of times obtained by subtracting the remaining number of times in the ceiling time-saving game state when the sudden time-saving game state A was reserved from the original upper limit number of times of the sudden time-saving game state A (for example, 100 times).

If special miss result A occurs in the sudden time-saving game state B (event B), the priority of the sudden time-saving game state A is higher than the priority of the sudden time-saving game state B, so the sudden time-saving game state B is terminated midway and a transition to the sudden time-saving game state A is executed. In other words, the transition to the sudden time-saving game state A is swiftly implemented without any restrictions (reservations) imposed as when the stay time reduction is in the ceiling time-saving game state. In this case, the remaining number of times in the sudden time-saving game state A becomes the original upper limit number of times for that state A (e.g. 100 times).

When special miss result B occurs in a situation where the player is in the ceiling time-saving game state (event C), the priority of the sudden time-saving game state B corresponding to special miss result B is lower than the priority of the ceiling time-saving game state, so the ceiling time-saving game state continues and the sudden time-saving game state B is placed in a reserved state. In this case, after the ceiling time-saving game state ends by reaching the upper limit number of times, a transition to the sudden time-saving game state B is made. At this time, the remaining number of times in the sudden time-saving game state B is set to the difference number of times less than the original upper limit number of times (e.g. 100 times).

If the number of misses reaches the ceiling number of times during the sudden time-saving game state A (event D), the priority of the ceiling time-saving game state is higher than the priority of the sudden time-saving game state A, so the sudden time-saving game state A is terminated and a transition to the ceiling time-saving game state is executed.

If the number of miss plays reaches the ceiling number of times during the sudden time-saving game state B (event E), the priority of the ceiling time-saving game state is higher than the priority of the sudden time-saving game state B, so the sudden time-saving game state B is terminated and a transition to the ceiling time-saving game state is executed.

In addition, since the ceiling number of times in the ceiling time-saving play state (e.g. 800 times) is set to a number greater than the upper limit number of times in the normal time-saving play state (e.g. 150 times), the number of misses in the normal time-saving play state will never reach the ceiling number. In other words, the normal time-saving play state and the ceiling time-saving play state are configured so that there is no competition between them.

In addition, the flow when special miss result A or special miss result B occurs during normal time-saving gameplay is the same as in Variation 6 above, so a description is omitted.

The modified example described above has the following advantages:

The priority order is set so that the order is highest in the sudden time-saving game state B < sudden time-saving game state A < ceiling time-saving game state, and if special miss result A occurs in a situation where the player is in the ceiling time-saving game state, the transition to the sudden time-saving game state A is reserved as a restriction on the transition, and if special miss result A occurs in a situation where the player is in the sudden time-saving game state B, the transition to the sudden time-saving game state A is immediately performed without adding the above restriction. In other words, the transition is restricted or not depending on the combination of the type of time-saving stay and the time-saving game state corresponding to the special miss result won during the game, so that the development of the game after that can be made different depending on the combination. This allows the player to enjoy not only whether or not to transition to a specific game state, but also which combination will result, making it possible to increase the interest.

The priority of the ceiling time-saving game state is set higher than other time-saving game states, so that transition to the ceiling time-saving game state takes priority even if the ceiling number of times is reached in either sudden time-saving game state A or B. More specifically, even if the ceiling number of times is reached in a situation in which the expected value of winning at the second operating port 63 is higher in sudden time-saving game state A than in the ceiling time-saving game state, switching to the ceiling time-saving game state is performed.

The ceiling time-saving game state is entered based on the cumulative number of misses, so the player can predict the transition to the ceiling time-saving game state before the number of misses reaches the ceiling number (before the transition trigger is established). For this reason, if the transition to the ceiling time-saving game state is not made even though the number of misses has actually reached the ceiling number and the transition trigger is established, the player is likely to notice that the transition to the ceiling time-saving game state has not occurred. In this case, there is a concern that the player will be confused as to what happened after reaching the ceiling, which may lead to a decrease in motivation to play. In this regard, by suddenly prioritizing the transition to the ceiling time-saving game state over the continuation of time-saving game state A, it is possible to avoid such confusion and suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

<Modification 8>
A sixth modified example of the third embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 299 to 308. In these figures, the same components as those in the third embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In this modified example, the sudden time-saving game state that has been put on hold due to a special miss during the time-saving game state is released if a specified release condition is met before the transition timing. The configuration of this modified example will be explained in detail below.

The sudden time-saving game state according to this modified example is the same as the sudden time-saving game state according to modified example 3 (Fig. 260(a)). The upper limit of reserved sudden time-saving game states is set to the same number as the number of types of sudden time-saving game states (e.g., three), as in modified example 3. The RAM 314 is also provided with a counter area 560 for the time-saving game state and an occurrence order information storage area 565, and is configured to perform transitions in an order corresponding to the occurrence order of multiple reserved time-savings that occurred during the time-saving game state, as in modified example 3.

<About the special chart win/loss table and special miss results for low probability mode>
The special winning/losing table and special losing results for the low probability mode in this modified example will be explained with reference to Figures 299 and 300.

As shown in FIG. 299(a), in the special chart win/lose table for the low probability mode in this modified example, the possible results are set as a jackpot result, a special miss result, and a normal miss result. Of these, the proportion of special miss results is higher than in the special chart win/lose table for the low probability mode in the third embodiment (FIG. 215(a)). Specifically, of the possible values of "0" to "2999" for the jackpot random number counter C1, a total of 40 values from "10" to "49" are assigned to special miss results, and the probability of getting a special miss result is set to 40/3000.

As shown in FIG. 299(b), in this modified example, six types of special failure results, A to F, are set as the types of special failure results. Of these, three types of special failure results, A to C, are the same as the special failure results A to C in the above third embodiment and modified example 1, etc., and correspond to sudden transitions to time-saving game states A to C and the occurrence of reservations. However, the probability of winning any of the special failure results A to C is higher than in the above third embodiment and modified example 1 (1/300), and is set to 1/100.

As shown in Figure 300(a), the respective ratios of special failure results A to C increase in the order of special failure result C < special failure result A < special failure result B. In other words, of special failure results A to C, special failure result C is the most likely to be a win, and when in the time-saving play state, it is the most likely to suddenly result in the reservation of time-saving play state B.

In Figure 299(b), the remaining three types of special miss results D through F correspond to the cancellation (cancellation) of the reserved state. In other words, if the result of the special chart win/loss lottery is a special miss result D through F while the time-saving play state is reserved, the reserved state is cancelled without transitioning to the time-saving play state.

As shown in FIG. 300(c), the special failure results D to F correspond to the types of sudden time-saving game states; specifically, the special failure result D corresponds to the sudden time-saving game state A, the special failure result E corresponds to the sudden time-saving game state B, and the special failure result F corresponds to the sudden time-saving game state C. In other words, when the special failure result D occurs, the reservation of the sudden time-saving game state A is canceled, when the special failure result E occurs, the reservation of the sudden time-saving game state B is canceled, and when the special failure result F occurs, the reservation of the sudden time-saving game state C is canceled.

However, for example, if the special miss result D occurs when the time-saving game state A is not suddenly reserved, or if the special miss result D to F occurs when there is no corresponding reserved time-saving state, the cancellation of the reserved state is not executed. In other words, it merely functions as a lottery result that does not result in a transition to a jackpot game state, and is equivalent to a normal miss result.

As shown in Figure 299(b), the probability of winning one of the special losing results D to F is lower than the probability of winning one of the special losing results A to C (1/100), and is specifically set to 1/300. In other words, the system is structured so that cancellations are less likely to occur than reservations.

Also, as shown in FIG. 300(b), the ratios of the special failure results D through F are different, and specifically, the ratio of the special failure result D is lower than the special failure results E and F. In other words, the probability of the special failure result D is lower than the probability of the special failure results E and F, and once the sudden time-saving game state A is suspended, it is less likely to be canceled than the other sudden time-saving game states B and C.

Note that the numbers and values of the random numbers shown in Figures 299 and 300 are merely examples, and the probabilities of various results and the corresponding random numbers can be set arbitrarily, for example, the probability of winning one of the special losing results D to F is higher than the probability of winning one of the special losing results A to C.

<Processing for determining transition to sudden time-saving gaming state>
The process for determining whether or not the game state is suddenly changed to the time-saving game state according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 301. This process is executed in step Sc711 of the fluctuation start process (Fig. 222) by the main control device 162, and is executed instead of the process for determining whether or not the game state is suddenly changed to the time-saving game state in Fig. 261(a). In Fig. 301, the same process as in Fig. 261(a) is assigned the same step number, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sc1401, it is determined whether the result of the current special drawing lottery is a special miss result. If the result of the special drawing lottery is a special miss result, it proceeds to step Sc8101 and it is determined whether the current special miss result is any of special miss results A to C, that is, whether it corresponds to a sudden transition to a time-saving play state or the occurrence of a reservation. This determination is made by referring to the special miss type flag (step Sc707) set in the various flags storage area 314e of RAM 314.

If the current special miss result is any of special miss results A to C, in step Sc1402, it is determined whether any support flags are set in the various flag storage area 314e. If none of the support flags are set, that is, if the current game state is the normal game state, in step Sc1403, a sudden time-saving start flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sc1402 (if any of the support flags is set), that is, if the current game state is a normal time-saving game state or a sudden time-saving game state, a reservation process is executed in step Sc4301, and then the process for determining whether to transition to the sudden time-saving game state is terminated. The reservation process is a process for reserving the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to a special miss result when a special miss result occurs during the time-saving game state.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sc8101 (if it is not one of the special miss results A to C), that is, if the current special miss result is one of the special miss results D to F and corresponds to the cancellation (release) of the reserved state, the process proceeds to step Sc8102 and the reservation release process is executed. The reservation release process is intended to cancel the reserved state. After execution of step Sc8102, the process for determining the transition to the sudden time-saving game state is terminated.

<Processing for canceling reservation>
The reservation release process in step Sc8102 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step Sc8201, it is determined whether any of the reservation flags are set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. If any of the reservation flags are set, i.e., if the sudden time-saving game state is in a reserved state, the process proceeds to step Sc8202, where the type of the current special failure result is identified. The reservation release process is executed if the current special failure result is special failure result D to F, and in step Sc8202 it is determined which of special failure results D to F the current special failure result is.

In step Sc8203, it is determined whether a corresponding reserved time-saving is present. Specifically, it is determined whether the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to the type of special miss result identified in step Sc8202 is on hold. For example, if the type of special miss result identified in step Sc8202 is special miss result D, it is determined whether the reservation flag A, which indicates that the sudden time-saving game state A is on hold, is set by referring to the various flag storage area 314e.

If a corresponding reserved time-saving state exists, proceed to step Sc8204, and clear the corresponding reserved flag in the various flag storage area 314e. This cancels (releases) the reservation of the sudden time-saving game state that corresponds to this special miss result.

In step Sc8205, a reservation release flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The reservation release flag is used by the MPU 312 to know that the reservation state has been cancelled.

In step Sc8206, a reservation release command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143. The reservation release command notifies that the reservation state has been cancelled, and includes information indicating the type of time-saving game state for which the reservation state has been cancelled.

In step Sc8207, the order of occurrence stored in the order of occurrence information storage area 565 is updated. For example, if the order of occurrence is stored as sudden time-saving game state C, sudden time-saving game state B, and sudden time-saving game state A, and the reservation of sudden time-saving game state B is canceled, the contents stored in the order of occurrence information storage area 565 are changed so that the order of occurrence of sudden time-saving game state A is moved up.

After step Sc8207 is executed, the reservation release process is terminated. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sc8201 (if none of the reservation flags are set) or if a negative judgment is made in step Sc8203 (if there is no corresponding reserved time reduction), the reservation status is not cancelled (released) and the reservation release process is terminated without executing the processes in and after step Sc8204.

<Setting process for variable display time>
The process of setting the variable display time according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 303. This process is executed in step Sc712 of the variable start process (Fig. 222), and is executed in place of the process of setting the variable display time in Fig. 263. In Fig. 303, the same process as in Fig. 263 is given the same step number, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sc1604 (if the game is not in a high probability game state), this means that the current game state is a time-saving game state (normal time-saving game state or sudden time-saving game state). In this case, step Sc8301 judges whether the result of this special chart winning/losing lottery is a special losing result. If it is a special losing result, the process proceeds to step Sc8302, where it is judged whether this special losing result is one of special losing results A to C, that is, whether it corresponds to a transition to a sudden time-saving game state or the occurrence of a reservation.

If the result is any of the special miss results A to C, in step Sc8303, the variable display time table A for special misses (Fig. 232 (b)) is obtained as the current variable display time table. In this variable display time table A, only variable pattern Z1 (special reach miss A presentation) is set as a selectable variable pattern. Therefore, if the current special miss result is any of the special miss results A to C, a lottery process for the variable display time (step Sc1607) is executed so that a variable pattern corresponding to the execution of the special reach miss A presentation is selected. In other words, if a special miss result occurs that corresponds to a sudden transition to a time-saving game state or the occurrence of a reservation, the pattern display device 75 will notify you of the lottery result each time.

If the determination in step Sc8302 is negative, i.e., if the current special miss result is any of special miss results D to F, then in step Sc8304 it is determined whether or not a flag for canceling the reservation has been set in the various flags storage area 314e of RAM 314. If the flag for canceling the reservation has been set, i.e., if the reservation is to be cancelled for the current game round, then the process proceeds to step Sc8305, where variable display time table C for special misses is obtained as the variable display time table for the current round.

As shown in FIG. 304(a), only the variation pattern Z3 (20 sec) is set as a selectable variation pattern in the variation display time table C. Variation pattern Z3 corresponds to the special reach miss C presentation, and when a variation start command corresponding to variation pattern Z3 is sent to the presentation control device 143, the symbol display device 75 executes the special reach miss C presentation as a presentation for a game round. Here, the special reach miss C presentation will be explained with reference to FIG. 305.

In the special reach-miss C performance, first, as shown in FIG. 305(a), the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are displayed as a reach combination on one of the pay lines L1 to L5 on the display screen G, and the reach display is executed. After that, the middle symbol row Z2 (the symbol row of the final stop row) is switched from a high-speed change display to a low-speed change display, and at that time, as shown in FIG. 305(b), a low-speed change display is performed with a special symbol 721 with a character such as "BAD" placed in a position different from the symbol that forms the jackpot combination. In this way, the change display is performed so that the player can understand the presence of the special symbol 721. Note that FIG. 305(b) shows an example in which the special symbol 721 is placed in the position of the "5" symbol that is the next symbol to the "4" symbol that forms the jackpot combination.

Next, as shown in FIG. 305(c), the special symbol 721, which is being displayed at a slow rate of change, is stopped and displayed on the reach line. In this embodiment, after the reach line is formed by the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, the symbol combination on the reach line where the special symbol 721 of the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed corresponds to the special miss results D to F. Therefore, when the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed in such a symbol combination, it is announced that one of the special miss results D to F has been achieved, in other words, that the result of the lottery has been drawn that corresponds to the cancellation of the reservation.

The variation display time for the variation pattern Z3 (20 sec) corresponding to the special reach miss C effect is longer than that for the variation pattern Z1 (15 sec) corresponding to the special reach miss A effect, which is executed when the special miss result is any of A to C. This is to ensure the execution period for the release effect, which will be described later.

Returning to the explanation of the variable display time setting process (Figure 303), after step Sc8305 is executed, the reservation release flag set in the various flag storage area 314e is cleared in step Sc8306.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sc8304 (the flag for canceling the reservation is not set), that is, if the current special miss result is one of special miss results D to F but the reservation is not to be canceled, proceed to step Sc8307 and obtain variable display time table D for special misses as the current variable display time table.

As shown in FIG. 304(b), the variable display time table D for special misses has variable pattern 21H (complete miss effect) and variable pattern Z4 set as selectable variable patterns. Variable pattern Z4 corresponds to the special reach miss D effect, and when a variable start command corresponding to variable pattern Z4 is sent to the effect control device 143, the special reach miss D effect is executed as a game round effect in the symbol display device 75. The special reach miss D effect is a so-called false effect that is paired with the special reach miss C effect, and it stirs up a sense of crisis about special misses D to F (cancellation of reservation) and then stops and displays the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 with a different symbol combination.

In the special reach-miss D performance, as shown in Figs. 305(a) and (b), after the reach display is executed using the upper pattern row Z1 and the lower pattern row Z3, the middle pattern row Z2 is displayed with a slow fluctuation, including the special pattern 721. That is, the pattern fluctuation performance is executed up to the middle in the same manner as the special reach-miss C performance. After that, for example, the special pattern 721 passes the reach line, and a pattern different from the special pattern 721 in the middle pattern row Z2 is displayed stopped on the reach line, as shown in Fig. 305(d). In other words, while it appears as if the pattern combinations corresponding to the special miss results D to F are established, the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed stopped in such a way that the combinations are not established in the end.

Returning to the explanation of the variable display time setting process (Fig. 303), if a negative judgment is made in step Sc8301 (if the result is not a special miss), this means that the result is a jackpot result or a normal miss result. In this case, the process proceeds to step Sc4505, and a variable display time table for the corresponding time-saving game state is obtained. Specifically, if the result of this win/lose lottery is a jackpot result, the variable display time table for the jackpot (Fig. 232(a)) is obtained, and if the result of this win/lose lottery is a normal miss result, the variable display time table for the normal miss (Fig. 304(c)) is obtained. Note that the variable display time table for the normal miss includes variable pattern Z4 (special reach miss D presentation) as a selectable variable pattern.

After step Sc8303, step Sc8306, step Sc8307, or step Sc4505 is executed, in step Sc1607, the dynamic display time table acquired in each step is used to execute a lottery process for the variable display time (variable pattern). Then, the process from step Sc1608 onwards is executed.

<Performance setting process>
The performance setting process according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 306. This process is started by the performance control device 143 at a predetermined cycle (for example, every 2 msec), and is executed in place of the performance setting process in Fig. 242. In Fig. 306, the same processes as those in Fig. 242 are given the same step numbers, and their descriptions will be omitted or simplified.

In step Sc2506, it is determined whether or not a reservation command has been received from the main control unit 162. If a reservation command has been received, i.e., if a sudden time-saving play state is to be reserved, the reserved time-saving play state (reserved time-saving) is identified in step Sc8401. In this step, the reservation command from the main control unit 162 is analyzed, and it is determined which of the sudden time-saving play states A to C has been reserved.

In step Sc8402, display settings for the reservation display section 731 are made based on the results of the determination in step Sc8401. Here, the reservation display section 731 will be described with reference to FIG. 307.

As shown in FIG. 307(a), in this modified example, a reservation display section 731 is set to be displayed on the display screen G in the time-saving game state. The reservation display section 731 functions as a notification section that notifies the presence or absence of a reserved time-saving play state and which sudden time-saving game state is reserved. This reservation display section 731 is displayed so as not to overlap with the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G, and when reservation images showing the number of reserved plays are displayed on the display screen G, it is displayed so as not to overlap with the display area of those reservation images. Note that, although the reservation display section 731 is located in the lower right of the display screen G in FIG. 307(a), it may be located in another area, such as the upper right or upper left.

As shown in FIG. 307 (b1), the reservation display section 731 has a first reservation display area 731a corresponding to the sudden time-saving game state A, a second reservation display area 731b corresponding to the sudden time-saving game state B, and a third reservation display area 731c corresponding to the sudden time-saving game state C. Each of these display areas 731a to 731c displays reservation images 732a to 732c indicating whether or not a reservation is made for each sudden time-saving game state.

Figure 307 (b1) shows an example in which each of the reserved images 732a-732c is configured with an image showing the type of time-saving game state in text so that the player can easily recognize the presence or absence of a reserved status as well as the corresponding sudden time-saving game status. However, the specific form of the reserved images 732a-732c is not limited to this, and any form can be used as long as the player can recognize the presence or absence of a reserved status, such as configuring the reserved images 732a-732c with a predetermined picture image such as a symbol or character.

In the reservation display section 731, each reservation image 732a to 732c is displayed semi-transparently when the corresponding sudden time-saving game state is not reserved.

In step Sc8402, among the reserved images 732a to 732c, the one corresponding to the type identified in step Sc8401 is set to a display mode corresponding to the reserved state. For example, if the sudden time-saving game state identified in step Sc8401 is sudden time-saving game state A, the reserved image 732a is set to change from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state as shown in FIG. 307(b2). This notifies the occurrence of a reservation of the sudden time-saving game state A. This opaque reserved image 732a is continuously displayed during the period during which the sudden time-saving game state A is reserved in the time-saving game state.

In addition, in step Sc8402, the effect that changes the display mode of each reserved image 732a-732c is set to be executed in the game round that results in special miss results A-C. At this time, the effect may be executed during at least a part of the variable display time of the game round, or during at least a part of the fixed display time, or may be executed across the variable display time and the fixed display time. Note that when the variable display time is used, the effect is configured to start after the symbol rows Z1-Z3 are stopped and displayed in the symbol combinations that correspond to the special miss results D-F.

After execution of step Sc8402 or if a negative judgment is made in step Sc2506 (if a reservation command has not been received), in step Sc8403, it is judged whether or not a reservation release command has been received from the main control unit 162. If a reservation release command has been received, i.e., if the reservation is to be canceled (released), in step Sc8404, the time-saving game state in which the reservation state is released (released time-saving) is identified. In this step, the reservation release command from the main control unit 162 is analyzed, and it is determined which of the time-saving game states A to C the sudden release has occurred for.

In step Sc8405, the display setting of the reservation display section 731 is performed based on the determination result of step Sc8404. Specifically, among the reservation images 732a to 732c, those corresponding to the type determined in step Sc8404 are set to a display mode corresponding to a non-reserved state. For example, if the sudden time-saving game state determined in step Sc8404 is sudden time-saving game state C, the reservation image 732c is set to change from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state as shown in Figures 307 (c1) and (c2). This notifies the user that the reservation of the sudden time-saving game state C has been canceled.

The display settings of the reservation display section 731 are set so that the above-mentioned effects that change the display mode of each of the reservation images 732a to 732c are executed in the game round that results in the special miss results A to C. At this time, the effects are set to be executed during part of the variable display time of that game round, and are executed in the following manner so that the cancellation of the reservation is more easily understood.

As shown in FIG. 308, at timing t3 within the variable display time, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed in the symbol combinations corresponding to the special miss results D to F, and then the reserved display section 731 is enlarged and displayed as shown in FIG. 308(d). Next, the special symbol 721 displayed on the reach line is moved to the third reserved display area 731c (an area corresponding to the sudden time-saving game state in which the reserved state is released) and is displayed so as to pass in front of the reserved image 732c displayed in an opaque state.

As the special symbol 721 passes, the reserved image 732c in the third reserved display area 731c is changed to a semi-transparent state, and the display mode is switched to a state where the symbol is not reserved (Fig. 308(e)). After that, the reserved display section 731 is reduced to its original display size, and the symbols that make up the combination that is not in a reach are displayed in the middle symbol row Z2 on the reach line, to notify the player that the combination is a miss (Fig. 308(f)).

The above configuration gives the player the impression that the reservation has been cancelled because the pattern sequence Z1 to Z3 has been displayed in a state including the special pattern 721. This makes it easy to understand that the reservation has been cancelled and that the pattern combination displayed in a state where it is stopped corresponds to the cancellation of the reservation. In addition, the above configuration makes it possible for the player to strongly associate the special pattern 721 with the cancellation of the reservation, and when the pattern sequence Z2 is displayed in a state in which the special pattern 721 can be seen, or when the special reach miss D performance is executed as a false performance, the player's sense of crisis can be suitably aroused, and the performance effect can be enhanced. Note that the performances of Figures 308(d) to 308(f) can be performed using the remaining variable display time, that is, the period until the confirmation display starts (timing t3 to timing t4).

Returning to the explanation of the effect setting process (Figure 306), after execution of step Sc8405 or if a negative judgment is made in step Sc8403 (if a hold release command has not been received), the process proceeds to step Sc2508, where it is determined whether any game state end command has been received.

<What happens if you get a special miss during the time-saving game mode>
The flow when a special failure occurs during the time-saving gaming state will be described. Here, the flow will be described by taking as an example a case where a special failure occurs suddenly when the time-saving gaming state C has been reserved.

When the special miss result A occurs while the time-saving game state C is reserved during the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state A is suddenly placed in a reserved state. In this case, in the special pattern play round in which the special miss result A occurs, the special reach miss A performance is executed, and the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed stopped in a stopping mode corresponding to the special miss result A (a reach miss pattern combination including the special pattern 511) (Fig. 233 (c)).

In addition, during that game round, the first reservation display area 731a corresponding to the sudden time-saving game state A in the reservation display section 731 on the display screen G is displayed in a manner corresponding to the reserved state. Specifically, the reservation image 732a in the first reservation display area 731a is changed from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state. This notifies the player that the reservation of the sudden time-saving game state A has been acquired.

After that, if a special miss result F occurs while both the sudden time-saving play state C and the sudden time-saving play state A are reserved, the reserved state of the sudden time-saving play state C is cancelled. In other words, the state where both the sudden time-saving play state C and the sudden time-saving play state A were reserved is changed to a state where only the sudden time-saving play state A is reserved.

In this case, in the special symbol play round in which the special miss result F is reached, the special reach miss C presentation is executed, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed stopped in a stop state corresponding to the special miss result F (a reach miss symbol combination including the special symbol 721) (Fig. 305 (c)). Also, in that play round, the third reservation display area 731c corresponding to the sudden time-saving play state C in the reservation display section 731 is changed to a state corresponding to a non-reserved state. Specifically, the reservation image 732c in the third reservation display area 731c is changed from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state. This notifies the user that the reservation of the sudden time-saving play state C has been canceled (disappeared).

Here, all of the special failure results D through F correspond to the cancellation of reserved points, and there is a difference in the probability of winning each of these results; specifically, the probability of getting special failure result D is lower than the probabilities of getting special failure results E and F. For this reason, sudden time-saving game state A is less likely to result in the cancellation of the reserved point compared to other sudden time-saving game states, making it easier for players to expect a transition. By making a difference in the likelihood of cancellation occurring in this way, it is possible to create a sudden time-saving game state in which players are particularly interested in acquiring reserved points, making it possible to increase the interest in aiming to acquire reserved points.

In addition, if the special miss result F occurs and the time-saving game state C is not suddenly reserved, the reservation will not be cancelled. In this case, a complete miss effect or a special reach miss effect D is executed, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed frozen in the symbol combination of a normal miss result or a reach miss result. In other words, it is not clearly indicated that the lottery result corresponds to the cancellation of the reservation.

The modified example described above has the following advantages:

When the time-saving play state is reserved and any of the special miss results D through F occurs, the reservation is cancelled. In this case, the player cannot feel at ease even if the time-saving play state is reserved, and can play while experiencing the thrill of possibly losing the reservation. Furthermore, by making the reservation cancelable after it has been executed, the probability of the reservation occurring in the first place can be set higher than if such a cancellation function is not provided. This increases the frequency with which reservations occur, making it possible to favorably stimulate the desire to play.

Special failure results D to F are set as special failure results corresponding to reservation cancellation, and a type of sudden time-saving game state in which the reservation is canceled corresponds to each of these special failure results. In this case, the player can be made to feel anxious not only about whether the reservation cancellation will be executed, but also about which time-saving game state the reservation will be canceled.

The condition for canceling a reservation is a win on special miss results D to F, and the decision on whether to cancel the reservation and the decision on whether to create a reservation are executed by the same lottery process (special win/lose lottery). This prevents the reservation of the time-saving play state and the cancellation of the reservation from occurring at the same time, preventing the process from becoming complicated or difficult for players to understand. Also, by consolidating multiple decisions into one lottery process, it is possible to simplify the processing structure compared to when each decision is made separately.

The probability of a reservation being suddenly cancelled differs depending on the type of time-saving game state. In this case, it is possible to create a time-saving game state in which a reservation is easily cancelled and a time-saving game state in which a reservation is not easily cancelled. As a result, when a reservation occurs, the player's enjoyment can differ depending not only on the degree of advantage of the reserved time-saving game state (for example, the expected value of winning at the second operating port 63), but also on the ease with which cancellation occurs, making it possible to increase interest.

When the special miss result is D to F, the special reach miss C effect is executed, and the cancellation of the reserved is notified by the combination of the stopped and displayed symbol strings Z1 to Z3. The symbol strings Z1 to Z3 are used to notify whether or not there is a jackpot, so they attract a lot of attention from players, and this configuration makes it possible to effectively prevent players from overlooking the cancellation notification. Also, by adding combinations that correspond to the cancellation of reserved positions, the stopping patterns of the symbol strings Z1 to Z3, which are of great interest to players, are diversified, making it possible to increase the excitement of the symbol game.

The special symbol 721 is moved to the reserved display section 731, and a part of the symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 that is stopped is used to execute the reservation cancellation effect (Fig. 308 (d) to (e)). In this case, the special symbol 721 and the cancellation of the reservation are directly linked, so it is possible to strongly stimulate the sense of excitement when the special symbol 721 is seen in the variable display or when the special symbol 721 is about to be stopped. This makes it possible to appropriately liven up a game that avoids the symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 being stopped in a combination that corresponds to the cancellation of the reservation.

<Other Modifications>
The present invention is not limited to the above-described third embodiment and each modified example, and may be implemented, for example, as follows. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to the third embodiment and each modified example, or may be applied to the third embodiment and each modified example in combination in part or in whole. It is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the third embodiment and each modified example. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed.

In addition, for ease of understanding, some examples are specified as prerequisite configurations, for example, "In variant 1 of the third embodiment," but the following configurations are not limited to application to the specified prerequisite configurations (examples), and can also be applied to other embodiments and variants.

(1) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, the time-saving game state is configured to end when the number of times the special game has been played since the transition to the time-saving game state reaches the upper limit. However, instead of or in addition to this, the time-saving game state may be configured to end when the number of times the small win has been obtained since the transition to the time-saving game state reaches a predetermined specific number (e.g., five times).

In the above case, if a special miss occurs during a time-saving play state, and the transition to the time-saving play state corresponding to that special miss is reserved, the actual number of small wins remaining in the reserved time-saving play state (e.g., 3 times) can be set as the difference number obtained by subtracting the number of small wins remaining in the stay time-saving play state (e.g., 2 times) from the original number of small wins remaining in the reserved time-saving play state (e.g., 5 times).

In addition, if both conditions are met, that is, the number of times the special chart is played reaches the upper limit number of times, and the number of times the small win is won reaches a specific number of times, the time-saving play state may be ended when one of these conditions is met, or the time-saving play state may be ended when both of these conditions are met.

(2) In the third embodiment and each modified example, when various support flags are set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314, the game is switched to the high-frequency support mode (time-shortened game state), and when various support flags are erased from the various flag storage area 314e, the game is switched to the high-frequency support mode (time-shortened game state), and when various support flags are erased from the various flag storage area 314e, the game is switched to the high-frequency support mode when information corresponding to a first value (e.g., a support flag) is stored in a specific memory area provided in the various flag storage area 314e, and when information corresponding to a second value different from the first value (e.g., a non-support flag) is stored in the specific memory area, the game is switched to the high-frequency support mode and when the high-frequency support mode is terminated, the game is terminated. In other words, information corresponding to being in the high-frequency support mode and information corresponding to not being in the high-frequency support mode may be provided, and the transition to the high-frequency support mode and the termination of the high-frequency support mode may be controlled depending on which information is stored (set).

The high-frequency support mode may also be terminated when information corresponding to a second value that is the same as or different from the first value is stored in a storage area other than the specific storage area. In other words, a storage area corresponding to being in the high-frequency support mode and a storage area corresponding to not being in the high-frequency support mode may be provided, and the transition to and termination of the high-frequency support mode may be controlled depending on which storage area the information is stored (set) in.

(3) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples, the variation pattern and the game-time performance have a one-to-one correspondence, but they may also have a one-to-many correspondence. In this case, the performance control device 143 can be configured to obtain a random number for the performance lottery, and to select one game-time performance from among multiple game-time performances associated with one variation pattern using the obtained random number.

(4) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, a value corresponding to the upper limit number of times is set in the support counter area SC when transitioning to the time-saving play state, and the remaining number of times in the time-saving play state is updated by subtracting one from that value each time a special game is played. However, a value corresponding to the upper limit number of times is not set in the support counter area SC when transitioning to the time-saving play state, and the number of times a special game is played in the time-saving play state may be updated by adding one to the value of the support counter area SC each time a special game is played. In this case, the time-saving play state may be ended when the updated counter value reaches the upper limit number of times.

(5) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples, the time-saving game state is reserved when a special miss occurs in a time-saving game state. However, the time-saving game state may be reserved when a special miss occurs in a high-probability game state. Also, a special chart win/lose lottery may be executed during the opening/closing execution mode, and when a special miss occurs in that mode, transition to the time-saving game state corresponding to the special miss may be reserved. In this case, the reserved time-saving game state may be transitioned to after the opening/closing execution mode ends, or may be transitioned to after another time-saving game state ends.

(6) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples, the occurrence of a special miss result is used as a trigger for reserving or transitioning to a time-saving game state, but the configuration may also be such that reserving or transitioning to a high probability game state is performed. In this case, the support mode in the high probability game state may be a high frequency support mode or a low frequency support mode.

In addition, instead of a configuration in which a time-saving play state or a high probability play state is reserved or transitioned to, a specific presentation mode in which a special presentation that cannot be seen in the normal presentation mode is performed or in which a special character or the like appears may be reserved or transitioned to. Also, a state in which a special lottery that is not performed in the normal play state is performed may be reserved or transitioned to. In these cases, it is advantageous for the player in that the player can see the special presentation or the like or can receive a special lottery. Note that a point lottery is one example of a special lottery. A configuration in which a time-saving play state, a high probability play state, or an opening and closing execution mode is transitioned to depending on the points awarded in the point lottery or the total number of points awarded may be used. Also, a special presentation (for example, a character's costume, etc.) may be released, or a secret story about the development of the pachinko machine 10 may be displayed.

(7) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, the time-saving game state is suddenly reserved when a special miss occurs while in the time-saving game state. However, instead of or in addition to this, the time-saving game state may be reserved when the cumulative number of misses reaches the ceiling number while in the time-saving game state.

(8) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples, a special losing result is provided as part of the result of the special winning/losing lottery, but the special winning/losing lottery may be configured to draw whether the result is a big win or a losing result, and if the result is a losing result, a separate lottery (a lottery for the type of losing result) may be performed to draw whether the result is a special losing result or not. In this case, the separate lottery may be performed using other existing random number values such as the big win type counter C2 or the variable type counter CS, or may be performed using a dedicated random number for drawing the type of losing result.

In addition, instead of the type lottery for the losing result, a transition lottery may be held to determine whether or not the transition condition to the third time-saving game state is met. In this case, the lottery may be held using other existing random numbers such as the jackpot type counter C2 or the variable type counter CS, or may be held using a dedicated random number for lottery to determine whether or not the transition condition is met.

In addition, in the special drawing, a lottery may be held to determine whether the result is a jackpot, a special miss, or a normal miss, and if the result is a special miss, a separate drawing may be held to determine the type of special miss. In this case, the separate drawing may be held using other existing random numbers such as the jackpot type counter C2 or the variable type counter CS, or may be held using a dedicated random number for drawing the type of special miss.

(9) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples, a normal time-saving game state is provided, which is entered via an open/close execution mode, in addition to the sudden time-saving game state and the ceiling time-saving game state. However, the configuration may not include a normal time-saving game state. Also, the configuration may not include a high-probability game state.

(10) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples, the time-saving game state is suddenly reserved or transitioned in response to a special miss result, but the time-saving game state may be reserved or transitioned in response to another event. For example, the time-saving game state may be reserved or transitioned based on a game ball entering or passing through a specific ball entry section or a specific passing section provided inside the game area PE or a specific ball entry section. In this case, prize balls may or may not be paid out based on the ball entering or passing through.

Note that a specific ball entry section may not have an opening/closing mechanism and may be a type that is always open, or may be a variable type that has an opening/closing mechanism and can be switched between an open state in which the game ball can or is easier to enter, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot or is harder to enter than in the open state. This also applies to the above-mentioned predetermined ball entry sections.

In addition, in a configuration in which a specific ball entry section or a passing section is provided within a predetermined ball entry section, only the specific ball entry section or the passing section may be provided within the predetermined ball entry section, and a game ball that enters the predetermined ball entry section will always enter or pass through the specific ball entry section or the passing section, or one or more other ball entry sections or passing sections different from the specific ball entry section or the passing section may be provided within the predetermined ball entry section, and a game ball that enters the predetermined ball entry section may be distributed, resulting in a game ball that enters the predetermined ball entry section not entering the specific ball entry section or not passing through the specific passing section. In the latter configuration, a transition trigger to the time-saving game state is established when a game ball that enters the predetermined ball entry section enters the specific ball entry section or passes through the specific passing section, while a transition trigger to the time-saving game state is not established even if a game ball that enters the predetermined ball entry section enters the other ball entry section or passes through the other passing section.

(11) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, the sudden time-saving game state in the event of a special miss is configured to implement a second high-frequency support mode in which the winning probability of the normal map support lottery is the same as that of the normal game state. However, it may also be configured to implement a first high-frequency support mode in which the winning probability of the normal map support lottery is higher than that of the normal game state. In this case, the winning probability of the normal map support lottery in the sudden time-saving game state may be the same as that of the normal time-saving game state that goes through the opening and closing execution mode, or it may be a different probability. For example, in order to ensure an advantage in the game state after the opening and closing execution mode, it is preferable to lower the winning probability of the support in the sudden time-saving game state compared to the normal time-saving game state.

In addition, for the normal time-saving play state that goes through the open/close execution mode, a second high-frequency support mode may be implemented in which the probability of winning the normal support lottery is the same as that of the normal play state.

(12) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples, the type of sudden time-saving game state and the type of special failure result correspond one-to-one, but they may correspond one-to-many. In this case, the number of special failure results corresponding to one sudden time-saving game state may be the same for each sudden time-saving game state, or may be different.

(13) In the third embodiment and each modified example, the corresponding time reduction is reserved when the difference number obtained by subtracting the remaining number of times of the stay time reduction from the upper limit number of times of the sudden time reduction game state (corresponding time reduction) corresponding to the special miss result won midway is 1 or more, but the corresponding time reduction may be reserved when the difference number is a predetermined value (e.g., 10) greater than 1. For example, if the transition to the reserved time reduction (corresponding time reduction) is implemented after the stay time reduction ends and the time reduction game state ends immediately, the impression of unsatisfaction is emphasized, and there is a concern that it may have the opposite effect. In this regard, with the above configuration, if the remaining number of times (difference number of times) at the time of the transition is small, the reservation is not executed, so the occurrence of an event in which the time reduction game state ends early after the transition to the reserved time reduction is suppressed, and the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be suppressed.

(14) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples, the reserved time reduction is transitioned at the end of the stay time reduction, but the reserved time reduction may be transitioned at a predetermined timing during the stay time reduction. For example, the transition may be executed after a predetermined number of play times (e.g., three special game times) have been played since the reservation was generated. In this case, the period of the reservation may be used to execute a continuous presentation (a series of presentations that are performed over multiple play times) to notify the player of the presence or absence of a reservation.

The above transition may also be executed when a predetermined execution condition is met before the end of the stay time reduction. The predetermined execution condition may be winning the same type of special losing result or a special losing result for the transition, or the game ball entering or passing through a specific entry section or a specific passing section provided inside the game area PE or the specified entry section. If the above execution condition is not met before the stay time reduction ends, the reserved state may be canceled (invalidated), or a transition to the reserved time reduction may occur in response to the end of the stay time reduction.

The timing of the transition to the reserved time reduction may also be determined by lottery. The lottery may be held when the reservation occurs, or may be held each time a player plays during the time reduction after the reservation occurs.

(15) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples, the remaining number of times when switching to the reserved time reduction is set to the difference number of times (the number of times obtained by subtracting the remaining number of times of the stay time reduction at the time of the special miss result from the original upper limit number of times of the reserved time reduction), but a predetermined number (reserved upper limit number of times) less than the original upper limit number may be set. For example, regardless of the timing of the special miss winning (the remaining number of times of the stay time reduction), a number of times less than the original upper limit number (for example, 30 times when the original upper limit number is 50 times) may be set. Also, a number of times less than the original upper limit number may be selected from a number of times less than the original upper limit number.

In addition, in the third embodiment and each of the modified examples, the original upper limit number of times may be set as the remaining number of times when switching to the reserved time reduction. Also, the reserved upper limit number of times may be set to a number greater than the original upper limit number (for example, 80 times when the original upper limit number is 50 times).

(16) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples, when deriving the remaining number of times when switching to reserved time reduction, the remaining number of times of stay time reduction at the time of the special deviation result is subtracted from the original upper limit number of times of reserved time reduction. However, the remaining number of times may be added to the original upper limit number. Also, a part of the remaining number of times of stay time reduction may be subtracted, or a part of the remaining number of times may be added.

(17) In the third embodiment and each modified example, when a special miss occurs but reservation is not executed, a longer variable display time is selected and a complete miss effect is executed when a reservation is not executed. However, a variable display time of the same length as that when a reservation is executed is selected and a complete miss effect is executed. Also, when reservation is not executed, a variable display time of the same length as that when a reservation is executed is selected and a special reach miss B effect is executed. However, a variable display time of a different length than that when a reservation is executed (for example, a variable display time shorter than that when a reservation is executed) may be selected and a special reach miss B effect is executed. Also, instead of the special reach miss B effect, an effect that does not correspond to the special reach miss A effect (for example, a specified effect that does not involve a reach) may be executed. Also, when reservation is not executed, a special reach miss A effect (the same type or similar effect as when reservation is executed) may be executed. In this case, a variable display time of the same length as that when a reservation is executed may be selected, or a variable display time of a different length (for example, a variable display time shorter than that when a reservation is executed) may be selected.

(18) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples, the notification corresponding to a win in the special miss result is configured to be executed by the pattern display device 75, but it may also be configured to be executed by another notification unit. Furthermore, the notification is not limited to being by image display, but may be executed by using a light-emitting means such as an LED, or may be executed by operating a decorative movable body (movable role object) for the moving performance in a predetermined operating mode. Furthermore, each of the above notifications does not necessarily have to be a visual notification, and may be an auditory notification in the form of a sound from the speaker unit 29. The same applies to notifications of the remaining number of times the time-saving feature is available, notifications of the occurrence of a reserved time-saving feature, notifications of the transition to a reserved time-saving feature, etc.

(19) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples, a special reach miss effect is executed as a notification corresponding to a special miss result, but a notification corresponding to a special miss result may be made by a game-time effect that does not involve a reach effect. In addition, the notification does not have to be made using the pattern strings Z1 to Z3. For example, a notification corresponding to a special miss result may be made by displaying a predetermined pattern such as a predetermined character on the pattern display device 75.

In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a pattern (so-called fourth pattern) that is displayed in a smaller size than each pattern in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 and that is completely synchronized with the special pattern displayed in the special pattern display section 43 is displayed on the pattern display device 75, a notification corresponding to the special miss result may be made by displaying the fourth pattern in a specific manner different from the normal manner. Also, a notification corresponding to the special miss result may be made by combining the manner of the stopped and displayed fourth pattern with at least a portion of the stopped and displayed pattern rows Z1 to Z3.

The notification corresponding to the special miss result may be given throughout the entire special game round, or may be given during a portion of the special game round. Incidentally, the special reach effects exemplified in the third embodiment and each modified example above are configured so that the player cannot tell whether or not the result is a special miss at the start of the special game round, but can tell that it is a special miss at the end of the special game round, so it can be said that the notification corresponding to the special miss result is given during a portion of the special game round.

(20) In the third embodiment and each modified example, the player can only recognize that a special miss has occurred from the stopping state of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, and cannot or has difficulty in recognizing the type of the special miss (type of sudden time-saving game state). However, instead of or in addition to this, the type may be recognizable or easily recognizable from the stopping state of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3. For example, when the sudden time-saving game state A is reserved, a configuration is conceivable in which a 7 symbol is set as the reach symbol in the special reach miss A performance, or a 7 symbol is more likely to be set than in other sudden time-saving game states (for example, sudden time-saving game state B). Also, when the sudden time-saving game state A is reserved, a configuration is conceivable in which a double reach is set, or a double reach is more likely to be set than in other sudden time-saving game states (for example, sudden time-saving game state B).

(21) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples, the reservation effect (Fig. 248) is executed in the game round in which the time-saving game state is reserved, and the occurrence of the reservation is notified. However, instead of or in addition to this, the occurrence of the reservation may not be notified in the game round in which the reservation is made, and the occurrence of the reservation may be notified in a game round after the said game round (a game round that does not result in a special miss). In other words, the configuration may be such that the occurrence of the reservation is notified immediately or with a delay. Note that the later game round may be the final game round of the time-saving stay, or may be a game round during the time-saving stay (a game round other than the final game round).

(22) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, when the result of the special drawing lottery is a special miss result and a complete miss effect or a special reach miss B effect is executed to conceal the win of the special miss result, the stop result corresponding to the special miss result is displayed on the special drawing display unit 43, but a configuration may also be adopted in which a stop result corresponding to a normal miss result is displayed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make it even more difficult to notice that a special miss result has occurred.

(23) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples, the configuration is such that the release effect (FIG. 249(b)) is executed when a transition to the reserved time reduction is implemented. However, instead of or in addition to this, a configuration may be adopted in which an additional effect is executed to notify the addition of the remaining number of times. Note that the additional effect is not particularly limited as long as it can notify the addition of the remaining number of times, but for example, the additional effect of FIG. 274 in modified example 4 can be executed.

It is also possible to configure the presentation when a transition to reserved time reduction is made to differ depending on the remaining number of times (difference number of times) of reserved time reduction. For example, a release presentation may be executed when the remaining number is a predetermined number (e.g. 20 times) or more, and an added presentation may be executed when the remaining number is less than the predetermined number, or a release presentation may be executed more easily when the remaining number is more than the predetermined number than when it is less than the predetermined number, and an added presentation may be executed more easily when the remaining number is less than the predetermined number than when it is more than the predetermined number. If a release presentation is executed when there are only a few remaining times, there is a concern that the player may feel that the remaining number is not enough compared to the impact of the presentation, but the above configuration can suitably eliminate such inconveniences.

(24) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples, the remaining number of reserved time-saving plays is notified at the time of the transition, but all or part of the remaining number of plays may be notified after the transition. For example, a part of the remaining number of plays (the difference in number of plays) may be notified at the time of the transition to reserved time-saving plays, and the number of plays may be added by an additional performance during the time-saving play state.

(25) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples, an upper limit is set for the number of times that can be reserved, but such an upper limit may not be set. Specifically, if the upper limit of the time-saving game state is 100 times, the number of reserved time-saving areas 562, 612 may be set in a number corresponding to the number of times that the player can stay in the time-saving game state, such as having 100 reserved time-saving areas 562, 612. In this case, even if a special miss occurs in each game during the time-saving state, it is possible to reserve the time-saving game state for all of them. Note that if the upper limit of the number of times differs depending on the type of time-saving game state, the number of reserved time-saving areas 562, 612 corresponding to the maximum number of times may be set.

(26) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples, the upper limit of the number of reservable balls is set to 1, but multiple upper limits may be set. For example, the upper limit may be different depending on the type of time-saving state, such as 1 ball when the time-saving state is a normal time-saving state and 2 balls when the time-saving state is a sudden time-saving state A. Since the frequency of reservations increases the more times a player can stay in a time-saving state, it is preferable to have a higher upper limit of the number of reservable balls in a time-saving state when comparing a time-saving state with a relatively high upper limit of the number of reservable balls with a relatively low upper limit.

(27) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples, the sudden transition to the time-saving game state is executed at the start of the confirmation display in the special game round that resulted in the special miss, but it may be executed after the confirmation display starts. Specifically, the sudden transition to the time-saving game state may be executed during or at the end of the confirmation display in the special game round that resulted in the special miss, or at the start of the next special game round.

(28) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples, the sudden time-saving game state to which a player is transitioned in response to a special miss during the time-saving game state may be configured to be more advantageous to the player than the sudden time-saving game state to which a player is transitioned in response to a special miss during the normal game state. For example, a configuration may be conceived in which, when a special miss occurs during the normal game state, a player transitions to a sudden time-saving game state of a first predetermined number of times with a relatively small upper limit number of times, and when a special miss occurs again during the sudden time-saving game state, a player transitions to a sudden time-saving game state of a second predetermined number of times with a relatively large upper limit number of times (more than the first predetermined number of times).

In this case, regardless of the type of special failure result, if a special failure result occurs during a stay in the sudden time-saving game state, the configuration may be such that the upper limit number of times is the second predetermined number, or even if a special failure result occurs during the sudden time-saving game state, depending on the type, there may be cases where the upper limit number of times is the second predetermined number, or cases where the upper limit number of times is a specific number less than that (for example, the first predetermined number or a different third predetermined number). Also, depending on the type of special failure result during the normal game state, there may be cases where the game is transitioned to the sudden time-saving game state for the second predetermined number of times without going through the sudden time-saving game state for the first predetermined number of times. Note that instead of or in addition to the upper limit number of times, the configuration may be such that the degree of advantage of the sudden time-saving game state is changed by changing the expected value of winning into the second operating port 63.

(29) In the first variant of the third embodiment described above, the reserved time-saving play state is updated when the remaining number of times (difference in number of times) in the time-saving play state corresponding to the special miss result that was won is greater than the remaining number of times (difference in number of times) in the reserved time-saving play state. However, the reserved time-saving play state may be updated each time a special miss result is obtained, regardless of the remaining number of times. In this case, the sudden time-saving play state corresponding to the last special miss result that was won during the stay time-saving play state becomes the final reserved time-saving play state, and a transition to that time-saving play state is implemented.

(30) In the above-mentioned modified example 1 of the third embodiment, when the reserved time reduction is updated, the special reach miss A effect is executed in the special chart game round in which the update is performed, and a notification of the special miss result is made. However, a complete miss effect or a special reach B effect may be executed, and a notification of the special miss result may not be made. In this case, the reserved image 529 may or may not be updated. Also, when the reserved time reduction is updated, a notification of the special miss result may or may not be made. In this case, it is preferable that the special miss reach A effect is less likely to be executed when the reserved time reduction is updated than when the special miss result is won for the first time during the stay time reduction.

(31) In the above-mentioned modified example 1 of the third embodiment, when the reserved time-saving play is updated, the remaining number of times in the reserved time-saving play state is replaced with the remaining number of times in the time-saving play state corresponding to the special miss result that was won, but the added value (total value) of these may be configured as the updated result of the remaining number. Also, when the reserved time-saving play is updated, both the type of reserved time-saving play and the remaining number of times are updated, but only one of them may be updated. For example, only the type may be changed (only the number of normal play times or the mode of the opening and closing of the role play is changed), and the remaining number of times may not be changed. The same applies to the modified example 2.

(32) In the first variant of the third embodiment, the upper limit of the number of reserved times is set to 1, but it may be set to 2 or more. If a special miss occurs when there are two or more reserved time reductions, the reserved time reductions with the smaller difference in number are compared with the difference in number of sudden time reduction game states to which the current special miss result corresponds. If there are two or more reserved time reductions, the transition order may be the order of the special miss results as in the third variant, or may be in order of priority as in the fifth variant.

(33) In the second variant of the third embodiment described above, a higher priority is set for a time-saving game state in which the expected value of winning at the second operating port 63 is relatively high than for a time-saving game state in which the expected value of winning is relatively low. However, the relationship between the expected value of winning and the priority may be reversed, and a lower priority may be set for a time-saving game state in which the expected value of winning is relatively high than for a time-saving game state in which the expected value of winning is relatively low.

(34) In the second modification of the third embodiment described above, the upper limit number of times for each sudden time-saving game state may be different, and a priority may be set according to the upper limit number. For example, a higher priority may be set for a time-saving game state with a relatively high upper limit number than a time-saving game state with a relatively low upper limit number. Also, a lower priority may be set for a time-saving game state with a relatively high upper limit number than a time-saving game state with a relatively low upper limit number.

(35) In the second variant of the third embodiment, a time-saving game state of the same type as the current time-saving game state may be given higher priority than a different time-saving game state. In this case, the opportunity to transition to the same type of time-saving game state after the current time-saving game state ends can be increased. In this case, if a configuration is adopted in which an additional effect is executed as in the fourth variant, the frequency with which the effect is executed can be increased, and the player can be given the impression that the remaining number of times is likely to be increased.

(36) In Variation 2 of the third embodiment described above, the upper limit of the number of reserved times is set to 1, but it may be set to 2 or more. If a special miss occurs when there are two or more reserved time reductions, the reserved time reductions with the lower priority are compared with the priority of the sudden time reduction game state to which the special miss results correspond. If there are two or more reserved time reductions, the transition order may be the order of the special miss results as in Variation 3, or the order of priority as in Variation 5.

(37) In the third modified example of the third embodiment, the number of reserved time reductions may be notified. For example, the number of reserved images corresponding to the number of reserved time reductions may be displayed, or the number may be notified by a number. Also, the number of reserved images not corresponding to the number of reserved time reductions may be displayed (for example, one reserved image may be displayed regardless of the number of reserved time reductions), and the mode of the reserved image may be set based on the number of reserved time reductions. In this case, the number of reserved time reductions can be suggested by the mode of the reserved image. In this case, the mode of the reserved image may have a plurality of modes including a first mode (for example, a blue mode) and a second mode (for example, a green mode), and the second mode is set when the number of reserved time reductions is a predetermined number or more (for example, 2), and the first mode is set when the number of reserved time reductions is less than the predetermined number, or the second mode is more likely to be set when the number of reserved time reductions is a predetermined number or more than the predetermined number, and the first mode is more likely to be set when the number of reserved time reductions is less than the predetermined number than when the number is equal to or more than the predetermined number. These are similar to other modified examples.

(38) In the third variant of the third embodiment described above, if a special failure occurs for the second or subsequent times while in the time-saving play state, the fact that a special failure has occurred is not notified. However, the configuration may be such that a special failure is notified each time a special failure occurs, regardless of the number of times the result has been won.

It may also be possible to determine whether or not the reserved time-saving feature is enabled (whether or not the transition is performed before the counter value set in reserved time-saving area 562 becomes "0" and the reserved state is released), and to switch whether or not to notify that a special miss has occurred (that a reservation for the time-saving game state has occurred) based on the result. In other words, a configuration may be adopted in which a notification that a special miss has occurred is issued when the feature is enabled, and no notification is issued when the feature is not enabled.

(39) In the third variant of the third embodiment, the transition order is not notified when there are multiple reserved time reductions, but this may be notified. In this case, the notification may be made at all times during the stay time reduction, or may be made in a specified case. Examples of the specified case may include a case where a specified operation is performed by an operation means that can be operated by the player, such as the performance operation unit 36, or a case where the result of a specified lottery based on winning at the start port is a predetermined result.

(40) In the third modified example of the third embodiment described above, when the time-shortened game state is reserved, a value corresponding to the upper limit number of times for the time-shortened game state is set in the reserved time-shortening area 562, and the counter value set in the area is updated in parallel with the counter value in the execution time-shortening area 561 to derive the remaining number of times (differential number of times) when a transition occurs. However, a differential number of times may be calculated when the game state is reserved, and the remaining number of times when a transition occurs may be set based on the calculated differential number of times. In this case, a reservation area 314f may be set in the RAM 314 as in the third embodiment, and information on the calculated differential number of times may be stored in the reservation area 314f.

(41) In the third modified example of the third embodiment, the counter value of the first reserved time-shortening area 562a is shifted to the execution time-shortening area 561 to set the remaining number of reserved time-shortening operations when a transition is performed. However, the remaining number may be set by shifting the reference counter area. For example, if counter values are set in the first reserved time-shortening area 562a and the second reserved time-shortening area 562b, the first reserved time-shortening area 562a first functions as the execution time-shortening area 561, the counter value of the area 562a is referenced to manage the remaining number of stay time-shortening operations, and then the counter value of the first reserved time-shortening area 562a is updated to "0", thereby ending the stay time-shortening operation, and the reference area is switched to the second reserved time-shortening area 562b to manage the remaining number of play states in the next time-shortening operation.

(42) In the third modified example of the third embodiment described above, when there are multiple reserved time-saving options, the transition is performed in the order corresponding to the special miss result. However, the transition order may be set based on the remaining number of times. For example, by configuring the transition to start from the option with the fewest remaining times, it is possible to reduce the number of time-saving game states in which the counter value of the reserved time-saving area 562 becomes "0" without a transition being performed, and to suppress the occurrence of invalidation.

(43) In the third variant of the third embodiment, the order of transition when there are multiple reserved time reductions may be determined by lottery. In this case, the order of transition for multiple reserved time reductions may be determined by lottery, or the next reserved time reduction to be transitioned to may be determined by lottery. In the latter case, for example, the order of transition to which of the multiple reserved time reductions to transition to at the end of the stay time reduction may be determined by lottery.

(44) In the fourth modified example of the third embodiment, when transitioning to a reserved time reduction of the same type as the stay time reduction, the additional effect is executed at the end of the stay time reduction, but the additional effect may be executed at a timing during the stay time reduction. Possible execution timings for the additional effect during the stay time reduction include, for example, when a special miss is won, or a specified timing after the win and before the end of the stay time reduction. In this case, the likelihood of each timing being selected may differ depending on the number of times the stay time reduction is remaining when the special miss is reached. For example, if the execution timings for the additional effect include when a special miss is won and a specified timing after the win, it may be possible to configure the additional effect to be executed more easily at the timing after the win when the number of times the stay time reduction is greater.

(45) In the fourth variant of the third embodiment, the reserved maximum number may be set for each type of sudden time-saving game state. For example, a predetermined number (e.g., three) of reserved balls may be allowed for each sudden time-saving game state. The reserved maximum number may also be different depending on the type of time-saving game state. For example, it is conceivable to set the reserved maximum number for a time-saving game state in which the probability of winning the corresponding special miss result is relatively high to a number greater than the reserved maximum number for a time-saving game state in which the probability of winning the corresponding special miss result is relatively low.

(46) In the fifth modified example of the third embodiment, the highest priority is set to the sudden time-shortened game state A, which has the highest expected value of winning the second operating port 63, but the order of expected value of winning does not necessarily have to correspond to the order of priority. For example, the highest priority may be set to the sudden time-shortened game state B or the sudden time-shortened game state C, which have a lower expected value of winning than the sudden time-shortened game state A, or the lowest priority may be set to the sudden time-shortened game state A, which has the highest expected value of winning.

(47) In the fifth variant of the third embodiment described above, the order of transitions to the reserved time-saving state may be determined by combining the order of priority with the order of wins of the special miss results. For example, the order of transitions to the sudden time-saving game states B and C may be adjusted based on the order of wins of the special miss results, and the highest priority may be set for the sudden time-saving game state A so that transitions are made first, regardless of the order of wins of the special miss results.

(48) In the above-mentioned modified example 5 of the third embodiment, a priority is set for the reserved time-saving areas 612a to 612c, but a priority is set for the type of sudden time-saving game state (or special miss result), and the reserved time-saving areas may be configured to correspond to the transition order like the reserved time-saving areas 562a to 562c in modified example 3. In this case, when the first special miss result is won in the stay time-saving, a counter value corresponding to the upper limit number of times is set in the first reserved time-saving area 562a, and when the second win results in a special miss result with a higher priority than the first win, the counter value of the first reserved time-saving area 562a is shifted to the second reserved time-saving area 562b, while the counter value corresponding to the upper limit number of times for the second win is shifted to the first reserved time-saving area 562a.

(49) In the above-mentioned modified example 5 of the third embodiment, the upper limit of the number of possible reserved times is set to the same number as the number of types of time-saving game states that can be reserved, but it may be set to a number that is multiple and less than the number of types (for example, 2). In this case, the priority set for each sudden time-saving game state may also be used to control whether or not to reserve. Specifically, when a special miss occurs in a situation where there are two or more reserved time-saving times, the priority of the reserved time-saving time with the lower priority among them is compared with the priority of the corresponding time-saving time (the sudden time-saving game state to which the special miss results correspond), and if the priority of the corresponding time-saving time is higher, the reserved time-saving time may be replaced. In this case, the priority for the transition order may also be used as the priority for reservation, or each of these priorities may be set separately.

(50) In variant 6 of the third embodiment described above, if the priority of the time-saving game state (corresponding time-saving) corresponding to the special missing result won midway is higher than the priority of the stay time-saving, the transition to the corresponding time-saving is immediately executed, and if the priority of the corresponding time-saving is lower than the priority of the stay time-saving, the transition to the corresponding time-saving is reserved. However, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the transition to the corresponding time-saving is reserved in the former case, and the transition to the corresponding time-saving is disabled in the latter case. Also, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the transition to the corresponding time-saving is immediately executed in the former case, and the transition to the corresponding time-saving is disabled in the latter case. This is similar to variant 7.

(51) In the sixth variant of the third embodiment described above, a configuration may be adopted in which no priority is set. In other words, if a special miss result A occurs in a situation in which the game is in a normal time-saving game state, a transition to the time-saving game state A is suddenly executed immediately, and if a special miss result B occurs, the time-saving game state B is suddenly put on hold. Such a response may be specified in the control program for each combination of time-saving game states. The same applies to the seventh variant.

(52) In the sixth modified example of the third embodiment described above, when the priority of the responsive time reduction is higher than the priority of the stay time reduction, the stay time reduction is stopped and a transition to the responsive time reduction is implemented. However, the stay time reduction may be interrupted and a transition to the responsive time reduction may be implemented. In other words, the stay time reduction may be resumed after the responsive time reduction is completed. This is also true for the seventh modified example.

(53) In the sixth modified example of the third embodiment described above, when a transition to the responsive time reduction is made in a situation where the priority of the responsive time reduction is higher than the priority of the stay time reduction, the remaining number of times the responsive time reduction is used is not notified, but the remaining number of times may be notified. Also, the remaining number of times the responsive time reduction is not generally notified, and may be notified when a predetermined condition is met. The predetermined condition may be, for example, a predetermined operation being performed by an operation means that can be operated by the player, such as the operation unit for presentation 36.

(54) In the sixth modified example of the third embodiment, the remaining number of times for the corresponding time reduction is not indicated by displaying "? times remaining" as the remaining number of times image 523, but the remaining number of times for the corresponding time reduction may be not indicated by not displaying the remaining number of times image 523. Also, another predetermined image may be displayed in front of the remaining number of times image 523, hiding at least a part of the remaining number of times image 523 and making it invisible or difficult to see, thereby making the remaining number of times for the corresponding time reduction not indicated.

(55) In the sixth modified example of the third embodiment described above, when a transition to the responsive time reduction is made in a situation where the priority of the responsive time reduction is higher than the priority of the stay time reduction, a notification corresponding to the remaining number of times assuming that the stay time reduction is continuing is executed. However, the remaining number of times of the responsive time reduction may be made invisible without the notification being executed. For example, after the transition to the responsive time reduction, the display of the remaining number of times image 523 may be immediately switched to "? times remaining."

(56) In the seventh modified example of the third embodiment, only one type of ceiling number of times is set, but multiple types with different numbers may be set. Also, multiple types of ceiling time-saving game states with different upper limit numbers may be set. In this case, multiple types of ceiling numbers may be set and a type of ceiling time-saving game state may be associated with each ceiling number, or one ceiling number may be set and a lottery may be drawn to determine which ceiling time-saving game state to transition to when the ceiling number is reached.

(57) In the above-mentioned variant 8 of the third embodiment, the reserved state is released when the special miss results D to F are achieved, but the reserved state may be released when triggered by another event. For example, the reserved state may be released when the game ball enters or passes through a specific ball entry section or a specific passing section provided inside the game area PE or a specific ball entry section. In this case, it is preferable to provide multiple ball entry sections corresponding to the types of time-saving game states in which reservations can be made, and when a ball enters, the reservation of the corresponding type of time-saving game state is released. Note that the prize balls may or may not be paid out based on the ball entering or passing through.

(58) In the eighth variant of the third embodiment described above, the reserved state can always be released when there is a reserved time reduction, but it may also be configured to have periods during which release can occur and periods during which it cannot occur. For example, if the remaining number of times that the stay time reduction is in progress is a predetermined number (e.g., 10 times) or less, the reserved state may not be released even if the special miss result is D to F. This allows the reserved state to be released just before the reserved time reduction transition is implemented, preventing the player from being overly disappointed.

(59) In the eighth modified example of the third embodiment described above, the reserved states are released one by one. However, instead of or in addition to this, when there are multiple reserved time reductions and a release condition is met, the reserved states of all of those reserved time reductions may be released. Also, even if not all reserved states are present, multiple reserved states may be released when one release condition is met.

(60) In the above-mentioned modified example 8 of the third embodiment, the reservation display section 731 is configured to display the sudden time-saving game states that are not reserved semi-transparently, but the display itself may not be performed. However, by making the display areas 731a to 731c semi-transparent, it becomes easier to see at a glance which sudden time-saving game states each of the display areas 731a to 731c corresponds to, and which time-saving game states are not reserved when reserved time-saving game states and non-reserved time-saving game states are mixed. From this perspective, the configuration of the above-mentioned modified example 8 is preferable.

(61) In the above-mentioned variant 8 of the third embodiment, the reserved state is released when the special failure results D to F are reached, but the configuration may also be such that the stay time reduction is ended at the same time. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to increase the drop when the special failure results D to F are reached, and it is possible to realize even more thrilling gameplay.

(62) In the above-mentioned modified example 8 of the third embodiment, a longer variable display time is set in the game times resulting in special failure results D to F than in the game times resulting in special failure results A to C, but a configuration in which a longer variable display time is more likely to be set may also be used. For example, a configuration may be used in which a relatively long first variable display time and a relatively short second variable display time are provided, and the first variable display time is more likely to be selected in the game times resulting in special failure results D to F than in the game times resulting in special failure results A to C, and the second variable display time is more likely to be selected in the game times resulting in special failure results A to C than in the game times resulting in special failure results D to F.

(63) In the above-mentioned modified example 8 of the third embodiment, the player can only recognize that the special miss result D to F has occurred from the stopped state of the pattern strings Z1 to Z3, and it is difficult or impossible to recognize which type has occurred (which reserved time-saving state is released) from the stopped state of the pattern strings Z1 to Z3. However, instead of or in addition to this, the type may be recognized or easily recognized from the stopped state of the pattern strings Z1 to Z3. For example, a configuration may be made in which multiple modes of the special pattern 721 are set, and each of these modes corresponds to a type of special miss result (a type of time-saving game state in which the reserved state is released). In other words, a configuration may be made in which the type of special miss result (a type of time-saving game state in which the reserved state is released) can be recognized by seeing which mode of the special pattern 721 is stopped and displayed.

(64) In the eighth modified example of the third embodiment, the variable winning device 65 may have a plurality of opening and closing execution modes including a first opening and closing execution mode and a second opening and closing execution mode, and the reserved state of the reserved time reduction may be released when the winning or losing lottery result corresponds to the first opening and closing execution mode in a situation where there is a reserved time reduction, and the reserved state of the reserved time reduction may not be released when the winning or losing lottery result corresponds to the second opening and closing execution mode in a situation where there is a reserved time reduction. By adopting such a configuration, not only can the opening and closing execution mode to be switched to be different depending on whether the winning or losing lottery result corresponds to the first opening and closing execution mode or the second opening and closing execution mode, but also whether the reservation is released or not can be different, which can increase the interest.

In addition, in the above configuration, the second opening and closing execution mode may be configured to be an opening and closing execution mode that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first opening and closing execution mode. In this case, when transitioning to the advantageous first opening and closing execution mode, the reservation is released, but when transitioning to the disadvantageous second opening and closing execution mode, the release of the reservation is avoided. In other words, the disadvantage of the opening and closing execution mode is compensated for by not releasing the reservation, making it possible to reduce disappointment of the player when transitioning to the second opening and closing execution mode.

In addition, configurations in which the second opening and closing execution mode is less favorable than the first opening and closing execution mode include a configuration in which the expected total number of game balls paid out is less in the second opening and closing execution mode than in the first opening and closing execution mode. Such configurations include a configuration in which the second opening and closing execution mode has fewer rounds than the first opening and closing execution mode, a configuration in which the opening period of the variable winning device 65 per round is shorter in the second opening and closing execution mode than in the first opening and closing execution mode, or a configuration in which the upper limit number of winning balls into the variable winning device 65 per round is less in the second opening and closing execution mode than in the first opening and closing execution mode.

(65) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples, the result of the win/lose judgment is a jackpot result, and the game transitions to the jackpot game (open/close execution mode). However, like a so-called type 1/type 2 hybrid machine, the result of the win/lose judgment is a small win result, and the game transitions to the jackpot game when the game ball passes through the V winning port (V winning sensor) during the small win game (a game state in which a variable winning device having a V winning port or a V winning port and a loss port inside is opened and closed) (when the result of the award judgment is a predetermined result and a predetermined game result is reached).

In addition, in the present invention, "transitioning to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state based on the result of a special judgment being a specific result" can be understood to also include the case where the result of the win/loss judgment is a small win result and transitions to a big win game via a V win, as described above.

(66) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples, the pachinko machine is a type in which game balls are paid out, but it may be an enclosed type pachinko machine in which game balls are not discharged outside the machine. In such an enclosed type pachinko machine, when prize balls are awarded as a bonus for winning a prize or the like, it is preferable to award the player a predetermined game value (virtual game medium such as credits) corresponding to the number of prize balls, and to notify the player of information indicating the number of prize balls.

(67) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples, the maximum number of pending information items based on winning at the first actuation port 62 is four, but it may be less than four (it may be one) or it may be five or more. The maximum number of pending information items based on winning at the second actuation port 63 may also be less than four (it may be one) or it may be five or more. The maximum number of pending information items based on winning at each actuation port 62, 63 may be different.

(68) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples, the reserved information based on winning at the first actuation port 62 and the second actuation port 63 is differentiated, but it may be configured not to be differentiated. Also, the reserved information based on winning at the second actuation port 63 is prioritized in the win/loss determination over the reserved information based on winning at the first actuation port 62, but the relationship may be reversed, or the win/loss determination may be performed in the order of winning.

(69) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples, only game balls flowing down the right route can pass through or win the through gate 64 and the second operating port 63, but only game balls flowing down the left route can pass through or win, or game balls can pass through or win from either the right route or the left route. However, in order to add variety to the game, it is preferable to configure the game so that only game balls flowing down one of the right route and the left route can win the first operating port 62, and only game balls flowing down the other of the right route and the left route can pass through or win the through gate 64 and the second operating port 63.

(70) In the third embodiment and each of the modified examples, the patterns displayed variably on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 are configured to scroll in the left-right direction, but the patterns may be displayed lined up on the left, center, and right, and these patterns may be variably displayed by scrolling up and down. In other words, the arrangement direction of the patterns and the scroll direction are not particularly limited. Furthermore, the number of patterns (number of rows of patterns) is not limited to three, and may be two, or four or more.

(71) The present invention can also be applied to other types of pachinko machines that are different from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric device opens a predetermined number of times when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines in which a right is generated and a jackpot is awarded when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines equipped with other devices, arrange ball machines, mahjong ball machines, and other gaming machines.

The present invention can also be applied to non-pinball gaming machines, such as slot machines, which have multiple reels with multiple patterns circumferentially attached, and which start the rotation of the reels by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and which, after the reels stop when a stop switch is operated or a predetermined time has passed, award the player with a special prize, such as a medal payout, if a specific pattern or combination of specific patterns is formed on a winning line visible through a display window.

The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the gaming machine body is supported on an outer frame so that it can be opened and closed, has a storage section and an intake device, and the reels start to rotate when a start lever is operated after a predetermined number of gaming balls stored in the storage section have been taken in by the intake device.

<Fourth embodiment>
The gaming machine according to this embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the pachinko machine 10 described with reference to Figures 1 to 10 in the first embodiment is the same in this embodiment, so the description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries by the MPU 312 of the main control device 162>
The electrical configuration for performing various lotteries by the MPU 312 of the main control device 162 will be described with reference to FIG.

The MPU 312 uses various counter information during play to perform the lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot, the setting of the display of the special chart display section 43, the setting of the display of the normal chart display section 44, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 309, it uses a jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot, a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the type of jackpot such as a guaranteed jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, a random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a variable type counter CS for determining the variable display time of each special chart display section AS, BS in the special chart display section 43. In addition, it uses a normal chart random number counter C3 used for the lottery for determining whether or not the normal power role 63a of the second operating port 63 is in a support state (open state), and a normal chart type counter C4 used for determining the type of the support winning result (normal chart winning result).

Each time counter C1-C4, CINI, and CS is updated, 1 is added to the previous value, and each time it is updated, it is a loop counter that returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in lottery counter buffer 314a set in a specified area of RAM 314. In lottery counter buffer 314a, information corresponding to jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and variable type counter CS is stored in reserved ball storage area 314b, which serves as acquired information storage means, when a win occurs in first actuation port 62 or second actuation port 63.

The reserved ball storage area 314b has a reserved area RE consisting of a reserved area Ra for the first special design and a reserved area Rb for the second special design, and an execution area AE. The reserved areas Ra and Rb each have a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, and the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer 314a is stored in one of the areas as reserved information (special information) according to the winning history of the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63.

In this case, when multiple consecutive wins occur at the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63, the first to fourth areas store the numerical information in chronological order from the first area → the second area → the third area → the fourth area. By providing four areas in this way, up to four winning balls at the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63 can be reserved and stored. In addition, the reserved ball storage area 314b is provided with a total reserved number storage area, and information for specifying the number of winning balls at the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63 that are reserved and stored is stored in this total reserved number storage area.

The execution area AE is an area for moving the values stored in the first area of the reserve area RE when the variable display of the special chart display section 43 begins, and when one game round begins, a win/loss determination is made based on the various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

As for each counter, for example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 2999, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e. 2999). In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 goes through one cycle, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 2999).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of the RAM 314 when the gaming ball enters the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63. More specifically, it is stored in the reserved area Ra for the first special symbol of the RAM 314 when the gaming ball enters the first actuation port 62, and it is stored in the reserved area Rb for the second special symbol of the RAM 314 when the gaming ball enters the second actuation port 63.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the win/lose lottery to determine whether or not there is a jackpot, and the value of the random number that will result in a jackpot win is set in a win/lose table stored in the win/lose table storage area 313a of the ROM 313. As shown in FIG. 310, a win/lose table for a low probability mode and a win/lose table for a high probability mode are set as the win/lose table. In this pachinko machine 10, the lottery modes for the win/lose lottery are a low probability mode (low probability state) in which the probability of a jackpot is relatively low, and a high probability mode (high probability state) in which the probability of a jackpot is relatively high. When the lottery mode is the low probability mode, the win/lose table for the low probability mode is referenced, and when the lottery mode is the high probability mode, the win/lose table for the high probability mode is referenced.

As shown in FIG. 310(a), in the win/lose table for the low probability mode, a total of 10 random numbers from "0" to "9" are set as the jackpot random number values. In other words, the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability mode is set to 1/300.

The lottery result will be a losing result for any random number value other than the jackpot winning value, but in this embodiment, the losing results include special losing results and normal losing results. In the winning/losing table for the low probability mode, a total of 20 random number values from "10" to "29" are set as special losing results, and the probability of getting a special losing result is 1/150.

As shown in FIG. 310(b), in the win/lose table for high probability mode, a total of 50 random number values from "0" to "49" are set as the jackpot winning random number values. In other words, the probability of winning the jackpot in high probability mode is set to 1/60. There are no special losing results set in the win/lose table for high probability mode, and all values other than the random number values that result in a jackpot winning random number are normal losing results.

The probability of winning a jackpot in each probability mode is not limited to the above, and can be set arbitrarily. In other words, as long as the probability of winning a jackpot is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers corresponding to the jackpot are arbitrary. Furthermore, the probability of a special miss result in the win/lose table for the low probability mode is also not limited to the above, and can be set arbitrarily. In this case, the probability of a special miss result does not necessarily have to be higher than the probability of winning a jackpot, and may be the same as the probability of winning a jackpot. Furthermore, the probability of a special miss result may be lower than the probability of winning a jackpot.

The jackpot type counter C2 is used to assign the type of jackpot when a jackpot is hit, and is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e. 99). The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of RAM 314 when the game ball enters the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63. More specifically, it is stored in the reserved area Ra for the first special symbol of RAM 314 when the game ball enters the first actuation port 62, and is stored in the reserved area Rb for the second special symbol of RAM 314 when the game ball enters the second actuation port 63.

The allocation destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a jackpot type table in the type table storage area 313b of the ROM 313. As shown in FIG. 311, a jackpot type table for the first special symbol and a jackpot type table for the second special symbol are set as the jackpot type table. When a jackpot is achieved based on winning the first actuation port 62, the jackpot type table for the first special symbol is referenced, and when a jackpot is achieved based on winning the second actuation port 63, the jackpot type table for the second special symbol is referenced.

As shown in FIG. 311(a), in the jackpot type table for the first special chart, a 4R variable jackpot result and a 4R normal jackpot result are set as selectable jackpot types. Both of these jackpot results result in four rounds of play being performed. Here, a round of play is one in which the variable winning control is performed at least once to change the variable winning device 65 from a closed state to an open state, and then back to the closed state. In this embodiment, the variable winning control is performed once per round of play.

A 4R high probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which, after the open/close execution mode ends, the lottery mode is set to high probability mode, and the support mode in the regular power device 63a of the second operating port 63 is set to high frequency support mode. In other words, when a 4R high probability jackpot result occurs, the game state after the open/close execution mode ends becomes a high probability mode and high frequency support mode state (high probability game state, high probability game state). In this case, the high probability game state continues until the next jackpot occurs (until the next open/close execution mode starts). Incidentally, while the open/close execution mode is being executed, the lottery mode is set to low probability mode, and the support mode is set to low frequency support mode.

In the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the drive mode of the normal power device 63a is controlled so that the frequency of winning into the second operating port 63 is relatively high or low when compared in a situation where game balls are continuously launched into the game area PE in a similar manner. Specifically, in the high-frequency support mode, the normal power device 63a is opened more frequently than in the low-frequency support mode, and the opening period for each opening is also longer than in the low-frequency support mode.

Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the second actuation port 63 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the first actuation port 62 is higher than in the second actuation port 63, but in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the second actuation port 63 is higher than in the first actuation port 62. And when a winning entry into the second actuation port 63 occurs, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so that in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play while minimizing the loss of balls in his or her possession.

In this embodiment, the high frequency support modes are a first high frequency support mode and a second high frequency support mode. Of these, the mode to be entered when a 4R special jackpot result occurs is the first high frequency support mode. The difference between the first high frequency support mode and the second high frequency support mode will be explained later.

A 4R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which, after the open/close execution mode ends, the lottery mode is set to the low probability mode, and the support mode in the normal power device 63a of the second operating port 63 is set to the first high frequency support mode. In other words, if a 4R normal jackpot result occurs, the game state after the open/close execution mode ends will be in the low probability mode and high frequency support mode (time-saving game state).

In the event of a 4R normal jackpot result, the time-saving game state will continue until the number of special game plays resulting from a miss (miss game plays) reaches a pre-defined upper limit (e.g. 100 times). In this case, the number of miss games is counted based on the special game plays after the open/close execution mode ends. When the number of miss games reaches the upper limit, the time-saving game state ends and the game transitions to the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). Note that if a jackpot result occurs before the upper limit is reached, the time-saving game state will end with a transition to the open/close execution mode based on the jackpot result.

In this embodiment, the jackpot type counter C2's "0" to "64" corresponds to a 4R special jackpot result, and "65" to "99" corresponds to a 4R normal jackpot result. In other words, the probability of being assigned to a 4R special jackpot result is set to 65%, and the probability of being assigned to a 4R normal jackpot result is set to 35%.

As shown in FIG. 311(b), in the jackpot type table for the second special chart, a 10R special jackpot result and a 4R regular jackpot result are set as selectable jackpot types.

A 10R guaranteed jackpot result is one in which the number of rounds played is 10, and the game state after the open/close execution mode ends is a highly likely game state. In this case, the highly likely game state continues until the next jackpot occurs. A 4R normal jackpot result is the same as the 4R normal jackpot result in the jackpot type table for the first special chart.

In this embodiment, the jackpot type counter C2's "0" to "64" corresponds to a 10R special jackpot result, and "65" to "99" corresponds to a 4R normal jackpot result. In other words, the probability of being assigned to a 10R special jackpot result is set to 65%, and the probability of being assigned to a 4R normal jackpot result is set to 35%.

In this way, the probability of being assigned to a special jackpot result is the same whether the type table of the first special chart display section or the type table of the second special chart display section is used. However, when a special jackpot result is selected, the type table of the second special chart display section is set to result in a 10R jackpot result, whereas the type table of the first special chart display section is set to result in a 4R jackpot result. In other words, when a special jackpot result is based on winning the second operating port 63, the number of rounds in the open/close execution mode is greater than when a special jackpot result is based on winning the first operating port 62, and it is possible to expect a larger payout of game balls. In other words, a game in which a game ball is won in the second operating port 63 is more advantageous for the player than a game in which a game ball is won in the first operating port 62.

As described above, there is a clear difference in the advantages offered to the player between the first actuation port 62 and the second actuation port 63. Therefore, the player will play in the hope that, of the first actuation port 62 and the second actuation port 63, a win will occur in the second actuation port 63, and as a result, the player will pay more attention to the high frequency support mode, in which the frequency of wins in the second actuation port 63 increases.

In this embodiment, the probability of being allocated to a special jackpot result is the same in the type table of the first special chart display section and the type table of the second special chart display section, but the probabilities may be different. Specifically, the type table of the second special chart display section may be configured to have a higher probability of being allocated to a special jackpot result than the type table of the first special chart display section. Even with this configuration, it is possible to make it more advantageous for the player to have the second operating port 63 win than the first operating port 62. In this case, it is not necessary to configure the second operating port 63 to be more favorable than the first operating port 62 in both the number of rounds in the opening and closing execution mode and the allocation probability to a special jackpot result, and it may be configured so that only the allocation probability to a special jackpot result is favored.

The jackpot type counter C2 is also used to determine the stop result of the image displayed on each special chart display unit AS, BS when the result of the winning/losing lottery based on the winning/losing entry into the operating port 62, 63 is a jackpot. The stop result is determined by referring to the stop result table stored in the stop result table memory area 313d of the ROM 313. In the stop result table, multiple data of the stop result (the jackpot image displayed on each special chart display unit AS, BS) in the case of a jackpot are set in correspondence with the value of the jackpot type counter C2, and when determining the stop result, the data of the multiple stop results corresponding to the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is read out. The same jackpot type counter C2 is used to determine the stop result and the jackpot type, so the jackpot image displayed on each special chart display unit AS, BS corresponds to the jackpot type determined at the time of the jackpot.

In this embodiment, in addition to the time-saving game state that is entered when a normal jackpot result is obtained, a time-saving game state that is entered when the result of the win/lose lottery using the jackpot random number counter C1 is a special miss result is provided. In this case, the time-saving game state is a state in which the lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a second high frequency support mode.

In addition, because a special miss result is a type of miss result, the transition to the above-mentioned time-saving game state will not pass through the open/close execution mode. In other words, when a special miss result occurs, the game state will transition to the time-saving game state as the special game round ends. In the following, when distinguishing between a time-saving game state triggered by a normal jackpot result and a time-saving game state triggered by a special miss result, the former will sometimes be called the "normal time-saving game state" and the latter the "sudden time-saving game state."

As shown in FIG. 311(c), the sudden time-saving game state, which is triggered by a special miss result, continues until the number of miss plays since the transition to this state reaches a predetermined upper limit (e.g., 100 plays). When the number of miss plays reaches the upper limit, the sudden time-saving game state ends and the game transitions to a normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). Note that if a jackpot result occurs before the upper limit is reached, the sudden time-saving game state ends with a transition to the opening/closing execution mode based on the jackpot result.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 309, the variation type counter CS is configured to increment by 1 within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 99). The variation type counter CS is used by the MPU 312 to determine the variation display time in the first special chart display section AS and the second special chart display section BS of the special chart display section 43.

The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time the normal processing described below is executed, and is repeatedly updated during the remaining time in the normal processing. The fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the reserved ball storage area 314b of the RAM 314 when the game ball enters the first actuation port 62 or the second actuation port 63. More specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the reserved area Ra for the first special symbol of the RAM 314 when the game ball enters the first actuation port 62, and is stored in the reserved area Rb for the second special symbol of the RAM 314 when the game ball enters the second actuation port 63.

The allocation destination of the variable display time for the variable type counter CS is stored as a variable display time table in the variable display time table storage area 313c of the ROM 313. The variable display time table will be described in detail later.

The regular winning random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 99, and to return to 0 after it reaches a maximum value (i.e., 99). The regular winning random number counter C3 is updated periodically, and is stored in the regular winning holding area 314c of the RAM 314 when the game ball enters the through gate 64.

The normal winning random number counter C3 is used for the normal winning/losing lottery (support lottery) to determine whether or not there is a normal winning (support winning) result. If the result is a support winning result, the normal power role 63a is changed from a closed state to an open state, and then a role opening/closing game is executed in which the opening/closing control to the closed state is performed at least once.

The random number value that results in a support win is set in a support lottery table stored in the win/lose table memory area 313a of the ROM 313. As shown in FIG. 312, the support lottery tables include a support lottery table for the low-frequency support mode, a support lottery table for the first high-frequency support mode, and a support lottery table for the second high-frequency support mode. When the support lottery is performed, if the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the support lottery table for the low-frequency support mode is referenced, if the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode, the support lottery table for the first high-frequency support mode is referenced, and if the support mode is the second high-frequency support mode, the support lottery table for the second high-frequency support mode is referenced.

As shown in FIG. 312(a), in the support lottery table for the low-frequency support mode, a total of 50 random number values from "0" to "49" are set as the support winning values, and the probability of winning the support is 1/2.

As shown in FIG. 312(b), the support selection table for the first high frequency support mode has a total of 90 values set from "0" to "89", and the probability of winning support is 9/10. In other words, when the first high frequency support mode is selected, the selection mode for the support selection is a high probability mode, making it easier to win support than in the low frequency support mode.

As shown in FIG. 312(c), in the support selection table for the second high frequency support mode, a total of 50 random number values from "0" to "49" are set as the support winning values, and the probability of winning support is 1/2. In other words, in the second high frequency support mode, the selection mode for the support selection is set to a low probability mode, and the support selection is performed under conditions where the probability of winning support is lower than in the first high frequency support mode.

In each support mode, if the random number value does not result in a support win, the lottery result will be a normal miss. In this case, the opening and closing of the reel will not be performed.

The probability of winning a support win in each support mode is not limited to the above, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, as long as the probability of winning a support win is higher in the first high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode, the number and value of the random numbers that result in a support win are arbitrary. In addition, in the above configuration, the probability of winning a support win in the second high-frequency support mode is the same as that in the low-frequency support mode, but the configuration may be such that the probability of winning a support win in the second high-frequency support mode is higher than the probability of winning a support win in the low-frequency support mode. In that case, the probability of winning a support win in the second high-frequency support mode may be the same as the probability of winning a support win in the first high-frequency support mode, or may be lower than the probability of winning a support win in the first high-frequency support mode, or may be higher than the probability of winning a support win in the first high-frequency support mode. Also, the configuration may be such that the probabilities of winning a support win in the low-frequency support mode, the first high-frequency support mode, and the second high-frequency support mode are equal.

Incidentally, as in this embodiment, if the probability of winning support is set to be equal between the low-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode, i.e., if there is no variation in the probability of winning support between these modes, the support lottery table for each of these modes may be made common, and a single lottery table may be provided.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 309, the normal winning type counter C4 is used to allocate the type when a support win occurs, and is configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 99, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e. 99). The normal winning type counter C4 is updated periodically, and is stored in the normal winning type reserve area 314c of the RAM 314 when the game ball enters the through gate 64.

The allocation destination of the game result for the normal winning type counter C4 is stored as a normal winning type table in the type table storage area 313b of the ROM 313. As shown in FIG. 313(a), in the normal winning type table, support winning result A and support winning result B are set as selectable types of support winning.

In this embodiment, multiple types of opening and closing games of the reel are set as the opening and closing games of the reel (opening and closing games of the normal electric reel 63a) that are performed in response to a support win, and the type of support win corresponds to the type of the reel open and closing games. However, the type of reel open and closing games corresponding to each support win result is different depending on the type of support mode in which you are staying. Specifically, if the support win result A or the support win result B is obtained in a low frequency support mode situation, a low prize reel open and closing game is performed, if the support win result A is obtained in a first or second high frequency support mode situation, a first high prize reel open and closing game is performed, and if the support win result B is obtained in a first or second high frequency support mode situation, a second high prize reel open and closing game is performed.

The low prize winning device opening and closing game is a device opening and closing game in which the winning rate (expected winning value) for the second operating port 63 is lower than the first high prize winning device opening and closing games and the second high prize winning device opening and closing games described below, and in which the player is less likely to expect a win in the second operating port 63. The specific form of the low prize winning device opening and closing game is not particularly limited, but for example, it is set to a form having an opening and ending that are relatively long, and an opening period that is relatively short.

For example, as shown in FIG. 313(b), the number of times the normal power device 63a opens (the number of times it is opened and closed) can be set to two, and the device can be configured to have an opening of 5 seconds, a first opening of 0.1 seconds, a closing of 1.5 seconds, a second opening of 0.1 seconds, and an ending of 5 seconds, in that order. In this case, since the opening period of the normal power device 63a is shorter than the firing cycle of the game balls (0.6 seconds), it becomes difficult to win at the second operating port 63. In addition, since the opening and ending periods are long and the opening period takes up a small proportion of the overall period of the device opening and closing game, it is also difficult to win at the second operating port 63.

The first high prize opening and closing game is a game in which the winning rate (expected winning value) for the second operating port 63 is higher than in the low prize opening and closing game, and the player can easily expect to win the second operating port 63. However, the winning rate is lower than the second high prize opening and closing game described below. The specific form of the first high prize opening and closing game is not particularly limited, but for example, it is set to a form having a relatively short opening and closing period and a relatively long opening period.

For example, as shown in FIG. 314(a), the number of times the normal power device 63a is opened can be set to one, and the device can be configured to have a 0.1 sec opening, a 1.5 sec opening, and a 0.1 sec ending, in that order. In this case, since the opening period of the normal power device 63a is longer than the ball launch cycle (0.6 sec), winning at the second operating port 63 is more likely to occur. Also, since the opening and ending periods are short and the opening period takes up a large proportion of the overall period of the device opening and closing game, winning at the second operating port 63 is also made easier.

The second high prize opening and closing game is a game in which the winning rate (expected winning value) for the second operating port 63 is even higher than that of the first high prize opening and closing game, and the player can easily expect to win the second operating port 63. The specific form of the second high prize opening and closing game is not particularly limited, but for example, it is set to a form having a relatively short opening and ending period and a relatively long opening period.

For example, as shown in FIG. 314(b), the number of times the normal power device 63a opens can be set to two, and the device can be configured to have an opening of 0.1 sec, a first opening of 2 sec, a closing of 0.3 sec, a second opening of 2 sec, and an ending of 0.1 sec, in that order. In this case, since the opening period of the normal power device 63a is longer than the firing cycle of the game balls (0.6 sec), it becomes easier to win a prize in the second operating port 63. In addition, since the opening and ending periods are short and the opening period accounts for a large proportion of the overall period of the device opening and closing game, it is also easier to win a prize in the second operating port 63.

As shown in FIG. 313(a), in the normal winning type table, "0" to "49" in the normal winning type counter C4 corresponds to support winning result A, and "50" to "99" corresponds to support winning result B. In other words, the probability of being assigned to support winning result A is set to 50%, and the probability of being assigned to support winning result B is set to 50%.

The allocation probability for each support winning result is not limited to the above, but can be set arbitrarily. For example, the probability of support winning result B may be higher than the probability of support winning result A, or vice versa. Furthermore, the number of types of support winning is not limited to two, but may be one, or three or more.

The regular winning type counter C4 is also used to determine the stop result of the pattern that is stopped and displayed on the regular winning display unit 44 when the support lottery result is a support win. The stop result is determined by referring to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of the ROM 313. In the stop result table, multiple data are set for the stop result (regular winning pattern that is stopped and displayed on the regular winning display unit 44) in the case of a support win, corresponding to the value of the regular winning type counter C4, and when determining the stop result, the data for the multiple stop results that correspond to the acquired regular winning type counter C4 is read out. The same regular winning type counter C4 is used to determine the stop result and the type of support win, so the regular winning pattern that is stopped and displayed on the regular winning type display unit 44 corresponds to the type of support win that is determined when the support win is won.

<Various processes executed by the main control device 162>
Next, a description will be given of timer interrupt processing and normal processing executed by the MPU 312 in the main control device 162 to progress the game. In addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 312 also executes main processing that is started when the power is turned on and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but a description of these processes will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
The timer interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 315. This process is started by the MPU 312 periodically (for example, at 2 msec intervals).

In step Sd101, the reading process of the various winning sensors is executed. That is, the state of the various winning sensors connected to the main control device 162 is read, and the state of the winning sensor (detection information from the winning sensor) is judged and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. For example, if it is judged that a winning has occurred in the first operating port 62, a winning detection flag for the first special symbol is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314, and if it is judged that a winning has occurred in the second operating port 63, a winning detection flag for the second special symbol is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. Also, if it is judged that the game ball has passed through the through gate 64, a winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314.

In step Sd102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 314.

In step Sd103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the regular random number counter C3, and the regular type counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the regular random number counter C3, and the regular type counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values, they are each cleared to 0. The updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 314.

In step Sd104, a winning process for through is executed in response to winning at the through gate 64. In the winning process for through, it is determined whether or not a winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314, and if the flag is stored, the values of the regular winning random number counter C3 and the regular winning type counter C4 updated in step Sd103 are stored in the regular winning area 314c, provided that the number of reserved role pieces stored in the regular winning area 314c is less than four. In addition, if a winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 314e, the winning detection flag is erased and the winning process for the through gate is terminated.

In step Sd105, the winning process for the actuation port 62, 63 is executed in response to a winning entry into the actuation port, and then the timer interrupt process is terminated.

<Winning process for the operating port>
The winning processing for the operating port in step Sd105 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 316.

First, in step Sd201, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the first operating port 62 (initial entry) based on the detection state of the first operating port entry sensor 62a. If it is determined that a game ball has entered the first operating port 62, in step Sd202, a prize ball command is set in the payout control device 181 to pay out three game balls.

In step Sd203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the gaming ball has entered the first operating port 62. In step Sd204, the value stored in the reserved number storage area of the first special symbol reserved area Ra is read, and the start reserved memory number RaN reserved and stored in the first special symbol reserved area Ra is set (hereinafter also referred to as the first start reserved memory number RaN). After that, in step Sd205, an information acquisition process is performed to store the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS, and this winning process is terminated.

If the result of step Sd201 is negative (if no winning has occurred in the first actuation port 62), the process proceeds to step Sd206, where it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the second actuation port 63 (initial winning) based on the detection state of the winning sensor 63c for the second actuation port. If it is determined that the game ball has won the second actuation port 63, a winning ball command is set in the payout control device 181 in step Sd207 to pay out one game ball.

In step Sd208, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the gaming ball has entered the second actuation port 63. In step Sd209, the value stored in the reserved number storage area of the second special symbol reserved area Rb is read, and the start reserved memory number RbN reserved and stored in the second special symbol reserved area Rb is set (hereinafter also referred to as the second start reserved memory number RbN). After that, in step Sd205, information acquisition process is performed, and this winning process is terminated.

Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sd206 (no winning has occurred in the second actuation port 63), this winning process ends.

The prize ball command set in step Sd202 or step Sd207 is sent to the payout control device 181 by the external output process of the normal process described below.

Here, the information acquisition process of step Sd205 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 317.

First, in step Sd301, it is determined whether the start pending memory count N (RaN or RbN) set in step Sd204 or step Sd209 described above is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). If the start pending memory count N is the upper limit, this information acquisition process is terminated, and if it is less than the upper limit, in step Sd302, the start pending memory count N of the corresponding special chart pending areas Ra, Rb is incremented by 1. In step Sd303, the value stored in the total pending number memory area (hereinafter referred to as the common pending number CRN) is incremented by 1.

In step Sd304, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS are stored in the first free memory area of the reserved area for the corresponding special chart display section, that is, the memory area corresponding to the reserved memory number incremented by 1 in step Sd302.

In other words, when the start pending memory number RaN for the first special symbol is set, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS are stored in the first free memory area of the first special symbol holding area Ra, that is, the holding area Ra corresponding to the start pending memory number RaN for the first special symbol that was incremented by 1 in step Sd302.

In addition, when the start pending memory number RbN for the second special chart is set, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS are stored in the first free memory area of the reserve area Rb for the second special chart, that is, the reserve area Rb corresponding to the start pending memory number RbN for the second special chart that was incremented by 1 in step Sd302.

In step Sd305, a display update process is executed for the special chart reserved number display section AM of the main display unit 81. In the special chart reserved number display section AM, it is possible to display the reserved number for the first special chart and the reserved number for the second special chart separately. In the display update process of step Sd305, if the current ball entry destination (winning destination) is the first operating port 62, the display of the reserved number for the first special chart is updated, and if the current ball entry destination (winning destination) is the second operating port 63, the display of the reserved number for the second special chart is updated.

In step Sd306, a hold command is set as a transmission target to the performance control device 143. The hold command includes information indicating whether the first or second special pattern is the starting winning, information indicating the number of holds, etc. After step Sd306 is executed, this information acquisition process ends.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 318. Normal processing is processing that starts after main processing that is started when the power is turned on is executed, and in normal processing, main processing of the game is executed. In summary, the processing of steps Sd401 to Sd408 is executed as a regular processing with a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps Sd409 to Sd411 is executed in the remaining time.

In normal processing, first, external signal output processing is executed in step Sd401. In the external signal output processing in step Sd401, output data such as the timer interrupt processing or the commands set in the previous normal processing is sent to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is sent to the payout control device 181. In addition, if a performance command such as a fluctuation start command, type command, or fluctuation end command is set, it is sent to the performance control device 143.

In step Sd402, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 314.

In step Sd403, a special chart play control process is executed to control play during each special chart play. In the special chart play control process, a jackpot determination and display control of the special chart display unit 43 are performed. In step Sd404, a game state transition process is executed. This game state transition process transitions the game state to an open/close execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like. The special chart play control process in step Sd403 and the game state transition process in step Sd404 will be described in detail later.

In step Sd405, a normal play control process is executed to control play during a normal play. In the normal play control process, a support lottery (a lottery for determining whether a normal play is a win or lose) and display control of the normal play display unit 44 are performed. In step Sd406, an electric role support process is executed to drive and control the normal play device 63a provided in the second operating port 63. The normal play control process in step Sd405 and the electric role support process in step Sd406 will be described in detail later.

In step Sd407, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 110 is excited once every predetermined period (e.g., 0.6 sec), provided that a launch permission signal is input from the power supply and launch control device 191. This causes the game ball to be launched toward the game area PE.

In step Sd408, it is determined whether a power outage flag is stored in the backup area of RAM 314. The power outage flag is set by the NMI interrupt process that is executed when a power outage occurs, and is used by MPU 312 to detect the occurrence of a power outage.

If the power outage flag is not stored (if no power interruption has occurred), step Sd409 determines whether it is time to execute the next normal process, i.e., whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current normal process. If the predetermined time has not elapsed since the start of the current normal process, step Sd410 updates the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches its maximum value. The updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is then stored in the corresponding area of RAM 314.

In step Sd411, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the corresponding area of RAM 314.

If the determination in step Sd409 is positive (a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of this normal processing), the process returns to step Sd401 and executes the processing from step Sd401 onwards.

In this way, after executing the process of step Sd408, the remaining period until the timing for executing the next normal process is reached is used to repeatedly update the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS. Here, since the execution time of each process of steps Sd401 to Sd408 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the timing for executing the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (i.e., the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be randomly updated, and the variation type counter CS can also be randomly updated in the same way.

If the judgment in step Sd408 is positive (the power outage flag is stored), the process proceeds to step Sd412, where the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited. In step Sd413, the value of the stack pointer of the MPU 312 is stored in the backup area of the RAM 314, and in step Sd414, a power outage command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143. By transmitting the power outage command, the performance control device 143 is notified of the occurrence of a power outage state.

In step Sd415, a RAM judgment value is calculated and saved in a backup area. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of RAM 314. In step Sd416, access to RAM 314 is prohibited, and an infinite loop continues until the power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed. Note that even after the power is completely cut off, power for storing and maintaining data in RAM 314 is supplied from the power supply and launch control device 191, so the information stored in RAM 314 before the power was cut off is retained in the same state for a specified period of time (for example, one or two days).

<Special chart game play control processing>
The game play control processing of step Sd403 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 319.

First, in step Sd501, it is determined whether or not the opening and closing execution mode using the variable winning device 65 is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening and closing execution mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. The opening and closing execution mode flag is used by the MPU 312 to know that the opening and closing execution mode is in progress.

If the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress, in step Sd502, it is determined whether the special chart display unit 43 is displaying a confirmed image. Specifically, it is determined whether a confirmed display flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The confirmed display flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine whether a confirmed display is being performed on the first special chart display unit AS or the second special chart display unit BS.

If the special chart display unit 43 is not displaying a fixed value, step Sd503 determines whether the special chart display unit 43 is displaying a variable value. Specifically, it determines whether a variable display flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The variable display flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine whether a variable display is being performed on the first special chart display unit AS or the second special chart display unit BS.

If the special chart display unit 43 is not displaying a variable, step Sd504 determines whether the common reserve number CRN is "0". If the common reserve number CRN is "0", this means that the start reserve memory numbers RaN and RbN are "0" for both the first actuation port 62 and the second actuation port 63. Therefore, if the common reserve number CRN is "0", there is no reserve information to be executed, and the special chart play count control process is terminated.

If the common reserved number CRN is not "0", in step Sd505, a data setting process is executed to set the data stored in the first special chart reserved area Ra or the second special chart reserved area Rb for variable display, and in step Sd506, a variable start process is executed to start the variable display in the special chart display unit 43, and then this game round control process is terminated.

The data setting process in step Sd505 and the change start process in step Sd506 are now described in detail.

First, the data setting process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 320.

First, in step Sd601, it is determined whether the second start pending memory count RbN reserved in the second special symbol reservation area Rb is "0". If the second start pending memory count RbN is "0", data setting processing for the first special symbol (first actuation port 62) is executed in steps Sd602 to Sd608, and if the second start pending memory count RbN is not "0", data setting processing for the second special symbol (second actuation port 63) is executed in steps Sd609 to Sd615.

As already explained, when the common reserved number CRN is 1 or more, the data setting process is performed. The situation in which the data setting process is performed means that at least one of the first start reserved memory number RaN and the second start reserved memory number RbN is 1 or more. In this case, the data setting process is configured to first determine whether the second start reserved memory number RbN is "0" or not, and to execute the process related to the reserved information for the first special symbol on the condition that the second start reserved memory number RbN is "0", that is, there is no reserved information for the second special symbol. Therefore, when reserved information is stored in both the first special symbol reserved area Ra and the second special symbol reserved area Rb, the reserved information for the second special symbol (second operating port 63) stored in the second special symbol reserved area Rb is processed preferentially.

In the data setting process for the first special chart, first in step Sd602, the first start reserved memory number RaN in the reserved area Ra for the first special chart is decremented by 1. In step Sd603, the common reserved number CRN is decremented by 1. In step Sd604, the data stored in the first area of the reserved area Ra for the first special chart is moved to the execution area AE.

In step Sd605, a process is executed to shift the data (reserved information such as the jackpot random number counter C1) stored in the memory area of the reserved area Ra for the first special chart. In this process, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in the second to fourth areas is sequentially moved to the lower areas.

In step Sd606, it is determined whether or not a second special pattern flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. The second special pattern flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that there is pending information for the second operating port 63. If the second special pattern flag is stored, the second special pattern flag is erased in step Sd607.

After execution of step Sd607 or if a negative judgment is made in step Sd606 (if the second special chart flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step Sd608, where a shift command (shift occurrence information) is set to notify the performance control device 143 that a shift has been made in the reserved area data. In this case, a shift command is selected from the command information storage area 313e of the ROM 313, the shift command including information that the reserved area that is the subject of this data shift corresponds to the first special chart reserved area Ra, i.e., information that the reserved area corresponds to the first operating port 62, and the selected shift command is set as the command to be sent to the performance control device 143. After that, this data setting process is terminated.

The shift command set in step Sd608 is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sd401 of normal processing (Fig. 318). Based on the received shift command, the performance control device 143 executes processing to change the display in the first reserved display area Ga of the pattern display device 75 in response to the reduction in the number of reserved items.

In the data setting process for the second special chart, first in step Sd609, the second start reserved memory number RbN in the reserved area Rb for the second special chart is decremented by 1. In step Sd610, the common reserved number CRN is decremented by 1. In step Sd611, the data stored in the first area of the reserved area Rb for the second special chart is moved to the execution area AE.

In step Sd612, a process is executed to shift the data (reserved information such as the jackpot random number counter C1) stored in the memory area of the reserved area Rb for the second special symbol. In step Sd613, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e. If the second special symbol flag is not stored, the second special symbol flag is set in step Sd614.

After execution of step Sd614 or if a positive judgment is made in step Sd613 (if the second special chart flag is stored), the process proceeds to step Sd615, where a shift command (shift occurrence information) is set, which is information for making the performance control device 143, which is the sub-side control device, recognize that a shift of data in the reserved area has occurred. In this case, a shift command is selected from the command information storage area 313e of the ROM 313, which includes information that the reserved area that is the subject of this data shift corresponds to the reserved area Rb for the second special chart, i.e., information that it corresponds to the second operating port 63, and the selected shift command is set as the command to be sent to the performance control device 143. After that, this data setting process is terminated.

The shift command set in step Sd615 is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sd401 of the normal processing (Fig. 318). Based on the received shift command, the performance control device 143 executes processing to change the display in the second reserved display area Gb of the pattern display device 75 in response to the reduction in the number of reserved items.

Next, the fluctuation start process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 321.

First, in step Sd701, a win/loss determination is made by referring to the win/loss table corresponding to the current game state. Specifically, if the current lottery mode is the low probability mode, a win/loss determination is made by referring to the win/loss table for the low probability mode (Figure 310(a)), and if the current lottery mode is the high probability mode, a win/loss determination is made by referring to the win/loss table for the high probability mode (Figure 310(b)). In this step, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the random number for the jackpot in the win/loss table being referenced.

In step Sd702, it is determined whether the result of the hit/miss determination in step Sd701 is a jackpot win or not. If it is a jackpot win, in step Sd703, the corresponding jackpot type table is referenced to determine the jackpot type (lottery for the jackpot type). Specifically, if the current jackpot result is a jackpot result based on the hit/miss lottery for the first special chart, the type is determined by referring to the jackpot type table for the first special chart (Fig. 311(a)), and if the current jackpot result is a jackpot result based on the hit/miss lottery for the second special chart, the type is determined by referring to the jackpot type table for the second special chart (Fig. 311(b)). For example, in the case of type determination based on the jackpot type table for the first special chart, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE belongs to a numerical range of the 4R variable jackpot result or the 4R normal jackpot result.

In step Sd704, a jackpot type flag corresponding to the jackpot type selected by the type determination in step Sd703 is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. For example, if the selected jackpot type is 4R normal jackpot result A, the 4R normal jackpot A flag is set.

In step Sd705, the stop result for the jackpot is set by referring to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of the ROM 313. Specifically, the stop result corresponding to the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is read from the stop result table and set as the stop result for the current game round.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sd702 (if the jackpot has not been won), the process proceeds to step Sd706, where it is judged whether the result of the win/loss judgment in step Sd701 is a special loss result. If it is a special loss result, a special loss flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e in step Sd707. The special loss flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that the result of this win/loss judgment is a special loss result.

In step Sd708, the stop result for the special miss is set by referring to the stop result table. In the stop result table, data of a unique stop result corresponding to the special miss result is set, and in this step, that data is read out and set as the stop result for the current game round.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sd706 (if the result is not a special miss), the process proceeds to step Sd709, where the stop result for the current game round is set as the stop result for a normal miss. In this embodiment, only one type of stop result for a normal miss is provided, and that stop result is set in step Sd709.

After execution of step Sd705, step Sd708, or step Sd709, in step Sd710, a high frequency support mode update process is executed to update the number of times the special chart has been played in the high frequency support mode. In step Sd711, a sudden time-saving play state transition determination process is executed to determine whether or not a transition trigger to the sudden time-saving play state has occurred. In step Sd712, a variable display time setting process is executed to draw a variation pattern and set the variable display time. Details of steps Sd710 to Sd712 will be described later.

In step Sd713, a change display flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The change display flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that a change display for a special game round is in progress.

In step Sd714, a variation start command and a type command are set as targets for transmission to the performance control device 143. The variation start command contains information on the variation pattern, and a different variation pattern is set for each game state, and also a different variation pattern is set depending on whether it is a jackpot or a miss. Therefore, by analyzing the variation pattern from the variation start command, the performance control device 143 can grasp not only information on the variation display time, but also whether or not there is a jackpot and the current game state. Furthermore, the type command contains information on the type of jackpot. Note that the type command is set only when the result of the win/lose determination is a jackpot.

In step Sd715, the display of the special symbol display section 43 begins to change. At that time, if the current special symbol game is based on winning the first operating port 62, the image in the first special symbol display section AS is displayed in a changing manner, and if it is based on winning the second operating port 63, the image in the second special symbol display section BS is displayed in a changing manner. After step Sd715 is executed, the change start process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the special chart play count control process (Fig. 319), after step Sd506 is executed, the special chart play count control process is terminated. Also, if a positive judgment is made in step Sd501 (opening/closing execution mode is in progress), the special chart play count control process is terminated without executing the processes in steps Sd502 and onward. In other words, if the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, no variable display is performed on the special chart display unit 43 even if reserved information exists.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sd503 (if the special chart display unit 43 is displaying a change), the process proceeds to step Sd507, where it is judged whether or not the change display time for the current special chart play round has elapsed. If the change display time has not elapsed, a change display process is executed in step Sd508. In the change display process, the display of the special chart display unit related to the current play round is controlled (each display segment is controlled to emit light) so that each display segment is turned on and off in a predetermined order. After execution of step Sd508, the special chart play round control process is terminated.

If the variable display time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step Sd509, where the variable display flag set in the various flag storage area 314e is cleared. In the following step Sd510, high-frequency support mode termination processing is executed to terminate the high-frequency support mode. In step Sd511, sudden transition processing to the time-shortened game state is executed. The sudden transition processing to the time-shortened game state is intended to transition the game state to the time-shortened game state suddenly. Details of steps Sd510 and Sd511 will be described later.

In step Sd512, the process for starting the confirmed display is executed, and then the special symbol game count control process is terminated. In the process for starting the confirmed display, the special symbol display unit 43 is controlled to perform a stopped display of the image with the stopping result set in step Sd705, step Sd708, or step Sd709. In addition, in step Sd512, the confirmed display time for continuing the above-mentioned stopped display is also set.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sd502 (if the special symbol display unit 43 is displaying a fixed symbol), the process proceeds to step Sd513, where a process for terminating the fixed symbol display is executed. In the process for terminating the fixed symbol display, it is judged whether or not the fixed symbol display time set in step Sd512 has elapsed, and if so, the special symbol display unit 43 is controlled to terminate the stationary display of the symbol. Note that if there is no next pending information when the fixed symbol display time has elapsed, the stationary display is controlled to continue as is until a winning entry occurs in the operation port 62, 63. After step Sd513 is completed, the special symbol play count control process is terminated.

<Game Status Transition Processing>
The game state transition processing of step Sd404 (Figure 318) will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 322.

First, in step Sd901, it is determined whether or not the game is in the open/close execution mode. If the game is not in the open/close execution mode, the program proceeds to step Sd902, where it is determined whether or not the special game play has ended (whether or not the final display on the special game display unit 43 has ended). If the special game play has not ended, the game state transition process is terminated.

If it is the end timing of the special game round, in step Sd903, it is determined whether the game result of this special game round corresponds to a transition to the open/close execution mode, i.e., whether the win/loss judgment result is a jackpot. In this step, the jackpot type flag (step Sd704) is stored in the various flags storage area 314e of RAM 314 to determine whether or not there is a jackpot. If the game result of this special game round does not correspond to a transition to the open/close execution mode, this game state transition process is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sd903 (if the game result of the current special game round corresponds to a transition to the open/close execution mode), the process proceeds to step Sd904, where the start process of the open/close execution mode is executed. In this start process, the open/close execution mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. In addition, an opening period is set in which the variable winning device 65 is kept in a closed state while waiting for the start of the first round. Furthermore, if the high probability flag or high frequency support flag described later is set in the various flag storage area 314e, these flags are cleared.

In step Sd905, a process for starting the round display is executed to notify the number of rounds in the open/close execution mode. In this step, the type of the current jackpot is identified based on the type flag stored in the various flag storage area 314e, and the round display unit is controlled so that the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. Note that the display of the number of rounds in the round display unit continues until the open/close execution mode ends.

In step Sd906, it is determined whether the current jackpot type is a 10R variable probability jackpot result. If it is not a 10R variable probability jackpot result, that is, if it is either a 4R variable probability jackpot result or a 4R normal jackpot result, in step Sd907, the round counter area RC1 provided in the various counter area 314d of RAM 314 is set to "4". On the other hand, if the current jackpot type is a 10R variable probability jackpot result, in step Sd908, the round counter area RC1 is set to "10".

After execution of step Sd907 or step Sd908, in step Sd909, an opening command is set to notify the performance control device 143 of the start of the opening and the opening period. This set opening command is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sd401 in normal processing (Figure 318).

In step Sd910, the external signal setting process is executed, and then the game state transition process is terminated. In the external signal setting process, the output terminal for the jackpot signal provided in the external output terminal 213 is set to an output state. As a result, if the output terminal for the jackpot signal is connected to a management control device on the gaming hall side, a jackpot signal is output to the management control device, and the management control device can determine that a jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 10.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sd901 (if the game is in the opening/closing execution mode), the process proceeds to step Sd911, where it is determined whether or not the opening period has elapsed. If the opening period has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated. If the opening period has elapsed, the large prize opening opening/closing process is executed in step Sd912.

Here, the process of opening and closing the big prize opening will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 323.

First, in step Sd1001, it is determined whether the large prize opening 65a is open or not. This determination is made based on the drive state of the drive unit 65d. If the large prize opening 65a is not open, in step Sd1002 it is determined whether the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0". If the value of the round counter area RC1 is not "0", that is, if there is a round of play to be executed, in step Sd1003 it is determined whether the value of the timer area T1 provided in the various counter areas 344b of RAM 314 is "0". This process is to determine whether the waiting period between rounds (round interval period) has elapsed.

If the value of the timer area T1 is "0", proceed to step Sd1004, and set "15000" in the timer area T1 as a value corresponding to the upper limit opening time (30 sec) of the variable winning device 65 in one round of play. The value set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (Fig. 315) is started. In step Sd1005, set "10" in the winning counter area PC1 provided in the various counter areas 344b as a value corresponding to the upper limit number of winnings (10) in the variable winning device 65 in one round of play.

In step Sd1006, the drive unit 65d is driven to open the large prize opening 65a. In step Sd1007, an opening command is set to notify the performance control device 143 that the opening of the large prize opening 65a (variable prize opening device 65) has begun, and then the large prize opening opening and closing process is terminated. This set opening command is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sd401 in the normal process (Figure 318).

If a positive judgment is made in step Sd1102 (if the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0") or if a negative judgment is made in step Sd1103 (if the value of the timer area T1 is not "0"), the large prize opening opening process is terminated.

If the answer is yes in step Sd1001 (the large prize opening 65a is open), the process proceeds to step Sd1008, where it is determined whether the value of the timer area T1 is "0". This process is to determine whether the upper limit opening time of the variable prize device 65 set in step Sd1004 has elapsed.

If the value of the timer area T1 is not "0", proceed to step Sd1009, and determine whether or not a win has occurred in the large prize opening 65a based on the detection state of the large prize opening winning sensor 65c. If no win has occurred, the large prize opening opening opening process ends. On the other hand, if a win has occurred, the value of the winning counter area PC1 is decremented by 1 in step Sd1010, and then it is determined in step Sd1011 whether or not the value of the winning counter area PC1 is "0". If the value of the winning counter area PC1 is not "0", the large prize opening opening opening process ends.

If the judgment in step Sd1008 is positive (if the value of the timer area T1 is "0") or if the judgment in step Sd1011 is positive (if the value of the prize counter area PC1 is "0"), the process proceeds to step Sd1012, where the drive unit 65d is switched to a non-driven state and the large prize opening 65a is closed. In step Sd1013, the value of the round counter area RC1 is decremented by 1, and in step Sd1014, it is determined whether the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0".

If the value in the round counter area RC1 is not "0", i.e., if there are remaining rounds of play, proceed to step Sd1015 and set the timer area T1 to "1000" as a value corresponding to the period (2 sec) during which the variable winning device 65 will remain closed and wait for the start of the next round of play.

In step Sd1016, a close command is set to notify the performance control device 143 that the variable winning device 65 has been closed (the round of play has ended), and then the large winning opening opening and closing process is terminated. The set close command is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sd401 in the normal process (Figure 318).

If the answer is yes in step Sd1014 (if the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0"), that is, if the final round of the open/close execution mode has ended, the process proceeds to step Sd1017, where the ending start process is executed. In this start process, an ending period is set during which the variable winning device 65 remains in the closed state and waits for the start of the next game round (the first game round after the open/close execution mode has ended). In step Sd1018, an ending command is set to notify the performance control device 143 of the start of the ending and the ending period, and then the large winning port open/close process is terminated. The set ending command is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sd401 in the normal process (Fig. 318).

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition process (Fig. 322), after executing the large prize opening/closing process in step Sd912, it is determined in step Sd913 whether the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0". If the value of the round counter area RC1 is not "0", this game state transition process is terminated as is to continue the opening/closing execution mode.

If the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0", the process proceeds to step Sd914, where it is determined whether the ending has ended (whether the ending period has elapsed). If the ending has not ended, the game state transition process is terminated in order to continue the ending. On the other hand, if the ending has ended, the process proceeds to step Sd915, where the transition process at the end of the opening and closing execution mode is executed.

Here, we will explain the transition process when the opening and closing execution mode ends, with reference to the flowchart in Figure 324.

First, in step Sd1201, the jackpot type flag set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314 is referenced to determine whether the current jackpot is a highly likely jackpot result. If it is a highly likely jackpot result, in step Sd1202, a high probability flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. This transitions the lottery mode to the high probability mode.

In step Sd1203, the Support A flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The Support A flag corresponds to the first high-frequency support mode. By setting the Support A flag, the internal state becomes one corresponding to the first high-frequency support mode.

In step Sd1204, a high probability game state start command is set as the target for transmission to the presentation control device 143, and then the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode is terminated. The high probability game state start command set in step Sd1204 is transmitted to the presentation control device 143 in step Sd401 in normal processing (FIG. 318). By transmitting the high probability game state start command, the presentation control device 143 is notified of the start of the high probability game state (high probability mode and first high frequency support mode).

If the result of step Sd1201 is negative (if the current jackpot result is a normal jackpot result), the process proceeds to step Sd1205, where the support A flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. This transitions the support mode to the first high frequency support mode.

In step Sd1206, the upper limit number of times corresponding to the current jackpot result is set. For example, if the current jackpot result is a 4R normal jackpot result, a value corresponding to the upper limit number of times (e.g., 100) is set in the support counter area SC provided in the various counter areas 314d of RAM314. The support counter area SC is used by MPU312 to grasp the remaining number of times in high frequency support mode (the remaining number of times special chart play can be performed while in high frequency support mode), and is decremented by 1 each time a special chart play is performed in the high frequency support mode.

In step Sd1207, a time-saving game state start command is set as the target for transmission to the presentation control device 143, and then the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode is terminated. The time-saving game state start command set in step Sd1207 is transmitted to the presentation control device 143 in step Sd401 in normal processing (FIG. 318). By transmitting the time-saving game state start command, the presentation control device 143 is notified of the start of the time-saving game state (low probability mode and first high frequency support mode).

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition process (FIG. 322), after the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode in step Sd915 is completed, the round display end process is executed in step Sd916. In this process, the round display section in the special chart display section 43 is controlled so that the round display section is turned off.

In step Sd917, the process of ending the open/close execution mode is executed, and then the game state transition process is terminated. In the process of ending the open/close execution mode, the process of erasing the type flag and the open/close execution mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 314e is executed.

Next, we will explain the process for updating the high-frequency support mode in step Sd710 and the process for determining whether to suddenly switch to the time-saving game state in step Sd711. These processes are executed in the fluctuation start process (Fig. 321), in other words, they are executed when the fluctuation display starts during the special game round.

<Processing for updating high frequency support mode>
The high frequency support mode update process of step Sd710 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step Sd1301, it is determined whether the result of this special drawing is a jackpot result. If it is not a jackpot result, in step Sd1302, it is determined whether any of the support flags are set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. Specifically, it is determined whether either the Support A flag or the Support B flag is set. The Support B flag corresponds to the second high frequency support mode (sudden time-saving game state).

If any of the support flags are set, i.e., if the high frequency support mode is in progress, the process proceeds to step Sd1303, and the value of the support counter area SC provided in the various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314 is updated. Specifically, the value of the support counter area SC is decremented by 1. This decrements the remaining number of times in the time-saving play state (the remaining number of times that the player can stay in the time-saving play state) by 1.

In step Sd1304, it is determined whether the value of the support counter area SC is "0". If the value of the support counter area SC is "0", that is, if the number of times play has been performed in the time-saving play state has reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to step Sd1305, where a time-saving end flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The time-saving end flag is used by the MPU 312 to know that each time-saving play state should be ended.

After step Sd1305 is executed, the high-frequency support mode update process is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step Sd1301 (if a jackpot result is obtained) or a negative judgment is made in step Sd1302 (if neither support flag is set), the remaining number of times in the time-saving play state is not updated, and the high-frequency support mode update process is terminated without executing the processes in and after step Sd1303. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sd1304 (if the value of the support counter area SC is not "0"), it is determined that the time-saving play state should not be ended, and the high-frequency support mode update process is terminated without executing the process in step Sd1305.

<Processing for determining transition to sudden time-saving gaming state>
The process for determining whether or not the game suddenly transitions to the time-saving game state in step Sd711 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step Sd1401, it is determined whether the result of this special drawing is a special miss result. Specifically, it is determined whether a special miss flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. The special miss flag is set when the win/loss determination in step Sd701 determines that the result is a special miss (step Sd707).

If the result of the special drawing lottery is not a special miss (the special miss flag is not set), the process for determining whether to transition to the time-saving game state is terminated. On the other hand, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a special miss, the process proceeds to step Sd1402, and it is determined whether any of the support flags are set in the various flag storage area 314e.

If none of the support flags are set, i.e., if the current game state is the normal game state, in step Sd1403, a sudden time-saving start flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e. The sudden time-saving start flag is used by the MPU 312 to determine that a sudden transition to the time-saving game state should occur. After step Sd1403 is executed, the process for determining the transition to the sudden time-saving game state is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sd1402 (if any of the support flags is set), that is, if the current game state is the normal time-saving game state or the sudden time-saving game state, the process for determining whether to transition to the sudden time-saving game state is terminated without executing the process of step Sd1403. In other words, if a special miss result occurs in a situation in which the game is in the time-saving game state, in other words, if a transition trigger to the time-saving game state is established in a situation in which the game is in the time-saving game state, the transition to the sudden time-saving game state corresponding to that result is invalidated. After execution of step Sd1403, the process for determining whether to transition to the sudden time-saving game state is terminated.

Here, in this embodiment, the high frequency support mode update process (Fig. 325) is executed first, followed by the process for determining whether to suddenly transition to the time-shortened game state (Fig. 326). The remaining number of times in the time-shortened game state (support counter area SC) is updated, and then a determination is made as to whether or not to suddenly transition to the time-shortened game state. For this reason, if a special miss occurs in a play round other than the final play round in the time-shortened game state while remaining in the time-shortened game state, a sudden transition to the time-shortened game state will not occur as described above, but if a special miss occurs in the final play round, a sudden transition to the time-shortened game state is permitted.

In other words, in the final play round, the remaining number of times in the time-saving play state becomes "0", and the time-saving play state is internally ended (the support flag is cleared), and then the process for determining whether to suddenly enter the time-saving play state is performed. Therefore, in the process for determining whether to enter the sudden time-saving play state executed in the final play round, it is determined in step Sd1402 that the support flag is not set, and if a special miss result occurs and the special miss flag is set, the flag for starting the sudden time-saving play is set in step Sd1403.

In this embodiment, if a special miss occurs in a play round other than the final play round, the sudden transition to the time-saving play state is invalidated. However, as in the third embodiment and its variations, the sudden transition to the time-saving play state may be reserved by setting a reservation flag.

<Setting process for variable display time>
The variable display time setting process of step Sd712 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 327.

First, in step Sd1601, the current game state is grasped. Specifically, it is grasped whether the high probability flag, the first high frequency support flag, or the second high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314, and based on the result, it is determined whether the current game state is a normal game state, a high probability game state, a normal time-saving game state, or a sudden time-saving game state. In this step, if the high probability flag and the first high frequency support mode are set, it is determined to be a high probability game state, if only the first high frequency support mode is set, it is determined to be a normal time-saving game state, if only the second high frequency support mode is set, it is determined to be a sudden time-saving game state, and if none of the flags are set, it is determined to be a normal game state.

In step Sd1602, it is determined whether the game state determined in step Sd1601 is a normal game state. If it is a normal game state, the process proceeds to step Sd1603, where a variable display time table for the normal game state is obtained. The variable display time table is used to select a variable display time (variation pattern) based on the value of the variation type counter CS.

Here, the variable display time table for the normal game state will be explained with reference to Figure 328. As the variable display time table for the normal game state, a variable display time table for a jackpot (Figure 328(a)), a variable display time table for a special miss (Figure 328(b)), and a variable display time table for a normal miss (Figure 328(c)) are set. In each variable display time table, the numerical range of the fluctuation type counter CS is set in correspondence with information on the fluctuation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 328(a), in the variable display time table for the jackpot corresponding to the normal game state, variable pattern 1A (15 sec), variable pattern 2A (60 sec), and variable pattern 3A (120 sec) are set as selectable variable patterns. When a variable pattern is selected using the variable type counter CS, the variable display time corresponding to the selected variable pattern is set as the variable display time of the image in the first special chart display section AS or the second special chart display section BS.

When a variation pattern is selected, information indicating that variation pattern is sent to the performance control device 143 as a variation start command. The performance control device 143 determines the variation pattern selected by the main control device 162 based on the received variation start command. Then, the display control device 350 is controlled so that the variation display of each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 is performed at the variation display time corresponding to the determined variation pattern. As a result, each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 is displayed in a variable manner on the pattern display device 75 in synchronization with the variable display of the pattern on the first special pattern display unit AS or the second special pattern display unit BS.

In addition, each variation pattern also corresponds to a game round presentation such as a reach presentation performed by the pattern display device 75. Specifically, variation pattern 1A corresponds to a normal reach winning presentation, variation pattern 2A corresponds to an SP reach (super reach) winning presentation, and variation pattern 3A corresponds to an SPSP reach winning presentation. In other words, when the presentation control device 143 determines a variation pattern from the received variation start command, it controls the display control device 350 so that a game round presentation corresponding to that variation pattern is performed by the pattern display device 75.

In each of the reach-winning effects, after a reach display is performed, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a stopped combination for a jackpot. Here, the reach display (reach state) refers to a display state for making the player believe that the state is in a variable display state that is likely to result in a special display result (jackpot result) in a gaming machine that is equipped with a symbol display device 75 capable of performing a variable display (or variably display) of symbols (pictures) and in which, when the stopped display result after the variable display becomes a special display result (jackpot result), the gaming state becomes a special gaming state (open/close execution mode) that is advantageous to the player.

In other words, it is a display state in which some of the multiple symbol rows displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 75 are stopped to display a combination of symbols that may result in a jackpot symbol combination corresponding to the occurrence of a jackpot state, and in this state, the remaining symbol rows are displayed with varying symbols. More specifically, as a preliminary step before the variable symbol display ends, when the symbols of the final symbol row are displayed with varying symbols, the symbols of the symbol rows other than the final symbol row are displayed on the active line in the display screen G in a manner that constitutes a jackpot symbol combination, thereby forming a reach line.

The normal reach hit effect is a reach display in which the symbols are displayed in a jackpot symbol combination after the reach display described above. The SP reach effect is a reach effect of a higher level than the normal reach effect, in which a predetermined effect in which a character or the like appears is performed after the reach line is formed, and after the predetermined effect, symbols are displayed in a jackpot symbol combination. The SPSP reach effect is a reach effect of a higher level than the SP reach effect, in which a development effect that develops from the SP reach effect is performed, and symbols are displayed in a jackpot symbol combination. Note that the items in the "Notes (Performance Mode)" column in Figure 328(a) are added for convenience and are not set in the variable display time table.

As shown in FIG. 328(b), in the variation display time table for special misses corresponding to the normal game state, variation pattern Z1 (15 sec) is set as a selectable variation pattern. In other words, regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS, variation pattern Z1 is always selected. As already explained, a special miss result suddenly triggers a transition to the time-saving game state.

The fluctuation pattern Z1 corresponds to the special reach miss A performance, and when a fluctuation start command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern Z1 is sent to the performance control device 143, the symbol display device 75 executes the special reach miss A performance as a performance for a game round. Here, the special reach miss A performance will be explained with reference to FIG. 329.

In the special reach miss A performance, first, as shown in FIG. 329(a), the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are displayed in a reach combination on one of the pay lines L1 to L5 on the display screen G, and the reach display is executed. After that, the middle symbol row Z2 (the symbol row of the final stop column) is switched from a high-speed change display to a low-speed change display, and at that time, as shown in FIG. 329(b), a low-speed change display is performed with a special symbol 711 with letters such as "LUCKY" placed in a position different from the symbol that forms the jackpot combination. In this way, the change display is performed so that the player can understand the presence of the special symbol 711. Note that FIG. 329(b) shows an example in which the special symbol 711 is placed in the position of the "4" symbol that is the next symbol to the "3" symbol that forms the jackpot combination.

Next, as shown in FIG. 329(c), the special symbol 711, which is being displayed in a slow-changing manner, is displayed stationary on the reach line. In this embodiment, after the reach line is formed by the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, the symbol combination on the reach line where the special symbol 711 of the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed stationary is a symbol combination that corresponds to a special miss result, and this notifies the user that a special miss result has occurred.

As shown in FIG. 328(c), in the variable display time table for normal misses corresponding to the normal game state, variable display pattern 1H, variable display pattern 2H (15 sec), variable display pattern 3H (60 sec), and variable display pattern 4H (120 sec) are set as selectable variable patterns. As with the variable display time table for big wins, the variable display time is set corresponding to each variable pattern, but the variable display time corresponding to variable display pattern 1H varies depending on the number of reserved first or second special symbols at that time. Specifically, when variable display pattern 1H is selected in a situation where the number of reserved symbols is two or less, the variable display time is 8 sec, and when variable display pattern 1H is selected in a situation where the number of reserved symbols is three or more, the variable display time is 4 sec, which is shorter than 8 sec.

Fluctuation pattern 1H corresponds to a complete miss on the symbol display device 75, fluctuation pattern 2H corresponds to a normal miss, fluctuation pattern 3H corresponds to a SP miss, and fluctuation pattern 4H corresponds to a SPSP miss.

In the complete miss effect, no reach display is performed and the symbols are displayed in a miss pattern combination. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned reach miss effects, after the reach display is performed, the symbols in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a reach miss pattern combination (a state in which the symbols in the final stop row displayed on the reach line are symbols other than those that form a jackpot when combined with the reach symbols). In addition, the SP reach miss effect corresponds to the SP reach hit effect, and after a predetermined effect of the same type as the SP reach hit effect is performed, a conclusion video corresponding to a miss is displayed and the symbols are displayed in a reach miss pattern combination. In addition, the SPSP reach miss effect also corresponds to the SP reach hit effect.

In the fluctuation display time table for big wins, "0" on the fluctuation type counter CS corresponds to fluctuation pattern 1A, "1" to "29" correspond to fluctuation pattern 2A, and "30" to "99" correspond to fluctuation pattern 3A. On the other hand, in the fluctuation display time table for normal losses, "0" to "64" on the fluctuation type counter CS corresponds to fluctuation pattern 1H, "65" to "84" corresponds to fluctuation pattern 2H, "85" to "94" corresponds to fluctuation pattern 3H, and "95" to "98" corresponds to fluctuation pattern 4H.

If the result of the winning/losing lottery based on the entry into the actuation ports 62, 63 is a jackpot result, variation pattern 3A corresponding to the SPSP reach performance is most likely to be selected, and if the result of the winning/losing lottery is a normal miss result, variation pattern 4H corresponding to the SPSP reach performance is least likely to be selected. In other words, the SPSP reach performance is the reach performance that is most likely to be executed in the case of a jackpot and least likely to be executed in the case of a normal miss, so it functions as the highest level reach performance with the highest expectation of a jackpot.

For fluctuation patterns other than fluctuation pattern 3A and fluctuation pattern 4H, the higher the reach effect, the more likely it is to be selected in the event of a jackpot and the less likely it is to be selected in the event of a normal miss. In other words, the expectation of a jackpot increases in the following order: normal reach effect < SP reach effect < SPSP reach effect.

Also, as shown in FIG. 328(c), in the variation display time table for normal misses corresponding to the normal game state, variation pattern Z2 is set as a selectable variation pattern. Variation pattern Z2 is selected when the value of the variation type counter is "99".

Fluctuation pattern Z2 corresponds to the special reach miss B performance, and when a fluctuation start command corresponding to fluctuation pattern Z2 is sent to the performance control device 143, the performance control device 143 controls the symbol display device 75 to execute the special reach miss B performance. The special reach miss B performance is a so-called false performance that is paired with the special reach miss A performance, and it builds up a sense of expectation for a special miss, and then stops and displays the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 with a different symbol combination.

In the special reach miss B performance, as shown in Figs. 329(a) and (b), after the reach display is executed using the upper pattern row Z1 and the lower pattern row Z3, the middle pattern row Z2 is displayed with a slow fluctuation, including the special pattern 711. That is, the pattern fluctuation performance is executed up to the middle in the same manner as the special reach miss A performance. After that, for example, the special pattern 711 passes over the reach line, and a pattern different from the special pattern 711 in the middle pattern row Z2 is displayed stopped on the reach line, as shown in Fig. 329(d). In other words, while it appears as if the pattern combination corresponding to the special miss result is established, the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed stopped in such a way that the combination is ultimately not established.

Returning to the explanation of the variable display time setting process (FIG. 327), in step Sd1603, from among the various variable display time tables for the normal game state, one corresponding to the result of the current special chart hit/miss determination (step Sd701) is obtained. Specifically, if the result of the current special chart hit/miss determination is a jackpot result, a variable display time table for a jackpot is obtained, if the result of the current special chart hit/miss determination is a special miss result, a variable display time table for a special miss is obtained, and if the result of the current special chart hit/miss determination is a normal miss result, a variable display time table for a normal miss is obtained.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sd1602 (if the game is not in a normal game state), the process proceeds to step Sd1604, where it is judged whether the current game state grasped in step Sd1601 is a high probability game state or not. If it is in a high probability game state, a variable display time table for the high probability game state is acquired in step Sd1605.

The variable display time table for the high probability game state will be explained with reference to Figure 330. As the variable display time table for the high probability game state, a variable display time table for a jackpot (Figure 330(a)) and a variable display time table for a normal miss (Figure 330(b)) are set.

As shown in FIG. 330(a), in the fluctuation display time table for a jackpot corresponding to a high probability game state, fluctuation pattern 11A (60 sec), which corresponds to an SP reach hit, and fluctuation pattern 12A (120 sec), which corresponds to an SPSP reach hit, are set as selectable fluctuation patterns.

Also, as shown in FIG. 330(b), in the variable display time table for normal misses corresponding to a high probability game state, variable pattern 11H corresponding to a complete miss, variable pattern 12H (60 sec) corresponding to an SP reach miss, and variable pattern 13H (120 sec) corresponding to an SPSP reach miss are set as selectable variable patterns. In the variable display time table for normal misses in a high probability game state, the range of the variable type counter CS corresponding to a complete miss is wider than in the variable display time table for normal misses in a normal game state. In other words, the reach miss performance is less likely to occur, allowing the game to progress quickly.

The display time for the variation pattern 11H, which corresponds to a complete miss, is shortened earlier than the display time table for normal misses in normal gameplay. Specifically, it is set to 8 seconds if the number of reserved items is 1 or less, and 4 seconds if the number of reserved items is 2 or more.

In step Sd1605, from among the various variable display time tables for the high probability game state, one that corresponds to the result of the current special chart win/loss judgment is obtained. Note that, since the win/loss table for the high probability game state does not have a special loss result set (Figure 310 (b)), the variable display time table for the high probability game state does not have a setting that corresponds to the special loss result either.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sd1604 (if the game is not in a high probability game state), this means that the current game state is in a time-saving game state (normal time-saving game state or sudden time-saving game state). In this case, in step Sd1606, a variable display time table for the time-saving game state is obtained.

The variable display time table for the time-saving game state will be explained with reference to Fig. 331 and Fig. 332. As the variable display time table for the time-saving game state, a variable display time table for a jackpot (Fig. 331(a)), a variable display time table for a miss in the first special chart (Fig. 331(b)), a variable display time table for a special miss in the second special chart (Fig. 332(a)), and a variable display time table for a normal miss in the second special chart (Fig. 332(b)) are set.

As shown in FIG. 331(a), in the variable display time table for a jackpot corresponding to a time-saving game state, variable pattern 21A (15 sec) corresponding to a normal reach hit, variable pattern 22A (60 sec) corresponding to a SP reach hit, and variable pattern 23A (120 sec) corresponding to a SPSP reach hit are set as selectable variable patterns.

The variable display time table for misses on the first special chart (for time-saving play state) is referenced when the win/loss lottery for the first special chart in time-saving play state results in a special miss or a normal miss. In this table, as shown in Figure 331 (b), variable pattern W1 (15 sec), which corresponds to a normal reach miss, and variable pattern W2 (60 sec), which corresponds to a SP reach miss, are set as selectable variable patterns.

The variable display time table for special misses on the second special chart (for time-saving play state) is referenced when the win/lose lottery for the second special chart in the time-saving play state results in a special miss. As shown in FIG. 332(a), this variable display time table is configured so that the selection of the variable pattern differs depending on the number of times the special chart has been played since the transition to the time-saving play state.

Specifically, if the number of times the special pattern play has been performed since the transition to the time-saving play state is between 1 and 99 times and a special miss occurs, variation pattern X1 (e.g., 8 sec or 4 sec) is selected, and if the number of times the special pattern play has been performed since the transition to the time-saving play state is 100 times, that is, if a special miss occurs in the final play in the time-saving play state, variation pattern X2 (e.g., 15 sec) is selected. Variation pattern X1 corresponds to a complete miss effect, and variation pattern X2 corresponds to a special reach miss A effect.

In other words, after transitioning to the time-saving play state, if a special miss occurs on the 1st to 99th special symbol play, a complete miss effect is executed on the symbol display device 75, and the special miss result is not announced. This is to accommodate the situation where even if a special miss occurs during a time-saving play state, a sudden transition to the time-saving play state corresponding to that result does not occur.

On the other hand, if a special miss occurs on the 100th special symbol play, the special reach miss A presentation is executed on the symbol display device 75, and the fact that a special miss has occurred is announced. As already explained, even if the game is in a time-saving play state, if the play round in which the special miss occurred is the final play round, a sudden transition to a time-saving play state corresponding to that result is made, and this is why the fact that a special miss has occurred is announced.

The variable display time table for normal misses on the second special chart (for time-saving game state) is referenced when the winning/losing lottery for the second special chart under time-saving game state results in a normal miss. As shown in FIG. 332(b), this variable display time table is also configured so that the selection of the variable pattern differs depending on the number of times the special chart has been played since the transition to the first time-saving game state.

When the number of times the special game has been played since the transition to the time-saving game state is 1 to 99, and a normal miss is obtained, the selectable variation patterns are variation pattern 21H corresponding to a complete miss, variation pattern 22H (15 sec) corresponding to a normal reach miss, variation pattern 23H (60 sec) corresponding to a SP reach miss, and variation pattern 24H (120 sec) corresponding to a SPSP reach miss. The rate of complete misses is lower than in the miss variation display time table for the normal game state, but this is to prevent the time-saving game state from ending without a reach performance by increasing the frequency of reach performance. The variation display time of variation pattern 21H corresponding to a complete miss is configured to be 8 sec when the number of reserved balls is 1 or less, and 4 sec when the number of reserved balls is 2 or more, as in the miss variation display time table for the high probability game state.

In addition, if the final play in the time-saving play mode results in a normal miss, regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS, the fluctuation pattern X3 (8 sec or 4 sec) is selected. The fluctuation pattern X3 corresponds to a complete miss effect.

As shown in Figures 332 (c) and (d), a variable display time table for reserved portions after the time-saving play state is set as a variable display time table that is referenced in the normal play state after the time-saving play state ends. The reserved portions here correspond to the special pattern play times that are executed in the normal play state after the time-saving play state ends, based on the reserved information of the second special pattern that exists at the end of the time-saving play state. Since the maximum number of reserved second special patterns is four, the reserved special pattern play times are executed a maximum of four times.

The variable display time table for special misses in the second special chart (normal play state of reserved items) is referenced when a special miss occurs in the reserved special chart play. As shown in FIG. 332(c), this variable display time table is configured to select variable pattern X4 (15 sec) regardless of the value of the variable type counter CS. Variable pattern X4 corresponds to the special reach miss A presentation.

The variable display time table for normal misses in the second special chart (normal play state of reserved pieces) is referenced when a normal miss occurs in the play of the reserved special chart. As shown in FIG. 332(d), this variable display time table is configured to select variable pattern X5 (8 sec) regardless of the value of the variable type counter CS. Variable pattern X5 corresponds to a complete miss performance.

Since each variable display time table is configured as described above, in the final play round to the reserved play rounds, if the result of the special chart lottery is a jackpot result or a special miss result, a reach effect is executed, and if the result of the special chart lottery is a normal miss result, the execution of the reach effect is restricted. Therefore, if a reach effect is executed in the final play round to the reserved play rounds, the jackpot result or special miss result is confirmed, and the player can predict that it will not be a normal miss result before the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are all stopped. In other words, in these play rounds, the player will play in strong hope that a reach effect will occur, making it possible to greatly increase the level of attention paid to the behavior of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3.

As shown in Figures 332(a) and (b), if the winning/losing lottery for the second special chart in the time-saving play state results in a losing result, a variation pattern corresponding to a complete loss effect with a relatively short variation display time is selected with a certain probability, while as shown in Figure 331(b), if the winning/losing lottery for the first special chart in the time-saving play state results in a losing result, a variation pattern corresponding to a complete loss effect is not selected, and a variation pattern corresponding to a reach loss effect with a relatively long variation display time is selected. In other words, when a play round of the first special chart is executed, a longer variation display time is more likely to be selected than when a play round of the second special chart is executed.

With this configuration, when a round of play for the first special symbol is started in a time-saving play state with two or more reserved first special symbols and zero reserved second special symbols, a long period of time can be secured for acquiring reserved information for the second special symbol before the next round of play for the first special symbol is played. This makes it easier to avoid playing the next round of play for the first special symbol, and reduces the number of times that a winning/losing lottery for the first special symbol (a winning/losing lottery on the side that is unfavorable to the player) is played.

Returning to the explanation of the variable display time setting process (Fig. 327), in step Sd1606, from among the various variable display time tables for the time-saving game state, one that corresponds to the situation at that time is obtained. Specifically, the result of the current special chart hit/miss determination and whether or not there is a sudden transition to the time-saving game state based on that result are referenced, and a table that corresponds to them is obtained.

Note that each of the fluctuation display time tables shown in Figures 328 and 330 to 332 is merely an example, and the number of types of fluctuation patterns and the numerical range of the fluctuation type counter CS corresponding to each fluctuation pattern can be set arbitrarily.

After execution of step Sd1603, step Sd1605, or step Sd1606, in step Sd1607, the variable display time table acquired in each step is used to execute a lottery process for the variable display time (variation pattern). Specifically, from the group of variation patterns set in the variable display time table, one variation pattern corresponding to the variation type counter CS stored in the execution area AE is identified.

In step Sd1608, the variable display time corresponding to the variable pattern identified in step Sd1607 above is set as the variable display time for the current special game round. In this step, the value of the variable display time corresponding to the identified variable pattern is set in the variable display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 314d of RAM 314. For example, if the variable display time is 15 sec, 7500 is set in the variable display time counter area as the corresponding value. This set value is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (Fig. 315) is started.

In step Sd1609, it is determined whether or not a special miss flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. If the special miss flag is set, the process proceeds to step Sd1610, and a process to clear the flag is executed. After execution of step Sd1610, or if a negative judgment is made in step Sd1609 (if the special miss flag is not set), the process of setting the variable display time is terminated.

Next, we will explain the process for ending the high-frequency support mode in step Sd510 (Fig. 319) and the process for suddenly transitioning to the time-saving game state in step Sd511. These processes are executed when the variable display time has elapsed in a special game round, in other words, when the fixed display in a special game round begins.

<Processing for ending high frequency support mode>
The high frequency support mode termination process in step Sd510 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step Sd1701, it is determined whether any of the support flags are set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. If any of the support flags are set, that is, if the player is currently in either the normal time-saving play state or the sudden time-saving play state, the process proceeds to step Sd1702, where it is determined whether or not a time-saving end flag is set. The time-saving end flag indicates that the current time-saving play state should be ended, in other words, it indicates that the current special chart play round is the final special chart play round in the current time-saving play state.

If the time-saving end flag is set, proceed to step Sd1703 and clear the support flag set in the various flag storage area 314e. This results in an internal state corresponding to the end of the high-frequency support mode. Note that the actual end of the high-frequency support mode, i.e., the state in which the normal power device 63a is controlled to operate in a manner corresponding to the low-frequency support mode, will occur after the execution timing of this step.

In step Sd1704, the time-saving end flag set in the various flag storage area 314e is cleared. In the following step Sd1705, a corresponding time-saving game state end command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143. For example, when the normal time-saving game state is ended, a time-saving game state end command corresponding to the end of the normal game state is set.

After step Sd1705 is executed, the high-frequency support mode termination process is terminated. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sd1701 (if none of the support flags are set) or if a negative judgment is made in step Sd1702 (if the time-saving termination flag is not set), the high-frequency support mode termination process is terminated without executing the processes in steps Sd1703 and onward.

<Processing for transition to sudden time-saving game state>
The first transition processing of the sudden time-saving game state in step Sd511 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step Sd1801, it is determined whether or not a sudden time-saving start flag has been set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. The sudden time-saving start flag is set in the transition determination process of step Sd711 at the start of fluctuation (step Sd1403), and indicates that a sudden transition to the time-saving game state should occur.

If the sudden time-saving start flag is set, that is, if the situation is such that a sudden transition to the time-saving game state should occur, proceed to step Sd1802 and set the Support B flag in the various flag storage area 314e. This transition causes a transition to an internal state corresponding to the sudden time-saving game state (second high-frequency support mode). Note that the actual transition to the second high-frequency support mode, that is, the state in which the normal power device 63a is controlled to operate in a manner corresponding to the high-frequency support mode, occurs after the execution timing of this step.

In step Sd1803, a value corresponding to the upper limit number of times the sudden time-saving game state can be played (e.g., 100 times) is set in the support counter area SC provided in the various counter areas 314d of the RAM 314. The support counter area SC is used by the MPU 312 to grasp the remaining number of times the high-frequency support mode (normal time-saving game state or sudden time-saving game state) can be played.

In step Sd1804, the sudden time-shortening start flag set in the various flag storage area 314e is cleared, and in step Sd1805, a sudden time-shortening game state start command is set as the target for transmission to the presentation control device 143. The sudden time-shortening game state start command is for notifying the player of the sudden transition to a time-shortening game state, and includes information indicating the type of sudden time-shortening game state to transition to. The sudden time-shortening game state start command set in step Sd1805 is transmitted to the presentation control device 143 in step Sd401 in normal processing (FIG. 318).

After step Sd1805 is executed, the first transition process to the sudden time-saving game state is terminated. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sd1801 (the sudden time-saving start flag is not set), the transition to the sudden time-saving game state is not executed, and the transition process to the sudden time-saving game state is terminated without executing the processes from step Sd1802 onwards.

<Regular game play control processing>
The regular game play control processing of step Sd405 (Figure 318) will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 335 (a).

First, in step Sd1901, it is determined whether or not a reel opening/closing game using the normal power reel 63a is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a reel opening/closing flag is stored in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. The reel opening/closing flag is used by the MPU 312 to know that a reel opening/closing game is in progress, and is set when a reel opening/closing game is being played.

If the reel is being opened and closed, the normal play control process ends. On the other hand, if the reel is not being opened and closed, step Sd1902 determines whether a normal play is being performed in the normal play display unit 44. In this case, a normal play is a concept that includes the changing display of the image in the normal play display unit 44 and the stationary display (confirmed display) of the image in the normal play display unit 44, and step Sd1902 determines whether either the changing display or the stationary display is being performed.

In addition, during the special game round in the special game display unit 43, the execution of the variable display is restricted when the opening and closing execution mode using the variable winning device 65 is being executed, but during the normal game round, the variable display is allowed even during the opening and closing execution mode. Also, during the normal game round, the execution of the variable display is restricted when the device opening and closing game using the normal electric device 63a is being executed, but during the special game round, the variable display is allowed even during the device opening and closing game. Also, the normal game round can be started during the execution of the special game round, and the special game round can be started during the execution of the normal game round. In other words, these game rounds can be executed in parallel. However, since they are not linked and are executed and controlled independently of each other, the normal game round and the special game round are executed asynchronously.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sd1902 (a normal game round is not being played), the process proceeds to step Sd1903, where it is judged whether the normal game round reserve memory number FN is "0". If the normal game round reserve memory number FN is "0", the normal game round control process is terminated.

If the number of reserved regular map memories FN is not "0", step Sd1904 executes a regular map data setting process to set the data stored in the reserved area Rc for electric utility for variable display. In the regular map data setting process, the number of reserved regular map memories FN is decremented by 1, and the data stored in the first area of the reserved area Rc for electric utility is moved to the execution area for regular maps. After that, a process is executed to shift the data stored in each memory area of the reserved area Rc for electric utility, and a regular map shift command is set, which is information for making the performance control device 143 recognize that a shift has been made in the reserved area on the regular map side.

In step Sd1905, the regular map fluctuation start process is executed, and then the regular map game play control process is terminated. Here, the regular map fluctuation start process is explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 336.

First, in step Sd2001, the current game state is grasped. Specifically, it is determined whether the current support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the first high-frequency support mode, or the second high-frequency support mode. This determination is made by checking whether the various flag storage area 314e in RAM 314 is set, and if so, by checking whether the Support A flag or the Support B flag is set.

In step Sd2002, a support lottery is performed by referring to a support lottery table corresponding to the game state grasped in step Sd2001. Specifically, if the current support mode is the low-frequency support mode, a support lottery is performed by referring to the support lottery table for the low-frequency support mode (FIG. 312(a)). If the current support mode is the first high-frequency support mode, a support lottery is performed by referring to the support lottery table for the first high-frequency support mode (FIG. 312(b)). If the current support mode is the second high-frequency support mode, a support lottery is performed by referring to the support lottery table for the second high-frequency support mode (FIG. 312(c)).

In step Sd2003, it is determined whether the result of the support lottery in step Sd2002 is a support winning result (a normal winning result). If it is a support winning result, a normal winning type determination (a lottery for a normal winning type) is performed in step Sd2004. In this step, the normal winning type table (Fig. 313 (a)) is referenced to identify the normal winning type (type of support winning) that corresponds to the normal winning type counter C4 that corresponds to the current normal game round.

In step Sd2005, a normal winning type flag corresponding to the normal winning type selected by the type determination in step Sd2004 is set in the various flags storage area 314e of RAM 314. For example, if the selected normal winning type is support winning result A, the normal winning A flag is set.

In step Sd2006, the stop result for the normal winning is set by referring to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of the ROM 313. Specifically, the stop result corresponding to the normal winning type counter C4 corresponding to the current normal game round is read from the stop result table, and set as the stop result for the current normal game round.

In this case, a common stop result table is used for the low-frequency support mode (normal game state) and the first or second high-frequency support mode (time-saving game state or high-probability game state). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 337(a), the same stop result is set for the acquired value of the normal map hit type counter C4 in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode. In other words, if the acquired normal map hit type counter C4 is a value within the range of 0 to 49, stop result A is set as the stop result for the normal map hit, regardless of whether it is the low-frequency support mode or the high-frequency support mode, and if the acquired normal map hit type counter C4 is a value within the range of 50 to 99, stop result B is set as the stop result for the normal map hit, regardless of whether it is the low-frequency support mode or the high-frequency support mode.

If the result of step Sd2003 is negative (if the result is not a support win), i.e., if the result is a normal miss, the process proceeds to step Sd2007, where the stop result for a normal miss is set by referring to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 313d of the ROM 313. Note that the same stop result is used for the normal miss in both the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode.

After step Sd2006 or step Sd2007 is executed, a process for setting the normal map variable display time is executed in step Sd2008. In this setting process, the variable display time for the current normal map play in the normal map display unit 44 is set. In this embodiment, as the variable display time that can be set in step Sd2008, multiple variable display times with different lengths are provided according to the type of support mode. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 337(b), the longest variable display time (e.g., 30 sec) is provided for the low-frequency support mode, the shortest variable display time (e.g., 0.5 sec) is provided for the second high-frequency support mode, and a variable display time (e.g., 2 sec) that is shorter than the low-frequency support mode and longer than the second high-frequency support mode is provided for the first high-frequency support mode. In step Sd2008, the variable display time corresponding to the support mode identified in step Sd2001 is set as the current variable display time.

In the above configuration, one variable display time is associated with each support mode, but multiple variable display times may be associated with at least one of the support modes. For example, if one time can be selected from multiple variable display times for each of the low-frequency support mode, the second high-frequency support mode, and the first high-frequency support mode, it is preferable that the expected value of the variable display time in each support mode (the sum of the variable display time x the probability of selecting that variable display time) satisfy the above-mentioned long/short relationship.

In step Sd2009, a regular map change start command and a regular map type command are set as targets for transmission to the performance control device 143. The regular map change start command includes information on the regular map change pattern (information indicating the regular map win/loss result and the change display time). In addition, the regular map type command includes information on the support win type. Note that the regular map type command is set only when the result of the support lottery is a support win. The set regular map change start command and regular map type command are transmitted to the performance control device 143 in step Sd401 in normal processing (Figure 318).

In step Sd2010, a process is executed to start the changing display of the image in the regular map display unit 44, and then the regular map change start process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the normal map play round control process (Fig. 335), if a positive judgment is made in step Sd1902 (if a normal map play round is being executed), the process proceeds to step Sd1906, where it is judged whether or not the variable display time set in step Sd1905 has elapsed. If the variable display time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step Sd1907, where the variable display process is executed. In the variable display process, the display of the normal map display unit 44 is controlled (light emission control of each display segment) so that each display segment in the normal map display unit 44 is turned on and off in a predetermined order.

In step Sd1907, it is determined whether a transition from the high-frequency support mode (first or second high-frequency support mode) to the low-frequency support mode has occurred. Specifically, it is determined whether a change has occurred from a state in which the support flag is set to a state in which it is not set. Examples of cases in which such a change may occur include when the number of times the special chart has been played since the transition to the high-frequency support mode has reached the upper limit, and the support flag has been cleared during the upper limit number of times the special chart has been played.

If a transition to low-frequency support mode occurs, proceed to step Sd1909 and set the low-support transition flag in the various flag storage area 314e. The low-support transition flag is used by the MPU 312 to recognize that the support flag has changed to a non-set state.

After step Sd1909 is executed, the normal game play control process is terminated. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sd1908 (a transition to the low frequency support mode has not occurred), the normal game play control process is terminated without executing the process of step Sd1909.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sd1906 (if the variable display time has elapsed), a process for displaying the confirmed normal map is executed in step Sd1910, and then the process for controlling the normal map play is terminated. In the process for displaying the confirmed normal map, the display unit 44 for the normal map is controlled so that the image is displayed as a stop result set in step Sd2006 or step Sd2007.

At that time, the stop display period (determined display time) for performing the above-mentioned stop display is set. In this embodiment, as the deterministic display time that can be set in step Sd1910, a plurality of deterministic display times of different lengths are provided according to the type of support mode. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 335(b), a relatively long deterministic display time (e.g., 2 sec) is provided for the low-frequency support mode, and a relatively short deterministic display time (e.g., 0.2 sec) is provided for the first or second high-frequency support mode. In step Sd1910, the deterministic display time corresponding to the support mode grasped in step Sd2001 is set as the current deterministic display time. In addition, in the process for the deterministic display, a deterministic change end command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143. The deterministic change end command includes information on the deterministic display time for the current deterministic game.

In FIG. 335(b), the confirmed display time for the first high-frequency support mode and the confirmed display time for the second high-frequency support mode are the same length, but they may be different lengths. For example, the confirmed display time for the second high-frequency support mode may be configured to be shorter than the confirmed display time for the first high-frequency support mode in accordance with the length relationship of the variable display time (FIG. 336(b)).

<Electricity support processing>
The electric support processing of step Sd406 (FIG. 318) will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step Sd2101, it is determined whether or not a reel opening/closing game is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a reel opening/closing flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314.

If the reel is not being opened or closed, proceed to step Sd2102 and determine whether the normal game has ended. If the normal game has not ended, the electric support process ends.

If it is time for the end of the regular game round, proceed to step Sd2103 and determine whether the result of the support lottery for this regular game round is a support winning result. If it is not a support winning result, end the electric role support processing.

If the result is a support win, in step Sd2104, the start process of the reel opening/closing game is executed. In this start process, a reel opening/closing flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314. Also, an opening period is set in which the normal power reel 63a is kept closed and the reel 36a is awaiting its first opening. At this time, the opening period is set to a period corresponding to the support mode at the time of the support lottery that triggered the reel opening/closing game. If the support mode at the time of the support lottery is the low frequency support mode, for example, 5 seconds is set, and if it is the first or second high frequency support mode, for example, 0.1 seconds is set (Fig. 313(b), Fig. 314).

In step Sd2105, the current game state is grasped. Specifically, by checking whether a support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e and, if set, referring to the type of the support flag, it is determined whether the current support mode is the low frequency support mode, the first high frequency support mode, or the second high frequency support mode. In the following step Sd2106, the type of the current normal winning is grasped based on the normal winning type flag set in the various flag storage area 314e.

As already explained, the normal winning type (type of support win) selected by the normal winning type counter C4 corresponds to the normal winning stop result displayed on the normal winning display unit 44, so the processing of step Sd2106 can be said to grasp the normal winning stop result for the current normal game round.

In step Sd2107, a process for setting the number of times the reels will open for this opening/closing game is executed. The process for setting the number of times the reels will open in this opening/closing game is explained below with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 339(a).

First, in step Sd2201, it is determined whether the result of step Sd2105 is the high-frequency support mode (first or second high-frequency support mode). In other words, the high-frequency support mode is a state in which the support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

If it is in the high-frequency support mode, proceed to step Sd2202 and set the number of openings for the high-frequency support mode as the number of openings of the normal power device 63a in the current device opening and closing game. Here, the cases in which it is determined in step Sd2105 that it is in the high-frequency support mode include a case in which it was in the high-frequency support mode before the start of the normal game round that triggered the current device opening and closing game, and a case in which it switched from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode during the normal game round that triggered the current device opening and closing game. In either case, in this embodiment, the number of openings for the high-frequency support mode is set as the current number of openings. In other words, if a transition to the high-frequency support mode occurs during the execution of a normal game round that started under the low-frequency support mode, the normal power device 63a will be opened the number of times corresponding to the high-frequency support mode in the device opening and closing game that is performed after that normal game round.

The number of times corresponding to the high frequency support mode is either 1 time or 2 times (Fig. 314), but the allocation is made based on the result of grasping the normal winning type in step Sd2106. Specifically, if the grasped normal winning type is support winning result A, the number of times of opening is set to 1 time, and if it is support winning result B, the number of times of opening is set to 1 time.

In this case, if a transition to the high-frequency support mode occurs during the normal game play that triggered the above, the result of grasping the normal winning type in step Sd2106 is also used. In other words, the number of times the opening and closing of the role device will be opened after the transition to the high-frequency support mode is set based on the result of the type lottery that was conducted before the transition to the high-frequency support mode.

In step Sd2202, a value corresponding to the number of openings is set in the opening count counter area RC2 provided in the various counter area 314d of RAM 314. For example, if the number of openings is two, the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is set to "2". After step Sd2202 is executed, the opening count setting process ends.

If the result of step Sd2201 is negative, i.e., if the result of step Sd2105 is low-frequency support mode (if the support flag is not set in the various flags storage area 314e), proceed to step Sd2203 and determine whether the low support transition flag is set in the various flags storage area 314e.

If the low support transition flag is not set, that is, if there is no transition from high frequency support mode to low frequency support mode during the normal play that triggered this opening and closing of the reel (in other words, if the reel was in low frequency support mode before the start of the normal play that triggered the above), proceed to step Sd2204 and set the number of openings for the low frequency support mode as the number of openings of the normal power reel 63a in this opening and closing of the reel. Specifically, it is set to 2 times (Figure 313 (b)). After step Sd2204 is executed, the number of openings setting process ends.

If step Sd2203 judges positive (if the low support transition flag is set), it means that a transition to low-frequency support mode has occurred during the normal game play that triggered the above. In this case, proceed to step Sd2202, and set the number of times for the high-frequency support mode as the number of times the normal power role 63a is opened in this role opening and closing game. In other words, if the support flag is switched from a set state to an unset state during the execution of a normal game play, the normal power role 63a will be opened the number of times corresponding to the high-frequency support mode, even if the support flag is not set when the normal power role 63a is opened.

Returning to the explanation of the electric role support process (Fig. 338), after executing the opening count setting process in step Sd2107, a normal opening command is set in step Sd2108 to notify the performance control device 143 of the opening start and opening period. This set opening command is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sd401 in the normal process (Fig. 318).

In step Sd2109, the external signal setting process is executed, and then the electric support process is terminated. In the external signal setting process, the signal output state of the output terminal for the role release signal provided in the external output terminal 213 is set to the release signal output state.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sd2101 (when the reel opening/closing game is in progress), then in step Sd2110 it is judged whether the opening period has elapsed. If the opening period has not elapsed, the electric support processing ends. If the opening period has elapsed, then in step Sd2111 the reel opening/closing processing is executed. Here, the reel opening/closing processing is explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 340.

First, in step Sd2301, it is determined whether the normal power mechanism 63a is open. Specifically, this determination is made based on the drive state of the drive unit 63b. If the normal power mechanism 63a is not open, it is determined in step Sd2302 whether the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is "0".

If the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is not "0", proceed to step Sd2303 and determine whether the value of the timer area T2 provided in the various counter areas 344b of RAM 314 is "0". This process is to determine whether the waiting period between openings has elapsed when the normal power device 63a is opened multiple times in a device opening and closing game.

If the value of the timer area T2 is "0", in step Sd2304, an upper limit opening time setting process is executed to set the upper limit opening time of the normal power device 63a for this opening. Here, the upper limit opening time setting process in step Sd2304 is explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 339 (b).

First, in step Sd2211, it is determined whether the result of step Sd2105 is the high-frequency support mode (first or second high-frequency support mode). If it is the high-frequency support mode (if the support flag is set in the various flags storage area 314e), the process proceeds to step Sd2212, where the upper limit release time for the current release is set to the upper limit release time for the high-frequency support mode.

Here, the cases where it is determined in step Sd2105 that it is in the high-frequency support mode include the case where the high-frequency support mode was in effect before the start of the normal game round that triggered the current opening and closing of the reel, and the case where the mode switched from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode during the normal game round that triggered the current opening and closing of the reel. In either case, in this embodiment, the upper limit opening time for the high-frequency support mode is set as the current upper limit opening time. In other words, if a transition to the high-frequency support mode occurs during the execution of a normal game round that started under the low-frequency support mode, in the reel opening and closing game that is played after that normal game round, the normal power reel 63a is opened at the upper limit opening time corresponding to the high-frequency support mode.

The upper limit release time corresponding to the high frequency support mode is either 1.5 sec or 2 sec (Fig. 314), but the allocation is made based on the result of the determination of the normal winning type in step Sd2106. If the determined normal winning type is support winning result A, the upper limit release time is set to 1.5 sec, and if it is support winning result B, the upper limit release time is set to 2 sec.

In this case, if the transition to the high-frequency support mode occurs during the normal game play that triggered the above, the result of grasping the normal winning type in step Sd2106 is also used. In other words, the upper limit opening time for the opening and closing of the role device after the transition to the high-frequency support mode is set based on the result of the type lottery that was conducted before the transition to the high-frequency support mode.

In step Sd2212, a value corresponding to the upper limit opening time is set in the timer area T2, and then the upper limit opening time setting process is terminated. Note that when the normal electric device 63a is opened twice in a device opening and closing game, if the upper limit opening time is to be different between the first and second openings, the number of times the current opening has been opened is determined, and the upper limit opening time corresponding to the result is set.

If the result of step Sd2211 is negative, i.e., if the result of step Sd2105 is low-frequency support mode (if the support flag is not set in the various flag storage area 314e), proceed to step Sd2213 and determine whether the low support transition flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e.

If the low support transition flag is not set, i.e., if there is no transition from high frequency support mode to low frequency support mode during the normal play that triggered this opening and closing of the reels (in other words, if the low frequency support mode was in effect before the start of the normal play that triggered the above), proceed to step Sd2214 and set the upper limit opening time for the low frequency support mode as the upper limit opening time for this opening. Specifically, set the upper limit opening time to 0.1 sec (Fig. 313 (b)).

If the determination in step Sd2213 is positive (if the low support transition flag is set), it is determined whether the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is "1". In other words, it is determined whether the current opening is the final opening. If the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is "1", the process proceeds to step Sd2216, where the low support transition flag set in the various flags storage area 314e of RAM 314 is cleared.

After execution of step Sd2216 or if a negative judgment is made in step Sd2215 (if the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is not "1"), proceed to step Sd2212 and set the upper limit opening time for the high frequency support mode as the upper limit opening time for this opening. In other words, if the support flag is switched from a set state to an unset state during the execution of a normal game round, the normal power device 63a will be opened at the upper limit opening time corresponding to the high frequency support mode, even if the support flag is not set when the normal power device 63a is opened.

Returning to the explanation of the reel opening/closing process (Fig. 340), after executing the upper limit opening time setting process in step Sd2304, in step Sd2305, "6" is set in the winning counter area PC2 provided in the various counter areas 344b. This value corresponds to the upper limit number of winnings (6) for the normal electric reel 63a (second operating port 63) in the reel opening/closing game.

In step Sd2306, the drive unit 63b is driven to open the normal power reel 63a. In step Sd2307, a reel opening command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143. The set reel opening command is transmitted to the performance control device 143 in step Sd401 in normal processing (FIG. 318). This notifies the performance control device 143 that the normal power reel 63a has been switched from a closed state to an open state.

After step Sd2307 is executed, the reel opening/closing process is terminated. Also, if a positive judgment is made in step Sd2302 (if the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is "0") or a negative judgment is made in step Sd2303 (if the value of the timer area T2 is not "0"), the normal power reel 63a is not opened, and the reel opening/closing process is terminated without executing the processes in steps Sd2304 and after.

If the result of step Sd2301 is positive (the normal power device 63a is open), the process proceeds to step Sd2308, where it is determined whether the value of the timer area T2 is "0." This process is to determine whether the upper limit open time of the normal power device 63a set in step Sd2304 has elapsed.

If the value of the timer area T2 is not "0", i.e., if the upper limit opening time of the normal power device 63a has not elapsed, step Sd2309 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the second operating port 63. If a win has occurred, step Sd2310 subtracts 1 from the value of the winning counter area PC2. Step Sd2311 determines whether or not the value of the winning counter area PC2 is "0", i.e., whether or not the number of winning balls entering the second operating port 63 has reached the upper limit number of winning balls.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sd2309 (if no winning has occurred in the second operating port 63) or if a negative judgment is made in step Sd2311 (if the value of the winning counter area PC2 is not "0"), the device opening/closing process ends to keep the normal power device 63a open.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sd2308 (if the upper limit opening time of the normal power device 63a has elapsed) or if a positive judgment is made in step Sd2311 (if the value of the winning counter area PC2 is "0"), in step Sd2312, the drive unit 63b is set to a non-driven state to close the normal power device 63a.

In step Sd2313, the above-mentioned update process of the opening count counter area RC2 is executed. In this update process, the value of the winning counter area PC2 is referenced, and if the value of the winning counter area PC2 is not "0" (the number of winning balls at the second operating port 63 has not reached the upper limit of winning balls), the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is decremented by 1. On the other hand, if the value of the winning counter area PC2 is "0" (the number of winning balls at the second operating port 63 has reached the upper limit of winning balls), the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is set to "0".

In step Sd2314, it is determined whether the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is "0". If the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is not "0", that is, if there are remaining openings of the normal power device 63a, in step Sd2315, the value of the interval time (waiting time) during which the normal power device 63a is closed and awaits the next opening is set in the timer area T2.

At this time, the interval time value corresponding to the game state determined in step Sd2105 (Fig. 338) and the normal winning type determined in step Sd2106 (Fig. 338) is set. If the support mode is the low frequency support mode, a value corresponding to 1.5 sec is set regardless of whether the normal winning type is support winning result A or B, and if the support mode is the first or second high frequency support mode and the support winning result is B, a value corresponding to 0.3 sec is set (Fig. 313 (b), Fig. 314). Note that if the normal power device 63a is opened three or more times in a device opening and closing game and the interval time between each opening is to be different, the number of times the current interval is determined and the interval time corresponding to the result is set.

In step Sd2316, a reel close command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143, and then the reel opening/closing process is terminated. The set reel close command is transmitted to the performance control device 143 in step Sd401 in the normal process (FIG. 318). This notifies the performance control device 143 that the normal power reel 63a has been switched from an open state to a closed state.

If the answer is "yes" in step Sd2314 (the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is "0"), the process to start the ending is executed in step Sd2317. In the process to start the ending, an ending period is set during which the normal power reel 63a is kept in the closed state and the start of the next play round (the first normal play round after the reel opening/closing play has ended) is awaited.

At this time, the value of the ending period corresponding to the game state grasped in step Sd2205 (Fig. 338) and the normal winning type grasped in step Sd2206 (Fig. 338) is set. If the support mode is the low frequency support mode, a value corresponding to 5 sec is set regardless of whether the normal winning type is support winning result A or B, and if the support mode is the first or second high frequency support mode and the support winning result is B, a value corresponding to 0.1 sec is set (Fig. 313 (b), Fig. 314).

In step Sd2318, a normal ending command is set to notify the performance control device 143 of the beginning of the ending and the ending period, and then the reel opening and closing process is terminated. The set normal ending command is sent to the performance control device 143 in step Sd401 in the normal process (Fig. 318).

Returning to the explanation of the electric role support process (Fig. 338), after executing the reel opening/closing process in step Sd2111, in step Sd2112, it is determined whether the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is "0". If the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is not "0", the electric role support process is terminated as is to continue the reel opening/closing game.

If the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is "0", proceed to step Sd2113 and determine whether the ending has ended (whether the ending period has elapsed). If the ending has not ended, end the electric support processing as is to continue the ending.

If the ending has ended, step Sd2114 executes the end process for the reel opening/closing game, and then ends the process for supporting the electric reel. In the end process for the reel opening/closing game, a process is executed to erase the normal winning type flag and the reel opening/closing flag stored in the various flag storage area 314e.

<Electrical configuration of the performance control device 143 and the display control device 350>
The electrical configuration of the performance control device 143 and display control device 350 in this embodiment will be described below with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The performance control board 341 provided in the performance control device 143 is equipped with an MPU 342. The MPU 342 has a ROM 343 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 342, a RAM 344 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 343, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc.

The MPU 342 is provided with an input port and an output port. The main control device 162 is connected to the input side of the MPU 342. From the main control device 162, various commands are received, such as game play control commands, such as a fluctuation start command, a type command, and a fluctuation end command, and opening/closing execution mode commands, such as an opening command and an ending command.

As already explained, the output side of the MPU 342 is connected to the lamp units 26 to 28 and the speaker unit 29 provided in the front door frame 14, as well as to the display control device 350.

The input side of the MPU 342 is also connected to the performance operation unit 36 provided on the front door frame 14. The performance operation unit 36 is provided with a detection sensor that detects the operation of the performance operation unit 36, and detection information (detection signal) from the detection sensor is input. The MPU 342 determines whether the performance operation unit 36 has been operated based on the detection information, and determines the type of operation that has been performed.

The display control device 350 includes a display control board 351 on which an MPU 372, which is a composite chip of a program ROM 373 and a work RAM 374, a video display processor (VDP) 375, a character ROM 376, and a video RAM 377 are mounted.

The MPU 372 analyzes the commands received from the performance control device 143 or performs a predetermined calculation process based on the received commands to control the VDP 375 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 375).

The program ROM 373 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 372, and also stores and holds JPEG format image data for the background image.

The work RAM 374 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. that are used when the MPU 372 executes various programs. This work data, flags, etc. are stored in various areas of the work RAM 374.

VDP375 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device that serves as a liquid crystal display driver built into pattern display device 75. VDP375 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is made into an IC chip, and its actual form can be described as a microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. VDP375 mediates the reading and writing of data by adjusting the timing of MPU372, video RAM377, etc., and reads image data to be stored in video RAM377 from character ROM376 at a specified timing and displays it on pattern display device 75.

The character ROM 376 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as the designs displayed on the design display device 75. This character ROM 376 holds bitmap format image data of various display designs, a color palette table that is referenced when determining the color to be displayed at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

It is also possible to provide multiple character ROMs 376 and have each character ROM 376 store image data, etc. It is also possible to configure the character ROM 376 to store JPEG format image data for background images stored in the program ROM 373.

Video RAM 377 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 75, and the display content of the pattern display device 75 is changed by rewriting the contents of video RAM 377.

<Various processes executed by the performance control device 143>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 342 of the performance control device 143 will be described.

<Performance setting process>
The effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 342. The effect setting process is a process that is activated by the MPU 342 at a predetermined cycle (for example, every 2 msec).

First, in step Sd2501, it is determined whether or not an ending command (step Sd1018) has been received from the main control device 162. The ending command is sent when an ending is to be started in the opening/closing execution mode, which is performed when the result of the win/loss determination in the special game round is a jackpot.

The various commands received from the main control device 162 are stored in a command storage area 344a provided in the RAM 344 of the performance control device 143. The command storage area 344a is configured as a ring buffer that can store multiple commands individually and can read out commands that have been stored earlier. Therefore, even if multiple commands are received at the same time, the processing corresponding to each command can be executed satisfactorily.

When making the judgment in step Sd2501, it is determined whether or not an ending command is stored in the area of the command storage area 344a that is the current read target. If an ending command is stored (if an ending command is received), in step Sd2502, a first transition effect setting process is executed to set a transition effect corresponding to a transition to a high probability play state or a normal time-saving play state. The first transition effect setting process will be described in detail later.

After execution of step Sd2502 or if a negative judgment is made in step Sd2501 (if an ending command has not been received), in step Sd2503, a special pattern change display process is executed to display the changes in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75. The details of the special pattern change display process will be described later.

In step Sd2504, it is determined whether or not a sudden time-shortened game state start command (step Sd1805) has been received from the main control device 162. The sudden time-shortened game state start command notifies the presentation control device 143 of the sudden transition to the time-shortened game state, and is transmitted at the timing of the sudden transition to the time-shortened game state. Note that in this embodiment, the sudden transition to the time-shortened game state occurs at the start of the confirmation display in the special game round that resulted in a special miss, so the sudden time-shortened game state start command is transmitted at that start timing.

If a sudden time-saving game state start command has been received, in step Sd2505, a second transition effect setting process is executed to set a transition effect corresponding to the sudden transition to the time-saving game state. The second transition effect setting process will be described in detail later.

After execution of step Sd2505 or if a negative judgment is made in step Sd2504 (if the sudden time-saving game state start command has not been received), step Sd2506 judges whether or not any game state end command has been received. Specifically, it judges whether or not a high probability game state end command or a time-saving game state end command (step Sd1705) has been received.

If any of these commands have been received, in step Sd2507, the end effect setting process is executed to set an end effect corresponding to the end of the high probability game state or each time-limited game state. The end effect setting process will be described in detail later.

In step Sd2508, a process for displaying changes in the regular map is executed to display changes in the regular map display area P (Fig. 349(a)) set on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75. The details of the process for displaying changes in the regular map will be described later.

In step Sd2509, a process for special light-emitting effects is executed to produce special light-emitting effects. Special light-emitting effects are effects that are produced using the light-emitting parts provided on the normal power device 63a and its surroundings. The process for special light-emitting effects will be described in detail later.

In step Sd2510, other processing is performed, and then the performance setting processing is terminated. In other processing, processing is performed to display a demo screen when a start winning does not occur for a specified period of time, and to switch to a power saving mode that stops the image display on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 to reduce power consumption, etc.

<First transition performance setting process>
The first transition performance setting process in step Sd2502 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 343. This process is executed when an ending command is received from the main control device 162, in other words, it is executed in accordance with the ending start timing of the opening/closing execution mode.

First, in step Sd2601, it is determined whether or not a situation exists in which a transition to a high probability game state or a normal time-saving game state will occur. In other words, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode for which the ending command was sent corresponds to a jackpot result that will cause a transition to a high probability game state or a normal time-saving game state. This determination is made based on the type command sent from the main control device 162.

If no transition to the high probability game state or the normal time-saving game state occurs, the first transition performance setting process is terminated. Note that, as in this embodiment, if there is only a jackpot type that always transitions to either the high probability game state or the normal time-saving game state after the opening/closing execution mode ends, it is possible to omit the process of step Sd2601.

When a transition to a high probability game state or a normal time-saving game state occurs, a start effect corresponding to each game state is set in step Sd2602. Specifically, when a transition to a high probability game state occurs, a start effect for the high probability game state is set as the start effect, and when a transition to a normal time-saving game state occurs, a start effect for the normal time-saving game state is set as the start effect.

In the start presentation for the high probability play state, as shown in FIG. 344(a), a title image 721 corresponding to the high probability play state, such as "Lucky Time", is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75. In addition, in the start presentation for the normal time-saving play state, as shown in FIG. 344(b), a title image 722 corresponding to the normal time-saving play state, such as "Chance Time", and a remaining number of times image 723 are displayed. The remaining number of times image 723 notifies the player of the remaining number of special play times that the player can stay in the normal time-saving play state.

Figure 344 (c) shows the time-saving effects that are executed while in the normal time-saving game state. The time-saving effects are performed after the start effect in Figure 344 (b) ends, until the normal time-saving game state ends. This time-saving effect is configured to be distinguishable from the normal effects, for example by having a different background image, etc., from the normal effects during the normal game state.

In step Sd2602, the various start effects are set to be displayed on the display screen G during the ending period of the opening and closing execution mode. In this case, the start effects may be configured to be displayed during the entire ending period, or may be configured to be displayed during only a part of the ending period.

In step Sd2603, it is determined whether the current transition is to a normal time-saving game state. If a positive determination is made in step Sd2603, in step Sd2604, a value corresponding to the upper limit number is set in the remaining number counter area provided in the various counter areas 344b of RAM 344. The remaining number counter area is used by MPU 342 to grasp the remaining number of special game times that can be played while in the normal time-saving game state, and is decremented by one each time a special game time is played in each of these game states.

In this embodiment, the performance control device 143 is configured to count the remaining number of times for each game state separately from the main control device 162, but the performance control device 143 may be configured to know the remaining number of times for each game state based on the update results in the main control device 162. For example, the main control device 162 may notify the performance control device 143 of the update results of the support counter area SC (step Sd1303) by sending a specified command, and the performance control device 143 may analyze the command and know each of the above update results. In this case, the specified command may be made by including information on each of the above update results in an existing command such as the fluctuation start command (step Sd714), or the specified command may be composed of a dedicated command for notifying each of the above update results.

In step Sd2605, the display of the remaining number of times image 723 is set to start. At this time, the display of the remaining number of times image 723 may be set to start during each start effect (effect performed using the ending period) set in step Sd2602, or the display of the remaining number of times image 723 may be set to start after the start effect ends and the game transitions to the normal time-saving game state.

In step Sd2606, the remaining number of times display flag is set in the various flag storage area 344c of the RAM 344, and then the first transition performance setting process is terminated. The remaining number of times display flag is used by the MPU 342 to know that the remaining number of times image 723 is being displayed.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sd2603, i.e., if the current transition is to a high probability play state, the remaining number of times image 723 is not displayed, and the first transition performance setting process is terminated without executing the processes in steps Sd2604 and onward.

<Special chart change display processing>
The processing for displaying special chart changes in step Sd2503 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 345.

First, in step Sd2701, it is determined whether a special pattern play round is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether a play round of either the first special pattern or the second special pattern is in progress. If neither play round is in progress, the process proceeds to step Sd2702, where it is determined whether a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control device 162.

The fluctuation start command includes information on the fluctuation pattern selected by the process of setting the fluctuation display time in the main control unit 162. By referring to this fluctuation pattern information, it is possible to know at which fluctuation display time the special chart game will be played on the special chart display unit 43, which is display controlled by the main control unit 162. Also, as already explained, since a fluctuation pattern for a jackpot and a fluctuation pattern for a loss are set separately, it is also possible to determine the result of the win/loss judgment from the fluctuation pattern.

If the change start command has not been received, the process for displaying the special chart change ends. On the other hand, if the change start command has been received, the process proceeds to step Sd2703, and the change start process is executed to start the performance for the game round.

In the process for starting the fluctuation, the fluctuation start command from the main control device 162 is analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern for the current special game is identified. Furthermore, the fluctuation display time for the current special game is determined based on the identified fluctuation pattern. The various table storage area 343a of the ROM 343 stores a presentation pattern table in which the fluctuation display time is determined in correspondence with each fluctuation pattern.

The variable display time determined in the presentation pattern table corresponds to the variable display time corresponding to each variation pattern (Fig. 328, Fig. 330 to Fig. 333) in the main control device 162, and a common variable display time is assigned to one variation pattern in the presentation control device 143 and the main control device 162. For example, if the variation pattern is variation pattern 1A, the corresponding variable display time is 15 sec in both the presentation control device 143 and the main control device 162. In the variation start process, the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern analyzed from the variation start command is identified by referring to the presentation pattern table, and this is grasped as the variable display time for the current special chart play round.

The presentation pattern table also associates each variation pattern with a presentation pattern for the game round presentation. The presentation patterns are normal reach hit, SP reach hit, SPSP reach hit, complete miss, normal reach miss, SP reach miss, SPSP reach miss, special reach miss A presentation, and special reach miss B presentation, as described in the explanation of the variation display time table. The correspondence between the variation patterns and presentation patterns has already been described with reference to Figures 328 and 330 to 333, so an explanation will be omitted. In the variation start process, the presentation pattern corresponding to the current variation pattern is identified by referring to the presentation pattern table, and this is set as the presentation pattern for the current special chart game round.

In addition, in the process for starting the variation, if the result of the win/loss judgment for the current special game round is a jackpot, the type of jackpot is identified based on the type command from the main control device 162. If the jackpot type is a guaranteed jackpot, the stop result for the guaranteed jackpot is set as the stop result of the pattern string Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75. Conversely, if the jackpot type is a regular jackpot, the stop result for the regular jackpot is set as the stop result of the pattern string Z1 to Z3. In these cases, the active lines L1 to L5 on which the stop result for the jackpot is displayed are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

In addition, if the result of the win/loss judgment for this special game round is a normal miss result, the stopping symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are randomly determined. However, if the presentation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern is one that produces a reach presentation, the stopping symbols are determined so that a reach is formed on the active lines L1 to L5 determined by lottery. In other words, the stopping result in which a combination of miss reach symbols is formed on at least one active line L1 to L5 is set as the stopping result for this time.

Also, if the result of the win/loss judgment for the current special game round is a special miss result, the stopping patterns of the upper pattern row Z1 and the lower pattern row Z3 are determined so that a reach is formed on the active lines L1 to L5 determined by lottery, and the stopping patterns are also determined so that the special pattern 711 is stopped and displayed on the middle pattern row Z2 on the reach line. In other words, the stopping result in which the pattern combination of the special miss result is formed on at least one active line L1 to L5 is set as the stopping result for this time.

In the process for starting the fluctuation, after executing each of the above processes, a command including information on the current stopped symbol and information on the presentation pattern is set as an output target to the display control device 350. The display control device 350 controls the symbol display device 75 according to the received command so that the symbols in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 stop with the stop result determined by the presentation control device 143, or a presentation for a game round is performed with the presentation pattern determined by the presentation control device 143.

After execution of step Sd2703, processing for updating the remaining number of times display is executed in step Sd2704, and then processing for displaying the special chart change is terminated. In processing for updating the remaining number of times display, it is determined whether or not the remaining number of times display flag is set in the various flag storage area 344c of RAM 344, and if the remaining number of times display flag is set (if the remaining number of times image 723 is being displayed), the value of the remaining number of times counter area is updated by subtracting 1. Furthermore, the display content of the remaining number of times image 723 is updated by referring to the update result of the remaining number of times counter area. As a result, the remaining number of times notified by the remaining number of times image 723 is subtracted by 1.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sd2701 (if a special game round is being played), the process proceeds to step Sd2705, where it is judged whether or not a change end command has been received from the main control device 162. If a change end command has not been received, this means that the change display time has not yet elapsed in this special game round. In this case, in step Sd2706, a change in progress process is executed. In the change in progress process, processing is executed to continue the change display of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 that was started by the change start process, to temporarily stop and display the patterns of each pattern row Z1 to Z3 in order, and to execute each reach performance.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sd2705 (if a variation end command has been received), variation end processing is executed in step Sd2707, and then the special pattern variation display processing is terminated. In the variation end processing, the variation display of each pattern row Z1 to Z3 and the currently executed performance are terminated. Also, in step Sd2707, control is performed so that the patterns of each pattern row Z1 to Z3 are fixed and stopped at the fixed display time set by the main control unit 162.

<Second transition performance setting process>
The second transition effect setting process of step Sd2505 (FIG. 342) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 346(a). This process is executed when a sudden time-saving game state start command is received from the main control device 162, in other words, when a sudden time-saving game state is started.

First, in step Sd2801, the start effect for the sudden time-saving game state is set. In the start effect for the sudden time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 346(b), a title image 725 corresponding to the sudden time-saving game state, such as "Sudden Chance Time", and a remaining number of times image 723 are displayed. The remaining number of times image 723 notifies the player of the remaining number of special game times that the player can stay in the sudden time-saving game state.

In this step, a setting process for the start effect for the sudden time-saving game state is performed so that the start effect is executed at the fixed display time in the special game round. In this case, the entire start effect may be executed at the fixed display time, or a part of the start effect may be executed at the fixed display time. Note that if a part of the start effect is executed within the fixed display time, the start effect is executed across the fixed display time and the next special game round.

In step Sd2802, a value corresponding to the upper limit number of times (e.g., 100 times) for the sudden time-saving game state is set in the remaining number counter area of RAM 344. In the following step Sd2803, a setting is made to start displaying the remaining number of times image 723. At this time, the setting may be made so that the display of the remaining number of times image 723 starts during the start effect set in step Sd2801, or the setting may be made so that the display of the remaining number of times image 723 starts after the start effect ends and the game transitions to the normal time-saving game state.

In step Sd2804, the remaining number display flag is set in the various flag storage area 344c of RAM 344, and then the second transition performance setting process is terminated.

<Ending performance setting process>
The end effect setting process of step Sd2507 (FIG. 342) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 347. This process is executed when an end command is received for each of the high probability game state, the normal time-saving game state, and the sudden time-saving game state, in other words, when each of these game states ends.

In step Sd2901, an end effect corresponding to the game state to be ended is set. For example, if the normal time-saving game state is to end, the end effect for the normal time-saving game state is set to be executed.

In step Sd2902, the value of the remaining number counter provided in the various counter area 344b of RAM 344 is cleared (initialized). At this time, if the value of the remaining number counter is already 0 (initial value), it is left in that state.

In step Sd2903, the remaining number of times image 723 displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 is erased. In the following step Sd2904, the remaining number of times display flag set in the various flag storage area 344c of the RAM 344 is cleared, and then the end performance setting process is terminated.

<Processing for displaying general map changes>
The processing for displaying general map changes in step Sd2508 (Figure 342) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 348.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 349, a regular pattern display area P is set on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75. This regular pattern display area P displays multiple (two) patterns F1, F2, and the display color of each of these patterns can be changed to allow for variable display. The regular pattern variable display process is a process for controlling the variable display of patterns in the regular pattern display area P.

The regular pattern display area P is set in an area (for example, the upper part of the display screen G) that does not overlap with the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 for the special pattern play rounds. The regular pattern display area P is also smaller than the variable display areas in each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, and each pattern in the regular pattern display area P is smaller than each pattern in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3.

Here, we will explain the change in the number of regular play times using the pictures F1 and F2 with reference to Figure 350.

As described above, the change in the normal play time in the normal play display area P is displayed by switching the display color of the pictures F1 and F2. For example, as shown in FIG. 350(a), when a normal play time starts with the display colors of the pictures F1 and F2 displayed in a first display color (e.g., white), the display color of one of the pictures, picture F2, is switched to a second display color (e.g., blue) that is different from the previous color, as shown in FIG. 350(b) (the difference in display colors is shown by different hatches in the figure).

After that, as shown in FIG. 350(c), the color of the pattern F2 that was switched to the second display color is switched back to the original first display color, and the color of the other pattern, pattern F1, is switched from the first display color to the second display color. After that, as shown in FIG. 350(d), the colors of each pattern are switched again. The variable display of the normal game round is basically performed by repeating the above-mentioned display color switching (repeating FIG. 350(b) → FIG. 350(c) → FIG. 350(d) → FIG. 350(b)). This display color switching is set to complete one cycle in approximately 0.05 sec, making it difficult for the player to distinguish between the displays before and after the switching.

When the variable display time for the normal game has elapsed, the pictures F1 and F2 are displayed and the result of the support lottery is announced. If the result of the support lottery is a support winning result (normal winning result), the pictures F1 and F2 are displayed in one of the display modes of the first stop result (Fig. 350(e)), the second stop result (Fig. 350(f)), and the third stop result (Fig. 350(g)). The first stop result is a stop mode in which the picture F1 is the second display color and the picture F2 is the first display color, the second stop result is a stop mode in which the picture F1 is the first display color and the picture F2 is the second display color, and the third stop result is a stop mode in which the pictures F1 and F2 are the second display color. Also, if the result of the support lottery is a losing result, the pictures F1 and F2 are displayed in the fourth stop result (Fig. 350(h)) in which the pictures F1 and F2 are the first display color.

As shown in FIG. 348, in the process for displaying the normal map fluctuation, first in step Sd3101 it is determined whether or not a normal map game round is being played. If a normal map game round is not being played, the process proceeds to step Sd3102, where it is determined whether or not a normal map fluctuation start command has been received from the main control device 162. The normal map fluctuation start command includes information on the support lottery results performed by the main control device 162, and information on the fluctuation display time for the normal map game round set by the main control device 162.

If the normal map change start command has not been received, the normal map change display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the normal map change start command has been received, the normal map change start command is analyzed in step Sd3103, and the support lottery results and change display time for this normal map play are determined.

In step Sd3104, a stop result setting process is executed to set the stop results of the pictures F1 and F2 in the normal picture display area P. Here, the stop result setting process is explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 351.

In the stop result setting process, first, in step Sd3201, it is determined whether the current support mode is a high-frequency support mode (first or second high-frequency support mode). Note that when the support mode is a high-frequency support mode, it means that the current game state is a normal time-saving game state, a sudden time-saving game state, or a high-probability game state.

If the current support mode is not the high-frequency support mode, i.e., if it is the low-frequency support mode (if the current gaming state is the normal gaming state), step Sd3202 determines whether the result of this support lottery is a support winning result. This determination is made by referring to the result of step Sd3103.

If the result is a support winning result, proceed to step Sd3203, and the first stop result (Fig. 350 (e)) is set as the current stop result in the normal map display area P. On the other hand, if the result of the current support lottery is not a support winning result, i.e., if it is a losing result, proceed to step Sd3204, and the fourth stop result (Fig. 350 (h)) is set as the current stop result in the normal map display area P. After step Sd3203 or step Sd3204 is executed, the stop result setting process ends.

If the result of step Sd3201 is positive (the current support mode is high frequency support mode), then in step Sd3205 it is determined whether the result of this support lottery is a support winning result. If it is a support winning result, the process proceeds to step Sd3206, where it is determined whether the type of support winning is support winning result A. This determination is made based on the general map type command sent from the main control unit 162.

If the type of support win is support win result A, proceed to step Sd3207 and set the second stop result (Fig. 350 (f)) as the current stop result in the normal map display area P. As already explained, the type of support win corresponds to the type (mode) of the reel opening and closing game, and support win result A corresponds to the first high prize reel opening and closing game (Fig. 313 (a)). Therefore, when the second stop result is displayed, the player can recognize that the reel opening and closing game will be executed in the mode of the first high prize reel opening and closing game (Fig. 314 (a)).

In addition, in the low frequency support mode, regardless of the type of support win, the stop result corresponding to the support win result is set as the first stop result. This corresponds to the fact that in the low frequency support mode, the same type of opening and closing game of the reel (low winning reel opening and closing game) is executed in both cases of support win results A and B (Figure 313 (a)).

If a negative judgment is made in step Sd3206, that is, if the type of support win is support win result B, the process proceeds to step Sd3208, where the third stop result (Fig. 350 (h)) is set as the current stop result in the normal map display area P. Since the support win result B corresponds to the second high prize device opening and closing game (Fig. 313 (a)), the player can recognize that the device opening and closing game will be executed in the mode of the second high prize device opening and closing game (Fig. 314 (b)) by the third stop result being displayed.

In addition, if the result of this support lottery is not a support winning result, i.e., if it is a losing result, the current stop result is set as the fourth stop result in step Sd3204. After step Sd3207, step Sd3208, or step Sd3204 is executed, the stop result setting process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the process for displaying normal map changes (Fig. 348), after the execution of the stop result setting process in step Sd3104, a process for starting the display of changes in the normal map display area P is executed in step Sd3105. Specifically, a command including information on the stop result set in step Sd3104 is output to the display control device 350, and the display of changes in the images F1 and F2 is started. After execution of step Sd3105, the process for displaying normal map changes is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sd3101 (if a normal game round is being played), the process proceeds to step Sd3106, where it is judged whether or not a variable display end command has been received from the main control unit 162. If a variable display end command has not been received, this means that the variable display time has not yet elapsed in this normal game round. In this case, in step Sd3107, processing for during the variable display is executed. In the variable display processing, processing is performed to continue the variable display of the images F1 and F2.

In step Sd3108, a process for changing the stop result is executed to change the stop result set in step Sd3104. Here, the process for changing the stop result is explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 352.

First, in step Sd3301, it is determined whether a transition from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode (first or second high-frequency support mode) has occurred. Specifically, it is determined whether a time-saving play state start command has been received from the main control device 162 during the display of the fluctuation of the normal play count.

When a transition to the high frequency support mode occurs, proceed to step Sd3302 and determine whether the result of the support lottery in the ongoing regular game round is a support winning result. If it is a support winning result, determine in step Sd3303 whether the type of support winning is support winning result A.

If the type of support win is support win result A, in step Sd3304, the current stop result in the normal map display area P is changed from the first stop result to the second stop result. In other words, if a switch from low-frequency support mode to high-frequency support mode occurs during the variable display, in the stop result setting process of step Sd3104 at the start of a normal map play round, the first stop result, which is the stop result corresponding to the case where a support win result occurs during low-frequency support mode, is set as the current stop result in the normal map display area P. In step Sd3304, the setting result for the stop result thus set is rewritten to the second stop result corresponding to the case where a support win occurs during high-frequency support mode and the type is support win result A.

If the result of step Sd3303 is negative, i.e., if the type of support win is support win result B, then in step Sd3305, the current stop result in the normal map display area P is changed from the first stop result to the third stop result. The third stop result is the stop result that corresponds to the case where a support win occurs during the high frequency support mode and the type of the support win is support win result B.

After step Sd3304 or step Sd3305 is executed, the process for changing the stop result is terminated. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sd3301 (if no transition to high-frequency support mode has occurred) or if a negative judgment is made in step Sd3302 (if the support lottery result is a losing result), the setting of the stop result is not changed and the process for changing the stop result is terminated without executing the processes from step Sd3303 onwards.

Returning to the explanation of the process for displaying normal map fluctuations (Fig. 348), if a positive judgment is made in step Sd3106 (if a fluctuation end command has been received), the process for ending fluctuations is executed in step Sd3109. In the process for ending fluctuations, control is performed so that the images F1 and F2 are stopped and displayed with the stop result set in step Sd3104 or the stop result changed in step Sd3108. After execution of step Sd3109, the process for displaying normal map fluctuations is terminated.

<Special lighting effects processing>
The special lighting effect processing of step Sd2509 (Figure 342) will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 353.

The special light-emitting effect process is a performance that uses the light-emitting parts arranged on the normal power device 63a and its surroundings. Here, the light-emitting parts are explained with reference to FIG. 354.

As shown in FIG. 354(a), the normal power device 63a has a front wall 751 that covers the second operating port 63 from the front side of the gaming machine. The front wall 751 protrudes forward from the front surface of the gaming board 60 (play area PE), and a space is formed behind it through which the gaming ball can pass. When the normal power device 63a is in the open state, the gaming ball is guided to the rear side of the front wall 751 by the left and right movable pieces, passes through the space, and enters the second operating port 63.

A first light-emitting section 752 is provided on the front wall section 751. Specifically, a light-emitting board on which a light-emitting element 753 is mounted is disposed inside the front wall section 751, and a transparent transmission section 754 is disposed so as to cover the light-emitting board from the front. The light-emitting element 753 (light-emitting board) is electrically connected to the performance control device 143, and the performance control device 143 controls the light emission of the light-emitting element 753 (first light-emitting section 752).

A second light-emitting unit 761 is disposed above the normal power device 63a. The second light-emitting unit 761 is disposed on the rear side of the game board 60. That is, a light-emitting board on which a light-emitting element 762 is mounted is disposed above the normal power device 63a at the rear of the game board 60, and the light from the light-emitting element 762 can be seen from the front through the game board by either the front area of the light-emitting board being transparent on the game board 60 or the game board 60 being formed from a transparent game board.

In terms of the flow of the game balls, the second light-emitting unit 761 is located upstream of the normal electric device 63a, and game balls flowing down the game area PE toward the second operating port 63 can pass in front of the second light-emitting unit 761. The light-emitting element 762 (light-emitting board) is electrically connected to the performance control device 143, and the light emission of the light-emitting element 762 (second light-emitting unit 761) is controlled by the performance control device 143.

Next, the special light-emitting effects performed by the first light-emitting unit 752 and the second light-emitting unit 761 will be explained with reference to Figures 354 (b) and (c).

When the support mode is the low frequency support mode (when the game state is the normal game state), the first light emitting unit 752 and the second light emitting unit 761 are controlled to be in the normal light emitting mode. The normal light emitting mode is, for example, a mode in which each of the light emitting units 752, 761 emits light in a first light emitting color (e.g., white) as shown in FIG. 354(b).

When the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode (when the game state becomes the time-saving game state or the high probability game state), the light emission state of the first light emitting unit 752 and the second light emitting unit 761 is switched to the special light emission state, and the special light emission performance is executed. The special light emission state is, for example, as shown in FIG. 354(c), in which each light emitting unit 752, 761 emits light in a second light emission color (e.g., blue) different from the first light emission color. This makes the normal power device 63a and its surrounding area stand out, and appeals to the player that a winning condition in the second operating port 63 is likely to occur.

The specific form of the special light emission mode is not limited to a different light emission color from the normal light emission mode, and is not particularly limited as long as it can be distinguished from the normal light emission mode. For example, the normal light emission mode may be continuous light emission, whereas the special light emission mode may be blinking light emission, and the light emission pattern may be different.

After the special light-emitting effect starts, it will continue to be executed for the period when the support mode is in high-frequency support mode. If a jackpot is won while in high-frequency support mode and the mode transitions to open/close execution mode, the special light-emitting effect will end in response to the transition to open/close execution mode. After the special light-emitting effect ends, the light-emitting mode will switch to the open/close execution mode or switch to the normal light-emitting mode.

In addition, when the high frequency support mode ends because the number of times the special chart has been played reaches the upper limit, the special light-emitting effect ends accordingly. At that time, the special light-emitting effect may be configured to end immediately upon the end of the high frequency support mode, or the special light-emitting effect may be configured to continue after the end of the high frequency support mode while the remaining reserved play times for the second special chart are being played, and to end upon the end of the play times. After the special light-emitting effect ends, a switch to the normal light-emitting mode is made.

As shown in FIG. 353, in the special light-emitting effect processing, first in step Sd3501, it is determined whether or not a special light-emitting effect (FIG. 354(c)) is being executed. If a special light-emitting effect is not being executed, it is determined in step Sd3502 whether or not a start flag has been set in the various flag storage area 344c of the RAM 344. The start flag is used by the MPU 342 to determine that a special light-emitting effect should be executed.

If the start flag is not set, the process proceeds to step Sd3503, where it is determined whether a transition from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode (first or second high-frequency support mode) has occurred. Specifically, it is determined whether a time-saving game state start command has been received from the main control device 162.

When a transition to high frequency support mode occurs, a start timing setting process is executed in step Sd3504. The start timing setting process is for setting the start timing of the special light emission effect. Here, the start timing setting process is explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 355.

First, in step Sd3601, it is determined whether a normal game round is being played. If a normal game round is not being played, the process proceeds to step Sd3602, where it is determined whether a reel opening/closing game is being played.

If the determination in step Sd3602 is negative, it means that a transition to the high frequency support mode has occurred when neither a normal play round nor a role opening/closing play round is being executed. In this case, the process proceeds to step Sd3603, and the start timing of the special light-emitting effect is set to the first timing. The first timing is the timing corresponding to the setting process of the support flag in the main control device 162, in other words, the timing corresponding to the special play round (the end of a special play round or the opening/closing execution mode). The first timing is specifically when the support flag is set, and by setting the start timing of the special light-emitting effect to the first timing, it is specified that the special light-emitting effect should be executed immediately. After execution of step Sd3602, the start timing setting process ends.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sd3602, this means that a transition to the high-frequency support mode has occurred in a situation where a device opening/closing game corresponding to the low-frequency support mode is being played. In this case, the process proceeds to step Sd3604, and the remaining period of the device opening/closing game is determined. Specifically, the period until the ending of the device opening/closing game is completed is determined.

In step Sd3605, it is determined whether the period determined in step Sd3604 is equal to or shorter than the first specific period. The first specific period is for determining whether the period until the currently executed opening and closing game of the reel (the opening and closing game of the reel in a mode corresponding to the low frequency support mode) ends is relatively short. The specific length of the first specific period is not particularly limited, but in this embodiment, it is set to, for example, 5 seconds.

If the remaining period of the opening and closing of the reels is equal to or shorter than the first specific period, proceed to step Sd3603 and set the start timing of the special light-emitting effect to the first timing. In other words, if it is expected that the period from the transition timing to the high-frequency support mode until the end of the opening and closing of the reels for the low-frequency support mode and the start of the next normal game (normal game for the high-frequency support mode) is relatively short, the special light-emitting effect is set to be executed immediately.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sd3605 (if the remaining period of the reel opening/closing game is longer than the first specific period), the start timing is set to the second timing in step Sd3606. The second timing is a timing corresponding to the reel opening/closing game currently being played, in other words, a timing corresponding to the normal side game. Specifically, the second timing is the end of the reel opening/closing game, and the second timing is a timing later than the first timing.

In other words, if it is expected that the period from the transition to the high frequency support mode to the start of the next regular game round is relatively long, the special light-emitting effect will be executed after the opening and closing of the reels has ended, and the special light-emitting effect will be set to start later than when the period is expected to be relatively short. Note that the second timing is not limited to the end of the opening and closing of the reels, but may be a predetermined period (e.g., 1 sec) before the end. It may also be the start of the next regular game round (regular game round for the high frequency support mode). After step Sd3606 is executed, the start timing setting process ends.

If a positive judgment is made in step Sd3601 (if a normal game round is being played), the process proceeds to step Sd3607, where it is judged whether the result of the support lottery in the currently played round is a support winning result. If the result is a support winning result, the period until the normal power device 63a is opened is determined in step Sd3608. Specifically, the total period of the remaining period of the currently played normal game round and the opening period of the device opening and closing game is determined.

In step Sd3609, it is determined whether the period determined in step Sd3608 is equal to or shorter than the second specific period. The second specific period is used to determine whether the period until the timing of opening the normal power device 63a is relatively short. The specific length of the second specific period is not particularly limited, but in this embodiment, it is set to, for example, 10 seconds.

If the time until the release is less than or equal to the second specific period, the start timing of the special light-emitting effect is set to the first timing in step Sd3603, and the special light-emitting effect is set to be executed immediately. On the other hand, if the time until the release is longer than the second specific period, the process proceeds to step Sd3610, and the start timing of the special light-emitting effect is set to the third timing.

The third timing corresponds to the opening of the normal power feature 63a, or in other words, corresponds to normal play. The third timing corresponds to the first opening of the normal power feature 63a, and is later than the first timing.

As already explained, in this embodiment, if a transition to the high-frequency support mode occurs during a normal game in which the support lottery result is a win, the opening and closing of the reels that is executed after the end of the normal game is configured to be executed in a manner corresponding to the high-frequency support mode (steps Sd2205 to Sd2207, step Sd2304). If the period until the first opening is expected to be relatively long, the special light-emitting effect is set to be executed after the start of the opening. Note that the third timing is not limited to the start of the first opening, but may be a predetermined period (for example, 1 sec) before the start of the first opening. In other words, the special light-emitting effect may be configured to start prior to the first opening. After execution of step Sd3610, the start timing setting process ends.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sd3607, that is, if the support lottery result for the regular game round being played is a losing result, the process proceeds to step Sd3611, where the remaining period for that regular game round is determined. In step Sd3612, it is determined whether the period determined in step Sd3611 is equal to or shorter than the third specific period. The third specific period is intended to determine whether the period until the end of the regular game round being played (the regular game round in a mode corresponding to the low frequency support mode) is relatively short. The specific length of the third specific period is not particularly limited, but in this embodiment, it is set to, for example, 5 seconds.

If the remaining time for the regular game is equal to or less than the third specific time, the process proceeds to step Sd3603, where the start timing for the special light-emitting effect is set to the first timing, and the special light-emitting effect is set to be executed immediately. On the other hand, if the remaining time for the regular game is longer than the third specific time, the process proceeds to step Sd3613, and the start timing for the special light-emitting effect is set to the fourth timing.

The fourth timing corresponds to the start of the next regular game round, or in other words, corresponds to regular side play. Specifically, the fourth timing corresponds to the start of the next regular game round, and is later than the first timing.

In other words, if it is expected that the period between the end of a regular game round in a mode corresponding to the low frequency support mode and the start of the next regular game round in a mode corresponding to the high frequency support mode is relatively long, the special light-emitting effect is set to be executed after waiting for the start of the next regular game round. Note that the fourth timing is not limited to the start of the next regular game round, but may be a predetermined period (e.g., 1 sec) before the start of the next regular game round. After execution of step Sd3613, the start timing setting process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the special light-emitting effect processing (FIG. 353), after the start timing setting processing of step Sd3504 is executed, in step Sd3505, a start flag is set in the various flag storage area 344c of RAM 344. After step Sd3505 is executed, the special light-emitting effect processing is terminated.

If the judgment in step Sd3502 is affirmative (if the start flag is set), the process proceeds to step Sd3506, where it is determined whether it is time to start the special light-emitting effect. In other words, it is determined whether the start timing set in step Sd3504 has arrived.

If it is time to start the special light-emitting effect, in step Sd3507, the start flag set in the various flag storage area 344c is cleared. In the following step Sd3508, the first light-emitting unit 752 and the second light-emitting unit 761 are controlled so that the special light-emitting effect is executed. As a result, the light-emitting mode of the first light-emitting unit 752 and the second light-emitting unit 761 is switched from the normal light-emitting mode to the special light-emitting mode, and the light-emitting color of each of the light-emitting units 752, 761 changes from the first light-emitting color to the second light-emitting color.

After step Sd3508 is executed, the processing for the special light-emitting effect is terminated. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sd3506 (if it is not the timing to start the special light-emitting effect), the processing for the special light-emitting effect is put on hold, and the processing for the special light-emitting effect is terminated without executing the processing from step Sd3507 onwards.

If the determination in step Sd3501 is affirmative (if the special light-emitting effect is being executed), the process proceeds to step Sd3509, where it is determined whether or not it is time to end the special light-emitting effect. If it is time to end the special light-emitting effect, the first light-emitting unit 752 and the second light-emitting unit 761 are controlled to end the special light-emitting effect in step Sd3510. At this time, if the special light-emitting effect ends due to a transition to the opening and closing execution mode based on a jackpot win during the high-frequency support mode, each light-emitting unit 752, 761 is controlled to switch to the light-emitting mode for the opening and closing execution mode or to switch to the normal light-emitting mode. Also, if the special light-emitting effect ends due to the end of the high-frequency support mode based on reaching the upper limit number of times, each light-emitting unit 752, 761 is controlled to switch to the normal light-emitting mode.

After step Sd3510 is executed, the processing for the special light-emitting effect is terminated. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sd3509 (if it is not the time to end the special light-emitting effect), the special light-emitting effect is decided to continue, and the processing for the special light-emitting effect is terminated without executing the processing of step Sd3510.

<About switching the operation mode of the normal game when the game state changes>
The flow of switching the operation mode with the change of the game state for the normal game including the normal game and the opening and closing game of the accessory will be explained. First, the flow when the support flag is set when the normal game and the opening and closing game of the accessory are not being executed will be explained with reference to FIG. 356. Here, the case where the special game is a special miss result in the winning or losing lottery and suddenly transitions to the time-saving game state will be explained as an example.

If the special symbol win/lose lottery performed during normal play at timing t1 results in a special miss, a support flag is set in the RAM 314 of the main control device 162 at the start of the confirmation display for the special symbol play round corresponding to that win/lose lottery (timing t2) (Fig. 356 (a) and (b)). At this time, it is assumed that neither the normal symbol play round nor the opening/closing game of the device has been executed in the normal symbol play.

After that, when a winning entry into the through gate 64 occurs at timing t3, a support lottery is held. In this case, the support lottery is held in a manner corresponding to the high-frequency support mode (specifically, the second high-frequency support mode) based on the support flag being set (internal state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode). However, in the second high-frequency support mode, the support lottery is held with the same winning probability as in the low-frequency support mode (Figures 312(a) and (c)), so the support lottery at timing t3 is held in the same manner as the support lottery in the low-frequency support mode. Note that, when the high-frequency support mode to be transitioned to is the first high-frequency support mode, the support lottery is held with a higher winning probability than in the low-frequency support mode (Figure 312(b)).

Here, let us assume that the result of the support lottery is a winning support result. If the result is a winning support result, a lottery for the normal winning type is held, and here we assume that the result selected is support winning result A.

In addition, at timing t3, a normal game round is executed based on the support lottery being performed. This normal game round is also executed in a manner corresponding to the high frequency support mode, and is executed with a shorter variable display time and a shorter fixed display time than in the low frequency support mode. For example, the variable display time is set to 0.5 sec (Figure 337 (b)), and the fixed display time is set to 0.2 sec (Figure 335 (b)).

When the confirmation display is made, the normal picture display section 44 displays stop result A as the stop result corresponding to the support win, based on the fact that support win result A has been selected as the normal picture winning type (Fig. 337 (a)). Also, in the normal picture display area P of the picture display device 75, the second stop result is displayed as the stop result of the pictures F1 and F2 (Figs. 350 and 351). Note that the setting of each of these stop results is performed at the start of a normal picture game round.

When the normal game play ends at timing t4, the normal power device 63a opens and closes the device based on the support win (Fig. 356 (d) to (f)). In this case, the device opens and closes in the manner of the first high prize device open and close game based on the support flag being set and the support win result A being drawn (Fig. 313).

In the above-mentioned opening and closing game, first, the normal power device 63a is closed and an opening is performed for, for example, 0.1 sec, and then the normal power device 63a is switched from the closed state to the open state (timing t5). The upper limit opening time of this open state is set to a period (for example, 1.5 sec) longer than the period (for example, 0.1 sec) in the low frequency support mode. Since the launch cycle of the game ball when the game ball launch handle 41 is continuously operated is 0.6 sec, when the normal power device 63a is opened in the above-mentioned manner, it is possible to preferably achieve a winning entry into the second operating port 63.

When the opening time of the normal power device 63a reaches the upper limit opening time or when the number of winning balls entering the second operating port 63 reaches the upper limit winning number, the normal power device 63a is closed (timing t6). As a result, an ending is executed for, for example, 0.1 sec.

As described above, if normal play is not being performed when the support flag is set, a switch from a mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode to a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode will occur in conjunction with the start of the next normal play round (Figure 356 (g)).

Next, we will explain the flow when the support flag is set while a regular game round resulting from a support win is being played, with reference to Figure 357.

When a support lottery is held at timing t1 during normal gameplay (low frequency support mode), a normal game round is executed based on that (Fig. 357 (c)). Here, the result of that support lottery is a support win, and support win result B is selected in the normal win type lottery.

At this time, the support flag is not set in the RAM 314 of the main control device 162, and the internal state corresponds to the low-frequency support mode (Fig. 357(b)), so the normal game round is executed in a manner corresponding to the low-frequency support mode. For example, the variable display time is set to 30 seconds (Fig. 337(b)), and the fixed display time is set to 2 seconds (Fig. 335(b)).

At the start of a normal game round, the stop result is set in the normal display section 44. Here, based on the fact that support winning result B has been drawn as the normal winning type, stop result B is set as the above-mentioned stop result (Fig. 337 (b)). The stop result is also set in the normal display area P of the pattern display device 75, but here, based on the fact that the support mode at that time is the low frequency support mode, the first stop result is set as the stop result of patterns F1 and F2 (Figs. 350 and 351).

After the start of the normal game round (after the support lottery is executed), if the special lottery results in a special miss at timing t2 while the variable display is being executed (Fig. 357(a)), a support flag is set in the RAM 314 of the main control device 162 at the start of the confirmation display for the special game round corresponding to the win/lose lottery (timing t3), and the internal state changes to one corresponding to the high-frequency support mode (Fig. 357(b)). At this time, the variable display for the normal game round being executed is in a mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode, and this mode is maintained even after the support flag is set. In other words, the variable display will continue until the variable display time set at timing t1 has elapsed, even if the support flag is set during the process.

As described above, if the support flag is set during the variable display in a normal play round after the support lottery is executed, the setting of the stop result of the pictures F1 and F2 in the normal play area P is changed from that corresponding to the low frequency support mode to that corresponding to the high frequency support mode (Figures 348 and 352). At that time, based on the fact that the support winning result B was selected in the normal win type lottery executed at timing t1, the above change is made so that the third stop result is set among the stop results corresponding to the high frequency support mode.

On the other hand, the stop result in the regular map display section 44 is not changed as in the regular map display area P, and the setting of the stop result executed at timing t1 (stop result B) is maintained as is. This is because the stop results corresponding to each value of the regular map type counter C4 are shared between the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode.

When the display of the variations in the number of normal play times ends at timing t4, the final display is executed. At this point, the support flag is set, but the final display is executed for the final display time (e.g., 2 seconds) that was set at timing t1 before the support flag was set. In other words, the final display is executed in a manner corresponding to the low frequency support mode (e.g., a final display time of 2 seconds). At this time, stop result B is displayed as a stop on the normal display unit 44, and the third stop result is displayed as a stop on the normal display area P of the pattern display device 75.

When the confirmation display ends at timing t5 and the normal game round ends, the normal power device 63a opens and closes the device based on the support win (Fig. 357 (d) to (f)). At that time, the support flag is set, but the opening in the device open and close game is executed in a manner corresponding to the low-frequency support mode based on the fact that the support lottery that triggered the device open and close game was performed under the low-frequency support mode. Specifically, the opening is executed for, for example, 5 seconds with the normal power device 63a in a closed state.

When the opening ends at timing t6, the opening and closing mode of the normal power device 63a in this device opening and closing game is set. At that time, based on the fact that the support flag is set, the opening and closing is set to be performed in a mode corresponding to the high frequency support mode. In other words, if the support flag is set during the execution of a normal game round that is the result of a support win, a switch is made from a mode corresponding to the low frequency support mode to a mode corresponding to the high frequency support mode in conjunction with the start of the opening of the normal power device 63a in the device opening and closing game triggered by the support win (Fig. 357 (g)).

Since multiple types of opening and closing modes are provided for the high frequency support mode, consisting of the first high prize feature opening and closing game and the second high prize feature opening and closing game, when setting the opening and closing mode of the regular power feature 63a, it is necessary to select which of these modes to use. At this time, the above selection is made based on the result of the winning type lottery that was held before the support flag was set.

In this example, support winning result B was selected in the winning type lottery held at timing t1, so the opening and closing mode of the normal power device 63a is set to the second high prize device opening and closing mode. Specifically, the first opening with an upper limit opening time of, for example, 2 sec, the closing with, for example, 0.3 sec, and the second opening with an upper limit opening time of, for example, 2 sec are set. As already explained, the firing cycle of the game ball is 0.6 sec, so when the normal power device 63a is opened in this mode, it is possible to preferably achieve a prize in the second operating port 63.

When the second opening ends due to reaching the upper limit opening time, or when the number of winning balls entering the second operating port 63 reaches the upper limit winning number, the normal power device 63a is closed (timing t7). After that, the ending of this device opening and closing game is executed. This ending is executed in a manner corresponding to the high frequency support mode, and continues for, for example, 0.1 sec. Note that from the start to the end of the device opening and closing game, the stop result B continues to be displayed on the normal map display section 44, and the third stop result continues to be displayed in the normal map display area P.

When the opening and closing of the reels ends at timing t8, if there is regular reels reserved information, the next regular reels will be played. This regular reels will be played in a manner that corresponds to the high frequency support mode.

The above example shows a case where the support flag is set during a variable display during a normal play round, but if the support flag is set during a fixed display during a normal play round, or if the support flag is set during the execution of an opening in a reel opening/closing game, the operation will be switched to a mode corresponding to the high frequency support mode from the start of opening in the reel opening/closing game, in the same manner as above. However, in these cases, the stop result in the normal play display area P will not be changed. In other words, the stop result displayed before the support flag was set will continue to be displayed as it is after the support flag is set.

It is also possible that the support flag may be set after the opening of the reel opening/closing game ends. In this case, the operation will be switched to a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode in time with the start of the next normal game round that is played after the reel opening/closing game ends. In other words, if the support flag is set after the opening state begins, the opening will be performed in a mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode.

Also, the example given was of a special miss in the special drawing and a sudden transition to a time-saving play state (second high-frequency support mode), but the same operation is performed when the special drawing results in a big win and the game transitions to a high probability play state or a normal time-saving play state (first high-frequency support mode) via the opening and closing execution mode. In other words, since the normal drawing round is also played during the opening and closing execution mode, if the opening and closing execution mode ends during the normal drawing round with the support win result and the support flag is set, the operation will be switched from the start of the opening of the device opening and closing game corresponding to that normal drawing round to a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode.

Next, we will explain the flow when the support flag is set while a normal game round with a losing result is being played, with reference to Figure 358.

When a support lottery is drawn at timing t1 during normal gameplay (low-frequency support mode), a normal game round is executed based on the lottery (Fig. 358 (c)). Here, it is assumed that the support lottery results in a loss.

At this time, the support flag is not set in the RAM 314 of the main control device 162, and the internal state corresponds to the low-frequency support mode (Fig. 358 (b)), so the normal game round is executed in a manner corresponding to the low-frequency support mode. For example, the variable display time is set to 30 seconds (Fig. 337 (b)), and the fixed display time is set to 2 seconds (Fig. 335 (b)).

After the normal game round starts (after the support lottery is executed), if the special game lottery results in a special miss at timing t2 while the variable display is being executed (Fig. 358(a)), a support flag is set in the RAM 314 of the main control device 162 at the start of the confirmation display for the special game round corresponding to the win/lose lottery (timing t3), and the internal state changes to one corresponding to the high-frequency support mode (Fig. 358(b)). At this time, the variable display being executed is in a mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode, and this mode is maintained even after the support flag is set.

After that, when the display of the variation of the number of normal play times ends at timing t4, the confirmation display is executed in a manner corresponding to the low frequency support mode. At this time, the stop result for a normal miss is displayed in the normal display section 44, and the fourth stop result is displayed in the normal display area P of the pattern display device 75 (Fig. 350, Fig. 351).

When the confirmation display ends at timing t5 and the normal game round ends, the next normal game round is executed. In this case, the normal game round is executed in a manner corresponding to the high frequency support mode (more specifically, the second high frequency support mode) based on the fact that the support flag is set.

In this way, if the support flag is set during the execution of a normal game round that results in a loss, the mode corresponding to the low frequency support mode is switched to the mode corresponding to the high frequency support mode in time for the start of the next normal game round (Figure 358 (g)).

Next, the flow when the support flag is cleared while a normal game round resulting from a support win is being played will be explained with reference to FIG. 359. Here, we will explain the case where the number of times a special game round has been played in the time-saving game state (high-frequency support mode) reaches the upper limit, and the game transitions to the normal game state (low-frequency support mode) as an example.

When a support lottery is held at timing t1 during the time-saving game state, a regular game round is executed based on that (Fig. 359 (c)). Here, the result of that support lottery is a support win, and support win result B is selected in the regular win type lottery.

At this time, a support flag is set in the RAM 314 of the main control device 162, and the internal state corresponds to the high frequency support mode (Fig. 359 (b)), so the normal game round is executed in a manner corresponding to the high frequency support mode. For example, the variable display time is set to 0.5 sec, and the fixed display time is set to 0.2 sec.

After the start of the normal game round (after the support lottery is executed), at timing t2 during which the variable display is being executed, when the variable display of the special game round, which is the upper limit number of times, ends, the support flag is cleared and the internal state changes to one corresponding to the low-frequency support mode. At this time, the variable display being executed is in a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode, and this mode is maintained even after the support flag is cleared. In addition, the final display after the variable display ends is also executed in a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode.

When the confirmation display ends at timing t3 and the normal game round ends, the normal power device 63a opens and closes the device based on the support win (Fig. 359 (d) to (f)). At that time, the support flag is cleared, but the device opens and closes in a manner corresponding to the high frequency support mode. Specifically, an opening of, for example, 0.1 sec, a first opening with an upper limit opening time of, for example, 2 sec, a closing of, for example, 0.3 sec, a second opening with an upper limit opening time of, for example, 2 sec, and an ending of, for example, 0.1 sec are performed in this order.

When the ending ends at timing t4 and the opening and closing of the reels ends, the next normal play round is executed. In this case, the normal play round is executed in a manner corresponding to the low frequency support mode, based on the fact that the support flag is not set.

In this way, if the support flag is cleared during a normal game round that results from a support win, the mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is applied until the opening and closing of the reel corresponding to that support win is completed, and the switch to the mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode is made after waiting for the start of the next normal game round. With this configuration, if the support flag is cleared during a normal game round that was started during the high-frequency support mode, a state in which winning at the second operating port 63 is likely to occur will continue until the opening and closing of the reel corresponding to that normal game round is completed, allowing the player to enjoy the benefits of the high-frequency support mode for a longer period of time.

In addition, if the support flag is cleared during the execution of a special feature opening/closing game or during the execution of a normal game round that results in a miss, the mode will be switched to the mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode in conjunction with the start of the next normal game round. Also, if the support flag is cleared when a normal game round or a special feature opening/closing game is not being executed, the mode will be switched to the mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode in conjunction with the start of the next normal game round.

<Special lighting effects start timing>
The start timing of the special light emitting effect using the first light emitting unit 752 and the second light emitting unit 761 will be described with reference to Fig. 360. The special light emitting effect is an effect that informs the player that the high frequency support mode is in effect (a state in which winning at the second operating port 63 is likely to occur) by making the first light emitting unit 752 and the second light emitting unit 761 emit light in a special light emitting mode different from the normal light emitting mode, while highlighting the normal power role 63a (the second operating port 63) and the winning route to the second operating port 63.

This special lighting effect corresponds to the high frequency support mode, so it basically starts at the timing corresponding to the setting of the support flag, but it can start at a different timing depending on the status of the normal side operation when the flag is set. Below, we will explain how to use these different start timings.

As shown in FIG. 360(a), the situation when the flag is set may be that the support flag is set during the execution of a reel opening/closing game in a mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode. In this case, the remaining period of the reel opening/closing game is grasped, and it is determined whether or not the period is relatively short. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the grasped remaining period is equal to or shorter than a first specific period (e.g., 5 seconds).

If the remaining period is less than the first specific period and is relatively short, a special light emission effect will start when the support flag is set (first timing). This makes it possible to notify the player of the transition to high frequency support mode by taking action in response to the change in the internal state. Note that the first timing does not necessarily have to be the timing when the support flag is set, and may be, for example, the timing after a predetermined period (e.g. 1 sec) has passed since the support flag was set. In short, it is sufficient that it is based on the timing when the support flag was set.

On the other hand, if the remaining period is longer than the first specific period and is relatively long, the special light-emitting effect starts at the end of the opening and closing of the reel (second timing). In other words, the special light-emitting effect starts at a later timing than when the remaining period of the opening and closing of the reel is relatively short.

In a situation where there is a long period between the setting of the support flag and the opening of the regular power device 63a for the high frequency support mode, if the special light emission effect starts at the timing of the flag being set, even though it is announced that it is in the high frequency support mode, it may give the player an unnatural impression that no winning entry into the second operating port 63 actually occurs. In particular, because the regular power device 63a and the winning route to the second operating port 63 are made to stand out, the player's attention is likely to be drawn to them, and it is easy to notice that no winning entry into the second operating port 63 occurs, which may have the opposite effect.

In this regard, by delaying the start timing of the special light-emitting effect as described above, it is possible to shorten the period from the start of the effect to the opening for the high-frequency support mode. This makes it possible to effectively suppress the impression that winning at the second operating port 63 is difficult to achieve, while effectively highlighting the regular electric device 63a and the winning route to the second operating port 63.

As shown in FIG. 360(b), another situation when the flag is set is when the support flag is set during a normal play round (a normal play round in a mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode) that is the result of a support win. In this case, the period until the opening of the normal power device 63a begins in the device opening/closing game triggered by the support win is grasped, and it is determined whether the period is relatively short or not. Specifically, it is determined whether the grasped period is equal to or shorter than a predetermined second specific period (e.g., 10 seconds).

If the remaining period is less than the second specific period and is relatively short, the special light-emitting effect starts when the support flag is set (first timing). On the other hand, if the remaining period is longer than the second specific period and is relatively long, the special light-emitting effect starts when the normal power device 63a opens (third timing). In other words, the special light-emitting effect starts at a later timing than when the period until opening is relatively short. With this configuration, it is possible to quickly create a state in which a winning entry into the second operating port 63 occurs after the start of the special light-emitting effect, making it possible to obtain the same effect as above.

As shown in FIG. 360(c), another situation when the flag is set is when the support flag is set during a normal play round that results in a loss (a normal play round in a mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode). In this case, the remaining period of that normal play round is grasped, and it is determined whether or not the period is relatively short. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the grasped remaining period is equal to or shorter than a predetermined third specific period (e.g., 5 seconds).

If the remaining period is less than the third specific period and is relatively short, the special light-emitting effect starts when the support flag is set (first timing). On the other hand, if the remaining period is longer than the third specific period and is relatively long, the special light-emitting effect starts at the start of the next regular game (a regular game in a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode) (fourth timing). In other words, the special light-emitting effect starts at a later timing than when the remaining period of the regular game is relatively short. Since the next regular game will be in a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode and is expected to end in a short time, the above configuration makes it possible to shorten the period from the start of the special light-emitting effect to the opening of the high-frequency support mode.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 360(d), if the support flag is set when neither a normal play nor a reel opening/closing play is in progress, a special light-emitting effect will start when the support flag is set (first timing).

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

In a pachinko machine in which the operation mode of the normal play round and the device opening/closing play are switched to a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode after the support flag is set and the internal state is set to correspond to the high-frequency support mode, the timing at which the switch can be executed is set multiple times within one normal play round (play from the start of a normal play round to the end of the device opening/closing play corresponding to that normal play round).

With this configuration, if the support flag is set during a normal game round resulting from a support win that was started in the low-frequency support mode, it is possible to switch to a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode without waiting for the end of the opening and closing of the device corresponding to that normal game round. This allows the opening and closing operation of the normal power device 63a in a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode to be activated quickly, and when the conditions for switching to the high-frequency support mode are met, the player can receive the benefits quickly.

The above configuration of this embodiment can also be seen as being configured so that when the support flag is set, the switch to the mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode can be executed at a specific timing during normal play. In this case, the switch can be executed without waiting for the end of the normal play, so the waiting period from when the support flag is set until the switch is executed can be shortened, and the opening and closing operation of the normal power device 63a in the mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode can be activated quickly.

As timings at which switching to a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode can be executed, a timing (first timing) corresponding to the start of a normal play round and a timing (second timing) corresponding to the first opening of the normal power device 63a in a device opening and closing play are provided. In this case, it is possible to select which of these timings to use for the above switching, taking into account the timing at which the support flag is set and the status of the normal side operation. In other words, it is possible to select the timing closest to the timing at which the support flag is set from among the above timings, and to quickly switch to a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode after the support flag is set.

The above-mentioned switching is performed at the above-mentioned first timing when the support flag is set when neither a normal game round nor a role opening/closing game is being played, or when the support flag is set during a normal game round that results in a loss, while the above-mentioned switching is performed at the above-mentioned second timing when the support flag is set during a normal game round that results in a support win. This allows for optimization of the switching timing, and makes it possible to quickly switch to a mode that corresponds to the high-frequency support mode after the support flag is set.

In a pachinko machine that has a sudden time-saving game state (second high-frequency support mode) in which the probability of winning the support lottery as a time-saving game state (high-frequency support mode) is the same as that in the normal game state (low-frequency support mode), the above-mentioned switching timing is provided in multiple times.

To make the high-frequency support mode function as a game state in which winning the second operating port 63 is likely to occur, it is necessary to set the winning probability in the support lottery to a certain value or more and ensure a certain frequency with which the second operating port 63 (normal power device 63a) is in the open state. In this case, since the winning probability of the support lottery is the same as the probability in the low-frequency support mode, the frequency with which the open state is reached also in the low-frequency support mode increases, making it difficult to create a clear difference in the ease with which the game ball can win the second operating port 63 between the two modes. Therefore, it is conceivable that by lengthening the period required for one normal game or one opening and closing game of the device in the low-frequency support mode, the frequency of the support lottery per unit time can be reduced, making it difficult to win the second operating port 63.

However, on the other hand, as these periods become longer, the waiting period after the support flag is set until the mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is switched to also becomes longer, and there is a concern that this may lead to a situation in which a state in which a winning entry into the second operating port 63 is likely to occur does not arrive easily, even though the internal state corresponds to the high-frequency support mode. By applying a configuration in this embodiment that diversifies the switching timing to this configuration, the waiting period can be effectively shortened, and it becomes possible to quickly arrive at a state in which a winning entry into the variable ball entry means is likely to occur.

When the support flag is set during the normal game play resulting from the support win, and the opening of the normal power device 63a in the device opening and closing game is switched to the mode for the high-frequency support mode, the selection of whether to set the first high-prize device opening and closing game or the second high-prize device opening and closing game for the opening in the high-frequency support mode is made using the results of the normal device winning type lottery performed before the support flag was set. In this case, since there is no need to redo the normal device winning type lottery, it is possible to suppress the complexity and complication of the control process, and it becomes possible to appropriately control the switching of the game state.

The stop results for the support winning results displayed on the normal game display unit 44 are configured so that the results (the state of the stop results) for the value of the normal game winning type counter C4 are the same for the time-saving game state and the normal game state.

The lottery result of the normal winning type is used to select the mode in which the opening and closing of the reel is performed and to select the stop result for the support winning result, so the stop result displayed on the normal winning display unit 44 not only shows the result of the support lottery, but also the mode of the reel opening and closing. In this case, by making the result (the mode of the stop result) for the value of the normal winning type counter C4 common to the stop result for the time-saving game state and the stop result for the normal game state, even if the mode of the opening operation switched to the high-frequency support mode is set by the result of the normal winning type lottery performed before the support flag is set, the stop result displayed (the stop result for the normal game state) and the mode of the opening operation after switching (the mode of the opening operation for the time-saving game state) can be made consistent. This makes it possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of inconveniences that may confuse players due to inconsistencies between the stop result displayed and the mode of the opening operation.

When a support flag is set during a normal game, the stop result in the normal display area P of the pattern display device 75 is changed. Specifically, the stop result of the patterns F1 and F2 is switched from the first stop result to the second or third stop result. With this configuration, even if a support flag is set during a normal game for the low-frequency support mode and the reel opening/closing game is switched to a high-frequency support mode and executed, the stop result corresponding to the reel opening/closing game mode can be notified.

Incidentally, if the special miss result is not clearly indicated in the special symbol play of the symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 performed on the symbol display device 75, it will be difficult for the player to recognize that they have won the special miss result from that special symbol play, but by visually checking the stop result in the normal symbol display area P, they will be able to sense that they have won the special miss result (in other words, that the support flag has been set). In other words, the stop results of the symbols F1 and F2 are displayed in a state that reflects not only the result of the support lottery but also whether or not the support flag has been set, so that the player's interest in the stop result can be heightened, and it becomes possible to increase the attention paid to the game.

When executing a special light-emitting effect (light-emitting effect at the first light-emitting portion 752 and the second light-emitting portion 761) corresponding to the time-saving play state, the start timing is configured to vary depending on the state of play on the normal play side. For example, if a special light-emitting effect corresponding to the time-saving play state is being executed but the state is not switched to one in which winning is likely to occur at the second operating port 63, there is a concern that this may give the player an unnatural impression. In such a case, by configuring the start timing of the special light-emitting effect to vary depending on the state of play on the normal play side, the special light-emitting effect can be started at an appropriate timing according to the switch to the high-frequency support mode, making it possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

The system is configured to grasp the period from when the support flag is set until the opening of the normal power device 63a in a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode, and if that period is longer than the second specific period, to delay the start of the special light-emitting effect to a third timing corresponding to the execution timing of that opening. In this case, it is possible to keep the time lag from when the special light-emitting effect starts until the opening operation for the high-frequency support mode is performed short. This makes it possible to inform the player that a winning condition is likely to occur in the second operating port 63 at an appropriate timing corresponding to the switch to the mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode.

<Modification 1>
A first modified example of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 361 to 365. In these figures, the same components as those in the fourth embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the fourth embodiment described above, switching from a mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode to a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is performed at the start of a normal game round and at the first opening of a reel opening/closing game, but in this modified example, switching at further different times is possible. The configuration of this modified example will be described in detail below.

The high prize device opening and closing game in this modified example will be explained with reference to Figure 361.

In the high frequency support mode, the first high prize opening and closing game and the second high prize opening and closing game are provided as the modes of the opening and closing game of the role in the high frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 361(a), the first high prize opening and closing game is configured so that the opening number of the normal power role 63a is set to two times, and the opening of 0.1 sec, the first opening of 1.5 sec, the closing of 0.3 sec, the second opening of 1.5 sec, and the ending of 0.1 sec are performed in order. Also, as shown in FIG. 361(b), the second high prize opening and closing game is configured so that the opening number of the normal power role 63a is set to two times, and the opening of 0.1 sec, the first opening of 2 sec, the closing of 0.3 sec, the second opening of 2 sec, and the ending of 0.1 sec are performed in order. In each of these open/close games, the number of times the normal power device 63a opens is the same, but the upper limit of the opening time for each opening is different.

<Opening and closing process of parts>
The opening and closing process of the role object according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 362. This process is executed in step Sd2111 of the electric role support process (Fig. 338) by the main control device 162, and is executed in place of the opening and closing process of the role object in Fig. 340. In Fig. 362, the same step numbers are given to the processes similar to those in Fig. 340, and their descriptions are omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sd2301, it is determined whether the normal power mechanism 63a is open. Specifically, this determination is made based on the drive state of the drive unit 63b. If the normal power mechanism 63a is not open, it is determined in step Sd2302 whether the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is "0".

If the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is not "0", proceed to step Sd2303, where it is determined whether the value of the timer area T2 provided in the various counter area 344b of RAM 314 is "0". If the value of the timer area T2 is "0", in step Sd4101, an upper limit opening time setting process is executed to set the upper limit opening time of the normal power device 63a for this opening. Here, the upper limit opening time setting process in step Sd4101 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 363 (a).

First, in step Sd4201, the current game state is grasped. Specifically, it is determined whether a support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314, and if so, the type of the support flag is referenced to determine whether the current support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the first high-frequency support mode, or the second high-frequency support mode.

In step Sd4202, it is determined whether the result of step Sd4201 is the high-frequency support mode (first or second high-frequency support mode). If it is the high-frequency support mode (if the support flag is set in the various flags storage area 314e), the process proceeds to step Sd4203, where the upper limit opening time for the current opening is set to the upper limit opening time for the high-frequency support mode.

The upper limit opening time corresponding to the high frequency support mode is either 1.5 sec or 2 sec (Fig. 361), but the allocation is made based on the result of grasping the normal winning type in step Sd2106 of the electric role support processing (Fig. 338). Specifically, if the grasped normal winning type is support winning result A, the upper limit opening time is set to 1.5 sec, and if it is support winning result B, the upper limit opening time is set to 2 sec. In step Sd4203, a value corresponding to the upper limit opening time is set in timer area T2 provided in various counter area 344b of RAM 314. After execution of step Sd4203, the upper limit opening time setting processing ends.

If the result of step Sd4202 is negative, i.e., if the result of step Sd4201 is low-frequency support mode (the support flag is not set in the various flags storage area 314e), the process proceeds to step Sd4204, where it is determined whether the low support transition flag is set in the various flags storage area 314e of RAM 314.

If the low support transition flag is not set, proceed to step Sd4205 and set the upper limit opening time for the low frequency support mode as the upper limit opening time for this opening. Specifically, the upper limit opening time is set to 0.1 sec (Figure 313 (b)). After executing step Sd4205, the upper limit opening time setting process ends.

If the determination in step Sd4204 is positive (if the low support transition flag is set), it is determined whether the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is "1". If the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is "1", the process proceeds to step Sd4207, where the low support transition flag set in the various flag storage area 314e is cleared.

After execution of step Sd4207 or if a negative judgment is made in step Sd4206 (the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is not "1"), the process proceeds to step Sd4203, where the upper limit opening time for the current opening is set to the upper limit opening time for the high frequency support mode. Note that the processing of steps Sd4204 to Sd4207 is the same as steps Sd2213 to Sd2216 (Fig. 339 (b)) in the fourth embodiment described above.

Returning to the explanation of the reel opening/closing process (Fig. 362), after executing the upper limit opening time setting process in step Sd4101, in step Sd2305, "6" is set in the winning counter area PC2 provided in the various counter areas 344b. This value corresponds to the upper limit number of winnings (6) for the normal electric reel 63a (second operating port 63) in the reel opening/closing game.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sd2314 (the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is not "0"), the closing time setting process is executed in step Sd4102. The closing time setting process is for setting the interval time (waiting time) during which the normal power mechanism 63a is kept in the closed state and waits for the next opening. Here, the closing time setting process in step Sd4102 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 363(b).

First, in step Sd4301, the current game state is grasped. Specifically, it is determined whether a support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e, and if so, the type of the flag is referenced to determine whether the current support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the first high-frequency support mode, or the second high-frequency support mode.

In step Sd4302, it is determined whether the result of step Sd4301 is the high-frequency support mode (first or second high-frequency support mode). If the result is the high-frequency support mode (if the support flag is set in the various flags storage area 314e), the process proceeds to step Sd4303, and the closing time for the high-frequency support mode (e.g., 0.3 sec) is set as the current closing time. In more detail, a value corresponding to the closing time is set in timer area T2 provided in various counter area 344b of RAM 314. After execution of step Sd4303, the closing time setting process ends.

If a negative judgment is made in step Sd4302, that is, if the result of the determination in step Sd4301 is the low-frequency support mode (if the support flag is not set in the various flags storage area 314e), then in step Sd4304, it is judged whether or not the low-support transition flag is set in the various flags storage area 314e. If the low-support transition flag is not set, the process proceeds to step Sd4305, where the closing time for this time is set to the closing time for the low-frequency support mode (e.g., 1.5 sec). After execution of step Sd4305, the closing time setting process ends.

If the determination in step Sd4304 is positive (the low support transition flag is set), the current closing time is set to the closing time for the high frequency support mode (e.g., 0.3 sec) in step Sd4303, and then the closing time setting process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the reel opening/closing process (FIG. 362), after executing the closing time setting process in step Sd4102, in step Sd2316, a reel closing command is set as the target for transmission to the performance control device 143. By transmitting the reel closing command, the performance control device 143 is notified that the normal power reel 63a has been switched from an open state to a closed state. The reel closing command includes information indicating the closing time set in step Sd4102.

<About switching the operation mode of the normal game when the game state changes>
The flow of switching of the operation mode accompanying the change of the game state regarding the normal game side including the normal game round and the opening and closing game of the role will be explained. Note that, as for the switching when the support flag is set when the normal game round and the role opening and closing game are not being executed (FIG. 356), and when the support flag is set during the execution of the normal game round (FIG. 357), it is the same as the fourth embodiment, so the explanation will be omitted.

First, the flow when the support flag is set during the interval (the closure between the first and second opening) of the opening and closing of the reels that was started in a mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode will be explained with reference to FIG. 364. Here, we will explain the case where the special drawing for the special game round results in a special miss, and the game suddenly transitions to a time-saving game state.

When a support lottery is held during normal play (low frequency support mode), a regular game round is executed based on that lottery. Here, the result of that support lottery is a support win, and support win result A is selected in the regular win type lottery.

At this time, the support flag is not set in the RAM 314 of the main control device 162, and the internal state corresponds to the low-frequency support mode, so the above-mentioned normal game round is executed in a manner corresponding to the low-frequency support mode. For example, the variable display time is set to 30 seconds, and the final display time is set to 2 seconds (Figure 364 (c)). When the final display is performed, the stop result corresponding to the support winning result A is displayed in a stopped state on the normal display unit 44, and the first stop result is set as the stop result of the pictures F1 and F2 in the normal display area P of the pattern display device 75.

When the normal game play ends at timing t1, a reel opening/closing game is executed using the normal power reel 63a based on the fact that a support win has been won. The opening in the reel opening/closing game is executed in a manner corresponding to the low-frequency support mode based on the fact that the support lottery that triggered the reel opening/closing game was executed in the low-frequency support mode (Fig. 364 (d)). Specifically, the opening is executed for, for example, 5 seconds with the normal power reel 63a in a closed state.

When the opening ends at timing t2, the opening mode for the first opening in this reel opening/closing game is set. At this time, the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314 is referenced to determine whether or not the support flag is set. Then, the opening mode for the first opening is set based on the determination result. Since the support flag is not set at this point, a mode corresponding to the low frequency support mode is set as the above opening mode. Specifically, the upper limit opening time for the first opening is set to, for example, 0.1 sec.

When the first opening ends at timing t3, the mode of the interval (the closure between the first and second opening) in this opening and closing game of the reels is set. At this time, the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314 is also referenced to determine whether or not the support flag is set. The mode of the interval is then set based on the determination result. Since the support flag is not set at this point, a mode corresponding to the low frequency support mode is set as the mode of the interval. Specifically, the closure period is set to, for example, 1.5 sec.

At timing t4 during the interval, when the result of the special draw lottery results in a special draw miss and the confirmation display of the special draw game round begins, a support flag is set in the RAM 314 of the main control device 162 (Fig. 364 (b)).

After that, when the interval ends at timing t5, the opening mode for the second opening in this reel opening/closing game is set. At this time, the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314 is also referenced to determine whether the support flag is set or not. Then, the opening mode for the second opening is set based on the determination result. At this point, since the support flag is set, the opening mode is set to a mode corresponding to the high frequency support mode.

As modes corresponding to the high frequency support mode, the first high prize feature open/close game (Fig. 361(a)) and the second high prize feature open/close game (Fig. 361(b)) are provided, and when setting the above, the result of the regular winning type lottery held at the start of the regular game round is referenced, and based on that result, which of the above opening/closing games is selected to set. Here, since the support winning result A was selected in the regular winning type lottery, the upper limit opening time for the second opening in the first high prize feature open/close game (for example, 1.5 sec) is set as the upper limit opening time for this opening (second opening).

In this way, if the support flag is set during the interval after the first opening is completed, a switch from the mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode to the mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode will occur in conjunction with the start of the second opening (Figure 364 (g)).

When the second opening of the current opening and closing game of the device is completed at timing t6, the ending is executed. This ending is executed in a manner corresponding to the high frequency support mode, and continues for, for example, 0.1 seconds. If the number of winning balls entering the second operating port 63 reaches the upper limit number of winning balls before the second opening is completed, the normal power device 63a is closed at that point, and the above-mentioned ending is executed.

The stop results of the normal map display section 44 and the normal map display area P that are stopped and displayed during the fixed display period of the normal map game round continue to be displayed even while the reel opening and closing game is being played. During the reel opening and closing game, the operation is switched to a mode corresponding to the high frequency support mode, but these stop results are not changed, and the stop results that were displayed before the switch continue to be displayed as they are.

Next, with reference to FIG. 365, we will explain the flow when the support flag is set during the first opening of a reel opening/closing game that has been started in a mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode.

When a support lottery is held during normal play (low-frequency support mode), a regular game round is executed based on that lottery. Here, the result of the support lottery is a support win, and support win result B is selected in the regular win type lottery. At this time, since the support flag is not set in the RAM 314 of the main control device 162, the regular game round is executed in a manner corresponding to the low-frequency support mode. For example, the variable display time is set to 30 seconds, and the fixed display time is set to 2 seconds (Fig. 365 (c)).

When the normal game play ends at timing t1, a device opening/closing game is executed by the normal power device 63a based on the fact that a support win has been won. The opening in the device opening/closing game is executed in a manner corresponding to the low-frequency support mode based on the fact that the support lottery that triggered the device opening/closing game was executed in the low-frequency support mode (Fig. 365 (d)).

When the opening ends at timing t2, the opening mode for the first opening in this game of opening and closing the reels is set. At this time, a reference is made to whether or not a support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. Since the support flag is not set at this point, the opening mode is set to a mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode (for example, an upper limit opening time of 0.1 sec).

At timing t3 during the first opening, when the result of the special drawing lottery results in a special miss and the confirmation display of the special drawing play round begins, a support flag is set in the RAM 314 of the main control device 162 (Fig. 365 (b)).

After that, when the first opening is completed at timing t4, the interval for this opening and closing game of the reels is set. At this time, the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314 is referenced to determine whether or not the support flag is set. In this case, since the support flag is set, the above-mentioned interval mode is set to a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode (for example, a closed period of 0.3 sec).

In this way, when the support flag is set during the first opening, a switch from the mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode to the mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is performed in time with the start of the interval (Figure 365 (g)). The flow thereafter is the same as that from timing t5 onwards in Figure 364, so a description thereof will be omitted.

By the way, if the support flag is set during the second opening or during the ending, the mode will switch from the mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode to the mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode when the next normal play begins after the opening and closing play of that reel ends.

The modified example described above has the following advantages:

Regarding normal game rounds and normal game rounds including the opening and closing of the reel, the timing at which the reel can be switched from a mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode to a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is set to the start timing of the second opening in the reel opening and closing game. In this case, if the support flag is set during the reel opening and closing game, the reel can be switched to a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode in the currently running reel opening and closing game without waiting for the start of the next normal game round. This makes it possible to quickly activate the opening operation of the normal reel 63a, which is likely to result in a win in the second operating port 63.

The above switching can be performed at the start of the interval immediately after the first opening. In this case, if the support flag is set during the first opening, the switch to the mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode can be performed from the start of the interval without waiting for the start of the second opening. In a device opening and closing game, if the interval for the high-frequency support mode (e.g., 0.3 sec) is shorter than the interval for the low-frequency support mode (e.g., 1.5 sec), this leads to the second opening in the mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode arriving sooner, and makes it possible to activate the opening operation of the normal power device 63a, which is more likely to result in a winning entry into the second operating port 63, more quickly.

<Modification 2>
Modification 2 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 366 to 369. In these figures, the same components as those in the fourth embodiment and modification 1 are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In this modified version, if a support flag is set during the opening and closing of the reels, the number of times the normal power reels 63a are opened can be changed. The configuration of this modified version is explained in detail below.

The high prize feature opening and closing game according to this modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 366. The second high prize feature opening and closing game according to this modified example is configured so that the number of openings of the regular power feature 63a is set to three, and the following sequence is played: a 0.1 sec opening, a 2 sec first opening, a 0.3 sec first closing, a 2 sec second opening, a 0.3 sec second closing, a 2 sec third opening, and a 0.1 sec ending. The first high prize feature opening and closing game has the same configuration as the modified example 1.

<Opening and closing process of parts>
The opening and closing process of the role object according to this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 367. This process is executed in step Sd2111 of the electric role support process (Fig. 338) by the main control device 162, and is executed instead of the opening and closing process of the role object in Fig. 362. In Fig. 367, the same step numbers are given to the processes similar to those in Fig. 362, and their descriptions are omitted or simplified.

First, in step Sd2301, it is determined whether the normal power mechanism 63a is open. Specifically, this determination is made based on the drive state of the drive unit 63b. If the normal power mechanism 63a is not open, it is determined in step Sd2302 whether the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is "0".

If the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is not "0", the process proceeds to step Sd2303, where it is determined whether the value of the timer area T2 provided in the various counter area 344b of the RAM 314 is "0". If the value of the timer area T2 is "0", the process executes an opening count change process in step Sd5101 to change the number of times the normal power device 63a is opened. Here, the opening count change process in step Sd5101 is explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 368.

First, in step Sd5201, it is determined whether the current opening is the first opening. If it is not the first opening, the current game state is grasped in step Sd5202. Specifically, it is determined whether the current support mode is the low frequency support mode, the first high frequency support mode, or the second high frequency support mode by checking whether a support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e and, if set, referring to the type of the flag.

In step Sd5203, it is determined whether the previous opening was performed in a manner corresponding to the low-frequency support mode. For example, if the current opening is the second opening, it is determined whether the first opening in the opening and closing game of that reel was performed in a manner corresponding to the low-frequency support mode.

If the previous opening was performed in a manner corresponding to the low-frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step Sd5204, where it is determined whether the result of the determination in step Sd5202 was the high-frequency support mode (first or second high-frequency support mode). If it is the high-frequency support mode (if the support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e), this means that the support flag has changed from an unset state to a set state between the start of the opening and closing game and the start of the current opening. In this case, the process proceeds to step Sd5205, and processing is executed to change the remaining number of openings.

In the processing of step Sd5205, the result of the normal map winning type drawn at the start of the normal map game that triggered this opening and closing game is referenced. Then, if this opening is the second opening and the drawn normal map winning type is support winning result B, the value of the opening count counter area RC2 is changed to add 1 to the remaining number of openings. As a result, the number of openings of the normal power device 63a in this opening and closing game is changed to 3 times, which corresponds to the second high winning device opening and closing game for the high frequency support mode.

In addition, if the selected normal winning type is Support Winning Result A, the number of times the first high prize feature open/close game and the low prize feature open/close game have been opened is equal, so the process of adding up the remaining number of times the feature has been opened is not executed.

After step Sd5205 is executed, the opening count change process is terminated. Also, if a positive judgment is made in step Sd5201 (if it is the first opening), the first opening is performed based on the result set in step Sd2107 (Fig. 338), and the opening count change process is terminated without executing the processes in steps Sd5202 and onward. Also, if a negative judgment is made in step Sd5203 (if the previous opening was not performed in a manner corresponding to the low-frequency support mode) or if a negative judgment is made in step Sd5204 (if it is not the high-frequency support mode), it is determined that the support flag has not changed from an unset state to a set state, and the opening count change process is terminated without executing the process in step Sd5205.

After executing the opening count change process in step Sd5101, proceed to step Sd4101 and execute the upper limit opening time setting process.

<About switching the operation mode of the normal game when the game state changes>
The flow of switching the operation mode with the change of the game state is explained for the normal game and the normal side game including the opening and closing of the role. The flow when the support flag is set in the situation where the first opening of the role opening and closing game started in the mode corresponding to the low frequency support mode is being performed is explained with reference to FIG.

When a support lottery is held during normal play (low-frequency support mode), a regular game round is executed based on that lottery. Here, the result of the support lottery is a support win, and support win result B is selected in the regular win type lottery. At this time, since the support flag is not set in the RAM 314 of the main control device 162, the regular game round is executed in a manner corresponding to the low-frequency support mode. For example, the variable display time is set to 30 seconds, and the fixed display time is set to 2 seconds (Fig. 369 (c)).

When the normal game play ends at timing t1, a reel opening/closing game is executed using the normal power reel 63a based on the fact that a support win has been won. The opening in the reel opening/closing game is executed in a low-winning reel opening/closing game (Fig. 313(b)) corresponding to the low-frequency support mode (Fig. 369(d)) based on the fact that the support lottery that triggered the reel opening/closing game was executed in the low-frequency support mode. At this time, the number of times that the normal power reel 63a is opened is set, but since the number of times that it was opened in the low-winning reel opening/closing game is two, the number of times that it is opened in this reel opening/closing game is set to two.

When the opening ends at timing t2, the opening mode for the first opening in this game of opening and closing the reels is set. At this time, a reference is made to whether or not a support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314. Since the support flag is not set at this point, the opening mode is set to a mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode (for example, an upper limit opening time of 0.1 sec).

At timing t3 during the first opening, when the result of the special drawing lottery results in a special miss and the confirmation display of the special drawing play round begins, a support flag is set in the RAM 314 of the main control device 162 (Fig. 369 (b)).

After that, when the first opening is completed at timing t4, the interval for this opening and closing game is set. At this time, since the support flag is set, the interval is set to a mode corresponding to the high frequency support mode (for example, a closing period of 0.3 seconds).

After that, when the interval ends at timing t5, the opening mode for the second opening in this reel opening/closing game is set. At this time, the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314 is referenced to determine whether or not the support flag is set. Then, the opening mode for the second opening is set based on the determination result. At this point, since the support flag is set, the opening mode is set to a mode corresponding to the high frequency support mode.

As modes corresponding to the high frequency support mode, the first high prize feature open/close game (Fig. 361(a)) and the second high prize feature open/close game (Fig. 366) are provided, and when setting the above, the result of the regular prize type lottery held at the start of the regular prize game is referenced, and based on that result, which of the above open/close games is selected to set. Here, since support winning result B was selected in the regular prize type lottery, the upper limit opening time for this opening (second opening) is set to the upper limit opening time for the second opening in the second high prize feature open/close game (e.g., 2 sec).

In addition, the number of times the second high prize opening/closing device is opened is three, which is more than the number of times (two) the low prize opening/closing device is opened for at timing t1, so the difference (one) is added to the remaining number of times it is opened. As a result, the number of times the regular power device 63a is opened in this opening/closing device game is increased to three.

When the third opening of the current opening and closing game of the device is completed at timing t6, the ending is executed. This ending is executed in a manner corresponding to the high frequency support mode, and continues for, for example, 0.1 seconds. If the number of winning balls entering the second operating port 63 reaches the upper limit number of winning balls before the third opening is completed, the normal power device 63a is closed at that point, and the above-mentioned ending is executed.

The above explanation exemplified the case where the support flag was set during the first opening of the opening and closing game of the reel, but even if the support flag was set during the interval between the first and second openings, if the result of the normal winning type lottery is support winning result B, the remaining number of openings will be added. At that time, the above interval is executed in a manner corresponding to the low frequency support mode (for example, 1.5 sec).

The modified example described above has the following advantages:

The remaining number of times the reel openings (upper limit number of times the reel openings) can be changed during the reel opening/closing game. With this configuration, when a support flag is set during the reel opening/closing game and a switch is made from a mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode to a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode during the reel opening/closing game, if the number of times the reel openings for the low-frequency support mode is less than the number of times the reel openings for the high-frequency support mode is less, the shortage can be added after the fact. This prevents the number of times the normal power reel 63a opens from remaining low after the switch is made to a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode, and allows the player to enjoy the benefits of the high-frequency support mode in terms of the number of times the reel openings are more quickly.

<Other Modifications>
The fourth embodiment and each modified example are not limited to the above description, and may be implemented as follows. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to the fourth embodiment and each modified example, or may be applied in combination with a part or all of the following to the fourth embodiment and each modified example. It is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or a part of the various configurations shown in the fourth embodiment and each modified example. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects to be exerted) of each of the configurations to be combined is guaranteed.

In addition, for ease of understanding, some examples are specified as prerequisite configurations, for example, "In variant 1 of the fourth embodiment," but the following configurations are not limited to application to the specified prerequisite configurations (examples), and can also be applied to other embodiments and variants.

(1) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, a special losing result is provided as part of the result of the special winning/losing lottery, but the special winning/losing lottery may be configured to draw a lottery to see whether it is a jackpot result or a losing result, and if the result is a losing result, a separate lottery (a lottery for the type of losing result) may be performed to see whether it is a special losing result or not. In this case, the separate lottery may be performed using other existing random number values such as the jackpot type counter C2 or the variable type counter CS, or may be performed using a dedicated random number for drawing the type of losing result.

In addition, instead of the type lottery for the losing result, a transition lottery may be held to determine whether or not the transition condition to the time-saving game state is suddenly established. In this case, the lottery may be held using other existing random numbers such as the jackpot type counter C2 or the variable type counter CS, or may be held using a dedicated random number for determining whether or not the transition condition is established.

(2) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, the notification corresponding to the winning of the special losing result is configured to be executed by the pattern display device 75, but it may be configured to be executed by another notification unit. Furthermore, the notification is not limited to being by image display, but may be executed by using a light-emitting means such as an LED, or may be executed by operating a decorative movable body (movable role object) for the moving performance in a predetermined operating mode. Furthermore, each of the above notifications does not necessarily have to be a visual notification, and may be an auditory notification by sound from the speaker unit 29. This also applies to notifications of the remaining number of times for the time-saving number of times, various stop results displayed in the normal pattern display area P of the pattern display device 75, special light-emitting performances in the light-emitting units 752, 761, etc.

(3) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, a special reach effect is executed as a notification corresponding to a special failure result, but a notification corresponding to a special failure result may be made by a game-round effect that does not involve a reach effect. In addition, the notification does not have to be made using the pattern rows Z1 to Z3. For example, a notification corresponding to a special failure result may be made by displaying a predetermined pattern such as a predetermined character on the pattern display device 75.

In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a pattern (so-called fourth pattern) that is displayed in a smaller size than each pattern in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 and that is completely synchronized with the special pattern displayed in the special pattern display section 43 is displayed on the pattern display device 75, a notification corresponding to the special miss result may be made by displaying the fourth pattern in a specific manner different from the normal manner. Also, a notification corresponding to the special miss result may be made by combining the manner of the stopped and displayed fourth pattern with at least a portion of the stopped and displayed pattern rows Z1 to Z3.

The notification corresponding to the special miss result may be given throughout the entire special game round, or may be given during a portion of the special game round. Incidentally, the special reach effects exemplified in the fourth embodiment and each modified example above are configured so that the player cannot determine whether or not the result is a special miss at the start of the special game round, but can determine that it is a special miss at the end of the special game round, so it can be said that the notification corresponding to the special miss result is given during a portion of the special game round.

(4) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, the sudden transition to the time-saving game state (the support flag setting process) is configured to be executed at the start of the confirmation display in the special game round that resulted in the special miss result, but it may also be configured to be executed after the confirmation display starts. Specifically, the sudden transition to the time-saving game state may be executed at the midpoint of the confirmation display or the end of the confirmation display in the special game round that resulted in the special miss result, or at the start of the next special game round.

(5) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, the transition to the time-saving game state is suddenly triggered by a special miss result, but the transition to the time-saving game state may be triggered by another event. For example, the transition to the time-saving game state may be triggered by a game ball entering or passing through a specific ball entry section or a specific passing section provided inside the game area PE or a specific ball entry section.

In these cases, the support flag is set when the game ball enters a specific entry section or when the game ball passes through a specific passing section. Also, instead of setting the support flag, a ball entry flag corresponding to the entry or a passing flag corresponding to the passing may be set. In this case, after the ball entry flag or the passing flag is set, a switch to a mode corresponding to the high frequency support mode may be performed based on the fact that these flags are set.

The specific ball entry section may not have an opening/closing mechanism (opening/closing body, etc.) and may be a ball entry section that is always open, or may have an opening/closing mechanism and be a variable type ball entry section that can be switched between an open state in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter or is harder to enter than the open state. The above-mentioned predetermined ball entry section may also not have an opening/closing mechanism and be a ball entry section that is always open, or may have an opening/closing mechanism and be a variable type ball entry section that can be switched between an open state and a closed state. In these cases, the variable type ball entry section as the specific ball entry section or the predetermined ball entry section may be the normal electric device 63a, the variable winning device 65, or a different ball entry section.

In addition, in a configuration in which a specific ball entry section or a passing section is provided within a predetermined ball entry section, only the specific ball entry section or the passing section may be provided within the predetermined ball entry section, and a game ball that enters the predetermined ball entry section will always enter or pass through the specific ball entry section or the passing section, or one or more other ball entry sections or passing sections different from the specific ball entry section or the passing section may be provided within the predetermined ball entry section, and a game ball that enters the predetermined ball entry section may be distributed, resulting in a game ball that enters the predetermined ball entry section not entering the specific ball entry section or not passing through the specific passing section. In the latter configuration, a transition trigger to the time-saving game state is established when a game ball that enters the predetermined ball entry section enters the specific ball entry section or passes through the specific passing section, while a transition trigger to the time-saving game state is not established even if a game ball that enters the predetermined ball entry section enters the other ball entry section or passes through the other passing section.

(6) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, the configuration includes a sudden time-saving game state and a normal time-saving game state. However, the configuration may include a normal time-saving game state without a sudden time-saving game state, or may include a sudden time-saving game state without a normal time-saving game state. In addition, the configuration may include at least one of a sudden time-saving game state and a normal time-saving game state, but does not include a high-probability game state.

(7) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, when various support flags are set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314, the game is switched to the high-frequency support mode (time-shortened game state), and when various support flags are erased from the various flag storage area 314e, the game is switched to the high-frequency support mode (time-shortened game state), and when various support flags are erased from the various flag storage area 314e, the game is switched to the high-frequency support mode when information corresponding to a first value (e.g., a support flag) is stored in a specific memory area provided in the various flag storage area 314e, and when information corresponding to a second value different from the first value (e.g., a non-support flag) is stored in the specific memory area, the game may be switched to the high-frequency support mode and when the high-frequency support mode is terminated. In other words, information corresponding to being in the high-frequency support mode and information corresponding to not being in the high-frequency support mode may be provided, and the transition to the high-frequency support mode or the termination of the high-frequency support mode may be controlled depending on which information is stored (set).

The high-frequency support mode may also be terminated when information corresponding to a second value that is the same as or different from the first value is stored in a storage area other than the specific storage area. In other words, a storage area corresponding to being in the high-frequency support mode and a storage area corresponding to not being in the high-frequency support mode may be provided, and the transition to and termination of the high-frequency support mode may be controlled depending on which storage area the information is stored (set) in.

(8) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, the time-saving game state is ended (the support flag is cleared) at the start of the confirmation display of the final game round, but it may be ended after the confirmation display starts. Specifically, the time-saving game state may be ended midway through the confirmation display of the final game round, at the end of the confirmation display, or at the start of the next special game round.

(9) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, the time-saving game state is ended (the support flag is cleared) when the number of times the special symbol game is played after the transition to the time-saving game state reaches the upper limit. However, instead of or in addition to this, the time-saving game state may be ended when the number of times that a small win is obtained in the special symbol win/lose lottery after the transition to the time-saving game state reaches a predetermined specific number (for example, 5 times). Note that, if both conditions are met, that the number of times the special symbol game is played reaches the upper limit and that the number of times that a small win is obtained reaches a specific number, the time-saving game state may be ended when one of the conditions is met, or the time-saving game state may be ended when both of the conditions are met.

Incidentally, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a small win result, a small win game (opening/closing execution mode triggered by a small win result) in which the variable winning device is opened and closed is executed. This small win game is executed in a manner that is more disadvantageous to the player than a big win game (opening/closing execution mode triggered by a big win result). For example, the upper limit number of winning balls into the variable winning device is set lower than in a big win game, or the upper limit opening time per opening is set shorter than one round of play or the upper limit opening time per opening in a big win game, so that the expected number of balls won is smaller than in a big win game.

In addition to or instead of the above, the time-saving game state may be terminated when the number of normal game times after the transition to the time-saving game state reaches a predetermined specific number (for example, 100 times). In this case, the time-saving game state may be terminated when the number of normal game times in which the support lottery result is a winning result reaches a specific number, or when the number of normal game times in which the support lottery result is a losing result reaches a specific number, or when the number of normal game times reaches a specific number regardless of the result of the support lottery. Note that, if the time-saving game state is terminated when the number of normal game times reaches a specific number in addition to the number of special game times reaching the upper limit number or the number of small winning results reaching a specific number, the time-saving game state may be terminated when any one of these conditions is met, or when all of these conditions are met.

(10) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples described above, a value corresponding to the upper limit number of times is set in the support counter area SC when transitioning to the time-saving play state, and the remaining number of times in the time-saving play state is updated by subtracting one from that value each time a special game is played. However, a value corresponding to the upper limit number of times is not set in the support counter area SC when transitioning to the time-saving play state, and the number of times a special game is played in the time-saving play state may be updated by adding one to the value of the support counter area SC each time a special game is played. In this case, the time-saving play state may be ended when the updated counter value reaches the upper limit number of times.

(11) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, when a support flag is set during the execution of a normal game round, the mode is switched to the mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode at the start of the first opening of the reel opening/closing game performed corresponding to that normal game round. However, the above-mentioned switching may be performed at the start of the opening of the reel opening/closing game. In other words, the opening may be performed in a short mode (e.g., 0.1 sec) for the high-frequency support mode, and the opening may end earlier than in the low-frequency support mode. Note that, when a support flag is set during the execution of an opening corresponding to the low-frequency support mode, the mode is switched to the mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode at the start of the first opening.

In addition, if a support flag is set during the variable display of a normal play count, the display may be switched to a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode at the start of the confirmation display of that normal play count. In other words, the confirmation display may be performed in a short mode (0.2 sec) for the high-frequency support mode. Note that if a support flag is set during the execution of the confirmation display, the display is switched to a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode at the start of the opening or first opening.

Also, if the support flag is set during the final opening of the opening and closing game of the reel (the second opening if the upper limit of openings is two), the game may be configured so that the game switches to a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode at the start of the ending of the opening and closing game of the reel. In other words, the ending may be configured to be performed in a short mode (0.1 sec) for the high-frequency support mode.

(12) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, the timing for switching to the mode corresponding to the high frequency support mode is the start timing of the normal game round, but this may not be included. That is, in the fourth embodiment, the timing for switching may be the start timing of the first opening only, and in modified example 1, the timing for switching may be the start timing of the first opening, the start timing of the interval, and the start timing of the second opening.

(13) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, when the support flag is cleared during the execution of a normal game round, the game is switched to the mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode after the opening and closing of the reel that is performed in response to that normal game round ends. However, the above-mentioned switching may be performed at the start of the first opening of the reel opening and closing game, the start of the opening, or the start of the confirmation display of the normal game round.

In addition, if the support flag is set during the execution of a normal game round, the system may be configured to switch to a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode after the opening and closing of the reels that is performed in response to that normal game round has ended.

(14) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, a transition to a time-saving game state is triggered by a special miss result, but a transition to a high probability game state may also be made. In this case, the support mode in the high probability game state may be a high frequency support mode or a low frequency support mode.

(15) In the fourth embodiment and each modified example, a special lottery may be performed separately from the winning/losing lottery, and in addition to the normal game state, a special game state may be entered upon winning a special losing result, and the special game state may be favored over the normal game state in terms of the winning probability and execution probability in the special lottery. For example, a special lottery may be executed when the result of the special lottery lottery or the normal lottery lottery becomes a specific losing result (a losing result different from the special losing result). In such a configuration, the configuration of the fourth embodiment and each modified example may be applied to the timing of switching the mode of the special lottery when the internal state corresponding to the special game state (the set state of the flag for the special game state) is entered. In this case, the special game state corresponds to the "specific game state", and the special lottery corresponds to the "specific control".

One example of a special lottery is a points lottery. Depending on the points awarded in the point lottery or the total number of points awarded, the game may transition to a time-saving game state, a high probability game state, an opening and closing execution mode, or a role opening and closing game. In addition, special effects (such as character costumes) may be released, or development stories about the pachinko machine 10 may be displayed. In addition, a points lottery may be held based on a game ball entering or passing through a specific ball entry section or a specific passing section provided inside the game area PE or a specific ball entry section.

(16) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, when a support win occurs in a situation where the low-frequency support mode is selected, a variable display time (for example, 5 sec) shorter than when a loss occurs may be selected, or a variable display time shorter than when a loss occurs may be more likely to be selected. With this configuration, the variable display time when a loss occurs is long, which keeps the frequency of support lottery execution per unit time low and ensures a state in which winning at the second operating port 63 is unlikely to occur, while the variable display time when a win occurs is short, so that when the support flag is set during the execution of a normal game round and the first opening for the high-frequency support mode is performed, the first opening can be made to arrive sooner. This makes it possible to activate the opening operation corresponding to the high-frequency support mode more quickly.

(17) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, one type of low-prize opening and closing game is provided as the opening and closing game of the low-frequency support mode, but it may be configured to provide multiple types of low-prize opening and closing games with different aspects. For example, it may be configured to provide a low-prize opening and closing game of the low-prize opening and closing game that opens once and a low-prize opening and closing game that opens multiple times.

(18) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, the mode of the reel opening/closing game and the type of stop result for the support winning result stopped and displayed on the normal display unit 44 are configured to correspond one-to-one, but a one-to-multiple correspondence is also possible. In other words, a configuration may be adopted in which multiple stop results correspond to one mode of the reel opening/closing game.

(19) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, the mode of the opening and closing of the reel is selected based on the result of the lottery for the normal winning type (the lottery result for the stop result for the normal winning type). However, a specific lottery for selecting the mode of the opening and closing of the reel may be performed separately from the lottery for the normal winning type, and the mode of the opening and closing of the reel may be selected based on the result of the specific lottery. When the support flag is set during the execution of a normal game for the low frequency support mode and the first opening for the high frequency support mode is executed, the result of the specific lottery performed before the support flag was set may be used to set the mode of the first opening for the high frequency support mode.

(20) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, when the support flag is set during the execution of a normal game round for the low-frequency support mode and the first opening for the high-frequency support mode is executed, the lottery for the normal winning type may be executed again, and the mode of the first opening may be set based on the result. The lottery for the re-execution may be executed at any time from when the support flag is set to when the first opening is executed. In addition, the lottery for the re-execution may be a lottery different from the lottery for the normal winning type (a lottery dedicated to selecting the mode of the first opening).

(21) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, the stop results displayed in the normal map display area P are configured to display a stop result in a manner corresponding to the time-saving game state when a support flag is set during normal map fluctuation display in the normal game state. However, instead of or in addition to this, a specific image may be displayed when a support flag is set during normal map fluctuation display, which is not displayed when the flag is not set. For example, a heart image may be displayed when a support flag is set in the normal map fluctuation display in the normal game state, while the image is not displayed when the support flag is not set. In this case, the player can infer the state change based on the presence or absence of the image.

In the above case, it is preferable that the specific image is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 on which the stopping results are displayed. By adopting such a configuration, the focus of attention is concentrated, and it becomes possible for the player to view both the stopping results and the specific image without having to move his/her line of sight significantly. In this sense, it is preferable that the specific image is displayed on the display screen G within the general pattern display area P or its periphery.

The specific image can be displayed at any time from when the support flag is set until the end of that regular game round. However, if it is displayed during the variable display, there is a concern that the player may mistake it for a preview effect (an effect that suggests the expected probability of a win in that game round), so it is preferable to display it after the display of the stop results has begun.

(22) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, the types of stop results (the first stop results to the third stop results of the pictures F1 and F2) displayed in the normal picture display area P are configured to correspond to the mode of the reel opening/closing game, but they may be configured to correspond to the game state. In other words, regardless of the mode of the reel opening/closing game, a configuration may be provided that includes a support winning stop result set for the normal game state (low frequency support mode) and a support winning stop result set for the time-saving game state (high frequency support mode).

(23) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, the stop results for a losing result displayed in the normal map display area P may have a stop result for a normal game state (low frequency support mode) (fourth stop result) and a stop result for a time-saving game state (high frequency support mode) (fifth stop result different from the fourth stop result), and may be configured to change from the fourth stop result to the fifth stop result when a support flag is set during the execution of a normal map game round that results in a losing result. With this configuration, it is possible to display a stop result that reflects a change in the internal state.

(24) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, the type of stop result displayed in the normal map display area P is set at the start of the display of changes in the normal map game round, but it may be set at the start of the final display. If the support flag is set during the display of changes in the normal map game round for the low frequency support mode and the first opening for the high frequency support mode is performed, the second stop result or the third stop result (the stop result for the high frequency support mode) will be set at the start of the display of the final display of the normal map game round. In this case, the process of changing the stop result is not executed.

(25) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, the stop results displayed in the normal map display area P may be configured so that the stop results of the support win set for the normal game state (low frequency support mode) and the stop results of the support win set for the time-saving game state (high frequency support mode) have the same form (type). In other words, the form of the stop results may be configured to be common in each of these game states.

(26) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, the light emitting units 752, 761 are illuminated in a normal illumination mode during normal game play, but the light emitting units 752, 761 may be configured to be turned off. In other words, the light emitting units 752, 761 may be configured to emit light when a special illumination effect is performed.

(27) In the fourth embodiment and each modified example, a configuration may be adopted in which, apart from the light-emitting units 752 and 761, a light-emitting effect corresponding to the time-saving game state is performed by a notification unit (for example, a lamp unit 26 provided on the front door frame 14) located farther from the normal power role 63a (second operating port 63) than the light-emitting units 752 and 761. In this case, if the period from when the support flag is set to when the first opening is executed is longer than the second specific period, and the light-emitting effect by the light-emitting units 752 and 761 is started at the third timing corresponding to the opening of the normal power role 63a, the light-emitting effect may be started at the first timing corresponding to the setting of the support flag by the notification unit located farther away. Also, instead of the first timing, the light-emitting effect may be started at a timing later than the first timing and earlier than the third timing.

Incidentally, if the period from when the support flag is set to when the first opening is executed is equal to or shorter than the second specific period, and the light-emitting effect in the light-emitting units 752, 761 is executed at the first timing, the light-emitting effect in the notification unit in the far position may also be started at the first timing. Note that the light-emitting effect in the notification unit in the far position does not necessarily have to be the same light-emitting mode as the special light-emitting effect in the light-emitting units 752, 761, and it is sufficient if it functions as a notification to indicate that the game is in a time-saving play state.

(28) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, if a predetermined state change (change of the time-saving flag to a set state) occurs during the execution of the reel opening/closing game by the normal power reel 63a, the state change is reflected in the reel opening/closing game that is being executed. However, if a predetermined state change occurs during the execution of the opening/closing execution mode by the variable winning device 65, the state change may be reflected in the opening/closing execution mode that is being executed. In other words, the present invention may be applied not only to the reel opening/closing game, but also to the opening/closing execution mode.

When the open/close execution mode is applied, for example, a time-saving flag is set based on a ball winning in a specific ball-winning section, and the opening/closing modes of the variable winning device 65 in the open/close execution mode are set to a non-set mode corresponding to the non-set state of the time-saving flag, and a set mode corresponding to the set state of the time-saving flag, and when a predetermined number of rounds of play during the open/close execution mode are played in the non-set mode, if a game ball wins in the specific ball-winning section and the time-saving flag is set, the next round of play may be played in the set mode, or the closed period (round interval) between the two rounds may be played in the set mode.

As another example, in a simultaneous variation type gaming machine that can execute the first and second special chart game rounds in parallel, in other words, can execute one of the special chart game rounds while the other special chart game round is being executed, if a jackpot result is obtained in one special chart game round, and the other special chart game round is executed while the opening and closing execution mode is being executed, if a jackpot result is also obtained in the other special chart game round, the latter jackpot result can be reflected by increasing the number of rounds in the opening and closing execution mode.

In addition to or instead of a configuration in which the number of rounds of play increases, a configuration may be adopted in which the degree of advantage differs after the opening and closing execution mode. For example, when transitioning to a normal time-saving play state after the opening and closing execution mode, if a jackpot result is obtained in the other special game play, the upper limit number of times the time-saving play state can be increased compared to when the jackpot does not occur, or the opening and closing game of the role device can be implemented in a manner in which the expected value of winning the second operating port 63 is increased.

(29) In the first modified example of the fourth embodiment described above, a configuration may be adopted in which switching to a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode can be performed at the start of the second opening, but cannot be performed at the start of the interval. In this case, if the support flag is set during the execution of the first opening in the opening and closing game of the role for the low-frequency support mode, the interval of the mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode is executed, and then the second opening of the mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is executed.

In addition, in the first variant of the fourth embodiment, the configuration may be such that switching to a mode corresponding to the high frequency support mode can be performed at the start of the interval, but cannot be performed at the start of the second opening.

(30) In the first modified example of the fourth embodiment, the low prize opening/closing game and the high prize opening/closing game may be configured to have a three-time opening mode. In this case, the second opening and the third opening may be configured to switch to a mode corresponding to the high frequency support mode, or the second opening and the third opening may be configured to switch to the mode corresponding to the high frequency support mode, or the second opening and the third opening may be configured to switch to the mode corresponding to the high frequency support mode, or the third opening may be configured to switch to the mode corresponding to the high frequency support mode, or the second opening and the third opening may be configured to open to the high frequency support mode, or the high frequency support mode ...

(31) In the first modified example of the fourth embodiment, the low-frequency support mode opening and closing game (low-winning opening and closing game) may be configured to have multiple types of modes with different required periods from the start of the first opening to the end of the interval. In the mode with the longer required period, if the support flag is set during the opening and closing game, the support flag is more likely to be set before the start of the second opening than in the mode with the shorter required period, so that the second opening is more likely to be performed in a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode. In other words, the ease of performing the second opening for the high-frequency support mode can be made different depending on the type of opening and closing game being performed when the support flag is set.

Specific configurations with different required periods may include different lengths of the first opening, different interval lengths, or both. However, in order to make it more difficult for a winning entry into the second operating port 63 to occur, it is preferable that the length of the interval is longer in one mode than in the other mode.

(32) In the above-mentioned modified example 2 of the fourth embodiment, the remaining number of times of the opening and closing of the reel game is increased by switching to the mode corresponding to the high frequency support mode. However, instead of or in addition to this, the remaining number of times of the opening and closing of the reel game may be decreased. For example, a low prize reel game may have a mode of opening twice, and a high prize reel game may have a mode of opening twice and a mode of opening once. When the support flag is set during the execution of an interval in the reel game for the low frequency support mode (low prize reel game), the lottery result of the normal winning type is referenced at the start of the second opening. At that time, if the lottery result corresponds to the mode of opening once, the difference of 1 time is subtracted from the remaining number of openings, and the remaining number of openings is changed to 0 times. In other words, the execution of the second opening is canceled, and the number of openings of the reel game is reduced from 2 times to 1 time.

(33) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, the result of the win/loss judgment is a jackpot result, and the game transitions to the jackpot game (open/close execution mode). However, like a so-called type 1/type 2 hybrid machine, the result of the win/loss judgment is a small win result, and the game transitions to the jackpot game when the game ball passes through the V winning port (V winning sensor) during the small win game (a game state in which a variable winning device having a V winning port or a V winning port and a loss port inside is opened and closed) (when the result of the award judgment is a predetermined result and a predetermined game result is achieved).

In addition, "transitioning to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result" can be understood to also include the case where the result of the win/loss judgment is a small win result and transitions to a big win game via a V win, as described above.

(34) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, the pachinko machine is a type in which game balls are paid out, but it may be an enclosed type pachinko machine in which game balls are not discharged outside the machine. In such an enclosed type pachinko machine, when prize balls are awarded as a bonus for winning a prize or the like, it is preferable to award the player a predetermined game value (virtual game medium such as credits) corresponding to the number of prize balls, and to notify the player of information indicating the number of prize balls.

(35) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, the maximum number of pending information items based on winning at the first actuation port 62 is four, but it may be less than four (it may be one) or it may be five or more. The maximum number of pending information items based on winning at the second actuation port 63 may also be less than four (it may be one) or it may be five or more. The maximum number of pending information items based on winning at each actuation port 62, 63 may be different.

(36) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, the reserved information based on winning at the first actuation port 62 and the second actuation port 63 is differentiated, but it may be configured not to be differentiated. Also, the reserved information based on winning at the second actuation port 63 is prioritized in the win/loss determination over the reserved information based on winning at the first actuation port 62, but the relationship may be reversed, or the win/loss determination may be performed in the order of winning.

(37) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, only game balls flowing down the right route can pass through or win the through gate 64 and the second operating port 63, but only game balls flowing down the left route can pass through or win, or game balls can pass through or win from either the right route or the left route. However, in order to add variety to the game, it is preferable to configure the game so that only game balls flowing down one of the right route and the left route can win the first operating port 62, and only game balls flowing down the other of the right route and the left route can pass through or win the through gate 64 and the second operating port 63.

(38) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, the variation pattern and the game-time performance have a one-to-one correspondence, but they may also have a one-to-many correspondence. In this case, the performance control device 143 can be configured to obtain a random number for the performance lottery, and to select one game-time performance from among multiple game-time performances associated with one variation pattern using the obtained random number.

(39) In the fourth embodiment and each of the modified examples, the patterns displayed variably on the display screen G of the pattern display device 75 are configured to scroll in the left-right direction, but the patterns may be displayed lined up on the left, center, and right, and these patterns may be variably displayed by scrolling up and down. In other words, the arrangement direction of the patterns and the scroll direction are not particularly limited. Furthermore, the number of patterns (number of rows of pattern rows) is not limited to three, and may be two, or four or more.

(40) The present invention can also be applied to other types of pachinko machines that are different from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric device opens a predetermined number of times when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines in which a right is generated and a jackpot is awarded when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines equipped with other devices, arrange ball machines, mahjong ball machines, and other gaming machines.

The present invention can also be applied to non-pinball gaming machines, such as slot machines, which have multiple reels with multiple patterns circumferentially attached, and which start the rotation of the reels by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and which, after the reels stop when a stop switch is operated or a predetermined time has passed, award the player with a special prize, such as a medal payout, if a specific pattern or combination of specific patterns is formed on a winning line visible through a display window.

The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the gaming machine body is supported on an outer frame so that it can be opened and closed, has a storage section and an intake device, and the reels start to rotate when a start lever is operated after a predetermined number of gaming balls stored in the storage section have been taken in by the intake device.

<Inventions extracted from the above embodiments>
The following describes the features of the inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, while indicating, as necessary, the effects, etc. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations in each of the above-mentioned embodiments are appropriately indicated in parentheses, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations indicated in parentheses.

<Features aA group to feature aI group>
The inventions described in the following feature group aA to feature group aI are extracted from the above-mentioned first embodiment and its various modifications. The inventions described in these feature groups have been made with a problem to be solved by the invention, which is that "there is still room for improvement in the game presentation in the gaming machines exemplified above," in the background technology, "For example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and if the lottery result is a specific result, a predetermined benefit is given to the player (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)."

<Features A Group>
Group aA of features is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the variations, or a combination of these, and is extracted mainly based on the above-mentioned first embodiment and variations 1 to 6 of the first embodiment.

Feature aA1. An information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
An acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 314b) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
An assignment determination means (a function of executing a correct/incorrect determination process in the main control device 162) for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the assigned information;
A bonus awarding means (a function of executing a process for opening and closing a large prize opening in the main control device 162) that can award a bonus to a player based on the result of the bonus determination by the bonus determination means being a bonus corresponding result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the bonus information;
A game round control means (a function for executing a game round control process in the main control unit 162) controls a predetermined notification means so that a game round operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and the game round operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination, and the game round operation is performed.
A hold notification means (a function of executing a hold command response process in the performance control device 143) that performs a hold notification (hold image) by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means so that the player can recognize at least the number of reserved play times before execution;
a destination specification means for executing a destination specification process for specifying information corresponding to a judgment result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means becomes the subject of the grant judgment, at a timing before the special information becomes the subject of the grant judgment (a function for executing a reserved read-ahead process by the main control device 162 in the first embodiment, variants 1 to 3 of the first embodiment, and variants 5 to 6 of the first embodiment, and a function for executing a reserved command setting process by the main control device 162 and a first reserved read-ahead process by the performance control device 143 in variant 4 of the first embodiment);
A specific mode means (a function of executing a setting process for a hold notice and a first execution process for a hold notice by the performance control device 143 in the first embodiment and the first to sixth variations of the first embodiment) that can set the notification mode of the hold notice to a specific mode (specific display mode) different from a normal mode (normal display mode) based on the result of the destination specific process;
Equipped with
The specific aspect includes a plurality of aspects (a blue display aspect HMb, a green display aspect HMc, a red display aspect HMd, and a rainbow display aspect HMe) that are set so as to have different expectations for the grant corresponding result,
When a specified event occurs while the notification mode of the hold notification is set to a specific mode (when the presentation mode is switched in the first embodiment and in variants 1 and 2 of the first embodiment, when the opening/closing execution mode is performed in variants 3 and 4 of the first embodiment, when a power outage occurs in variants 5 and 6 of the first embodiment), at least the hold notification set to the specific mode is set to a specific mode or a specific state in which the hold notification is not executed (a configuration in which the display mode of the hold image is changed to the normal display mode HMa by switching the presentation mode in the first embodiment and variants 1 and 2 of the first embodiment, a configuration in which the hold image is made invisible by executing the opening/closing execution mode in variants 3 and 4 of the first embodiment, and a configuration in which the hold image is made to disappear due to the occurrence of a power outage in variants 5 and 6 of the first embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a specification means (a function of executing a setting process for the return of a notice by the presentation control device 143, a second execution process for the hold notice, and a third execution process for the hold notice in the first embodiment and in variants 1 to 4 of the first embodiment, a function of executing a process for the return of a notice by the presentation control device 143 and a fourth execution process for the hold notice in variant 5, and a function of executing a setting process for a display mode by the presentation control device 143 in variant 6) that can set the notification mode of the hold notice that is the subject of the specific state after the end of the specific state to a predetermined first mode (same specific display mode, display mode of the same rank, same character, etc.) that the player can recognize as being of the same rank as the notification mode before the specified event occurred, or a predetermined second mode (higher specific display mode, etc.) that the player can recognize as being of a higher rank than the notification mode before the specified event occurred after the end of the specific state.

In the above configuration, the notification mode of the reserved notification is set to a specific mode based on the result of the so-called reserved pre-read, so that the player's expectation of the grant response result can be aroused even before the start of the game round. Furthermore, since multiple types of modes are set as the specific mode so that the expectation level of the grant response result is different, the expectation level can be suggested by assigning a large or small value, which is an advantageous configuration for arousing the player's expectation. In such a configuration, if a predetermined event occurs in a situation in which the reserved notification is set to a specific mode, the system transitions to a specific state in which the specific mode or the reserved notification is not executed. In this case, there is a concern that the player may misunderstand or feel uneasy that the expectation level suggested by the specific mode has disappeared due to the non-execution of the specific mode, etc. In this regard, in this configuration, after the end of the specific state, the reserved notification is executed as a first mode equivalent to the notification mode before the occurrence of the predetermined event, or a second mode higher than that, so that the expectation level can be suggested again, making it possible to maintain the expectation of the grant response result.

Feature aA2. The device is configured to be able to store information corresponding to at least the specific notification mode of the hold notification in a predetermined storage unit (the return area 344f of the RAM 344),
The gaming machine described in feature aA1 is characterized in that the determination means is equipped with a means for setting the notification mode of a hold notification that is the subject of the specific state to the specified first mode based on information stored in the specified memory unit when the notification mode is to be the specified first mode (a function for executing setting processing for preview return in the performance control device 143 in the first embodiment and variants 1 to 4 of the first embodiment, and a function for executing setting processing for the display mode in variant 5).

In the above configuration, information corresponding to the notification mode of the specific notification is stored, and after the specific state ends, the notification mode of the specific notification is set based on the stored information. This makes it possible to preferably restore the notification mode of the hold notification to the same mode as before the specific state (before the occurrence of the specified event) after the specific state ends.

Feature aA3. Equipped with an execution notification section (execution display area D) that performs a predetermined notification (display of a pending image in the execution display area D) so that the player can recognize the execution of a reserved game round,
The gaming machine described in feature aA1 or feature aA2 is characterized in that the identification means is equipped with identification means (a function of executing a third execution process of the hold notice by the presentation control device 143 in the first embodiment and variants 1 to 4 of the first embodiment, and a function of executing a fourth execution process of the hold notice by the presentation control device 143 in variants 5 to 6) that can set the manner of the specified notification made by the execution notification unit to the specified first manner or the specified second manner during a game round of special information corresponding to the hold notice that is the subject of the specific state.

In the above configuration, when a process is carried out to change the notification mode before the occurrence of a specified event to a first mode of the same rank or a second mode of a higher rank after the end of a specific state, the implementation period can include up to the play round of the pending notification that was the subject of the specific state. This makes it possible to secure a long processing period for restoring the notification mode to a mode of the same rank, etc., and for example, even if a specified event occurs immediately before the start of a play round of the pending notification that has been set to the specific mode, the restoration process can be carried out by utilizing the execution period of the play round after the end of the specific state. This makes it possible to appropriately suggest the degree of expectation after the end of the specific state.

Feature aA4. When a game round is executed, a game round performance setting means (a function for executing a special chart change display process in the performance control device 143) is provided that sets a game round performance (reach performance, etc.) to be performed in the game round based on the special information (reserved information) that is the subject of the grant judgment that is the trigger of the game round or the specific information (change pattern) derived from the special information,
The gaming machine described in feature aA3 is characterized in that the identification means is equipped with a means for setting the notification mode of the specified notification to the specified second mode based on the special information or the identification information referenced by the game round presentation setting means when the notification mode of the specified notification is to be the specified second mode (a function for executing a third execution process of the hold notice by the presentation control device 143 in the first embodiment and variants 1 to 4 of the first embodiment, and a function for executing a fourth execution process of the hold notice in variants 5 to 6).

For example, if the notification mode is simply returned to the same level after the end of the specific state, it will not be possible to suggest a higher level of expectation than was suggested before the occurrence of the specified event. However, if the notification mode is unnecessarily set to a higher level, it will no longer be consistent with the game round presentation that is actually performed in the game round, and may result in the player losing trust. In this regard, in this configuration, based on the special information or specific information used to set the game round presentation in the game round of the pending notification that was the subject of the specific state, the notification mode of the specified notification corresponding to that pending notification is promoted to a higher level than before the occurrence of the specified event. This makes it possible to promote the notification mode of the specified notification while preventing the notification mode of the specified notification from becoming inconsistent with the game round presentation that is actually performed in the game round.

Feature aA5. The gaming machine according to Feature aA4, characterized in that the identification means includes a determination means (a function for executing a third execution process of the hold notice by the presentation control device 143 in the first embodiment and variants 1 to 4 of the first embodiment, and a function for executing a fourth execution process of the hold notice in variants 5 to 6) for determining whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification should be the predetermined second mode based on the special information or the identification information referenced by the game play presentation setting means, and when the determination means determines that the notification mode should be the predetermined second mode, the notification mode of the predetermined notification is set to the predetermined second mode.

In the above configuration, a determination is made as to whether or not to use a higher-level mode based on the special information or specific information used to set the game round presentation, and if the determination allows promotion to a higher-level mode, a promotion process is performed. This makes it possible to promote the notification mode of the specified notification after the end of the specific state, within a range that does not exceed the expected degree of the game round presentation that is actually performed.

Feature aA6. A gaming machine according to any one of Features aA1 to aA5, characterized in that the specifying means includes means for changing the notification mode of the pending notification that was the subject of the specific state from the predetermined first mode to the predetermined second mode after the specific state ends.

When the notification mode of the pending notification is set to a higher mode than the original mode after the end of a specific state, if the higher mode is suddenly set, it may be difficult for the player to understand the correspondence with the specific mode that was in place before the occurrence of the specified event, which may lead to confusion. In this regard, with this configuration, the notification mode is first set to the same level and then changed to a higher level notification mode, making it easy to understand that the notification mode has returned, and making it possible to reduce the above-mentioned confusion.

Feature aA7. The specific mode means includes a first scenario setting means (a function of executing a setting process for a hold notice in the performance control device 143) for setting a notification scenario (performance scenario) for setting the notification mode of the hold notice to the specific mode when the notification mode of the hold notice is set to the specific mode;
A gaming machine described in any of features aA1 to aA6, characterized in that the determination means is equipped with a second scenario setting means (a function of executing setting processing for a notice return in the presentation control device 143) for setting a notification scenario (return scenario) for changing the notification mode of the hold notification that was the subject of the specific state to the specified first mode or the specified second mode after the end of the specific state.

For example, in a configuration in which play is possible in a specific state, play times are consumed during the specific state, so it is expected that the execution period (remaining period) after the specific state of a pending notification that was set to a specific mode before the occurrence of a specified event will vary depending on the length of time spent in the specific state. In this regard, in addition to the notification scenario set before the occurrence of a specified event, after the end of the specific state, a notification scenario is reset to make the pending notification that was the subject of the specific state have the same mode, etc., so that the notification mode of the pending notification can be suitably changed to the same mode, etc., even when the remaining period of the pending notification after the specific state varies.

Feature aA8. After the end of the specific state, a reserved number grasping means (a function for executing the process of step Sa2103) is provided for grasping the reserved number of game times before or before the special information corresponding to the reserved notification that became the target of the specific state;
The gaming machine described in feature aA7, characterized in that the second scenario setting means sets a notification scenario for achieving the specified first mode or the specified second mode based on the number of reserved balls grasped by the number of reserved balls grasping means.

In the above configuration, when a specific state ends, the number of pending notifications is grasped, and the notification scenario is reset to take the result into account to set the notification to the same level, etc. Therefore, regardless of the duration of the stay in the specific state, the notification mode of the pending notification can be suitably changed to the same level, etc.

Feature aA9. The gaming machine according to any one of Features aA1 to aA8, characterized in that the specific state is such that the notification mode for at least the reserved notification set to the specific mode is the normal mode.

When the notification mode of the pending notification is changed (downgraded) from the specific mode to the normal mode as a result of the transition to the specific state, it is easy for the player to misunderstand or feel anxious that the expectation level suggested by the specific mode before the occurrence of the specified event has disappeared. By applying any of the configurations of features aA1 to aA8 above to such a configuration, it is possible to make each of those features function effectively and to optimally exert each of the above effects.

When the hold notification is in the normal mode in a specific state, a process is required to change (upgrade) the normal mode to a mode of the same rank after the specific state ends. By applying this feature to feature aA7 or feature aA8, it is possible to preferably change from the normal mode to a mode of the same rank even when the remaining period of the hold notification after the specific state changes.

Feature aA10. The gaming machine described in Feature aA9 is characterized in that it is equipped with a means for restricting the execution of the specific mode in the specific state for a hold notification corresponding to special information acquired during the specific state (a function for restricting the execution of a hold notice presentation triggered by hold information acquired in presentation mode B).

For example, if the notification mode of a hold notification that was set to a specific mode is set to a normal mode in a specific state, while special information acquired during the specific state is changed to the specific mode, there is a concern that processing will become complicated because it is necessary to distinguish between special information acquired before the specific state and special information acquired during the specific state. In addition, if there is a hold notification that has been changed from a specific mode to a normal mode, but the hold notification for special information acquired later is set to the specific mode, there is a risk that this will further incite anxiety that the expectation for the change to the normal mode of the previous hold notification has disappeared. In this regard, the present configuration restricts the change to the specific mode in the specific state for hold notifications corresponding to special information acquired during the specific state, making it possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of such inconveniences.

Feature aA11. The gaming machine described in Feature aA10 is characterized in that it is provided with a means for causing the specific mode means to perform processing for a hold notification in which execution of the specific mode is restricted after the specific state ends (a function for executing the second setting process for hold notice in Variation 1 of the first embodiment).

As described in the effect of feature aA10 above, by restricting the change of special information acquired during a specific state to a specific form, it is possible to suppress the creation of anxiety that the expectation level for the change to the normal form in the previous pending notification has disappeared. However, on the other hand, there is a concern that the opportunity to suggest the expectation level for special information acquired during a specific state will be lost. In this regard, in the above configuration, the pending notification to which such a restriction is imposed is allowed to be changed to a specific form after the end of the specific state, so that the opportunity to suggest the expectation level can be secured.

Feature aA12. The gaming machine described in any one of Features aA1 to aA8, characterized in that the specific state is such that at least for a reserved notification that is a specific mode, the reserved notification is not executed.

If the notification mode of the pending notification is not executed due to the transition to the specific state, it is easy for the player to misunderstand or feel anxious that the expectation level suggested by the specific mode before the occurrence of the specified event has disappeared. By applying any of the configurations of features aA1 to aA8 above to such a configuration, each of those features can be made to function effectively, and each of the above effects can be optimally exerted.

Feature aA13: After the specific state ends, the hold notification that was the subject of the specific state is executed in the normal manner;
The gaming machine described in feature aA12 is characterized in that the identification means is equipped with a means (a function of executing setting processing for preview return in the performance control device 143) for changing the notification mode of the hold notification, which is set to the normal mode, to the specified first mode or the specified second mode.

If the notification mode of the hold notification is deactivated following a transition to a specific state, and then the hold notification is resumed in the normal mode, this may further incite anxiety that the expectation suggested by the specific mode before the occurrence of the specified event has disappeared. By applying any of the configurations of features aA1 to aA8 to such a configuration, each of the features can be made to function effectively, and each of the effects described above can be optimally exhibited.

In the case of a configuration in which the hold notification is not executed in a specific state and the hold notification returns to the normal state after the specific state ends, a process is required to change (upgrade) the normal state to a state of the same rank after the specific state ends. However, by applying this feature to feature aA7 or feature aA8, it is possible to preferably change from the normal state to a state of the same rank even when the remaining period of the hold notification after the specific state changes.

This feature can also be expressed as "the specifying means includes a means (a function of executing a setting process for the return of a preview in the performance control device 143) for changing the hold notification that was the subject of the specific state to the specified first state or the specified second state after the hold notification is executed in the normal state after the specific state ends."

Feature aA14. A specific performance means (a function for executing the processes of steps Sa1603 to Sa1605) for executing a specific performance (change suggestion performance) that suggests that the notification mode of the hold notification will change to a higher notification mode;
After the end of the specific state, when the notification mode of the pending notification that is the subject of the specific state is set to the predetermined first mode, a means for restricting the execution of the specific performance (a function for restricting the execution of the change suggestion performance);
A gaming machine according to any one of features aA1 to aA13, characterized in that it is equipped with:

In the above configuration, the specific performance suggests that the notification mode of the pending notification will change to a higher notification mode, which creates anticipation for the change to a higher mode, and increases the player's attention to the pending notification. In such a configuration, for example, if a specific performance is performed when the same mode is set after the end of a specific state, it is expected that the player will associate the higher notification mode with the notification mode he or she remembers (the mode before the occurrence of the specified event) as a reference, even though the mode is actually the same mode. In this case, the actual notification mode will not match the mode associated with the player, which may damage the player's trust in the specific performance. In this regard, in the present configuration, when the same mode is set after the end of a specific state, the execution of the specific performance is restricted, which prevents the player from associating a higher mode than the actual notification mode, and makes it possible to suitably prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

Note that, to each of the configurations of the above features aA1 to aA14, features aB1 to aB14, features aC1 to aC9, features aD1 to aD10, features aE1 to aE19, features aF1 to aF12, features aG1 to aG15, features aH1 to aH11, and features aI1 to aI12, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in each of the configurations individually, or it is also possible to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea to each of the configurations. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Features aB group>
The features aB group are invention groups extracted from the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications or combinations thereof, and are extracted mainly based on the above-mentioned first embodiment.

Feature aB1. An information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
An acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 314b) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
An assignment determination means (a function of executing a correct/incorrect determination process in the main control device 162) for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the assigned information;
A bonus awarding means (a function of executing a process for opening and closing a large prize opening in the main control device 162) that can award a bonus to a player based on the result of the bonus determination by the bonus determination means being a bonus corresponding result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the bonus information;
A specific notification means (a function for executing a hold command response process in the performance control device 143) that causes a specific notification (hold notice performance) to be performed by a specific notification means (a pattern display device 75, a hold lamp unit) based on a specific execution trigger (a result of a look-ahead),
Equipped with
The specific notification means includes a first notification mode setting means (a function for executing a setting process for a hold notice in the performance control device 143 and a first execution process for the hold notice) for setting the notification mode of the specific notification to one of a plurality of notification modes (a blue display mode HMb, a green display mode HMc, a red display mode HMd, and a rainbow display mode HMe), and is configured to execute the specific notification based on a setting result of the first notification mode setting means;
When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied (when a predetermined operation is performed by the performance operation unit 36), a performance state transition means (a function of executing a performance mode switching process in the performance control device 143) transitions from one of a plurality of types of performance states (performance mode A, performance mode B) including a predetermined performance state to another performance state;
a second notification mode setting means (a function of executing a setting process for the return of the notification by the performance control device 143 in the first embodiment) for setting the notification mode of the specific notification in the subsequent predetermined performance state based on the notification mode of the specific notification in the previous predetermined performance state when the specific notification (the hold notification performance by the hold image HW) is being executed and the specific notification is then transitioned from the predetermined performance state to another performance state and then transitioned to the previous predetermined performance state;
A gaming machine comprising:

In the above configuration, multiple types of presentation states are provided, and the presentation states are switched when a specific transition condition is met. This allows the player to change his/her mood while playing, and prevents boredom from the game. In such a configuration, for example, if the execution of a specific notification is canceled when the presentation state is switched while the specific notification is being executed, there is a concern that the player may misunderstand or feel anxious that the chance that was notified or suggested by the specific notification has been lost. In such a case, it is possible to limit the switching of the presentation state while the specific notification is being executed, but this could lead to a situation where the frequency of switching of the presentation state decreases, undermining the purpose of providing multiple types of presentation states.

In this regard, with this feature, if a transition is made from a predetermined presentation state to another presentation state while a specific notification is being executed, and then the transition is made to the predetermined presentation state, the notification mode of the specific notification in the subsequent predetermined presentation state is set based on the notification mode in the previous predetermined presentation state, so that the specific notification can be restored to its original notification mode by returning the presentation state to its original state. This notifies the player that the chance has not been lost, and the specific notification can be executed without imposing restrictions on switching presentation states. In other words, it becomes possible to optimally achieve both the execution of the specific notification and the switching of presentation states.

Feature aB2. A game operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and the game operation is controlled so that the game operation is performed by giving a notification result corresponding to the award determination result and ending the game operation as one game, and a game control means (a function of executing a game control process in the main control device 162) is provided;
The gaming machine described in feature aB1, wherein the specific notification means is configured to be able to execute the specific notification across game rounds.

In the above configuration, the specific notification is performed over a relatively long period of time, so that an event in which the presentation state is switched during the execution of the specific notification is likely to occur. By applying the configuration of feature aB1 to such a configuration, the feature can be made to function effectively, and the above effect can be preferably exerted.

In addition, this characteristic may have a feature that "the presentation state transition means includes a means for switching the presentation state in accordance with the execution of a game round." In a configuration in which a specific notification is performed across game rounds and the presentation state is switched in accordance with the end of a game round, an event in which the presentation state is switched during the execution of a specific notification is particularly likely to occur, making it possible to more effectively exert the above-mentioned effect of characteristic aB1.

Feature aB3. The information corresponding to the notification mode of the specific notification can be stored in a predetermined storage unit (the return area 344f of the RAM 344),
A gaming machine described in feature aB1 or feature aB2, characterized in that the second notification mode setting means sets the notification mode of a specific notification in a subsequent specified presentation state based on information stored in the specified memory unit.

In the above configuration, the notification mode of the specific notification is stored, and when a transition is made to a later specified performance state, the notification mode of the specific notification is set based on the stored information. This allows the specific notification in the later specified performance state to be suitably restored to the original notification mode that was executed in the previous specified performance state.

Feature aB4. A game time control means (a function for executing a game time control process in the main control device 162) that controls the game time operation to be performed based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and the end of the game time operation as a notification result corresponding to the award determination result, counting as one game time;
a destination specifying means (a function of executing a reserved read-ahead process in the main control unit 162) for executing a destination specifying process for specifying information corresponding to a judgment result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquiring means becomes the subject of the grant judgment, at a timing before the special information becomes the subject of the grant judgment;
Equipped with
The specific notification means is configured to be able to execute the specific notification before the special information that is the subject of the destination specification process becomes the subject of the grant determination based on a result of the destination specification process,
A gaming machine described in any of features aB1 to aB3, characterized in that the specific notification means transitions from a previous predetermined presentation state to the other presentation state during the execution of a specific notification triggered by specific special information (pending information of a target hold image HW), and then, when transitioning to a later predetermined presentation state before the end of the play round of the specific special information or before the specific special information becomes the subject of the grant determination by the grant determination means, is equipped with a specific means (a function of executing setting processing for the return of the notice in the presentation control device 143, processing for the second execution of the hold notice, and processing for the third execution of the hold notice) which executes a specific notification corresponding to the specific special information in the later predetermined presentation state.

In the above configuration, the specific notification is executed based on the result of so-called reserved pre-reading, so that the notification mode of the specific notification suggests the degree of expectation that the result of the award judgment will be the award response result, and can ideally arouse the player's expectation that the award response result will be before the award judgment is made. In such a case, if the execution of the specific notification is canceled with a change in the presentation state as described above, there is a concern that the player may mistakenly believe that the award response result has disappeared or the expectation has decreased.

In this regard, according to this configuration, if the original presentation state is restored before the play round of the special information that triggered the specific notification ends or before the special information becomes the subject of a grant judgment, the notification mode of the specific notification is set to correspond to the original notification mode. This makes it possible to inform the player that the grant response result has not disappeared, and also to suggest the degree of expectation for the special information before the grant judgment result for the special information that triggered the specific notification is notified. This makes it possible to appropriately address the above concerns and to appropriately balance the execution of the specific notification with the switching of the presentation state.

Feature aB5. The gaming machine described in Feature aB4, wherein the second notification mode setting means sets the notification mode of the specific notification in the subsequent predetermined presentation state based on the notification mode of the specific notification in the previous predetermined presentation state, regardless of the result of the previous specific processing in the previous predetermined presentation state.

For example, if the notification mode of a specific notification in a later specified presentation state is set based on the results of a reserved look-ahead performed in a previous specified presentation state, it is expected that a mode different from the notification mode of the specific notification in the previous specified presentation state will be set. Also, in a configuration in which the notification mode of a specific notification is changed (ranked up) in stages, even with the same look-ahead result, differences in the notification mode of the specific notification at the time of switching the presentation state may occur depending on the timing of the switch, so if the notification mode in the later specified presentation state is set based on the results of a reserved look-ahead, a mode different from the notification mode of the specific notification in the previous specified presentation state is likely to be set.

In this regard, in this configuration, the notification mode of the specific notification in the later specified presentation state is set based on the notification mode of the specific notification when switching from that presentation state to another presentation state, rather than the result of the reserved pre-read performed in the previous specified presentation state, so that when the presentation state returns to the original state, it can be set to the same notification mode as the specific notification that was actually notified. This allows the notification mode in the previous specified presentation state to be appropriately matched with the notification mode in the later specified presentation state, making it easier for the player to recognize that the notification mode has returned.

Feature aB6. The specific notification means is
A first scenario setting means (a function for executing a setting process for a hold notice) for setting a notification scenario (performance scenario) for changing the notification mode of the specific notification when a specific notification is made triggered by the specific special information in the previous predetermined performance state;
A second scenario setting means (a function for executing a setting process for a notice return) for resetting a notification scenario (return scenario) for changing the notification mode of the specific notification in the case where a specific notification is made in response to the specific special information in a later predetermined performance state;
The gaming machine according to feature aB4 or feature aB5, characterized in that it is provided with:

When a specific notification is made in a later specified presentation state, it is expected that the period from when the later specified presentation state is switched to until the game round of the special information to which the specific notification corresponds starts or ends will vary depending on the length of time spent in the other presentation state, i.e., the period during which the specific notification can be executed. In this regard, in this configuration, when a specific notification is made in a later specified presentation state, the notification scenario for changing the notification mode is reset, so that the notification mode of the specific notification can be suitably changed to the original mode even when the above-mentioned period varies.

Feature aB7. When transitioning to a later predetermined performance state, a reserved number grasping means (a function for executing the processing of step Sa2103) is provided for grasping the reserved number of game times before or before the specific special information;
The gaming machine described in feature aB6, wherein the second scenario setting means resets the notification scenario based on the number of reserved balls grasped by the number of reserved balls grasping means.

In the above configuration, when switching to a later specified presentation state, the number of pending notifications is grasped and the notification scenario for the specific notification is reset taking the result into consideration, so that the notification mode of the specific notification can be suitably changed to the original mode regardless of the duration of stay in the other presentation state.

Feature aB8. A gaming machine according to any one of Features aB1 to aB7, characterized in that it is provided with a means for limiting the continuation of a specific notification (a function for changing the display mode of the pending image HW to the normal display mode HMa) when a transition is made from a previous predetermined presentation state to the other presentation state during the execution of the specific notification.

In the above configuration, the continuation of the specific notification that had been executed up until that point is restricted (regulated) when the presentation state is switched, which can easily give the player the mistaken impression that their chance has disappeared. By applying any of the configurations of features aB1 to aB7 above to such a configuration, it is possible to make each of those features function effectively and to optimally exert each of the above effects.

Feature aB9. A gaming machine according to any one of Features aB1 to aB8, characterized in that the predetermined presentation state is a presentation state in which the likelihood of the specific notification being executed differs from the other presentation states.

In the case of a configuration in which the likelihood of a specific notification being executed differs depending on the presentation state, switching the presentation state while the specific notification is still being executed may result in a situation in which the expectation level, etc., suggested by the specific notification differs before and after the presentation state is switched. In this case, such inconsistencies in expectation level, etc. can be suppressed by canceling the execution of the specific notification when the presentation state is switched. However, on the other hand, there is a concern that this may cause the player to misunderstand or feel anxious that the chance suggested by the specific notification has disappeared. By applying any of the configurations of features aB1 to aB8 above to such a configuration, each of these features can be made to function effectively, and each of the above effects can be optimally exerted.

In addition, in this feature, "the specified presentation state is a presentation state that differs from the other presentation states in the ease with which the specific notification is executed" can be understood to include not only a configuration in which the other presentation states are set as states in which the specific notification can be executed, but also a configuration in which the other presentation states are set as states in which the specific notification is not executed.

Feature aB10. The plurality of notification modes in the specific notification are set so as to have different expectations for the grant response result;
A gaming machine described in any of features aB1 to aB9, characterized in that the second notification mode setting means is equipped with a first means (setting process for preview return in the presentation control device 143) for setting the notification mode of a specific notification in a later specified presentation state to a specified first mode (same specific display mode, display mode of the same rank, same character, etc.) that the player can recognize as being of the same level as the notification mode of a specific notification in a previous specified presentation state.

In the above configuration, the notification mode of the specific notification in the subsequent predetermined presentation state is set to a mode that the player can recognize as being of the same level as the notification mode in the previous predetermined presentation state, making it easier for the player to recognize that the specific notification has returned.

Feature aB11. The gaming machine described in Feature aB10, characterized in that the second notification mode setting means includes a second means (setting process for preview return in the presentation control device 143) for setting the notification mode of the specific notification in a later predetermined presentation state to the predetermined first mode, and then setting the notification mode to a predetermined second mode (such as a higher specific display mode) that the player can recognize as being higher than the notification mode of the specific notification in the previous predetermined presentation state.

In the above configuration, the notification mode of a specific notification in a later specified presentation state can be a higher-ranking notification mode than the notification mode in the previous specified presentation state, which prevents the notification mode in the later specified presentation state from being limited to the notification mode in the previous specified presentation state, narrowing the range of possible expectations, etc. In this case, if a higher-ranking notification mode is suddenly used, it may be difficult to understand the correspondence with the notification mode in the previous specified presentation state, making the presentation difficult to understand. In this regard, in this configuration, the notification mode is first set to the same rank and then changed to a higher-ranking notification mode, making it easy to understand that the notification mode has returned, and reducing player confusion.

Feature aB12. A specific presentation means (a function for executing the processes of steps Sa1603 to Sa1605) for executing a specific presentation (change suggestion presentation) suggesting that the notification mode of the specific notification will change to a higher notification mode;
When the notification mode of the specific notification is set to the predetermined first mode in the later predetermined performance state, a means for restricting the execution of the specific performance (a function for restricting the execution of the change suggestion performance);
The gaming machine according to feature aB10 or feature aB11, characterized in that it is provided with:

In the above configuration, the specific presentation suggests that the notification mode of the specific notification will change to a higher notification mode, so that the player's expectation of the change to a higher mode is aroused, and the player's attention to the specific notification can be increased. In such a configuration, for example, when the notification mode of the specific notification is set to a mode of the same rank, it is assumed that the player will associate the higher notification mode with the notification mode in the previous specified presentation state that he remembers, even though the mode is actually the same rank. In this case, the actual notification mode will not match the mode associated with the player, and there is a risk that the player's trust in the specific presentation will be damaged. In this regard, in the present configuration, even if the change corresponds to a change to a higher notification mode, if the notification mode is simply returned to the notification mode in the previous specified presentation state, the execution of the specific presentation is restricted, so that it is possible to suppress the player's association with a mode higher than the actual notification mode, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

Feature aB13. A game time control means (a function for executing a game time control process in the main control device 162) that controls the game time operation to be performed based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and the end of the game time operation as a notification result corresponding to the award determination result, counting as one game time;
A hold notification means (a function of executing a hold command response process in the performance control device 143) for issuing a hold notification (hold image) so that the player can recognize at least the number of holds before execution;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any of features aB1 to aB12, characterized in that the specific notification is a notification mode of the hold notification in a specific mode (specific display mode) different from a normal mode (normal display mode).

When a specific notification is made using a hold notification, the execution period of the specific notification is relatively long, and it is easy for the presentation state to change while the specific notification is being executed. In addition, since it becomes clear which special information the specific notification suggests is the target of the expectation level, etc., it is expected that there will be a large impact if the execution of the specific notification is canceled due to a change in the presentation state. By applying any of the configurations of features aB1 to aB12 above to such a configuration, each of these features can be made to function effectively, and each of the above effects can be optimally exerted.

Feature aB14. The gaming machine described in Feature aB13 is characterized in that, when a transition is made from a previous predetermined presentation state to the other presentation state in a situation where the presentation state of the hold notification corresponding to specific special information (hold information of the hold image HW) is a specific presentation state, the gaming machine is provided with a means for setting the presentation state of the hold notification corresponding to the specific special information to the normal presentation state (a function for setting the display state of the hold image HW to the normal display state HMa).

In the above configuration, when the presentation state is switched, the hold notification that was previously in a specific mode is changed to a normal mode, which can easily give the player the impression that he has been downgraded and can easily give the player the mistaken impression that his expectations have decreased. By applying any of the configurations from feature aB1 to feature aB12 to this configuration, it is possible to make each of these features function effectively and to optimally exert each of the above effects.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of Features aA1 to aA14, Features aB1 to aB14, Features aC1 to aC9, Features aD1 to aD10, Features aE1 to aE19, Features aF1 to aF12, Features aG1 to aG15, Features aH1 to aH11, and Features aI1 to aI12 can be applied individually to each of the configurations of Features aB1 to aB14 above, or a part or all of each technical idea can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature a Group C>
The features aC group are features of the invention group extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the variations or combinations thereof, and are mainly extracted based on variation 1 of the first embodiment described above.

Feature aC1. An information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
An acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 314b) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
An assignment determination means (a function of executing a correct/incorrect determination process in the main control device 162) for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the assigned information;
A bonus awarding means (a function of executing a process for opening and closing a large prize opening in the main control device 162) that can award a bonus to a player based on the result of the bonus determination by the bonus determination means being a bonus corresponding result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the bonus information;
A game round control means (a function of executing a game round control process in the main control unit 162) controls a predetermined notification means (a pattern display device 75) so that a game round operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and the end of the game round operation is regarded as one game round as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination, and the game round operation is performed.
A hold notification means (a function of executing a hold command response process in the performance control device 143) that performs a hold notification (hold image) by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means (a pattern display device 75, a hold lamp unit) so that the player can recognize at least the number of reserved play times before execution;
a destination specifying means (a function of executing a reserved read-ahead process in the main control unit 162) for executing a destination specifying process for specifying information corresponding to a judgment result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquiring means becomes the subject of the grant judgment, at a timing before the special information becomes the subject of the grant judgment;
A specific mode means (a function for executing a setting process for a hold notice in the performance control device 143 and a first execution process for the hold notice in the first modification of the first embodiment) capable of executing a specific mode process for changing the notification mode of the hold notice to a specific mode (specific display mode) different from a normal mode (normal display mode) based on the result of the destination specific process;
Equipped with
When a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the presentation mode is switched from the presentation mode A to the presentation mode B), the specific mode or the execution of the hold notification is restricted, and the state is transitioned to a restricted state.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a setting means (a function of executing a second setting process for hold notice by the presentation control device 143 in variant example 1 of the first embodiment) that sets the notification mode after the restricted state for the hold notification corresponding to special information obtained during the restricted state based on the result of the destination identification process executed during the restricted state.

In the above configuration, the notification mode of the reserved notification is set to a specific mode based on the result of so-called reserved pre-reading, so that it is possible to arouse the player's anticipation that the corresponding result will be obtained even before the start of a game round. With such a configuration, a restricted state may be set for a reserved notification that is already set to a specific mode, which restricts the execution of the specific mode or the reserved notification. However, if new special information is obtained in the restricted state, and such special information is not changed to the specific mode, there is a concern that it will not be possible to arouse the player's anticipation for the special information obtained during the restricted state.

In this regard, according to the present configuration, the notification mode of the reserved notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the restricted state can be changed to a specific mode after the restricted state ends, thereby stimulating the player's anticipation for the special information acquired during the restricted state. In this case, the change to the specific mode after the restricted state is performed based on the results of the destination specification process (reserved pre-reading process) executed during the restricted state, so the destination specification process can be performed in the same way as when the restricted state is not in effect. In other words, since there is no need to change the configuration of the destination specification process, it is possible to change the notification mode of the reserved notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the restricted state after the restricted state while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature aC2. The gaming machine described in Feature aC1, characterized in that the destination determination means is configured to perform the destination determination process for the acquired special information in accordance with the timing of acquisition of the special information, regardless of whether the restricted state is in effect or not.

According to the above configuration, the destination identification process can be performed according to the timing of acquiring the special information in both the restricted state and the non-restricted state, so there is no need to distinguish between the destination identification process in the former and latter cases. Therefore, it is possible to change the notification mode of the hold notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the restricted state after the restricted state, while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature aC3. The gaming machine described in Feature aC1 or Feature aC2, characterized in that the setting means executes the setting when or after the restricted state ends.

For example, if the notification mode after the restricted state is set based on the results of a destination-specific process executed during the restricted state, and the setting is configured to be performed during the restricted state, if a play round of special information corresponding to the pending notification for which the notification mode was set is executed during the restricted state, the pending notification may end without the setting of the notification mode being reflected, and the setting may be wasted. In this regard, with this configuration, the notification mode is set at or after the end of the restricted state, preventing such waste from occurring and enabling efficient processing.

The restriction state restricts execution of the specific aspect,
A gaming machine described in any of features aC1 to aC3, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for setting the notification mode during the restricted state for the pending notification corresponding to special information obtained during the restricted state to the normal mode, or a predetermined mode (black display mode) different from both the normal mode and the specific mode (a function for forcibly setting the display mode of the pending images HB1, HB2 to the normal display mode HMa or the black display mode).

In the above configuration, in a restricted state in which the execution of a specific mode is restricted, the hold notification is performed in a normal mode or in a predetermined mode different from both the normal mode and the specific mode, so that the specific mode can be prevented from being executed while the player can recognize the number of reserved plays. By applying any of the configurations of features aC1 to aC3 to this configuration, each of these features can be made to function effectively, and each of the above effects can be optimally exerted.

Feature aC5. A gaming machine according to any one of Features aC1 to aC4, characterized in that when special information is acquired during the restricted state, a predetermined information (information indicating that the occurrence is pending during the restricted period) can be stored in a predetermined memory unit (a reserved memory area 344c of RAM 344) so that it can be recognized after the restricted state that the special information was acquired during the restricted state.

According to the above configuration, even if special information acquired before the restricted state ends and special information acquired during the restricted state are mixed, the special information acquired during the restricted state can be identified based on the specified information stored in the specified storage unit. This makes it possible for the setting means related to feature aC1 to distinguish between special information acquired during the restricted state and special information that is not, and to process only the special information acquired during the restricted state.

Feature aC6. A plurality of presentation states including a first presentation state (presentation mode A) and a second presentation state (presentation mode B) are set as presentation states;
When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied (when a predetermined operation is performed by the performance operation unit 36), a performance state transition means (a function of executing a performance mode switching process in the performance control device 143) is provided to transition from one of a plurality of types of performance states to another performance state,
A gaming machine described in any one of features aC1 to aC5, characterized in that when the first presentation state is transitioned to the second presentation state, the gaming machine is configured to transition to the restricted state.

In the above configuration, the restricted state is entered when the presentation state is switched. In this case, it is considered that the player will play in the presentation state after the switch, so it is expected that special information will be acquired during the restricted state. By applying any of the configurations of features aC1 to aC5 to such a configuration, each of those features can be made to function effectively, and each of the above effects can be optimally exerted.

Feature aC7. The gaming machine described in Feature aC6, characterized in that the second presentation state is a presentation state in which the ease with which the specific mode processing is executed differs from the first presentation state.

In the case of a configuration in which the ease of changing to a specific mode differs depending on the presentation state, if the presentation state is switched while maintaining the specific mode, there is a risk that the expectation level suggested by the specific mode before and after the switch will become inconsistent. In this case, such inconsistency in expectation level can be suppressed by restricting the execution of the specific mode and the hold notification when transitioning from the first presentation state to the second presentation state. However, even if the above restriction is applied to the hold notification that was the specific mode before transitioning to the second presentation state, concerns arise as to how to handle the new hold notification that is made when special information is acquired in the second presentation state. By applying any of the above features aC1 to aC6 to such a configuration, each of these features can be made to function effectively, and each of the above effects can be optimally exerted.

In addition, in this feature, "the second presentation state is a presentation state in which the likelihood of the specific mode processing being executed differs from that of the first presentation state" means that a specific notification can be executed in both the first presentation state and the second presentation state, and can be understood to include not only cases in which the execution frequency (execution probability) of the specific notification differs in each of these presentation states, but also configurations in which the specific notification is not executed in either the first presentation state or the second presentation state.

Feature aC8. The gaming machine described in Feature aC6 or Feature aC7, characterized in that the restricted state is configured to end when the second presentation state ends.

In the above configuration, the restricted state is released when the second presentation state ends, so that for the pending notification of special information acquired during the second presentation state, execution of the specific mode or pending notification is restricted during the second presentation state, and then the specific mode can be set in response to the end of the second presentation state.

Feature aC9. An execution notification section (execution display area D) is provided that performs a predetermined notification (displaying a reserved image in the execution display area D) corresponding to the reserved notification so that the player can recognize the execution of the reserved game round;
A gaming machine described in any of Features aC1 to aC8, characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function of executing the processing of steps Sa2901 to Sa2903) for setting the notification mode of the specified notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the restricted state, which is performed by the execution notification unit, to a specific mode different from the normal mode based on the result of the advance specific processing performed during the restricted state, when a play round of special information acquired during the restricted state is performed during the restricted state.

According to the above configuration, for a pending notification whose notification mode change is restricted by transitioning to a restricted state, a change to a specific mode is permitted as play progresses up to the play round of the pending notification. Therefore, even if the play round of special information acquired during the restricted state is executed during the restricted state, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for that special information.

Note that, to each of the configurations of Features aC1 to aC9 above, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of Features aA1 to aA14, Features aB1 to aB14, Features aC1 to aC9, Features aD1 to aD10, Features aE1 to aE19, Features aF1 to aF12, Features aG1 to aG15, Features aH1 to aH11, and Features aI1 to aI12 individually, or it is also possible to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature aD group>
The features aD group are an invention group extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the modifications or combinations thereof, and are mainly extracted based on the above-mentioned modification 2 of the first embodiment.

Feature aD1. An information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
An acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 314b) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
An assignment determination means (a function of executing a correct/incorrect determination process in the main control device 162) for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the assigned information;
A bonus awarding means (a function of executing a process for opening and closing a large prize opening in the main control device 162) that can award a bonus to a player based on the result of the bonus determination by the bonus determination means being a bonus corresponding result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the bonus information;
A game round control means (a function of executing a game round control process in the main control unit 162) controls a predetermined notification means (a pattern display device 75) so that a game round operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and the end of the game round operation is regarded as one game round as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination means, and the game round operation is performed.
A hold notification means (a function of executing a hold command response process in the performance control device 143) that performs a hold notification (hold image) by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means (a pattern display device 75, a hold lamp unit) so that the player can recognize at least the number of reserved play times before execution;
A specific mode means (a function for executing a setting process for a hold notice in the performance control device 143 and a first execution process for the hold notice) capable of executing a specific mode process that sets the notification mode of the hold notice to a specific mode (specific display mode) different from a normal mode (normal display mode) based on a predetermined execution trigger (pre-reading result);
Equipped with
The specific aspect includes a plurality of aspects (a blue display aspect HMb, a green display aspect HMc, a red display aspect HMd, and a rainbow display aspect HMe) that are set so as to have different expectations for the grant corresponding result,
A plurality of types of states are set, including a first state (presentation mode A) and a second state (presentation mode B) in which the specific aspect processing is performed with a different degree of ease from the first state;
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the specific mode processing is executed in the first state and the notification mode of the hold notification is set to one of a plurality of types of modes and then transitions to the second state, the gaming machine is equipped with a mode determination means (a function of executing processing for switching presentation modes by the presentation control device 143 in variant example 2 of the first embodiment) which determines whether the notification mode of the hold notification is set to a predetermined mode (same specific display mode, display mode of the same rank, same character, etc.) that the player can recognize as being of the same rank as the notification mode in the first state.

In the above configuration, the notification mode of the pending notification is a specific mode, and multiple types of modes are set for the specific mode so that the degree of expectation for the grant corresponding result is different. Therefore, by setting the pending notification to one of the specific modes, the degree of expectation can be suggested, and the player's sense of expectation for the grant corresponding result can be suitably aroused. Also, in this configuration, multiple types of states are set, including a first state and a second state which differs from the first state in the ease with which it can be changed to the specific mode. Switching between these states allows the player to change his/her mood during play, and makes it possible to prevent boredom from the game.

In such a configuration, when transitioning from the first state to the second state occurs while a specific mode of pending notification is being made, maintaining the specific mode may result in the corresponding expectation level being far removed from that before the transition to the second state, depending on the type of the specific mode, which may lead to misunderstanding by the player. In this regard, in the present configuration, when such a transition occurs, a determination is made as to whether or not the notification mode of the pending notification after the transition to the second state will be a mode that the player can recognize as being of the same level as the notification mode in the first state. This makes it possible to prevent inconsistencies in expectation levels from occurring, and makes it possible to perform pending notifications appropriately after the transition to the second state.

In addition, the "second state in which the ease with which the specific mode processing is performed differs from the first state" in this feature can be understood to include not only a configuration in which the second state is set as a state in which the hold notification can be changed to a specific mode, but also a configuration in which the second state is set as a state in which the hold notification cannot be changed to a specific mode.

Feature aD2. The gaming machine described in Feature aD1, characterized in that the second state is a state in which the specific mode process is less likely to be executed than the first state.

In the above configuration, the second state is less likely to cause the hold notification to be in a specific mode than the first state, so when comparing the expectation level for the grant response result when the notification mode of the hold notification is changed to a specific mode, it is expected that the second state will be higher than the first state. In this case, the transition from the first state to the second state is a transition from a state in which the expectation level for the grant response result for the specific mode is low to a state in which the expectation level is high. By applying the configuration of feature aD1 to such a transition, it is possible to suppress inconsistencies in the expectation level and to appropriately perform the hold notification after the transition to the second state.

In addition, in this feature, "the second state is a state in which the specific mode processing is less likely to be executed than the first state" can be understood to include a configuration in which the probability that the hold notification will be set to a specific mode in the second state is set to be lower than that in the first state, as well as a configuration in which the second state is set as a state in which the hold notification will not be changed to a specific mode.

Feature aD3. The gaming machine described in Feature aD1 or Feature aD2, characterized in that the mode determination means determines that the notification mode of the hold notification when transitioning to the second state is a mode higher than a predetermined notification mode (upper limit display mode) and determines that the notification mode of the hold notification is allowed to be the predetermined mode when the notification mode of the hold notification when transitioning to the second state is a mode lower than the predetermined notification mode.

In the above configuration, the notification mode at the time of transition to the second state is compared with a predetermined notification mode set corresponding to the second state to determine whether or not the notification mode in the first state should be of the same rank. This makes it possible to determine whether or not the notification mode should be of the same rank in the second state based on the expected degree of expectation corresponding to each mode, and makes it possible to perform hold notifications appropriately after transition to the second state.

In addition, in this feature, the "predetermined notification mode" can also be expressed as "a predetermined notification mode set in response to the second state."

Feature aD4. A destination specification means (a function for executing a reserved read-ahead process in the main control unit 162) is provided for executing a destination specification process for specifying information (such as a fluctuation pattern) corresponding to a judgment result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means becomes the subject of the grant judgment, at a timing before the special information becomes the subject of the grant judgment;
The specific mode means is configured to execute the specific mode process based on a result of the first specific process,
A gaming machine described in any of features aD1 to aD3, characterized in that the mode determination means makes the determination based on the result of the destination identification processing for the special information corresponding to the hold notification that is the subject of determination by the mode determination means.

In the above configuration, the change to a specific mode is made based on the result of the advance specification process (the so-called look-ahead result). When the mode determination means determines whether or not to make the mode the same rank, the above determination is made based on the look-ahead result of the pending notification that is the subject of the determination. This makes it possible to determine whether or not to make the mode the same rank, taking into account the look-ahead result of the pending notification, that is, the notification result of the game round that is executed when the special information of the pending notification becomes the subject of the determination by the grant determination means, and the game round presentation of that game round.

Feature aD5. A plurality of types of upper limit modes (upper limit display modes) are set in accordance with the results of the destination specification process (return determination table);
The mode determination means is
A grasping means (a function of executing the process of step Sa3105) for grasping the result of the destination specification process for the special information corresponding to the hold notification to be determined by the mode determination means;
A means for making the determination based on an upper limit state corresponding to the result grasped by the grasping means among the plurality of types of states (a function for executing the process of step Sa3106);
A gaming machine as described in feature aD4, characterized by being equipped with:

In the above configuration, multiple types of upper limit modes are set corresponding to the look-ahead results, and when the mode determination means determines whether to use the same mode, the upper limit mode corresponding to the look-ahead result of the hold notification that is the subject of the determination is applied and the above determination is made. This makes it possible to determine whether to use the same mode without causing the notification mode of the hold notification when transitioning to the second state to exceed the expectation level corresponding to the first state.

Feature aD6. A gaming machine according to any one of Features aD1 to aD5, characterized in that the specific mode means, when executing the specific mode process, executes the hold notification in a first specific mode (blue display mode HMb), which is one of the multiple types of modes, and then has a means for changing the notification mode of the hold notification to a second specific mode (green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow display mode HMe) that is higher than the first specific mode (function for executing setting process for hold notice in the performance control device 143).

In the above configuration, after the notification mode of the hold notification is set to a specific mode, the notification mode is changed to a higher mode in stages. In such a configuration, when the process of setting the notification mode of the hold notification to a specific mode is performed in the first state, for example, if a transition to the second state occurs early after the specific mode, the specific mode at that time is assumed to be a relatively lower mode (a mode with low expectations), and conversely, if the transition occurs at the end, it is assumed to be a relatively higher mode (a mode with high expectations). In other words, depending on the timing of the transition to the second state, there is a difference in which mode the specific mode of the hold notification is. In this way, by applying any of the configurations of features aD1 to aD5 to the configuration, it is possible to assign whether or not to set the mode to the same level depending on the notification mode each time, and it becomes possible to perform the hold notification preferably after the transition to the second state.

In addition, this feature may further include the feature that "the mode determination means includes means for determining whether or not the notification mode in the first mode immediately before transitioning to the second state is a predetermined mode that allows the player to recognize that he or she is of the same rank."

Feature aD7. The second state is a state in which the specific mode process is less likely to be executed than the first state;
A gaming machine described in any of Features aD1 to aD6, characterized in that when the specific mode processing is executed in the second state and the notification mode of the hold notification is set to one of multiple types of modes and then transitions to the first state, the gaming machine is equipped with a means for not executing the judgment by the mode judgment means (a function for skipping the processing of steps Sa3105 to Sa3107 when a negative judgment is made in step Sa3104).

In the above configuration, when the hold notification transitions from the second state, in which it is relatively unlikely to be a specific mode, to the first state, in which it is relatively likely to be a specific mode, that is, when the expectation of the grant response result for the specific mode switches from a high state to a low state, the configuration does not determine whether or not the hold notification will be in the same mode. This makes it possible to prevent excessive restrictions on the opportunities for maintaining the notification mode of the hold notification, and also to reduce the processing load.

Feature aD8. A gaming machine according to any one of Features aD1 to aD7, characterized in that it is provided with a change means (a function for executing the process of step Sa3110) for changing the notification mode of the hold notification that is the subject of the judgment from the normal mode to the predetermined mode when the mode judgment means judges that the predetermined mode should be selected.

In the above configuration, when the notification mode of the hold notification is set to the same-rank mode, it is first set to the normal mode and then changed to the same-rank mode. In this case, the notification mode of the hold notification can be configured to switch to the normal mode when switching from the first state to the second state, whether the notification mode is set to the same-rank mode or not. This makes it possible to reduce the unnaturalness of changing from the specific mode to the normal mode due to a determination that the notification should not be set to the same-rank mode. In addition, by configuring the notification to change to the normal mode and then to the specific mode, it is possible to arouse a sense of expectation that the hold notification, which was set to the normal mode, will be changed to the specific mode after transitioning to the second state, including when it is determined that the notification should not be set to the same-rank mode, and it is possible to maintain the sense of expectation for the hold notification.

Feature aD9. A specific performance means (a function for executing the processes of steps Sa1603 to Sa1605) for executing a specific performance (change suggestion performance) that suggests that the notification mode of the hold notification will change to a higher notification mode;
When the notification mode of the hold notification is changed to the predetermined mode by the change means, a means for restricting the execution of the specific performance (a function for restricting the execution of the change suggestion performance);
The gaming machine described in feature aD8 is characterized by being equipped with:

In the above configuration, the special effect suggests that the notification mode of the pending notification will change to a higher notification mode, which creates anticipation for the change to a higher notification mode and increases the player's attention to the pending notification. In such a configuration, for example, if a special effect is performed when changing to a mode of the same rank, it is assumed that the notification mode in the first state remembered by the player will be used as a standard and the player will associate it with a higher notification mode. In this case, there is a concern that even though a special effect has been performed, it will give the unnatural impression that the original state has simply been restored. In this regard, in the present configuration, even if the notification mode is changed to a higher rank, the execution of the special effect is restricted when changing from a normal state to a mode of the same rank, so it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of such inconveniences.

Feature aD10. A gaming machine according to any one of Features aD1 to aD9, characterized in that it is provided with a means (function for executing the process of step Sa3108) for changing the notification mode of the pending notification that was the subject of the determination to the normal mode or to a notification mode lower than the predetermined mode when the mode determination means determines that the predetermined mode should not be used.

In the above configuration, if it is determined that the mode should not be the same, the notification mode of the hold notification that was the subject of the determination is set to the normal mode or a lower level notification mode, so that the notification mode of the hold notification when transitioning to the second state can be prevented from exceeding the expected level corresponding to the first state, and it becomes possible to perform the hold notification appropriately after transitioning to the second state.

It is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of Features aA1 to aA14, Features aB1 to aB14, Features aC1 to aC9, Features aD1 to aD10, Features aE1 to aE19, Features aF1 to aF12, Features aG1 to aG15, Features aH1 to aH11, and Features aI1 to aI12 individually to each of the configurations of Features aD1 to aD10 above, or to apply a part or all of each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Features aE group>
The group of features aE is an invention group extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the variations or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted based on the variation 3 of the first embodiment described above.

Feature aE1. An information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
An acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 314b) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
An assignment determination means (a function of executing a correct/incorrect determination process in the main control device 162) for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the assigned information;
A special game state means (a function of executing a large prize opening opening/closing process in the main control device 162) for transitioning to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the result of the award determination by the award determination means being an award corresponding result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the award information;
A game round control means (a function of executing a game round control process in the main control unit 162) controls a predetermined notification means (a pattern display device 75) so that a game round operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and the end of the game round operation is regarded as one game round as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination, and the game round operation is performed.
A hold notification means (a function of executing a hold command response process in the performance control device 143) that performs a hold notification (hold image) by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means (a pattern display device 75, a hold lamp unit) so that the player can recognize at least the number of reserved play times before execution;
a destination specifying means (a function of executing a reserved read-ahead process in the main control unit 162) for executing a destination specifying process for specifying information corresponding to a judgment result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquiring means becomes the subject of the grant judgment, at a timing before the special information becomes the subject of the grant judgment;
A specific mode means (a function for executing a setting process for a hold notice in the performance control device 143 and a first execution process for the hold notice) capable of setting the notification mode of the hold notice to a specific mode (specific display mode) different from a normal mode (normal display mode) based on the result of the first specific process,
In addition to the special game state, multiple types of game states (normal game state, high probability game state, time-saving game state) are set as game states,
When the determination result of the award determination means becomes the award corresponding result and the special game state is executed, a state transition means (a function of executing a transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in the main control device 162) transitions to one of the plurality of game states;
A specifying means (a function of executing a setting process for a notice return by the performance control device 143 in the third modified example of the first embodiment) for setting the notification for reservation, which was set to a specific mode before the special game state, so that the notification mode after the special game state is different from the notification mode before the special game state when the game state before the special game state and the game state after the special game state are different;
A gaming machine comprising:

In the above configuration, the notification mode of the reserved notification is set to a specific mode based on the result of the so-called reserved pre-read, so that the degree of expectation for the award corresponding result can be suggested, and the player's sense of expectation can be suitably aroused. Also, in this configuration, multiple types of game states are set as the game state, and when the judgment result of the award judgment means becomes the award corresponding result and a special game state is executed, the game state is transitioned to one of the multiple types of game states. In such a configuration with multiple types of game states, even if the special information used for the award judgment is the same, differences may occur in the result of the award judgment and the game round presentation performed in the game round depending on the game state. In this regard, in this configuration, for the hold notification that was set to a specific mode before the special game state was executed, if the game state before and after the special game state is different, the notification mode after the special game state is set to be different from the notification mode before the special game state. Therefore, even if the award determination result or game number presentation due to the difference in the game state changes, the hold notification is prevented from misleading the player, and it is possible to appropriately execute the hold notification in the game state after the transition.

Feature aE2. The gaming machine described in feature aE1, characterized in that the specifying means includes a means for setting the notification mode after the special gaming state to the normal mode for the pending notification that was set to the specific mode before the special gaming state when the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state are different (a function for executing the processing of step Sa3417 after a negative judgment is made in step Sa3504).

In the above configuration, if the game state after the special game state differs from the game state before the special game state, the mode is changed to the normal mode and a pending notification is issued. This makes it possible to effectively prevent a pending notification that does not match the actual expectation level from being issued after the special game state, which may lead to misunderstandings by the player. Furthermore, by uniformly setting the mode to the normal mode, it is possible to eliminate the need for fine adjustments to the notification mode in accordance with changes in expectation level, and it is also possible to simplify the processing configuration.

Feature aE3. The specifying means is
A first means as a means for setting the normal mode;
A second means (a function for executing a third execution process of the hold notice) for determining whether or not the notification mode of the hold notice set to the normal mode by the first means is to be set to a specific mode and setting the notification mode of the hold notice based on the result of the determination;
The gaming machine described in feature aE2 is characterized by being equipped with:

By changing the notification mode of the reserved notification, which was set to a specific mode before the special game state, to a normal mode after the special game state based on the difference between the game state after the special game state and the game state before the special game state, it is possible to absorb fluctuations in the award judgment results and game number presentation caused by changes in the game state, but there is a concern that it may not be possible to notify or suggest the expectation level of the special information corresponding to the reserved notification. In this regard, with this configuration, the reserved notification that was set to the normal mode is given the opportunity to change to a specific mode afterwards, so it can be upgraded to a specific mode after the fact, making it possible to notify the expectation level, etc.

Feature aE4. An execution notification section (execution display area D) is provided that performs a predetermined notification (displaying a reserved image in the execution display area D) corresponding to the reserved notification so that the player can recognize the execution of the reserved game round;
The identification means is
A first means as a means for setting the normal mode;
A second means (a function for executing a third execution process of the reservation notice) for determining whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification corresponding to the reservation notice is to be a specific mode different from the normal mode during a game in which the reservation notice is set to the normal mode by the first means, and setting the notification mode of the predetermined notification based on the result of the determination;
A gaming machine according to feature aE2 or feature aE3, characterized in that it is equipped with:

By changing the notification mode of a reserved notification, which was set to a specific mode before the special game state, to a normal mode after the special game state based on the difference between the game state after the special game state and the game state before the special game state, it is possible to absorb fluctuations in the award judgment results and game round presentation caused by changes in the game state, but there is a concern that it may become impossible to notify or suggest the expectation level of the special information corresponding to the reserved notification. In this regard, with this configuration, for a reserved notification that was set to a normal mode, an opportunity to change to a specific mode is given as play progresses to the game round of that reserved notification. Therefore, even if the notification mode is changed from a specific mode to a normal mode, it can be upgraded to a specific mode after the fact, making it possible to notify the expectation level, etc.

Feature aE5. When a game round is executed, a game round performance setting means (a function for executing a special chart change display process in the performance control device 143) is provided that sets a game round performance (reach performance, etc.) to be performed in the game round based on the special information (reserved information) that is the subject of the grant judgment that is the trigger of the game round or the specific information (change pattern) derived from the special information,
The gaming machine described in feature aE4 is characterized in that the second means determines whether or not the notification mode of the specified notification is to be a specific mode based on the special information or the specific information referenced by the game round presentation setting means.

In the above configuration, the game play presentation setting means determines whether or not to set the notification mode of the predetermined notification to a specific mode based on the special information or specific information used to set the game play presentation. This makes it possible to change the notification mode of the predetermined notification to a specific mode while adapting it to the game play presentation actually performed in the game play after the special game state when the game state after the special game state differs from the game state before the special game state.

When this feature is applied to feature aE2, "the second means determines whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification is a specific mode based on the special information or the specific information referenced by the game round presentation setting means" can be expressed as "the second means determines whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification is a specific mode based on the special information or the specific information referenced by the game round presentation setting means, regardless of the information stored in the specified memory unit."

Feature aE6. The specific aspect is set with a plurality of types of aspects (a blue display aspect HMb, a green display aspect HMc, a red display aspect HMd, and a rainbow display aspect HMe) with different expectations for the grant corresponding result;
The information corresponding to the notification mode of the hold notification set to the specific mode before the execution of the special game state can be stored in a predetermined storage unit (a return area 344f of the RAM 344).
A gaming machine described in any of features aE1 to aE5, characterized in that the determination means is equipped with a mode setting means (a function of executing setting processing for preview return in the presentation control device 143) that sets the notification mode after the special game state based on information stored in the specified memory unit for the pending notification that was set to a specific mode before the special game state when the game state before the special game state and the game state after the special game state are the same.

For example, if the notification mode after the special game state is set based on the results of a reserved read-ahead performed before the special game state, there is a concern that the notification mode may be set to a different mode from the notification mode before the special game state. In this regard, with this configuration, when a special game state is executed in a situation where a reserved notification of a specific mode exists, information on the notification mode at that time is stored, and if the game state after the special game state is the same as the game state before the special game state, the notification mode after the special game state is set based on the stored information. This makes it possible to preferably restore the notification mode after the special game state to the original mode before the special game state.

In addition, in this feature, "mode setting means for setting the notification mode after the special game state for the pending notification that was set to a specific mode before the special game state based on the information stored in the specified memory unit" can also be expressed as "mode setting means for setting the notification mode after the special game state for the pending notification that was set to a specific mode before the special game state based on the information stored in the specified memory unit regardless of the result of the advance specification process."

Feature aE7. The specific mode is set with a plurality of types of modes (a blue display mode HMb, a green display mode HMc, a red display mode HMd, and a rainbow display mode HMe) with different expectations for the grant corresponding result;
A gaming machine described in any of features aE1 to aE6, characterized in that the identification means is equipped with a mode setting means (a function of executing setting processing for a preview return in the presentation control device 143) for setting the notification mode after the special game state, which was set to a specific mode before the special game state, to a predetermined mode (same specific display mode, display mode of the same rank, same character, etc.) that allows the player to recognize that the notification mode after the special game state is of the same rank as the notification mode before the special game state, when the game state before the special game state and the game state after the special game state are the same.

In the above configuration, if the game state after the special game state is the same as the game state before the special game state, the notification mode after the special game state is a mode that the player can recognize as being of the same rank as the notification mode before the special game state, so that the pending notification that aroused the player's expectations by changing to a specific mode before the special game state can arouse the player's expectations in the same way even after the special game state.

Feature aE8. The specific aspect is set with a plurality of types of aspects (a blue display aspect HMb, a green display aspect HMc, a red display aspect HMd, and a rainbow display aspect HMe) with different expectations for the grant corresponding result;
The identification means is
A first means for setting the notification mode after the special game state to the normal mode for the reserved notification that was set to the specific mode before the special game state when the game state before the special game state and the game state after the special game state are different (a function for executing the process of step Sa3417 after making a negative judgment in step Sa3504);
a second means (a function of executing a setting process for a notice return in the performance control device 143) for setting the notification mode after the special game state, which was set to a specific mode before the special game state, to a predetermined mode (the same specific display mode, the same display mode, the same character, etc.) that allows a player to recognize that the notification mode after the special game state is of the same rank as the notification mode before the special game state, when the game state before the special game state and the game state after the special game state are the same;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any of features aE1 to aE7, characterized in that the second means is equipped with a means (a function of executing the processing of step Sa3507) that can set the notification mode after the special game state to the normal mode and then to the specified mode.

In the above configuration, when the notification mode after the special game state is to be the same as the notification mode before the special game state, the notification mode is first changed to the normal mode and then changed to the same mode. In this case, regardless of whether the game state after the special game state is the same as the game state before the special game state, the notification mode of the reserved notification is changed from the specific mode to the normal mode as the special game state is executed. This makes it possible to reduce the unnaturalness of changing to the normal mode due to a difference in the game state. In addition, by configuring the notification mode to change to the specific mode after the normal mode, it is possible to arouse a sense of expectation that the reserved notification, which was set to the normal mode, will be changed to the specific mode in the game state after the special game state, including when the game state is different, and it is possible to maintain the sense of expectation for the reserved notification.

Feature aE9. A gaming machine according to any one of Features aE1 to aE8, characterized in that the identification means includes a game state determination means (a function of executing the processing of step Sa3416) that determines whether or not the game state before the special game state is the same as the game state after the special game state during the special game state or when the special game state ends.

In the above configuration, the determination of whether the game states are the same or not is performed while the special game state is in progress or when the special game state ends. This makes it possible to quickly respond after the special game state as to what mode the notification mode of the reserved notification, which was set to a specific mode before the special game state, should be after the special game state. Therefore, even if the number of reserved balls before the reserved notification is small after the special game state, the notification mode of the reserved notification can be suitably adjusted.

Feature aE10. A variable ball entry means (variable winning device 65) that can be switched between a first state (open state) in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a second state (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first state;
A switching control means (a function of executing a large prize opening opening/closing process in the main control unit 162) that switches the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state and then switches the variable ball entry means to the second state;
Equipped with
The special game state is a state in which the switching control is performed at least once,
A gaming machine described in feature aE9, characterized in that the game state determination means makes the determination during the period in which the variable ball entry means is in the second state.

When the variable ball entry means is in the first state during a special game state, it is expected that the processing load will be relatively high, such as the need to perform effects based on the game ball entering the variable ball entry means. If a match determination is made during such a period, there is a concern that this will result in an even higher load. In this regard, with this configuration, the match determination is made during the period when the variable ball entry means is in the second state, making it possible to reduce the processing load.

Feature aE11. The award determination means performs the award determination based on the first information (the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) included in the special information;
A game round performance setting means (a function of executing a special chart variation display process in the performance control device 143) is provided for setting a game round performance (reach performance) to be performed in the game round based on second information (value of the variation type counter CS) included in the special information or specific information (variation pattern) derived from the second information,
The destination specification process specifies the second information included in the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means or the specification information corresponding to the second information at a timing before the first information included in the predetermined special information becomes a target of the grant determination,
A gaming machine described in any of features aE1 to aE9, characterized in that the multiple types of gaming states include a first gaming state (either a normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, or a high-probability gaming state) and a second gaming state (either a normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, or a high-probability gaming state, and a gaming state different from the first gaming state) in which a gaming round presentation or specific information corresponding to a predetermined second information (a variable type counter CS with a value of 80) is different from the first gaming state.

In the above configuration, the game round presentation is set based on the second information included in the special information, and the first game state and the second game state are configured so that the corresponding game round presentation is different even if the value of the second information is the same. For this reason, if the game state after the special game state is different from the game state before the special game state, and the notification mode after the special game state in the hold notification is made the same as the notification mode before the special game state, there is a risk that the game round presentation suggested by the hold notification before the special game state and after the special game state will not be consistent. By applying any of the configurations of features aE1 to aE9 above to such a configuration, each of those features can be made to function effectively, and each of the above effects can be preferably exerted.

Feature aE12. A gaming machine according to any one of Features aE1 to aE10, characterized in that it is provided with a means for not executing the hold notification in the special game state (a function for executing the processing of step Sa3411).

When changing the notification mode of a reserved notification when a special game state ends, there is a concern that if the notification mode of the reserved notification that was being performed up until that point is suddenly changed to another mode at the end of the special game state, the player may have an unnatural impression. For example, if the notification mode of the reserved notification is downgraded to a normal mode or a lower notification mode, it is expected that this will be easily noticeable to the player and will likely give an unnatural impression. In this regard, since the reserved notification is not performed in the special game state in this configuration, when changing the notification mode, a period can be inserted during which the reserved notification itself, including other reserved notifications, is not performed. This makes it possible to prevent the change in the notification mode from being noticeable and to alleviate unnaturalness. Another advantage is that not performing a specific notification makes it easier for the player to focus on the special game state presentation.

Feature aE13. An information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
An acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 314b) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
An assignment determination means (a function of executing a correct/incorrect determination process in the main control device 162) for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the assigned information;
A special game state means (a function of executing a large prize opening opening/closing process in the main control device 162) for transitioning to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the result of the award determination by the award determination means being an award corresponding result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the award information;
A game round control means (a function of executing a game round control process in the main control unit 162) controls a predetermined notification means (a pattern display device 75) so that a game round operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and the end of the game round operation is regarded as one game round as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination, and the game round operation is performed.
A hold notification means (a function of executing a hold command response process in the performance control device 143) that performs a hold notification (hold image) by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means (a pattern display device 75, a hold lamp unit) so that the player can recognize at least the number of reserved play times before execution;
a destination specifying means (a function of executing a reserved read-ahead process in the main control unit 162) for executing a destination specifying process for specifying information corresponding to a judgment result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquiring means becomes the subject of the grant judgment, at a timing before the special information becomes the subject of the grant judgment;
A specific mode means (a function for executing a setting process for a hold notice in the performance control device 143 and a first execution process for the hold notice) capable of setting the notification mode of the hold notice to a specific mode (specific display mode) different from a normal mode (normal display mode) based on the result of the first specific process,
In addition to the special game state, multiple types of game states (normal game state, high probability game state, time-saving game state) are set as game states,
When the determination result of the award determination means becomes the award corresponding result and the special game state is executed, a state transition means (a function of executing a transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in the main control device 162) transitions to one of the plurality of game states;
A specifying means (a function of executing a setting process for a notice return by the performance control device 143 in the third modified example of the first embodiment) for changing the notification mode after the special game state, which is set as a specific mode before the special game state, depending on whether the game state before the special game state is the same as the game state after the special game state or not;
A gaming machine comprising:

In the above configuration, the notification mode of the reserved notification is set to a specific mode based on the result of the so-called reserved pre-read, so that the degree of expectation for the grant corresponding result can be suggested, and the player's sense of expectation can be suitably aroused. In addition, in this configuration, multiple types of game states are set as the game state, and when the judgment result of the grant judgment means is the grant corresponding result and the special game state is executed, the game state is transitioned to one of the multiple types of game states. In this configuration in which multiple types of game states are set, even if the special information used for the grant judgment is the same, differences may occur in the result of the grant judgment and the game round performance performed in the game round depending on the game state. In this regard, in this configuration, for the reserved notification that was set to a specific mode before the execution of the special game state, the notification mode in the game state after the special game state is different depending on whether the game state before and after the execution of the special game state is the same, so that the notification mode can be set based on the change in the grant judgment result, the game round performance, etc. caused by the difference in the game state, and it becomes possible to suitably perform the reserved notification in the game state after the transition.

Feature aE14. The specific aspect is set with a plurality of types of aspects (a blue display aspect HMb, a green display aspect HMc, a red display aspect HMd, and a rainbow display aspect HMe) with different expectations for the grant corresponding result;
The information corresponding to the notification mode of the hold notification set to the specific mode before the execution of the special game state can be stored in a predetermined storage unit (a return area 344f of the RAM 344).
The gaming machine described in feature aE13 is characterized in that the determination means is equipped with a mode setting means (a function of executing setting processing for preview return in the presentation control device 143) that sets the notification mode after the special game state based on information stored in the specified memory unit for the pending notification that was set to a specific mode before the special game state when the game state before the special game state and the game state after the special game state are the same.

For example, if the notification mode after the special game state is set based on the results of a reserved read-ahead performed before the special game state, there is a concern that the notification mode may be set to a different mode from the notification mode before the special game state. In this regard, with this configuration, when a special game state is executed in a situation where a reserved notification of a specific mode exists, information on the notification mode at that time is stored, and if the game state after the special game state is the same as the game state before the special game state, the notification mode after the special game state is set based on the stored information. This makes it possible to preferably restore the notification mode after the special game state to the original mode before the special game state.

In addition, in this feature, "mode setting means for setting the notification mode after the special game state for the pending notification that was set to a specific mode before the special game state based on the information stored in the specified memory unit" can also be expressed as "mode setting means for setting the notification mode after the special game state for the pending notification that was set to a specific mode before the special game state based on the information stored in the specified memory unit regardless of the result of the advance specification process."

Feature aE15. The specific aspect is set with a plurality of types of aspects (a blue display aspect HMb, a green display aspect HMc, a red display aspect HMd, and a rainbow display aspect HMe) with different expectations for the grant corresponding result;
The gaming machine described in feature aE13 or feature aE14, characterized in that the identification means is equipped with a mode setting means (a function of executing setting processing for preview return in the presentation control device 143) for setting the notification mode after the special game state, which was set to a specific mode before the special game state, to a predetermined mode (same specific display mode, display mode of the same rank, same character, etc.) that allows the player to recognize that the notification mode after the special game state is of the same rank as the notification mode before the special game state, when the game state before the special game state and the game state after the special game state are the same.

In the above configuration, if the game state after the special game state is the same as the game state before the special game state, the notification mode after the special game state is a mode that the player can recognize as being of the same rank as the notification mode before the special game state, so that the pending notification that aroused the player's expectations by changing to a specific mode before the special game state can arouse the player's expectations in the same way even after the special game state.

Feature aE16. A gaming machine according to any one of Features aE13 to aE15, characterized in that the specifying means includes means for setting the notification mode after the special gaming state to the normal mode for the pending notification that was set to the specific mode before the special gaming state when the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state are different (a function for executing the processing of step Sa3417 after a negative judgment is made in step Sa3504).

In the above configuration, if the game state after the special game state differs from the game state before the special game state, the mode is changed to the normal mode and a pending notification is issued. This makes it possible to effectively prevent a pending notification that does not match the actual expectation level from being issued after the special game state, which may lead to misunderstandings by the player. Furthermore, by uniformly setting the mode to the normal mode, it is possible to eliminate the need for fine adjustments to the notification mode in accordance with changes in expectation level, and it is also possible to simplify the processing configuration.

Feature aE17. An execution notification section (execution display area D) is provided that performs a predetermined notification (displaying a reserved image in the execution display area D) corresponding to the reserved notification so that the player can recognize the execution of the reserved game round;
The identification means is
A first means as a means for setting the normal mode;
A second means (a function for executing a third execution process of the reservation notice) for determining whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification corresponding to the reservation notice is to be a specific mode different from the normal mode in a game of the reservation notice set by the first means, and setting the notification mode of the predetermined notification based on the result of the determination;
The gaming machine described in feature aE16 is characterized by comprising:

By changing the notification mode of a reserved notification, which was set to a specific mode before the special game state, to a normal mode after the special game state based on the difference between the game state after the special game state and the game state before the special game state, it is possible to absorb fluctuations in the award judgment results and game round presentation caused by changes in the game state, but there is a concern that it may become impossible to notify or suggest the expectation level of the special information corresponding to the reserved notification. In this regard, with this configuration, for a reserved notification that was set to a normal mode, an opportunity to change to a specific mode is given as play progresses to the game round of that reserved notification. Therefore, even if the notification mode is changed from a specific mode to a normal mode, it can be upgraded to a specific mode after the fact, making it possible to notify the expectation level, etc.

Feature aE18. When a game round is executed, a game round performance setting means (function for executing a special chart change display process in the performance control device 143) is provided that sets a game round performance (reach performance, etc.) to be performed in the game round based on the special information (reserved information) that is the subject of the grant judgment that is the trigger of the game round or the specific information (change pattern) derived from the special information,
The gaming machine described in feature aE17, characterized in that the second means determines whether or not the notification mode of the specified notification is to be a specific mode based on the special information or the specific information referenced by the game round presentation setting means.

In the above configuration, the game play presentation setting means determines whether or not to set the notification mode of the predetermined notification to a specific mode based on the special information or specific information used to set the game play presentation. This makes it possible to change the notification mode of the predetermined notification to a specific mode while adapting it to the game play presentation actually performed in the game play after the special game state when the game state after the special game state differs from the game state before the special game state.

When this feature is applied to feature aE2, "the second means determines whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification is a specific mode based on the special information or the specific information referenced by the game round presentation setting means" can be expressed as "the second means determines whether or not the notification mode of the predetermined notification is a specific mode based on the special information or the specific information referenced by the game round presentation setting means, regardless of the information stored in the specified memory unit."

Feature aE19. The specific aspect is set with a plurality of types of aspects (a blue display aspect HMb, a green display aspect HMc, a red display aspect HMd, and a rainbow display aspect HMe) with different expectations for the grant corresponding result;
The identification means is
a first means (a function of executing a setting process for a notice return in the performance control device 143) for setting the notification mode after the special game state, which was set to a specific mode before the special game state, to a predetermined mode (the same specific display mode, the same display mode, the same character, etc.) that allows a player to recognize that the notification mode after the special game state is of the same rank as the notification mode before the special game state, when the game state before the special game state and the game state after the special game state are the same;
A second means (a function of executing the process of step Sa3417 after making a negative judgment in step Sa3504) for setting the notification mode after the special game state to the normal mode for the hold notification that was set to the specific mode before the special game state when the game state before the special game state and the game state after the special game state are different;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any of features aE13 to aE18, characterized in that the first means is equipped with a means (a function of executing the processing of step Sa3507) that can set the notification mode after the special game state to the normal mode and then to the specified mode.

In the above configuration, when the notification mode after the special game state is to be the same as the notification mode before the special game state, the notification mode is first changed to the normal mode and then changed to the same mode. In this case, regardless of whether the game state after the special game state is the same as the game state before the special game state, the notification mode of the reserved notification is changed from the specific mode to the normal mode as the special game state is executed. This makes it possible to reduce the unnaturalness of changing to the normal mode due to a difference in the game state. In addition, by configuring the notification mode to change to the specific mode after the normal mode, it is possible to arouse a sense of expectation that the reserved notification, which was set to the normal mode, will be changed to the specific mode in the game state after the special game state, including when the game state is different, and it is possible to maintain the sense of expectation for the reserved notification.

It is possible to apply the configurations of features aE9 to aE12 to features aE13 to aE19. In this case, further effects can be achieved by applying these configurations.

Note that, to each of the configurations of Features aE1 to aE19 above, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of Features aA1 to aA14, Features aB1 to aB14, Features aC1 to aC9, Features aD1 to aD10, Features aE1 to aE19, Features aF1 to aF12, Features aG1 to aG15, Features aH1 to aH11, and Features aI1 to aI12 individually, or it is also possible to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature a F group>
The group of features aF is an invention group extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the modifications or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted based on the above-mentioned modification 4 of the first embodiment.

Feature aF1. An information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
An acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 314b) for storing the special information (reserved information) acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
An assignment determination means (a function of executing a correct/incorrect determination process in the main control device 162) for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the assigned information;
A specific notification means (a function of executing a first execution process of the hold notice in the performance control device 143) that executes a specific notification (display of a hold image) corresponding to the specific special information acquired by the information acquisition means before the specific special information becomes the subject of the grant determination;
Equipped with
A first destination specifying means (a function of executing a first reserved pre-reading process by the performance control device 143 in the fourth modified example of the first embodiment) for specifying information (such as a variation pattern) corresponding to a judgment result when the predetermined special information becomes the subject of the grant judgment at a predetermined timing (the timing of acquiring the reserved information) before the special information becomes the subject of the grant judgment;
a second destination determination means (a function of executing a second reserved look-ahead process by the performance control device 143 in the fourth modified example of the first embodiment) for determining, when a predetermined event (such as an opening/closing execution mode) occurs during the execution of a specific notification corresponding to the predetermined special information, information (such as a fluctuation pattern) corresponding to a determination result when the predetermined special information becomes the subject of the grant determination for the predetermined special information at a specific timing (such as the end timing of the opening/closing execution mode) after the predetermined event;
Equipped with
The specific notification means is
A first means (a function of executing a setting process for a hold notice in the performance control device 143) for setting a notification mode of a specific notification corresponding to the specific special information before the specific event based on the identification result of the first destination identification means;
A second means (a function of executing a setting process for a notice return in the performance control device 143) for setting a notification mode of a specific notification corresponding to the specific special information after the specific event based on the result of the determination by the second destination determination means;
A gaming machine comprising:

In the above configuration, the specific notification is made based on the result of so-called look-ahead processing, so that the specific notification can suggest the degree of expectation that the result will be a grant-corresponding result, and can appropriately arouse the player's sense of expectation. In such a configuration, the state changes with the occurrence of a specified event, and even if the value of the special information used in the grant judgment is the same, there may be differences in the result of the grant judgment before and after the specified event. In this regard, in the present configuration, if a specified event occurs during the execution of a specific notification, the look-ahead processing is executed again after the specified event for the special information that triggered the specific notification, and the notification mode of the specific notification is set based on the result. Therefore, the notification mode of the specific notification performed before the specified event can be adjusted to a mode appropriate for after the specified event, and it becomes possible to perform the specific notification after the specified event in an appropriate manner.

Feature aF2. A game operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and the end of the game operation is counted as one game, as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination, and the game operation is controlled to be performed (a function of executing a game control process in the main control device 162);
The gaming machine described in feature aF1, wherein the specific notification means is configured to be able to execute the specific notification across game rounds.

In the above configuration, the specific notification is performed over a relatively long period of time, which can easily lead to a situation in which a specified event occurs while the specific notification is being performed. By applying the configuration of feature aF1 to such a configuration, the feature can be made to function effectively, and the above-mentioned effect can be preferably exerted.

Feature aF3. A gaming machine according to Feature aF1 or Feature aF2, characterized in that the award information (random number value corresponding to a jackpot) or the judgment condition (probability of winning) in the award judgment means can be different before and after the predetermined event.

In the above configuration, even if the value of the special information is the same, differences may occur in the results of the awarding judgment before and after the specified event. For this reason, if a specific notification is made after a specified event in the notification mode before the specified event, there is a concern that it may suggest a result that is different from the notification result (the result of the awarding judgment) that is actually notified in the game round. By applying the configuration of feature aF1 or feature aF2 to such a configuration, it is possible to adjust the notification mode to be consistent with the actual notification result in the game round and to make a notification after a specified event, making it possible to preferably make a specific notification after a specified event.

Feature aF4. The gaming machine described in Feature aF3, wherein the second destination determination means performs the determination by applying the given information or the judgment condition corresponding to the predetermined event.

In the above configuration, when the pre-reading process is executed again after a specified event for the special information that triggered the specific notification, the pre-reading process is performed by applying the attached information and judgment conditions corresponding to the state after the specified event. This makes it possible to adjust the notification mode for the specific notification performed before the specified event so that it is consistent with the actual notification result in the game round, and to perform the specific notification after the specified event in an appropriate manner.

Feature aF5. A game time control means (a function for executing a game time control process in the main control device 162) for starting a game time operation based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and ending the game time operation as a notification result corresponding to the award determination result, as one game time, so that the game time operation is performed;
A game round performance setting means (a function for executing a special chart change display process in the performance control device 143) for setting a game round performance (reach performance, etc.) to be performed in a game round based on special information (reserved information) or specific information (change pattern) derived from the special information;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of Features aF1 to aF4, characterized in that the game presentation corresponding to predetermined special information or predetermined specific information derived from the predetermined special information (a fluctuation pattern with a value of 80) is configured to be different before the predetermined event and after the predetermined event.

In the above configuration, even if the value of the special information or specific information is the same, differences may occur in the game round presentation set by the game round setting means before and after the specified event. For this reason, there is a concern that if a specific notification after a specified event is made in the notification mode before the specified event, it may suggest a different presentation from the game round presentation actually performed in the game round. By applying the configuration described in any of Features aF1 to aF4 above to such a configuration, it is possible to adjust the notification mode of the specific notification performed before the specified event so that it is consistent with the actual game round presentation, and to perform a notification after the specified event, making it possible to perform the specific notification after the specified event in an appropriate manner.

Feature aF6. The first destination specifying means and the second destination specifying means are provided with a means for specifying a game round performance corresponding to the predetermined special information or specific information corresponding to the predetermined special information as information corresponding to the judgment result;
The gaming machine described in feature aF5, wherein the second destination determination means determines a game round presentation corresponding to the specified special information or specific information corresponding to the specified special information in response to the specified event.

In the above configuration, when the pre-reading process is executed again after a specified event for the special information that triggered the specific notification, the game round presentation and specific information are pre-read in accordance with the state after the specified event. This makes it possible to adjust the notification mode for the specific notification that was performed before the specified event so that it is consistent with the actual game round presentation, and to perform the notification after the specified event, making it possible to perform the specific notification preferably after the specified event.

Feature aF7. A gaming machine according to any one of Features aF1 to aF6, characterized in that the second means sets the notification mode after the predetermined event based on the notification mode before the predetermined event and the result of the determination by the second destination determination means.

For example, if the notification mode of a specific notification is configured to change frequently as a specific event occurs, there is a concern that the player may feel uncomfortable. In this regard, in this configuration, the notification mode after the specific event is set taking into account not only the identification result of the second destination identification means, but also the notification mode before the specific event. Therefore, for example, if the notification mode before the specific event is compared with the identification result of the second destination identification means and there is no problem in keeping the same mode after the specific event, the specific notification can be carried out by continuing the notification mode before the specific event. This makes it possible to prevent the notification mode from changing excessively after the specific event, and makes it possible to carry out the specific notification after the specific event in a natural manner.

Feature aF8. The specific notification is set to a plurality of types of display modes (normal display mode HMa, blue display mode HMb, green display mode HMc, red display mode HMd, rainbow display mode HMe) so that the expectation level of the result of the grant determination that the result of the grant determination corresponds to the grant information is different;
The gaming machine described in feature aF7 is characterized in that the second means is equipped with a mode determination means (a function of executing the processing of steps Sa4703 to Sa4705) which determines whether the notification mode after the specified event is a specified mode (same specific display mode, display mode of the same rank, same character, etc.) that the player can recognize as being of the same rank as the notification mode before the specified event, based on the notification mode before the specified event and the determination result of the second destination determination means.

In the above configuration, multiple types of notification modes for the specific notification are set with different expectations for the corresponding result. In this configuration in which the expectations are set in stages and multiple notification modes are provided, the range of expectations that one notification mode corresponds to is narrow, so if a specific notification after a specified event is performed using a notification mode before a specified event, a difference in the expectations suggested before and after the specified event is likely to occur. In this regard, in this configuration, based on the notification mode before the specified event and the identification result of the second identification means, it is determined whether the notification mode after the specified event is a mode that the player can recognize as being of the same rank as the notification mode before the specified event, so that even in a situation in which multiple notification modes are set, it is possible to match the expectations and perform the specific notification after the specified event appropriately.

Feature aF9. The gaming machine described in Feature aF8, wherein the second means includes a means for setting the notification mode after the predetermined event to a normal mode (normal display mode HMa) or a lower notification mode than the notification mode before the predetermined event when the mode determination means determines not to set the predetermined mode (a function for executing the process of step Sa3417 after a negative determination in step Sa4706).

In the above configuration, if it is determined that the notification mode should not be of the same rank, the notification mode of the specific notification that was the subject of the determination is set to the normal mode or a lower level notification mode, so that it is possible to prevent the notification mode after a specified event from exceeding the corresponding expectation level before the specified event, and it is possible to perform the specific notification after the specified event in an appropriate manner.

Feature aF10. A game time control means (a function for executing a game time control process in the main control device 162) that controls the game time operation to be performed based on the award judgment performed by the award judgment means, and the end of the game time operation as a notification result corresponding to the award judgment result, counting as one game time;
A hold notification means (a function of executing a hold command response process in the performance control device 143) for performing a hold notification (hold image) so that the player can recognize at least the number of holds before execution;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any of features aF1 to aF9, characterized in that the specific notification is the hold notification.

When a specific notification is made using a hold notification, the execution period of the specific notification is relatively long, making it easier for a specified event to occur while the specific notification is being executed. In addition, since it becomes clear which special information the specific notification is suggesting is the subject of expectation, it is expected that there will be a large impact if there is a difference in expectation before and after the specified event. By applying any of the configurations of features aF1 to aF9 above to such a configuration, each of these features can be made to function effectively, and each of the above effects can be optimally achieved.

Feature aF11. A special game state (a function for executing a large prize opening/closing process in the main control device 162) that transitions to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the result of the award determination by the award determination means being an award correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the award information;
In addition to the special game state, multiple types of game states (normal game state, high probability game state, time-saving game state) are set as game states,
When the determination result of the award determination means becomes the award corresponding result and the special game state is executed, a state transition means (a function of executing a transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in the main control device 162) transitions to one of the plurality of game states;
Equipped with
A gaming machine according to any one of features aF1 to aF10, wherein the specified event is the special gaming state.

Some gaming machines transition to a normal gaming state, high probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state, etc., upon transition to a special gaming state. In such gaming machines, even if the value of the special information used in the award determination is the same in the gaming state before the special gaming state and the gaming state after the special gaming state, differences may occur in the results of the award determination before and after the special gaming state. By applying any of the configurations of features aF1 to aF10 above to such a configuration, each of those features can function effectively and each of the above effects can be optimally exerted.

Feature aF12. A gaming machine according to feature aF11, characterized in that it is provided with a means (a function for executing the processing of step Sa3411) for not executing the specific notification in the special gaming state when the special gaming state is entered during the execution of the specific notification.

When changing the notification mode of a specific notification when a special game state ends, there is a concern that the player may get an unnatural impression if the specific notification that had been performed up until that point is suddenly changed to another mode at the end of the special game state. For example, if the notification mode of a specific notification is downgraded to a normal mode or a lower notification mode, it is expected that this will be easily noticeable to the player and will likely give an unnatural impression. In this regard, since the specific notification is not performed in the special game state in this configuration, a period in which the specific notification itself is not performed can be inserted when changing the notification mode. This makes it possible to prevent the change in the notification mode from being too noticeable and to alleviate the unnaturalness. Another advantage is that not performing the specific notification makes it easier for the player to focus on the special game state presentation.

It is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of Features aA1 to aA14, Features aB1 to aB14, Features aC1 to aC9, Features aD1 to aD10, Features aE1 to aE19, Features aF1 to aF12, Features aG1 to aG15, Features aH1 to aH11, and Features aI1 to aI12 individually to each of the configurations of Features aF1 to aF12 above, or to apply a part or all of each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature aG group>
The features aG group are a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and variations, or combinations of these, and are mainly extracted based on variations 5 and 6 of the first embodiment.

Feature aG1. An information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
An acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 314b) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
An assignment determination means (a function of executing a correct/incorrect determination process in the main control device 162) for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the assigned information;
A bonus awarding means (a function of executing a process for opening and closing a large prize opening in the main control device 162) that can award a bonus to a player based on the result of the bonus determination by the bonus determination means being a bonus corresponding result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the bonus information;
a destination specifying means (a function of executing a reserved read-ahead process in the main control unit 162) for executing a destination specifying process for specifying information corresponding to a judgment result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquiring means becomes the subject of the grant judgment, at a timing before the special information becomes the subject of the grant judgment;
A first specific notification means (a function for executing a setting process for the hold notice in the performance control device 143 and a first execution process for the hold notice) that causes a specific notification (hold notice performance) to be executed by a predetermined notification means (a pattern display device 75) based on the result of the destination specific processing;
Equipped with
The first specific notification means includes a first notification mode setting means (a function of executing a setting process for a hold notice in the performance control device 143) for setting the notification mode of the specific notification to one of a plurality of notification modes (a blue display mode HMb, a green display mode HMc, a red display mode HMd, and a rainbow display mode HMe), and is configured to execute the specific notification based on a setting result of the first notification mode setting means;
If a predetermined abnormality (power interruption state) occurs during the execution of the specific notification, a second specific notification means (a function of executing a process for restoring the hold notice by the performance control device 143 in the modified example 5 of the first embodiment, and a function of executing a performance setting process by the performance control device 143 in the modified example 6 of the first embodiment) is provided for re-executing the specific notification after the predetermined abnormality is resolved;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second specific notification means is equipped with a second notification mode setting means (a function of executing a display mode setting process by the presentation control device 143 in variants 5 to 6 of the first embodiment) which sets the notification mode of the specific notification that is re-executed after a specified abnormality is resolved based on the notification mode of the specific notification before the specified abnormality occurred, the result of the destination specific processing executed before the specified abnormality occurred, or the result of the destination specific processing executed after the specified abnormality is resolved.

In the above configuration, the specific notification is performed based on the result of the so-called look-ahead process, so that the specific notification can suggest the degree of expectation for the corresponding result to be obtained, and the player's sense of expectation can be suitably aroused. At that time, since multiple types of modes are set as the notification mode of the specific notification, the degree of expectation can be suggested by setting one of the multiple types of modes and executing the specific notification. Under such a configuration, if a specific abnormality occurs while the specific notification is being performed and the abnormality is then resolved, the specific notification that was performed before the abnormality occurred is re-executed. This allows the specific notification to be restored after the abnormality is resolved, and prevents the specific notification from disappearing due to the occurrence of an abnormality. At that time, the notification mode of the re-executed specific notification is set based on the notification mode before the abnormality occurred, the look-ahead result performed before the abnormality occurred, or the look-ahead result performed again after the abnormality occurred, so that the specific notification that was performed before the abnormality occurred can be suitably restored.

Feature aG2. The gaming machine described in Feature aG1 is configured so that if the specified abnormality occurs during the execution of a specific notification, the specific notification is not executed.

In a configuration in which the occurrence of an abnormality causes a special notification to not be executed, it is easy for a player to feel uneasy that not only has the special notification disappeared, but the expectation associated with that special notification has also disappeared. By applying the configuration of feature aG1 to such a configuration, the feature can be made to function effectively, and the above-mentioned effect can be optimally achieved.

Feature aG3. The gaming machine described in Feature aG1 or Feature aG2, characterized in that the second notification mode setting means performs the setting at a predetermined timing during the period from when the specified abnormality is resolved to when the special information that triggered the specific notification becomes the subject of the grant determination by the grant determination means.

In the above configuration, the notification mode of the specific notification that is re-executed is set during the period from when the abnormality is resolved to when the play round of the special information that triggered the specific notification starts. Therefore, the notification mode of the specific notification can be restored to the mode before the abnormality occurred before the play round of the special information starts, making it possible to suggest the degree of expectation before the play round.

Feature aG4: The second specific notification means sets the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed based on the notification mode of the specific notification before the occurrence of a predetermined abnormality,
The information corresponding to the notification mode of the specific notification (information regarding the image for reservation) can be stored in a predetermined storage unit (backup RAM 345),
A gaming machine described in any of Features aG1 to aG3, characterized in that when the specified abnormality occurs, the information stored in the specified memory unit is configured to be retained.

In the above configuration, information corresponding to the notification mode of the specific notification is stored in a predetermined storage unit, and the information stored in the storage unit is retained without being lost when an abnormality occurs. Therefore, after the abnormality is resolved, the notification mode of the specific notification can be determined based on the information in the storage unit, making it possible to perform the specific notification appropriately after the abnormality is resolved.

Feature aG5: The second specific notification means sets the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed based on the notification mode of the specific notification before the occurrence of a predetermined abnormality,
The specific notification is set in the plurality of notification modes so that the degree of expectation for the specific notification to become the grant corresponding result is different,
A gaming machine described in any of features aG1 to aG4, characterized in that if the notification mode of the specific notification before the occurrence of a specified abnormality is a notification mode higher than a predetermined specified mode (green display mode HMc), it is equipped with a determination means that sets the notification mode of the re-executed specific notification to a notification mode lower than the predetermined mode (function of executing the processing of step Sa5407), or does not execute the specific notification (function of not executing the hold notice performance after the abnormality is resolved).

For example, if a change occurs in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means due to the influence of an abnormality, an inconsistency occurs between the results of the look-ahead performed before the abnormality occurred and the results of the award judgment performed after the abnormality is resolved. In such a case, if a high expectation level is suggested by the specific notification before the abnormality occurs and it is re-executed as is after the abnormality is resolved, the result of the announcement (the result of the award judgment) in the game round and the game round performance performed in the game round may not be consistent with the expectation level suggested by the specific notification, and there is a concern that this may give the player an unpleasant impression. In this regard, in the above configuration, if the announcement mode of the specific notification performed at the time of the abnormality was a predetermined or higher mode and suggested a certain degree of expectation, the specific notification is re-executed by limiting it to a lower announcement mode, or the specific notification itself is not executed. This prevents the specific notification from suggesting an expectation level that does not match the announcement result in the game round, etc., and makes it possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

Feature aG6. When the predetermined abnormality occurs, the special information stored in the acquired information storage means can be retained;
The gaming machine described in feature aG5 is characterized in that it is equipped with a setting means (a function of executing a fourth execution process of the hold notice in the presentation control device 143) that sets the notification mode of the specific notification set by the determination means to a notification mode lower than the specified mode or the specific notification that has been not executed based on the judgment result of the grant judgment means when the special information that triggered the specific notification becomes the subject of the grant judgment by the grant judgment means after the specified abnormality is resolved.

In the above configuration, even if the specific notification is re-executed by being limited to a lower notification mode after the predetermined cancellation or the specific notification is not executed, the special information that triggered the specific notification becomes the subject of the grant judgment, so that the notification mode of the specific notification is reset or the non-executed specific notification is executed. This prevents the suggested expectation from remaining low or the specific notification from disappearing completely. In that case, the notification mode is reset based on the result of the grant judgment, so that the specific notification can be executed in an appropriate mode that is consistent with the notification result in the game round.

Feature aG7: The second specific notification means sets the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed based on a result of the prior specific processing executed before the occurrence of a predetermined abnormality;
The information (variation pattern, etc.) corresponding to the result of the destination specification process is configured to be stored in a predetermined storage unit (RAM 344),
A gaming machine described in any of Features aG1 to aG6, characterized in that when the specified abnormality occurs, the information stored in the specified memory unit is configured to be retained.

In the above configuration, information corresponding to the look-ahead result is stored in a specified storage unit, and the information stored in the storage unit is retained without being lost when an abnormality occurs. Therefore, after the abnormality is resolved, the notification mode of the specific notification can be determined based on the information in the storage unit, making it possible to perform the specific notification appropriately after the abnormality is resolved.

Feature aG8. The second specific notification means sets the notification mode of the re-executed specific notification based on a result of the prior specific processing executed before the occurrence of a predetermined abnormality,
The specific notification is set in the plurality of notification modes so that the degree of expectation for the specific notification to become the grant response result is different,
If the specific result of the destination specification means becomes a specific result (a winning result) before the occurrence of the specific abnormality, the notification mode of the specific notification is allowed to be a notification mode (red display mode HMd, rainbow display mode HMe) higher than the specific mode (green display mode HMc),
A gaming machine described in any of features aG1 to aG7, characterized in that it is equipped with a specification means that either limits and sets the notification mode of the specific notification to a notification mode equal to or lower than the specified mode (a function of executing the processing of step Sa6303), or does not execute the specific notification (a function of not executing the hold notice presentation after the abnormality is resolved) if the result of the previous specific processing executed before the occurrence of a specified abnormality is a specified result.

For example, if a change occurs in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means due to the influence of an abnormality, an inconsistency occurs between the results of the look-ahead performed before the abnormality occurred and the results of the award judgment performed after the abnormality is resolved. In such a case, if a high expectation level is suggested by the specific notification before the abnormality occurs and it is executed again as is after the abnormality is resolved, the result of the notification (the result of the award judgment) in the game round and the game round performance performed in the game round may not be consistent with the expectation level suggested by the specific notification, which may give the player an unpleasant impression. In this regard, in the above configuration, the specific notification after the abnormality is resolved is executed in a limited manner or less, or if the look-ahead result before the abnormality occurs is a specified result, the specific notification after the abnormality is resolved is not executed, so that the specific notification is prevented from suggesting an expectation level that does not match the result of the notification in the game round, etc., and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above inconvenience.

Feature aG9. When the predetermined abnormality occurs, the special information stored in the acquired information storage means can be retained;
The gaming machine described in feature aG8 is characterized in that it is equipped with a setting means (a function of executing a fourth execution process of the hold notice in the presentation control device 143) that sets the notification mode of the specific notification set by the determination means to a notification mode lower than the specified mode or the specific notification that has been not executed based on the judgment result of the grant judgment means when the special information that triggered the specific notification becomes the subject of the grant judgment by the grant judgment means after the specified abnormality is resolved.

In the above configuration, even if the specific notification is re-executed by being limited to a lower notification mode after the predetermined cancellation or the specific notification is not executed, the special information that triggered the specific notification becomes the subject of the grant judgment, so that the notification mode of the specific notification is reset or the non-executed specific notification is executed. This prevents the suggested expectation from remaining low or the specific notification from disappearing completely. In that case, the notification mode is reset based on the result of the grant judgment, so that the specific notification can be executed in an appropriate mode that is consistent with the notification result in the game round, etc.

Feature aG10. A gaming machine according to any one of Features aG1 to aG9, characterized in that it is provided with a means for restricting the execution of the specific notification after the abnormality is resolved if a specific abnormality occurs during the execution of the specific notification and the result of the specific processing performed before the abnormality occurs cannot be identified after the specific abnormality is resolved (a function for transitioning to step Sa6311 if a negative judgment is made in step Sa6308).

In the above configuration, if an abnormality occurs during the execution of a specific notification, and the look-ahead result on which the notification was based cannot be identified after the abnormality is resolved, the execution of the specific notification after the abnormality is resolved is restricted, thereby preventing erroneous expectations from being suggested.

Feature aG11. The second specific notification means sets the notification mode of the specific notification to be re-executed based on a result of the prior specific processing performed after a predetermined abnormality is resolved,
A game operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and the game operation is controlled so that the game operation is performed by giving a notification result corresponding to the award determination result and the game operation is terminated as one game.
A hold notification means (a function for executing a hold command corresponding process in the performance control device 143) is provided for performing a hold notification (hold image) corresponding to the number of game times for which execution is held,
The first specific notification means is configured to set a notification mode of the hold notification to a specific mode (specific display mode) different from a normal mode (normal display mode) as the specific notification,
The device is configured to store specific information (change location information) that allows the user to grasp the hold notification that is being made in a situation where a plurality of hold notifications are being made in a predetermined storage unit (RAM 314, RAM 344, backup RAM 345),
A gaming machine described in any of Features aG1 to aG10, characterized in that when the specified abnormality occurs, the information stored in the specified memory unit is configured to be retained.

In the above configuration, which hold notification is issuing a specific notification is stored in a specified memory unit, and this information is backed up when an abnormality occurs, so that after the abnormality is resolved, it is possible to conveniently determine which hold notification was issuing a specific notification before the abnormality occurred.

Feature aG12. The gaming machine described in Feature aG11, characterized in that after a specified abnormality is resolved, the hold notification for which the specific notification was made before the occurrence of the specified abnormality is identified based on the specific information stored in the specified storage unit, and the specific process is executed for the identified hold notification.

In the above configuration, the next specific processing after the abnormality is resolved is performed on the reserved notifications for which a specific notification was performed before the abnormality occurred, so that it is possible to prevent a player from having an unnatural impression when a specific notification is performed after the abnormality is resolved even for reserved notifications for which a specific notification was not performed before the abnormality occurred. Furthermore, compared to performing the next specific processing on all reserved notifications performed after the abnormality is resolved, it is possible to reduce the number of times the next specific processing is performed, making it possible to reduce the processing load when returning.

Feature aG13. The gaming machine described in Feature aG11 or Feature aG12 is characterized in that it is provided with a means for identifying the pending notification for which the specific notification was not made before the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality based on the specific information stored in the specified memory unit after the predetermined abnormality has been resolved, and for setting the notification mode of the identified pending notification to the normal mode.

The above configuration prevents specific notifications from being made after the abnormality is resolved for pending notifications that were not made before the abnormality occurred, making it possible to ensure consistency in the notification mode before and after the abnormality occurs.

Feature aG14. A gaming machine according to any one of Features aG1 to aG13, characterized in that the specified abnormality is a power interruption state.

If a power outage occurs while a specific notification is being executed, the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, causing the specific notification that had been being executed to suddenly disappear. In this case, it is expected that the player will be anxious about whether the expectation suggested before the power outage will remain after the power is restored. By applying any of the configurations of features aG1 to aG113 above to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately re-execute the specific notification after power is restored, and each of these features can be made to function effectively.

The "power outage state" of this characteristic can also be expressed as "a power outage state in which no power is being supplied to the gaming machine from an external power source (commercial power source)."

Feature aG15. A game round control means (a function for executing a game round control process in the main control device 162) is provided that controls the game round operation so that the game round operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and the end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination is counted as one game round, and the game round operation is performed;
A hold notification means (a function of executing a hold command response process in the performance control device 143) is provided to perform a hold notification (hold image) so that the player can recognize at least the number of holds before execution,
The specific notification is a notification mode of the hold notification that is a specific mode (specific display mode) different from a normal mode (normal display mode),
A gaming machine described in any one of features aG1 to aG14, characterized in that the specific mode is set to the multiple types of notification modes.

When a specific notification is made using a hold notification, the execution period of the specific notification is relatively long, making it easier for abnormalities to occur during the execution of the specific notification. In addition, since it becomes clear which special information the specific notification is suggesting, such as the degree of expectation, it is expected that there will be a large impact if the specific notification cannot be continued due to the occurrence of an abnormality. By applying any of the configurations from feature aG1 to feature aG14 above to such a configuration, each of these features can be made to function effectively, and each of the above effects can be optimally achieved.

It is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of Features aA1 to aA14, Features aB1 to aB14, Features aC1 to aC9, Features aD1 to aD10, Features aE1 to aE19, Features aF1 to aF12, Features aG1 to aG15, Features aH1 to aH11, and Features aI1 to aI12 individually to each of the configurations of Features aG1 to aG15 above, or to apply a part or all of each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristics aH group>
The group of features aH is an invention group extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the modifications or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted based on the seventh modification of the first embodiment.

Feature aH1. An information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
An acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 314b) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
An assignment determination means (a function of executing a correct/incorrect determination process in the main control device 162) for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the assigned information;
A bonus awarding means (a function of executing a process for opening and closing a large prize opening in the main control device 162) that can award a bonus to a player based on the result of the bonus determination by the bonus determination means being a bonus corresponding result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the bonus information;
a destination specifying means (a function of executing a reserved read-ahead process in the main control unit 162) for executing a destination specifying process for specifying information corresponding to a judgment result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquiring means becomes the subject of the grant judgment, at a timing before the special information becomes the subject of the grant judgment;
A specific notification means (a function for executing a setting process for the hold notice in the performance control device 143 and a first execution process for the hold notice) capable of executing a specific notification (hold notice performance) by a predetermined notification means (a pattern display device 75, a hold lamp unit) based on the result of the first specific processing;
When a predetermined condition is met (when the first mode switching lottery is won in the seventh modified example), a presentation state switching means (a function of executing a presentation mode switching process by the presentation control device 143 in the seventh modified example of the first embodiment) executes a process for switching from one of a plurality of presentation states (presentation mode A, presentation mode B) to another presentation state;
A switching restriction means (a function of executing a mode switching determination process by the performance control device 143 in the seventh modified example of the first embodiment) capable of restricting the switching of the performance state by the performance state switching means when a specific notification is being executed;
A gaming machine comprising:

In the above configuration, the specific notification is made based on the result of so-called look-ahead processing, so that the specific notification can suggest the degree of expectation for the corresponding result to be obtained, and can ideally arouse the player's sense of expectation. In addition, since multiple types of presentation states are provided and switching between these presentation states is performed, the player can change his/her mood while playing and prevent boredom from the game. In such a configuration, for example, if the presentation state is switched while a specific notification is being executed, there is a concern that the player will be distracted by the change in presentation state and will pay less attention to the specific notification, or conversely, as a result of concentrating on the specific notification, the presentation state will be changed without the player noticing, causing confusion.

In this regard, with this configuration, the switching of the presentation state is restricted when a specific notification is being executed, thereby preventing the execution of the specific notification and the switching of the presentation state from overlapping. This allows the execution of the specific notification and the switching of the presentation state to be carried out in a way that makes it easy for the player to notice each, making it possible to effectively prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences. Furthermore, if the presentation state after the switch is not suitable for the specific notification being executed, prior adjustments are required to make the two compatible when designing the presentation; however, with this configuration, such adjustments are not necessary, which has the advantage of reducing the burden during design.

Feature aH2. The multiple types of presentation states include a first presentation state (presentation mode A) and a second presentation state (presentation mode B) in which the likelihood of a specific notification being executed is different from that of the first presentation state;
The gaming machine described in feature aH1 is characterized in that the switching restriction means is provided with a means for restricting switching to the second presentation state when a specific notification is being executed in the first presentation state.

In a configuration in which the likelihood of a specific notification being executed varies depending on the presentation state, switching the presentation state while the specific notification is still being executed may result in a situation in which the expectation level suggested by the specific notification differs before and after the presentation state is switched. In this case, there is a concern that the expectation level suggested by the specific notification in the presentation state after the switch and the result of the award determination that is actually notified may differ, giving the player an unpleasant impression. By applying the configuration of feature aH1 to such a configuration, the occurrence of the above-mentioned discrepancy can be avoided, and it is possible to effectively prevent the player from having an unpleasant impression.

In addition, the "second presentation state in which the likelihood of a specific notification being executed differs from that of the first presentation state" in this feature can be understood to include not only a configuration in which the second presentation state is set as a presentation state in which a specific notification can be executed, but also a configuration in which the second state is set as a presentation state in which a specific notification is not executed.

Feature aH3. The gaming machine described in Feature aH2, characterized in that the second presentation state is a presentation state set so that a specific notification is less likely to be executed than in the first presentation state.

When the likelihood of a specific notification being executed in the second presentation state is lower than that in the first presentation state, there is a concern that switching from the first presentation state to the second presentation state while the specific notification is still being executed will increase the apparent expectation level, causing the player to be presented with a higher expectation level than in reality. In this regard, with this configuration, when switching from the first presentation state, in which the likelihood of a specific notification being executed is relatively high (the expectation level corresponding to the specific notification is relatively low) to the second presentation state, in which the likelihood of a specific notification being executed is low (the expectation level corresponding to the specific notification is relatively high), the execution of the switch is restricted if the specific notification is being executed, making it possible to suitably prevent a higher expectation level being suggested than in reality.

In addition, in this feature, "the second presentation state is a presentation state that is set so that a specific notification is less likely to be executed than in the first presentation state" can be understood to include a configuration in which the probability of a specific notification being executed in the second presentation state is set to be lower than that in the first presentation state, as well as a configuration in which the second presentation state is set as a presentation state in which a specific notification is not executed.

Feature aH4. A gaming machine according to any one of Features aH1 to aH3, characterized in that the switching restriction means includes a means (a function for executing the processing of step Sa7207) for restricting switching of the presentation state based on the result of the prior specific processing that triggered the specific notification.

In the above configuration, the switching of the presentation state is restricted based on the result of the pre-reading process that triggered the specific notification. For example, when there is a high possibility that a specific notification will be made, such as when a jackpot is pre-read, the switching of the presentation state can be restricted based on the pre-reading until the end of the play round of the special information for which the pre-reading was made. In this case, the switching can be restricted quickly, and the overlap between the execution of the specific notification and the switching of the presentation state can be preferably prevented. In addition, by adopting such a configuration, the following effect can be expected. When the pre-reading result is a jackpot, etc., it is assumed that a provocative performance such as a preview performance that stimulates the player's expectations will be performed before the special information is subject to the granting judgment. If the switching of the presentation state is inserted during the execution of the provocative performance, the provocative performance may become difficult to understand from the player's perspective. In this case, by restricting the switching of the presentation state based on the pre-reading of a jackpot, etc., the switching of the presentation state can be prevented in the middle of the provocative performance, and it is possible to preferably prevent the performance from becoming difficult to understand.

For example, a configuration can be adopted in which switching of the presentation state is not generally permitted while a specific notification is being executed, but switching of the presentation state is permitted in special cases, such as when a jackpot is predicted in advance. In this case, even though a switching of the presentation state does not normally occur, the occurrence of such a switch can violate the rules from the player's perspective and suggest a jackpot or the like. In other words, it becomes possible to utilize switching of the presentation state as one of the presentations suggesting the degree of expectation.

Note that the "means for restricting switching" in this feature can also be expressed as "means for determining whether or not switching is restricted."

Feature aH5. The gaming machine described in Feature aH4, characterized in that the switching restriction means includes means (a function for executing the process of step Sa7207) for restricting switching of the presentation state based on whether the result of the destination specific process that triggered the specific notification was a predetermined first result (a result of predicting a jackpot) corresponding to the award corresponding result or a predetermined second result (a result of predicting an SPSP reach presentation) corresponding to a predetermined expectation level as the expectation level of the award corresponding result.

By restricting or allowing the switching of presentation states when the pre-read result is a jackpot result (first result) or a result with high expectations (second result), it becomes possible to optimally exert each of the above-mentioned effects of feature aH4.

Feature aH6. The specific notification is set with a plurality of notification modes (a blue display mode HMb, a green display mode HMc, a red display mode HMd, and a rainbow display mode HMe) so that the expectation of the specific notification is different from that of the grant corresponding result;
A gaming machine described in any one of features aH1 to aH5, characterized in that the switching restriction means is provided with a means (step Sa7211) for restricting the switching of the presentation state based on the notification mode of a specific notification.

For example, if a configuration were adopted that uniformly restricted the switching of presentation states while a specific notification was being executed, there is a risk that the switching of presentation states would be excessively restricted or the frequency with which specific notifications were executed would be kept low, which would undermine the significance of providing multiple types of presentation states and the significance of having a function for executing specific notifications. In this regard, the above configuration restricts the switching of presentation states based on the notification mode of the specific notification being executed, making it possible to operate in such a way that, for example, in the case of a specific notification that corresponds to a certain level of expectation or below, the switching of presentation states is not restricted and such switching is permitted. This makes it possible to prevent excessive restrictions on the switching of presentation states and the execution of specific notifications, and makes it possible to optimally secure these opportunities.

Feature aH7. The gaming machine described in Feature aH6, wherein the restricting means restricts the switching of the presentation state when the notification mode of the specific notification is a notification mode higher than a predetermined mode (green display mode HMc), and allows the switching of the presentation state when the notification mode of the specific notification is a mode lower than the predetermined mode.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to restrict the switching of the presentation state only when a specific notification of a predetermined type or more is being executed. This makes it possible to prevent excessive restrictions on switching of the presentation state and the execution of specific notifications, and makes it possible to optimally secure these opportunities.

Feature aH8. The multiple types of presentation states include a first presentation state (presentation mode A) and a second presentation state (presentation mode B) in which the frequency of execution of a specific notification is set to be lower than that of the first presentation state;
The specific notification is set with a plurality of notification modes (a blue display mode HMb, a green display mode HMc, a red display mode HMd, and a rainbow display mode HMe) so that the expectation degree of the specific notification is different from that of the grant corresponding result,
The switching restriction means is
When a specific notification is being executed in the first presentation state, a first means (a function of executing a process when a positive judgment is made in step Sa7206) restricts switching to the second presentation state regardless of the notification mode of the specific notification;
A second means (a function of determining negative in step Sa7206 and executing processing in step Sa7211) for restricting switching to the first performance state based on the notification mode of the specific notification when the specific notification is being executed in the second performance state;
A gaming machine according to any one of features aH1 to aH7, characterized in that it comprises:

In the above configuration, when switching from a presentation state (first presentation state) in which the expectation level corresponding to a specific notification is relatively low to a presentation state (second presentation state) in which the expectation level corresponding to a specific notification is relatively high, the switching of the presentation state is uniformly restricted, so that it is possible to preferably prevent a higher expectation level than the actual level being suggested. Conversely, when switching from a presentation state (second presentation state) in which the expectation level corresponding to a specific notification is relatively high to a presentation state (first presentation state) in which the expectation level corresponding to a specific notification is relatively low, the switching of the presentation state is restricted only to some notification modes, so that excessive restriction on the switching of the presentation state is prevented, and it is possible to preferably secure the opportunity for the switching.

Feature aH9. The presentation state switching means is
A switching determination means (a function for executing the process of step Sa7102) for determining whether or not to switch the presentation state based on a predetermined trigger (a switching lottery timing);
A switching execution means (a function for executing the process of step Sa7106) for switching the presentation state when the switching determination means determines that the presentation state should be switched;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of Features aH1 to aH8, wherein the switching restriction means restricts at least one of the determination by the switching determination means and the execution by the switching execution means.

In the above configuration, when restricting switching of the presentation state, at least one of the switching decision of whether or not to switch the presentation state and the execution process of whether or not to execute the switch is restricted, so that it is possible to appropriately restrict switching of the presentation state.

Feature aH10. A game operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and the game operation is controlled so that the game operation is performed by giving a notification result corresponding to the award determination result and ending the game operation as one game, and a game control means (a function of executing a game control process in the main control device 162) is provided;
A gaming machine according to any one of Features aH1 to aH9, wherein the specific notification means is configured to be able to execute the specific notification across game rounds.

In the above configuration, the specific notification is performed over a relatively long period of time, so that an event in which the presentation state is switched while the specific notification is being performed is likely to occur. By applying any of the configurations of features aH1 to aH9 to such a configuration, each of those features can be made to function effectively, and each of the above effects can be optimally exhibited.

Feature aH11. A game time control means (a function for executing a game time control process in the main control device 162) is provided that controls the game time operation so that the game time operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and the end of the game time operation as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination is counted as one game time, and the game time operation is performed;
A hold notification means (a function of executing a hold command response process in the performance control device 143) is provided to perform a hold notification (hold image) so that the player can recognize at least the number of holds before execution,
A gaming machine described in any of features aH1 to aH10, characterized in that the specific notification is a notification mode of the hold notification in a specific mode (specific display mode) different from a normal mode (normal display mode).

When a specific notification is made using a hold notification, the execution period of the specific notification is relatively long, and an event in which the presentation state changes during the execution of the specific notification is likely to occur. In addition, since it becomes clear which special information the specific notification indicates is the subject of expectation, etc., it is expected that there will be a large impact if the indicated expectation changes with the change in presentation state. By applying any of the configurations of features aH1 to aH10 above to such a configuration, each of those features can be made to function effectively, and each of the above effects can be optimally exerted.

It is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of Features aA1 to aA14, Features aB1 to aB14, Features aC1 to aC9, Features aD1 to aD10, Features aE1 to aE19, Features aF1 to aF12, Features aG1 to aG15, Features aH1 to aH11, and Features aI1 to aI12 individually to each of the configurations of Features aH1 to aH11 above, or to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature group aI>
The feature group aI is an invention group extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the variations or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted based on the variation 8 of the first embodiment.

Feature aI1. An information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
An acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 314b) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
An assignment determination means (a function of executing a correct/incorrect determination process in the main control device 162) for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the assigned information;
A bonus awarding means (a function of executing a process for opening and closing a large prize opening in the main control device 162) that can award a bonus to a player based on the result of the bonus determination by the bonus determination means being a bonus corresponding result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the bonus information;
a destination specifying means (a function of executing a reserved read-ahead process in the main control unit 162) for executing a destination specifying process for specifying information corresponding to a judgment result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquiring means becomes the subject of the grant judgment, at a timing before the special information becomes the subject of the grant judgment;
A specific notification means (a function for executing a setting process for the hold notice in the performance control device 143 and a first execution process for the hold notice) capable of executing a specific notification (hold notice performance) by a predetermined notification means (a pattern display device 75, a hold lamp unit) based on the result of the first specific processing;
A presentation state switching means for switching the presentation state from one of a plurality of presentation states (presentation mode A, presentation mode B) to another presentation state (a function for executing a presentation mode switching process by the presentation control device 143 in the eighth modified example of the first embodiment);
Equipped with
The presentation state switching means includes:
When a predetermined first condition is satisfied (when a positive judgment is made in the judgment process of step Sa8109 in the eighth modified example of the first embodiment), a first means (a function of executing the process of step Sa8111 in the eighth modified example of the first embodiment) for setting a specific state (standby state) in which it is understood that the presentation state will be changed thereafter;
When a predetermined second condition different from the predetermined first condition is satisfied in the specific state (when a positive judgment is made in the judgment process of step Sa8115 in the modification example 8 of the first embodiment), a second means for switching the presentation state (a function for executing the process of step Sa8117 in the modification example 8 of the first embodiment) is provided;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a restriction means (a function of executing the processing of step Sa8203 in variant example 8 of the first embodiment) that can restrict the execution of a specific notification when the specific state is present.

In the above configuration, the specific notification is made based on the result of so-called look-ahead processing, so that the specific notification can suggest the degree of expectation for the corresponding result to be obtained, and can ideally arouse the player's sense of expectation. In addition, since multiple types of presentation states are provided and switching between these presentation states is performed, the player can change his/her mood while playing and prevent boredom from the game. In such a configuration, for example, if the presentation state is switched while a specific notification is being executed, there is a concern that the player will be distracted by the change in presentation state and will pay less attention to the specific notification, or conversely, as a result of concentrating on the specific notification, the presentation state will change without the player noticing, causing confusion.

In this regard, according to the present configuration, the execution of a specific notification is restricted under a specific state where it is known that the presentation state will subsequently change, and therefore it is possible to prevent the presentation state from changing while the specific notification is being executed. This allows the execution of the specific notification and the change in presentation state to be carried out in a way that is easy for the player to notice, and it is possible to effectively prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences. Furthermore, if the presentation state after the change is not suitable for the specific notification currently being executed, prior adjustments are required to make the two compatible when designing the presentation; however, according to the present configuration, such adjustments are not necessary, which has the advantage of reducing the burden during design.

Feature aI2. The gaming machine described in Feature aI1, characterized in that the limiting means includes a means (a function for executing pending command response processing in the performance control device 143) capable of limiting the execution of a specific notification corresponding to special information acquired during the specific state.

In the above configuration, the execution of a specific notification can be restricted for special information acquired during a period in which the specific state in which the switching of the presentation state is awaited. This broadens the scope of special information that is subject to the restriction of the specific notification, and prevents excessive restrictions on the opportunities to execute the specific notification.

Feature aI3. The gaming machine according to Feature aI1 or Feature aI2, wherein the limiting means is capable of limiting the execution of a specific notification corresponding to special information acquired during the specific state, regardless of the result of the advance specific processing for the special information.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to forcibly restrict the execution of a specific notification regardless of the result of the look-ahead processing. This makes it possible to preferably prevent the presentation state from switching while a specific notification is being executed. In addition, since the restriction on the execution of a specific notification is not affected by the result of the look-ahead processing, the look-ahead processing can be carried out in the same way as in a non-specific state even in a specific state (a waiting period for a specific notification). In other words, since there is no need to change the configuration of the look-ahead processing (look-ahead specific processing), it is possible to restrict a specific notification in a specific state while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature aI4. The multiple types of presentation states include a first presentation state (presentation mode A) and a second presentation state (presentation mode B) in which the likelihood of a specific notification being executed differs from that of the first presentation state;
A gaming machine described in any of features aI1 to aI3, characterized in that the restriction means is capable of restricting the execution of a specific notification when the specific state is present at least for switching from the first presentation state to the second presentation state.

In the case of a configuration in which the likelihood of a specific notification being executed differs depending on the presentation state, switching the presentation state while the specific notification is still being executed may result in a situation in which the expectation level suggested by the specific notification differs before and after the presentation state is switched. In this case, there is a concern that the expectation level suggested by the specific notification in the presentation state after the switch and the result of the award judgment that is actually notified will differ, giving the player an unpleasant impression. By applying any of the configurations of features aI1 to aI3 above to such a configuration, the occurrence of the above-mentioned discrepancy can be avoided, and it is possible to suitably suppress giving the player an unpleasant impression.

In addition, the "second presentation state in which the likelihood of a specific notification being executed differs from that of the first presentation state" in this feature can be understood to include not only a configuration in which the second presentation state is set as a presentation state in which a specific notification can be executed, but also a configuration in which the second presentation state is set as a presentation state in which a specific notification is not executed.

Feature aI5. The gaming machine described in Feature aI4, characterized in that the second presentation state is a presentation state set so that a specific notification is less likely to be executed than in the first presentation state.

When the likelihood of a specific notification being executed in the second presentation state is lower than that in the first presentation state, there is a concern that switching from the first presentation state to the second presentation state while the specific notification is still being executed will increase the apparent expectation level, causing the player to be presented with a higher expectation level than in reality. In this regard, in the present configuration, the execution of a specific notification is restricted in a specific state for switching from the first presentation state, in which the likelihood of a specific notification being executed is relatively high (the expectation level corresponding to the specific notification is relatively low), to the second presentation state, in which the likelihood of a specific notification being executed is low (the expectation level corresponding to the specific notification is relatively high). This prevents switching from the first presentation state to the second presentation state while the specific notification is being executed, making it possible to suitably prevent a higher expectation level being suggested than in reality.

In addition, in this feature, "the second presentation state is a presentation state that is set so that a specific notification is less likely to be executed than in the first presentation state" can be understood to include a configuration in which the probability of a specific notification being executed in the second presentation state is set to be lower than that in the first presentation state, as well as a configuration in which the second presentation state is set as a presentation state in which a specific notification is not executed.

Feature aI6. A gaming machine according to any one of Features aI1 to aI5, characterized in that it is equipped with a specification means (a function for executing a second setting process for a hold notice in the performance control device 143, and a first execution process for a hold notice) that executes a specific notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the specific state after the specific state or after the performance state is switched, if the specific notification corresponding to the special information acquired during the specific state is restricted by the restriction means.

In the above configuration, the specific notification, the execution of which is restricted due to the specific state, is executed after the specific state is entered or after the presentation state is switched, so that the execution of the specific notification remains restricted for special information acquired during the specific state, and it is possible to prevent the expectation level from being suggested.

Feature aI7. The gaming machine described in Feature aI6, characterized in that the specifying means includes a means (a function of executing the processing of step Sa8302) for executing a specific notification after a specific state or after a change in presentation state for special information for which the execution of a specific notification has been restricted by the restricting means, based on the result of the prior specifying processing performed during the specific state.

According to the above configuration, the specific notification after the change in the presentation state is made based on the results of the look-ahead performed during the specific state, so the specific notification can be made without having to perform the look-ahead process again after the change in the presentation state. This allows the existing configuration to be used as is for the look-ahead process (predetermined processing), preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature aI8. The specification means is provided with a specification determination means (a function for executing the process of step Sa8307) for determining whether or not to execute a specific notification after the specific state or after the switching of the performance state based on the result of the previous specification process performed during the specific state for the special information for which the execution of the specific notification is restricted by the restriction means, and is configured to execute the specific notification when it is determined by the specification determination means to execute the specific notification;
The gaming machine according to feature aI6 or aI7, wherein the specific judgment means makes the judgment by applying a judgment condition (execution winning probability) set in accordance with the presentation state after the switch.

In the above configuration, it is determined whether or not to execute a specific notification after a specific state or after a change in presentation state, and if it is determined that the specific notification should be executed, the specific notification is executed. In this case, the above determination is performed using a judgment condition set in correspondence with the presentation state after the change, rather than the judgment condition when the special information was acquired (the judgment condition set in correspondence with the presentation state before the change). This makes it possible to preferably execute a specific notification after a specific state or after a change in presentation state, even if the ease of executing the specific notification differs between the presentation state before the change and the presentation state after the change.

Feature aI9. The notification mode of the specific notification is set to a plurality of types (a blue display mode HMb, a green display mode HMc, a red display mode HMd, and a rainbow display mode HMe) so that the expectation degree of the grant corresponding result is different,
A gaming machine described in any of features aI6 to aI8, characterized in that the determination means is provided with a means (a function of executing the processing of steps Sa8310 to Sa8313) for determining one of the multiple types of modes by applying lottery conditions (such as a scenario lottery table) set in accordance with the presentation state after the switch when a specific notification is executed after a specific state or after a switch in presentation state.

In the above configuration, multiple types of notification modes are set for the specific notification, so that the degree of expectation can be indicated by assigning a large or small value, and the player's sense of expectation can be more appropriately aroused. With such a configuration, when a specific notification is executed after a specific state or after a change in presentation state, the notification mode is selected by applying the selection conditions set in accordance with the presentation state after the change. This makes it possible to appropriately execute the specific notification after a specific state or after a change in presentation state, even if the degree of expectation corresponding to each notification mode differs between the presentation state before the change and the presentation state after the change.

Feature aI10. A gaming machine according to any one of Features aI6 to aI9, characterized in that when special information is acquired during the specific state, predetermined information (information generated during standby) is stored in a predetermined memory unit (holding memory area 344c of RAM 344) so that it can be recognized after the specific state that the acquired special information was acquired during the specific state.

According to the above configuration, even if special information acquired before the specific state is reached and special information acquired during the specific state are mixed after the specific state is reached or after the presentation state is switched, the special information acquired during the specific state can be identified based on the specified information stored in the specified storage unit. This makes it possible to distinguish between special information acquired during the specific state and special information that is not, and to process only the special information acquired during the specific state.

Feature aI11. A game time control means (a function for executing a game time control process in the main control device 162) is provided that controls the game time operation so that the game time operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and the end of the game time operation as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination is counted as one game time, and the game time operation is performed;
A gaming machine described in any one of features aI1 to aI10, wherein the specific notification means is configured to be able to execute the specific notification across game rounds.

In the above configuration, the specific notification is performed over a relatively long period of time, so that the execution of the specific notification and the switching of the presentation state are likely to overlap. By applying any of the configurations of features aI1 to aI10 to such a configuration, each of those features can be made to function effectively, and each of the above effects can be optimally achieved.

Feature aI12. A game time control means (a function for executing a game time control process in the main control device 162) is provided that controls the game time operation so that the game time operation is started based on the award determination made by the award determination means, and the end of the game time operation as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the award determination is counted as one game time, and the game time operation is performed;
A hold notification means (a function of executing a hold command response process in the performance control device 143) is provided to perform a hold notification (hold image) so that the player can recognize at least the number of holds before execution,
A gaming machine described in any of features aI1 to aI11, characterized in that the specific notification is a notification mode of the hold notification in a specific mode (specific display mode) different from a normal mode (normal display mode).

When a specific notification is made using a hold notification, the execution period of the specific notification is relatively long, and the execution of the specific notification and the switching of the presentation state are likely to overlap. In addition, since it becomes clear which special information the specific notification indicates is the subject of expectation, etc., it is expected that there will be a large impact if the indicated expectation changes with the switching of the presentation state. By applying any of the configurations of features aI1 to aI11 above to such a configuration, each of these features can be made to function effectively, and each of the above effects can be optimally exerted.

It is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of Features aA1 to aA14, Features aB1 to aB14, Features aC1 to aC9, Features aD1 to aD10, Features aE1 to aE19, Features aF1 to aF12, Features aG1 to aG15, Features aH1 to aH11, and Features aI1 to aI12 individually to each of the configurations of Features aI1 to aI12 above, or to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

In addition, to each of the configurations of the feature aA group to the feature aI group described above, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in each configuration of the other feature groups individually, or to apply each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: A game machine that has an operating means operated by the player, a game ball launching means that launches game balls based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage that guides the launched game balls to a specified game area, and various game components arranged within the game area, and that awards a special prize to the player when the game ball passes through a specified passage section of each of the game components.

Slot machines and other reel-type gaming machines: A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a series of symbols consisting of multiple symbols in a variable manner and then displays the series of symbols in a final stopped state, in which the variation of the symbols is started by operating a start operating means, the variation of the symbols is stopped by operating a stop operating means or after a predetermined time has passed, and a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol.

Ball-operated belt-type game machine (ball-operated reel-type game machine): A game machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable pattern string consisting of multiple patterns and then displays the final stop of the pattern string, in which the pattern variation is started due to the operation of a start operation means, the pattern variation is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means or after a predetermined time has passed, and a special game state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stop pattern at the time of the stop is a specific pattern, and further equipped with a ball receiving tray and an insertion device that performs an insertion process to take in game balls from the ball receiving tray, and a payout device that pays out game balls to the ball receiving tray, and configured so that the operation of the start operation means is valid when game balls are inserted by the insertion device.

<Feature b Group A to Feature b Group N>
The inventions described in the following feature bA group to feature bN group are extracted from the above-mentioned second embodiment and each of its modified examples.

<Feature b Group A>
The feature bA group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the variations or combinations thereof, and is extracted mainly based on the above-mentioned second embodiment and variations 1 to 10 of the second embodiment.

The invention described in the feature bA group has been made with a problem to be solved by the invention with respect to the background technology that "for example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and when the lottery result is a specific result, the game is transitioned to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)."

Feature bA1. A special judgment means (a function for executing a special drawing hit judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (a special drawing hit judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (a prize-winning in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63),
A special game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can transition to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result (a big win result);
A game round control means (a function for executing a special game round control process in the main control device 162, a function for executing a special game round display process in the performance control device 143) that controls the game round so that a game round operation is started based on the special judgment, and a notification result corresponding to the result of the special judgment is counted as one game round, and
Equipped with
As a gaming state, there is a specific gaming state (such as a high frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to a player than a normal gaming state and is different from a special gaming state,
transition determination means for determining whether or not to transition to a specific game state (a function for executing a process for transition to a second time-shortened game state by the main control device 162 according to the second embodiment, modified example 1 and modified example 2 of the second embodiment, a function for executing a process for transition to a third time-shortened game state by the main control device 162 according to modified examples 3 to 5, a function for executing a process for transition determination of the second time-shortened game state and a process for transition determination of the third time-shortened game state by the main control device 162 according to modified examples 6 to 10);
a specific game state transition means capable of transitioning to the specific game state without passing through a special game state when the result of the transition judgment is a transition response result corresponding to a transition to the specific game state (a function of executing a second time-shortened game state transition process by the main control unit 162 according to the second embodiment, the modified example 1 and the modified example 2 of the second embodiment, a function of executing a third time-shortened game state transition process by the main control unit 162 according to the modified examples 3 to 5, a function of executing a time-shortened game state transition process by the main control unit 162 according to the modified examples 6 to 10, etc.);
Equipped with
The specific game state termination condition includes that the number of games played since the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games,
A number update means for updating the number of times a game has been played since the game was switched to a specific game state or the remaining number of times a game has been played in the specific game state (a function for executing high-frequency support mode update/termination processing by the main control device 162 according to the second embodiment and modified examples 1 to 5 of the second embodiment, a function for executing high-frequency support mode update processing by the main control device 162 according to modified examples 6 to 10, etc.),
A gaming machine characterized in that, in one game round, after the update is performed by the number update means, the transition determination means performs the transition determination.

In the above configuration, in addition to the special game state to which the player transitions based on the result of a special judgment being a specific result, there is also a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. This specific game state ends when the number of times played since transitioning to the specific game state reaches the upper limit, so the control performed during the execution period of a game round involves processing to update the number of times played since transitioning to the specific game state and the remaining number of times played in the specific game state.

The above configuration also has a specific game state to which a transition is made without passing through a special game state. Conventionally, a specific game state is transitioned through a special game state, so it was possible to process the transition judgment as to whether or not to transition to a specific game state within the special game state. In other words, the transition judgment could be made separately from the game round, but when transitioning to a specific game state without passing through a special game state, the state immediately before the transition to the specific game state is a game round, so it is necessary to incorporate the transition judgment processing into the control performed during the execution period of a game round.

In other words, in the control performed during the execution period of a game round, it is necessary to perform both a count update to end the specific game state and a transition judgment as to whether or not to transition to the specific game state, but there is a concern that the control of the specific game state may not be carried out appropriately depending on the order in which these processes are performed. In this regard, in this configuration, the order is set to execute the count update before executing the transition judgment, so that it is possible to prevent the execution of a count update in a certain game round immediately after transitioning to the specific game state in the same game round. In other words, if a transition to the specific game state is made in a certain game round, it is possible to control so that the count update starts from the next game round, so that the remaining number of times after transitioning to the specific game state can be appropriately secured, and it becomes possible to appropriately control the game state.

Feature bA2. The transition determination means executes the transition determination based on whether a predetermined transition condition (reaching the ceiling number of times, winning a special miss result, scoring in a specific scoring section, etc.) is satisfied, and is configured to set the result of the transition determination as the transition corresponding result when the transition condition is satisfied;
A gaming machine as described in feature bA1, characterized in that the transition condition is configured to be established during a game turn in a specific gaming state.

In this configuration, a transition trigger to a specific game state can occur while the player is in the specific game state. In such a case, by executing the count update before executing the transition determination in this order, in addition to the effect of properly securing the remaining number of times after transition to the specific game state as described in feature bA1 above, if the play count in which the transition trigger is established is the final play count of the preceding specific game state (the play count that has reached the upper limit number of times), it is possible to end the preceding specific game state and then transition to the subsequent specific game state based on the establishment of the transition trigger.

Moreover, because the end of the preceding specific game state and the transition to the subsequent specific game state can be achieved within the same game round, a seamless transition from the preceding specific game state to the subsequent specific game state can be achieved without an intervening game round in the normal game state. This creates a state equivalent to the remaining number of times in the specific game state being added, making it possible to ideally arouse the joy of the player when he or she achieves the transition to the subsequent specific game state.

Feature bA3. The configuration is such that predetermined information (such as a first support flag, a second support flag, a third support flag, etc.) corresponding to a specific game state can be stored in a predetermined storage means (various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314);
A transition to a specific game state occurs when the predetermined information is set to a first state (such as a state in which the predetermined information is set in the various flag storage area 314e), and the specific game state ends when the predetermined information set to the first state is set to a second state different from the first state (such as a state in which the predetermined information is not set in the various flag storage area 314e),
A termination determination means for determining whether the termination condition is satisfied (such as a function for executing high frequency support mode update/termination processing by the main control device 162 according to the second embodiment and modified examples 1 to 5 of the second embodiment, and a function for executing high frequency support mode update processing by the main control device 162 according to modified examples 6 to 10),
a termination process execution means for setting the predetermined information to the second state or recognizing that the predetermined information should be set to the second state based on a determination result of the termination determination means (a function for executing high frequency support mode update/termination process by the main control device 162 according to the second embodiment and modified examples 1 to 5 of the second embodiment, a function for executing high frequency support mode update process by the main control device 162 according to modified examples 6 to 10, etc.);
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in feature bA1 or feature bA2, characterized in that the processing by the termination processing execution means is performed after the update by the number update means and before the transition determination by the transition determination means.

In the above configuration, after the number of times is updated, it is recognized that the specific game state has ended or should be ended internally based on the result, and then a transition decision is made as to whether or not to transition to the specific game state. As a result, if the game round in which the transition trigger was established is the final game round of the preceding specific game state, after the preceding specific game state is ended, it is possible to transition to the subsequent specific game state within the same game round.

In addition, even if the game turn in which the transition trigger is established is not the ending game turn of the preceding specific game state, in a configuration in which transition to the subsequent specific game state is permitted during the preceding specific game state, it is possible to internally end the preceding specific game state before transitioning to the subsequent specific game state. This makes it possible to smoothly switch from the preceding specific game state to the subsequent specific game state.

Feature bA4. The configuration is such that predetermined information (first support flag, second support flag, third support flag) corresponding to a specific game state can be stored in a predetermined storage means (various flag storage area 314e of RAM 314);
A transition to a specific game state occurs when the predetermined information is set to a first state (such as a state in which the predetermined information is set in the various flag storage area 314e), and the specific game state ends when the predetermined information set to the first state is set to a second state different from the first state (such as a state in which the predetermined information is not set in the various flag storage area 314e),
a termination process execution means for setting the predetermined information to the second state or recognizing that the predetermined information should be set to the second state based on the establishment of the termination condition (such as a function for executing high frequency support mode update/termination process by the main control device 162 according to the second embodiment and modified examples 1 to 5 of the second embodiment, and a function for executing high frequency support mode update process by the main control device 162 according to modified examples 6 to 10);
A gaming machine described in any of features bA1 to bA3, characterized in that it is equipped with a restriction means for restricting the transition by the specific game state transition means when the specified information is set to the first state (such as a function for restricting transition to the second time-shortened game state or the third time-shortened game state by the main control device 162 in the second embodiment, variant 1 of the second embodiment, variant 3, variant 6, variants 8 to 10).

In the above configuration, transition to a subsequent specific game state during a preceding specific game state is restricted. This allows the continuation of the preceding specific game state to be prioritized, and prevents frequent transitions between game states from complicating gameplay and decreasing ease of play. However, on the other hand, there is a risk that the opportunities to transition to a specific game state will be kept low. In this regard, by executing the count update before executing the transition determination, transition to the subsequent specific game state can be permitted for the final play count of the preceding specific game state (the play count that has reached the upper limit count). This makes it possible to increase the opportunities to transition to a specific game state compared to when transition to a subsequent specific game state is restricted throughout the specific game state.

Feature bA5. The transition determination means executes the transition determination based on whether a predetermined transition condition (reaching the ceiling number of times, winning a special miss result, scoring in a specific scoring section, etc.) is satisfied, and is configured to set the result of the transition determination as the transition corresponding result when the transition condition is satisfied;
The transition condition includes that the number of times that the result of the special judgment is a non-specific result (miss result) that does not correspond to the transition to the special game state becomes a specific number (ceiling number of times),
A gaming machine described in any one of features bA1 to bA4, characterized in that it includes, as a specific gaming state, a predetermined specific gaming state (such as a high probability gaming state to which a 4R certainty jackpot result A is triggered in the second embodiment, a first time-saving gaming state to which a 4R normal jackpot result A is triggered) that is set so that the gaming number that reaches the upper limit number of times can be the same as the gaming number that reaches the specific number of times.

In the above configuration, the specific game state is entered when the cumulative number of times that a non-specific result (so-called losing result) that does not correspond to the transition to the special game state in the special judgment reaches a specific number, and the specific game state is set so that the number of times that the upper limit number of times is the same as the number of times that the specific number of times is reached. In this case, if a specific game state is executed as the preceding specific game state, the cumulative number of times that the non-specific result reaches a specific number in the final game, and the specific game state can be entered into the specific game state triggered by the reaching of the specific number of times. In other words, even if the specific game state ends without the player being able to win the specific result, the remaining number of times in the specific game state is added by the transition to the specific game state triggered by the reaching of the specific number of times, and from the player's perspective, the chance of winning the specific result in the specific game state is significantly increased compared to when such an addition of the remaining number of times is not made. This not only provides the player with the enjoyment of anticipating that a specific game state will be selected as the specific game state, but also increases the appeal of the specific game state (its appeal to the player), making it possible to favorably stimulate the player's desire to play.

Feature bA6. A gaming machine according to feature bA5, characterized in that the predetermined specific gaming state is a specific gaming state (first time-saving gaming state) to which a transition is made via a special gaming state.

According to this configuration, when a special game state ends and a transition to a specific game state occurs, even if the specific game state ends without a specific result being drawn, the remaining number of times in the specific game state can be increased by transitioning to the specific game state upon reaching the specific number of times. This increases the chance of drawing a specific result and transitioning to the special game state again while maintaining the advantageous specific game state after the special game state ends, making it possible to improve interest.

Feature bA7. The transition determination means executes the transition determination based on whether a predetermined transition condition (reaching the ceiling number of times, winning a special miss result, scoring in a specific scoring section, etc.) is satisfied, and is configured to set the result of the transition determination as the transition corresponding result when the transition condition is satisfied;
A gaming machine described in any of features bA1 to bA4, characterized in that the transition conditions include the result of the special judgment being a predetermined result (special missing result) different from the specific result, or the result of a specific judgment (miss type judgment, transition lottery, etc.) made in a game round in which the result of the special judgment is a non-specific result (miss result) that does not correspond to a transition to a special game state being a predetermined result (special missing result, winning result of the transition lottery, etc.).

In the above configuration, the specific game state is entered based on a specific result different from the specific result (so-called jackpot result) in a special judgment or a specific result in a specific judgment made in a game round in which the special judgment resulted in a non-specific result (so-called miss result). In this case, if the game round in which the special judgment or specific judgment resulted in the specific result is the final game round of the specific game state, the transition to the specific game state triggered by winning the specific result is permitted. In other words, if the player can win the specific result in the special judgment or specific judgment in the final game round of the specific game state, the remaining number of times in the specific game state can be added. Generally, in the psychology of the player in the final game round of the specific game state, there is a strong sense of anxiety about the end of the specific game state and the player tends to feel disappointed, but with this configuration, the final game round of the specific game state can function as a chance game round, making it possible to suitably stimulate the player's desire to play. This allows the player to enjoy playing until the end of the specific game state, making it possible to increase the player's interest.

Feature bA8. The transition determination means executes the transition determination based on whether a predetermined transition condition (reaching the ceiling number of times, winning a special miss result, scoring in a specific scoring section, etc.) is satisfied, and is configured to set the result of the transition determination as the transition corresponding result when the transition condition is satisfied;
A means for setting the upper limit number of times when the state is shifted to a specific game state (a function for executing a shift process at the time of ending the opening/closing execution mode by the main control device 162 according to the second to tenth variations of the second embodiment);
A gaming machine described in any of features bA1 to bA7, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for resetting the upper limit number of times when the transition condition is satisfied in a situation in which the specific gaming state is being played (a function for executing processing for transition to a second time-shortened gaming state by the main control unit 162 in variant example 2 of the second embodiment, a function for executing processing for transition to a third time-shortened gaming state by the main control unit 162 in variant examples 4 and 5, and a function for executing processing for transition determination of the second time-shortened gaming state, processing for transition determination of the third time-shortened gaming state, and processing for transition to a time-shortened gaming state by the main control unit 162 in variant example 7).

In the above configuration, if the transition condition is satisfied during the specific game state, the upper limit number of times for the specific game state is reset. In other words, if the transition condition is satisfied during the preceding specific game state, transition to the subsequent specific game state is permitted, but by executing the number of times update and then executing the transition determination as in feature bA1 above, it is possible to appropriately secure the remaining number of times after transition to the subsequent specific game state.

Feature bA9. It is configured to control the progress of the game by repeatedly executing periodic processing (such as normal processing by the main control device 162) at a predetermined cycle,
A gaming machine described in any one of features bA1 to bA8, characterized in that the update by the number update means and the transition determination by the transition determination means are capable of being executed in one processing round of the periodic processing.

In the above configuration, the game progress is controlled by repeatedly executing periodic processing, and the number of times updated and the transition determination are performed in the same processing round, so when transitioning from a preceding specific game state to a subsequent specific game state, it is possible to effectively prevent a game round in the normal game state from being inserted.

Feature bA10. Equipped with a predetermined ball entry means (second operating port 63) through which a game ball can enter;
The specific gaming state is a state in which a ball is more likely to enter the predetermined ball entry means than in a normal gaming state,
A gaming machine according to any one of features bA1 to bA9, characterized in that the special judgment means is capable of executing the special judgment based on a ball entering the specified ball entry means.

In the above configuration, when the game transitions to the specific game state, it is more likely that the ball will enter the specified ball entry means than in the normal game state, and it is more likely that a special judgment will be made. By applying any of the configurations of features bA1 to bA9 to this configuration, each of these features can be made to function effectively, and each of the above effects can be optimally exerted.

Feature bA11. A special judgment means (a function for executing a special drawing hit judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (a special drawing hit judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (a prize-winning in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63),
A special game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can transition to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result (a big win result);
A game round control means (a function for executing a special game round control process in the main control device 162, a function for executing a special game round display process in the performance control device 143) that controls the game round so that a game round operation is started based on the special judgment, and a notification result corresponding to the result of the special judgment is regarded as one game round, and
Equipped with
As a gaming state, there is a specific gaming state (such as a high frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to a player than a normal gaming state and is different from a special gaming state,
transition determination means for determining whether or not to transition to a specific game state (a function for executing a process for transition to a second time-shortened game state by the main control device 162 according to the second embodiment, modified example 1 and modified example 2 of the second embodiment, a function for executing a process for transition to a third time-shortened game state by the main control device 162 according to modified examples 3 to 5, a function for executing a process for transition determination of the second time-shortened game state and a process for transition determination of the third time-shortened game state by the main control device 162 according to modified examples 6 to 10);
a specific game state transition means capable of transitioning to the specific game state without passing through a special game state when the result of the transition judgment is a transition response result corresponding to a transition to the specific game state (a function of executing a second time-shortened game state transition process by the main control unit 162 according to the second embodiment, the modified example 1 and the modified example 2 of the second embodiment, a function of executing a third time-shortened game state transition process by the main control unit 162 according to the modified examples 3 to 5, a function of executing a time-shortened game state transition process by the main control unit 162 according to the modified examples 6 to 10, etc.);
A termination process execution means for terminating the specific game state or recognizing that the specific game state should be terminated when a predetermined termination condition (reaching the upper limit number of times) is satisfied (a function for executing a high frequency support mode update/termination process by the main control device 162 according to the second embodiment and the first to fifth modified examples of the second embodiment, a function for executing a high frequency support mode update process by the main control device 162 according to the sixth to tenth modified examples, etc.);
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that, in one game round, after the end process execution means has performed a process, the transition determination means performs the transition determination.

In the above configuration, the specific game state has a specific game state to which a transition is made without passing through a special game state. Conventionally, a specific game state is transitioned through a special game state, so it was possible to process the transition judgment as to whether or not to transition to a specific game state within the special game state. In other words, the transition judgment could be made separately from the game round, but when transitioning to a specific game state without passing through a special game state, the state immediately before the transition to the specific game state is a game round, so it is necessary to incorporate the transition judgment processing into the control performed during the execution period of a game round.

In addition, in the control performed during the execution period of a game round, it is necessary to determine whether a predetermined termination condition corresponding to the end of a specific game state has been met, and to perform termination processing to terminate the specific game state or to recognize that it should be terminated. In other words, in the control performed during the execution period of a game round, it is necessary to perform both a transition determination as to whether to transition to a specific game state or not, and termination processing to terminate the specific game state, but there is a concern that the control of the specific game state cannot be performed appropriately depending on the order of these processes.

In this regard, in this configuration, the order is set to execute the termination process before executing the transition judgment, so that when a transition trigger to a subsequent specific game state occurs during a specific game state, the preceding specific game state can be terminated before transitioning to the subsequent specific game state. This prevents multiple specific game states from overlapping, making it possible to appropriately control the game state. Moreover, since the termination of the preceding specific game state and the transition to the subsequent specific game state can be processed within the same game round, it is possible to switch from the preceding specific game state to the subsequent specific game state without an intervening transition to the normal game state. This makes it possible to maintain the specific game state, which is advantageous to the player, even in a situation where the above-mentioned switching occurs, and to realize a configuration that is excellent in ease of play.

Feature bA12. The transition determination means is configured to execute the transition determination based on whether a predetermined transition condition (reaching the ceiling number of times, winning a special miss result, scoring in a specific scoring section, etc.) is satisfied, and when the transition condition is satisfied, the result of the transition determination is the transition corresponding result;
The specific game state termination condition includes that the number of games played since the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games,
A means for setting the upper limit number of times when the state is shifted to a specific game state (a function for executing a shift process at the time of ending the opening/closing execution mode by the main control device 162 according to the second to tenth variations of the second embodiment);
means for resetting the upper limit number of times when the transition condition is satisfied in a situation where the specific game state is in effect (a function for executing a process for transition to a second time-shortened game state by the main control unit 162 in accordance with the second modified example of the second embodiment, a function for executing a process for transition to a third time-shortened game state by the main control unit 162 in accordance with the fourth and fifth modified examples, and a function for executing a process for determining transition to the second time-shortened game state, a process for determining transition to the third time-shortened game state, and a process for transition to a time-shortened game state by the main control unit 162 in accordance with the seventh modified example);
The gaming machine described in feature bA11 is characterized by comprising:

In the above configuration, if a transition condition is met in the middle of a specific game state, the upper limit number of times for the specific game state is reset. In other words, since a transition to a subsequent specific game state is permitted when a transition condition is met in the middle of a preceding specific game state, a process for switching from the middle of a preceding specific game state to a subsequent specific game state is required. In such a configuration, by executing the termination process before executing the transition determination as in feature bA11 above, it becomes possible to smoothly switch from the preceding specific game state to the subsequent specific game state.

It is possible to apply any of the configurations of features bA1 to bA10 to feature bA11 or feature bA12. In this case, further effects can be achieved by applying these configurations.

Note that, to each of the configurations of the above features bA1 to bA12, features bB1 to bB10, features bC1 to bC9, features bD1 to bD6, features bE1 to bE10, features bF1 to bF10, features bG1 to bG8, features bH1 to bH8, features bI1 to bI11, features bJ1 to bJ10, features bK1 to bK10, features bL1 to bL9, features bM1 to bM10, and features bN1 to bN7, the technical ideas shown in each of the configurations can be applied individually, or a part or all of each technical idea can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Features bB group>
The feature bB group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the variations or combinations thereof, and is extracted mainly based on the above-mentioned second embodiment and variations 1 to 10 of the second embodiment.

The invention described in the feature group bB has been made with a problem to be solved by the invention with respect to the background technology that "for example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and when the lottery result is a specific result, the game is transitioned to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)."

Feature bB1. A variable ball entry means (second operating port 63) that can be switched between a first state (open state) in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a second state (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first state;
A first judgment means (a function of executing a special drawing hit judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a first judgment (a special drawing hit judgment) based on the entry of the game ball into the variable ball entry means;
A bonus awarding means (such as a function of executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) capable of awarding a predetermined bonus (such as an open/close execution mode) to a player based on the result of the first judgment being a specific result (such as a big win result);
A second judgment means (a function of executing a normal winning/losing judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a second judgment (a normal winning/losing judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (the passage of the game ball through the through gate 64);
Based on the result of the second judgment being a predetermined result (support winning result), the variable ball entry control means is changed from the second mode to the first mode, and then the switching control to the second mode is performed at least once. A variable ball entry control means (function of executing processing for electric role support in the main control unit 162) executes a variable ball entry control (a role opening and closing game).
A game round control means (a function for executing a normal game round control process in the main control device 162) controls the game round so that a game round operation is started based on the second judgment, and a notification result corresponding to the result of the second judgment is counted as one game round (normal game round), and
Equipped with
The game state includes a first game state (a normal game state, etc.) and a second game state (a second time-saving game state, etc.),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a specific ending means (such as a function of executing the processes of steps Sb1311 to Sb1315, step Sb3509, step Sb4107, and step Sb5811 by a main control device 162 according to the second embodiment and modified examples 1 to 10 of the second embodiment) capable of ending a game round being executed when the game round is executed in a situation in which a first game state changes to a second game state (a situation in which a normal game state changes to a second time-shortened game state, a situation in which a normal game state changes to a third time-shortened game state, a situation in which a second time-shortened game state changes to a normal game state, a situation in which a third time-shortened game state changes to a normal game state, a situation in which a first time-shortened game state changes to a normal game state, a situation in which a second time-shortened game state or a third time-shortened game state changes to the other of the time-shortened game state, etc.).

In the above configuration, a first judgment is made based on the ball entering the variable ball entry means, and a predetermined benefit is given when the result is a specific result. In addition, a second judgment is made separately from the first judgment, and a game round is executed to notify the result, and when the result of the second judgment becomes a predetermined result, variable ball entry control is executed in which the variable ball entry means becomes the first mode. Here, in a gaming machine with such a configuration, the game round and the variable ball entry control mode differ depending on the type of game state, and for example, there are some in which a game round in the changed game state is executed in a mode more advantageous to the player than the game state before the change. In such a case, for example, if the second judgment is made just before the game state changes, the judgment is started under the game state before the change, and the game round based on the judgment result is executed in a mode disadvantageous to the player. In this regard, in this configuration, if a game round is being executed in a situation where the first game state changes to the second game state, the game round is forcibly terminated, so that the second judgment in the second game state can be executed quickly. This allows for faster start timing for a game round that corresponds to the second game state, making it possible to optimally control the game state.

Note that the feature "when a game round is being played in a situation where the game state is changing from the first game state to the second game state" can also be expressed as "when a game round that was started during the first game state is being played in a situation where the game state is changing from the first game state to the second game state."

Feature bB2. The bonus granting means includes a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can transition to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is advantageous to the player based on the result of the first judgment being a specific result,
The gaming machine described in feature bB1, wherein the specific ending means is capable of ending a game round being executed when the game round is being executed in a situation where the game state is changed from a first game state to a second game state without passing through a special game state.

For example, if the game state changes via the special game state, such as from the first game state to the special game state to the second game state, the game rounds and variable ball entry control started in the first game state can be ended in the special game state, so that the influence of these on the second game state can be suppressed. However, if the first game state changes to the second game state without going through the special game state, there is a concern that the game rounds etc. corresponding to the first game state will be more likely to continue in the second game state, since there is no time period to absorb the game rounds etc. started in the first game state. By applying the configuration of the above feature bB1 to such a case, it is possible to preferably exert the above effect.

Feature bB3. A gaming machine according to feature bB1 or feature bB2, characterized in that it is provided with a means (a function of executing the process of step Sb1313 by the main control device 162) for changing the result of the second judgment in the game round to be ended to a result different from the predetermined result (a normal miss result) when the end is performed by the specific ending means.

In the above configuration, when a game round is forcibly terminated due to a change in the game state, if the result of the second judgment that triggered that game round is a predetermined result corresponding to the execution of variable ball entry control, it is changed to another result that does not execute variable ball entry control. This makes it possible to start the next game round after the forced termination of a game round without going through variable ball entry control. As a result, it is possible to advance the start timing of a game round corresponding to the second game state (the game state after the change), making it possible to respond more quickly to changes in the game state.

Feature bB4. The game control means controls the game so that a specific notification (stop display of a normal figure) is performed as a notification result corresponding to the result of the second judgment after the game operation is performed,
A gaming machine described in any of features bB1 to bB3, characterized in that when a specific notification is being executed in a situation in which the game state is changing, the termination by the specific termination means can be restricted.

For example, forcibly terminating a specific notification (notification of the result of a specific judgment) while that notification is being executed will result in a shortening of the notification period. As a result, there is a concern that the visibility of the specific notification will decrease, making it difficult to grasp the result of the second judgment. In this regard, with this configuration, forced termination due to a change in the game state is restricted when a specific notification is being executed. This makes it possible to ensure an appropriate notification period and prevent the visibility of the specific notification from being impaired.

When this feature is applied to the above feature bB3, the following effect can be achieved. For example, in a configuration in which forced termination is performed due to a change in the game state even during execution of a specific notification, when the result of the second judgment is changed from the predetermined result to a different result, a specific notification (notification that the predetermined result has been reached) corresponding to the result before the change is executed, and then the notification is terminated by the forced termination. In other words, the predetermined result, which is the result before the change, is not notified until the execution timing of the forced termination, and then the game round itself ends due to the forced termination, so the result after the change is not notified. This may lead to a situation in which variable ball entry control is not performed even though the predetermined result is notified, which may reduce the player's trust in the gaming machine and the gaming hall. In this regard, in feature bB4, when a specific notification is being executed, forced termination is not performed as an exception, so that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconsistencies between the result indicated by the specific notification and the result of the second judgment after the change, and in turn, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event in which variable ball entry control is not performed when the predetermined result is notified.

Feature bB5. A first game round control means (a function for executing a special game round control process in the main control device 162) that controls the first game round so that a first game round is performed, in which a first game round operation is started based on the first judgment, and a predetermined notification (stop display of the special game round) corresponding to the result of the first judgment is performed after the first game round operation is completed, as one of the first game rounds (special game rounds);
A second game round control means for controlling the second game round to be played as the game round;
a transition means for transitioning to the second game state when a predetermined transition condition (reaching the ceiling number of times, winning a special miss result, scoring in a specific ball entry section, reaching the upper limit number of times, etc.) is satisfied (a function for executing a process for transitioning to the second time-shortened game state by the main control device 162 in the second embodiment, the modified example 1 and the modified example 2 of the second embodiment, a function for executing a process for transitioning to the third time-shortened game state by the main control device 162 in the modified examples 3 to 5, a function for executing a process for determining transition to the second time-shortened game state, a process for determining transition to the third time-shortened game state, a process for determining transition to the time-shortened game state, etc. by the main control device 162 in the modified examples 6 to 10);
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any of features bB1 to bB4, characterized in that the transition means is configured to transition to a specific gaming state at a predetermined timing (such as the start timing of the confirmation display in a special game round, a mid-way timing of the confirmation display, the start timing of the variable display, or a timing during the variable display) before the end of the predetermined notification in the first game round in which the predetermined transition condition is satisfied.

When the predetermined notification (notification of the special judgment result) ends in the first game round in which the transition condition is satisfied, the first game round after the transition to the second game state is started as the next first game round. In this case, in the above configuration, the transition to the second game state is made before the predetermined notification ends in the first game round in which the transition condition is satisfied, so that a grace period (a period in which the game state has transitioned to the second game state, but the first game round after the transition to the second game state has not yet been performed) can be secured between the time of the transition to the second game state and the time of the first first game round being performed. If the second game round is ended in response to the transition to the second game state, the next second game round can be started during the grace period, so that the second game round can be started prior to the first game round after the transition to the second game state. As a result, the start timing of the variable ball entry control is advanced, and it is possible to create a situation in which a ball is more likely to enter the variable ball entry means after the transition to the second game state at an early stage.

Feature bB6. The second game control means controls the second game round to be performed by starting the second game round operation based on the second judgment, and performing the second notification (stop display of the normal figure) corresponding to the result of the second judgment after the second game round operation is completed, which is regarded as one second game round (normal figure game round);
A gaming machine as described in feature bB5, characterized in that it is equipped with a means (such as a function of executing a process for starting a confirmed display by the main control unit 162 in the second embodiment and variants 1 to 10 of the second embodiment) that enables the period from the specified timing to the start of the first first game round after the transition to the second game state to be longer than the period of the second notification in the second game round that is the subject of the termination by the specific termination means.

In the above configuration, the period (grace period) from when the transition to the second game state is made at a predetermined timing to when the first first game round after the transition to the second game state is started is configured to be longer than the execution period of the second notification in the second game round that is subject to termination by the specific termination means. In this case, the second notification of the second game round that is subject to termination ends in the middle of the grace period, so the next second game round will start before the grace period ends. Since the next second game round is played in the second game state, the second game round corresponding to the second game state can be started prior to the first first game round. This makes it possible to advance the start timing of the variable ball entry control after the transition to the second game state and to create a situation in which a ball is more likely to enter the variable ball entry means at an early stage.

When this feature is applied to feature bB5 above, the "predetermined notification" in feature bB5 above can be read as "first notification."

Feature bB7. A gaming machine as described in Feature bB5 or Feature bB6, characterized in that it is provided with a means (such as a function for setting a specific confirmation display time in the main control device 162 in the second embodiment and Modifications 1 to 10 of the second embodiment) for making the period of the first notification in the first game round in which the predetermined transition condition is satisfied longer than the period of the first notification in the first game round in which the predetermined transition condition is not satisfied.

In the above configuration, the period of the first notification in the first game round in which the condition for transitioning to the second game state is met is made longer than the period of the first notification in other first game rounds, thereby making it possible to lengthen the grace period.

When this feature is applied to feature bB6, it is possible to achieve the further advantage that "in realizing the configuration of feature bB6, which makes the grace period longer than the period of the second notification, it is possible to avoid unreasonable shortening of the period of the second notification. This makes it possible to realize the configuration of feature bB6 while suppressing the occurrence of inconveniences that make it difficult to visually confirm the results of a specific judgment due to shortening the notification period."

Feature bB8. The bonus granting means includes a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can transition to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the result of the first judgment being a specific result,
As a gaming state, there is a specific gaming state (such as a high frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to a player than a normal gaming state and is different from a special gaming state,
A gaming machine described in any one of features bB1 to bB7, characterized in that one of the first gaming state and the second gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the other of the first gaming state and the second gaming state is a specific gaming state.

In the above configuration, the game round is forcibly terminated when the game state changes between the normal game state and the specific game state. In other words, the above termination is executed by the specific termination means in response to a change in the game round or the state of the variable ball entry control, so that the above effects of the above features bB1 to bB7 can be optimally exerted.

Feature bB9. The bonus granting means includes a special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can transition to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the result of the first judgment being a specific result,
As a gaming state, there is a specific gaming state (such as a high frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to a player than a normal gaming state and is different from a special gaming state,
A gaming machine according to any one of features bB1 to bB7, wherein the first gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the second gaming state is a specific gaming state.

In the above configuration, the end of a game round is executed by the specific end means when there is a transition from a normal game state to a specific game state. In other words, the above end is executed by the specific end means in response to a change from a situation in which the game round or the variable ball entry control is performed in an unfavorable manner to a situation in which it is performed in an advantageous manner, so that it is possible to optimally exert each of the above effects in the above features bB1 to bB7.

In addition, the above feature bB8 or feature bB9 "has a specific gaming state (such as a high-frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and is different from the special gaming state" can also be expressed as "has a specific gaming state (such as a high-frequency support mode) in which at least one of the game times and the variable ball entry control is executed in a manner more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state."

Feature bB10. The specific game state has a plurality of specific game states (a first time-saving game state, a second time-saving game state, a third time-saving game state, etc.),
A gaming machine as described in feature bB8 or feature bB9, characterized in that the termination by the specific termination means is configured to be restricted when a game round is being executed in a situation in which a specific game state changes from a specific game state different from the specific game state.

When there is a change from one specific game state to another specific game state, the game round and variable ball entry control have already been executed in a manner corresponding to the specific game state before the change. In such a situation, if a game round is ended midway, there is a risk that the start of a game round corresponding to the changed game state may be delayed. In this regard, with this configuration, when switching from one specific game state to another specific game state, the end of the game round by the specific ending means is limited, making it possible to prevent such inconvenience from occurring.

Note that, to each of the configurations of the above features bB1 to bB10, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of features bA1 to bA12, features bB1 to bB10, features bC1 to bC9, features bD1 to bD6, features bE1 to bE10, features bF1 to bF10, features bG1 to bG8, features bH1 to bH8, features bI1 to bI11, features bJ1 to bJ10, features bK1 to bK10, features bL1 to bL9, features bM1 to bM10, and features bN1 to bN7 individually, or it is also possible to apply a combination of some or all of the technical ideas. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Features b Group C>
The feature bC group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the variations or combinations thereof, and is extracted mainly based on the above-mentioned second embodiment and variations 1 to 10 of the second embodiment.

The invention described in Feature bC group was made with the problem that the invention aims to solve in the background technology that "for example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and when the lottery result is a specific result, the player is transitioned to a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)." "Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, there is still room for improvement in controlling the gaming state."

Feature bC1. A ball entry means (first operating port 62) through which a game ball can enter;
A variable ball entry means (second operating port 63) that can be switched between a first state (open state) in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a second state (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first state;
A special judgment means (a function of executing a special drawing hit judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (a special drawing hit judgment) based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means or the variable ball entry means;
A special game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can transition to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result (a big win result);
A first game round control means (a function for executing a special game round control process in the main control device 162, a function for executing a special game round display process in the performance control device 143) controls the first game round so that an operation for the first game round is started based on the special judgment, and a notification result corresponding to the result of the special judgment is made as one of the first game rounds (special game rounds), and the first game round is played;
A specific judgment means (a function of executing a normal winning/losing judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a specific judgment (a normal winning/losing judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (the passage of the game ball through the through gate 64);
Based on the result of the specific judgment being a predetermined result (support winning result), the variable ball entry control means is changed from the second mode to the first mode, and then the switching control to the second mode is performed at least once. A variable ball entry control means (function of executing processing for electric role support in the main control unit 162) executes a variable ball entry control (a role opening and closing game).
A second game round control means (a function for executing a normal game round control process in the main control device 162) controls the second game round so that a second game round operation is started based on the specific judgment, and a notification result corresponding to the result of the specific judgment is set as one second game round (normal game round), and
Equipped with
As a gaming state, there is a specific gaming state (high frequency support mode) in which at least one of the second gaming round and the variable ball entry control is executed in a manner more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state,
a specific game state transition means capable of transitioning to the specific game state without passing through the special game state when a predetermined transition condition (reaching the ceiling number of times, winning a special miss result, a ball entering a specific ball entry section, etc.) is met (a function of executing a process for transitioning to the second time-shortened game state by the main control unit 162 in the first and second modified examples of the second embodiment, a function of executing a process for transitioning to the third time-shortened game state by the main control unit 162 in the third to fifth modified examples, and a function of executing a process for determining transition to the second time-shortened game state, a process for determining transition to the third time-shortened game state, and a process for transitioning to the time-shortened game state by the main control unit 162 in the sixth to tenth modified examples);
A specifying means for allowing the first second game round after the transition to the specific game state to be performed prior to the first first game round after the transition to the specific game state when the specific game state is entered (a function for executing the processes of steps Sb1311 to Sb1315, Sb3509, Sb4107, and Sb5811, and the process for starting the final display by the main control device 162 according to the second embodiment and the first to tenth modified examples of the second embodiment);
A gaming machine comprising:

In the above configuration, there is a specific game state in which at least one of the game rounds and the variable ball entry control is executed in a manner more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. Therefore, by transitioning the game state to the specific game state, balls are more likely to enter the variable ball entry means, and the player is more likely to receive special judgments, allowing the player to play advantageously. In addition, in the above configuration, the transition to the specific game state is executed without passing through the special game state. In other words, when the above transition condition is met in a certain first game round, the next game round is immediately started as the first first game round after the transition to the specific game state after the end of that game round. Under such a premise, in the above configuration, when the specific game state is transitioned to, the first second game round after the transition to the specific game state is performed prior to the first first game round after the transition to the specific game state. This makes it possible to advance the start timing of the variable ball entry control after the transition to the specific game state, and to create a situation in which balls are more likely to enter the variable ball entry means at an early stage.

Feature bC2. The first game control means controls so that a predetermined notification (stop display of a special chart) is performed as a notification result corresponding to the result of the special judgment,
The gaming machine described in feature bC1, wherein the transition means for the specific game state is configured to transition to the specific game state at a predetermined timing (such as the start timing of the confirmation display in a special game round, a midway timing of the confirmation display, the start timing of the variable display, or a timing during the variable display) before the end of the predetermined notification in the first game round in which the transition condition is satisfied.

When the predetermined notification (notification of the special judgment result) ends in the first game round in which the transition condition is satisfied, the first game round after the transition to the specific game state is started as the next first game round. In this case, in the above configuration, the transition to the specific game state is made before the predetermined notification ends in the first game round in which the transition condition is satisfied, so that a grace period (a period during which the game state has transitioned to the specific game state, but the first game round after the transition to the specific game state has not yet been played) can be secured between the transition to the specific game state and the first first game round is played. If the second game round is started using this grace period, the second game round can be started before the first game round after the transition to the specific game state, which can be a preferable aspect for realizing the configuration of feature bC1.

Feature bC3. A gaming machine according to feature bC1 or feature bC2, which is configured so that it is more advantageous for the player if the gaming ball enters the variable ball entry means than if the gaming ball enters the ball entry means (configuration that gives preference to the jackpot type determination of the second special chart over the jackpot type determination of the first special chart).

In the above configuration, since it is more advantageous for the player to have the ball enter the variable entry means than to have the ball enter the entry means, the benefit of the specific game state for the player is not only that the frequency of receiving special judgments increases, but also that advantageous games based on the ball entering the variable entry means are more likely to be played. In this case, the player will want to minimize the playing of disadvantageous games based on the ball entering the entry means after the transition to the specific game state, but by being able to speed up the timing of the ball entering the advantageous variable entry means, it is possible to reduce the number and possibility of games based on the ball entering the entry means. This makes it possible to preferably realize a configuration in which games after the transition to the specific game state are played in a manner that meets the player's wishes.

Feature bC4. An information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means or the variable ball entry means;
Acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 314b) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Equipped with
The special determination means performs the special determination based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means,
A gaming machine described in any of features bC1 to bC3, characterized in that when special information obtained based on a ball entering the ball entry means and special information obtained based on a ball entering the variable ball entry means are stored in the acquired information storage means, the gaming machine is equipped with a priority means (a function of executing data setting processing by the main control unit 162) that enables the special judgment to be made with priority for the special information obtained based on a ball entering the variable ball entry means.

In the above configuration, a special judgment is made in the special judgment means based on special information acquired by a ball entering the ball entry means or the variable ball entry means. By applying the configuration of feature bC1 or feature bC2 to such a configuration, it becomes possible to easily acquire special information corresponding to a ball entering the variable ball entry means early after transition to the special game state. In addition, in the above configuration, when both special information based on a ball entering the ball entry means and special information based on a ball entering the variable ball entry means are acquired, the special judgment for the latter special information is executed preferentially, so that when special information corresponding to a ball entering the variable ball entry means is acquired, even if the special information corresponding to a ball entering the ball entry means remains in the acquired information storage means, a special judgment based on a ball entering the variable ball entry means is executed. In other words, according to this configuration, it becomes possible to accelerate the timing of execution of a special judgment based on a ball entering the variable ball entry means after transition to the special game state.

When this feature is applied to feature bC3, the timing of a game based on the ball entering the variable ball entry means, which is advantageous to the player, can be advanced, and the number and possibility of a game based on the ball entering the ball entry means being played that is unfavorable to the player can be reduced.

Feature bC5. A gaming machine according to any one of Features bC1 to bC4, characterized in that the determination means is capable of ending the second game turn operation in the first second game turn prior to the first first game turn being performed when the machine transitions to a specific game state (a function of setting a specific confirmation display time by the main control device 162 according to Variation 1 of the second embodiment).

In the above configuration, since the game round operation for the first second game round is completed before the first first game round is performed after the transition to the specific game state, the variable ball entry control after the end of the first second game round can be easily executed before the start of the first first game round. This makes it easier to execute a game round based on a ball entering the variable ball entry means as the first first game round after the transition to the specific game state.

Feature bC6. The second game control means controls so that a specific notification (stop display of the normal figure) is performed as a notification result corresponding to the result of the specific judgment,
A gaming machine described in any of features bC1 to bC5, characterized in that the identification means is capable of making the specific notification in the first second game round end before the first first game round is played when the game state is transitioned to a specific game state (a function of setting a specific confirmed display time by the main control unit 162 relating to variant example 1 of the second embodiment).

In the above configuration, the specific notification (notification of the specific judgment result) in the first second game round ends before the first first game round is played after the transition to the specific game state, so it becomes possible to execute the variable ball entry control after the end of the first second game round before the start of the first first game round. This makes it possible to execute a game round based on a ball entering the variable ball entry means as the first first game round after the transition to the specific game state.

Feature bC7. The first game control means controls so that a predetermined notification (stop display of a special chart) is performed as a notification result corresponding to the result of the special judgment,
The specific game state transition means is configured to transition to the specific game state at a predetermined timing (such as the start timing of the determination display in the special game round, the midway timing of the determination display, the start timing of the variable display, or the timing during the variable display) before the end of the predetermined notification in the first game round in which the transition condition is established,
A specific notification execution means is provided for executing a specific notification (displaying a right-hand hit notification image 477a or a target guide image 477b) to encourage a ball to be scored into the variable ball scoring means,
A gaming machine described in any of features bC1 to bC6, characterized in that the specific notification execution means is configured to be able to execute the specific notification at a specific timing during the period from the specified timing to the first game round being played (such as the timing after transition to the second time-shortened game state and before the opening and closing of the device starts, or any timing during the period after transition to the second time-shortened game state and until the fixed display time has elapsed).

When the predetermined notification (notification of the special judgment result) ends in the first game round in which the transition condition is satisfied, the first game round after the transition to the specific game state is started as the next first game round. In this case, in the above configuration, the transition to the specific game state is made before the predetermined notification ends in the first game round in which the transition condition is satisfied, so that a grace period (a period during which the game state has transitioned to the specific game state, but the first game round after the transition to the specific game state has not yet been made) can be secured between the transition to the specific game state and the first first game round is made. In the case where the first second game round after the transition to the specific game state is made before the first first game round after the transition to the specific game state, by making a specific notification to encourage the ball to enter the variable ball entry means during the grace period, it is possible to more suitably promote the ball to enter the variable ball entry means quickly.

Feature bC8. A gaming machine according to any one of Features bC1 to bC7, characterized in that the specification means is capable of making the first second game round precede the first first game round when transitioning from a normal game state to a specific game state.

In the above configuration, when transitioning from a normal game state to a specific game state, processing is executed so that the first second game round after transitioning to the specific game state is performed before the first first game round after transitioning to the specific game state. In other words, the above processing is executed in response to switching from a situation in which game rounds and variable ball entry control are performed in an unfavorable manner to a situation in which they are performed in an advantageous manner, so that the above effects of features bC1 to bC7 can be optimally exerted.

Feature bC9. An information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means or the variable ball entry means;
Acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 314b) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Equipped with
The special determination means performs the special determination based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means,
A gaming machine described in any one of features bC1 to bC8, characterized in that when a transition is made to a specific gaming state while special information corresponding to the next first game round is stored in the acquired information storage means, the first second game round can be made to precede the first first game round.

If special information corresponding to the next first game round for the first game round in which the transition condition is satisfied is stored in the acquired information storage means, the first first game round (the above-mentioned next first game round) after the transition to the specific game state will start immediately after the end of the first game round in which the transition condition is satisfied, even if no new balls enter the variable ball entry means. However, in this configuration, even in such a case, the first second game round is performed before the above-mentioned first first game round is performed. This allows each of the configurations of the above-mentioned features bC1 to bC9 to function effectively, and each of the above-mentioned effects to be preferably exerted.

Note that, to each of the configurations of the above features bC1 to bC9, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of features bA1 to bA12, features bB1 to bB10, features bC1 to bC9, features bD1 to bD6, features bE1 to bE10, features bF1 to bF10, features bG1 to bG8, features bH1 to bH8, features bI1 to bI11, features bJ1 to bJ10, features bK1 to bK10, features bL1 to bL9, features bM1 to bM10, and features bN1 to bN7 individually, or it is also possible to apply a combination of some or all of the technical ideas. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Features bD group>
The group of features bD is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and variations or combinations of these, and is extracted mainly based on the above-mentioned second embodiment and variations 1 to 10 of the second embodiment.

The invention described in the feature group bD has been made with a problem to be solved by the invention with respect to the background technology that "for example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and when the lottery result is a specific result, the player is transitioned to a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)." The problem is that "here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, there is still room for improvement in controlling the gaming state."

Feature bD1. A special judgment means (a function for executing a special drawing hit judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (a special drawing hit judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (a prize-winning in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63),
A special game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can transition to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result (a big win result);
A pattern display means (special pattern display unit 43, pattern display device 75) capable of variably displaying a pattern;
A game round control means (a function of executing a special pattern game round control process in the main control device 162, a function of executing a special pattern variable display process in the performance control device 143) that controls the game round so that a game round is played by starting a variable display of a pattern in the pattern display means based on the special judgment being made, and stopping and displaying a stop result corresponding to the result of the special judgment, which is counted as one game round;
Equipped with
As a gaming state, there is a specific gaming state (such as a high frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to a player than a normal gaming state and is different from a special gaming state,
a specific game state transition means capable of transitioning to the specific game state without passing through the special game state when a predetermined transition condition (reaching the ceiling number of times, winning a special miss result, a ball entering a specific ball entry section, etc.) is established (a function of executing a process for transitioning to the second time-shortened game state by the main control unit 162 according to the second embodiment, the modified example 1 and the modified example 2 of the second embodiment, a function of executing a process for transitioning to the third time-shortened game state by the main control unit 162 according to the modified examples 3 to 5, a function of executing a process for determining transition of the second time-shortened game state, a process for determining transition of the third time-shortened game state, and a process for transitioning to the time-shortened game state by the main control unit 162 according to the modified examples 6 to 10);
A period setting means (a function of setting a specific fixed display time by the main control device 162 according to the second embodiment and the first to tenth modified examples of the second embodiment) capable of setting a stop display period for performing the stop display in a game round in which the transition condition is satisfied to a period different from the stop display period in a predetermined game round in which the transition condition is not satisfied;
A gaming machine comprising:

In the above configuration, in addition to the special game state to which the game is transitioned based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result, there is a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. In addition, in the above configuration, there is a game state to which the game is transitioned without going through the special game state as such a specific game state. This specific game state is transitioned to when a specific transition condition is met, but in order to enable the player to smoothly start playing in the specific game state, it is desirable to notify the player of the transition to the specific game state before the first game round after transition to the specific game state is started. In this case, if the transition is made via a special game state as in the conventional specific game state, it is possible to make a notification corresponding to the transition to the specific game state, etc., by using the period of the special game state (for example, the period of the end performance in the special game state, etc.), but in the case of a specific game state to which the game is transitioned without going through the special game state, the first game round after transition to the specific game state is immediately played after the game round in which the transition condition is met is ended, making it difficult to ensure the execution period of such a notification. In this regard, in this configuration, the stop display period during which the image is stopped during a game in which the transition condition is met is made different from the stop display period during other game times in which the transition condition is not met, so that when a transition to a specific game state occurs, the special stop display period can be used to optimally ensure the execution period of the notification.

Feature bD2. The gaming machine described in Feature bD1, characterized in that the period setting means is capable of setting the stop display period of a game in which the transition condition is satisfied to a period longer than the stop display period of a predetermined game in which the transition condition is not satisfied.

In the above configuration, the stop display period for a game in which the transition condition is met is longer than the stop display period for other game in which the transition condition is not met, making it possible to optimally ensure the execution period of the above notification.

Feature bD3. The gaming machine described in Feature bD2, characterized in that the period setting means is capable of setting the stop display period of a game in which the transition condition is satisfied, when transitioning from a normal game state to a specific game state, to a period longer than the stop display period of a predetermined game in which the transition condition is not satisfied.

In the above configuration, when transitioning from the normal game state to the specific game state, the stop display period of the game turn in which the transition condition is met is made longer than the stop display period of other game turns in which the transition condition is not met. In this case, the longer stop display period in the game turn in which the transition condition is met can ensure a preparation period for the player to switch to the specific game state. This configuration is particularly effective when the player's operation manner in each game state differs, for example, when the recommended game ball launch strength differs between the normal game state and the specific game state.

Feature bD4. Equipped with a specific notification execution means (function of executing the second transition effect setting process, special chart change display process, etc. by the effect control device 143) that executes a specific notification (start effect of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, ceiling reach effect, etc.) corresponding to the establishment of the transition condition or the transition to a specific game state,
A gaming machine according to feature bD2 or feature bD3, characterized in that the specific notification execution means is provided with a means for executing the specific notification during at least a portion of the stop display period of a game in which the transition condition is satisfied.

To notify the player of the transition to a specific game state in advance, it is possible to use the variable display period of the image in the game round in which the transition condition is met to make a notification corresponding to the transition to the specific game state. However, with this configuration, there is a concern that the player's interest will tend to shift to the transition to the specific game state in the middle of the game round, and attention to the game round will be lost. In this regard, with the present configuration, the stop display period for the game round in which the transition condition is met is made longer than the stop display period for other game rounds in which the transition condition is not met, and the above notification is made using at least a part of that period, making it possible to optimally achieve both attention to the game round and the period for the above notification.

Feature bD5. The gaming machine described in Feature bD4, wherein the specific notification execution means is capable of executing the specific notification after the stop display has started during the stop display period of the game in which the transition condition has been satisfied.

According to the above configuration, the result of the special judgment can be notified by the stopped display of the image, and then the transition to the specific game state can be notified, which is preferable for the player to understand both the result of the special judgment and the transition to the specific game state.

Feature bD6. Equipped with a predetermined ball entry means (second operating port 63) through which a game ball can enter;
The specific gaming state is a state in which a ball is more likely to enter the predetermined ball entry means than in a normal gaming state,
The special determination means is capable of executing the special determination based on a game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means,
A predetermined notification execution means is provided for executing a predetermined notification (displaying a right-hand hit notification image 477a or a target guide image 477b) to encourage a ball to be shot into the predetermined ball shot means,
A gaming machine described in any of features bD2 to bD5, characterized in that the specified notification execution means is provided with a means for executing the specified notification during at least a portion of the stopped display period of a game in which the transition condition is met.

In the above configuration, the specific game state is a game state in which a ball is likely to enter the specific ball entry means, and a specific notification encouraging the ball to enter the specific ball entry means is given by utilizing at least a portion of the longer stop display period in the game round in which the transition condition is met. This makes it possible to encourage the ball to enter the specific ball entry means before the start of the first game round after the transition to the specific game state, allowing the player to start playing in the specific game state smoothly and conveniently.

Note that, to each of the configurations of the above features bD1 to bD6, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of features bA1 to bA12, features bB1 to bB10, features bC1 to bC9, features bD1 to bD6, features bE1 to bE10, features bF1 to bF10, features bG1 to bG8, features bH1 to bH8, features bI1 to bI11, features bJ1 to bJ10, features bK1 to bK10, features bL1 to bL9, features bM1 to bM10, and features bN1 to bN7 individually, or it is also possible to apply a combination of some or all of the technical ideas. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature b E group>
The feature group bE is an invention group extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the variations or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted based on the variation 3 of the above-mentioned second embodiment.

The invention described in the feature bE group has been made with a problem to be solved by the invention in relation to the background technology, which is "for example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and if the lottery result is a specific result, the game is transitioned to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)." The problem is that "here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, there is still room for improvement in terms of increasing the interest in the game."

Feature bE1. A special judgment means (a function for executing a special drawing hit judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (a special drawing hit judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (a prize-winning in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63),
A special game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can transition to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result (a big win result);
A game round control means (a function for executing a special game round control process in the main control device 162, a function for executing a special game round display process in the performance control device 143) that controls the game round so that a game round operation is started based on the special judgment, and a notification result corresponding to the result of the special judgment is counted as one game round, and
Equipped with
As a gaming state, there is a specific gaming state (high frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to a player than a normal gaming state and is different from a special gaming state,
The specific game state termination condition includes that the number of games played since the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a specific means (such as a function of executing processing for transitioning to a third time-saving gaming state by the main control unit 162 relating to variant example 3 of the second embodiment) that is capable of executing specific processing such that, when a predetermined condition (winning a special miss result, scoring in a specific scoring area, etc.) is met in a specific gaming round in a specific gaming state (a gaming round other than the final gaming round, the allowable gaming round, the limited gaming round, etc.), the specific gaming state is re-transitioned to or the remaining number of gaming rounds in the specific gaming state is increased after the specific gaming state ends.

In the above configuration, in addition to the special game state to which the player is transitioned based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result, there is a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. This specific game state ends on the condition that the number of times played since transitioning to the specific game state reaches the upper limit. Under such a premise, in the above configuration, when a specific condition is established in a specific game time during the specific game state, the game is re-transferred to the specific game state after the specific game state ends, or the remaining number of times played in the specific game state is increased. Therefore, by establishing a specific condition in a specific game time, the period during which the specific game state can be played is extended, and the chance of achieving a specific result and transitioning to the special game state while maintaining the advantageous specific game state can be increased. This makes it possible to add a game that aims to achieve a specific condition in a specific game time, as well as to achieve a specific result in the specific game state, thereby expanding the range of ways to enjoy the game and improving interest.

Feature bE2. The specifying means is capable of re-transitioning to the specific gaming state after the specific gaming state ends when a specific condition is established in a specific game round in the specific gaming state;
A gaming machine described in feature bE1, characterized in that it is configured so that the end of a previous specific gaming state and the transition to a subsequent specific gaming state can be executed in the same gaming round.

In the above configuration, when a specific condition is met in a specific game round, the specific game state ends and the game re-enters the specific game state in the same game round. This makes it possible to switch from the preceding specific game state to the subsequent specific game state without an intervening game round in the normal game state, making it possible to achieve a state equivalent to having the remaining number of times in the specific game state increased.

Feature bE3. The player is unable to recognize the end of the previous specific game state or is more difficult to recognize than the end of the specific game state when the re-transition is not performed;
A gaming machine as described in feature bE2, characterized in that it is equipped with a predetermined notification execution means (a function of executing processing for displaying special chart changes in the presentation control device 143) that executes a predetermined notification (additional presentation) that allows the player to recognize that the remaining number of play times in a specific gaming state has increased during the same play time or the next play time.

In the above configuration, after the end of the preceding specific game state is made impossible or difficult for the player to recognize, a predetermined notification is given as if the remaining number of times in the specific game state has increased in the game round in which the transition to the subsequent specific game state occurs or in the next game round. This makes it easier for the player to sense that the remaining number of times has been increased.

Feature bE4. A gaming machine according to any one of Features bE1 to bE3, characterized in that the specifying means includes a means for re-transitioning to the specific gaming state or increasing the remaining number of times when a specific condition is met in a specific game turn in the specific gaming state, without passing through a special gaming state (such as a function for executing a process for transitioning to a third time-saving gaming state by the main control device 162 according to Variation 3 of the second embodiment).

In the above configuration, it is possible to re-transition to a specific game state or increase (add-on) the remaining number of times without going through a special game state. In other words, since a specific result is not required for re-transition to a specific game state, the probability of the re-transition (probability of a specific condition being met) can be set independently from the probability of transition to a special game state (probability of winning a specific result). This makes it possible to increase the freedom of game design, for example, by making the former probability higher than the latter probability. In addition, by re-transitioning to a specific game state without going through a special game state, it is possible to prevent a large separation between the specific game state before the specific condition is met and the specific game state after the specific condition is met. This makes it easier for the player to feel a sense of unity between the two specific game states, making it easier to give the impression that the specific game state has been extended.

Feature bE5. A gaming machine according to any one of features bE1 to bE4, characterized in that it is equipped with a restriction means (such as a function of executing a process for transitioning to a third time-saving gaming state by the main control device 162 according to the third modified example of the second embodiment) that restricts the execution of the specific process when a specific condition is satisfied in a game turn other than the specific game turn in the specific gaming state.

According to the above configuration, re-transition to a specific game state is performed only if a specific condition is met in a specific game round. In other words, in order to realize the re-transition, not only the specific condition must be met, but also the timing must be right. Therefore, the difficulty of the re-transition can be appropriately increased, and the player's joy and sense of accomplishment when the re-transition is realized can be appropriately brought out. Furthermore, this configuration can appropriately increase the attention to the specific game round.

Feature bE6. A gaming machine according to feature bE5, characterized in that the specific game round is a game round in the latter half of a specific game state.

As the number of remaining play times in a specific game state decreases, the expectation value of hitting a specific result in the specific game state decreases, so there is a concern that the player will feel less hopeful as the specific game state approaches its end. In this regard, with this configuration, the specific play times are set in the latter half of the specific game state, so it is possible to provide the player with an opportunity to realize re-transition to the specific game state even if the expectation of a specific result is low. This makes it possible to liven up the latter half of the specific game state and maintain a sense of hope.

Feature bE7. A gaming machine according to feature bE5 or feature bE6, characterized in that it is provided with a means for executing a specific notification (chance notification image 478) in a specific game round (a function for executing the processing of step Sb3802 by the presentation control device 143).

In the above configuration, a specific notification is made during a specific game round that is not made during other game rounds, so the player can understand that it is a specific game round through the specific notification. This allows the player to play with enthusiasm when it is a specific game round, making it possible to appropriately increase the level of attention to the game.

This feature can also be expressed as "having a means (a function for executing the processing of step Sb3802 by the presentation control device 143) for executing a specific notification (chance notification image 478) in a specific game round that is not executed in the other game rounds," and this feature may further have the configuration that "the specific notification is configured not to be executed in the other game rounds."

Feature bE8. A gaming machine according to any one of features bE1 to bE7, characterized in that the specific condition is that the result of the special judgment is a predetermined judgment result (special losing result) different from the specific result, or that the result of the specific judgment (loss type judgment, transition lottery, etc.) made when the result of the special judgment is a non-specific result (losing result) that does not correspond to a transition to a special gaming state is a predetermined judgment result (special losing result, winning result of the transition lottery, etc.).

In the above configuration, the specific condition is met when the result of the special judgment is a predetermined judgment result different from the specific result, or when the result of the specific judgment made when the result of the special judgment is a non-specific result is a predetermined judgment result, so that it is possible to execute a judgment as to whether or not the result of the special judgment is a specific result and a judgment as to whether or not the specific condition is met within one play round. This allows a specific play round to function as a chance play round (a play round that is more advantageous than other play rounds) in which both judgments can be received, making it possible to appropriately increase the sense of expectation and attention for that play round.

Feature bE9. A gaming machine according to feature bE8, characterized in that the probability of the special judgment in a specific gaming state or the specific judgment resulting in the predetermined judgment result is set higher than the probability of the specific result in the special judgment in a specific gaming state.

In the above configuration, the probability of a predetermined judgment result being achieved is set higher than the probability of a specific result being achieved, which heightens the sense of anticipation that a specific condition will be met and makes it possible to increase attention to a specific game session.

Feature bE10. A special judgment means (a function for executing a special drawing hit judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (a special drawing hit judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (a prize-winning in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63),
A special game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can transition to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result (a big win result);
A specifying means (such as a function of executing a process for transition to a third time-saving game state by the main control device 162 according to the third modified example of the second embodiment) that allows a player to be more advantageous in a case where the result of the special judgment in a first predetermined situation (the final game round in the first time-saving game state) is a predetermined result (a special miss result) that does not correspond to a transition to a special game state, compared to a case where the result of the special judgment in a second predetermined situation (a special game round other than the final game round in the first time-saving game state) that is different from the first predetermined situation,
A gaming machine comprising:

In conventional gaming machines, the game was a choice of whether or not a specific result was obtained, and so players could only have a sense of expectation that a specific result would be obtained when playing, which raised concerns that the game would become monotonous. In this regard, in the present configuration, even if the result of the special judgment is a predetermined result that does not correspond to a transition to a special game state (a so-called miss result), it is possible to be advantageous, so that even if a specific result is not obtained, a sense of expectation is aroused and the game can be diversified. In this case, because the advantage of a miss result is limited to the first predetermined situation, it is possible to prevent the advantage of a specific result from being excessively impaired. In other words, it is possible to realize a game that does not end with disappointment even if a specific result is not obtained, while ensuring the fun of a game that aims to achieve a specific result, and it is possible to improve interest.

The configurations of features bE1 to bE9 above can be applied to this feature. In this case, further effects can be achieved by applying these configurations.

Note that, to each of the configurations of the above features bE1 to bE10, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of features bA1 to bA12, features bB1 to bB10, features bC1 to bC9, features bD1 to bD6, features bE1 to bE10, features bF1 to bF10, features bG1 to bG8, features bH1 to bH8, features bI1 to bI11, features bJ1 to bJ10, features bK1 to bK10, features bL1 to bL9, features bM1 to bM10, and features bN1 to bN7 individually, or it is also possible to apply a combination of some or all of the technical ideas. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature bF group>
The feature bF group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and variations or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted based on variations 3, 6, and 8 to 12 of the second embodiment.

The invention described in the feature bF group has been made with a problem to be solved by the invention with respect to the background technology that "for example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and when the lottery result is a specific result, the game is transitioned to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)." The problem is that "here, there is still room for improvement in controlling the gaming state in gaming machines such as those exemplified above."

Feature bF1. A special judgment means (a function for executing a winning/losing judgment process in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (a winning/losing judgment of a special drawing) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (a winning/losing judgment on the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63),
A special game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can transition to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result (a big win result);
Equipped with
As a gaming state, there is a specific gaming state (such as a high frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to a player than a normal gaming state and is different from a special gaming state,
A specific game state transition means capable of transitioning to a specific game state without passing through a special game state when a predetermined condition (such as a special miss result or reaching the ceiling number of times) is met (a function of executing a process for transitioning to a second time-shortened game state by the main control unit 162 in the second embodiment, the modified example 1 and the modified example 2 of the second embodiment, a function of executing a process for transitioning to a third time-shortened game state by the main control unit 162 in the modified examples 3 to 5, a function of executing a process for transitioning to a time-shortened game state by the main control unit 162 in the modified examples 6 to 10, etc.);
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, when the transition is made by the specific game state transition means, or when the transition is made, an external output means (a function of executing the processing of step Sb3511 by the main control device 162 according to the second embodiment in the variants 3, 6, and 8 to 10, a function of outputting the first external signal in the variant 11, a function of outputting the first external signal A in the variant 12, etc.) capable of outputting a specific signal (an external signal corresponding to a special miss result such as in the variant 3, the first external signal in the variant 11, the first external signal A in the variant 12, etc.) to the outside of the gaming machine;
A gaming machine comprising:

In the above configuration, in addition to the special game state to which a transition is made based on the result of a special judgment being a specific result, there is a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. In addition, in the above configuration, it is possible to transition to a specific game state without passing through a special game state. If the transition is made via a special game state like a conventional specific game state, the occurrence of the transition can be grasped on the gaming hall side, but there is a concern that the occurrence of a specific game state that is transitioned to without passing through a special game state cannot be grasped on the gaming hall side. In this regard, with this feature, a specific signal is output to the outside of the gaming machine in response to the establishment of a transition trigger (predetermined condition) to such a specific game state or the transition to the specific game state, so that the above-mentioned grasping can be preferably performed on the gaming hall side.

Feature bF2. Equipped with a transition restriction means (a function of executing a process for transition to a third time-shortened game state by the main control device 162 according to the modified example 3 of the second embodiment, and a function of executing a process for determining transition to the third time-shortened game state by the main control device 162 according to the modified examples 6, 8 to 10) capable of restricting transition to a specific game state when the predetermined condition is satisfied in a predetermined situation (a situation in which the game is in the first time-shortened game state, a situation in which the game is in the second time-shortened game state, a situation in which the game is in the limited game number, etc.),
The gaming machine described in feature bF1 is configured so that when the specified condition is met in the specified situation and the transition restriction means performs the restriction, the output of the specific signal can be executed by the external output means (a configuration in which the processing of step Sb3511 is executed by the main control device 162 in variants 3, 6, and 8 to 10 of the second embodiment, thereby outputting an external signal corresponding to a special miss result).

In the above configuration, even if a predetermined condition is met, if a predetermined situation exists, the transition to the specific game state is restricted. When such a restriction is imposed, it is conceivable to stop outputting the specific signal in response to the absence of a transition to the specific game state. From the perspective of achieving consistency with the subsequent game state, it would be more logical not to output the specific signal than to do so.

However, with such a configuration, the amusement hall will not be able to grasp the actual number of times that a specified condition has been met during play, and there is a concern that it will be difficult to determine whether the probability of the condition being met is generally in line with the design probability. In particular, as a result of the number of times notified to the amusement hall being culled by ceasing the output of the specific signal, the number of times grasped by the amusement hall will be less than the actual number, so there is a risk that, for example, even if an act is being carried out to fraudulently meet the above-mentioned transition condition, there will be a delay in discovering this.

In this regard, the present configuration is such that a specific signal is output even if the transition to a specific game state is restricted when a predetermined condition is met, allowing the gaming hall to properly grasp the actual number of times that condition is met. This makes it easier to discover cases where the probability of the transition condition being met has been fraudulently increased, and makes it possible to enhance fraud prevention effects.

Feature bF3. The external output means is
A means for outputting a specific signal of a first mode when the predetermined condition is satisfied in a specific situation (such as a situation other than the first time-shortened gaming state) different from the predetermined situation;
means for outputting a specific signal of a second mode different from the first mode when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the predetermined situation;
A gaming machine as described in feature bF2, characterized in that it is equipped with:

In the above configuration, different specific signals are output depending on whether transition to a specific game state is permitted or restricted, so the gaming hall can determine from one specific signal not only that a specific condition has been met, but also whether or not a transition to a specific game state is required. This makes it possible to immediately determine that failure to transition to a specific game state despite the fact that a specific condition has been met does not indicate an abnormality in the gaming machine.

Feature bF4. The predetermined condition is configured to be established in relation to the result of the special judgment (the result of the winning/losing lottery or the loss type judgment is a special loss result, and the transition condition to the third time-saving game state is established),
A specific external signal output means (a function of executing the process of step Sb3511 by the main control device 162) capable of outputting a specific external signal (lottery result signal) corresponding to the result of the special judgment to the outside of the gaming machine,
A gaming machine described in any of features bF1 to bF3, characterized in that it is configured to be able to output the specific signal using the specific external signal (configuration to output an external signal corresponding to a special losing result using a lottery result signal).

According to the above configuration, the specific signal can be output using existing terminals and existing wiring for notifying the result of the special judgment, so the number of output terminals, etc. on the gaming machine can be kept small compared to when a dedicated signal is output as the specific signal. Also, if the management control device on the gaming hall side already has an input terminal, etc. for receiving notification of the result of the special judgment, it can use that to receive the specific signal.

The feature "configured to be capable of outputting the specific signal using the specific external signal" can also be expressed as "the specific external signal output means includes a first means (a function of outputting a lottery result signal for a jackpot or a normal miss) capable of outputting a specific external signal of a first mode when the specific external signal is output in a situation where the specified condition is not met, and a second means as the external output means (a function of outputting a lottery result signal for a special miss) capable of outputting a specific external signal of a second mode different from the first mode as the specific signal when the specific external signal is output in a situation where the specified condition is met."

Feature bF5. The predetermined condition is configured to be established in relation to the result of the special judgment (the result of the winning/losing lottery or the loss type judgment is a special loss result, and the transition condition to the third time-saving game state is established),
A game round control means (a function for executing a special game round control process in the main control device 162, a function for executing a special game round display process in the performance control device 143) that controls the game round so that a game round operation is started based on the special judgment, and a notification result corresponding to the result of the special judgment is regarded as one game round, and
A predetermined external signal output means capable of outputting a predetermined external signal (a game round execution signal, a game round start signal, etc.) to the outside of the gaming machine in response to each game round (a function of executing the process of step Sb3511 by the main control device 162 according to the third, sixth, eighth, and tenth variants of the second embodiment);
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any of features bF1 to bF3, characterized in that it is configured to be able to output the specific signal by utilizing the specified external signal (configuration to output an external signal corresponding to a special losing result by utilizing a lottery result signal).

The above configuration makes it possible to output a specific signal by utilizing a predetermined external signal that is output to the outside of the gaming machine in response to each game round. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration by eliminating signal terminals and signal wiring for the specific signal, and also makes it possible to avoid adding input terminals to the management and control device on the gaming hall side. In addition, since the specific signal can be output simultaneously with the predetermined external signal, it is possible to reduce the number of signal outputs from the gaming machine, making it possible to reduce the processing load required for signal exchange on both the gaming machine and the management and control device on the gaming hall side.

The feature "configured to be capable of outputting the specific signal using the specified external signal" can also be expressed as "the specified external signal output means includes a first means capable of outputting a specified external signal of a first aspect when the specified external signal is output in a situation where the specified condition is not satisfied, and a second means as the external output means capable of outputting a specified external signal of a second aspect different from the first aspect as the specific signal when the specified external signal is output in a situation where the specified condition is satisfied."

Feature bF6. A gaming machine according to any one of Features bF2 to bF5, characterized in that it is equipped with a means capable of outputting a predetermined output signal (such as a time-saving state signal or a high-frequency support signal) to the outside of the gaming machine when the predetermined situation is met.

In the above configuration, a predetermined output signal is output to the outside of the gaming machine when a predetermined situation occurs that restricts transition to a specific gaming state. As a result, when a specific signal indicating that a predetermined condition has been met is output but the game does not transition to a specific gaming state, the gaming hall's management control device can easily determine whether or not the cause is a predetermined situation by referring to the above-mentioned predetermined output signal. In other words, by also referring to the predetermined output signal, the gaming hall can easily determine whether or not a transition to a specific gaming state despite the specific signal being output is due to an abnormality in the gaming machine.

Feature bF7. Based on the special judgment, a game round operation is started, and a notification result corresponding to the result of the special judgment is counted as one game round, and a game round control means (a function for executing a special game round control process in the main control device 162, a function for executing a special chart variable display process in the performance control device 143) is provided to control the game round to be played;
The predetermined situation is configured to end based on the establishment of a predetermined ending condition (such as reaching an upper limit of the number of times),
The gaming machine described in feature bF6, wherein the external output means is configured to be capable of outputting the specific signal at the end timing of the specified situation or at a specified timing after the end timing when the specified condition is satisfied in a game round in which the end condition is satisfied.

For example, it is conceivable to restrict transition to a specific game state even if a specified condition is met in a specified situation, while permitting transition to the specific game state if the specified condition is met in the final game round in the specified situation. In such a case, if a specific signal is output earlier than the end timing of the specified situation, there is a concern that the management control device on the gaming hall side will recognize that a transition to a specific game state has occurred even though the specified condition was met in the specified situation. In this regard, in this configuration, a specific signal is output at the end timing of the specified situation or at a specified timing after the end timing, so that the management control device can understand that the specified situation has ended before understanding that the specified condition has been met, and it is possible to prevent the transition to the specific game state from being recognized as unnatural behavior.

Feature bF8. The external output means is
A first means (a function of outputting a first external signal when a normal jackpot result is obtained) capable of outputting a signal from a predetermined output terminal (an output terminal for a first external signal) to an outside of the gaming machine in response to a transition to a special gaming state or during execution of the special gaming state;
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, when the transition is made by the specific game state transition means or when the transition is made, a second means (a function of outputting a first external signal when a special miss result occurs) capable of outputting a specific signal to the outside of the gaming machine;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature bF1, wherein the second means is capable of outputting a specific signal from the predetermined output terminal.

In the above configuration, a specific signal corresponding to the establishment of a predetermined condition or the transition to a specific game state is output using the same output terminal as the one that outputs an external signal when a transition to a special game state or when that state is in progress. This makes it possible to recognize a specific game state that is transitioned to without passing through a special game state, even in hall machines that only support specific game states that are transitioned to via a special game state.

Feature bF9: The first means is capable of outputting a signal of a predetermined mode (a first external signal that is turned on during the opening and closing execution mode);
The gaming machine described in feature bF8 is characterized in that the second means is capable of outputting a signal of a different mode from the specified mode as the specific signal (a first external signal that is in an on state for a specified period shorter than the period of the opening/closing execution mode).

In the above configuration, different signal modes are used for external output from a specified output terminal depending on whether a special game state is entered or a specified condition is met. This makes it possible to distinguish between the two external signals even if they are output from the same output terminal.

Feature bF10. The gaming machine described in Feature bF8 or Feature bF9, characterized in that the external output means includes a third means (function of outputting a second external signal) capable of outputting a signal (second external signal) from an output terminal different from the predetermined output terminal to the outside of the gaming machine at least in a situation where a specific gaming state is being entered or in a situation where a specific gaming state is being entered.

In the above configuration, a signal is output from an output terminal other than a predetermined output terminal that outputs a signal when a special game state is in progress or when a predetermined condition is met, in response to a transition to a specific game state or during that transition. This makes it possible for the hall machine to recognize the transition to a specific game state or the existence of a specific game state.

Note that, to each of the configurations of the above features bF1 to bF10, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of features bA1 to bA12, features bB1 to bB10, features bC1 to bC9, features bD1 to bD6, features bE1 to bE10, features bF1 to bF10, features bG1 to bG8, features bH1 to bH8, features bI1 to bI11, features bJ1 to bJ10, features bK1 to bK10, features bL1 to bL9, features bM1 to bM10, and features bN1 to bN7 individually, or it is also possible to apply a combination of some or all of the technical ideas. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Features bG group>
The features bG group are an invention group extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the modifications or combinations thereof, and are mainly extracted based on the modification 4 of the second embodiment described above.

The invention described in the feature bG group has been made with a problem to be solved by the invention, which is based on the background technology that "for example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and if the lottery result is a specific result, the game is transitioned to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)."

Feature bG1. A special judgment means (a function for executing a winning/losing judgment process in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (a winning/losing judgment of a special drawing) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (a winning/losing judgment on the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63),
A special game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can transition to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result (a big win result);
Equipped with
As a gaming state, there is a specific gaming state (high frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to a player than a normal gaming state and is different from a special gaming state,
The specific game states include a first specific game state (first time-saving game state) to which a transition can be made via a special game state when a predetermined first condition is met (such as a 4R normal jackpot result in the fourth modified example of the second embodiment), and a second specific game state (third time-saving game state) to which a transition can be made without passing through a special game state when a predetermined second condition different from the first condition is met (such as a special miss result or a ball entering a specific ball entry section),
The second condition is established in a first specific gaming state,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a specification means (a function of executing processing for transition to a third time-shortened gaming state by a main control unit 162 relating to variant example 4 of the second embodiment) that can make the situation more disadvantageous to the player when the second condition is met in the first specific gaming state than when the second condition is not met.

In the above configuration, in addition to the special game state to which a transition is made based on the result of a special judgment being a specific result, there is a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. In addition, as such specific game states, a first specific game state to which a transition is made via the special game state, and a second specific game state to which a transition is made without passing through the special game state are provided. In addition, a second condition that is a transition trigger to the second specific game state can be established in a situation in which the first specific game state is in effect, and when such an establishment occurs and a transition is made to the second specific game state, the player is configured to be at a disadvantage compared to a case in which a transition to the second specific game state does not occur.

With this configuration, when the player transitions from the special gaming state to the first specific gaming state, the player can experience the thrill of possibly being demoted to a disadvantageous state depending on the subsequent game development, and it is possible to add excitement beyond just aiming to win a specific result. However, while it is possible to provide such a thrill, there is a concern that if the player is too disappointed when demoted to a disadvantageous state, it may reduce the player's motivation to play thereafter, which may have the opposite effect. In this regard, with this configuration, when the second condition is met, the player transitions to the second specific gaming state, which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and therefore the player's disappointment can be reduced compared to when the player transitions to the normal gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game in which the player can experience the above-mentioned thrill while preventing a significant loss of motivation to play.

Feature bG2. A game round control means (a function for executing a special chart game round control process in the main control device 162, a function for executing a special chart variable display process in the performance control device 143) that controls the game round so that the game round operation is started based on the special judgment, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the special judgment is regarded as one game round, and
The specific game state termination condition includes that the number of games played since the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games,
The upper limit number of times of the second specific game state is set to a predetermined number (e.g., 10 times) that is less than the upper limit number of times of the first specific game state (e.g., 1000 times),
The gaming machine described in feature bG1 is characterized in that the specifying means transitions to a second specific gaming state when the second condition is met in a first specific gaming state.

In the above configuration, by satisfying the second condition during the first specific game state, the specific game state is switched to a second specific game state in which the number of times that the specific game state can be played is reduced. In this case, even if the specific game state is transitioned to the second specific game state, the specific game state can be continued up to the upper limit number of times, and it is possible to leave a chance for a specific result in the specific game state. This makes it possible to reduce the disappointment of the player when the second condition is satisfied, while still providing the player with a thrilling feeling that the player may fall into a disadvantageous situation when the second condition is satisfied.

Feature bG3. Equipped with an upper limit number setting means for setting the upper limit number in response to a transition to a specific gaming state (a function for executing a process for transition to a third time-saving gaming state by the main control device 162 according to the fourth modified example of the second embodiment);
The gaming machine described in feature bG2 is characterized in that the upper limit number setting means is provided with a means (a function of executing the processing of step Sb4108 in the main control unit 162) for setting the predetermined number as the upper limit number for transitioning to the second specific gaming state when the second condition is satisfied in the first specific gaming state, regardless of the remaining number of play times in the first specific gaming state.

In the above configuration, the remaining number of times in the specific game state when the second condition is met is uniformly set to the upper limit number of times in the second specific game state, regardless of the number of times played up to that point in the first specific game state (the remaining number of times in the first specific game state). Therefore, the later the timing of meeting the second condition in the first specific game state, the greater the total number of times the specific game state can be played, which is advantageous for the player. This increases the fun of avoiding the meeting of the second condition when playing in the first specific game state, making it possible to increase the entertainment value of the game.

Feature bG4. A gaming machine according to feature bG2 or feature bG3, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for making the remaining number of times in the first specific gaming state invisible (a function for displaying a state notification image 450 instead of a remaining number image 472) when the machine is in a first specific gaming state or when the remaining number of times up to the upper limit number in the first specific gaming state is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times.

For example, if the configuration indicates the remaining number of times in the first specific game state, the player can know how many times there were before the second condition was met, and therefore, when the second condition is met and the remaining number of times in the second specific game state is set as the remaining number of times in the specific game state, the player can easily determine how many times the number of times has decreased as a result. In this regard, in the above configuration, by not indicating the remaining number of times in the first specific game state, it is possible to make it impossible or difficult for the player to determine the remaining number of times before the second condition is met. This makes it difficult for the player to determine the decrease in the remaining number of times when transitioning to the second specific game state, and even if the decrease is large, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming too disappointed and losing his motivation to play.

Feature bG5. A gaming machine as described in feature bG4, characterized in that it is provided with a means (a function for executing the process of step Sb4403 in the presentation control device 143) for executing a predetermined notification (remaining number of times image 472) that enables the player to recognize the number of times remaining in the second specific gaming state when the second condition is satisfied in the first specific gaming state and transition is made to the second specific gaming state.

In the above configuration, the remaining number of times is not displayed while the player is in the first specific game state, but is displayed when the player transitions to the second specific game state. This allows the player to easily know that the second condition has been met and the player has transitioned to the second specific game state, and the number of times remaining in the specific game state after the player transitions to the second specific game state.

Feature bG6. A gaming machine according to any one of features bG1 to bG5, characterized in that the second condition is that the result of the special judgment is a predetermined judgment result (special losing result) different from the specific result, or that the result of the specific judgment (loss type judgment, transition lottery, etc.) made when the result of the special judgment is a non-specific result (losing result) that does not correspond to a transition to a special gaming state is a predetermined judgment result (special losing result, winning result of the transition lottery, etc.).

In the above configuration, the specific condition is met when the result of the special judgment is a predetermined judgment result different from the specific result, or when the result of the special judgment is a non-specific result and the result of the specific judgment is a predetermined judgment result, so that it is possible to determine whether or not the player will be demoted to a disadvantageous state in each game round. This allows the player to experience the thrill of the possibility of the above-mentioned demotion occurring in each game round, making it possible to enhance the enjoyment of such thrills in the game.

Feature bG7. The second condition can be satisfied in a normal gaming state.
A gaming machine described in any of features bG1 to bG6, characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function in the main control unit 162 to transition to a third time-saving gaming state A) that can transition to a second specific gaming state when the second condition is met in the normal gaming state.

In the above configuration, the second condition can be established not only during the first specific game state but also during the normal game state, and if the second condition is established during the normal game state, a transition to the second specific game state occurs. Since the second specific game state is a more advantageous game state than the normal game state, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the establishment of the second condition during the first specific game state is disadvantageous, whereas the establishment of the second condition during the normal game state is advantageous. In other words, even if the same second condition occurs, the advantage or disadvantage is reversed depending on the game state when it is established, so that the game is prevented from being fixed on the sole purpose of avoiding the establishment of the second condition, and it is possible to diversify the game.

Feature bG8. The condition for ending the specific gaming state includes that the number of times the game has been played since the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times;
A maximum number of times setting means for setting the maximum number of times in response to a transition to a specific gaming state (a function for executing a process for transition to a third time-saving gaming state by the main control device 162 according to the fourth modified example of the second embodiment) is provided;
The gaming machine described in feature bG7 is characterized in that the upper limit number setting means is equipped with a means (a function of executing the processing of step Sb4106 in the main control unit 162) that can set an upper limit number (e.g., 100 times) that is greater when the second condition is satisfied in the normal gaming state than when the second condition is satisfied in the first specific gaming state.

The second specific game state is a more advantageous game state than the normal game state, so even the transition from the normal game state to the second specific game state is advantageous for the player, but the above configuration goes beyond that; when the second condition is met during the normal game state, a higher upper limit is set than when the second condition is met during the first specific game state. This makes it possible to highlight the advantage and increase the fun of aiming for the second condition to be met in the normal game state.

Note that, to each of the configurations of the above features bG1 to bG8, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of features bA1 to bA12, features bB1 to bB10, features bC1 to bC9, features bD1 to bD6, features bE1 to bE10, features bF1 to bF10, features bG1 to bG8, features bH1 to bH8, features bI1 to bI11, features bJ1 to bJ10, features bK1 to bK10, features bL1 to bL9, features bM1 to bM10, and features bN1 to bN7 individually, or it is also possible to apply a combination of some or all of the technical ideas. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristics bH group>
The group of features bH is an invention group extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the modifications or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted based on the above-mentioned modification 5 of the second embodiment.

The invention described in the feature bH group has been made with a problem to be solved by the invention with respect to the background technology, which is "for example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and if the lottery result is a specific result, the game is transitioned to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)." The problem is that "here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, there is still room for improvement in terms of increasing attention to the game."

Feature bH1. A special judgment means (a function for executing a winning/losing judgment process in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (a winning/losing judgment of a special drawing) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (a winning/losing judgment on the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63),
A special game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can transition to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result (a big win result);
A game round control means (a function of executing a special game round control process in the main control device 162) is provided for controlling the game round so that a game round operation is started based on the special judgment being made, and a notification result corresponding to the result of the special judgment is counted as one game round, and a game round is played.
As a gaming state, there is a specific gaming state (such as a high frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to a player than a normal gaming state and is different from a special gaming state,
The specific game state termination condition includes that the number of games played since the transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games,
The device is provided with a means for increasing the number of remaining play times in the specific game state when a specific condition is met (such as when a special miss occurs or when the ball enters a specific ball entry area) in a situation where the specific game state is in an allowable state (when the number of play times in the third time-saving game state is greater than the number of play times remaining in the first time-saving game state) (a function for executing a process for transition to the third time-saving game state by the main control device 162 according to the fifth modified example of the second embodiment);
A gaming machine characterized in having a plurality of specific gaming states (first time-shortened gaming state A, first time-shortened gaming state B) as specific gaming states, each of which has a different number of gaming rounds, range of number of gaming rounds, or period corresponding to the permissible state.

In the above configuration, in addition to the special game state to which the player transitions when the result of a special judgment is a specific result, there is also a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. If a specific condition is met in a situation that is permissible in this specific game state, the number of remaining times in the specific game state is increased (added on), allowing the player to play more advantageously.

In such a configuration, for example, if the number of play times at which the remaining number of times increases due to the fulfillment of a specific condition is fixed, the player will know in advance when the specific condition needs to be fulfilled to increase the remaining number of times, and there is a risk that interest in other play times will wane. In this regard, in the above configuration, multiple types of specific game states are provided that have different play times, ranges of play times, or periods in which an increase in the remaining number of times is permitted, so it is no longer possible to uniformly determine when the specific condition needs to be fulfilled to increase the remaining number of times. This prevents the player's attention from concentrating on the same play times in each specific game state, making it possible to increase the level of attention to the game throughout the entire specific game state.

Feature bH2. A gaming machine as described in feature bH1, characterized in that the game number, range of game number, or period corresponding to the permissible state in each specific game state is configured to be impossible or difficult for the player to distinguish (configuration that makes it impossible or difficult to distinguish between first time-saving game state A and first time-saving game state B).

For example, in the case of a configuration in which the play times etc. that will be in an allowable state are clearly defined, even if multiple specific game states with different play times etc. that will be in an allowable state are set, the play times that should be noted in each specific game state will be clearly defined, and there is a concern that the effect of preventing the player's interest from being biased towards specific play times will not be effectively achieved. In this regard, in the above configuration, the play times etc. that will be in an allowable state are impossible or difficult for the player to identify, so the player can enjoy playing while predicting which play times etc. will be in an allowable state in each specific game state, making it possible to increase attention to the game throughout the entire specific game state.

Feature bH3. As the specific game state, there are a plurality of types of specific game states including a first type specific game state (first time-saving game state A) in which the upper limit number is a first number (e.g., 70 times) and a second type specific game state (first time-saving game state B) in which the upper limit number is a second number (e.g., 100 times) that is greater than the first number,
A gaming machine according to feature bH1 or feature bH2, characterized in that the number of play times, the range of play times, or the period corresponding to the permissible state differs at least in the first type specific gaming state and the second type specific gaming state.

In the above configuration, specific game states with different allowable play counts are provided, including a first type specific game state in which the upper limit is set to a first number, and a second type specific game state in which the upper limit is set to a second number, which is greater than the first type specific game state. This allows for diversification not only of when the specific condition should be met, but also of when the specific condition should be met, for each specific game state, making it possible to increase interest.

Feature bH4. The gaming machine according to feature bH3, characterized in that in the second type specific gaming state, a gaming round, range of gaming rounds, or period corresponding to the permissible state is included in a gaming round (e.g., the 71st to 100th gaming round) subsequent to the gaming round corresponding to the first number (e.g., the 70th special game round).

In the above configuration, the number of play times that become an allowable state in the second type specific game state is included in the number of play times after the upper limit number (first number) of the first type specific game state. In this case, if it is assumed that the transitioned specific game state is the first type specific game state, the specific game state will end when the first number of play times is reached. On the other hand, if it is assumed that the transitioned specific game state is the second type specific game state, the remaining number of play times in the specific game state can be increased by establishing a specific condition in play after the first number of play times has been exceeded, which is a desirable situation for the player. Therefore, when the number of play times approaches the first number in the case of transition to the specific game state, the player can play while feeling a conflict between anxiety that the specific game state will end and expectation that the remaining number of play times will be efficiently increased by the establishment of a specific condition after the first number of play times has been exceeded, which makes it possible to appropriately increase interest.

Feature bH5. When a specific condition is met in a situation where the specific game state is in a non-permissible state (the number of times played in the third time-saving game state is less than the number of times remaining in the first time-saving game state), the increase in the number of times remaining in the specific game state is limited;
The gaming machine described in feature bH3 or feature bH4 is configured such that in the first type specific gaming state and the second type specific gaming state, a common gaming count, range of gaming counts (1st to 20th gaming count) or period is included as the gaming count, range of gaming counts or period corresponding to the non-allowable state.

In the above configuration, a common number of play times, range of play times, or period is set for each specific game state as a non-permissible state in which the remaining number of play times is not increased even if a specific condition is met. In this common number of play times, etc., the remaining number of play times is not increased regardless of which specific game state the player transitions to, so it is possible to ensure a period in which the player can concentrate on playing to achieve a specific result without worrying about the type of specific game state or the fulfillment of a specific condition.

Feature bH6. A gaming machine as described in any one of Features bH3 to bH5, characterized in that the first type specific game state and the second type specific game state are configured to be indistinguishable or difficult for the player to distinguish (configuration that makes it impossible or difficult to distinguish between first time-saving game state A and first time-saving game state B).

The above configuration allows the player to predict whether the transitioned specific game state is a first type specific game state or a second type specific game state, making it possible to optimally exert each of the effects of features bH3 to bH5.

Feature bH7. A gaming machine according to any one of Features bH1 to bH6, characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function for executing the process of step Sb4801 by the main control device 162) capable of limiting the increase in the remaining number of play times when a specific condition is satisfied in the permissible state of a specific game state and the remaining number of play times is increased, if the specific condition is satisfied again in that specific game state.

In the above configuration, the remaining number of times can be increased based on the fulfillment of a specific condition only once during the transition to the specific game state, so the timing at which the specific condition is fulfilled has a significant impact on the subsequent game, making it possible to optimally exert each of the effects of features bH1 to bH6.

Feature bH8. A gaming machine according to any one of Features bH1 to bH7, characterized in that the specific condition is that the result of the special judgment is a predetermined judgment result (special losing result) different from the specific result, or that the result of the specific judgment (loss type judgment, transition lottery, etc.) made when the result of the special judgment is a non-specific result (losing result) that does not correspond to a transition to a special gaming state is a predetermined judgment result (special losing result, winning result of the transition lottery, etc.).

In the above configuration, the specific condition is met when the result of the special judgment is a predetermined judgment result different from the specific result, or when the result of the specific judgment made when the result of the special judgment is a non-specific result is a predetermined judgment result, so that it is possible to judge whether or not the result of the special judgment is a specific result and to judge whether or not the specific condition is met within one game round. Therefore, when the specific game state is in an allowable state, the player can play both by challenging himself to get a specific result and by challenging himself to increase the number of times the specific game state remains, making it possible to play under more favorable conditions than if he remained in the latter state alone. This makes it possible to favorably increase the desire to play in the specific game state.

Note that, to each of the configurations of the above features bH1 to bH8, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of features bA1 to bA12, features bB1 to bB10, features bC1 to bC9, features bD1 to bD6, features bE1 to bE10, features bF1 to bF10, features bG1 to bG8, features bH1 to bH8, features bI1 to bI11, features bJ1 to bJ10, features bK1 to bK10, features bL1 to bL9, features bM1 to bM10, and features bN1 to bN7 individually, or it is possible to apply a combination of some or all of the technical ideas. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Features bI group>
Group Feature bI is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and variations or combinations of these, and is extracted mainly based on variations 6, 8, and 9 of the second embodiment.

The invention described in Feature bI group has been made with a problem to be solved by the invention with respect to the background technology that "for example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and when the lottery result is a specific result, the game is transitioned to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)."

Feature bI1. A special judgment means (a function for executing a special drawing hit judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (a special drawing hit judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (a prize-winning in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63),
A special game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can transition to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result (a big win result);
A game round control means (a function for executing a special game round control process in the main control device 162, a function for executing a special game round display process in the performance control device 143) that controls the game round so that a game round operation is started based on the special judgment, and a notification result corresponding to the result of the special judgment is counted as one game round, and
An update means (such as a function for executing the process of step Sb5504 by the main control device 162 according to the sixth, eighth, and ninth variants of the second embodiment) capable of updating predetermined update information (such as the number of times a game has lost, internal point information, etc.) based on a predetermined update trigger (such as a loss in the result of the winning/losing lottery, winning the point lottery, etc.);
Equipped with
As a gaming state, there is a specific gaming state (such as a high frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to a player than a normal gaming state and is different from a special gaming state,
The specific game states include a first specific game state (second time-saving game state) to which a transition can be made based on the update result of the update means becoming a predetermined result (ceiling number of times, a predetermined number of points, etc.), and a second specific game state (third time-saving game state) to which a transition can be made based on the result of the special judgment becoming a predetermined judgment result (special miss result) different from the specific result, or the result of a specific judgment (miss type judgment, transition lottery, etc.) made in a game round in which the result of the special judgment becomes a non-specific result (miss result) that does not correspond to a transition to the special game state becomes a predetermined judgment result (special miss result, winning result of transition lottery, etc.),
A first transition determination means for making a first transition determination as to whether or not to transition to a first specific gaming state based on the update result of the update means (such as a function of executing a process for determining transition to a third time-shortened gaming state by the main control device 162 according to Modification 6 and Modification 9 of the second embodiment, and a function of executing a process A for determining transition to a third time-shortened gaming state by the main control device 162 according to Modification 8);
A second transition determination means for making a second transition determination as to whether or not to transition to a second specific game state based on the result of the special determination or the specific determination (such as a function of executing a process for determining transition to the second time-shortened game state by the main control device 162 according to Modification 6 and Modification 9 of the second embodiment, and a function of executing a process A for determining transition to the second time-shortened game state by the main control device 162 according to Modification 8);
Equipped with
a function of executing processing of step Sb5303 after executing processing of step Sb5302 in variant 6 of the second embodiment; a function of executing processing of step Sb6503 and then executing processing of step Sb6504 if a negative judgment is made in step Sb6502 in variant 8; a function of executing processing of step Sb7201 and then executing processing of step Sb7203 in variant 9, etc.

In the above configuration, in addition to the special game state to which the game is transitioned based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result, there is a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. In addition, as such specific game states, there is a first specific game state to which the game is transitioned based on the result of update information updated by a specific update trigger, and a second specific game state to which the game is transitioned based on the result of the special judgment being a specific judgment result different from the specific result, or the result of the specific judgment made in a game round in which the result of the special judgment was a non-specific result being a specific judgment result. In such a gaming machine, the transition condition to the first specific game state and the transition condition to the second specific game state may be satisfied in the same game round. In this regard, in the above configuration, the first transition judgment of whether to transition to the first specific game state is made and then the second transition judgment of whether to transition to the second specific game state is made, so that it is possible to determine whether to adopt the result of the second transition judgment based on the result of the first transition judgment, and it becomes possible to control the game state appropriately.

Feature bI2. A gaming machine according to feature bI1, characterized in that it is equipped with a means capable of restricting the transition to the second specific game state or restricting the execution of the second transition judgment when the result of the first transition judgment corresponds to a transition to the first specific game state, even if the result of the second transition judgment corresponds to a transition to the second specific game state (a function of executing the process of step Sb5605 by the main control unit 162 in variants 6 and 8 of the second embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step Sb7202 by the main control unit 162 in variant 9).

In the above configuration, if a transition to a first specific game state is determined in a first transition determination that is performed first, even if a transition to a second specific game state is determined in a second transition determination that is performed thereafter, this is invalidated, or the execution of the second transition determination itself is restricted. This makes it possible to prioritize the transition to the first specific game state when the transition conditions to the first specific game state and the transition conditions to the second specific game state are met in the same game round.

Feature bI3. The gaming machine described in Feature bI2, wherein the predetermined update information is the number of times the result of the special determination has been the non-specific result.

The first specific game state is transitioned to based on the updated result of the number of times that the result of the special judgment is a non-specific result (the cumulative number of times of losing play), so that the player can predict the transition to the first specific game state before the updated result becomes a specified result. Therefore, if the transition to the first specific game state is not made even though the updated result becomes a specified result, the player is likely to notice that the transition to the first specific game state has not occurred. On the other hand, the second specific game state is transitioned to based on the results of the special judgment and the specific judgment, so that the player cannot predict the transition to the second specific game state in advance. In light of such characteristics, by prioritizing the transition to the first specific game state when the transition conditions to the first specific game state and the transition conditions to the second specific game state are met in the same play round, it becomes possible to adjust the specific game state to be transitioned to while suppressing the player's awareness.

Feature bI4. A gaming machine according to feature bI2 or feature bI3, characterized in that the first specific gaming state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the second specific gaming state.

According to the above configuration, when the conditions for transitioning to the first specific game state and the conditions for transitioning to the second specific game state are met in the same game round, the transition to the first specific game state is prioritized, making it possible to transition to the more advantageous specific game state.

Feature bI5. The gaming machine described in Feature bI1 is characterized in that it is equipped with a means for transitioning to a second specific gaming state when the result of the second transition determination corresponds to transitioning to a second specific gaming state, even if the result of the first transition determination corresponds to transitioning to a first specific gaming state.

In the above configuration, if a transition to the second specific game state is determined in the second transition determination performed later, even if a transition to the first specific game state was determined in the previous first transition determination, the result is invalidated. This makes it possible to prioritize the transition to the second specific game state when the transition conditions to the first specific game state and the transition conditions to the second specific game state are met in the same game round.

Feature bI6. A gaming machine according to feature bI5, characterized in that the second specific gaming state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first specific gaming state.

According to the above configuration, when the conditions for transitioning to the first specific game state and the conditions for transitioning to the second specific game state are met in the same game round, the transition to the second specific game state is prioritized, making it possible to transition to the more advantageous specific game state.

Feature bI7. A first means (a function of executing a ceiling reaching performance by the performance control device 143) for executing a predetermined first notification (a ceiling reaching performance) when the update result of the update means becomes a predetermined result or when the game moves to a first specific game state;
A second means (a function of executing a special reach miss effect by the effect control device 143) for executing a predetermined second notification (a special reach miss effect) when the result of the special determination or the specific determination becomes a predetermined determination result or when a transition is made to a second specific game state;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any of features bI2 to bI6, characterized in that the first transition judgment and the second transition judgment are configured to be performed at a predetermined timing (at the start of the fluctuation, while the fluctuation is being displayed) prior to the execution timing of the first notification and the second notification.

In the above configuration, the first notification is executed when the update result of the update means becomes a predetermined result or when a transition to the first specific game state occurs, and the second notification is executed when the result of the special judgment or specific judgment becomes a predetermined judgment result or when a transition to the second specific game state occurs, so that the player can be notified of the transition to the first specific game state or the transition to the second specific game state through these notifications. In this case, since the first transition judgment and the second transition judgment are performed prior to the timing of execution of the first notification and the second notification, when the transition conditions to the first specific game state and the transition conditions to the second specific game state are met in the same game round, the above notifications can be executed based on the adjustment results of the specific game state to be transitioned to. This makes it possible to prevent notifications that are inconsistent with the type of specific game state to be transitioned to.

Feature bI8. The game control means controls the game so that after the game action is performed, a notification corresponding to the notification result is performed within a predetermined notification period (confirmed display time);
A specific game state transition means capable of transitioning the game state to a first specific game state or a second specific game state based on the determination results of the first transition determination means and the second transition determination means (a function of executing a time-saving game state transition process by the main control device 162 according to the sixth, eighth, and ninth variants of the second embodiment),
A gaming machine described in any one of features bI1 to bI7, characterized in that the transition means for the specific game state is configured to be able to execute the transition at any specific timing (such as the start timing of the confirmation display in a special game round, a mid-way timing of the confirmation display, or the end timing of the confirmation display) during the period from the end of the game round operation to the start of the next game round.

When the game state transitions to a specific game state, it is expected that the player will realize that it is in the specific game state from the behavior of the gaming machine. For this reason, for example, if the transition to the specific game state occurs at the start or middle of a game round operation in a game round, the player's attention will be shifted to the transition to the specific game state even before the result of the special judgment is announced, and there is a concern that the role of the game round will not be properly fulfilled. In this regard, with this configuration, the transition to the specific game state occurs after the game round operation is completed, so that the transition to the specific game state can be made aware of after the result of the special judgment is announced. This makes it possible to prevent a loss of attention to the game round.

When this feature is applied to feature bI3, the following effect can be achieved: "Both the transition conditions to the first specific game state and the transition conditions to the second specific game state are met in a game round in which the result of the special judgment is a non-specific result (a so-called miss result). In such a configuration, if the transition to the specific game state based on the satisfaction of each transition condition is made at the start of a game round or in the middle of an operation for a game round, there is a concern that the player will be able to know the miss result in advance without realizing that the specific game state has been entered, even before the result of the special judgment is announced, and the role of the game round will not be properly fulfilled. By applying this feature to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the miss result from being known in advance."

When this feature is applied to the feature bI7, the following effect can be achieved: "In a configuration in which the first transition judgment and the second transition judgment are performed before the execution timing of the first notification and the second notification, each of these transition judgments is performed at a relatively early stage in the game round. In this case, if the transition to the specific game state is performed immediately at the time each of these transition judgments is performed, there is a concern that the player's attention will be shifted to the transition to the specific game state even before the result of the special judgment is not announced, and the role of the game round will not be properly fulfilled. In this regard, in this configuration, even if each transition judgment is completed before the result of the special judgment is announced, the transition to the specific game state based on the result of each transition judgment is performed after waiting for the start of the result announcement. As a result, even if the player notices the specific game state from the behavior of the gaming machine, it is possible to have the player pay attention to the game round until the result announcement and then shift their attention to the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to exert the effect of the feature bI7 while suppressing the loss of attention to the game round."

Feature bI9. The condition for ending the specific gaming state includes that the number of times the game has been played since the transition to the specific gaming state reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times;
A number update means (such as a function of executing the process of step Sb5504 by the main control device 162 according to the sixth, eighth, and ninth variants of the second embodiment) is provided for updating the number of times the game has been played since the game was switched to the specific game state or the remaining number of times the game has been played in the specific game state,
A gaming machine described in any of features bI1 to bI8, characterized in that in one game round, after the update is performed by the number update means, the first transition judgment is performed by the first transition judgment means, and then the second transition judgment is performed by the second transition judgment means.

According to the above configuration, the number of plays in the specific game state and the remaining number of plays that can be played in the specific game state are updated before the first transition judgment and the second transition judgment are executed. For example, if the second transition condition is met in the final play of the first specific game state, the first specific game state can be ended in that final play and then transitioned to the second specific game state. This makes it possible to transition from the first specific game state to the second specific game state without an intervening play in the normal game state, making it possible to achieve a state equivalent to an increase in the remaining number of plays in the specific game state.

Feature bI10. It is configured to control the progress of the game by repeatedly executing periodic processing (such as normal processing by the main control device 162) at a predetermined cycle,
The gaming machine described in feature bI9 is configured to be capable of executing the update by the number update means, the first transition judgment by the first transition judgment means, and the second transition judgment by the second transition judgment means in one processing round of the periodic processing.

In the above configuration, the game progress is controlled by repeatedly executing periodic processing, and the number of times updated and each transition determination are performed in the same processing round, so when transitioning from a preceding specific game state to a subsequent specific game state, it is possible to effectively prevent a game round in the normal game state from being inserted.

Feature bI11. A special judgment means (a function for executing a special drawing hit judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (a special drawing hit judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (a prize-winning in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63),
A special game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can transition to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result (a big win result);
A game round control means (a function for executing a special game round control process in the main control device 162, a function for executing a special game round display process in the performance control device 143) that controls the game round so that a game round operation is started based on the special judgment, and a notification result corresponding to the result of the special judgment is counted as one game round, and
Equipped with
As a gaming state, there is a specific gaming state (such as a high frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to a player than a normal gaming state and is different from a special gaming state,
The specific game states include a first specific game state (the second time-shortened game state or the third time-shortened game state B) to which a transition can be made based on the establishment of a predetermined first transition condition (reaching the ceiling number of times, reaching a predetermined number of points, etc., or winning a special losing result, winning a transition lottery, etc.), and a second specific game state (the third time-shortened game state A or the second time-shortened game state) to which a transition can be made based on the establishment of a predetermined second transition condition (winning a special losing result, winning a transition lottery, etc., reaching the ceiling number of times, reaching a predetermined number of points, etc.),
A first transition determination means for making a first transition determination as to whether or not to transition to a first specific gaming state (such as a function of executing a process for determining a transition to a third time-shortened gaming state by the main control device 162 according to Modification 6 and Modification 9 of the second embodiment, and a function of executing a process A for determining a transition to a third time-shortened gaming state by the main control device 162 according to Modification 8);
A second transition determination means for performing a second transition determination as to whether or not to transition to a second specific game state (such as a function of executing a process for determining transition to the second time-shortened game state by the main control device 162 according to Modification 6 and Modification 9 of the second embodiment, and a function of executing a process A for determining transition to the second time-shortened game state by the main control device 162 according to Modification 8),
Equipped with
a function of executing processing of step Sb5303 after executing processing of step Sb5302 in variant 6 of the second embodiment; a function of executing processing of step Sb6503 and then executing processing of step Sb6504 if a negative judgment is made in step Sb6502 in variant 8; a function of executing processing of step Sb7201 and then executing processing of step Sb7203 in variant 9, etc.

In the above configuration, in addition to the special game state to which a transition is made based on the result of a special judgment being a specific result, there is a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. In addition, as such specific game states, there is a first specific game state to which a transition is made when a first transition condition is satisfied, and a second specific game state to which a transition is made when a second transition condition is satisfied. In this way, in a gaming machine having multiple specific game states to which a transition is made based on different transition conditions, each of these transition conditions may be satisfied in the same game round. In this regard, in the above configuration, a first transition judgment is made as to whether or not to transition to the first specific game state, and then a second transition judgment is made as to whether or not to transition to the second specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not to adopt the result of the second transition judgment based on the result of the first transition judgment, and it becomes possible to control the game state in an appropriate manner.

It is possible to apply the configurations of features bI2 to bI10 to this feature. In this case, further effects can be achieved by applying these configurations.

Note that, to each of the configurations of the above features bI1 to bI11, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of features bA1 to bA12, features bB1 to bB10, features bC1 to bC9, features bD1 to bD6, features bE1 to bE10, features bF1 to bF10, features bG1 to bG8, features bH1 to bH8, features bI1 to bI11, features bJ1 to bJ10, features bK1 to bK10, features bL1 to bL9, features bM1 to bM10, and features bN1 to bN7 individually, or it is also possible to apply a combination of some or all of the technical ideas. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristics bJ group>
The group of features bJ is an invention group extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the variations or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted based on variations 7, 8, and 10 of the second embodiment.

The invention described in the feature bJ group has been made with a problem to be solved by the invention with respect to the background technology that "for example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and when the lottery result is a specific result, the game is transitioned to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)." "Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, there is still room for improvement in controlling the gaming state."

Feature bJ1. A special judgment means (a function for executing a special drawing hit judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (a special drawing hit judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (a prize-winning in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63),
A special game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can transition to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result (a big win result);
A game round control means (a function for executing a special game round control process in the main control device 162, a function for executing a special game round display process in the performance control device 143) that controls the game round so that a game round operation is started based on the special judgment, and a notification result corresponding to the result of the special judgment is counted as one game round, and
An update means (such as a function of executing the process of step Sb5504 by the main control unit 162 in the seventh and eighth variants of the second embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step Sb7604 by the main control unit 162 in the tenth variant) capable of updating predetermined update information (such as the number of times a game has lost, the number of points, etc.) based on a predetermined update trigger (such as the result of the win/lose lottery being a loser, or winning the points lottery, etc.);
Equipped with
As a gaming state, there is a specific gaming state (such as a high frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to a player than a normal gaming state and is different from a special gaming state,
The specific game states include a first specific game state (second time-saving game state) to which a transition can be made based on the update result of the update means becoming a predetermined result (ceiling number of times, a predetermined number of points, etc.), and a second specific game state (third time-saving game state) to which a transition can be made based on the result of the special judgment becoming a predetermined judgment result (special miss result) different from the specific result, or the result of a specific judgment (miss type judgment, transition lottery, etc.) made in a game round in which the result of the special judgment becomes a non-specific result (miss result) that does not correspond to a transition to the special game state becomes a predetermined judgment result (special miss result, winning the transition lottery, etc.),
A first transition determination means for making a first transition determination as to whether or not to transition to a first specific gaming state based on the update result of the update means (such as a function of executing a process for determining transition to a second time-shortened gaming state by the main control unit 162 according to the seventh and tenth modified examples of the second embodiment, and a function of executing a process B for determining transition to a second time-shortened gaming state by the main control unit 162 according to the eighth modified example);
A second transition determination means for making a second transition determination as to whether or not to transition to a second specific game state based on the result of the special determination or the specific determination (such as a function of executing a process for determining transition to a third time-shortened game state by the main control device 162 according to the seventh and tenth modified examples of the second embodiment, and a function of executing a process B for determining transition to a third time-shortened game state by the main control device 162 according to the eighth modified example);
Equipped with
a function of executing processing of step Sb6102 after executing processing of step Sb6101 in variant 7 of the second embodiment; a function of executing processing of step Sb6505 and then processing of step Sb6506 if a positive judgment is made in step Sb6502 in variant 8; a function of executing processing of step Sb7501 and then processing of step Sb7502 in variant 10, etc.

In the above configuration, in addition to the special game state to which the game is transitioned based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result, there is a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. In addition, as such specific game states, there is a first specific game state to which the game is transitioned based on the result of update information updated by a specific update trigger, and a second specific game state to which the game is transitioned based on the result of the special judgment being a specific judgment result different from the specific result, or the result of the specific judgment made in a game round in which the result of the special judgment was a non-specific result being a specific judgment result. In such a gaming machine, the transition condition to the first specific game state and the transition condition to the second specific game state may be satisfied in the same game round. In this regard, in the above configuration, the second transition judgment of whether to transition to the second specific game state is made before the first transition judgment of whether to transition to the first specific game state is made, so that it is possible to determine whether to adopt the result of the first transition judgment based on the result of the second transition judgment, and it becomes possible to control the game state appropriately.

Feature bJ2. A gaming machine according to feature bJ1, characterized in that it is provided with a means capable of restricting the transition to the first specific gaming state or restricting the execution of the first transition judgment when the result of the second transition judgment corresponds to a transition to the second specific gaming state, even if the result of the first transition judgment corresponds to a transition to the first specific gaming state (a function of executing the process of step Sb6601 by the main control unit 162 according to variant 8 of the second embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step Sb7601 by the main control unit 162 according to variant 10).

In the above configuration, if a transition to the second specific game state is determined in the second transition determination that is performed first, even if a transition to the first specific game state is determined in the first transition determination that is performed thereafter, this is invalidated, or the execution of the first transition determination itself is restricted. This allows the transition to the second specific game state to be prioritized when the transition conditions to the first specific game state and the transition conditions to the second specific game state can be met in the same game round.

Feature bJ3. A gaming machine according to feature bJ2, characterized in that it is provided with a means (a function of executing the processing of step Sb7601 by the main control device 162 according to variant 10) capable of restricting the update by the update means when the result of the second transition determination corresponds to a transition to a second specific gaming state.

For example, if the transition to the first specific game state is invalidated and the game state is transitioned to the second specific game state based on the fact that both the transition condition to the first specific game state and the transition condition to the second specific game state are satisfied in the same game round, there is a concern that the player will not be able to enjoy the benefits of the first specific game state. In this regard, in the above configuration, when the transition to the second specific game state is determined in the second transition determination, the execution of the update by the update means is restricted. This restricts the update result of the update means from becoming a predetermined result in the game round in which the transition condition to the second specific game state is satisfied, and thus prevents the transition condition to the first specific game state and the transition condition to the second specific game state from being satisfied in the same game round. This makes it possible to prioritize the transition to the second specific game state while preventing the player from being unable to enjoy the benefits of the first specific game state.

Feature bJ4. A gaming machine according to feature bJ3, characterized in that it is provided with a means capable of restricting the update by the update means when in the second specific gaming state (a function for executing the processing of steps Sb7602 and Sb7603 by the main control device 162 according to variant example 10).

In the above configuration, if the update by the update means is restricted based on the second transition judgment determining that a transition to the second specific game state has occurred, the restriction continues even after the transition to the second specific game state. This allows the update by the update means to be resumed after the second specific game state has ended, and prevents the transition condition to the first specific game state from being satisfied in the middle of the second specific game state.

Feature bJ5. A gaming machine described in any one of Features bJ2 to bJ4, characterized in that the second specific gaming state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first specific gaming state.

According to the above configuration, when the conditions for transitioning to the first specific game state and the conditions for transitioning to the second specific game state are met in the same game round, the transition to the second specific game state is prioritized, making it possible to transition to the more advantageous specific game state.

Feature bJ6. A gaming machine according to feature bJ1, characterized in that it is provided with a means (a function of executing the processing of steps Sb6303 and Sb6304 by the main control device 162 according to variant 7) capable of transitioning to the first specific gaming state when the result of the first transition determination corresponds to transitioning to the first specific gaming state, even if the result of the second transition determination corresponds to transitioning to the second specific gaming state.

In the above configuration, if a transition to the first specific game state is determined in the first transition determination performed later, even if a transition to the second specific game state was determined in the previous second transition determination, the result is invalidated. This makes it possible to prioritize the transition to the first specific game state when the transition conditions to the first specific game state and the transition conditions to the second specific game state can be met in the same game round.

Feature bJ7. The gaming machine described in feature bJ6, wherein the predetermined update information is the number of times the special determination has resulted in the non-specific result.

The first specific game state is transitioned to based on the updated result of the number of times that the result of the special judgment is a non-specific result (the cumulative number of times of losing play), so that the player can predict the transition to the first specific game state before the updated result becomes a specified result. Therefore, if the transition to the first specific game state is not made even though the updated result becomes a specified result, the player is likely to notice that the transition to the first specific game state has not occurred. On the other hand, the second specific game state is transitioned to based on the results of the special judgment and the specific judgment, so that the player cannot predict the transition to the second specific game state in advance. In light of such characteristics, by prioritizing the transition to the first specific game state when the transition conditions to the first specific game state and the transition conditions to the second specific game state are met in the same play round, it becomes possible to adjust the specific game state to be transitioned to while suppressing the player's awareness.

Feature bJ8. A first means (a function of executing a ceiling reaching performance by the performance control device 143) for executing a predetermined first notification (a ceiling reaching performance) when the update result of the update means becomes a predetermined result or when the game moves to a first specific game state;
A second means (a function of executing a special reach miss effect by the effect control device 143) for executing a predetermined second notification (a special reach miss effect) when the result of the special determination or the specific determination becomes a predetermined determination result or when a transition is made to a second specific game state;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any of features bJ2 to bJ7, characterized in that the first transition judgment and the second transition judgment are configured to be performed at a predetermined timing (at the start of the fluctuation, while the fluctuation is displayed) prior to the execution timing of the first notification and the second notification.

In the above configuration, the first notification is executed when the update result of the update means becomes a predetermined result or when a transition to the first specific game state occurs, and the second notification is executed when the result of the special judgment or specific judgment becomes a predetermined judgment result or when a transition to the second specific game state occurs, so that the player can be notified of the transition to the first specific game state or the transition to the second specific game state through these notifications. In this case, since the first transition judgment and the second transition judgment are performed prior to the timing of execution of the first notification and the second notification, when the transition conditions to the first specific game state and the transition conditions to the second specific game state can be satisfied in the same game round, the above notifications can be executed based on the adjustment results of the specific game state to be transitioned to. This makes it possible to prevent notifications that are inconsistent with the type of specific game state to be transitioned to.

Feature bJ9. The specific game state termination condition includes that the number of times of play after transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times;
A number update means (such as a function of executing the process of step Sb5504 by the main control device 162 according to the seventh, eighth, and tenth variants of the second embodiment) is provided for updating the number of times the game has been played since the game was switched to the specific game state or the remaining number of times the game has been played in the specific game state;
A gaming machine described in any of features bJ1 to bJ8, characterized in that in one game round, after the update is performed by the number update means, the first transition determination is performed by the first transition determination means, and then the second transition determination is performed by the second transition determination means.

According to the above configuration, the number of plays in the specific game state and the remaining number of plays that can be played in the specific game state are updated before the first transition judgment and the second transition judgment are executed. For example, if the second transition condition is met in the final play of the first specific game state, the first specific game state can be ended in that final play and then transitioned to the second specific game state. This makes it possible to transition from the first specific game state to the second specific game state without an intervening play in the normal game state, making it possible to achieve a state equivalent to an increase in the remaining number of plays in the specific game state.

Feature bJ10. The game progress is controlled by repeatedly executing periodic processing (such as normal processing by the main control device 162) at a predetermined cycle.
The gaming machine described in feature bJ9 is configured to be capable of executing the update by the number of times update means, the first transition judgment by the first transition judgment means, and the second transition judgment by the second transition judgment means in the same processing round of the periodic processing.

In the above configuration, the game progress is controlled by repeatedly executing periodic processing, and the number of times updated and each transition determination are performed in the same processing round, so when transitioning from a preceding specific game state to a subsequent specific game state, it is possible to effectively prevent a game round in the normal game state from being inserted.

Note that, to each of the configurations of the above features bJ1 to bJ10, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of features bA1 to bA12, features bB1 to bB10, features bC1 to bC9, features bD1 to bD6, features bE1 to bE10, features bF1 to bF10, features bG1 to bG8, features bH1 to bH8, features bI1 to bI11, features bJ1 to bJ10, features bK1 to bK10, features bL1 to bL9, features bM1 to bM10, and features bN1 to bN7 individually, or it is also possible to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature bK group>
The features bK group are a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the variations or combinations thereof, and are mainly extracted based on variations 6 and 8 of the second embodiment described above.

The invention described in the feature bK group has been made with a problem to be solved by the invention with respect to the background technology that "for example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and when the lottery result is a specific result, the game is transitioned to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)."

Feature bK1. A special judgment means (a function for executing a special drawing hit judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (a special drawing hit judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (a prize-winning in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63),
A special game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can transition to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result (a big win result);
Equipped with
As a gaming state, there is a specific gaming state (such as a high frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to a player than a normal gaming state and is different from a special gaming state,
The specific game states include a first specific game state (the second time-shortened game state or the third time-shortened game state B) to which a transition can be made based on the establishment of a predetermined first transition condition (reaching the ceiling number of times, reaching a predetermined number of points, etc., or winning a special losing result, winning a transition lottery, etc.), and a second specific game state (the third time-shortened game state A or the second time-shortened game state) to which a transition can be made based on the establishment of a predetermined second transition condition (winning a special losing result, winning a transition lottery, etc., reaching the ceiling number of times, reaching a predetermined number of points, etc.) which is more disadvantageous to a player than the first specific game state and different from the first transition condition,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to restrict transition to a second specific gaming state when the second transition condition is satisfied while in a first specific gaming state (e.g., the flow when a positive judgment is made in step Sb5603 and a negative judgment is made in step Sb5604).

In the above configuration, in addition to the special game state to which a transition is made based on the result of a special judgment being a specific result, there is a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. In addition, as such specific game states, there is a first specific game state to which a transition is made when a first transition condition is satisfied, and a second specific game state that is less advantageous than the first specific game state and to which a transition is made when a second transition condition is satisfied. In such a case, if the second transition condition is satisfied in a situation in which the first specific game state is being used, transition to the second specific game state is restricted, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being treated at a disadvantage, and it is possible to preferably control the game state.

Feature bK2. A game round control means (a function for executing a special game round control process in the main control device 162, a function for executing a special game round display process in the performance control device 143) that controls the game round so that a game round operation is started based on the special judgment, and a notification result corresponding to the result of the special judgment is regarded as one game round, and
a first transition determination means for performing a first transition determination as to whether or not to transition to a first specific gaming state (a function for executing a process for determining a transition to a second time-shortened gaming state in step Sb5302 or step Sb6503 by the main control device 162 according to the sixth and eighth variants of the second embodiment, or a function for executing a process for determining a transition to a third time-shortened gaming state in step Sb6505 by the main control device 162 according to the eighth variant of the second embodiment);
A second transition determination means for performing a second transition determination as to whether or not to transition to a second specific gaming state (such as a function of executing a process for determining a transition to a third time-shortened gaming state in step Sb5303 or step Sb6504 by the main control device 162 according to the sixth and eighth variants of the second embodiment, or a function of executing a process for determining a transition to a second time-shortened gaming state in step Sb6506 by the main control device 162 according to the eighth variant of the second embodiment),
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in feature bK1, characterized in that it is configured so that, in one game round, after the first transition determination is made by the first transition determination means, the second transition determination is made by the second transition determination means (a function of executing the processing of step Sb5303 after executing the processing of step Sb5302 in variant 6 of the second embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step Sb6503 and then executing the processing of step Sb6504 if a negative determination is made in step Sb6502 in variant 8, a function of executing the processing of step Sb6505 and then executing the processing of step Sb6506 if a positive determination is made in step Sb6502, etc.).

In a gaming machine having a plurality of specific game states to which a transition is made under different transition conditions, each of these transition conditions may be satisfied in the same game round. In consideration of such a situation, this feature is configured to restrict the transition to the second specific game state when the second transition condition is satisfied in a situation in which the first specific game state is in effect, and then to perform a first transition judgment as to whether or not to transition to the first specific game state, and then to perform a second transition judgment as to whether or not to transition to the second specific game state. With this configuration, when both the first transition condition and the second transition condition are satisfied in the same game round, even if the first transition judgment determines that the first specific game state will be transitioned to, and the second transition judgment determines that the second transition condition is satisfied, the transition to the second specific game state is avoided by the above-mentioned restriction. As a result, a transition to the advantageous first specific game state is implemented, and it becomes possible to control the game state in an appropriate manner.

Feature bK3. Equipped with a predetermined notification execution means (a function of executing a game round performance by the performance control device 143) capable of executing a predetermined notification (a ceiling reaching performance, a special reach miss performance) corresponding to the establishment of the first transition condition or the transition to the first specific game state in a game round,
The gaming machine described in feature bK2 is characterized in that the first transition judgment and the second transition judgment are configured to be performed at a predetermined timing (at the start of the fluctuation, while the fluctuation is being displayed) prior to the execution timing of the predetermined notification by the predetermined notification execution means.

In the above configuration, by implementing a predetermined notification in a game round, it becomes possible to notify the player of the establishment of the first transition condition or the transition to the first specific game state. In this case, since the first transition judgment and the second transition judgment are implemented prior to the timing of the execution of the above-mentioned predetermined notification, in a game round in which both the first transition condition and the second transition condition are established, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the predetermined notification based on the results of each transition judgment. In other words, when both the first transition condition and the second transition condition are established in the same game round and a transition to the first specific game state is implemented, it becomes possible to preferably implement the above-mentioned predetermined notification.

Feature bK4. The specific notification execution means (the function of executing the game round performance based on the variation pattern from the main control device 162 in the performance control device 143) is provided, which is capable of executing the specific notification (special reach miss performance, ceiling reach performance) corresponding to the establishment of the second transition condition or the transition to the second specific game state in the game round,
A gaming machine described in feature bK2 or feature bK3, characterized in that the first transition judgment and the second transition judgment are configured to be performed at a predetermined timing (at the start of the fluctuation, during the fluctuation display) prior to the execution timing of the specific notification by the specific notification execution means.

In the above configuration, by implementing a specific notification in a game round, it becomes possible to notify the player of the establishment of the second transition condition or the transition to the second specific game state. In this case, since the first transition judgment and the second transition judgment are implemented before the timing of the execution of the specific notification, in a game round in which both the first transition condition and the second transition condition are established, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a specific notification based on the results of each transition judgment. As a result, even if the second transition condition is established, if the first transition condition is also established at the same time and the transition to the second specific game state is restricted, the implementation of the specific notification can be canceled. Therefore, when both the first transition condition and the second transition condition are established in the same game round, it is possible to prevent a notification that is inconsistent with the type of specific game state to be transitioned to being issued.

Feature bK5. A gaming machine described in any one of features bK2 to bK4, characterized in that the first transition judgment and the second transition judgment are configured to be executed when a game round is started.

In the above configuration, the first transition judgment and the second transition judgment are executed at the start of a game round, so when a notification corresponding to the fulfillment of the first transition condition or a notification corresponding to the fulfillment of the second transition condition is made in a game round, it is possible to control whether or not to make each notification based on the results of the above transition judgments. This makes it possible to prevent a notification that is inconsistent with the type of specific game state to be transitioned to when both the first transition condition and the second transition condition are fulfilled in the same game round. This is also effective when notifying the fulfillment of the first transition condition or the second transition condition based on the result of a game round.

When this feature is applied to feature bK3 or feature bK4, it has the following effect: "It can deal appropriately with cases where the above-mentioned predetermined notifications or specific notifications are executed in the middle of a game round, as well as cases where these notifications are executed at the beginning of a game round. Also, in a gaming machine that is configured to set the game round presentation to be executed in a game round at the start of the game round, it can flexibly deal with cases where the above-mentioned predetermined notifications or specific notifications are incorporated into the game round presentation that is set."

Feature bK6. The game control means controls the game so that after the game action is performed, a notification corresponding to the notification result is performed within a predetermined notification period (determined display time);
A specific game state transition means (a function of executing a time-saving game state transition process by the main control device 162 according to the sixth and eighth variants of the second embodiment) capable of transitioning the game state to a first specific game state or a second specific game state based on the determination results of the first transition determination means and the second transition determination means is provided;
A gaming machine described in any of features bK2 to bK5, characterized in that the transition means for the specific game state is configured to be able to execute the transition at any specific timing (the start timing of the confirmation display in a special game round, the midway timing of the confirmation display, the end timing of the confirmation display, etc.) during the period from the end of the game round operation to the start of the next game round.

When the game state transitions to a specific game state, it is expected that the player will realize that it is in the specific game state from the behavior of the gaming machine. For this reason, for example, if the transition to the specific game state occurs at the start or middle of a game round operation in a game round, the player's attention will be shifted to the transition to the specific game state even before the result of the special judgment is announced, raising concerns that the role of the game round will not be fulfilled properly. In this regard, with this configuration, the transition to the specific game state occurs after the game round operation is completed, so that the transition to the specific game state can be made aware of after the result of the special judgment is announced. This makes it possible to prevent a loss of attention to the game round.

When this feature is applied to feature bK3 or feature bK4, "in a configuration in which the first transition judgment and the second transition judgment are made prior to the timing of execution of the above-mentioned predetermined notification or specific notification, each of these transition judgments may be made at a relatively early stage in a game round. For example, in a configuration in which the setting for executing the predetermined notification is made at the start of a game round, each of the above transition judgments will also need to be made at the start of the game round. In such a case, if the configuration is such that a transition to a specific game state occurs immediately upon execution of each of these transition judgments, the player's attention will be shifted to the transition to the specific game state even before the result of the special judgment is notified, There is a concern that the role of the game round will not be properly fulfilled. In this regard, in this configuration, even if each transition judgment has been completed before the result of the special judgment is notified, the transition to the specific game state based on the results of each transition judgment is not performed until the result notification begins. This makes it possible to achieve a configuration in which, even if the player notices the specific game state from the behavior of the gaming machine, the player's attention is directed to the game round until the result notification, and then the player's interest shifts to the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned effects of feature bK3 or feature bK4 while preventing the player's attention from being lost to the game round. "

In addition, when this feature is applied to the above feature bK5, "once the first transition judgment and the second transition judgment are completed, all that remains is to make a transition to a specific game state, so in a configuration in which the first transition judgment and the second transition judgment are made at the start of a game round, it is natural that the transition to the specific game state is also made at the start of the game round. However, if the transition to the specific game state is made at the start of a game round, the player's attention will be shifted to the transition to the specific game state even before the result of the special judgment is announced, and there is a concern that the role of the game round will not be fulfilled properly. In this regard, in this configuration, even if each of the above transition judgments is made at the start of a game round, the transition to the specific game state based on the results of each transition judgment is made after waiting for the start of the result notification. As a result, even if the player notices the specific game state from the behavior of the gaming machine, it is possible to configure the player to focus on the game round until the result notification and then shift their interest to the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the above effect of the above feature bK5 while preventing the attention to the game round from being lost. "

Feature bK7. The gaming machine described in feature bK6, characterized in that the first transition condition and the second transition condition can be satisfied in a game in which the result of the special judgment is a non-specific result (a losing result) that does not correspond to a transition to a special gaming state.

In the above configuration, the first transition condition and the second transition condition are met in a game round in which the result of the special judgment is a non-specific result (a so-called miss result). In this configuration, if the transition to a specific game state based on the satisfaction of each transition condition is made at the start of a game round or during the operation for the game round, even before the result of the special judgment is announced, the player may be able to know in advance the miss result without realizing that he or she is in the specific game state, which raises concerns that the role of the game round will not be properly fulfilled. By applying the above feature bK6 to this configuration, it becomes possible to exert the above effects of the above features bK2 to bK5 while suppressing the possibility of knowing in advance the miss result.

Feature bK8. The specific game state termination condition includes that the number of times of play after transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times;
A number of times update means (a function of executing the process of step Sb5301 in the main control device 162) for updating the number of times of play after transition to the specific game state or the remaining number of times of play in the specific game state is provided;
A gaming machine described in any of features bK2 to bK7, characterized in that in one game round, after the update is performed by the number update means, the first transition determination is performed by the first transition determination means, and then the second transition determination is performed by the second transition determination means.

According to the above configuration, the remaining number of times that the specific game state can be played is updated before the first transition judgment and the second transition judgment are executed. For example, if the second transition condition is met in the final play of the first specific game state, the first specific game state can be ended in that final play and then transitioned to the second specific game state. This makes it possible to transition from the first specific game state to the second specific game state without an intervening play in the normal game state, and essentially makes it possible to create a state in which the remaining number of times in the specific game state is added.

Feature bK9. It is configured to control the progress of the game by repeatedly executing periodic processing (such as normal processing by the main control device 162) at a predetermined cycle,
The gaming machine described in feature bK8 is configured to be capable of executing the update by the number of times update means, the first transition judgment by the first transition judgment means, and the second transition judgment by the second transition judgment means in one processing round of the periodic processing.

In the above configuration, the game progress is controlled by repeatedly executing periodic processing, and the number of times updated and each transition determination are performed in the same processing round, so when transitioning from a preceding specific game state to a subsequent specific game state, it is possible to effectively prevent a game round in the normal game state from being inserted.

Feature bK10. The specific game state termination condition includes that the number of times of play after transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times;
A gaming machine according to any one of features bK1 to bK9, characterized in that the upper limit number of times the first specific gaming state can be played is greater than the upper limit number of times the second specific gaming state can be played.

In the above configuration, the upper limit number (remaining number of times) of the first specific game state is greater than the upper limit number of times of the second specific game state, making the first specific game state more advantageous for the player than the second specific game state. By applying any of the configurations of features bK1 to bK9 to this configuration, each of these features can be made to function effectively, and each of the above effects can be optimally exerted.

Note that, to each of the configurations of the above features bK1 to bK10, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of features bA1 to bA12, features bB1 to bB10, features bC1 to bC9, features bD1 to bD6, features bE1 to bE10, features bF1 to bF10, features bG1 to bG8, features bH1 to bH8, features bI1 to bI11, features bJ1 to bJ10, features bK1 to bK10, features bL1 to bL9, features bM1 to bM10, and features bN1 to bN7 individually, or it is also possible to apply a combination of some or all of the technical ideas. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature b L group>
The group of features bL is an invention group extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the modifications or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted based on the seventh modification of the second embodiment.

The invention described in the feature bL group has been made with a problem to be solved by the invention with respect to the background technology, which is "for example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and if the lottery result is a specific result, the game is transitioned to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)." The problem is that "here, there is still room for improvement in controlling the gaming state in gaming machines such as those exemplified above."

Feature bL1. A special judgment means (a function for executing a special drawing hit judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (a special drawing hit judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (a prize-winning in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63),
A special game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can transition to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result (a big win result);
A game round control means (a function for executing a special game round control process in the main control device 162, a function for executing a special game round display process in the performance control device 143) that controls the game round so that a game round operation is started based on the special judgment, and a notification result corresponding to the result of the special judgment is counted as one game round, and
Equipped with
As a gaming state, there is a specific gaming state (such as a high frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to a player than a normal gaming state and is different from a special gaming state,
The specific game states include a first specific game state (second time-saving game state) to which a transition can be made based on the establishment of a predetermined first transition condition (reaching a ceiling number of times, reaching a predetermined number of points, etc.), and a second specific game state (third time-saving game state) to which a transition can be made based on the establishment of a predetermined second transition condition (winning a special losing result, winning a transition lottery, etc.) which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first specific game state and different from the first transition condition,
A first transition determination means (such as a function of executing a process for determining whether or not to transition to a first specific gaming state by the main control device 162)
A second transition determination means (such as a function of executing a process for determining whether or not to transition to a third time-saving game state by the main control device 162) performs a second transition determination as to whether or not to transition to a second specific game state;
Equipped with
When the first transition condition is satisfied in the second specific game state, it is possible to allow the transition to the first specific game state (the flow when the affirmative determination is made in step Sb6301),
A gaming machine characterized in that, in one game round, after the second transition determination is made by the second transition determination means, the first transition determination is made by the first transition determination means (such as a function of executing processing of step Sb6102 after executing processing of step Sb6101 in a main control device 162 relating to variant example 7 of the second embodiment).

In the above configuration, in addition to the special game state to which a transition is made based on the result of a special judgment being a specific result, there is a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. In addition, as such specific game states, there is a first specific game state to which a transition is made when a first transition condition is satisfied, and a second specific game state that is less advantageous than the first specific game state and to which a transition is made when a second transition condition is satisfied. In this way, in a gaming machine that has multiple specific game states to which a transition is made based on different transition conditions, it is possible that each of these transition conditions will be satisfied in the same play round.

In consideration of such a situation, the above configuration is configured to allow a transition to the first specific game state when the first transition condition is satisfied in a situation where the game is in the second specific game state, and then to make a second transition judgment as to whether or not to transition to the second specific game state, and then to make a first transition judgment as to whether or not to transition to the first specific game state. With this configuration, when both the first transition condition and the second transition condition are satisfied in the same game round, even if the second transition judgment judges that a transition to the second specific game state should be made, the first transition judgment judges that a transition to the first specific game state should be made thereafter, thereby canceling the result of the previous second transition judgment. As a result, a transition to the advantageous first specific game state is made, and it becomes possible to suitably control the game state.

Feature bL2. A predetermined notification execution means (a function of executing a game round performance by the performance control device 143) capable of executing a predetermined notification (a ceiling reaching performance, a special reach missing performance) corresponding to the establishment of the first transition condition or the transition to the first specific game state in a game round,
The gaming machine described in feature bL1 is characterized in that the first transition judgment and the second transition judgment are configured to be performed at a predetermined timing (at the start of the fluctuation, during the fluctuation display) prior to the execution timing of the predetermined notification by the predetermined notification execution means.

In the above configuration, by implementing a predetermined notification in a game round, it becomes possible to notify the player of the establishment of the first transition condition or the transition to the first specific game state. In this case, since the first transition judgment and the second transition judgment are implemented prior to the timing of the execution of the above-mentioned predetermined notification, in a game round in which both the first transition condition and the second transition condition are established, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the predetermined notification based on the results of each transition judgment. In other words, when both the first transition condition and the second transition condition are established in the same game round and a transition to the first specific game state is implemented, it becomes possible to preferably implement the above-mentioned predetermined notification.

Feature bL3. Equipped with a specific notification execution means (a function of executing a game round performance based on a variation pattern from the main control device 162 in the performance control device 143) capable of executing a specific notification (a special reach miss performance, a ceiling reaching performance) corresponding to the establishment of the second transition condition or the transition to the second specific game state in a game round,
A gaming machine described in feature bL1 or feature bL2, characterized in that the first transition judgment and the second transition judgment are configured to be performed at a predetermined timing (at the start of the fluctuation, during the fluctuation display) prior to the execution timing of the specific notification by the specific notification execution means.

In the above configuration, by implementing a specific notification in a game round, it becomes possible to notify the player of the establishment of the second transition condition or the transition to the second specific game state. In this case, since the first transition judgment and the second transition judgment are implemented before the timing of the execution of the specific notification, in a game round in which both the first transition condition and the second transition condition are established, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a specific notification based on the results of each transition judgment. As a result, even if the second transition condition is established, if the first transition condition is also established at the same time and the transition to the second specific game state is restricted, the implementation of the specific notification can be canceled. Therefore, when both the first transition condition and the second transition condition are established in the same game round, it is possible to prevent a notification that is inconsistent with the type of specific game state to be transitioned to being issued.

Feature bL4. A gaming machine described in any one of Features bL1 to bL3, characterized in that the first transition judgment and the second transition judgment are configured to be executed when a game round is started.

In the above configuration, the first transition judgment and the second transition judgment are executed at the start of a game round, so when a notification corresponding to the fulfillment of the first transition condition or a notification corresponding to the fulfillment of the second transition condition is made in a game round, it is possible to control whether or not to make each notification based on the results of the above transition judgments. This makes it possible to prevent a notification that is inconsistent with the type of specific game state to be transitioned to when both the first transition condition and the second transition condition are fulfilled in the same game round. This is also effective when notifying the fulfillment of the first transition condition or the second transition condition based on the result of a game round.

When this feature is applied to feature bL2 or feature bL3, it has the following effect: "It can deal appropriately with cases where the above-mentioned predetermined notifications or specific notifications are executed in the middle of a game round, as well as cases where these notifications are executed at the beginning of a game round. Also, in a gaming machine that is configured to set the game round presentation to be executed in a game round at the start of the game round, it can flexibly deal with cases where the above-mentioned predetermined notifications or specific notifications are incorporated into the game round presentation that is set."

Feature bL5. The game control means controls the game so that after the game action is performed, a notification corresponding to the notification result is performed within a predetermined notification period (determined display time);
A specific game state transition means (a function of executing a time-saving game state transition process by the main control device 162 according to the seventh modified example of the second embodiment) capable of transitioning the game state to a first specific game state or a second specific game state based on the determination results of the first transition determination means and the second transition determination means,
A gaming machine described in any of features bL1 to bL4, characterized in that the transition means for the specific game state is configured to be able to execute the transition at any specific timing (such as the start timing of the confirmation display in a special game round, a mid-way timing of the confirmation display, or the end timing of the confirmation display) during the period from the end of the game round operation to the start of the next game round.

When the game state transitions to a specific game state, it is expected that the player will realize that it is in the specific game state from the behavior of the gaming machine. For this reason, for example, if the transition to the specific game state occurs at the start or middle of a game round operation in a game round, the player's attention will be shifted to the transition to the specific game state even before the result of the special judgment is announced, raising concerns that the role of the game round will not be fulfilled properly. In this regard, with this configuration, the transition to the specific game state occurs after the game round operation is completed, so that the transition to the specific game state can be made aware of after the result of the special judgment is announced. This makes it possible to prevent a loss of attention to the game round.

When this feature is applied to the feature bL2 or feature bL3, the following effect can be achieved: "In a configuration in which the first transition judgment and the second transition judgment are performed before the execution timing of the predetermined notification or the specific notification, the transition judgments are performed at a relatively early stage in the game round. In this case, if the transition to the specific game state is performed immediately at the time of the execution of each transition judgment, there is a concern that the player's attention will be shifted to the transition to the specific game state even before the result of the special judgment is not announced, and the role of the game round will not be properly fulfilled. In this regard, in this configuration, even if each transition judgment is completed before the result of the special judgment is announced, the transition to the specific game state based on the result of each transition judgment is performed after waiting for the start of the result announcement. As a result, even if the player notices the specific game state from the behavior of the gaming machine, it is possible to have the player pay attention to the game round until the result announcement and then shift their attention to the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to exert each of the effects of the feature bL2 or feature bL3 while suppressing the loss of attention to the game round."

In addition, when this feature is applied to the above feature bL4, "once the first transition judgment and the second transition judgment are completed, all that remains is to make a transition to a specific game state, so in a configuration in which the first transition judgment and the second transition judgment are made at the start of a game round, it is natural that the transition to the specific game state is also made at the start of the game round. However, if the transition to the specific game state is made at the start of a game round, the player's attention will be shifted to the transition to the specific game state even before the result of the special judgment is announced, and there is a concern that the role of the game round will not be fulfilled properly. In this regard, in this configuration, even if each of the above transition judgments is made at the start of a game round, the transition to the specific game state based on the results of each of those transition judgments is made after waiting for the start of the result notification. As a result, even if the player notices the specific game state from the behavior of the gaming machine, it is possible to have the player focus on the game round until the result notification and then shift their interest to the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to exert each of the above effects of the above feature bL4 while preventing the player's attention to the game round from being lost. " effect can be achieved.

Feature bL6. The gaming machine described in Feature bL5, characterized in that the first transition condition and the second transition condition can be satisfied in a game in which the result of the special judgment is a non-specific result (a losing result) that does not correspond to a transition to a special game state.

In the above configuration, the first transition condition and the second transition condition are met in a game round in which the result of the special judgment is a non-specific result (a so-called losing result). In this configuration, if the transition to a specific game state based on the satisfaction of each transition condition is made at the start of a game round or during the operation for the game round, even before the result of the special judgment is announced, the player may be able to know in advance the losing result without realizing that he or she is in the specific game state, which raises concerns that the role of the game round will not be properly fulfilled. By applying the above feature bL5 to this configuration, it becomes possible to exert the effects of the above features bL1 to bL4 while suppressing the possibility of knowing in advance the losing result.

Feature bL7. The specific game state termination condition includes that the number of times of play after transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times;
A number update means (a function of executing the process of step Sb5301 in the main control device 162) is provided for updating the number of times of play after transition to the specific game state or the remaining number of times of play in the specific game state,
A gaming machine described in any of features bL1 to bL6, characterized in that in one game round, after the update is performed by the number update means, the second transition determination is performed by the second transition determination means, and then the first transition determination is performed by the first transition determination means.

According to the above configuration, the number of plays in the specific game state and the remaining number of plays that can be played in the specific game state are updated before the first transition judgment and the second transition judgment are executed. For example, if the second transition condition is met in the final play of the first specific game state, the first specific game state can be ended in that final play and then transitioned to the second specific game state. This makes it possible to transition from the first specific game state to the second specific game state without an intervening play in the normal game state, making it possible to achieve a state equivalent to an increase in the remaining number of plays in the specific game state.

Feature bL8. The game progress is controlled by repeatedly executing periodic processing (such as normal processing by the main control device 162) at a predetermined cycle.
The gaming machine described in feature bL7 is configured to be capable of executing the update by the number of times update means, the first transition judgment by the first transition judgment means, and the second transition judgment by the second transition judgment means in one processing round of the periodic processing.

In the above configuration, the game progress is controlled by repeatedly executing periodic processing, and the number of times updated and each transition determination are performed in the same processing round, so when transitioning from a preceding specific game state to a subsequent specific game state, it is possible to effectively prevent a game round in the normal game state from being inserted.

Feature bL9. The specific game state termination condition includes that the number of times of play after transition to the specific game state reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times;
A gaming machine described in any one of features bL1 to bL8, characterized in that the upper limit number of times the first specific game state can be played is greater than the upper limit number of times the second specific game state can be played.

In the above configuration, the upper limit number (remaining number of times) of the first specific game state is greater than the upper limit number of times of the second specific game state, making the first specific game state more advantageous for the player than the second specific game state. By applying any of the configurations of features bL1 to bL8 to this configuration, each of these features can be made to function effectively, and each of the above effects can be optimally exerted.

Note that, to each of the configurations of the above features bL1 to bL9, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of features bA1 to bA12, features bB1 to bB10, features bC1 to bC9, features bD1 to bD6, features bE1 to bE10, features bF1 to bF10, features bG1 to bG8, features bH1 to bH8, features bI1 to bI11, features bJ1 to bJ10, features bK1 to bK10, features bL1 to bL9, features bM1 to bM10, and features bN1 to bN7 individually, or it is also possible to apply a combination of some or all of the technical ideas. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristics b M group>
The group of features bM is an invention group extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the modifications or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted based on the modification 10 of the second embodiment.

The invention described in the feature bM group has been made with a problem to be solved by the invention with respect to the background technology, which is "for example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and when the lottery result is a specific result, the game is transitioned to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)."

Feature bM1. A special judgment means (a function for executing a special drawing hit judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (a special drawing hit judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (a prize-winning in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63),
A special game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can transition to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result (a big win result);
Equipped with
As game states, there are a first game state (a second time-shortened game state) and a second game state (a third time-shortened game state, a first time-shortened game state) which are more advantageous to a player than a normal game state and different from a special game state,
An update means (such as a function of executing the process of step Sb7604 by the main control device 162 according to the modified example 10 of the second embodiment) capable of updating predetermined update information (such as the number of times a game has lost, the number of points, etc.) based on a predetermined update trigger (such as the result of the winning/losing lottery being a losing result, winning the point lottery, etc.);
A transition means (such as a function of executing a process for determining whether the main control unit 162 is in the second time-saving game state or a process for transitioning to the time-saving game state) is capable of transitioning to the first game state based on the update result of the update means becoming a predetermined result (such as a ceiling number of times or a predetermined number of points);
An update limiting means capable of limiting the update by the update means when in the second gaming state (such as a function of executing the processes of steps Sb7602 and Sb7603 by the main control device 162 according to the modified example 10 of the second embodiment);
A gaming machine comprising:

In the above configuration, in addition to the special game state to which the player transitions based on the result of a special judgment being a specific result, there are a first game state and a second game state that are more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. Of these, the first game state is transitioned to based on the result of update information, which is updated at a specified update trigger, being a specified result.

Here, depending on the timing of the transition to the second gaming state, the update result of the update means may become a predetermined result in the middle of the second gaming state. In this case, it is possible to invalidate the reaching of the predetermined result under such circumstances in order to avoid overlapping implementation of the first gaming state and the second gaming state. However, there is a concern that the game played with the aim of the update result becoming the predetermined result will be for naught, making the player feel unpleasant. In this regard, in the present configuration, since updates by the update means are limited when in the second gaming state, it is possible to prevent the update result of the update means from becoming a predetermined result in the middle of the second gaming state. This prevents the reaching of the predetermined result from being invalidated, making it possible to control the gaming state in an appropriate manner.

Feature bM2. A gaming machine according to feature bM1, characterized in that it is provided with a means (such as a function for executing the processing of step Sb7602 by the main control device 162 relating to variant 10 of the second embodiment) capable of releasing the restriction imposed by the update restriction means when the second gaming state ends.

According to the above configuration, when the second game state ends, the update by the update means is resumed. This allows the player to play again from the continuation of the update result before the transition to the second game state, aiming for a predetermined result.

Feature bM3. A game round control means (a function for executing a special chart game round control process in the main control device 162, a function for executing a special chart variable display process in the performance control device 143) that controls the game round so that a game round operation is started based on the special judgment, and a notification result corresponding to the result of the special judgment is counted as one game round, and
A second game state transition means (a function for executing a process for determining whether the main control unit 162 transitions to the third time-saving game state, a process for transitioning to the time-saving game state, etc.) is capable of transitioning to the second game state when a predetermined transition opportunity (a special miss result) is established;
A means capable of restricting the update by the update means in a predetermined game round in which the predetermined transition opportunity (a special losing result) is established (such as a function of executing the process of step Sb7601 by the main control device 162 according to the modified example 10 of the second embodiment);
A gaming machine according to feature bM1 or feature bM2, characterized in that it is equipped with:

In the above configuration, in a game round in which the transition condition to the second game state is met, the execution of the update by the update means is restricted. As a result, when a situation arises in which both a transition trigger to the second game state and the update result of the update means becoming a predetermined result (a transition trigger to the first game state) can be met in the same game round, it is possible to postpone the achievement of the predetermined result (transition to the first game state) while prioritizing the transition to the second game state. Therefore, it is possible to avoid transition to the first game state and transition to the second game state, thereby preventing the two game states from overlapping.

In addition, in the above configuration, the update information is resumed when the second game state ends, and the update result becomes a predetermined result, so that the game state can be transitioned to the first game state after the second game state ends. In other words, when the transition trigger for each of these game states occurs in the same game round, the game state can be transitioned to the second game state and the first game state in sequence, allowing the player to enjoy the benefits of both game states.

Feature bM4. Equipped with a transition determination means for determining whether or not to transition to the second gaming state (such as a function of executing a process for determining transition to the third time-saving gaming state by the main control device 162 according to the modified example 10 of the second embodiment),
A gaming machine described in feature bM3, characterized in that in one game round, the update is performed by the update means after the transition determination is made by the transition determination means (a configuration in which the processing of step Sb7604 is executed after the processing of step Sb7501 is executed).

In the above configuration, the update process of the update information is executed after a transition determination to the second game state is made. Therefore, when a situation arises in which both a transition trigger to the second game state and the update result of the update means becoming a predetermined result (a transition trigger to the first game state) can be achieved in the same game round, it is possible to switch whether or not to update the update information based on the result of the transition determination to the second game state. Therefore, this can be a preferable aspect in a configuration that restricts the updating of the update information in a game round in which the transition condition to the second game state is achieved, as in the above feature bM3.

Feature bM5. Based on the special judgment, a game round operation is started, and a notification result corresponding to the result of the special judgment is counted as one game round, and a game round control means (a function for executing a special game round control process in the main control device 162, a function for executing a special chart variable display process in the performance control device 143) is provided to control the game round to be played;
A gaming machine described in any of features bM1 to bM4, characterized in that it is equipped with a second gaming state transition means (a function for executing a transition determination process for a third time-saving gaming state by the main control unit 162, a transition process for a time-saving gaming state, etc.) that can transition to a second gaming state based on the result of the special judgment being a predetermined judgment result (special miss result) different from the specific result, or the result of a specific judgment (miss type judgment, transition lottery, etc.) made in a gaming round in which the result of the special judgment is a non-specific result (miss result) that does not correspond to a transition to a special gaming state being a predetermined judgment result (special miss result).

In the above configuration, the game is configured to transition to the second game state based on the result of a special judgment being a predetermined judgment result different from the specific result, or based on the result of a specific judgment made in a game round in which the result of a special judgment was a non-specific result being a predetermined judgment result. In this configuration in which the trigger for transition to the second game state is established by the special judgment itself or a specific judgment linked to the result of a special judgment, the timing of the transition to the second game state is random, so that an event may occur in which the update result of the update means becomes a predetermined result in the middle of the second game state. By applying the configuration of feature bM1 in such a case, the occurrence of the above event is suppressed, making it possible to appropriately control the game state.

Feature bM6. The game has a third game state (first time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state and is different from the special game state;
The second gaming state can be transitioned to without passing through a special gaming state, and the third gaming state can be transitioned to via a special gaming state,
A gaming machine described in any one of features bM1 to bM5, characterized in that the update by the update means is permitted when in the third gaming state.

As for the third gaming state, which is reached via a special gaming state, it is possible to adjust the update result of the update means during the third gaming state so that it does not become a predetermined result during the design stage of the gaming machine. In consideration of this characteristic, the above configuration is configured so that while updating of the update information is restricted in the second gaming state, no such restriction is imposed in the third gaming state. This makes it possible to prevent excessive stagnation in the updating of the update information and to prevent a significant delay in the transition to the first gaming state.

This feature can also be expressed as "a gaming machine according to any one of features bM1 to bM5, characterized in that it has a third gaming state (first time-saving gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state and different from the special gaming state, and the transition to the third gaming state is made with the predetermined update information set to a predetermined initial value (a value corresponding to the ceiling number of times) or the predetermined update information is set to the predetermined initial value in response to the transition to the third gaming state, and the update by the update means is permitted when in the third gaming state."

Feature bM7. The third gaming state termination condition includes that the number of games played since the transition to the third gaming state reaches a specific number (a sixth upper limit number or a seventh upper limit number),
A gaming machine as described in feature bM6, characterized in that the first gaming state can be transitioned to based on the result of the update by the update means performed on the game after the special gaming state has ended being a predetermined result.

In the above configuration, the third gaming state ends when the number of times played since transition to the third gaming state reaches a specific number, and the update means updates the update information for games played after the special gaming state ends. In this case, by setting the specific number, which is the upper limit number of times for the third gaming state, to a number less than the number of times played required for the update result of the update information to reach a specific result, it is possible to configure the update result to reach the specific result after the third gaming state ends. In other words, since it is possible to avoid the update result of the update means reaching the specific result in the middle of the third gaming state, this can be a preferable aspect for realizing the configuration of the above feature bM6.

Feature bM8. The device is provided with a specific notification execution means (a function of displaying the miss count image 475 by the performance control device 143) capable of executing a specific notification (displaying the miss count image 475) corresponding to the update result of the update means,
A gaming machine described in any of features bM1 to bM7, characterized in that the specific notification execution means is equipped with a means for enabling the notification content of the specific notification to be maintained in the state immediately before the update by the update means is restricted.

In the above configuration, a specific notification corresponding to the update result of the update means is executed, allowing the player to grasp the progress of the update information and the remaining time until a predetermined result is reached, and the information can be utilized as useful information in proceeding with the game thereafter. In this case, if the update is restricted due to being in the second game state, a specific notification is issued in a manner that maintains the state immediately before the restriction was imposed, so that the player can easily understand that no update has been performed, as well as the remaining time if the update is resumed due to the lifting of the restriction, and it is possible to suitably suppress confusion among the player.

Feature bM9. A gaming machine according to any one of features bM1 to bM8, characterized in that the predetermined update information is the number of times the result of the special judgment is a non-specific result (a losing result) that does not correspond to a transition to a special gaming state.

The first gaming state transitions based on the updated number of times that the result of the special judgment is a non-specific result (the cumulative number of misses), and therefore has the characteristic that the player can predict the transition to the first gaming state before the updated result becomes a specified result. For this reason, if the transition to the first gaming state is not made when the updated result becomes a specified result in the middle of the second gaming state, there is a concern that the player may easily notice that the transition to the first gaming state has not occurred. If the configuration of the above feature bM1 is applied to such a configuration and the occurrence of the event in which the updated result becomes a specified result in the middle of the second gaming state, which is the original cause, can be avoided, it is possible to suppress the arousal of distrust regarding the failure to transition to the first gaming state, and it is possible to preferably exert the above effect of feature bM1.

Feature bM10. Equipped with a predetermined ball entry means (second operating port 63) through which a game ball can enter;
In the first gaming state and the second gaming state, a ball is more likely to enter the predetermined ball entry means than in a normal gaming state,
A gaming machine described in any one of features bM1 to bM9, characterized in that the special judgment means is capable of executing the special judgment based on a ball entering the specified ball entry means.

In the above configuration, when the game state transitions to the first or second game state, it is configured so that a ball will be more likely to enter the specified ball entry means than in the normal game state, and a special judgment will be more likely to be made. By applying any of the configurations of features bM1 to bM9 to this configuration, each of these features can be made to function effectively, and each of the above effects can be optimally exerted.

Note that, to each of the configurations of features bM1 to bM10, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of features bA1 to bA12, features bB1 to bB10, features bC1 to bC9, features bD1 to bD6, features bE1 to bE10, features bF1 to bF10, features bG1 to bG8, features bH1 to bH8, features bI1 to bI11, features bJ1 to bJ10, features bK1 to bK10, features bL1 to bL9, features bM1 to bM10, and features bN1 to bN7 individually, or it is also possible to apply a combination of some or all of the technical ideas. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature bN group>
The group of features bN is an invention group extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and variations or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted based on variations 6 to 10 of the second embodiment described above.

The invention described in the feature bN group has been made with a problem to be solved by the invention with respect to the background technology that "for example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery process is executed based on a predetermined lottery trigger, and when the lottery result is a specific result, the game machine transitions to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)."

Feature bN1. A special judgment means (a function for executing a special drawing hit judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (a special drawing hit judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (a prize-winning in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63),
A special game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can transition to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result (a big win result);
A game round control means (a function for executing a special game round control process in the main control device 162, a function for executing a special game round display process in the performance control device 143) that controls the game round so that a game round operation is started based on the special judgment, and a notification result corresponding to the result of the special judgment is counted as one game round, and
An update means (such as a function for executing the process of step Sb5504 by the main control device 162 according to Modifications 7 to 9 of the second embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step Sb7604 by the main control device 162 according to Modification 10) capable of updating predetermined update information (such as the number of times a game has lost, the number of points, etc.) based on a predetermined update trigger (such as the result of the win/lose lottery being a loser, or winning the points lottery, etc.);
Equipped with
As a gaming state, there is a specific gaming state (such as a high frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to a player than a normal gaming state and is different from a special gaming state,
The specific game states include a first specific game state (second time-saving game state) to which a transition can be made based on the update result of the update means becoming a predetermined result (ceiling number of times, a predetermined number of points, etc.), and a second specific game state (third time-saving game state) to which a transition can be made based on the result of the special judgment becoming a predetermined judgment result (special miss result) different from the specific result, or the result of a specific judgment (miss type judgment, transition lottery, etc.) made in a game round in which the result of the special judgment becomes a non-specific result (miss result) that does not correspond to a transition to the special game state becomes a predetermined judgment result (special miss result, winning result of transition lottery, etc.),
A notification setting means for setting a predetermined notification (such as a special reach miss presentation) to be made when the result of the special judgment or the specific judgment becomes a predetermined judgment result, or when a transition to a second specific game state occurs or when a transition occurs (a function for executing the process of step Sb3313 by the main control device 162 relating to the modified examples 6 to 10 of the second embodiment, a function for setting a presentation for a game round by the presentation control device 143);
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that, in one game round, the update is performed by the update means before the setting is performed by the notification setting means (a configuration in which the processing of step Sb3313 is performed after the processing of step Sb5504 is performed in variants 6 to 9 of the second embodiment, and a configuration in which the processing of step Sb3313 is performed after the processing of step Sb7604 is performed in variant 10 of the second embodiment).

In the above configuration, in addition to the special game state to which the player transitions based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result, there is a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. In addition, as such specific game states, there is a first specific game state to which the player transitions based on the result of update information updated by a specific update trigger, and a second specific game state to which the player transitions based on the result of the special judgment being a specific judgment result different from the specific result, or the result of the specific judgment made in a game round in which the result of the special judgment was a non-specific result being a specific judgment result. In this case, both the result of the special judgment or the specific judgment being the specific judgment result and the update result of the update means being the specific result may occur in the same game round, and it is possible to adjust the specific game state to be transitioned to the first specific game state in order to avoid multiple specific game states overlapping.

In this case, for example, if a predetermined notification corresponding to a transition to the second specific game state or the establishment of a condition for transitioning to the second specific game state is set prior to updating the update information, there is a risk that the above-mentioned predetermined notification corresponding to a transition to the second specific game state, etc. will be performed in a game round, even though the transition destination will actually transition to the first specific game state due to adjustment of the transition destination. In this regard, in the above-mentioned configuration, since the update information is updated prior to the setting process of the above-mentioned predetermined notification, the gaming machine can grasp that the update result has become a predetermined result before setting the execution of the predetermined notification, and can cancel the execution of the above-mentioned predetermined notification based on the result of the adjustment of the transition destination. This makes it possible to adjust the specific game state to be transitioned to while preventing notifications that are inconsistent with the type of specific game state to be actually transitioned to from being performed in a game round, making it possible to control the game state in an appropriate manner.

If the result of the special judgment or specific judgment becomes the specified judgment result in a game round where the update result of the update means is not the specified result, the execution of the specified notification is set after the update information is updated. In other words, when only the transition condition to the second specific game state is met, the corresponding notification can be appropriately performed.

Feature bN2. A gaming machine described in feature bN1, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for transitioning to a first specific gaming state when the update result of the update means becomes a predetermined result and the result of the special judgment or the specific judgment becomes a predetermined judgment result (a function for executing a process for determining transition to a second time-shortened gaming state and a process for determining transition to a third time-shortened gaming state by the main control device 162 according to variants 6, 8, and 9 of the second embodiment).

In the above configuration, if the result of the special judgment or specific judgment becomes a predetermined judgment result and the update result of the update means becomes a predetermined result both occur in the same game round, the transition to the first specific game state is prioritized. In such a case, applying the above feature bN1 makes it possible to avoid a notification corresponding to the second specific game state.

Feature bN3. A gaming machine according to feature bN1 or feature bN2, characterized in that the predetermined update information is the number of times the result of the special determination has become the non-specific result.

The first specific game state is transitioned based on the update result of the number of times that the result of the special judgment is a non-specific result (the cumulative number of times of losing play), so that the player can predict the transition to the first specific game state before the update result becomes a predetermined result. Therefore, if the transition to the first specific game state is not made when the update result becomes a predetermined result in the middle of the second specific game state, there is a concern that the player may easily notice that the transition to the first specific game state has not occurred. Considering such circumstances, when a state is reached in which both the result of the special judgment or specific judgment becomes a predetermined judgment result and the update result of the update means becomes a predetermined result can be achieved in the same play round, it is preferable to prioritize the transition to the first specific game state. In such a case, by applying the configuration of the above feature bN1, it becomes possible to prioritize the transition to the first specific game state while suppressing the notification in the play round that is not consistent with the type of the specific game state to which the transition is actually made.

Feature bN4. A gaming machine described in any one of Features bN1 to bN3, characterized in that the first specific gaming state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the second specific gaming state.

According to the above configuration, when a state occurs in which both the result of a special judgment or specific judgment becomes a predetermined judgment result and the update result of the update means becomes a predetermined result in the same game round, it is possible to prioritize transition to the first specific game state, thereby transitioning to the more advantageous specific game state. By applying the configuration of feature bN1 in such a case, it is possible to prioritize transition to the first specific game state while suppressing the issuance of a notification in the game round that is inconsistent with the type of specific game state to which the player will actually transition.

Feature bN5. A gaming machine according to any one of Features bN1 to bN4, configured so that the update is performed by the update means when a game round is started.

In the above configuration, the update information is updated at the start of a game round, so the execution setting of the specified notification can also be performed at the start of the game round. This makes it possible to deal with cases where the specified notification is performed at the beginning of a game round or throughout the game round, and allows for greater freedom in designing the specified notification.

Feature bN6. The device is provided with a specific notification execution means (a function of displaying the miss count image 475 by the performance control device 143) capable of executing a specific notification (miss count image 475) corresponding to the update result of the update means,
The specific notification execution means includes a notification update means for updating the notification content of the specific notification based on the predetermined update information being updated by the update means (a function for updating the display content of the miss count image 475 by the performance control device 143),
The game number control means controls the game number so that, after the game number action is performed, a notification corresponding to the notification result is performed within a predetermined notification period (determined display time),
A gaming machine described in any of features bN1 to bN5, characterized in that the notification update means is equipped with a means capable of executing update of the notification content at any predetermined timing (the start timing of the confirmation display in a special game round, the mid-way timing of the confirmation display, the end timing of the confirmation display, etc.) during the period from the end of the game round operation for the game round in which the update is performed by the update means to the start of the next game round.

In the above configuration, the specific notification corresponding to the update result of the update means is executed, so that the player can grasp the progress of the update information and the remaining time until the predetermined result is reached, and the information can be used as useful information in proceeding with the subsequent game. In this case, in a configuration in which the update information is updated before the setting of the predetermined notification is performed after the update information is updated as in the above feature bN1, in other words, in a configuration in which the update information is updated before the determination of whether the transition condition to the second specific game state necessary for setting the predetermined notification is established or not, the update process of the update information may be performed at a relatively early stage in the game round. In such a case, if the content of the specific notification is updated immediately in response to the update information being updated, the player's interest will be shifted to the update result even before the result of the special judgment is not notified, and there is a concern that the role of the game round will not be properly fulfilled. In this regard, in this configuration, even if the update information has already been updated, the reflection in the specific notification is performed after waiting for the start of the notification of the result of the special judgment, so that the player can pay attention to the game round until the result of the special judgment is notified. This makes it possible to achieve the above-mentioned effect of feature bN1 while preventing a loss of attention to the game.

This feature may further include a configuration in which "the predetermined update information is the number of times that the result of the special judgment has become the non-specific result." In this case, "the update process of the update information may be performed at a relatively early stage in a game round. In such a case, if the content of the specific notification is updated immediately in response to the update of the update information, there is a concern that the player may be able to determine that the result of the special judgment is a non-specific result (a so-called loss result) even before the result of the special judgment is not notified. In this regard, with this configuration, even if the update information has already been updated, the reflection in the specific notification is performed after waiting for the start of the notification of the result of the special judgment, so that it is possible to exert the effect of the feature bN1 while suppressing the possibility of determining in advance that the result is a loss."

Feature bN7. The game control means controls the game so that after the game action is performed, a notification corresponding to the notification result is performed within a predetermined notification period (determined display time);
A gaming machine described in any one of features bN1 to bN6, characterized in that when the update result of the update means becomes a predetermined result, the transition to a first specific gaming state is configured to be performed at any specific timing (the start timing of the confirmation display in a special game round, the midway timing of the confirmation display, the end timing of the confirmation display, etc.) during the period from the end of the game round operation to the start of the next game round.

In a configuration in which the predetermined notification is set after the update information is updated as in the above feature bN1, in other words, in a configuration in which the update information is updated before it is determined whether the transition condition to the second specific game state necessary for setting the predetermined notification is met, the update process of the update information may be performed at a relatively early stage in the game round. In such a case, if the game is immediately transitioned to the first specific game state based on the update result being the predetermined result, even before the result of the special judgment is not notified, the player may notice that the game is in the first specific game state from the behavior of the gaming machine, and as a result of losing attention, there is a concern that the role of the game round will not be properly fulfilled. In this regard, in this configuration, even if the update information has already been updated, the transition to the first specific game state is performed after waiting for the start of the notification of the result of the special judgment, so that attention can be drawn to the game round until the result of the special judgment is notified. Therefore, it is possible to exert the above effect of the above feature bN1 while suppressing the loss of attention to the game round.

Note that, to each of the configurations of the above features bN1 to bN7, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of features bA1 to bA12, features bB1 to bB10, features bC1 to bC9, features bD1 to bD6, features bE1 to bE10, features bF1 to bF10, features bG1 to bG8, features bH1 to bH8, features bI1 to bI11, features bJ1 to bJ10, features bK1 to bK10, features bL1 to bL9, features bM1 to bM10, and features bN1 to bN7 individually, or it is also possible to apply a combination of some or all of the technical ideas. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

Note that, to each of the configurations of the feature bA group to the feature bN group described above, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configurations of the other feature bA group to the feature bN group individually, or to apply the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying the respective technical ideas in combination, it is also possible to combine them across the feature groups.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: A game machine that has an operating means operated by the player, a game ball launching means that launches game balls based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage that guides the launched game balls to a specified game area, and various game components arranged within the game area, and that awards a special prize to the player when the game ball passes through a specified passage section of each of the game components.

Slot machines and other reel-type gaming machines: A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a series of symbols consisting of multiple symbols in a variable manner and then displays the series of symbols in a final stopped state, in which the variation of the symbols is started by operating a start operating means, the variation of the symbols is stopped by operating a stop operating means or after a predetermined time has passed, and a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol.

Ball-operated belt-type game machine (ball-operated reel-type game machine): A game machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable pattern string consisting of multiple patterns and then displays the final stop of the pattern string, in which the pattern variation is started due to the operation of a start operation means, the pattern variation is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means or after a predetermined time has passed, and a special game state (bonus game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stop pattern at the time of the stop is a specific pattern, and further equipped with a ball receiving tray and an insertion device that performs an insertion process to take in game balls from the ball receiving tray, and a payout device that pays out game balls to the ball receiving tray, and configured so that the operation of the start operation means is valid when game balls are inserted by the insertion device.

<Features cA group to feature cI group>
The inventions described in the following feature group cA to feature group cI are extracted from the above-mentioned third embodiment and each of its modified examples.

<Features c Group A>
Group cA of features is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the variations or combinations thereof, and is extracted mainly based on the above-mentioned third embodiment and variations 1 to 8 of the third embodiment.

The feature group cA was made with a view to resolving the problem that the invention aims to solve with regard to the background technology that "for example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is known a normal gaming state and a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is controlled to be switched based on the results of the game (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)." The background technology is that "here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, there is still room for improvement in terms of increasing the interest in the game."

Feature cA1. A special judgment means (a function for executing a special drawing hit judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (a special drawing hit judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (a prize-winning in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63),
A first transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can transition to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (normal game state) based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result (jackpot result);
Equipped with
As a gaming state, there is a specific gaming state (such as a high frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to a player than a predetermined gaming state and is different from a special gaming state,
A second transition means (a function for executing a process for determining whether or not the game is suddenly switched to the time-saving game state in the main control device 162 according to the third embodiment and modified examples 1 to 8, and a first transition process for the time-saving game state) is capable of switching to a specific game state when a specific condition (such as a special miss result, reaching the ceiling number of times, or a ball entering a specific ball entry section) is met;
A specifying means (function for executing a process for determining whether to suddenly enter the time-saving game state in the main control device 162 of the third embodiment and modified examples 1 to 8, and a second process for suddenly entering the time-saving game state in the main control device 162) is capable of reserving a transition to a specific game state based on the establishment of a specific condition when the specific condition is established in a predetermined situation (a situation in which the time-saving game state is in a state of high probability game state, a situation in which the opening and closing execution mode is in progress, etc.), and then executing a transition to the reserved specific game state when a predetermined condition is established (an end of the time-saving game state, etc., a predetermined number of game rounds have been played, a ball has entered a specific ball entry section, etc.);
A gaming machine comprising:

In the above configuration, in addition to the special game state to which a transition is made based on the result of a special judgment being a specific result, there is a specific game state that is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state. It is possible to transition to this specific game state when a specific condition is met. With this configuration, when a specific condition is met in a specific situation, the transition to the specific game state is reserved, and then when the specified condition is met, a transition is made to the reserved specific game state. In other words, not only is there a case where a transition to the specific game state occurs immediately in response to the fulfillment of a specific condition, but there is also a case where a transition to the specific game state occurs after a delay from the fulfillment of a specific condition. Therefore, the player can be entertained not only by whether or not a transition to a specific game state occurs, but also by whether or not the specific game state is reserved, making it possible to suitably increase interest.

Feature cA2. The gaming machine described in Feature cA1, characterized in that the specifying means is capable of making the reservation for a specific gaming state corresponding to the establishment of a specific condition when the specific gaming state is established.

In the above configuration, if a specific condition is met while in a specific game state, the transition to the specific game state corresponding to that condition is reserved, and the reserved specific game state is transitioned to when a predetermined condition is subsequently met. In other words, since it is possible to acquire multiple specific game states, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of challenging themselves to acquire additional specific game states, greatly increasing the player's interest.

Feature cA3. A game round control means (a function for executing a special chart game round control process in the main control device 162, a function for executing a special chart variable display process in the performance control device 143) that controls the game round so that a game round operation is started based on the special judgment, and a notification result corresponding to the result of the special judgment is counted as one game round, and
A number setting means for setting the number of times that the player can stay in a specific game state (a function for setting a counter value corresponding to the upper limit number of times and the difference number of times in the third embodiment and modified examples 1 and 2, a function for setting a counter value in the execution time reduction areas 561, 611 in modified examples 3 to 8, etc.);
Equipped with
The gaming machine described in feature cA1 or feature cA2, wherein the number setting means is equipped with a means for making the number of play times when a transition to a specified specific gaming state is made via the reservation different from the number of play times when a transition is made without going through the reservation (the original upper limit number of play times) (a function for setting, as a counter value, a difference number of play times, an upper limit number for reservation that is lower than the original upper limit number of play times, or a value corresponding to an upper limit number for reservation that is higher than the original upper limit number of play times).

In the above configuration, the number of times that a player can stay in a specific gaming state differs depending on whether or not they transition via a reservation, so even in the same specific gaming state, the degree of advantage can differ depending on whether or not there is a reservation, making it possible to increase interest.

Feature cA4. The specification means is capable of performing the reservation for a specific gaming state corresponding to the establishment of a specific condition when the specific gaming state is established in a situation where the specific gaming state is established;
The gaming machine described in feature cA3 is characterized in that the number setting means is equipped with a means (a function of setting a difference number as a counter value, and a reservation upper limit number which is lower than the original upper limit number) that enables the number of times of play when transitioning to a specified specific gaming state via the reservation to be less than the number of times of play when transitioning without via the reservation for the specified specific gaming state.

In the above configuration, when a specific condition is met while in a specific game state, it is possible to reserve the specific game state that corresponds to that fulfillment, making it possible for a player to acquire a specific game state multiple times, greatly increasing interest. In this case, when going through reservation (when acquiring multiple times), the number of times that a player can stay in a specific game state is reduced compared to when not going through reservation (when acquiring only one), making it possible to prevent the player from gaining an excessive advantage.

Feature cA5. A game round control means (a function for executing a special chart game round control process in the main control device 162, a function for executing a special chart variable display process in the performance control device 143) that controls the game round so that a game round operation is started based on the special judgment, and a notification result corresponding to the result of the special judgment is counted as one game round, and
A number setting means for setting the number of times that a player can stay in a specific game state (a function for setting a counter value corresponding to the upper limit number of times and the difference number of times in the main control device 162 in the third embodiment and modified examples 1 and 2, a function for setting a counter value in the execution time reduction areas 561, 611 by the main control device 162 in modified examples 3 to 8, etc.);
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any of features cA1 to cA4, characterized in that when the reservation of a specific specific game state is performed in response to the fulfillment of a specific condition while the player is in a specific specific game state, and then the transition to the specific specific game state is performed, the number of times setting means is capable of setting the number of times that the player can stay in the specific specific game state by taking into account the remaining number of times that the specific specific game state will remain in when the specific condition is fulfilled (such as a function of setting the difference number of times obtained by subtracting the remaining number of times of stay time reduction from the original maximum number of times of reserved time reduction).

In the above configuration, when a transition is made to a specific game state (a specified specific game state) after a reservation has been made, the number of times that the player can remain in that specific game state is set taking into account the number of times remaining in the previous specific game state (specific specific game state) in which the player was staying when the specific condition was met. In this case, the number of times that the player can remain in the subsequent specific game state changes depending on the number of times remaining when the specific condition is met, so it is possible to create differences in the degree of advantage depending on the timing of the fulfillment of the specific condition. This allows the player to enjoy not only whether or not a reservation will occur, but also the timing of its occurrence, making it possible to appropriately increase interest.

Feature cA6. A gaming machine according to any one of Features cA1 to cA5, characterized in that it is configured to be able to perform a plurality of the above-mentioned reservations (configurations of Modifications 3 to 8 of the third embodiment).

In the above configuration, it is possible to reserve multiple specific game states, and transitions are made to the multiple reserved specific game states in sequence, so the more reservations there are, the more advantageous it is for the player. This allows the player to enjoy not only whether a reservation will occur, but also how many reservations there are, making it possible to appropriately increase interest.

Feature cA7. A predetermined order means for making the execution order of the transition for the plurality of specific game states in which the reservation is performed a predetermined order (a process for storing type information in the first area 565a to the third area 565b and the first area 565a to the tenth area 565j set in the generation order information storage area 565 in the third to fourth modifications in correspondence with the winning order of the special miss result, a process for grasping the reserved time reduction with the highest priority in the fifth to seventh modifications and making the grasped reserved time reduction the transition target, a function for executing a process for determining the transition order of the reserved time reduction by lottery, etc.),
The gaming machine described in feature cA6 is configured so that when the specified condition is met when multiple reservations are made, a transition is executed based on an execution order determined by the specified order means.

In the above configuration, when multiple specific game states are reserved, the execution order of transitions is determined for the reserved specific game states, and the transition order is controlled according to the execution order. Therefore, in a situation where conflicts may arise between specific game states, transitions can be performed in a suitable order while avoiding overlapping execution of specific game states.

Feature cA8. The specific game states that can be reserved include a plurality of specific game states (sudden time-saving game states A to C, ceiling time-saving game state, etc.);
Priorities are set in advance for the multiple specific game states,
The gaming machine described in feature cA7 is characterized in that the predetermined order means is equipped with a means for making the execution order correspond to the priority (a function for executing a second transition process for a sudden time-saving gaming state in the main control unit 162 of variants 5 to 7).

In the above configuration, when a transition is made between multiple reserved specific game states, the transition is controlled to be made in an order corresponding to the priority set in advance for each specific game state. This makes it possible to make transitions in an order corresponding to the type of specific game state, regardless of the order in which the specific conditions are established. In addition, it is expected that the effect of reducing the workload when designing a gaming machine can be achieved. In other words, if the transition order for all combinations of specific game states is specified one by one in the control program, there is a concern that the control program will become complicated and the workload will increase. In this regard, by controlling the transition order using the priority, it is sufficient to simply set a priority for each specific game state, and the control program can be simplified. Furthermore, even if a design change is required after the fact, a complete change to the control program is not required, and it is sufficient to simply change the priority setting. In other words, there is also the advantage that the design change can be easily made.

Feature cA9. The specific condition may be satisfied multiple times in the predetermined situation,
A gaming machine described in any of features cA1 to cA8, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for limiting the number of specific gaming states in which the reservation is made to a predetermined number or less (a function for executing a process for determining a transition to a sudden time-saving gaming state in the main control unit 162 of the third embodiment and variants 1 and 2, the reserved time-saving area 562 of variants 3 and 4, the reserved time-saving area 612 of variant 5, etc.).

If the number of reserved specific game states becomes large, there is a concern that the management and control will become complicated and the processing load will increase. In this regard, in the above configuration, the reservation is limited so that the number of reserved specific game states is kept below a predetermined number, making it possible to suppress an increase in the processing load. Furthermore, in order to temporarily reserve a specific game state and then perform a transition, information on the specific game state that was the target at the time of reservation is stored, and this information is used at the time of transition. For this reason, it is necessary to secure a storage area for this purpose, but with this feature, it is also possible to keep the amount of area for storing information on reserved specific game states small.

Feature cA10. A game round control means (a function for executing a special chart game round control process in the main control device 162, a function for executing a special chart variable display process in the performance control device 143) that controls the game round so that a game round operation is started based on the special judgment, and a notification result corresponding to the result of the special judgment is counted as one game round, and
A termination means (a function of executing a process for terminating the high frequency support mode in the main control device 162) capable of terminating the specific game state based on the number of times of play after transition to the specific game state reaching a predetermined upper limit number of times;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any of features cA1 to cA9, characterized in that the determination means is capable of reserving a specific gaming state corresponding to the establishment of a specific condition when the specific gaming state is in effect, and is capable of executing a transition to the reserved specific gaming state when the specific gaming state in which the player is currently in effect is terminated by the termination means.

In the above configuration, if a specific condition is met while in a specific game state, the specific game state currently in progress is completed and then a transition to the reserved specific game state is executed. This prevents the current specific game state from ending midway, giving the player an unnatural impression. In addition, while the specific game state may notify the player of the remaining number of times that the player can remain in that state, by continuing the current specific game state to the end, it is possible to eliminate the need to adjust the notification even if a specific condition is met midway through the specific game state.

Feature cA11. A gaming machine according to any one of Features cA1 to cA10, characterized in that it is equipped with a specific notification execution means (a function for executing a reserved performance setting process in the performance control device 143) capable of executing a specific notification (such as displaying a reserved image 529) by a predetermined notification means (pattern display device 75) when the reservation is made.

In the above configuration, a specific notification is issued when a specific game state is reserved, allowing the player to easily understand that a reservation has occurred.

Feature cA12. A number of times specification means (a function of executing the process of step Sc2901 by the performance control device 143) is provided for specifying the number of times that the player can stay in the specific game state in which the reservation has been made if the transition is made,
The gaming machine described in feature cA11 is characterized in that the specific notification execution means is equipped with a mode setting means (a function of executing the processing of step Sc2902 by the performance control device 143) that sets the mode of the specific notification taking into account the number of times specified by the number of times specified by the number of times specified by the gaming machine, and is capable of executing the specific notification in the mode set by the mode setting means.

In the above configuration, the remaining number of times (the number of times a player can remain in the game) when a transition is made to the reserved specific game state is identified, and the manner of the specific notification is determined taking into account the result. Therefore, the specific notification not only notifies the occurrence of a reservation, but also serves to notify or suggest the remaining number of times. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest in the specific notification and to increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature cA13. Equipped with a predetermined ball entry portion (second operating port 63) into which a game ball can enter,
The specific game state is a state in which a ball is more likely to enter the predetermined ball entry portion than a predetermined game state,
A gaming machine described in any one of features cA1 to cA12, characterized in that the special judgment means is capable of executing the special judgment based on a ball entering the specified ball entry area.

In the above configuration, when the game transitions to a specific game state, it becomes easier for the ball to enter a specific ball entry area than in a predetermined game state, making it easier to receive a special judgment. By applying any of the features cA1 to cA12 to this configuration, it is possible to make each of these features function effectively and to optimally exert each of the above effects.

Note that, to each of the configurations of features cA1 to cA13, features cB1 to cB14, features cC1 to cC12, features cD1 to cD9, features cE1 to cE11, features cF1 to cF9, features cG1 to cG14, features cH1 to cH10, and features cI1 to cI11, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations individually to each of the configurations of features cA1 to cA13 above, or it is also possible to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Features c Group B>
The feature cB group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the variations or combinations thereof, and is extracted mainly based on the above-mentioned third embodiment and variations 1 to 8 of the third embodiment.

The feature group cB was made with a view to resolving the problem that the invention aims to solve with respect to the background technology that states, "For example, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have a normal gaming state and a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player, and control is performed such as switching the gaming state based on the game results (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)." "Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, there is still room for improvement in controlling the gaming state."

Feature cB1. The game state includes a predetermined game state (normal game state) and a specific game state (high frequency support mode, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state.
A specific game state transition means (a function of executing a first transition process for the sudden time-saving game state in the main control device 162) that can transition to a specific game state when a specific condition (a special miss result is won, the number of times the ball reaches the ceiling is reached, a ball is scored in a specific ball scoring section, etc.) is satisfied;
A specifying means (a function for executing a reservation process in the main control device 162 in the third embodiment and modified examples 1 to 8) that can reserve a transition to a specific game state based on the establishment of a specific condition when the specific condition is established in a predetermined situation (a situation in a time-saving game state, a situation in a high probability game state, a situation in an open/close execution mode, etc.);
Equipped with
A situation in which a specific condition is satisfied multiple times may occur in the predetermined situation,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a means for making it possible to make the number of specific game states reserved by the identification means equal to or less than a predetermined number (a function for executing a process for determining a sudden transition to a time-saving game state in the main control unit 162 of the third embodiment and modified examples 1 and 2, the reserved time-saving area 562 of modified examples 3 and 4, the reserved time-saving area 612 of modified examples 5 to 8, etc.).

In the above configuration, a specific game state is provided as a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state, and this specific game state is entered when a specific condition is met. Therefore, the player can enjoy playing the game with the aim of entering the specific game state by fulfilling the specific condition. Under such a configuration, not only is the game immediately entered into the specific game state upon the fulfillment of the specific condition, but when the specific condition is fulfilled under a predetermined situation, the game is configured to reserve the transition to the specific game state corresponding to the fulfillment. Therefore, the player can enjoy not only whether or not to enter the specific game state, but also whether or not the specific game state is reserved, which makes it possible to increase the interest. However, on the other hand, if the number of reserved specific game states becomes large, there is a concern that the management and control of the specific game states will become complicated and the processing load will increase. In this regard, the reservation is limited so that the number of reserved specific game states is kept below a predetermined number, so that the reservation of the specific game state can be performed while suppressing the increase in the processing load, and the game state can be controlled appropriately.

In addition, this feature "has a means capable of making the number of specific game states for which the specification means reserves a predetermined number or less" can also be expressed as "the specification means is capable of executing the reservation with an upper limit of the predetermined number."

Feature cB2. The specific game state that can be reserved includes a plurality of specific game states (sudden time-saving game states A to C, etc.);
A gaming machine described in feature cB1, characterized in that the predetermined number is a specific number (such as "1" in the third embodiment and variants 1 and 2) less than the number of types of specific gaming states.

In the above configuration, the upper limit number that can be reserved is a specific number that is equal to or less than the number of types of specific game states, so that the upper limit number can be kept small and the processing load can be reduced in an optimal manner. Furthermore, if the specific number is set to a number less than the number of types, it is not possible to reserve all specific game states at the same time, and only a portion of them will be reserved. This allows the player to enjoy which specific game state will be reserved, making it possible to increase interest.

Feature cB3. The specific game state that can be reserved includes a plurality of specific game states (sudden time-saving game states A to C, etc.);
A gaming machine according to feature cB1 or feature cB2, characterized in that the predetermined number is the number of types of specific gaming states for which the reservation is possible (such as "3" in variant 3 and variant 5).

In the above configuration, the maximum number of reserved games is set to the number of types of specific game states, so all types of specific game states can be reserved simultaneously, while preventing the number of reserved games from becoming too large and reducing the processing load.

Feature cB4. The specific game states that can be reserved include a plurality of specific game states (sudden time-saving game states A to C, etc.);
A gaming machine described in any of features cB1 to cB3, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for restricting the execution of the reservation for a specific gaming state corresponding to the establishment of a specific condition when the number of reservations has reached the specified number (a function for executing a process for determining a sudden transition to a time-saving gaming state in the main control unit 162 in the third embodiment and variants 1 and 2).

In the above configuration, only specific game states in which a specific condition is met before the reserved number reaches the upper limit are eligible for reservation, so for example, by setting different degrees of advantage for various specific game states, it is possible to heighten the player's interest not only in whether or not a specific game state can be reserved, but also in its type. In other words, players can be greatly entertained by seeing whether or not a specific condition corresponding to a specific game state on the advantageous side can be met sooner than a specific condition corresponding to a specific game state on the unfavorable side, which can increase interest.

Feature cB5. A first means (a function for executing a variable display time setting process in the main control device 162 in the third embodiment and modified examples 1 and 2) for executing a predetermined first notification (such as a special reach miss A performance) when a specific condition is established in a situation where the number of reserved items has not reached the predetermined number;
A second means (a function for executing a process for setting a variable display time in the main control device 162 in the third embodiment and modified examples 1 and 2) for executing a second notification (a complete miss effect, a special miss B effect, etc.) different from the first notification when a specific condition is satisfied in a situation where the number of reserved items has reached the predetermined number;
A gaming machine according to any one of features cB1 to cB4, characterized in that it is provided with:

In the above configuration, the notification given when a specific condition is met differs depending on whether the reserved number has reached the upper limit, making it possible for the player to recognize or guess whether the specific condition was met before or after the upper limit was reached.

Feature cB6. The first notification allows the player to recognize that a specific condition has been met;
The gaming machine described in feature cB5, wherein the second notification is one that is not recognizable by the player or is more difficult to recognize than the first notification, indicating that a specific condition has been met.

In the above configuration, the second notification that is issued when a specific condition is met when the number of reserved items has reached the upper limit is not noticeable to the player or is more difficult to notice than the first notification, making it difficult for the player to notice that a specific condition has been met. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when no reservation is made despite the specific condition being met.

Feature cB7: A first means (a function for executing a variable display time setting process in the main control device 162 in the third embodiment and modified examples 1 and 2) for executing a specific notification (such as a special reach miss A performance) when a specific condition is established in a situation where the number of reserved items has not reached the predetermined number;
A second means for preventing the specific notification from being executed when a specific condition is met in a situation where the number of reserved items has reached the predetermined number (a function for not executing a special reach miss A effect and executing a complete miss effect or a special reach miss B effect in a situation where the number of reserved items has reached the upper limit in the third embodiment and modified examples 1 and 2 and a special miss result occurs);
A gaming machine according to any one of features cB1 to cB6, characterized in that it is provided with:

In the above configuration, when the number of reserved items has not reached the upper limit, a specific notification is executed in response to the fulfillment of a specific condition, thereby making it possible to inform the player that a specific condition has been fulfilled and thereby making the player aware of the occurrence of a reservation. On the other hand, when the number of reserved items has reached the upper limit, the execution of the specific notification is restricted even if the specific condition is fulfilled, making it difficult for the player to notice that a specific condition has been fulfilled and thus preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable about no reservation occurring despite the fulfillment of the specific condition.

Feature cB8. The specific game states that can be reserved include a plurality of specific game states (such as sudden time-saving game states A to C),
A gaming machine described in any of features cB1 to cB7, characterized in that when a specific condition is met when the number of reservations has reached the specified number, a means for changing the reservation so that the reservation is made for a specific game state corresponding to the establishment of the specific game state instead of either the reserved specific game state or the reserved specific game state (a function for executing a reservation update process in the main control unit 162 of variants 1 and 2).

In the above configuration, if a specific condition is met when the reserved number has reached the upper limit, the reserved specific game state is replaced with the specific game state corresponding to that condition, so that the fulfillment of a specific condition that occurs after the upper limit is reached can be reflected in the reserved specific game state. This allows players to play in anticipation of the fulfillment of a specific condition not only before the upper limit is reached but also after it is reached, making it possible to maintain anticipation of the fulfillment for a long period of time.

Feature cB9. A gaming machine according to feature cB8, which is provided with a change determination means (a function for executing reservation update processing in the main control device 162 of variants 1 and 2) that determines whether or not to execute the change when a specific condition is met in a situation in which the number of reservations has reached the predetermined number, and executes the change when the change determination means determines that the change should be executed.

Depending on the combination of the reserved specific game state and the specific game state corresponding to the specific condition that is established after the upper limit is reached, there is a concern that changing the reserved specific game state may actually put the player in a disadvantageous situation. In this regard, with this feature, a determination is made as to whether or not to execute the above-mentioned change, and the change is executed only if it is determined that the change should be executed, so that unnecessary changes are not made and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

Feature cB10. The gaming machine described in feature cB9, wherein the change determination means performs the determination based on the type of a specific gaming state.

In the above configuration, the determination of whether or not to execute a change to the reserved specific game state is made based on the type of specific game state. In other words, the presence or absence of a change is determined by comparing the specific game state corresponding to the establishment of a specific condition with the reserved specific game state, so it becomes possible to determine whether or not a change should be made taking into account the differences in characteristics between the two specific game states.

Feature cB11. Priorities are set in advance for the plurality of specific game states;
The gaming machine according to feature cB9 or feature cB10, wherein the change determination means makes the determination based on the priority.

In the above configuration, the decision as to whether or not to change the reserved specific game state is made based on the priority set in advance for each specific game state, so that the decision as to whether or not to change can be made conveniently. In addition, the effect of reducing the workload when designing a gaming machine can be expected. In other words, if all combinations of reserved specific game states and specific game states corresponding to specific conditions established after the upper limit is reached are assumed, and the presence or absence of changes for each combination is incorporated into the control program, there is a concern that the control program will become complicated and the workload will increase. In this regard, by using the priority to determine the presence or absence of changes, it is sufficient to simply set a priority for each specific game state, and the control program can be simplified. Furthermore, even if a design change is required after the fact, a complete change of the control program is not required, and it is sufficient to simply change the priority setting. In other words, there is also the advantage that the design change can be easily made.

Feature cB12. The specific game states that can be reserved include a plurality of specific game states (such as sudden time-saving game states A to C),
A gaming machine described in any of features cB1 to cB11, characterized in that when a specific condition is fulfilled while the reservation is being made, and a specific game state of the same type as the specific game state corresponding to the fulfillment is included in the reserved specific game states, the reservation can be restricted for the specific game state corresponding to the fulfillment (a function of executing reservation processing in the main control unit 162 of variant example 3).

In the above configuration, if a specific game state of the same type as the specific game state corresponding to the establishment of a specific condition is already reserved, the execution of the reservation corresponding to the establishment is restricted. This allows specific game states of a different type from the reserved specific game state to be reserved preferentially, and prevents reserved specific game states from being biased toward the same type.

Feature cB13. The specific game states that can be reserved include a plurality of specific game states (such as sudden time-saving game states A to C),
A gaming machine described in feature cB1, characterized in that the predetermined number is a specific number ("10" in variant 4 of the third embodiment) greater than the number of types of specific gaming states for which the reservation can be made.

In the above configuration, the maximum number of reserved specific game states is set to a number greater than the number of types of specific game states, making it possible to reserve all types of specific game states simultaneously, while also making it possible to reserve multiple specific game states of the same type.

Feature cB14. The specific game states that can be reserved include a first specific game state (sudden time-saving game state A) and a second specific game state (sudden time-saving game state B), and include a plurality of specific game states (sudden time-saving game states A to C, etc.);
A gaming machine according to any one of features cB1 to cB13, characterized in that a reserved upper limit number for the first specific game state and a reserved upper limit number for the second specific game state are each set.

In the above configuration, the upper limit number that can be reserved is set for each type of specific game state, so for example, when a specific condition corresponding to a first specific game state is established, even if the overall reserved number has not reached the upper limit number, if the upper limit number for the first specific game state has been reached, the reservation of the first specific game state corresponding to the establishment is not executed. This makes it possible to secure a surplus for reserving the second specific game state, and to prevent bias in the types of specific game states that are reserved.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of features cA1 to cA13, features cB1 to cB14, features cC1 to cC12, features cD1 to cD9, features cE1 to cE11, features cF1 to cF9, features cG1 to cG14, features cH1 to cH10, and features cI1 to cI11 can be applied individually to each of the configurations of features cB1 to cB14 above, or a part or all of each technical idea can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Features c Group C>
The feature cC group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and variations or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted based on the above-mentioned third embodiment and variations 3 to 8 of the third embodiment.

The feature group C has been made with a view to resolving the problem that the invention aims to solve with respect to the background technology that states, "For example, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have a normal gaming state and a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player, and control is performed such as switching the gaming state based on the game results (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)." "Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, there is still room for improvement in controlling the gaming state."

Feature cC1. The game state includes a predetermined game state (normal game state) and a specific game state (high frequency support mode, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state.
A means for storing predetermined information (maximum number of times, type information, etc.) on a specific game state in a predetermined storage unit (RAM 314) when a specific condition (a special miss result is won, the number of times reaches the ceiling, a ball is scored in a specific ball scoring area, etc.) is satisfied (such as a function for executing a process for determining whether or not a time-saving game state is suddenly entered in the main control unit 162 of the third to eighth modified examples);
The predetermined information is referred to when controlling at least one of a transition to a specific game state and a progress of the specific game state,
In the predetermined storage unit, a plurality of areas (an area for execution time reduction 561, an area for reserved time reduction 562, an area for generation order information storage 565 of the counter area for time-shortened game state 560 according to the modified examples 3 to 4, an area for execution time reduction 611, an area for reserved time reduction 612, etc. of the counter area for time-shortened game state 610 according to the modified examples 5 to 8) are set as storage areas for storing the predetermined information,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when a specific condition is satisfied while the specified information is stored in a specified area among the plurality of areas (e.g., the first reserved time-shortening area 562a), the specified information of a specific game state corresponding to the satisfaction of that specific condition is stored in another area among the plurality of areas (e.g., the second reserved time-shortening area 562b) different from the specified area.

In the above configuration, a specific game state is provided as a game state that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state, and predetermined information regarding the specific game state is stored when a specific condition is met, and transition control to the specific game state and progress control of the specific game state are performed based on the stored predetermined state. With this configuration, multiple areas are provided as storage areas for storing the above-mentioned predetermined information, and if a specific condition is met when predetermined information is stored in any of these areas, other free areas are used to store the predetermined information of the specific game state corresponding to the fulfillment of the specific condition. This makes it possible to manage multiple specific game states simultaneously, and makes it possible to appropriately control those game states when a conflict occurs between specific game states, such as when a specific condition is met while in a specific game state.

Feature cC2. The gaming machine described in feature cC1, characterized in that the predetermined information stored in the predetermined area corresponds to a specific gaming state being played.

In the above configuration, when a specific condition is established while information on a specific game state currently being executed is stored in a specified area, information on the specific game state corresponding to the establishment of that specific condition is stored in another area separate from the above-mentioned specified area. This makes it possible to store information on a specific game state corresponding to the establishment of a specific condition that occurs during the specific game state, independently of information on the specific game state currently being executed, and to enable a specific game state that occurs during the execution.

Feature cC3. A means for reserving a transition to a specific game state corresponding to the predetermined information when the predetermined information is stored in the other area (a function for executing a reservation process in the main control device 162 of the modified examples 3 to 8);
A means for executing a transition to the specific game state for which the above-mentioned reservation has been made when a predetermined condition (such as the end of a time-saving game state, the execution of a predetermined number of game turns, or a ball entering a specific ball entry section) is met (a function for executing a second transition process for the sudden time-saving game state in the main control device 162 of the third to eighth modified examples);
A gaming machine according to feature cC1 or feature cC2, characterized in that it is equipped with:

In the above configuration, the specific game state whose information is stored in another area is set to a reserved state, so that it is possible to preferably avoid conflict with the specific game state currently being executed. In addition, the specific game state that has been set to a reserved state is transitioned to when a predetermined condition is subsequently met, so that it is possible to execute both the currently executed specific game state and the specific game state in which the specific condition has been met during that time. In other words, by meeting a specific condition in a specific game state, it is possible to provide a game that can essentially extend the specific game state or subsequently transition to another specific game state, which can increase interest.

Feature cC4. A special judgment means (a function for executing a special drawing hit judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (a special drawing hit judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (a prize-winning in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63),
A game round control means (a function for executing a special game round control process in the main control device 162, a function for executing a special game round display process in the performance control device 143) that controls the game round so that a game round operation is started based on the special judgment, and a notification result corresponding to the result of the special judgment is counted as one game round, and
Equipped with
A gaming machine according to any one of features cC1 to cC3, characterized in that the predetermined information is information corresponding to the remaining number of games in a specific gaming state.

In the above configuration, information corresponding to the remaining number of times to be played in a specific game state is stored as the specified information stored in the specified area and the other area. Therefore, when a specific condition is satisfied in a situation where a specific game state is in progress, the remaining number of times to be played in a specific game state corresponding to the satisfaction of the specific condition that occurred during the process can be stored separately from the remaining number of times to be played in the specific game state being executed, making it possible to simultaneously manage the remaining number of times to be played in both of these specific game states.

Feature cC5. The predetermined information stored in the predetermined area corresponds to a specific game state being played;
A means for updating the predetermined information in the predetermined area based on a predetermined update trigger (execution of a game round, a small win result, etc.) (a function for executing a high-frequency support mode update process in the main control device 162 of the modified examples 3 to 8);
A means for ending the specific game state being executed when the update result of the specific information in the specific area becomes a specific result (0) (a function for executing a high frequency support mode ending process by the main control device 162 according to the third embodiment of the modified examples 3 to 8);
A means for updating the predetermined information in the other area based on a predetermined update trigger (a function for executing a high frequency support mode update process in the main control device 162 in the third to eighth modified examples);
A gaming machine according to any one of features cC1 to cC4, characterized in that it is equipped with:

In the above configuration, the specified information in the specified area and the specified information in the other area are updated based on a specified update trigger, so the remaining number of times for a specific game state currently being played and the remaining number of times for a specific game state corresponding to the establishment of a specific condition that occurs midway can be updated in parallel. This makes it possible to simultaneously manage the remaining number of times for both specific game states.

Feature cC6. A gaming machine according to Feature cC5, characterized in that it is provided with a means for writing the update result of the specified information updated in the other area to the specified area when a transition to a specific gaming state corresponding to the specified information in the other area is made (a function for executing the second transition process of the sudden time-saving gaming state in the main control device 162 of Modifications 3 to 8).

In the above configuration, when the specific information in the other area transitions to the corresponding specific game state, the update result of the specific information made in the other area is written to the specific area and is used as information corresponding to the remaining number of times in the specific game state being executed. As a result, for the subsequent specific game state corresponding to the establishment of a specific condition that occurs during the transition, the remaining number of times after the transition can be set to the difference number (the original upper limit number for the subsequent specific game state minus the remaining number when the specific condition is established for the previous specific game state being executed). In this case, the remaining number of times after the transition in the subsequent specific game state can be changed depending on the timing at which the specific condition is established. Therefore, the player can be entertained not only by whether or not the specific condition is established, but also by the timing at which the establishment occurs, and it is possible to increase the interest. Furthermore, since the remaining number of times after the transition in the subsequent specific game state can be kept lower than the original upper limit number of the specific game state, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively advantageous in a configuration in which the player can acquire multiple specific game states in overlapping fashion.

Feature cC7: When the predetermined information is stored in the other area, the transition to the specific game state corresponding to the predetermined information is reserved, and then, when a predetermined condition (such as the end of the time-saving game state, the execution of a predetermined number of game rounds, the ball entering a specific ball entry section, etc.) is met, a means for executing the transition to the specific game state for which the reservation was made (a function for executing the reservation process in the main control device 162 of the modified examples 3 to 8, and the second transition process for the sudden time-saving game state);
A means for terminating the reservation when the update result of the predetermined information updated in the other area becomes a predetermined result without the transition being performed for the specific game state corresponding to the predetermined information stored in the other area (a function for executing a high frequency support mode update process in the main control device 162 of the third to eighth modified examples);
A gaming machine according to feature cC5 or feature cC6, characterized in that it is provided with:

In the above configuration, the specific game state whose information is stored in another area is put into a reserved state, and a transition is made when a predetermined condition is met thereafter, so that it is possible to implement both the specific game state being executed and the specific game state in which the specific condition is met during that state. In other words, by meeting a specific condition in a specific game state, it is possible to provide a game that can essentially extend the specific game state or transition to another specific game state, thereby increasing interest.

In addition, when the update result of the specified area becomes a specified result and the specific game state being executed ends, the reserved state is configured to end when the update result of the other area becomes a specified result for the reserved specific game state. In this case, if the remaining number of times (original upper limit number of times) of the specific game state after the specific condition is satisfied midway is less than the remaining number of times for the previous specific game state being executed, the reserved state can be automatically released without transitioning to the subsequent specific game state. Therefore, when the specific condition is satisfied midway through the previous specific game state, the specified information can be stored in the other area without the need to compare the remaining number of times of the previous specific game state with the remaining number of times of the above-mentioned subsequent specific game state and to determine whether or not to store information in the other area based on the result, which makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration.

Feature cC8. The plurality of areas includes a first area (e.g., a first reserved time-saving area 562a) as the predetermined area and a second area (e.g., a second reserved time-saving area 562b to a third reserved time-saving area 562c) as the other area,
The predetermined information stored in the first area corresponds to a specific game state being executed,
A gaming machine described in any one of features cC1 to cC7, characterized in that multiple second areas are set.

In the above configuration, multiple second areas are set, making it possible to reserve multiple specific game states. This allows the player to enjoy not only whether a reservation will occur, but also how many can be reserved, making it possible to appropriately increase interest.

Feature cC9. The gaming machine described in Feature cC8, characterized in that the multiple second areas are set in accordance with the order in which specific conditions are met (in variants 3 and 4, the order in which special misses are won is associated with each area of the reserved time-saving area 562).

In the above configuration, since the multiple second areas correspond to the order in which the specific conditions are met, when the specific conditions are met multiple times, the specified information can be stored while being organized in the order in which they occurred. Therefore, when transitions are made to the multiple reserved specific game states in the order in which the specific conditions are met, the transition control can be performed appropriately.

Feature cC10. When a specific condition is established in a situation where a specific information is stored in a specific area (e.g., the first reserved time-shortening area 562a) among the plurality of second areas, a means for storing the specific information of a specific game state corresponding to the establishment in a specific area (e.g., the second reserved time-shortening area 562b) among the plurality of second areas that corresponds to a position after the specific area (a function for executing a reservation process in the main control device 162 of the modified examples 3 to 4);
A means for transitioning to a specific game state corresponding to the predetermined information stored in the specific area after transitioning to the specific game state corresponding to the predetermined information stored in the specific area (a function for executing a second transition process of the sudden time-saving game state in the main control device 162 of the third and fourth modified examples);
A gaming machine according to feature cC8 or feature cC9, characterized in that it is provided with:

According to the above configuration, when a specific condition is met multiple times and multiple reservations are made for a specific game state, it becomes possible to transition to the reserved specific game states sequentially in the order corresponding to the fulfillment of the specific conditions.

Feature cC11. The specific game state has a plurality of specific game states (sudden time-saving game states A to C, etc.),
The gaming machine described in feature cC8 is characterized in that the multiple second areas are set to correspond to the type of specific gaming state (in variant example 5, each area of the reserved time-saving area 612 is assigned a type of sudden time-saving gaming state).

In the above configuration, since the multiple second areas correspond to the types of specific game states, when the specific condition is met multiple times, the specified information can be stored while being organized by the type of specific game state. Therefore, when transitions are made to the multiple reserved specific game states in the order corresponding to their types, it is possible to appropriately control the transitions.

Feature cC12. The gaming machine described in Feature cC11 is provided with a means for executing a transition to a plurality of specific game states to which the predetermined information corresponds in a predetermined order (priority) determined in accordance with the type of specific game state when the predetermined information is stored in a plurality of the second areas (a function for executing a second transition process for the sudden time-saving game state in the main control device 162 of Variation 5).

According to the above configuration, when a specific condition occurs multiple times and multiple reservations are made for specific game states, it becomes possible to transition to the reserved specific game states sequentially in a predetermined order determined according to the type of specific game state.

Note that, to each of the configurations of Features cC1 to cC12 above, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of Features cA1 to cA13, Features cB1 to cB14, Features cC1 to cC12, Features cD1 to cD9, Features cE1 to cE11, Features cF1 to cF9, Features cG1 to cG14, Features cH1 to cH10, and Features cI1 to cI11 individually, or it is also possible to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Features C-D group>
The group of features cD is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the variations or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted based on variations 3 to 8 of the third embodiment described above.

The features cD group were made with a view to resolving the problem that the invention aims to solve with respect to the background technology that states, "For example, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have a normal gaming state and a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player, and control is performed such as switching the gaming state based on the game results (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)." "Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, there is still room for improvement in controlling the gaming state."

Feature C D1. The game state has a plurality of game states including a predetermined game state (normal game state) and a specific game state (high frequency support mode, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state;
A specific game state transition means (a function for executing a first transition process for the sudden time-saving game state in the main control device 162 of the modified examples 3 to 8) that can transition to a specific game state when a specific condition (such as winning a special miss result, reaching the ceiling number of times, or hitting a specific ball entry area) is met;
A specifying means (a function for executing a process for determining whether to suddenly enter the time-saving game state in the main control device 162 of the third to eighth variants) that can reserve a transition to a specific game state based on the establishment of a specific condition when the specific condition is established in a predetermined situation (a situation in which the time-saving game state is in progress, a situation in which the high probability game state is in progress, a situation in which the opening and closing execution mode is in progress, etc.), and then execute a transition to the reserved specific game state when a predetermined condition is established (an end of the time-saving game state, etc., a predetermined number of game rounds have been played, a ball has been scored into a specific ball-scoring section, etc.);
Equipped with
It is configured to be possible to reserve a specific game state for multiple times,
A predetermined sequence means is provided for making the execution sequence of transitions for the plurality of specific game states in which the reservation is made a predetermined sequence (a process for storing type information in the first area 565a to the third area 565b and the first area 565a to the tenth area 565j set in the generation sequence information storage area 565 in accordance with the winning sequence of the special miss results in the first area 565a to the third area 565b and the first area 565a to the tenth area 565j in the third area 565a to the tenth area 565j in the third area 565b and the tenth area 565j in the fourth area 565j in the fourth area 565j, respectively; a process for grasping the reserved time reduction with the highest priority and making the grasped reserved time reduction a transition target, a process for determining the transition sequence of the reserved time reduction by lottery in the fifth area 565j, etc.),
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the specified condition is met while multiple reservations are being made, a transition is executed based on an execution order determined by the specified order means.

In the above configuration, the specific game state is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state, and this specific game state is entered when a specific condition is met. Therefore, the player can enjoy playing the game with the aim of entering the specific game state by entering the specific condition. Under such a configuration, not only is the specific game state entered immediately upon the establishment of a specific condition, but when a specific condition is entered under a predetermined situation, the entry to the specific game state corresponding to the entry is reserved. Therefore, the player can enjoy not only whether or not to enter the specific game state, but also whether or not the specific game state is reserved, which makes it possible to increase the interest. In addition, since such a reservation can be made multiple times, if a specific condition is met while the specific game state is reserved, the specific game state can be reserved again. This further increases the interest. Moreover, when such multiple reservations are made, the execution order of the transitions to the reserved specific game states is determined, and the transition order is controlled according to the execution order. Therefore, in situations where conflicts between specific game states may occur, transitions can be made in a suitable order while avoiding overlapping execution of specific game states.

Feature C2. The specific game state that can be reserved includes a plurality of specific game states (sudden time-saving game states A to C, etc.);
Priorities are set in advance for the multiple specific game states,
The gaming machine described in feature cD1 is characterized in that the predetermined order means ensures that the order in which the transitions are executed is a predetermined order corresponding to the priority (such as a function of executing a second transition process for a sudden time-saving gaming state in the main control unit 162 of variant example 5).

In the above configuration, when a transition is made between multiple reserved specific game states, the transition is controlled to be made in an order corresponding to the priority set in advance for each specific game state. This makes it possible to make transitions in an order corresponding to the type of specific game state, regardless of the order in which the specific conditions are established. In addition, it is expected that the effect of reducing the workload when designing a gaming machine can be achieved. In other words, if the transition order for all combinations of specific game states is specified one by one in the control program, there is a concern that the control program will become complicated and the workload will increase. In this regard, by controlling the transition order using the priority, it is sufficient to simply set a priority for each specific game state, and the control program can be simplified. Furthermore, even if a design change is required after the fact, a complete change to the control program is not required, and it is sufficient to simply change the priority setting. In other words, there is also the advantage that the design change can be easily made.

Feature cD3. A launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball based on a predetermined launching operation;
A predetermined ball entry section (second operating port 63) into which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter,
The plurality of specific game states include a first specific game state (sudden time-saving game state C) and a second specific game state (sudden time-saving game state A) in which a ball is more likely to enter the predetermined ball entry portion than in the first specific game state,
A gaming machine according to feature cD2, characterized in that the second specific gaming state is set to a higher priority than the first specific gaming state.

In the above configuration, the second specific game state, in which a ball is more likely to enter the designated ball entry area, is set to a higher priority than the first specific game state, in which the ball is less likely to enter the designated ball entry area, so that if both of these specific game states are reserved, the transition to the second specific game state can be made to occur first. This allows the player to arrive at a state in which it is easier to prevent the loss of balls in their possession more quickly, making it possible to create a configuration that allows the player to play with an advantage.

Feature cD4. A special judgment means (a function for executing a special drawing hit judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (a special drawing hit judgment) based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry portion;
A means for transitioning to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state and different from the specific game state based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result (jackpot result) (a function for executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162);
A gaming machine as described in feature cD3, characterized in that it is equipped with:

In the above configuration, the predetermined ball entry section is the starting point for a special judgment, and when both the first specific game state and the second specific game state are reserved, the transition to the second specific game state, in which a ball is more likely to enter the starting point, can be prioritized. This allows the player to quickly reach a state in which a special judgment is more likely to be received and the loss of balls in hand is less likely, making it possible to create a configuration that allows the player to play advantageously.

Feature cD5. A gaming machine according to any one of Features cD1 to cD4, characterized in that the predetermined order means includes a means for making the execution order correspond to the order in which specific conditions are established (a function for executing a reservation process in the main control device 162 of Modifications 3 to 4).

In the above configuration, when multiple reservations are made, transitions are made in an order that corresponds to the order in which the specific conditions are met. In other words, since the order of reservations is directly reflected in the order of transitions, if there are differences in the degree of advantage between multiple specific game states, it is advantageous for the player to meet the specific condition corresponding to the advantageous specific game state earlier. In other words, since the order in which the specific game states are reserved affects the subsequent development of the game, the player can also pay attention to the order in which reservations occur, making it possible to increase interest.

Feature cD6. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball based on a predetermined launching operation;
A predetermined ball entry section (second operating port 63) into which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter,
The gaming machine described in feature cD5 is characterized in that the multiple types of specific game states include a first specific game state (sudden time-saving game state C) and a second specific game state (sudden time-saving game state A) in which a ball is more likely to enter the designated ball entry section than in the first specific game state.

The above configuration has a first specific game state and a second specific game state that differ in the likelihood of a ball scoring into a predetermined scoring area, and different degrees of advantage are provided in the multiple specific game states. By applying the configuration of feature cD5 to this configuration, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the order of the reserved specific game states, and to increase the fun factor.

Feature cD7. When a specific condition is met in a specific situation, a specific notification (such as a special reach miss A performance) can be executed by a specific notification means (such as the symbol display device 75) (a function for executing the processing of steps Sc4502 and Sc4503 in the modified example 3, etc.).
The specific game state that can be reserved includes a plurality of specific game states (sudden time-saving game states A to C, etc.),
A gaming machine described in any one of features cD1 to cD6, characterized in that the specific notification is one in which the type of the reserved specific game state is impossible or difficult for the player to recognize (e.g., a configuration in which the player can recognize that a special losing result has been won from the stopping combination of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, but cannot recognize the type of the special losing result).

In the above configuration, a specific notification is issued in response to the establishment of a specific condition, so the player can recognize that a reservation has occurred by referring to the notification. In such a case, the type of reserved specific game state cannot be unequivocally derived, so even if the player knows the regularity of the transition order (for example, the order of priority, or the order in which specific conditions are established), the actual transition order can be made difficult to understand. This allows the player to enjoy predicting which specific game state they will transition to, making it possible to increase interest.

Feature cD8. A first means (function for executing the processing of steps Sc4502 and Sc4503 in the modified example 3, etc.) capable of executing a specific notification (such as a special reach miss A performance) by a specific notification means (such as the symbol display device 75) when a specific condition is established in a specific situation;
A second means (a function of executing the processes of steps Sc4502 and Sc4504 in the third modification, etc.) for restricting the execution of the specific notification by the first means when a specific condition is satisfied in a situation where the reservation is being made;
A gaming machine described in any one of Features cD1 to cD7, characterized in that it is equipped with:

In the above configuration, a specific notification is issued in response to the establishment of a specific condition, allowing the player to recognize the occurrence of a reservation by referring to the notification. However, even if a specific condition is established, the specific notification is not issued if a specific game state is on hold. In other words, a notification is issued for the first reservation, but no notification is issued for the second or subsequent reservation occurrences. This makes it possible for the player to be unaware that multiple reservations have occurred, and allows the player to enjoy predicting the number of reservations and the order in which they will be transferred.

Feature cD9. A gaming machine according to any one of Features cD1 to cD8, characterized in that in a predetermined case where a plurality of the reservations are made and transitions are made based on the execution order determined by the predetermined order means, the execution order is configured to be unrecognizable or difficult for the player to recognize (such as in Variation 3, where the player is unable to recognize the transition order of each of the sudden time-saving game states while the sudden time-saving game states are reserved).

In the above configuration, when multiple reservations are made, the transition order of the multiple reserved specific game states is made impossible or difficult for the player to recognize, allowing the player to predict the transition order and enjoy the game.

Note that, to each of the configurations of Features cD1 to cD9 above, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of Features cA1 to cA13, Features cB1 to cB14, Features cC1 to cC12, Features cD1 to cD9, Features cE1 to cE11, Features cF1 to cF9, Features cG1 to cG14, Features cH1 to cH10, and Features cI1 to cI11 individually, or it is also possible to apply a combination of some or all of the technical ideas. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature c Group E>
Group cE of features is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and variations, or combinations thereof, and is extracted mainly based on variations 2, 5, and 7 of the third embodiment.

The feature group cE was made with a view to resolving the problem that the invention aims to solve with respect to the background technology that states, "For example, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have a normal gaming state and a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player, and control is performed such as switching the gaming state based on the game results (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)." "Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, there is still room for improvement in controlling the gaming state."

Feature cE1. A special judgment means (a function for executing a special drawing hit judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (a special drawing hit judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (a prize-winning in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63),
A first transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can transition to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state (normal game state) based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result (jackpot result);
Equipped with
As a gaming state, there is a specific gaming state (such as a high frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to a player than a predetermined gaming state and is different from a special gaming state,
A second transition means (a function for executing a process for determining whether to transition to a specific game state in the main control device 162 of the second modification and the fifth modification to the seventh modification, and a process for the first transition to the sudden time-saving game state in the main control device 162 of the seventh modification) is provided, which can transition to a specific game state when a specific condition (a special miss result is won, the number of times the ball reaches the ceiling is reached, a ball is scored in a specific ball-scoring area, etc.) is satisfied.
A gaming machine characterized in that it has a plurality of specific game states (sudden time-shortening game states A to C, a normal time-shortening game state, a ceiling time-shortening game state, etc.) as specific game states, and priority is set for these specific game states (a configuration in which priority is set for the sudden time-shortening game states A to C in variant 2 and variant 5, a configuration in which priority is set for the normal time-shortening game state and the sudden time-shortening game states A and B in variant 6, and a configuration in which priority is set for the ceiling time-shortening game state and the sudden time-shortening game states A and B in variant 7).

In the above configuration, in addition to the special game state to which the player is transitioned based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result, there is a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state. This specific game state can be transitioned to when a specific condition is met. In addition, since multiple types of specific game states are provided as the specific game states, the player can enjoy not only whether or not to transition to a specific game state, but also which specific game state to transition to, which makes it possible to increase interest. However, when multiple types of specific game states are provided in this way, there is a concern that specific game states may overlap, such as when a specific condition corresponding to another specific game state is met in a situation where one specific game state is in one state. In this regard, since a priority is set for each specific game state, the switching of specific game states and the determination of the transition order in the event of an overlap can be performed based on the priority, making it possible to control the game state appropriately.

Feature cE2. The multiple types of specific game states include a first specific game state (normal time-saving game state in Modification 6, sudden time-saving game state B, sudden time-saving game state A, B in Modification 7, etc.) and a second specific game state (sudden time-saving game state A in Modification 6, ceiling time-saving game state in Modification 7, etc.),
A gaming machine described in feature cE1, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for controlling whether or not to switch to the second specific game state based on the priority set for each specific game state when a specific condition corresponding to a second specific game state is satisfied while the first specific game state is in effect (a function for executing a process for determining whether to transition to the sudden time-saving game state in the main control unit 162 of variants 6 to 7, and a process for the first transition to the sudden time-saving game state).

According to the above configuration, when a specific condition corresponding to a second specific game state is met during a first specific game state, the priorities of those specific game states are compared to control whether to switch to the second specific game state. Therefore, simply by assigning an appropriate priority to each specific game state in advance, it becomes possible to appropriately control whether to switch to the second specific game state or to continue the first specific game state.

Feature cE3. The multiple types of specific game states include a first specific game state (such as the normal time-saving game state in Modification 6, the sudden time-saving game state B, and the sudden time-saving game state B in Modification 7) and a second specific game state having a higher priority than the first specific game state (such as the sudden time-saving game state A in Modification 6 and the ceiling time-saving game state in Modification 7),
A gaming machine as described in feature cE1 or feature cE2, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for transitioning from a first specific gaming state to a second specific gaming state when a specific condition corresponding to a second specific gaming state is satisfied while the first specific gaming state is in the first specific gaming state (a function for executing a process for determining transition to a sudden time-saving gaming state in the main control device 162 of variants 6 to 7, and a first transition process for the sudden time-saving gaming state).

In the above configuration, if a specific condition corresponding to a second specific game state with a higher priority is met during the first specific game state, a switch from the first specific game state to the second specific game state is executed. For example, if the second specific game state is more advantageous to the player than the first specific game state, a switch from an unfavorable state to an advantageous state can be performed, and control can be appropriately performed when a specific condition is met during the game.

Feature cE4. The gaming machine described in Feature cE3, characterized in that the transition means stops or interrupts the first specific game state and transitions to the second specific game state.

In the above configuration, it is possible to interrupt the first specific game state and transition to the second specific game state. For example, if the second specific game state is more advantageous than the first specific game state, such an advantageous state can be brought about earlier, making it possible to provide a configuration that allows the player to easily play advantageously.

Feature cE5. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball based on a predetermined launching operation;
A predetermined ball entry section (second operating port 63) into which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter,
A gaming machine described in any of features cE2 to cE4, characterized in that a second specific gaming state (such as the sudden time-saving gaming state A in variants 6 to 7) is one in which a ball is more likely to enter the designated ball entry portion than a first specific gaming state (such as the sudden time-saving gaming state B in variants 6 to 7).

In the above configuration, the second specific game state makes it easier for the ball to enter the designated ball entry area than the first specific game state, and allows the player to play more advantageously with less loss of balls than in the first specific game state. By applying each of the configurations from feature cE2 to feature cE4 to this configuration, it becomes possible to optimally exert each of the above-mentioned effects of those configurations.

Feature cE6. The multiple types of specific game states include a first specific game state (such as the sudden time-saving game state A in the modified examples 6 to 7) and a third specific game state (such as the sudden time-saving game state B in the modified examples 6 to 7) that has a lower priority than the first specific game state;
A gaming machine described in any of features cE1 to cE5, characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a reservation process in the main control device 162 of variants 6 to 7, a function of suddenly executing a second transition process to the time-saving game state) for reserving transition to the third specific game state when a specific condition corresponding to a third specific game state is satisfied while the machine is in the first specific game state, and then executing a transition to the reserved third specific game state when a specified condition (end of a time-saving game state, etc., completion of a specified number of game rounds, a ball entering a specific ball entry section, etc.) is satisfied.

In the above configuration, when a specific condition corresponding to a third specific game state with a lower priority is established while the first specific game state is in progress, the first specific game state is continued, and then a transition to the third specific game state is executed in response to the establishment of the predetermined condition. In other words, the continuation of the specific game state with a higher priority is prioritized, and the transition to the specific game state with a lower priority can be postponed.

Feature cE7. The device is provided with a means for reserving a transition to a specific game state, and then, when a predetermined condition (such as the end of a time-saving game state, the execution of a predetermined number of game rounds, a ball entering a specific ball entry section, etc.) is met, capable of executing a transition to the reserved specific game state (a function for executing a reservation process in the main control device 162 of the second modified example, a second transition process for the time-saving game state suddenly);
The specific game states that can be reserved include a plurality of specific game states (sudden time-saving game states A to C, etc.), and priorities are set for the specific game states;
A gaming machine described in any of features cE1 to cE6, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for controlling, based on priority, whether or not to execute the reservation for a specific gaming state corresponding to the establishment of a specific condition (a function for executing a reservation update process in the main control unit 162 of variant example 2).

In the above configuration, it is possible not only to immediately transition to a specific game state when a specific condition is met, but also to reserve the transition to the specific game state and then execute the transition when a predetermined condition is met. This allows the player to enjoy not only whether or not to transition to a specific game state, but also whether or not the specific game state is reserved. In this case, a priority is set for each specific game state, and whether or not reservation is executed is controlled based on that priority, so that if a specific condition is met multiple times, the specific game state with the highest priority can be given priority as the target for reservation.

Feature cE8. The plurality of specific game states include a first specific game state (such as the sudden time-saving game state B in the modified example 2) and a second specific game state (such as the sudden time-saving game state A in the modified example 2),
The gaming machine described in feature cE7 is characterized in that it is equipped with a means for controlling whether or not to execute the reservation for the second specific game state based on the priority set for each of the specific game states when a specific condition corresponding to the second specific game state is established while the reservation is being made for the first specific game state (a function for executing a reservation update process in the main control unit 162 of variant example 2).

In the above configuration, whether or not to reserve the second specific game state is controlled by comparing the priority between the already reserved first specific game state and the second specific game state for which a new specific condition has been established. This makes it possible to appropriately control whether or not to reserve for each time a specific condition is established multiple times.

Feature cE9. The plurality of specific game states include a first specific game state (such as the sudden time-saving game state B in the modified example 2) and a second specific game state (such as the sudden time-saving game state A in the modified example 2) having a higher priority than the first specific game state;
A gaming machine described in feature cE7 or feature cE8, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for changing the execution target of the reservation from the first specific game state to the second specific game state when a specific condition corresponding to the second specific game state is established while the reservation is being made for the first specific game state (a function for executing a reservation update process in the main control unit 162 of variant example 2).

In the above configuration, when a specific condition corresponding to a second specific game state with a higher priority is met while a first specific game state is reserved, the reserved execution target is changed from the first specific game state to the second specific game state. In other words, since the reservation is updated to switch the reserved specific game state, it becomes possible to reserve specific game states with higher priority with priority when a specific condition is met multiple times in a configuration with an upper limit on the number of reservations that can be made.

Feature cE10. A means for reserving a transition to a specific game state and then executing a transition to the reserved specific game state when a predetermined condition (such as the end of a time-saving game state, the execution of a predetermined number of game rounds, a ball entering a specific ball entry section, etc.) is met (a function for executing a reservation process in the main control device 162 of the fifth modified example, and a second transition process for the time-saving game state suddenly) is provided;
The specific game states that can be reserved include a plurality of specific game states (sudden time-saving game states A to C, etc.), and priorities are set for the specific game states;
A gaming machine described in any of features cE1 to cE9, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for controlling, based on priority, which specific gaming state to transition to when a specified condition is met when multiple reservations are made (a function for executing a second transition process for the sudden time-saving gaming state in the main control unit 162 of variant example 5).

In the above configuration, it is possible not only to immediately transition to a specific game state when a specific condition is met, but also to reserve the transition to the specific game state and then execute the transition when a predetermined condition is met. This allows the player to enjoy not only whether or not to transition to a specific game state, but also whether or not the specific game state is reserved. In this case, a priority is set for each specific game state, and when multiple reservations are made, the specific game state to transition to is controlled based on the priority. This makes it possible to suitably control the transition order for multiple reserved specific game states.

Feature cE11. The plurality of specific game states includes a first specific game state (such as the sudden time-saving game state B in the modified example 5) and a second specific game state (such as the sudden time-saving game state A in the modified example 5) having a higher priority than the first specific game state;
A gaming machine as described in feature cE10, characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function of executing a second transition process for the sudden time-saving gaming state in the main control unit 162 of variant example 5) for prioritizing the transition to the second specific gaming state before the first specific gaming state when the reservation is made for the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state.

According to the above configuration, when multiple specific game states are reserved, the transition order can be made earlier for specific game states with higher priority, regardless of the order in which the specific conditions are met (the order in which the reservations occur). For example, by giving a higher priority to specific game states with a higher degree of advantage, such advantageous states can be brought about earlier, making it possible to create a configuration that makes it easier for players to play advantageously.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of Features cA1 to cA13, Features cB1 to cB14, Features cC1 to cC12, Features cD1 to cD9, Features cE1 to cE11, Features cF1 to cF9, Features cG1 to cG14, Features cH1 to cH10, and Features cI1 to cI11 can be applied individually to each of the configurations of Features cE1 to cE11 above, or a part or all of each technical idea can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature cF group>
The group of features cF is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the variations or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted based on the third embodiment and variations 1 to 8 of the third embodiment.

The feature group cF was made with a view to resolving the problem that the invention aims to solve with regard to the background technology, which is "for example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is known a normal gaming state and a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is controlled to be switched based on the results of the game (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)." The background technology is "Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, there is still room for improvement in terms of increasing the interest in the game."

Feature cF1. A launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball based on a predetermined launching operation;
A predetermined ball entry section (a first operating port 62, a second operating port 63) into which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter;
A specific judgment means (a function of executing a special game number control process and a process for suddenly determining whether or not a game state has been entered into the time-saving game state by the main control device 162) for executing a specific judgment (a judgment as to whether or not a special game result has been entered into the time-saving game state) when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry portion;
A bonus granting means (such as a function for executing a reserved process in the main control device 162 in the third embodiment and modified examples 1 to 8) that can grant a predetermined bonus (execution of reserved time-saving) when the result of the specific judgment becomes a specific result (a special miss result) in a predetermined situation (a situation in which the time-saving game state is in progress, a situation in which the high probability game state is in progress, a situation in which the opening and closing execution mode is in progress, etc.) and
A means for varying the degree of advantage of the specified privilege (the number of times remaining when a transition to reserved time reduction is implemented) depending on the timing when the result of the specific judgment becomes a specific result in the specified situation (such as a function for setting the number of times remaining when a transition to reserved time reduction is implemented in the third embodiment and modified examples 1 to 8 to the difference number obtained by subtracting the remaining number of times for the stay time reduction from the upper limit number of times for the reserved time reduction),
A gaming machine comprising:

In the above configuration, a specific judgment is executed when a gaming ball enters a specific entry area, and if the judgment result becomes a specific result in a specific situation, a specific bonus is awarded. At that time, the configuration is such that the degree of advantage of the bonus changes depending on the timing at which the specific result is reached in the specific situation. This not only ensures that the result of the specific judgment becomes a specific result corresponding to the award of a bonus, but also entertains the player with the timing of this result, making it possible to increase interest.

Feature cF2. A gaming machine as described in Feature cF1, characterized in that it is possible to award a more advantageous bonus as the specified bonus when the specific judgment results in a specific result at a second timing (e.g., the 40th special game in the normal time-saving game state) that is later than the first timing in the specified situation (e.g., the 29th special game in the normal time-saving game state) compared to when the specific judgment results in a specific result at a first timing in the specified situation (e.g., the 29th special game in the normal time-saving game state).

In the above configuration, the later the timing of the specific result in a predetermined situation, the more advantageous the predetermined benefit will be. For this reason, the later the timing of the specific result, the more desirable it is for the player, but at the same time, the risk that the predetermined situation will end without the specific result being achieved increases. Therefore, the player can play in the hope of hitting the specific result amid the thrill of knowing that the predetermined situation may end, making it possible to increase interest.

Feature cF3. A gaming machine according to feature cF1 or feature cF2, characterized in that it is provided with a means for granting a bonus corresponding to the second timing as a predetermined bonus granted by the bonus granting means when the result of the specific judgment becomes a specific result at a first timing in the predetermined situation (e.g., the 29th special game in the normal time-saving game state) and the result of the specific judgment becomes a specific result at a second timing after the first timing (e.g., the 40th special game in the normal time-saving game state).

In the above configuration, if a specific result is achieved at both the first timing and the later second timing in a specified situation, a bonus corresponding to the second timing is awarded. For example, if the configuration is such that the later the timing of the specific result is achieved, the more advantageous the bonus, even if the specific result is achieved at the first timing, the bonus can be upgraded by achieving the specific result at the subsequent second timing, so that it is possible to maintain anticipation of the specific result until the end of the specified situation. Conversely, if the configuration is such that the later the timing of the specific result is achieved, the more disadvantageous the bonus, it is possible to add a game in which, when a specific result is achieved at the first timing, the player can enjoy the thrill of whether the specific result can be avoided in the subsequent specific judgment.

Feature cF4. The bonus granting means grants a predetermined bonus when a predetermined condition (such as the end of a time-saving game state, the execution of a predetermined number of game rounds, or the ball entering a specific ball entry section) is met after the result of the specific judgment becomes a specific result,
A gaming machine as described in feature cF1 or feature cF2, characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function of executing a reservation update process in the main control unit 162 in variant 1, a function of executing a reservation process in the main control unit 162 in variant 5) for granting a bonus corresponding to the second timing as a predetermined bonus granted in response to the establishment of a predetermined condition, when the result of the specific judgment becomes a specific result at a first timing in the specified situation (for example, the 29th special chart play in the normal time-saving play state) and the result of the specific judgment becomes a specific result at a second timing later than the first timing before the specified condition is established (for example, the 40th special chart play in the normal time-saving play state).

In the above configuration, in which a specific bonus is awarded when a specific result is achieved and a specific condition is met, if a specific result is achieved at a first timing and then at a second timing before the specific condition is met, a bonus corresponding to the second timing is awarded when the specific condition is met. In other words, since the bonus content is updated each time a specific result is achieved, if the configuration is such that the bonus is more advantageous the later the specific result is achieved, for example, even if a specific result is achieved at an early timing, the player can continue playing with the aim of achieving the specific result again. This makes it possible to maintain the sense of anticipation for the specific result until the end of the specified situation, allowing the player to enjoy the game until the end.

Feature cF5. A gaming machine according to any one of Features cF1 to cF4, characterized in that it is equipped with a specific notification execution means (a function for executing a variable display time setting process in the main control device 162, a function for executing a special chart variable display process in the presentation control device 143) capable of executing a specific notification (special reach miss A presentation) when the result of the specific judgment in the predetermined situation is a specific result.

In the above configuration, a specific notification is executed when a specific judgment results in a specific result in a specified situation during the period for which the bonus is awarded, so the player can easily grasp the timing at which the specific result was reached.

Feature cF6. After the result of the specific judgment becomes a specific result at a first timing (for example, the 29th special game in the normal time-saving game state) in the predetermined situation, when the result of the specific judgment becomes a specific result at a second timing (for example, the 40th special game in the normal time-saving game state) after the first timing, a bonus corresponding to the second timing is granted as a predetermined bonus granted by the bonus granting means (a function for executing a reserved update process in the main control device 162 of the modified example 1, a function for executing a reserved process in the main control device 162 of the modified example 5);
a means for, when the result of the specific judgment at the first timing is a specific result and then the result of the specific judgment at the second timing is a specific result, not executing a specific notification corresponding to the second timing, or making it more difficult to execute a specific notification corresponding to the second timing than at the first timing (a function for not executing a special reach miss A presentation in a game in which a special miss result is re-won, or a function for making it more difficult to execute a special reach miss A presentation);
A gaming machine as described in feature cF5, characterized in that it is equipped with:

In the above configuration, in which a special result is obtained at a first timing and then a special result is obtained at a second timing, a special notification corresponding to the special result at the second timing is not executed or is made difficult to execute. This makes it difficult for a player to notice that a special result has been obtained at the second timing, leading the player to believe that a special benefit corresponding to the first timing will be granted. Therefore, when a special benefit corresponding to the second timing is granted as a predetermined benefit, the player can be surprised, making it possible to increase interest.

Feature cF7. A predetermined notification execution means (a function for executing a reserved performance setting process in the performance control device 143) capable of executing a predetermined notification (display of reserved images 528, 529) when the result of the specific judgment in the predetermined situation becomes a specific result,
A gaming machine described in any of features cF1 to cF6, characterized in that the specified notification execution means is equipped with a mode setting means (a function of executing a reserved performance setting process in the performance control device 143) for setting the mode of the specified notification based on the specified bonus granted by the bonus granting means.

In the above configuration, when a specific result is achieved under a specific situation, a specific notification is executed, and the manner of the specific notification is set based on the specific benefit to be awarded. In this case, the execution of the specific notification can inform the player that a specific result has been achieved, and the manner of the notification can suggest the content of the benefit. This allows a game to be played in which the player can guess the benefit by referring to the fixed notification, which can increase the player's interest.

Feature cF8. After the result of the specific judgment becomes a specific result at a first timing (for example, the 29th special game in the normal time-saving game state) in the predetermined situation, when the result of the specific judgment becomes a specific result at a second timing (for example, the 40th special game in the normal time-saving game state) after the first timing, a bonus corresponding to the second timing is granted as a predetermined bonus granted by the bonus granting means (a function for executing a reserved update process in the main control device 162 of the modified example 1, a function for executing a reserved process in the main control device 162 of the modified example 5);
A predetermined notification execution means (a function of executing a reserved performance setting process in the performance control device 143) capable of executing a predetermined notification (displaying reserved images 528, 529) when the result of the specific judgment in the predetermined situation becomes a specific result;
Equipped with
The predetermined notification execution means is configured to execute the predetermined notification before the predetermined benefit is granted by the benefit granting means (a function of displaying reservation images 528, 529 prior to implementing a transition to the reservation time reduction),
A gaming machine described in any of features cF1 to cF7, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for changing the manner of the specified notification when the result of the specific judgment at the second timing becomes a specific result while a specified notification is being executed (a function for executing an update process of the reserved image in the presentation control device 143 of variant example 1).

In the above configuration, in the case where a specific result is obtained at a first timing and then at a second timing, a special benefit corresponding to the second timing is granted, the manner of the specific notification is changed when a specific result is obtained at the second timing while a specific notification is being executed. In other words, the changed manner suggests the content of the special benefit corresponding to the second timing, so it is possible to add to the excitement of guessing the special benefit that will actually be granted from the change in the specific notification.

Feature cF9. A gaming machine described in any one of Features cF1 to cF8, which is configured so that if the result of the specific judgment is a specific result in a specific situation different from the specified situation (such as a situation in a normal game state), the granting of a specified bonus is not executed (a configuration in which the time-saving game state is not suddenly reserved even if a special miss result occurs in a situation in a normal game state).

In the above configuration, even if a specific result is achieved in a specific situation different from the predetermined situation, the predetermined benefit is not awarded, and the benefit can only be obtained in the predetermined situation. This allows the predetermined situation to be enjoyed as a special game period, making it possible to increase interest.

Note that, to each of the configurations of features cF1 to cF9 above, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of features cA1 to cA13, features cB1 to cB12, features cC1 to cC12, features cD1 to cD9, features cE1 to cE11, features cF1 to cF9, features cG1 to cG14, features cH1 to cH10, and features cI1 to cI11 individually, or it is also possible to apply a combination of some or all of the respective technical ideas. When applying the respective technical ideas in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic cG group>
The feature group cG is an invention group extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the modifications or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted based on the modification 8 of the third embodiment.

The feature group cG was made with a view to resolving the problem that the invention aims to solve with regard to the background technology, which is "for example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is known a normal gaming state and a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is controlled to be switched based on the results of the game (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)." The background technology is "Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, there is still room for improvement in terms of increasing the interest in the game."

Feature cG1. The game state has a plurality of game states including a predetermined game state (normal game state) and a specific game state (high frequency support mode, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state;
A specific game state transition means (a function of executing a first transition process for the sudden time-saving game state in the main control device 162) that can transition to a specific game state when a specific condition (such as winning a special miss result A to C, reaching the ceiling number of times, or hitting a specific ball entry area) is met;
a first means (a function of suddenly executing a second transition process to the time-saving game state in the main control device 162 of the eighth modified example) which reserves a transition to a specific game state based on the establishment of a specific condition when the specific condition is established in a predetermined situation (a situation in which the time-saving game state is in a state, a situation in which the high probability game state is in a state, a situation in which the opening and closing execution mode is in progress, etc.), and then executes a transition to the reserved specific game state when a predetermined execution condition is established (an end of the time-saving game state, etc., a predetermined number of game rounds are played, a ball is scored in a specific ball entry section, etc.);
A second means (a function of executing a process for canceling reservation in the main control device 162 of the eighth modified example) for canceling the reserved state without executing a transition to the reserved specific game state when a predetermined condition (such as winning a special miss result D to F, or a ball entering a specific ball entry section) is satisfied before the predetermined execution condition is satisfied when a reservation is made by the first means;
A gaming machine comprising:

In the above configuration, a specific game state is provided as a game state more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state, and it is possible to transition to this specific game state when a specific condition is met. Under such a configuration, not only is a transition to the specific game state immediately made in response to the establishment of a specific condition, but when a specific condition is met in a predetermined situation, the transition to the specific game state corresponding to the establishment is reserved. Therefore, not only whether or not to transition to the specific game state, but also whether or not the specific game state is reserved can be entertained by the player. Moreover, if a predetermined condition is met before the execution condition of the reserved specific game state is met, the reservation is cancelled. Therefore, even if the specific game state is reserved, the player cannot feel at ease, and can play while experiencing the thrill that the reservation may disappear. Furthermore, by configuring the reservation to be cancelled after its execution, it is possible to prevent the player from being biased toward the advantage even if the occurrence probability of the reservation is set high. In other words, compared to a case where the reservation cancellation function is not provided, the reservation occurrence probability can be set higher in the first place, so that the occurrence frequency of the reservation can be increased. This can increase players' expectations regarding the occurrence of reserves, and can effectively stimulate their desire to play.

Feature cG2. The specific game states that can be reserved include a first specific game state (sudden time-saving game state A) and a second specific game state (sudden time-saving game state B),
The gaming machine described in feature cG1 is characterized in that the predetermined conditions are set in a number of types, including a first predetermined condition corresponding to the release of the reservation for the first specific game state (winning special miss result D, the ball entering the entry area corresponding to the sudden time-saving game state A, etc.) and a second predetermined condition corresponding to the release of the reservation for the second specific game state (winning special miss result E, the ball entering the entry area corresponding to the sudden time-saving game state B, etc.).

In the above configuration, there are multiple types of specific game states, and a release condition is set for each of these specific game states. This makes it possible for the player to be excited not only about whether the reservation will be released or not, but also about which specific game state the reservation will be released for. In particular, when the degree of advantage is different depending on the type of specific game state, it is possible to arouse a sense of anticipation that the release of the reservation of an advantageous specific game state will be avoided, making it possible to appropriately increase interest.

This feature can also be expressed as "there are multiple types of specific game states (such as sudden time-saving game states A to C) that can be reserved, multiple types of conditions (such as winning special miss results D to F) corresponding to each specific game state are set as the predetermined condition, and the second means has a means (a function of executing a reservation release process in the main control device 162 of variant 8) for canceling the reservation of the specific game state corresponding to the established condition when the predetermined condition is established."

Feature cG3. Equipped with a lottery means (such as a function of executing a special drawing win/loss judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a predetermined lottery (such as a special drawing win/loss lottery) when a predetermined lottery trigger (such as winning the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63) is established,
As a result of the predetermined lottery, a plurality of results including a first predetermined result (special losing results A to C) and a second predetermined result (special losing results D to F) different from the first predetermined result may be obtained,
A gaming machine described in feature cG1 or feature cG2, characterized in that the specific condition is met if the result of the specified lottery is the first specified result, and the specified condition is met if the result is the second specified result.

In the above configuration, among the possible outcomes of a predetermined lottery, a first predetermined result corresponds to the fulfillment of a specific condition, and a second predetermined result corresponds to the fulfillment of a specific condition. That is, a determination as to whether a specific condition that triggers the reservation of a specific game state has been fulfilled and a determination as to whether a predetermined condition that triggers the release of the reservation has been fulfilled are performed by the same lottery process. This prevents the reservation and release of a specific game state from being fulfilled simultaneously, and prevents the process from becoming complicated or difficult for players to understand. Furthermore, by consolidating multiple determinations into a single lottery process, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration compared to when each of these determinations is performed separately.

Feature cG4. A special judgment means (a function for executing a special drawing hit judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (a special drawing hit judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (a prize-winning in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63),
A special game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can transition to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state and different from the specific game state based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result (jackpot result);
Equipped with
As a result of the special determination, a plurality of results including the specific result and a predetermined result (special miss results D to F) different from the specific result may be obtained,
A gaming machine described in any one of features cG1 to cG3, characterized in that the specified condition is satisfied when the result of the special judgment becomes the specified result.

In the above configuration, among the possible outcomes of the special judgment (win/lose lottery), a specific outcome corresponds to a transition to a special game state, and a predetermined outcome corresponds to the fulfillment of a predetermined condition (reservation release). This allows the player to simultaneously enjoy a game aiming to obtain the special game state and a game avoiding the release of the reservation, making it possible to increase the player's interest.

Feature cG5. A gaming machine according to any one of Features cG1 to cG4, characterized in that the probability of the specific condition occurring (the probability of winning one of the special losing results A to C) is different from the probability of the predetermined condition occurring (the probability of winning one of the special losing results D to F).

With the above configuration, it is possible to set the likelihood of a specific game state being reserved and the likelihood of the reservation being released separately.

Feature cG6. The gaming machine described in Feature cG5, characterized in that the probability of the specific condition being met (e.g., 1/100) is set to a higher probability than the probability of the predetermined condition being met (e.g., 1/300).

In the above configuration, the probability of a reservation occurring is higher than the probability of a reservation being released, so the occurrence of a reservation leaves a stronger impression on the player than the release of a reservation, making it possible to effectively stimulate the player's desire to play.

Feature cG7. The specific game states that can be reserved include a first specific game state (sudden time-saving game state A) and a second specific game state (sudden time-saving game state B),
A gaming machine described in any of features cG1 to cG6, characterized in that the first specific gaming state is configured to be less likely to be released by the second means than the second specific gaming state (in variant example 8, the probability of suddenly releasing the reservation in the time-saving gaming state A is lower than the probability of suddenly releasing the reservation in the time-saving gaming state B).

In the above configuration, the ease with which a reservation can be released varies depending on the type of specific game state, so it is possible to create a specific game state in which a reservation is less likely to be released than in other specific game states. When a reservation occurs in such a specific game state in which release is difficult, the player can be suitably pleased, and interest can be suitably increased.

Feature cG8. A first means (a function of executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 162 according to the modified example 8) for executing a first specific notification (such as a special reach miss A performance) when the specific condition is established or when the reservation is made;
A second means (a function of executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 162 according to the eighth modification) for executing a second specific notification (such as a special reach miss C presentation) different from the first specific notification when the predetermined condition is satisfied or when the release is performed;
A gaming machine described in any one of features cG1 to cG7, characterized in that it is equipped with:

In the above configuration, different specific notifications are issued when a specific condition is reserved and when the reservation is released, allowing the player to clearly distinguish whether a reservation has occurred or whether the reservation has been released.

Feature cG9. A pattern display means (pattern display device 75) capable of variably displaying a plurality of patterns (pattern rows Z1 to Z3);
A display control means for controlling the display of a plurality of patterns variably displayed by the pattern display means so as to be stopped and displayed in a specific combination when the predetermined condition is satisfied or the cancellation is performed (a function for stopping and displaying the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 in a combination that is not a reach-winning combination including the special pattern 721);
A gaming machine described in any one of features cG1 to cG8, characterized in that it is equipped with:

In the above configuration, the release of the reservation is notified by the stopping result of the variably displayed patterns, so the player can check in what combination the patterns will stop and know whether the reservation will be released or not at the same time as the result of winning or losing, which effectively prevents oversights. Also, by adding combinations that correspond to the release of the reservation, the stopping patterns of the patterns that interest players are diversified, making it possible to increase the excitement of the pattern game.

Feature cG10. A predetermined notification execution means (a function of executing display setting of the reservation display unit 731 by the performance control device 143 according to the modified example 8) for executing a predetermined notification (such as a display performance using the reservation display unit 731) corresponding to the release of the reservation by the picture display means,
The gaming machine described in feature cG9 is characterized in that the specified notification is executed using at least a part of the multiple patterns (such as special pattern 721) that are stopped and displayed in the specific combination.

In the above configuration, a predetermined notification corresponding to the release of the reservation is executed using the images that are stopped and displayed in the second combination, so that the second combination of images and the release of the reservation can be strongly associated in the player's line of sight. This can strongly heighten the sense of excitement when the images in the second combination are about to be stopped and display, and can ideally liven up the game by avoiding the combination.

Feature cG11. A gaming machine according to Feature cG9 or Feature cG10, characterized in that it is provided with a display control means for controlling the display of a plurality of patterns variably displayed by the pattern display means so that the patterns are displayed in a predetermined combination different from the specific combination when the specific condition is met or when the reservation is made (a function for displaying the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 in a combination that is not in a reach and includes the special pattern 511).

In the above configuration, the occurrence and release of a reserved state in a specific game state is notified by using the stopping results of the variably displayed patterns, so the player can see the winning or losing result as well as the occurrence and release of a reserved state by watching what combination the patterns stop in. In other words, since the points that require attention are concentrated, it is possible to effectively prevent oversights. Also, by adding at least the occurrence and release of a reserved state, it is possible to increase the number of stopping combinations of patterns that interest players, making the pattern game more interesting.

Feature cG12. A special judgment means (a function for executing a special drawing hit judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (a special drawing hit judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (a prize-winning in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63),
A special game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can transition to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state and different from the specific game state based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result (jackpot result);
A game round control means (a function for executing a special game round control process in the main control device 162, a function for executing a special game round display process in the performance control device 143) that controls the game round so that a game round operation is started based on the special judgment, and a notification result corresponding to the result of the special judgment is counted as one game round, and
A means for making the operation period of the game turn operation in the game turn in which the predetermined condition is satisfied or the game turn in which the release is performed longer or more likely to be longer than the operation period of the game turn operation in the game turn in which the specific condition is satisfied or the game turn in which the reservation is performed (a function for executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 162 according to the eighth modified example);
A gaming machine described in any one of features cG1 to cG11, characterized in that it is equipped with:

In the above configuration, the game turn operation period for the game turn in which the reservation is released is longer or is likely to be longer than the game turn operation period for the game turn in which the reservation is made, so that the game turn presentation can be executed with a sufficient period for notifying the release of the reservation, and it becomes possible to clearly inform the player that the release has occurred.

Feature cG13. The game machine has a first game state (first opening and closing execution mode) and a second game state (second opening and closing execution mode) that are more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state and different from a specific game state;
A variable ball entry control means (a function of executing a large prize opening opening/closing process in the main control unit 162) that executes variable ball entry control in which the variable ball entry means (variable prize entry device 65) opens in the first game state and the second game state;
a means for canceling the reserved state by the second means when a predetermined game result (a winning/losing lottery result corresponding to a first opening/closing execution mode) corresponding to a transition to a first game state is reached, and for not canceling the reserved state by the second means when a specific game result (a winning/losing lottery result corresponding to a second opening/closing execution mode) corresponding to a transition to a second game state is reached;
A gaming machine described in any one of features cG1 to cG12, characterized in that it is equipped with:

In the above configuration, in a configuration having multiple game states in which the variable ball entry means is opened and closed, not only can differences be made in the game state to which the player transitions depending on whether the game result corresponds to a transition to a first game state or a transition to a second game state, but differences can also be made in whether or not the reservation is released, thereby increasing interest.

Feature cG14. A gaming machine according to feature cG13, characterized in that the second gaming state is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first gaming state.

In the above configuration, the reservation is released when transitioning to a relatively advantageous first gaming state, but the reservation is avoided when transitioning to a relatively disadvantageous second gaming state. In other words, the disadvantage of the gaming state is compensated for by not releasing the reservation, making it possible to reduce the player's disappointment when transitioning to the second gaming state.

Note that, to each of the configurations of features cG1 to cG14 above, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of features cA1 to cA13, features cB1 to cB14, features cC1 to cC12, features cD1 to cD9, features cE1 to cE11, features cF1 to cF9, features cG1 to cG14, features cH1 to cH10, and features cI1 to cI11 individually, or it is also possible to apply a combination of some or all of the technical ideas. When applying a combination of the technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Features C Group H>
The group of features cH is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the variations or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted based on variations 6 to 7 of the third embodiment described above.

The feature group cH was made with a view to resolving the problem that the invention aims to solve with regard to the background technology, which is "for example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is known a normal gaming state and a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is controlled to be switched based on the results of the game (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)." The background technology is "Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, there is still room for improvement in terms of increasing the interest in the game."

Feature cH1. The game state includes a predetermined game state (normal game state) and a specific game state (high frequency support mode, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state;
A specific game state transition means (a function for executing a process for determining a transition to a sudden time-saving game state in the main control device 162 of the examples 6 and 7, and a first transition process for the sudden time-saving game state) is provided, which is capable of transitioning to a specific game state when a specific condition (a special miss result is won, the number of times the ball reaches the ceiling is reached, a ball is struck in a specific ball-striking area, etc.) is satisfied,
There are a plurality of specific game states (sudden time-saving game states A to C, ceiling time-saving game state, normal time-saving game state, etc.) as specific game states.
a first means (such as a function of executing a process for determining whether to transition to the sudden time-shortened game state in the main control device 162 of the sixth to seventh variations) for imposing a predetermined restriction (such as reservation or invalidation of transition) on the implementation of a predetermined second specific game state when a specific condition corresponding to a predetermined second specific game state (such as the sudden time-shortened game state B in the sixth variation and the sudden time-shortened game state B in the seventh variation) is satisfied in a situation in which a predetermined first specific game state (such as the normal time-shortened game state in the sixth variation and the sudden time-shortened game state A in the seventh variation) is in a predetermined first specific game state among the plurality of specific game states;
a second means for permitting the implementation of a predetermined fourth specific game state (the sudden time-shortened game state A in the modified example 6, the ceiling time-shortened game state in the modified example 7) without imposing a predetermined restriction on the implementation of the predetermined fourth specific game state when a specific condition corresponding to the sudden time-shortened game state A in the modified example 6 is satisfied in a situation in which the predetermined third specific game state (the normal game state in the modified example 6, the sudden time-shortened game state A in the modified example 7) is satisfied; and
A gaming machine comprising:

In the above configuration, a specific game state is provided as a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state, and this specific game state is entered when a specific condition is met. Thus, the player can enjoy playing the game with the aim of entering the specific game state by fulfilling the specific condition. Furthermore, multiple types of specific game states are provided as specific game states, and when the conditions for entering the specific game state are met while the player is in the specific game state, restrictions on the entry are imposed or not imposed depending on the combination, so that the subsequent development of the game can be differentiated depending on the combination. This allows the player to enjoy not only whether or not to enter a specific game state, but also which combination will result, making it possible to more appropriately increase interest.

Feature cH2. The transition to a specific game state is reserved, and then, when a predetermined condition (such as the end of a time-saving game state, the execution of a predetermined number of game rounds, a ball entering a specific ball entry section, etc.) is met, the transition to the reserved specific game state can be executed.
A gaming machine described in feature cH1, characterized in that the specified restriction is the reservation.

In the above configuration, since the specified restriction reserves the transition, depending on the combination of the specific game state currently in play and the specific game state corresponding to the specific condition that is met along the way, it is possible to delay the transition to the latter specific game state and continue the former specific game state, or to immediately transition to the latter specific game state. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest in the above combination and increase the level of attention paid to the game.

Feature cH3. A gaming machine according to feature cH2, characterized in that it is provided with a means for executing a transition to a predetermined second specific gaming state after the end of the predetermined first specific gaming state when the transition to the predetermined second specific gaming state is reserved by the first means (a function for executing a second transition process for the sudden time-saving gaming state in the main control device 162 of variants 6 to 7).

In the above configuration, the second specific game state is transitioned to after the preceding first specific game state has ended, so it is possible to play the first specific game state to the end. This makes it possible to enjoy playing in the first specific game state to the end before enjoying playing in the second specific game state.

Feature cH4. A gaming machine according to feature cH1, characterized in that the predetermined restriction regulates the transition to a specific gaming state (such as a function that invalidates the winning of a special losing result and the transition to a corresponding time-saving gaming state).

In the above configuration, since the specified restrictions regulate the transition to a specific gaming state, depending on the combination of the specific gaming state currently in play and the specific gaming state corresponding to the specific condition that is met along the way, it is possible to switch between invalidating the latter specific gaming state, or transitioning to the latter specific gaming state and allowing that gaming state to be played. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest in the above combinations and increase the level of attention paid to the game.

Feature cH5. A gaming machine according to any one of Features cH1 to cH4, characterized in that the predetermined restriction reduces the number of times that a player can play in a specific gaming state compared to when the predetermined restriction is not imposed (the difference in the number of times is set as the remaining number of times that a player can play when the game transitions to the reserved time-saving mode).

Since the specified restriction reduces the number of times a player can stay in a specific game state, the number of times the player can stay in the latter specific game state can be changed by combining the specific game state currently in play with a specific game state corresponding to a specific condition that is met along the way. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest in the combination and to increase the level of attention paid to the game.

Feature cH6. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball based on a predetermined launching operation;
A predetermined ball entry section (second operating port 63) into which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter,
A gaming machine described in any of Features cH1 to cH5, characterized in that the specified fourth specific gaming state is one in which the ball is more likely to enter the specified ball entry portion than the specified third specific gaming state when compared with a state in which the gaming ball is launched with a specified launch strength.

In the above configuration, if the combination of the specific game state in which the player is currently playing and the specific game state corresponding to the specific condition that is met during the game increases the ease of scoring a ball in the designated scoring area, the latter specific game state is implemented without any restrictions, so that a state in which it is easier to prevent the loss of balls in possession can be reached quickly, making it possible to create a configuration that allows the player to play with an advantage.

Feature cH7. A gaming machine described in any one of Features cH1 to cH6, characterized in that the predetermined first specific gaming state (normal time-shortened gaming state in Modification 6) and the predetermined third specific gaming state (normal time-shortened gaming state in Modification 6) are the same type of specific gaming state, and the predetermined second specific gaming state (sudden time-shortened gaming state B in Modification 6) and the predetermined fourth specific gaming state (sudden time-shortened gaming state A in Modification 6) are different types of specific gaming states.

In the above configuration, when a specific condition is met in a specific game state, the presence or absence of restrictions on the implementation of the specific game state corresponding to the met condition is switched depending on the type of condition. This allows the player to pay attention to which specific game state the specific condition corresponding to while staying in the specific game state is met, making it possible to appropriately liven up the game in the specific game state.

Feature cH8. A gaming machine described in any one of Features cH1 to cH5, characterized in that the first specific gaming state (the ceiling time-saving gaming state in Modification 7) and the third specific gaming state (the sudden time-saving gaming state B in Modification 7) are different types of specific gaming states.

In the above configuration, the presence or absence of restrictions when a specific condition is met can be switched depending on which specific game state the player is currently in. This makes it possible to diversify the gameplay during the specific game state, and to increase interest.

Feature cH9. A gaming machine according to feature cH8, characterized in that the predetermined second specific gaming state (sudden time-saving gaming state A in variant 7) and the predetermined fourth specific gaming state (sudden time-saving gaming state A in variant 7) are the same type of specific gaming state.

In the above configuration, when a specific condition is met in a specific game state, the presence or absence of restrictions on the implementation of the specific game state corresponding to the fulfillment of the specific condition is switched depending on which specific game state the player is currently in. This makes it possible to diversify the play during the specific game state and increase interest.

Feature cH10. A special judgment means (a function for executing a special drawing hit judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (a special drawing hit judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (a prize-winning in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63),
A special game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can transition to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state and different from the specific game state based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result (jackpot result);
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any of features cH1 to cH9, characterized in that at least a predetermined second specific game state and a predetermined fourth specific game state are specific game states to which it is possible to transition without passing through a special game state.

In the above configuration, the second specific game state and the fourth specific game state are specific game states that can be transitioned to without passing through a special game state. By applying any of the configurations of features cH1 to cH9 to this configuration, each of these features can be made to function effectively, and each of the above effects can be optimally exerted.

Note that, to each of the configurations of Features cH1 to cH10 above, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of Features cA1 to cA13, Features cB1 to cB14, Features cC1 to cC12, Features cD1 to cD9, Features cE1 to cE11, Features cF1 to cF9, Features cG1 to cG14, Features cH1 to cH10, and Features cI1 to cI11 individually, or it is also possible to apply a combination of some or all of the technical ideas. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature group cI>
The features cI group are an invention group extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the modifications or combinations thereof, and are mainly extracted based on the sixth modification of the third embodiment.

The feature group cI was made with the problem that the invention aims to solve in the background technology that "for example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is known a gaming state that has a normal gaming state and a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is controlled to be switched based on the results of the game (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)." "Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, there is still room for improvement in terms of increasing the interest in the game."

Feature cI1. The game state includes a predetermined game state (normal game state) and a specific game state (such as a high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state.
A specific game state transition means (a function of suddenly executing a first transition process for the time-saving game state by the main control device 162) that can transition to a specific game state when a specific condition (a special miss result is won, the number of times the ball reaches the ceiling is reached, a ball is scored in a specific ball scoring section, etc.) is satisfied;
A specific game state termination means (a function of executing a high frequency support mode termination process by the main control device 162) capable of terminating the specific game state based on the number of times of play after transition to the specific game state reaching a predetermined upper limit number of times;
Equipped with
When a specific condition is met in a previous specific game state (for example, a normal time-saving game state), it is possible to transition to a later specific game state (for example, a sudden time-saving game state A) as a result of the specific condition being met.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a specifying means for making it possible to make the remaining number of times that the player can remain in the subsequent specific gaming state invisible under a specified situation while the player is in the subsequent specific gaming state (in variant example 6, a function for displaying as the remaining number of times image 523 a number corresponding to the number of times that would remain if the normal time-saving gaming state had not ended midway, a function for suddenly changing the display of the remaining number of times image 523 to "? times remaining" from the middle of the time-saving gaming state A, etc.).

In the above configuration, a specific game state is provided as a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state, and this specific game state is entered when a specific condition is met. Therefore, the player can enjoy playing the game with the aim of achieving the specific condition and entering the specific game state. With this configuration, when a specific condition is met in a previous specific game state, a transition to a later specific game state is made based on that condition being met, and the remaining number of play times in the later specific game state is not made clear. This makes it appear as if the previous specific game state continues after the transition to the later specific game state, and allows the player to enjoy wondering how long that state will continue, making it possible to suitably increase interest.

Feature cI2. A launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball based on a predetermined launching operation;
A predetermined ball entry section (second operating port 63) into which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter,
The gaming machine described in feature cI1 is characterized in that the later specific gaming state is one in which the ball is more likely to enter the specified ball entry portion than the earlier specific gaming state when compared with a state in which the gaming ball is launched with a specified launch strength.

In the above configuration, since the later specific game state is more likely to result in a ball entering the designated ball entry area than the earlier specific game state, the later specific game state can function as a higher-level specific game state. In this case, by not disclosing the remaining number of play times in the later specific game state, it is possible to make it difficult to know how long the promoted higher-level specific game state (later specific game state) will last, making it possible to increase interest.

Feature cI3. A gaming machine according to feature cI1 or feature cI2, characterized in that it is configured to be able to transition to the later specific gaming state in the middle of the earlier specific gaming state when a specific condition is met in the earlier specific gaming state.

In the above configuration, when a specific condition is met in a previous specific game state, that specific game state is terminated midway and a transition to a subsequent specific game state is made, giving the impression that the player has been promoted midway through the specific game state, which can increase interest.

Feature cI4. The device has a means for executing a predetermined notification (display of the remaining number of times image 523) so that the player can recognize the number of times that the player can stay in the specific game state (a function for setting the display of the remaining number of times image 523 in the performance control device 143);
A gaming machine described in any one of features cI1 to cI3, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for executing a specific notification corresponding to a number different from the number of times that can be played in the subsequent specific gaming state in a specified situation while the machine is in the subsequent specific gaming state (a function for displaying a remaining number image 523 corresponding to the remaining number of times in the normal time-saving gaming state after a sudden transition to the time-saving gaming state A).

In the above configuration, in the later specific game state, a specific notification is executed corresponding to a number different from the number of times that the player can remain in the later specific game state. For example, if a specific notification is executed for a number less than the actual number of times remaining, the player can be led to believe that the later specific game state will end before continuing the specific game state, which can satisfactorily induce surprise and delight in the player.

Feature cI5. The gaming machine described in Feature cI4, characterized in that the specific notification corresponds to the remaining number of play times if the previous specific game state was not terminated in a situation where a transition to the subsequent specific game state was made in the middle of the previous specific game state.

With the above configuration, in the later specific game state, a notification is given that corresponds to the number of remaining plays if the earlier specific game state had not been ended midway, so that the earlier specific game state and the later specific game state can be viewed as a series of specific game states.

Feature cI6. The device has a means for executing a predetermined notification (display of the remaining number of times image 523) so that the player can recognize the number of times that the player can stay in the specific game state (a function for setting the display of the remaining number of times image 523 in the performance control device 143);
A gaming machine described in any of features cI1 to cI5, characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function of setting the display of a remaining number image 523 in the presentation control device 143) for executing a specific notification (display of remaining? times) in a specific manner that is impossible or difficult for the player to recognize as the number of times the player can remain in the subsequent specific gaming state in a specific situation while the player is in the subsequent specific gaming state, as a notification corresponding to the specified notification.

In the above configuration, as a notification corresponding to a predetermined notification in a later specific game state, a notification of a specific type is executed that does not allow the player to recognize the number of times the player can play in the later specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to make it appear as if a predetermined notification has been issued, while keeping the remaining number of times in the later specific game state undisclosed.

Feature cI7. The device has a means for executing a predetermined notification (display of the remaining number of times image 523) so that the player can recognize the number of times that the player can stay in the specific game state (a function for setting the display of the remaining number of times image 523 in the performance control device 143);
A gaming machine described in any of features cI1 to cI5, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for not executing the specified notification in a specified situation while remaining in the subsequent specific gaming state (a function for erasing the display of the remaining number of times image 523).

In the above configuration, by not issuing a predetermined notification in a subsequent specific game state, the remaining number of times in that subsequent specific game state can be made invisible.

Feature cI8. A special judgment means (a function for executing a special drawing hit judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a special judgment (a special drawing hit judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (a prize-winning in the first operating port 62 or the second operating port 63),
A special game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process in the main control device 162) that can transition to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state and different from the specific game state based on the result of the special judgment being a specific result (jackpot result);
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features cI1 to cI7, characterized in that when a specific condition is met in the previous specific gaming state, it is possible to transition to the subsequent specific gaming state without passing through a special gaming state.

In the above configuration, it is possible to switch from the earlier specific game state to the later specific game state without the special game state being involved, making it difficult to distinguish the boundary between the two specific game states. By applying any of the configurations of features cI1 to cI7 to this configuration, it is possible to make each of these features function effectively and to optimally exert each of the above effects.

Feature cI9. The device has a means for executing a predetermined notification (display of the remaining number of times image 523) so that the player can recognize the number of times that the player can stay in a specific game state (a function for setting the display of the remaining number of times image 523 in the performance control device 143);
A gaming machine described in any of features cI1 to cI8, characterized in that after the subsequent specific gaming state is put into the invisible state by the identification means, a predetermined notification corresponding to the remaining number of times played in the subsequent specific gaming state can be executed in a predetermined case (such as when the remaining number of times in the time-saving gaming state A suddenly becomes 10 or less, or when a predetermined operation is performed by an operating means such as a performance button).

The above configuration makes it possible to prevent a specific game state from ending with the remaining number of play times in the subsequent specific game state remaining unclear. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being confused by the impression that the specific game state has ended suddenly.

Feature cI10. The gaming machine described in Feature cI9, characterized in that after the subsequent specific gaming state is put into the non-specified state by the specifying means, when the remaining number of times that the player can remain in the subsequent specific gaming state becomes a predetermined number or less, the predetermined notification corresponding to the remaining number of times can be executed.

In the above configuration, the non-disclosed state is switched to the disclosed state when the number of remaining play times in the later specific game state falls below a predetermined number, so that the player can be informed of the number of remaining play times at the end of the later specific game state, preventing the player from getting the impression that the specific game state has suddenly ended.

Feature cI11. Equipped with an operation means (effect button, etc.) that can be operated by the player,
A gaming machine described in feature cI9 or feature cI10, characterized in that when a predetermined operation is performed by the operating means in the subsequent specific gaming state, a predetermined notification corresponding to the remaining number of games in the subsequent specific gaming state can be executed.

In the above configuration, the player can perform a specific operation to switch the remaining number of play times in the subsequent specific game state from a non-disclosed state to a clearly displayed state. This leaves it up to the player to decide whether or not to make the remaining number of play times visible to the player, making it possible to accommodate both players who want to know as soon as possible how long the specific game state will last and players who do not want to know until the very end.

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of Features cA1 to cA13, Features cB1 to cB14, Features cC1 to cC12, Features cD1 to cD9, Features cE1 to cE11, Features cF1 to cF9, Features cG1 to cG14, Features cH1 to cH10, and Features cI1 to cI11 can be applied individually to each of the configurations of Features cI1 to cI11 above, or a part or all of each technical idea can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

Note that, to each of the configurations of the feature groups cA to cI described above, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configurations of the other feature groups cA to cI individually, or to apply the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying the respective technical ideas in combination, it is also possible to combine them across the feature groups.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: A game machine that has an operating means operated by the player, a game ball launching means that launches game balls based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage that guides the launched game balls to a specified game area, and various game components arranged within the game area, and that awards a special prize to the player when the game ball passes through a specified passage section of each of the game components.

Slot machines and other reel-type gaming machines: A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a series of symbols consisting of multiple symbols in a variable manner and then displays the series of symbols in a final stopped state, in which the variation of the symbols is started by operating a start operating means, the variation of the symbols is stopped by operating a stop operating means or after a predetermined time has passed, and a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol.

Ball-operated belt-type game machine (ball-operated reel-type game machine): A game machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable pattern string consisting of multiple patterns and then displays the final stop of the pattern string, in which the pattern variation is started due to the operation of a start operation means, the pattern variation is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means or after a predetermined time has passed, and a special game state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stop pattern at the time of the stop is a specific pattern, and further equipped with a ball receiving tray and an insertion device that performs an insertion process to take in game balls from the ball receiving tray, and a payout device that pays out game balls to the ball receiving tray, and configured so that the operation of the start operation means is valid when game balls are inserted by the insertion device.

<Feature dA group to feature dF group>
The inventions described in the following feature dA group to feature dF group are extracted from the above-mentioned fourth embodiment and each of its modified examples.

<Features dA Group>
The group of features dA is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the variations or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted based on the above-mentioned fourth embodiment and variations 1 and 2 of the fourth embodiment.

The feature group dA was made with a view to resolving the problem that the invention aims to solve with respect to the background technology, which is "for example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a normal gaming state and a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player, and control is performed such as switching between gaming states based on the establishment of predetermined conditions, and various switching operations related to the progress of the game are performed (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)."

Feature dA1. A specific judgment means (such as a function of executing a normal winning/losing judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a specific judgment (such as a normal winning/losing judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (such as the entry of a game ball into the through gate 64),
A game round control means (a function for executing a normal game round control process in the main control device 162, a function for executing a normal game round display process in the performance control device 143, etc.) that controls the game round so that a game round operation is started based on the specific judgment, and a notification result corresponding to the result of the specific judgment is set as one game round (such as a normal game round), and
A specific control execution means (such as a function for executing a process for supporting electric roles in the main control device 162) that executes a specific control (such as an opening and closing game of a role) based on the result of the specific judgment being a predetermined result (such as a support winning result);
Equipped with
The game state has a specific game state (such as a high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state,
A means for bringing the device into a predetermined internal state (a state in which a support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314, a state in which a ball entry flag is set, etc.) based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition (a special miss result win, a big win, a ball entry into a specific entry section, etc.) (such as a function for executing a transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in the main control device 162, a process for suddenly transitioning to a time-saving game state, etc.);
After the predetermined internal state is reached, a switching means (such as a function for executing a normal game fluctuation start process and a special opening/closing process in the main control unit 162) switches the mode of the predetermined game operation (normal game play and a special game including a special control) including the game round and the specific control to a mode corresponding to the specific game state;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that a plurality of timings at which the switching by the switching means can be executed are provided in the specified game operation (in the fourth embodiment, a configuration in which switching from a mode corresponding to a low-frequency support mode to a mode corresponding to a high-frequency support mode can be executed at the start of fluctuation in normal game times and at the first opening of a reel opening/closing game, and in the first variant embodiment, a configuration in which the above switching can be executed at the second opening and during an interval, etc.).

In the above configuration, a specific game state is provided as a game state advantageous to the player, and a specific internal state is configured to be established when a specific condition is met. When such a specific internal state is established, a switch is executed so that the operation mode of the specific game operation, including the game round for notifying the result of the specific judgment and the specific control performed based on the result of the specific judgment, becomes a mode corresponding to the specific game state. In this case, in this feature, since multiple timings at which the above-mentioned switch can be executed are provided in the specific game operation, when a transition to the specific internal state occurs during the specific game operation, the above-mentioned switch can be performed without waiting for the end of the specific game operation. In other words, the switch to the mode corresponding to the specific game state can be performed quickly, and the player can quickly receive the benefit of the specific game state when the specific condition is met. Therefore, it becomes possible to preferably control the switching of the game state.

The "means for establishing a predetermined internal state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition" in this feature can also be expressed as "means for establishing a predetermined internal state when a predetermined specific condition is satisfied", "means for establishing a predetermined internal state when a predetermined specific condition is satisfied", or "means for establishing a predetermined internal state after a predetermined specific condition is satisfied".

Feature dA2. Equipped with a means for controlling so that a first game operation (a special game including a special game) is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition (such as the entry of a game ball into the actuation port 62, 63) (a function for executing a special game control process and a game state transition process in the main control device 162),
The predetermined internal state is set in response to the first game operation (such as a function of setting a support flag in response to a confirmation display of a special game or the end of an opening/closing execution mode),
A second game action different from the first game action is performed as the predetermined game action,
A gaming machine described in feature dA1, characterized in that multiple timings at which the switching by the switching means can be executed are provided in the second gaming operation.

In the above configuration, the first game action is executed separately from the second game action as the predetermined game action. Since a transition to a predetermined internal state is executed in response to this first game action, this transition occurs asynchronously with the second game action. In this situation, since multiple timings are provided in the second game action at which a process can be executed to switch the mode of the second game action to a mode corresponding to a specific game state, when a transition to a predetermined internal state occurs, an action in a mode corresponding to the specific game state can be quickly activated.

In addition, this feature may further include the feature that "if the determination condition is met while the first game action is being performed, the second game action is configured to be performed in parallel with the first game action."

Feature dA3. A gaming machine according to feature dA1 or dA2, characterized in that the switching can be performed at multiple timings, including a first timing corresponding to the game number (a timing corresponding to the start of fluctuation in the normal game number) and a second timing corresponding to the specific control (a timing corresponding to the first opening and second opening of the normal power device 63a in a device opening and closing game, etc.).

In the above configuration, at least a first timing corresponding to a game round and a second timing corresponding to a specific control are provided as timings at which the switch can be made to a mode corresponding to a specific game state. In this case, it is possible to select which of these timings to make the switch, taking into account the timing at which the transition to the specified internal state occurs and the status of the specified game operation. In other words, it is possible to select the timing closest to the timing at which the transition to the specified internal state occurs from among the above timings, and to quickly switch to a mode corresponding to a specific game state when a transition to the specified internal state occurs.

Feature dA4. The gaming machine described in feature dA3, characterized in that the switching means includes a means for switching the mode of the predetermined gaming operation to a mode corresponding to a specific gaming state at the second timing when the predetermined internal state is reached during the execution of the gaming round (a function for executing an upper limit opening time setting process by the main control device 162 in the fourth embodiment).

In the above configuration, if a transition to a predetermined internal state occurs during a game round, the switch to the mode corresponding to the specific game state is executed at a second timing corresponding to the specific control. Therefore, the switch can be performed without waiting for the arrival of the first timing corresponding to the next game round, and it becomes possible to quickly switch to the mode corresponding to the specific game state when a transition to a predetermined internal state occurs.

In addition, this feature may further include the feature that "the switching means includes a means for switching the mode of the specified game operation to a mode corresponding to the specific game state at the first timing when the specified internal state is reached in a situation where the game round and the specific control are not being executed (a function for executing a general game fluctuation start process by the main control device 162 in the fourth embodiment described above)."

Feature dA5. The second timing is a timing corresponding to the start of the specific control (a timing corresponding to the opening) or a predetermined timing during the specific control (a timing corresponding to the first opening);
A gaming machine described in feature dA3 or feature dA4, characterized in that a third timing (second opening, timing corresponding to an interval, etc.) that is a timing during the specific control and that is later than the second timing is further provided as a timing at which the switching can be executed.

In the above configuration, a third timing, which is later than the second timing, is provided as a timing at which switching to a mode corresponding to a specific game state can be executed during specific control. In this case, if a transition to a predetermined internal state occurs after the second timing while specific control is being executed, switching to a mode corresponding to a specific game state can be executed at the third timing. In other words, since the above switching can be executed during specific control being executed without waiting for the arrival of the first timing corresponding to the next play round, it becomes possible to quickly switch to a mode corresponding to a specific game state when a transition to a predetermined internal state occurs.

Feature dA6. The gaming machine described in Feature dA5 is characterized in that the switching means includes a means for switching the mode of the specified gaming operation to a mode corresponding to the specific gaming state at the third timing when the specified internal state is achieved after the second timing during the specific control (a function for executing an upper limit opening time setting process and a closing time setting process by the main control device 162 in Variation 1 of the fourth embodiment).

According to the above configuration, if a transition to a specific internal state occurs after the second timing during execution of the specific control, it is possible to switch to a mode corresponding to the specific game state during the execution of the specific control without waiting for the arrival of the first timing corresponding to the next game round. Therefore, when a transition to a specific internal state occurs, it is possible to quickly switch to a mode corresponding to the specific game state.

Feature dA7. A variable ball entry means (second operating port 63) is provided that can be switched between a first state (open state) in which the game ball can be entered or is easy to enter, and a second state (closed state) in which the game ball cannot be entered or is more difficult to enter than the first state;
The specific control execution means executes the specific control so that the switching control of the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state is performed at least once,
A gaming machine described in any one of features dA1 to dA6, characterized in that the switching by the switching means can be performed at a plurality of timings, including a first timing corresponding to the start of the game round (a timing corresponding to the start of the fluctuation of the normal game round) and a second timing corresponding to the execution of the switching control in the specific control (a timing corresponding to the first opening and second opening of the normal power device 63a in the device opening and closing game, etc.) (in the fourth embodiment, a configuration in which switching from a mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode to a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode can be performed at the start of the fluctuation of the normal game round and at the first opening of the device opening and closing game, and in variant example 1, a configuration in which the above switching can be performed at the second opening and during the interval, etc.).

In the above configuration, at least a first timing corresponding to the start of a game round and a second timing corresponding to the execution of switching control in specific control (opening of the variable ball entry means) are provided as timings at which switching to a mode corresponding to a specific game state can be executed. Of these timings, the above switching can be performed at the timing closest to the timing at which a transition to a specified internal state occurs, making it possible to quickly switch to a mode corresponding to a specific game state when a transition to a specified internal state occurs.

Feature dA8. A variable ball entry means (second operating port 63) is provided that can be switched between a first state (open state) in which the game ball can be entered or is easy to enter, and a second state (closed state) in which the game ball cannot be entered or is more difficult to enter than the first state;
The specific control execution means executes the specific control so that the switching control of the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state is performed at least once,
The specific control mode includes a predetermined control mode in which the switching control is performed a plurality of times, including a previous switching control (first opening) and a subsequent switching control (second opening) performed after the previous switching control,
A gaming machine described in any one of features dA1 to dA7, characterized in that the switching by the switching means can be performed at multiple timings, including a first timing corresponding to the start of the game round (a timing corresponding to the start of the fluctuation of the normal game round) and a second timing (a timing corresponding to the second opening) corresponding to the execution of the later switching control in the specific control in which the switching control is performed multiple times (in variant example 1, a configuration in which switching from a mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode to a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode can be performed at the start of the fluctuation of the normal game round and at the second opening of the opening and closing game of the device).

In the above configuration, at least a first timing corresponding to the start of a game round and a second timing corresponding to a later switching control in the specific control (the second or subsequent opening of the variable ball entry means) are provided as timings at which switching to a mode corresponding to a specific game state can be executed. In this case, if a transition to a specific internal state occurs during execution of the specific control, the above switching can be performed at the second timing in the middle of the specific control being executed, without waiting for the arrival of the first timing corresponding to the start of the next game round. Therefore, when a transition to a specific internal state occurs, it becomes possible to quickly switch to a mode corresponding to a specific game state.

When this feature is applied to feature dA7, the "second timing" of feature dA7 can be expressed as the "second timing corresponding to the earlier switch," and the "second timing" of this feature can be expressed as the "third timing corresponding to the later switch."

Feature dA9. A variable ball entry means (second operating port 63) is provided that can be switched between a first state (open state) in which the game ball can be entered or is easy to enter, and a second state (closed state) in which the game ball cannot be entered or is more difficult to enter than the first state;
The specific control execution means executes the specific control so that the switching control of the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state is performed at least once,
The specific control mode includes a predetermined control mode in which the switching control is performed multiple times, including a previous switching control (first opening) and a subsequent switching control (second opening) performed after the previous switching control,
A gaming machine described in any one of features dA1 to dA8, characterized in that the switching by the switching means is capable of executing a plurality of timings, including a first timing corresponding to the start of the game round (a timing corresponding to the start of the fluctuation of the normal game round) and a second timing corresponding to the second state between the earlier switching control and the later switching control in the specific control in which the switching control is performed a plurality of times (a timing corresponding to the interval between the first opening and the second opening) (in variant example 1, a configuration in which switching from a mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode to a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode can be executed at the start of the fluctuation of the normal game round and during the interval between the opening and closing of the reel).

In the above configuration, at least a first timing corresponding to the start of a game round and a second timing corresponding to a second state (interval) between each switching control in the specific control are provided as timings at which switching to a mode corresponding to a specific game state can be executed. In this case, if a transition to a specified internal state occurs during execution of a specific control, the above switching can be performed at the second timing in the middle of the specific control being executed, without waiting for the arrival of the first timing corresponding to the start of the next game round. Therefore, when a transition to a specified internal state occurs, it becomes possible to quickly switch to a mode corresponding to a specific game state.

Feature dA10. A variable ball entry means (second operating port 63) is provided that can be switched between a first state (open state) in which the game ball can be entered or is easy to enter, and a second state (closed state) in which the game ball cannot be entered or is more difficult to enter than in the first state;
The specific control execution means executes the specific control so that the switching control of the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state is performed at least once,
A gaming machine described in any one of features dA1 to dA9, characterized in that a specific gaming state is one in which a ball is more likely to enter the variable ball entry means than a predetermined gaming state.

In the above configuration, the specific game state is a state in which it is more likely that a ball will enter the variable ball entry means than the predetermined game state. By applying any of the configurations of features dA1 to dA9 to this configuration, it is possible to quickly arrive at a state in which it is more likely that a ball will enter the variable ball entry means when a transition to a predetermined internal state occurs, and it is possible to create a configuration in which the player can quickly enjoy the benefits of the specific game state when the player fulfills a specific condition.

Feature dA11. A gaming machine according to feature dA10, characterized in that the specific gaming state includes a gaming state (sudden time-saving gaming state) in which the probability of the specific result being reached in the specific judgment is the same as that of the specific gaming state.

In the above configuration, since the specific game state is a state in which a ball is more likely to enter the variable ball entry means than the predetermined game state, in order to realize such a state, it is necessary to set the probability of winning the predetermined result in the specific game state to a certain value or more and ensure a certain degree of frequency in which the variable ball entry means is in the first state (open state). In this case, since the probability of winning the predetermined result is set to the same probability in the predetermined game state, the frequency with which the variable ball entry means is in the first state increases even in the predetermined game state, making it difficult to create a clear difference in the ease with which a ball can enter the variable ball entry means between the predetermined game state and the specific game state. Therefore, it is conceivable that by lengthening the period required for one game round or one specific control in the predetermined game state, the frequency of specific judgments per unit time can be reduced, making it more difficult for a ball to enter the variable ball entry means.

However, on the other hand, as these periods become longer, the waiting period after the transition to a specified internal state occurs until the switch to the mode corresponding to the specific game state also becomes longer, which raises the concern that even though the internal state corresponds to the specific game state, a state in which it is easy for a ball to score into the variable ball entry means to occur may not arrive sooner. By applying the configuration of feature dA1 to such a configuration, it is possible to shorten the waiting period, and to make it possible to arrive sooner in a state in which it is easy for a ball to score into the variable ball entry means.

Feature dA12. A specific judgment means (such as a function of executing a normal winning/losing judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a specific judgment (such as a normal winning/losing judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (such as the entry of a game ball into the through gate 64),
A game round control means (a function for executing a normal game round control process in the main control device 162, a function for executing a normal game round display process in the performance control device 143, etc.) that controls the game round so that a game round operation is started based on the specific judgment, and a notification result corresponding to the result of the specific judgment is set as one game round (such as a normal game round), and
A specific control execution means (such as a function for executing a process for supporting electric roles in the main control device 162) that executes a specific control (such as an opening and closing game of a role) based on the result of the specific judgment being a predetermined result (such as a support winning result);
Equipped with
The game state has a specific game state (such as a high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state,
A means for bringing the device into a predetermined internal state (a state in which a support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314, a state in which a ball entry flag is set, etc.) based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition (a special miss result win, a big win, a ball entry into a specific entry section, etc.) (such as a function for executing a transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in the main control device 162, a process for suddenly transitioning to a time-saving game state, etc.);
After the predetermined internal state is reached, a mode setting means (such as a function for executing a normal game change start process and a special opening/closing process in the main control unit 162) sets the predetermined game operation (normal game play and a special game including a special control) including the game round and the specific control to be executed in a mode corresponding to the specific game state;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that a plurality of timings at which the setting by the mode setting means can be executed in the specified gaming operation so that the specified gaming operation is executed in a mode corresponding to a specific gaming state are provided in the specified gaming operation (in the fourth embodiment, a configuration in which switching from a mode corresponding to a low-frequency support mode to a mode corresponding to a high-frequency support mode can be executed at the start of fluctuation in normal game times and at the first opening of a reel opening/closing game, and in the first modified example, a configuration in which the above-mentioned switching can be executed at the second opening and during an interval, etc.).

In the above configuration, a specific game state is provided as a game state advantageous to the player, and a specific internal state is configured to be established when a specific condition is met. When such a specific internal state is established, the operation mode of the specific game operation, including the game round for notifying the result of the specific judgment and the specific control performed based on the result of the specific judgment, is set (switched) to a mode corresponding to the specific game state. In this case, in this feature, since multiple timings are provided between the start and end of the specific game operation at which the above switching can be performed, if a transition to the specific internal state occurs in the middle of the specific game operation, the above switching can be performed without waiting for the end of the specific game operation. In other words, the switching to the mode corresponding to the specific game state can be performed quickly, and the player can quickly receive the benefit of the specific game state when the specific condition is met. Therefore, it is possible to control the game state in an appropriate manner.

The configurations of features dA2 to dA11 above can be applied to this feature, and in this case, further effects can be achieved by applying these configurations. When applying these configurations, "switching by the switching means" in features dA2 to dA11 above can be read as "setting by the mode setting means."

Note that, to each of the configurations of features dA1 to dA12, features dB1 to dB12, features dC1 to dC8, features dD1 to dD10, features dE1 to dE12, and features dF1 to dF9, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in each of the configurations individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Characteristic dB group>
The feature dB group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the variations or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted based on the above-mentioned fourth embodiment and variations 1 and 2 of the fourth embodiment.

The feature dB group was developed with the problem that the invention aims to solve in the background technology, "For example, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have a normal gaming state and a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player, and are known to perform control such as switching between gaming states based on the establishment of predetermined conditions, and to perform various switches related to the progress of the game (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)." "Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, there is still room for improvement in performing predetermined switches related to the progress of the game."

Feature dB1. Equipped with a means for controlling (function for executing a normal game round control process and an electric role support process in the main control device 162) so that a predetermined game operation (a normal game round and a normal side game including a role opening and closing game) is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition (such as the entry of a game ball into the through gate 64),
The game state has a specific game state (such as a high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state,
A means for bringing the device into a predetermined internal state (a state in which a support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314, a state in which a ball entry flag is set, etc.) based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition (a special miss result win, a big win, a ball entry into a specific entry section, etc.) (such as a function for executing a transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in the main control device 162, a process for suddenly transitioning to a time-saving game state, etc.);
After the predetermined internal state is reached, a switching means (such as a function for executing a normal game fluctuation start process and a role opening/closing process in the main control device 162) switches the mode of the predetermined game operation to a mode corresponding to a specific game state;
Equipped with
The switching means is capable of performing the switching at a specific timing during the specified game operation (timing corresponding to the first opening, the second or subsequent opening, the start of an interval, the start of an opening, the start of a confirmation display, etc.) after the specified internal state is reached (in the fourth embodiment, a configuration in which switching from a mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode to a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode can be performed at the start of fluctuations in normal game times and at the first opening of a device opening and closing game, and in variant example 1, a configuration in which the above switching can be performed at the second opening and during an interval, etc.).

In the above configuration, a specific game state is provided as a game state advantageous to the player, and is configured to enter a specific internal state when a specific condition is met. When the specific internal state is reached, a switch is executed so that the operation mode of the specific game action becomes a mode corresponding to the specific game state. In this case, this feature allows the switch to the mode corresponding to the specific game state at a specific timing during the execution of the specific game action, so that, for example, if a transition to the specific internal state occurs during the execution of the specific game action, the switch to the mode corresponding to the specific game state can be performed quickly. Therefore, when the player meets the specific condition, the player can quickly enjoy the benefits of the specific game state, and it becomes possible to appropriately control the switching of the game state.

The "means for controlling a predetermined game action to be performed based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition" of this feature can also be expressed as "means for controlling a predetermined game action to be performed when a predetermined execution condition is established", "means for controlling a predetermined game action to be performed when a predetermined execution condition is established", or "means for controlling a predetermined game action to be performed after a predetermined execution condition is established". The "means for bringing a predetermined internal state into a state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition" of this feature can also be expressed as "means for bringing a predetermined internal state into a state triggered by the establishment of a predetermined specific condition", "means for bringing a predetermined internal state into a state when a predetermined specific condition is established", or "means for bringing a predetermined internal state into a state after a predetermined specific condition is established".

Feature dB2. The gaming machine described in Feature dB1, wherein the switching means is capable of performing the switching at the specific timing during the execution of the predetermined gaming operation when the transition to the predetermined internal state occurs during the execution of the predetermined gaming operation.

In the above configuration, if a transition to a predetermined internal state occurs during the execution of a predetermined game operation, a switch to a mode corresponding to the specific game state can be made at a specific timing during the predetermined game operation, so that the switch can be made without waiting for the end of the predetermined game operation. This shortens the waiting period from when a transition to a predetermined internal state occurs until the switch is made, making it possible to quickly activate the predetermined game operation corresponding to the specific game state.

Feature dB3. Equipped with a means for controlling so that a first game operation (a special game operation including a special game) is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined first execution condition (such as the entry of a game ball into the actuation port 62, 63) (a function for executing a special game control process and a game state transition process in the main control device 162);
A second game action as the predetermined game action is controlled to be performed based on the establishment of a second execution condition as the predetermined execution condition,
The predetermined internal state can be set in response to the first game operation (a configuration for setting a support flag in response to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and a function for setting a support flag in response to the confirmation display of the special game round),
The gaming machine described in feature dB1 or feature dB2, wherein the switching means is capable of performing the switching at a specific timing during the second game operation when the specified internal state is reached.

In the above configuration, the first game action is executed separately from the second game action as the predetermined game action. Since a transition to a predetermined internal state is executed in response to this first game action, this transition occurs asynchronously with the second game action. In such a situation, since a switch to a mode corresponding to a specific game state can be performed in the middle of the predetermined game action, the predetermined game action corresponding to the specific game state can be quickly activated when a transition to the predetermined internal state occurs.

In addition, this feature may further include the feature that "if the determination condition is met while the first game action is being performed, the second game action is configured to be performed in parallel with the first game action."

Feature dB4. A variable ball entry means (second operating port 63) that can be switched between a first state (open state) in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a second state (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first state;
A specific judgment means (such as a function of executing a normal winning/losing judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a specific judgment (such as a normal winning/losing judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (such as the entry of a game ball into the through gate 64);
A game round control means (a function for executing a normal game round control process in the main control device 162, a function for executing a normal game round display process in the performance control device 143, etc.) that controls the game round so that a game round operation is started based on the specific judgment, and a notification result corresponding to the result of the specific judgment is made as one game round (such as a normal game round), and
A specific control execution means (such as a function for executing a process for supporting electric roles in the main control unit 162) executes specific control (such as opening and closing a role) so that the variable ball entry means is switched from the second state to the first state based on the result of the specific judgment being a predetermined result (a support winning result), and then the switching control to the second state is performed at least once.
Equipped with
The predetermined game operation includes the game round and the specific control,
A gaming machine described in any one of features dB1 to dB3, characterized in that when the result of the specific judgment is the specified internal state during the execution of a specified game round which is a specified result, the specific timing is set so that at least the switching control in the specific control performed after the specified game round is executed in a manner corresponding to the specific game state (in the fourth embodiment, a configuration in which switching from a manner corresponding to the low-frequency support mode to a manner corresponding to the high-frequency support mode can be executed at the start of fluctuation of a normal game round and at the first opening of a device opening and closing game, in variant example 1, a configuration in which the above switching can be executed at the second opening and during an interval, etc.).

In the above configuration, if a transition to a predetermined internal state occurs during the execution of a predetermined game round in which the result of a specific judgment is a predetermined result, the timing of switching by the switching means is set so that the switching control (opening of the variable ball entry means) in the specific control performed after that game round can be performed in a manner corresponding to the specific game state. Therefore, the above switching can be performed without waiting for the end of the specific control after the predetermined game round, making it possible to quickly switch to a manner corresponding to the specific game state when a transition to a predetermined internal state occurs.

Feature dB5. A specific judgment means (such as a function of executing a normal winning/losing judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a specific judgment (such as a normal winning/losing judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (such as the entry of a game ball into the through gate 64),
A game round control means (a function for executing a normal game round control process in the main control device 162, a function for executing a normal game round display process in the performance control device 143, etc.) that controls the game round so that a game round operation is started based on the specific judgment, and a notification result corresponding to the result of the specific judgment is set as one game round (such as a normal game round), and
A specific control execution means (such as a function for executing a process for supporting electric roles in the main control device 162) that executes a specific control (such as opening and closing a role) based on the result of the specific judgment being a predetermined result (a support winning result);
Equipped with
The predetermined game operation includes the game round and the specific control,
the specific timing is set so that, when the specific internal state is reached during the execution of a specific game round in which the result of the specific judgment is a specific result, the specific control to be performed after the specific game round is executed in a manner corresponding to the specific game state;
The specific control corresponding to the specific game state has a plurality of different types of specific control (a first high prize opening/closing game, a second high prize opening/closing game),
A means for executing a predetermined lottery (such as a general winning type determination) before executing the specific control when the result of the specific determination is the predetermined result (such as a function for executing the process of step Sd2004 in the main control device 162);
A means for setting the specific control mode after the predetermined number of games based on the result of the predetermined lottery performed in response to the predetermined number of games before the predetermined internal state is established (a function for executing the processes of steps Sd2206, Sd2207, and Sd2304 in the main control device 162);
A gaming machine according to any one of features dB1 to dB4, comprising:

In the above configuration, when a transition to a predetermined internal state occurs during the execution of a predetermined game round in which the result of a specific judgment is a predetermined result, the timing of switching by the switching means is set so that the specific control performed after that game round can be executed in a manner corresponding to the specific game state. Therefore, the above switching can be performed without waiting for the specific control after the predetermined game round to end, and when a transition to a predetermined internal state occurs, it is possible to quickly switch to a manner corresponding to the specific game state.

The results of the predetermined lottery conducted before the transition to the predetermined internal state are used to set the specific control mode to be performed after the transition to the predetermined internal state. In other words, because the results of the predetermined lottery are used across transitions to the predetermined internal state, there is no need to redo the predetermined lottery, and the control process can be prevented from becoming complicated and cumbersome.

Feature dB6. A variable ball entry means (second operating port 63) that can be switched between a first state (open state) in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a second state (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first state;
A specific judgment means (such as a function of executing a normal winning/losing judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a specific judgment (such as a normal winning/losing judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (such as the entry of a game ball into the through gate 64);
A specific control execution means (such as a function for executing a process for supporting electric roles in the main control unit 162) executes specific control (such as opening and closing a role) so that the variable ball entry means is switched from the second state to the first state based on the result of the specific judgment being a predetermined result (a support winning result), and then the switching control to the second state is performed at least once.
Equipped with
The predetermined game operation includes the specific control,
The specific control mode includes a predetermined control mode (second high prize opening and closing game) in which switching control is executed multiple times,
A gaming machine described in any of features dB1 to dB5, characterized in that the specific timing is set so that a predetermined switching control, which is the second or subsequent switching control among the multiple switching controls, is executed in a manner corresponding to a specific game state (e.g., in variant example 1, a configuration in which switching from a manner corresponding to a low-frequency support mode to a manner corresponding to a high-frequency support mode can be executed at the second opening of a reel opening/closing game).

In the above configuration, the specific control mode includes a predetermined control mode in which switching control (opening of the variable ball entry means) is performed multiple times, and the timing of switching by the switching means is set so that the second or subsequent predetermined switching control in the predetermined control mode can be performed in a mode corresponding to the specific game state. Therefore, if a transition to a specific internal state occurs during the specific control, the above switching can be performed without waiting for the end of the specific control, and it becomes possible to quickly switch to a mode corresponding to the specific game state when a transition to a specific internal state occurs.

Feature dB7. When the game state is a specific game state, a specific notification (special light-emitting performance) can be executed by a predetermined notification means (the first light-emitting unit 752, the second light-emitting unit 761, etc.) (a function of executing a process for special light-emitting performance in the performance control device 143),
A gaming machine described in any of features dB1 to dB6, characterized in that it is equipped with a control means (a function of executing a start timing setting process in the performance control device 143) for controlling the specific notification so that it is executed at a predetermined timing corresponding to the specific timing (a third timing corresponding to the opening of the normal power device 63a).

If a switch to a mode corresponding to a specific game state is made at a specific timing during a specified game operation, there is a concern that the player may find it difficult to notice the switch. In this regard, with the above configuration, a specific notification corresponding to a specific game state is executed at a timing corresponding to the specific timing, so that even if the switch is made during a specified game operation, the configuration makes it easy for the player to notice the switch.

Feature dB8. When the game state is a specific game state, a specific notification (special light-emitting performance) can be executed by a predetermined notification means (the first light-emitting unit 752, the second light-emitting unit 761, etc.) (a function of executing a process for special light-emitting performance in the performance control device 143),
A first means (a function of executing a start timing setting process in the performance control device 143) for controlling the specific notification to be executed at a first predetermined timing (a first timing corresponding to the setting of a support flag) corresponding to the transition to the predetermined internal state;
A second means (a function of executing a start timing setting process in the performance control device 143) for controlling the specific notification to be executed at a second predetermined timing (a third timing corresponding to the opening of the normal power role 63a) corresponding to the specific timing;
A gaming machine according to any one of features dB1 to dB7, characterized in that it is provided with:

In the above configuration, a specific notification is issued when the game is in a specific game state, so that the player can easily understand that the game is in a specific game state. In this case, a first predetermined timing corresponding to a transition to a specific internal state and a second predetermined timing corresponding to a specific timing at which the game is switched to a mode corresponding to the specific game state are provided as timings at which the specific notification can be issued. In this case, by selecting the timing at which the specific notification is issued depending on the period from the transition to the specific internal state until the switching, it becomes possible to issue the specific notification at an appropriate timing.

Feature dB9. A grasping means (a function for executing the process of step Sd3608 in the performance control device 143) for grasping the period from the transition to the predetermined internal state to the specific timing;
A setting means for setting whether the specific notification is to be executed at the first predetermined timing or the second predetermined timing based on the period grasped by the grasping means (a function for executing the processes of steps Sd3609, Sd3610, and Sd3603 in the performance control device 143);
The gaming machine according to feature dB8, characterized in that it is provided with:

In the above configuration, the period from the transition to the predetermined internal state to the switching to the mode corresponding to the specific game state is grasped, and based on the result, it is set whether to execute the specific notification at the first predetermined timing or the second predetermined timing. Therefore, depending on the length of the period from the transition to the switching, it is possible to selectively execute the specific notification in accordance with the transition to the predetermined internal state or in accordance with the switching to the mode corresponding to the specific game state. For example, if the specific notification is executed in accordance with the transition when the above period is long, it may lead to a situation where the operation of the mode corresponding to the specific game state is not performed for a long time even though the specific game state has been notified. In such a case, by executing the specific notification in accordance with the above switching, it is possible to set the state so that the operation corresponding to the specific game state is started promptly after the start of the specific notification, and it is possible to inform the player that the specific game state is in an appropriate timing.

Feature dB10. A variable ball entry means (second operating port 63) that can be switched between a first state (open state) in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a second state (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter or is more difficult to enter than the first state;
A specific judgment means (such as a function of executing a normal winning/losing judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a specific judgment (such as a normal winning/losing judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (such as the entry of a game ball into the through gate 64);
A specific control execution means (such as a function for executing a process for supporting electric roles in the main control unit 162) executes specific control (such as opening and closing a role) so that the variable ball entry means is switched from the second state to the first state based on the result of the specific judgment being a predetermined result (a support winning result), and then the switching control to the second state is performed at least once.
Equipped with
The predetermined game operation includes the specific control,
A gaming machine according to any one of features dB1 to dB9, characterized in that a specific gaming state is one in which a ball is more likely to enter the variable ball entry means than a predetermined gaming state.

In the above configuration, the specific game state is a state in which it is more likely that a ball will enter the variable ball entry means than the predetermined game state. By applying any of the configurations from feature dB1 to feature dB9 to this configuration, it is possible to quickly arrive at a state in which it is more likely that a ball will enter the variable ball entry means when a transition to a predetermined internal state occurs, and it is possible to create a configuration in which the player can quickly enjoy the benefits of the specific game state when the player fulfills a specific condition.

Feature dB11. The gaming machine described in feature dB10, characterized in that the specific gaming state includes a gaming state (sudden time-saving gaming state) in which the probability of the specific result being achieved in the specific judgment is the same as that of the specific gaming state.

In the above configuration, since the specific game state is a state in which a ball is more likely to enter the variable ball entry means than the predetermined game state, in order to realize such a state, it is necessary to set the probability of winning the predetermined result in the specific game state to a certain value or more and ensure a certain degree of frequency in which the variable ball entry means is in the first state (open state). In this case, since the probability of winning the predetermined result is set to the same probability in the predetermined game state, the frequency with which the variable ball entry means is in the first state increases even in the predetermined game state, making it difficult to create a clear difference in the ease with which a ball can enter the variable ball entry means between the predetermined game state and the specific game state. Therefore, it is conceivable that by lengthening the period required for one game round or one specific control in the predetermined game state, the frequency of specific judgments per unit time can be reduced, making it more difficult for a ball to enter the variable ball entry means.

However, on the other hand, as these periods become longer, the waiting period after the transition to the specified internal state occurs until the switch to the mode corresponding to the specific game state also becomes longer, which raises the concern that even though the internal state corresponds to the specific game state, a state in which it is easy for a ball to score into the variable ball entry means to occur may not arrive soon. By applying the configuration of feature dB1 to such a configuration, it is possible to shorten the waiting period, and make it possible to arrive sooner at a state in which it is easy for a ball to score into the variable ball entry means to occur.

Feature dB12. Equipped with a means for controlling (function for executing a normal game round control process and an electric role support process in the main control device 162) so that a predetermined game operation (a normal game round and a normal side game including a role opening and closing game) is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition (such as the entry of a game ball into the through gate 64),
The game state has a specific game state (such as a high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state,
A means for bringing the device into a predetermined internal state (a state in which a support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314, a state in which a ball entry flag is set, etc.) based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition (a special miss result win, a big win, a ball entry into a specific entry section, etc.) (such as a function for executing a transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in the main control device 162, a process for suddenly transitioning to a time-saving game state, etc.);
After the predetermined internal state is established, a mode setting means (such as a function for executing a normal game fluctuation start process and a role opening/closing process in the main control device 162) sets the predetermined game operation so that the predetermined game operation is executed in a mode corresponding to the specific game state;
Equipped with
The mode setting means is capable of performing the predetermined setting at a specific timing during the predetermined game operation (timing corresponding to the first opening, the second or subsequent opening, the start of an interval, the start of an opening, the start of a confirmation display, etc.) when the predetermined internal state is reached (in the fourth embodiment, a configuration in which switching from a mode corresponding to a low-frequency support mode to a mode corresponding to a high-frequency support mode can be performed at the start of fluctuations in normal game times and at the first opening of a device opening and closing game, and in variant example 1, a configuration in which the above switching can be performed at the second opening and during an interval, etc.).

In the above configuration, a specific game state is provided as a game state advantageous to the player, and is configured to enter a specific internal state when a specific condition is met. When the specific internal state is entered, a specific setting is executed so that a specific game action is performed in a manner corresponding to the specific game state. In this case, this feature allows the above-mentioned specific setting to be performed at a specific timing during the specific game action, so that, for example, if a transition to a specific internal state occurs during the execution of a specific game action, the game can be quickly switched to the manner corresponding to the specific game state. Therefore, when a player meets a specific condition, the player can quickly enjoy the benefits of the specific game state, and control over the switching of game states can be performed appropriately.

The configurations of features dB2 to dB11 above can be applied to this feature, and in this case, further effects can be achieved by applying these configurations. When applying these configurations, "switching by the switching means" in features dB2 to dB11 above can be read as "setting by the mode setting means."

Note that, to each of the configurations of Features dB1 to dB12 above, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of Features dA1 to dA12, Features dB1 to dB12, Features dC1 to dC8, Features dD1 to dD10, Features dE1 to dE12, and Features dF1 to dF9 individually, or it is also possible to apply a combination of some or all of the technical ideas. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature dC group>
The feature dC group is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the variations or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted based on the above-mentioned fourth embodiment and variations 1 and 2 of the fourth embodiment.

The feature group dC was made with a view to resolving the problem that the invention aims to solve with respect to the background technology, which is "for example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a normal gaming state and a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player, and control is performed such as switching between gaming states based on the establishment of predetermined conditions, and various switching operations related to the progress of the game are performed (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)."

Feature dC1. A specific judgment means (such as a function of executing a normal winning/losing judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a specific judgment (such as a normal winning/losing judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (such as the entry of a game ball into the through gate 64),
A specific control execution means (such as a function for executing a process for supporting electric roles in the main control device 162) that executes a specific control (such as opening and closing a role) based on the result of the specific judgment being a predetermined result (a support winning result);
Equipped with
The gaming machine has a means (such as a function of executing the process of step Sd2004 in the main control device 162) for executing a predetermined lottery (such as a normal winning type determination) before executing the specific control when the result of the specific determination is a predetermined result, and is configured to set the mode of the specific control based on the result of the predetermined lottery.
The specific control execution means is capable of executing the specific control in a mode (opening mode for a high-prize opening and closing game, etc.) corresponding to the state after the change (set state of the support flag, state corresponding to a ball entry, etc.) when a specific state change (change from a non-set state to a set state, a ball entry into a specific entry section, etc.) occurs during a specified period (during the execution of a normal game round, during the execution of the first opening in a game of opening and closing a device, during the execution of an interval, etc.) between the execution of the specific judgment that results in a specified result and the execution of the specific control corresponding to the specified result,
The specific control mode corresponding to the changed state has a plurality of modes (first and second high prize opening and closing games),
A gaming machine characterized by having a mode setting means (such as a function of executing the processing of steps Sd2106, Sd2107, and Sd2304 in the main control unit 162) that sets which of the multiple modes will be used for the specific control after the specified state change based on the result of the specified lottery conducted before the specified state change.

In the above configuration, the specific control is executed when the result of the specific judgment becomes a predetermined result. In addition, when the result of the specific judgment becomes a predetermined result, a predetermined lottery is executed, and the mode of the specific control is set based on the lottery result. Under such a configuration, when a predetermined state change occurs between the execution of the specific judgment and the execution of the specific control, the specific control is configured to be executed in a mode corresponding to the state after the change. In this case, the specific judgment and the predetermined lottery are executed in the state before the change, whereas the specific control is executed in response to the state after the change. In such a case, the mode of the specific control executed in response to the state after the change is configured to be set using the result of the predetermined lottery executed before the state change. In this case, since there is no need to redo the predetermined lottery, it is possible to suppress the control process from becoming complicated and cumbersome, and it becomes possible to appropriately control the switching of the game state.

Feature dC2. The game state includes a first game state (low frequency support mode) and a second game state (high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state,
A gaming machine as described in feature dC1, characterized in that the specified state change is a change from a state corresponding to the first gaming state (support flag unset state) to a state corresponding to the second gaming state (support flag set state).

In the above configuration, the predetermined state change is a change from a state corresponding to a first gaming state to a state corresponding to a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player. In this configuration, if a predetermined state change occurs between the execution of a specific judgment and the execution of a specific control, the specific control corresponding to the changed state is executed in a manner corresponding to the changed state, so that the specific control corresponding to the second gaming state can be implemented quickly, and the player can receive the benefits of the second gaming state quickly. In such a case, by setting the manner of the specific control executed in response to the changed state using the result of a specific lottery performed before the state change, the manner of the specific control corresponding to the second gaming state can be set without redoing the specific lottery, and control associated with switching to the second gaming state can be performed preferably.

Feature dC3. A variable ball entry means (second operating port 63) is provided that can be switched between a first state (open state) in which the game ball can be entered or is easy to enter, and a second state (closed state) in which the game ball cannot be entered or is more difficult to enter than the first state;
The gaming machine described in feature dC1 or feature dC2, characterized in that the specific control execution means executes the specific control so that switching control to change the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state, and then to the second state is performed at least once.

In the above configuration, the specific control opens and closes the variable ball entry means, so that a specific change in state brings about a change in the likelihood of a ball entering the variable ball entry means. In such a configuration, if a specific change in state occurs between the execution of a specific judgment and the execution of specific control, the specific control is executed in a manner corresponding to the changed state, thereby making it possible to quickly bring about a state in which it is easier for a ball to enter the variable ball entry means. In such a case, the manner of the specific control executed in response to the changed state can be set using the results of a specific lottery performed before the state change, so that the manner of the specific control corresponding to the changed state can be set without redoing the specific lottery.

Feature dC4. A period setting means (a function of executing an upper limit opening time setting process in the main control device 162) is provided for setting a period during which the first state can continue (upper limit opening time) when the switching control is executed,
The gaming machine described in feature dC3 is characterized in that the mode setting means is provided with a means (a function of executing the processing of steps Sd2212 and Sd4203 in the main control unit 162) for setting the continuation period of the specific control after the specified state change based on the result of the specified lottery conducted before the specified state change.

In the above configuration, when setting the continuation period of the first state when executing a specific control corresponding to the state after the change, the continuation period is set using the results of a predetermined lottery that was performed before the state change. This makes it possible to set the continuation period without redoing the predetermined lottery, making it possible to prevent the control process from becoming complicated and cumbersome.

Feature dC5. Equipped with a number setting means (a function for executing the opening and closing process of the main control unit 162) for setting the number of times (the number of times of opening) of the switching control executed in the specific control,
The gaming machine described in Feature dC3 or Feature dC4, characterized in that the mode setting means is provided with a means (a function of executing the processing of step Sd5101 in the main control unit 162) for setting the number of times of the specific control after the specified state change based on the result of the specified lottery conducted before the specified state change.

In the above configuration, when setting the number of switching controls when executing a specific control corresponding to the changed state, the number is set using the results of a predetermined lottery that was performed before the state change. This makes it possible to set the number of times without redoing the predetermined lottery, making it possible to prevent the control process from becoming complicated and cumbersome.

Feature dC6. The game operation is started based on the specific judgment, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the specific judgment is counted as one game round (such as a normal game round), and a game round control means (a function of executing a normal game round control process in the main control device 162) is provided to control the game round to be played;
There are multiple modes (stop result A, stop result B) as notification results corresponding to the predetermined results,
The game control means is configured to, when the result of the specific judgment is the predetermined result, perform a notification result mode lottery for selecting a mode of a notification result corresponding to the predetermined result, and to notify the notification result of the mode selected by the notification result mode lottery;
A gaming machine described in any one of features dC1 to dC5, characterized in that the specified lottery is the notification result mode lottery.

In the above configuration, the predetermined lottery is constituted by a notification result mode lottery that selects the mode of the notification result to be notified in a game round. In this case, the mode of the specific control to be executed corresponding to the changed state is set using the result of the notification result mode lottery performed before the state change, so that the mode of the specific control corresponding to the changed state can be set without redoing the notification result mode lottery.

Feature dC7: The predetermined state change is a change from a state corresponding to a first gaming state (a non-set state of the support flag) to a state corresponding to a second gaming state (a set state of the support flag);
The gaming machine described in feature dC6 is characterized in that the notification result corresponding to the specified result when in the first gaming state (the stop result for a normal winning symbol when in low frequency support mode) and the notification result corresponding to the specified result when in the second gaming state (the stop result for a normal winning symbol when in high frequency support mode) have the same pattern for the result of the notification result pattern lottery (for example, stop result A).

When the mode of specific control is set based on the result of the lottery for the notification result mode, the notification result notified in the game round corresponds to the mode of specific control executed after that game round. In other words, the notification result indicates not only the result of the specific judgment but also the mode of specific control. In this case, since the mode for the result of the lottery for the notification result mode is common to the notification result for the first game state and the notification result for the second game state, even when the result of the lottery for the notification result mode performed before the state change is used to set the mode of specific control executed in response to the changed state, the notification result notified before the execution of the specific control (the notification result corresponding to the first game state) can be consistent with the mode of specific control executed in response to the changed state (the mode of specific control corresponding to the second specific game state).

Feature dC8. The predetermined state change is a change from a state corresponding to a first gaming state (a non-set state of the support flag) to a state corresponding to a second gaming state (a set state of the support flag);
The notification result type lottery is executed based on a predetermined lottery random number (general winning type counter C4),
The gaming machine described in feature dC6 is characterized in that the pattern for the specified lottery random number is the same (stop result A) in the notification result corresponding to the specified result when in the first gaming state (stop result for a normal winning symbol when in low frequency support mode) and the notification result corresponding to the specified result when in the second gaming state (stop result for a normal winning symbol when in high frequency support mode).

When the mode of specific control is set based on the result of the lottery for the notification result mode, the notification result notified in the game round corresponds to the mode of specific control executed after that game round. In other words, the notification result indicates not only the result of the specific judgment but also the mode of specific control. In this case, the result (mode of notification result) for the value of the lottery random number used in the lottery for the notification result mode is made common between the notification result for the first game state and the notification result for the second game state. Therefore, even when the result of the lottery for the notification result mode performed before the state change is used to set the mode of specific control executed in response to the changed state, the notification result notified before the execution of the specific control (the notification result corresponding to the first game state) can be consistent with the mode of specific control executed in response to the changed state (the mode of specific control corresponding to the second specific game state).

Note that, to each of the configurations of Features dC1 to dC8 above, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of Features dA1 to dA12, Features dB1 to dB12, Features dC1 to dC8, Features dD1 to dD10, Features dE1 to dE12, and Features dF1 to dF9 individually, or it is also possible to apply a part or all of each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Features dD group>
The group of features dD is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the variations or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted based on the above-mentioned fourth embodiment and variations 1 and 2 of the fourth embodiment.

The feature dB group was developed with the problem that the invention aims to solve in relation to the background technology, which is "for example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a normal gaming state and a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player, and control is performed such as switching the gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and various switching operations related to the progress of the game are performed (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)."

Feature dD1. A specific judgment means (such as a function of executing a normal winning/losing judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a specific judgment (such as a normal winning/losing judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (such as the entry of a game ball into the through gate 64),
A game round control means (such as a function for executing a process for displaying a normal game round in the performance control device 143) controls the game round so that a game round operation is started based on the specific judgment, and a notification result corresponding to the result of the specific judgment is made as one game round (such as a normal game round), and
A specific control execution means (such as a function for executing a process for supporting electric roles in the main control device 162) that executes a specific control (such as an opening and closing game of a role) based on the result of the specific judgment being a predetermined result (such as a support winning result);
Equipped with
When reporting a notification result corresponding to the result of the specific judgment, it is possible to display a plurality of different types of notification displays (such as a first stop result, a second stop result, a third stop result, and a fourth stop result of the patterns F1 and F2) having different forms.
A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a specification means (such as a function relating to a fourth embodiment, in which when the result of the support lottery is a winning result and the support flag does not change from a non-set state to a set state during a normal game round, and a function relating to a fourth embodiment, in which when the result of the support lottery is a winning result, the first stop result is displayed if the support flag does not change from a non-set state to a set state during a normal game round, and the second or third stop result is displayed if the above change occurs during a normal game round) that can display the notification in a different manner depending on whether a predetermined state change occurs during the execution of the game round (such as a change of the support flag from a non-set state to a set state during a normal game round) when the result of the specific judgment is a specific result (a support winning result, a normal game round missing result, etc.).

In the above configuration, when the result of the specific judgment is a predetermined result, a specific control is executed, and the result of the specific judgment is announced as a notification result in a game round. With this configuration, multiple types of notification displays are provided as notification displays when announcing the notification result, and different notification displays are displayed depending on whether or not a predetermined state change occurs during the execution of a game round action in a game round. In this case, the notification result (notification display) displayed in a game round reflects not only the result of the specific judgment, but also whether or not there is a state change, so that it is possible to increase the player's interest in the notification result and increase attention to the game.

Feature dD2. The identification means is
When the result of the specific judgment is the specific result and the predetermined state change does not occur during the execution of the game operation, a first means (a function of executing the processing of steps Sd3104 and Sd3108 in the performance control device 143) performs a first type of notification display (first stop result) among the multiple types of notification displays;
When the result of the specific judgment is the specific result and the predetermined state change occurs during the execution of the game operation, a second means (a function of executing the process of step Sd3108 in the performance control device 143) performs a second type of notification display (a second or third stop result) different from the first type of notification display among the multiple types of notification displays;
A gaming machine as described in feature dD1, characterized in that it is equipped with:

In the above configuration, when the result of the specific judgment is a specific result, if no state change occurs during the game operation, the first type of notification display is executed, and if a state change occurs during the game operation, the second type of notification display is executed. In other words, even if the result of the specific judgment is the same, different notification displays are executed depending on whether or not there is a state change, so that the player can detect whether or not there is a state change from the notification result, and it is possible to appropriately increase the attention to the notification result.

Feature dD3. The game state includes a first game state (low frequency support mode) and a second game state (high frequency support mode) having different advantageous degrees for the player,
A gaming machine described in feature dD1 or feature dD2, characterized in that the specified state change is a change from a state corresponding to the first gaming state (support flag unset state) to a state corresponding to the second gaming state (support flag set state).

In the above configuration, there are a first game state and a second game state that have different degrees of advantage for the player, and the notification result for a game round is displayed in a different notification display depending on whether or not a change occurs from a state corresponding to the first game state to a state corresponding to the second game state during the game round operation. This allows the player to detect the change in the game state from the notification result, making it possible to appropriately increase the attention paid to the notification result.

Feature dD4. The specific result is the predetermined result;
A gaming machine described in any of features dD1 to dD3, characterized in that it is possible to display multiple types of notification displays (such as the first stop result, second stop result, and third stop result of pictures F1 and F2) with different forms as notification displays when notifying a notification result corresponding to the specified result.

In the above configuration, the specific result is a predetermined result (a result of a specific control being executed), and the notification result corresponding to the predetermined result is displayed in a different notification display depending on whether or not there is a state change. In this case, the notification result (notification display) indicates whether or not a specific control is executed and whether or not a state change has occurred during the game play operation, so it is possible to appropriately increase the attention to the notification result.

Feature dD5. The predetermined state change is a change from a state corresponding to a first gaming state (a non-set state of the support flag) to a state corresponding to a second gaming state (a set state of the support flag);
A gaming machine described in feature dD4, characterized in that when the specified state change occurs during the execution of a specified game round in which the result of the specific judgment is a specified result, the specific control after the specified game round can be executed in a mode corresponding to the second game state (a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode) (in the fourth embodiment, a configuration in which switching from a mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode to a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode can be executed at the start of fluctuation in a normal game round and at the first opening of a device opening and closing game, and in variant example 1, a configuration in which the above switching can be executed at the second opening and during an interval, etc.).

In the above configuration, if a change occurs from a state corresponding to the first game state to a state corresponding to the second game state during the game operation for a game round in which the result of the specific judgment is a predetermined result, the specific control performed after that game round is executed in a manner corresponding to the second game state. In this case, the player can tell in advance from the notification result (notification display) whether or not the specific control in a manner corresponding to the second game state will be executed, making it possible to appropriately increase the attention to the notification result.

Feature dD6. A variable ball entry means (second operating port 63) is provided that can be switched between a first state (open state) in which the game ball can be entered or is easy to enter, and a second state (closed state) in which the game ball cannot be entered or is more difficult to enter than the first state;
A gaming machine described in any of features dD1 to dD5, characterized in that the specific control execution means executes the specific control so that switching control to change the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state, and then to the second state is performed at least once.

In the above configuration, the specific control opens and closes the variable ball entry means, so a specified state change brings about a change in the likelihood of a ball entering the variable ball entry means. By applying any of the configurations of features dD1 to dD5 to such a configuration, the player can tell in advance from the notification result (notification display) whether the specific control is being performed in a manner that makes it easier for the ball to enter the variable ball entry means, making it possible to appropriately increase attention to the notification result.

Feature dD7: The predetermined state change is a change from a state corresponding to a first gaming state (a state in which the support flag is not set) to a state corresponding to a second gaming state (a state in which the support flag is set);
The gaming machine described in feature dD6 is characterized in that, when the specified state change occurs during the execution of a specified game round in which the result of the specific judgment is a specified result, at least the switching control (opening of the normal power device 63a) in the specific control performed after the specified game round can be executed in a mode corresponding to the second game state (first or second high prize device opening and closing game) (in the fourth embodiment, a configuration in which switching from a mode corresponding to the low frequency support mode to a mode corresponding to the high frequency support mode can be executed at the first opening of the device opening and closing game, in variant example 1, a configuration in which the above switching can be executed at the second opening, etc.).

In the above configuration, if a change occurs from a state corresponding to the first game state to a state corresponding to the second game state during the game operation for a game round in which the result of the specific judgment is a predetermined result, the switching control (switching from the first state to the second state) in the specific control performed after that game round is executed in a manner corresponding to the second game state. By applying any of the configurations of features dD1 to dD5 to this configuration, the player can detect in advance from the notification result (notification display) whether or not the switching control corresponding to the second game state will be performed, making it possible to appropriately increase the attention to the notification result.

Feature dD8. The game play control means is
A setting means (a function of executing a stop result setting process in the performance control device 143) for setting the mode of the notification display corresponding to the specified result based on the execution of the specified determination;
A change means (a function of executing a process for changing a stop result in the performance control device 143) for changing the mode of the notification display to a mode different from the mode set by the setting means when the predetermined state change occurs after the setting is performed by the setting means;
A gaming machine described in any one of features dD1 to dD7, characterized in that it is equipped with:

In the above configuration, the mode of the notification display is set in response to the execution of a specific judgment, and then, if a state change occurs during the game operation, a change process is executed after the fact so that a notification display other than the set mode is set. With this configuration, the notification display can be properly performed for both cases where a state change occurs during the game operation and where it does not occur, and the configuration of the above features dD1 to dD7 can be preferably realized.

Feature dD9. The gaming machine described in Feature dD8 is configured such that, if the result of the specific judgment is the specific result and the specified state change occurs during the execution of the notification display, the execution of the change by the change means is restricted.

In the above configuration, if a state change occurs during a game operation, the notification display is actively changed, but if a state change occurs while the notification display is being executed, the change of the notification display is restricted. This makes it possible to optimally achieve the above effect of feature dD8 while preventing the occurrence of a situation in which the notification display is switched to another notification display while being executed, confusing the player.

Feature dD10. A gaming machine according to any one of Features dD1 to dD9, characterized in that, when the result of the specific judgment is the specific result and the specified state change occurs during the execution of the notification display, a means is provided for maintaining the state of the notification display that was being executed before the state change.

In the above configuration, if a state change occurs while the notification display is being executed, the notification display mode that was being executed before the state change is maintained as is. This makes it possible to preferably exert each of the above effects of features dD1 to dD9 while preferably preventing the occurrence of a situation in which the notification display is switched to another mode while being executed, confusing the player.

It is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of Features dA1 to dA12, Features dB1 to dB12, Features dC1 to dC8, Features dD1 to dD10, Features dE1 to dE12, and Features dF1 to dF9 individually to each of the configurations of Features dD1 to dD10 above, or to apply a part or all of each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature dE group>
The group of features dE is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the variations or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted based on the above-mentioned fourth embodiment and variations 1 and 2 of the fourth embodiment.

The feature group dE was made with a view to resolving the problem that the invention aims to solve with regard to the background technology, which is "for example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a normal gaming state and a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player, and control is performed such as switching the gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and various switching operations related to the progress of the game are performed (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)."

Feature dE1. A specific judgment means (such as a function of executing a normal winning/losing judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a specific judgment (such as a normal winning/losing judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (such as the entry of a game ball into the through gate 64),
A game round control means (a function for executing a normal game round control process in the main control device 162, a function for executing a normal game round display process in the performance control device 143, etc.) that controls the game round so that a game round operation is started based on the specific judgment, and a notification result corresponding to the result of the specific judgment is made as one game round (such as a normal game round), and
A specific control execution means (such as a function for executing a process for supporting electric roles in the main control device 162) capable of executing a specific control (such as opening and closing a role) after a game in which the result of the specific judgment becomes a predetermined result (such as a support winning result),
When the result of the specific judgment is a predetermined result, a first means for making the mode of the specific control when a predetermined condition (such as the setting of a support flag, a ball entering a specific ball entry section, etc.) is established in a predetermined situation after the execution of the specific judgment (during the execution of a normal game in the fourth embodiment, during the execution of an interval of the opening and closing game of the reel in the first modification, during the execution of the first opening, etc.) become a first mode (a reel opening and closing game in a mode corresponding to a high-frequency support mode, a reel opening and closing game in a mode corresponding to a low-frequency support mode in the first opening and a mode corresponding to a high-frequency support mode in the second opening) (a configuration in the fourth embodiment in which a switch from a mode corresponding to a low-frequency support mode to a mode corresponding to a high-frequency support mode can be executed at the first opening of the reel opening and closing game, a configuration in the first modification in which the switch can be executed at the second opening or during an interval, etc.);
When the result of the specific judgment is a predetermined result, a second means (a function of executing the entire opening and closing of the reel in a mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode in the fourth embodiment and the first modified example) for making the mode of the specific control in the case where the predetermined condition is not satisfied in the predetermined situation a second mode different from the first mode (a reel opening and closing game in a mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode);
A gaming machine comprising:

In the above configuration, the specific control is executed when the specific judgment results in a predetermined result. Furthermore, a game round is started when the specific judgment is executed, and the result of the specific judgment is announced during that game round. Under such a configuration, when the specific judgment results in a predetermined result, different types of specific control are executed depending on whether a predetermined condition is met after the specific judgment is executed. This allows the player's interest in whether or not a specific control is executed, and what kind of specific control is executed, to be focused not only on whether or not the specific judgment results in a predetermined result, but also on whether or not a predetermined condition is met after the game round corresponding to the specific judgment is started, making it possible to appropriately increase attention to the game.

Feature dE2. A gaming machine according to feature dE1, characterized in that the first mode is a mode that is more advantageous to the player than the second mode.

In the above configuration, if a specific judgment results in a predetermined result, and a predetermined condition is met in a predetermined situation after the execution of the specific judgment, the specific control performed after the end of the game corresponding to the specific judgment can be made to be more advantageous to the player than if the predetermined condition is not met. This can arouse anticipation for the predetermined condition to be met, making it possible to appropriately increase attention to the game.

Feature dE3. The game state includes a predetermined game state (low frequency support mode) and a specific game state (high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state.
A gaming machine described in feature dE1 or feature dE2, characterized in that the specified condition is a change from a state corresponding to the specified gaming state (support flag unset state) to a state corresponding to the specific gaming state (support flag set state).

According to the above configuration, when a specific judgment made under a specified game state results in a specified result, a change occurs from a state corresponding to the specified game state in a specified situation after the execution of the specific judgment to a state corresponding to a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player, so that the specific control performed after the end of a game round can be in a mode corresponding to the specific game state. This can arouse anticipation for the occurrence of the above-mentioned change, making it possible to appropriately increase attention to the game.

In addition, this feature may further include the feature that "the first mode is a mode corresponding to the specific game state, and the second mode is a mode corresponding to the predetermined game state."

Feature dE4. A gaming machine according to any one of Features dE1 to dE3, characterized in that it is equipped with a specific notification execution means (a function for executing a process for changing the stop result in the performance control device 143 and a process for special light emission performance) that executes a specific notification (display of the second or third stop result in the general map display area P, execution of a special light emission performance in the light-emitting units 752, 761) when the specified condition is met in the specified situation.

In the above configuration, a specific notification is executed if a specific condition is met in a specific situation after the specific judgment results in a specific result, making it possible for the player to easily recognize whether or not the specific condition is met in that specific situation.

Feature dE5. The game round control means controls the game round to be performed by a predetermined notification means (pattern display device 75),
The gaming machine described in feature dE4, wherein the specific notification execution means causes the specific notification to be executed by the predetermined notification means.

In the above configuration, when a predetermined condition is met, a specific notification is made by the same notification means as the notification means for playing a game round, so a player who is paying attention to a game round can see the specific notification without moving their line of sight. This makes it possible to effectively prevent a player from losing focus on a game round or from missing a specific notification.

Feature dE6. A variable ball entry means (second operating port 63) is provided that can be switched between a first state (open state) in which the game ball can be entered or is easy to enter, and a second state (closed state) in which the game ball cannot be entered or is more difficult to enter than in the first state;
A gaming machine described in any of features dE1 to dE5, characterized in that the specific control execution means executes the specific control so that switching control to change the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state, and then to the second state is performed at least once.

In the above configuration, the specific control opens and closes the variable ball entry means, so whether or not a specific condition is met in a specific situation after the specific judgment results in a specific result makes a difference in the likelihood of the ball entering the variable ball entry means under the specific control. This configuration can further increase the player's interest in whether or not the specific condition is met, making it possible to appropriately increase attention to the game.

Feature dE7. The first means is configured so that the manner of the switching control in the specific control when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the predetermined situation becomes the first manner (the upper limit release time is, for example, 1.5 sec or 2 sec release);
The second means is configured to change the mode of the switching control in the specific control when the predetermined condition is not satisfied in the predetermined situation to the second mode (an upper limit release time of, for example, 0.1 sec release),
A gaming machine described in feature dE6, characterized in that the switching control of the first aspect makes it easier for a ball to enter the variable ball entry means than the switching control of the second aspect.

In the above configuration, when a specified condition is met in a specified situation after the result of a specific judgment becomes a specified result, in the specific control, switching control (opening of the variable ball entry means) is performed in a manner in which a ball is more likely to enter the variable ball entry means than when the specified condition is not met. In other words, the likelihood of a ball entering the variable ball entry means changes in conjunction with whether or not the specified condition is met, so that the player's interest in whether or not the specified condition is met can be further increased, making it possible to appropriately increase attention to the game.

Feature dE8. The predetermined situation is a specific situation after the start of the specific control (such as during the first opening in Modification 1 or during an interval),
The first means is for making the specific control mode when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the specific situation the first mode (a role opening and closing game in which a first opening in a mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode is executed and a second opening in a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is executed) (such as a function for switching from a mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode to a mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode at the time of the second opening or during an interval in the first modified example),
The second means is a gaming machine described in any of features dE1 to dE7, characterized in that when the specified condition is not satisfied in the specific situation, the specific control mode becomes the second mode (a reel opening and closing game in which the first and second openings are executed in a mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode) (a function of executing the entire reel opening and closing game in a mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode in variant example 1).

In the above configuration, after a specific control is started, if a predetermined condition is met in a specific situation, the state of the specific control will change. This allows the player to play the specific control while paying attention to whether the state of the specific control changes during the specific control, rather than simply playing the specific control. This makes it possible to appropriately increase the level of attention to the game.

Feature dE9. The specific control includes a first specific control (the first opening of the normal power device 63a corresponding to the low frequency support mode),
The first means executes a second specific control (a second opening in a manner corresponding to the high-frequency support mode) corresponding to the establishment of the predetermined condition after the first specific control when the predetermined condition is established in response to the first specific control (when a change in the support flag from an unset state to a set state occurs during the first opening or execution of the interval in the first modified example 1) (a function of switching from a manner corresponding to the low-frequency support mode to a manner corresponding to the high-frequency support mode at the time of the second opening or during the interval in the first modified example 1),
A gaming machine described in any of features dE1 to dE8, characterized in that the second means does not execute the second specific control after the first specific control when the specified condition corresponding to the first specific control is not satisfied (a function of executing the entire reel opening and closing game in a manner corresponding to the low frequency support mode in variant example 1).

In the above configuration, the specific control is configured to include the first specific control, and whether or not a predetermined condition is met during the execution of the first specific control determines whether or not the second specific control is executed after the first specific control ends. This allows the player to play the specific control while paying attention to whether or not the second specific control is executed, rather than simply finishing the specific control when the specific control is started. This makes it possible to appropriately increase the level of attention to the game.

Feature dE10. The gaming machine described in Feature dE9 is configured such that the specific result is reached in the specific judgment when the specific condition is not met, and the first specific control is executed in response to the specific result (the first opening in a mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode is executed in response to a support winning result in a situation in which the low-frequency support mode is active).

In the above configuration, the first specific control is executed in response to the specific judgment resulting in a specific result when the specific condition is not met, and the second specific control is executed when the specific condition is met while the first specific control is being executed. With this configuration, even if a specific judgment is made in a situation where the specific condition is not met, the player can expect the second specific control to be executed by the specific control, making it possible to appropriately increase attention to the game.

Feature dE11. A gaming machine as described in Feature dE9 or Feature dE10, characterized in that the second specific control is more advantageous to the player than the first specific control.

In the above configuration, the second specific control is more advantageous than the first specific control, which arouses the player's anticipation for the second specific control to be executed, making it possible to appropriately increase the player's attention to the game.

Feature dE12. The second specific control has a plurality of modes (first high prize opening/closing game, second high prize opening/closing game),
A means for executing a predetermined lottery (such as a general winning type determination) before executing the specific control when the result of the specific determination is the predetermined result (such as a function for executing the process of step Sd2004 in the main control device 162);
When the predetermined condition is satisfied in response to the first specific control and the second specific control is executed by the first means, a means for setting the mode of the second specific control based on the result of the predetermined lottery performed before the predetermined condition is satisfied (such as a function for executing the processes of steps Sd2106, Sd2107, and Sd2304 in the main control device 162);
A gaming machine described in any one of features dE9 to dE11, characterized in that it is equipped with:

In the above configuration, multiple types of modes are provided as the mode of the second specific control, and when a predetermined condition is met in the first specific control and the second specific control is performed, the mode is determined based on the result of a predetermined lottery that was performed before the predetermined condition was met. This makes it unnecessary to re-run the predetermined lottery, and makes it possible to prevent the control process from becoming complicated and cumbersome.

It is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of Features dA1 to dA12, Features dB1 to dB12, Features dC1 to dC8, Features dD1 to dD10, Features dE1 to dE12, and Features dF1 to dF9 individually to each of the configurations of Features dE1 to dE12 above, or to apply a part or all of each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature dF group>
The group of features dF is a group of inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the variations or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted based on the above-mentioned fourth embodiment, variations 1 and 2.

The feature group dF was made with a view to solving the problem that the invention aims to solve with respect to the background technology, which is "for example, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a normal gaming state and a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player, and control is performed such as switching the gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and various switching operations related to the progress of the game are performed (for example, JP 2004-81853 A)."

Feature dF1. A specific judgment means (such as a function of executing a normal winning/losing judgment in the main control device 162) that executes a specific judgment (such as a normal winning/losing judgment) based on the establishment of a predetermined judgment condition (such as the entry of a game ball into the through gate 64),
A game round control means (a function for executing a normal game round control process in the main control device 162, a function for executing a normal game round display process in the performance control device 143, etc.) that controls the game round so that a game round operation is started based on the specific judgment, and a notification result corresponding to the result of the specific judgment is set as one game round (such as a normal game round), and
A specific control execution means (such as a function for executing a process for supporting electric roles in the main control device 162) that executes a specific control (such as an opening and closing game of a role) based on the result of the specific judgment being a predetermined result (such as a support winning result);
Equipped with
The game state has a specific game state (such as a high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined game state,
A means for setting a predetermined internal state (a state in which a support flag is set in the various flag storage area 314e of the RAM 314) based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition (a special miss result win, a jackpot win, a ball entering a specific ball entry section, etc.) (such as a function for executing a transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in the main control device 162, a process for suddenly transitioning to a time-saving game state, etc.);
After the predetermined internal state is reached, a switching means (such as a function for executing a normal game fluctuation start process and a special opening/closing process in the main control unit 162) switches the mode of the predetermined game operation (normal game play and a special game including a special control) including the game round and the specific control to a mode corresponding to the specific game state;
A specific notification execution means (such as a function of executing a process for special light-emitting performance in the performance control device 143) that executes a specific notification (such as a special light-emitting performance) by a predetermined notification means (such as the first light-emitting unit 752, the second light-emitting unit 761, etc.) when the game state is a specific game state;
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific notification execution means is equipped with a specification means (a function of executing a start timing setting process in the presentation control device 143) that can make the execution timing of the specific notification different depending on the status of the specified game operation when the specified internal state is reached (a situation in which the period until the opening of the normal power device 63a is a second specific period or less, a situation in which it is not less than the second specific period, a situation in which the remaining period for the device opening and closing game is a first specific period or less, a situation in which it is not less than the first specific period, a situation in which the remaining period for normal game rounds is a third specific period or less, a situation in which it is not less than the third specific period, etc.).

In the above configuration, a specific game state is provided as a game state advantageous to the player, and a specific internal state is configured to be established when a specific condition is met. When such a specific internal state is established, a switch is executed so that the operation mode of a specific game operation, including a game round for notifying the result of a specific judgment and a specific control performed based on the result of the specific judgment, becomes a mode corresponding to the specific game state. Under such a configuration, the execution timing of a specific notification executed when in a specific game state is configured to vary according to the status of the specific game operation when the specific internal state is established. With such a configuration, a specific notification can be started at an appropriate timing according to the switch to the mode corresponding to the specific game state, and a specific notification corresponding to the specific game state can be appropriately performed.

Feature dF2. The identification means is
A first means (a function for executing the process of step Sd3603 in the performance control device 143) for executing the specific notification at a first timing (such as a timing corresponding to the setting of a support flag) when the situation of the specific game operation when the specific internal state is reached is a first specific situation (such as a situation in which the period until the opening of the normal power role 63a is equal to or shorter than a second specific period);
A second means (a function for executing the process of step Sd3610 in the performance control device 143) for executing the specific notification at a second timing (such as a timing corresponding to the opening of the normal power role 63a) different from the first timing when the situation of the specified game operation when the specified internal state is reached is a second specified situation different from the first specified situation (such as a situation in which the period until the opening of the normal power role 63a is not equal to or shorter than a second specific period);
A gaming machine as described in feature dF1, characterized in that it is equipped with:

In the above configuration, the start timing of the specific notification can be selected between the first timing and the second timing depending on whether the state of the specific game operation when the specific internal state is reached is the first predetermined state or the second predetermined state. This allows the specific notification to be started at an appropriate timing in response to switching to a mode corresponding to the specific game state, making it possible to appropriately perform the specific notification corresponding to the specific game state.

Feature dF3. The second predetermined situation is a situation in which a period from the predetermined internal state to the switching by the switching means is longer than that of the first predetermined situation;
A gaming machine described in feature dF2, characterized in that the second timing is a timing later than the first timing.

For example, if a specific notification is given but specific control in a mode corresponding to the specific game state is not performed for a long time, there is a concern that this may give the player an unnatural impression. In this regard, by delaying the start timing of the specific notification when the period from when the specified internal state is reached to when the mode corresponding to the specific game state is switched to is long, it is possible to shorten the period from when the specific notification is started to when specific control in a mode corresponding to the specific game state is performed. This makes it possible to inform the player that the specific game state is being reached at an appropriate timing according to the switch to the mode corresponding to that state.

Feature dF4. The gaming machine described in Feature dF2 or Feature dF3, characterized in that the second timing is a timing corresponding to the execution of the specific control (the timing when the normal power device 63a opens or a timing slightly before the opening).

In the above configuration, the specific notification is executed at a second timing corresponding to the execution of the specific control. For example, if there is a long period of time between the specified internal state being reached and the execution of the specific control corresponding to the specific game state, the specific notification can be started after the specific control is executed, making it possible to shorten the period between the start of the specific notification and the execution of the specific control.

Feature dF5. A gaming machine according to any one of Features dF2 to dF4, in which the first timing corresponds to a transition to the predetermined internal state (when a support flag is set or slightly after the support flag is set).

In the above configuration, the specific notification is executed at a first timing corresponding to the transition to the specified internal state. For example, if the period between the specified internal state being entered and the execution of the specific control in a manner corresponding to the specific game state is short, the specific notification can be started in accordance with the transition to the specified internal state. This makes it possible to inform the player of the timing of the transition to the specified internal state.

Feature dF6. A variable ball entry means (second operating port 63) is provided that can be switched between a first state (open state) in which the game ball can be entered or is easy to enter, and a second state (closed state) in which the game ball cannot be entered or is more difficult to enter than the first state;
A gaming machine described in any of features dF1 to dF5, characterized in that the specific control execution means executes the specific control so that switching control to change the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state, and then to the second state is performed at least once.

In the above configuration, the specific control opens and closes the variable ball entry means, so by applying the configurations of features dF1 to dF5 to such a configuration, it is possible to start a specific notification at an appropriate timing according to the period until the opening (switching control) of the mode corresponding to the specific game state is performed.

Feature dF7. The gaming machine described in Feature dF6, characterized in that the predetermined notification means is provided in at least one of the variable ball entry means and the periphery of the variable ball entry means.

In the above configuration, a specific notification is made by the variable ball entry means or its surrounding area, which makes it easier for players to focus on the variable ball entry means, and makes it possible to effectively appeal to a specific game state and liven up the game. However, on the other hand, there is a concern that if an event occurs in which the switching control of the mode corresponding to the specific game state (opening control of the variable ball entry means) is not performed despite the specific notification being made, this may encourage the player to notice. In this regard, this feature targets the specific notification that is likely to attract attention to the variable ball entry means and varies the execution timing depending on the status of the specified game operation when a specified internal state is reached, making it possible to appropriately appeal to the specific game state while suppressing the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences.

Feature dF8. As a notification means capable of executing a notification corresponding to the specific notification, a first notification means (first light-emitting unit 752, second light-emitting unit 761) on a side relatively close to the controlled object (general power device 63a) controlled by the specific control, and a second notification means (lamp unit 26) on a side relatively far from the controlled object,
A gaming machine described in any of features dF1 to dF7, characterized in that the identification means is capable of varying the execution timing of the notification executed by the first notification means depending on the status of the specified game operation when the specified internal state is reached.

In the above configuration, a first notification means and a second notification means are provided as notification means for issuing a specific notification corresponding to a specific game state, and among these notification means, the first notification means closer to the controlled object controlled by the specific control is configured to vary its execution timing according to the status of the specific game operation when a specific internal state is reached. If a specific notification is issued near a controlled object, the player's attention is likely to be drawn to that controlled object, and there is a concern that if a specific control in a manner corresponding to a specific game state is not executed despite the specific notification being issued, the player will be more likely to notice this. However, this characteristic configuration makes it possible to suitably prevent such inconveniences from occurring.

Feature dF9. The gaming machine described in Feature dF8 is characterized in that it is provided with a means for controlling the notification executed by the second notification means so that it is executed at a predetermined timing (such as the first timing) regardless of the status of the predetermined game operation when the predetermined internal state is reached.

In the above configuration, unlike the first notification means closer to the controlled object, the second notification means farther from the controlled object is configured to execute a specific notification at a predetermined timing, regardless of the status of the specified game operation when the specified internal state is reached. For example, by setting the specified timing to a timing corresponding to the transition to a specified internal state, specific notifications that are likely to draw attention to the controlled object can be executed at a timing according to the above-mentioned status, while specific notifications that are unlikely to draw attention to the controlled object can be executed at a timing corresponding to the transition to the specified internal state.

It is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in any one of the configurations of Features dA1 to dA12, Features dB1 to dB12, Features dC1 to dC8, Features dD1 to dD10, Features dE1 to dE12, and Features dF1 to dF9 individually to each of the configurations of Features dF1 to dF9 above, or to apply a part or all of each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

Note that, to each of the configurations of the feature groups dA to dF described above, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configurations of the other feature groups dA to dF individually, or to apply the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying the respective technical ideas in combination, it is also possible to combine them across the feature groups.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: A game machine that has an operating means operated by the player, a game ball launching means that launches game balls based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage that guides the launched game balls to a specified game area, and various game components arranged within the game area, and that awards a special prize to the player when the game ball passes through a specified passage section of each of the game components.

Slot machines and other reel-type gaming machines: A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a series of symbols consisting of multiple symbols in a variable manner and then displays the series of symbols in a final stopped state, in which the variation of the symbols is started by operating a start operating means, the variation of the symbols is stopped by operating a stop operating means or after a predetermined time has passed, and a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol.

Ball-operated belt-type game machine (ball-operated reel-type game machine): A game machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable pattern string consisting of multiple patterns and then displays the final stop of the pattern string, in which the pattern variation is started due to the operation of a start operation means, the pattern variation is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means or after a predetermined time has passed, and a special game state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stop pattern at the time of the stop is a specific pattern, and further equipped with a ball receiving tray and an insertion device that performs an insertion process to take in game balls from the ball receiving tray, and a payout device that pays out game balls to the ball receiving tray, and configured so that the operation of the start operation means is valid when game balls are inserted by the insertion device.

10... Pachinko machine, 143... Performance control device, 162... Main control device.

Claims (1)

A launching means capable of launching a game ball based on a predetermined launching operation;
A variable ball entry means that can be switched between a first state in which the game ball can be entered or is easy to enter, and a second state in which the game ball cannot be entered or is more difficult to enter than in the first state ;
A means for executing a specific determination based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition;
A means for controlling execution of a specific game based on the result of the specific determination;
Equipped with
The specific game is a game in which the variable ball entry means is switched from the second state to the first state , and then switched to the second state ,
The specific game mode includes a first mode corresponding to the result of the specific judgment being a first result, and a second mode corresponding to the result of the specific judgment being a second result different from the first result,
a first means for, when a predetermined state change occurs after the execution of the specific judgment and before the execution of the specific game, making the mode of the specific game performed after the predetermined state change the first mode in response to the result of the specific judgment performed before the predetermined state change being the first result;
a second means for, when the predetermined state change occurs after the execution of the specific judgment and before the execution of the specific game, making the mode of the specific game performed after the predetermined state change the second mode in response to the result of the specific judgment performed before the predetermined state change being the second result;
a means for enabling a specific notification to be executed after the occurrence of the predetermined state change;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific notification is not executed if the specified state change does not occur.

Images